initial commit of ebook 12693HEADmain

4 files changed, 32202 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/12693-8.txt b/old/12693-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4bcb90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12693-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16099 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Principal Navigations, Voyages,
+Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Vol. 11, by Richard
+Hakluyt, Edited by Edmund Goldsmid
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of
+The English Nation, Vol. 11
+
+Author: Richard Hakluyt
+
+Release Date: June 23, 2004  [eBook #12693]
+
+Language: English, Latin, Spanish, and Italian
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS,
+VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Karl Hagen and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team from images generously made available by the Canadian
+Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+
+** Transcriber's Notes **
+
+The printed edition from which this e-text has been produced retains the
+spelling and abbreviations of Hakluyt's 16th-century original. In this
+version, the spelling has been retained, but the following manuscript
+abbreviations have been silently expanded:
+
+- vowels with macrons = vowel + 'n' or 'm'
+- q; = -que (in the Latin)
+- y'e = the; y't = that; w't = with
+
+This edition contains footnotes and two types of sidenotes. Most footnotes
+are added by the editor. They follow modern (19th-century) spelling
+conventions. Those that don't are Hakluyt's (and are not always
+systematically marked as such by the editor). The sidenotes are Hakluyt's
+own. Summarizing sidenotes are labelled [Sidenote: ] and placed before the
+sentence to which they apply. Sidenotes that are keyed with a symbol are
+labeled [Marginal note: ] and placed at the point of the symbol, except in
+poetry, where they are placed at a convenient point. Additional notes on
+corrections, etc. are signed 'KTH'
+
+** End Transcriber's Notes **
+
+
+
+
+
+THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES AND DISCOVERIES
+OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOLUME XI
+
+AFRICA
+
+Collected by
+
+RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER.
+
+AND
+
+Edited by
+
+EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries
+
+OF THE
+
+ENGLISH NATION IN AFRICA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Henrie Eatle of Derbie, after Duke of Hereford, and lastly
+  Henry the fourth King of England, to Tunis in Barbarie, with an army of
+  Englishmen mitten by Polidore Virgill. pag. 1389.
+
+Franci interim per inducias nacti ocium, ac simul Genuensium precibus
+defatigati, bellum in Afros, qui omnem oram insulásque Italiae latiocinijs
+infestas reddebant, suscipiunt. Richardus quoque rex Angliæ rogatus
+auxilium, mittit Henricum comitem Derbiensem cum electa Anglicæ pubis manu
+ad id bellum faciendum. Igitur Franci Anglíque viribus et animis
+consociatis in Africam traijciunt, qui vbi littus attigere, eatenus à
+Barbaris descensione prohibiti sunt, quoad Anglorum sagittariorum virtute
+factum est, vt aditus pateret: in terram egressi recta Tunetam vrbem regiam
+petunt, ac obsident. Barbari timore affecti de pace ad eos legates mittunt,
+quam nostris dare placuit, vt soluta certa pecuniae summa ab omni deinceps
+Italiae, Galliaeque ora mamis abstinerent. Ita peractis rebus post paucos
+menses, quàm eo itum erat, domum repediatum est.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+The French in the meane season hauing gotten some leasure by meanes of
+their truce, and being sollicited and vrged by the intreaties of the
+Genuois vndertooke to wage warre against the Moores, who robbed and spoyled
+all the coasts of Italy, and of the Ilandes adiacent. Likewise Richard the
+second, king of England, being sued vnto for ayde, sent Henry the Earle of
+Derbie with a choice armie of English souldiers vnto the same warfare.
+Wherefore the English and French, with forces and mindes vnited, sayled
+ouer into Africa, who when they approached vnto the shore were repelled by
+the Barbarians from landing, vntill such time as they had passage made them
+by the valour of the English archers. Thus hauing landed their forces, they
+foorthwith marched vnto the royall citie of Tunis, and besieged it. Whereat
+the Barbarians being dismayed, sent Ambassadours vnto our Christian
+Chieftaines to treat of peace, which our men graunted vnto them, vpon
+condition that they should pay a certaine summe of money, and that they
+should from thencefoorth abstaine from piracies vpon all the coasts of
+Italy and France. And so hauing dispatched their businesse, within a fewe
+moneths after their departure they returned home.
+
+
+This Historie is somewhat otherwise recorded by Froysard and Holenshed in
+  manner following, pag 473.
+
+In the thirteenth yeere of the reigne of King Richard the second, the
+Christians tooke in hand a iourney against the Saracens of Barbarie through
+sute of the Genouois, so that there went a great number of Lords, Knights,
+and Gentlemen of France and England, the Duke of Burbon being their
+Generall. Out of England there went Iohn de Beaufort bastarde sonne to the
+Duke of Lancaster (as Froysard hath noted) also Sir Iohn Russell, Sir Iohn
+Butler, Sir Iohn Harecourt and others. They set forwarde in the latter ende
+of the thirteenth yeere of the Kings reigne, and came to Genoa, where they
+remayned not verie long, but that the gallies and other vessels of the
+Genouois were ready to passe them ouer into Barbarie. And so about midsomer
+in the begining of the foureteenth yere of this kings reigne the whole army
+being embarked, sailed forth to the coast of Barbary, where neere to the
+city of Africa they landed: [Sidenote: The Chronicles of Genoa] at which
+instant the English archers (as the Chronicles of Genoa write) stood all
+the company in good stead with their long bowes, beating backe the enemies
+from the shore, which came downe to resist their landing. After they had
+got to land, they inuironed the city of Africa (called by the Moores
+Mahdia) with a strong siege: but at length, constrained with the
+intemperancy of the scalding ayre in that hot countrey, breeding in the
+army sundry diseases, they fell to a composition vpon certaine articles to
+be performed in the behalfe of the Saracens: and so 61 dayes after their
+arriuall there they tooke the seas againe, and returned home, as in the
+histories of France and Genoa is likewise expressed. Where, by Polidore
+Virgil it may seeme, that the lord Henry of Lancaster earle of Derbie
+should be generall of the English men, that (as before you heard) went into
+Barbary with the French men and Genouois.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The memorable victories in diuers parts of Italie of Iohn Hawkwood English
+  man in the reigne of Richard the second, briefly recorded by M. Camden.
+
+Ad alteram ripam fluuij Colne oppositus est Sibble Heningham, locus
+natalis, vt accepi, Ioannis Hawkwoodi (Itali Aucuthum corruptè vocant) quem
+illi tantopere ob virtutem militarem suspexerunt, vt Senatus Florentinus
+propter insignia merita equestri statua et tumuli honore in eximiæ
+fortitudinis, fideíque testimonium ornauit. Res eius gestas Itali pleno ore
+prædicant; Et Paulus Iouius in elogijs celebrat: sat mihi sit Iulij Feroldi
+tetrastichon adijcere.
+
+  Hawkoode Angloram decus, et decus addite genti
+     Italicæ, Italico presidiúmque solo,
+  Vt tumuli quondam Florentia, sic simulachri
+     Virtutem Ionius donat honore tuam.
+
+William Thomas in his Historie of the common wealthes of Italy, maketh
+honorable mention of him twise, to wit, in the commonwealth of Florentia
+and Ferrara.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Epitaph of the valiant Esquire M. Peter Read in the south Ile of Saint
+  Peters Church in the citie of Norwich, which was knighted by Charles the
+  fift at the winning of Tunis in the yeere of our Lord 1538.
+
+Here vnder lieth the corpes of Peter Reade Esquire, who hath worthily
+serued, not onely his Prince and Countrey, but also the Emperour Charles
+the fift, both at his conquest of Barbarie, and at his siege at Tunis, and
+also in other places. Who had giuen him by the sayd Emperour for his
+valiant deedes the order of Barbary. Who dyed the 29 day of December, in
+the yeere of our Lord God 1566.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger with Charles the fift 1541,
+  drawen out of his booke De Republica instauranda.
+
+Thomas Chalonerus patria Londinensis, studio Cantabrigensis, educatione
+aulicus, religione pius, veréque Christianus fuit. Itaque cum iuuenilem
+ætatem, mentémque suam humanioribus studijs roborasset, Domino Henrico
+Kneuetto à potentissimo rege Henrico eius nominis octauo ad Carolum quintum
+imperatorem transmisso legato, vnà cum illo profectus est, tanquam
+familiaris amicus, vel eidem, à consilijs. Quo quidem tempore Carolo quinto
+nauali certamine à Genua et Corsica in Algyram in Africa contra Turcas
+classem soluente ac hostiliter proficiscente, ornatissimo illo Kneuetto
+legato regis, Thoma Chalonero, Henrico Knolleo, et Henrico Isamo,
+illustribus viris eundem in illa expeditione suapte sponte sequentibus,
+paritérque militantibus, mirifice vitam suam Chalonerus tutatus est. Nam
+triremi illa, in qua fuerat, vel scopulis allisa, vel grauissimis pro
+cellis conquassata, naufragus cum se diù natatu defendisset, deficientibus
+viribus, brachijs manibusque languidis ac quasi eneruatis, prehensa
+dentibus cum maxima difficultate rudenti, quæ ex altera triremi iam
+propinqua tum fuerat eiecta, non sine dentium aliquorum iactura sese tandem
+recuperauit, ac domum integer relapsus est.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Thomas Chaloner was by birth a Londiner, by studie a Cantabrigian, by
+education a Courtier, by religion a deuout and true Christian. Therefore
+after he had confirmed his youth and minde in the studies of good learning,
+when Sir Henry Kneuet was sent ambassadour from the mighty Prince Henry the
+8. to the Emperour Charles the fift, he went with him as his familiar
+friend, or as one of his Councell. At which time the said Charles the 5.
+passing ouer from Genoa and Corsica to Alger in Africa in warlike sort,
+with a mighty army by sea, that honourable Kneuet the kings ambassadour,
+Thomas Chaloner, Henry Knolles, and Henry Isham, right worthy persons, of
+their owne accord accompanied him in that expedition, and serued him in
+that warre, wherin Thomas Chaloner escaped most wonderfully with his life.
+For the galley wherein he was, being either dashed against the rockes, or
+shaken with mighty stormes, and so cast away, after he had saued himselfe a
+long while by swimming, when his strength failed him, his armes and hands
+being faint and weary, with great difficulty laying hold with his teeth on
+a cable, which was cast out of the next gally, not without breaking and
+losse of certaine of his teeth, at length recouered himselfe, and returned
+home into his countrey in safety.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The woorthy enterprise of Iohn Foxe an Englishman in deliuering 266.
+Christians out of the captiuitie of the Turkes at Alexandria, the 3 of
+Ianuarie 1577.
+
+Among our Merchants here in England, it is a common voiage to traffike into
+Spaine: whereunto a ship, being called The three halfe Moones, manned with
+38. men, and well fensed with munitions, the better to encounter their
+enemies withall, and hauing wind and tide, set from Portsmouth, 1563. and
+bended her iourney toward Siuill a citie in Spaine, intending there to
+traffique with them. [Sidenote: Iohn Foxe taken 1563.] And felling neere
+the Streights, they perceiued themselues to be beset round with eight
+gallies of the Turkes, in such wise, that there was no way for them to flie
+or escape away, but that either they must yeeld or els be sunke. Which the
+owner perceiuing, manfully encouraged his company, exhorting them valiantly
+to shew their manhood, shewing them that God was their God, and not their
+enemies, requesting them also not to faint in seeing such a heape of their
+enemies ready to deuour them; putting them in mind also, that if it were
+Gods pleasure to giue them into their enemies hands, it was not they that
+ought to shew one displeasant looke or countenance there against; but to
+take it patiently, and not to prescribe a day and time for their
+deliuerance, as the citizens of Bethulia did, but to put themselues vnder
+his mercy. And againe, if it were his mind and good will to shew his mighty
+power by them, if their enemies were ten times so many, they were not able
+to stand in their hands; putting them likewise in mind of the old and
+ancient woorthinesse of their countreymen, who in the hardest extremities
+haue alwayes most preuailed and gone away conquerors, yea, and where it
+hath bene almost impossible. Such (quoth he) hath bene the valiantnesse of
+our countreymen, and such hath bene the mightie power of our God.
+
+With other like incouragements, exhorting them to behaue themselues
+manfully, they fell all on their knees making their prayers briefly vnto
+God: who being all risen vp againe perceiued their enemies by their signes
+and defiances bent to the spoyle, whose mercy was nothing els but crueltie,
+whereupon euery man tooke him to his weapon.
+
+Then stood vp one Groue the master, being a comely man, with his sword and
+target, holding them vp in defiance agaynst his enemies. So likewise stood
+vp the Owner, the Masters mate, Boateswaine, Purser, and euery man well
+appointed. Nowe likewise sounded vp the drums, trumpets and flutes, which
+would haue encouraged any man, had he neuer so litle heart or courage in
+him.
+
+Then taketh him to his charge Iohn Foxe the gunner in the disposing of his
+pieces in order to the best effect, and sending his bullets towards the
+Turkes, who likewise bestowed their pieces thrise as fast toward the
+Christians. But shortly they drew neere, so that the bowmen fel to their
+charge in sending forth their arrowes so thicke amongst the Gallies, and
+also in doubling their shot so sore vpon the gallies, that there was twise
+so many of the Turkes slaine, as the number of the Christians were in all.
+But the Turks discharged twise as fast against the Christians, and so long,
+that the ship was very sore stricken and bruised vnder water. Which the
+Turkes perceiuing, made the more haste to come aboord the Shippe: which ere
+they could doe, many a Turke bought it deerely with the losse of their
+liues. Yet was all in vaine, and boorded they were, where they found so
+hote a skirmish, that it had bene better they had not medled with the
+feast. For the Englishmen shewed themselues men in deed, in working
+manfully with their browne bils and halbardes: where the owner, master,
+boateswaine, and their company stoode to it so lustily, that the Turkes
+were halfe dismaied. [Sidenote: The valour and death of their Boatswaine.]
+But chiefly the boateswaine shewed himself valiant aboue the rest: for he
+fared amongst the Turkes like a wood Lion: for there was none of them that
+either could or durst stand in his face, till at the last there came a shot
+from the Turkes, which brake his whistle asunder, and smote him on the
+brest, so that he fell downe, bidding them farewell, and to be of good
+comfort, encouraging them likewise to winne praise by death, rather then to
+liue captiues in misery and shame. Which they hearing, in deed intended to
+haue done, as it appeared by their skirmish: but the prease and store of
+the Turkes was so great, that they were not able long to endure, but were
+so ouerpressed, that they could not wield their weapons: by reason whereof,
+they must needs be taken, which none of them intended to haue bene, but
+rather to haue died: except onely the masters mate, who shrunke from the
+skirmish, like a notable coward, esteeming neither the valure of his name,
+nor accounting of the present example of his fellowes, nor hauing respect
+to the miseries, whereunto he should be put. But in fine, so it was, that
+the Turks were victors, whereof they had no great cause to reioyce, or
+triumph. Then would it haue grieued any hard heart to see these Infidels so
+violently intreating the Christians, not hauing any respect of their
+manhood which they had tasted of, nor yet respecting their owne state, how
+they might haue met with such a bootie, as might haue giuen them the
+ouerthrow; but no remorse hereof, or any thing els doth bridle their fierce
+and tirannous dealing, but that the Christians must needs to the gallies,
+to serue in new offices: and they were no sooner in them, but their
+garments were pulled ouer their eares, and torne from their backes, and
+they set to the oares.
+
+I will make no mention of their miseries, being now vnder their enemies
+raging stripes. I thinke there is no man wil iudge their fare good, or
+their bodies vnloden of stripes, and not pestered with too much heate, and
+also with too much cold: but I will goe to my purpose, which is, to shew
+the ende of those, being in meere miserie, which continually doe call on
+God with a steadfast hope that he will deliuer them, and with a sure faith
+that he can doe it.
+
+Nigh to the citie of Alexandria, being a hauen towne, and vnder the
+dominion of the Turkes, there is a roade, being made very fensible with
+strong wals, whereinto the Turkes doe customably bring their gallies on
+shoare euery yeere, in the winter season, and there doe trimme them, and
+lay them vp against the spring time. In which road there is a prison,
+wherein the captiues and such prisoners as serue in the gallies, are put
+for all that time, vntill the seas be calme and passable for the gallies,
+euery prisoner being most grieuously laden with irons on their legges, to
+their great paine, and sore disabling of them to any labour taking.
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen carried prisoners vnto an Hauen nere Alexandria.]
+Into which prison were these Christians put, and fast warded all the Winter
+season. But ere it was long, the Master and the Owner, by meanes of
+friends, were redeemed: the rest abiding still by the miserie, while that
+they were all (through reason of their ill vsage and worse fare, miserably
+starued) sauing one Iohn Fox, who (as some men can abide harder and more
+miserie, then other some can, so can some likewise make more shift, and
+worke more deuises to helpe their state and liuing, then other some can
+doe) being somewhat skilfull in the craft of a Barbour, by reason thereof
+made great shift in helping his fare now and then with a good meale.
+Insomuch, til at the last, God sent him fauour in the sight of the keeper
+of the prison, so that he had leaue to goe in and out to the road, at his
+pleasure, paying a certaine stipend vnto the keeper, and wearing a locke
+about his leg: which libertie likewise, sixe more had vpon like sufferance:
+who by reason of their long imprisonment, not being feared or suspected to
+start aside, or that they would worke the Turkes any mischiefe, had
+libertie to go in and out at the sayd road, in such maner, as this Iohn Fox
+did, with irons on their legs, and to returne againe at night.
+
+In the yeere of our Lord 1577. in the Winter season, the gallies happily
+comming to their accustomed harborow, and being discharged of all their
+mastes, sailes, and other such furnitures, as vnto gallies doe appertaine,
+and all the Masters and mariners of them being then nested in their owne
+homes: there remained in the prison of the said road two hundred threescore
+and eight Christian prisoners, who had bene taken by the Turks force, and
+were of sixteen sundry nations. Among which there were three Englishmen,
+whereof one was named Iohn Foxe of Woodbridge in Suffolke, the other
+William Wickney of Portsmouth, in the Countie of Southampton, and the third
+Robert Moore of Harwich in the Countie of Essex. Which Iohn Fox hauing bene
+thirteene or fourteene yeres vnder their gentle entreatance, and being too
+too weary thereof, minding his escape, weighed with himselfe by what meanes
+it might be brought to passe: and continually pondering with himself
+thereof, tooke a good heart vnto him, in hope that God would not be alwayes
+scourging his children, and neuer ceassed to pray him to further his
+pretended enterprise, if that it should redound to his glory.
+
+Not farre from the road, and somewhat from thence, at one side of the
+Citie, there was a certaine victualling house, which one Peter Vnticaro had
+hired, paying also a certaine fee vnto the keeper of the road. This Peter
+Vnticaro was a Spaniard borne, and a Christian, and had bene prisoner about
+thirtie yeeres, and neuer practised any meanes to escape, but kept himselfe
+quiet without touch or suspect of any conspiracie: vntill that nowe this
+John Foxe vsing much thither, they brake one to another their mindes,
+concerning the restraint of their libertie and imprisonment. So that this
+Iohn Fox at length opening vnto this Vnticaro the deuise which he would
+faine put in practise, made priuie one more to this their intent. Which
+three debated of this matter at such times as they could compasse to meete
+together: insomuch, that at seuen weekes ende they had sufficiently
+concluded how the matter should be, if it pleased God to farther them
+thereto: who making fiue more priuie to this their deuise, whom they
+thought they might safely trust, determined in three nights after to
+accomplish their deliberate purpose. Whereupon the same Iohn Fox, and Peter
+Vnticaro, and the other sixe appointed to meete all together in the prison
+the next day, being the last day of December: where this Iohn Fox certified
+the rest of the prisoners, what their intent and deuise was, and how and
+when they minded to bring their purpose to passe: who thereunto perswaded
+them without much a doe to further their deuise. Which the same Iohn Fox
+seeing, deliuered vnto them a sort of files, which he had gathered together
+for this purpose, by the meanes of Peter Vnticaro, charging them that euery
+man should be readie discharged of his yrons by eight of the clocke on the
+the next day at night.
+
+[Sidenote: Januarie.] On the next day at night, this said Iohn Fox, and his
+sixe other companions, being all come to the house of Peter Vnticaro,
+passing the time away in mirth for feare of suspect, till the night came
+on, so that it was time for them to put in practise their deuise, sent
+Peter Vnticaro to the master of the roade, in the name of one of the
+Masters of the citie, with whom this keeper was acquainted, and at whose
+request he also would come at the first: who desired him to take the paines
+to meete him there, promising him, that he would bring him backe againe.
+The keeper agreed to goe with him, willing the warders not to barre the
+gate, saying, that he would not stay long, but would come againe with all
+speede.
+
+In the meane season, the other seuen had prouided them of such weapons, as
+they could get in that house: and Iohn Fox tooke him to an olde rustie
+sword blade, without either hilt or pomell, which he made to serue his
+turne, in bending the hand ende of the sword, in steed of a pomell, and the
+other had got such spits and glaiues as they found in the house.
+
+The keeper now being come vnto the house, and perceiuing no light, nor
+hearing any noyse, straight way suspected the matter: and returning
+backward, Iohn Fox standing behind the corner of the house, stepped foorth
+vnto him: who perceiuing it to be Iohn Fox, saide, O Fox, what haue I
+deserued of thee, that thou shouldest seeke my death? Thou villaine (quoth
+Fox) hast bene a bloodsucker of many a Christians blood, and now thou shalt
+know what thou hast deserued at my handes: wherewith he lift vp his bright
+shining sword of tenne yeeres rust, and stroke him so maine a blowe, as
+therewithall his head claue a sunder, so that he fell starke dead to the
+ground. Whereupon Peter Vnticaro went in, and certified the rest how the
+case stood with the keeper: who came presently foorth, and some with their
+spits ranne him through, and the other with their glaiues hewed him in
+sunder, cut off his head, and mangled him so, that no man should discerne
+what he was.
+
+Then marched they toward the roade, whereinto they entered softly, where
+were six warders, whom one of them asked, saying, who was there? quoth Fox
+and his company, all friendes. Which when they were all within, proued
+contrary: for, quoth Fox, my masters, here is not to euery man a man,
+wherefore looke you play your parts. Who so behaued themselues in deede,
+that they had dispatched these sixe quickly. Then Iohn Fox intending not to
+be barred of his enterprise, and minding to worke surely in that which he
+went about, barred the gate surely, and planted a Canon against it.
+
+Then entred they into the Gailers lodge, where they found the keyes of the
+fortresse and prison by his bed side, and there had they all better
+weapons. In this chamber was a chest, wherein was a rich treasure, and all
+in duckats, which this Peter Vnticaro, and two more, opening, staffed
+themselues so full as they could, betweene their shirts and their skinne:
+which Iohn Fox would not once touch, and sayde, that it was his and their
+libertie which he sought for, to the honour of his God, and not to make a
+marte of the wicked treasure of the Infidels. Yet did these words sinke
+nothing into their stomakes, they did it for a good intent: so did Saul
+saue the fattest Oxen, to offer vnto the Lord, and they to serue their owne
+turnes. But neither did Saul scape the wrath of God therefore, neither had
+these that thing which they desired so, and did thirst after. Such is Gods
+iustice. He that they put their trust in, to deliuer them from the
+tyrannous hands of their enemies, he (I say) could supply their want of
+necessaries.
+
+Nowe these eight being armed with such weapons as they thought well of,
+thinking themselues sufficient champions to encounter a stronger enemie,
+and coming vnto the prison, Fox opened the gates and doores thereof, and
+called forth all the prisoners, whom he set, some to ramming vp the gate,
+some to the dressing vp of a certaine gallie, which was the best in all the
+roade, and was called the captaine of Alexandria, whereinto some caried
+mastes, sailes, oares, and other such furniture as doth belong vnto a
+gallie.
+
+At the prison were certaine warders, whom Iohn Fox and his companie slewe:
+in the killing of whom, there were eight more of the Turkes, which
+perceiued them, and got them to the toppe of the prison: vnto whom Iohn
+Fox, and his company, were faine to come by ladders, where they found a hot
+skirmish. For some of them were there slaine, some wounded, and some but
+scarred, and not hurt. As Iohn Fox was thrise shot through his apparell,
+and not hurt. Peter Vnticaro, and the other two, that had armed them with
+the duckats, were slaine, as not able to weild themselues, being so
+pestered with the weight and vneasie carying of the wicked and prophane
+treasure: and also diuerse Christians were aswell hurt about that skirmish,
+as Turkes slaine.
+
+Amongst the Turkes was one thrust thorowe, who (let vs not say that it was
+ill fortune) fell off from the toppe of the prison wall, and made such a
+lowing, that the inhabitants thereabout (as here and there scattering
+stoode a house or two) came and dawed [Footnote: To awaken: here to bring
+back to his senses. I know of no other instance where it bears just this
+meaning. "The other side from whence the morning daws." (_Polyolbion
+X._)] him, so that they vnderstood the case, how that the prisoners were
+paying their ransomes: wherewith they raised both Alexandria which lay on
+the west side of the roade, and a Castle which was at the Cities end, next
+to the roade, and also an other Fortresse which lay on the Northside of the
+roade: so that nowe they had no way to escape, but one, which by mans
+reason (the two holdes lying so vpon the mouth of the roade) might seeme
+impossible to be a way for them. So was the red sea impossible for the
+Israelites to passe through, the hils and rockes lay so on the one side,
+and their enemies compassed on the other. So was it impossible, that the
+wals of Iericho should fall downe, being neither vndermined, nor yet rammed
+at with engines, nor yet any mans wisedome, pollicie, or helpe set or put
+thereunto. Such impossibilities can our God make possible. He that helde
+the Lyons iawes from renting Daniel asunder, yea, or yet from once touching
+him to his hurt: can not he hold the roring cannons of this hellish force?
+He that kept the fiers rage in the hot burning Ouen, from the three
+children, that praised his name, can not he keepe the fiers flaming blastes
+from among his elect?
+
+Now is the road fraught with lustie souldiers, laborers, and mariners, who
+are faine to stand to their tackling, in setting to euery man his hand,
+some to the carying in of victuals, some munitions, some oares, and some
+one thing, some another, but most are keeping their enemie from the wall of
+the road. But to be short, there was no time mispent, no man idle, nor any
+mans labour ill bestowed, or in vaine. So that in short time, this gally
+was ready trimmed vp. Whereinto euery man leaped in all haste, hoyssing vp
+the sayles lustily, yeelding themselues to his mercie and grace, in whose
+hands are both winde and weather.
+
+Now is this gally on flote, and out of the safetie of the roade: now haue
+the two Castles full power vpon the gally, now is there no remedy but to
+sinke: how can it be auoided? The canons let flie from both sides, and the
+gally is euen in the middest, and betweene them both. What man can deuise
+to saue it? there is no man, but would thinke it must needes be sunke.
+
+There was not one of them that feared the shotte, which went thundring
+round about their eares, nor yet were once scarred or touched, with fiue
+and forty shot, which came from the Castles. Here did God hold foorth his
+buckler, he shieldeth now this gally, and hath tried their faith to the
+vttermost. Now commeth his speciall helpe: yea, euen when man thinks them
+past all helpe then commeth he himselfe downe from heauen with his mightie
+power, then is his present remedie most readie prest. For they saile away,
+being not once touched with the glaunce of a shot, and are quickly out of
+the Turkish canons reach. Then might they see them comming downe by heapes
+to the water side, in companies like vnto swarmes of bees, making shew to
+come after them with gallies, in bustling themselues to dresse vp the
+gallies, which would be a swift peece of worke for them to doe, for that
+they had neither oares, mastes, sailes, gables, nor any thing else ready in
+any gally. But yet they are carrying them into them, some into one gally,
+and some into another, so that, being such a confusion amongst them,
+without any certaine guide, it were a thing impossible to ouertake them:
+beside that, there was no man that would take charge of a gally, the
+weather was so rough, and there was such an amasednes amongst them. And
+verely I thinke their God was amased thereat: it could not be but he must
+blush for shame, he can speake neuer a word for dulnes, much lease can he
+helpe them in such an extremitie. Well, howsoeuer it is, he is very much to
+blame, to suffer them to receiue such a gibe. But howsoeuer their God
+behaued himselfe, our God shewed himselfe a God indeede, and that he was
+the onely liuing God: for the seas were swift vnder his faithfull, which
+made the enemies agast to behold them, a skilfuller Pilot leades them, and
+their mariners bestirre them lustily: but the Turkes had neither mariners,
+Pilot, nor any skilfull Master, that was in a readinesse at this pinch.
+
+When the Christians were safe out of the enemies coast, Iohn Fox called to
+them all, willing them to be thankfull vnto almighty God for their
+deliuerie, and most humbly to fall downe vpon their knees, beseeching him
+to aide them vnto their friends land, and not to bring them into an other
+daunger, sith hee had most mightily deliuered them from so great a
+thraldome and bondage.
+
+Thus when euery man had made his petition, they fell straight way to their
+labour with the oares, in helping one another, when they were wearied, and
+with great labour striuing to come to some Christian land, as neere as they
+could gesse by the starres. But the windes were so diuers, one while
+driuing them this way, that they were now in a newe maze, thinking that God
+had forsaken them, and left them to a greater danger. And forasmuch as
+there were no victuals now left in the gally, it might haue beene a cause
+to them (if they had beene the Israelites) to haue murmured against their
+God: but they knew how that their God, who had deliuered them out of Ægypt,
+was such a louing and mercifull God, as that hee would not suffer them to
+be confounded, in whom he had wrought so great a wonder: but what calamitie
+soeuer they sustained, they knew it was but for their further triall, and
+also (in putting them in mind of their farther miserie) to cause them not
+to triumph and glory in themselues therefore. [Sidenote: Extremity of
+famine.] Hauing (I say) no victuals in the galley, it might seeme that one
+miserie continually fel vpon an others neck: but to be briefe, the famine
+grew to be so great, that in 28 dayes, wherein they were on the sea, there
+died eight persons, to the astonishment of all the rest.
+
+So it fell out, that vpon the 29 day, after they set from Alexandria, they
+fell on the Isle of Candie, and landed at Gallipoli, where they were made
+much of by the Abbot and Monks there, who caused them to stay there, while
+they were well refreshed and eased. [Sidenote: John Fox his sword kept as a
+monument in Gallipoli.] They kept there the sworde, wherewith Iohn Fox had
+killed the keeper, esteeming it as a most precious iewell, and hung it vp
+for a monument.
+
+When they thought good, hauing leaue to depart from thence, they sayled
+along the coast, till they arriued at Tarento, where they solde their
+gallie, and deuided it, euery man hauing a part thereof. The Turkes
+receiuing so shamefull a foile at their hand, pursued the Christians, and
+scoured the seas, where they could imagine that they had bent their course.
+And the Christians had departed from thence on the one day in the morning,
+and seuen gallies of the Turkes came thither that night, as it was
+certified by those who followed Fox, and his companie, fearing least they
+should haue bene met with. And then they came a foote to Naples, where they
+departed a sunder, euery man taking him to his next way home. From whence
+Iohn Fox tooke his iourney vnto Rome, where he was well entertayned of an
+Englishman, who presented his worthy deede vnto the Pope, who rewarded him
+liberally, and gaue him his letters vnto the king of Spaine, where he was
+very well entertained of him there, who for this his most worthy enterprise
+gaue him in fee twenty pence a day. From whence, being desirous to come
+into his owne countrie, he came thither at such time as he conueniently
+could, which was in the yeere of our Lorde God, 1579. Who being come into
+England, went vnto the Court, and shewed all his trauell vnto the Councell:
+who considering of the state of this man, in that hee had spent and lost a
+great part of his youth in thraldome and bondage, extended to him their
+liberalitie, to helpe to maintaine him now in age, to their right honour,
+and to the incouragement of all true hearted Christians.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The copie of the certificate for Iohn Fox, and his companie, made by the
+  Prior, and the brethren of Gallipoli, where they first landed.
+
+We the Prior, and Fathers of the Couent of the Amerciates, of the city of
+Gallipoli, of the order of Preachers doe testifie, that vpon the 29 of
+Ianuary last past, 1577, there came into the said citie a certaine gally
+from Alexandria, taken from the Turkes, with two hundreth fiftie and eight
+Christians, whereof was principal Master Iohn Fox, an Englishman, a gunner,
+and one of the chiefest that did accomplish that great worke, whereby so
+many Christians haue recouered their liberties. In token and remembrance
+whereof, vpon our earnest request to the same Iohn Fox, he hath left here
+an olde sworde, wherewith he slewe the keeper of the prison: which sword we
+doe as a monument and memoriall of so worthy a deede, hang vp in the chiefe
+place of our Couent house. And for because all things aforesaid, are such
+as we will testifie to be true, as they are orderly passed, and haue
+therefore good credite, that so much as is aboue expressed is true, and for
+the more faith thereof, we the Prior, and Fathers aforesaide, haue ratified
+and subscribed these presents. Geuen in Gallipoly, the third of Februarie
+1577.
+
+    I Frier Vincent Barba, Prior of the same place, confirme the premisses,
+      as they are aboue written.
+    I Frier Albert Damaro, of Gallipoly, Subprior, confirme as much.
+    I Frier Anthony Celleler of Gallipoly, confirme as aforesaid.
+    I Frier Bartlemew of Gallipoly, confirme as aboue said.
+    I Frier Francis of Gallipoly, confirme as much.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Bishop of Rome his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox.
+
+Be it knowen vnto all men, to whom this writing shall come, that the
+bringer hereof Iohn Fox Englishman, a Gunner, after he had serued captiue
+in the Turkes gallies, by the space of foureteene yeeres, at length,
+thorough God his helpe, taking good opportunitie, the third of Ianuarie
+last past, slew the keeper of the prison, (whom he first stroke on the
+face) together with four and twentie other Turkes, by the assistance of his
+fellow prisoners: and with 266. Christians (of whose libertie he was the
+author) launched from Alexandria, and from thence arriued first at
+Gallipoly in Candie, and afterwardes at Tarento in Apulia: the written
+testimony and credite of which things, as also of others, the same Iohn Fox
+hath in publike tables from Naples.
+
+Vpon Easter eue he came to Rome, and is now determined to take his iourney
+to the Spanish Court, hoping there to obtaine some reliefe toward his
+liuing: wherefore the poore distressed man humbly beseecheth, and we in his
+behalfe do in the bowels of Christ, desire you, that taking compassion of
+his former captiuitie, and present penurie, you doe not onely suffer him
+freely to passe throughout all your cities and townes, but also succour him
+with your charitable almes, the reward whereof you shall hereafter most
+assuredly receiue, which we hope you will afford to him, whom with tender
+affection of pitie wee commende vnto you. At Rome, the 20 of Aprill 1577.
+
+    Thomas Grolos Englishman Bishop of Astraphen.
+    Richard Silleum Prior Angliæ.
+    Andreas Ludouicus Register to our Soueraigne Lord the Pope, which for
+      the greater credit of the premises, haue set my seale to these
+      presents. At Rome, the day and yeere aboue written.
+    Mauricius Clement the gouernour and keeper of the English Hospitall in
+      the citie.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The King of Spaine his letters to the Lieutenant, for the placing of Iohn
+  Fox in the office of a Gunner.
+
+To the illustrious Prince, Vespasian Gonsaga Colonna, our Lieutenant and
+Captaine Generall of our Realme of Valentia. Hauing consideration, that
+Iohn Fox Englishman hath serued vs, and was one of the most principall,
+which tooke away from the Turkes a certaine gallie, which they haue brought
+to Tarento, wherein were two hundred, fiftie, and eight Christian captiues:
+we licence him to practise, and giue him the office of a Gunner, and haue
+ordained, that he goe to our said Realme, there to serue in the said office
+in the Gallies, which by our commandement are lately made. And we doe
+commaund, that you cause to be payed to him eight ducats pay a moneth, for
+the time that he shall serue in the saide Gallies as a Gunner, or till we
+can otherwise prouide for him, the saide eight duckats monethly of the
+money which is already of our prouision, present and to come, and to haue
+regarde of those which come with him. From Escuriall the tenth of August,
+1577.
+
+  I the King,
+    Iuan del Gado.
+
+And vnder that a confirmation of the Councell.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbarie, in the yeere 1583. with a ship
+  called the Iesus, wherein the aduentures and distresses of some
+  Englishmen are truely reported, and other necessary circumstances
+  obserued. Written by Thomas Sanders.
+
+This voyage was set foorth by the right worshipfull sir Edward Osborne
+knight, chiefe merchant of all the Turkish company, and one master Richard
+Staper, the ship being of the burden of one hundred tunnes, called the
+Iesus, she was builded at Farmne a riuer by Portsmouth. The owners were
+master Thomas Thomson, Nicholas Carnaby, and Iohn Gilman. The master was
+one Aches Hellier of Black-wall, and his Mate was one Richard Morris of
+that place: their Pilot was one Anthonie Ierado a Frenchman, of the
+prouince of Marseils: the purser was one William Thomson our owners sonne:
+the merchants factors were Romane Sonnings a Frenchman, and Richard Skegs
+seruant vnto the said master Staper. The owners were bound vnto the
+marchants by charter partie therevpon, in one thousand markes, that the
+said ship by Gods permission should goe for Tripolis in Barbarie, that is
+to say, first from Portsmouth to Newhauen in Normandie, from thence to S.
+Lucar, otherwise called Saint Lucas, in Andeluzia, and from thence to
+Tripolie, which is in the East part of Africa, and so to returne vnto
+London. [Sidenote: Man doth purpose, and God doth dispose.] But here ought
+euery man to note and consider the workes of our God, that many times what
+man doth determine God doth disappoint. The said master hauing some
+occasion to goe to Farmne, tooke with him the Pilot and the Purser, and
+returning againe by meanes of a perrie of winde, the boat wherein they
+were, was drowned, with the said master, the purser, and all the company:
+onely the said Pilot by experience in swimming saued himselfe: these were
+the beginnings of our sorrowes. [Sidenote: A new master chosen.] After
+which the said masters mate would not proceed in that voiage, and the owner
+hearing of this misfortune, and the unwillingnesse of the masters mate, did
+send downe one Richard Deimond, and shipped him for master, who did chuse
+for his Mate one Andrew Dier, and so the said ship departed on her voiage
+accordingly: that is to say, about the 16. of October, in An. 1583. she
+made saile from Portsmouth, [Sidenote: The new master died.] and the 18 day
+then next following she arriued at Newhauen, where our saide last master
+Deimond by a surfeit died. The factors then appointed the said Andrew Dier,
+being then masters mate, to be their master for that voiage, who did chuse
+to be his Mates the two quarter masters of the same ship, to wit, Peter
+Austine, and Shillabey, and for Purser was shipped one Richard Burges.
+Afterward about the 8. day of Nouember we made saile forthward, and by
+force of weather we were driuen backe againe into Portesmouth, where we
+renued our victuals and other necessaries, and then the winde came faire.
+About the 29. day then next following we departed thence, and the first day
+of December by meanes of a contrarie winde, we were driuen to Plimmouth.
+The 18. day then next following, we made foorthward againe, and by force of
+weather we were driuen to Falmouth, where we remained vntill the first day
+of Ianuary: at which time the winde comming faire, we departed thence, and
+about the 20. day of the said moneth we arriued safely at S. Lucar.
+[Sidenote: The Iesus arriued in Tripolis.] And about the 9. day of March
+next following, we made saile from thence, and about the 18. day of the
+same moneth we came to Tripolis in Barbarie, where we were verie well
+intertained by the king of that countrey, and also of the commons. The
+commodities of that place are sweete oiles: the king there is a merchant,
+and the rather (willing to preferre himselfe before his commons) requested
+our said factors to traffique with him, and promised them that if they
+would take his oiles at his owne price, they should pay no maner of
+custome, and they tooke of him certaine tunnes of oile: and afterwarde
+perceiuing that they might haue farre better cheape notwithstanding the
+custome free, they desired the king to licence them to take the oiles at
+the pleasure of his commons, for that his price did exceede theirs:
+whereunto the king would not agree, but was rather contended to abate his
+price, insomuch that the factors bought all their oyles of the king custome
+free, and so laded the same aboord.
+
+[Sidenote: Another ship of Bristow came to Tripolis.] In the meane time
+there came to that place one Miles Dickenson in a ship of Bristow, who
+together with our said Factors tooke a house to themselues there. Our
+French Factor Romane Sonnings desired to buy a commodity in the market, and
+wanting money, desired the saide Miles Dickenson to lend him an hundred
+Chikinoes vntill he came to his lodging, which he did, and afterward the
+same Sonnings mette with Miles Dickenson in the streete, and deliuered him
+money bound vp in a napkin: saying, master Dickenson there is the money I
+borrowed of you, and so thanked him for the same: hee doubted nothing lesse
+then falshoode, which is seldome knowne among marchants, and specially
+being together in one house, and is the more detestable betweene
+Christians, they being in Turkie among the heathen. The said Dickenson did
+not tell the money presently, vntill he came to his lodging, and then
+finding nine Chikinoes lacking of his hundred, which was about three
+pounds, for that euery Chikino is woorth seuen shillings of English money,
+he came to the sayde Romane Sonnings and deliuered him his handkerchiefe,
+and asked him howe many Chikinoes hee had deliuered him! Sonnings answered,
+an hundred: Dickenson, said no: and so they protested and swore on both
+parts. But in the ende the said Romane Sonnings did sweare deepely with
+detestable othes and curses, and prayed God that he might shewe his workes
+on him, that other might take ensample thereby, and that he might be hanged
+like a dogge, and neuer come into England againe, if he did not deliuer
+vnto the sayde Dickenson an hundred Chikinoes. And here beholde a notable
+example of all blasphemers, curses and swearers, how God rewarded him
+accordingly: for many times it cometh to passe, that God sheweth his
+miracles vpon such monstrous blasphemers, to the ensample of others, as
+nowe hereafter you shall heare what befell to this Romane Sonnings.
+
+There was a man in the said towne a pledge, whose name was Patrone Norado,
+who the yere before had done this Sonnings some pleasure there. The
+foresaid Patrone Norado was indebted vnto a Turke of that towne in the
+summe of foure hundred and fiftie crownes, for certain goods sent by him
+into Christendome in a ship of his owne, and by his owne brother, and
+himselfe remained in Tripolis as pledge vntill his said brothers returne:
+and, as the report went there, after his brothers arriual into
+Christendome, he came among lewde companie, and lost his brothers said ship
+and goods at dice, and neuer returned vnto him againe.
+
+[Sidenote: A conspiracie practiced by the French Factor, to deceiue a
+Turkish marchant of 450 crowns.] The said Patrone Norado being voyde of all
+hope, and finding now opportunitie, consulted with the said Sonnings for to
+swimme a seaboorde the Islands, and the ship being then out of danger,
+should take him in (as after was confessed) and so to goe to Tolan in the
+prouince of Marseilis with this Patrone Norado, and there to take in his
+lading.
+
+The shippe being readie the first day of May, and hauing her sayles all
+aboorde, our sayde Factors did take their leaue of the king, who very
+courteously bidde them farwell, and when they came aboorde, they commanded
+the Master and the companie hastily to get out the ship: the Master
+answered that it was vnpossible, for that the winde was contrary and
+ouer-blowed. And he required vs vpon forfeiture of our bandes, that we
+should doe our endeuour to get her foorth. Then went wee to warpe out the
+shippe, and presently the king sent a boate aboord of vs, with three men in
+her, commaunding the saide Sonnings to come a shoare: at whose coming, the
+king demaunded of him custome for the oyles: Sonnings answered him that his
+highnesse had promised to deliuer them custome free. But notwithstanding
+the king weighed not his said promise, and as an infidell that hath not the
+feare of God before his eyes, nor regarde of his worde, albeit he was a
+king, hee caused the sayde Sonnings to pay the custome to the vttermost
+penie. And afterwarde willed him to make haste away, saying, that the
+Ianizaries would haue the oyle ashoare againe.
+
+These Ianizaries are souldiers there vnder the great Turke, and their power
+is aboue the Kings. And so the saide Factor departed from the king, and
+came to the waterside, and called for a boate to come aboorde, and he
+brought with him the foresaid Patrone Norado. [Sidenote: The beginning of
+their troubles, and occasion of all their miserie.] The companie
+inquisitiue to know what man that was, Sonnings answered, that he was his
+countrymen, a passenger: I pray God said the companie, that we come not
+into trouble by this man. Then said Sonnings angerly, what haue you to do
+with any matters of mine? if any thing chance otherwise then well, I must
+answer for all.
+
+Now the Turke vnto whom this Patrone Norado was indebted, missing him
+(supposed him to be aboorde of our shippe) presently went vnto the King,
+and tolde him that hee thought that his pledge Patrone Norado was aboord of
+the English ship, whereupon the King presently sent a boat aboord of vs,
+with three men in her commanding the said Sonnings to come a shoare, and
+not speaking any thing as touching the man, he saide that he would come
+presently in his owne boate, but as soone as they were gone, he willed vs
+to warp foorth the ship, and saide that he would see the knaues hanged
+before he would goe a shoare. And when the king sawe that he came not a
+shoare, but still continued warping away the shippe, he straight commaunded
+the gunner of the bulwarke next vnto vs, to shoote three shootes without
+ball. Then we came all to the said Sonnings, and asked of him what the
+matter was that we were shot at, he said that it was the Ianizaries who
+would haue the oyle a shoare againe, and willed vs to make haste away, and
+after that he had discharged three shots without ball, he commaunded all
+the gunners in the towne to doe their indeuour to sinke vs, but the Turkish
+gunners could not once strike vs, wherefore the king sent presently to the
+Banio: (this Banio is the prison whereas all the captiues lay at night) and
+promised if that there were any that could either sinke vs, or else cause
+vs to come in againe, he should haue a hundred crownes, and his libertie.
+With that came foorth a Spaniard called Sebastian, which had bene an olde
+seruitor in Flanders, and he said, that vpon the performance of that
+promise, hee would vndertake either to sinke vs, or to cause vs to come in
+againe, and therto he would gage his life, and at the first shotte he split
+our rudders head in pieces, and the second shotte he shotte vs vnder the
+water, and the third shotte he shotte vs through our foremast with a
+Coluering shot, and thus he hauing rent both our rudder and maste, and shot
+vs vnder water, we were inforced to goe in againe.
+
+This Sebastian for all his diligence herein, had neither his liberty, nor
+an hundred crownes, so promised by the said king, but after his seruice
+done was committed againe to prison, whereby may appeare the regard that
+the Turke or infidell hath of his worde, although he be able to performe
+it, yea more, though he be a king.
+
+Then, our merchants seeing no remedie, they together with fiue of our
+companie went a shoare, and then they ceased shooting: they shot vnto vs in
+the whole, nine and thirtie shootes, without the hurt of any man.
+
+And when our marchants came a shoare, the King commaunded presently that
+they with the rest of our companie that were with them, should be cheined
+foure and foure, to a hundred waight of yron, and when we came in with the
+ship, there came presently aboue an hundred Turks aboord of vs, and they
+searched vs, and stript our very clothes from our backes, and brake open
+our chests, and made a spoyle of all that we had: and the Christian
+caitifes likewise, that came a boord of vs made spoyle of our goods, and
+vsed vs as ill as the Turkes did. And our masters mate hauing a Geneua
+Bible in his hand, there came the kings chiefe gunner, and tooke it out
+from him, who shewed me of it, and I hauing the language, went presently to
+the kings treasurer, and tolde him of it, saying, that sith it was the will
+of God that we should fall into their handes, yet that they should grant us
+to vse our consciences to our owne discretion, as they suffered the
+Spaniards and other nations to vse theirs, and he graunted vs: then I told
+him that the maister gunner had taken away a Bible from one of our men: the
+Treasurer went presently and commaunded him to deliuer vp the Bible againe,
+which he did: and within a litle after he tooke it from the man againe, and
+I shewed the Treasurer of it, and presently he commaunded him to deliuer it
+againe: saying, thou villaine, wilt thou turne to Christianitie againe? for
+he was a Renegado, which is one that first was a Christian, and afterwards
+becommeth a Turke, and so he deliuered me the Bible the second time. And
+then I hauing it in my hand, the gunner came to me, and spake these wordes,
+saying, thou dogge, I wil haue the booke in despight of thee, and tooke it
+from me, saying: If thou tell the kings treasurer of it any more, by
+Mahomet I will be reuenged of thee. Notwithstanding I went the third time
+vnto the kings Treasurer, and tolde him of it, and he came with me, saying
+thus unto the gunner: by the head of the great Turke, if thou take it from
+him againe, thou shalt haue an hundred bastonadoes. And foorthwith he
+deliuered me the booke, saying, he had not the value of a pin of the spoyle
+of the ship, which was the better for him, as hereafter you shall heare:
+for there was none, neither Christian nor Turke that tooke the value of a
+peniworth of our goods from vs, but perished both bodie and goods within
+seuenteene moneths following, as hereafter shall plainely appeare.
+
+Then came the Guardian Basha, which is the keeper of the kings captiues, to
+fetch vs all a shoare, and then I remembring the miserable estate of poore
+distressed captiues, in the time of their bondage to those infidels, went
+to mine owne chest, and tooke out thereof a iarre of oyle, and filled a
+basket full of white Ruske to carie a shoare with me, but before I came to
+the Banio, the Turkish boyes had taken away almost all my bread, and the
+keeper saide, deliuer me the iarre of oyle, and when thou commest to the
+Banio thou shalt haue it againe, but I neuer had it of him any more.
+
+But when I came to the Banio, and sawe our Marchants and all the rest of
+our company in chaines, and we all ready to receiue the same reward, what
+heart in the world is there so hard, but would haue pitied our cause,
+hearing or seeing the lamentable greeting there was betwixt vs: all this
+happened the first of May 1584.
+
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen arraigned.] And the second day of the same
+moneth, the King with all his counsell sate in Judgment vpon vs. The first
+that were had forth to be arraigned, were the Factors, and the Masters, and
+the King asked them wherefore they came not a shoare when he sent for them.
+And Romaine Sonnings answered, that though he were king on shoare, and
+might commaunde there, so was hee as touching those that were vnder him:
+and therefore said, if any offence be, the fault is wholly in my selfe, and
+in no other. Then foorthwith the king gaue iudgement, that the saide
+Romaine Sonnings should be hanged ouer the Northeast bulwarke: from whence
+he conueyed the forenamed Patrone Norado, and then he called for our Master
+Andrew Dier, and vsed fewe wordes to him, and so condemned him to be hanged
+ouer the walles of the Westermost bulwarke.
+
+Then fell our other Factor (named Richard Skegs) vpon his knees before the
+king, and said, I beseech your highnesse either to pardon our Master, or
+else suffer me to die for him, for he is ignorant of this cause. And then
+the people of that countrey fauouring the said Richard Skegs besought the
+king to pardon them both. So then the king spake these wordes: Beholde for
+thy sake, I pardon the Master. Then presently the Turkes shouted, and
+cried, saying: Away with the Master from the presence of the king. And then
+he came into the Banio whereas we were, and tolde vs what had happened, and
+we all reioyced at the good hap of master Skegs, that hee was saued, and
+our Master for his sake.
+
+[Sidenote: Master Dier condemned to be hanged ouer a bulwarke.] But
+afterward our ioy was turned to double sorrow, for in the meane time the
+kings minde was altered: for that one of his counsell had aduised him, that
+vnlesse the Master died also, by the lawe they could not confiscate the
+ship nor goods, neither captive any of the men: whereupon the king sent for
+our Master againe, and gaue him another iudgement after his pardon for one
+cause, which was that hee should be hanged. Here all true Christians may
+see what trust a Christian man may put in an infidels promise, who being a
+King pardoned a man nowe, as you haue heard, and within an houre after
+hanged him for the same cause before a whole multitude: and also promised
+our Factors their oyles custome free, and at their going away made them pay
+the vttermost penie for the custome thereof.
+
+[Sidenote: A Frenshman turned Turke, in hope of his life, and afterwards
+was hanged.] And when that Romaine Sonnings saw no remedy but that he
+should die, he protested to turne Turke, hoping thereby to haue saued his
+life. Then said the Turke, if thou wilt turne Turke, speake the words that
+thereunto belong: and he did so. Then saide they vnto him, Now thou shalt
+die in the faithe of a Turke, and so hee did, as the Turkes reported that
+were at his execution. And the forenamed Patrone Norado, whereas before he
+had libertie and did nothing he then was condemned slaue perpetuall, except
+there were paiment made of the foresaid summe of money.
+
+Then the king condemned all vs, who were in number sixe and twentie, of the
+which, two were hanged (as you haue heard) and one died the first day wee
+came on shoare, by the visitation of Almightie God: and the other three and
+twentie he condemned slaues perpetually vnto the great Turke, and the ship
+and goods were confiscated to the vse of the great Turke: and then we all
+fell downe vpon our knees, giuing God thankes for this sorrowfull
+visitation, and giuing our selues wholy to the Almightie power of God, vnto
+whom all secrets are knowen, that he of his goodnesse would vouchsafe to
+looke vpon vs.
+
+Here may all true Christian hearts see the wonderfull workes of God shewed
+vpon such infidels, blasphemers, whoremasters, and renegate Christians, and
+so you shall reade in the ende of this booke, of the like vpon the
+vnfaithfull king and all his children, and of as many as tooke any portion
+of the said goods.
+
+[Sidenote: Euery fiue men allowed but two pence of bread a day.] But first
+to shewe our miserable bondage and slauerie, and vnto what small pittance
+and allowance wee were tied, for euery fiue men had allowance but fiue
+aspers of bread in a day, which is but two pence English: and our lodging
+was to lye on the bare boards, with a very simple cape to couer vs, wee
+were also forceably and most violently shauen, head and beard, and within
+three dayes after, I and six more of my fellowes, together with fourescore
+Italians and Spaniards were sent foorth in a Galeot to take a Greekish
+Carmosell, which came into Africa to steale Negroes, and went out of
+Tripolis vnto that place, which was two hundred and fourtie leagues thence,
+but wee were chained three and three to an oare, and wee rowed naked aboue
+the girdle, and the Boteswaine of the Galley walked abaft the maste, and
+his Mate afore the maste, and eche of them a bulls pissell dried in their
+handes, and when their diuelish choller rose, they would strike the
+Christians for no cause: and they allowed vs but halfe a pound of bread a
+man in a day without any other kinde of sustenance, water excepted. And
+when we came to the place whereas wee saw the Carmosell, we were not
+suffered to haue neither needle, bodkin, knife, or any other weapon about
+vs, nor at any other time in the night, vpon paine of one hundred
+bastonadoes: wee were then also cruelly manackled in such sort, that we
+could not put our handes the length of one foote asunder the one from the
+other, and euery night they searched our chaines three times, to see if
+they were fast riueted: Wee continued fight with the Carmosell three
+houres, and then wee tooke it, and lost but two of our men in that fight,
+but there were slaine of the Greekes fiue, and foureteene were cruelly
+hurt, and they that were sound, were presently made slaues and chained to
+the oares: and within fifteene dayes after we returned againe into
+Tripolis, and then wee were put to all maner of slauerie. [Sidenote: The
+Turkes builded a church.] I was put to hewe stones, and other to cary
+stones, and some to draw the Cart with earth, and some to make morter, and
+some to draw stones, (for at that time the Turkes builded a church:) And
+thus we were put to all kinde of slauerie that was to be done. And in the
+time of our being there, the Moores that are the husbandmen of the countrey
+rebelled against the king, because he would haue constrained them to pay
+greater tribute then heretofore they had done, so that the Souldiours of
+Tripolis marched foorth of the towne to haue ioyned battell against the
+Moores for their rebellion, and the King sent with them foure pieces of
+Ordinance, which were drawen by the captiues twenty miles into the Country
+after them, and at the sight thereof the Moores fled and then the Captaines
+returned backe againe. Then I and certaine Christians more were sent twelue
+miles into the countrey with a Cart to lode timber, and we returned againe
+the same day.
+
+[Sidenote: The Christians sent 3. times a weeke 30 miles to fetch wood.]
+Nowe the king had 18. captiues, which three times a weeke went to fetch
+wood thirtie miles from the towne: and on a time he appointed me for one of
+the 18. and wee departed at eight of the clocke in the night, and vpon the
+way as wee rode vpon the camels, I demaunded of one of our company, who did
+direct vs the way? he sayd, that there was a Moore in our company which was
+our guide: and I demavnded of them how Tripolis and the wood bare one of
+the other? and hee said, East Northeast and West Southwest. And at midnight
+or neere thereabouts, as I was riding vpon my camel, I fell asleepe, and
+the guide and all the rest rode away from me, not thinking but I had bene
+among them. When I awoke, and finding my selfe alone durst not call nor
+hallow for feare least the wilde Moores should heare me, because they holde
+this opinion, that in killing a Christian they do God good seruice: and
+musing with my selfe what were best for me to do, if I should goe foorth,
+and the wilde Moores should hap to meete with mee, they would kill mee: and
+on the other side, if I should returne backe to Tripolis without any wood
+or company, I should be most miserably vsed: therefore of two euils, rather
+I had to goe foorth to the loosing of my life, then to turne backe and
+trust to their mercie, fearing to bee vsed as before I had seene others:
+for vnderstanding by some of my company before, howe Tripolis and the saide
+wood did lie one off another, by the North starre I went forth at
+aduenture, and as God would haue it, I came right to the place where they
+were, euen about an houre before day: there altogether wee rested and gaue
+our camels prouender, and assoone as the day appeared, we rode all into the
+wood: and I seeing no wood there, but a sticke here and a sticke there,
+about the bignesse of a mans arme growing in the sand, it caused mee to
+maruile how so many camels should be loden in that place. The wood was
+Iuniper, we needed no axe nor edge toole to cut it, but pluckt it vp by
+strength of hands rootes and all, which a man might easily do, and so
+gathered it together, a little at one place and so at another, and laded
+our camels, and came home about seuen of the clocke that night following:
+because I fell lame, and my camel was tired, I left my wood in the way.
+
+[Sidenote: Eighteene captiues run away from Tripolis.] There was in
+Tripolis that time a Venetian, whose name was Benedetto Venetiano, and
+seuenteene captiues more of his company, which ranne away from Tripolis in
+a boate, and came in sight of an Island called Malta, which lieth fourtie
+leagues from Tripolis right North, and being within a mile of the shoare,
+and very faire weather, one of their company said, In dispetto de Dio
+adesso venio a pilliar terra, which is as much to say: In the despite of
+God I shall now fetch the shoare, [Sidenote: The iudgement of God vpon
+blasphemers.] and presently there arose a mighty storme, with thunder and
+raine and the wind at North, their boate being very small, so that they
+were inforced to beare vp roome, and to sheare right afore the winde ouer
+against the coast of Barbarie from whence they came, and rowing vp and
+downe the coast, their victuals being spent, the 21. day after their
+departure they were inforced through the want of food to come ashoare,
+thinking to haue stolne some sheepe: but the Moores of the country very
+craftily perceiuing their intent, gathered together a threescore horsemen,
+and hid themselues behinde a sandie hill, and when the Christians were come
+all a shoare, and past vp halfe a mile into the countrey, the Moores rode
+betwixt them and their boate, and some of them pursued the Christians, and
+so they were all taken and brought to Tripolis, from whence they had before
+escaped: and presently the king commaunded that the foresaide Benedetto
+with one more of his company should lose their eares, and the rest should
+be most cruelly beaten, which was presenly done. [Sidenote: The Greene
+Dragon.] This king had a sonne which was a ruler in an Island called Gerbi,
+whereunto arriued an English shippe called the Greene Dragon, of the which
+was Master one M. Blonket, who hauing a very vnhappy boy in that shippe,
+and vnderstanding that whosoeuer would turne Turke should be well
+enterteined of the kings sonne, this boy did runne a shoare, and
+voluntarily turned Turke. Shortly after the kings sonne came to Tripolis to
+visite his father, and seeing our company, hee greatly fancied Richard
+Burges our Purser, and Iames Smith: they were both yong men, therefore he
+was very desirous to haue them to turne Turkes, but they would not yeeld to
+his desire, saying: We are your fathers slaues, and as slaues wee will
+serue him. Then his father the king sent for them, and asked them if they
+would turne Turkes? And they saide: If it please your highnesse, Christians
+we were borne, and so we will remaine, beseeched the king that they might
+not bee inforced thereunto. [Sidenote: The Kings sonne had a captiue that
+was sonne to one of the Queenes Maiesties guard, that was forced to turne
+Turke.] The king had there before in his hosue a sonne of a yeoman of our
+Queenes guard, whom the kings sonne had inforced to turne Turke, his name
+was Iohn Nelson: him the king caused to be brought to these yong men, and
+thea said vnto them: Wil not you beare this your countreymen company, and
+be Turke as hee is? And they saide, that they would not yeeld thereunto
+during life. But it fell out, that within a moneth after, the kings sonne
+went home to Gerbi againe, being sixe score miles from Tripolis, and
+carried our two foresaid yong men with him, which were Richard Burges, and
+Iames Smith: and after their departure from vs, they sent vs a letter,
+signifying that there was no violence shewed vnto them as yet, but within
+three dayes after they were violently vsed, for that the kings sonne
+demaunded of them againe, if that they would turne Turke? Then answered
+Richard Burges, a Christian I am, and so I will remaine. Then the kings
+sonne very angerly said vnto him: By Mahomet thou shall presently be made
+Turke. Then called he for his men, and commaunded them to make him Turke,
+and they did so, and circumcised him, and would haue had him speake the
+wordes that thereunto belonged, but he answered them stoutly that he would
+not: and although they had put on him the habite of a Turke, yet sayd he, A
+Christian I was borne, and so I will remaine, though you force me to doe
+otherwise.
+
+And then he called for the other, and commaunded him to be made Turke
+perforce also: but he was very strong, for it was so much as eight of the
+kings sonnes men could doe to holde him, so in the ende they circumcised
+him, and made him Turke. Now to passe ouer a little, and so to shewe the
+maner of our deliuerance out of that miserable captiuitie.
+
+[Sidenote: The first motion for those Engmens deliuerie.] In May aforesaid,
+shortly after our apprehension, I wrote a letter into England vnto my
+father dwelling in Tauistoke in Deuonshire, signifying vnto him the whole
+estate of our calamities: and I wrote also to Constantinople, to the
+English Embassadour, both which letters were faithfully deliuered. But when
+my father had receiued my letter, and vnderstood the trueth of our mishap,
+and the occasion thereof, and what had happened to the offenders, he
+certified the right honourable the earle of Bedford thereof, who in short
+space acquainted her highnesse with the whole cause thereof, and her
+Maiestie like a most mercifull princesse tendering her Subiects, presently
+tooke order for our deliuerance. Whereupon the right worshipful sir Edward
+Osborne knight directed his letters with all speed to the English
+Embassadour in Constantinople, to procure our deliuery: and he obtained the
+great Turkes Commission, and sent it foorthwith to Tripolis, by one Master
+Edward Barton, together with a Iustice of the great Turkes, and one
+souldiour, and another Turke, and a Greeke which was his interpretour,
+which could speake besides Greeke, Turkish, Italian, Spanish and English.
+And when they came to Tripolis, they, were well interteined. And the first
+night they did lie in a Captaines house in the towne: all our company that
+were in Tripolis came that night for ioy to Master Barton and the other
+Commissioners to see them. Then master Barton said vnto vs, welcome my good
+countreymen, and louingly interteined vs, and at our departure from him, he
+gaue vs two shillings, and said, Serue God, for to morrow I hope you shall
+be as free as euer you were; We all gaue him thankes and so departed.
+
+The next day in the morning very early, the King hauing intelligence of
+their comming, sent word to the keeper, that none of the Englishmen
+(meaning our company) should goe to worke. Then he sent for Master Barton
+and the other Commissioners, and demaunded of the saide Master Barton his
+message: the Iustice answered, that the great Turke his Souereigne had sent
+them vnto him, signifying that he was informed that a certaine English
+shippe, called the Iesus, was by him the saide king confiscated, about
+twelue months since, and nowe my saide Souereigne hath here sent his
+especiall commission by vs vnto you, for the deliuerance of the saide
+shippe and goods, and also the free libertie and deliuerance of the
+Englishmen of the same shippe, whom you haue taken and kept in captiuitie.
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen released.] And further the same Iustice saide, I
+am authorized by my said soueraigne the great Turke to see it done: And
+therefore I commaund you by vertue of this commission, presently to make
+restitution of the premisses or the value thereof: and so did the Justices
+deliuer vnto the King the great Turkes commission to the effect aforesaide,
+which commission the king with all obedience receiued: and after the
+perusing of the same, he foorthwith commanded all the English captiues to
+be brought before him, and then willed the keeper to strike off all our
+yrons, which done, the king said, You Englishmen, for that you did offend
+the lawes of this place, by the same lawes therefore some of your company
+were condemned to die as you knowe, and you to bee perpetuall captiues
+during your liues: notwithstanding; seeing it hath pleased my soueraigne
+lord the great Turke to pardon your said offences, and to giue you your
+freedome and libertie, beholde, here I make deliuery of you to this English
+Gentleman: so hee deliuered vs all that were there, being thirteene in
+number, to Master Barton, who required also those two yong men which the
+Kings sonne had taken with him. Then the king answered that it was against
+their lawe to deliuer them, for that they were turned Turkes: and touching
+the ship and goods, the king said, that he had solde her, but would make
+restitution of the value, and as much of the goods as came vnto his hands,
+and so the king arose and went to dinner, and commaunded a Iew to goe with
+Master Barton and the other commissioners, to shew them their lodging,
+which was a house prouided and appointed them by the said king. And because
+I had the Italian and Spanish tongues, by which their most trafique in that
+countrey is, Master Barton made me his Cater to buy his victuals for him
+and his company, and deliuered me money needfull for the same. Thus were
+wee set at libertie the 28. day of April, 1585.
+
+[Sidenote: The plagues and punishments that happened to the King and his
+people.] Nowe to returne to the kings plagues and punishments, which
+Almighty God at his will and pleasure sendeth vpon men in the sight of the
+world, and likewise of the plagues that befell his children and others
+aforesaide. First when we were made bondmen, being the second day of May
+1584. the king had 300. captiues, and before the moneth was expired, there
+died of them of the plague 150. [Sidenote: The king lost 150. camels taken
+by the wilde Moores.] And whereas they were 26. men of our company, of whom
+two were hanged, and one died the same day that wee were made bondslaues:
+that present moneth there died nine more of our company of the plague, and
+other two were forced to turne Turkes as before is rehearsed: and on the
+fourth day of June next following the king lost 150 camels, which were
+taken from him by the wilde Moores: and on the 28. day of the saide moneth
+of Iune, one Geffrey Maltese, a renegado of Malta, ranne away to his
+countrey, and stole a Brigandine which the king had builded for to take the
+Christians withall, and carried with him twelue Christians more which were
+the kings captiues. Afterward about the tenth day of Iuly next following,
+the king road foorth vpon the greatest and fairest mare that might be
+seene, as white as any swanne: hee had not ridden fourtie paces from his
+house, but on a sudden the same mare fell downe vnder him starke dead, and
+I with sixe more were commaunded to burie her, skinne, shoes and all, which
+we did. And about three moneths after our deliuerie, Master Barton, with
+all his residue of his company departed from Tripoli to Zante, in a
+vessell, called a Settea, of one Marcus Segoorus, who dwelt in Zante, and
+after our arriuall at Zante we remained fifteene dayes there aboorde our
+vessell, before wee could haue Platego, (that is, leaue to come a shoare)
+because the plague was in that place, from whence wee came: and about three
+dayes after we came a shoare, thither came another Settea of Marseils bound
+for Constantinople. [Sidenote: Two Englishmen shipped to Constantinople
+with M. Barton.] Then did Master Barton, and his company, with two more of
+our company, shippe themselues as passengers in the same Settea, and went
+to Constantinople. But the other nine of vs, that remained in Zante, about
+three moneths after, shipt our selues in a ship of the said Marcus
+Segoorus, which came to Zante, and was bound for England. [The souldiers of
+Tripolis kil the king.] In which three moneths, the souldiers of Tripolie
+killed the said king. And then the kings sonne, according to the custome
+there, went to Constantinople, to surrender vp all his fathers treasure,
+goods, captiues, and concubines, vnto the great Turke, and tooke with him
+our saide Purser Richard Burges, and Iames Smith, and also the other two
+Englishmen, which he the said kings sonne had inforced to become Turkes, as
+is aforesayd. And they the said Englishmen finding now some opportunitie,
+concluded with the Christian captiues which were going with them vnto
+Constantinople, being in number about one hundred and fiftie, to kill the
+kings sonne, and all the Turkes which were aboorde of the Galley, and
+priuily the saide Englishmen conueyed vnto the saide Christian captiues,
+weapons for that purposes. And when they came into the maine Sea, towards
+Constantinople (vpon the faithfull promise of the sayde Christian captiues)
+these foure Englishmen lept suddenly into the Crossia, that is, in the
+middest of the Galley, where the canon lieth, and with their swordes
+drawne, did fight against all the foresaid Turkes, and for want of helpe of
+the saide Christian captiues, who falsly brake their promises, the said
+Master Blonkets boy was killed, and the sayde Iames Smith, and our Pursser
+Richard Surges, and the other Englishman, were taken and bound into
+chaines, to be hanged at their arriual in Constantinople: and as the Lordes
+will was, about two dayes after, passing through the gulfe of Venice, at an
+Island called Cephalonia, they met with two of the duke of Venice his
+Gallies, [Marginal Note: Two Gallies of Venice tooke the King of Tripolie
+his galley, and killed the kings sonne, and all the Turkes in it, and
+released all the Christians being in number 150.] which tooke that Galley,
+and killed the kings sonne, and his mother, and all the Turkes that were
+there, in number 150. and they saued the Christian captiues, and would haue
+killed the two Englishmen because they were circumcised, and become Turkes,
+had not the other Christian captiues excused them, saying, that they were
+inforced to be Turkes, by the kings sonne, and shewed the Venetians also,
+how they did enterprise at sea to fight against all the Turks, and that
+their two fellowes were slaine in that fight. Then the Venetians saued
+them, and they, with all the residue of the said captiues, had their
+libertie, which were in number 150. or thereabouts, and the said Gallie,
+and all the Turkes treasure was confiscated to the vse of the state of
+Venice. And from thence our two Englishmen traueiled homeward by land, and
+in this meane time we had one more of our company, which died in Zante, and
+afterward the other eight shipped themselues at Zante, in a shippe of the
+said Marcus Segorus, which was bound for England: and before we departed
+thence, there arriued the Assension, and the George Bonauenture of London
+in Cephalonia, in a harbour there, called Arrogostoria, whose Marchants
+agreed with the Marchants of our shippe, and so laded all the marchandise
+of our shippe into the said ships of London, who tooke vs eight in as
+passengers, and so we came home, and within two moneths after our arriuall
+at London, our said Purser Richard Surges, and his fellow came home also:
+for the which we are bound to praise Almightie God, during our liues, and
+as duetie bindeth vs, to pray for the preseruation of our most gracious
+Queene, for the great care her Maiestie had ouer vs, her poore Subjects, in
+seeking and procuring of our deliuerance aforesaide: and also for her
+honourable priuie Counsell, and I especiall for the prosperitie and good
+estate of the house of the late deceased, the right honourable the Earle of
+Bedford, whose honour I must confesse, most diligently at the suite of my
+father now departed, traueiled herein: for the which I rest continually
+bounden to him, whose soule I doubt not, but is already in the heauens in
+ioy, with the Almightie, vnto which place he vouchsafe to bring vs all,
+that for our sinnes suffered most vile and shameful death vpon the Crosse,
+there to liue perpetually world without ende, Amen.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Queenes letters to the Turke 1584. for the restitution of the shippe
+  called the Iesus, and the English captiues detained in Tripolie in
+  Barbarie, and for certaine other prisoners in Argier.
+
+ELIZABETHA, Dei ter maxhni et vnici coeli terræque conditoris gratia,
+Angliæ, Franciæ, et Hiberniæ Regina, fidei Christianæ contra omnes omnium
+inter Christianos degentium, Christíque nomen falsò profitentium
+idololatrias, inuistissima et potentissima defensatrix: augustissimo,
+inuictissimôque principi, Zultan Murad Can, Musulmanici regni dominatori
+potentissimo, imperijque Orientis Monarchæ, supra omnes soli et supremo
+salutem, et multos cum summa rerum optimarum affluentia foelices et
+fortunatos annos.
+
+Augustissime et potentissime Imperator, biennio iam peracto, ad Cæsaream
+vestram Maiestatem scripsimus, vt dilectus noster famulus Guilielmus
+Harebornus, vir ornatissimus pro legato nostro Constantinopoli, alijsque
+Musulmanici imperij ditionibus, sublimi vestra authoritate reciperetur:
+simul etiam Angli subditi nostri commercium et mercaturam, in omnibus illis
+prouincijs exerceant, non minùs liberè quàm Galli, Poloni, Veneti, Germani,
+cæteríque vestri confoederati, qui varias Orientis partes peragrant, operam
+nauantes, vt mutuis commercijs coniungatur Oriens, cum Occidente.
+
+Quæ priuilegia, cum nostris subditis Anglis inuictissima vestra Maiestas
+literis et diplomate suo liberalissimè indulserit, facere non potuimus,
+quin quas maximas animus noster capere potest gratias, eo nomine ageremus:
+sperantes fore, vt hæc instituta commerciorum ratio maximas vtilitates, et
+commoda vtrinque, tam in imperij vestri ditiones, quàm regni nostri
+prouincias secum adferat.
+
+Id vt planè fiat, cûm nuper subditi nostri nonnulli Tripoli in Barbaria et
+Argellæ ab eius loci incolis voluntatem vestram fortè nescientibus malè
+habiti fuerint, et immaniter diuexati, Cæsaream vestram Maiestatem beneuolè
+rogamus, vt per Legatum nostrum eorum causam cognoscas, et postremò earum
+prouinciarum proregibus ac præfectis imperes, vt nostri liberè in illis
+locis, sine vi aut iniuria deinceps versari, et negotia gerere possint.
+
+Et nos omni opera vicissim studebimus ea omnia præstare, quæ Imperatoriæ
+vestræ Maiestati vllo pacto grata fore intelligemus: quam Deus vnicus mundi
+conditor optimus maximus diutissimè incolumem et florentem seruet. Datæ in
+palatio nostro Londini, quinto die Mensis Septembris: anno IESV CHRISTI
+Seruatoris nostri, 1584. Regni verò nostri vicessimo sexto.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Elizabeth, by the grace of the most high God, and onely maker of heauen and
+earth, of England, France and Ireland Queene, and of the Christian faith,
+against all the Idolaters and false professors of the Name of CHRIST
+dwelling among the Christians, most inuincible and puissant defender: to
+the most valiant and invincible Prince, Zultan Murad Can, the most mightie
+ruler of the kingdome of Musulman, and of the East Empire the onely and
+highest Monarch aboue all, health and many happy and fortunate yeres, with
+great aboundance of the best things.
+
+Most noble and puissant Emperour, about two yeeres nowe passed, wee wrote
+vnto your Imperiall Maiestie, that our welbeloued seruant, William
+Hareborne, a man of great reputation and honour, might be receiued vnder
+your high authoritie, for our Ambassadour in Constantinople, and other
+places, vnder the obedience of your Empire of Musulman: And also that the
+Englishmen, being our Subiects, might exercise entercourse and marchandize
+in all those Prouinces, no lesse freely then the French, Polonians,
+Venetians, Germanes, and other your confederats, which traueile through
+diuers of the East parts: endeuouring that by mutuall trafique, the East
+may be ioyned and knit to the West.
+
+Which priuileges, when as your most puissant Maiestie, by your letters and
+vnder your dispensation most liberally and fauourably granted to our
+Subiects of England, wee could no lesse doe, but in that respect giue you
+as great thankes, as our heart could conceiue, trusting that it wil come to
+passe, that this order of trafique, so well ordeined, will bring with it
+selfe most great profits and commodities to both sides, as well to the
+parties subiect to your Empire, as to the Prouinces of our kingdome. Which
+thing that it may be done in plaine and effectuall maner, whereas some of
+our Subiects of late at Tripolis in Barbarie, and at Argier, were by the
+inhabitants of those places (being perhaps ignorant of your pleasure) euill
+intreated and grieuously vexed, wee doe friendly and louingly desire your
+Imperial Maiestie, that you will vnderstand their causes by our
+Ambassadour, and afterward giue commaundement to the Lieutenants and
+Presidents of those Prouinces, that our people may henceforth freely,
+without any violence, or iniurie, traueile, and do their businesse in those
+places.
+
+And we againe with all endeuour, shall studie to performe all those things,
+which we shall in any wise vnderstand to be acceptable to your Imperiall
+Maiestie, which God, the onely maker of the world, most best and most
+great, long keepe in health, and flourishing. Given in our pallaice at
+London, the fift day of the moneth of September, in the yeere of IESVS
+CHRIST our Saviour, 1534. And of our raigne, the 26.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis in Barbarie, commanding the
+  restitution of an English ship, called the Iesus, with the men, and
+  goods, sent from Constantinople, by Mahomet Beg, a Iustice of the Great
+  Turkes, and an English Gentleman, called Master Edward Barton. Anno 1584.
+
+Honourable, and worthy Bassa Romadan Beglerbeg, most wise and prudent Iudge
+of the West Tripolis, wee wish the ende of all thy enterprises happie, and
+prosperous. By these our highnesse letters, wee certifie thee, that the
+right honourable, William Hareborne, Ambassadour in our most famous Porch,
+for the most excellent Queenes Maiestie of England, in person, and by
+letters hath certified our highnesse, that a certaine shippe, with all her
+furniture, and artillerie, worth two thousand duckets, arriuing in the port
+of Tripolis, and discharged of her lading and marchandize, paide our
+custome according to order, and againe, the marchants laded their shippe
+with oyle, which by constraint they were inforced to buy of you and hauing
+answered in like maner the custome for the same, determined to depart: a
+Frenchman assistant to the Marchant, vnknowen to the Englishmen, caried
+away with him another Frenchman indebted to a certaine Moore in foure
+hundred duckets, and by force caused the Englishmen, and shippe to depart:
+who neither suspecting fraude, nor deceite, hoised sailes. In the meane
+time, this man, whose debter the Frenchman had stollen away, went to the
+Bassa with the supplication, by whose meanes, and force of the Castle, the
+Englishmen were constrained to returne into the port, where the Frenchman,
+author of the euill, with the Master of the ship an Englishman, innocent of
+the crime were hanged, and sixe and twentie Englishmen, cast into prison,
+of whom through famine, thirst, and stinke of the prison, eleuen died, and
+the rest like to die. Further, it was signified to our Maiestie also, that
+the marchandise and other goods, with the shippe, were worth 7600. duckets:
+which things if they be so, this is our commandemeht, which was granted and
+giuen by our Maiestie, that the English shippe, and all the marchandize,
+and whatsoeuer else taken away bee wholy restored, and that the Englishmen
+be let goe free, and suffered to returne into their countrey. Wherefore
+when this our commaundement shall come vnto thee, wee straightly commaund,
+that the foresaid businesse be diligently looked vnto, and discharged. And
+if it be so, that a Frenchman, and no Englishman hath done this craft, and
+wickednesse vnknowen to the Englishmen, and as authour of the wickednesse
+is punished, and that the Englishmen committed nothing against the peace
+and league, or their articles: also if they payd custome according to
+order, it is against law, custome of Countreys, and their priuilege, to
+hinder or hurt them. Neither is it meete, their shippe, marchandise, and
+all their goods taken, should be withholden. We will therefore, that the
+English shippe, marchandize, and all other their goods, without exception,
+be restored to the Englishmen: also that the men bee let goe free, and if
+they will, let none hinder them, to returne peaceably into their Countrey:
+do not commit, that they another time complaine of this matter, and how
+this businesse is dispatched, certifie vs at our most famous porche.
+
+Dated in the Citie of Constantinople, in the 992. yeere of Mahomet, and in
+the ende of the moneth of October; and in the yeere of IESVS 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of Master William Hareborne, the English Ambassadour, Ligier in
+  Constantinople, to the Bassa Romadan, the Beglerbeg of Tripolis in
+  Barbarie, for the restoring of an English shippe called the Iesus, with
+  the goods, and men, detained as slaues, Anno 1585.
+
+Molto magnifico Signor,
+
+Noi ha stato significato per diuerse lettere di quanto ha passato circa
+diuina naue nostra chiamata Iesus, sopra il quale in agiuto di Ricciardo
+Skegs, vno de gli nostri mercanti di essa gia morto, veniua vn certo
+Francese per sopra cargo, chiamato Romano Sonings, il quale per non esser
+ben portato secondo che doueua, volendo importer seco vn altro Francese
+debitore a certi vostri sensa pagarcene, per giusticia era appiccato col
+patron Inglese Andre Dier, che come simplice credendo al detto Francese,
+senza auedercene de la sua ria malitia non retornaua, quando da vostra
+magnifica Signoria gli era mandato. La morte del detto tristo Francese
+approuiamo como cosa benfatta. [Sidenote: Edoardo Barton et Mahumed Beg.]
+Ma al contrario, doue lei ha confiscato la detta naue e mercantia en essa,
+et fatto sciaui li marinari, como cosa molto contraria a li priuilegij dal
+Gran Signor quattro anni passati concessi, et da noi confirmati di parte de
+la Serenissima Magesta d'Ingilterra nostra patrona, e molto contraria a la
+liga del detto Gran Signor, il quale essendo dal sopra detto apieno
+informato, noi ha conceduto il suo regale mandamento di restitutione, la
+qual mandiamo a vostra magnifica Signoria col presente portator Edoardo
+Barton, nostro Secretario, et Mahumed Beg, droguemano di sua porta excelsa,
+con altre lettere del excellentissimo Vizir, et inuictissimo capitan di
+mar: chiedendo, tanto di parte del Gran Signor, quanto di sua Serenissima
+Magesta di V. S. M. che gli huomini, oglij, naue col fornimento, danare, et
+tutti altri beni qualconque, da lei et per vestro ordine da gli nostri
+tolti siano resi à questo mio Secretario liberamente senza empacho alcuno,
+como il Gran Signor da sua gratia noi ha conceduto, specialmente per esser
+detti oglij comprati per ordine di sua Serenissima Magestà, per prouisione
+della Corte sua. Il qual non facendo, protestiamo per questa nostra al
+incontra di esso tutti futuri danni che puono succedere per questa cagione,
+como authore di quelli, contrario à la Santa liga giurata de li duoi Rei,
+patroni nostri, como per li priuilegij, che lei mostrerà il nostra, consta:
+per obseruatione de gli quali noi stiamo di fermo en questa excelsa Porta.
+Et cosi responderete nel alro mondo al solo Iddio, et quà al Gran Signor
+questo massimo peccato commesso da lei al incontra di tanti poueracchi, che
+per questa crudeltà sono in parte morti, in parti retenuti da esso en duro
+cattiuerio. Al contrario, piacendo lei euitar questo incommodo et
+restarcene en gratia del Signor Iddio, et li nostri patroni,
+amicheuolmente, (como conuien à par vostro di mostrarsi prudente
+gouernatore, et fidel seruitor al patrono) ad impirete questa nostra
+guistissima domanda, per poter resultarui à grand honore et commodò per la
+tratta di marchantia, che faronno a laduenire li nostri in quella vostra
+prouincia. Li quali generalmente, tanto quelli, como tutti altri che nel
+mar riscontrarete, siano, secondo che manda il Grand Signor, de vostra
+Signoria magnifica amicheuolmente recolti et receunti: Et noi non
+mancharemo al debito di ottimo amico en qualconche occurenza vostra,
+piacendo lei amicitia nostra como desideramo. Il Signor Iddio lei conceda
+(adimpiendo questa nostra giusta rechiesta, per cauar noi di piu futura
+fatica in questo negocio, et lei di disgratia) ogni vera felicità, et
+supremo honore. Data in Palazzo nostro che fu da Rapamat appresso Pera di
+15. di Genero 1585.
+
+Il Ambassiatore de la Majesta Serenissima d'Ingilterra, amico de vostra
+Signoria magnifica, piacendo lei.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right honourable Lord, it hath bene signified vnto vs by diuers letters,
+what hath fallen out, concerning a certaine shippe of ours, called the
+Iesus, into which, fore the helpe of Richard Skegs, one of our Marchants in
+the same, nowe deceased, there was admitted a certaine Frenchman called
+Romaine Sonnings, which for his ill behauiour, according to his deserts,
+seeking to cary away with him another Frenchman, which was indebted to
+certaine of your people, without paying his creditours, was hanged by
+sentence of iustice, together with Andrew Dier, the master of the said
+ship, who simply and without fraude, giuing credite to the said Frenchman,
+without any knowledge of his euil fact, did not returne when hee was
+commaunded, by your honourable Lordship. The death of the said lewde
+Frenchman we approue as a thing well done, but contrarywise, whereas your
+Lordship hath confiscated the said ship with the goods therein, and hath
+made slaues of the Mariners, as a thing altogether contrary to the
+priuileges of the Grand Signior, granted foure yeeres since, and confirmed
+by vs on the behalfe of the most excellent the Queenes Maiestie of England
+our Mystresse, and altogether contrary to the league of the saide Grand
+Signior, who being fully informed of the aforesaid cause, hath granted vnto
+vs his royall commandement of restitution, which we send vnto your
+honourable Lordship, by the present bearer Edward Barton our Secretaire,
+and Mahomet Beg, one of the Iustices of his stately Court, with other
+letters of the most excellent Admirall, and most valiant Captaine of the
+Sea, requiring your honourable Lordship, as well on the behalfe of the
+Grand Signior, as of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie, my Mystresse,
+that the men, oyles, shippe, furniture, money, and all other goods
+whatsoeuer, by your Lordship, and your order taken from our men, be
+restored vnto this my Secretary freely, without delay, as the Grand Signior
+of his goodnesse hath graunted vnto vs, especially in regard that the same
+oyles were bought by the commaundement of our Queenes most excellent
+Maiestie, for the prouision of her Court. Which if you performe not, wee
+protest by these our leters against you, that you are the cause of all the
+inconueniences which may ensue vpon this occasion, as the authour thereof,
+contrary to the holy league sworne by both our Princes, as by the
+priuileges, which this our seruant will shewe you, may appeare. For the
+seeing of which league performed, wee remaine here as Ligier in this
+stately Court. And by this meanes you shall answere in another world vnto
+God alone, and in this world vnto the Grand Signior, for this hainous sinne
+committed by you against so many poore soules, which by this your cruelty
+are in part dead, and in part detained by you in most miserable captiuitie.
+Contrarywise, if it shall please you to auoyd this mischiefe, and to
+remaine in the fauour of Almighty God, and of our Princes, you shall
+friendly fulfill this our iust demaund (as it behooueth you to shew your
+selfe a prudent Gouernour, and faithfull seruant vnto your Lord) and the
+same may turne to your great honour, and profite, by the trade of
+marchandize, which our men in time to come, may vse in that gouernment of
+yours: which generally, as well those poore men, as all others, which you
+shall meete at the sea, ought to be according to the commandement of the
+Grand Signior, friendly entertained and receiued of your honourable
+Lordship, and we will not faile in the dueties of a speciall friend,
+whensoeuer you shall haue occasion to vse vs, as we desire. Almighty God
+grant vnto your Lordship (in the fulfilling of this our iust request,
+whereby wee may be deliuered from further trouble in this matter, and your
+selfe from further displeasure) all true felicitie, and increase of honour.
+
+Giuen in our Pallace from Rapamat in Pera, the 15 of Ianuarie 1585.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage passed by sea into Aegypt, by Iohn Euesham Gentleman. Anno 1586.
+
+The 5 of December 1586 we departed from Grauesend in the Tiger of London,
+wherein was Master vnder God for the voyage Robert Rickman, and the 21. day
+at night we came to the Isle of Wight: departing from thence in the morning
+following we had a faire winde, so that on the 27 day wee came in sight of
+the rocke of Lisbone, and so sayling along we came in sight of the South
+Cape, the 29 of the same, and on the morrowe with a Westerly winde we
+entered the straights: and the second of Ianuary being as high as Cape de
+Gate, we departed from our fleete towards Argier. And the 4 day we arriued
+at the port of Argier aforesaid, where we staied till the first of March.
+[Sidenote: Tunis.] At which time we set saile towardes a place called
+Tunis, to the Eastward of Argier 100 leagues, where we arriued the 8 of the
+same. This Tunis is a small citie vp 12 miles from the sea, and at the port
+or rode where shipping doe ride, is a castle or fort called Goletta,
+sometimes in the handes of the Christians, but now of the Turkes; at which
+place we remained till the third of Aprill: at which time wee set saile
+towardes Alexandria, and hauing sometime faire windes, sometime contrary,
+we passed on the 12 day betweene Sicilia and Malta (where neere adioyning
+hath beene the fort and holde of the knights of the Rhodes) and so the 19
+day we fell with the Isle of Candy, and from thence to Alexandria, where we
+arriued the 27 of April, and there continued till the 5 of October.
+
+[Sidenote: The description of Alexandria.] The said citie of Alexandria is
+an old thing decayed or ruinated, hauing bene a faire and great citie neere
+two miles in length, being all vauted vnderneath for prouision of fresh
+water, which water commeth thither but once euery yeere, out of one of the
+foure riuers of paradise (as it is termed) called Nilus, which in September
+floweth neere eighteene foote vpright higher then his accustomed manner,
+and so the banke being cut, as it were a sluce, about thirty miles from
+Alexandria, at a towne called Rossetto, it doth so come to the saide Citie,
+with such aboundance, that barkes of twelue tunne doe come vpon the said
+water, which water doth fill all the vaults, cesternes, and wels in the
+said Citie, with very good water, and doth so continue good, till the next
+yeere following: for they haue there very litle raine or none at all, yet
+have they exceeding great dewes. Also they haue very good corne, and very
+plentifull; all the Countrey is very hot, especially in the moneths of
+August, September, and October. Also within the saide Citie there is a
+pillar of Marble, called by the Turkes, King Pharaoes needle, and it is
+foure square, euery square is twelue foote, and it is in height 90 foote.
+Also there is without the wals of the said Citie, about twentie score
+paces, another marble pillar, being round, called Pompey his pillar: this
+pillar standeth vpon a great square stone, euery square is fifteene foote,
+and the same stone is fifteene foote high, and the compasse of the pillar
+is 37 foote, and the height of it is 101 feete, which is a wonder to thinke
+how euer it was possible to set the said pillar vpon the said square stone.
+The port of the said Citie is strongly fortified with two strong Castles,
+and one other Castle within the citie, being all very well planted with
+munition: [Sidenote: Cayro.] and there is to the Eastward of this Citie,
+about three dayes iourney the citie of Grand Cayro, otherwise called
+Memphis: it hath in it by report of the registers bookes which we did see,
+to the number of 2400 Churches, and is wonderfully populous, and is one
+dayes iourney about the wals, which was iourneyed by one of our Mariners
+for triall thereof. Also neere to the saide citie there is a place called
+the Pyramides, being as I may well terme it, one of the nine wonders of the
+world: that is, seuen seuerall places of flint and marble stone, foure
+square, the wals thereof are seuen yards thicke in those places that we did
+see: the squarenes is in length about twentie score euery square, being
+built as it were a pointed diamond, broad at the foote, and small or narrow
+at the toppe: the heigth of them, to our judgement, doth surmount twise the
+heighth of Paules steeple: within the said Pyramides, no man doth know what
+there is, for that they haue no entrance but in the one of them, there is a
+hole where the wall is broken, and so we went in there, hauing torch light
+with vs, for that it hath no light to it, and within the same, is as it
+were a great hall, in the which there is a costly tombe, which tombe they
+say, was made for kinq Pharao in his life time, but he was not buried
+there, being drowned in the red sea: also there are certaine vauts or
+dungeons, which goe downe verie deepe vnder those Pyramides with faire
+staires, but no man dare venter to goe downe into them, by reason that they
+can cary no light with them, for the dampe of the earth doth put out the
+light: the red sea is but three dayes iourney from this place, and
+Ierusalem about seuen dayes iourney from thence: but to returne to Cayro.
+There is a Castle wherein is the house that Pharaoes wiues were kept in,
+and in the Pallace or Court thereof stande 55 marble pillars, in such
+order, as our Exchange standeth in London: the said pillars are in beigth
+60 foote: and in compasse 14 foote: also in the said Citie is the castle
+were Joseph was in prison, where to this day they put in rich men, when the
+king would haue any summe of money of them: there are seuen gates to the
+sayd prison, and it goeth neere fiftie yardes downe right: also, the water
+that serueth this castle, commeth out of the foresaide riuer of Nilus, vpon
+a wall made with arches, fiue miles long, and it is twelue foote thicke.
+Also there are in old Cayro two Monasteries, the one called S. Georges, the
+other S. Maries: and in the Courts where the Churches be, was the house of
+king Pharao. In this Citie is great store of marchandize, especially
+pepper, and nutmegs, which come thither by land, out of the East India: and
+it is very plentifull of all maner of victuals, especially of bread,
+rootes, and hearbes: to the Eastwards of Cayro, there is a Well, fiue miles
+off called Matria, and as they say, when the Virgin Marie fled from
+Bethleem, and came into Ægypt, and being there, had neither water, nor any
+other thing to sustaine them, by the prouidence of God, an Angell came from
+heauen, and strake the ground with his wings, where presently issued out a
+fountaine of water: and the wall did open where the Israelites did hide
+themselues, which fountains or well is walled foure square till this day.
+[Sidenote: Carthage.] Also we were at an old Citie, all ruinated and
+destroyed, called in olde time, the great Citie of Carthage where Hannibal
+and Queene Dido dwelt: this Citie was but narrow, but was very long: for
+there was, and is yet to bee seene, one streete three mile long, to which
+Citie fresh water was brought vpon arches (as afore) aboue 25 miles, of
+which arches some are standing to this day. [Sidenote: Argier.] Also we
+were at diuers other places on the coast, as we came from Cayro, but of
+other antiquities we saw but few. The towne of Argier which was our first
+and last part, within the streights standeth vpon the side of an hill,
+close vpon the sea shore: it is very strong both by sea and land, and it is
+very well victualed with all manner of fruites bread and fish good store,
+and very cheape. It is inhabited with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes, and so are
+Alexandria and Cayro. In this towne are a great number of Christian
+captiues, whereof there are of Englishmen onely fifteene, from which port
+we set sayle towardes England, the seuenth of Ianuarie, Anno 1587, and the
+30 day of the sayd moneth, we arriued at Dartmouth on the coast of England.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage of M. Laurence Aldersey, to the Cities of Alexandria, and
+  Cayro in Aegypt. Anno 1586.
+
+I Embarked my selfe at Bristoll, in the Hercules, a good ship of London,
+and set saile the 21 day of Februarie, about ten of the clocke in the
+morning, hauing a merry winde: but the 23 day, there arose a very great
+storme, and in the mids of it we descried a small boate of the burden of
+ten tunnes, with foure men in her, in very great danger, who called a maine
+for our helpe. Whereupon our Master made towards them, and tooke them into
+our ship, and let the boate, which was laden with timber, and appertained
+to Chepstow, to runne a drift. The same night about midnight arose another
+great storme, but the winde was large with vs, vntill the 27 of the same
+moneth, which grew then somewhat contrary: yet notwithstanding we held on
+our course, and the tenth day of March, we described a saile about Cape
+Sprat, which is a little on this side the streight of Gibraltare, but we
+spake not with her. The next day we described twelue saile more, with whom
+we thought to haue spoken, to haue learned what they were, but they made
+very fast away, and we gaue them ouer.
+
+Thursday the 16 of March, we had sight of the streights, and of the coast
+of Barbary. The 18 day we passed them, and sailed towards Patras. Vpon the
+23 of March, we met with the Centurion of London which came from Genoa, by
+whom we sent letters to England, and the foure men also which we tooke in,
+vpon the coast of England, before-mentioned.
+
+The 29th of March we came to Goleta a small Iland, and had sight of two
+shippes, which we iudged to be of England.
+
+Tuesday the fourth of April, we were before Malta, and being there
+becalmed, our Maister caused the two ship boates to be had out, and they
+towed the ship, till we were out of sight of the Castle of Malta. The 9 day
+of April we came to Zante, and being before the towne, William Aldridge,
+seruant to Master Thomas Cordall of London, came aboord us, with whom our
+Master and twelue more of our company, thought to haue gone on shoare: but
+they could not be permitted: so we all came aboard againe, and went to
+Patras, where we arriued vpon good Friday, and lay there with good
+enterteinement at the English house, where was the Consull Master Grimes,
+Ralph Ashley, and Iohn Doddington, who very kindly went with vs, and shewed
+vs the pleasures of the towne.
+
+They brought vs to the house of the Cady, who was made then to vnderstand
+of the 20 Turks that wee had aboard, which were to goe to Constantinople,
+being redeemed out of captiuitie, by sir Francis Drake in the West Indies,
+and brought with him into England, and by order of the Queenes Maiestie
+sent now into their Countrey. Whereupon the Cady commanded them to be
+brought before him, that he might see them: and when, he had talked with
+them, and vnderstood howe strangely they were deliuered, he marueiled much,
+and admired the Queenes Maistie of England, who being but a woman, is
+notwithstanding of such power and renowne amongst all the princes of
+Christendome, with many other honourable wordes of commending her Maiestie.
+So he tooke the names of those 20 Turkes, and recorded them in their great
+bookes, to remaine in perpetuall memory. After this, our foresaid
+countreyman brought mee to the Chappel of S. Andrew where his tombe or
+sepulchre is, and the boord vpon which he was beheaded, which boord is now
+so rotten, that if any man offer to cut it, it falleth to powder, yet I
+brought some of it away with me.
+
+Vpon Tuesday in Easter weeke, wee set out towards Zante againe, and the 24.
+of April with much adoe, wee were all permitted to come on shoare, and I
+was caried to the English house in Zante, where I was very well
+entertained. The commodities of Zante are Currants and oyle: the situation
+of the Towne is vnder a very great hill, vpon which standeth a very strong
+Castle, which commaundeth the Towne. At Zante wee tooke in a Captaine and
+16. souldiers, with other passengers. Wee departed from Zante vpon Tuesday
+the 15. of April, and the next day we ankered at a small Iland, called
+Striualia, which is desolate of people, sauing a fewe religious men, who
+entertained vs well, without taking any money: but of courtesie we bestowed
+somewhat vpon them for their maintenance, and then they gaue vs a couple of
+leane sheepe, which we caried aboord. The last day of Aprill, wee arriued
+at Candie, at a Castle, called Sowday, where wee set the Captaine,
+Souldiers, and Mariners ashoare, which wee tooke in at Zante, with all
+their carriage.
+
+[Sidenote: The Islands of Milo, in olde time called Sporades.] The second
+day of May wee set saile againe, and the fourth day came to the Islands of
+Milo, where we ankered, and found the people there very courteous, and
+tooke in such necessaries as we wanted. The Islands are in my iudgement a
+hundred in number, and all within the compasse of a hundred miles.
+
+The 11. day, the Chaus, which is the greatest man there in authoritie, for
+certaine offences done in a little Chappell by the water side, which they
+saide one of our shippe had done, and imputed it to mee, because I was
+seene goe into it three dayes before, came to vs, and made much a doe, so
+that we were faine to come out of our shippe armed: but by three pieces of
+golde the brabling was ended, and we came to our shippe. This day wee also
+set saile, and the next day passed by the Castle of Serpeto, which is an
+old ruinated thing, and standeth vnder a hils side.
+
+The 13. day we passed by the Island of Paris, and the Island of the bankes
+of Helicon, and the Island called Ditter, where are many boares, and the
+women bee witches. The same day also wee passed by the Castle of Timo,
+standing vpon a very high mountaine, and neere vnto it is the Island of
+Diana.
+
+The 15. of May, wee came to Sio, where I stayed thirtie and three dayes. In
+it is a very proper Towne, after the building of that Countrey, and the
+people are civil: and while we were here there came in sixe Gallies, which
+had bene at Alexandria, and one of them which was the Admiral, had a Prince
+of the Moores prisoner, whom they tooke about Alexandria, and they meant to
+present him to the Turke. The towne standeth in a valley, and a long the
+water side pleasantly. There are about 26. winde-mils about it, and the
+commodities of it are cotton wooll, cotton yarne, mastike, and some other
+drugs.
+
+As we remained at Sio, there grew a great controuersie betweene the
+mariners of the Hercules, and the Greekes of the towne of Sio, about the
+bringing home of the Turkes, which the Greekes took in ill part, and the
+boyes cried out, Viue el Re Philippe: whereupon our men beate the boyes,
+and threwe stones, and so a broile beganne, and some of our men were hurt:
+but the Greekes were fetcht out of their houses, and manacled together with
+yrons, and threatned to the Gallies: about fortie of them were sent to the
+prison, and what became of them when we were gone, we know not, for we went
+thence within two dayes after, which was the 19. of Iune.
+
+The 20. day wee passed by the Island of Singonina, an Island risen by the
+casting of stones in that place: the substance of the ground there is
+brimstone, and burneth sometimes so much that it bloweth vp the rockes.
+
+The 24. of Iune wee came to Cyprus, and had sight in the way of the
+aforesaide sixe Gallies, that came from Alexandria, one whereof came vnto
+vs, and required a present for himselfe, and for two of the other Gallies,
+which we for quietnesse sake gaue them.
+
+The 27. of Iune, wee came to Tripolie, where I stayed till the fift of
+Iuly, and then tooke passage in a smal barke called a Caramusalin, which
+was a passage boat, and was bound for Bichieri, thirteene miles on this
+side Alexandria, which boate was fraighted with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes.
+
+The 20. day of Iuly, this barke which I passed in ranne vpon a rocke, and
+was in very great danger, so that we all began some to be ready to swimme,
+some to leape into the shippe boate, but it pleased God to set vs quickly
+off the rocke, and without much harme.
+
+[Sidenote: The English house in Alexandria.] The 28. of Iuly I came to
+Bichieri, where I was well entertained of a Iewe which was the Customer
+there, giuing me Muskadine, and drinking water himselfe: hauing broken my
+fast with him, he prouided mee a Camell for my carriage, and a Mule for mee
+to ride vpon, and a Moore to runne by me to the City of Alexandria, who had
+charge to see mee safe in the English house, whether I came, but found no
+Englishmen there: but then my guide brought me aboord a ship of Alderman
+Martins, called the Tyger of London, where I was well receiued of the
+Master of the said ship, whose name was Thomas Rickman, and of all the
+company.
+
+The said Master hauing made me good cheere, and made me also to drinke of
+the water of Nilus, hauing the keyes of the English house, went thither
+with me himselfe, and appointed mee a faire chamber, and left a man with me
+to prouide me all things that I needed, and euery day came himselfe to me,
+and caried me into the City, and shewed me the monuments thereof, which be
+these.
+
+[Sidenote: The monuments of Alexandria.] Hee brought mee first to Pompey
+his pillar, which is a mighty thing of gray marble, and all of one stone,
+in height by estimation about 52. yards, and the compasse about sixe
+fadome.
+
+The City hath three gates, one called the gate of Barbaria, the other of
+Merina, and the thirde of Rossetto.
+
+He brought me to a stone in the streete of the Citie, whereupon S. Marke
+was beheaded: to the place where S. Katerine died, hauing there hid
+herselfe, because she would not marry: also to the Bath of S. Katerine.
+
+I sawe there also Pharaos needle, which is a thing in height almost equall
+with Pompeys pillar, and is in compasse fiue fadome, and a halfe, and all
+of one stone.
+
+I was brought also to a most braue and daintie Bath, where we washed our
+selues: the Bath being of marble, and of very curious workemanship.
+
+The Citie standeth vpon great arches, or vawtes, like vnto Churches, with
+mightie pillars of marble, to holde vp the foundation: which arches are
+built to receiue the water of the riuer of Nilus, which is for the vse of
+the Citie. It hath three Castles, and an hundred Churches: but the part
+that is destroyed of it, is sixe time more then that part which standeth.
+
+The last day of Iuly, I departed from Alexandria towards Cayro in a passage
+boate, wherein first I went to Rossetto, standing by the riuer side, hauing
+13. or 14. great churches in it, their building there is of stone and
+bricke, but as for lodging, there is little, except we bring it with vs.
+
+From Rosetto wee passed along the riuer of Nilus, which is so famous in the
+world, twise as broad as the Thames at London: on both sides grow date
+trees in great abundance. The people be rude, insomuch that a man cannot
+traueile without a Ianizary to conduct him.
+
+[Sidenote: The Turkes Lent.] The time that I stayed in Ægypt, was the
+Turkes and Moores Lent, in all which time they burne lamps in their
+churches, as many as may hang in them: their Lent endureth 40. dayes, and
+they haue three Lents in the yere: during which time they neither eate nor
+drinke in the day time, but all the night they do nothing else.
+
+Betwixt Rossetto and Cayro there are along the water side three hundred
+cities and townes, and the length of the way is not aboue three hundred
+miles.
+
+To this famous Citie of Cayro I came the fift day of August, where I found
+M. William Alday, and William Cæsar, who intertained me in very good sort.
+M. Cæsar brought mee to see the Pyramides which are three in number, one
+whereof king Pharao made for his owne tombe, the tombe it selfe is almost
+in the top of it: the monuments bee high and in forme 4. square, and euery
+of the squares is as long as a man may shoote a rouing arrowe, and as high
+as a Church, I sawe also the ruines of the Citie of Memphis hard by those
+Pyramides.
+
+The house of Ioseph is yet standing in Cayro, which is a sumptuous thing,
+hauing a place to walke in of 56. mighty pillars, all gilt with gold, but I
+saw it not, being then lame.
+
+The 11. day of August the lande was cut at Cayro, to let in the water of
+the riuer of Nilus, which was done with great ioy and triumph.
+
+The 12. of August I set from Cayro towards Alexandria againe, and came
+thither the 14. of August The 26. day there was kept a great feast of the
+Turkes and Moores, which lasted two dayes, and for a day they neuer ceased
+shooting off of great Ordinance.
+
+[Sidenote: The English Consul at Argier.] From Alexandria I sailed to
+Argier, where I lay with M. Typton Consull of the English nation, who vsed
+me most kindly, and at his owne charge. Hee brought mee to the kings Court,
+and into the presence of the King, to see him, and the maners of the Court:
+the King doeth onely beare the name of a king, but the greatest gouernment
+is in the hands of the souldiers.
+
+The king of Potanca is prisoner in Argier, who comming to Constantinople,
+to acknowledge a duety to the great Turke, was betrayed by his owne nephew,
+who wrote to the Turke, that he went onely as a spy, by that meanes to get
+his kingdome. I heard at Argier of seuen Gallies that were at that time
+cast away at a towne called Formentera: three of them were of Argier, the
+other foure were the Christians.
+
+We found here 13. Englishmen, which were by force of weather put into the
+bay of Tunis, where they were very ill vsed by the Moores, who forced them
+to leaue their barke: whereupon they went to the Councell of Argier, to
+require a redresse and remedy for the iniurie. They were all belonging to
+the shippe called the Golden Noble of London, whereof Master Birde is
+owner. The Master was Stephen Haselwood, and the Captaine Edmond Bence.
+
+The thirde day of December, the pinnesse called the Mooneshine of London,
+came to Argier with a prize, which they tooke vpon the coast of Spaine,
+laden with sugar, hides, and ginger: the pinnesse also belonging to the
+Golden Noble: and at Argier they made sale both of shippe and goods, where
+wee left them at our comming away, which was the seuenth day of Ianuarie,
+and the first day of February, I landed at Dartmouth, and the seuenth day
+came to London, with humble thankes to Almightie God, for my safe arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the English Ambassadour to M. Haruie Millers, appointing him
+  Consull for the English nation in Alexandria, Cairo, and other places of
+  Egypt.
+
+Hauing to appoint our Consull in Cayro, Alexandria, Egypt, and other parts
+adiacent, for the safe protection of body and goods of her Maiesties
+subiects; being well perswaded of your sufficient abilitie; in her
+Maiesties name I doe elect and make choise of you, good friend Haruie
+Millers, to execute the same worshipfull office, as shall be required for
+her Maiesties better seruice, the commodity of her subiects, and my
+contentation: hauing and enioying for merit of your trauell in the premises
+the like remuneration incident to the rest of ours in such office in other
+parts of this Empire. Requiring you (all other affaires set aside) to
+repaire thither with expedition, and attend vpon this your charge, which
+the Almighty grant you well to accomplish. For the due execution whereof,
+wee heerewith send you the Grand Signiors Patent of priuilege with ours,
+and what els is needfull therefore, in so ample maner, as any other Consull
+whosoeuer doeth or may enioy the same. In ayd whereof, according to my
+bounden duety to her Maiesty our most gracious Mistresse, I will be ready
+alwayes to employ my selfe to the generall benefit of her Maiesties
+subiects, for your maintenance in all iust causes incident to the same. And
+thus eftsoones requiring and commanding you as aboue sayd, to performe my
+request, I bid you most heartily well to fare, and desire God to blesse
+you. From my mansion Rapamat night Pera this 25 of April 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter to the right honourable William Hareborne her Majesties
+  Ambassadour with the Grand Signior from Alger.
+
+Right honorable, we haue receiued your honors letters dated in
+Constantinople the 5. of Nouember, and accordingly deliuered that inclosed
+to the king of this place, requiring of him, according as you did command
+vs in her Maiesties name, that he would vouchsafe to giue order to all his
+Captaines and Raies that none of them should meddle with our English
+shippes comming or going to or from these parts, for that they haue order
+not to passe by the Christian coast, but vpon the coast of Barbary, and
+shewing him of the charter giuen by the Grand Signior, requiring him in
+like case that for the better fulfilling of the amity, friendship and holy
+league betweene the Grand Signior and her Maiesty, he would giue us fiue or
+six safe-conducts for our ships, that meeting with any of his gallies or
+galliots, they might not meddle with them neither shoot at them: who made
+me answere he would neither giue me any safe conduct nor commission to his
+men of war not to meddle with them, for that he trusted to take some of
+them this yere, and made good account thereof. In like maner I spake to the
+chiefe of the Ianisers and the Leuents, who made me answere, the best hope
+they had this yere was to take some of them, and although they haue the
+Grand Signiors commandement we care not therefore: for we will by policy,
+or one meanes or other prouoke them to shoot some ordinance, which if they
+do but one piece, the peace is broken, and they be good prizes. And some of
+them say further, we care not for his safe-conduct, for if they shew it vs,
+we will conuey it away, we are sure the dogs cannot be beleeued against vs.
+The premisses considered, your honour is with all speed to procure the
+Grand Signior his fauorable letters directed to Hazan, the Cady, Captaines,
+Ianisers, and Leuents, and another like to Romadan Bassa, king of Tripolis,
+commanding them in no maner whatsoeuer to deale with our English ships
+bound into those parts or returning thence with their commodities, although
+they should shoot one at another: for when our ships shall meet them, for
+that, as your honor is aduertised, the gallies of Carthagena, Florence,
+Sicilia and Malta haue made a league to take all our ships comming in or
+going out of the Grand Signiors dominions, therefore if they meet with any
+of these gallies of Alger or Tripolis, thinking they be of them, and not
+knowing them a far off, they may shoot at them, which if therefore they
+should make them prizes, were against Gods lawes, the Grand Signior his
+league, all reason and conscience, considering that all the world doth know
+that Marchants ships laden with marchandise do not seeke to fight with men
+of warre, but contrariwise to defend themselues from them, when they would
+do them harme. Wherefore if your honour do not get out two letters of the
+Grand Signior as aforesayd, and send them hither with all speed by some one
+of your gentlemen accompanied with a chaus of the Court, or some other of
+the Grand Signiors servants, it is impossible that our English ships can
+escape freely from these or the Christians: for either they must of force
+go on the Christian coast, and so fall into their hands, or els on this
+coast, and fall into the kings of this towne, or Tripolis, their hands
+which if they should, will neuer be recouered. And if your honor cannot
+obtaine this thing, I beseech your honour in the behalfe of all the English
+marchants (who sent me hither to follow such order as your honour should
+giue me) to certifie her Maiesty, to the end that they may be commanded to
+leaue off traffique, and not to lose their goods, and her poore subiects
+the Mariners. And thus humbly taking my leaue, I desist from troubling your
+honor. From Algier the tenth of February 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of M. Harborne to Mustapha, challenging him for his dishonest
+  dealing in translating of three of the Grand Signior his commandements.
+
+Domine Mustapha, nescimus quid sibi velit, cum nobis mandata ad finem
+vtilem concessa perperàm reddas, quæ male scripta, plus damni, quàm
+vtilitatis adferant: quemadmodum constat ex tribus receptis mandatis, in
+quibus summum aut principale deest aut aufertur. In posterum noli ita
+nobiscum agere. Ita enim ludibrio erimus omnibus in nostrum et tuum
+dedecus. Cum nos multarum actionum spem Turcicè scriptarum in tua prudentia
+reponimus, ita prouidere debes, vt non eueniant huiusmodi mala. Quocirca
+deinceps cum mandatum aut scriptum aliquod accipias, verbum ad verbum
+conuertatur in Latinum sermonem, ne damnum insequatur. Nosti multos habere
+nos inimicos conatibus nostris inuidentes, quorum malitiæ vestræ est
+prudentiæ aduersari. Hi nostri, Secretarius et minimus interpres ex nostra
+parte dicent in tribus illis receptis mandatis errata. Vt deinceps similes
+errores non eueniant precamur. Ista emendes, et cætera Serenissimæ regiæ
+Maiestatis negocia, vti decet vestræ conditionis hominem, meliùs cures. Nam
+vnicuique suo officio strenuè est laborandum vt debito tramite omnia
+succedant: quod spero te facturum. Bene vale.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Pasport in Italian granted to Thomas Shingleton Englishman, by the king
+  of Algier. 1583.
+
+Noi Assan Basha Vicere et lochotenente e capitan della iurisditione de
+Algier doniamo e concediamo libero saluo condutto a Thomas Shingleton
+mercadante, che possi con suo vassello e marinare de che natione se siano,
+e mercadantia di qual si voglia natione, andare et venire, e negotiari, e
+contrattare liberamente in questa citta de Algier et altri locha de la
+nostra iurisditione cosi di ponente comi di Leuante: et cosi anchora
+commandiamo al capitan di maare di Algier et d'altri lochi de nostra
+iurisditione, Rais de Vasselli et Capitani de Leuante, et altri capitani di
+vasselli tanto grossi como picholi, si comnanda a qual si voglia, che
+truando il sopradetto Thomas Shingleton Inglese nelli mari di Genua,
+Francia Napoli, Calabria, e Sardigna con suo vassello e mercantia, et
+homini de che nationi si siano, non gli debba molestare, ne piggliare, ne
+toccare cosa de nessuna manero tanto di denare, como di qual si voglia
+altra robba, sotto la pena e disgratia di perdir la vita et la robba: Et
+per quanto hauete a caro la gratia del Gran Signor nostro patrone Soltan
+Murates Ottomano, lo lasciarete andare per suo camino senza dargli nessuno
+impedimento. Dato in Algieri in nostro regio Palazzo, sigillato del nostro
+reggio sigillo, e fermato della gran ferma, et scritto del nostro reggio
+Secretario, il di 23 de Ienaro, 1583.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+We Assan Bassha Viceroy and lieutenant, and captaine of the iurisdiction of
+Algier, giue and grant free safeconduct to Thomas Singleton marchant, that
+with his ship and mariners, of what nation soeuer they be, and with his
+marchandize of what countrey soeuer, he may go and come, and trade and
+traffique freely in this city of Algier, and other places of our
+iurisdiction, as well of the West as of the East. And in like sort we
+further command the captaine of the sea of Algier, and other places of our
+iurisdiction, the Reiz of vessels and captaines of the Leuant, and other
+captaines of vessels aswell great as small, whosoeuer they be, we do
+command them, that finding the forsayd Thomas Shingleton Englishman in the
+seas of Genua, France, Naples, Calabria, and Sardinia, with his ship and
+merchandize, and men of what nation soeuer they be, that they molest them
+not, neither take nor touch any kind of thing of theirs, neither money nor
+any other kind of goods, vnder paine and peril of loosing of their liues
+and goods: and as you make account of the fauour of the Grand Signor our
+lord Sultan Murates Hottoman, so see you let him passe on his way without
+any maner of impediment. Dated at Alger in our kingly palace, signed with
+our princely Signet, and sealed with our great seale, and writen by our
+Secretarie of estate, the 23. of Ianuarie, 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter written in Spanish by Sir Edward Osborne, to the king of Alger,
+  the 20. of Iuly, 1584 in the behalfe of certeine English captiues there
+  detained.
+
+Muy alto y poderoso Rey,
+
+Sea seruida vostra alteza. Como la muy alta y potentissima magestad del
+Gran Sennor tiene hecho articulos de priuilegios con la Serenissima
+Magestad de nuestra Reyna d'Inglatierra, para los vassalos della poder
+libremente yr y boluer, y tratar por mar y tierra en los dominios de su
+potentissima Magestad, Como a la clara paresce por los dichos articulos, de
+che embiamos el tractado al Senor Iuan Tipton nuestro commissario, para le
+muestrar a vostra Alteza. Contra el tenor de los quales articulos por dos
+galeras de su ciudad de Alger ha sido hechado al fondo en la mar vn des
+nuestros nauios que venia de Patras, que es en la Morea, cargado de
+corintes y otras mercaderias, que alla se compraron, y las mas de la gente
+del la matados y ahogados en la mar, y el resto est an detenidos por
+esclauos: cosa muy contraria a los dichos articulas y priuilegios. Que es
+occasion, que por esto supplicamos a vostra Alteza muy humilmente, que,
+pues que la potentissimo magestad del grand Sennor es seruida nos
+fauorescer por los dichos articulos, tambien sea seruida vostra Alteza
+assistimos en ellos, otorgandonos por vostra autoridad su auida y fauor,
+segun que esperamos, para que puedan estar libres, y boluer para aca
+aquellos pobres hombres ansi hechos esclauos, como dicho es. Y ansi mismo,
+que mande vostra Alteza dar orden a los capitanes, maestres y gente de las
+galeras, que nos dexen de aqui adelante hazer nuestro trafico con seys naos
+cada anno para Turquia a los dominios del Gran Sennor a paz y a saluo, por
+no cotrariar a los dichos nuestros priuilegios, Lleuando cada vna de
+nuestras dichas naos pot se conoscer vn saluo condutto de su alta et
+potentissima magestad. Y con esta vostra tan senallada merced y fauor que
+en esso reciberemos, quedaremos nosotros con grandissima obligation a
+vostra Alteza de seruir la por ello, segun que el dicho Sennor Iuan Tipton,
+a quien nos reportamos de todo lo demas, mejor informira vostra Alteza:
+Cuya serenissima persona y estado supplicamos y pidimos a Dios omnipotente
+prosperu y accrescente con toda felicitad y honra. Del la ciuidad de
+Londres a los veynte dias de Iulio del mil y quinientos y ocbenta y quatro
+annos.
+
+Al seruitio de vuestra Alteza per y en hombre de todos los tratantes en
+Tutquia, lo el Mayor de Londres,
+
+Edward Osborne.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right high and mightie king,
+
+May it please your highnesse to vnderstand, that the most high and most
+mightie maiestie of the Grand Signor hath confirmed certaine articles of
+priuileges with the most excellent maiestie of our Queene of England, that
+her subjects may freely go and come, and traffique by sea and land in the
+dominions of his most mighty maiesty, as appeareth more at large by the
+said articles, whereof we haue sent the copy vnto M. Iohn Tipton our
+Commissarie to shew the same vnto your highnes. [Sidenote: An English ship
+sunke by two gallies of Alger.] Against the tenor of which articles, one of
+our ships which came from Patras which is in Morea, laden with corants and
+other merchandizes which were bought in those parts, was sunke by 2.
+gallies of your citie of Alger, and the greatest number of the men thereof
+were slain and drowned in the sea, the residue being detained as slaues: An
+acte very contrary to the meaning of the aforesaid articles and priuileges:
+which is the occasion that by these presents we beseech your highnesse very
+humbly that since it hath pleased the most mightie maiestie of the Grand
+Signor to fauour vs with the sayd priuileges, it would please your
+Highnesse in like maner to assist vs in the same, graunting vs by your
+authoritie, your ayde and fauour, according as our hope is that these poore
+men so detained in captiuitie, as is aforesaid, may be set at libertie, and
+returne into their countrey. And likewise that your highnesse would send to
+giue order to the captaines, masters and people of your gallies, that from
+hencefoorth they would suffer vs to vse our traffique with sixe ships
+yerely into Turkie vnto the dominions of the Grand Signor in peace and
+safetie, that they do not withstand those our said priuileges, euery one of
+our foresaid ships carying with them a passeport of his most high and most
+mightie maiestie to be knowen by. And for that your so singular fauour and
+curtesie which in so doing we shall receiue, we on our part with all
+bounden duetie vnto your highnesse, will seeke to honour you in that
+behalfe, according as the sayd Master Iohn Tipton (to whom wee referre our
+selues touching all other circumstances) shall more at large informe your
+highnesse, whose most excellent person and estate, we pray and beseech
+Almighty God to prosper and increase with all felicitie and honour. From
+the Citie of London, the 20. of Iuly, 1584.
+
+At the seruice of your highnesse, for and in the name of our whole company
+trading into Turkie, I Maior of London. Edward Osburne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes concerning the trade of Alger.
+
+The money that is coined in Alger is a piece of gold called Asiano, and
+Doublaes, and two Doublaes make an Asiano, but the Doubla is most vsed, for
+all things be sold by Doublaes, which Doubla is fiftie of their Aspers
+there.
+
+The Asper there is not so good by halfe and more, as that in
+Constantinople; for the Chekin of gold of the Turkes made at Constantinople
+is at Alger worth an 150 Aspers, and at Constantinople, it is but 66.
+Aspers.
+
+The pistolet and roials of plate are most currant there.
+
+The said pistolet goeth for 130. Aspers there: and the piece of 4 roials
+goeth for 40 Aspers, but oftentimes is sold for more, as men need them to
+carie vp into Turkie.
+
+Their Asianos and Doublaes are pieces of course gold, worth here but 40. s.
+the ounce, so the same is currant in no place of Turkie out of the kingdom
+of Alger, neither the Aspers, for that they be lesse then others be, for
+they coine them in Alger.
+
+The custome to the king is inward 10. per centum, to the Turke, to be paid
+of the commoditie it selfe, or as it shall be rated.
+
+There is another custome to the Ermine, of one and an halfe per centum,
+which is to the Iustice of the Christians: the goods for this custome are
+rated as they are for the kings custome.
+
+Hauing paid custome inwards, you pay none outwards for any commoditie that
+you doe lade, more then a reward to the gate keepers.
+
+The waight there is called a Cantare for fine wares, as mettals refined,
+and spices &c. which is here 120. li. subtil.
+
+Mettall not refined, as lead, iron, and such grosse wares, are sold by a
+great Cartare, which is halfe as big againe: so it is 180. li. subtil of
+ours here.
+
+The measure of corne is by a measure called a Curtia, which is about 4.
+bushels of our measure, and corne is plentiful there and good cheape,
+except when there hapneth a very dry yeere.
+
+The surest lodging for a Christian there is in a Iewes house: for if he
+haue any hurt, the Iew and his goods shall make it good, so the Iew taketh
+great care of the Christian and his goods that lieth in his house, for
+feare of punishment.
+
+An Englishman called Thomas Williams, which is M. Iohn Tiptons man, lieth
+about trade of merchandize in the streete called The Soca of the Iewes.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria.
+
+Alexandria in Egypt is a free port, and when a man commeth within the
+castles, presently the Ermyn sends aboord to haue one come and speake with
+him to know what goods are aboord: and then hee will set guards aboord the
+ship to see all the goods discharged. And then from the Ermin you goe to
+the Bye, [Marginal note: This is another officer.] onely for that he will
+inquire newes of you, and so from thence to the Consuls house where you
+lie. The Venetians haue a Consul themselues. But all other nations goe to
+the French nations Consul, who will giue you a chamber for your selues
+apart, if you will so haue it.
+
+The customs inward of all commodities are ten in the hundred, and the
+custome is paid in wares also that you buy: for the same wares in barter
+you pay also ten in the hundred, at the lading of the wares. [Marginal
+note: Other smal customs you pay besides, which may be at two in the
+hundred: and for Consulage you pay two in the hundred.] But if you sell for
+mony, you pay no more custome but the ten aforesaid, and one and a halfe in
+the hundred, which is for the custome of the goods you lade for the sayd
+mony, for more custome you pay not. But for all the money you bring thither
+you pay nothing for the custome of the same. And if you sell your wares for
+mony, and with the same money buy wares, you pay but two in the hundred for
+the custome thereof. And if you steale any custome, if it be taken, you pay
+double custome for that you steale.
+
+The weight of Alexandria is called Pois Forforeine, which is a kintal in
+that place, which maketh at Marseils 109. li. of Marseils waight, at 15
+ounces the pound, which is 103. li. of 16. ounces to the li. There is
+another waight called Pois Gerrin, which is 150. li. of Marseils waight, by
+which are sold all things to eate: but spice is sold by the former waight.
+
+From Alexandria to Cairo is three daies journey, but you must take a
+Ianissarie with you: and to go vp thither by water it is 8. dayes journey.
+Roials of Spaine are currant mony there, and are the best money you can
+cary. And 4. roials are worth 13. Medins, and 2. Medins, are 3. Aspers.
+Pistolets and crownes of France and Dollers will goe, but of all Roials are
+best.
+
+Rice is not permitted to goe out of the land, but is kept for a victuall.
+But with a present to the Bye and Ermine some may passe.
+
+All sortes of spices be garbled after the bargaine is made, and they be
+Moores which you deale withall, which be good people and not ill disposed.
+And after you be searched and haue leaue to passe, you must presently
+depart out of the port, and if you doe not, they will search you againe.
+And you must depart in the day, for in the night the castles will not
+suffer you to depart. The duetie to the Consul is 2 in the hundred, for his
+aide, and meate, and drinke and all. And the port of Alexandria is good
+when one is within it with good ankers and cables. Silver is better currant
+then gold in Alexandria, but both are good.
+
+Commonly the Carauans come thither in October from Mecca to Cairo, and from
+thence to Alexandria, where the merchants be that buy the spices, and
+therefore the spices are brought most to Alexandria, where each Christian
+nation remaineth at the Consuls houses. Yet oftentimes the Christians go vp
+to Cairo to buy drugs and other commodities there, as they see cause. And
+the commodities there vendible are all sorts of kersies, but the most part
+blewes, and of clothes all colours except mingled colours and blacks.
+Pepper is usually sold for 24. ducats the quintal, Ginger for 14. ducats.
+You most take canuas to make bags to put your commoditie in from
+Alexandria, for there is none. There is also fine flaxe, and good store of
+Buffe hides.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the English ambassador to M. Edward Barton.
+
+Master Barton I send you 3. commandements in Turkish, with a copy thereof
+in English, to the ende our ships might not come in danger of breach of
+league, if they should shoote at the gallies of those of Algier, Tunis, and
+Tripolis in the West: which after you haue shewed the Bassas, receiue
+againe into your hands, and see them registred, and then deliuer one of
+them to our friend M. Tipton, and the like you are to do with the priuilege
+which you cary with you, and see them iointly registered in the Cadies
+booke, deliuering the copy of the said priuilege sealed by the Cadi, also
+to the sayd our friend M. Tipton, taking a note of his hand for the receipt
+thereof, and for deliuerie at all times to vs or our assignes. And require
+them in her maiesties and the grand Signors name, that they will haue our
+ships passing too and fro vnder licence and safeconduct for recommended in
+friendly maner. Touching your proceedings in Tripolis with Romadan, as I
+haue not receiued any aduise thereof, since your departure, so must I leaue
+you to God and my former direction. The ship patronised of Hassan Rayes,
+which you wrote to be ours, prooued to be a Catalonian. As for ours, by
+report of that Hassan and other Iewes in his ship, it was affirmed to be
+sold to the Malteses, which with the rest you are to receiue there. And
+hauing ended these affaires and registred our priuilege, and these three
+commandements, in Tripolis, Tunis, and Alger, I pray you make speedy
+returne, and for that which may be recouered, make ouer the same either to
+Richard Rowed for Patrasso in Morea, or otherwise hither to Iohn Bate in
+the surest maner you may, if the registring of that your priuilege and
+these commandements will not suffer you in person to returne with the same.
+From my mansion Rapamat in Pera this 24. of Iune 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The commaundement obtained of the Grand Signior by her Maiesties ambassador
+  M. Wil. Hareborne, for the quiet passing of her subiects to and from his
+  dominions, sent in An. 1584 to the Viceroyes of Algier, Tunis, and
+  Tripolis in Barbary.
+
+To our Beglerbeg of Algier.
+
+We certifie thee by this our commandement, that the right honorable Will.
+Hareborne ambassador to the Queenes maiestie of England hath signified vnto
+vs, that the ships of that countrey in their comming and returning to and
+from our Empire, on the one part of the Seas haue the Spaniards,
+Florentines, Sicilians, and Malteses, on the other part our countreis
+committed to your charge: which abouesaid Christians will not quietly
+suffer their egresse and regresse, into, and out of our dominions, but doe
+take and make the men captiues, and forfeit the shippes and goods, as the
+last yeere the Maltese did one, which they tooke at Gerbi, and to that end
+do continually lie in wait for them to their destruction, whereupon they
+are constrained to stand to their defence at any such time as they might
+meet with them. Wherefore considering by this means they must stand vpon
+their guard, when they shall see any gallie afarre off, whereby if meeting
+with any of your gallies and not knowing them, in their defence they do
+shoot at them, and yet after when they doe certainly know them, do not
+shoote any more, but require to passe peaceably on their voiage, which you
+would deny, saying, the peace is broken because you haue shot at vs, and so
+make prize of them contrary to our priuileges, and against reason: for the
+preuenting of which inconuenience the said ambassadour hath required this
+our commaundement. We therefore command thee, that vpon sight hereof thou
+doe not permit any such matter in any sort whatsoeuer, but suffer the sayd
+Englishmen to passe in peace according to the tenour of our commandement
+giuen, without any disturbance or let by any meanes vpon the way, although
+that meeting with thy gallies, and not knowing them afarre off, they taking
+them for enemies should shoote at them, yet shall you not suffer them to
+hurt them therefore, but quietly to passe. Wherefore looke thou that they
+may haue right, according to our priuilege giuen them, and finding any that
+absenteth himself, and wil not obey this our commandement, presently
+certify vs to our porch, that we may giue order for his punishment, and
+with reverence giue faithfull credite to this our commandement, which
+hauing read, thou shalt againe returne it vnto them that present it. From
+our palace in Constantinople, the 1. of Iune 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the honorable M. Wil. Hareborne her maiesties ambass. with the
+  grand Signior to M. Tipton, appointing him Consul of the English in
+  Algier, Tunis, and Tripolis of Barbarie.
+
+Master Tipton, I haue receiued among others, yours of the 10. of Nouember
+1584. by Soliman Sorda, certifying the receipt of mine of the 24. of Iune
+1584. with the 3. commandements, which not being registred, let it now be
+done. Where you write the force of the priuilege to be broken by our ships
+in shooting, and therefore be lawfully taken, you are deceiued, for of
+those taken in then, hath the grand Signior now deliuered vs free, Wil.
+Moore, and Rob. Rawlings, and further promised the rest in like case,
+wheresoeuer they be, and that hereafter no violence shalbe shewed,
+considering ours be merchants ships which go peaceably in their voiage, and
+were ignorant of the orders of Algier, neither knew afar off, whether they
+were friends or the Christians gallies in league with vs, of whom they most
+doubted, who not suffring our ships to come into these parts, wil make
+prize of the goods and captiue the men, so as they are not to let them come
+nigh them: and since ours haue not done contrary to the articles of the
+same priuilege, wherein is no order for Algier prescribed vs, as both by
+the originall now sent vs, and also by the copy now sent you from London
+you may perceiue, they according to right are as abouesaid to be set free,
+and their goods restored, which if it be not there accomplished as the
+grand Signior hath now commanded, and most faithfully promised, neither yet
+in case of their denial, those offenders punished here, and our injuries
+redressed, we are to demand our Congie, and command our merchants her
+maiesties subiects, to end their traffike here, which in our countrey
+commodities is prooued and found by the great Signior to be so beneficial
+to his countries as we are assured so well thereof, as also for the honor
+which his ancestors neuer had of friendship with so mighty a prince as is
+her maiesty, he wil not but maintaine the faith promised her, and the
+intercourse in due force. And where you say that the grand Signor his
+letters, in the behalf of the French, were no more accepted there, then of
+a mean man, nor tooke no place, that is not material to vs, our letters are
+after another sort much more effectuall. For our case and theirs be found
+far different, in that they be not onely now out of fauour with him, but
+also the commodities which they bring hither, as sugar, paper, bracelets,
+ropes of bast, almonds, &c., all which may be here wel spared, and we
+contrarily so wel esteemed, as he neuer denied vs any thing since our
+comming demanded, which neither their ambassador, nor the Venetian could
+haue here, and therefore we rest perswaded, knowing the wisdom of the
+Beglebeg, who is aduised by his friends from hence, of this our credite
+with his master, he wil so respect his commandements, as to accomplish the
+tenor thereof according to our desire. And where you say that the Ianizers
+rule all there, I know right wel that if things be not done as the grand
+Signior commandeth, his lieutenant must answer it. And therefore I am fully
+perswaded if he doe what he may they dare not resist him, for if they
+should, those rebels should not be vnpunished of the grand Signior. And
+though they speake their pleasures among themselues there, yet they be not
+so brutish, but they wel consider that their master the grand Signior may
+not be gainsaid or mocked of any. For vpon his word dependeth the life or
+death euen of the chiefest, as I have seene since my comming hither. So
+whatsoever these Ianizaries say, they will be better aduised in their
+deedes then to withstand their Viceroy, if he himselfe wil vse his lawfull
+power, which if hee doe not, hee cannot purge himselfe here of their euill
+proceedings against the grand Signiors friends: for the feet may not rule
+the bodie, but contrarywise, the head, the feete, and all the rest of the
+members. And for that neither for feare, affection or otherwise you omit as
+a faithfull true subiect to her maiestie to do your dutie, I do by my
+warrant going herewith charge you, and in her maiesties name, to the
+vttermost to vse your good and faithfull endeuour, as becommeth a true
+subiect, and in all things that may concerne her maiesties good seuice,
+assisting the Chaus with the rest of our messengers in counsel, trauel, and
+what els shall be thought requisite for your good discharge of your duetie.
+And to the end you may boldly proceed herein as also for the good opinion
+sir Edward Osborne and the company haue of you, and I no lesse perswaded of
+youre wisedome, vpright dealing, and good experience in those parts, do
+send you herewith the grand Signiors and our patents for exercising the
+office of Consul there, in Tripolis and Tunis: by virtue of which
+authoritie you may without feare proceed as the office doeth chalenge in
+defence of our priuilege, to redresse all iniuries offred our nation. Which
+if you cannot get reformed there of the Beglerbies vpon your complaint, I
+thereof aduertised, shal doe it here, and to the vttermost maintaine you in
+al rightful causes whatsoeuer, doubt you not. And hereafter according to
+your aduise, I wil and doe giue our ships order not to fight with any
+gallies of Alger, but to hoise out their skiffe and go aboord to shew them
+their safeconduct, and to present the captain with a garment, and you there
+in such like case are to take order that they do not forceably take any
+thing from them. [Sidenote: The Inuentorie of our ships and goods sunke and
+taken by the gallies of Alger.] Nothing doubting but the Viceroy (whose
+friendship in her maiesties behalfe I desire) will not onely performe the
+same your iust request, and according to right, restore to libertie our men
+since the priuilege taken, but also cause those that tooke and sunke our
+ships to answere the value, which I haue set down truly, and rather with
+the least in the Inuentorie translated into Turkish, whereof the inclosed
+is the copy in English, which I send to the end you may be the better
+informed of my demand by this our Chaus Mahomet, with whom in all things
+you are to conferre of matters expedient, for the honor of her maiesties
+countrey, and the commoditie, and libertie of poore captiues, which if the
+Viceroy do wel consider, according to his wisdome, as the grand Signior
+doeth thereof, he shal wel perceiue it not onely a great honour to his
+master as aforesaid, to continue this amitie with her maiestie, but chiefly
+to the whole estate of his kingdom exceeding profitable, which by this
+means shall be abundantly serued with the chiefest commodities they want,
+with many other things of more importance to the grand Signior his
+contentation, not herein to be mentioned. For I know the Viceroies
+experienced wisdom can wel consider thereof, in such sort as he wil not
+deny to accomplish his masters commandement, and our earnest request in so
+small a matter as this we require, whereof I expect no refusall: for
+thereby he shall increase his honor with the grand Signior, be in credite
+with her maiestie, be void of trouble which hereafter by future suite
+against him may happen, and his gallies free of such doubtful issue as
+doeth chance, fighting with our ships. Which, as it is well knowen to all
+the world, haue so great hearts as neuer cowardly to yeeld to their
+enemies. And that therefore in that respect (after the prouerbe, like
+esteeme of their like) they are the more of such a valiant prince as is
+their Viceroy and his couragious souldiers to be in all friendship
+cherished and better esteemed. If the captaine Bassa had bene returned from
+Capha, I would in like maner haue procured his letters, which for that he
+is not, I doubt nothing but that the grand Signiors will suffise. Thus
+commending your selfe and these proceedings to the almighty his merciful
+direction, I bid you most heartily wel to fare. From my mansion Rapamat
+nigh Pera, this 30. of March, 1585.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Series vel registrum valoris nauium, bonorum, et hominum per triremes
+  Argerienses ereptorum, vna cum captiuorum hominum nominibus, Beglerbego
+  Argeriensi Hassano.
+
+1 Salomon de Plimmouth habuit 36. homines, onerata cum sale, onere
+trecentorum doliorum, valore Florenorum 5600.
+
+2 Elizabetha de Garnesey cum decem hominibus Anglis, reliquis Britonibus,
+valore Florenorum 2000.
+
+3 Maria Martin de London onere centum et triginta doliorum, rectore Thoma
+More cum triginta quinque hominibus, reuertens de Patrasso cum mandato
+Cæsareo, valore Florenorum 1400.
+
+4 Elizabeth Stokes de London, rectore Dauid Fillie de London, Patrassum
+veniens cum mandato Cæsareo: huius præcipuus valor erat in talleris
+numeratis, quos habuit Richardus Gibben, qui adduxit etiam Serenissimæ
+Reginæ: maiestatis literas Cæsari et oratori. Valor reliquus in mercibus
+vna cum superiori in talleris, effecit Florenorum 21500.
+
+5 Nicolaus de London, rectore Thoma Forster, onerata cum vuis siccis,
+valore Florenorum 4800.
+
+
+In tempore Romadan Beglerbegi Argiræ spoliatæ et ereptæ naues, merces, et
+  homines.
+
+1 Iudith de London, rectore Iacobo Beare, cum hominibus 24. valore
+Florenorum 3100.
+
+2 Iesus de London, rectore Andræa Dier, cum 21. hominibus. Valorem huius et
+14. homines, reliquis mortuis, reddidit Romadan Bassa Tripolitanus
+Secretario legati, Edwardo Barten, valore Florenorum 9000.
+
+
+Nomina hominum mancipatorum et viuentium tunc temporis, quando Cæsar
+  illustrissimus, et dominus Orator Chauseum Mahumetem miserunt Algiram.
+
+1 Ante foedus initum in naue Peter de Bristow. Iohn Winter, Robert Barton.
+
+2 In naue Swallow de London. Rich. Crawford, Anthony Eluers, Wil. Rainolds.
+
+Post foedus initum in naue Britona. Iames Yoong.
+
+1 In naue Rabnet de Hampton. Thomas Lisney.
+
+1 In naue Salomon. Iohn Tracie, Wil. Griffith, Wil. Cocke.
+
+1 In naue Elizabeth. Iohn Woodward, Giles Naper, Leonard Iames, Oliuer
+Dallimore, and Richard Maunsell.
+
+2 In naue Maria Martin. Thomas Moore, Wil. White, Wil. Palmer, Nich. Long,
+Peter March, Rich. Haslewood, Wil. Dewly, Wil. Cowel, Iohn Franke, Henry
+Parker, Iohn Cauendish, Moises Robinson, Iames Sotherich, Henry Howel,
+Nich. Smith, Henry Ragster, Rich. Dauison, Rich. Palmer.
+
+3 In naue Elizabeth Stokes. Dauid Fillie, Walter Street, Laurence Wilkins,
+Morgan Dauis, Iohn Quinte, Ambrose Harison, Iohn Peterson, Tristram Vois,
+Roger Ribbe.
+
+4 In naue Nicholas, Thomas Forster rector nauis et eius nautæ.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+To Assan Aga, Eunuch and Treasurer to Hassan Bassa king of Alger, which
+  Assan Aga was the sonne of Fran. Rowlie of Bristow merchant, taken in the
+  Swalow.
+
+I receiued your letters of Will. Hamor gentleman my seruant very
+thankfully, aswel for the feruant faith that by his report I heare you haue
+in our lord Iesus Christ, by whose onely merits and bloodshedding, you
+together with vs and all other good Christians so truly beleeuing, shalbe
+saued, as also for your faithfull obedience like a true subiect to her
+Maiestie, naturally louing your countrey and countreymen, declared in your
+fauourable furtherance of the said Wil. Hamore, procuring their redemption.
+Of which your good and vertuous actions, as I reioice to vnderstand, so wil
+I impart the same to your singuler commendation, both to our mistresse her
+Maiestie, and her most honorable counsellors the nobilitie of England, to
+whom assure your selfe the report shalbe very welcome. And now this second
+time I am inforced by duetie to God and her maiesty, as also by the smal
+regard your master had of the Grand Signors former commandements, to
+complaine vnto him, though not so vehemently as I had occasion by his most
+vnworthy answer. But I hope, and the rather by your means, he will not
+contrary this second commandement, threatning him, not obseruing the same,
+losse of office and life. The due execution whereof by your vertuous and
+careful industry procured, wil manifest to all the world, especially to her
+maiesty, and me her ambassador, your true Christian mind and English heart,
+intentiuely bent to Gods honor, and the libertie of the poore men, for
+which I trust you be ordained another Ioseph, to folow his example in true
+pietie, in such sort that notwithstanding your body be subiect to Turkish
+thraldom, yet your vertuous mind free from those vices, next vnder God
+addict to the good seruice of your liege Lady and soueraigne princes, her
+most excellent maiesty, wil continually seeke by all good meanes to
+manifest the same in this and the like faithful seruice to your singuler
+commendation, wherby both my selfe and others in that place hauing found
+you in all good offices faithfully affectionated, may in like case performe
+the like towards you, when and where you may haue occasion to vse me: which
+as I for my part do assuredly promise, and wil no lesse faithfully
+performe: so accordingly I expect herein, and hereafter the like of you,
+whom most heartily saluted I commend to the diuine tuition and holy
+direction. From my house Rapamar, this 28. of June 1586.
+
+Your louing and good friend her Maiesties Ambassador with the Grand Signor,
+
+Wil. Hareborne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The originall of the first voyage for traffique into the kingdom of Marocco
+  in Barbarie, begun in the yeere 1551. with a tall ship called the Lion of
+  London, whereof went as captaine Master Thomas Windam, as appeareth by
+  this extract of a letter of Iames Aldaie, to the worshipfull master
+  Michael Locke, which Aldaie professeth himselfe to haue bene the first
+  inuentor of this trade.
+
+Worshipful Sir, hauing lately bene acquainted with your intent to prosecute
+the olde intermitted discouerie for Catai, if therein with my knowledge,
+trauell or industrie I may doe you seruice, I am readie to doe it and
+therein to aduenture my life to the vttermost point. Trueth it is, that I
+haue bene by some men (not my friends) euill spoken of at London, saying
+that although I be a man of knowledge in the Arte of Nauigation and
+Cosmographie, and that I haue bene the inuentor of some voyages that be now
+growen to great effect; yet say they maliciously and without iust cause,
+that I haue not bene willing at any season to proceed in those voyages that
+I haue taken in hand, taking example especially of two voyages. The one was
+when I was master in the great Barke Aucher of the Leuant, in which voyage
+I went not, but the causes they did not know of my let from the same, nor
+of the other. But first the very trueth is, that I was from the same voyage
+letted by the Princes letters, which my Master Sebastian Gabota had
+obtained for that purpose, to my great griefe. And as touching the second
+voyage which I inuented for the trade of Barbarie, the liuing God knoweth
+that I say most true, that when the great sweate was, (whereon the chiefe
+of those with whom I ioyned in that voyage died, that is to say, Sir Iohn
+Lutterell, Iohn Fletcher, Henry Ostrich and others) I my selfe was also
+taken with the same sweate in London, and after it, whether with euill diet
+in keeping, or how I know not, I was cast into such an extreame feuer, as I
+was neither able to ride nor goe: and the shippe being at Portesmouth,
+Thomas Windam had her away from thence, before I was able to stand vpon my
+legges, by whom I lost at that instant fourescore pound. Besides I was
+appointed by them that died (if they had liued) to haue had the whole
+gouernment both of shippe and goods, because I was to them the sole
+inuenter of that trade.
+
+In the first voyage to Barbary there were two Moores, being noblemen,
+whereof one was of the Kings blood, conuayed by the said Master Thomas
+Windham into their Countrey out of England,
+
+Yours humble at your commandement,
+
+Iames Alday.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Barbary in the yeere 1552. Set foorth by the right
+  worshipfull Sir Iohn Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir Thomas Wroth, Master
+  Frances Lambert, Master Cole and others; Written by the relation of
+  Master Iames Thomas then Page to Master Thomas Windham chiefe Captaine of
+  this voyage.
+
+The shippes that went on this voyage were three, whereof two were of the
+Riuer of Thames, That is to say, the Lyon of London, whereof Master Thomas
+Windham was Captaine and part owner, of about an hundred and fiftie tonnes:
+The other was the Buttolfe about fourescore tunnes, and a Portugall Carauel
+bought of certaine Portugals in Newport in Wales, and fraightened for this
+voyage, of summe sixtie tunnes. The number of men in the Fleete were an
+hundred and twentie. The Master of the Lyon was one Iohn Kerry of Mynhed in
+Somersetshire, his Mate was Dauid Landman. The chiefe Captaine of this
+small Fleete was Master Thomas Windham a Norffolke gentlemen borne, but
+dwelling at Marshfield-parke in Somerset shire. This Fleete departed out of
+King-rode neere Bristoll about the beginning of May 1552. being on a Munday
+in the morning: and the Munday fortnight next ensuing in the euening came
+to an ancker at their first port in the roade of Zafia, or Asafi on the
+coast of Barbarie, standing in 32. degrees of latitude, and there put on
+land part of our Marchandise to be conueied by land to the citie of
+Marocco: which being done, and hauing refreshed our selues with victuals
+and water, we went to the second port called Santa Cruz, where we
+discharged the rest of our goods, being good quantitie of linnen and
+woollen cloth, corall, amber, Iet, and diuers other things well accepted of
+the Moores. In which road we found a French ship, which not knowing whether
+it were warre or peace betweene England and France, drewe her selfe as
+neere vnder the towne wals as she could possible, crauing aide of the towne
+for her defence, if need were, which in deed seeing vs draw neere, shot at
+vs a piece from the wals, which came ouer the Lion our Admirall, between
+the maine mast and her foremast. [Sidenote: The English were at Santa Cruz
+the yere before being 1551.] Whereupon we comming to an anker, presently
+came a pinnes aboord vs to know what we were, who vnderstanding that we had
+bene there the yere before, and came with the good leaue of their king in
+marchant wise, were fully satisfied, and gaue vs good leaue to bring our
+goods peaceably on shore, where the Viceroy, whose name was Sibill Manache,
+within short time after came to visite vs, and vsed vs with all curtesie.
+But by diuers occasions we spent here very neere three moneths before we
+could get in our lading, which was Sugar, Dates, Almonds, and Malassos or
+sugar Syrrope. And for all our being here in the heate of the Sommer, yet
+none of our company perished by sicknesse. Our ships being laden, we drew
+into the Sea for a Westerne wind for England. But being at sea, a great
+leake fell vpon the Lion, so that we were driuen to Lancerota, and
+Forteuentura, where, betweene the two Ilands, we came to a road, whence wee
+put on land out of our sayd ship 70. chests of Sugar vpon Lancerota, with
+some dozen or sixteene of our company, where the inhabitants supposing we
+had made a wrongfull prize of our carauell, suddenly came with force vpon
+our people, among whom I my selfe was one, tooke vs prisoners, and spoiled
+the sugars: which thing being perceiued from our ships, they manned out
+three boates, thinking to rescue vs, and draue the Spaniards to flight,
+whereof they slew eighteene, and tooke their gouernour of the Iland
+prisoner, who was a very aged gentleman about 70 yeeres of age. But chasing
+the enemies so farre, for our recouerie, as pouder and arrowes wanted, the
+Spaniardes perceiuing this, returned, and in our mens retire they slew sixe
+of them. Then a Parle grew, in the which it was agreed, that we the
+prisoners should be by them restored, and they receiue their olde
+gouernour, giuing vs a testimonie vnder his and their hands, what damages
+wee had there receiued, the which damages were here restored, and made good
+by the king of Spaine his marchants vpon our returne into England. After
+wee had searched and mended our leake, being returned aboord, we came vnder
+saile, and as wee were going to the sea on the one side of the Iland, the
+Cacafuego and other ships of the king of Portugals Armada entered at the
+other, and came to anker in the road from whence we were but newly
+departed, and shot off their great ordinance in our hearing. And here by
+the way it is to bee vnderstood that the Portugals were much offended with
+this our new trade into Barbarie, and both in our voiage the yeere before,
+as also in this they gaue out in England by their marchants, that if they
+tooke vs in those partes, they would vse vs as their mortall enemies, with
+great threates and menaces. But by God and good prouidence wee escaped
+their hands. From this Iland shaping our coast for England, we were seuen
+or eight weekes before we could reach the coast of England. The first port
+wee entered into was the hauen of Plimmouth, from whence within short time
+wee came into the Thames, and landed our marchandise at London, about the
+ende of the moneth of October, 1552.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voiage made out of England vnto Guinea and Benin in Affrike, at the
+  charges of certaine marchants Aduenturers of the Citie of London, in the
+  yeere of our Lord 1553.
+
+I was desired by certaine of my friends to make some mention of this
+Voiage, that some memorie thereof might remaine to our posteritie, if
+either iniquitie of time consuming all things, or ignorance creeping in by
+barbarousness and contempt of knowledge should hereafter bury in obliuion
+so woorthie attempts, so much the greatlier to bee esteemed, as before
+neuer enterprised by Englishmen, or at the least so frequented, as at this
+present they are, and may bee, to the great commoditie of our marchants, if
+the same be not hindered by the ambition of such, as for the conquering of
+fortie or fiftie miles here and there, and erecting of certaine fortresses,
+thinke to be Lordes of half the world, enuying that other should enioy the
+commodities, which they themselues cannot wholly possesse. And although
+such as haue bene at charges in the discouering and conquering of such
+landes ought by good reason to haue certaine priuileges, preheminences, and
+tributes for the same, yet (to speake vnder correction) it may seeme
+somewhat rigorous, and agaynst good reason and conscience, or rather
+agaynst the charitie that ought to be among Christian men, that such as
+inuade the dominions of other should not permit other friendly to vse the
+trade of marchandise in places neerer, or seldome frequented of them,
+whereby their trade is not hindered in such places, where they themselues
+haue at their owne election appointed the Martes of their traffike. But
+forasmuch as at this present it is not my intent to accuse or defend,
+approoue or improoue, I will cease to speake any further hereof, and
+proceed to the description of the first voyage, as briefly and faithfully
+as I was aduertised of the same, by the information of such credible
+persons, as made diligent inquisition to know the trueth thereof, as much
+as shall be requisite, omitting to speake of many particular things, not
+greatly necessarie to be knowen: which neuerthelesse, with also the exact
+course of the navigation, shall be more fully declared in the second
+voiage. And if herein fauour or friendship shall perhaps cause some to
+thinke that some haue bene sharply touched, let them lay apart fauour and
+friendship, and giue place to trueth, that honest men may receiue prayse
+for well doing, and lewd persons reproch, as the iust stipend of their
+euill desertes, whereby other may be deterred to doe the like, and vertuous
+men encouraged to proceed in honest attempts.
+
+But that these voyages may be more plainly vnderstood of all men, I haue
+thought good for this purpose, before I intreat hereof, to make a briefe
+description of Africa, being that great part of the world, on whose West
+side beginneth the coast of Guinea at Cabo Verde, about twelue degrees in
+latitude, on this side the Equinoctiall line, and two degrees in longitude
+from the measuring line, so running from the North to the South, and by
+East in some places, within 5, 4, and 3 degrees and a halfe vnto the
+Equinoctiall, and so foorth in maner directly East and by North, for the
+space of 36 degrees or thereabout, in longitude from the West to the East,
+as shall more plainly appeare in the description of the second voyage.
+
+
+A briefe description of Afrike gathered by Richard Eden.
+
+In Africa the lesse are these kingdoms: the kingdom of Tunis and
+Constantina, which is at this day under Tunis, and also the region of
+Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of Afrike is very barren by reason of
+the great deserts, as the deserts of Numidia and Barca. The principall
+ports of the kingdome of Tunis are these: Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia,
+Bona, and Stora. The chiefe cities of Tunis are Constantina and Bona, with
+diuers other. Vnder this kingdom are many Ilands, as Zerbi, Lampadola,
+Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta, where at this present is the
+great master of the Rhodes. Vnder the South of this kingdom are the great
+deserts of Lybia. All the nations in this Africa the lesse are of the sect
+of Mahomet, and a rusticall people, liuing scattred in villages. The best
+of this part of Afrike is Barbaria lying on the coast of the sea
+Mediterraneum.
+
+Mauritania (now called Barbaria) is diuided into two parts, as Mauritania
+Tingitana, and Cæsariensis. Mauritania Tingitania is now called the kingdom
+of Fes, and the kingdom of Marocco. The principall citie of Fes is called
+Fessa: and the chiefe citie of Marocco is named Marocco.
+
+Mauritania Cæsariensis is at this day called the kingdom of Tremisen, with
+also the citie called Tremisen or Telensin. This region is full of deserts,
+and reacheth to the Sea Mediterraneum, to the citie of Oram, with the port
+of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fes reacheth vnto the Ocean Sea, from the
+West to the citie of Argilla: and the port of the sayd kingdom is called
+Sala.
+
+The kingdom of Marocco is also extended aboue the Ocean Sea, vnto the citie
+of Azamor and Azafi, which are vpon the Ocean Sea, toward the West of the
+sayd kingdom. Nere Mauritania Tingitana (that is to say, by the two
+kingdoms of Fes, and Marocco) are in the Sea, the Ilands of Canarie, called
+in old time, The fortunate Ilands. Toward the south of this region is the
+kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Ialofo, Gambra, and many other regions of
+the Blacke Moores, called Aethiopians or Negros all which are watered with
+the riuer Negro, called in old time Niger. In the sayd regions are no
+cities, but onely certaine lowe cottages made of boughes of trees,
+plastered with chalke, and couered with strawe. In these regions are also
+very great deserts.
+
+The kingdom of Marocco hath vnder it these seuen kingdoms: Hea, Sus,
+Guzula, the territorie of Marrocca, Duccala, Hazchora, and Tedle. The
+kingdom of Fes hath as many: as Fes, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errif, Garet,
+and Elcair. The kingdom of Tremisen hath these regions: Tremisen, Tenez,
+and Elgazair, all which are Machometists. But all the regions of Guinea are
+pure Gentiles, and idolatrous, without profession of any religion, or other
+knowledge of God, then by the law of nature.
+
+Africa the great is one of the three parts of the world, knowen in old
+time, and seuered from Asia, on the East by the riuer Nilus, on the West
+from Europe by the pillars of Hercules. The hither part is now called
+Barbarie, and the people Moores. The inner part is called Lybia and
+Aethiopia. Afrike the lesse is in this wise bounded: On the West it hath
+Numidia; On the East Cyrenaica: On the North, the sea called Mediterraneum.
+In this countrey was the noble city of Carthage.
+
+In the East side of Afrike beneath the red sea, dwelleth the great and
+mighty Emperour and Christian king Prester Iohn, well knowen to the
+Portugales in their voyages to Calicut. His dominions reach very farre on
+euery side: and hath vnder him many other Kings both christian and heathen
+that pay him tribute. This mightie prince is called Dauid the Emperour of
+Aethiopia. Some write that the king of Portugall sendeth him yeerely eight
+ships laden with marchandize. His kingdom confineth with the red Sea, and
+reacheth far into Afrike toward Aegypt and Barbarie. Southward it confineth
+with the Sea toward the Cape de Bona Speranza: and on the other side with
+the sea of sand, called Mare de Sabione, a very dangerous sea lying between
+the great citie of Alcair, or Cairo in Aegypt, and the country of
+Aethiopia: In the which way are many vnhabitable deserts, continuing for
+the space of fiue dayes iourney. And they affirme, that if the sayd
+Christian Emperour were not hindered by those deserts (in the which is
+great lacke of victuals, and especially of water) he would or now haue
+inuaded the kingdom of Egypt, and the citie of Alcair. The chiefe city of
+Ethiopia, where this great emperor is resident, is called Amacaiz, being a
+faire citie, whose inhabitants are of the colour of an Oliue. There are
+also many other cities, as the city of Saua vpon the riuer of Nilus, where
+the Emperour is accustomed to remaine in the Sommer season. There is
+likewise a great city named Barbaregaf, and Ascon, from whence it is said
+that the Queene of Saba came to Hierusalem to heare the wisedom of Salomon.
+This citie is but litle, yet very faire, and one of the chiefe cities in
+Ethiope. In this prouince are many exceeding high mountains, vpon the which
+is said to be the earthly paradise: and some say that there are the trees
+of the Sunne and Moone, whereof the antiquitie maketh mention: yet that
+none can passe thither by reason of great deserts of an hundred daies
+iourney. Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of Bona Speranza. And to
+haue said thus much of Afrike it may suffice.
+
+
+The first voiage to Guinea and Benin.
+
+In the yeere of our Lord 1553. the twelfth day of August, sailed from
+Portsmouth two goodly ships, the Primerose and the Lion, with a pinnas
+called the Moone, being all well furnished aswell with men of the lustiest
+sort, to the number of seuen score, as also with ordinance and victuals
+requisite to such a voiage: hauing also two captaines, the one a stranger
+called Anthonie Anes Pinteado, a Portugall, borne in a towne named The Port
+of Portugall, a wise, discreet, and sober man, who for his cunning in
+sailing, being as well an expert Pilot as a politike captaine, was sometime
+in great fauour with the king of Portugall, and to whom the coasts of
+Brasile and Guinea were committed to be kept from the Frenchmen, to whom he
+was a terrour on the Sea in those parts, and was furthermore a gentleman of
+the king his masters house. But as fortune in maner neuer fauoureth but
+flattereth, neuer promiseth but deceiueth, neuer raiseth but casteth downe
+againe: and as great wealth and fauour haue alwaies companions, emulation
+and enuie, he was after many aduersities and quarels made against him,
+inforced to come into England: where in this golden voyage he was euil
+matched with an vnequal companion, and vnlike match of most sundry
+qualities and conditions, with vertues few or none adorned. Thus departed
+these noble ships vnder saile on their voyage: But first captaine Windam
+putting forth of his ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head
+marchants, and shewing herein a muster of the tragicall partes hee had
+conceiued in his braine, and with such small beginnings nourished so
+monstrous a birth, that more happy, yea and blessed was that yong man being
+left behind, then if he had bene taken with them, as some do wish he had
+done the like by theirs. Thus sailed they on their voyage, vntill they came
+to the Iland of Madera, where they tooke in certaine wines for the store of
+their ships, and paid for them as they agreed of the price. At these Ilands
+they met with a great Galion of the king of Portugall, full of men and
+ordinance: yet such as could not haue preuailed if it had attempted to
+withstand or resist our ships, for the which cause it was set foorth, not
+onely to let and interrupt these our shippes of their purposed voiage, but
+al other that should attempt the like: yet chiefly to frustrate our voiage.
+For the king of Portugall was sinisterly informed, that our ships were
+armed to his castle of Mina in those parties, whereas nothing lesse was
+ment.
+
+After that our ships departed from the Iland of Madera forward on their
+voiage, began this worthy captaine Pinteados sorow, as a man tormented with
+the company of a terrible Hydra, who hitherto flattred with him, and made
+him a faire countenance and shew of loue. Then did he take vpon him to
+command all alone, setting nought both by captain Pinteado, and the rest of
+the marchants factors, sometimes with opprobrious words, and sometimes with
+threatnings most shamfully abusing them, taking from Pinteado the seruice
+of the boies and certain mariners that were assigned him by the order and
+direction of the worshipful merchants, and leauing him as a common mariner,
+which is the greatest despite and grief that can be to a Portugale or
+Spaniard, to be diminished of their honor, which they esteem aboue all
+riches. Thus sailing forward on their voiage, they came to the Ilands of
+Canarie, continuing their course from thence vntil they arriued at the
+Iland of S. Nicholas, where they victualled themselues with fresh meat, of
+the flesh of wild goats, whereof is great plenty in that Iland, and in
+maner of nothing els. From hence following on their course and tarying here
+and there at the desert Ilands in the way, because they would not come too
+timely to the countrey of Guinea for the heat, and tarying somewhat too
+long (for what can be well ministred in a common wealth, where inequalitie
+with tyrannie wil rule alone) they came at the length to the first land of
+the country of Guinea, where they fel with the great riuer of Sesto, where
+they might for their marchandizes haue laden their ships with the graines
+of that countrey, which is a very hote fruit, and much like vnto a fig as
+it groweth on the tree. For as the figs are full of small seeds, so is the
+said fruit full of graines, which are loose within the cod, hauing in the
+mids thereof a hole on euery side. This kind of spice is much vsed in cold
+countries, and may there be sold for great aduantage, for exchange of other
+wares. But our men, by the perswasion or rather inforcement of this
+tragicall captaine, not regarding and setting light by that commoditie, in
+comparison of the fine gold they thirsted, sailed an hundred leagues
+further, vntil they came to the golden land: where not attempting to come
+neere the castle pertaining to the king of Portugall, which was within the
+riuer of Mina, they made sale of their ware only on this side and beyond
+it, for the gold of that country, to the quantitie of an hundred and fiftie
+pounds weight, there being in case that they might haue dispatched all
+their ware for gold, if the vntame braine of Windam had, or could haue
+given eare to the counsell and experience of Pinteado. For when that Windam
+not satisfied with the gold which he had, and more might haue had if he had
+taried about the Mina, commanding the said Pinteado (for so he tooke vpon
+him) to lead the ships to Benin, being vnder the Equinoctial line, and an
+hundred and fifty leagues beyond the Mina, where he looked to haue their
+ships laden with pepper: and being counselled of the said Pinteado,
+considering the late time of the yeere, for that time to go no further, but
+to make sale of their wares such as they had for gold, wherby they might
+haue bene great gainers: Windam not assenting hereunto, fell into a sudden
+rage, reuiling the sayd Pinteado, calling him Iew, with other opprobrious
+words, saying, This whoreson Iew hath promised to bring vs to such places
+as are not, or as he cannot bring vs vnto: but if he do not, I will cut off
+his eares and naile them to the maste. Pinteado gaue the foresaid counsell
+to go no further for the safegard of the men and their liues, which they
+should put in danger if they came too late, for the Rossia which is their
+Winter, not for cold, but for smothering heate, with close and cloudie aire
+and storming weather, of such putrifying qualitie, that it rotted the
+coates of their backs: or els for comming to soone for the scorching heat
+of the sunne, which caused them to linger in the way. [Sidenote: The king
+of Benin his court.] But of force and not of will brought he the ships
+before the riuer of Benin, where riding at an Anker, they sent their pinnas
+vp into the riuer 50 or 60 leagues, from whence certaine of the marchants
+with captaine Pinteado, Francisco, a Portugale, Nicholas Lambert gentleman,
+and other marchants were conducted to the court where the king remained,
+ten leagues from the riuer side, whither when they came, they were brought
+with a great company to the presence of the king, who being a blacke Moore
+(although not so blacke as the rest) sate in a great huge hall, long and
+wide, the wals made of earth without windowes, the roofe of thin boords,
+open in sundry places, like vnto louers to let in the aire.
+
+And here to speake of the great reuerence they giue to their king, it is
+such, that if we would giue as much to our Sauior Christ, we should remooue
+from our heads many plagues which we daily deserue for our contempt and
+impietie.
+
+So it is therefore, that when his noble men are in his presence, they neuer
+looke him in the face, but sit cowring, as we vpon our knees, so they vpon
+their buttocks, with their elbowes vpon their knees, and their hands before
+their faces, not looking vp vntil the king command them. And when they are
+comming toward the king, as far as they do see him, they do shew such
+reuerence, sitting on the ground with their faces couered as before.
+Likewise when they depart from him, they turn not their backs toward him,
+but goe creeping backward with like reuerence.
+
+[Sidenote: The communication between the king of Benin and our men.] And
+now to speake somewhat of the communication that was between the king and
+our men, you shall first vnderstand that he himselfe could speake the
+Portugall tongue, which he had learned of a child. Therefore after he had
+commanded our men to stand vp, and demanded of them the cause of their
+comming into that countrey, they answered by Pinteado, that they were
+marchants trauelling into those parties for the commodities of his
+countrey, for exchange of wares which they had brought from their
+countries, being such as should be no lesse commodious for him and his
+people. The king then hauing of old lying in a certaine store house 30 or
+40 kintals of Pepper (euery kintall being an hundred weight) willed them to
+looke vpon the same, and againe to bring him a sight of such marchandizes
+as they had brought with them. [Sidenote: The kings gentlenes towards our
+men. ] And thereupon sent with the captaine and the marchants certaine of
+his men to conduct them to the waters side, with other to bring the ware
+from the pinnas to the court. Who when they were returned and the wares
+seen, the king grew to this ende with the merchants to prouide in 30 dayes
+the lading of al their ships with pepper. And in case their merchandizes
+would not extend to the value of so much pepper, he promised to credite
+them to their next returne, and thereupon sent the country round about to
+gather pepper, causing the same to be brought to the court: So that within
+the space of 30 dayes they had gathered fourescore tunne of pepper.
+
+In the meane season our men partly hauing no rule of themselues, but eating
+without measure of the fruits of the countrey, and drinking the wine of the
+Palme trees that droppeth in the night from the cut of the branches of the
+same, and in such extreme heate running continually into the water, and
+vsed before to such sudden and vehement alterations (then the which nothing
+is more dangerous) were thereby brought into swellings and agues: insomuch
+that the later time of the yeere comming on, caused them to die sometimes
+three and sometimes 4 or 5 in a day. Then Windam perceiuing the time of the
+30 daies to be expired, and his men dying so fast, sent to the court in
+post to Captaine Pinteado, and the rest to come away and to tary no longer.
+But Pinteado with the rest, wrote backe to him againe, certifying him of
+the great quantity of pepper they had alreadie gathered, and looked daily
+for much more: desiring him furthermore to remember the great praise and
+name they should win, if they came home prosperously, and what shame of the
+contrary. With which answere Windam not satisfied, and many of their men
+dying dayly, willed and commaunded them againe either to come away
+forthwith, or els threatened to leaue them behinde. When Pinteado heard
+this answere, thinking to perswade him with reason, hee tooke his way from
+the court toward the ships, being conducted thither with men by the kings
+commandement.
+
+[Sidenote: The Death of Windham.] In the meane season Windam all raging,
+brake vp Pinteados Cabin, brake open his chestes, spoiled such prouision of
+cold stilled waters and suckets as he had prouided for his health, and left
+him nothing, neither of his instruments to saile by, nor yet of his
+apparell: and in the meane time falling sicke, himselfe died also. Whose
+death Pinteado comming aboord, lamented as much as if he had bene the
+deerest friend he had in the world. [Sidenote: Pinteado euill vsed of the
+mariners.] But certaine of the mariners and other officers did spit in his
+face, some calling him Iewe, saying that he had brought them thither to
+kill them: and some drawing their swords at him, making a shew to slay him.
+Then he perceiuing that they would needs away, desired them to tarry that
+he might fetch the rest of the marchants that were left at the court, but
+they would not grant this request. Then desired he them to giue him the
+ship-boate, with as much of an old saile as might serue for the same,
+promising them therwith to bring Nicholas Lambert and the rest into
+England, but all was in vaine. [Sidenote: This Lambert was a Londiner
+borne, whose father had bin Lord Maior of London.] Then wrote he a letter
+to the court to the marchants, informing them of all the matter, and
+promising them if God would lend him life to returne with all haste to
+fetch them. And thus was Pinteado kept ashipboord against his will, thrust
+among the boyes of the ship, not vsed like a man, nor yet like an honest
+boy, but glad to find fauour at the cookes hand. Then departed they,
+leauing one of their ships behind them, which they sunke for lacke of men
+to cary her. [Sidenote: The death of Pinteado.] After this, within 6 or 7
+dayes sayling, dyed also Pinteado for uery pensiuenesse and thought that
+stroke him to the heart. A man worthy to serue any prince, and most vilely
+vsed. And of seuenscore men came home to Plimmouth scarcely forty, and of
+them many died. [Sidenote: Pinteado first perswaded our men to the voiage
+of Guinea.] And that no man should suspect these words which I haue saide
+in commendation of Pinteado, to be spoken vpon fauour otherwise then
+trueth, I haue thought good to adde hereunto the copie of the letters which
+the king of Portugall and the infant his brother wrote vnto him to
+reconcile him, at such time as vpon the king his masters displeasure (and
+not for any other crime or offence, as may appeare by the said letters) he
+was only for pouertie inforced to come into England, where he first
+perswaded our marchants to attempt the said voyages to Guinea. But as the
+king of Portugall too late repented him that he had so punished Pinteado,
+vpon malicious informations of such as enuied the mans good fortune: euen
+so may it hereby appeare that in some cases euen Lions themselues may
+either be hindered by the contempt, or aided by the helpe of the poore
+mise, according vnto the fable of Esope.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The copie of Anthonie Anes Pinteado his letters patents, whereby the king
+  of Portugall made him knight of his house, after all his troubles and
+  imprisonment, which, by wrong information made to the king, he had
+  susteined of long time, being at the last deliuered, his cause knowen and
+  manifested to the king by a gray Friar the kings Confessor.
+
+[Sidenote: Seven hundred reis are ten shillings. Alcayre is halfe a
+bushell.] I the king doe giue you to vnderstand lord Francis Desseaso, one
+of my counsell and ouerseer of my house, that in consideration of the good
+seruice which Anthony Anes Pinteado, the sonne of Iohn Anes, dwelling in
+the towne called the Port, hath done vnto me, my will and pleasure is, to
+make him knight of my house, allowing to him in Pension seuen hundred reis
+monethly, and euery day one alcayre of barly, as long as he keepeth a
+horse, and to be paid according to the ordinance of my house. Prouiding
+alwaies that he shall receiue but one marriage gift. And this also in such
+condition, that the time which is accepted in our ordinance, forbidding
+such men to marry for getting such children as might succeede them in this
+allowance, which is 6 yeres after the making of this patent, shalbe first
+expired before he do marry. I therfore command you to cause this to be
+entred in the booke called the Matricula of our houshold, vnder the title
+of knights. And when it is so entred, let the clarke of the Matricula, for
+the certeintie therof, write on the backside of this Aluala, or patent, the
+number of the leafe wherein this our grant is entred. Which done, let him
+returne this writing vnto the said Anthonie Anes Pinteado for his warrant.
+
+I Diego Henriques haue written this in Almarin the two and twentie day of
+September, in the yeere of our Lord 1551. And this beneuolence the king
+gaue vnto Anthonie Anes Pinteado, the fiue and twentie day of Iuly this
+present yeere.
+
+Rey.
+
+
+The Secretaries declaration written vnder the kings grant.
+
+Your Maiestie hath vouchsafed, in respect and consideration of the good
+seruice of Anthonie Anes Pinteado, dwelling in the port, and sonne of Iohn
+Anes, to make him knight of your house, with ordinarie allowance, of seuen
+hundred reis pension by the moneth, and one alcaire of barley by the day,
+as long as he keepeth a horse: and to be paide according to the ordinance
+of your house, with condition that hee shall haue but one marriage gift:
+and that not within the space of sixe yeres after the making of these
+letters Patents. The Secretaries note. Entred in the booke of the
+Matricula. Fol. 683.
+
+Francisco de Siquera.
+
+
+The copie of the letter of Don Lewes the infant, and brother to the king of
+  Portugall, sent into England to Anthonie Anes Pinteado.
+
+Anthony Anes Pinteado, I the infant brother to the king, haue me heartily
+commended vnto you. Peter Gonsalues is gone to seeke you, desiring to bring
+you home againe into your countrey. And for that purpose he hath with him a
+safe conduct for you, granted by the king, that therby you may freely and
+without all feare come home. And although the weather be foule and stormie,
+yet faile not to come: for in the time that his Maiestie hath giuen you,
+you may doe many things to your contentation and gratifying the king,
+whereof I would be right glad: and to bring the same to passe, I will do
+all that lieth in me for your profite. But forasmuch as Peter Gonsalues
+will make further declaration hereof vnto you, I say no more at this
+present. Written in Lisbone, the eight day of December. Anno 1552.
+
+The infant Don Lewes.
+
+
+All these foresaid writings I saw vnder seale, in the house of my friend
+Nicholas Liese, with whom Pinteado left them, at his vnfortunate departing
+to Guinea. But, notwithstanding all these friendly letters and faire
+promises, Pinteado durst not attempt to goe home, neither to keepe companie
+with the Portugals his countrey men, without the presence of other:
+forasmuch as he had secrete admonitions that they intended to slay him, if
+time and place might haue serued their wicked intent.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Guinea set out by Sir George Barne, Sir Iohn Yorke,
+  Thomas Lok, Anthonie Hickman and Edward Castelin, in the yere 1554. The
+  Captaine whereof was M. Iohn Lok.
+
+As in the first voiage I haue declared rather the order of the history,
+then the course of the nauigation, whereof at that time I could haue no
+perfect information: so in the description of this second voyage, my chiefe
+intent hath beene to shew the course of the same, according to the
+obseruation and ordinarie custome of the mariners, and as I receiued it at
+the handes of an expert Pilot, being one of the chiefe in this voyage, who
+also with his owne handes wrote a briefe declaration of the same, as he
+found and tried all things, not by coniecture, but by the art of sayling,
+and instruments perteining to the mariners facultie. Not therefore assuming
+to my selfe the commendations due vnto other, neither so bold as in any
+part to change or otherwise dispose the order of this voyage so well
+obserued by art and experience, I haue thought good to set forth the same,
+in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly vsed among them, and as I
+receiued it of the said Pilot, as I haue said. Take it therefore as
+followeth.
+
+[Sidenote: Robert Gainsh was master of the Iohn Euangelist.] In the yeere
+of our Lord 1554 the eleuenth day of October, we departed the riuer of
+Thames with three goodly ships, the one called the Trinitie, a ship of the
+burden of seuenscore tunne, the other called the Bartholomew, a ship of the
+burden of ninetie, the third was the Iohn Euangelist, a ship of seuen score
+tunne. With the sayd ships and two pinnesses (wherof the one was drowned on
+the coast of England) we went forward on our voyage, and stayed at Douer
+fourteene dayes. We staied also at Rie three or foure dayes. Moreouer last
+of all we touched at Dartmouth.
+
+The first day of Nouember at nine of the clocke at night, departing from
+the coast of England, we set off the Start, bearing Southwest all that
+night in the sea, and the next day all day, and the next night after,
+vntill the third day of the said moneth about noone, making our way good,
+did runne threescore leagues.
+
+The 17. day in the morning we had sight of the Ile of Madera, which doth
+rise to him that commeth in the Northnortheast part vpright land in the
+west part of it, and very high: and to the Southsoutheast a low long land,
+and a long point, with a saddle thorow the middest of it, standing in two
+and thirtie degrees: and in the West part, many springs of water running
+downe from the mountaine, and many white fieldes like vnto corne fields,
+and some white houses to the Southeast part of it: and the toppe of the
+mountaine sheweth very ragged, if you may see it, and in the Northeast part
+there is a bight or bay as though it were a harborow: Also in the said
+part, there is a rocke a little distance from the shoare, and ouer the sayd
+bight you shall see a great gappe in the mountaine.
+
+The 19 day at twelue of the clocke we had sight of the isle of Palmes and
+Teneriffa and the Canaries. The Ile of Palme riseth round, and lieth
+Southeast and Northwest, and the Northwest part is lowest. In the South is
+a round hill ouer the head land, and another round hill aboue that in the
+land. There are between the Southeast part of the Ile of Madera and the
+Northwest part of the Ile of Palme seuen and fifty leagues. This Isle of
+Palme lieth in eight and twenty degrees. And our course from Madera to the
+Ile of Palme was South and South and by West, so that we had sight of
+Teneriffa and of the Canaries. The Southeast part of the Ile of the Palme,
+and the Northnortheast of Teneriffa lie Southeast and Northwest, and
+betweene them are 20 leagues. Teneriffa and the great Canary called Gran
+Canaria, and the West part of Forteuentura stande in seuen and twenty
+degrees and a halfe. Gomera is a faire Island but very ragged, and lieth
+Westsouthwest off Teneriffa. And whosouer wil come betweene them two Ilands
+must come South and by East, and in the South part of Gomera is a towne and
+a good rode in the said part of the Iland: and it standeth in seuen and
+twentie degrees and three terces. Teneriffa is an high land, with a great
+high pike like a sugar loafe, and vpon the said pike is snow throughout all
+the whole yeere. And by reason of that pike it may be knowen aboue all
+other Ilands, and there we were becalmed the twentieth day of Nouember,
+from sixe of the clocke in the morning, vntill foure of the clocke at
+afternoone.
+
+The two and twentieth day of Nouember, vnder the Tropike of Cancer the
+Sunne goeth downe West and by South. Vpon the coast of Barbarie fiue and
+twentie leagues by North Cape blanke, at three leagues off the maine, there
+are fifteene fadomes and good shelly ground, and sande among and no
+streames, and two small Ilands standing in two and twentie degrees and a
+terce.
+
+From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is an hundred leagues, and our course was
+South and by East. The said Cape standeth in two and twentie and a halfe:
+and all that coast is flatte, sixteene or seuenteene fadome deepe. Seuen or
+eight leagues off from the riuer del Oro or Cape de las Barbas, there vse
+many Spaniardes and Portugals to trade for fishing, during the moneth of
+Nouember: and all that coast is very low lands. Also we went from Cape de
+las Barbas Southsouthwest, and Southwest and by South, till we brought our
+selues in twentie degrees and a halfe, reckoning our selues seuen leagues
+off: and there were the least sholes of Cape Blanke.
+
+Then we went South vntil we brought our selues in 13 degrees, reckoning our
+selues fiue and twentie leagues off. And in 15 degrees we did reare the
+Crossiers, and we might haue reared them sooner if we had looked for them.
+They are not right a crosse in the moneth of Nouember, by reason that the
+nights are short there. Neuertheless we had the sight of them the 29 day of
+the said moneth at night.
+
+The first of December, being in 13 degrees we set our course South and by
+East, vntill the fourth day of December at 12 of the clocke the same day.
+Then we were in nine degrees and a terce, rekoning our selues 30 leagues of
+the sholes of the riuer called Rio Grande, being Westsouthwest off them,
+the which sholes be 30 leagues long.
+
+The fourth of December we beganne to set our course Southeast, we being in
+sixe degrees and a halfe.
+
+The ninth day of December we set our course Eastsoutheast: the fourteenth
+day of the sayde moneth we set our course East, we being in fiue degrees
+and a halfe, reckoning our selues thirty and sixe leagues from the coast of
+Guinea.
+
+The nineteenth of the said moneth we set our course East and by North,
+reckoning our selues seuenteene leagues distant from Cape Mensurado, the
+said Cape being Eastnortheast of vs, and the riuer of Sesto being East.
+
+The one and twentieth day of the said moneth, we fell with Cape Mensurado
+to the Southeast, about two leagues off. This Cape may be easily knowen, by
+reason yet the rising of it is like a Porpose-head. Also toward the
+Southeast there are three trees, whereof the Eastermost tree is the
+highest, and the middlemost is like a hie stacke, and the Southermost like
+vnto a gibet: and vpon the maine are foure or fiue high hilles rising one
+after another like round hommocks or hillocks. And the Southeast of the
+three trees, brandiernwise: and all the coast along is white sand. The said
+Cape standeth within a litle in sixe degrees.
+
+The two and twentieth of December we came to the riuer of Sesto, and
+remained there vntill the nine and twentieth day of the said moneth. Here
+we thought it best to send before vs the pinnesse to the riuer Dulce,
+called Rio Dulce, that they might haue the beginning of the market before
+the comming of the Iohn Euangelist.
+
+At the riuer of Sesto we had a tunne of graines. This riuer standeth in
+sixe degrees, lacking a terce. From the riuer of Sesto to Rio Dulce are
+fiue and twentie leagues. Rio Dulce standeth in fiue degrees and a halfe.
+The river of Sesto is easie to be knowen, by reason there is a ledge of
+rockes on the Southeast part of the Rode. And at the entring into the hauen
+are fiue or sixe trees that beare no leaues. The is a good harborow, but
+very narow at the entrance into the riuer. There is also a rocke in the
+hauens mouth right as you enter. And all that coast betweene Cape de Monte,
+and cape de las Palmas, lieth Southeast and by East, Northwest and by West,
+being three leagues off the shore. And you shal haue in some places rocks
+two leagues off: and that, betweene the riuer of Sesto and cape de las
+Palmas.
+
+Betweene the riuer of Sesto and the riuer Dulce are fiue and twentie
+leagues: and the high land that is betweene them both, is called Cakeado,
+being eight leagues from the riuer of Sesto. And to the Southeastwarde of
+it is a place called Shawgro, and another called Shyawe or Shauo, where you
+may get fresh water. Off this Shyawe lieth a ledge of rockes: and to the
+Southeastwarde lieth a hedland called Croke. Betweene Cakeado and Croke are
+nine or ten leagues. To the Southeastward off, is a harborow called S.
+Vincent: Right ouer against S. Vincent is a rocke vnder the water two
+leagues and a halfe off the shore. To the Southeastward of that rocke you
+shal see an island about three or foure leagues off: this island is not
+past a league off the shore. To the Eastsoutheast of the island, is a rocke
+that lieth aboue the water, and by that rocke goeth in the riuer Dulce,
+which you shall know by the said riuer and rocke. The Northwest side of the
+hauen is flat sand, and the Southeast side thereof is like an Island, and a
+bare plot without any trees, and so is it not in any other place.
+
+In the Rode you shall ride in thirteene or foureteene fadomes, good oaze
+and sand, being the markes of the Rode to bring the Island and the
+Northeast land together, and here we ankered the last of December.
+
+The third day of Ianuarie, we came from the riuer Dulce.
+
+Note that Cape de las Palmas is a faire high land, but some low places
+thereof by the water side looke like red cliffes with white strakes like
+hie wayes, a cable length a piece, and this is the East part of the cape.
+This cape is the Southermost land in all the coast of Guinea, and standeth
+in foure degrees and a terce.
+
+The coast from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes, or de Tres Puntas, is
+faire and cleare without rocke or other danger.
+
+Twentie and fiue leagues from Cape de las Palmas, the land is higher then
+in any place, vntill we come to Cape Trepointes: And about ten leagues
+before you come to Cape Trepointes, the land riseth still higher and
+higher, vntill you come to Cape Trepointes. Also before you come to the
+said Cape, after other 5 leagues to the Northwest part of it, there is
+certaine broken ground, with two great rockes, and within them in the bight
+of a bay, is a castle called Arra, perteining to the king of Portugall. You
+shall know it by the said rockes that lie off it: for there is none such
+from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes. This coast lieth East and by
+North, West and by South. From Cape de las Palmas to the said castle is
+fourescore and fifteene leagues. And the coast lieth from the said castle
+to the Westermost point of Trepoyntes, Southeast and by South, Northwest
+and by North. Also the Westermost point of Trepoyntes is a low lande, lying
+halfe a mile out in the sea: and vpon the innermost necke, to the
+land-ward, is a tuft of trees, and there we arriued the eleuenth day of
+Ianuary.
+
+The 12 day of Ianuary we came to a towne called Samma or Samua, being 8
+leagues from Cape Trepointes toward Eastnortheast. Betweene Cape Trepointes
+and the towne of Samua is a great ledge of rockes a great way out in the
+sea. [Sidenote: The pledge was sir Iohn Yorke his Nephew.] We continued
+foure dayes at that Towne, and the Captaine thereof would needs haue a
+pledge a shore. But when they receiued the pledge, they kept him still, and
+would trafficke no more, but shot off their ordinance at vs. They haue two
+or three pieces of ordinance and no more.
+
+The sixteenth day of the said month we made reckoning to come to a place
+called Cape Corea, where captaine Don Iohn dwelleth, whose men entertained
+vs friendly. This Cape Corea is foure leagues Eastwarde of the castle of
+Mina, otherwise called La mina, or Castello de mina, where we arriued the
+18 day of the month. [Sidenote: The castle of Mina perteining to the king
+of Portugall.] Here we made sale of all our cloth, sauing two or three
+packes.
+
+The 26 day of the same moneth we weighed anker, and departed from thence to
+the Trinitie, which was seuen leagues Eastward of vs, where she solde her
+wares. Then they of the Trinitie willed vs to go Eastward of that eight or
+nine leagues, to sell part of their wares, in a place called Perecow, and
+another place named Perecow Grande, being the Eastermost place of both
+these, which you shal know by a great round hill neere vnto it, named Monte
+Rodondo, lying Westward from it, and by the water side are many high palme
+trees. From hence did we set forth homeward the thirteenth day of February,
+and plied vp alongst till we came within seuen or eight leagues to Cape
+Trepointes. About eight of the clocke the 15 day at afternoone, wee did
+cast about to seaward: and beware of the currants, for they will deceiue
+you sore. Whosoeuer shall come from the coast of Mina homeward, let him be
+sure to make his way good West, vntill he reckon himselfe as farre as Cape
+de las Palmas, where the currant setteth alwayes to the Eastward. And
+within twentie leagues Eastward of Cape de las Palmas is a riuer called De
+los Potos, where you may haue fresh water and balast enough, and plenty of
+iuory or Elephants teeth. This riuer standeth in foure degrees, and almost
+two terces. [Sidenote: Cabo de las Palmas.] And when you reckon your selfe
+as farre shot as Cape de las Palmas, being in a degree, or a degree and a
+halfe, you may go West, and West by North, vntill you come in three
+degrees: and then you may go Westnorthwest, and Northwest and by West,
+vntill you come in fiue degrees, and then Northwest. And in sixe degrees,
+we met Northerly windes, and great ruffling of tides. And as we could
+iudge, the currants went to the Northnorthwest. Furthermore betweene Cape
+de Monte, and Cape Verde, go great currants, which deceiue many men.
+
+The 22 day of Aprill, we were in 8 degrees and two terces: and so we ran to
+the Northwest, hauing the winde at Northeast and Eastnortheast, and
+sometimes at East, vntill we were at 18 degrees and a terce, which was on
+May day. And so from 18 and two terces, we had the winde at East and
+Eastnortheast, and sometimes at Eastsoutheast: and then we reckoned the
+Island of Cape verde Eastsoutheast of vs, we iudging our selues to be 48
+leagues off. And in 20 and 21 degrees, we had the winde more Easterly to
+the Southward then before. And so we ran to the Northwest and
+Northnorthwest, and sometimes North and by West and North, until we came
+into 31 degrees, where we reckoned our selues a hundred and fourescore
+leagues Southwest and by South of the Island de los Flores, and there wee
+met with the winde at Southsoutheast, and set our course Northeast.
+
+In 23 degrees we had the winde at the South and Southwest, and then we set
+our course Northnortheast, and so we ran to 40 degrees, and then we set our
+course Northeast, the winde being at the Southwest, and hauing the Ile de
+Flores East of us, and 17 leagues off.
+
+In the 41 degrees we met with the winde at Northeast, and so we ran
+Northwestward, then we met with the winde Westnorthwest, and at the West
+within 6 leagues, running toward the Northwest, and then we cast about, and
+lay Northeast, vntill we came in 42 degrees, where we set our course
+Eastnortheast, iudging the Ile of Coruo South and by West of vs, and sixe
+and thirty leagues distant from vs.
+
+A remembrance, that the 21st day of May we communed with Iohn Rafe, and he
+thought it best to goe Northeast, and iudged himselfe 25 leagues Eastward
+to the Isle de Flores, and in 39 degrees and a halfe.
+
+Note, that on the fourth day of September, vnder nine degrees, we lost the
+sight of the North starre.
+
+Note also, that in 45 degrees, the compasse is varied 8 degrees to the
+West.
+
+Item, in 40 degrees the compasse did varie 15 degrees in the whole.
+
+Item, in 30 degrees and a halfe, the compasse is varied 5 degrees to the
+West.
+
+Be it also in memory that two or three daies before we came to Cape de 3
+puntas, the pinnesse went alongst the shore, thinking to sell some of our
+wares, and so we came to anker three or foure leagues West and by South of
+the Cape de 3 puntas, where we left the Trinitie.
+
+Then our pinnesse came aboord with all our men, the pinnesse also tooke in
+more wares. They told me moreouer that they would goe to a place where the
+Primrose was, and had receiued much gold at the first voyage to these
+parties, and tolde me furthermore that it was a good place: but I fearing a
+brigantine that was then vpon the coast, did wey and follow them, and left
+the Trinitie about foure leagues off from vs, and there we rode against
+that towne foure dayes: so that Martine by his owne desire, and assent of
+some of the Commissioners that were in the pinnesse, went a shoare to the
+towne, and there Iohn Berin went to trafique from vs, being three miles off
+trafiquing at an other towne. The towne is called Samma or Samua, for Samma
+and Sammaterra, are the names of the two first townes, where we did
+trafique for gold, to the Northeast of Cape de 3 puntas.
+
+Hitherto continueth the course of the voyage, as it was described by the
+sayde Pilot. Nowe therefore I will speake somewhat of the countrey and
+people, and of such things as are brought from thence.
+
+They brought from thence at the last voyage foure hundred pound weight and
+odde of gold, of two and twentie carrats and one graine in finenesse: also
+sixe and thirtie buts of graines, and about two hundred and fiftie
+Elephants teeth of all quantities. Of these I saw and measured, some of
+nine spans in length, as they were crooked. Some of them were as bigge as a
+mans thigh aboue the knee, and weyed about fourescore and ten pound weight
+a peece. They say that some one hath bin seene of an hundred and fiue and
+twentie pound weight. Other there were which they call the teeth of calues,
+of one or two or three yeeres, whereof some were a foot and a halfe, some
+two foot, and some 3 or more, according to the age of the beast. These
+great teeth or tusks grow in the vpper iaw downeward, and not in the nether
+iaw vpward, wherein the Painters and Arras workers are deceiued. At this
+last voyage was brought from Guinea the head of an Elephant, of such huge
+bignesse, that onely the bones or cranew thereof, beside the nether iaw and
+great tusks, weighed about two hundred weight, and was as much as I could
+well lift from the ground: insomuch that considering also herewith the
+weight of two such great teeth, the nether iaw with the lesse teeth, the
+tongue, the great hanging eares, the bigge and long snout or troonke, with
+all the flesh, braines, and skinne, with all other parts belonging to the
+whole head, in my iudgement it could weigh litle lesse then fiue hundred
+weight. [Sidenote: Sir Andrew Iudde. The contemplation of Gods works.] This
+head diuers haue seene in the house of the worthy marchant sir Andrew
+Iudde, where also I saw it, and beheld it, not only with my bodily eyes,
+but much more with the eye of my mind and spirit, considering by the worke,
+the cunning and wisedome of the workemaister: without which consideration,
+the sight of such strange and wonderfull things may rather seeme
+curiosities, then profitable contemplations.
+
+[Sidenote: The decription and properties of the Elephant.] The Elephant
+(which some call an Oliphant) is the biggest of all foure footed beasts,
+his forelegs are longer then his hinder, he hath ancles in the lower part
+of his hinder legges, and fiue toes on his feete vndiuided, his snout or
+tronke is so long, and in such forme, that it is to him in the stead of a
+hand: for he neither eateth nor drinketh but by bringing his tronke to his
+mouth, therewith he helpeth vp his Master or keeper, therewith he
+ouerthroweth trees. Beside his two great tusks, he hath on euery side of
+his mouth foure teeth, wherewith he eateth and grindeth his meate: either
+of these teeth are almost a span in length, as they grow along in the iaw,
+and are about two inches in height, and almost as much in thicknesse. The
+tuskes of the male are greater then of the female: his tongue is very
+litle, and so farre in his mouth, that it cannot be seene: of all beastes
+they are most gentle and tractable, for by many sundry wayes they are
+taught, and doe vnderstand: insomuch that they learne to doe due honor to a
+king, and are quick sense and sharpenesse of wit. When the male hath once
+seasoned the female, he neuer after toucheth her. The male Elephant liueth
+two hundreth yeeres, or at the least one hundred and twentie: the female
+almost as long, but the floure of their age is but threescore yeres, as
+some write. They cannot suffer winter or cold: they loue riuers, and will
+often go into them vp to the snout, wherewith they blow and snuffe, and
+play in the water: but swimme they cannot, for the weight of their bodies.
+Plinie and Soline write, that they vse none adulterie. If they happen to
+meete with a man in wildernesse being out of the way, gently they wil go
+before him, and bring him into the plaine way. Ioyned in battel, they haue
+no small respect vnto them that be wounded: for they bring them that are
+hurt or weary into the middle of the army to be defended: they are made
+tame by drinking the iuise of barley. [Sidenote: Debate between the
+Elephant and the Dragon.] They haue continual warre against Dragons, which
+desire their blood, because it is very cold: and therefore the Dragon lying
+awaite as the Elephant passeth by, windeth his taile (being of exceeding
+length) about the hinder legs of the Elephant, and so staying him,
+thrusteth his head into his tronke and exhausteth his breath, or else
+biteth him in the eare, whereunto he cannot reach with his tronke, and when
+the Elephant waxeth faint, he falleth downe on the serpent, being now full
+of blood, and with the poise of his body breaketh him: so that his owne
+blood with the blood of the Elephant runneth out of him mingled together,
+which being colde, is congealed into that substance which the Apothecaries
+call Sanguis Draconis, (that is) Dragons blood, otherwise called
+Cinnabaris, although there be an other kinde of Cinnabaris, commonly called
+Cinoper or Vermilion, which the Painters vse in certaine colours.
+
+[Sidenote: Three kinds of Elephants.] They are also of three kinds, as of
+the Marshes, the plaines, and the mountaines, no lesse differing in
+conditions. Philostratus writeth, that as much as the Elephant of Libya in
+bignes passeth the horse of Nysea, so much doe the Elephants of India
+exceed them of Libya: for the Elephants of India, some haue bene seene of
+the height of nine cubits: the other do so greatly feare these, that they
+dare not abide the sight of them. Of the Indian Elephants onely the males
+haue tuskes, but of them of Ethiopia and Libya both kindes are tusked: they
+are of diuers heights, as of twelue, thirteene, and fourteene dodrants,
+euery dodrant being a measure of nine inches. Some write that an Elephant
+is bigger then three wilde Oxen or Buffes. They of India are black, or of
+the colour of a mouse, but they of Ethiope or Guinea are browne: the hide
+or skinne of them all is very hard, and without haire or bristles: their
+eares are two dodrants broad, and their eyes very litle. Our men saw one
+drinking at a riuer in Guinea, as they sailed into the land.
+
+Of other properties and conditions of the Elephant, as of their marueilous
+docilitie, of their fight and vse in the warres, of their generation and
+chastitie, when they were first seene in the Theatres and triumphes of the
+Romanes, how they are taken and tamed, and when they cast their tusks, with
+the vse of the same in medicine, who so desireth to know, let him reade
+Plinie, in the eight booke of his naturall history. He also writeth in his
+twelft booke, that in olde time they made many goodly workes of iuory or
+Elephants teeth: as tables, tressels, postes of houses, railes, lattesses
+for windowes, images of their gods, and diuers other things of iuory, both
+coloured, and vncoloured, and intermixt with sundry kindes of precious
+woods, as at this day are made certaine chaires, lutes, and virginals. They
+had such plenty thereof in olde time, that (as far as I remember) Iosephus
+writeth, that one of the gates of Hierusalem was called Porta Eburnea,
+(that is) the Iuory gate. The whitenesse thereof was so much esteemed, that
+it was thought to represent the natural fairenesse of mans skinne: insomuch
+that such as went about to set foorth (or rather corrupt) naturall beautie
+with colours and painting, were reproued by this prouerbe, Ebur atramento
+candefacere, that is, To make iuory white with inke. The Poets also
+describing the faire necks of beautifull virgins, call them Eburnea colla,
+that is, Iuory necks. And to haue said thus much of Elephants and Iuory, it
+may suffice.
+
+[Sidenote: The people of Africa.] Now therefore I will speake somewhat of
+the people and their maners, and maner of liuing, with an other briefe
+description of Africa also. It is to be vnderstood, that the people which
+now inhabite the regions of the coast of Guinea, and the midle parts of
+Africa, as Libya the inner, and Nubia, with diuers other great and large
+regions about the same, were in old time called Æthiopes and Nigritæ, which
+we now call Moores, Moorens, or Negroes, a people of beastly liuing,
+without a God, lawe, religion, or common wealth, and so scorched and vexed
+with the heat of the sunne, that in many places they curse it when it
+riseth. Of the regions and people about the inner Libya (called Libya
+interior) Gemma Phrysius writeth thus.
+
+Libya interior is very large and desolate, in the which are many horrible
+wildernesses and mountaines, replenished with diuers kinds of wilde and
+monstrous beastes and serpents. First from Muritania or Barbary toward the
+South is Getulia, a rough and sauage region, whose inhabitants are wilde
+and wandering people. After these follow the people called Melanogetuli and
+Pharusij, which wander in the wildernesse, carrying with them great gourdes
+of water. [Sidenote: Æthiopes, Nigritæ. The riuer Nigritis or Senega.] The
+Ethiopians called Nigritæ occupy a great part of Africa, and are extended
+to the West Ocean. Southward also they reach to the riuer Nigritis, whose
+nature agreeth with the riuer of Nilus, forasmuch as it is increased and
+diminished at the same time, and bringeth forth the like beasts as the
+Crocodile. By reason whereof, I thinke this to be the same riuer which the
+Portugals called Senega: For this riuer is also of the same nature. It is
+furthermore marueilous and very strange that is said of this river: And
+this is, that on the one side thereof, the inhabitants are of high stature
+and black, and on the other side, of browne or tawne colour, and low
+stature, which thing also our men confirme to be true.
+
+[Sindenote: People of Libya.] There are also other people of Libya called
+Garamantes, whose women are common: for they contract no matrimonie;
+neither haue respect to chastitie. After these are the nations of the
+people called Pyrei, Sathiodaphnitæ, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamatæ, Dolopes,
+Aganginæ, Leuci Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopei, Calcei Ethiopes, and Nubi.
+These haue the same situation in Ptolome that they now giue to the kingdome
+of Nubia. Here are certaine Christians vnder the dominion of the great
+Emperour of Æthiopia, called Prester Iohn. From these toward the West is a
+great nation of people called Aphricerones, whose region (as faire as may
+be gathered by coniecture) is the same that is now called Regnum Orguene,
+confining vpon the East parts of Guinea. From hence Westward, and somewhat
+toward the North, are the kingdoms of Gambra and Budomel, not farre from
+the riuer of Senega. And from hence toward the inland regions, and along by
+the sea coast, are the regions of Ginoia or Guinea, which we commonly call
+Ginnee. [Sidenote: The Portugals Nauigation to Brasile.] On the Westside of
+these regions toward the Ocean, is the cape or point called Cabo verde, or
+Caput viride, (that is) the greene cape, to the which the Portugals first
+direct their course when they saile to America, or the land of Brasile.
+Then departing from hence, they turne to the right hand toward the quarter
+of the winde called Garbino, which is betweene the West and the South. But
+to speake somewhat more of Æthiopia: although there are many nations of
+people so named, yet is Æthiopia chiefly diuided into two parts, whereof
+the one is called Aethiopia vnder Aegypt, a great and rich region. To this
+perteineth the Island Meroe, imbraced round about with the stremes of the
+riuer Nilus. In this Island women reigned in old time. Iosephus writeth,
+that it was sometime called Sabea: and that the Queene of Saba came from
+thence to Ierusalem, to heare the wisedom of Salomon. [Sidenote: Prester
+Iohn Emperour of Aethiopia.] From hence toward the East reigneth the said
+Christian Emperour Prester Iohn, whom some cal Papa Iohannes, and other say
+that he is called Pean Iuan (that is) great Iohn, whose Empire reacheth far
+beyond Nilus, and is extended to the coasts of the Red sea and Indian sea.
+The middle of the region is almost in 66. degrees of longitude, and 12.
+degrees of latitude. [Sidenote: People of the Eastside of Africa.] About
+this region inhabite the people called Clodi, Risophagi, Bobylonij,
+Axiuntæ, Molili, and Molibæ. After these is the region called Troglodytica,
+whose inhabitants dwel in caues and dennes: for these are their houses, and
+the flesh of serpents their meat, as writeth Plinie, and Diodorus Siculus.
+They haue no speach, but rather a grinning and chattering. There are also
+people without heads, called Blemines, hauing their eyes and mouth in their
+breast. Likewise Strucophagi, and naked Ganphasantes: Satyrs also, which
+haue nothing of men but onely shape. Moreouer Oripei, great hunters.
+Mennones also and the region of Smyrmophora, which bringeth foorth myrrhe.
+After these is the region of Azania, in the which many Elephants are found.
+A great part of the other regions of Africke that are beyond the
+Aequinoctiall line, are now ascribed to the kingdome of Melinde, whose
+inhabitants are accustomed to trafique with the nations of Arabia, and
+their king is ioyned in friendship with the king of Portugal, and payeth
+tribute to Prester Iohn.
+
+The other Ethiope, called Æthiopia interior (that is) the inner Ethiope, is
+not yet knowne for the greatnesse thereof, but onely by the sea coastes:
+yet is it described in this manner. First from the Aequinoctiall toward the
+South, is a great region of Aethiopians, which bringeth forth white
+Elephants, Tygers, and the beastes called Rhinocerotes. Also a region that
+bringeth foorth plenty of cynamome, lying betweene the branches of Nilus.
+Also the kingdome of Habech or Habasi, a region of Christian men, lying
+both on this side and beyond Nilus. Here are also the Aethiopians, called
+Ichthiopagi (that is) such as liue onely by fish, and were sometimes
+subdued by the warres of great Alexander. Furthermore the Aethiopians
+called Rhapsij, and Anthropophagi, that are accustomed to eat mans flesh,
+inhabite the regions neere vnto the mountains called Montes Lunæ (that is)
+the mountaines of the Moone. Gazati is vnder the Tropike of Capricorne.
+After this followeth the front of Afrike, the Cape of Buena Speranza, or
+Caput Bonæ Spei, that is, the Cape of good hope, by the which they passe
+that saile from Lisbon to Calicut. But by what names the Capes and gulfes
+are called, forasmuch as the same are in euery globe and card, it were here
+superfluous to rehearse them.
+
+Some write that Africa was so named by the Grecians, because it is without
+colde. For the Greeke letter Alpha or A signifies priuation, voyd, or
+without: and Phrice signifies colde. For in deed although in the stead of
+Winter they haue a cloudy and tempestuous season, yet is it not colde, but
+rather smothering hote, with hote showres of raine also, and somewhere such
+scorching windes, that what by one meanes and other, they seeme at certaine
+times to liue as it were in fornaces, and in maner already halfe way in
+Purgatorie or hell. Gemma Phrisius writeth, that in certaine parts of
+Africa, as in Atlas the greater, the aire in the night season is seene
+shining, with many strange fires and flames rising in maner as high as the
+Moone: and that in the element are sometime heard as it were the sound of
+pipes, trumpets and drummes: which noises may perhaps be caused by the
+vehement and sundry motions of such firie exhalations in the aire, as we
+see the like in many experiences wrought by fire, aire and winde.
+[Sidenote: The middle region of the aire is cold.] The hollowness also, and
+diuers reflexions and breaking of the cloudes may be great causes hereof,
+beside the vehement colde of the middle region of the aire, whereby the
+said fiery exhalations, ascending thither, are suddenly stricken backe with
+great force: for euen common and dayly experience teacheth vs, by the
+whissing of a burning torch, what noise fire maketh in the aire, and much
+more where it striueth when it is inclosed with aire, as appeareth in
+gunnes, and as the like is seene in onely aire inclosed, as in Organ pipes,
+and such other instruments that go by winde. [Sidenote: The strife of
+Elements. Winde.] For winde (as say the Philosophers) is none other then
+aire vehemently moued, as we see in a paire of bellowes, and such other.
+
+[Sidenote: The heate of the Moone.] Some of our men of good credite that
+were in this last voiage to Guinea, affirme earnestly that in the night
+season they felt a sensible heat to come from the beames of the moone.
+[Sidenote: The nature of the starres.] The which thing, although it be
+strange and insensible to vs that inhabite cold regions, yet doeth it stand
+with good reason that it may so be, forasmuch as the nature of starres and
+planets (as writeth Plinie) consisteth of fire, and conteineth in it a
+spirit of fire, which cannot be without heat.
+
+And, that the Moone giueth heate vpon the earth the Prophet Dauid seemeth
+to confirme in his 121. Psalme, where speaking of such men as are defended
+from euil by Gods protection, hee saith thus: Per diem Sol non exuret te,
+nec Luna per noctem. That is to say, In the day the Sunne shall not burne
+thee, nor the Moone by night.
+
+They say furthermore, that in certaine places of the sea they saw certaine
+streames of water, which they call spouts, falling out of the aire into the
+sea, and that some of these are as bigge as the great pillars of Churches:
+insomuch that sometimes they fall into shippes, and put them in great
+danger of drowning. Some faine that these should be the Cataracts of
+heauen, which were all opened at Noes floud. But I thinke them rather to be
+such fluxions and eruptions as Aristotle in his booke de Mundo saith, to
+chance in the sea. For speaking of such strange things as are seene often
+times in the sea, he writeth thus. Oftentimes also euen in the sea are
+seene euaporations of fire, and such eruptions and breaking foorth of
+springs, that the mouthes of riuers are opened. Whirlepooles, and fluxions
+are caused of such other vehement motions, not only in the middest of the
+sea, but also in creeks and streights. At certaine times also, a great
+quantity of water is suddenly lifted vp and carried about with the Moone,
+&c. By which wordes of Aristotle it doth appeare that such waters be lifted
+vp in one place at one time, and suddenly fall downe in an other place at
+another time. [Sidenote: A strange thing.] And hereunto perhaps perteineth
+it that Richard Chancellor told me that he heard Sebastian Cabot report,
+that (as farre as I remember) either about the coasts of Brasile or Rio de
+Plata, his shippe or pinnesse was suddenly lifted from the sea, and cast
+vpon land, I wot not howe farre. [Sidenote: The power of nature.] The which
+thing, and such other like wonderfull and strange workes of nature while I
+consider, and call to remembrance the narrownesse of mans vnderstanding and
+knowledge, in comparison of her mightie power, I can but cease to maruell
+and confesse with Plinie, that nothing is to her impossible, the least part
+of whose power is not yet knowen to men. Many things more our men saw and
+considered in this voyage, woorthy to be noted, whereof I haue thought good
+to put some in memory, that the reader may aswell take pleasure in the
+variety of things, as knowledge of the historie. Among other things,
+therefore touching the maners and nature of the people, this may seeme
+strange, that their princes and noble men vse to pounce and rase their
+skinnes with pretie knots in diuers formes, as it were branched damaske,
+thinking that to be a decent ornament. [Sidenote: Fine iewels. A bracelet.]
+And albeit they goe in maner all naked, yet are many of them, and
+especially their women, in maner laden with collars, bracelets, hoopes, and
+chaines, either of gold, copper, or iuory. I my selfe haue one of their
+brassets of Iuory, weighing two pound and sixe ounces of Troy weight, which
+make eight and thirtie ounces: this one of their women did weare vpon her
+arme. It is made of one whole piece of the biggest part of the tooth,
+turned and somewhat carued, with a hole in the midst, wherein they put
+their handes to wear it on their arme. Some haue on euery arme one, and as
+many on their legges, wherewith some of them are so galled, that although
+they are in maner made lame thereby, yet will they by no meanes leaue them
+off. Some weare also on their legges great shackles of bright copper, which
+they thinke to bee no lesse comely. They weare also collars, bracelets,
+garlands, and girdles, of certain blew stones like beads. Likewise some of
+their women weare on their bare armes certaine foresleeues made of the
+plates of beaten golde. On their fingers also they weare rings, made of
+golden wires, with a knot or wreath, like vnto that which children make in
+a ring of a rush. Among other things of golde that our men bought of them
+for exchange of their wares, were certaine dog-chaines and collers.
+
+They are very wary people in their bargaining, and will not lose one sparke
+of golde of any value. They vse weights and measures, and are very
+circumspect in occupying the same. They that shall haue to doe with them,
+must vse them gently: for they will not trafique or bring in any wares if
+they be euill vsed. At the first voyage that our men had into these
+parties, it so chanced, that at their departure from the first place where
+they did trafick, one of them either stole a muske Cat, or tooke her away
+by force, not mistrusting that that should haue hindered their bargaining
+in another place whither they intended to goe. But for all the haste they
+coulde make with full sailes, the fame of their misusage so preuented them,
+that the people of that place also, offended thereby, would bring in no
+wares: insomuch that they were inforced either to restore the Cat, or pay
+for her at their price before they could trafique there.
+
+Their houses are made of foure postes or trees, and couered with boughes.
+
+Their common feeding is of roots, and such fishes as they take, whereof
+they haue great plenty.
+
+There are also such flying fishes as are seene in the sea of the West
+Indies. Our men salted of their fishes, hoping to prouide store thereof:
+but they would take no salt, and must therefore be eaten forthwith as some
+say. Howbeit other affirme, that if they be salted immediately after they
+be taken, they wil last vncorrupted ten or twelue dayes. But this is more
+strange, that part of such flesh as they caried with them out of England,
+which putrified there, became sweete againe at their returne to the clime
+of temperate regions.
+
+They vse also a strange making of bread, in this maner. They grinde
+betweene two stones with their handes as much corne as they thinke may
+suffice their family, and when they haue thus brought it to floure, they
+put thereto a certaine quantitie of water, and make thereof very thinne
+dough, which they sticke vpon some post of their houses, where it is baked
+by the heate of the Sunne: so that when the master of the house or any of
+his family will eate thereof, they take it downe and eate it.
+
+They haue very faire wheate, the eare whereof is two handfuls in length,
+and as bigge as a great Bulrush, and almost foure inches about where it is
+biggest. The stemme or straw seemeth to be almost as bigge as the litle
+finger of a mans hand, or litle lesse. The graines of this wheate are as
+big as our peason, round also, and very white, and somewhat shining, like
+pearles that haue lost their colour. Almost all the substance of them
+turneth into floure, and maketh little bran or none. I told in one eare two
+hundred and threescore graines. The eare is inclosed in three blades longer
+than it selfe, and of two inches broad a piece. And by this fruitfulnes the
+Sunne seemeth partly to recompence such griefes and molestations as they
+otherwise receiue by the feruent heate thereof. It is doubtlesse a worthy
+contemplation to consider the contrary effects of the sunne: or rather the
+contrary passions of such things as receiue the influence of his beames,
+either to their hurt or benefit. Their drinke is either water, or the iuise
+that droppeth from the cut branches of the barren Date trees, called
+Palmitos. For either they hang great gourdes at the said branches euery
+euening, and let them so hang all night, or else they set them on the
+ground vnder the trees, that the droppes may fall therein. They say that
+this kinde of drinke is in taste much like vnto whey, but somewhat sweeter,
+and more pleasant. They cut the branches euery euening, because they are
+seared vp in the day by the heate of the Sunne. They haue also great beanes
+as bigge as chestnuts, and very hard, with a shell in the stead of a huske.
+
+Many things more might be saide of the maners of the people, and of the
+wonders and monstrous things that are engendered in Africke. But it shall
+suffice to haue saide this much of such things as our men partly sawe, and
+partly brought with them.
+
+And whereas before speaking of the fruit of graines, I described the same
+to haue holes by the side (as in deede it hath, as it is brought hither)
+yet was I afterward enfourmed, that those holes were made to put stringes
+or twigges through the fruite, thereby to hang them vp to dry at the Sunne.
+They grew not past a foote and a halfe, or two foote from the ground, and
+are as red as blood when they are gathered. The graines themselues are
+called of the Phisicions Grana Paradisi.
+
+[Sidenote: Shels that cleaue to ships.] At their comming home the keeles of
+their shippes were marueilously ouergrowne with certaine shelles of two
+inches length and more, as thicke as they could stand, and of such bignesse
+that a man might put his thumbe in the mouthes of them. They certainely
+affirme that in these there groweth a certaine slimie substance, which at
+the length slipping out of the shell and falling in the sea, becommeth
+those foules which we call Barnacles. The like shelles haue bene seene in
+ships returning from Iseland, but these shels were not past halfe an inch
+in length. Of the other that came from Guinea, I sawe the Primerose lying
+in the docke, and in maner couered with the said shels, which in my
+iudgement should greatly hinder her sayling. Their ships were also in many
+places eaten with the wormes called Bromas or Bissas, whereof mention is
+made in the Decades. These creepe betweene the plankes, which they eate
+through in many places.
+
+[Sidenote: A secret.] Among other things that chanced to them in this
+voyage, this is worthy to be noted, that whereas they sailed thither in
+seuen weekes, they could returne in no lesse space then twentie weekes. The
+cause whereof they say to be this: That about the coast of Cabo Verde the
+winde is euer at the East, by reason whereof they were enforced to saile
+farre out of their course into the maine Ocean, to finde the winde at the
+West to bring them home. [Sidenote: The death of our men.] There died of
+our men at this last voyage about twentie and four, whereof many died at
+their returne into the clime of the colde regions, as betweene the Islands
+of Azores and England. [Sidenote: Fiue blacke Moores brought into England.
+Colde may be better abiden then heate.] They brought with them certaine
+black slaues, whereof some were tall and strong men, and could wel agree
+with our meates and drinkes. The colde and moyst aire doth somewhat offend
+them. Yet doubtlesse men that are borne in hot Regions may better abide
+colde, then men that are borne in colde Regions may abide heate, forasmuch
+as vehement heate resolueth the radicall moysture of mens bodies, as colde
+constraineth and preserueth the same.
+
+This is also to be considered as a secret worke of nature, that throughout
+all Africke, vnder the Æquinoctial line, and neere about the same on both
+sides, the regions are extreeme hote, and the people very blacke. Whereas
+contrarily such regions of the West Indies as are vnder the same line are
+very temperate, and the people neither blacke, nor with curlde and short
+wooll on their heads, as they of Afrike haue, but of the colour of an
+Oliue, with long and blacke heare on their heads: the cause of which
+variety is declared in diuers places in the Decades.
+
+It is also worthy to be noted that some of them that were at this voyage
+told me: That is, that they ouertooke the course of the Sunne, so that they
+had it North from them at noone, the 14. day of March. And to haue said
+thus much of these voyages, it may suffice.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The first voyage made by Master William Towrson Marchant of London, to the
+  coast of Guinea, with two Ships, in the yeere 1555.
+
+Vpon Munday the thirtieth day of September wee departed from the Isle of
+Wight, out of the hauen of Neuport with two good shippes, the one called
+the Hart, the other the Hinde, both of London, and the Masters of them were
+Iohn Ralph, and William Carter, for a voyage to bee made vnto the Riuer de
+Sestos in Guinea, and to other hauens thereabout.
+
+It fell out by the varietie of windes, that it was the fourteenth day of
+October before wee coulde fetch Dartmouth: and being there arriued wee
+continued in that roade sixe dayes, and the 20. of October we warpt out of
+the hauen, and set saile, directing our course towards the Southwest, and
+the next morning we were runne by estimation thirty leagues.
+
+The first of Nouember we found our selues to be in 31. degrees of latitude
+by the reckoning of our Master. This day we ranne about 40. leagues also.
+
+The second day we ranne 36. leagues.
+
+The third day we had sight of Porto Santo, which is a small Island lying in
+the sea, about three leagues long, and a league and a halfe broad, and is
+possessed by Portugals. It riseth as we came from the Northnorthwest like
+two small hilles neere together. The East end of the same Island is a high
+land like a saddle with a valley, which makes it to beare that forme. The
+West ende of it is lower with certaine small round hillocks. This Island
+lieth in thirty and three degrees. The same day at 11. of the clocke we
+raysed the Isle of Madera, which lieth 12. leagues from Porto Santo,
+towards the Southwest: that Island is a faire Island and fruitfull, and is
+inhabited by Portugals, it riseth afarre off like a great whole land and
+high. By three of the clocke this day at after noone we were thwart of
+Porto Santo, and we set our course Southwest, to leaue the Isle of Madera
+to the Eastward, as we did Porto Santo. These two Islands were the first
+land that we saw since wee left the coast of England. About three of the
+clocke after midnight wee were thwart of Madera, within three leagues of
+the West ende of it, and by meanes of the high hilles there, we were
+becalmed: We suppose we ranne this day and night 30. leagues.
+
+The fourth day we lay becalmed vnder thejsle of Madera, vntill one of the
+clocke at afternoone, and then, the winde comming into the East, wee went
+our course, and ranne that day fifteene leagues.
+
+The 5. day we ranne 15. leagues more.
+
+The 6. day in the morning we raysed the Isle of Tenerif, otherwise called
+the Pike, because it is a very high Island, with a pike vpon the top like a
+loafe of suger. The same night we raised the Isle of Palma, which is a high
+land also, and to the Westward of the Isle of Tenerif.
+
+The 7. day we perceiued the Isle of Gomera, which is an Island standing
+betwixt Tenerif and Palma, about 12. leagues Eastward from Palma, and 8.
+leagues Westward from Tenerif: and for feare of being becalmed with the
+Isle of Tenerif, we left both it, and Gomera to the Eastward of vs, and
+went betwixt Palma and Gomera. We ranne this day and night 30. leagues.
+
+Note that these Islands be 60. leagues from Madera, and that there are 3
+Islands more to the Westward of Tenerif, named the Grand Canaria,
+Forte-ventura, and Lancerot, of which Island we came not in sight: they
+being inhabited by Spaniards.
+
+This day also we had sight of the Isle of Ferro, which is to the Southwards
+13. leagues from the other Islands, and is possessed by Spaniards. All this
+day and night by reason of the winde we could not double the point of the
+Isle of Ferro, except we would haue gone to the Westward of it, which had
+bene much out of our course: therefore we kept about, and ranne backe fiue
+houres Eastnortheast to the ende we might double it vpon the next boord,
+the winde continuing Southeast, which hath not bene often seene vpon that
+coast by any traueilers: for the winde continueth there for the most part
+Northeast, and East Northeast: so vpon the other boord by the next morning
+we were in a maner with the Island, and had roome ynough to double the
+same.
+
+The 8. day we kept our course as neere the winde as wee could, because that
+our due course to fetch the coast of Barbary was Southeast and by East, but
+by the scant winde we could not goe our due course, but went as neere it as
+we could, and ranne this day and night 25. leagues.
+
+The 9. day we ranne 30. leagues, the 10. 25. leagues, the 12. 24.
+
+The 12. day we saw a saile vnder our Lee, which was as we thought a
+fishermen, so that wee went roome to haue spoken with him, but within one
+houre there fell such a fogge, that wee could not see the shippe nor one of
+vs the other: we shot off diuers pieces to the Hinde, but she heard them
+not: at afternoone she shot off a piece which wee heard, and made her
+answere with another: and within one halfe houre after the fogge brake vp,
+and we were within 4. leagues of the shoare vpon the coast of Barbary, and
+wee sounded and had 14. fadom water. The Barke also came roome with vs and
+their ankered by reason of the contrary winde. When we fell with the land,
+we could not iudge iustly what part of the land it was, because the most
+part of that coast is lowe land, and no part to be iudged of it but the
+fore part of the shoare, which is white like chalke or sand, and very deepe
+vnto the hard shoare: there immediatly we began to fish, and found great
+store of a kinde of fish which the Portugals commonly fish for vpon that
+coast, which they cal Pergosses, the Frenchmen call them Saders, and our
+men salt-water breames. Before the clearing vp of the fogge, the shippe
+which we followed shaped such a course that we could see her no more, by
+reason of our shooting off to finde the Hinde againe. This part of the
+coast of Barbary, by our Pilots reckoning, is about 16. leagues to the
+Eastwards of the riuer del Oro.
+
+The 13. day in the afternoone wee spyed a saile comming towards vs, which
+wee iudged to be the saile that wee sawe the day before, and as soone as we
+spied him, wee caused the Hinde to way her ancre and to goe towardes him,
+and manned out our Skiffe in like case to lay him aboorde, or to discerne
+what hee was, and wee our selues within halfe an houre after wayed also:
+but after the saile had espied vs, hee kept about, and turned backe againe,
+and shortly after there fell such another fogge, that wee coulde not see
+him: which fogges continued all that night, so that wee were constrained to
+leaue the chase. This afternoone the winde came about, and wee went our
+course Southwest and by West, to goe cleare off the coast, wee ranne that
+night sixteene leagues.
+
+The foureteenth day in the morning was verie foggie: but about twelue a
+clocke wee espied a Caruell of 60. tunne which was fishing, and we sent our
+Skiffe to him with fiue men, and all without any weapon sauing their Oares.
+[Sidenote: A Caruell taken.] The Caruell for haste let slippe her ancre,
+and set saile; and they seeing that, fearing that they should not fetch
+her, would tarry for no weapons, and in the ende ouertooke the Caruel, and
+made her to strike saile, and brought her away, although they had
+foureteene or fifteene men aboord, and euery man his weapon, but they had
+not the hearts to resist our men. After they were come to vs, they let fall
+their ancre, for wee had cast ancre because the winde was not good: I
+caused then the Skiffe to come for mee, and I went aboorde of them to see
+that no harme should bee done to them, nor to take any thing but that which
+they might spare vs for our money. [Sidenote: Great store of fish vpon the
+coast of Barbary.] So wee tooke of them 3. Tapnets of figges, two small
+pots of oyle, two pipes of water, foure hogsheads of saltfish which they
+had taken vpon the coast, and certaine fresh fish which they did not
+esteeme, because there is such store vpon that coast, that in an houre and
+sometime lesse, a man may take as much fish as will serue twentie men a
+day. For these things, and for some wine which wee dranke aboord of them,
+and three or foure great Cannes which they sent aboord of our shippes, I
+payed them twentie and seuen Pistoles, which was twise as much as they
+willingly would haue taken: and so let them goe to their ancre and cable
+which they had let slippe, and got it againe by our helpe. After this wee
+set saile, but the winde caused vs to ancre againe about twelue leagues off
+the riuer del Oro, as the Portugals tolde vs. There were fiue Caruels more
+in this place, but when they sawe vs, they made all away for feare of vs.
+
+The 15. day we ridde still because of the winde.
+
+[Sidenote: The Tropike of Cancer in 23. and a halfe.] The 16. day we set
+saile and ranne our course 40. leagues. This day, by the reckoning of our
+Pilots, we were right vnder the Tropike of Cancer. The 17. we ranne 25.
+leagues within sight for the most part of the coast of Barbary.
+
+The 18. day wee ranne thirtie leagues, and at twelue of the clocke by the
+reckoning of our Pilots we were thwart of Cape Blanke.
+
+The 22. day our Pilots reckoned vs to be thwart Cape Verde.
+
+[Sidenote: The coast of Guinea.] The 12. day of December we had sight of
+land of Guinea, which as soone as we saw we halled into the land Northeast,
+and about 12. of the clocke at night we were neere the shoare within lesse
+then 2. leagues: and then we kept about and sounded, and found 18. fadom
+water. Afterwards we saw a light towards the shoare, which we thought to
+haue bene a ship, and thereby iudged it to be the riuer de Sestos, which
+light as soone as we espied, we came to an anker and armed our tops, and
+made all things ready to fight, because we doubted that it might be some
+Portugal or French man: this night we remained at an anker, but in the
+morning we saw no man, only we espied 4. rockes about 2. English miles from
+vs, one great rocke, and the 3. other smal ones, which when we sawe, we
+supposed that the light came from the shore, and so wayed, and set saile
+East Southeast along the shoare, because the Master did not well know the
+place, but thought that we were not so farre to the East as the riuer de
+Sestos.
+
+This land all along is a low land, and full of very high trees all along
+the shoare, so that it is not possible to know the place that a man doth
+fall withall, except it be by the latitude. In these 24. houres I thinke we
+ran 16. leagues, for all the night we had a great gale as we were vnder
+saile, and had withall store of thunder and lightnings.
+
+The 13. day for the most part we ran East Southeast all along the shoare,
+within two leagues alwayes of the same, and found the land all as at the
+first, ful of woods and great rocks hard aboord the shoare, and the billow
+beating so sore, that the seas brake vpon the shoare as white as snow, and
+the water mounted so high that a man might easily discerne it 4. leagues
+off, in such wise that no boate could land there. Thus we ran vntil 12. of
+the clocke, and then they tooke the Sunne and after iudged themselues to be
+24. leagues past the riuer de Sestos to the Eastwards, by reason whereof we
+halled into the shoare within two English miles, and there ancred and found
+fifteene fadom water, and all off from the shoare the sea so smooth, that
+we might wel haue rid by an Hawser. All that after-noone we trimmed our
+boate and made her a saile, to the ende that she might go along by the
+shoore to seeke some place to water in: for wee could not goe back againe
+to the riuer de Sestos, because the winde blowes alwayes contrary, and the
+Currant runneth alwayes to the Eastwards, which was also against vs.
+
+The 14. day we set saile and went back againe along the coast, and sent our
+boats hard aboord the shoare to seeke a watering place, which they found
+about 12. of the clock, and we being farre into the sea, met with diuers
+boats of the Countrey, small, long and narrow, and in euery boate one man
+and no more: we gaue them bread which they did eat, and were very glad of
+it. About 4. of the clocke our boats came to vs with fresh water: and this
+night we ankered against a Riuer.
+
+The 15. day we wayed and set saile to goe neere the shoare, and with our
+leade wee sounded all the way, and found sometimes rockes, and sometimes
+faire ground, and at the shallowest found 7. fadoms alwayes at the least.
+So in fine we found 7. fadom and a halfe within an English mile of the
+shoare, and there we ankered in a maner before the mouth of the Riuer, and
+then wee sent our boats into the Riuer for water, which went about a mile
+within the Riuer, where they had very good water. [Sidenote: Riuer S.
+Vincent.] This Riuer lieth by estimation 8. leagues beyond the Riuer de
+Sestos, and is called in the Carde Riuer S. Vincent, but it is so hard to
+finde, that a boat being within halfe a mile of it shall not be able to
+discerne that it is a Riuer: by reason that directly before the mouth of it
+there lyeth a ledge of rockes, which is much broader then the Riuer, so
+that a boate must runne in along the shoare a good way betwixt the rockes
+and the shoare before it come to the mouth of the Riuer, and being within
+it, it is a great Riuer and diuers other Riuers fall into it: The going
+into it is somewhat ill, because that at the entring the seas doe goe
+somewhat high, but being once within it, it is as calme as the Thames.
+
+[Sidenote: Cloth made of the barke of trees.] There are neere to the sea
+vpon this Riuer diuers inhabitants, which are mighty bigge men and go al
+naked except some thing before their priuie parts, which is like a clout
+about a quarter of a yard long made of the barke of trees, and yet it is
+like a cloth: for the barke is of that nature, that it will spin small
+after the maner of linnen. [Sidenote: The Negroes race their skinnes.] Some
+of them also weare the like vpon their heades being painted with diuers
+colours, but the most part of them go bare headed, and their heads are
+clipped and shorne of diuers sorts, and the most part of them haue their
+skin of their bodies raced with diuers workes, in maner of a leather
+Ierkin. The men and women goe so alike, that one cannot know a man from a
+woman but by their breastes, which in the most part be very foule and long,
+hanging downe like the vdder of a goate.
+
+The same morning we went into the Riuer with our Skiffe, and caried
+certaine basons, manels, &c. [Sidenote: Graines of Guinea.] And there we
+tooke that day one hogs-head and 100 li. waight of Graines, and two
+Elephants teeth at a reasonable good reckoning. We solde them both basons,
+and Manellios, and Margarits, but they desired most to haue basons: For the
+most part of our basons wee had by estimation about 30. li. for a piece,
+and for an Elephants tooth of 30. li. waight, we gaue them 6.
+
+The 16. day in the morning we went into the riuer with our Skiffe, and
+tooke some of euery sort of our marchandize with vs, and shewed it to the
+Negroes, but they esteemed it not, but made light of it, and also of the
+basons, Manellios and Margarits, which yesterday they did buy: howbeit for
+the basons they would haue giuen vs some graines, but to no purpose, so
+that this day wee tooke not by estimation aboue one hundreth pound waight
+of Graines, by meanes of their Captaine, who would suffer no man to sell
+any thing but through his hands, and at his price: he was so subtile, that
+for a bason hee would not giue 15. pound waight of Graines, and sometimes
+would offer vs smal dishfuls whereas before wee had baskets full, and when
+he saw that wee would not take them in contentment, the Captaine departed,
+and caused all the rest of the boates to depart, thinking belike that wee
+would haue followed them, and haue giuen them their owne askings.
+[Sidenote: The description of their townes and houses.] But after that we
+perceiued their fetch, wee wayed our Grapnel and went away, and then wee
+went on land into a small Towne to see the fashions of the Countrey, and
+there came a threescore of them about vs, and at the first they were afraid
+of vs, but in the end perceiuing that wee did no hurt, they would come to
+vs and take vs by the hand and be familiar with vs, and then we went into
+their Townes, which were like to twentie small houels, all couered ouer
+with great leaues and baggage, and all the sides open, and a scaffolde
+vnder the house about a yarde high, where they worke many pretie things of
+the barkes of trees, and there they lye also. In some of their houses they
+worke yron and make faire dartes, and diuers other things to worke their
+boates, and other things withall, and the women worke as well as the men.
+But when wee were there diuers of the women to shew vs pleasure danced and
+sung after their maner, full ill to our eares. Their song was thus:
+
+    Sakere, sakere, ho, ho. Sakere, sakore, ho, ho.
+
+And with these words they leape and dance, and clap their hands. Beastes we
+could see none that they had, but two goates, small dogges, and small
+hennes: other beastes we saw none. After that we had well marked all things
+we departed and went aboord our ships: which thing the Captaine of the
+other towne perceiuing, sent two of his seruants in a boat with a basket of
+Graines, and made vs signes that if when wee had slept wee would come
+againe into their riuer, wee should haue store of Graines, and so shewed vs
+his Graines and departed.
+
+The 17. day in the morning because we thought that the Negroes would haue
+done something because the Captaine sent for vs, I required the Master to
+goe on shoare, and sent the rest of our Marchants with him, and taried
+aboord my selfe by reason that the last day he esteemed our things so
+litle: so when the Master and the rest came into the riuer, the captaine
+with diuers others came to them, and brought Graines with them, and after
+that he saw that I was not there, he made signes to know where I was, and
+they made signes to him againe that I was in the ships: [Sidenote: Diago
+the name of a Captaine.] and then hee made signes to know who was Captaine
+by name of Diago, for so they call their Captaine, and they pointed to the
+master of the ship: then he began to shew his Graines, but he held them so
+vnreasonably, that there was no profit to be made of them: which things the
+Master perceiuing, and seeing that they had no store of Graines, came away,
+and tooke not aboue 50. pound waight of Graines. Then he went a shoare to
+the litle Towne where we were the day before, and one of them plucked a
+Gourd, wherewith the Negroes were offended, and came many of them to our
+men with their darts and great targets, and made signes to them to depart:
+which our men did, hauing but one bow and two or three swords, and went
+aboord the boate and came away from them: and assoone as they were come
+aboord we wayed and set saile, but the winde was off the Sea, so that we
+could not get out cleare of certaine rocks, and therefore we came to an
+ancre againe.
+
+[Sidenote: The latitude of S. Vincent riuer is 4. degrees and a halfe.]
+This riuer is called Riuer S. Vincent, standing in 4. degrees and a halfe,
+and ebbeth and floweth there every 12. houres, but not much water when it
+ebbeth the most: while wee were there, it ebbeth one fadome and a halfe
+water.
+
+[Sidenote: Leaues of exceeding length.] This countrey as farre as we could
+perceiue is altogether woody, and al strange trees, whereof wee knewe none,
+and they were of many sorts, with great leaues like great dockes, which bee
+higher then any man is able to reach the top of them.
+
+[Sidenote: Long pease stalkes.] There are certaine peason by the Sea side,
+which grow vpon great and very long stalkes, one of the stalkes I measured
+and found it 27. paces long, and they grow vpon the sand like to trees, and
+that so neere the Sea, that sometimes the Sea floweth into the woods as we
+might perceiue by the water markes.
+
+[Sidenote: Long womens breasts.] The trees and all things in this place
+grow continually greene. Diuers of the women haue such exceeding long
+breasts, that some of them wil lay the same vpon the ground and lie downe
+by them, but all the women haue not such breasts.
+
+At this place all the day the winde bloweth off the Sea, and all the night
+off the land, but wee found it to differ sometimes, which our Master
+marueiled at.
+
+This night at 9. of the clocke the winde came vp at the East, which
+ordinarily about that time was wont to come out of the North Northwest off
+the shoare: yet we wayed and halled off South with that winde all night
+into the Sea, but the next morning we halled in againe to the lande, and
+tooke in 6. Tunnes of water for our ship, and I thinke the Hinde tooke in
+as much.
+
+I could not perceiue that here was any gold, or any other good thing: for
+the people be so wilde and idle, that they giue themselues to seeke out
+nothing: if they would take paines they might gather great store of
+graines, but in this place I could not perceiue two Tunne.
+
+There are many foules in the Countrey, but the people will not take the
+paines to take them.
+
+I obsetued some of their words of speach, which I thought good here to set
+downe.
+
+  Bezow, bezow,                  Is their salutation.
+  Manegete afoye,                Graines ynough.
+  Crocow, afoye,                 Hennes ynough.
+  Zeramme, afoye,                Haue ynough.
+  Begge sacke                    Giue me a knife.
+  Begge come,                    Giue me bread
+  Borke,                         Holde your peace.
+  Coutrecke.                     Ye lye.
+  Veede,                         Put foorth, or emptie.
+  Brekeke,                       Rowe.
+  Diago,                         Their Captaine, and some
+                                   call him Dabo.
+
+These and other wordes they speake very thicke, and oftentimes recite one
+word three times together, and at the last time longer then at the two
+first.
+
+The 18. day towards night, as we were sailing along the coast, we met with
+certaine boats in the sea, and the men shewed vs that there was a riuer
+thwart of vs, where there were Graines to be sold, but we thought it not
+good to tary there, least the other ships should get before vs. This riuer
+hath lying before it three great rockes, and 5. small rocks, one great
+tree, and a little tree right by the riuer, which in height exceeded all
+the rest: we halled this night along the coast 16. leagues.
+
+The 19. day as we coasted the shoare, about twelue of the clocke there came
+out to vs 3. boates to tell vs that they had graines, and brought some with
+them for a shew, but we could not tary there. We proceeded along the coast,
+and ancred by the shore all the night, and ran this day 10. leagues.
+
+The 20. day the Hinde hauing ankered by vs amongst rockes, and foule
+gronnd, lost a small anker. At noone, as we passed along the coast, there
+came forth a Negro to vs, making signes, that if we would goe a shoare, wee
+should haue Graines, and where wee ankered at night, there came another to
+vs, and brought Graines, and shewed vs them, and made signes that wee
+should tary, and made a fire vpon the land in the night, meaning thereby to
+tell vs where we should land, and so they did in diuers other places vpon
+the coast, where they saw vs to anker. [Sidenote: The tides and nature of
+the shore.] In al the places where we haue ancred, since we came from our
+watring place, we haue found the tide alwayes running to the Westwards, and
+all along the coast many rockes hard aboord the shoare, and many of them a
+league off the shoare or more, we ran this day 12. leagues.
+
+The 21 day, although we ranne all day with a good gale of winde, yet the
+tides came so sore out of the coast, that we were not able to runne aboue
+sixe leagues: and this day there came some Negroes to vs, as there had done
+other times.
+
+The 22. wee ranne all day and night to double a point, called Das Palmas,
+and ranne sixteene leagues.
+
+The 23. day about 3. of the clocke we were thwart of the point, and before
+we came to the Westermost part of it, we saw a great ledge of rocks, which
+lie West from the Cape about 3. leagues and a league or more from the land.
+Shortly after we had sight of the Eastermost part of the Cape, which lieth
+4. leagues from the Westermost part, and vpon the very corner thereof lie
+two greene places, as it were closes, and to the Westwards of the Cape the
+land parted from the Cape, as it were a Bay, whereby it may well be knowen.
+Foure leagues more beyonde that there lieth a head-land in the sea, and
+about two leagues beyond the head-land there goeth in a great Bay, as it
+were a riuer, before which place we ankered all that night, which wee did,
+least in the night wee should ouerrunne a riuer where the last yeere they
+had all their Elephants teeth. [Sidenote: That was the yeere 1554.]
+
+This Cape Das palmas lieth vnder foure degrees and a halfe, and betwixt the
+said Cape, and the riuer de Sestos is the greatest store of Graines to be
+had, and being past the said Cape there is no great store else where.
+
+Where we ankered this night, we found that the tide, which before ran
+alwayes to the Westward, from this Cape runneth all to the Eastward: this
+day we ranne some 16. leagues.
+
+The 24. day running our course, about eight of the clock there came forth
+to vs certaine boats, which brought with them small egges, which were soft
+without shels, and they made vs signes, that there was within the land
+fresh water, and Goates: and the Master thinking that it was the riuer
+which we sought, cast ancker and sent the boate on shoare, with one that
+knew the riuer, and comming neere the shoare, hee perceiued that it was not
+the riuer, and so came backe againe, and went along the shoare, with their
+oares and saile, and wee weyed and ranne along the shoare also: and being
+thirteene leagues beyond the Cape, the Master perceiued a place which he
+iudged to be the riuer, when wee were in deede two miles shot past it: yet
+the boate came from the shoare, and they that were in her saide, that there
+was no riuer: notwithstanding wee came to an ancker, and the Master and I
+tooke fiue men with vs in the boat, and when hee came neere the shoare, hee
+perceiued that it was the same riuer which hee did seeke: so we rowed in,
+and found the entrance very ill, by reason that the sea goeth so high: and
+being entred, diuers boats came to vs, and shewed vs that they had
+Elephants teeth, and they brought vs one of about eight pound, and a little
+one of a pound, which we bought: then they brought certaine teeth to the
+riuer side, making signes, that if the next day we would come againe, they
+would sell vs them: so we gaue vnto two Captaines, to either of them a
+manillio, and so we departed, and came aboord, and sent out the other boate
+to another place, where certaine boats that came into the sea, made vs
+signes that there was fresh water: and being come thither, they found a
+towne, but no riuer, yet the people brought them fresh water, and shewed
+them an Elephants tooth, making signes that the next day they would sel
+them teeth, and so they came aboord.
+
+This riuer lieth by the Carde thirteene leagues from the Cape Das palmas,
+and there lieth to the Westwards of the same a rocke about a league in the
+sea, and the riuer it selfe hath a point of lande comming out into the Sea,
+whereupon grow fiue trees, which may well bee discerned two or three
+leagues off, comming from the Westward, but the riuer cannot bee perceiued
+vntill such time as a man be hard by it, and then a man may perceiue a
+litle Towne on ech side the riuer, and to ech Towne there belongeth a
+Captaine. The riuer is but small, but the water is good and fresh.
+
+Two miles beyond the riuer, where the other towne is, there lieth another
+point into the Sea, which is greene like a close, and not aboue sixe trees
+vpon it, which growe one of them from the other, whereby the coast may well
+be knowen: for along all the coast that we haue hitherto sailed by, I haue
+not seene so much bare land.
+
+In this place, and three or foure leagues to the Westward of it, al along
+the shoare, there grow many Palme trees, whereof they make their wine de
+Palma. These trees may easily be knowen almost two leagues off, for they be
+very high and white bodied, and streight, and be biggest in the midst: they
+haue no boughes, but onely a round bush in the top of them: and at the top
+of the same trees they boare a hoale, and there they hang a bottell, and
+the iuyce of the tree runneth out of the said hole into the bottle, and
+that is their wine.
+
+From the Cape das Palmas, to the Cape Tres puntas, there are 100. leagues:
+and to the port where we purpose to make sales of our cloth beyond the Cape
+Tres puntas, 40. leagues.
+
+Note, that betwixt the riuer De Sestos, and the Cape Das palmas, is the
+place where all the graines be gathered.
+
+The language of the people of this place, as far as I could perceiue,
+differeth not much from the language of those which dwel where we watred
+before: but the people of this place be more gentle in nature then the
+other, and goodlier men: their building and apparel is all one with the
+others.
+
+Their desire in this place was most of all to haue Manillios and
+Margarites: as for the rest of our things, they did litle esteeme them.
+
+[Sidenote: Their maner of swearing by the water of the Sea.] About nine of
+the clocke there came boates to vs foorth, from both of the places
+aforsaid, and brought with them certaine teeth, and after they had caused
+me to sweare by the water of the Sea that I would not hurt them, they came
+aboord our ship three or foure of them, and we gaue them to eate of all
+such things as we had, and they did eate and drinke of all things, as well
+as we our selues. Afterwards we bought all their teeth, which were in
+number 14. and of those 14. there were 10. small: afterwards they departed,
+making vs signes that the next day we should come to their Townes.
+
+[Sidenote: Two townes.] The 26. day because we would not trifle long at
+this place I required the Master to goe vnto one of the townes, and to take
+two of our marchants with him, and I my selfe went to the other, and tooke
+one with me, because these two townes stand three miles asunder. To these
+places we caried somewhat of euery kind of marchandize that we had: and hee
+had at the one Towne, nine teeth, which were but small, and at the other
+towne where I was, I had eleuen, which were also not bigge, and we left
+aboord with the Master certaine Manillios, wherewith he bought 12. teeth
+aboord the ship, in our absence: and hauing bought these of them, wee
+perceiued that they had no more teeth: so in that place where I was one
+brought to me a small goat, which I bought, and to the Master at the other
+place they brought fiue small hennes, which he bought also, and after that
+we saw there was nothing else to be had, we departed, and by one of the
+clocke we met aboord, and then wayed, and went East our course 18. leagues
+still within sight of land.
+
+The 28. the wind varied, and we ranne into the sea, and the winde comming
+againe off the sea, wee fell with the land againe, and the first of the
+land which we raised shewed as a great red cliffe round, but not very high,
+and to the Eastward of that another smaller red cliffe, and right aboue
+that into the land a round hammoke and greene, which we tooke to be trees.
+We ranne in these 24. houres, not aboue foure leagues.
+
+The 29. day comming neere to the shoare, we perceiued the red cliffe
+aforesaide to haue right vpon the top of it a great heape of trees, and all
+to the Westwards of it ful of red cliffes as farre as we could see, and all
+along the shoare, as well vpon the cliffes, as otherwise, full of wood:
+within a mile of the said great cliffe there is a riuer to the Eastwards,
+and no cliffes that we could see, except one small cliffe, which is hard by
+it. We ran this day and night 12. leagues.
+
+The windes that wee had in this place by the reports of the people and of
+those that haue bene there, haue not bene vsuall, but in the night, at
+North off the lande, and in the day South off the Sea, and most commonly
+Northwest, and Southwest.
+
+The 31. day we went our course by the shoare Northwards: this land is al
+along a low shoare, and full of wood, as all the coast is for the most
+part, and no rockes. This morning came out many boates which went a
+fishing, which bee greater boates then those which we sawe before, so that
+in some of them there sate 5. men, but the fashion of the boats is all one.
+In the afternoone about three of the clocke wee had sight of a Towne by the
+sea side, which our Pilots iudged to be 25. leagues to the Westwards of the
+Cape Tres puntas.
+
+The third of Ianuary in the morning we fell with the Cape Tres puntas, and
+in the night passed, as our Pilots saide, by one of the Portugals castles,
+which is 8. leagues to the Westwards of the Cape: vpon the first sight of
+the Cape wee discerned it a very high land, and all growen ouer with trees,
+and comming neere to it, we perceiued two head lands, as it were two Bayes
+betwixt them, which opened right to the Westward, and the vttermost of them
+is the Easterne Cape, there we perceiued the middle Cape, and the
+Eastermost Cape: the middle Cape standeth not aboue a league from the West
+Cape, although the Card sheweth them to be 3. leagues one from the other:
+and that middle Cape hath right before the point of it a small rocke so
+neere to it, that it cannot be discerned from the Cape, except a man be
+neere to the shoare, and upon the same Cape standeth a great heape of
+trees, and when a man is thwart the same Cape to the Eastward, there riseth
+hard by it a round greene hommoke, which commeth out of the maine.
+
+The thirde Cape is about a league beyond the middle Cape, and is a high
+land like to the other Capes, and betwixt the middle, and the thirde
+commeth out a little head or point of a land out of the maine, and diuers
+rocks hard aboord the shoare.
+
+Before we came to the Capes, being about 8. leagues off them, wee had the
+land Southeast, and by East, and being past the Capes, the land runneth in
+againe East Northeast.
+
+About two leagues beyond the farthest Cape there is a lowe glade about two
+miles long, and then the land riseth high againe, and diuers head lands
+rise one beyond another, and diuers rockes lie at the point of the first
+head-land. The middest of these Capes is the neerest to the Southwards, I
+meane, further into the sea than any of the other, so that being to the
+Eastward of it, it may be discerned farre off, and being so to the Eastward
+it riseth with two small rockes.
+
+This day we ankered for feare of ouershooting a towne called S. Iohns. Wee
+ran this day not aboue 8. leagues. In the afternoone this day there came a
+boate of the countrey from the shoare, with fiue men in her, and went along
+by vs, as we thought, to discerne our flagges, but they would not come
+neere vs, and when they had well looked vpon vs, they departed.
+
+The fourth day in the morning, sailing by the coast, we espied a ledge of
+rockes by the shoare, and to the Westwards of them two great grene hils
+ioyning together, so that betweene them it was hollow like a saddle: and
+within the said rockes the Master thought the aforenamed Towne had stoode,
+and therefore we manned our boates, and tooke with vs cloth, and other
+marchandize, and rowed ashoare, but going along by the coast, we sawe that
+there was no towne, therefore wee went aboord againe.
+
+From these two hils aforesaid, about two leagues to the Eastward, lie out
+into the Sea almost two miles a ledge of rockes, and beyond that a great
+Bay, which runneth into the North Northwestward, and the land in this place
+lieth North Northeast along the shoare: but the vttermost point of land in
+that place that we could see, lay Northeast, and by East from vs.
+
+After that we were with a small gale of winde runne past that vttermost
+head-land, we sawe a great red cliffe, which the Master againe iudged to be
+the towne of S. Iohns, and then wee tooke our boate with marchandize, and
+went thither, and when we came thither, we perceiued that there was a towne
+vpon the toppe of the hill, and so wee went toward it, and when we were
+hard by it, the people of the towne came together a great sort of them, and
+waued vs to come in, with a peece of cloth, and so we went into a very
+faire Bay, which lieth to the Eastward of the cliffe, whereupon the towne
+standeth, and being within the cliffe, wee let fall our grapnell, and after
+that we had taried there a good space, they sent a boate aboord of vs, to
+shewe vs that they had golde, and they shewed us a peece about halfe a
+crowne weight, and required to know our measure, and our weight, that they
+might shewe their Captaine thereof: and wee gaue them a measure of two
+elles, and a waight of two Angels to shew vnto him, which they tooke, and
+went on shoare, and shewed it vnto their Captaine, and then they brought vs
+a measure of two elles, one quarter and a halfe, and one Crusado-weight of
+gold, making vs signes that so much they would giue for the like measure,
+and lesse they would not haue. After this, we taried there about an houre,
+and when we sawe that they would doe no otherwise, and withall vnderstood,
+that all the best places were before vs, wee departed to our shippes and
+wayed, and ranne along the shoare, and went before with our boate, and
+hauing sailed about a league, we came to a point where there lay foorth a
+ledge of rockes, like to the others before spoken of, and being past that
+people, the Master spied a place which hee saide plainely was the towne of
+Don Iohn: and the night was come vpon vs, so that we could not well
+discerne it, but we ankered as neere vnto the place as we could.
+
+[Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn.] The fift day in the morning we perceiued
+it to be the same towne in deede, and we manned our boates and went
+thither, and because that the last yeere the Portugals at that place tooke
+away a man from them, and after shot at them with great bases, and did
+beate them from the place, we let fall our grapnel almost a base shot off
+the shoare, and there we lay about two houres, and no boats came to vs.
+Then certaine of our men with the Hindes boate went into the Bay which
+lieth to the Eastward of the towne, and within that Bay they found a goodly
+fresh riuer, and afterwards they came and waued to vs also to come in,
+because they perceiued the Negroes to come downe to that place, which we
+did: and immediately the Negroes came to vs, and made vs signes that they
+had golde, but none of them would come aboord our boates, neither could we
+perceiue any boates that they had to come withall, so that we iudged that
+the Portugals had spoiled their boates, because we saw halfe of their towne
+destroyed.
+
+Wee hauing stayed there a good space, and seeing that they would not come
+to vs, thrust our boates heads a shoare, being both well appointed, and
+then the Captaine of the Towne came downe being a graue man: and he came
+with his dart in his hand, and sixe tall men after him, euery one with his
+dart and his target, and their darts were all of yron, faire and sharpe,
+and there came another after them which caried the Captaines stoole: wee
+saluted him, and put off our caps, and bowed our selues, and hee like one
+that thought well of himselfe, did not mooue his cap, nor scant bowed his
+body, and sate him downe very solemnly, vpon his stoole: but all his men
+put off their caps to vs, and bowed downe themselues.
+
+He was clothed from the loines down with a cloth of that Countrey making,
+wrapped about him, and made fast about his loynes with a girdle, and his
+cap of a certaine cloth of the Countrey also, and bare legged, and bare
+footed, and all bare aboue the loynes, except his head.
+
+His seruants, some of them had cloth about their loines, and some nothing
+but a cloth betwixt their legges, and made fast before, and behinde to
+their girdles, and cappes of their owne making, some like a basket, and
+some like a great wide purse of beasts skinnes.
+
+[Sidenote: Their weapons.] All their cloth, cordes, girdles, fishing lines,
+and all such like things which they haue, they make of the bark of certaine
+trees, and thereof they can worke things very pretily, and yron worke they
+can make very fine, of all such things as they doe occupy, as darts,
+fishhookes, hooking yrons, yron heads, and great daggers, some of them as
+long as a woodknife, which be on both sides exceeding sharpe, and bended
+after the maner of Turkie blades, and the most part of them haue hanging at
+their left side one of those great daggers.
+
+Their targets bee made of such pils as their cloth is made of, and very
+closely wrought, and they bee in forme foure square, and very great, and
+somewhat longer then they bee broad, so that kneeling downe, they make
+their targets to couer their whole body. Their bowes be short, and of a
+pretie strength, as much as a man is able to draw with one of his fingers,
+and the string is of the barke of a tree, made flat, and about a quarter of
+an inch broad: as for their arrowes, I haue not as yet seene any of them,
+for they had wrapped them vp close, and because I was busie I could not
+stand about it, to haue them open them. Their golde also they worke very
+well.
+
+When the Captaine was set, I sent him two elles of cloth, and two basons,
+and gaue them vnto him, and hee sent againe for a waight of the same
+measure, and I sent him a weight of two Angels, which he would not take,
+nether would hee suffer the towne to buy any thing, but the basons of
+brasse: so that wee solde that day 74. basons vnto the men of the towne,
+for about half an Angel weight, one with another, and nine white basons,
+which we solde for a quarter of an Angell a peece, or thereabouts.
+
+We shewed them all our other things which we had, but they did not esteeme
+them.
+
+About two of the clocke, the Captaine who did depart in the morning from
+vs, came againe, and brought with him to present mee withall, a henne, and
+two great rootes, which I receiued, and after made me signes that the
+countrey would come to his towne that night, and bring great store of gold,
+which in deed about 4. of the clocke they did: for there came about 100.
+men vnder 3. Captaines, well appointed with their darts and bowes, and when
+they came to vs, euery man sticked downe his dart vpon the shoare, and the
+Captaines had stooles brought them, and they sate downe, and sent a young
+man aboord of vs, which brought a measure with him of an ell, and one
+fourth part, and one sixteenth part, and he would haue that foure times for
+a waight of one Angell and twelue graines: I offered him two elles, as I
+had done before for two Angels weight, which he esteemed nothing, but still
+stucke at his foure measures aforesaide: yet in the ende, when it grew very
+late, and I made him signes, that I would depart, he came to foure elles
+for the weight abouesaid, and otherwise he would not deale, and so we
+departed. This day we tooke for basons sixe ounces and a halfe and one
+eight part.
+
+The sixt day in the morning we manned our boates and the skiffe well, for
+feare of the Portugals which the last yeere had taken away a man from the
+other ships, and went on shoare, and landed, because they had no boates to
+come to vs, and so the young man which was with vs the night before was
+sent aboord, who seemed to haue dealt and bargained before with the
+Portugals for he could speake a litle Portuguise, and was perfect in
+weights and measures: at his comming be offered vs, as he had done before,
+one Angell, and twelue graines for four elles, and more he would not giue,
+and made signes, that if we would not take that, we should depart, which we
+did: but before we did indeede depart, I offered him of some rotten cloth
+three elles for his waight of an Angell and twelue graines, which he would
+not take, and then we departed making signes to him that we would go away,
+as indeede we would haue done, rather then haue giuen that measure,
+although the cloth was ill, seeing we were so neere to the places, which we
+iudged to be better for sale. Then we went aboord our ships which lay about
+a league off, and came backe againe to the shoare for sand and balaste: and
+then the Captaine perceiuing that the boats had brought no marchandize but
+came onely for water and sand, and seeing that we would depart, came vnto
+them, making signes againe to know whether would we not giue the foure
+elles, and they made signes againe, that we would giue them but three, and
+when they sawe that the boates were ready to depart, they came vnto them
+and gaue them the weight of our Angell and twelue graines, which we
+required before and made signes, that if we would come againe, they would
+take three elles. So when the boates came aboord, we layde wares in them
+both, and for the speedier dispatch I and Iohn Sauill went in one boat, and
+the Maister Iohn Makeworth, and Richard Curligin, in the other, and went on
+shoare, and that night I tooke for my part fiftie and two ounces, and in
+the other boate they tooke eight ounces and a quarter, all by one weight
+and measure, and so being very late, we departed and went aboord, and took
+in all this day three pound.
+
+The seuenth day we went a shoare againe, and that day I tooke in our boate
+three pound 19 ounces, so that we dispatched almost all the cloth that we
+caried with us before noone, and then many of the people were departed and
+those that remained had litle golde, yet they made vs signes to fetch them
+some latten basons which I would not because I purposed not to trifle out
+the time, but goe thence with speede to Don Iohns towne. But Iohn Sauill
+and Iohn Makeworth were desirous to goe againe: and I, loth to hinder them
+of any profite, consented, but went not my selfe: so they tooke eighteene
+ounces of gold and came away, seeing that the people at a certaine crie
+made, were departed.
+
+While they were at the shoare, there came a young fellow which could speake
+a little Portuguise, with three more with him, and to him I solde 39 basons
+and two small white sawcers, for three ounces, &c., which was the best
+reckoning that we did make of any basons: and in the forenoone when I was
+at the shoare, the Master solde fiue basons vnto the same fellow, for halfe
+an ounce of golde.
+
+[Sidenote: 60. Portugales in the castle of Mina.] This fellow, as farre as
+we could perceiue, had bene taken into the Castle by the Portugales, and
+was gotten away from them, for he tolde vs that the Portugales were bad
+men, and that they made them slaues if they could take them, and would put
+yrons vpon their legges, and besides he tolde vs, that as many Frenchmen or
+Englishmen, as they could take (for he could name these two very well) they
+would hang them: he tolde vs further, that there were 60 men in the castle,
+and that euery yeere there came thither two shippes, one great, and one
+small caruell, and further, that Don Iohn had warres with the Portugals,
+which gaue mee the better courage to goe to his towne, which lieth not
+foure leagues from the Castle, wherehence our men were beaten the last
+yeere.
+
+[Sidenote: The English in anno 1544 tooke away 5 Negroes.] This fellowe
+came aboord our shippe without much feare, and assoone as he came, he
+demaunded, why we had not brought againe their men, which the last yeere we
+tooke away, and could tell vs that there were fiue taken away by
+Englishmen: we made him answere, that they were in England well vsed, and
+were there kept till they could speake the language, and then they should
+be brought againe to be a helpe to Englishmen in this Countrey: and then he
+spake no more of that matter:
+
+Our boates being come aboord, we wayed and set saile and a litle after
+spied, a great fire vpon the shoare, and by the light of the fire we might
+discerne a white thing, which they tooke to be the Castle, and for feare of
+ouersbooting the towne of Don Iohn we there ankered two leagues off the
+shoare, for it is hard to fetch vp a towne here, if a ship ouershoot it.
+This day we tooke seuen pound, and fiue ounces of gold.
+
+This towne lieth in a great Bay, which is very deepe.
+
+The people in this place desired most to haue basons and cloth. They would
+buy some of them also many trifles, as kniues, horsetailes, hornes: and
+some of our men going a shoare, sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, &c.
+
+They shewed vs a certain course cloth, which I thinke to be made in France,
+for it was course wooll, and a small threed, and as thicke as wosted, and
+striped with stripes of greene, white, yellow &c. Diuers of the people did
+weare about their neckes great beades of glasse of diuerse colours. Here
+also I learned some of their language, [Marginal note: This language
+seemeth partly to be corrupt.] as followeth:
+
+     Mattea, mattea,     Is their salutation.
+     Dassee, dassee,     I thanke you.
+     Sheke,              Golde.
+     Cowrte,             Cut.
+     Cracca,             Kniues.
+     Bassina,            Basons.
+     Foco, foco,         Cloth.
+     Molta,              Much, or great store.
+
+[Sidenote: Sight of the casle of Mina.] The eight day in the morning we had
+sight of the Castle, but by reason of a miste that then fell we could not
+haue the perfect sight of it, till we were almost at the towne of Don Iohn,
+and then it cleared vp, and we saw it and a white house, as it were a
+Chappell, vpon the hill about it, and then we halled into the shoare,
+within two English miles of Don Iohns towne, and there ankered in seuen
+fadome water. Here, as in many other places before, we perceiued that the
+currant went with the winde.
+
+The land here is in some places low and in some high, and full of wood
+altogether.
+
+[Sidenote: Don Iohns towne described.] The towne of Don Iohn is but litle,
+of about twentie houses, and the most part of the towne is walled in with a
+wall of a mans height, made with reede or sedge, or some such thing. Here
+we staied two or three houres after we had ankered, to see if any man would
+come vnto vs: and seeing that none did come, we manned our boates and put
+in marchandize, and went and ankered with our boates neere to the shoare:
+then they sent out a man to vs who made vs signes that that was the towne
+of Don Iohn, and that he himselfe was in the Countrey, and would be at home
+at the going downe of the Sunne, and when he had done, he required a
+reward, as the most part of them will doe which come first aboord, and I
+gaue him one ell of cloth and he departed, and that night we heard no more
+of him.
+
+The ninth day in the morning we went againe with our boates to the shoare,
+and there came foorth a boate to vs, who made signes that Don Iohn was not
+come home, but would be at home this day: and to that place also came
+another boate from the other towne a mile from this, which is called Don
+Deuis, and brought with him gold to shew vs, making signes that we should
+come thither. I then left in this place Iohn Sauill, and Iohn Makeworth,
+and tooke the Hinde, and went to the other towne and there ankered, and
+tooke cloth and went to shore with the boate, and by and by the boates came
+to vs and brought a measure of foure yards long and a halfe, and shewed vs
+a weight of an angell and twelue graines, which they would giue for so
+much, and not otherwise: so I staied and made no bargaine. And all this day
+the barke lay at Don Iohns towne, and did nothing, hauing answere that he
+was not come home.
+
+The tenth day we went againe to the shoare, and there came out a boat with
+good store of gold, and hauing driuen the matter off a long time, and
+hauing brought the measure to a nayle lesse then three elles, and their
+weight to an angell and twentie graines, and could not bring them to more,
+I did conclude with them and solde, and within one quarter of an houre I
+tooke one pound and a quarter of an ounce of golde: and then they made me
+signes to tary, till they had parted their cloth vpon the shoare as their
+manner is, and they would come againe, and so they went away, and layde the
+cloth all abroad vpon the sande peece by peece, and by and by one came
+running downe from the towne to them, and spake vnto them, and foorthwith
+euery man made as much haste as he could away, and went into the woods to
+hide his golde and his cloth: we mistrusted some knauery, and being waued
+by them to come a shoare, yet we would not, but went aboorde the Hinde, and
+perceiued vpon the hill 30 men whom we iudged to be Portugals: and they
+went vp to the toppe of the hill and there mustered and shewed themselues,
+hauing a flagge with them. Then I being desirous to knowe what the Hart
+did, tooke the Hindes boate and went towards her, and when I came neere to
+them they shot off two pieces of ordinance which I marueiled at: I made as
+much haste as I could to her, and met her boate and skiffe comming from the
+shoare in all haste, and we met aboord together. [Sidenote: The Portugales
+of the castle of Mina inuaded our men.] They shewed me that they had beene
+a shoare all that day, and had giuen to the two sonnes of Don Iohn, to
+either of them three yardes and a halfe of doth, and three basons betwixt
+them, and had deliuered him 3 yards of cloth more and the weight of an
+angell and 12 graines, and being on land did tarie for his answere, and in
+the meane time the Portugals came running from the hill vpon them, whereof
+the Negroes a litle before had giuen them warning, and bad them to go away,
+but they perceiued it not. The sonne of Don Iohn conspired with the
+Portugales against them, so that they were almost vpon them, but yet they
+recouered their boate and set off from the shoare, and the Portugales shot
+their calieuers at them, but hurt no man, and then the shippe perceiuing
+it, shot off the two peeces aforesayde among them. Hereupon we layde bases
+in both the boates, and in the Skiffe and manned them well, and went a
+shoare againe, but because of the winde we could not land, but lay off in
+the sea about ten score and shot at them, but the hill succoured them, and
+they from the rockes and from the hilles shot at vs with their halfe
+hakes, and the Negroes more for feare then for loue stoode by them to helpe
+them, and when we saw that the Negroes were in such subiction vnto them
+that they durst not sell vs any thing for feare of them we went aboord, and
+that night the winde kept at the East, so that we could not with our ship
+fetch the Hinde, but I tooke the boate in the night and went aboord the
+barke to see what was there to be done, and in the morning we perceiued the
+towne to be in like case layde with Portugales, so we wayed and went along
+the coast. [Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn de Viso.] This towne of Iohn de
+Viso standeth vpon an hill like the towne of Don Iohn, but it hath beene
+burned, so that there are not passing sixe houses in it: the most part of
+the golde that comes thither comes out of the countrey, and no doubt if the
+people durst for feare of the Portugals bring forth their gold, there would
+be had good store: but they dare not sell any thing, their subiection is so
+great to the Portugales. The 11 day running by the shoare we had sight of a
+litle towne foure leagues from the last towne that we came from, and about
+halfe a league from that, of another towne vpon a hill, and halfe a league
+from that also of another great towne vpon the shoare: whither we went to
+set what could there be done: if we could doe nothing, then to returne to
+the other towne, because we thought that the Portugales would leaue the
+towne vpon our departure. Along from the castle vnto this place are very
+high hilles which may be seene aboue all other hilles, but they are full of
+wood, and great red cliffes by the sea side. The boates of these places are
+somewhat large and bigge, for one of them will carie twelue men, but their
+forme is alike with the former boates of the coast. There are about these
+townes few riuers: their language differeth not from the language vsed at
+Don Iohns towne: but euery one can speake three or foure words of
+Portuguise, which they vsed altogether to vs.
+
+We sawe this night about 5 of the clocke 22 boates running along the shoare
+to the Westward, whereupon we suspected some knauery intended against vs.
+The 12 day therefore we set sayle and went further along the coast, and
+descried more townes wherein were greater houses then in the other townes,
+and the people came out of the townes to looke vpon vs, but we could see no
+boates. Two mile beyond the Eastermost towne are blacke rocks, which blacke
+rockes continue to the vttermost cape of the land, which is about a league
+off, and then the land runnes in Eastnortheast, and a sandy shoare againe:
+vpon these blacke rockes came downe certaine Negroes, which waued vs with a
+white flagge, but we perceiuing the principall place to be neere, would not
+stay, but bare still along the shoare: and as soone as we had opened the
+point of the land, we raysed another headland about a league off the point,
+which had a rocke lying off it into the sea, and that they thought to be
+the place which we sought. When we came thwart the place they knew it, and
+we put wares into our boate, and the ship being within halfe a mile of the
+place ankered in fiue fadome water and faire ground. We went on shoare with
+our boate, and ankered about ten of the clocke in the forenoone: we saw
+many boates lying vpon the shoare, and diuers came by vs, but none of them
+would come neere vs, being as we iudged afraid of vs: [Sidenote: Foure men
+taken away by the English.] because that foure men were taken perforce the
+last yeere from this place, so that no man came to vs, whereupon we went
+aboord againe, and thought here to haue made no saile: yet towardes night a
+great sort came downe to the water side, and waued vs on shoare with a
+white flagge, and afterwarde their Captaine came downe and many men with
+him, and sate him downe by the shoare vnder a tree: which when I perceiued,
+I tooke things with me to giue him: at last he sent a boat to call to vs,
+which would not come neere vs, but made vs signes to come againe the next
+day: but in fine, I got them to come aboord in offering them things to giue
+to their captaine, which were two elles of cloth, one latten bason, one
+white bason, a bottle, a great piece of beefe, and sixe bisket cakes, which
+they receiued making vs signes to come againe the next day, saying, that
+their Captain was Grand Capitane as appeared by those that attended vpon
+him with their darts and targets, and other weapons.
+
+This towne is very great and stands vpon a hill among trees, so that it
+cannot well be seene except a man be neere it: to the Eastward of it vpon
+the hill hard by the towne stand 2. high trees, which is a good marke to
+knowe the towne. And vnder the towne lieth another hill lower then it,
+whereupon the sea beates: and that end next the sea is all great blacke
+rockes, and beyonde the towne in a bay lieth another small towne.
+
+The 13 day in the morning we tooke our boate and went to shoare, and stayed
+till ten a clocke and no man came to vs: we went about therefore to returne
+aboord, and when the Negroes saw that, they came running downe with a
+flagge to waue vs againe, so we ankered againe, and then one shewed vs that
+the Captaine would come downe by and by: we sawe a saile in the meane time
+passe by vs but it was small, and we regarded it not. [Sidenote: The like
+they doe in the countrey of Prette Ianni.] Being on shore we made a tilt
+with our oares and sayle, and then there came a boate to vs with fiue men
+in her, who brought vs againe our bottle, and brought me a hen, making
+signes by the sunne, that within two houres the marchants of the countrey
+would come downe and buy all that we had: so I gaue them sixe Manillios to
+carry to their Captaine, and they made signes to haue a pledge of vs, and
+they would leaue vs another man: and we willing to do so, put one of our
+men in their boate, but they would not giue vs one of theirs, so we tooke
+our man againe, and there tarried for the marchants: and shortly after one
+came downe arrayed like their Captaine with a great traine after him, who
+saluted us friendly, and one of the chiefest of them went and sate downe
+vnder a tree, where the last yere the Captaine was wont to sit: and at last
+we perceiued a great many of them to stand at the ende of a hollow way, and
+behinde them the Portugales had planted a base, who suddenly shotte at vs
+but ouershot vs, and yet we were in a manner hard by them, and they shot at
+vs againe before we could ship our oares to get away but did no hurt. Then
+the Negroes came to the rocks hard by vs, and disharged calieuers at vs,
+and againe the Portugales shot off their base twise more, and then our ship
+shot at them, but the rockes and hilles defended them.
+
+[Sidenote: Master Robert Gainshes voyage to Guinea in anno 1554.] Then we
+went aboord to goe from this place, seeing the Negroes bent against vs,
+because that the last yeere M. Gainsh did take away the Captaines sonne and
+three others from this place with their golde, and all that they had about
+them: [Sidenote: The English were offered to build a towne in Guine.] which
+was the cause that they became friends with the Portugales, whom before
+they hated, as did appeare the last yeere by the courteous intertainement
+which the Trinitie had there, when the Captaine came aboord the shippe, and
+brought them to his towne, and offered them ground to build a Castle in,
+and there they had good sales.
+
+The 14 day we wayed and plyed backe againe to seeke the Hinde, which in the
+morning we met, and so we turned both back to the Eastwardes to see what we
+could doe at that place where the Trinitie did sell her eight frises the
+last yeere. The Hinde had taken eighteene ounces and a halfe more of golde
+of other Negroes, the day after that we left them. This day about one of
+the clocke we espied certaine boates vpon the sand and men by them and went
+to them with marchandizes, and tooke three ounces of gold for 18 fuffs of
+cloth, euery fuffe three yards and a halfe after one angell and 12 graines
+the fuffe, and then they made me signes that the next day I should haue
+golde enough: so the Master took the Hinde with Iohn Sauill and Iohn
+Makeworth, and went to seeke the place aforesaid, and I with Richard
+Pakeman remained in this place to see what we could do the next day: and
+when the Negroes perceiued our ship to go away, they feared that the other
+would follow, and so sent forth 2 boats to vs with 4 men in them, requiring
+vs to tary and to giue them one man for a pledge, and 2 of them should tary
+with vs for him, so Edward M. Morleis seruant seeing these men so earnest
+therein offered himselfe to be pledge, and we let him goe for two of them,
+one whereof had his waights and scales, and a chaine of golde aboute his
+necke, and another about his arme. They did eate of such things as we had
+and were well contented. In the night the Negroes kept a light vpon the
+shoare thwart of vs, and about one of the clocke we heard and saw the light
+of a base which shot off twise at the said light, and by and by discharged
+two calieuers, which in the end we perceiued to be the Portugals brigandine
+which followed vs from place to place, to giue warning to the people of the
+countrey, that they should not deale with vs.
+
+The 15 day in the morning the Captaine came downe with 100 men with him,
+and brought his wife, and many others brought their wiues also, because
+their towne was 8 miles vp in the countrey, and they determined to lie by
+the sea side till they had brought what they would. When he was come he
+sent our man aboord, and required to haue two men pledges, and he himselfe
+would come aboord, and I sent him two, of whom he tooke but one, and so
+came aboord vs, he and his wife with diuers of his friends, and brought me
+a goate and two great rootes, and I gaue him againe a latten bason, a white
+bason, 6 manillios, and a bottell of Malmesie, and to his wife a small
+casket. After this we began to make our measure and weight: and he had a
+weight of his owne which held one angell and 14 graines, and required a
+measure of 4 elles and a halfe. In fine we concluded the 8 part for one
+angell and 20 graines, and before we had done, they tooke mine owne weight
+and measure.
+
+The 16 day I tooke 8 li. 1 ounce of gold: and since the departure of the
+Hinde I heard not of her, but when our pledge went into the countrey the
+first night, he said he saw her cast anker aboue fiue leagues from this
+place. The 17 day I sold about 17 pieces of cloth, and tooke 4 li. 4 ounces
+and a halfe of gold. The 18 day the captaine desired to haue some of our
+wine, and offered halfe a ducket of gold for a bottell: but I gaue it him
+freely, and made him and his traine drinke besides. And this day also I
+tooke 5 li. 5 ounces of gold. The 19 day we sold about 18 clothes, and
+tooke 4 li. 4 ounces and one quarter of golde.
+
+The 20 day tooke 3 li. sixe ounces and a quarter of golde. The 21 we tooke
+8 li. 7. ounces and a quarter. The 22. 3. li. 8. ounces and a quarter. And
+this night about 4 of the clocke the Captaine who had layen all this while
+vpon the shoare, went away with all the rest of the people with him.
+
+The 23 day we were waued a shoare by other Negroes, and sold them cloth,
+caskets, kniues, and a dosen of bels, and tooke 1 li. 10 ounces of gold.
+The 24 likewise we sold bels, sheetes, and thimbles, and tooke two li. one
+ounce and a quarter of gold. The 25 day we sold 7 dosen of smal bels and
+other things, and then perceiuing their gold to be done, we wayed and set
+sayle and went to leeward to seeke the Hinde, and about 5 of the clocke at
+night we had sight of her, and bare with her, and understood that shee had
+made some sales. The 26 day wee receiued out of the Hinde 48 li. 3 ounces
+and one eight part of golde, which they had taken in the time that we were
+from them. And this day vpon the request of a Negro that came vnto vs from
+a captaine, we went to shoare with our marchandize, and tooke 7 li. and one
+ounce of gold. At this place they required no gages of vs, but at night
+they sent a man aboord vs, which lay with vs all night, because we might
+knowe that they would also come to vs the next day. The 27 day in both our
+shippes we tooke 8. li. one ounce, three quarters and halfe a quarter of
+golde. The 28 we made sales for the companie, and tooke one pound and half
+an ounce of gold. The 29 day in the morning we heard two calieuers shot off
+vpon the shore, which we iudged to be either by the Portugales or by the
+Negroes of the Portugales: we manned our boates and armed our selues and
+went to shoare, but coulde finde nothing: for they were gone. The 30 day we
+made more sales for the companie and for the Masters.
+
+The 31 we sent our boate to shoare to take in sand for balast, and there
+our men met the Negroes, with whom they had made sale the day before a
+fishing which did helpe them to fill sand, and hauing no gold, sold fish to
+our men for their handkerchiefs and nightkerchiefes.
+
+The 1 day of February we wayed and went to another place, and tooke 1 li.
+9. ounces 3 quarters of gold. The 2 day we made more sales: but hauing
+viewed our victuals we determined to tarie no long time vpon the coast,
+because the most part of our drinke was spent, and that which remained grew
+sowre. [Sidenote: They returne for England.] The 3 and 4 dayes we made some
+sales, though not great, and finding the wind this 4. day to come off the
+shoare, we set saile and ranne along the shoare to the Westwards: vpon this
+coast we found by experience that ordinarily about 2 of the clocke in the
+night the winde comes off the shoare at Northnortheast, and so continueth
+vntil eight of the clocke in the morning: and all the rest of the day and
+night it comes out of Southwest: and as for the tide or currant vpon this
+shoare, it goeth continually with the winde. The 5 day we continued sayling
+and thought to haue met with some English ships, but found none.
+
+The sixt day we went our course Southwest to fetch vnder the line, and
+ranne by estimation 24 leagues.
+
+The 13 day wee thought our selues by our reckoning to be cleare off the
+Cape das Palmas, and ranne 12 leagues.
+
+The 22 day we were thwart of the Cape de Monte, which is to the Westward of
+the Riuer de Sestos, about 30 leagues.
+
+The first day of March in a Ternado we lost the Hinde, whereupon we set vp
+a light and shot off a piece but could not heare of her, so that then we
+strooke our saile and taried for her, and in the morning had sight of her
+againe three leagues a sterne off vs.
+
+Vpon the 22 day we found our selues to be in the height of Cape Verde,
+which stands in 14 degrees and a halfe.
+
+From this day till the 29 day we continued our course, and then we found
+our selues to be in 22 degrees. This day one of our men called William
+King, who had bene long sicke, died in his sleepe, his apparel was
+distributed to those that lackt it, and his money was kept for his friends
+to be deliuered them at his comming home.
+
+The 30 day we found our selues to be vnder the Tropike.
+
+The 31 day we went our course, and made way 18 leagues.
+
+From the first day of Aprill to the 20 we went our course, and then found
+our selues to bee in the height of the Asores.
+
+The seuenth day of May we fell with the South part of Ireland, and going on
+shoare with our boate had fresh drinke, and two sheepe of the countrey
+people, which were wilde Kernes, and we gaue them golde for them, and
+bought further such other victuals as we had neede of, and thought would
+serue vs till we arriued in England.
+
+The 14. day with the afternoone tide we went into the Port of Bristoll
+called Hungrode, and there ankered in safetie and gaue thankes to God for
+our safe arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage made by Maister William Towrson to the coast of Guinea,
+  and the Castle of Mina, in the yeere 1556. with the Tiger of London, a
+  ship of 120 tunnes, the Hart of London of 60 tunnes, and a Pinnesse of
+  sixteene tunnes.
+
+The fourteenth day of September, the yeere abouesayd, we departed from
+Harwich, and directed our course for the Isle of Sillie, to meete there
+with the Hart and Pinnesse, which were rigged and victualed at Bristoll,
+but arriuing there the eight and twientieth day we found them not, and
+therefore after long lying at Hull to tarrie for them, but not espying
+them, we turned backe to Plimmouth the 12 day of October, and being there,
+the Hart and the Pinnesse came to vs, so that the 15 of Nouember we all
+departed together from Plimmouth at one of the clocke in the after noone,
+and the 28 day we had sight of the Isle of Porto Santo, and the next day in
+the morning of Madera.
+
+The third day of December we fell with the Ile of Palma, and the 9 we were
+thwart of Cape Blanke, and found there certaine Carauels fishing for
+Pargoes.
+
+The 19 we found our selues in the height of Sierra Leona, and all this day
+we ranne thwart of certaine Currants, which did set to the West
+Southwestward so fast as if it had bene the ouerfall of a sand, making a
+great noyse like vnto a streame or tide-gate when the water is shoale: and
+to prooue whither we could finde ground in this place, we sounded and had
+150 fadome, and no ground, and so departed.
+
+The 30 of December we fell with the coast of Guinea, and had first sight of
+it about 4 leagues off. The best marke that we could take of the place to
+knowe it was three hilles, which lay Northeast and by East from vs: betwixt
+the Northermost two hilles there are two high and great trees standing in
+sight as it were a sailes breadth one from another, and a litle more to the
+Northwestwards are certaine hommocks. Hauing sayled somewhat into the
+shoare wee tooke our selues to be shotte somewhat past the riuer de Sestos,
+so that we kept about to fetch it. And a litle after we had sight of three
+sayles of shippes and two pinnesses which were in the weather of vs, and
+hauing sight of them we made our selues readie to meete them, and halled
+off our ships to fetch the winde as neere as we could: and hauing sayled
+about an houre or two, they also went about, and went as we went to make
+themselues readie, and when we had them in chase, they went away from vs:
+but when they had made themselues readie, they kept about againe, and came
+with vs verie finely appointed with their streamers, and pendants and
+ensignes, and noyse of trumpets very brauely: so when we met, they had the
+weather of vs, and we being determined to fight, if they had bene
+Portugals, waued them to come vnder our Lee, which they denied stoutly:
+then we demaunded of them whence they were, and they sayd of France, we
+told them againe that we were of London in England. They asked of vs what
+Portugals wee had seene, we answered, none but Fishermen: then they told vs
+that there were certaine Portugall ships gone to the Mina to defend it, and
+that they met with another at the riuer de Sestos, which was a ship of two
+hundred which they had burned, and had saued none but the master and two or
+three Negroes, and certaine others which were sore burned which they left a
+shoare there. Then they desired to come aboord of vs with their boates to
+talke with vs, and wee gaue them leaue. Then the captaine of the Admirall
+and diuers others came aboord very friendly, desiring vs to keepe them
+company because of the Portugals, and to goe to the Mina with them: wee
+told them that we had not watered, and that we were but now fallen with the
+coast, and they shewed vs that we were fiftie leagues past the riuer de
+Sestos: notwithstanding there was water enough to be had, and they would
+helpe vs to water with their owne boates because they would haue our
+companie. And told vs further, that they had bene sixe weekes vpon the
+coast, and had gotten but three tunnes of graines amongst them all: and
+when wee had heard them, we made our reckoning that although the Mina were
+cleare, yet if they did goe before vs, they would marre our market; and if
+it were not cleare, then if the Portugals were there and did take them,
+they would vnderstand that we were behind, and so would waite for vs.
+[Sidenote: They admit certaine Frenchmen into their companie.] And further
+we made account that if we went with them we should doe as well as they, if
+the coast were cleare: if it were not cleare, then by them we were assured
+to be the stronger. Therefore hauing considered thus much of their gentle
+offers, we tolde them that the next day wee would conferre more largely of
+the matter. Whereupon they desired me to come the next day to dinner to
+them, and to bring the masters of our ships with me, and such merchants as
+I thought good, promising to giue vs water out of their owne ships if we
+would take it, or els to tarie with vs and helpe vs to water with their own
+boats and pinnasses.
+
+The 31 day in the morning the Admirall sent his boat aboord for me, and I
+tooke our masters and certaine of our marchants and went to him, who had
+prouided a notable banquet for vs, and intreated vs very friendly, desiring
+vs still to keepe his company, promising that what victuals were in his
+ships, or other things that might doe vs pleasure vntill the end, we should
+haue the one halfe of it, offering vs if we would to furle his Flags, and
+to bee at our commaundement in all things.
+
+In the ende we agreed to come to an anker, and to send our boat on shore
+with the Admirals boat, and one of his pinnasses, and an Almaine which they
+had brought out of France, to seeke water, as for our pinnasse she came to
+an anker to seaward of vs all, and would not come at vs. All this night the
+boats continued on shore.
+
+The first day of Ianuary our boats came to vs againe and had found no
+riuer. Whereupon we weighed and set saile, and ankred againe at another
+riuer.
+
+The 2 day we went into the riuer and bargained, and tooke 5 small Elephants
+teeth.
+
+The 3 day we tooke 5 more.
+
+[Sidenote: An assault vpon elephants.] The fourth day the French Admirall
+and wee tooke fifteene small teeth. This day wee tooke thirtie men with vs
+and went to seeke Elephants, our men being all well armed with
+harquebusses, pikes, long bowes, crossebowes, partizans, long swordes, and
+swordes and bucklers: wee found two Elephants which wee stroke diuers times
+with harquebusses and long bowes, but they went away from vs and hurt one
+of our men. The fift day we set saile and ranne along the coast.
+
+The 6 day we fell with the riuer de S. Andre, at which place the land is
+somewhat high to the Westward of the riuer, and a faire Baie also to the
+Westward of it: but to the Eastward of it it is lowe land.
+
+The 7 day we went into the Riuer and found no village, but certaine wild
+Negros not accustomed to trade. It is a very great riuer and 7 fadome water
+in some places at the entring. Here we filled water, and after set saile.
+
+The 8 day we sailed along the shore and came to the red cliffes, and went
+forward in sailing the 9 day also.
+
+The 10 day we came together to confer with captaine Blundel Admiral of the
+French ships, Ierom Baudet his vice admiral, and Iohn de Orleans master of
+a ship of 70 tunne, and with their marchants, and agreed that when God
+should send vs to any place where wee might make sale, that we should be of
+one accord and not one of vs hurt the market of the other, but certaine of
+our boates to make the price for all the rest, and then one boate to make
+sale for euery shippe. This night our boats going to the shore met with
+certaine Negros, who said that they had gold, and therefore we here cast
+anker.
+
+The 11 day all the day we tooke but one halfe angel weight of 4 graines,
+which we tooke by hand, for the people of this place had no weight: the
+Negros called this place Allow.
+
+The 12 day we ran along the coast and found but one towne, but no boates
+would come out to vs, and therefore we went our course.
+
+The 13 day I tooke my boat and went along the shore, and passed by diuers
+small townes, and was waued to come on shore at 3 places, but the sea went
+so high vpon the shore, that it was not possible for vs to land, neither
+could they come to vs if they had had boats, as I could see none but at one
+place, where there was one that would haue come vnto vs, but the Land-wash
+went so sore that it ouerthrew his boat, and one of the men was drowned,
+which the people lamented, and cried so sore, that we might easily heare
+them, and they got his body out of the sea, and caried it amongst them to
+their towne.
+
+[Sidenote: The castle of Mina.] The 14 day we came within Saker-shot of the
+castle, and straightway they set forth an Almade to descry vs, and when
+they perceiued that we were no Portugals, they ranne within the towne
+againe: for there is a great towne by the Castle which is called by the
+Negros Dondou. Without this there lie two great rockes like Ilands, and the
+castle standeth vpon a point which sheweth almost like an Iland. Before we
+came at this castle, we found the land for fiue or six leagues to be high
+land, and about seuen leagues before we came to the castle, lowe land,
+vntil we came at the castle, and then wee found the land high againe. This
+castle standeth about fiue leagues to the East of Cape de Tres puntas. Here
+I tooke the boate with our Negros and ranne alongst the shore till I came
+to the Cape and found two small townes, but no boates at them, neither any
+traffique to be had. At these places our Negros did vnderstand them well,
+and one of them went ashore at all the places and was well receiued of
+them. This night we ankred at the Cape de Tres puntas.
+
+The 15 day I tooke our boat and went along the shore, and about 3 leagues
+beyond the Eastermost part of the Cape we found a faire Bay where we ran
+in, and found a smal towne and certaine boates which belonged to the same
+towne, but the Negros in a long time would not come to vs, but at the last
+by the perswasion of our owne Negros, one boat came to vs, and with him we
+sent George our Negro a shore, and after he had talked with them, they came
+aboard our boates without feare, and I gaue to their captaine a bason, and
+two strings of Margarets, and they shewed vs about 5 duckats weight of
+gold, but they required so much for it that wee would not take it, because
+the Frenchman and we had agreed to make price of our goods all in one boat,
+and the price being made then euery man to sell in his owne boat, and no
+man to giue more then the price which should be set by vs al. This place is
+called Bulle, and here the Negros were very glad of our Negros, and shewed
+them all the friendship they could, when they had told them that they were
+the men that were taken away being now againe brought by vs.
+
+The Negros here shewed vs that a moneth since there were 3 ships that
+fought together, and the two shippes put the other to flight: and before
+that at the castle of Mina there were 4 ships of the Portugals which met
+with one Frenchman, which Frenchman caused them all to flee, which shippe
+we tooke to be the Roebarge: for the Frenchmen of our company iudged her to
+be thereabout that time with her pinnasse also. And further, that after her
+went a shippe of twelue score named the Shaudet all alone, and after her a
+ship of fourescore, and both for the Mina. And there were two others also
+which they left, one at Cape Verde called the Leuriere of Diepe, and
+another at the riuer De Sestos, besides these 3 which all this time be in
+our company, whose names be these:
+
+The Espoier of Hableneff which is the Admirall, whose captaine is Denis
+Blundell.
+
+The Leuriere of Roan Viceadmirall, whose master is Ierome Baudet.
+
+The other is of Hunfleur whose master is called Iohn de Orleans.
+
+The sixteenth day I went along the shore with two pinasses of the
+Frenchmen, and found a Baie and a fresh riuer, and after that went to a
+towne called Hanta, twelue leagues beyond the Cape. At this towne our
+Negros were well knowen, and the men of the towne wept for ioy when they
+saw them, and demanded of them where Anthonie and Binne had bene: and they
+told them that they had bene at London in England, and should bee brought
+home the next voyage. So after this, our Negros came aboord with other
+Negros which brought a weight with them, which was so small that wee could
+not giue them the halfe of that which they demaunded for it.
+
+The Negros here told vs that there were fiue Portugall shippes at the
+Castle, and one pinnasse, and that the Portugals did much harme to their
+Countrey, and that they liued in feare of them, and we told them againe,
+that we would defend them from the Portugals whereof they were very glad.
+
+The 17 day we went a shoare and the Frenchmen with vs, but did no great
+good, the Negros were so vnreasonable, we sold 80. Manellios for one ounce
+of gold.
+
+[Sidenote: The Negros brought home by our men.] Then wee departed and went
+to Shamma, and went into the riuer with fiue boates well appointed with men
+and ordinance, and with our noises of trumpets and drummes, for we thought
+here to haue found some Portugals but there were none: so wee sent our
+Negros on shoare, and after them went diuers of vs, and were very well
+receiued, and the people were very glad of our Negros, specially one of
+their brothers wiues, and one of their aunts, which receiued them with much
+ioy, and so did all the rest of the people, as if they had bene their
+naturall brethren: we comforted the captaine and told him that hee should
+not feare the Portugals, for wee would defend him from them: whereupon we
+caused our boats to shoote off their bases and harquebusses, and caused our
+men to come on shore with their long bowes, and they shot before the
+captaine, which he, with all the rest of the people, wondred much at,
+specially to see them shoot so farre as they did, and assaied to draw their
+bowes but could not. When it grew to be late, we departed to our ships, for
+we looked euery houre for the Portugals. And here the Negros shewed vs that
+there was an English ship at the Mina, which had brought one of the Negros
+againe, which Robert Gaynsh tooke away.
+
+The 18 day we went into the riuer with no lesse strength then before, and
+concluded with the Negros to giue them for euery Fuffe two yardes and three
+nailes of Cloth, and to take for it one angel-duckat: so that we tooke in
+all 70 Duckats, whereof the Frenchmen had fortie, and wee thirtie.
+
+The nineteenth day wee went a shore euery man for himselfe, and tooke a
+good quantitie of gold, and I for my part tooke foure pound and two ounces
+and a halfe of gold, and our Hartes boate tooke one and twentie ounces. At
+night the Negros shewed vs that the next day the Portugals would be with vs
+by land or by Sea: and when we were ready to depart, we heard diuers
+harquebusses shoote off in the woods by vs which wee knew to bee Portugals,
+which durst come no neerer to vs, but shot off in the woods to see if they
+could feare vs and so make vs to leaue our traffique.
+
+The 20 day we manned our fiue boats, and also a great boat of the
+Frenchmens with our men and the Admirals, 12 of them in their murrians and
+corsets, and the rest all well appoynted, with foure trumpets, a drumme and
+a Fife, and the boate all hanged with streamers of Silke and pendants very
+faire, and went into the riuer and traffiqued, our man of warre lying off
+and on in the riuer to waft vs, but we heard no more of the Portugals. This
+day the Negros told vs that there were certain ships come into Hanta, which
+towne is about two leagues to the Westward of this place.
+
+This 21 day we manned our boats againe and went to a place a league from
+this to the Westwards, and there found many Negros with another Captaine,
+and sold at the same rate that wee had done with the others.
+
+The 22 day we went ashore againe and traffiqued in like sort quietly, and I
+tooke 4 pound and six ounces of gold.
+
+The 23 day about night the Negros with their captaine came to vs and told
+vs that the king of Portugals ships were departed from the Castle, meaning
+the next day to plie to the windward to come to vs, giuing vs warning to
+take heed to our selues: we told them againe that wee were very glad of
+their comming, and would be ready at all times to meet them, and to assure
+them that wee were glad of it, wee sounded our trumpets, and shot off
+certaine bases whereof the Negros were very glad, and requested vs that if
+the Portugals sought to hinder our traffique, to shew them all the
+extremitie that we could, promising vs that if they came by land, they
+would aduertise vs thereof.
+
+The 24 we went a shore with our trumpets and drummes, and traffiqued, and I
+bade the captaine of the towne to dinner.
+
+[Sidenote: Fiue sailes of Portingals descried.] The 25 day we being a
+shore, our ships had descried fiue sailes of the king of Portugals, and our
+ships shot off ordinance to call vs away, and we threw euery man his caske
+ashore for water, and went to our ships, and by that time we had weighed
+and giuen order one to another what to do, it was night, so that that night
+nothing was done. We set saile and lay close all night to get the wind if
+we could: we were neere some of them, and one shot off a piece which wee
+iudged to be the Admirall of the Portugals, to cause the rest to come and
+speake with him: so all this night we made our selues ready for fight.
+
+The 26 we came in with the shore and had sight of the Portugals where they
+rid at anker, and we bare with them, and we gaue all our men white
+scarffes, to the ende that the Frenchmen might know one the other if we
+came to boording: but the night came vpon vs that we could not fetch them,
+but we ankered within demie-Culuering shot of them.
+
+[Sidenote: The fight with the Portugals.] The 27 day we weighed and so did
+the Portugals, and about eleuen of the clocke wee had the wind of them, and
+then we went roome with them, which when they pereeiued, they kept about to
+the shore againe, and wee after them, and when they were so neere the shore
+that they could not well runne any further on that boord, they kept about
+againe, and lay to the Seaward, and then we kept about with them, and were
+a head of them, and tooke in our topsailes and taried for them: and the
+first that came vp was a small barke which sailed so well that she cared
+not for any of vs, and caried good ordinance: and as soone as she came vp,
+she shot at vs, and ouershot vs, and then she shot at the Admirall of the
+Frenchmen, and shot him through in two or three places, and went forth a
+head of vs, because we were in our fighting sailes: then came vp another
+carauell vnder our Lee in like case which shot at vs and at the Frenchman,
+and hurt two of his men and shot him through the maine maste. And after
+them came vp the Admirall vnder our Lee also, but he was not able to doe vs
+so much harme as the small shippes, because he caried ordinance higher then
+they, neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, because our
+shippe was so weake in the side, that she laid all her ordinance in the
+Sea: [Sidenote: The French forsake our men.] wherefore we thought to lay
+the great ship aboord, and as soone as the French Admirall went roome with
+him, be fell a sterne and could not fetch him, and after he fell asterne of
+two carauels more and could fetch none of them, but fell to Leeward of them
+all: and when he was to Leeward, he kept about to the shoreward, and left
+vs, and then we put out our topsailes and gaue them chase, and both the
+other Frenchmen kept the wind, and would not come neere vs, and our owne
+ship was a sterne so that she could not come to vs: and after we had
+folowed them about two houres to the seaward, they kept about againe
+towards the shore, thinking to pay vs as they went along by, and to haue
+the wind of the French Admirall which before ran in towards the shore, and
+we kept about with them, and kept still the wind of them thinking that our
+Viceadmiral and the other would haue folowed vs as wee willed them to do:
+but after that the Portugall was past by them, and euery one had shot at vs
+and our Viceadmirall, both our Viceadmirall and the two Frenchmen, and our
+owne pinnasse left vs in the laps, and ran to seaward, and we ran still
+along, and kept the wind of them to succour the French Admirall, who was
+vnder all of their Lees, and when they met with him, euery one went roome
+with him, and gaue him the broad side, and after they cast about againe,
+and durst not boord him, because they sawe vs in the weather of them, or
+els without doubt they had taken or sunke them, for three of them which
+were the smallest went so fast that it was not possible for a ship to boord
+them, and caried such ordinance that if they had had the weather of vs,
+they would haue troubled 3 of the best ships that we had, and as for their
+Admirall and Viceadmirall they were both notablie appointed.
+
+When the Frenchman was cleare of them, hee laie as neere the winde as hee
+could, and wee followed them still towardes the shore, and there the
+Admirall ranne to Sea after the rest, and left vs all alone: and when the
+Portugals perceiued that we were alone, and gaue them chase, they kept
+about with vs and we with them, to keepe the wind of them, and we ranne
+still within base shot of them, but they shot not at vs, because we had the
+weather of them, and sawe that they could do vs no hurt: and thus we
+folowed one another vntil night, and in the night we lost them, but as for
+all the rest of our ships, they packed on all the sailes that they could
+and ranne to sea, and as they themselues confesse, they praied for vs, but
+as for helpe at their hands we could haue none.
+
+The 28 day we met with our Viceadmirall, our pinnasse, and two of the
+Frenchmen, and the third was fled which was a ship of fourscore tunne, and
+belonged to Roan: and when I had the sight of the rest of our ships, I
+tooke our skiffe and went to them to know why they lost vs in such a case,
+and Iohn Kire made me answere that his ship would neither reare nor steere,
+and as for the pinnasse, Iohn Dauis made me answere that she would doe
+nothing, and that he could cary her no further, for her rudder was broken,
+so that the Hart was glad to towe her. Then I went to the French Admirall,
+and found himselfe to be a man of good stomacke, but the one halfe of his
+men were sicke and dead: and then I talked with the smaller Frenchman, and
+hee made me answere that he could doe nothing, saying, that his ship would
+beare no saile, and had 16 of his men dead and sicke, so he made vs plaine
+answere that he was able to doe nothing. After this the Frenchman durst not
+anker for feare of the Portugales.
+
+The 29 day the master of the pinnasse came to vs and sayd that they were
+not able to keepe her any longer, and then wee viewed her and seeing there
+was no remedie, her rudder with all the iron worke being broken both aloft
+and belowe, wee agreed to breake her vp and to put the men into the Hart.
+So wee tooke out of her foure bases, one anker, and certaine fire wood, and
+set her on fire, and afterwards ran along the coast.
+
+The thirtie day we went in to the shore, and spake with certaine Negros,
+who told vs that some French shippes had bene there, but wee could not
+bargaine with them they were so vnreasonable.
+
+The 31 day I went to shore but did not traffike.
+
+The 1 day of Februarie we weighed, seeing we could not bring the Negros to
+any reason, and came to another place which standeth vpon an hill.
+
+The third day I went to a towne foure leagues from vs, and shot off two
+pieces, and the Captaine came to vs, and I sent Thomas Rippen a land who
+knew the Captaine, and assoone as he came on shore, the Captaine knew him
+and diuers of the Negros who then began to aske for mee, and hauing told
+the Captaine that I was in the boate, hee made no longer tarying but by and
+by caused two boates to be put to the Sea, and came to me himselfe, and
+when he sawe me, he cryed to me before hee came to the boat and seemed to
+be the gladdest man aliue, and so did all the companie that knew mee, and I
+gaue him a reward as the maner of the Countrey is, and caused the Frenchman
+to giue another, promising the next day to giue him wine: and that night
+because it was late, he would not talke of any price but left me a pledge,
+and tooke another of me and so departed.
+
+The 4 day going on shore, I found that the ships of France which had bin
+there, had done much hurt to our markets but yet I tooke fiue ounces and a
+halfe of gold.
+
+The fift day I tooke eight ounces and one eight part of gold: but I saw
+that the Negros perceiued the difference in Cloth betwixt ours and that
+which the Frenchmen had, which was better, and broader then ours: and then
+I told captaine Blundel that I would goe to the Leeward, because I
+perceiued that being there where his Cloth was sold, I should do no good,
+whereof hee was sorie.
+
+The 6 day there came an almade and Negros aboord me, requesting me to come
+to their towne for they had much gold and many marchants: and so I went and
+found their old Captaine gone, and another in his place: but this night wee
+did no good, because the marchants were not come downe: so he required a
+pledge which I let him haue, and tooke another of him.
+
+The 7 day George our Negro came to vs, who had followed vs at the least 30
+leagues in a small boat, and when he came, the Negros and we soone
+concluded of price. I tooke this day fiue pound and one ounce, and 3
+quarters of gold. This Negro we had left at Shamma at the time of the
+fight, who said that he saw the fight being on shore, and that when we were
+gone from the Portugals, the Portugals came into their riuer, and told them
+that the Englishmen had slaine two Portugals with a piece, which was in
+deed out of our ship, and they required harbour there, but the captaine of
+Shamma would not suffer them.
+
+The 8 day we tooke nineteene pound three ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 9 day we tooke two pound six ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 10 day three pound.
+
+[Sidenote: The Frenchmen bridled by the English.] The 11 day came to vs
+Ierome Bawdet the Viceadmiral of the Frenchmen and his pinnasse, and he
+shewed vs that where we left them there was no good to be done, and sayd he
+would goe to the Eastward, but we told him hee should not: and thereupon
+commaunded him to goe to his company which he was appointed to bee with,
+which hee refused to doe vntill wee had shot three or foure pieces at their
+pinnasse, and when the ship sawe that, she kept about, and ranne to
+Seaward, and durst come no neerer to vs, so the pinnasse went after her. We
+tooke this day one pound fiue ounces.
+
+The 12 day there came one of the Frenchmens pinnasses to vs laden with
+cloth, and would haue made sale, but I would not suffer him, and therefore
+tooke him and sent him aboord of our ship, and caused him to ride there all
+day. We tooke fiue pound six ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 14 day we tooke of some Negros 4 ounces of gold.
+
+The 16 we came to another towne.
+
+The 17 day I went a shore and vnderstood that 3 of the Portugall ships were
+at the Castle, and the other two at Shamma. The captaine of this towne was
+gone to the principall towne, to speake with their king, and would returne
+shortly as they told me, and so he did, and brought me a weight and
+measure, and I sent a man to see that principall towne, and their king. The
+Portugall ships rid so neere vs, that within 3 houres they might be with
+vs, yet were all contented to tary for sales.
+
+The 18 day certaine of the kings seruants came to vs, and we tooke one
+pound two ounces, and one eight part of gold.
+
+The 10 day we tooke fiue pound one ounce.
+
+The 20 day one pound and foure ounces.
+
+The 21 I tooke foure pound and one ounce, and the Negroes enquired for fine
+cloth, and I opened two pieces which were not fine enough, as they sayd,
+but seeing that we had no other, they bought of them. At night I prouided a
+gift, or present, and sent one marchant and a mariner with it to the king,
+to certifie him of our want of victuals, by reason whereof we could not
+stay long: for in deed we searched our ship, and the most part of our beere
+was leaked out of all our barrels.
+
+The 22 day we tooke three ounces and a halfe.
+
+[Sidenote: The offer of the king to the English to build a Fort.] The 23
+our men came from the king Abaan, and told vs, that he had receiued them
+very friendly, but he had litle gold, but promised, if we would tary, to
+send into all his countrey for gold for vs, and he willed our men at their
+comming home to speake to our king to send men and prouision into his
+countrey, to build a castle, and to bring Tailors with them, to make them
+apparell, and good wares, and they should be sure to sell them: but for
+that present the Frenchmen had filled them full of cloth.
+
+This towne standeth about foure leagues vp in the land, and is by the
+estimation of our men, as big in circuit as London, but the building is
+like to the rest of the countrey. They haue about this Towne great store of
+the wheate of the Countrey, and they iudge, that on one side of the towne
+there were one thousand rikes of Wheate, and another sorte of Corne which
+is called Mill, which is much vsed in Spaine.
+
+[Sidenote: A pretie deuise to descrie the enemie.] About this towne they
+keepe good watch euery night, and haue to warne the watchmen certaine
+cordes made fast ouer their wayes which lead into the town, and certaine
+bels vpon them, so that if any man touch the cordes, the bels ring, and
+then the watchmen runne foorth of their watch houses to see what they be:
+and if they be enemies, if they passe the cord, they haue prouision with
+certaine nets hanged ouer the wayes, where they must passe, to let fall
+vpon them, and so take them, and otherwise then by the wayes it is not
+possible to enter the towne, by reason of the thickets and bushes which are
+about the same, and the towne is also walled round about with long cords,
+and bound together with sedge and certaine barkes of tree.
+
+[Sidenote: The kings friendly entertainment of our men.] When our men came
+to the towne, it was about fiue of the clock in the morning, for there they
+trauell alwayes in the night by reason of the heate of the day: and about
+nine of the clocke, the king sent for them, for there may no man come to
+him before he be sent for, and then they would haue carried their present
+with them: but the Negros told them, that they must bee three times brought
+before him, before they might offer their gift: and when they came to him,
+he talked with them, and receiued them very friendly and kept them about
+half an hour, and then they departed, and after that sent for them againe
+three times, and last of all, they brought him their present, which he
+receiued thankfully, and then caused a pot of wine of Palme to be brought
+foorth, and made them drinke: and before they drinke, both here and in all
+the Countrey, they vse certaine ceremonies.
+
+[Sidenote: Their ceremonies in drinking.] First, they bring foorth their
+pot of drinke, and then they make a hole in the ground, and put some of the
+drinke into it, and they cast the earth vpon it, which they digged forth
+before, and then they set the pot vpon the same, then they take a little
+thing made of a goord, and with that they take out of the same drinke, and
+put it vpon the ground in three places, and in diuers places they haue
+certaine bunches of the pils of Palme trees set in the ground before them,
+and there they put in some drinke, doing great reuerence in all places to
+the same Palme trees.
+
+All these ceremonies first done, the king tooke a cup of gold, and they put
+him in wine, and hee dranke of it, and when he dranke, the people cried all
+with one voice, Abaan, Abaan, with certaine other words, like as they cry
+commonly in Flanders, vpon the Twelfe night, The kinning [sic--KTH] drinks:
+and when he had drunke, then they gaue drinke to euery one, and that done,
+the king licensed them to depart, and euery one that departeth from him
+boweth 3 times towards him, and waueth with both hands together, as they
+bow, and then do depart. The king hath commonly sitting by him 8 or 10
+ancient men with gray beards.
+
+This day we tooke one pound and 10 ounces of gold.
+
+The 24 day we tooke 3 pound and 7 ounces.
+
+The 25 we tooke 3 ounces and 3 quarters.
+
+The 26 day we tooke 2 pound and 10 ounces.
+
+The 27 two pound and fiue ounces.
+
+The 28 foure pound, and then seeing that there was no more gold to be had,
+we weighed and went foorth.
+
+The first day of March we came to a towne called Mowre, but we found no
+boats nor people there: but being ready to depart, there came two Almades
+to vs from another towne, of whom we tooke two ounces and a halfe of gold:
+and they tolde vs that the Negros that dwelled at Mowre were gone to dwell
+at Lagoua.
+
+The second day we came thwart of the castle, and about two leagues off, and
+there saw all the fiue Portugall ships at anker, and this day by night we
+fetched Shamma.
+
+[Sidenote: Ships of Portugall.] The third day we had sight of one tall
+ship, of about two hundred tunnes in the weather of vs, and within lesse
+then two leagues of our ships, and then we saw two more a sterne of her,
+the one a ship of fiue hundred or more, and the other a pinnesse: and these
+were a new fleet at that present arriued out of Portugall. Whereupon we
+wayed, and made shift to double out of the land, and then the winde comming
+to the South-southwest, the Hart going roome with them fell three leagues
+to the leewards of vs. These Portugals gaue vs the chase from nine of the
+clocke in the morning, till fiue at night, but did no good against vs. At
+last, we perceiuing the Admirall to be farre a sterne of his company,
+because his maine topmast was spent, determined to cast about againe with
+them, because we were sure to weather them, and the winde being as it was,
+it was our best course: but the Hart was so farre to the leeward, that we
+could not doe it, except we would lose her company, so that we tooke in
+some of our sailes, and went roome with him: which when he perceiued, he
+looffed to, and was able to lie as neere as he did before. At night, when
+we came to him, he would not speake to vs: then we asked of his company why
+he went so roome; and they made excuse that they were able to beare no
+saile by, for feare of bearing their foretopmast ouer boord: but this was a
+simple excuse.
+
+The fourth day, being put from our watring place we began to seethe our
+meat in salt water, and to rebate our allowance of drinke, to make it
+indure the longer: and so concluded to set our course thence, for our owne
+countrey.
+
+The 12 of March I found my selfe thwart of Cape das Palmas.
+
+The 16 day we fell with the land, which we iudged to be the Cape Mensurado,
+about which place is very much high land.
+
+The 18 day we lost sight of the Hart, and I thinke the willfull Master ran
+in with the shore of purpose to lose vs, being offended that I tolde him of
+his owne folly.
+
+[Sidenote: Two small Ilands by Sierra Leona. Note.] The 27 day we fell in
+sight of two small Islands, which lie by our reckoning sixe leagues off the
+headland of Sierra Leona: and before we came in sight of the same Ilands,
+we made our reckoning to be forty or thirty leagues at the least off them.
+Therefore all they that saile this way are to regard the currents which set
+Northnorthwest, or els they may be much deceiued.
+
+The 14 of April we met with two great ships of Portugall, which although
+they were in the weather of vs, yet came not roome with vs, whereby we
+iudged that they were bound for Calicut.
+
+The 18 day we were in the heigth of Cape verde.
+
+The 24 we were directly vnder the tropike of Cancer.
+
+The first day of May Henry Wilson our Steward died: and the next day died
+Iohn Vnderwood.
+
+[Sidenote: A French brauado.] The 23 we had sight of a shippe in the
+weather of vs, which was a Frenchman of 90 tunne, who came with vs as
+stoutly and as desperately as might be, and comming neere vs perceiued that
+we had bene vpon a long voyage, and iudging vs to be weake, as in deed we
+were, came neerer vs, and thought to haue layed vs aboord, and there stept
+vp some of his men in armour, and commanded vs to strike saile: whereupon
+we sent them some of our stuffe, crossebarres, and chaineshot, and arrowes,
+so thicke, that it made the vpper worke of their shippe flit about their
+eares, and then we spoiled him with all his men, and toare his shippe
+miserably with our great ordinance, and then he began to fall a sterne of
+vs, and to packe on his sailes, and get away: and we seeing that, gaue him
+foure or fiue good pieces more for his farewell; and thus we were rid of
+this French man, who did vs no harme at all. We had aboord vs a French man
+a Trumpeter, who being sicke, and lying in his bed, tooke his trumpet
+notwithstanding, and sounded till he could sound no more, and so died.
+
+The 28 we conferred together, and agreed to go into Seuerne, and so to
+Bristoll, but the same night we had sight of the Lizard, and by reason of
+the winde, we were not able to double the lands end to go into Seuerne, but
+were forced to beare in with the Lizard.
+
+The 29 day, about nine of the clocke in the morning, we arriued safely in
+Plimmouth, and praised God for our good arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The third and last voyage of M. William Towrson to the coast of Guinie, and
+  the Castle de Mina, in the yeere 1577.
+
+The thirtieth day of Ianuary, the yeere abouesayd, we departed out of the
+sound of Plimmouth, with three ships, and a pinnesse, whereof the names are
+these:
+
+1 The Minion Admirall of the fleet.
+
+2 The Christopher Viceadmirall.
+
+3 The Tyger.
+
+4 A pinnesse called the Vnicorne: being all bound for the Canaries, and
+from thence, by the grace of God, to the coast of Guinie.
+
+The next day, being the last of this moneth, [Marginal note: It is to be
+vnderstood, that at this time there was warre betwixt England and France.]
+we met with two hulks of Dantzick, the one called the Rose, a ship of foure
+hundred tunnes, and the other called the Vnicorne, of an hundred and fifty
+tunnes, the Master of the Rose was called Nicholas Masse, and the Master of
+the Vnicorne Melchior White, both laden at Bourdeaux, and for the most part
+with wines. When we came to them, we caused them to hoise foorth their
+boats, and to come and speake with vs, and we examined euery one of them
+apart, what French mens goods they had in their shippes, and they said they
+had none: but by the contrarieties of their tales, and by the suspicion
+which we gathered of their false chartar-parties, we perceiued that they
+had French mens goods in them: we therefore caused one of them to fetch vp
+his bils of lading, and because he denied that he had any, we sent certaine
+with him, who caused him to goe to the place where he had hid them, and by
+the differences of his billes of lading, and his talke, we gathered, as
+before, that they had Frenchmens goods. Whereupon we examined them
+straightly, and first the Purser of the Vnicorne, which was the smaller
+shippe, confessed that they had two and thirty tunnes and a hogs-head of a
+French mans. Then we examined the Master in like case, and he acknowledged
+the same to be true. Then we examined also the Master of the great ship,
+and he confessed that he had an hundred and eight and twenty tunnes of the
+same French mans, and more they would not confesse, but sayd that all the
+rest was laden by Peter Lewgues of Hamburg, to be deliuered to one Henry
+Summer of Camphire, notwithstanding all their letters were directed to
+Hamburg, and written in Dutch without, and within in French.
+
+When they had confessed that they had thus much French mens goods within
+their shippes, we conferred together what was best to be done with them.
+William Cretton and Edward Selman were of the opinion, that it should be
+good either to carry them into Spaine, and there to make sale of the goods,
+or els into Ireland, or to returne backe againe into England with them, if
+the winde would permit it. But I, waying what charge we had of our Masters,
+first by mouth, and afterwards by writing, that for no such matter we
+should in any case prolong the time, for feare of losing the voyage, and
+considering that the time of the yeere was very farre spent, and the money
+that we should make of the wines not very much, in respect of the commodity
+which we hoped for by the voyage, perswaded them that to goe into Ireland,
+the winde being Easterly as it was, might be an occasion that we should be
+locked in there with that winde, and so lose our voyage: and to cary them
+into Spaine, seeing they sailed so ill, that hauing all their sailes
+abroad, we kept them company onely with our foresailes, and without any
+toppe sailes abroad, so that in euery two dayes sailing they would haue
+hindered vs more then one; and besides that (the winde being Easterly) we
+should not be able to seaze the coast with them: besides all this the losse
+of time when we came thither was to be considered, whereupon I thought it
+not good to carry them any further.
+
+And as for carying them into England, although the winde had bene good, as
+it was not, considering what charge we had of our Masters, to shift vs out
+of the way for feare of a stay by reason of the warres, I held it not in
+any wise conuenient.
+
+But notwithstanding all this, certeine of our company not being herewith
+satisfied went to our Master to know his opinion therein, who made them a
+plaine answere, that to cary them into any place, it was not the best way
+nor the profit of their Masters. And he tolde them further, that if the
+time were prolonged, one moneth longer before they passed the Cape, but a
+few men would go the voyage. [Sidenote: The French mens goods seazed in the
+time of the warre vpon the losse of Cales.] All these things considered, we
+all paused, and determined at the last, that euery man should take out of
+the hulks so much as he could well bestow for necessaries, and the next
+morning to conclude what should be further done with them. So we tooke out
+of them for vs foureteene tunnes and a halfe of wine, and one tunne we put
+into the pinnesse.
+
+More we tooke out one hogshead of Aquauitæ.
+  Sixe cakes of rozzen.
+  A small halser for ties: and certeine chestnuts.
+
+The Christopher tooke out,
+  Ten tunnes of wine, and one hogshead.
+  A quantity of Aquauitæ.
+  Shall-lines.
+  Chesnuts.
+  Sixe double bases with their chambers.
+
+And then men broke vp the hulks chests, and tooke out their compasses, and
+running glasses, the sounding leade and line, and candles: and cast some of
+their beefe ouer board, and spoiled them so much, that of very pity we gaue
+them a compasse, a running glasse, a leade and a line, certaine bread and
+candles, but what apparel of theirs we could finde in their ship, we gaue
+them againe, and some money also of that which William Crompton tooke for
+the ransome of a poore Frenchman, who being then Pilot downe the Riuer of
+Bordeux, they were not able to set him a shore againe, by reason of the
+foule weather.
+
+The Tyger also tooke out of the smaller hulke sixe or seuen tunnes of wine,
+one hogshead of Aquauitæ, and certeine rozzen, and two bases he tooke out
+of the great hulke.
+
+The first day of February in the morning we all came together againe sauing
+W. Crompton who sent vs word mat he was contented to agree to that order
+which we should take.
+
+Now Edward Selman was of this opinion, that it was not best to let the
+ships depart, but put men into them to cary them into England, which thing
+neither we nor our Master would agree vnto, because we thought it not good
+to vnman our ships going outward, considering how dangerous the time was:
+so that in fine we agreed to let them depart, and giue them the rest of the
+wine which they had in their ships of the Frenchmens for the fraight of
+that which we had taken, and for their ordinance, rozzen, aquauitæ,
+chesnuts, and other things which the company had taken from them. So we
+receiued a bill of their handes, that they confessed how much Frenchmens
+goods they had, and then we let them depart.
+
+The 10 day we reckoned our selues to be 25 leagues from the Grand Canarie,
+and this day about nine of the clocke our pinnesse brake her rudder, so
+that we were forced to towe her at the sterne of the Minion, which we were
+able to doe, and yet kept company with the rest of our ships. About eleuen
+of the clocke this day we had sight of the Grand Canarie.
+
+The 11 day when we came to the Iland we perceiued that it was the Ile of
+Tenerif, and then indeed wee had sight of the Grand Canarie, which lieth 12
+leagues to the Eastwards of Tenerif: and because the road of Tenerif is
+foule ground, and nothing was there to be gotten for the helping of our
+pinnesse, hauing the winde long, we agreed to go with the Grand Canarie.
+
+The 12 day we came into the roade of the towne of Canarie, which lieth one
+league from the same towne. And after we had shot off diuers pieces of
+ordinance to salute the towne and the castle, the gouernour and captiues of
+the Iland sent to vs which were the captaines of the ships, requiring vs to
+come a shoare.
+
+[Sidenote: Two English Marchants Legiers in the Grand Canary.] And when we
+came to them they receiued vs very friendly, offering vs their owne Iennets
+to ride to the towne, and what other friendship they could shew vs: and we
+went to the towne with two English Marchants which lay there, and remained
+in their house that day. The second day following we came aboord to deliuer
+our marchandise, and to get our pinnesse mended.
+
+The 14 day came into the road the Spanish fleet which was bound to the
+Emperours Indies, which were in number nineteene saile, whereof sixe were
+ships of foure hundred and fiue hundred a piece, the rest were of two
+hundred, an hundred and fifty, and of an hundred. When they were come to an
+ancre they saluted vs with ordinance, and so we did them in like case. And
+afterwards the Admirall (who was a knight) sent his pinnesse to desire me
+to come to him; and when I came to him he receiued me friendly, and was
+desirous to heare somewhat of the state of England and Flanders. And after
+he had me a banquet, I departed; and I being gone vnto the boat, hee caused
+one of his gentlemen to desire Francisco the Portugall, which was my
+interpreter, to require me to furle my flagge, declaring that hee was
+Generall of the Emperours fleet. Which thing (being come aboord) Francisco
+shewed me: and because I refused to furle it, and kept it foorth still,
+certaine of the souldiers in the ships shot diuers harquebush shot about
+the ship, and ouer the flagge: and at the same time there came certeine
+gentlemen aboord our ship to see her: to whom I sayd, that if they would
+not cause those their men to leaue shooting, I would shoot the best
+ordinance I had thorow their sides. And when they perceuied that I was
+offended, they departed, and caused their men of warre and souldiers to
+shoot no more, and afterwards they came to me againe, and tolde me that
+they punished their men. That done, I shewed them the ship, and made them
+such cheere as I could, which they receiued very thankfully: and the day
+following they sent for mee to dine with them, and sent me word that their
+General was very sory that any man should require me to furle my flagge,
+and that it was without his consent: and therefore he requested me not to
+thinke any vngentlenesse to be in him, promising that no man of his should
+misdemeane himselfe.
+
+The 17 day we set saile in the road of Grand Canarie, and proceeded on our
+voyage.
+
+The 20 in the morning we had sight of the coast of Barbarie, and running
+along the shore we had sight of Rio del Oro, which lieth almost vnder the
+tropike of Cancer.
+
+The 21 day we found our selues to be in 20 degrees and a halfe, which is
+the heigth of Cape Blank.
+
+The 25 we had sight of the land in the bay to the Northward of Cape Verde.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape verde. Foure Ilands.] The 26 I tooke Francisco and Francis
+Castelin with me, and went into the pinnesse, and so went to the Tyger
+which was neerer the shore then the other ships, and went aboord her, and
+with her and the other ships we ranne West and by South, and West
+southwest, vntill about foure of the clocke, at which time we were hard
+aboord the Cape, and then we ran in Southwest, and beyond the Cape about
+foure leagues we found a faire Iland, and besides that two or three Ilands,
+which were of very high rocks being full of diuers sorts of sea foule, and
+of pigeons, with other sorts of land-foules, and so many, that the whole
+Iland was couered with the dung thereof, and seemed so white as if the
+whole Iland had bene of chalke; and within those Ilands was a very faire
+bay, and hard aboord the rocks eighteene fadom water, and faire ground.
+[Sidenote: A great trade of the Frenchmen at Cape verde.] And when we
+perceiued the bay, and vnderstanding that the Frenchmen had a great trade
+there, which we were desirous to know, we came to an ancre with the Tyger.
+And after that the Minion and the Christopher ancred in like case: then we
+caused the pinnesse to runne beyond another Cape of land, to see if there
+were any place to trade in there.
+
+It being neere night I took our cocke and the Tygers skiffe, and went to
+the Iland, where we got certaine foules like vnto Gannards: and then I came
+aboord againe and tooke two of the Gannards which we had taken, and caried
+them to the captaine of the Christopher, and when I had talked with him I
+found him not willing to tary there, neither was I desirous to spend any
+long time there, but onely to attempt what was to be done. The Master of
+the Christopher told me he would not tary, being not bound for that place.
+
+[Sidenote: A faire Iland where the French trade.] The 27 the Captaine of
+the Tyger and Edward Selman came to me, and Iohn Makeworth from the
+Christopher, and then we agreed to take the pinnessse, and to come along
+the shore, because that where we rid no Negros came to vs, and the night
+before our pinnesse brought vs word that there was a very faire Iland. And
+when I came beyond the point I found it so, and withall a goodly bay, and
+we saw vpon the maine certaine Negros which waued vs on shore, and then we
+came to an ancre with the pinnesse, and went a shore with our cocke, and
+they shewed vs where their trade was, and that they had Elephants teeth,
+muske, and hides, and offered vs to fetch downe their Captaine, if we would
+send a man with them, and they would leaue a pledge for him: then we asked
+him when any ship had bene there; and some of them sayd not in eight
+moneths, others, in sixe moneths, and others in foure and that they were
+Frenchmen.
+
+Then we perceuing, the Christopher not willing to tary, departed from them,
+and set saile with the pinnesse and went aboord the Tyger.
+
+The 10 day of March we fell with the coast of Guinea, fiue leagues to the
+Eastward of Cape de Monte, beside a riuer called Rio das Palmas.
+
+The 11 we went to the shore, and found one man that could speake some
+Portuguise, who tolde vs that there were three French ships passed by; one
+of them two moneths past, and the other one moneth past. At this place I
+receiued nineteene Elephants teeth, and two ounces and halfe a quarter of
+golde.
+
+The 12 we set saile to go to the riuer de Sestos.
+
+The 13 at night we fell with the same riuer.
+
+The 14 day we sent in our boats to take water, and rommaged our shippes,
+and deliuered such wares to the Christopher and Tyger, as they had need of.
+
+The 15 we came together, and agreed to send the Tyger to another riuer to
+take in her water, and to see what she could do for graines.
+
+After that we tooke marchandise with vs, and went into the riuer, and there
+we found a Negro which was borne in Lisbone, left there by a ship of
+Portugal which was burned the last yere at this riuer in fighting with
+three Frenchmen: and he told vs further, that two moneths past there were
+three Frenchmen at this place; and sixe weeks past there were two French
+ships at the riuer: and fifteene dayes past there was one. All which ships
+were gone towards the Mina. This day we tooke but few graines.
+
+The 19 day considering that the Frenchman were gone before vs, and that by
+reason of the vnholesome aires of this place foureteene of our men in the
+Minion were fallen sicke, we determined to depart, and with all speed to go
+to the Mina.
+
+The 21. wee came to the riuer de Potos, where some of our boats went in for
+water, and I went in with our cocke, and tooke 12 small Elephants teeth.
+
+The 23. day, after we had taken as many teeth as we could get, about nine
+of the clocke we set saile to go towards the Mina.
+
+The 31 we came to Hanta, and made sale of certaine Manillios.
+
+[Sidenote: They descrie fiue saile of the Portugals.] The first Aprill we
+had sight of fiue saile of Portugals, wherevpon we set saile and went off
+to sea to get the winde of them, which wee should haue had if the winde had
+kept his ordinary course, which is all the day at the Southwest, and
+West-southwest: but this day with a flaw it kept all the day at the East,
+and East-southeast, so that the Portugals had the winde of vs, and came
+roome with the Tyger and vs untill night, and brought themselues all saue
+one, which sailed not so well as the rest, within shot of vs: then it fell
+calme, and the winde came vp to the Southwest, howbeit it was neere night,
+and the Christopher, by meanes of her boat, was about foure leagues to the
+leewards of vs. We tacked and ranne into the weather of the Admirall, and
+three more of his company, and when we were neere him we spake to him, but
+he would not answere. [Sidenote: The fight.] Then we cast about and lay in
+the weather of him; and casting about he shot at vs, and then wee shot at
+him, and shot him foure or fiue times thorow. They shot diuers times thorow
+our sailes, but hurt no man. The Tyger and the pinnesse, because it was
+night, kept out their sailes, and would not meddle with them. After we had
+thus fought together 2 houres or more, and would not lay him aboord because
+it was night, we left shooting one at the other, and kept still the weather
+of them. Then the Tyger and the pinnesse kept about and came to vs, and
+afterwards being neere the shore, we three kept about and lay to the sea,
+and shot off a piece to giue warning to the Christopher.
+
+This night about 12 of the clocke, being very litle winde, and the Master
+of the Tyger asleepe, by the ill worke of his men the ship fel aboord of
+vs, and with her sheare-hooks cut our maine-saile, and her boat being
+betwixt vs was broken and suncke, with certaine marchandise in her, and the
+ships wales were broken with her outleger: yet in the ende we cleared her
+without any more hurt, but she was in hazzard to be broken downe to the
+water.
+
+The second day we had sight of the Christopher, and were neere vnto her, so
+that I tooke our boat and went to her. And when I came thither, they shewed
+me, that after the Portugals had left vs, they went all roome with him, and
+about twelue a clocke at night met him, and shot at him, and hee at them,
+and they shot him thorow the sailes in diuers places, and did no other
+great hurt. And when we had vnderstood that they had bene with him as well
+as with vs, we agreed altogether to seeke them (if wee might finde them)
+and keepe a weather our places of traffique.
+
+The third day we ran all day to the Southwestwards to seeke the Portugals,
+but could haue no sight of them, and halled into the shore.
+
+The fourth day, when we had sight of land, we found that the current had
+set vs thirty leagues to the Eastwards of our reckoning, which we woondered
+at: for the first land we made was Lagua. Then I caused our boat to be
+manned, and the Christophers also, and went to the shore and tooke our
+Negro with vs. And on shore we learned that there were foure French ships
+vpon the coast: one at Perinnen, which is six leagues to the Westward of
+Laguoa: another at Weamba, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Laguoa; a third at Perecow, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Weamba: and the fourth at Egrand, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Perecow.
+
+When we had intelligence of these newes we agreed to go to the Eastwards
+with the Frenchmen to put them from their traffique, and shot off two or
+three pieces in our boats to cause the ships to way: and hauing bene about
+one houre vnder saile, we had sight of one of the French men vnder saile,
+halling off from Weamba to whome we gaue chase, and agreed in the night for
+feare of ouershooting them, that the Minion should first come to ancre, and
+after that about three houres, the Tyger and the Christopher to beare along
+all night.
+
+The 5. day we found three of the French ships at ancre: one called La foye
+de Honfleur, a ship of 220 tunnes, another called the Ventereuse or small
+Roebarge of Honfleur, of 100 tunnes, both appertaining to Shawdet of
+Honfleur, the third was called the Mulet de Batuille a ship of 120 tunnes,
+and this ship belonged to certaine Marchants of Roan.
+
+[Sidenote: the English boord the Frenchmen.] When we came to them, we
+determined to lay the Admiral aboord, the Christopher the Viceadmirall, and
+the Tyger the smallest: but when we came nere them they wayed, and the
+Christopher being the headmost and the weathermost man, went roome with the
+Admirall: the Roebarge went so fast that wee could not fetch her. The first
+that we came to was the Mullet, and her wee layed aboord, and our men
+entred and tooke her, which ship was the richest except the Admirall: for
+the Admirall had taken about 80 pound of golde, and Roeberge had taken but
+22 pound: and all this we learned of the Frenchmen, who knew it very well:
+for they were all in consort together, and had bene vpon the coast of Mina
+two moneths and odde dayes: howbeit the Roebarge had bene there before them
+with another ship of Diepe, and a carauel, which had beaten all the coast,
+and were departed one moneth before our arriuing there, and they three had
+taken about 700 pound of golde.
+
+Assoone as we had layed the ship aboord, and left certaine men in her to
+keepe her, we set saile and gaue chase to the other two ships, and chased
+them all day and night, and the next day vntill three a clocke in the
+afternoone, but we could not fetch them: and therefore seeing that we
+brought our selues very farre to leeward of our place, we left the chase,
+and kept about againe to go with the shore.
+
+The 7 day I sent for the captaine, marchants and Masters of the other
+ships, and when they came we weighed the golde which we had from the
+Frenchmen, which weighed fifty pound and fiue ounces of golde: this done we
+agreed to put men out of euery ship into the prise to keepe her.
+
+The 12 day we came to the further place of the Mina called Egrand, and
+being come to an ancre, discharged all the marchants goods out of the
+prise, and would haue sold the ship with the victuals to the Frenchmen, but
+because she was leake they would not take her, but desired vs to saue their
+liues in taking them into our owne ships: then we agreed to take out the
+victuals and sinke the ship, and diuide the men among our ships.
+
+The 15 at night we made an end of discharging the prise, and diuided all
+the Frenchmen except foure which were sicke and not able to helpe
+themselues; which foure both the Christopher and the Tyger refused to take,
+leauing them in their ship alone in the night, so that about midnight I was
+forced to fetch them into our ship.
+
+The 15 of April, moouing our company for the voyage to Benin, the most part
+of them all refused it.
+
+The 16, seeing the vnwillingnesse of the company to goe thither, we
+determined to spend as much time vpon the coast as we could, to the end we
+might make our voyage, and agreed to leaue the Minion here at Egrand, the
+Tyger to go to Pericow which is foure leagues off, and the Christopher to
+goe to Weamba, which is ten leagues to the weatherward of this place: and
+if any of them both should haue sight of more sailes then they thought good
+to meddle withall to come roome with their fellowes; to wit, first the
+Christopher to come with the Tyger, and then both they to come with vs.
+
+We remained in this place called Egrand, vntill the last day of April, in
+which time many of our men fell sicke: and sixe of them died. And here we
+could haue no traffique with the Negros but three or foure dayes in the
+weeke, and all the rest of the weeke they would not come at vs.
+
+The 3 of May not hauing the pinnesse sent vs with cloth from the other
+ships, as they promised, we solde French cloth, and gaue but three yards
+thereof to euery fuffe.
+
+The 5 day the Negros departed, and told vs they would come to vs againe
+within foure dayes, which we determined there to tary, although we had
+diuers of our men sicke.
+
+The 8 day, all our cloth in the Minion being sold, I called the company
+together, to know whether they would tary the sale of the cloth taken in
+the prise at this place or no: they answered, that in respect of the death
+of some of their men, and the present sicknesse of twentie more, they would
+not tary, but repaire to the other ships, of whom they had heard nothing
+since the 27 of April: and yet they had our pinnesse with them, onely to
+cary newes from one to another.
+
+The 9 day we determined to depart hence to our fellowes, to see what they
+had done, and to attempt what was to be done at the towne of Don Iohn.
+
+The 10 day in the morning we sat saile to seeke the Christopher and the
+Tyger.
+
+The ll day the Captaine of the Christopher came to vs, and told vs that
+they could finde small doings at the places where they had bene.
+
+The 12 William Crompton and I in our small pinnesse went to the Tyger and
+the Christopher at Perenine.
+
+The 13 we sent away the Tyger to Egrand, because we found nothing to doe at
+Perenine, worth the tarying for.
+
+The 14 our great pinnesse came to vs, and presently we put cloth into her,
+and sent her backe to Weamba, where she had bene before, and had taken
+there ten pound of golde.
+
+The 15 the Minion came to vs, and the next day we went a shore with our
+boats, and tooke but one ounce of golde.
+
+The 19 day hauing set saile we came to an ancre before Mowre, and there we
+tarried two dayes, but tooke not an ounce of golde.
+
+The 21 we came to an ancre before Don Iohns towne.
+
+[Sidenote: the great towne of Don Iohn.] The 22 we manned our boats and
+went to shore, but the Negros would not come at vs; then the Captaine of
+the Christopher and I tooke a skiffe and eight men with vs, and went and
+talked with the Negros, and they sayd that they would send a man to the
+great towne, where Don Iohn himselfe lay, to aduertise him of our comming.
+
+The 23 we went ashore againe, and the Negros tolde vs that this day the
+marchants of Don Iohn would come downe: so we tarried there vntill night,
+and no man would come to vs: but diuers of the Negros made vs signes to
+depart.
+
+The 24 the Captaine of the Christopher tooke his boat and went to Mowre,
+and when he came thither, certaine Negros came to him to know the price of
+his wares, but in the end there came an Almade, which he iudged came from
+the castle, and caused all the Negros to depart from him: and when he saw
+they would come no more to him, he went ashore and tooke certaine men with
+him, and then the Negros cast stones at them, and would not suffer them to
+come vp to their towne. And when they saw that, they tooke certaine of the
+Almades, and put them to the sea, and afterwards departed. The same morning
+I went a shore at Don Iohns towne, and tooke a white flag with me, but none
+of the Negros could come to me, which caused vs to iudge that the Portugals
+were in the towne. After this, our boat came to vs well manned, and I sent
+one man vp to the towne with a white flag in his hand, but when he was come
+thither, all the Negros went away and would not speake with him. Then I
+sent one alone into the woods after them, but they in no case would come to
+vs. When we saw that, we tooke twelue goats and fourteene hennes, which we
+found in the towne, and went aboord without doing any farther hurt to the
+towne: and when I came aboord, I found our pinnesse come from Cormatin,
+which had taken there two pound and fiue ounces of golde. Then after much
+ado with the froward Mariners, we went thitherwards with our ship, and the
+Christopher went to Mowre.
+
+[Sidenote: A fight with the Negros.] The 25 day the Master of the
+Christopher sent his boat to the shore for balast, and the Negros would
+haue beaten the company from the shore, whereupon the company resisted
+them, and slew and hurt diuers of them, and hauing put them to flight,
+burned their towne, and brake all their boats.
+
+The 26 day our pinnesse came to vs from Cormatin, and had taken two pound
+and eleuen ounces of golde: and Iohn Shirife tolde vs that the Negros of
+that place were very desirous to haue a ship come back againe to their
+towne.
+
+The 27 we wayed and went to Cormatin.
+
+The 28 the Christopher came to vs from Mowre and traffiqued there two
+dayes.
+
+The second day of Iune the Tyger came to vs from Egrand, and the pinnesse
+from Weamba, and they two had taken about fifty pound of golde since they
+departed from vs.
+
+The 4 day we departed from Cormatin to plie vp to Shamma, being not able to
+tary any longer vpon the coast for lacke of victuals, and specially of
+drinke.
+
+The 7 day we had sight of fiue of the king of Portugals ships which came to
+an ancre besides the castle.
+
+The 8 day George and Binny came to vs, and brought with them two pound of
+golde.
+
+The 10 day in the morning I tooke our small pinnesse, and the Captaine of
+the Christopher with me, and manned her well, and went to the castle to
+view the Portugals ships, and there we found one ship of about 300 tunne,
+and foure carauels: when we had well viewed them, we returned backe againe
+to our ships which we found seuen leagues at sea.
+
+The 11 day in the morning we found our selues wel shot toward Shamma, and
+the Tyger with vs, but the Minion and the pinnesse had not wayed that
+night, so that we were out of sight of them: and hauing brought our selues
+in the weather of the Portugals ships, we came to an ancre to tary for the
+Minion, or els we might haue fetched Shamma. At night the Minion and the
+pinnesse came vp to vs, but could not fetch so farre to the weatherward as
+we, and therefore they ancred about a league a weather The castle, and we
+waied in the Christopher, and went roome with her.
+
+The 12 day the Tyger came roome with vs, and she and the Christopher
+finding themselues to stand in great need of victuals, would haue gone with
+the Portugals ships to haue fetched some of them forth: but our master and
+company would in no case consent to goe with them, for feare of hanging
+when we came home: and the other two ships being fully minded to haue gone,
+and fearing that their owne company would accuse them, durst not go to
+them.
+
+After this, by reason of the want of victuals in the pinnesse, which could
+receiue no victuals from the other shippes, but from vs onely, we tooke out
+all our men, and put twelue Frenchmen into her, and gaue them victuals to
+bring them to Shamma.
+
+The 19 day the Tyger and Minion arrived at Shamma, and the Christopher
+within two leagues off them, but could not fetch the winde by reason of the
+scantnesse of the winde, which hath bene so scant, that in fifteene dayes
+we haue plied to the windewards but twelue leagues, which before we did in
+one day and a night.
+
+The 20 day I tooke our pinnesse, and went to the towne of Shamma to speake
+with the captaine, and he tolde me that there was no golde there to be had,
+nor as much as a hen to be bought, and all by reason of the accord which he
+had made with the Portugals, and I seeing that departed peaceably from him.
+
+The 21 I put such things as we had into our small pinnesse, and tooke one
+marchant of our ship, and another of the Tyger, and sent her to Hanta, to
+attempt, if she could doe any thing there. That night they could doe
+nothing but were promised to haue golde the next day.
+
+The next day (which was the 22) being come, we sent our pinnesse to Hanta
+againe, but there neither the captaine nor the Negros durst traffike with
+vs, but intised vs from place to place, and all to no purpose.
+
+This day we put away our pinnesse, with fiue and twenty Frenchmen in her,
+and gaue them such victuals as we could spare, putting fifteene of them to
+the ransome of sixe crownes a man.
+
+The 23 of Iune our pinnesse came to vs from Hanta, and tolde vs that the
+Negros had dealt very ill with them, and would not traffike with them to
+any purpose.
+
+[Sidenote: Shamma burnt by the English.] The 24 we tooke our boat and
+pinnesse and manned them well, and went to the towne of Shamma, and because
+the Captaine thereof was become subiect to the Portugals we burned the
+towne, and our men seeking the spoile of such trifles as were there found a
+Portugals chest, wherein was some of his apparell, and his weights, and one
+letter sent to him from the castle, whereby we gathered that the Portugall
+had bene there of a long time.
+
+The 25 day, about three of the clocke at afternoone, we set saile, and put
+into the sea, for our returne to England.
+
+The last day of this moneth we fell with the shore againe, and made our
+reckoning to be eighteene leagues to the weatherward of the place where we
+set off. When we came to make the land, we found our selues to be eighteene
+leagues to the leeward of the place, where we set off, which came to passe,
+by reason of the extreme currant that runneth to the Eastward: when we
+perceiued our selues so abused, we agreed to cast about againe, and to lie
+as neere the winde as we could, to fetch the line.
+
+The seuenth of Iuly we had sight of the Ile of S. Thome, ana thought to
+haue sought the road to haue arriued there: but the next morning the wind
+came about, and we kept our course.
+
+The ninth, the winde varying, we kept about againe, and fell with the Iland
+of S. Thome, and seeking the road, were becalmed neere the Iland, and with
+the currant were put neere the shore, but could haue no ground to ancre: so
+that we were forced to hoise out our pinnesse, and the other ships their
+skiffs to towe from the Iland, which did litle good, but in the ende the
+winde put vs three leagues off the shore.
+
+The tenth day the Christopher and the Tyger cast about, whereby we iudged
+them to haue agreed together, to goe seeke some ships in the road, and to
+leaue vs: our men were not willing to goe after them, for feare of running
+in with the Iland againe, and of putting our selues into the same danger
+that we were in the night before: but we shot off a piece, and put out two
+lights, and they answered vs with lights againe: whereupon we kept our
+course, and thought that they had followed vs, but in the morning we could
+not see them, so that they left vs willingly, and we determined to follow
+them no more. But the eleuenth day we altered our opinion and course, and
+consented to cast about againe for the Iland, to seeke our ships; and about
+foure of the clocke in the afternoone we met with them.
+
+The 13 we fell againe with the Iland of S. Thome; and the same night we
+found our selues directly vnder the line.
+
+[Sidenote: The description of the Ile of S. Thome.] This Iland is a very
+high Iland, and being vpon the West side of it, you shall see a very high
+pike, which is very small, and streight, as it were the steeple of a
+church, which pike lieth directly vnder the line, and at the same South end
+of the Iland to the Westward thereof lieth a small Iland, about a mile from
+the great Iland.
+
+The third of August we departed from the Ile of S. Thome, and met the winde
+at the Southwest.
+
+The 12 day we were in the height of Cape Verde.
+
+The 22 day we fell with one of the Iles of Cape verde, called the Ile of
+Salt, and being informed by a Scotish man that we tooke among the Frenchmen
+vpon the coast, that there were fresh victuals to be had, we came to an
+ancre there.
+
+The 23 day in the morning we manned our skiffe, and went a shore, and found
+no houses, but we saw foure men, which kept themselues alwayes farre from
+vs, as for cattell we could finde none, but great store of goats, and they
+were so wilde, that we could not take aboue three or foure of them: but
+there we had good store of fish, and vpon a small Iland which lay by the
+same we had great store of sea-birds.
+
+At night the Christopher brake her cradle, and lost an ancre, so that she
+could tary no longer, so we all wayed, and set saile. Vpon the same Iland
+we left the Scotish man, which was the occasion of our going aland at that
+place, but how he was left we could not tell: but, as we iudged, the people
+of the Iland found him sleeping, and so caried him away; for at night I
+went my selfe to the Iland to seeke him, but could hear nothing of him.
+
+[Sidenote: The great inconuenience by late staying vpon the coast of
+Guinie.] The 24 day the Master of the Tyger came aboord vs, and tolde vs
+that his men were so weake, and the shippe so leake, that he was not able
+to keepe her aboue the water, and therefore requested vs to go backe againe
+to the Iland, that we might discharge her, and giue her vp: but we
+intreated him to take paine with her awhile, and we put a French Carpenter
+into her, to see if he could finde the leake. This day we tooke a view of
+all our men, both those that were hole, and the sicke also, and we found
+that in all the three ships, were not aboue thirty sound men.
+
+The 25 we had sight of the Ile of S. Nicholas, and the day following of the
+other Iles, S. Lucia, S. Vincent, and S. Anthony; which four Iles lie the
+one from the other Northwest, and by West, Souteast and by East.
+
+The 26 we came againe with the Iland of S. Anthony, and could not double
+the Cape. This day Philip Iones, the Master of the Christopher, came aboord
+vs, who had beene aboord the Tyger, and tolde vs that they were not able to
+keepe the Tyger, because she was leake, and the Master very weake, and sayd
+further, he had agreed with the Master and the company, that if the next
+day we could double the Iland, we should runne to the leeward of it, and
+there discharge her: but if we could not double it, then to put in betwixt
+the Iland of S. Vincent and S. Anthony, to see if we could discharge her.
+
+The third day of September I went aboord the Tyger, with the Master and
+Marchants with me, to view the shippe and men: and we found the shippe very
+leake, and onely six labouring men in her, whereof one was the Master
+gunner: so that we seeing that they were not able to keepe the ship, agreed
+to take in the men, and of the goods what we could saue, and then to put
+the ship away.
+
+The fift day we went to discharge the Tyger.
+
+The eight day, hauing taken out the artillery, goods, victuals, and gold of
+the Tyger, we gaue her vp 25 degrees by North the line.
+
+The 27 we had sight of two of the Iles of the Azores, S. Mary, and S.
+Michael.
+
+The fourth of October we found ourselues to be 41 degrees and a halfe from
+the line.
+
+The sixt day the Christopher came to vs, and willed vs to put with the
+Cape, for they also were so weake, that they were not able to keepe the
+sea, and we being weake also, agreed to go for Vigo, being a place which
+many English men frequent.
+
+The 10 day the Christopher went roome with the Cape, but we having a mery
+wind for England, and fearing the danger of the enemies, which ordinarily
+lie about the Cape: besides, not knowing the state of our countrey and
+Spaine, and although it were peace, yet there was little hope of friendship
+at their hands, considering the voyage that we had made, and we also being
+so weake, that by force and violence we could come by nothing, and doubting
+also that the king of Portugall knowing of our being there, might worke
+some way with the Counsell of Spaine to trouble vs: and further,
+considering that if we did put in with any harbor, we should not be able to
+come out againe, till we sent for more men into England, which would be a
+great charge, and losse of time, and meanes of many dangers. All these
+things pondred, we agreed to shoot off two pieces of ordinance, to warne
+the Christopher, and then we went our course for England: she hearing our
+pieces followed vs, and we carried a light for her, but the next day in the
+morning it was thicke, and we could not see her in the afternoone neither,
+so that we suspected that either she was gone with Spaine, or els that she
+should put foorth more sailes then we in the night, and was shot a head of
+vs, so that then we put forth our top-sailes, and went our course with
+England.
+
+At the time when the Christopher left vs, we were within 120 leagues of
+England, and 45 leagues Northwest and by West from Cape Finister: and at
+the same time in our ships we had not aboue sixe Mariners and sixe
+Marchants in health, which was but a weake company for such a ship to seeke
+a forren harbour.
+
+The 16 day about sixe of the clocke at night, we met with a great storme at
+the West-south-west, and West, and our men being weake, and not able to
+handle our sailes, we lost the same night our maine saile, foresaile, and
+spreetsaile, and were forced to lie a hulling, vntill the eighteenth day,
+and then we made ready an olde course of a foresaile, and put it to the
+yard, and therewith finding our selues far shot into the sleeue, we bare
+with our owne coast; but that foresaile continued not aboue two houres,
+before it was blowen from the yard with a freat, and then we were forced to
+lie a hull againe, vntil the nineteenth day of October in the morning, and
+then we put an olde bonnet to our foreyard, which, by the good blessing and
+prouidence of God, brought vs to the Ile of Wight, where we arriued the 20
+of October in the afternoone.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The commodities and wares that are most desired in Guinie, betwixt Sierra
+  Liona and the furthest place of the Mine.
+
+Manils of brasse, and some of loade.
+
+Basons of diuers sorts, but the most lattin.
+
+Pots of course tinne, of a quart and more.
+
+Some wedges of yron.
+
+Margarites, and certaine other sleight beads.
+
+Some blew Corall.
+
+Some horse tailes.
+
+Linnen cloth principally.
+
+Basons of Flanders.
+
+Some red cloth of low price, and some kersie.
+
+Kettles of Dutch-land with brasen handles.
+
+Some great brasse basons graued, such as in Flanders they set vpon their
+cupboords.
+
+Some great basons of pewter, and ewers grauen.
+
+Some lauers, such as be for water.
+
+Great kniues of a low price.
+
+Sleight Flanders-caskets.
+
+Chests of Roan of a lowe price, or any other chests.
+
+Great pinnes.
+
+Course French couerings.
+
+Packing sheets good store.
+
+Swords, daggers, frise mantels, and gownes, clokes, hats, red caps, Spanish
+blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of yron, sleight belles, gloues
+of a lowe price, leather bags, and what other trifles you will.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine Articles deliuered to M. Iohn Lok, by Sir William Gerard Knight,
+  M. William Winter, M. Beniamin Gonson, M. Anthony Hickman, and M. Edward
+  Castelin the 8 of September 1561, touching a voyage to Guinea.
+
+A remembrance for you M. Lok at your comming to the coast of Guinie.
+
+First, when God shal send you thither, to procure, as you passe alongst the
+coast, to understand what riuers, hauens, or harboroughs there be; and to
+make your selfe a plat thereof, setting those places which you shall thinke
+materiall in your sayd plat, with their true eleuations.
+
+Also you shall learne what commodities doe belong to the places where you
+shall touch, and what may be good for them.
+
+It is thought good, that hauing a fort vpon the coast of Mina in the king
+of Habaans country, [Marginal note: The English marchants intend to
+fortifie in Ghinea, in the king of Habaans country.] it would serve to
+great purpose: wherfore you are especially sent to consider where the fort
+might be best placed, and vpon what ground: wherein are to be noted these
+things following.
+
+1. That the ground so serue, that it ioyne to the sea on the one
+part, so as shippes and boats may come to lade and vnlade.
+
+2. What molde of earth the ground is of.
+
+3. What timber or wood may be had, and how it will be caried.
+
+4. What prouision of victuals may be had in the countrey: and what kinde of
+our victuals will best serve to continue.
+
+5. The place must be naturally strong, or such as may be made strong with a
+small charge, and afterwards kept with a few men.
+
+6. How water may be prouided, if there be none to be had in the ground
+where the fort shall stand, or neere to it.
+
+7. What helpe is to be had from the people of the country, either for the
+building of it, or for the defence thereof.
+
+To mooue the king of Haban a farre off, for the making of a fort, and to
+note how he will like it; but vse your communication so, that although
+there might fall out good cause for the doing of it, yet he do not
+vnderstand your meaning.
+
+Search the countrey so farre as you may, both alongst the coast, and into
+the land.
+
+To learne what became of the marchants that were left at Benin.
+
+The matters which shall be of importance to be noted we nothing doubt that
+you will omit, wherefore we referre the order of these affaires to your
+discretion.
+
+Also we pray you as occasion shall serue that you ayd and helpe our
+factours, both with your counsell and otherwise; and thus God send you
+safely to returne.
+
+William Gerrard, William Winter, Beniamin Gonson, Anthony Hickman, Edward
+Castelin.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of M. Iohn Lok to the worshipfull company of Marchants aduenturers
+  for Guinie, written 1561, shewing reasons for his not proceeding in a
+  voyage then intended to the foresayd countrey.
+
+Worshipfull sirs; since the arriuall of M. Pet and Buttoll Monioy (as I
+vnderstand) for the voyage it is concluded that the Minion shall proceed on
+her voyage, if within 20 dayes she may be repaired of those hurts she hath
+receiued by the last storme: or in the moneth of Ianuary also, if the wind
+wil serue therfore. Wherefore for that your worships shall not be ignorant
+of my determined purpose in the same, with the reasons that haue perswaded
+me thereunto; I haue thought good to aduertise you thereof, trusting that
+your worships will weigh them, as I vprightly and plainly meane them. And
+not for any feare or discouragement that I haue of my selfe by the raging
+of the stormes of the sea, for that (I thanke the Lord) these haue not
+beene the first that I haue abiden, neither trust I they shalbe the last.
+First the state of the ship, in which, though I thinke not but M. Pet can
+do more for her strengthening than I can conceiue, yet for all that, it
+will neither mend her conditions, nor yet make her so stanch that any cabin
+in her shalbe stanch for men to lie drie in: the which sore, what a
+weakening it will be to the poore men after their labour, that they neither
+can haue a shift of apparell drie, nor yet a drie place to rest in, I
+referre to your discretion. For though that at Harwich she was both bound
+and caulked as much as might be, both within and without, yet for all that
+she left not, afore this flaw, in other weathers, being stressed, to open
+those seames, and become in the state she was before; I meane, in wetting
+her men: notwithstanding her new worke. And my iudgement, with that litle
+experience I haue had, leadeth me to thinke that the ship whose water works
+and footings be spent and rotten cannot be but leake for men. Next, the
+vnseasonable time of the yeere which is now present. And how onely by
+meanes of the vnseasonable times in the returne from the voyage home, many
+thereby haue decayed, to the great misery and calamity of the rest, and
+also to the great slander of the voyage, (which I much respect) the last
+and other voyage haue declared. And what it is to make the voyage in
+vnseasonable time, that hath the second voyage also declared. Wherefore
+weying and foreseeing this (as I may wel terme it) calamity and vneuitable
+danger of men, and that by men she must be brought home againe (except that
+God will shew an extraordinary miracle) I purpose not nor dare I venture
+with a safe conscience to tempt God herein. Againe, forsomuch as she is
+alone, and hath so little helpe of boat or pinnesse in her trade, and also
+for her watering, where a long time of force must be spent, my going, to
+the accomplishment of your expectations, will be to small effect for this
+time, because I shall want both vessell and men to accomplish it. And I
+would not gladly so spend my time and trauell, to my great charges and
+paine, and after, for not falling out accordingly, to lose both pot and
+water, as the prouerbe is. As for the Primrose, if she be there, her trade
+will be ended or euer we come there, so that she of force, by want of
+prouision, must returne: yea, though we should carry with vs a supply for
+her, yet is the meeting of her doubtfull, and though we met her, yet will
+the men not tarry, as no reason is they should: howbeit my opinion of her
+is that she is put into Ireland. The Flowerdeluce was in Milford. Thus for
+that your worships might vnderstand the whole cause why I doe not proceed,
+I haue troubled you at this time with this my long Letter. And, as God is
+my Iudge, not for feare of the Portugals, which there we shall meet (and
+yet alone without ayde) as here is a shippe which was in Lisbon, whose men
+say that there are in a readinesse (onely to meet vs) foure great ships, of
+the which one is accounted 700 tunnes, and other pinnesses: yet not for
+feare of them, nor raging of the seas (whose rage God is aboue to rule) but
+onely for the premisses: the sequell whereof must by reason turne to a
+great misery to the men; the which I for my part (though it might turne me
+to as much gaine as the whole commeth to) yet would I not be so tormented,
+as the sight thereof would be a corsiue to my heart, and the more, because
+foreseeing the same, I should be so leud, as yeelding, to haue runne into
+the danger thereof, and therefore I haue absolutely determined with my
+selfe not to goe this voyage. Howbeit if in a seasonable time of the yeere
+I had but one ship sufficient, though much lesse by the halfe, I would not
+refuse (as triall being made thereof should appeare) or if I had ability of
+my selfe to venture so much, it should well be seene. And this I speake to
+giue you to vnderstand that I refuse not this for feare: If you purpose to
+proceed heerein, send some one whom you please; to whom I will not onely
+deliuer the articles which I haue receiued, but also will giue some
+particular notes which I haue noted in the affaires which you haue
+committed vnto mee, with the best helpe and counsell I can. Thus the liuing
+God keepe your worships all. Bristoll this 11 of December 1561.
+
+Your worships to comand to his power.
+
+Iohn Lok.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The relation of one William Rutter to M. Anthony Hickman his master
+  touching a voyage set out to Guinea in the yeere 1562, by Sir William
+  Gerard, Sir William Chester, M. Thomas Lodge, the sayd Anthony Hickman,
+  and Edward Castelin, which voyage is also written in verse by Robert
+  Baker.
+
+Worshipfull sir, my duty remembered, this shalbe to declare vnto you the
+discourse of this our voyage, since our departure out of England from
+Dartmouth; at which time I gaue you to vnderstand of our departure, which
+was the 25 of February 1562. Then hauing a prosperous winde we departed
+from thence, and sailed on our voyage vntill we arriued at Cauo verde the
+20 of March, making no abode there, but sailed along the coast to our first
+appointed port Rio de Sestos, at which port we arriued the third of Aprill
+in the morning, hauing the sight of a Frenchman, who assoone as he
+perceiued vs, set saile and made to the sea: in the meane time we came to
+an anker in the rode: and after that he had espied our flag, perceiuing vs
+to be Englishman, he bare with the shore, and hailed our ships with his
+ordinance, at which time we the merchants of both the ships were in the
+riuer in traffike, and had vnderstanding of the Negroes that he had bene
+there three dayes before our comming: so we concluded together, that if he
+sent his pinnesse to traffike, we would not suffer him, vntill we had taken
+further order with their captaine and marchants. In the afternoone the
+pinnesse came into the riuer, whose men we willed to make no traffike
+vntill we had talked further with their captaine, whom we willed that night
+to come aboord our admirall: which was done. At which sayd time M. Burton
+and Iohn Munt went aboord the Minion where the Frenchmen were, and there
+concluded that they should tary by vs eight dayes, and suffer vs quietly to
+traffike, wherewith they were not well pleased. Wherevpon the next morning
+they departed from vs, sailing alongst the coast to the Eastward towards
+Potis, which he did to hinder our traffike that way: wherefore the
+marchants of the Minion and we concluded (forasmuch as at that present we
+vnderstood that were no sailes past alongst) that we should go before, to
+the end we might not be hindered of our traffike by the Frenchmen; which
+thing we did: and at our comming thither we found the Frenchmen in traffike
+to the West of Potis, by whom we passed, and arriued at Rio de Potis the 12
+of April, where we remained in traffike vntill the 15 of the sayd moneth,
+and then departed from thence along the coast toward Sant Andre, where we
+appointed by agreement to tary for the Minion; and the 17 at night we came
+to the riuer of S. Andre, in which very day the Minion came vnto vs,
+telling vs that they met at cauo das Palmas a great ship and a caruell of
+the king of Portugals bound to the Mina, who gaue chase vnto them, and shot
+freely at them, and the Minion in her defence returned her the like: but
+God be praised the Minion had no hurt for that time. In the end we
+concluded to hasten towards cauo de tres puntus to haue put them from the
+castle, if by any meanes wee might; and when wee were come to the Cape, we
+lay a hull one night and two dayes, and doubting they had bene past, the
+Minion went neere the shore, and sent her merchants to a place called Anta,
+where beforetime we had traffike, and the next morning very early being the
+21 of the sayd moneth, we againe had sight of the ship and the carauell a
+good way to sea-boord of vs. Then we presently set saile, and bare with the
+formost of them, hoping to haue got betweene the castle and them, but we
+came short of our purpose, which was no small griefe vnto vs all; and when
+they had gotten the castle to friend, they shot at vs freely, and we at
+them, and the castle at vs; but we profited litle. In the afternoone we set
+saile and came to the town of Don Iuan called Equi, where the 22 in the
+morning we went a shoare to traffike, but the Negros would not vntill they
+had newes from Don Luis, for at that time Don Iuan was dead, and the 23
+came Don Luis his sonne and Pacheco minding to traffike with vs, at which
+said day came two gallies rowing along the shoare from the castle, minding
+to keepe vs from our traffike. The 24 we set saile and chased the galies to
+the castle againe. The Negroes being glad of that required vs to goe to
+Mowre, which is some 3 leagues behind, and thither would they come for that
+they stood in feare of the Portugals, and there we remained for the
+marchants that came out of the countrey which were come with their gold,
+but Anthonio don Luis his sonne, and Pacheco were aboord the Minion. And
+the 25 in the morning came the two galies from the castle againe vnto vs,
+the weather being very calme, they shot at vs and hit vs 3 times, and
+shortly after the wind came from the shore, at which instant we descried
+the ship, and the carauell comming toward vs, then we weighed and set
+saile, and bare as neere vnto them as we could: but it was night or euer
+wee met with them, and the night being very darke we lost them. The next
+day plying to the shore, at night we agreed to go with Cormantin, but the
+next morning being the 28 we were but a litle distant from the great ship
+and the 2 galies, hauing no wind at all, and the carauell hard aboord the
+shore. Then being calme, came the 2 galies rowing to the sterne of the
+Minion, and fought with her the most part of the forenoone: [Sidenote: Much
+hurt done in the Minion with firing a barrel of gunpouder.] and in the
+fight a mischance hapned in the Minions steward-roome by means of a barrell
+of pouder that tooke fire, wherewith were hurt the master gunner, the
+steward, and most part of the gunners: which the galies perceiuing, began
+to be more fierce vpon them, and with one shot cut halfe her foremast in
+twaine, that without present remedie shee was not able to beare saile, and
+presently vpon this the great ship sent her boat to the galies, who
+suddenly departed from vs. And after their departure we went aboord the
+Minion to counsell what were best to be done, at which time they were sore
+discomfited. Whereupon we deuised what was best to be done: and because wee
+knew that the Negros neither would nor durst traffike so long as the galies
+were on the coast it was therefore agreed that we should prepare our selues
+to depart to Rio de Sestos, and so we departed that day. [Sidenote: They
+returne.] The 14 of May in the rooming we fell with the land, and when wee
+came to it, we doubted what place it was, and sent our boates on land to
+know the trueth, and we found it to be Rio de Barbos, which is to be
+Eastward of sant Andre, and there remained in getting of water until the
+21, where we lost the day before 5 of our men by meanes of overthrowing our
+black pinnasse. The 22 we departed from thence to Rio de Sesto, where we
+arriued the 2 of Iune, and the 4 wee departed from Rio de Sesto, and
+arriued (God bee thanked) the 6 of August within sight of the Stert in the
+West part of England, our men being very sicke and weake. We haue not at
+this present aboue 20 sound men that are able to labour, and we haue of our
+men 21 dead, and many more very sore hurt and sicke. Master Burton hath
+bene sicke this 6 weekes, and at this present (God strengthen him) is so
+weake that I feare he will hardly escape. Herein inclosed your worship
+shall receiue a briefe of all the goods sold by vs, and also what
+commodities we haue receiued for the same. Thus I leaue to trouble your
+worship, reseruing all things als to our generall meeting, and to the
+bringer hereof. From aboord the Primerose the 6 of August 1563.
+
+Your obedient seruant
+
+William Rutter.
+
+There are brought home this voiage An. 1363. Elephants teeth 166 weighing
+1758 pounds. Graines 22 buts full.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A meeting at Sir William Gerards house the 11 of Iuly 1564. for the setting
+  foorth of a voyage to Guinea, with the Minion of the Queens, the Iohn
+  Baptist of London, and the Merline of M. Gonson.
+
+At this meeting were these chiefe aduenturers, Sir William Gerrard, sir
+William Chester, sir Thomas Lodge, Anthonie Hickman, and Edward Castelin.
+Where it was agreed that Francis Ashbie should be sent to Deptford to M.
+Gonson for his letters to Peter Pet to goe about the rigging of the Minion
+vpon the Queenes maiesties charges, and so the said Francis to repaire with
+the same letters to Gillingham with money to supplie our charge there.
+
+Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith call vpon their
+partners to supply towards this new rigging and victualling, 29 li. 10s.
+6d. for euery 100. li. value.
+
+Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith bring in 50 li.
+towards the furniture of the premisses.
+
+Likewise it is agreed that if M. Gonson giue his consent that the Merline
+shall be brought about from Bristoll to Hampton, that a letter be drawen
+whereunto his hand shall be, before order be giuen for the same.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The successe of this Voiage in part appeareth by certaine briefe relations
+  extracted out of the second voyage of Sir Iohn Hawkins to the West
+  Indies, made in the sayd yeere 1564, which I thought good to set downe
+  for want of further instructions, which hitherto I could not by any
+  meanes come by, albeit I haue vsed all possible indeuour for the
+  obtaining of the same: Take them therefore in the meane season as
+  foloweth.
+
+Master Iohn Hawkins, with the Iesus of Lubeck a ship of 700. tonnes, and
+the Salomon, a ship of 7 score, the Tiger a barke of 50, and the Swalow 30
+tonnes, being all well furnished with men to the number of one hundred
+threescore and ten, as also with ordinance and victuall requisite for such
+a voiage, departed out of Plimmouth the 18 day of October in the yeere of
+our Lord 1564. with a prosperous winde: at which departing, in cutting the
+foresaile, a marueilous misfortune happened to one of the officers in the
+ship, who by the pullie of the sheat was slaine out of hand, being a
+sorowfull beginning to them all. And after their setting out 10 leagues to
+the Sea, hee met the same day with the Minion a ship of the Queens
+Maiesties, whereof was captaine Dauid Carlet, and also her consort the Iohn
+Baptist of London being bound to Guinea likewise, who hailed one the other
+after the custome of the sea, with certaine pieces of ordinance for ioy of
+their meeting: which done, the Minion departed from him to seeke her other
+consort the Merline of London, which was a stone out of sight, leauing in
+M. Hawkins companie the Iohn Baptist her other consort.
+
+Thus sailing forwards on their way with a prosperous wind until the 21 of
+the same moneth, at that time a great storme arose, the wind being at
+Northeast about 9 of the clocke at night, and continued so 23 houres
+together, in which storme M. Hawkins lost the company of the Iohn Baptist
+aforesaid, and of his pinnasse called the Swallow, the other 3 ships being
+sore beaten with the storme. The 23 day the Swalow, to his no small
+reioicing, came to him againe in the night 10 leagues to the Northward of
+Cape Finister, hauing put roomer and not being able to double the Cape, in
+that there rose a contrary wind at Southwest. The 25 the wind continuing
+contrary, he put into a place in Galicia called Ferol, where he remained 5
+daies and appointed all the masters of his ships an order for the keeping
+of good company.
+
+[Sidenote: The firing and sinking of the Merline bound for Guinea.] The 26
+day the Minion came in also where he was, for the reioycing whereof he gaue
+them certaine pieces of ordinance after the curtesie of the Sea for their
+welcome, but the Minions men had no mirth because of their consort the
+Merline, whom at their departure from M. Hawkins vpon the coast of England,
+they went to seeke, and hauing met with her, kept company two dayes
+together, and at last by misfortune of fire (through the negligence of one
+of the gunners) the pouder in the gunners roome was set on fire, which with
+the first blast stroke out her poope, and therewithall lost 3 men, besides
+many sore burned (which escaped by the Brigandine being at her sterne) and
+immediatly to the great losse of the owners, and most horrible sight of the
+beholders, she sunke before their eies. The 30 day of the moneth M. Hawkins
+with his consorts and company of the Minion hauing now both the Brigandines
+at her sterne, weighed anker, and set saile on their voiage hauing a
+prosperous wind thereunto. The 4 of Nouember they had sight of the Iland of
+Madera, and the 6 day of Teneriffa, which they thought to haue bene the
+Canarie, in that they supposed themselues to haue bene to the Eastward of
+Teneriffa but were not: but the Minion beyng 3 or 4 leagues a head of vs
+kept on her course to Teneriffa, hauing better sight thereof then the other
+had, and by that means they parted company.
+
+The foresaid Sir Iohn Hawkins passing on his voiage by Cauo Verde and
+Sierra Leona, and afterward crossing ouer the maine Ocean comming to the
+towne of Burboroata vpon the coast of Terra firma in the West Indies, had
+further information of the euill successe of this Guinean voyage, as in the
+same hereafter is verbatim mentioned.
+
+The 29 of April, we being at anker without the road, a French ship called
+the green Dragon of Newhauen, whereof was captaine one Bon Temps came in,
+who saluted vs after the maner of the sea, with certaine pieces of
+ordinance, and we resaluted him with the like againe: with whom hauing
+communication, he declared that hee had bene at the Mina in Guinea, and was
+beaten off by the Portugals gallies, and enforced to come thither to make
+sale of such wares as he had: and further that the like was hapned vnto the
+Minion: also that captaine Dauid Carlet, and a marchant, with a dozen
+mariners were betraied by the Negros at their first arriuall thither,
+remaining prisoners with the Portugals, besides other misaduentures of the
+losse of their men hapned through the great lacke of fresh water, with
+great doubts of bringing home the ships: which was most sorrowfull for vs
+to vnderstand.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of M. George Fenner to Guinie, and the Islands of Cape Verde, in
+  the yeere of 1566. with three ships, to wit the Admirall called the
+  Castle of Comfort, the May Flower, and the George, and a pinnasse also:
+
+Written by Walter Wren.
+
+The 10 day of December, in the yeere abouesayd, we departed from Plimmouth,
+and the 12 day we were thwart of Vshant.
+
+The 15 day in the morning being Sunday, wee had sight of Cape Finister, and
+the same night we lost the company of our Admiral, wherefore we sayled
+along the coast of Portugall, hoping that our Admiral had bene before vs.
+
+The 18 day we met with a French ship of whom wee made inquirie for our
+Admirall, but he could not tell vs newes of him: so we followed our course
+to the Ilands of the Canaries.
+
+The 25 day in the morning we fell with a small Iland called Porto Santo,
+and within 3 houres wee had sight of another Iland called Madera which is 6
+leagues from Porto Santo.
+
+The said 25 day being the day of the Natiuitie, we hoised out our boat, and
+fet Master Edward Fenner captaine of the May Flower aboord vs, being in the
+George, with the master whose name was Robert Cortise and others of the
+sayd shippe, and feasted them with such cheere as God had sent vs.
+
+The 28 day we fel with an Iland called Tenerif, which is 27 leagues from
+the said Iland, and on the East side thereof we came to an anker in 40
+fadome water, within a base shot of the shore, in a little Baie wherein
+were 3 or 4 small houses: which Baie and houses were distant from a litle
+towne called Santa Cruz, a league or thereabout, and as we rode in the said
+Baie, we might see an Iland called The grand Canarie, which was 6 or 7
+leagues from vs.
+
+The 29 day the May Flower for that she could not fet into ye road where we
+were at an anker, by reason the wind was off the shore, and because she
+bare more roomer from the land then we did, in the morning came bearing in
+with the towne of Santa Cruz, thinking to come to an anker in the road
+against the towne, and before she came within the reach of any of their
+ordinance, they shot at her foure pieces which caused her to come roome
+with vs, and came at last to an anker by vs. And about one of the clocke in
+the afternoone, the forenamed captaine of the May Flower wrote a letter a
+shoare, directing it to the head officer of the towne of Santa Cruz, to the
+intent to vnderstand the pretense of the shooting off the said ordinance.
+
+The letter being written, Robert Courtise master of the May Flower, and
+Walter Wren were appointed to deliuer the same a land at 3 or 4 houses to
+bee conueid to the foresayd towne, and so went with six men in the boate,
+and rowed to the shore as neere as they might, for setting the boate on
+ground, for the sea went cruelly at the shore.
+
+The people stood in number 30 persons with such armour as they had: the
+foresayd Wren called to them in Spanish, declaring to them that they had a
+letter which they would very gladly haue conueid vnto the towne, shewing
+that they would traffique with them as marchants, desiring their helpe for
+the conuenience of the same letter. With that one of the Spaniards willed
+vs to come on land, and we should be welcome, but doubting the worst, the
+said Walter answered them that they would not come on land, vntill they had
+answere of their letter which they had brought.
+
+Whereupon one of the Spaniards vnraied himselfe, and lept into the water,
+and swam to the boat, whom we receiued. And he saluted vs, and demaunded
+what our request was: we made him answere, that by misfortune we lost the
+companie of our Admirall, and being bound to this Iland to traffique for
+wines and other things necessary for vs, do here mind to stay vntill he
+come.
+
+Concerning our letter he made vs answere, that he would with all diligence
+cary it, and deliuer it according to the direction, and so the said Walter
+knit the letter in a bladder, and deliuered it unto him, and also gaue him
+foure roials of Spanish money for his paines: and promising that we should
+haue answere of it, he tooke his leaue and swamme againe on shore, where
+the people stood ready to receiue him. And after that they had talked with
+him, and vnderstood our meaning, some of them threw vp their hats, and the
+other put them off holding them in their hands, and made vs very curteous
+signes, alwaies desiring that the boat would come a land, but we resaluting
+them rowed backe againe aboord.
+
+The 30 day the Gouernors brother of Santa Cruz came aboord the May Flower
+with sixe or seuen Spaniards with him, who concluded with the Captaine that
+we might come a shoare and traffique with them, but that day we did not,
+for we had sufficient pledge of theirs for our assurance. Our Captaine
+entertained them well, and at their departure gaue them foure pieces of
+ordinance for a farewell, and bestowed vpon them two cheeses with other
+things.
+
+The said Gouernors brother promised our Captaine that hee should haue
+sufficient pledges the morrow following, which was not done, whereupon wee
+grew suspicious, and went not that day a shore.
+
+The first day of Ianuary our captaine sent Nicholas Day and Iohn Sumpter a
+shore, who were very well entertained with as many of our company as went
+after them.
+
+In the said Iland is a maruellous high hill called the Pike, which is a far
+off more like a cloud in the aire, then any other thing: the hill is round
+and somewhat small at the top, it hath not bene knowen that euer any man
+could goe vp to the top thereof. And although it stand in 28 degrees which
+is as hote in January, as it is in England at Midsommer, yet is the top of
+the said hil Winter and Sommer seldome without snow.
+
+In this Iland about two leagues from the said Santa Cruz is a citie called
+Anagona.
+
+The third day wee departed about the Westerne point of the Iland, about 12
+or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz, into a Baie which is right agaynst the house
+of one Petro de Souses, in which Baie we came to an anker the 5 day, where
+we heard that our Admirall had bene there at an anker 7 dayes before vs,
+and was gone thence to an Iland called Gomera, whereupon we set saile
+presently to seeke him.
+
+The 6 day we came to an anker against the towne of Gomera, where we found
+our Admirall, which was very ioyfull of our comming, and we also of his
+sight.
+
+In the sayd road we found Edward Cooke, in a tall ship, and a shippe of the
+Coppersmiths of London, which the Portugals had trecherously surprised in
+the Baie of Santa Cruz, vpon the coast of Barbarie, which ship we left
+there all spoiled.
+
+Our General and merchants bought in the said towne for our provision, 14
+buts of wine, which cost 15 duckats a but, which were offred vs at Santa
+Cruz in Tenerif for 8, 9, and 10 duckats.
+
+The 9 day we departed from this road to another Baie, about 3 leagues off
+and there tooke in fresh water: and so the 10 day we set saile towards Cape
+Blanke, which is on the coast of Guinea.
+
+The 12 day we fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape Pargos, which is 35
+leagues from Cape Blanke. But hauing no knowledge of that coast, we went
+with Cape Blanke, and at the fall of the land we sounded and had 16 fadome
+water two leagues from the shore. The land is very lowe and white sand.
+[Sidenote: A good caueat.] Vpon the fall of the sayd coast beware how you
+borow in 12 or 10 fadome, for within 2 or 3 casts of the lead you may be on
+ground.
+
+The 17 day we set saile from Cape Blanke, directing our course South and by
+East and South among, and so fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape
+Verde, about 16 leagues, and about sixe leagues from the shore. The sayd
+land seemed vnto vs as if it had bene a great number of shippes vnder
+saile, being indeed nothing els but the land which was full of Hummoks,
+some high some lowe, with high trees on them. We bare with the said land
+till we were within 3 leagues of the shore, and then we sounded, and found
+28 fadome water, black oase. This day we saw much fish in sundry sculs
+swimming with their noses with the brim of the water.
+
+Passing along this coast we might see two small round hils, seeming to vs
+about a league one from the other, which is the Cape, and betweene them are
+great store of trees, and in all our dayes sailing we saw no land so high
+as the said two hils.
+
+The 19 day we came to an anker at the Cape, in a roade fast by the
+Westermost side of two hils in 10 fadome of water where you may ride in
+fiue or sixe fadome, for the ground is faire, and alwayes you shall haue
+the winde off the shore. And as soone as we were all at an anker our
+Generall came aboord vs, and with him the master of the Admirall, whose
+name was William Bats, and with them the captaine of the Viceadmirall,
+whose name was master Edward Fenner, and Robert Curtise the master, and
+dined aboord of vs being in the George, wherein was Captaine Iohn Heiwood,
+and Iohn Smith of Hampton master, and there we concluded to goe a land,
+which was halfe a mile from vs: [Sidenote: The foolish rashness of Wil.
+Bats perswading company to land unarmed.] and by the counsel of William
+Bats both Captaine and marchants and diuers of the companie went without
+armour: for he sayd, that although the people were blacke and naked, yet
+they were ciuill: so that hee would needs giue the venter without the
+consent of the rest to go without weapon. Thus they rowed to shore, where
+we being in the shippe might see a great companie of Negros naked, walking
+to and fro by the sea side where the landing place was, waiting for the
+comming of our men, who came too soone, and landed to their losse as it
+fell out afterwards.
+
+There went a shore the Admirals skiffe, and the May Flowers boate, and in
+them the number of 20 persons or thereabouts, as M. George Fenner the
+Generall, his brother M. Edward Fenner, Thomas Valentine, Iohn Worme and
+Francis Leigh marchants, Iohn Haward, William Bats, Nicholas Day, Iohn
+Thomson and others.
+
+At their comming to the shore there were 100 Negros or vpward, with their
+bowes and arrowes: our Captaines and merchants talked with them, and
+according to the vse of the country, the one demanded pledges of the other,
+and they were content to deliuer 3 of their Negros for 5 of our men. Our 5
+mens names were these, Iohn Haward, Wil. Bats, Nich. Day, Ioh. Tomson, and
+Iohn Curtise: these were deliuered them, and we receiued 3 Negros into our
+Admirals skiffe.
+
+Our men being a shore among the Negros, began to talke with them, declaring
+what ware and marchandize we had, as woollen cloth, linnen cloth, iron,
+cheese and other things. The Negros answered againe, they had ciuet, muske,
+gold and graines, which pleased our captaines and marchants very well. Then
+the Negros desired to haue a sight of some of our wares, to the which our
+marchants were content, and foorthwith sent aboord one of the boats for
+part of their marchandise, and in the meane time while the boate went to
+the ship, our fiue men were walking on the shore with the Negros, and our
+Generall and marchants staied in the other boat by the sea side, hauing the
+3 Negros with them.
+
+Our boate then came againe and brought iron and other marchandise, with
+bread, wine, and cheese which they gave vnto him. Then two of the Negros
+(which were the pledges) made themselues sicke, desiring to goe a shore,
+promising to send other two for them. Captaine Haiward perceiuing that our
+men had let the Negros come a shore, asked what they meant, and doubting
+the worst began to drawe toward the boate, and two or three of the Negros
+folowed him. And when hee came to the boate they began to stay him, and he
+made signes vnto them that hee would fetch them more drinke and bread:
+notwithstanding, when he was entering into the boate, one of them caught
+him by the breeches and would haue staied him, but hee sprang from him and
+leapt into the boate, and as soone as hee was in, one of the Negros a shore
+beganne to blow a pipe, and presently the other Negro that was in our boate
+sitting on the boates side, and master Wormes sword by him, suddenly drew
+the sword out of the scabberd, and cast himselfe into the Sea, and swamme a
+shore, and presently the Negros laied handes on our men that were on shore,
+and tooke three of them with great violence, and tore all their apparell
+from their backes and left them nothing to couer them, and many of them
+shot so thicke at our men in our boates, that they could scarse set hand to
+any Oare to rowe from the shore, yet (by the helpe of God) they got from
+them with their boates although many of them were hurt with their poysoned
+arrowes: and the poison is vncurable, if the arrow enter within the skin
+and drawe blood, and except the poison be presently suckt out, or the place
+where any man is hurt bee foorthwith cut away, he dieth within foure dayes,
+and within three houres after they bee hurt or pricked, wheresoeuer it be,
+although but at the litle toe, yet it striketh vp to the heart, and taketh
+away the stomacke, and causeth the partie marueilously to vomite, being
+able to brooke neither meat nor drinke.
+
+The Negros hauing vsed our men with such cruelty, whose names were Nicholas
+Day, William Bats, and Iohn Tomson, led them away to a towne which was
+within a mile of the water side, or thereabout.
+
+The 20 day we sent to land a boate or skiffe wherein were eight persons,
+and one of them was the foresayd Iohn Tomson and our interpreter which was
+a Frenchman, (for there was one of the Negros which spake good French:) and
+they caried with them two harquebusses, two targets and a mantell.
+
+The cause of sending them was to learne what ransome they demaunded for
+Bats and Day whom they detained. And when they came to the shore and told
+the Negros what they desired, they went and fetched them from among the
+trees, and brought them loose among fortie or fiftie of them. And being
+come within a stones cast of the sea side, William Bats brake from them,
+and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat, and he was not
+so soone in the water but hee fell downe, either breath or his foote
+failing him in the sand being soft: so that the Negros came and fell on him
+and tooke him and haled him, that we thought they had torne him in pieces:
+[Sidenote: The danger of poysoned arrowes.] for they tore againe all the
+apparell from his backe, so that some of them caried our men againe to the
+towne, and the rest shot at vs with their poisoned arrowes, and hurt one of
+our men called Androwes in the smal of the leg, who being come aboord, (for
+all that our Surgeons could do) we thought he would haue died.
+
+Our Generall (notwithstanding all this villanie) sent agayne to them, and
+offered them any thing that they desired for the raunsome of our men, but
+they would not deliuer them: giuing vs this answere: That there was in the
+foresayd roade, three weekes before we came, an English shippe which had
+taken three of their people, and vntill we did bring or send them againe,
+wee should not haue our men although wee would giue our three shippes with
+their furniture.
+
+The 21 day a French shippe of the burden of 80 tunnes (or thereabouts,)
+came to the place where we were, being bound to traffique at the Cape: we
+told them of the detaining of our two men by the Negros: and seeing that
+these Frenchmen were very well welcome to the Negros, we wished them to see
+whether they could procure them againe of the Negros, and bring them along
+with them, and our Generall promised the Frenchmen 100 li. to obtaine them.
+So wee committed the matter to the Frenchmen and departed.
+
+Of our men that were hurt by the Negros arrowes, foure died, and one to
+saue his life had his arme cut off. Androwes that was last of all hurt, lay
+lame not able to helpe himselfe: onely two recouered of their hurts. So we
+placed other men in the roomes of those that we lost, and set saile.
+
+The 26 day between Cape Verde and Bona vista we sawe many flying fishes of
+the bignesse of herrings, whereof two flew into our boat, which we towed at
+our sterne.
+
+The 28 day we fell with an Iland called Bona vista, which is from Cape
+Verde 86 leagues. The Northside of the sayde Iland is full of white sandie
+hils and dales, and somewhat high land.
+
+The sayd day wee came to an anker within the Westermost point, about a
+league within the point and found in our sounding faire sand in ten fadome
+water, but you may go neere till you be in fiue or six fadome, for the
+ground is faire.
+
+As soone as we were at an anker, our Generall sent his pinnasse a land, and
+found fiue or sixe small houses, but the people were fled into the
+mountains: and the next day he sent a shore againe, and met with two
+Portugals, who willingly went aboord with his men, and at their comming he
+welcommed them, although they were but poore and simple, and gaue each of
+them a paire of shoes, and so set them a shore againe.
+
+The 30 day we weighed and sailed into a Bay within a small Iland about a
+league from vs, and tooke plentie of diuers sortes of fishe. The foresayd
+Iland lieth in sixteene degrees. And if you meane to anker in the said Bay,
+you may borow in four or fiue fadome of the Southermost point of the sayd
+Iland, which you may see when you ride in the road. But beware of the
+middle of the Baie, for there lieth a ledge of rocks, which at lowe water
+breaketh, yet there is three fadome water ouer them.
+
+The last day of Ianuarie our Generall with certaine of his men went a shore
+in the Baie to the houses, where be found 12 Portugals. In all the Iland
+there were not aboue 30 persons, which were banished men for a time, some
+for more yeeres, some for lesse, and amongst them there was one simple man
+which was their captaine.
+
+They liue vpon goats flesh, cocks, hennes, and fresh water: other victuals
+they haue none, sauing fish, which they esteeme not, neither haue they any
+boats to take them.
+
+They reported that this Iland was giuen by the king of Portugall to one of
+his gentlemen, who hath let it foorth to rent for one hundreth duckats a
+yeere, which rent is reared onely in goates skinnes. For by their speaches
+there hath bene sent foorth of the sayd Iland into Portugall 40000 skins in
+one yeere.
+
+We were to these men marueilously welcome, and to their powers very wel
+entertained, and they gaue vs the flesh of as many hee-goates as wee would
+haue, and tooke much paines for vs in taking them, and bringing them from
+the mountains vpon their asses.
+
+They haue there great store of the oyle of Tortoises, which Tortoise is a
+fish which swimmeth in the Sea, with a shell on his backe as broad as a
+target. It raineth not in this Iland but in three moneths of the yeere,
+from the midst of Iuly to the midst of October, and it is here alwayes very
+hote. Kine haue bene brought hither, but by reason of the heate and drought
+they haue died.
+
+The 3 of February wee departed from this Iland, and the same day fell with
+another Iland called the Iland of Maiyo, which is 14 leagues from the other
+Iland: there is in the midst of the way between these two Ilands a danger
+which is alwayes to be seene.
+
+We ankred in the Northwest side of the sayd Ile in a faire Baie of eight
+fadomes water and faire sand, but here we staied not, but the fourth day
+weighed and sailed to another Iland called S. Iago, which lieth off the
+said Iland of Maiyo East and by South, and about fiue leagues one from the
+other. Being come within the Westermost point, we saw a faire road, and a
+small towne by the water side, and also a fort or platforme by it: there we
+purposed to come to anker, and our marchants to make some sale. But before
+we came within their shot, they let flie at vs two pieces, whereupon we
+went roomer and sailed along the shore two or three leagues from the road,
+where we found a small Baie and two or three small houses, where we came to
+an anker in 14 fadome faire ground.
+
+Within an houre after we had ankered we might see diuers horsemen and
+footmen on the land right against vs riding and running to and fro.
+
+The next day being the fift of Februarie, a great companie of their
+horsemen and footmen appeared on the shoare side, vnto whom our Generall
+sent to vnderstande whether they would quietly trafike with vs: And they
+sent him worde againe, desiring that they might speake with him, promising
+that if he came to trafike as a marchant he should be welcome, and also
+that he should haue any thing that he or the marchant would with reason
+demaund.
+
+When this answere was brought vnto our Generall he was very glad thereof
+and the whole companie, and presently (with as much speede as he could) he
+caused his boates to be made readie: but doubting the villanie of the
+Portugales, he armed his boates putting a double base in the head of his
+pinnesse, and two single bases in the head of the Skiffe, and so sent to
+the May-floure, and the George, and willed them in like sort to man their
+two boates.
+
+These boates being thus manned and well appointed, our Generall entered
+into his Skiffe, and with the rest rowed to the shoare where were
+threescore horsemen or more, and two hundreth footemen readie to receiue
+them. Our Generall marueiled that they came in so great a number and all
+armed, and therefore with a flagge of truce sent to them to knowe their
+pleasure: and they answered him with many faire promises and othes, that
+their pretence was all true, and that they meant like Gentlemen and
+Marchantes to trafike with him, declaring also that their Captaine was
+comming to speake with him, and therefore desired our Generall to come and
+speake with him himselfe.
+
+With this answere the boate returned, and then our Generall caused his
+pinnesse to rowe to them, and as he came neere the shoare they came in a
+great companie with much obeysance, opening their hands and armes abroade,
+bowing themselues with their bonnets off, with as much humble salutations
+outwardly as they might: earnestly desiring our Generall and Marchants to
+come on lande to them, wherevnto he would not agree without sufficient
+gages of Gentlemen and Marchants. At length they promised to sende two
+gages to our Generals contentment, promising fresh water, victuall, money,
+or Negroes for ware, if it were such as they liked: and therefore desired
+our Generall and Marchants to sende them a shoare in writing the quantitie
+of their wares, and the names of them: all which our Generall departed to
+performe, looking for their answere the morrowe following. And being gone a
+litle from the shoare, he caused his bases, curriers, and harquebusses to
+be shot off, and our ships in like case shot off fiue or sixe pieces of
+great ordinance, and so came aboord to prepare the note. The Portugales
+most of them departed, sauing those that were left to watch and to receiue
+the note, which about foure or five a clocke in the afternoone was sent,
+and it was receiued. [Sidenote: The treason of the Portugals in S. Iago to
+our men.] But all the purposes of the Portugal were villainously to betray
+vs, (as shal appeare hereafter) although we meant in truth and honestie,
+friendly to trafike with them.
+
+There was to the Westward of vs and about two leagues from vs, a towne
+behinde a point fast by the sea side, where they had certaine carauels, or
+shippes and also two Brigandines, whereof they (with all the speede that
+they might) made readie foure Carauels, and both the brigandines which were
+like two Gallies, and furnished them both with men and ordinance as much at
+they could carrie, and as soone as it was night, they came rowing and
+falling towardes vs: so that the land being high and the weather somewhat
+cloude or mystie, and they comming all the way close vnder the shoare we
+could not see them till they were right against one of our ships called the
+May-floure.
+
+By this time it was about one or two of the clocke in the morning, and the
+May-floure roade neerer them then the other two by a base shotte, so they
+made a sure account either to haue taken her or burnt her. In the meane
+time our men that had the watch (litle thinking of such villainous
+treacheries after so many faire wordes) were singing and playing one with
+the other and made such a noyse, that (being but a small gale of winde, and
+riding neere the lande) they might heare vs from the shoare: so that we
+supposed that they made account that we had espyed them, which indeede we
+had not, neither had any one piece of ordinance primed, or any other thing
+in a readinesse.
+
+They came so neere vs that they were within gunshot of vs, and then one of
+our men chanced to see a light, and then looking out spied the 4 ships, and
+suddenly cried out, Gallies, gallies, at which crie we were all amazed, and
+foorthwith they shot at vs all the great ordinance that they had, and their
+harquebusses, and curriers, and so lighted certaine tronkes or pieces of
+wilde fire, and all of them with one voice (as well they on the shoare as
+they in the shippes) gaue a great shoute, and so continued hallowing with
+great noyses, still approaching neerer and neerer vnto the May-floure. We
+(with all the speede that we might) made readie one piece of ordinance and
+shotte at them, which caused them somewhat to stay, so they charged their
+ordinance and shot at vs freshly againe, and while they shotte this second
+time at vs, we had made readie three pieces which we shot at them, but they
+approched still so neere, that at last we might haue shot a sheafe arrowe
+to them. Wherevpon we hauing a gale of winde off the shoare hoysed our
+foresayle, and cut our cable at the hawse, and went towarde our Admirall,
+and they continued following and shooting at vs, and sometime at our
+Admirall, but our Admirall shotte one such piece at them, that it made them
+to retire, and at length to worpe away like traiterous villaines, and
+although they thus suddenly shot all their shot at vs, yet they hurt
+neither man or boye of ours, but what we did to them we know not.
+
+But seeing the villanie of these men we thought it best to stay there no
+longer, but immediately set sayle towardes an Iland, called Fuego, 12
+leagues from the said Iland of S. Iago. At which Island of Fuego we came to
+an anker the 11 day of this moneth, against a white chappell in the West
+end of the sayd Iland, within half a league of a litle towne, and with in a
+league or thereabout of the vtternost point of the said Island.
+
+In this Island is a marueilous high hill which doth burne continually, and
+the inhabitants reported that about three yeeres past the whole Island was
+like to be burned with the abundance of fire that came out of it.
+
+About a league from the chappel to the Westward is a goodly spring of fresh
+water, where we had as much as we would. Wheate they haue none growing
+here, but a certaine seede that they call Mill, and certaine peason like
+Guinie peason, which Mill maketh good breade, but they haue here good store
+of rother beasts and goates. [Sidenote: Cotton in Fuego.] Their marchandize
+is cotton, which groweth there.
+
+The inhabitants are Portugals which haue commandement from the king to
+trafike neither with Englishmen nor Frenchmen for victuall or any other
+thing, except they be forced so to doe.
+
+There lieth off this Iland another called Ila Braua, which is not passing
+two leagues ouer, it hath good store of goates and many trees, but there
+are not passing three or foure persons dwelling in it.
+
+[Sidenote: They returne.] The 25 day of February we departed towardes the
+Islands at Azores: and on the 23 day March we had sight of one of them
+called Flores, and then wee might see another Island to the Northward of it
+called Cueruo, lying two leagues or thereabouts off the other.
+
+The 27 we came to an anker in Cueruo ouer against a village of about twelue
+simple houses; but in the night by a gale of winde, which caused vs to
+drawe our anker after vs we hoysed sayle and went to the aforesayd Island
+of Flores, where we sawe strange streames of water running downe from the
+high cliffes by reason of the great abundance of raine that had suddenly
+fallen.
+
+The 29 day we came againe to Cueruo and cast anker, but a storme arose and
+continued seuen or eight houres together, so that we let slip a cable and
+anker, and after the storme was alayed we came againe thinking to haue
+recouered the same, but the Portugals had either taken it, or spoiled it:
+the cable was new and neuer wet before, and both the cable and anker were
+better worth then 40 li. So that we accompt our selues much beholding to
+the honest Portugales.
+
+The 18 day of April we tooke in water at the Island of Flores, and hauing
+ankered our cable was fretted in sunder with a rocke and so burst, where
+wee lost that cable and anker also, and so departed to our coast.
+
+Then wee set sayle to an Islande named Faial, about the which lie three
+other Islands, the one catted Pico, the other Saint George, and the other
+Graciosa, which we had sight of on the eight and twentieth day.
+
+The 29 we came to an anker in the Southwest side of Faial in a faire bay,
+and 22 fadom water against a litle towne where we had both fresh water and
+fresh victuall. In this Iland by the report of the inhabitants, there
+groweth certaine greene woad, which by their speeches is faire better then
+the woad of S. Michael or of Tercera.
+
+The 8 day of May we came to Tercera where we met with a Portugall ship, and
+being destitute of a cable and anker, our Generall caused vs to keepe her
+companie, to see if she could conueniently spare vs any. The next morning
+we might see bearing with vs a great shippe and two Carauels, which we
+iudged to be of the king of Portugals Armada, and so they were, wherevpon
+we prepared our selues for our defence. [Sidenote: A Portugall Galiasse of
+400 tunnes.] The said ship was one of the kings Galliasses, about the
+burden of foure hundred tunnes, with about three hundred men in her, the
+shippe being well appointed with brasse pieces both great and small, and
+some of them so bigge that their shot was as great as a mans head, the
+other two Carauels were also very warlike and well appointed both with men
+and munition.
+
+[Sidenote: A fight betweene one English ship and 7 Portugals.] As soone as
+they were within shotte of vs, they waued vs amaine with their swords, we
+keeping our course, the greatest shippe shot at vs freely and the carauell
+also, and we prepared our selues, and made all things cleare for our
+safegard as neere as we could. Then the great shippe shot at vs all her
+broad side, and her foure greatest pieces that lay in her sterne, and
+therewith hurt some of our men, and we did the best we could with our shot
+to requite it. At last two other Carauels came off the shoare, and two
+other pinnesses full of men, and deliuered them aboord the great shippe,
+and so went backe againe with two men in a piece of them. The ship and the
+Carauell gave vs the first day three fights, and when the night was come
+they left off shooting, yet notwithstanding kept hard by vs all the night.
+In the meane time we had as much as wee could doe all the night to mende
+our ropes, and to strengthen our bulwarkes, putting our trust in God, and
+resoluing our selues rather to die in our defence then to bee taken by such
+wretches.
+
+The next day being the 10 of May in the morning, there were come to the
+aide the said Portugals foure great Armadas or Carauels more which made
+seuen, of which 4 three of them were at the least 100 tunnes a piece, the
+other not so bigge, but all well appointed and full of men. All these
+together came bearing with vs being in our Admirall, and one of the great
+Carauels came to lay vs aboorde (as we iudged) for they had prepared their
+false nettings, and all things for that purpose, so that the Gallias came
+vp in our larboord side, and the Carauell in our starboord side.
+
+Our Captaine and master perceiuing their pretence, caused our gunners to
+make all our ordinance readie with crossebarres, chaineshotte and
+haileshot: so the ship and Carauell came vp, and as soone as they were
+right in our sides, they shotte at vs as much ordinance as they could,
+thinking to haue layde vs presently aboord: whereupon we gaue them such a
+heate with both our sides, that they were both glad to fall asterne of vs,
+and so paused the space of two or three houres being a very small gale of
+winde.
+
+Then came vp the other fiue and shot all at vs, and so fell all asterne of
+vs, and then went to counsell together.
+
+Then our small barke named the George came to vs, and wee confered together
+a great space. And as the Portugall shippes and Carauels were comming to vs
+againe, our barke minding to fall asteme of vs and so to come vp againe,
+fell quickly vpon the lee, and by reason of the litle winde, it was so long
+before she could fill her sailes againe, that both the shippe and Carauels
+were came vp to vs, and she falling in among them made reasonable shift
+with them, but they got a head of her, so that she could not vs: then 5 of
+the Carauels followed her, but we saw she defended her selfe against them
+all.
+
+Then came the great shippe and the Carauell to vs, and fought with vs all
+that day with their ordinance.
+
+The May-floure our other consort being very good by the winde, tooke the
+benefite thereof and halde all that day close by the winde, but could not
+come neere vs. So when night againe was come, they gaue ouer their fight
+and followed vs all the night.
+
+In these many fights it could not otherwise be but needes some of our men
+must be slaine, (as they were indeede) and diuers hurt, and our tackle much
+spoyled: yet for all this we did our best indeuour to repaire all things,
+and to stand to it to the death with our assured trust in the mercie and
+helpe of God.
+
+This night the May-floure came vp to vs, and our Captaine tolde them his
+harmes and spoyles, and wished them if they could spare halfe a dosen fresh
+men to hoyse out their boate and sende them to him, but they could not
+spare any, and so bare away againe. Which when our enemies sawe in the next
+morning that we were one from another, they came vp to vs againe and gaue
+vs a great fight with much hallowing and hooping, making accompt either to
+boorde vs or els to sinke vs: but although our companie was but small, yet
+least they should see vs any whit dismayed, when they hallowed we hallowed
+also as fast as they, and waued to them to come and boorde vs if they
+durst, but that they would not, seeing vs still so couragious: [Sidenote:
+The 7 Portugals depart with shame from one English ship.] and hauing giuen
+vs that day foure fights, at night they forsooke vs with shame, as they
+came to vs at the first with pride.
+
+They had made in our ship some leakes with their shot which we againe
+stopped with al speed, and that being done, we tooke some rest after our
+long labour and trouble.
+
+The next day in the morning the May-floure came to vs, and brought vs sixe
+men in her boate which did vs much pleasure, and we sent to them some of
+our hurt men.
+
+Then we directed our course for our owne countrey, and by the second day of
+Iune we were neere to our owne coast and sounded being thwart the Lyzard.
+
+The third day we had sight of a shippe which was a Portugall, who bare with
+vs, and at his comming to vs (the weather being calme) our Captaine caused
+him to hoyse foorth his boate to come aboord to speake with him, and at
+their comming our Captaine and Marchants demanded of them what ware they
+had, and whether they were bound, and they made answere that their lading
+was sugar and cotton. Then our Captaine and Marchants shewed them fiue
+Negroes that we had, and asked them whither they would buy them, which they
+were very desirous to doe, and agreed to giue for them 40 chests of sugar,
+which chests were small hauiug not aboue 26 loaues in a piece: so they with
+their boate did fetch fiue of the chestes and deliuered them and went for
+more, and when they had laden their boate and were come againe, we might
+see bearing with vs a great ship and a small, which our Captaine supposed
+to be men of warre or Rouers, [Marginal Note: A Portugall ship
+(notwithstanding all their villanies) defended by our men from Rouers.] and
+then willed the Portugales to carie their sugar to their ship againe,
+purposing to make our selues readie for our defence. But the Portugales
+earnestly intreated our Captaine not so to forsake them, and promised him
+(if he would safegard them) to giue him aboue the bargain ten chests of
+sugar: whereupon our Captaine was content, and the Portugall not being good
+of sayle, we spared our topsayles for her; so at last the foresaid ship
+bare with vs, and (seeing that we did not feare them) gaue vs ouer. And the
+next morning came two others bearing with vs, and seeing vs not about to
+flie a iot from them forsooke vs also.
+
+The 5 day of Iune we had sight of the Stert, and about noone we were thwart
+of the bay of Lime, and so sounded and had 35 fadom water.
+
+The sixt day we came in at the Needles and so came to an anker vnder the
+Isle of Wight at a place called Meadhole, and from thence sayled to
+Southampton where we made an ende of this voyage.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Ambassage of M. Edmund Hogan, one of the sworne Esquires of her
+  Maiesties person, from her Highnesse to Mully Abdelmelech Emperour of
+  Marocco, and king of Fes and Sus: in the yeere 1577, written by himselfe.
+
+I Edmund Hogan being appointed Ambassadour from the Queenes Maiestie to the
+aboue named Emperour and King Mully Abdelmelech, departed with my company
+and seruants from London the two and twentie day of April 1577, being
+imbarked in the good ship called the Gallion of London, and arriued in
+Azafi a port of Barbarie the one and twentie day of May next following.
+Immediatly I sent Leonell Edgerton a shoare with my letters directed to
+Iohn Williams and Iohn Bampton, who dispatched a Trottero to Marocco to
+knowe the kings pleasure for my repaire to the Court, which letters came to
+their hands on the Thursday night.
+
+They with all speede gaue the king understanding of it, who being glad
+thereof speeded the next day certaine Captaines with souldiers and tents,
+with other prouision to Azafi, so that vpon Whitsunday at night the said
+Captaines with Iohn Bambton, Robert Washborne, and Robert Lion, and the
+kings officers came late to Azafi.
+
+In the meane time I remained a boord, and caused some of the goods to be
+discharged for lightning of the shippe, and I wrote in my letter that I
+would not lande, till I knewe the Kings pleasure.
+
+The 22 day being Saturday, the Make-speede arriued in the roade about two
+of the clocke in the afternoone.
+
+The 27 day, being Whitsunday, came aboord the Gallion Iohn Bampton, and
+others, giuing me to vnderstande how much the King reioyced of my safe
+arriuall, comming from the Queenes Maiestie, and how that for my safe
+conduct to the Court he had sent foure Captaines and an hundred souldiers
+well appointed, with a horse furnished which he vsed himselfe to ride on
+with all other furniture accordingly: they wished mee also to come on lande
+in the best order I could, as well for my selfe as my men, which I did,
+hauing to the number of tenne men, whereof three were trumpetters.
+
+The ships being foure appointed themselues in the best order they could for
+the best shew, and shot off all their ordinance to the value of twentie
+Markes in powder.
+
+At my comming a shoare, I found all the souldiers well appointed on
+horsebacke, the Captaines and the Gouernour of the towne standing as neere
+the water side as they could, with a Iennet of the kings, and receiued mee
+from the boate declaring how glad his maiestie was of my safe arriuall,
+comming from the Queenes Maiestie my Mistresse, and that hee had sent them
+to attend vpon me, it being his pleasure that I should tarie there on shore
+fiue or sixe dayes for my refreshing.
+
+So being mounted vpon the Iennet, they conducted mee through the Towne into
+a faire fielde vpon the Sea-side where was a tent prouided for mee, and all
+the ground spread with Turkie carpets, and the Castle discharged a peale of
+ordinance, and all things necessarie were brought into my tent, where I
+both tooke my table and lodging, and had other conuenient tents for my
+seruants.
+
+The souldiers enuironed the tents, and watched about vs day and night as
+long as I lay there, although I sought my speedier dispatch.
+
+On the Wednesday towards night, I tooke my horse and traueiled ten miles to
+the first place of water that we could finde, [Marginal Note: In Barbarie
+they haue no Innes but they lodge in open fieldes where they can find
+water.] and there pitched our tents till the next morning, and so traueiled
+till ten of the clocke, and then pitched our tents till foure, and so
+traueiled as long as day light would suffer about 26 miles that day.
+
+The next day being Friday I traueiled in like order but eight and twentie
+miles at the most, and by a Riuer being about sixe miles within sight of
+the Citie of Marocco we pitched our tents.
+
+[Sidenote: The singular humanitie of the king to our Ambassadour.]
+Immediatly after came all our English marchants, and the French on
+horsebacke to meete me, and before night there came an Alcayde from the
+king with fiftie men, and diuers mules laden with victuall and banket, for
+my supper, declaring vnto me how glad the king shewed himselfe to heare of
+the Queenes Maiestie, and that his pleasere was I should be receiued into
+his country as neuer any Christian the like: and desired to knowe what time
+the next day I would come into his citie, because he would that all the
+Christians as also his nobilitie should meete me, and willed Iohn Bampton
+to be with him early in the morning, which he did.
+
+About seuen of the clocke being accompanied with the French and English
+marchants, and a great number of souldiers, I passed towards the citie, and
+by that time I had traueiled 2 miles, there met me all the Christians of
+the Spaniards and Portugals to receiue me, which I knowe was more by the
+kings commandement then of any good wils of themselues: for some of them
+although they speake me faire hung downe their heads like dogs, and
+especially the Portugales, and I countenanced them accordingly. [Marginal
+Note: The Spaniards and Portugales were commanded by the king in paine of
+death, to meete the English Ambassadour.]
+
+So I passed on till I came within two English miles of the Citie, and then
+Iohn Bampton returned, shewing me that the king was so glad of my comming,
+that hee could not deuise to doe too much, to shewe the good will that hee
+did owe to the Queenes Maiestie, and her Realme.
+
+His counsellors met me without the gates, and at the entrie of the gates,
+his footmen and guard were placed on both sides of my horse, and so brought
+me to the kings palace.
+
+The king sate in his chaire with his Counsell about him, as well the Moores
+as the Elchies, and according to his order giuen vnto me before, I there
+declared my message in Spanish, and made deliuerie of the Queenes Maiesties
+letters, and all that I spake at that present in Spanish, hee caused one of
+his Elchies to declare the same to the Moores present, in the Larbe tongue.
+
+Which done, he answered me againe in Spanish, yeelding to the Queenes
+Maiestie great thankes, and offering himselfe and his countrey to bee at
+her Graces commaundement, and then commaunded certaine of his Counsellers
+to conduct mee to my lodging, not being farre from the Court.
+
+The house was faire after the fashion of that countrey, being daily well
+furnished with al kind of victuall at the kings charge.
+
+The same night he sent for mee to the Court, and I had conference with him
+about the space of two houres, where I throughly declared the charge
+committed vnto mee from her Maiestie, finding him conformable, willing to
+pleasure and not to vrge her Maiestie with any demaundes, more then
+conueniently shee might willingly consent vnto, hee knowing that out of his
+countrey the Realme of England might be better serued with lackes, then bee
+in comparison from vs.
+
+[Sidenote: The king of Spaine sought to disgrace the Queene and her
+Ambassadour.] Further he gaue me to vnderstand, that the king of Spaine had
+sent vnto him for a licence, that an Ambassadour of his might come into his
+countrey, and had made great meanes that if the Queenes maiesty of England
+sent any vnto him, that he would not giue him any credit or intertainment,
+albeit (said he) I know what the king of Spaine is, and what the Queene of
+England and her Realme is: for I neither like of him nor of his religion,
+being so gouerned by the Inquisition that he can doe nothing of himselfe.
+
+Therefore when he commeth vpon the licence which I haue granted, he shall
+well see how litle account I will make of him and Spaine, and how greatly
+will extoll you for the Queenes maiestie of England.
+
+He shall not come to my presence as you haue done, and shall dayly: for I
+minde to accept of you as my companion and one of my house, whereas he
+shall attend twentie dayes after he hath done his message.
+
+After the end of this speech I deliuered Sir Thomas Greshams letters, when
+as he tooke me by the hand, and led me downe a long court to a palace where
+there ranne a faire fountaine of water, and there sitting himselfe in a
+chaire, he commanded me to sit downe in another, and there called for such
+simple Musicians as he had.
+
+[Sidenote: The king of Barbarie sent into England for Musicians.] Then I
+presented him with a great base Lute, which he most thankfully accepted,
+and then he was desirous to heare of the Musicians, and I tolde him that
+there was great care had to prouide them, and that I did not doubt but vpon
+my returne they should come with the first ship. He is willing to giue them
+good intertainment with prouision of victuall, and to let them liue
+according to their law and conscience wherein he vrgeth none to the
+contrary.
+
+I finde him to be one that liueth greatly in the feare of God, being well
+exercised in the Scriptures, as well in the olde Testament as also in the
+New, and he beareth a greater affection to our Nation then to others
+because of our religion, which forbiddeth worship of Idols, and the Moores
+called him the Christian king.
+
+[Sidenote: A rich gift bestowed upon our Ambassadour.] The same night being
+the first of Iune, I continued with him till twelue of the clocke, and he
+seemed to haue so good liking of me, that he tooke from his girdle a short
+dagger being set with 200 stones, rubies and turkies, and did bestow it
+vpon me, and so I being conducted returned to my lodging for that time.
+
+The next day because he knew it to be Sunday and our Sabbath day he did let
+me rest. But on the Munday in the afternoone he sent for me, and I had
+conference with him againe, and musicke.
+
+Likewise on the Tuesday by three of the clocke he sent for me into his
+garden, finding him layd vpon a silke bed complayning of a sore leg: yet
+after long conference he walked into another Orchard, where as hauing a
+faire banketting-house and a great water, and a new gallie in it, he went
+aboord the gallie and tooke me with him, and passed the space of two or
+three houres, shewing the great experience he had in Gallies, wherein (as
+he said) he had excercised himselfe eighteene yeeres in his youth.
+
+After supper he shewed me his horses and other commodities that he had
+about his house, and since that night I haue not seene him, for that he
+hath kept in with his sore legge, but he hath sent to me daily.
+
+The 13 of Iune at sixe of the clocke at night I had againe audience of the
+king, and I continued with him till midnight, hauing debated as well for
+the Queenes commission as for the well dealing, with her marchants for
+their traffike here in these parts, saying, he would do much more for the
+Queenes maiesty and the Realme offering that all English ships with her
+subiects may with good securitie enter into his ports and dominions as well
+in trade of marchandise, as for victuall and water, as also in time of
+warre with any her enemies to bring in prises and to make sales, as
+occasion should serue, or else to depart againe with them at their
+pleasure.
+
+Likewise for all English ships that shall passe along his coast of
+Barbarie, and thorow the straites into the Leuant seas, that he would
+graunt safe conduct that the said ships and marchants with their goods
+might passe into the Leuant seas, and so to the Turks dominions, and the
+king of Argiers, as his owne, and that he would write to the Turke and to
+the king of Argier his letters for the well vsing of our ships and goods.
+
+Also that hereafter no Englishmen that by any meanes be taken captiues,
+shall be solde within any of his dominions: whereupon I declared that the
+Queenes maiesty accepting of these his offers was pleased to confirme the
+intercourse and trade of our marchants within this his countrey, as also to
+pleasure him with such commodities as he should haue need of, to furnish
+the necessities and wants of his countrey in trade of marchandise, so as he
+required nothing contrarie to her honour and law, and the breach of league
+with the Christian princes her neighbours. [Sidenote: A good prouiso.]
+
+The same night I presented the king with the case of combes, and desired
+his maiestie to haue special regard that the ships might be laden backe
+againe, for that I found litle store of saltpeter in readinesse in Iohn
+Bamptons hands. He answered me that I should haue all the assistance
+therein that he could, but that in Sus he thought to haue some store in his
+house there, as also that the Mountayners had made much in a readinesse: I
+requested that he would send downe, which he promised to doe.
+
+The eighteene day I was with him againe and so continued there till night,
+and he shewed me his house with pastime in ducking with water-Spaniels, and
+baiting buls with his English dogges.
+
+At this time I moued him againe for the sending downe to Sus, which he
+granted to doe, and the 24. day there departed Alcayde Mammie, with Lionell
+Edgerton, and Rowland Guy to Sus, and caried with them for our accompts and
+his company the kings letters to his brother Muly Hammet, and Alcayde
+Shauan, and the Viceroy.
+
+The 23. day the king sent me out of Marocco to his garden called
+Shersbonare, with his gard, and Alcayde Mamoute, and the 24. at night I
+came to the court to see a Morris dance, and a play of his Elchies. He
+promised me audience the next day being Tuesday, but he put it off till
+Thursday: and the Thursday at night I was sent for to the king after
+supper, and then he sent Alcayde Rodwan, and Alcayde Gowry to conferre with
+me, but after a little talke I desired to be brought to the King for my
+dispatch. And being brought to him, I preferred two bils of Iohn Bamptons
+which he had made for prouision of Salt-peter: also two bils for the quiet
+traffique of our English marchants, and bils for sugars to be made by the
+Iewes, as well for the debts past, as hereafter, and for good order in the
+Ingenios. Also I mooued him againe for the Salt-peter, and other
+dispatches, which he referred to be agreed vpon by the two Alcaydes. But
+the Friday being the 20. the Alcaydes could not intend it, and vpon
+Saturday Alcayde Rodwan fell sicke, so on Sunday we made meanes to the
+King, and that afternoone I was sent for to conferre vpon the bargaine with
+the Alcaydes and others, but did not agree.
+
+Vpon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the King for my dispatch, and the same
+afternoone I was called againe to the Court, and referred all things to the
+King, accepting his offer of Salt-peter.
+
+That night againe the King had me into his Gallie, and the Spaniels did
+hunt the ducke.
+
+The Thursday I was appointed to way the 300. kintals grosse of Salt-peter,
+and that afternoone the Tabybe came vnto mee to my lodging, shewing mee
+that the king was offended with Iohn Bampton for diuers causes.
+
+The Sunday night late being the 7. of Iuly, I got the King to forgiue all
+to Iohn Bampton, and the King promised me to speake againe with me vpon
+Munday.
+
+Vpon Tuesday I wrote to him againe for my dispatch, and then hee sent Fray
+Lewes to mee, and said that he had order to write.
+
+Vpon Wednesday I wrote againe, and he sent me word that vpon Thursday I
+should come and be dispatched, so that I should depart vpon Friday without
+faile, being the twelfth of Iuly.
+
+[Sidenote: The Emperor of Maroco his priuileges to the English.] So the
+Friday after according to the kings order and appointment I went to the
+court, and whereas motion and petition was made for the confirmation of the
+demaunds which I had preferred, they were all granted, and likewise the
+priuileges which were on the behalfe of our English marchants requested,
+were with great fauour and readinesse yeelded vnto. And whereas the Iews
+there resident were to our men in certaine round summes indebted, the
+Emperors pleasure and commandement was, that they should without further
+excuse or delay, pay and discharge the same. And thus at length I was
+dismissed with great honour and speciall countenance, such as hath not
+ordinarily bene shewed to other Ambassadors of the Christians.
+
+And touching the priuate affaires intreated vpon betwixt her Maiestie and
+the Emperour, I had letters from him to satisfie her highnesse therein. So
+to conclude, hauing receiued the like honourable conduct from his Court, as
+I had for my part at my first landing, I embarked my selfe with my foresaid
+company, and arriuing not long after in England, I repaired to her
+Maiesties court, and ended my Ambassage to her highnesse good liking, with
+relation of my seruice performed.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Thomas Stukeley, wrongfully called Marques of Ireland, into
+  Barbary 1578. Written by Iohannes Thomas Freigius in Historia de cæde
+  Sebastiani Regis Lusitaniæ.
+
+Venerant autem ad regem etiam sexcenti Itali, quos Papa subministrarat,
+Comiti Irlandiæ: qui cum Vlissiponem tribus instructis nauibus appulisset
+Regi operam suam condixit, eumque in bellum sequi promisit. Cap. 7.
+
+Totum exercitum diuisit in quatuor acies quadratas: In dextro latere primum
+agmen erat Velitum et militum Tingitanorum, eosque ducebat Aluarus Peresius
+de Tauara: sinistram aciem seu mediam tenebant Germani et Ital, quibus
+imperabat Marchio Irlandiæ, etc. Cap 11.
+
+Inter nobiles qui in hoc prælio ceciderunt, fuerunt, præter regem
+Sebastianum, dux de Auero, Episcopi Conimbricensis et Portuensis,
+Commissarius generalis à Papa missus Marchio Irlandiæ, Christophorus de
+Tauora, et plures alij. Cap. 13.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+There came also to Don Sebastian the King of Portugal 600. Italians, whom
+the Pope sent vnder the conduct of the Marques of Irland: [Marginal note:
+Thomas Stukeley was wrongfully indued with this title.] who being arriued
+at Lisbone with three tall ships, proffered his seruice to the king, and
+promised to attend vpon him in the warres, &c.
+
+He diuided the whole Armie into 4 squadrons: vpon the right wing stood the
+first squadron, consisting of men lightly armed or skirmishers and of the
+souldiers of Tangier, Generall of whom was Don Aluaro Perez de Tauara: the
+left or midle squadron consisted of Germanes and Italians, vnder the
+command of the Marques of Irland, &c. cap. 7.
+
+Of Noblemen were slaine in this battel (besides Don Sebastian the king) the
+duke de Auero, the two bishops of Coimbra and of Porto, the Marques of
+Irland sent by the Pope as his Commissary generall, Christopher de Tauara,
+and many others, cap. 13.
+
+It is further also to be remembred, that diuers other English gentlemen
+were in this battell, whereof the most part were slaine; and among others
+M. Christopher Lyster was taken captiue, and was there long detained in
+miserable seruitude. Which gentleman although at length he happily escaped
+the cruel hands of the Moores; yet returning home into England, and for his
+manifold good parts being in the yeere 1586. employed by the honourable the
+Earle of Cumberland, in a voyage intended by the Streights of Magellan for
+the South sea, as Viceadmirall, (wherein he shewed singular resolution and
+courage) and appointed afterward in diuers places of speciall command and
+credite, was last of all miserably drowned in a great and rich Spanish
+prize vpon the coast of Cornwall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine reports of the prouince of China learned through the Portugals
+  there imprisoned, and chiefly by the relation of Galeotto Perera, a
+  gentleman of good credit, that lay prisoner in that Countrey many yeeres.
+  Done out of Italian into English by Richard Willes.
+
+This land of China is parted into 13. Shires, the which sometimes were ech
+one a kingdome by it selfe, but these many yeeres they haue bene all
+subiect vnto one King. Fuquien is made by the Portugals the first Shire,
+because there their troubles began, and they had occasion thereby to know
+the rest. In the shire be 8 cities, but one principally more famous then
+others called Fuquieo, the other seuen are reasonably great, the best
+knowen whereof vnto the Portugals is Cinceo, in respect of a certaine hauen
+ioyning thereunto, whither in time past they were wont for marchandise.
+
+Cantan is the second shire, not so great in quantitie, as well accompted
+of, both by the king thereof, and also by the Portugals, for that it lieth
+neerer vnto Malacca then any other part of China, and was first discried by
+the Portugals before any other shire in that prouince: this shire hath in
+it seuen Cities.
+
+Chequeam is the third shire, the chiefest Citie therein is Donchion,
+therein also standeth Liampo, with other 13. or 14. boroughes: countrey
+townes therein are too too many to be spoken of.
+
+The fourth shire is called Xutiamfu, the principall Citie thereof is great
+Pachin, where the King is alwayes resident. In it are fifteene other very
+great Cities: of other townes therein, and boroughes well walled and
+trenched about, I will say nothing.
+
+The fift shire hath name Chelim: the great Citie Nanquin chiefe of other
+fifteene cities was herein of ancient time the royall seat of the Chinish
+kings. From this shire, and from the aforesaid Chequeam forward bare rule
+the other kings, vntil the whole region became one kingdome.
+
+[Sidenote: Quianci, or, Quinzi.] The 6. shire beareth the name Quianci, as
+also the principal City thereof, wherein the fine clay to make vessels is
+wrought. The Portugals being ignorant of this Countrey, and finding great
+abundance of that fine clay to be solde at Liampo, and that very good
+cheape, thought at the first that it had bene made there, howbeit in fine
+they perceiued that the standing of Quinzi more neere vnto Liampo then to
+Cinceo or Cantan was the cause of so much fine clay at Liampo: within the
+compasse of Quinci shire be other 12. cities.
+
+The 7. shire is Quicin, the 8. Quansi, the 9. Confu, the 10. Vrnan, the 11.
+Sichiua. In the first hereof there be 16. Cities, in the next 15: how many
+Townes the other 3. haue, wee are ignorant as yet, as also of the proper
+names of the 12. and 13. shires, and the townes therein.
+
+This finally may be generally said hereof, that the greater shires in China
+prouince may bee compared with mightie kingdomes.
+
+In eche one of these shires bee set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, before
+whom are handled the matters of other Cities. There is also placed in ech
+one a Tutan, as you would say, a gouernour, and a Chian, that is a visiter,
+as it were: whose office is to goe in circuit, and to see iustice exactly
+done. By these meanes so vprightly things are ordered there, that it may be
+worthily accompted one of the best gouerned prouinces in all the world.
+
+The king maketh alwayes his abode in the great city Pachin, as much to say
+in our language, as by the name thereof I am aduertised, the towne of the
+kingdome. This kingdome is so large, that vnder fiue moneths you are not
+able to trauaile from the Townes by the Sea side to the Court, and backe
+againe, no not vnder three moneths in poste at your vrgent businesse. The
+post-horses in this Countrey are litle of body, but swift of foote. Many
+doe traueile the greater part of this iourney by water in certaine light
+barkes, for the multitude of Riuers commodious for passage from one Citie
+to another.
+
+The king, notwithstanding the hugenesse of his kingdome, hath such a care
+thereof, that euery Moone (for by the Moones they reckon their monethes)
+hee is aduertised fully of whatsoeuer thing happeneth therein, by these
+meanes following.
+
+The whole prouince being diuided into shires, and each shire hauing in it
+one chiefe and principall Citie, whereunto the matters of all the other
+Cities, Townes and boroughes, are brought, there are drawen in euery chiefe
+Citie aforesaid intelligences of such things as doe monethly fall out, and
+be sent in writing to the Court. If happely in one moneth euery Post be not
+able to goe so long a way, yet doeth there notwithstanding once euery
+moneth arriue one Poste out of the shire. Who so commeth before the new
+moone stayeth for the deliuery of his letters vntil the moone be changed.
+Then likewise are dispatched other Posts backe into all the 13. shires
+againe.
+
+Before that we doe come to Cinceo wee haue to passe through many places,
+and some of great importance. For this Countrey is so well inhabited neere
+the Sea side, that you cannot goe one mile but you shall see some Towne,
+borough or hostry, the which are so aboundantly prouided of all things,
+that in the Cities and townes they liue ciuily. Neuertheles such as dwel
+abrode are very poore, for the multitude of them euery where is so great,
+that out of a tree you shall see many times swarme a number of children,
+where a man would not haue thought to haue found any one at all.
+
+From these places in number infinite, you shall come vnto wo Cities very
+populous, and, being compared with Cinceo, not possibly to be discerned
+which is the greater of them. These Cities are as well walled as any Cities
+in all the world. As you come into either of them, there standeth so great
+and mighty a bridge, that the like thereof I haue neuer seene in Portugal
+nor else where. I heard one of my fellowes say, that hee tolde in one
+bridge 40. arches. The occasion wherefore these bridges are made so great
+is, for that the Countrey is toward the sea very plaine and low, and
+ouerflowed euer as the sea water encreaseth. The breadth of the bridges,
+although it bee well proportioned vnto the length thereof, yet are they
+equally built no higher in the middle then at either ende, in such wise
+that you may see directly from the one ende to the other: the sides are
+wonderfully well engraued after the maner of Rome-workes. But that we did
+most marueile at was therewithall the hugenesse of the stones, the like
+whereof, as we came into the Citie, we did see many set vp in places
+dis-habited by the way, to no small charges of theirs, howbeit to little
+purpose, whereas no body seeth them but such as doe come by. The arches are
+not made after our fashion, vauted with sundry stones set together: but
+paued, as it were, whole stones reaching from one piller to an other, in
+such wise that they lye both for the arches heads, and galantly serue also
+for the highway. I haue bene astonied to beholde the hugenesse of the
+aforesaid stones: some of them are xii. pases long and vpward, the least
+ii. good pases long, and an halfe.
+
+The wayes echwhere are galantly paued with fouresquare stone, except it be
+where for want of stone they vse to lay bricke: in this voyage wee
+trauailed ouer certaine hilles, where the wayes were pitched, and in many
+places no worse paued then in the plaine ground. This causes vs to thinke,
+that in all the world there bee no better workemen for buildings, then the
+inhabitants of China. The Countrey is so well inhabited, that no one foote
+of ground is left vntilled: small store of cattell haue we seene this day,
+we sawe onely certaine oxen wherewithall the countrey, men do plow their
+ground. One oxe draweth the plough alone not onely in this shire, but in
+other places also, wherein is greater store of cattell. These countreymen
+by arte do that in tillage, which we are constrained to doe by force. Here
+be solde the voydings of close stooles, although there wanteth not the dung
+of beastes: and the excrements of man are good marchandise throughout all
+China. The dungfermers seek in euery streete by exchange to buy this dirtie
+ware for herbs and wood. The custome is very good for keeping the Citie
+cleane. There is great aboundance of hennes, geese, duckes, swine, and
+goates, wethers haue they none: the hennes are solde by weight, and so are
+all other things. Two pound of hennes flesh, geese, or ducke, is worth two
+foi of their money, that is, d. ob. sterling. Swines flesh is sold at a
+penie the pound. Beefe beareth the same price, for the scarcitie thereof,
+howbeit Northward from Fuquieo and farther off from the seacoast, there is
+beefe more plentie and solde better cheape; We haue had in all the Cities
+we passed through, great abundance of all these victuals, beefe onely
+excepted. And if this Countrey were like vnto India, the inhabitants
+whereof eate neither henne, beefe, nor porke, but keepe that onely for the
+Portugals and Moores, they would be sold here for nothing. But it so
+falling out, that the Chineans are the greatest eaters in all the world,
+they do feed vpon all things, specially on porke, which, the fatter it is,
+is vnto them the lesse lothsome. The highest price of these things
+aforesaid I haue set downe, better cheap shal you sometimes buy them for
+the great plentie thereof in this countrey. Frogs are solde at the same
+price that is made of hennes, and are good meate amongst them, as also
+dogs, cats, rats, snakes, and all other vncleane meates.
+
+The Cities be very gallant, specially neere vnto the gates, the which are
+marueilously great, and couered with iron. The gate houses are built on
+high with towers, and the lower part thereof is made of bricke and stone,
+proportionally with the walls, from the walles vpward the building is of
+timber, and many stories in it one aboue the other. The strength of their
+townes is in the mightie walles and ditches, artillerie haue they none.
+
+The streetes in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the Cities we haue seene are
+very faire, so large and so straight, that it is wonderfull to behold.
+Their houses are built with timber, the foundations onely excepted, the
+which are layed with stone: in ech side of the streetes are pentises or
+continuall porches for the marchants to walke vnder: the breadth of the
+streets is neuertheless such, that in them 15. men may ride commodiously
+side by side. As they ride they must needs passe vnder many high arches of
+triumph that crosse ouer the streetes made of timber, and carued diuersly,
+couered with tiles of fine clay: vnder these arches the Mercers do vtter
+their smaller wares, and such as list to stand there are defended from
+raine and the heate of the Sunne. The greater gentlemen haue these arches
+at their doores: although some of them be not so mightily built as the
+rest.
+
+I shall haue occasion to speake of a certaine order of gentlemen that are
+called Louteas. I wil first therefore expound what this word signifieth.
+Loutea is as much to say in our language as Sir, and when any of them
+calleth his name, he answereth Sir: and as we do say, that the king hath
+made some gentlemen, so say they, that there is made a Loutea. And for that
+amongst them the degrees are diuers both in name and office, I will tell
+you onely of some principals, being not able to aduertise you of all.
+
+The maner how gentlemen are created Louteas, and do come to that honour and
+title, is by the giuing of a broad girdle, not like to the rest, and a cap,
+at the commaundement of the king. The name Loutea is more generall and
+common vnto mo, then the qualitie of honour thereby signified agreeth
+withall. Such Louteas as doe serue their prince in weightie matters for
+iustice, are created after trial made of their learning: but the other
+which serue in smaller affaires, as Captaines, constables, sergeants by
+land and sea, receiuers and such like, whereof there be in euery citie, as
+also in this, very many, are made for fauour: the chiefe Louteas are serued
+kneeling.
+
+The whole prouince of China is diuided, as I haue said, into 13. shires, in
+euery shire at the least is one gouernour called there Tutan, in some
+shires there be two.
+
+[Sidenote: Chian, or, Chaen.] Chiefe in office next vnto them be certaine
+other named Chians, that is, high Commissioners as you would say, visiters,
+with full authoritie in such wise, that they doe call vnto an accompt the
+Tutans themselues, but their authoritie lasteth not in any shire longer
+then one yere. Neuerthelesse in euery shire being at the least 7. cities,
+yea, in some of them 15. or 16. beside other boroughes and townes not well
+to be numbred, these visiters where they come are so honoured and feared,
+as though they were some great princes. At the yeres end, their circuit
+done, they come vnto that Citie which is chiefe of others in the shire, to
+do iustice there: finally busying themselues in the searching out of such
+as are to receiue the order of Louteas, whereof more shalbe said in another
+place.
+
+Ouer and beside these officers, in the chiefe Citie of ech one of these
+aforesaid 13. prouinces, is resident one Ponchiassi, Captaine thereof, and
+treasurer of all the kings reuenues. This Magistrate maketh his abode in
+one of the foure greatest houses that be in all these head Cities. And
+although the principall part of his function be to be Captaine, to be
+treasourer of the reuenues in that prouince, and to send these reuenues at
+appointed times to the Court: yet hath he notwithstanding by his office
+also to meddle with matters appertaining vnto iustice.
+
+[Sidenote: Anchiassi, or Hexasi.] In the second great house dwelleth an
+other Magistrate called Anchiassi, a great officer also, for he hath
+dealings in all matters of iustice. Who although he be somewhat inferior in
+dignitie vnto the Ponchiassi, yet for his great dealings and generall
+charge of iustice, whosoeuer seeth the affaires of the one house and the
+other might iudge this Anchiassi to be the greater.
+
+Tuzi, an other officer so called, lieth in the thirde house, a magistrate
+of importance, specially in things belonging vnto warfare, for thereof hath
+he charge.
+
+There is resident in the 4 house a fourth officer, bearing name Taissu. In
+this house is the principall prison of all the Citie. Ech one of these
+Magistrates aforesaide may both lay euill doers in prison, and deliuer them
+out againe, except the fact be heinous and of importance: in such a case
+they can do nothing, except they do meet al together. And if the deed
+deserueth death, all they together cannot determine thereof, without
+recourse made vnto the Chian wheresoeuer hee be, or to the Tutan; and eft
+soones it falleth put, that the case is referred vnto higher power. In all
+Cities, not onely chiefe in ech shire, but in the rest also, are meanes
+found to make Louteas. Many of them do study at the prince his charges,
+wherefore at the yeeres ende they resort vnto the head Cities, whither the
+Chians doe come, as it hath bene earst aside, as well to giue these
+degrees, as to sit in iudgement ouer the prisoners.
+
+The Chians go in circuit euery yeere, but such as are to be chosen to the
+greatest offices meete not but from three yeeres to three yeeres, and that
+in certaine large halles appointed for them to be examined in. Many things
+are asked them, whereunto if they doe answere accordingly, and be found
+sufficient to take their degree, the Chian by and by granteth it them: but
+the Cap and girdle, whereby they are knowen to be Louteas, they weare not
+before that they be confirmed by the king. Their examination done, and
+triall made of them, such as haue taken their degree wont to be giuen them
+with all ceremonies, vse to banquet and feast many dayes together (as the
+Chineans fashion is to ende all their pleasures with eating and drinking)
+and so remaine chosen to do the king seruice in matters of learning. The
+other examinates founde insufficient to proceed are sent backe to their
+studie againe. Whose ignorance is perceiued to come of negligence and
+default, such a one is whipped, and sometimes sent to prison, where lying
+that yere when this kinde of acte was, we found many thus punished, and
+demaunding the cause thereof, they saide it was for that they knew not how
+to answere vnto certaine things asked them. It is a world to see how these
+Louteas are serued and feared, in such wise, that in publike assemblies at
+one shrike they giue, all the seruitors belonging vnto iustice tremble
+thereat. At their being in these places, when they list to mooue, be it but
+euen to the gate, these seruitors doe take them vp, and carry them in
+seates of beaten gold. After this sort are they borne when they goe in the
+City, either for their owne businesse abroade, or to see ech other at home.
+For the dignitie they haue, and office they doe beare, they be all
+accompanied: the very meanest of them all that goeth in these seates is
+vshered by two men at the least, that cry vnto the people to giue place,
+howbeit they neede it not, for that reuerence the common people haue vnto
+them. They haue also in their company certaine Sergeants with their maces
+either siluered or altogether siluer, some two, some foure, other sixe,
+other eight, conueniently for ech one his degree. The more principal and
+chiefe Louteas haue going orderly before these Sergeants, many other with
+staues, and a great many catchpoules with rods of Indish canes dragged on
+the ground, so that the streets being paued, you may heare affarre off as
+well the noyse of the rods, as the voyce of the criers. These fellowes
+serue also to apprehend others, and the better to be knowen they weare
+liuery red girdles, and in their caps peacocks feathers. Behinde these
+Louteas come such as doe beare certaine tables hanged at staues endes,
+wherein is written in siluer letters, the name, degree, and office of that
+Loutea, whom they follow. In like maner they haue borne after them hattes
+agreeable vnto their titles: if the Loutea be meane, then hath he brought
+after him but one hat, and that may not be yealowe: but if he be of the
+better sort, then may he haue two, three, or foure: the principall and
+chiefe Louteas may haue all their hats yealow, the which among them is
+accompted great honour. The Loutea for warres, although he be but meane,
+may notwithstanding haue yealow hats. The Tutans and Chians, when they goe
+abroad, haue besides all this before them ledde three or foure horses with
+their guard in armour.
+
+Furthermore the Louteas, yea and all the people of China, are wont to eate
+their meate sitting on stooles at high tables as we doe, and that very
+cleanely, although they vse neither tableclothes nor napkins. Whatsoeuer is
+set downe vpon the boord is first carued before that it be brought in: they
+feede with two sticks, refraining from touching their meate with their
+hands, euen as we do with forkes: for the which respect they lesse do need
+any table clothes. Ne is the nation only ciuill at meate, but also in
+conuersation, and in courtesie they seeme to exceede all other. Likewise in
+their dealings after their maner they are so ready, that they farre passe
+all other Gentiles and Moores: the greater states are so vaine, that they
+line their clothes with the best silke that may be found. The Louteas are
+an idle generation, without all maner of exercises and pastimes, except it
+be eating and drinking. Sometimes they walke abroad in the fields to make
+the souldiers shoot at pricks with their bowes, but their eating passeth:
+they will stand eating euen when the other do draw to shoot. The pricke is
+a great blanket spread on certaine long poles, he that striketh it, hath of
+the best man there standing a piece of crimson Taffata, the which is knit
+about his head: in this sort the winners be honoured, and the Louteas with
+their bellies full returne home againe. The inhabitants of China be very
+great Idolaters, all generally doe worship the heauens: and, as wee are
+wont to say, God knoweth it: so say they at euery word, Tien Tautee, that
+is to say, The heauens doe know it. Some doe worship the Sonne, and some
+the Moone, as they thinke good, for none are bound more to one then to
+another. [Sidenote: After the Dutch fashion.] In their temples, the which
+they do call Meani, they haue a great altar in the same place as we haue,
+true it is that one may goe round about it There set they vp the image of a
+certaine Loutea of that countrey, whom they haue in great reuerence for
+certaine notable things he did. At the right hand standeth the diuel much
+more vgly painted then we doe vse to set him out, whereunto great homage is
+done by such as come into the temple to aske counsell, or to draw lottes:
+this opinion they haue of him, that he is malicious and able to do euil. If
+you aske them what they do thinke of the souls departed, they will answere
+that they be immortall, and that as soone as any one departeth out of this
+life, he becommeth a diuel if he haue liued well in this world, if
+otherwise, that the same diuel changeth him into a bufle, oxe, or dogge.
+[Marginal note: Pythagorean like.] Wherefore to this diuel they doe much
+honour, to him doe they sacrifice, praying him that he will make them like
+vnto himselfe, and not like other beastes. They haue moreouer another sort
+of temples, wherein both vpon the altars and also on the walls do stand
+many idols well proportioned, but bare headed; these beare name Omithofon,
+accompted of them spirits, but such as in heauen doe neither good nor
+euill, thought to be such men and women as haue chastly liued in this world
+in abstinence from fish and flesh, fed onely with rise and salates. Of that
+diuel they make some accompt: for these spirits they care litle or nothing
+at all. Againe they hold opinion that if a man do well in this life, the
+heauens will giue him many temporall blessings, but if he doe euil, then
+shall he haue infirmities, diseases, troubles, and penurie, and all this
+without any knowledge of God. Finally, this people knoweth no other thing
+then to liue and die, yet because they be reasonable creatures, all seemed
+good vnto them we speake in our language, though it were not very
+sufficient; our maner of praying especially pleased them, and truely they
+are well ynough disposed to receiue the knowledge of the trueth. Our Lord
+grant for his mercy all things so to be disposed, that it may sometime be
+brought to passe, that so great a nation as this is perish not for want of
+helpe.
+
+Our maner of praying so well liked them, that in prison importunately they
+besought vs to write for them somewhat as concerning heauen, the which we
+did to their contentation with such reasons as we knew, howbeit not very
+cunningly. As they do their idolatry they laugh at themselues. If at any
+time this countrey might be ioyned in league with the kingdome of
+Portugale, in such wise that free accesse were had to deale with the people
+there, they might all be soone conuerted. The greatest fault we doe finde
+in them is Sodomie, a vice very common in the meaner sort, and nothing
+strange among the best. This sinne were it left of them, in all other
+things so well disposed they be, that a good interpreter in a short space
+might do there great good: If, as I said, the countrey were ioyned in
+league with vs.
+
+Furthermore the Louteas, with all the people of China, are wont to
+solemnise the dayes of the new and full Moones in visiting one an other,
+and making great banquets: for to that end, as I earst said, do tend all
+their pastimes, and spending their dayes in pleasure. They are wont also to
+solemnise ech one his birth day, whereunto their kindred and friends do
+resort of custome with presents of iewels or money, receiuing againe for
+their reward good cheare. They keepe in like maner a generall feast with
+great banquets that day their king was borne. But their most principall and
+greatest feast of all, and best cheare, is the first day of new yeere,
+namely the first day of the new Moone of February, so that their first
+moneth is March, and they reckon the times accordingly, respect being had
+vnto the reigne of their princes: as when any deed is written, they date it
+thus, Made such a day of such a moone, and such a yeere of the reigne of
+such a king. And their ancient writings beare date of the yeeres of this or
+that king.
+
+Now will I speake of the maner which the Chineans doe obserue in doing of
+iustice, that it be knowen how farre these Gentiles do herein exceed many
+Christians, that be more bounden then they to deale iustly and in trueth.
+Because the Chinish king maketh his abode continually in the city of
+Pachin, his kingdome is so great, and the shires so many, as tofore it hath
+bene said: in it therefore the gouernours and rulers, much like vnto our
+Shireffs, be appointed so suddenly and speedily discharged againe, that
+they haue no time to grow naught. Furthermore to keepe the state in more
+securitie, the Louteas that gouerne one shire are chosen out of some other
+shire distant farre off, where they must leaue their wiues, children and
+goods, carying nothing with them but themselues. True it is, that at their
+comming thither they doe finde in a readinesse all things necessary, their
+house, furniture, seruants, and all other things in such perfection and
+plentie, that they want nothing. Thus the king is well serued without all
+feare of treason.
+
+In the principall Cities of the shires be foure chiefe Louteas, before whom
+are brought all matters of the inferiour Townes, throughout the whole
+Realme. Diuers other Louteas haue the managing of iustice, and receiuing of
+rents, bound to yeelde an accompt thereof vnto the greater officers. Other
+do see that there be no euil rule kept in the Citie: ech one as it behoueth
+him. [Sidenote: The Italians call it the strapado.] Generally all these doe
+imprison malefactors, cause them to be whipped and racked, hoysing them vp
+and downe by the armes with a cord, a thing very vsuall there, and
+accompted no shame. These Louteas do vse great diligence in the
+apprehending of theeues, so that it is a wonder to see a theefe escape away
+in any City, towne or village. Vpon the sea neere vnto the shoare many are
+taken, and looke euen as they are taken, so be they first whipped, and
+afterward layde in prison, where shortly after they all die for hunger and
+cold. At that time when we were in prison, there died of them aboue
+threescore and ten. If happely any one, hauing the meanes to get food, do
+escape, he is set with the condemned persons, and prouided for as they be
+by the King, in such wise as hereafter it shalbe said.
+
+Their whips be certaine pieces of canes, cleft in the middle, in such sort
+that they seeme rather plaine then sharpe. He that is to be whipped lieth
+groueling on the ground: vpon his thighes the hangman layeth on blowes
+mightily with these canes, that the standers by tremble at their crueltie.
+Ten stripes draw a great deale of blood, 20. or 30. spoile the flesh
+altogether, 50. or 60. will require long time to bee healed, and if they
+come to the number of one hundred, then are they incurable.
+
+The Louteas obserue moreouer this: when any man is brought before them to
+be examined, they aske him openly in the hearing of as many as be present,
+be the offence neuer so great. Thus did they also behaue themselues with
+vs: For this cause amongst them can here be no false witnesse, as daily
+amongst vs it falleth out. This good commeth thereof, that many being
+alwayes about the Iudge to heare the euidence, and beare witnesse, the
+processe cannot be falsified, as it happeneth sometimes with vs. The
+Moores, Gentiles, and Iewes haue all their sundry othes, the Moores do
+sweare by their Mossafos, the Brachmans by their Fili, the rest likewise by
+the things they do worship. The Chineans though they be wont to sweare by
+heauen, by the Moone, by the Sunne, and by all their Idoles, in iudgement
+neuertheless they sweare not at all. If for some offence an othe be vsed of
+any one, by and by with the least euidence he is tormented, so be the
+witnesses he bringeth, if they tell not the trueth, or do in any point
+disagree, except they be men of worship and credit, who are beleeued
+without any further matter: the rest are made to confesse the trueth by
+force of torments and whips. Besides this order obserued of them in
+examinations, they do feare so much their King, and he where he maketh his
+abode keepeth them so lowe, that they dare not once stirre. Againe, these
+Louteas as great as they be, notwithstanding the multitude of Notaries they
+haue, not trusting any others, do write all great processes and matters of
+importance themselues. Moreouer one vertue they haue worthy of great
+praise, and that is, being men so wel regarded and accompted as though they
+were princes, yet they be patient aboue measure in giuing audience. We
+poore strangers brought before them might say what we would, as all to be
+lyes and fallaces that they did write, ne did we stand before them with the
+usuall ceremonies of that Countrey, yet did they beare with vs so
+patiently, that they caused vs to wonder, knowing specially how litle any
+aduocate or Iudge is wont in our Countrey to beare with vs. For wheresoeuer
+in any Towne of Christendome should be accused vnknowen men as we were, I
+know not what end the very innocents cause would haue: but we in a heathen
+Countrey, hauing our great enemies two of the chiefest men in a whole
+Towne, wanting an interpreter, ignorant of that Countrey language, did in
+the end see our great aduersaries cast into prison for our sake, and
+depriued of their Offices and honour for not doing iustice, yea not to
+escape death: for, as the rumour goeth, they shalbe beheaded. Somewhat is
+now to be said of the lawes that I haue bene able to know in this Countrey,
+and first, no theft or murther is at any time pardoned: adulterers are put
+in prison, and the fact once prooued, are condemned to die, the womans
+husband must accuse them: this order is kept with men and women found in
+that fault, but theeues and murderers are imprisoned as I haue said, where
+they shortly die for hunger and cold. If any one happely escape by bribing
+the Gailer to giue him meate, his processe goeth further, and commeth to
+the Court where he is condemned to die. [Sidenote: A pillory boord.]
+Sentence being giuen, the prisoner is brought in publique with a terrible
+band of men that lay him in Irons hand and foot, with a boord at his necke
+one handfull broad, in length reaching downe to his knees, cleft in two
+parts, and with a hole one handfull downeward in the table fit for his
+necke, the which they inclose vp therein, nailing the boord fast together;
+one handfull of the boord standeth vp behinde in the necke: The sentence
+and cause wherefore the fellon was condemned to die, is written in that
+part of the table that standeth before.
+
+This ceremony ended, he is laid in a great prison in the company of some
+other condemned persons, the which are found by the king as long as they do
+liue. The bord aforesaid so made tormenteth the prisoners very much,
+keeping them both from rest, and eke letting them to eat commodiously,
+their hands being manacled in irons vnder that boord, so that in fine there
+is no remedy but death. In the chiefe Cities of euery shire, as we haue
+erst said, there be foure principall houses, in ech of them a prison: but
+in one of them, where the Taissu maketh his abode, there is a greater and a
+more principall prison then in any of the rest: and although in euery City
+there be many, neuerthelesse in three of them remaine onely such as be
+condemned to die. Their death is much prolonged, for that ordinarily there
+is no execution done but once a yeere, though many die for hunger and cold,
+as we haue seene in this prison. Execution is done in this maner. The
+Chian, to wit, the high Commissioner or Lord chiefe Iustice, at the yeres
+end goeth to the head City, where he heareth againe the causes of such as
+be condemned. Many times he deliuereth some of them, declaring that boord
+to haue bene wrongfully put about their necks: the visitation ended, he
+choseth out seuen or eight, not many more or lesse of the greatest
+malefactors, the which, to feare and keepe in awe the people, are brought
+into a great market place, where all the great Louteas meete together, and
+after many ceremonies and superstitions, as the vse of the Countrey is, are
+beheaded. This is done once a yeere: who so escapeth that day, may be sure
+that he shall not be put to death all that yeere following, and so
+remaineth at the kings charges in the greater prison. In that prison where
+we lay were alwayes one hundred and mo of these condemned persons, besides
+them that lay in other prisons.
+
+These prisons wherein the condemned caytifes do remaine are so strong, that
+it hath not bene heard, that any prisoner in all China hath escaped out of
+prison, for in deed it is a thing impossible. The prisons are thus builded.
+First all the place is mightily walled about, the walles be very strong and
+high, the gate of no lesse force: within it three other gates, before you
+come where the prisoners do lye, there many great lodgings are to be seene
+of the Louteas, Notaries, Parthions, that is, such as do there keepe watch
+and ward day and night, the court large and paued, on the one side whereof
+standeth a prison, with two mighty gates, wherein are kept such prisoners
+as haue committed enormious offences. This prison is so great, that in it
+are streets and Market places wherein all things necessary are sold. Yea
+some prisoners liue by that kind of trade, buying and selling, and letting
+out beds to hire: some are dayly sent to prison, some dayly deliuered,
+wherefore this place is neuer void of 7. or eight hundred men that go at
+libertie.
+
+Into one other prison of condemned persons shall you go at three yron
+gates, the court paued and vauted round about, and open aboue as it were a
+cloister. In this cloister be eight roomes with yron doores, and in ech of
+them a large gallerie, wherein euery night the prisoners do lie at length,
+their feet in the stocks, their bodies hampered in huge wooden grates that
+keep them from sitting, so that they lye as it were in a cage, sleepe if
+they can: in the morning they are losed againe, that they may go into the
+court. Notwithstanding the strength of this prison, it is kept with a
+garrison of men, part whereof watch within the house, part of them in the
+court, some keepe about the prison with lanterns and watch-bels answering
+one another fiue times euery night, and giuing warning so lowd, that the
+Loutea resting in a a chamber not neere thereunto, may heare them. In these
+prisons of condemned persons remaine some 15, other 20. yeres imprisoned,
+not executed, for the loue of their honorable friends that seeke to prolong
+their liues. Many of these prisoners be shoomakers, and haue from the king
+a certaine allowance of rise: some of them worke for the keeper, who
+suffreth them to go at libertie without fetters and boords, the better to
+worke. Howbeit when the Loutea called his checke roll, and with the keeper
+vieweth them, they all weare their liuerses, that is, boords at their
+necks, yronned hand and foot. When any of these prisoners dieth, he is to
+be seene of the Loutea and Notaries, brought out of a gate so narrow, that
+there can but one be drawen out there at once. The prisoners being brought
+forth, one of the aforesaid Parthions striketh him thrise on the head with
+an yron sledge, that done he is deliuered vnto his friends, if he haue any,
+otherwise the king hireth men to cary him to his buriall in the fields.
+
+Thus adulterers and theeues are vsed. Such as be imprisoned for debt once
+knowen, lie there vntill it be paied. [Sidenote: Of like the first lenders
+be the more wealthie.] The Taissu or Loutea calleth them many times before
+him by the vertue of his office, who vnderstanding the cause wherefore they
+do not pay their debts, appointeth them a certaine time to do it, within
+the compasse whereof if they discharge not their debts being debtors in
+deed, then they be whipped and condemned to perpetuall imprisonment: if the
+creditors be many, and one is to be paied before another, they do, contrary
+to our maner, pay him first of whom they last borrowed, and so ordinarily
+the rest, in such sort that the first lender be the last receiuer. The same
+order is kept in paying legacies: the last named receiueth his portion
+first. They accompt it nothing to shew fauour to such a one as can do the
+like againe: but to do good to them that haue litle or nothing, that is
+worth thanks, therefore pay they the last before the first, for that their
+intent seemeth rather to be vertuous then gainefull.
+
+When I said, that such as be committed to prison for theft and murther were
+iudged by the Court, I ment not them that were apprehended in the deed
+doing, for they need no triall, but are brought immediatly before the
+Tutan, who out of hand giueth sentence. Others not taken so openly, which
+do need trial, are the malefactors put to execution once a yere in the
+chiefe cities, to keepe in awe the people: or condemned, do remaine in
+prison, looking for their day. Theeues being taken are caried to prison
+from one place to another in a chest vpon mens shoulders, hired therefore
+by the king, the chest is 6. handfuls high, the prisoner sitteth therein
+vpon a bench, the couer of the chest is two boords, amid them both a
+pillery-like hole, for the prisoners necke, there sitteth he with his head
+without the chest, and the rest of his body within, not able to mooue or
+turne his head this way or that way, nor to plucke it in; the necessities
+of nature he voydeth at a hole in the bottome of a chest, the meate he
+eateth is put into his mouth by others. There abideth he day and night
+during his whole iourney: if happily his porters stumble, or the chest do
+iogge or be set down carelessly, it turneth to his great paines that
+sitteth therein, al such motions being vnto him hanging as it were. Thus
+were our companions carried from Cinceo, 7. dayes iourney, neuer taking any
+rest as afterward they told vs, and their greatest griefe was to stay by
+the way: as soone as they came, being taken out of the chests, they were
+not able to stand on their feet, and two of them died shortly after. When
+we lay in prison at Fuquieo, we came many times abroad, and were brought to
+the pallaces of noble men, to be seene of them and their wiues, for that
+they had neuer seene any Portugale before. Many things they asked vs of our
+Countrey, and our fashions, and did write euery thing, for they be curious
+in nouelties aboue measure. The gentlemen shew great curtesie vnto
+strangers, and so did we finde at their hands, and because that many times
+we were brought abroad into the City, somewhat wil I say of such things as
+I did see therein, being a gallant City, and chiefe in one of the 13.
+shires aforesaid. The City Fuquieo is very great, and mightily walled with
+square stone both within and without, and, as it may seeme by the breadth
+thereof, filled vp in the middle with earth, layd ouer with brick and
+couered with tyle, after the maner of porches or galleries, that one might
+dwel therein. The staires they vse are so easily made, that one may go them
+vp and downe a horse-backe, as eftsoones they do: the streets are paued, as
+already it hath bin said: there be a great number of Marchants, euery one
+hath written in a great table at his doore such things as he hath to sel.
+In like maner euery artisane painteth out his craft: the market places be
+large, great abundance of al things there be to be sold. The city standeth
+vpon water, many streames run through it, the banks pitched, and so broad
+that they serue for streets to the cities vse. Ouer the streams are sundry
+bridges both of timber and stone, which being made leuel with the streets,
+hinder not the passage of the barges too and fro, the chanels are so deepe.
+Where the streames come in and go out of the city, be certaine arches in
+the wal, there go in and out their Parai, that is a kind of barges they
+haue, and that in the day time only: at night these arches are closed vp
+with gates, so do they shut vp al the gates of the City. These streames and
+barges do ennoblish very much the City, and make it as it were to seeme
+another Venice. The buildings are euen, wel made, high, not lofted, except
+it be some wherein marchandize is laid. It is a world to see how great
+these cities are, and the cause is, for that the houses are built euen, as
+I haue said, and do take a great deale of roome. One thing we saw in this
+city that made vs al to wonder, and is worthy to be noted: namely, ouer a
+porch at the comming in to one of the aforesaid 4. houses, which the king
+hath in euery shire for his gouernors, as I haue erst said, standeth a
+tower built vpon 40. pillers, ech one whereof is but one stone, ech one 40.
+handfuls or spans long: in bredth or compasse 12, as many of vs did measure
+them. Besides this, their greatnesse is such in one piece, that it might
+seeme impossible to worke them: they be moreouer cornered, and in colour,
+length and breadth so like, that the one nothing differeth from the other.
+This thing made vs all to wonder very much.
+
+We are wont to cal this country China, and the people Chineans, but as long
+as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any time that name, I
+determined to learne how they were called: and asked sometimes by them
+thereof, for that they vnderstood vs not when we called them Chineans, I
+answered them, that al the inhabitants of India named them Chineans,
+wherefore I praied them that they would tel me, for what occasion they are
+so called, whether peraduenture any city of theirs bare that name. Hereunto
+they alwayes answered me, that they haue no such name, nor euer had. Then
+did I aske them what name the whole Country bareth, and what they would
+answere being asked of other nations what countrymen they were? It was told
+me that of ancient time in this country had bin many kings, and though
+presently it were al vnder one, ech kingdom neuertheles enioyed that name
+it first had, these kingdomes are the prouinces I spake of before.
+[Sidenote: Tamen the proper name of China.] In conclusion they said, that
+the whole country is called Tamen, and the inhabitants Tamegines, so that
+this name China or Chineans, is not heard of in that country. I thinke that
+the neernesse of another prouince thereabout called Cochinchina, and the
+inhabitants thereof Cochinesses, first discovered before China was, lying
+not far from Malacca, did giue occasion to ech of the nations, of that name
+Chineans, as also the whole country to be named China. But their proper
+name is that aforesaid.
+
+I haue heard moreover that in the City of Nanquim remaineth a table of
+gold, and in it written a kings name, as a memory of that residence the
+kings were wont to keepe there. This table standeth in a great pallace,
+couered alwayes, except it be on some of their festiuall dayes, at what
+time they are wont to let it be seene, couered neuertheless as it is, all
+the nobilitie of the City going of duetie to doe it euery day reuerence.
+The like is done in the head Cities of all the other shires in the pallaces
+of the Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesaid tables doe stand with the
+kings name written in them, although no reuerence be done thereunto but in
+solemn feastes.
+
+[Sidenote: Pochan, or Pachin.] I haue likewise vnderstood that the city
+Pachin, where the king maketh his abode, is so great, that to go from one
+side to the other, besides the Suburbs, the which are greater then the City
+it selfe, it requireth one whole day a horseback, going hackney pase. In
+the suburbs be many wealthy marchants of all sorts. They tolde me
+furthermore that it was moted about, and in the moates great store of fish,
+whereof the King maketh great gaines.
+
+[Sidenote: Their enemies.] It was also told me that the king of China had
+no kings to wage battel withall, besides the Tartars, with whom he had
+concluded a peace more then 80. yeres ago. Neuerthelesse their friendship
+was not so great, that the one nation might marry with the other.
+[Sidenote: Marriage of the kings children.] And demanding with whom they
+married, they said, that in olde time the Chinish kings when they would
+marry their daughters, accustomed to make a solemne feast, whereunto came
+all sorts of men. The daughter that was to be married, stood in a place
+where she might see them all, and looke whom she liked best, him did she
+chuse to husband, and if happely he were of a base condition, hee became by
+and by a gentleman: but this custome hath bene left long since. Now a dayes
+the king marrieth his daughters at his owne pleasure, with great men of the
+kingdome: the like order he obserueth in the marriage of his sonnes.
+
+They haue moreouer one thing very good, and that which made vs all to
+maruelle at them being Gentiles: namely, that there be hospitals in all
+their Cities, alwayes full of people, we neuer saw any poore body begge.
+[Marginal note: He speaketh not here of all China, but of the Cities, for
+in other places there be beggers, as you haue seene already, swarming out
+of trees.] We therefore asked the cause of this: answered it was, that in
+euery City there is a great circuit, wherein be many houses for poore
+people, for blinde, lame, old folke, not able to trauaile for age, nor
+hauing any other meanes to liue. These folke haue in the aforesaid houses
+euer plentie of rice during their liues, but nothing else. Such as be
+receiued into these houses, come in after this maner. When one is sicke,
+blinde or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassi, and prouing
+that to be true he writeth, he remaineth in the aforesaid great lodging as
+long as he liueth: besides this they keepe in these places swine and
+hennes, whereby the poore be relieued without going a begging.
+
+I said before that China was full of riuers, but now I minde to confirme
+the same anew: for the farther we went into the Countrey, the greater we
+found the riuers. Sometimes we were so farre off from the sea, that where
+we came no sea fish had bene seene, and salt was there very deare, of fresh
+water fish yet was there great abundance, and that fish very good: they
+keep it good after this maner. Where the riuers do meete, and so passe into
+the sea, there lieth great store of boats, specially where no salt-water
+commeth, and that in March and April. These boates are so many that it
+seemeth wonderfull, ne serue they for other then to take small fish. By the
+riuers sides they make leyres of fine and strong nettes, that lye three
+handfulls vnder water, and one aboue to keepe and nourish their fish in,
+vntill such time as other fishers do come with boates, bringing for that
+purpose certaine great chests lined with paper, able to holde water,
+wherein they cary their fish vp and downe the riuer, euery day renuing the
+chest with fresh water, and selling their fish in euery City, towne and
+village where they passe, vnto the people as they neede it: most of them
+haue net leyres to keepe fish in alwayes for their prouision. Where the
+greater boates cannot passe any further forward, they take lesser, and
+because the whole Countrey is very well watered, there is so great plenty
+of diuers sorts of fish, that it is wonderfull to see: assuredly we were
+amazed to behold the maner of their prouision. [Sidenote: Meanes to fat
+fish.] Their fish is chiefly nourished with the dung of Bufles and oxen,
+that greatly fatteth it. Although I said their fishing to be in March and
+April at what time we saw them do it, neuerthelesse they told vs that they
+fished at all times, for that vsually they do feed on fish, wherefore it
+behoueth them to make their prouision continually.
+
+When we had passed Fuquien, we went into Quicin shire, [Sidenote: He
+speaketh of Fuquien shire.] where the fine clay vessell is made, as I said
+before: and we came to a City, the one side whereof is built vpon the the
+foote of a hill, whereby passeth a riuer nauigable: there we tooke boat,
+and went by water toward the Sea: on ech side of the riuer we found many
+Cities, Townes and villages, wherein we saw great store of marchandize, but
+specially of fine clay: there did we land by the way to buy victuals and
+other necessaries. Going downe this riuer Southward, we were glad that wee
+drew neere vnto a warmer Countrey, from whence we had bene farre distant:
+this Countrey we passed through in eight dayes, for our iourney lay downe
+the streame. Before that I doe say any thing of that shire we came into, I
+will first speake of the great City of Quicin, wherein alwayes remaineth a
+Tutan, that is a gouernour, as you haue seene, though some Tutans do
+gouerne two or three shires.
+
+That Tutan that was condemned for our cause, of whom I spake before, was
+borne in this Countrey, but he gouerned Foquien shire: nothing it auailed
+him to be so great an officer. This Countrey is so great, that in many
+places where we went, there had bene as yet no talke of his death, although
+he were executed a Whole yere before. [Sidenote: Aliàs Cenchi.] At the
+Citie Quanchi whither we came, the riuer was so great it seemed a Sea,
+though it were so litle where we tooke water, that we needed small boats.
+One day about nine of the clocke, beginning to row neere the walls with the
+streame, we came at noone to a bridge made of many barges, ouerlinked al
+together with two mightie cheines. There stayed we vntill it was late, but
+we saw not one go either vp thereon or downe, except two Louteas that about
+the going downe of the Sunne, came and set them down there, the one on one
+side, the other on the other side. Then was the bridge opened in many
+places, and barges both great and small to the number of sixe hundred began
+to passe: those that went vp the streame at one place, such as came downe
+at an other. When all had thus shot the bridge, then was it shut vp againe.
+[Sidenote: The kings reuenues.] We heare say that euery day they take this
+order in all principall places of marchandize, for paying of the Custome
+vnto the king, specially for salt, whereof the greatest reuenues are made
+that the king hath in this Countrey. The passage of the bridge where it is
+opened, be so neere the shoare, that nothing can passe without touching the
+same. To stay the barges at their pleasure, that they goe no further
+forward, are vsed certaine iron instruments The bridge consisteth of 112.
+barges, there stayed we vntill the euening that they were opened,
+lothsomely oppressed by the multitude of people that came to see vs, so
+many in number, that we were enforced to go aside from the banke vntil such
+time as the bridge was opened: howbeit we were neuerthelesse thronged about
+with many boates full of people. And though in other Cities and places
+where we went, the people came so importunate vpon vs, that it was needfull
+to withdraw our selues: yet were we here much more molested for the number
+of people: and this bridge is the principall way out of the Citie vnto
+another place so wel inhabited, that were it walled about, it might be
+compared to the Citie. When we had shot the bridge, we kept along the Citie
+vntil it was night, and then met we with another riuer that ioyned with
+this, we rowed vp that by the walls vntill we came to another bridge
+gallantly made of barges, but lesser a great deale then that other bridge
+ouer the greater streame: here stayed we that night, and other two dayes
+with more quiet, being out of the preasse of the people. These riuers do
+meet without at one corner point of the City. In either of them were so
+many barges great and small, that we all thought them at the least to be
+aboue three thousand: the greater number thereof was in the lesser riuer,
+where we were. Amongst the rest here lay certaine greater vessels, called
+in their language Parai, that serue for the Tutan, when he taketh his
+voyage by other riuers that ioyne with this, towards Pachin, where the king
+maketh his abode. For, as many times I haue erst said, all this Countrey is
+full of riuers. Desirous to see those Parai we got into some of them, where
+we found some chambers set foorth with gilded beds very richly, other
+furnished with tables and seats, and all other things so neat and in
+perfection, that it was wonderfull.
+
+Quiacim shire, as farre as I can perceiue, lieth vpon the South. On that
+side we kept at our first entry thereinto, trauayling not farre from the
+high mountaines we saw there. Asking what people dwelleth beyond those
+monntaines, it was told me that they be theeues and men of a strange
+language. And because that vnto sundry places neere this riuer the
+mountaines doe approch, whence the people issuing downe do many times great
+harme, this order is taken at the entry into Quiacim shire. To guard this
+riuer whereon continually go to and fro Parai great and small fraught with
+salt, fish poudred with peper, and other necessaries for that countrey,
+they do lay in diuers places certaine Parai, and great barges armed, wherin
+watch and ward is kept day and night on both sides of the riuer, for the
+safety of the passage, and securitie of such Parai as do remaine there,
+though the trauailers neuer go but many in company. In euery rode there be
+at the least thirtie, in some two hundred men, as the passage requireth.
+This guard is kept vsually vntill you come to the City Onchio, where
+continually the Tutan of this shire, and eke of Cantan, maketh his abode.
+From that City vpward, where the riuer waxeth more narrow, and the passage
+more dangerous, there be alwayes armed one hundred and fiftie Parai, to
+accompany other vessels fraught with marchandize, and all this at the Kings
+charges. This seemed to me one of the strangest things I did see in this
+Countrey.
+
+When we lay at Fuquien, we did see certaine Moores, who knew so litle of
+their secte, that they could say nothing else but that Mahomet was a Moore,
+my father was a Moore, and I am a Moore, with some other wordes of their
+Alcoran, wherewithall, in abstinence from swines flesh, they liue vntill
+the diuel take them all. This when I saw, and being sure that in many
+Chinish Cities the reliques of Mahomet are kept, as soone as we came to the
+City where these fellowes be, I enfourmed my selfe of them, and learned the
+trueth.
+
+[Sidenote: Great ships comming from the North.] These Moores, as they tolde
+me, in times past came in great ships fraught with marchandise from Pachin
+ward, to a port granted vnto them by the king, as hee is wont to all them
+that traffique into this Countrey, where they being arriued at a litle
+Towne standing in the hauens mouth, in time conuerted vnto their sect the
+greatest Loutea there. When that Loutea with all his family was become
+Moorish, the rest began likewise to doe the same. In this part of China the
+people be at libertie, euery one to worship and folow what him liketh best.
+Wherefore no body tooke heede thereto, vntil such time as the Moores
+perceiuing that many followed them in superstition, and that the Loutea
+fauoured them, they began to forbid wholy the eating of swines flesh. But
+all these countreymen and women chosing rather to forsake father and
+mother, then to leaue off eating of porke, by no meanes would yeeld to that
+proclamation. For besides the great desire they all haue to eate that kinde
+of meate, many of them do liue thereby: and therefore the people complained
+vnto the Magistrates, accusing the Moores of a conspiracie pretended
+betwixt them and the Loutea against their king. In this countrey, as no
+suspition, no not one traiterous word is long borne withall, so was the
+king speedily aduertised thereof, who gaue commandement out of hand that
+the aforesaid Loutea should be put to death, and with him the Moores of
+most importance: the other to be layde first in prison, and afterward to be
+sent abroad into certaine Cities, where they remained perpetuall slaues
+vnto the king. To this City came by happe men and women threescore and
+odde, who at this day are brought to fiue men and foure women, for it is
+how twenty yeeres since this happened. [Sidenote: That is their temples.]
+Their offspring passeth the number of two hundreth, and they in this City,
+as the rest in other Cities whither they were sent, haue their Moscheas,
+whereunto they all resort euery Friday to keepe their holy day. But, as I
+thinke, that will no longer endure, then whiles they doe liue that came
+from thence, for their posteritie is so confused, that they haue nothing of
+a Moore in them but abstinence from swines flesh, and yet many of them doe
+eate thereof primly. [Sidenote: It should seeme by their voyage to be
+Cardandan in Ortelius.] They tell mee that their natiue Countrey hath name
+Camarian, a firme land wherein be many kings, and the Indish countrey well
+knowen vnto them. It may so be: for as soone as they did see our seruants
+(our seruants were Preuzaretes) they iudged them to be Indians: many of
+their wordes sounded vpon the Persian tongue, but none of vs coulde
+vnderstand them. I asked them whether they conuerted any of the Chinish
+nation vnto their secte: they answered mee, that with much a doe they
+conuerted the women with whom they doe marry, yeelding me no other cause
+thereof, but the difficultie they finde in them to be brought from eating
+swines flesh and drinking of wine. I am perswaded therefore, that if this
+Countrey were in league with vs, forbidding them neither of both, it would
+be an easie matter to draw them to our Religion, from their superstition,
+whereat they themselues do laugh when they do then idolatry.
+
+[Sidenote: A Northerne Sea.] I haue learned moreouer that the Sea, whereby
+these Moores that came to China were wont to trauaile, is a very great
+gulfe, that falleth into this Countrey out from Tartaria and Persia,
+leauing on the other side all the Countrey of China, and land of the
+Mogores, drawing alwayes toward the South: and of all likelyhood it is euen
+so, because that these Moores, the which we haue seene, be rather browne
+then white, whereby they shewe themselues to cone from some warmer Countrey
+then China is neere to Pachin, where the riuers are frosen in the Winter
+for colde, and many of them so vehemently that carts may passe ouer them.
+
+We did see in this Citie many Tartars, Mogores, Brames, and Laoynes, both
+men and women. The Tartars are men very white, good horsemen and archers,
+confining with China on that side where Pachin standeth, separated from
+thence by great mountaines that are bewixt these kingdomes. Ouer them be
+certaine wayes to passe, and for both sides, Castles continually kept with
+Souldiers: in time past the Tartars were wont alwayes to haue warres with
+the Chineans, but these fourescore yeeres past they were quiet, vntill the
+second yeere of our imprisonment. The Mogores be in like maner white, and
+heathen, we are aduertised that of one side they border vpon these Tartars,
+and confine with the Persian Tartars on the other side, whereof we sawe in
+them some tokens, as their maner of clothes, and that kinde of hat the
+Saracens doe weare. The Moores affirmed, that where the king lyeth, there
+be many Tartars and Mogores, that brought into China certaine blewes of
+great value: all we thought it to be Vanil of Cambaia wont to be sold at
+Ormus. So that this is the true situation of that Countrey, not in the
+North parts, as many times I haue heard say, confining with Germanie.
+
+As for the Brames we haue seene in this city Chenchi certaine men and
+women, amongst whom there was one that came not long since, hauing as yet
+her haire tied vp after the Pegues fashion: this woman, and other mo with
+whom a black Moore damsel in our company had conference, and did vnderstand
+them wel ynough, had dwelt in Pegu. This new come woman, imagining that we
+ment to make our abode in that citie, bid vs to be of good comfort, for
+that her countrey was not distant from thence aboue fiue dayes iourney, and
+that out of her countrey there lay a high way for vs home into our owne.
+Being asked the way, she answered that the first three daies the way lieth
+ouer certaine great mountaines and wildernesse, afterward people are met
+withall againe. [Sidenote: Southward from Chenchi to the sea.] Thence two
+dayes iourney more to the Brames countrey. Wherefore I doe conclude, that
+Chenchi is one of the confines of this kingdome, separated by certaine huge
+mountaines, as it hath bene alreadie said, that lie out towards the South.
+In the residue of these mountaines standeth the prouince of Sian, the
+Laoyns countrey, Camboia, Campaa, and Cochinchina.
+
+This citie chiefe of other sixteene is situated in a pleasant plaine
+abounding in all things necessarie, sea-fish onely excepted, for it
+standeth farre from the sea: of fresh fish so much store, that the market
+places are neuer emptie. The walles of this city are very strong and high:
+one day did I see the Louteas thereof go vpon the walles to take the view
+thereof, borne in their seates which I spake of before, accompanied with a
+troupe of horsemen that went two and two: It was tolde me they might haue
+gone three and three. We haue seene moreouer, that within this aforesayd
+Citie: the king hath moe then a thousande of his kinne lodged in great
+pallaces, in diuers partes of the Citie: their gates be redde, and the
+entrie into their houses, that they may be knowen, for that is the kings
+colour. These Gentlemen, according to their neerenesse in blood vnto the
+king, as soone as they be married receiue their place in honour: this place
+neither increaseth nor diminisheth in any respect as long as the king
+liueth, the king appointeth them their wiues and familie, allowing them by
+the moneth all things necessarie abundantly, as he doth to his gouernours
+of shires and Cities, howbeit, not one of these hath as long as he liueth
+any charge or gouernement at all. They giue themselues to eating and
+drinking, and be for the most part burly men of bodie, insomuch that
+espying any one of them whom we had not seene before, we might knowe him to
+be the King his cosin. They be neuerthelesse very pleasant, courteous, and
+faire conditioned: neither did we find, all the time wee were in that
+citie, so much honour and good intertainement any where as at their hands.
+They bid vs to their houses to eate and drinke, and when they found vs not,
+or we were not willing to go with them, they bid our seruants and slaues,
+causing them to sit downe with the first. Notwithstanding the good lodging
+these Gentlemen haue, so commodious that they want nothing, yet are they in
+this bondage, that during life they neuer goe abroad. The cause, as I did
+vnderstand, wherefore the king so vseth his cosins is, that none of them at
+any time may rebell against him: and thus he shutteth them vp in three or
+foure other cities. Most of them can play on the Lute, and to make that
+kinde of pastime peculiar vnto them onely, all other in the cities where
+they doe liue be forbidden that instrument, the Curtisans and blinde folke
+onely accepted, who be musicians and can play.
+
+This king furthermore, for the greater securitie of his Realme and the
+auoiding of tumults, letteth not one in all his countrey to be called Lord,
+except he be of his blood. Manie great estates and gouernours there be,
+that during their office are lodged Lord-like, and doe beare the port of
+mightie Princes: but they be so many times displaced and other placed a
+new, that they haue not the time to become corrupt. True it is that during
+their office they be well prouided for, as afterward also lodged at the
+kings charges, and in pension as long as they liue, payed them monethly in
+the cities where they dwell by certaine officers appointed for that
+purpose. The king then is a Lord onely, not one besides him as you haue
+seene, except it be such as be of his blood. A Nephew likewise of the king,
+the kings sisters sonne, lyeth continually within the walles of the citie
+in a strong pallace built Castlewise, euen as his other cousins do,
+remayning alwayes within doores, serued by Eunuches, neuer dealing with any
+matters. On their festiuall dayes, new moones, and full moones the
+magistrates make great bankets, and so do such as be of the king his blood.
+[Sidenote: Goa is a city of the Portugals in the East Indies.] The kings
+Nephew hath to name Vanfuli, his pallace is walled about, the wall is not
+high but fouresquare, and in circuit nothing inferiour to the wals of Goa,
+the outside is painted red, in euery square a gate, and ouer each gate a
+tower made of timber excellently well wrought: before the principall gate
+of the foure that openeth in to the high street no Loutea, be he neuer so
+great, may passe on horsebacke, or carried in his seat. Amidst this
+quadrangle standeth the pallace where that Nobleman lyeth, doubtlesse worth
+the sight, although we came not in to see it. By report the roofes of the
+towers and houses are glased greene, and the greater part of the quadrangle
+set with sauage trees, as Okes, Chesnuts, Cypresse, Pineapples, Cedars, and
+other such like that we do want, after the manner of a wood, wherein are
+kept Stags, Oxen, and other beasts, for that Lord his recreation neuer
+going abroad as I haue sayd. One preheminence this citie hath aboue the
+rest where we haue bene, and that of right, as we do thinke, that besides
+the multitude of market places wherein all things are to be sold through
+euery streete continually are cryed all things necessary, as flesh of all
+sortes, freshfish, hearbes, oyle, vineger, meale, rise: in summa, all
+things so plentifully, that many houses neede no servants, euery thing
+being brought to their doores. Most part of the marchants remaine in the
+suburbes, for that the cities are shut vp euery night, as I haue said. The
+marchants therefore, the better to attend their businesse, do chuse rather
+to make their abode without in the suburbes then within the citie. I haue
+seene in this riuer a pretie kinde of fishing, not to be omitted in my
+opinion, and therefore I will set it downe. [Marginal note: Odeicus writeth
+of the like.] The king hath in many riuers good store of barges full of
+sea-crowes that breede, are fedde and doe die therein, in certaine cages,
+allowed monethely a certaine prouision of rise. These barges the king
+bestoweth vpon his greatest magistrates, giuing to some two, to some three
+of them as be thinketh good, to fish therewithal after this manner. At the
+houre appointed to fish, all the barges are brought together in a circle,
+where the riuer is shalow, and the crowes tyed together vnder the wings are
+let leape downe into the water some vnder, some aboue, woorth the looking
+vpon: each one as he hath filled his bagge, goeth to his owne barge and
+emptieth it, which done, he returneth to fish againe. Thus hauing taken
+good store of fish, they set the crowes at libertie, and do suffer them to
+fish for their owne pleasure. There were in that city where I was, twentie
+barges at the least of these aforesayd crowes. I went almost euery day to
+see them, yet could I neuer be throughly satisfyed to see so strange a kind
+of fishing.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Of the Iland Iapan, and other litle Iles in the East Ocean.
+
+By R. Willes.
+
+The extreame part of the knowen world vnto vs is the noble Iland Giapan,
+written otherwise Iapon and Iapan. This Island standeth in the East Ocean,
+beyond all Asia, betwixt Cathayo and the West Indies sixe and thirtie
+degrees Northward from the Equinoctial line, in the same clime with the
+South part of Spain and Portugall, distant from thence by sea sixe thousand
+leagues: the trauile thither, both for ciuill discord, great pyracie, and
+often shipwracks is very dangerous. This countrey is hillie and pestered
+with snow, wherefore it is neither so warme as Portugall, nor yet so
+wealthy, as far as we can learne, wanting oyle, butter, cheese, milke,
+egges, sugar, honny, vinegar, saffron, cynamom and pepper. Barleybranne the
+Ilanders doe vse in stead of salt: medicinable things holsome for the bodie
+haue they none at all. Neuerthelesse in that Iland sundry fruites doe
+growe, not much vnlike the fruites of Spaine: and great store of Siluer
+mynes are therein to be seene. The people are tractable, ciuill, wittie,
+courteous, without deceit, in vertue and honest conuersation exceeding all
+other nations lately discouered, but so much standing vpon their
+reputation, that their chiefe Idole may be thought honour. The contempt
+thereof causeth among them much discord and debate, manslaughter and
+murther: euen for their reputation they doe honour their parents, keepe
+their promises, absteine from adulterie and robberies, punishing by death
+the least robbery done, holding for a principle, that whosoeuer stealeth a
+trifle, will, if he see occasion, steale a greater thing. It may be theft
+is so seuerely punished of them, for that the nation is oppressed with
+scarcitie of all things necessary, and so poore, that euen for miserie they
+strangle their owne children, preferring death before want. These fellowes
+doe neither eate nor kill any foule. They liue chiefely by fish, hearbes,
+and fruites, so healthfully, that they die very old. Of Rice and Wheat
+there is no great store. No man is ashamed there of his pouertie, neither
+be their gentlemen therefore lesse honoured of the meaner people, neither
+will the poorest gentleman there matche his childe with the baser sort for
+any gaine, so much they do make more account of gentry then of wealth. The
+greatest delight they haue is in armour, each boy at fourteene yeeres of
+ages, be he borne gentle or otherwise, hath his sword and dagger: very good
+archers they be, contemning all other nations in comparison of their
+manhood and prowesse, putting not vp one iniurie be it neuer so small in
+worde or deede, among themselues. They feede moderately, but they drinke
+largely. The vse of vines they knowe not, their drinke they make of Rice,
+vtterly they doe abhorre dice, an all games, accounting nothing more vile
+in a man, then to giue himselfe vnto those things that make vs greedy and
+desirous to get other mens goods. If at any time they do sweare, for that
+seldome they are wont to doe, they sweare by the Sunne: many of them are
+taught good letters, wherfore they may so much the sooner be brought vnto
+Christianitie. Each one is contented with one wife: they be all desirous to
+learne, and naturally inclined vnto honesty and courtesie: godly talke they
+listen vnto willingly, especially when they vnderstand it throughly. Their
+gouernment consisteth of 3 estates. The first place is due vnto the high
+Priest, by whose laws and decrees all publike and priuate matters
+appertayning to religion are decided. The sects of their clergie men, whom
+they doe call Bonzi, be of no estimation or authoritie except the high
+Priest by letters patent doe confirme the same: he confirmeth and alloweth
+of their Tundi, who be as it were Bishops, although in many places they are
+nominated by sundry Princes. These Tundi are greatly honoured of all sorts:
+they doe giue benefices vnto inferiour ministers, and do grant licences for
+many things as to eate flesh vpon those dayes they goe in pilgrimage to
+their Idoles with such like priuileges. Finally, this High Priest wont to
+be chosen in China for his wisedome and learning, made in Iapan for his
+gentry and birth, hath so large a Dominion and reuenues so great, that
+eftsones he beardeth the petie Kings and Princes there.
+
+Their second principal Magistrate, in their language Vo, is the chiefe
+Herehaught, made by succession and birth, honoured as a God. This gentleman
+neuer toucheth the ground with his foote without forfaiting of his office,
+he neuer goeth abroad out of his house, nor is at all times to be seene. At
+home he is either carried about in a litter, or els he goeth in wooden
+Choppines a foote high from the ground: commonly he sitteth in his chaire
+with a sword in one side, and a bow and arrows in the other, next his bodie
+he wearth blacke, his outward garments be red, all shadowed ouer with
+Cypresse, at his cappe hang certaine Lambeaux much like vnto a Bishop
+Miter, his forehead is painted white and red, he eateth his meat in earthen
+dishes. This Herehaught determineth in all Iapan the diuerse titles of
+honour, whereof in that Iland is great plentie, each one particularly
+knowen by his badge, commonly seene in sealing vp their letters, and dayly
+altered according to their degrees. About this Vo euery Noble man hath his
+Solicitor, for the nation is so desirous of praise and honour, that they
+striue among themselues who may bribe him best. By these meanes the
+Herehaught groweth so rich, that although hee haue neither land nor any
+reuenues otherwise, yet may he be accounted the wealthiest man in all
+Iapan. For three causes this great Magistrate may loose his office: first,
+if he touch the ground with his foote, as it hath beene alreadie said:
+next, if he kill any body: thirdly, if he be found an enemie vnto peace and
+quietnesse, howbeit neither of these aforesaid causes is sufficient to put
+him to death.
+
+Their third chiefe officer is a Iudge, his office is to take vp and to end
+matters in controuersie, to determine of warres and peace, that which he
+thinketh right, to punish rebels, wherein he may commaund the noble men to
+assist him vpon paine of forfeiting their goods: neuerthelesse at all times
+he is not obeyed, for that many matters are ended rather by might and
+armes, then determined by law. Other controuersies are decided either in
+the Temporall Court, as it seemeth good vnto the Princes, or in the
+Spirituall consistorie before the Tundi.
+
+Rebelles are executed in this manner, especially if they be noble men or
+officers. The king looke what day he giueth sentence against any one, the
+same day the partie, wheresoeuer he be, is aduertised thereof, and the day
+told him of his execution. The condemned person asketh of the messenger
+whether it may bee lawful for him to kill himselfe: the which thing when
+the king doeth graunt, the partie taking it for an honour, putteth on his
+best apparel and launcing his body a crosse from the breast downe all the
+belly, murthereth himselfe. This kind of death they take to be without
+infamie, neither doe their children for their fathers crime so punished,
+loose their goods. But if the king reserue them to be executed by the
+hangman, then flocketh he together his children, his seruants, and friends
+home to his house, to preserue his life by force. The king committeth the
+fetching of him out vnto his chiefe Iudge, who first setteth vpon him with
+bow and arrowes, and afterward with pikes and swords, vntill the rebell and
+family be slaine to their perpetuall ignominie and shame.
+
+The Indie-writers make mention of sundry great cities in this Iland, as
+Cangoxima a hauen towne in the South part thereof, and Meaco distant from
+thence three hundred leagues northward, the royall seat of the king and
+most wealthy of all other townes in that Iland. The people thereabout are
+very noble, and their language the best Iaponish. In Maco are sayd to be
+ninetie thousande houses inhabited and vpward, a famous Vniuersitie, and in
+it fiue principall Colleges, besides closes and cloysters of Bonzi,
+Leguixil, and Hamacata, that is, Priests, Monks and Nunnes. Other fiue
+notable Vniuersities there be in Iapan, namely, Coia, Negru, Homi, Frenoi,
+and Bandu. The first foure haue in them at the least three thousand and
+fiue hundred schollers: in the fift are many mo. For Bandu prouince is very
+great and possessed with sixe princes, fiue whereof are vassals vnto the
+sixt, yet he himselfe subiect vnto the Iaponish king, vsually called the
+great king of Meaco: lesser scholes there be many in diuers places of this
+Ilande. And thus much specially concerning this glorious Iland, among so
+many barbarous nations and rude regions, haue I gathered together in one
+summe, out of sundry letters written from thence into Europe, by no lesse
+faithfull reporters than famous trauellers. [Sidenote: Petrus Maffeius de
+rebus Iaponicis.] For confirmation wherof, as also for the knowledge of
+other things not conteyned in the premisses, the curious readers may peruse
+these 4 volumes of Indian matters written long ago in Italian, and of late
+compendiously made Latine, by Petrus Maffeius my old acquainted friend,
+entituling the same, De rubus Iaponicis. One whole letter out of the fift
+booke thereof, specially intreating of that countrey, I haue done into
+English word for word in such wise as followeth.
+
+
+Aloisius Froes to his companions in Iesus Christ that remaine in China and
+  India.
+
+The last yeere, deare brethren, I wrote vnto you from Firando, how Cosmus
+Turrianus had appointed me to trauile to Meaco to helpe Gaspar Vilela, for
+that there the haruest was great, the labourers few, and that I should haue
+for my companion in that iourney Aloisius Almeida. It seemeth now my part,
+hauing by the helpe of God ended so long a voiage, to signifie vnto you by
+letter such things specially as I might thinke you would most delight to
+know. And because at the beginning Almeida and I so parted the whole labour
+of writing letters betwixt vs, that he should speake of our voyage, and
+such things as happened therein, I should make relation of the Meachians
+estate, and write what I could well learne of the Iapans manners and
+conditions: setting aside all discourses of our voyage, that which standeth
+me vpon I will discharge in this Epistle, that you considering how
+artificially, how cunningly, vnder the pretext of religion, that craftie
+aduersary of mankind leadeth and draweth vnto perdition the Iapanish
+mindes, blinded with many superstitions and ceremonies, may the more pitie
+this Nation.
+
+The inhabiters of Iapan, as men that had neuer had greatly to doe with
+other Nations, in their Geography diuided the whole world into three parts,
+Iapan, Sian, and China. And albeit the Iapans receiued out of Sian and
+China their superstitions and ceremonies, yet doe they neuertheless
+contemne all other Nations in comparison of themselues, and standing in
+their owne conceite doe far preferre themselues before all other sorts of
+people in wisedome and policie.
+
+Touching the situation of the countrey and nature of the soyle, vnto the
+things eftsoones erst written, this one thing I will adde: in these Ilands,
+the sommer to be most hot, the winter extreme cold. In the kingdom of
+Canga, as we call it, falleth so much snow, that the houses being buried in
+it, the inhabitants keepe within doores certaine moneths of the yeere,
+hauing no way to come foorth except they break vp the tiles. Whirlewindes
+most vehement, earthquakes so common, that the Iapans dread such kind of
+feares litle or nothing at all. The countrey is ful of siluer mines
+otherwise barren, not so much by fault of nature, as through the
+slouthfulnesse of the inhabitants: howbeit Oxen they keepe and that for
+tillage sake onely. The ayre is holesome, the waters good, the people very
+faire and well bodied: bare headed commonly they goe, procuring baldnesse
+with sorrow and teares, eftsoones rooting vp with pinsars all the haire of
+their heads as it groweth, except it be a litle behind, the which they knot
+and keepe with all diligence. Euen from their childhood they weare daggers
+and swords, the which they vse to lay vnder their pillowes when they goe to
+bed: in shew courteous and affable, in deede haughtie and proud. They
+delight most in warlike affaires, and their greatest studie is armes. Mens
+apparel diuersely coloured is worne downe halfe the legges and to the
+elbowes: womens attire made handsomely like vnto a vaile, is somewhat
+longer: all manner of dicing and theft they do eschewe. The marchant
+although he be wealthy, is not accounted of. Gentlemen, be they neuer so
+poore, retaine their place: most precisely they stand vpon their honour and
+worthinesse, ceremoniously striuing among themselues in courtesies and
+faire speeches. Wherein if any one happily be lesse carefull than he should
+be, euen for a trifle many times he getteth euill will. Want though it
+trouble most of them, so much they doe detest, that poore men cruelly
+taking pittie of their infantes newly borne, especially girles, do many
+times with their owne feete strangle them. Noble men, and other likewise of
+meaner calling generally haue but one wife a peece, by whom although they
+haue issue, yet for a trifle they diuorse themselues from their wiues, and
+the wiues also sometimes from their husbands, to marry with others. After
+the second degree cousins may there lawfully marry. Adoption of other mens
+children is much vsed among them. In great townes most men and women can
+write and reade.
+
+This Nation feedeth sparingly, their vsuall meat is rice and salets, and
+neere the sea side fish. They feast one another many times, wherein they
+vse great diligence, especially in drinking one to another, insomuch that
+the better sort, least they might rudely commit some fault therein, does
+vse to reade certaine bookes written of duties and ceremonies apperteyning
+vnto banquets. To be delicate and fine, they put their meate into their
+mouthes with litle forkes, accounting it great rudenesse to touch it with
+their fingers: winter and sommer they drinke water as hot as they may
+possibly abide it. Their houses are in danger of fire, but finely made and
+cleane, layde all ouer with strawe-pallets, whereupon they doe both sit in
+stead of stooles, and lie in their clothes with billets under their heads.
+For feare of defiling these pallets, they goe either bare foote within
+doores, or weare strawe pantofles on their buskins when they come abroad,
+the which they lay aside at their returne home againe. Gentlemen for the
+most part do passe the night in banketting, musicke, and vaine discourses,
+they sleepe the day time. In Meaco and Sacaio there is good store of beds,
+but they be very litle, and may be compared vnto our pues.
+
+In bringing vp children they vse words only to rebuke them, admonishing as
+diligently and aduisedly boyes of sixe or seuen yeeres of age, as though
+they were olde men. They are giuen very much to intertaine strangers, of
+whom most curiously they loue to aske euen in trifles what forraine nations
+doe, and their fashions. Such arguments and reasons as be manifest, and are
+made plaine with examples, doe greatly persuade them. They detest all kinde
+of theft, whosoeuer is taken in that fault may be slaine freely of any
+bodie. No publike prisons, no common gayles, no ordinary Iusticers:
+priuately each householder hath the hearing of matters at home in his owne
+house, and the punishing of greater crimes that deserue death without
+delay. Thus vsually the people is kept in awe and feare.
+
+About foure hundred yeeres past (as in their olde recordes we finde) all
+Iapan was subiect vnto one Emperour whose royall seat was Meaco, in the
+Iaponish language called Cubucama. But the nobtlitie rebelling against him,
+by litle and litle haue taken away the greatest part of his dominion,
+howbeit his title continually remayneth, and the residue in some respect
+doe make great account of him still, acknowledging him for their superior.
+Thus the Empyre of Iapan, in times past but one alone, is now diuided into
+sixtie sixe kingdomes, the onely cause of ciuill warres continually in that
+Iland, to no small hinderance of the Gospell, whilest the kings that dwell
+neare together inuade one another, each one coueting to make his kingdome
+greater. Furthermore in the citie Meaco is the pallace of the high Priest,
+whom that nation honoureth as a God, he hath in his house 306 Idoles, one
+whereof by course is euery night set by his side for a watchman. He is
+thought of the common people so holy, that it may not be lawfull for him to
+goe vpon the earth: if happily he doe set one foote to the ground, he
+looseth his office. He is not serued very sumptuously, he is maintained by
+almes. The heads and beards of his ministers are shauen, they haue name
+Cangues, and their authoritie is great throughout all Iapan. The Cubucama
+vseth them for Embassadores to decide controuersies betwixt princes, and to
+end their warres, whereof they were wont to make very great game. It is now
+two yeres since or there about, that one of them came to Bungo, to intreate
+of peace betwixt the king thereof and the king of Amanguzzo. This Agent
+fauouring the king of Bungo his cause more then the other, brought to passe
+that the foresayd king of Bungo should keepe two kingdomes, the which he
+had taken in warres from the king of Amanguzzo. Wherefore he had for his
+reward of the king of Bungo aboue 30000 ducats. And thus farre hereof.
+
+I come now to other superstitions and ceremonies, that you may see, deare
+brethren, that which I said in the beginning, how subtilly the diuell hath
+deceiued the Iaponish nation, and how diligent and readie they be to obey
+and worship him. And first, al remembrance and knowledge not onely of
+Christ our Redeemer, but also of that one God the maker of all things is
+cleane extinguished and vtterly abolished out of the Iapans hearts.
+Moreouer their superstitious sects are many, whereas it is lawfull for each
+one to follow that which liketh him best: but the principall sects are two,
+namely the Amidans and Xacaians. Wherefore in this countrey shall you see
+many monasteries, not onely of Bonzii men, but also of Bonziæ women
+diuersely attired, for some doe weare white vnder, and blacke vpper
+garments, other goe apparelled in ash colour, and their idole hath to name
+Denichi: from these the Amidanes differ very much. Againe the men Bonzii
+for the most part dwell in sumptuous houses, and haue great reuenues. These
+fellowes are chaste by commandement, marry they may not vpon paine of
+death. In the midst of their temple is erected an altar, whereon standeth a
+woodden Idole of Amida, naked from the girdle vpward, with holes in his
+eares after the manner of Italian gentlewomen, sitting on a wooden rose
+goodly to behold. They haue great libraries, and halles for them all to
+dine and sup together, and bels wherewith they are at certaine houres
+called to prayers. In the euening the Superintendent giueth each one a
+theame for meditation. After midnight before the altar in their Temple they
+do say Mattens at it were out of Xaca his last booke, one quier one verse,
+the other quier another. Early in the morning each one giueth himselfe to
+meditation one houre: they shaue their heads and beards. Their cloysters be
+very large, and within the precinct thereof, Chappels of the Fotoquiens,
+for by that name some of the Iapanish Saints are called: their holydaies
+yeerely be very many. Most of these Bonzii be gentlemen, for that the
+Iapanish nobility charged with many children, vse to make most of them
+Bonzii, not being able to leaue for each one a patrimony good enough. The
+Bonzii most coueteously bent, know all the wayes how to come by money. They
+sell vnto the people many scrolles of paper, by the helpe whereof the
+common people thinketh it selfe warranted from all power of the deuils.
+They borrow likewise money to be repayed with great vsury in an other
+worlde, giuing by obligation vnto the lender an assurance thereof, the
+which departing out of his life he may carry with him to hell.
+
+There is another great company of such as are called Inambuxu, with curled
+and staring haire. They make profession to finde out againe things either
+lost or stolen, after this sort. They set before them a child whom the
+deuill inuadeth, called vp thither by charmes: of that child then doe they
+aske that which they are desirous to know.
+
+These mens prayers both good and bad are thought greatly to preuaile,
+insomuch that both their blessings and their curses they sell vnto the
+people. The nouices of this order, before they be admitted, goe together
+two or three thousand in a company, vp a certaine high mountaine to doe
+pennance there, threescore dayes voluntarily punishing themselues. In this
+time the deuill sheweth himselfe vnto them in sundry shapes: and they like
+young graduats, admitted as it were fellowes into some certaine companie,
+are set foorth with white tassels hanging about their neckes, and blacke
+Bonnets that scarcely couer any more then the crawne of their heads. Thus
+attyred they range abroade in all Iapan, to set out themselues and their
+cunning to sale, each one beating his bason which he carieth alwayes about
+with him, to giue notice of their comming in al townes where they passe.
+
+There is also an other sort called Genguis, that make profession to shewe
+by soothsaying where stollen things are, and who were the theeues. These
+dwell in the toppe of an high mountaine, blacke in the face: for the
+continuall heate of the sunne, for the cold windes, and raines they doe
+continually endure. They marry but in their owne tribe and line: the report
+goeth that they be horned beasts. They climbe vp most high rockes and
+hilles, and go ouer very great riuers by the onely arte of the deuill, who
+to bring those wretches the more into errour, biddeth them to goe vp a
+certaine high mountaine, where they stande miserably gazing and earnestly
+looking for him as long as the deuill appointeth them. At the length at
+noonetide or in the euening commeth that deuill, whom they call Amida among
+them to shew himselfe vnto them: this shew breedeth in the braines and
+hearts of men such a kinde of superstition, that it can by no meanes be
+rooted out of them afterward.
+
+The deuill was wont also in another mountaine to shew himselfe vnto the
+Iapanish Nation. Who so was more desirous than other to go to heauen and to
+enioy Paradise, thither went he to see that sight, and hauing seene the
+deuill followed him (so by the deuill persuaded) into a denne vntil he came
+to a deepe pit. Into this pit the deuill was wont to leape and to take with
+him his worshipper whom he there murdred. This deceit was thus perceiued.
+An old man blinded with this superstition, was by his sonne diswaded from
+thence, but all in vaine. Wherefore his sonne followed him priuily into
+that denne with his bow and arrows, where the deuill gallantly appeared
+vnto him in the shape of a man. Whilest the old man falleth downe to
+worshippe the deuill, his sonne speedily shooting an arrow at the spirit so
+appearing, strooke a Foxe in stead of a man so suddenly was that shape
+altered. This olde manne his sonne tracking the Foxe so running away, came
+to that pit whereof I spake, and in the bottome thereof he found many bones
+of dead men, deceiued by the deuill after that sort in time past. Thus
+deliuered he his father from present death, and all other from so pestilent
+an opinion.
+
+There is furthermore a place bearing name Coia, very famous for the
+multitude of Abbyes which the Bonzii haue therein. The beginner and founder
+whereof is thought to be one Combendaxis a suttle craftie fellowe, that got
+the name of holinesse by cunning speech, although the lawes and ordinances
+he made were altogether deuillish: he is said to haue found out the
+Iapanish letters vsed at this day. In his latter yeeres this Sim suttle
+buried himselfe in a fouresquare graue, foure cubites deepe, seuerely
+forbidding it to be opened, for that then he died not, but rested his bodie
+wearied with continuall businesse, vntill many thousand thousands of yeeres
+were passed, after the which time a great learned man named Mirozu should
+come into Iapan, and then would he rise vp out of his graue againe. About
+his tombe many lampes are lighted, sent thither out of diuerse prouinces,
+for that the people are perswaded that whosoeuer is liberall and
+beneficiall towardes the beautifying of that monument shall not onely
+increase in wealth in this world, but in the life to come be safe through
+Combendaxis helpe. Such as giue themselues to worship him, liue in those
+Monasteries or Abbyes with shauen heads, as though they had forsaken all
+secular matters, whereas in deede they wallow in all sortes of wickednesse
+and lust. In these houses, the which are many (as I sayd) in number, doe
+remaine 6000 Bonzii, or thereabout besides the multitude of lay men, women
+be restrained from thence vpon paine of death. Another company of Bonzii
+dwelleth at Fatonochaiti. They teach a great multitude of children all
+tricks and sleights of guile and theft: whom they do find to be of great
+towardnes, those do they instruct in al the petigrues of princes, and
+fashions of the nobilitie, in chiualrie and eloquence, and so send them
+abroad into other prouinces, attired like yong princes, to this ende, that
+faining themselues to be nobly borne, they may with great summes of money
+borowed vnder the colour and pretence of nobilitie returne againe.
+Wherefore this place is so infamous in all Iapan, that if any scholer of
+that order be happily taken abroad, he incontinently dieth for it.
+Neuerthelesse these cousiners leaue not daily to vse their woonted
+wickednesse and knauerie.
+
+[Sidenote: A warrelike people 300 leagues to the North of Meaco.] North
+from Iapan, three hundred leagues out of Meaco, lieth a great countrey of
+sauage men clothed in beasts skinnes, rough bodied, with huge beards and
+monstrous muchaches, the which they hold vp with litle forkes as they
+drinke. These people are great drinkers of wine, fierce in warres, and much
+feared of the Iapans: being hurt in fight, they wash their wounds with salt
+water, other Surgerie haue they none. In their breasts they are sayd to
+cary looking glasses: their swordes they tie to their heads, in such wise,
+that the handle doe rest vpon their shoulders. Seruice and ceremonies haue
+they none at all, onely they are woont to worship heauen. To Aquita a great
+towne in that Iaponish kingdom, which we call Geuano, they much resort for
+marchandise, and the Aquitanes likewise doe trauell in to their countrey,
+howbeit not often, for that there many of them are slaine by the
+inhabiters.
+
+Much more concerning this matter I had to write: but to auoyd tediousnesse
+I will come to speake of the Iapans madnesse againe, who most desirous of
+vaine glory doe thinke then specially to get immortall fame, when they
+procure themselues to be most sumptuously and solemnly buried: their
+burials and obsequies in the citie Meaco are done after this maner.
+[Sidenote: The Iapanish funerals.] About one houre before the dead body be
+brought fourth, a great multitude of his friends apparelled in their best
+aray goe before vnto the fire, with them goe their kinswomen and such as
+bee of their acquaintance, clothed in white, (for that is the mourning
+colour there) with a changeable coloured vaile on their heads. Each woman
+hath with her also, according to her abilitie, all her familie trimmed vp
+in white mockado: the better sort and wealthier women goe in litters of
+Cedar artificially wrought and richly dressed. In the second place marcheth
+a great company of footemen sumptuously apparelled. Then afarre off commeth
+one of these Bonzii master of the ceremonies for that superstition, brauely
+clad in silkes and gold, in a large and high litter excellently well
+wrought, accompanied with 30 other Bonzii or thereabout, wearing hats,
+linnen albes, and fine blacke vpper garments. Then attired in ashe colour
+(for this colour also is mourning) with a long torch of Pineaple, he
+sheweth the dead body the way vnto the fire, lest it either stumble or
+ignorantly go out of the way. Well neere 200 Bonzii folow him singing the
+name of that deuill the which the partie deceassed chiefly did worship in
+his life time, and therewithall a very great bason is beaten euen to the
+place of fire instead of a bell. Then follow two great paper baskets hanged
+open at staues endes full of paper roses diuersly coloured, such as beare
+them doe march but slowly, shaking euer now and then their staues, that the
+aforesayd flowers may fall downe by litle and litle as it were drops of
+raine: and be whirled about with wind. This shower say they is an argument
+that the soule of the dead man is gone to paradise. After al this, eight
+beardles Bonzii orderly two and two drag after them on the ground long
+speares, the points backward, with flags of one cubite a piece, wherein the
+name also of that idole is written. Then there be caried 10 lanterns
+trimmed with the former inscription, ouercast with a fine vaile, and
+candles burning in them. [Sidenote: They burne their dead.] Besides this,
+two yoong men clothed in ashe colour beare pineaple torches, not lighted,
+of three foote length, the which torches serue to kindle the fire wherein
+the dead corpes is to bee burnt. In the same colour follow many other that
+weare on the crownes of their heads faire, litle, threesquare, blacke
+Lethren caps tied fast vnder their chinnes (for that is honorable amongst
+them) with papers on their heads, wherein the name of the deuill I spake
+of, is written. And to make it the more solemne, after commeth a man with a
+table one cubite long, one foot broad, couered with a very fine white
+vaile, in both sides whereof is written in golden letters the aforesayd
+name. At the length by foure men is brought fourth the corps sitting in a
+gorgeous litter clothed in white, hanging downe his head and holding his
+hands together like one that prayed: to the rest of his apparell may you
+adde an vpper gowne of paper, written full of that booke the which his God
+is sayd to haue made, when he liued in the world, by whose helpe and
+merites commonly they doe thinke to be saued. The dead man his children
+come next after him most gallantly set foorth, the yongest wherof carieth
+likewise a pineaple torch to kindle the fire. Last of all foloweth a great
+number of people in such caps as I erst spake of.
+
+When they are al come to the place appointed for the obsequie, al the
+Bonzii with the whole multitude for the space of one houre, beating pannes
+and basons with great clamours, call vpon the name of that deuill, the
+which being ended, the Obsequie is done in this maner. In the midst of a
+great quadrangle railed about, hanged with course linnen, and agreeably
+vnto the foure partes of the world made with foure gates to goe in and out
+at, is digged a hole: in the hole is laied good store of wood, whereon is
+raised gallantly a waued roofe; before that stand two tables furnished with
+diuers kindes of meates, especially drie Figs, Pomegranates and Tartes good
+store, but neither Fish nor Flesh: vpon one of them standeth also a chafer
+with coales, and in it sweete wood to make perfumes. When all this is
+readie, the corde wherewith the litter was caried, is throwen by a long
+rope into the fire: as many as are present striue to take the rope in their
+handes, vsing their aforesayd clamours, which done, they goe in procession
+as it were round about the quadrangle thrise. Then setting the litter on
+the wood built vp ready for the fire that Bonzius who then is master of the
+ceremonies, saieth a verse that no bodie there vnderstandeth, whirling
+thrise about ouer his head a torch lighted, to signifie thereby that the
+soule of the dead man had neither any beginning, ne shall haue at any time
+an ende, and throweth away the torch. Two of the dead man his children, or
+of his neere kinne, take it vp againe, and standing one at the East side of
+the litter, the other at the West, doe for honour and reuerence reach it to
+each other thrise ouer the dead corps, and so cast it into the pile of
+wood: by and by they throw in oyle, sweete wood, and other perfumes,
+accordingly as they haue plentie, and so with a great flame bring the corps
+to ashes: his children in the meane while putting sweete wood into the
+chafer at the table with odours, doe solemnly and religiously worship their
+father as a Saint: which being done, the Bonzii are paied each one in his
+degree. The master of the ceremonies hath for his pact fiue duckats,
+sometimes tenne, sometimes twentie, the rest haue tenne Iulies a piece, or
+els a certaine number of other presents called Caxæ. The meate that was
+ordained, as soone as the dead corps friends and all the Bonzii are gone,
+is left for such as serued at the obsequie, for the poore and impotent
+lazars.
+
+The next day returne to the place of obsequie the dead man his children,
+his kindred and friends, who gathering vp his ashes, bones, and teeth, doe
+put them in a gilded pot, and so carie them home, to bee set vp in the same
+pot couered with cloth, in the middest of their houses. Many Bonzii returne
+likewise to these priuate funerals, and so do they againe the seuenth day:
+then cary they out the ashes to be buried in a place appointed, laying
+thereupon a fouresquare stone, wherein is written in great letters drawen
+all the length of the stone, the name of that deuil the which the dead man
+worshipped in his life time. Euery day afterward his children resort vnto
+the graue with roses and warme water that the dead corps thirst not. Nor
+the seuenth day onely, but the seuenth moneth and yeere, within their owne
+houses they renue this obsequie, to no small commodities and gaine of the
+Bonzii: great rich men doe spend in these their funerals 3000 duckats or
+thereabout, the meaner sort two or three hundred. Such as for pouertie be
+not able to go to that charges, are in the night time darke long without
+all pompe and ceremonies buried in a dunghill.
+
+They haue another kinde of buriall, especially neere the Sea side, for them
+that bee not yet dead. These fellowes are such, as hauing religiously with
+much deuotion worshipped Amida, now desirous to see him, doe slay
+themselues. And first they goe certaine dayes begging almes, the which they
+thrust into their sleeues, then preach they in publique a sermon vnto the
+people, declaring what they mind to doe, with the great good liking of all
+such as doe heare them: for euery body wondreth at such a kinde of
+holinesse. Then take they hookes to cut downe briars and thornes that might
+hinder them in their way to heauen, and so embarke themselues in a new
+vessell, tying great stones about their neckes, armes, loines, thighes, and
+feete: thus they launching out into the main Sea be either drowned there,
+their shippe bouged for that purpose, or els doe cast themselues ouer-boord
+headlong into the Sea. The emptie barke is out of hand set a fire for
+honours sake by their friends that folow them in another boat of their
+owne, thinking it blasphemie that any mortall creature should afterward
+once touch the barke that had bene so religiously halowed.
+
+Truly when we went to Meaco, eight dayes before we came to the Ile of Hiu
+at Fore towne, sixe men and two women so died. To all such as die so the
+people erecteth a Chappell, and to each of them a pillar and a pole made of
+Pineaple for a perpetuall monument, hanging vp many shreds of paper in
+stickes all the roofe ouer, with many verses set downe in the walles in
+commendation of that blessed company. Wherefore vnto this place both day
+and night many come very superstitiously in pilgrimage. It happened euen
+then as Aloisius Almeida and I went to christen a childe wee traueiled that
+way at what time foure or fiue olde women came foorth out of the aforesayd
+chappell with beades in their handes (for in this point also the deuill
+counterfeiteth Christianitie) who partly scorned at vs for follie, partly
+frowned and taunted at our small deuotion, for passing by that holy
+monument without any reuerence or worship done thereunto at all.
+
+It remaineth now we speake two or three wordes of those Sermons the Bonzii
+are woont to make, not so many as ours in number, but assuredly very well
+prouided for. The Pulpit is erected in a great temple with a silke Canopie
+ouer it, therein standeth a costly seate, before the seate a table with a
+bell and a booke. At the houre of Sermon each sect of the Iapans resorteth
+to their owne doctors in diuers Temples. Vp goeth the doctor into the
+Pulpit, and being set downe, after that hee hath lordlike looked him about,
+signifieth silence with his bell, and so readeth a fewe wordes of that
+booke we spake of, the which he expoundeth afterward, more at large. These
+preachers be for the most part eloquent, and apt to drawe with their speach
+the mindes of their hearers. Wherefore to this ende chieflie (such is their
+greedinesse) tendeth all their talke, that the people bee brought vnder the
+colour of godlinesse to enrich their monasteries, promising to each one so
+much the more happinesse in the life to come, how much the greater costes
+and charges they bee at in Church matters and obsequies: notwithstanding
+this multitude of superstitious Sects and companies, and the diuersities
+thereof amongst themselues: yet in this principally all their
+Superintendents doe trauell so to perswade their Nouices in their owne
+tales and lies, that they thinke nothing els trueth, nothing els sure to
+come by euerlasting saluation, nothing els woorth the hearing. Whereunto
+they adde other subtleties, as in going grauitie, in countenance, apparell,
+and in all outward shew, comelinesse. Whereby the Iapans mindes are so
+nousled in wicked opinions, and doe conceiue thereby such trust and hope of
+euerlasting saluation, that not onely at home, but also abroad in euery
+corner of the towne continually almost they run ouer their beades, humbly
+asking of Amida and Xaca, wealth, honour, good health, and euerlasting
+ioyes. Thus then, deare brethren, may you thinke how greatly they need the
+helpe of God, that either doe bring the Gospell into this countrey, or
+receiuing it brought vnto them, doe forsake idolatrie and ioine themselues
+with Christ, being assaulted by so many snares of the deuill, troubled with
+the daily dissuasions of their Bonzii, and finally, so iniuriously, so
+hardly, so sharpely vexed of their kinred and friends, that except the
+grace of God obtained by the sacrifices and prayers of the Catholique
+church doe helpe vs, it cannot be chosen but that the faith and constancie
+of many, if not of all, in these first beginnings of our churches, will
+greatly be put in ieopardie. So much the more it standeth you vpon that so
+earnestly long for the health of soules, to commend specially these
+Iapanish flocks vnto our Lord.
+
+We came to Sacaio the eight and twentie day of Ianuary: Aloisius Almeida
+first for businesse, but afterward let by sicknesse, staied there some
+while, but I parting the next day from thence came thirteene leagues off to
+Meaco the last of Ianuarie. Of my comming all the Christians tooke great
+comfort, but specially Gaspar Vilela who in 6 yeres had seen none of our
+companie at Meaco: his yeeres are not yet fortie, but his grey haires shew
+him to be seuentie, so vehemently is his litle body afflicted and worne
+with extreme cold. Hee speaketh Iapanish so skilfully after the phrase of
+Meaco (the which for the renowne of this people and royal seat of the king
+is best accounted of) that hee doeth both confesse and preach in that
+language. Certaine godly bookes also he hath done into that speach, not
+omitting to translate other as laisure suffreth him. To make an ende, our
+Lord for his goodnesse vouchsafe to preserue vs all continually, and to
+giue vs ayde both rightly to interprete his will, and well to doe the same.
+From Meaco the 19 of February 1565.
+
+Other such like matter is handled both in other his letters, and also in
+the Epistles written by his companions to be seene at large in the
+aforesaid volume. Amongst the rest this seemed in my iudgement one of the
+principall, and therefore the rather I tooke vpon me to doe it into
+English.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Of the Iles beyond Iapan in the way from China to the Moluccas.
+
+Amongst other Iles in the Asian sea betwixt Canton a Chinish hauen in
+Cathaio and the Moluccas, much spoken of in the Indian histories and
+painted out in Maps, Ainan and Santianum are very famous. Ainan standeth 19
+degrees on this side of the Equinoctiall line neere China, from whence the
+Chinish nation haue their prouision for shipping and other necessaries
+requisite for their Nauie. There staied Balthasar Gagus a great traueiler 5
+moneths, who describeth that place after this maner. [Sidenote: De reb.
+Iap. li. 4.] Ainan is a goodly countrey ful of Indian fruits and all kinds
+of victuals, besides great store of iewels and pearle, well inhabited, the
+townes built of stone, the people rude in conditions, apparelled in diuers
+coloured rugs, with two oxe hornes, as it were, made of fine cypres hanging
+downe about their eares, and a paire of sharpe cyzers at their foreheads.
+
+The cause wherefore they go in such attire I could not vnderstand, except
+it bee for that they do counterfeit the deuil in the forme of a brute
+beast, offring themselues vp to him.
+
+Santianum is an Ile neere vnto the hauen Cantan in the confines likewise of
+China, famous for the death of that worthy traueiler and godly professour
+and painfull doctor of the Indian nation in matters concerning religion,
+Francis Xauier, who after great labours, many iniuries, and calamities
+infinite suffred with much patience, singular ioy and gladnesse of mind,
+departed in a cabben made of bowes and rushes vpon a desert mountaine, no
+lesse voyd of all worldly commodities, then endued with all spirituall
+blessings, out of this life, the 2 day of December, the yeere of our Lord
+1552. after that many thousand of these Easterlings were brought by him to
+the knowledge of Christ. Of this holy man, his particular vertues, and
+specially trauell, and wonderfull works in that region, of other many litle
+Iles (yet not so litle, but they may right wel be written of at laisure)
+all the latter histories of the Indian regions are full.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+An excellent treatise of the kingdome of China, and of the estate and
+  gouernment thereof: Printed in Latine at Macao a citie of the Portugals
+  in China, An. Dom. 1590. and written Dialogue-wise. The speakers are
+  Linus, Leo, and Michael.
+
+LINUS.
+
+Concerning the kingdome of China (Michael) which is our next neighbour, we
+haue heard and daily do heare so many reports, that we are to request at
+your hands rather a true then a large discourse and narration thereof. And
+if there be ought in your knowledge besides that which by continual rumours
+is waxen stale among vs, we will right gladly giue diligent eare vnto it.
+
+MICHAEL. Because the report of this most famous kingdome is growen so
+common among vs, reducing diuers and manifold particulars into order, I
+will especially aime at the trueth of things receiued from the fathers of
+the societie, which euen now at this present are conuersant in China.
+[Sidenote: The situation and limites of China.] First of all therefore it
+is not vnknowen, that of all parts of the maine continent this kingdom of
+China is situate most Easterly: albeit certaine Ilands, as our natiue
+Iapon, and the Ile of Manilia stand more Easterly then China it selfe. As
+touching the limites and bounds of this kingdom, we may appoint the first
+towards the West to be a certaine Ile commonly called Hainan, which
+standeth in 19 degrees of Northerly latitude. For the continent next
+adioining vnto this Ile trendeth towardes the East, and that especially,
+where the promontorie of the citie called Nimpo or Liampo doeth extend it
+selfe. Howbeit, from that place declining Northward, it stretcheth foorth
+an huge length, insomuch that the farthest Chinian inhabitants that way doe
+behold the North pole eleuated, at least 50 degrees, and perhaps more also:
+whereupon a man may easilie coniecture (that I may speake like an
+Astronomer) how large the latitude of this kingdom is, when as it
+containeth about more then 540 leagues in direct extension towards the
+North. But as concerning the longitude which is accounted from East to
+West, it is not so exactly found out, that it may be distinguished into
+degrees. [Sidenote: Chinian Cosmographers.] Howbeit certaine it is, that
+according to the Map wherein the people of China describe the forme of
+their kingdom, the latitude thereof doeth not much exceed the longitude.
+This kingdom therefore is, without all peradventure, of all earthly
+kingdoms the most large and spacious: for albeit diuers other kings vnder
+their iurisdiction containing in dimensions more length and breadth then
+all China, do possesse very many kingdoms and far distant asunder: yet none
+of them all enioyeth any one kingdom so large and so ample, as the most
+puissant king of China doeth. [Sidenote: The rich reuenues of the king of
+China.] Now, if we shall make enquirie into his reuenues and tributes, true
+it is, that this king, of all others, is endued with the greatest and the
+richest, both in regard of the fertilitie and greatnes of his dominions,
+and also by reason of the seuere collection and exaction of his duties:
+yea, tributes are imposed vpon his subiects, not onely for lands, houses,
+and impost of marchandise, but also for euery person in each family. It is
+likewise to be understood, that almost no lord or potentate in China hath
+authoritie to leuie vnto himselfe any peculiar reuenues, or to collect any
+rents within the precincts of his seigniories, al such power belonging
+onely vnto the king: whereas in Europe the contrary is most commonly seen,
+as we haue before signified. In this most large kingdom are conteined 15
+prouinces, euery one of which were in it selfe sufficient to be made one
+great kingdom. Six of these prouinces do border vpon the sea, namely (that
+I may vse the names of the Chinians themselues) Coantum, Foquien, Chequiam,
+Nanquin, Xantum, Paquin: the other 9 be in-land prouinces, namely, Quiansi,
+Huquam, Honan, Xiensi, Xansi, Suchuon, Queicheu, Iunan, Coansi. [Sidenote:
+The seats roiall of the king of China.] Amongst all the foresayd prouinces,
+two are allotted for the kings court and seat roial, that is to say, Paquin
+for his court in the North, and Nanquin for his court in the South. For the
+kings of China were woont to be resident altogether at the South court: but
+afterward by reason of the manifold and cruell warres mooued by the
+Tartars, they were constrained to defixe their princely seate and
+habitation in that extreme prouince of the North. Whereupon it commeth to
+passe, that those Northren confines of the kingdom doe abound with many moe
+fortresses, marciall engines, and garrisons of souldiers. LEO. I haue
+heard, amongst those munitions, a certaine strange and admirable wall
+reported of, wherewith the people of China doe represse and driue backe the
+Tartars attempting to inuade their territories. MICHAEL. Certes that wall
+which you haue heard tell of is most woorthie of admiration; for it runneth
+alongst the borders of three Northerlie prouinces, Xiensi, Xansit and
+Paquin, and is sayd to contayne almost three hundred leagues in length, and
+in such sort to bee built, that it hindereth not the courses and streames
+of any riuers, their chanels being ouerthwarted and fortified with
+wonderfull bridges and other defences. Yet is it not vnlikely, that the
+sayd wall is built in such sort, that onely lowe and easie passages bee
+therewith stopped and enuironed; but the mountaines running betweene those
+lowe passages are, by their owne naturall strength, and inaccessible
+heigth, a sufficient fortification agaynst the enemie. LINUS. Tell vs
+(Michael) whether the kingdome of China be so frequented with inhabitants,
+as wee haue often bene informed, or no? MICHAEL. It is (Linus) in very deed
+a most populous kingdom, as I haue bene certified from the fathers of
+societie: who hauing seene sundry prouinces of Europe renoumed for the
+multitude of their inhabitants, doe notwithstanding greatly admire the
+infinite swarmes of people in China. Howbeit these multitudes are not
+pel-mel and confusiuely dispersed ouer the land, but most conueniently and
+orderly distributed in their townes and famous cities: of which assemblies
+there are diuers kindes among the Chinians. For they haue certaine
+principal cities called by the name of Fu: other inferior cities called
+Cheu: and of a third kind also named Hien, which be indeed walled townes,
+but are not priuileged with the dignities and prerogatiues of cities. To
+these may be added two other kindes of lesser townes, which are partly
+villages, and partly garrisons of souldiers. Of the first and principall
+kind is that most noble citie standing neere vnto the port of Macao, called
+by the Chinians Coanchefu, but by the Portugals commonly termed Cantam,
+which is rather the common name of the prouince, then a word of their
+proper imposition. Vnto the third kind appertaineth a towne, which is yet
+nigher vnto the port of Macao, called by the Portugals Ansam, but by the
+Chinians Hiansanhien. Al the foresayd prouinces therefore haue their
+greater cities named Fu, and their lesser cities called Cheu, vnto both of
+which the other townes may be added. Moreouer in euery prouince there is a
+certain principal city which is called the Metropolitane thereof, wherein
+the chief magistrates haue their place of residence, as the principal citie
+by me last mentioned, which is the head of the whole prouince called
+Coantum. The number of the greater cities throughout the whole kingdom is
+more then 150, and there is the same or rather a greater multitude of
+inferiour cities. Of walled townes, not endued with the priuileges of
+cities there are mo then 1120: the villages and garrisons can scarce be
+numbred: ouer and besides the which conuents it is incredible what a number
+of countrie fames or granges there be: for it is not easie to find any
+place desert or void of inhabitants in all that land. [Sidenote: The
+Chinian riuers greatly inhabited.] Now in the sea, in riuers, and in barks
+there are such abundance of people, and of whole families inhabiting, that
+euen the Europæans themselues doe greatly wonder thereat: insomuch that
+some (albeit beyond measure) haue bene perswaded that there are as many
+people dwelling vpon the water as vpon the land. Neither were they induced
+so to thinke altogether without probabilitie: for whereas the kingdom of
+China is in all parts thereof interfused with commodious riuers, and in
+many places consisteth of waters, barges and boats being euery-where very
+common, it might easily bee supposed, that the number of watermen was equal
+vnto the land inhabitants. Howbeit, that is to be vnderstood by
+amplification, whereas the cities do swarme so ful with citizens and the
+countrie with peasants. [Sidenote: Holesome aire, plenty and peace in
+China.] LEO. The abundance of people which you tell vs of seemeth very
+strange: whereupon I coniecture the soile to be fertile, the aire to be
+holesome, and the whole kingdom to be at peace. MICHAEL. You haue (friend
+Leo) ful iudicially coniectured those three: for they do all so excel that
+which of the three in this kingdom be more excellent, it is not easie to
+discerne. And hence it is that this common opinion hath been rife among the
+Portugals, namely, that the kingdom of China was neuer visited with those
+three most heauy and sharpe scourges of mankind, warre, famine, and
+pestilence. But that opinion is more common then true: sithens there haue
+bene most terrible intestine and ciuile warres, as in many and most
+autenticall histories it is recorded: sithens also that some prouinces of
+the sayd kingdom, euen in these our dayes, haue bene afflicted with
+pestilence and contagious diseases, and with famine. [Sidenote: Chinian
+stories.] Howbeit, that the foresaid three benefits do mightily flourish
+and abound in China, it cannot be denied. For (that I may first speake of
+the salubritie of the aire) the fathers of the societie themselues are
+witnesses; that scarcely in any other realme there are so many found that
+liue vnto decrepite and extreme old age: so great a multitude is there of
+ancient and graue personages: neither doe they vse so many confections and
+medicines, nor so manifold and sundry wayes of curing diseases, as wee saw
+accustomed in Europe. For amongst them they haue no Phlebotomie or letting
+of blood: but all their cures, as ours also in Iapon, are atchieued by
+fasting, decoctions of herbes, and light or gentle potions. But in this
+behalfe let euery nation please themselues with their owne customes. Now,
+in fruitfulnes of soile this kingdom certes doth excel, far surpassing all
+other kingdoms of the East: yet it is nothing comparable vnto the plentie
+and abundance of Europe, as I haue declared at large in the former
+treatises. But the kingdom of China is, in this regard, so highly extolled,
+because there is not any region in the East partes that aboundeth so with
+marchandise, and from whence so much traffique is sent abroad. [Sidenote:
+The city of Coanchefu, _aliàs_ Cantam.] For whereas this kingdome is most
+large and full of nauigable riuers, so that commodities may easilie be
+conueyed out of one prouince into another: the Portugals doe find such
+abundance of wares within one and the same Citie, (which perhaps is the
+greatest Mart throughout the whole kingdome) that they are verily
+perswaded, that the same region, of all others, most aboundeth with
+marchandise: which notwithstanding is to be vnderstood of the Orientall
+regions: albeit there are some kindes of marchandise, wherewith the land of
+China is better stored then any other kingdom. [Sidenote: Great abundance
+of gold in China.] This region affordeth especially sundry kinds of
+mettals, of which the chiefe, both in excellencie and in abundance, is
+gold, whereof so many Pezoes are brought from China to India, and to our
+countrey of Iapon, that I heard say, that in one and the same ship, this
+present yeere, 2000 such pieces consisting of massie gold, as the Portugals
+commonly call golden loaues, were brought vnto vs for marchandise: and one
+of these loaues is worth almost 100 duckats. Hence it is that in the
+kingdom of China so many things are adorned with gold, as for example,
+beds, tables, pictures, images, litters wherein nice and daintie dames are
+caried vpon their seruants backes. Neither are these golden loaues onely
+bought by the Portugals, but also great plentie of gold-twine and leaues of
+gold: for the Chinians can very cunningly beate and extenuate gold into
+plates and leaues. [Sidenote: Great store of siluer.] There is also great
+store of siluer, whereof (that I may omit other arguments) it is no small
+demonstration, that euery yeere there are brought into the citie commonly
+called Cantam by the Portugal marchants to buie wares, at the least 400
+Sestertium thereof, and yet nothing in a maner is conueied out of the
+Chinian kingdom: because the people of China abounding with all
+necessaries, are not greatly inquisitiue or desirous of any marchandise
+from other kingdomes. I doe here omit the Siluer mines whereof there are
+great numbers in China, albeit there is much circumspection vsed in digging
+the siluer thereout: for the king standeth much in feare least it may bee
+an occasion to stirre vp the couetous and greedie humour of many. Nowe
+their siluer which they put to vses is for the most part passing fine, and
+purified from all drosse, and therefore in trying it they vse great
+diligence. What should I speake of their iron, copper, lead, tinne, and
+other mettals, and also of their quick-siluer. Of all which in the realme
+of China there is great abundance, and from thence they are transported
+into diuers countreys. Hereunto may bee added the wonderfull store of
+pearles, which, at the Ile of Hainan, are found in shell-fishes taken very
+cunningly by certaine Diuers, and doe much enlarge the kings reuenues.
+[Sidenote: Great store of silke in China.] But now let vs proceed vnto the
+Silke or Bombycine fleece, whereof there is great plentie in China: so that
+euen as the husbandmen labour in manuring the earth, and in sowing of Rice;
+so likewise the women doe employ a great part of their time in preseruing
+of silke-wormes, and in keeming and weauing of Silke. Hence it is that
+euery yeere the King and Queene with great solemnitie come foorth into a
+publique place, the one of them touching a plough, and the other a Mulberie
+tree, with the leaues whereof Silke-wormes are nourished: and both of them
+by this ceremonie encouraging both men and women vnto their vocation and
+labour: whereas otherwise, all the whole yeere throughout, no man besides
+the principall magistrates, may once attaine to the sight of the king.
+[Sidenote: Silke brought into Iapon.] Of this Silke or Bombycine fleece
+there is such abundance, that three shippes for the most part comming out
+of India to the port of Macao, and at the least one euery yeere comming
+vnto vs, are laden especially with this fraight, and it is vsed not onely
+in India, but caried euen vnto Portugal. Neither is the Fleece it selfe
+onely transported thence, but also diuers and sundry stuffes wouen thereof,
+for the Chinians do greatly excel in the Art of weauing, and do very much
+resemble our weauers of Europe. Moreouer the kingdom of China aboundeth
+with most costlie spices and odours, and especially with cynamom (albeit
+not comparable to the cynamom of Zeilan) with camphire also and muske,
+which is very principal and good. Muske deriueth his name from a beast of
+the same name (which beast resembleth a Beuer) from the parts whereof
+bruseda and putrified proceedeth a most delicate and fragrant smel which
+the Portugals highly esteem, commonly calling those parts of the foresaid
+beasts (because they are like vnto the gorges of foules) Papos, and conuey
+great plenty of them into India, and to vs of Iapon. [Sidenote: Cotton
+wooll, whereof Calicut-cloth is made.] But who would beleeue, that there
+were so much gossipine or cotton-wool in China; whereof such variety of
+clothes are made like vnto linnen; which we our selues do so often vse, and
+which also is conueied by sea into so many regions? Let vs now intreat of
+that earthen or pliable matter commonly called porcellan, which is pure
+white, and is to be esteemed the best stuffe of that kind in the whole
+world: whereof vessels of all kinds are very curiously framed. I say, it is
+the best earthen matter in all the world, for three qualities; namely, the
+cleannesse, the beauty, and the strength thereof. There is indeed other
+matter to be found more glorious, and more costly, but none so free from
+vncleannes, and so durable: this I adde, in regard of glasse, which indeed
+is immaculate and cleane, but may easily be broken in pieces. This matter
+is digged, not thorowout the whole region of China, but onely in one of the
+fifteene prouinces called Quiansi, wherein continually very many artificers
+are employed about the same matter: neither doe they only frame thereof
+smaller vessels, as dishes, platters, salt sellers, ewers, and such like,
+but also certaine huge tunnes, and vessels of great quantity, being very
+finely and cunningly wrought, which, by reason of the danger and difficulty
+of carriage, are not transported out of the realme, but are vsed onely
+within it, and especially in the kings court. The beauty of this matter is
+much augmented by variety of picture, which is layed in certaine colours
+vpon it, while it is yet new, golde also being added thereunto, which
+maketh the foresayd vessels to appeare most beautifull. It is wonderfull
+how highly the Portugals do esteeme thereof, seeing they do, with great
+difficulty transport the same, not onely to vs of Iapon and into India, but
+also into sundry prouinces of Europe. Vnto the marchandize aboue-mentioned
+may be added diuers and sundry plants, the rootes whereof be right holesome
+for mens bodies, and very medicinable, which are brought vnto our Iles of
+Iapon, and vnto many other Ilands, amongst the which that wood may be
+reckoned, which (by a synechdoche) is called The Wood of China, being of
+notable force to expell out of mens bodies those humours, which would breed
+contagious diseases. To these you may adde sugar-canes (for in the realme
+of China there is great store of excellent sugar) which is conueyed by the
+Portugals very plentifully, both into our countrey, and also into India. My
+speeches vttered immediatly before concerned marchandize onely, in regard
+whereof this kingdome is beneficiall not to itselfe alone, but most
+profitable to many other nations also. [Sidenote: China in a maner
+destitute of corne, wine, and oile.] As for those fruits which pertaine to
+yerely sustenance and common food, they can scarse be numbred: albeit, of
+those three commodities which they of Europe so greatly account of; namely
+of cornes, vines, and oliues the land of China is not very capable: for the
+Chinians know not so much as the name of an Oliue tree (out of the fruit
+whereof oile is expressed) neither yet the name of a vine. The prouince of
+Paquin is not altogether destitute of wine, but whether it be brought from
+other places, or there made, I am not able to say: although it aboundeth
+with many other, and those not vnpleasant liquors, which may serue in the
+stead of wine it selfe. Now, as touching corne, there is indeed wheat sowen
+in all the prouinces, howbeit rise is in farre more vse and request then
+it: and so in regard of these two commodities profitable for mans life;
+namely, wine and come; the kingdome of China and our countrey of Iapon may
+be compared together.
+
+LEO. You haue discoursed (Michael) of the fruitfulnesse of China, whereof I
+haue often heard, that it is no lesse pleasant than fruitful, and I haue
+bene especially induced so to thinke, at the sight of the Chinian maps.
+MICHAEL. The thing it selfe agrees right well with the picture: for they
+that haue seene the mediterran or inner parts of the kingdome of China, do
+report it to be a most amiable countrey, adorned with plenty of woods, with
+abundance of fruits and grasse, and with woonderfull variety of riuers,
+wherewith the Chinian kingdome is watered like a garden; diuers of which
+riuers doe naturally flowe, and others by arte and industry are defined
+into sundry places. But now I will intreat of the tranquility and peace of
+China, after I haue spoken a word or two concerning the maners of the
+inhabitants. [Sidenote: The disposition and maners of the Chinians.] This
+nation is indued with excellent wit and dexterity for the attaining of all
+artes, and being very constant in their owne customes, they lightly regard
+the customes or fashions of other people. They vse one and the same kinde
+of vesture, yet so, that there is some distinction betweene the apparell of
+the magistrate and of the common subiect. They all of them do weare long
+haire vpon their heads, and, after the maner of women, do curiously keame
+their dainty locks hanging downe to the ground, and, hauing twined and
+bound them vp, they couer them with calles, wearing sundry caps thereupon,
+according to their age and conditon. It seemeth that in olde time one
+language was common to all the prouinces: notwithstanding, by reason of
+variety of pronunciation, it is very much altered, and is diuided into
+sundry idiomes or proprieties of speech, according to the diuers prouinces:
+howbeit, among the magistrates, and in publike assemblies of iudgement,
+there is one and the very same kinde of language vsed thorowout the whole
+realme, from the which (as I haue sayd) the speech of ech prouince
+differeth not a little. [Sidenote: Their loyaltie vnto their superiours.]
+Moreouer this people is most loyall and obedient vnto the king and his
+magistrates, which is the principall cause of their tranquility and peace.
+For whereas the common sort doe apply themselues vnto the discretion and
+becke of inferiour magistrates, and the inferiour magistrates of the
+superiour, and the superiour magistrates of the king himselfe, framing and
+composing all their actions and affaires vnto that leuell: a world it is to
+see, in what equability and indifferency of iustice all of them do leade
+their liues, and how orderly the publike lawes are administred. Which thing
+notwithstanding shall be handled more at large, when we come to intreat of
+the gouernment. LINUS. Tell vs now (Michael) of the industry of that
+people, whereof we haue heard great reports. MICHAEL. Their industry is
+especially to be discerned in manuary artes and occupations, and therein
+the Chinians do surpasse most of these Easterly nations. For there are such
+a number of artificers ingeniously and cunningly framing sundry deuices out
+of golde, siluer, and other mettals, as likewise of stone, wood and other
+matters conuenient for mans vse, that the streets of cities being
+replenished with their shops and fine workemanship, are very woonderfull to
+beholde. Besides whom also there are very many Painters, vsing either the
+pensill or the needle (of which the last sort are called Embrotherers) and
+others also that curiously worke golde-twine vpon cloth either of linnen or
+of cotton: whose operations of all kinds are diligently conueyed by the
+Portugals into India. Their industry doth no lesse appeare in founding of
+gunnes and in making of gun-powder, whereof are made many rare and
+artificiall fire-works. To these may be added the arte of Printing, albeit
+their letters be in maner infinite and most difficult, the portraitures
+whereof they cut in wood or in brasse, and with maruellous facilitie they
+dayly publish huge multitudes of books. Vnto these mechanicall and
+illiberall crafts you may adde two more; that is to say, nauigation and
+discipline of warre; both of which haue bene in ancient times most
+diligently practised by the inhabitants of China: for (as we haue before
+signified in the third dialogue) the Chinians sailing euen as farre as
+India, subdued some part thereof vnto their owne dominion: howbeit
+afterward, least they should diminish the forces of their realme by
+dispersing them into many prouinces, altering their counsell, they
+determined to containe themselues within their owne limits: within which
+limits (as I haue sayd) there were in olde time vehement and cruell wares,
+both betweene the people of China themselues, and also against the
+Tartarian king, who inuaded their kingdome, and by himselue and his
+successours, for a long season, vsurped the gouernment thereof. Howbeit the
+kings of the Tartarian race being worne out, and their stocke and family
+being vtterly abolished, the Chinians began to lift vp their heads, and to
+aduance themselues, inioying for these 200 yeeres last past exceeding peace
+and tranquility, and at this day the posterity of the same king that
+expelled the Tartars, with great dignity weareth the crowne, and wieldeth
+the royall scepter. Albeit therefore the people of China (especially they
+that inhabit Southerly from the prouince of Paquin) are, for the most part,
+by reason of continuall ease and quiet, growen effeminate, and their
+courage is abated, notwithstanding they would prooue notable and braue
+souldiers, if they ioyned vse and exercise vnto their naturall fortitude.
+As a man may easily obserue in them, that maintaine continuall warres
+against the most barbarous and cruell Tartars. Howbeit in this kingdome of
+China there is so great regard of military discipline, that no city nor
+towne there is destitute of a garison, the captaines and gouernours keeping
+ech man his order; which all of them, in euery prouince, are subiect vnto
+the kings lieutenant generall for the warres, whom they call Chumpin, and
+yet he himselfe is subiect vnto the Tutan or viceroy. Let vs now come vnto
+that arte, which the Chinians do most of all professe, and which we may,
+not vnfitly, call literature or learning. For although it be commonly
+reported, that many liberall sciences, and especially naturall and morall
+phylosophy are studied in China, and that they haue Vniuersities there,
+wherein such ingenuous artes are deliuered and taught, yet, for the most
+part this opinion is to be esteemed more popular then true; but I will
+declare, vpon what occasion this conceit first grew. The people of China
+doe, aboue all things, professe the arte of literature; and learning it
+most diligently, they imploy themselues a long time and the better part of
+their age therein. For this cause, in all cities and townes, yea, and in
+pety villages also, there are certaine schole-masters hired for stipends to
+instruct children: and their literature being (as ours in Iapon is also) in
+maner infinite, their children are put to schole euen from their infancy
+and tender yeeres, from whence notwithstanding such are taken away, as are
+iudged to be vnfit for the same purpose, and are trained vp to marchandize
+or to manuary sciences: but the residue do so dedicate themselues to the
+study of learning, that (a strange thing it is to consider) being
+conuersant in the principall books, they will easily tel you, if they be
+asked the question, how many letters be conteined in euery page, and where
+ech letter is placed. Now, for the greater progresse and increase of
+learning, they (as the maner is in Europe) do appoint three degrees to the
+attaining of noble sciences; that is to say, the lowest, the middle degree,
+and the highest. Graduates of the first degree are called Siusai, of the
+second Quiugin, and of the third Chinzu. And in each city or walled towne
+there is a publique house called the Schoole, and vnto that all they doe
+resort from all priuate and pety-schooles that are minded to obtaine the
+first degree; where they do amplifie a sentence or theame propounded vnto
+them by some magistrate: and they, whose stile is more elegant and refined,
+are, in ech city, graced with the first degree. Of such as aspire vnto the
+second degree triall is made onely in the metropolitan or principall city
+of the prouince, whereunto, they of the first degree, euery third yere,
+haue recourse, and, in one publike house or place of assembly, doe, the
+second time, make an oration of another sentence obscurer then the former,
+and doe vndergo a more seuere examination. Now, there is commonly such an
+huge multitude of people, that this last yere, in the foresayd famous city
+of Cantam, by reason of the incredible assembly of persons flocking to that
+publike act or commencement, at the first entrance of the doores, there
+were many troden vnder foot, and quelled to death, as we haue bene most
+certainly informed. Moreouer they that sue for the highest degree are
+subiect vnto a most seuere and exact censure, whereby they are to be
+examined at the Kings Court onely, and that also euery third yere next
+ensuing the sayd yere wherein graduates of the second degree are elected in
+ech prouince, and, a certaine number being prescribed vnto euery particular
+prouince, they do ascend vnto that highest pitch of dignity, which is in so
+great regard with the king himselfe, that the three principall graduates
+do, for honours sake, drinke off a cup filled euen with the Kings owne
+hand, and are graced with other solemnities. [Marginal note: Note the
+extraordinary honor vouchsafed by the great King of China vpon his learned
+graduates.] Out of this order the chiefe magistrates are chosen: for after
+that they haue attained vnto this third degree, being a while trained vp in
+the lawes of the realme, and in the precepts of vrbanity, they are admitted
+vnto diuers function. Neither are we to thinke that the Chinians be
+altogether destitute of other artes. For, as touching morall philosophy,
+all those books are fraught with the precepts thereof, which, for their
+instructions sake, are alwayes conuersant in the hands of the foresayd
+students, wherein such graue and pithy sentences are set downe, that, in
+men void of the light of the Gospell, more can not be desired. [Sidenote:
+Naturall philosophy.] They haue books also that intreat of things and
+causes naturall, but herein it is to be supposed, that aswell their books
+as ours do abound with errors. There be other books among them, that
+discourse of herbs and medicines, and others of chiualry and martiall
+affaires. Neither can I here omit, that certaine men of China (albeit they
+be but few, and rare to be found) are excellent in the knowledge of
+astronomy, by which knowledge of theirs the dayes of the new moone incident
+to euery moneth are truly disposed and digested, and are committed to
+writing and published: besides, they doe most infallibly foretell the
+eclipses of the Sun and Moone: and whatsoeuer knowledge in this arte we of
+Iapon haue, it is deriued from them. LEO. We doe freely confesse that
+(Michael) sithens our books intreating of the same arte are a great part of
+them, written in the characters or letters of China. [Sidenote: The
+politike gouernment of China.] But now, instruct you vs as touching their
+maner of gouernment, wherein the Chinians are sayd greatly to excell.
+MICHAEL. That, that, in very deed, is their chiefe arte, and vnto that all
+their learning and exercise of letters is directed. Whereas therefore, in
+the kingdome of China, one onely king beares rule ouer so many prouinces,
+it is strange what a number of Magistrates are by him created to admister
+publique afiaires. For (to omit them which in ech Towne and City haue
+iurisdiction ouer the townesmen and citizens) there are three principall
+Magistrates in euery prouince. The first is he that hath to deale in cases
+criminall, and is called Ganchasu: the second is the Kings Fosterer, and is
+called Puchinsu: the third is the Lieutenant-generall for the warres,
+named, as we sayd before, Chumpin. These three therefore haue their place
+of residence in the chiefe City of the prouince: and the two former haue
+certaine associates of their owne order, but of inferiour authority,
+appointed in diuers Cities and Townes, vnto whom, according to the variety
+of causes, the Gouernours of Townes and the Maiors of Cities doe appeale.
+Howbeit the three forenamed Magistrates are in subjection vnto the Tutan,
+that is, the Vice-roy, ordained in ech prouince. And all these Magistrates
+beare office for the space of three yeeres together: yet so, that for the
+gouerning of ech province, not any of the same prouince, but strangers,
+that is, men of another prouince, are selected: whereof it commeth to
+passe, that the Iudges may giue sentence with a farre more entire and
+incorrupt minde, then if they were among their owne kinesfolke and allies.
+Ouer and besides all these, there is an annuall or yeerely Magistrate,
+which is called Chaien, whose duety it is to make inquisition of all
+crimes, and especially the crimes of Magistrates, and also to punish common
+offences: but concerning the faults of the great magistrates to admonish
+the king himselfe. Of this order, euery yere, are sent out of the Kings
+Court, for ech prouince, one; and going ouer all the Cities and Townes
+thereof, they do most diligently ransacke and serch out all crimes, and
+vpon them which are imprisoned they inflict due punishment, or, being found
+not guilty, they dismisse them vnpunished. Hence it is, that all
+Magistrates greatly fearing to be called in question by the Chaien are well
+kept within the limits of their callings. [Sidenote: Two Senates or
+Counsels continually holden in China.] Besides all these Magistrates there
+is at either Court, namely in the North, and in the South, a Senate or
+honourable assembly of graue counsellors, vnto the which, out of all
+prouinces, according to the neerenesse and distance of the place, affaires
+of greater weight and moment are referred, and by their authority diuers
+Magistrates are created: howbeit the managing and expedition of principall
+affaires is committed vnto the Senate of Paquin. Moreouer there are euery
+yeere certaine Magistrates appointed in ech prouince, to goe vnto the king;
+and euery third yeere all the Gouernours of Cities and of Townes do visit
+him at once, what time triall is made of them that aspire vnto the third
+degree: vpon which occasion there is at the same time an incredible number
+of people at the Kings Court. [Sidenote: The causes of peace in China.] By
+reason of this excellent order and harmony of Magistrates placed one vnder
+another, it can scarse be imagined, what sweete peace and tranquility
+flourisheth thorowout the whole realme, especially sithens, after speedy
+inquisition, persons that are guilty be put (as the maner is there) to the
+punishment of the bastinado: neither yet are suits or actions any long time
+delayed. [Sidenote: Learning the only step to honour in China.] Also it is
+not to be omitted, that for the obtaining of any dignity or magistracy, the
+way is open, without all respect of gentry or blood, vnto all men, if they
+be learned, and especially if they haue attained vnto the third and highest
+degree aforesaid. [The stately and formidable procession of the Chinian
+magistrates.] Neither can it be expressed how obedient and duetifull the
+common sort are vnto their Magistrates, and with what magnificence and
+pompe the sayd Magistrates come abroad: for the most part of them haue
+fiftie or threescore Sergeants attending vpon them, and going before them,
+two and two in a ranke: some of them carrying Halberds, Maces and
+Battle-axes: some trailing yron chaines vpon the ground: others holding
+great roddes or staues of a certaine kinde of reede, wherewith malefactours
+are punished, in their hands: and two there are that carry, inclosed in a
+case, the Kings seale peculiar for ech office: and many others also, that
+shew sundry spectacles vnto the people: whereunto may be added the horrible
+out-cries and showtes, which betweene whiles they vtter, to strike a
+terrour into the hearts of all men: and at length come the Magistrates
+themselues, being carried in a throne vpon the backs of foure men, sixe
+men, or eight men, according to the dignity of their office. [Sidenote: The
+houses of the Chinian magistrates.] Now, as concerning their houses, they
+are very large and stately, being built and furnished with all necessary
+stuffe, at the Kings owne cost, in the which, so long as their magistracy
+lasteth, they leade a braue and an honourable life. The sayd houses are
+without variety of stories one aboue another, which in the kingdome of
+China and in our Iles of Iapon also are not ordinarily vsed for habitation,
+but either to keepe watch and ward, or els for solace and recreations sake
+(for the which purposes, eight most lofty turrets of nine stories high are
+built) or els for the defence of Cities. Howbeit in other regardes these
+buildings doe shew foorth no small magnificence: for they haue their
+cisternes for the receit of raine-water, which are adorned with beautifull
+trees, set in order, round about them: and they haue also their places
+designed for the administration of iustice, and diuers other conuenient
+roomes to bestow their wiues and families in. Within the doores of the
+foresayd habitations a certain number of Sergeants and officers, hauing
+cabbins or little houses allotted them on both sides, doe alwayes giue
+their attendance; and so long as matters of iudgement are in deciding, they
+be alwayes ready at hand, that, at the direction of the Magistrates they
+may either beat malefactours, or by torments constraine them to tell the
+trueth. [Sidenote: The magistrates barges.] The sayd Magistrates also haue
+their peculiar barges wherein to take the water; being in breadth and
+length not much vnlike to galleys of Europe, but for swiftnesse and
+multitude of orres, farre inferiour vnto them. The rowers, sitting vpon
+galleries without the hatches or compasse of the barge, doe mooue it on
+forward with their oares: whereupon it commeth to passe, that the middle
+part of the barge affordeth sufficient roome for the Magistrates themselues
+to abide in, containing chambers therein almost as conuenient and handsome,
+as in any of their foresayd publique houses, together with butteries and
+kitchins, and such other places necessary for the prouision and stowage of
+victuals. LEO. All these things agree right well with the reports, which we
+haue heard of the stately and renowmed kingdome of China: I would now right
+gladly know somewhat concerning the order which is obserued in the
+obtaining of magistracies.
+
+MICHAEL. You haue enquired of a matter most woorthy to be knowen, which I
+had almost omitted to entreat of. [Sidenote: The maner of electing
+magistrates in China.] The Chinians therefore doe vse a kinde of gradation
+in aduancing men vnto sundry places of authority, which for the most part
+is performed by the Senatours of Paquin. For first they are made iudges of
+townes: then of Cities: afterward they are elected to be of that order,
+which decreeth punishments in cases criminall without further appeale, or
+of their order, that are the kings fosterers. [Sidenote: Degrees vnto
+honour.] And in both of these Orders, which are very honourable, there are
+many places and degrees, so that from the inferiour place they must ascend
+vnto the superiour, vntill they haue attained vnto the highest dignity of
+all: and immediatly after that they come to be Vice-royes, howbeit this
+gradation is not alwayes accomplished in one and the same prouince, but in
+changing their offices they change places and prouinces also. Moreouer,
+next after the office of Vice-roy they are capable to be chosen Senatours
+of Nanquin, and last of all to be elected into the Senate of Paquin. Now,
+there is such an order and methode obserued in the ascending vnto these
+dignities, that all men may easily coniecture, what office any one is to
+vndertake. [Sidenote: Riding post.] And there is so great diligence and
+celerity vsed for the substitution of one into the roome of another, that
+for the same purpose, messengers are dispatched by land, vpon swift
+post-horses, vnto diuers prouinces, almost twenty dayes iourney from the
+Kings Court. And, to be short, there is such district seuerity in degrading
+those that vniustly or negligently demeane themselues, from an honourable
+vnto an inferiour and base office, or altogether in depriuing them of the
+kings authority: that all Magistrates doe stand in feare of nothing in the
+world more then of that. [Sidenote: Martiall dignities.] The same order,
+almost, is obserued among the Captaines and Lieu-tenants generall for the
+warres: except onely in them, that their birth and offspring is respected:
+for many there be, who descending by parentage from such men as haue in
+times past atchieued braue exploits in warfare, so soone as they come to
+sufficient yeeres, are created Centurions, Colonels, and Gouernours, vntill
+at last they attaine to be Lieu-tenants generall and Protectours of some
+whole prouince; who notwithstanding (as I haue sayd) are in all things
+subiect vnto the Vice-roy. All the foresayd Magistrates both of warre and
+of peace haue a set number of attendants allotted vnto them, enioying a
+stipend, and carying certaine ensignes and peculiar badges of their office:
+and (besides the ordinary watch, which souldiers appointed for the same
+purpose doe in the night season, after the City gates be shut, keepe in
+their forts) wheresoeuer any Magistrate is, either at his house or in his
+barge, the sayd attendants striking vpon a cymball of brasse, at certaine
+appointed times, do keepe most circumspect and continuall watch and ward
+about his person. LINUS. You haue (Michael) sufficiently discoursed of the
+Magistrates: informe vs now of the king himselfe, whose name is so renowmed
+and spread abroad. [Sidenote: The king of China.] MICHAEL. Concerning this
+matter I will say so much onely as by certaine rumours hath come to my
+knowledge; for of matters appertaining vnto the kings Court we haue no
+eye-witnesses, sithens the fathers of the society haue not as yet proceeded
+vnto Paquin, who so soone as (by Gods assistance) they shall there be
+arriued, will by their letters more fully aduertise vs. [Sidenote:
+Van-Sui.] The king of China therefore is honoured with woonderfull
+reuerence and submission thorowout his whole realme; and whensoeuer any of
+his chiefe Magistrates speaketh vnto him, he calleth him VAN-SVI,
+signifying thereby that be wisheth tenne thousands of yeeres vnto him.
+[Sidenote: The succession of the crowne.] The succession of the kingdome
+dependeth vpon the bloud royall: for the eldest sonne borne of the kings
+first and lawfull wife obtaineth the kingdome after his fathers decease:
+neither doe they depriue themselues of the kingly authority in their life
+time (as the maner is in our Ilands of Iapon) but the custome of Europe is
+there obserued. [Sidenote: The kings yonger brethren.] Now, that the safety
+and life of the king may stand in more security, his yoonger brethren, and
+the rest borne of concubines are not permitted to liue in the kings Court:
+but places of habitation are by the king himselfe assigned vnto them in
+diuers prouinces farre distant asunder, where they dwell most commodiously,
+being comparable vnto kings for their buildings and revenues: howbeit they
+exercise no authority ouer the people, but all the gouernment of those
+cities wherein they dwell concerneth the Magistrates, who notwithstanding
+haue the sayde Princes in high regard and honour, and doe visit them twise
+in a moneth, and salute them kneeling vpon their knees, and bowing their
+faces downe to the earth: and yet they communicate nothing vnto them as
+touching the administration of the Common-wealth. These are they which may
+properly be called the Peeres or Princes of the Realme of China: for they
+deriue their houses and reuenues vnto their posterity, and so are these
+royall families continually preserued. But to returne vnto the king
+himselfe, hee is most chary in obseruing the Chinian lawes and customes,
+and diligently exerciseth himselfe in learning so much as concernes his
+estate, sheweth himselfe dayly vnto his chiefe Magistrates, and communeth
+of matters appertaining to the publique commodity of the Realme. [Sidenote:
+Twelue chariots.] His palace is of woonderfull largenesse and capacity, out
+of the which he very seldome takes his progresse; and whensoeuer he doeth
+so, there are twelue chariots brought foorth, all of them most like one to
+another both in workemanship and in value, that no man may discerne in
+which the king himselfe is placed. [Sidenote: The idolatrous religion of
+the king.] He followeth in religion especially the opinions of the
+Magistrates, attributing diuine power vnto heauen and earth as vnto the
+parents of all, and with great solemnity sacrificing vnto them. He hath
+diuers most sumptuous Temples dedicated vnto his ancestours, whereunto
+likewise he ascribeth diuine honour, and yet ceaseth hee not to fauour
+Priests of other sects, yea, hee erecteth Temples vnto their Patrons,
+endowing them with most rich reuenues; and so often as any vrgent necessity
+requireth, he enioynes continuall fastings and prayers vnto them: and after
+this sort he doeth in a maner patronize all the idolatrous sects of his
+Realme, and shewing himselfe ready to embrace any false religion
+whatsoeuer, be liueth in sundry and manifolde kindes of superstition.
+[Sidenote: The ciuill gouernment of China most agreeable to the instinct of
+nature.] Out of all the former particulars by me alledged, you may easily
+coniecture that the administration of kingdome of China doeth, for the most
+parts agree with the instinct of nature, authority being committed, not
+vnto rude and vnskilfull persons, but vnto such as haue beene conuersant in
+the vse and exercise of learning, yea, and in promoting learned men vnto
+magistracies, great consideration is had of their wisedom, justice, and of
+other virtues esteemed by the Chinian: wherefore the way being open for all
+men, without any respect of degree or parentage, to obtaine any of the
+foresayd dignities, it can not be but that this most mighty and famous
+kingdome must needes enioy exceeding peace and tranquility. LEO. I would
+nowe (Michael) right gladly vnderstand, what kinde of vrbanity or ciuill
+demeanour both the common people and the Magistrates doe vse one towardes
+another: for it is not likely that where such due administration of iustice
+is, common ciuility, which so well beseemeth all men, should be wanting.
+[Sidenote: The fiue vertues principally esteemed among the Chinians.]
+MICHAEL. You haue hit euen the very naile on the head: for among the fiue
+vertues, which the Chinians principally regard, vrbanity or courtesy is
+one, the rest are piety, a thankefull remembrance of benefites, true
+dealing in contracts or bargaines, and wisedome in atchieuing of matters:
+with the praises and commendations of which vertues the Chinian bookes are
+full fraught. [Sidenote: Vrbanity.] Now as touching their vrbanity, it is
+much vnlike vnto ours in Iapan, and vnto that of Europe: howbeit vnder two
+principall kindes the rule of their vrbanity or courtesie may be
+comprehended: whereof one is obserued betweene equals, and the other
+betweene superiours and inferiours. For when men of equall dignity meet
+together, they stand bending their backes, and bowing their heads downe to
+the ground, and this they doe either once or twice, or sometimes thrise.
+Now when the inferiour meets with his superiour, the sayd inferiour, for
+the most part kneeling lowly on his knees, enclineth his countenance downe
+to the earth. But how often and when this obeizance is to be performed it
+is woonderfull what a number of rules and prescriptions are set downe,
+which to recount would require a long time. [Sidenote: The Chinians great
+piety towards their parents.] Somewhat also I wil say as touching their
+piety, and especially of the piety which they vse towards their parents,
+which verily is so exceeding great, that for the space of three whole yeres
+together, the sonnes being cladde in mourning vestures doe bewaile the
+death of their parents, which duety is performed not onely by the common
+sort, but euen by all the Magistrates themselues, and that most curiously
+and diligently. And that all men may wholly giue their attendance vnto this
+businesse, it is prouided by a most inuiolable law among the Chinians, that
+Magistrates, vpon the death of their parents, must foorthwith renounce
+their authority, and three whole yeeres, for the performance of their
+fathers exequies, must betake themselues vnto a priuate kinde of liuing:
+which also is most duely put in practise by the Senatours of the Kings owne
+Councell. For albeit a man be right gracious in the eyes of his Prince,
+yea, and such an one, as vpon whom the administration of the Realme doeth
+principally depend; yet hauing heard of the death of his parents, that is,
+of his father or his mother, he hies himselfe immediately home to
+solemnise their funerals: insomuch that if the king would retaine him still
+in his office, he should be esteemed by the people, as a transgressour of
+the lawes and customes of China: which accident (as it is recorded) in
+ancient times fel out euen so. [Sisdenote: A memorable story.] For whenas a
+certain king most familiarly vsed a certaine Senatour of his about the
+managing and expedition of publike affaires, and vnderstanding well how
+necessary the helpe of his foresayd Senatour was, would gladly, after the
+death of his father, haue retained him still in his office: yet a certaine
+other man, being a welwiller vnto the Chinian lawes, could in no case abide
+it, but checking his Prince with sharpe rebukes, obiected the transgression
+of the law against him. The king waxing wroth menaced present death vnto
+the man; but when the party being no wit danted with the terrour of death,
+persisted still in his sayings, the king changing his determination
+dismissed the Senatour to mourne for his father, but as for his reprehender
+be aduanced him vnto an higher dignity. LINUS. I perceiue (Michael) that
+drawing to an end of these dialogues, and being weary of your long race,
+you begin to affect breuity: yet let it not seeme troublesome vnto you to
+speake somewhat of the religion of China, which onely thing seemes to be
+wanting in this present dialogue. [Sidenote: The religion of China.]
+MICHAEL. I confesse indeed that I endeuour to be briefe, not so much in
+regard of wearisomnesse, as for feare least I haue bene ouer tedious vnto
+you: howbeit I will not faile but accomplish that which I haue vndertaken,
+and (according to your request) adde somewhat more concerning religion.
+Whereas therefore the kingdome of China hath hitherto bene destitute of
+true religion, and now the first beginnings thereof are included in most
+narrow bounds, that nation being otherwise a people most ingenious, and of
+an extraordinory and high capacity, hath alwayes liued in great errours and
+ignorance of the trueth, being distracted into sundry opinions, and
+following manifolde sects. [Sidenote: Three principall sectes among the
+Chinians.] And among these sects there are three more famous then the rest:
+[Sidenote: Confucius authour of the first sect.] the first is of them that
+professe the doctrine of one Confucius a notable philosopher. This man (as
+it is reported in the history of his life) was one of most vpright and
+incorrupt maners, whereof he wrote sundry treatises very pithily and
+largely, which aboue all other books, are seriously read and perused by the
+Chinians. The same doctrine do all Magistrates embrace, and others also
+that giue their mindes to the study of letters, a great part whereof
+Confucius is sayd to haue inuented: and he is had in so great honour, that
+all his followers and clients, vpon the dayes of the new and full Moone,
+doe assemble themselues at the common Schoole, which I haue aboue
+mentioned, and before his image, which is worshipped with burning of
+incense and with tapers, they doe thrise bend their knees, and bow their
+heads downe to the ground; which not onely the common scholars, but the
+chiefe Magistrates do performe. [The summe of Confucius his doctrine.] The
+summe of the foresayd doctrine is, that men should follow the light of
+nature as their guide, and that they should diligently endeuour to attaine
+vnto the vertues by me before mentioned: and lastly, that they should
+employ their labour about the orderly gouernment of their families and of
+the Common-wealth. All these things are in very deed praise-worthy, if
+Confucius had made any mention of almighty God and of the life to come, and
+had not ascribed so much vnto the heauens, and vnto fatall necessity, nor
+yet had so curiously intreated of worshipping the images of their
+forefathers. In which regard he can very hardly or not at all be excused
+from the crime of idolatry: notwithstanding it is to be granted, that none
+other doctrine among the Chinians approacheth so neere vnto the trueth as
+this doeth. [Sidenote: Xequiam author of the second sect, whose followers
+are called Cen or Bonzi.] The second sect is of them which followethe the
+instructions of Xaquam, or as the Chinians call him Xequiam, whose
+opinions, because they are well knowen amongst vs, it were bootlesse for me
+to repeat; especially sithens, in the Catechisme composed by our grave
+visitour, they are notably refuted. This doctrine doe all they embrace,
+which are in China called Cen, but with vs at Iapon are named Bonzi.
+[Sidenote: Note.] For this I doe briefly and by the way giue you to
+vnderstand, that all words of the Chinians language are of one sillable
+onely, so that if there be any word that consisteth of more sillables then
+one, it consisteth also of more wordes then one. These sectaries called Cen
+doe shaue their beards and their heads, and doe for the most part, together
+with diuers of their associates, inhabit the Temples of Xaquam, or of
+others which in regard of the same profession haue in their Kalenders beene
+canonized for Saints, and doe rehearse certaine prayers after their maner,
+either vpon books or beads, vsing other ceremonies after the maner of our
+Bonzi. These men haue some inckling of the life to come, and of the
+rewardes of good men, and the punishments of the wicked: howbeit all their
+assertions are fraught with errours. [Sidenote: The third sect.] The third
+sect is of them which are called Tauzu: and those doe imitate a certaine
+other man, to be adored, as they thinke, for his holinesse. These also are
+Priests after their kinde, howbeit they let their haire grow, and doe in
+other obseruations differ from the former. Now, because the sect of
+Confucius is the most famous of all the three, and the two other sects
+called Cen and Tauzu are not much adicted vnto learning, their religion
+preuailing onely among the common sort, the Priests of both the sayd sects
+doe leade a most base and seruile life amongst the Chinians, insomuch that
+they kneele downe before the Magistrates, and are not permitted to sit
+beside them, sometimes, if the Magistrate please, are abased vnto the
+punishment of the bastonado: whereas in our Iles of Iapon it is farre
+otherwise, Priests, euen of false religion, being had in so great honour
+among vs. [Sidenote: The superstition of the Saracens.] LEO. I heard also
+(Michael) that the Saracens superstition takes place in China: now, whether
+it doth or no, you can resolue vs. MICHAEL. That forren superstition was
+brought into China what time the Tartars inuaded the kingdome, and vsurped
+the gouernment thereof. All the Saracens therefore in China are originally
+descended of the Tartars, who, because they were an infinite number, could
+not vtterly be expelled and rooted out of the kingdome, but remaining
+still there, haue propagated their posterity, though not their religion.
+These therefore are souldiers for the greater part of them, and sometimes
+doe obtaine martiall dignities: and except a few ceremonies of their
+superstition which is nowe become stale and almost worne out, they doe
+liue, altogether after the Chinians fashion, their predecessours being
+brought into the same kingdome about foure hundred yeeres agoe. [Sidenote:
+Christian religion planted in China.] LINUS. Now (Michael) let vs heare you
+say somewhat of the Christian religion, which as we hope hath set most
+happy footing in that kingdome. MICHAEL. I could say much concerning those
+most wished and acceptable beginnings were they not already published in
+Iapon by the letters of the fathers: howbeit I will make a briefe
+rehearsall of all things, that I may not seem altogether to haue abandoned
+this labour. You know that from the time wherein the fathers of the society
+arriued in our Ilands, to the end they might augment Christian religion,
+they were in like sort most carefull how they might insinuate themselues
+into the innermost parts of the kingdome of China. In the middst of this
+endeauour and trauell Francis Xauier, a most deuout man of the foresayd
+society, departed out of this present life at the Ile of Sancian (which
+some call Sangiam) leauing an example vnto the rest of his associates, how
+they should likewise doe their best to plant the religion of Christ in that
+nation. [Sidenote: An ancient custome worthy the obseruation.] This man was
+seconded by others, who vsed all meanes, and left no practise vnattempted,
+that they might bring these good beginnings vnto a prosperours issue:
+howbeit they were greatly hindered by reason of an ancient custome in
+China, in regard whereof they doe not without great difficulty and
+circumspection admit any strangers into their dominions, except those which
+hauing a long time executed the office of ambassadours doe ordinarily euery
+third yeere present themselues before the king: in the admission of whom
+likewise there is maruellous care vsed, that they may not easily espie and
+become acquainted with the affaires of the Realme. [Sidenote: The Chinians
+contemne other nations.] Hereunto may be added, that the Chinians are great
+contemners of other nations, and most constant obseruers of their owne
+lawes and customes: in all which respects it came to passe that there was
+wonderfull labour and diligence employed aboue thirty yeeres together,
+onely to get an entrance, vntill in the yeere one thousand fiue hundred
+fourescore and three, two fathers of the foresayd society, that had pretty
+skill in the letters and language of China, vtterly despairing of mans
+helpe, and depending vpon the prouidence of almighty God, obtained licence
+of the Tutan or Vice-roy to build them an house and a Church in the City of
+Xauquin, which by reason of the commodiousnesse thereof is the seat of the
+Viceroy himselue. This worke being begunne, the sayd fathers of the
+society, for the nouelty therof, were a few yeeres right well entreated by
+the Magistrates: inasmuch that two others out of India had free and easie
+accesse vnto them, one couple remaining still in their foresayd house at
+Xauquin, and the other two taking their iourney for the inner prouinces, to
+conuert more people vnto the faith: who notwithstanding afterward, other
+Magistrates not approouing of their attempts, were constrained to retire.
+Nowe all the time wherein the foresayd fathers abode at Xauquin (being more
+then fiue yeeres) certaine of the common people were restrained from false
+superstition to Christian religion, and seuenty persons were baptised. But
+the enemy of mankinde, who omitteth none opportunity for the hinderance of
+Christian religion, suggested into the mindes of the Chinians (being, as I
+sayd, of their owne nature, a people estranged from the traffique and
+acquaintance of other nations, and alwayes being too suspicious of
+strangers) that they should exhibit letters of supplication vnto the Caien
+and the Tutan their principall Magistrates, to haue the fathers expelled
+out of Xauquin: which Magistrates repairing vnto their foresayed house and
+Church entered consultation how they might bannish them out of the sayd
+City of Xauquin: in which thing verily they vsed great moderation, not any
+way offending or exasperating the mindes of the fathers, but onely
+signifying that they had regard vnto the estate of their Common-wealth. For
+the Tutan or Vice-roy calling the fathers vnto him, and (to let passe other
+accidents) vsing courteous and familiar conference with them, declared by
+many arguments, that their habitation in the City of Xauquin was not
+conuenient, especially sithens so many Magistrates resorted vnto that City,
+who would take great offence at the presence of strangers. For the which
+cause he perswaded them to accept some part of the money which they had
+bestowed in the building of their house, and so to returne either home into
+their own countrey, or vnto the port of Macao. Howbeit, such was the
+instant supplication of the fathers, and so woorthy of compassion, that the
+Tutan or Vice-roy, in the extreame and mediterrane borders of the prouince
+of Coantum, assigned vnto them a new habitation at the city called Xaucheo,
+commending them also to a certaine Magistrate, who was come from the same
+place to salute him. Thither therefore the sayd others, not without great
+sorrow and griefe of the Christians, hied themselues, and as we are
+informed by their last letters, they haue euen now layed the foundation of
+their first building, and haue also written that they are like to liue much
+more peaceably and conueniently for the propagating of Christian religion.
+These be the first beginnings of Christianity in China, where, euen as in
+other places of the Christian Common-wealth, the seed is to be sowen with
+great labour and teares, that acceptable fruits may be reaped with
+gladnesse. LEO. It is euen as you haue sayd (Michael) and nowe for this
+your pleasant and eloquent discourse we do acknowledge our selues much
+bounden vnto you.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A Letter written from Goa, the principall City of all the East Indies, by
+  one Thomas Steuens an English man, and sent to his father, M. Thomas
+  Steuens: Anno 1579.
+
+After most humble commendations: These shall be to crave your dayly
+blessing, with like commendations vnto my mother; and withall, to certifie
+you of my being: according to your will and my duety. I wrote vnto you
+taking my iourney from Italy to Portugall, which letters I thinke are come
+to your hands, so that presuming therupon, I thinke I haue the lesse need
+at this time to tell you the cause of my departing, which nevertheless in
+one word I may conclude, if I do but name obedience. I came to Lisbon
+toward the end of March, eight dayes before the departure of the shippes,
+so late that if they had not bene stayed about some weighty matters, they
+had bene long gone before our comming: insomuch that there were others
+ordained to goe in our places, that the kings prouision and ours also might
+not be in vaine. Neuerthelesse our sudden comming tooke place, and the
+fourth of Aprill fiue ships departed for Goa, wherein besides shipmen and
+souldiers, there were a great number of children which in the seas beare
+out better than men, and no maruell, when that many women also passe very
+well. The setting foorth from the port I need not to tell how solemne it is
+with trumpets, and shooting of ordinance, you may easily imagine it,
+considering that they go in the maner of warre. The tenth of the foresayd
+moneth we came to the sight of Porto Santo neere vnto Madera, where an
+English shippe set vpon ours (which was then also alone) with a few shots,
+which did no harme, but after that our ship had layed out her greatest
+ordinance, they straight departed as they came. The English shippe was very
+faire and great, which I was sorry to see so ill occupied, for she went
+rouing about, so that we saw her againe at the Canarian Iles, vnto the
+which we came the thirteenth of the sayd moneth, and good leisure we had to
+woonder at the high mountaine of the Iland Tenerif, for we wandred betweene
+that and great Canaria foure dayes by reason of contrary windes: and
+briefly, such euill weather we had vntill the foureteenth of May, that they
+despaired, to compasse the Cape of Good hope that yeere. Neuertheless,
+taking our voyage betweene Guinea and the Ilands of Capo Verde, without
+seeing of any land at all, we arriued at length vnto the coast of Guinie,
+which the Portugals so call, chiefly that part of the burning Zone, which
+is from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, in which parts they suffered
+so many inconueniences of heats, and lacke of windes, that they thinke
+themselues happy when they haue passed it: for sometimes the ship standeth
+there almost by the space of many dayes, sometimes she goeth, but in such
+order that it were almost as good to stand still. And the greatest part of
+this coast not cleare, but thicke and cloudy, full of thunder and
+lightening, and raine so vnholesome, that if the water stand a little
+while, all is full of wormes, and falling on the meat which is hanged vp,
+it maketh it straight full of wormes. Along all that coast we often times
+saw a thing swimming vpon the water like a cocks combe (which they call a
+ship of Guinea) but the colour much fairer; which combe standeth vpon a
+thing almost like the swimmer of a fish in colour and bignesse, and beareth
+vnderneath in the water, strings which saue it from turning ouer. This
+thing is so poisonous, that a man cannot touch it without great perill. In
+this coast, that is to say, from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, we
+spent no lesse than thirty dayes, partly with contrary windes, partly with
+calme. The thirtieth of May we passed the Equinoctiall with contentation,
+directing our course as well as we could to passe the promontory, but in
+all that gulfe, and in all the way beside, we found so often calmes, that
+the expertest mariner wondred at it. And in places where there are alwayes
+woont to be most horrible tempests, we found most quiet calmes which was
+very troublesome to those ships which be the greatest of all other, and
+cannot go without good windes. Insomuch, that when it is tempest almost
+intollerable for other ships, and maketh them maine all their sailes, these
+hoise vp, and saile excellent well, vnlesse the waters be too furious,
+which seldome happened in our nauigation. You shall vnderstand, that being
+passed the line, they cannot straightway go the next way to the promontory:
+but according to the winde, they draw always as neere South as they can to
+put themselues in the latitude of the point, which is 35 degrees and an
+halfe, and then they take their course towards the East, and so compass the
+point. But the winde serued vs so, that at 33 degrees we did direct our
+course toward the point or promontory of Good hope.
+
+You know that it is hard to saile from East to West, or contrary, because
+there is no fixed point in all the skie, whereby they may direct their
+course, wherefore I shall tell you what helps God prouided for these men.
+There is not a fowle that appereth, or signe in the aire, or in the sea,
+which they haue not written, which haue made the voyages heretofore.
+[Sidenote: The variation of the compasse.] Wherfore, partly by their owne
+experience, and pondering withall what space the ship was able to make with
+such a winde, and such direction, and partly by the experience of others,
+whose books and nauigations they haue, they gesse whereabouts they be,
+touching degrees of longitude, for of latitude they be alwayes sure: but
+the greatest and best industry of all is to marke the variation of the
+needle or compasse, which in the Meridian of the Iland of S. Michael, which
+is one of the Azores in the latitude of Lisbon, is iust North, and thence
+swarueth towards the East so much, that betwixt the Meridian aforesayd, and
+the point of Africa it carrieth three or foure quarters of 32. And againe
+in the point of Afrike, a little beyond the point that is called Cape das
+Agulias (in English the needles) it returneth againe vnto the North, and
+that place passed, it swarueth againe toward the West, as it did before
+proportionally. [Sidenote: Signes about the Cape of Bona Speransa.] As
+touching our first signes, the neerer we came to the people of Afrike, the
+more strange kindes of fowles appeared, insomuch that when we came within
+no lesse then thirty leagues (almost an hundred miles) and sixe hundred
+miles as we thought from any Iland, as good as three thousand fowles of
+sundry kindes followed our ship: some of them so great that their wings
+being opened from one point to the other, contained seuen spannes, as the
+Mariners sayd. A maruellous thing to see how God prouided, so that in so
+wide a sea these fowles are all fat, and nothing wanteth them. The
+Portugals haue named them all according to some propriety which they haue:
+some they call Rushtailes, because their tailes be not proportionable to
+their bodies, but long and small like a rush, some forked tailes because
+they be very broad and forked, some Veluet sleeues, because they haue wings
+of the colour of veluet, and bowe them as a man boweth his elbow. This bird
+is alwayes welcome, for he appeareth neerest the Cape. I should neuer make
+an end if I should tell all particulars: but it shall suffice briefly to
+touch a few, which yet shall be sufficient, if you marke them, to giue
+occasion to glorifie almighty God in his wonderfull works, and such variety
+in his creatures. [Sidenote: Fishes on sea coast of Africa.] And to speake
+somewhat of fishes in all places of calme, especially in the burning Zone,
+neere the line (for without we neuer saw any) there waited on our ship
+fishes as long as a man, which they call Tuberones, they come to eat such
+things as from the shippe fall into the sea, not refusing men themselues if
+they light vpon them. And if they finde any meat tied in the sea, they take
+it for theirs. These haue waiting on them six or seuen small fishes (which
+neuer depart) with gardes blew and greene round about their bodies, like
+comely seruing men: and they go two or three before him, and some on euery
+side. Moreouer, they haue other fishes which cleaue alwayes vnto their
+body, and seeme to take such superfluities as grow about them, and they are
+sayd to enter into their bodies also to purge them if they need. The
+Mariners in time past haue eaten of them, but since they haue seene them
+eate men their stomacks abhorre them. Neuerthelesse, they draw them vp with
+great hooks, and kill of them as many as they can, thinking that they haue
+made a great reuenge. There is another kind of fish as bigge almost as a
+herring, which hath wings and flieth, and they are together in great
+number. These haue two enemies, the one in the sea, the other in the aire.
+In the sea the fish which is called Albocore, as big as a Salmon, followeth
+them with great swiftnesse to take them. This poore fish not being able to
+swim fast, for he hath no finnes, but swimmeth with moouing of his taile,
+shutting his wings, lifteth himselue aboue the water, and flieth not very
+hie: the Albocore seeing that, although he haue no wings, yet he giueth a
+great leape out of the water, and sometimes catcheth him, or els he keepeth
+himselfe vnder the water going that way on as fast as he flieth. And when
+the fish being weary of the aire, or thinking himselue out of danger,
+returneth into the water, the Albocore meeteth with him: but sometimes his
+other enemy the sea-crow, catcheth him before he falleth. [Sidenote: Note.]
+With these and like sights, but alwayes making our supplications to God for
+good weather and saluation of the ship, we came at length vnto the point,
+so famous and feared of all men: but we found there no tempest, only great
+waues, where our Pilot was a little ouerseene: for whereas commonly al
+other neuer come within sight of land, but seeing signes ordinary, and
+finding bottome, go their way sure and safe, he thinking himselfe to haue
+wind at will, shot so nigh the land that the winde turning into the South,
+and the waues being exceeding great, rolled vs so neere the land, that the
+ship stood in lesse then 14 fadoms of water, no more then sixe miles from
+the Cape, which is called Das Agulias, and there we stood as vtterly cast
+away: for vnder vs were rocks of maine stone so sharpe, and cutting, that
+no ancre could hold the ship, the shore so euill, that nothing could take
+land, and the land itselfe so full of Tigers, and people that are sauage,
+and killers of all strangers, that we had no hope of life nor comfort, but
+onely in God and a good conscience. Notwithstanding, after we had lost
+ancres, hoising vp the sailes for to get the ship a coast in some safer
+place, or when it should please God, it pleased his mercy suddenly, where
+no man looked for helpe, to fill our sailes with wind from the land, and so
+we escaped, thanks be to God. And the day following, being in the place
+where they are alwayes wont to catch fish, we also fell a fishing, and so
+many they tooke, that they serued all the ship for that day, and part of
+the next. [Sidenote: Corall.] And one of them pulled vp a corall of great
+bignesse and price. For there they say (as we saw by experience) that the
+corals doe grow in the maner of stalks vpon the rocks in the bottome, and
+waxe hard and red. The day of perill was the nine and twentieth of Iuly.
+[Sidenote: Two wayes beyond the cape of Good hope.] And you shall
+vnderstand that, the Cape passed, there be two wayes to India: one within
+the Ile of S. Lawrence, which they take willingly, because they refresh
+themselues at Mosambique a fortnight or a moneth, not without great need,
+and thence in a moneth more land in Goa. The other is without the Ile of S.
+Lawrence, which they take when they set foorth so late, and come so late to
+the point, that they have no time to take the foresayd Mosambique, and then
+they goe heauily, because in this way they take no port. And by reason of
+the long nauigation, and want of food and water, they fall into sundry
+diseases, their gummes waxe great, and swell, and they are faine to cut
+them away, their legges swell and all the body becommeth sore, and so
+benummed, that they cannot stirre hand nor foot, and so they die for
+weaknesse, others fall into fluxes and agues, and die thereby. And this way
+it was our chance to make: yet though we had more then one hundred and
+fifty sicke, there died not past seuen and twentie; which losse they
+esteemed not much in respect of other times. Though some of ours were
+diseased in this sort, yet, thanks be to God, I had my health, contrary to
+the expectation of many: God send me my health so well in the land, if it
+may be to his honour and seruice. This way is full of priuy rocks and
+quicke-sands, so that sometimes we durst not saile by night, but by the
+prouidence of God we saw nothing, nor neuer found bottom vntill we came to
+the coast of India. When we had passed againe the line, and were come to
+the third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming on the water that
+were red as though they had bene sodden: but this was no signe of land.
+After about the eleuenth degree, the space of many days, more than ten
+thousand fishes by estimation followed round about our ship, whereof we
+caught so many, that for fifteene days we did eate nothing els, and they
+serued our turne very well: for at this time we had neither meate nor
+almost any thing els to eate, our nauigation growing so long that it drew
+neere to seuen moneths, where as commonly they goe it in fiue, I mean when
+they saile the inner way. [Sidenote: They commonly sail from Lisbon to Goa
+in 5 moneths.] But these fishes were not signe of land, but rather of deepe
+sea. At length we tooke a couple of Birds which were a kinde of Hawks,
+whereof they ioyed much, thinking that they had bene of India, but indeed
+they were of Arabia, as we found afterward. And we that thought we had bene
+neere India, were in the same latitude neere Zocotoro, an Ile in the mouth
+of the Red sea. [Sidenote: Running seas very dangerous.] But there God sent
+vs great winds from the Northeast or Northnortheast, wherevpon vnwillingly
+they bare vp towards the East, and thus we went tenne dayes without seeing
+signe of land, whereby they perceived their errour: for they had directed
+their course before always Northeast, coueting to multiply degrees of
+latitude, but partly the difference of the Needle, and most of all the
+running seas, which at that time ran Northwest, had drawen vs to this other
+danger, had not God sent vs this winde, which at length waxed larger, and
+restored vs to our right course. These running seas be so perillous that
+they deceiue the most part of the gouernours, and some be so little
+curious, contenting themselues with ordinary experience, that they care not
+to seeke out any meanes to know when they swarue, neither by the compasse,
+nor by any other triall. [Sidenote: Certaine signs of land.] The first
+signe of land were certaine fowles which they knew to be of India: the
+second, boughes of palmes and sedges: the third, snakes swimming on the
+water, and a substance which they call by the name of a coine of money, as
+broad and as round as a groat, wonderfully printed and stamped of nature,
+like vnto some coine. And these two last signes be so certaine, that the
+next day after, if the winde serve, they see lande, which we did to our
+great joy, when all our water (for you know they make no beere in those
+parts) and victuals began to faile vs. [Sidenote: They arriued at Goa the
+24 of October.] And to Goa we came the foure and twentieth day of October,
+there being receiued with passing great charity. The people be tawny, but
+not disfigured in their lips and noses, as the Moores and Cafres of
+Ethiopia. They that be not of reputation, or at least the most part, goe
+naked, sauing an apron of a span long, and as much in breadth before them,
+and a lace two fingers broad before them, girded about with a string and no
+more: and thus they thinke them as well as we with all our trimming. Of the
+fruits and trees that be here I cannot now speake, for I should make
+another letter as long as this. For hitherto I haue not seene a tree here
+whose like I haue seene in Europe, the vine excepted, which neuerthelesse
+here is to no purpose, so that all the wines are brought out of Portugall.
+The drinke of this countrey is good water, or wine of the Palme tree, or of
+a fruit called Cocos. And this shall suffice for this time. If God send me
+my health, I shall haue opportunity to write to you once againe. Now the
+length of my letter compelleth me to take my leaue, and thus I wish your
+most prosperous health. From Goa the tenth of Nouember, 1579.
+
+Your louing sonne Thomas
+
+Steuens.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe relation of the great magnificence and rich traffike of the
+  kingdome of Pegu beyond the East India, written by Frey Peter of Lisbon,
+  to his cousin Frey Diego of Lisbon, from Cochin.
+
+[Sidenote: The coast of India greatly troubled with Moores.] I receiued
+your letters in the harbour of Damaon by a carauell of aduise that came
+from Malacca, which brought shot, powder, and other prouision for the
+furnishing of foure gallies and a great Gallion, which are now in building,
+to keepe our coast for feare of great store of men of warre, being Moores,
+which trouble vs very sore. At that instant when I receiued your letters I
+was newly come from the kingdome of Pegu, where I had remained one yeere
+and an halfe, and from thence I departed to the city of Cochin in October
+1587. The newes which I can certifie you of concerning these countreys are:
+that this king of Pegu is the mightiest king of men, and the richest that
+is in these parts of the world: for he bringeth into the field at any time,
+when he hath warres with other princes, aboue a million of fightingmen:
+howbeit they be very leane and small people, and are brought vnto the field
+without good order. [Sidenote: Abundance of golde, siluer, pearles, and
+precious stones in Pegu.] He is lord of the Elephants, and of all the golde
+and siluer mines, and of all the pearles and precious stones: so that he
+hath the greatest store of treasure that euer was heard of in these parts.
+The countrey people call him the God of trueth and of iustice. I had great
+conference with this king, and with the head captaine of the Portugals,
+which is one of the countrey. They demanded of me many questions as
+touching the law and faith of Iesus Christ, and as touching the Ten
+Commandements. And the king gaue his consent that our Order should build a
+Church in his countrey, which was halfe builded; but our peruerse and
+malicious Portugals plucked it downe againe: [Sidenote: The great gaine of
+the Portugals in Pegu.] for whereas it is a countrey wherein our nation
+gaine very much by their commodities, they fearing that by the building of
+this Church there would be greater resort thither, and so their trade
+should be impaired if their great gaines should be knowen vnto others then
+those which found this countrey out first, therefore they were so vnwilling
+that the building of this church should goe forward. Our Portugals which
+are here in this realme are woorse people then the Gentiles. I preached
+diuers times among those heathen people; but being obstinate they say, that
+as their father beleeued so they will beleeue: for if their forefathers
+went to the diuell so they will. Whereupon I returned backe againe to our
+monastery to certifie our Father prouinciall of the estate of this new
+found countrey. It is the best and richest countrey in all this East India:
+and it is thought to be richer then China.
+
+[Sidenote: Pegu the best and richest countrey in all the East Indies.] I am
+afrayd that the warres which his Maiestie hath with England will be the
+vtter vndoing and spoile of Spaine: for these countreys likewise are almost
+spoiled with ciull warres, which the Moores haue against the Gentiles: for
+the kings here are vp in armes all the countrey ouer. Here is an Indian
+which is counted a prophet, which hath prophesied that there will a Dragon
+arise in a strange countrey, which will do great hurt to Spaine. How it
+will fall out onely God doth know. And thus I rest: from this monastery of
+Cochin the 28 of December, 1589. [Sidenote: A prophesie of an Indian
+against Spaine.]
+
+Your good cousin and assured friend
+
+frier Peter of Lisbon.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voyage with three tall ships, the Penelope Admirall, the Marchant royall
+  Viceadmirall, and the Edward Bonaduenture Rereadmirall, to the East
+  Indies, by the Cape of Buona Speransa, to Quitangone neere Mosambique, to
+  the Iles of Comoro and Zanzibar on the backeside of Africa, and beyond
+  Cape Comori in India, to the Iles of Nicubar and of Gomes Polo, within
+  two leagues of Sumatra, to the Ilands of Pulo Pinaom, and thence to the
+  maine land of Malacca, begunne by M. George Raymond, in the yeere 1591,
+  and performed by M. Iames Lancaster, and written from the mouth of Edmund
+  Barker of Ipswich, his lieutenant in the sayd voyage, by M. Richard
+  Hakluyt.
+
+Our fleet of the three tall ships abouenamed departed from Plimmouth the 10
+of April 1591, and arrived at the Canarie-ilands the 25 of the same, from
+whence we departed the 29 of April. The second of May we were in the height
+of Cape Blanco. The fift we passed the tropique of Cancer. The eight we
+were in the height of Cape Verde. All this time we went with a faire winde
+at Northeast, alwayes before the winde vntil the 13 of the same moneth,
+when we came within 8 degrees of the Equinoctiall line, where we met with a
+contrary winde. Here we lay off and on in the sea vntil the 6 of Iune, on
+which day we passed the sayd line. While we lay thus off and on, we tooke a
+Portugal Carauel laden by merchants of Lisbon for Brasile, in which Carauel
+we had some 60 tunnes of wine, 1200 iarres of oyle, about 100 iarres of
+oliues, certaine barrels of capers, three fats of peason, with diuers other
+necessaries fit for our voyage; which wine, oyle, oliues and capers were
+better to vs then gold. [Sidenote: Three occasions of sicknes neere the
+line.] We had two men died before wee passed the line, and diuers sicke,
+which took their sicknesse in those hote climates: for they be wonderfull
+vnwholesome from 8 degrees of Northerly latitude vnto the line, at that
+time of the yeere: for we had nothing but Ternados, with such thunder,
+lightning, and raine, that we could not keep our men drie 3 houres
+together, which was an occasion of the infection among them, and their
+eating of salt victuals, with lacke of clothes to shift them. After we
+passed the line, we had the wind still at Eastsoutheast, which carried vs
+along the coast of Brasil 100 leagues from the maine, til we came in 26
+degrees to the Southward of the line, where the wind came vp to the North,
+at which time we did account, that the Cape of Buona esperansa did beare
+off vs East and by South, betwixt 900 and 1000 leagues. Passing this gulfe
+from the coast of Brasil vnto the Cape we had the wind often variable as it
+is vpon our coast, but for the most part so, that we might lie our course.
+The 28 of Iuly we had sight of the foresayd Cape of Buona esperansa: vntill
+the 31 we lay off and on with the wind contrary to double the Cape, hoping
+to double it, and so to haue gone seuentie leagues further to a place
+called Agoada de S. Bras, before we would haue sought to haue put into any
+harbour. But our men being weake and sicke in all our shippes, we thought
+good to seeke some place to refresh them. With which consent we bare vp
+with the land to the Northward of the Cape, and going along the shoare, we
+espied a goodly Baie with an Iland lying to Seawards of it into which we
+did beare, and found it very commodious for our ships to ride in.
+[Sidenote: Agoada de Saldanha.] This Baie is called Agoada de Saldanha,
+lying 15 leagues Northward on the hither side of the Cape. The first of
+August being Sunday we came to an anker in the Baie, sending our men on
+land, and there came vnto them certaine blacke Saluages very brutish which
+would not stay, but retired from them. For the space of 15 or 20 dayes we
+could finde no reliefe but onely foules which wee killed with our pieces,
+which were cranes and geese: there was no fish but muskles and other
+shel-fish, which we gathered on the rockes. [Sidenote: Great store of
+Penguins and Seales.] After 15 or 20 dayes being here, our Admirall went
+with his pinnasse vnto the Iland which lieth off this Baie, where hee found
+great store of Penguines and Seales, whereof he brought good plenty with
+him. And twise after that we sent certain of our men, which at both times
+brought their bots lading vnto our ships. After we had bene here some time,
+we got here a Negro, whom we compelled to march into the countrey with vs,
+making signs to bring vs some cattel; but at this time we could come to the
+sight of none, so we let the Negro goe with some trifles. [Sidenote:
+Bullocks, oxen, and sheepe, dog-cheape.] Within 8 dayes after, he with 30
+or 40 other Negroes, bought vs downe some 40 bullocks and oxen, with as
+many sheepe: at which time we brought but few of them. But within 8 dayes
+after they came downe with as many more, and then we bought some 24 oxen
+with as many sheepe. We bought an oxe for two kniues, a stirke for a knife,
+and a sheepe for a knife, and some we bought for lesse value then a knife.
+The oxen be very large and well fleshed, but not fat. The sheepe are very
+big and very good meat, they haue no woll on their backs but haire, and
+haue great tailes like the sheepe in Syria. There be diuers sorts of wild
+beests, as the Antilope, (whereof M. Lancaster killed one of the bignes of
+a yong colt) the red and fallow Deere, with other great beasts vnknowen
+vnto vs. Here are also great store of ouer-growen monkies. As touching our
+proceeding vpon our voyage, it was thought good rather to proceed with two
+ships wel manned, then with three euill manned: for here wee had of sound
+and whole men but 198, of which there went in the Penelope with the Admiral
+101, and in the Edward with the worshipfull M. captaine Lancaster 97. We
+left behind 50 men with the Roiall marchant, whereof there were many
+pretily well recouered, of which ship was master and gouernour Abraham
+Kendal, which for many reasons we thought good to send home. The disease
+that hath consumed our men hath bene the skuruie. Our souldiers which haue
+not bene vsed to the Sea, haue best held out, but our mariners dropt away,
+which (in my iudgement) proceedeth of their euill diet at home.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape de Buona Speransa doubled. Cape dos Corrientes.] Sixe dayes
+after our sending backe for England of the Marchant Roiall from Agoada de
+Saldanha, our Admirall M. captaine Raimond in the Penelope, and M. Iames
+Lancaster in the Edward Bonaduenture, set forward to double the Cape of
+Buona esperansa, which they did very speedily. [Sidenote: Here they are
+seuered from the Penelope.] But being passed as far as Cape dos Corrientes
+the 14 of September we were encountred with a mighty storme and extreme
+gusts of wind, wherein we lost our Generals companie, and could neuer heare
+of him nor his ship any more, though we did our best endeuour to seeke him
+vp and downe a long while, and staied for him certaine dayes at the Iland
+of Comoro, where we appointed to stay one for another. [Sidenote: Foure men
+slaine with a clap of thunder.] Foure days after this uncomfortable
+seperation in the morning toward ten of the clocke we had a terrible clap
+of thunder, which slew foure of our men ovtright, the necks being wrung in
+sonder without speaking any word, and of 94 men there was not one
+vntouched, whereof some were striken blind, others were bruised in their
+legs and armes, and others in their brests, so that they voided blood two
+days after, others were drawen out at length as though they had been
+racked. But (God be thanked) they all recouered sauing onely the foure
+which were slain out right. Also with the same thunder our maine maste was
+torn very grieuously from the head to the decke, and some of the spikes
+that were ten inches into the timber, were melted with the extreme heate
+thereof. [Sidenote: The Shoulds of S. Laurence.] From thence we shaped our
+course to the Northeast, and not long after we fell vpon the Northwest end
+of the mighty Iland of S. Laurence: which one of our men espied by Gods
+good blessing late in the euening by Moone light, who seeing afarre off the
+breaking of the Sea, and calling to certaine of his fellowes, asked them
+what it was: which eft soones told him that it was the breaking of the Sea
+vpon the Shoulds. Whereupon in very good time we cast about to auoyd the
+danger which we were like to haue incurred. [Sidenote: Quitangone neere
+Mozambique.] Thus passing on forward, it was our lucke to ouer-shoote
+Mozambique, and to fall with a place called Quitangone two leagues to the
+Northward of it, and we tooke three or foure Barkes of Moores, which Barkes
+in their language they call Pangaias, laden with Millio, hennes and ducks,
+with one Portugall boy, going for the prouision of Mozambique. [Sidenote:
+The Ile of Comoro.] Within few dayes following we came to an Iland an
+hundred leagues to, the Northeast of Mozambique called Comoro, which we
+found exceedingly full of people, which are Moores of tawnie colour and
+good stature, but they be very trecherous and diligently to be taken heed
+of. Here wee desired to store our selues with water, whereof we stood in
+great need, and sent sixteene of our men well armed on in our boate: whom
+the people suffred quietly to land and water, and diuers of them with their
+king came aboord our ship in a gowne of crimosine Sattin pinked after the
+Moorish fashion downe to the knee, whom we entertained in the best maner,
+and had some conference with him of the state of the place and
+marchandises, vsing our Portugall boy which we had taken before for our
+interpreter, and in the end licensed the king and his company to depart,
+and sent our men againe for more water, who then also dispatched their
+businesse and returned quietly: the third time likewise we sent them for
+more, which also returned without any harme. [Sidenote: 32 of our men
+betraid at the Ile of Comoro.] And though we thought our selues furnished,
+yet our master William Mace of Radcliffe pretending that it might be long
+before we might finde any good watering place, would needes goe himselfe on
+shore with thirtie men, much against the will of our captaine, and hee and
+16 of his company, together with one boat which was all that we had, and 16
+others that were a washing ouer against our ship, were betrayed of the
+perfidious Moores, and in our sight for the most part slaine, we being not
+able for want of a boat to yeeld them any succour. [Sidenote: Zanzibar
+Iland.] From thence with heauie hearts we shaped our course for Zanzibar
+the 7 of Nouember, where shortly after we arriued and made vs a new boat of
+such boards as we had within boord, and rid in the road vntill the 15 of
+February, where, during our aboad, we sawe diuers Pangaias or boates, which
+are pinned with wooden pinnes, and sowed together with Palmito cordes, and
+calked with the husks of Cocos shels beaten, whereof they made Occam.
+[Sidenote: A Portugall Factorie in Zanzibar.] At length a Portugal Pangaia
+comming out of the harborow of Zanzibar, where they haue a small Factorie,
+sent a Canoa with a Moore which had bene christened, who brought vs a
+letter wherein they desired to know what wee were, and what we sought. We
+sent them word we were Englishmen come from Don Antonio vpon businesse to
+his friends in the Indies: with which answere they returned, and would not
+any more come at vs. Whereupon not long after wee manned out our boat and
+tooke a Pangaia of the Moores, which had a priest of theirs in it, which in
+their language they call a Sherife: whom we vsed very courteously: which
+the king tooke in very good part, hauing his priests in great estimation,
+and for his deliuerance furnished vs with two moneths victuals, during all
+which time we detained him with vs. These Moores informed vs of the false
+and spitefull dealing of the Portugals towards vs, [Marginal note: The
+treason of the Portugals towards the English.] which made them beleeue that
+we were cruell people and men-eaters, and willed them if they loued their
+safetie in no case to come neere vs. Which they did onely to cut us off
+from all knowledge of the state and traffique of the countrey. While we
+road from the end of Nouember vntil the middle of February in this
+harborough, which is sufficient for a ship of 500 tuns to ride in, we set
+vpon a Portugall Pangaia with our boat, but because it was very litle, and
+our men not able to stirre in it, we were not able to take the sayd Pangaia
+which was armed with 10 good shot like our long fouling pieces. [Sidenote:
+An excellent place for refreshing.] This place for the goodnesse of the
+harborough and watering, and plentifull refreshing with fish, whereof we
+tooke great store with our nets, and for sundry sorts of fruits of the
+countrey, as Cocos and others, which were brought vs by the Moores as also
+for oxen and hennes, is carefully to be sought for by such of our ships, as
+shall hereafter passe that way. [Sidenote: A gallie Frigate.] But our men
+had need to take good heed of the Portugals: for while we lay here the
+Portugall Admiral of the coast from Melinde to Mozambique, came to view and
+betray our boat if he could haue taken at any time aduantage, in a gallie
+Frigate of ten tunnes with 8 or 9 oares on a side. Of the strength of which
+Frigate and their trecherous meaning we were aduertised by an Arabian Moore
+which came from the king of Zanzibar diuers times vnto vs about the
+deliuerie of the priest aforesayd, and afterward by another which we caried
+thence along with vs: for whersoeuer we came, our care was to get into our
+hands some one or two of the countreys to learne the languages and states
+of those partes where we touched. [Sidenote: Another thunder-clap.]
+Moreouer, here againe we had another clap of thunder which did shake our
+foremast very much, which wee fisht and repaired with timber from the
+shore, whereof there is good store thereabout of a kind of tree some fortie
+foot high, which is a red and tough wood, and as I suppose, a kind of
+Cedar. [Sidenote: Heat in the head deadly. Letting of blood very
+necessary.] Here our Surgeon Arnold negligently catching a great heate in
+his head being on land with the master to seeke oxen, fell sicke and
+shortly died, which might haue bene cured by letting of blood before it had
+bin settled. Before our departure we had in this place some thousand weight
+of pitch, or rather a kind of gray and white gumme like vnto frankincense,
+as clammie as turpentine, which in melting groweth as blacke as pitch, and
+is very brittle of it selfe, but we mingled it with oile, whereof wee had
+300 iarres in the prize which we tooke to the Northward of the
+Equinoctiall, not farre from Guinie, bound for Brasil. Sixe days before wee
+departed hence, the Cape marchant of the Factorie wrote a letter vnto our
+capitaine in the way of friendship, as he pretended, requesting a iarre of
+wine and a iarre of oyle, and two or three pounds of gunpowder, which
+letter hee sent by a Negro his man, and Moore in a Canoa: we sent him his
+demaunds by the Moore, but tooke the Negro along with vs because we
+vnderstood he had bene in the East Indies and knew somewhat of the
+Countrey. [Sidenote: A Iunco laden with pepper and drugs.] By this Negro we
+were aduertised of a small Barke of some thirtie tunnes (which the Moores
+call a Iunco) which was come from Goa thither laden with Pepper for the
+Factorie and seruice of that kingdome. Thus hauing trimmed our shippe as we
+lay in this road, in the end we set forward for the coast of the East
+Indie, the 15 of February aforesayd, intending if we could to haue reached
+to Cape Comori, which is the headland or Promontorie of the maine of
+Malauar, and there to haue lien off and on for such ships as should haue
+passed from Zeilan, Sant Tome, Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, the Moluccos, the
+coast of China, and the Ile of Japan, which ships are of exceeding wealth
+and riches. [Sidenote: The currents set to the North-west.] But in our
+course we were very much deceiued by the currents that set into the gulfe
+of the Red sea along the coast of Melinde. [Sidenote: Zocotora.] And the
+windes shortening vpon vs to the Northeast and Easterly, kept vs that we
+could not get off, and so with the putting in of the currents from the
+Westward, set vs in further vnto the Northward within fourscore leagues of
+the Ile of Zocotora, farre from our determined course and expectation. But
+here we neuer wanted abundance of Dolphins, Bonitos, and flying fishes. Now
+while we found our selues thus farre to the Northward, and the time being
+so farre spent, we determined to goe for the Red sea, or for the Iland of
+Zocotora, both to refresh our selues, and also for some purchase. But while
+we were in this consultation, the winde very luckily came about to the
+Northwest and caried vs directly toward Cape Comori. [Sidenote: The Isles
+of Mamale.] Before we should haue doubled this Cape, we were determined to
+touch at the Ilands of Mamale, of which we had aduertisement, that one had
+victuals, standing in the Northerly latitude of twelue degrees. Howbeit it
+was not our good lucke to finde it, which fell out partly by the obstinacie
+of our master: for the day before we fell with part of the Ilands the wind
+came about to the Southwest, and then shifting our course we missed it. So
+the wind increasing Southerly, we feared we should not haue bene able to
+haue doubled the Cape, which would haue greatly hazarded our casting away
+vpon the coast of India, the Winter season and Westerne Monsons already
+being come in, which Monsons continue on that coast vntil August.
+[Sidenote: Cape Comori doubled 1592.] Neuertheless it pleased God to bring
+the wind more Westerly, and so in the moneth of May 1592, we happily
+doubled Cape Comori without sight of the coast of India. From hence thus
+hauing doubled this Cape, we directed our course for the Ilands of Nicubar,
+which lie North and South with the Westerne part of Sumatra, and in the
+latitude of 7 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall. From which Cape
+of Comori vnto the aforesayd Ilands we ranne in sixe days with a very large
+wind though the weather were foule with extreme raine and gustes of winde.
+These Ilands were missed through our masters default for want of due
+obseruation of the South starre. [Sidenote: The Iles of Gomes Polo.] And we
+fell to the Southward of them within the sight of the Ilands of Gomes Polo,
+[Sidenote: Sumatra.] which lie hard vpon the great Iland of Sumatra the
+first of Iune, and at the Northeast side of them we lay two or three dayes
+becalmed, hoping to haue had a Pilote from Sumatra, within two leagues
+whereof we lay off and on. [Sidenote: The Iles of Pulo Pinauo.] Now the
+Winter coming vpon vs with much contagious weather, we directed our course
+from hence with the Ilands of Pulo Pinaou, (where by the way it is to be
+noted that Pulo in the Malaian tongue signifieth an Iland) at which Ilands
+wee arriued about the beginning of Iune, where we came to an anker in a
+very good harborough betweene three Ilands: at which time our men were very
+sicke and many fallen. Here we determined to stay vntil the Winter were
+ouerpast. This place is in 6 degrees and a halfe to the Northward, and some
+fiue leagues from the maine betweene Malacca and Pegu. Here we continued
+vntil the end of August. Our refreshing in this place was very smal, onely
+of oysters growing on rocks, great wilks, and some few fish which we tooke
+with our hookes. Here we landed our sicke men on these vninhabited Ilands
+for their health, neuertheless 26 of them died in this place, whereof John
+Hall our master was one, and M. Rainold Golding another, a marchant of
+great honestie and much discretion. [Sidenote: Trees fit for mastes.] In
+these Ilands are abundance of trees of white wood, so right and tall, that
+a man may make mastes of them being an hundred foote long. The winter
+passed and hauing watered our ship and fitted her to goe to Sea, wee had
+left vs but 33 men and one boy, of which not past 22 were sound for labour
+and helpe, and of them not past a third part sailers: [Sidenote: Malacca.]
+thence we made saile to seeke some place of refreshing, and went ouer to
+the maine of Malacca. The next day we came to an anker in a Baie in six
+fadomes water some two leagues from the shore. Then master Iames Lancaster
+our captaine, and M. Edmund Barker his lieutenant, and other of the
+companie manning the boat, went on shoare to see what inhabitants might be
+found. And comming on land we found the tracking of some barefooted people
+which were departed thence not long before: for we sawe their fire still
+burning, but people we sawe none, nor any other living creature, saue a
+certaine kind of foule called oxe birds, which are a gray kind of
+Sea-foule, like a Snite in colour, but not in beake. Of these we killed
+some eight dozen with haile-shot being very tame, and spending the day in
+search, returned toward night aboord. The next day about two of the clocke
+in the afternoone we espied a Canoa which came neere vnto vs, but would not
+come aboord vs, hauing in it some sixteen naked Indians, with whom
+neuertheles going afterward on land, we had friendly conference and promise
+of victuals. [Sidenote: Three ships of Pegu laden with pepper.] The next
+day in the morning we espied three ships, being all of burthen 60 or 70
+tunnes, one of which wee made to strike with our very boate: and
+vnderstanding that they were of the towne of Martabam, [Sidenote:
+Martabam.] which is the chiefe hauen towne for the great citie of Pegu, and
+the goods belonging to certaine Portugal Iesuites and a Biscuit baker a
+Portugall we tooke that ship and did not force the other two, because they
+were laden for marchants of Pegu, but hauing this one at our command, we
+came together to an anker. The night folowing all the men except twelue,
+which we tooke into our ship, being most of them borne in Pegu, fled away
+in their boate, leauing their ship and goods with vs. [Sidenote: Pera.] The
+next day we weighed our anker and went to the Leeward of an Iland hard by,
+and tooke in her lading being pepper, which shee and the other two had
+laden at Pera, which is a place on the maine 30 leagues to the South.
+Besides the aforesaid three ships we tooke another ship of Pegu laden with
+pepper, and perceiuing her to bee laden with marchants goods of Pegu onely,
+wee dismissed her without touching any thing.
+
+[Sidenote: Pulo Sambilam.] Thus hauing staied here 10 daies and discharged
+her goods into the Edward, which was about the beginning of September, our
+sicke men being somewhat refreshed and lustie, with such reliefe as we had
+found in this ship, we weighed anker, determining to runne into the
+streights of Malacca to the Ilands called Pulo Sambilam, which are some
+fiue and fortie leagues Northward of the citie of Malacca, to which Ilands
+the Portugals must needs come from Goa or S. Thome, for the Malucos, China,
+and Iapan. And when wee were there arriued, we lay too and agayne for such
+shipping as should come that way. [Sidenote: A ship of Negapatan taken.]
+Thus hauing spent some fiue dayes, vpon a Sunday we espied a saile which
+was a Portugall ship that came from Negapatan a towne on the maine of India
+ouer-against the Northeast part of the Ile of Zeilan; and that night we
+tooke her being of 250 tunnes: she was laden with Rice for Malacca.
+Captaine Lancaster commanded their captaine and master aboord our shippe,
+and sent Edmund Barker his lieutenant and seuen more to keepe this prize,
+who being aboord the same, came to an anker in thirtie fadomes water: for
+in that chanell, three or foure leagues from the shore you shall finde good
+ankorage. [Sidenote: A ship of S. Thome.] Being thus at an anker and
+keeping out a light for the Edward, another Portugall ship of Sant Thome of
+foure hundred tunnes, came and ankered hard by vs. The Edward being put to
+Leeward for lacke of helpe of men to handle her sailes, was not able the
+next morning to fetch her vp, vntil we which were in the prize with our
+boate, went to helpe to man our shippe. Then comming aboord we went toward
+the shippe of Sant Thome, but our ship was so foule that shee escaped vs.
+After we had taken out of our Portugall prize what we thought good, we
+turned her and all her men away except a Pilot and foure Moores. [Sidenote:
+The galeon of Malacca of 700 taken.] We continued here vntill the sixt of
+October, at which time we met with the ship of the captaine of Malacca of
+seuen hundred tunnes which came from Goa: we shot at her many shot, and at
+last shooting her maine-yard through, she came to an anker and yeelded. We
+commaunded her Captaine, Master, Pilot, and Purser to come aboord vs. But
+the Captaine accompanied by one souldier onely came, and after certaine
+conference with him, he made excuse to fetch the Master, and Purser, which
+he sayd would not come vnless he went for them: but being gotten from vs in
+the edge of the euening, he with all the people which were to the number of
+about three hundred men, women and children gote a shore with two great
+boates and quite abandoned the ship. [Sidenote: Wares fit to carry into the
+East India.] At our comming aboord we found in her sixteene pieces of
+brasse, and three hundred but of Canarie wine, and Nipar wine, which is
+made of the palme trees, and raisin wine which is also very strong: as also
+all kinds of Haberdasher wares, as hats, red caps knit of Spanish wooll,
+worsted stockings knit, shooes, veluets, taffataes, chamlets, and silkes,
+abundance of suckets, rice, Venice glasses, certaine paper full of false
+and counterfeit stones which an Italian brought from Venice to deceiue the
+rude Indians withall, abundance of playing cardes, two or three packs of
+French paper. Whatsoeuer became of the treasure which vsually is brought in
+roials of plate in this gallion, we could not find it. After that the
+mariners had disordredly pilled this rich shippe, the Captaine because they
+would not follow his commandement to vnlade those excellent wines into the
+Edward, abandoned her and let her driue at Sea, taking out of her the
+choisest things that she had. [Sidenote: The kingdom of Iunsaloam.] And
+doubting the forces of Malaca, we departed thence to a Baie in the kingdom
+of Iunsalaom, which is betweene Malacca and Pegu eight degrees to the
+Northward, to seeke for pitch to trimme our ship. Here we sent our
+souldier, which the captaine of the aforesaid galion had left behind him
+with vs, because he had the Malaian language, to deale with the people for
+pitch, which hee did faithfully, and procured vs some two or three quintals
+with promise of more, and certaine of the people came vnto vs. [Sidenote:
+Amber-greese. The hornes of Abath.] We sent commodities to their king to
+barter for Amber-griese, and for the hornes of Abath, whereof the king
+onely hath the traffique in his hands. [Sidenote: The female Vnicorne.] Now
+this Abath is a beast which hath one horne onely in her forehead, and is
+thought to be the female Vnicorne, and is highly esteemed of all the Moores
+in those parts as a most soueraigne remedie against poyson. We had only two
+or three of these hornes which are of the colour of a browne gray, and some
+reasonable quantitie of Amber-griese. At last the king went about to betray
+our Portugall with our marchandise: but he to get aboord vs, told him that
+we had gilt armour, shirtes of maile and halberds, which things they
+greatly desire: for hope whereof he let him returne aboord, and so he
+escaped the danger. [Marginal note: Some small quantitie hereof may be
+caried to pleasure those kings.] Thus we left this coast and went backe
+againe in sight of Sumatra, and thence to the Ilands of Nicubar, where we
+arriued and found them inhabited with Moores, [Sidenote: They arriue at the
+Iles of Nicubar, which are inhabited by Moores.] and after wee came to an
+anker, the people daily came aboord vs in their Canoas, with hennes, Cocos,
+plantans, and other fruits: and within two dayes they brought vnto vs
+roials of plate, giuing vs them for Calicut cloth: which roials they nude
+by diuing for them in the Sea, which were lost not long before in two
+Portugall ships which were bound for China and were cast away there. They
+call in their language the Coco Calambe, the Plantane Pison, a Hen Iam, a
+Fish Iccan, a Hog Babee. From thence we returned the 21 of Nouember to goe
+for the Iland of Zeilan, and arriued there about the third of December
+1592, and ankered vpon the Southside in sixe fadomes water, where we lost
+our anker, the place being rockie and foule ground. Then we ranne along the
+Southwest part of the sayd Iland, to a place called Punta del Galle, where
+we ankered, determining there to haue remained vntill the comming of the
+Bengala Fleet of seuen or eight ships, and the Fleete of Pegu of two or
+three sailes, and the Portugall shippes of Tanaseri being a great Baie to
+the Southward of Martabam in the kingdome of Siam: which ships, by diuers
+intelligences which we had, were to come that way within foureteene daye to
+bring commodities to serue the Caraks, which commonly depart from Cochin
+for Portugall by the middest of Ianuarie. The commodities of the shippes
+which come from Bengala bee fine pauillions for beds, wrought quilts, fine
+Calicut cloth, Pintados and other fine workes, and Rice, and they make this
+voiage twise in the yeere. Those of Pegu bring the chiefest stones, as
+Rubies and Diamants, but their chiefe fraight is Rice and certaine cloth.
+Those of Tanaseri are chiefly freighted with Rice and Nipar wine, which is
+very strong, and in colour like vnto rocke water, somewhat whitish, and
+very hote in taste like vnto Aqua vitæ. Being shot vp to the place
+aforesayd, called Punta del Galle, wee came to an anker in foule ground and
+lost the same, and lay all that night a drift, because we had nowe but two
+ankers left vs, which were vnstocked and in hold. Whereupon our men tooke
+occasion to come home, our Captaine at that time lying very sicke more like
+to die then to liue. In the morning wee set our foresaile determining to
+lie vp to the Northward and there to keepe our selues to and againe out of
+the current, which otherwise would haue set vs off to the Southward from
+all knowen land. Thus hauing set our foresayle, and in hand to set all our
+other sayles to accomplish our aforesayd determination, our men made
+answere that they would take their direct course for England and would stay
+there no longer. Nowe seeing that they could not bee perswaded by any
+meanes possible, the captaine was constrained to giue his consent to
+returne, leauing all hope of so great possibilities. Thus the eight of
+December 1592, wee set sayle for the Cape of Buona Speransa, passing by the
+Ilands of Maldiua, and leauing the mightie Iland of S. Laurence on the
+starreboord or Northward in the latitude of 26 degrees to the South. In our
+passage ouer from S. Laurence to the maine we had exceeding great store of
+Bonitos and Albocores, which are a greater kind of fish; of which our
+captain, being now recouered of his sicknesse, tooke with a hooke as many
+in two or three howers as would serue fortie persons a whole day. And this
+skole of fish continued with our ship for the space of fiue or sixe weekes,
+all which while we tooke to the quantitie aforesayd, which was no small
+refreshing to vs. In February 1593 we fell with the Eastermost land of
+Africa at a place called Baia de Agoa some 100 leagues to the Northeast of
+the Cape of Good Hope: and finding the winds contrary, we spent a moneth or
+fiue weekes before we could double the Cape. After wee had doubled it in
+March following wee directed our course for the Iland of Santa Helena, and
+arriued there the third day of Aprill, where we staied to our great comfort
+nineteene dayes: in which meane space some one man of vs tooke thirtie
+goodly Congers in one day, and other rockie fishe and some Bonitos. After
+our arriual at Santa Helena, I Edmund Barker went on shore with foure or
+fiue Peguins or men of Pegu which we had taken, and our Surgion, where in
+an house by the Chappell I found an Englishman one Iohn Segar of Burie in
+Suffock, [Marginal note: Iohn Segar an Englishman left 18 moneths alone in
+the Ile of santa Helena.] who was left there eighteene moneths before by
+Abraham Kendall, who put in there with the Roiall marchant and left him
+there to refresh him on the Iland, being otherwise like to haue perished on
+shipboord: and at our comming wee found him as fresh in colour and in as
+good plight of body to our seeming as might be, but crazed in minde and
+halfe out of his wits, as afterwards wee perceiued: for whether he was put
+in fright of vs, not knowing at first what we were, whether friends or
+foes, or of sudden ioy when he vnderstand we were his olde consorts and
+countreymen, hee became idle-headed, and for eight dayes space neither
+night nor day tooke any naturall rest, and so at length died for lacke of
+sleepe. [Marginal note: A miraculous effect of extreme feare or extreme
+ioy.] Here two of our men, whereof the one was diseased with the skuruie,
+and the other had bene nine moneths sicke of the fluxe, in short time while
+they were on the Iland, recouered their perfect health. We found in this
+place great store of very holesome and excellent good greene figs, orenges,
+and lemons very faire, abundance of goates and hogs, and great plentie of
+partriges, Guiniecocks, and other wilde foules. [Marginal note: The
+description of the commodities of the ile of santa Helena.] Our mariners
+somewhat discontented being now watered and hauing some prouision of fish,
+contrary to the will of the capitaine, would straight home. The capitaine
+because he was desirous to goe for Phernambuc in Brasil, granted their
+request. And about the 12 of Aprill 1593. we departed from S. Helena, and
+directed our course for the place aforesayd. The next day our capitaine
+calling vpon the sailers to finish a foresaile which they had in hand, some
+of them answered that vnlesse they might goe directly home, they would lay
+their hands to nothing; whereupon he was constrained to folow their humour.
+And from thence-foorth we directed our course for our countrey, which we
+kept vntill we came 8 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall,
+betweene which 8 degrees and the line, we spent some sixe weekes, with many
+calme and contrary winds at North, and sometimes to the Eastward, and
+sometimes to the Westward: which losse of time and expense of our victuals,
+whereof we had very smal store, made vs doubt to keepe our course and some
+of our men growing into a mutinie threatned to breake vp other mens chests,
+to the ouerthrow of our victuals and all our selues, for euery man had his
+share of his victuals before in his owne custody, that they might be sure
+what to trust to, and husband it more thriftily. [Sidenote: The gulfe of
+Paria, or Bocca del Dragone passed.] Our captaine seeking to preuent this
+mischiefe, being aduertised by one of our companie which had bene at the
+Ile of Trinidada in M. Chidleis voyage, that there we should be sure to
+haue refreshing, hereupon directed his course to that Iland, and not
+knowing the currents, we were put past it in the night into the gulfe of
+Paria in the beginning of Iune, wherein we were 8 dayes, finding the
+current continually setting in, [Sidenote: A good note.] and oftentimes we
+were in 3 fadomes water, and could find no going out vntil the current had
+put vs ouer to the Westernside vnder the maine land, where we found no
+current at all, and more deep water; and so keeping by the shore, the wind
+off the shore euery night did helpe vs out to the Northward. [Sidenote: The
+Ile of Mona.] Being cleare, within foure or fiue days after we fell with
+the Ile of Mona where we ankered and rode some eighteene dayes. In which
+time the Indians of Mona gaue vs some refreshing. And in the meane space
+there arriued a French ship of Cane in which was capitaine one Monsieur de
+Barbaterre, of whom wee bought some two buts of wine and bread, and other
+victuals. Then wee watered and fitted our shippe, and stopped a great leake
+which broke on vs as we were beating out of the gulfe of Paria. And hauing
+thus made ready our ship to goe to Sea, we determined to goe directly for
+Newfound-land. But before we departed, there arose a storme the winde being
+Northerly, which put vs from an anker and forced vs the Southward of Santo
+Domingo. [Sidenote: The Ile of Sauona enuironed with flats.] This night we
+were in danger of shipwracke vpon an Iland called Sauona, which is
+enuironed with flats lying 4 or 5 miles off; yet it pleased God to cleare
+vs of them, [Sidenote: Cape de Tiberon.] and so we directed our course
+Westward along the Iland of Santo Domingo, and doubled Cape Tiberon, and
+passed through the old channell betweene S. Domingo and Cuba for the cape
+of Florida: And here we met againe with the French ship of Caen, whose
+Captaine could spare vs no more victuals, as he said, but only hides which
+he had taken by traffike vpon those Ilands, wherewith we were content and
+gaue him for them to his good satisfaction. After this, passing the Cape of
+Florida, and cleere of the channell of Bahama, we directed our course for
+the banke of Newfound-land. Thus running to the height of 36 degrees, and
+as farre to the East as the Ile of Bermuda the 17 of September finding the
+winds there very variable, contrarie to our expectation and all mens
+writings, we lay there a day or two the winde being northerly, and
+increasing continually more and more, it grewe to be a storme and a great
+frete of wind: which continued with vs some 24 houres, with such
+extremetie, as it caried not onely our sayles away being furled, but also
+made much water in our shipppe, so that wee had six foote water in hold,
+and hauing freed our ship thereof with baling, the winde shifted to the
+Northwest and became dullerd: but presently vpon it the extremetie of the
+storme was such that with the labouring of our ship we lost our foremaste,
+and our ship grewe as full of water as before. The storme once ceased, and
+the winde contrary to goe our course, we fell to consultation which might
+be our best way to saue our liues. Our victuals now being vtterly spent,
+and hauing eaten hides 6 or 7 daies, we thought it best to beare back
+againe for Dominica, and the Islands adioyning, knowing that there we might
+haue some reliefe, whereupon we turned backe for the said Islands. But
+before we could get thither the winde scanted vpon vs, which did greatly
+endanger vs for lacke of fresh water and victuals; so that we were
+constrained to beare vp to the Westward to certaine other Ilandes called
+the Neublas or cloudie Ilands, towards the Ile of S. Iuan de porto Rico,
+where at our arriuall we found land-crabs and fresh water, and tortoyses,
+which come most on lande about the full of the moone. Here hauing refreshed
+our selues some 17 or 18 dayes, and hauing gotten some small store of
+victuals into our ship, we resolued to returne againe for Mona: vpon which
+our determination fiue of our men left vs, remaining still on the Iles of
+Neublas for all perswasions that we could vse to the contrary, which
+afterward came home in an English shippe. From these Iles we departed and
+arriued at Mona about the twentieth of Nouember 1593, and there comming to
+an anker toward two or three of the clocke in the morning, the Captaine,
+and Edmund Barker his Lieutenant with some few others went on land to the
+houses of the olde Indian and his three sonnes, thinking to haue gotten
+some foode, our victuals being all spent, and we not able to proceede any
+further vntill we had obteyned some new supply. We spent two or three daies
+in seeking prouision to cary aboord to relieue the whole companie. And
+comming downe to go aboord, the winde then being northerly and the sea
+somewhat growne, they could not come on shore with the boate, which was a
+thing of small succour and not able to rowe in any rough sea, whereupon we
+stayed vntill the next morning, thinking to haue had lesse winde and safer
+passage. But in the night about twelue of the clocke our ship did driue
+away with fiue men and a boy onely in it, our carpenter secretly cut their
+owne cable, leauing nineteene of vs on land without boate or any thing, to
+our great discomfort. In the middest of these miseries reposing our trust
+in the goodnesse of God, which many times before had succoured vs in our
+greatest extremities, we contented our selues with our poore estate, and
+sought meanes to preserue our liues. And because one place was not able to
+sustaine vs, we tooke our leaues one of another, diuiding our selues into
+seuerall companies. The greatest reliefe that we sixe which were with the
+Captaine could finde for the space of nine and twentie dayes was the
+stalkes of purselaine boyled in water, and now and then a pompion, which we
+found in the garden of the olde Indian, who vpon this our second arriual
+with his three sonnes stole from vs, and kept himselfe continually aloft in
+the mountaines. After the ende of nine and twentie dayes we espied a French
+shippe, which afterwards we vnderstood to be of Diepe, called the Luisa,
+whose Captaine was one Monsieur Felix, vnto whom wee made a fire, at sight
+whereof he tooke in his topsayles, bare in with the land, and shewed vs his
+flagge, whereby we iudged him French: so comming along to the Westerne ende
+of the Island there he ankered, we making downe with all speede vnto him.
+At this time the Indian and his three sonnes came downe to our Captaine
+Master Iames Lancaster and went along with him to the shippe. This night he
+went aboord the French man who gaue him good entertainement, and the next
+day fetched eleuen more of vs aboord entreating vs all very courteously.
+This day came another French shippe of the same towne of Diepe which
+remayned there vntil night expecting our other seuen mens comming downe:
+who, albeit we caused certaine pieces of ordinance to be shot off to call
+them, yet came not downe. Whereupon we departed thence being deuided sixe
+into one ship, and sixe into another, and leauing this Iland departed for
+the Northside of Saint Domingo, where we remained vntill April following
+1594, and spent some two moneths in traffike with the inhabitants by
+permission for hides and other marchandises of the Countrey. In this meane
+while there came a shippe of New-hauen to the place where we were, whereby
+we had intelligence of our seuen men which wee left behinde vs at the Isle
+of Mona: which was, that two of them brake their neckes with ventring to
+take foules vpon the cliffes, other three were slaine by the Spaniards,
+which came from Saint Domingo, vpon knowledge giuen by our men which went
+away in the Edward, the other two this man of New-hauen had with him in his
+shippe, which escaped the Spaniards bloodie hands. From this place Captaine
+Lancaster and his Lieutenant Master Edmund Barker, shipped themselues in
+another shippe of Diepe, the Captaine whereof was one Iohn La Noe, which
+was readie first to come away, and leauing the rest of their companie in
+other ships, where they were well intreated, to come after him, on Sunday
+the seuenth of Aprill 1594 they set homewarde, and disbocking through the
+Caijcos from thence arriued safely in Diepe within two and fortie dayes
+after, on the 19 of May, where after two dayes we had stayed to refresh our
+selues, and giuen humble thankes vnto God, and vnto our friendly
+neighbours, we tooke passage for Rie and landed there on Friday the 24 of
+May 1594, hauing spent in this voyage three yeeres, sixe weekes and two
+dayes, which the Portugales performe in halfe the time, chiefely because
+wee lost our fit time and season to set foorth in the beginning of our
+voyage.
+
+We vnderstood in the East Indies by certaine Portugeles which we tooke,
+that they haue lately discouered the coast of China, to the latitude of
+nine and fiftie degrees, finding the sea still open to the Northward:
+giuing great hope of the Northeast or Northwest passage. Witnesse Master
+Iames Lancaster.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine remembrances of an intended voyage to Brasill, and the Riuer of
+  Plate, by the Edward Cotton, a ship of 260 Tunnes of Master Edward Cotton
+  of Southampton, which perished through extreme negligence neare Rio
+  Grande in Guinie, the 17 of July 1583.
+
+Articles of Couenants agreed vpon betweene Edward Cotton Esquier, owner of
+the good ship called the Edward Cotton of Southampton, and of all the
+marchandizes in her laden, of the one part, and William Huddie gentleman,
+Captaine of the said ship, Iohn Hooper his Lieutenant, Iohn Foster Master,
+Hugh Smith Pilot for the whole voyage, and William Cheesman marchant, on
+the other part.
+
+1 To obserue and keepe the dayly order of Common prayer aboord the ships,
+and the companie to be called thereunto, at the least once in the day, to
+be pronounced openly.
+
+2 Item, that they be ready with the first faire winde, to set saile and
+sailes in the voyage, and not to put into any port or harbour, but being
+forcibly constrained by weather, or other apparent and vrgent cause.
+
+3 Item, that they take in, at or about the Isles of Cape Verde, to the
+quantitie of 25 or 30 tuns of salt, to be imployed among other the owners
+marchandize, at Santos, and S. Vincent, to his onely behoofe, and the rest
+of the salt, so much as shall be needed for victuall, and for sauing of the
+hides to be kept aboord, and the same salt to be prouided either at the
+fishermens hands neere the said Isles for trucke of commodities, or els to
+be taken in at the aforesayd Isles, at discretion of the aboue-named.
+
+4 Item, vpon the due performance of this voiage, the owner bindeth himselfe
+by this deede, to yeeld vnto any such of the companie, as shall refuse
+their shares before they depart from the coast of England, 20 markes a
+single share, for the dutie of the whole voiage, making not aboue 75.
+shares single in the whole.
+
+5 Item, the company according as they be appointed by the officers of the
+said ship aboue named, shall at all times be most ready to doe their
+painfull indeuor, not onely aboord, but in all labours at the land,
+according to the direction giuen by the aboue named officers, vpon paine of
+forfeiture of their shares and wages, the same to be diuided amongst the
+company.
+
+6 Item, that the shares be taken at their returne out of al the traine
+oile, and hides of the seales, and of all other commodities gotten by their
+handie labour, and of the salt that shall be vended and other commodities,
+at, or neere the coast of Brasil, to allow after 9 li. the tunne freight,
+whereof one third to goe to the company.
+
+7 Item, that if any man shall practise by any deuise or deuises whatsoeuer,
+to alter the voiage from the true purpose and intent of the owner, viz. to
+make their first port at Santos, and Saint Vincent, and there to revictuall
+and traffike, and from thence to the riuer of Plate to make their voyage by
+the traine, and hide of the seales, with such other commodities as are
+there to be had, according as the owner, with diuers that haue gouernment
+in the said ship, are bound to her highnesse by their deedes obligatorie in
+great summes, that all such practisers, vpon due proofe made, shall lose
+their whole intertainement due by shares or otherwise for this sayde voyage
+to be adiuged by the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, Pilot, and
+marchant, or three of them at least, whereof the Captaine to be one.
+
+8 Item, that the pinnesse be ready at al times to serue the marchants turne
+vpon his demand, to take in wares and commodities, and to cary and recary
+to and from the shore, when, and as oft as neede shall be, and to giue due
+attendance at the marchant and marchants direction during the whole voyage.
+
+9 Item, that no head or chiefe officer being set downe for such an officer
+vnder the hand of the owner, at the going to sea of the said shippe, shall
+or may be displaced from his said place or office, without great cause, and
+his misdemeanor to be adiudged by the Captaine, and his Lieutenant, the
+Master, the Pilot, and the marchant, or by the consent of three of them at
+least.
+
+10 Item, that vpon the returne of the shippe to the coast of England, the
+Maister and Pilot put not into any port or harbour, to the Westward of
+Southampton, but forced by weather, or such like vrgent cause.
+
+William Huddie.
+Iohn Hooper.
+Hugh Smith.
+John Foster.
+William Cheesman.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A direction as well for the Captaine, and other my friends of the shippe,
+  as especially for William Cheesman Marchant, for the voyage to the riuer
+  of Plate.
+
+[Sidenote: The Ile of S. Sebastian.] At your comming to the Isle of Saint
+Sebastian, vpon the coast of Brasill, you shall according to your
+discretions, make sale of such commodities, as you may thinke will be
+thereabout well vented, and likewise to buy commodities without making
+longer stay there then your victuals be prouiding, but rather to bespeake
+commodities against your returne from the riuer of Plate, especially of
+Amber, Sugar, Greene ginger, Cotton wooll, and some quantitie of the
+peppers of the countrey there. Also for Parats and Munkies, and the beast
+called Serrabosa. Also you shall barrell vp of the beefe called Petune, two
+or three barrels, and to lose no good opportunitie, to gather of the Indian
+figges, and the graines of them to preserue drie, in such quantitie as
+conueniently may be done: and touching the making of the traine, and
+preseruing of the hides, I leaue it wholly to the order and the discretion
+of the chiefe of the companie. Also that in any road where the ship shall
+ride vpon the coast of America, triall be made with the dragges, for the
+pearle Oisters, and the same being taken, to be opened and searched for
+pearle in the presence of the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, the
+Pilot, and marchant, or three of them, whereof the Captaine or his
+Lieutenant to be one, and to remaine in the custodie of the Captaine and
+marchant, vnder two lockes, either of them to haue a key to his owne locke,
+and that a true inuentorie be deliuered also to the Master and Pilot of the
+said pearle or other iewels of price gotten in the said voiage, to the
+intent that no partie be defrauded of his due, and that no concealment be
+made of any such thing vpon forfeiture, the partie to lose his share and
+dutie for the voyage that shall so conceale and not reueale it vnto the
+officers aboue named. Also to doe your best indeuour to try for the best
+Ore of golde, siluer, or other rich mettals whatsoeuer. Forget not also to
+bring the kernels and seeds of strange plants with you, the Palmito with
+his fruit inclosed in him. Serue God, keepe good watch, and stand alwayes
+vpon your garde.
+
+Edward Cotton.
+
+
+These things being thus ordered, and the ship of the burden of 260 tunnes,
+with 83 men of all sortes furnished, and fully appointed for the voyage,
+began to set saile from Hurst Castle vpon Friday the 20 of May, Anno 1583,
+and the 17 day of Iuly ensuing fell with the coast of Guinie, to take in
+fresh water, where, through meere dissolute negligence, she perished vpon a
+sand, with the most part of the men in her, as appeareth by the confession
+of one that escaped, the substance and tenor whereof is this.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The confession of William Bends Masters Mate in the Edward Cotton, the 21
+  of October, Ann. 1584.
+
+He sayth, that the 17 day of Iuly, Anno 1583. hauing some lacke of fresh
+water, they put roome vpon the coast of Guinie, where they were set vpon a
+sand about 8 leagues from the shore, and this Examinate, with 29 more, got
+into the pinnesse, who arriued in an Island, being desolate of people, and
+fiue miles in compasse, where they rested 18 dayes through force of
+weather, hauing nought to eate but grasse. [Sidenote: Rio Grande.] The rest
+of the company the ship being splitted in two and in quarters, got them
+into one of the after quarters, and by the helpe of raftes came also a
+shore into another Island neere to Rio Grande, where they all died as he
+supposeth.
+
+The other 30 in the pinnesse, at the end of 18 dayes, departed that Island,
+and came to Saint Domingo, where comming on shore, they were taken of the
+Moores, and stripped naked. And they buried one Coxe [Marginal note: One
+Coxe an old English man buried aliue by the Moores of Rio Grande in
+Guinea.] an olde man aliue, notwithstanding his pitifull lamentation and
+skrikings: the rest hauing Rice and water allowed them, liued there a
+certaine time. This Examinate was at last sold to a Portugall, with whom he
+dwelt the space of a quarter of a yere, and in the end, a Portugall Carauel
+comming, thither, his master laded the same with Negroes, and he obtained
+leaue of his master to goe in the same Carauell, and by that meanes arriued
+at Lisbone, and from thence came into England the 17 of October, 1584,
+leauing behinde him of his companie aliue, Richard Hacker, Iohn Baker, Iohn
+Mathew, and a boy, with two others which were gone beyond Saint Domingo:
+all which, as he saith, were so sicke and diseased, that he iudged them to
+be long before this time dead.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Letters patents or priuiledges granted by her Maiestie to certaine
+  Noble men and Marchants of London, for a trade to Barbarie, in the yeere
+  1585.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France, and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. to the Treasurer & Barons of our Eschequer, and
+to al Maiors, shirifs, constables, customers, collectors of our customes
+and subsidies, controllers, searchers, and keepers of our hauens and
+creekes, ports and passages, within this our realme of England and the
+dominions of the same and to al our officers, ministers and subiects, and
+to all other whosoeuer to whom it shall or may appertaine, and to euery of
+them greeting. Whereas it is made euidently and apparently knowen vnto vs,
+that of late yeeres our right trustie and right welbeloued councellors,
+Ambrose Erle of Warwike, and Robert Erle of Leicester, and also our louing
+and naturall subiects, Thomas Starkie of our citie of London Alderman,
+Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes, Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur
+Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur
+Dawbeney, William Sherington, Thomas Bramlie, Anthony Garrard, Robert How,
+Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon
+Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henrie Farrington,
+Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton,
+Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert Washborne, Reinold Guy, Thomas
+Hitchcocke, George Lydiat, Iohn Cartwright, Henry Paiton, Iohn Boldroe,
+Robert Bowyer, Anthonie Dassell, Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas
+Dod, all of London, Marchants now trading into the Countrey of Barbary, in
+the parts of Africa, vnder the gouernement of Muly Hammet Sheriffe, Emperor
+of Morocco, and king of Fesse and Sus, haue sustained great and grieuous
+losses, and are like to sustaine greater if it should not be preuented: In
+tender consideration whereof, and for that diuers Marchandize of the same
+Countries are very necessary and conuenient for the vse and defence of this
+our Realme of England, and for diuers other causes vs specially mouing,
+minding the reliefe and benefit of our said subiects, and the quiet
+trafique and good gouernment to be had, and vsed among them in their said
+trade, of our speciall grace, certaine knowledge, and meere motion haue
+giuen and granted, and by those presents for vs, our heires and successors,
+doe giue and grant vnto the saide Earles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas
+Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, Arthur Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon,
+Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbenie, William Sherrington,
+Thomas Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward
+Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile,
+Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henry Farrington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter
+Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afild,
+Robert Washborne, Rainold Guie, Thomas Hitchcocke, George Lidiate, Iohn
+Cartwright, Henry Payton, Iohn Baldroe, Robert Bowyer, Anthony Dassell,
+Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas Dod, that they and euery of them by
+themselues or by their factors or seruants, and none others, shall and may,
+for, and during the space of 12. yeeres, haue and enioy the whole freedome
+and libertie in the saide trafique or trade, vnto or from the said countrey
+of Barbary, or to or from any part thereof, for the buying and selling of
+all maner of wares and marchandizes whatsoeuer, that now or accustomably
+heretofore haue bene brought or transported, from, or to the said country
+of Barbary, or from or to any of the cities, townes, places, ports, roades,
+hauens, harbors, or creeks of the said country of Barbary, any law,
+statute, graunt, matter, customes or priuileges, to the contrary in any
+wise notwithstanding.
+
+And for the better establishing, ordering and gouerning of the said Erles
+of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, &c. abouesaid, their factors,
+seruants and assignes in the trade aforesaid, we for vs, our heires and
+successors, doe by these presents giue and graunt full licence to the saide
+Thomas Starke, Ierard Gore the elder, and the rest aforesaide, and euery of
+them from time to time, during the said terme of twelue yeeres, at their
+pleasures to assemble and meete together in any place or places conuenient
+within our citie of London, or elsewhere, to consult of, and for the said
+trade, and with the consent of the said Erie of Leicester, to make and
+establish good and necessary orders and ordinances for and touching the
+same, and al such orders and ordinances so made, to put in vse and execute,
+and them or any of them with the consent of the said Erle of Leicester, to
+alter, change and make voyde, and if need be, to make new, at any time
+during the saide terme, they or the most part of them then liuing and
+trading, shall finde conuenient.
+
+Prouided alwayes, that the ordinances or any of them bee not contrary or
+repugnant to the lawes, statutes or customes of this our Realme of England.
+And to the intent that they onely to whom the said libertie of trafique is
+graunted by these our Letters patents, and none other our Subiects
+whatsoeuer, without their special consent and licence before had, should
+during the said terme haue trade or trafique for any maner of Marchandizes,
+to, or from the said countrey of Barbary, or to, or from any Citie, town,
+place, port, harbor or creeke within the said countrey of Barbary, to, or
+out of our said Realmes and dominions, wee doe by these presents straightly
+charge, commaund, and prohibite all and euery our Subiects whatsoeuer,
+other then only the said Erles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie,
+and the rest abouesaid, and euery of them by themselues, or by their
+Factors or seruants during the saide terme, to trade or trafique, for or
+with any marchandize, to, or from the saide Countrey of Barbary, or to, or
+from any the dominions of the same, as they tender our fauour, and will
+auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his and
+their bodies, at our will and pleasure, and of forfeiting all the
+marchandizes, or the full value thereof, wherewith they or any of them
+during the saide terme, shall trade or trafique to or from the said
+countrey of Barbary, or to, or from the dominions of the same, contrary to
+this our priuilege and prohibition, vnlesse it be by and with the expresse
+licence, consent, and agreement of the saide Erles of Warwike and
+Leicester, Thomas Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes,
+Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur Atie Gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard
+Straper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbnie, William Sherington, Thomas
+Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden,
+Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer
+Stile, William Bond, Henry Farington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams,
+William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert
+Washborne, Rainold Guy, Thomas Hitchcock, George Lidiate, &c. or by, and
+and with the expresse licence and consent of the more part of them then
+liuning and trading, first had and obtained, so alwayes, that the sayd
+Earle of Leicester be one, if hee bee liuing.
+
+And we further for vs, our heires and successors of our speciall grace,
+meere motion and certaine knowledge, do graunt to the said Erles of Warwike
+and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, and the rest abouesaid, and to euery of
+them, that nothing shall be done, to be of force or validitie touching the
+said trade or trafique, or the exercise thereof, without or against the
+consent of the saide Erles, Thomas Starkie, (and the others before named)
+during the time of these our Letters patents for 12. yeeres as aforesaid.
+
+And for that the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them
+aforesaid should not be preuented or interrupted in this their said trade,
+we do by these presents for vs, our heires and successours, straightly
+prohibite and forbid all maner of person or persons, as well strangers of
+what nation or countrey soeuer, as our owne Subiects, other then onely the
+said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them as aforesaid, that they
+nor any of them from hencefoorth during the said terme of 12. yeeres, do or
+shall bring, or cause to be brought into this our Realme of England, or to
+any the dominions thereof, any maner of marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, or
+being made within the said Countrey of Barbary, or within any the dominions
+thereof, vnlesse it be by and with the license of the more part of them
+then liuing, first had and obtained, so alwayes that the sayd Erle of
+Leicester (if hee be liuing) be one, vnder the paine that euery one that
+shall offend or doe against this our present prohibition here last aboue
+mentioned in these presents, shall forfeite and lose all and singular the
+said marchandizes to be landed in any our realmes and dominions, contrary
+to the tenor and true meaning of this our prohibition in that behalfe
+prouided: the one moitie of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer
+mentioned or specified in these our present Letters patents, shalbe to vs,
+our heires and successors: And the other moity of al and euery the said
+forfaitures, we doe by these presents of our certaine knowledge and meere
+motion clearely and wholy for vs, our heires and successors giue and graunt
+vnto the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. And these our Letters patents,
+vpon the onely sight thereof, without any further warrant, shal bee
+sufficient authoritie to our Treasurer of England for the time being, to
+our Barons of the Exchequer, and to all other our officers that shall haue
+to deale in this behalfe, to make full allowance vnto the said Erles,
+Thomas Starkie, &c. their deputies or assignes of the one moitie of all and
+singular the goods, marchandizes and things whatsoever mentioned in these
+our present Letters patents, to be forfaited at any time or times during
+the said terme of twelue yeres: which said allowance we doe straightly
+charge and commaund from time to time to be made to the sayd Erles, Thomas
+Starkie, &c. and to euery of them accordingly, without any maner of delay
+or deniall or any of our officers whatsoever, as they tender our fauour and
+the furtherance of our good pleasure. And wee doe straightly charge and
+commaund, and by these presents prohibite all and singular Customers and
+Collectors of our customes and subsidies, and comptrollers, of the same, of
+and within our Citie and port of London, and all other portes, creekes, and
+places within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, that they ne
+any of them take or perceiue, or cause, or suffer to be taken, receiued, or
+perceiued for vs and in our name, or to our vse, or to the vses of our
+heires or successors of any person or persons, any sum or summes of money,
+or other things whatsoeuer during the said terme of 12. yeeres, for, and in
+the name and liew or place of any custome, subsidy and other thing or
+duties to vs, our heires or successors due or to be due for the customes
+and subsidies of any marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, being made or comming
+out of the said countrey of Barbary, or out of the dominions thereof, nor
+make, cause, nor suffer to be made any entrie into our or their books of
+customs and subsidies, nor make any agreement for the subsidies and
+customs, of, and for any the said marchants, sauing onely with, and in the
+name of the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or the most part of them, as
+they and euery of them will answers at their vttermost perils to the
+contrary. And for the better and more sure obseruation of this our graunt,
+wee will, and grant for vs, our heires and successors by these presents,
+that the Treasurer and barons of our Exchequer for the time being, by force
+of this our graunt or enrolment thereof in the said court at al and euery
+time and times during the said terme of 12 yeeres, at and vpon request made
+vnto them by the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or by the atturneis,
+factors, deputies or assignes of them, or the most part of them then liuing
+and trading, shall and may make and direct vnder the seale of the said
+Exchequer, one or more sufficient writ or writs, close or patents, vnto
+euery or any of our said customers, collectors or controllers of our heires
+and successors in all and euery, or to any port or ports, creeke, hauens,
+or other places within this our realme of England, as the Erles, Thomas
+Starkie, &c. or any the atturneis, factors, deputies or assignes of them or
+the most part of them then liuing and trading, shall at any time require,
+commaunding and straightly charging them and euery of them, that they nor
+any of them at any time or times during the said term of 12. yeeres, make
+any entrie of any wares or marchandizes whatsoeuer, growing, being made or
+comming out or from the said countrey of Barbary, or the dominions thereof,
+nor receiue or take any custome, subsidie or other entrie, or make any
+agreement for the same, other then with or in the name of the said Erles,
+Thomas Starkie, &c, the factor or factors, deputies or assignes of them or
+the most part of them then liuing and trading, according to this our
+graunt, and the true meaning thereof, and according to our saide will and
+pleasure before in these presents declared. In witnesse whereof we haue
+caused these our Letters to be made patents. Witnesse our selfe at
+Westminster the 5. day of Iuly in the 27. yeere of our reigne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Ambassage of Master Henry Roberts, one of the sworne Esquires of her
+  Maiesties person, from her highnesse to Mully Hamet Emperour of Morocco
+  and the King of Fesse and Sus, in the yeere 1585: who remained there as
+  Liger for the space of 3. yeeres. Written briefly by himselfe.
+
+Vpon an incorporation granted to the Company of Barbary Marchants resident
+in London, I Henry Roberts one of her Maiesties sworne Esquires of her
+person, was appointed her highnesse messenger, and Agent vnto the aforesaid
+Mully Hamet Emperor of Marocco, king of Fesse, and Sus. And after I had
+receiued my Commission, instructions, and her Maiesties letters, I departed
+from London the 14. of August in the yeere 1585. in a tall ship called the
+Ascension, in the company of the Minion and Hopewell, and we all arriued in
+safetie at Azafi a port of Barbary, the 14. of September next following.
+The Alcaide of the towne (being the kings officer there, and as it were
+Maior of the place) recalled mee with all humanitie and honour, according
+to the custome of the Countrey, lodging me in the chiefest house of the
+towne, from whence I dispatched a messenger (which in their language they
+call a Trottero) to aduertise the Emperour of my arriuall: who immediately
+gaue order, and sent certaine souldiers for my guard and conduct, and
+horses for my selfe, and mules for mine owne and my companies carriages.
+Thus being accompanied with M. Richard Euans, Edward Salcot, and other
+English Marchants resident there in the Countrey, with my traine of Moores
+and carriages, I came at length to the riuer of Tensist, which is within
+foure miles of Marocco: and there by the water side I pitched my tents
+vnder the Oliue trees: where I met with all the English Marchants by
+themselues, and the French and Flemish, and diuers other Christians, which
+attended my comming. And after we had dined, and spent out the heat of the
+day, about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we all set forward toward
+the Citie of Marocco, where we arriued the said day, being the 14. of
+September, and I was lodged by the Emperours appointment in a faire house
+in the Iudaria or Iurie, which is the place where the Iewes haue their
+abode, and is the fairest place, and quietest lodging in all the Citie.
+
+After I had reposed my selfe 3 dayes, I had accesse to the kings presence,
+delinered my message and her Maiesties letters, and was receiued with all
+humanitie, and had fauourable audience from time to time for three yeeres:
+during which space I abode there in his Court, as her Maiesties Agent and
+Ligier: and whensoeuer I had occasion of businesse, I was admitted either
+to his Maiestie himselfe, or to his vice Roy, whose name was Alcayde Breme
+Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the chiefest about his
+Maiestie. The particulers of my seruice, for diuers good and reasonable
+causes, I forbeare here to put downe in writing.
+
+After leaue obtained, and an honourable reward bestowed by the Emperour
+vpon me, I departed from his Court at Marocco the 18. of August 1588.
+toward a garden of his, which is called Shersbonare, where he promised mee
+I should stay but one day for his letters: howbeit, vpon some occasion I
+was stayed vntil the 14. of September at the kings charges, with 40. or 50.
+shot attending vpon me for my guard and safetie.
+
+From thence at length I was conducted with all things necessary to the port
+of Santa Cruz, being sixe dayes iourney from Marocco, and the place where
+our shippes do commonly take in their lading, where I arriued the 21. of
+the same moneth. In this port I stayed 43. dayes, and at length the second
+of Nouember I embarqued my selfe, and one Marshok Reiz a Captaine and a
+Gentleman, which the Emperour sent with mee vpon an Ambassage to her
+Maiestie: and after much torment and foule weather at Sea, yet New-yeres
+day I came on land at S. Iues in Cornwall, from whence passing by land both
+together vp towards London, we were met without the Citie with the chiefest
+marchants of the Barbary Company, well mounted all on horsebacke, to the
+number of 40. or 50. horse, and so the Ambassadour and myselfe being both
+in Coche, entred the citie by torchlight, on Sunday at night the 12. of
+Ianuary 1589.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Este es vn traslado bien y fielmente sacado da vna carta real del Rey Muley
+  Hamet de Fes y Emperador de Marruecos, cuyo tenor es este, que Segue.
+
+Con el nombre de Dios piadoso y misericordioso, &c. El sieruo de Dios
+soberano, el conquistador per su causa, el successor ensalçado por Dios,
+Emperador de los Moros, hijo del Emperador de los Moros, Iariffe, Haceni,
+el que perpetue su honora, y ensalçe su estado. Se pone este nuestro real
+mandado en manos de los criados de neustras altas puertas los mercadores
+Yngleses; para que por el sepan todos los que la presente vieren, come
+nuestro alto Conseio les anpara con el fauor de Dios de todo aquello, que
+les enpeciere y dannare en qualquiera manera, que fueren offendidos, y en
+qualquiera viaie, que fueren, ninguno les captinarà en estos nuestros
+reynos, y puertos, y lugares, que a nos pertenescen: y que les cubre el
+anporo de nuestro podor de qualquiera fatiga; y ningun los impida commano
+de enemistad, ni se darà causa, de que se agrauien en qualquiera manera con
+el fauor de Dios y de sua comparo. Y mandamos à los Alcaydes de los
+nuestros puertos y fortalezas, y à los que en estos nuestros reynos tienen
+cargo, y à toda la gente commun, que no les alleguen en ninguna manera, con
+orden, de que sean offendidos en ninguna manera; y esto serà
+necessariamente: Que es escrita en los medios dias de Rabel, segundo anno
+de nueue çientos, y nouenta y seys.
+
+Concorda el dia d'esta cara con veynte dias de Março del anno de mil y
+quiniento y ochenta y siete, lo qual yo Abdel Rahman el Catan, interprete
+per su Magestad saquè, y Romançe de verbo ad verbum, como en el se
+contiene, y en Fee dello firmo de my nombre, fecho vt supra.
+
+Abdel Rahman el Catan.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+This is a copy well and truely translated of an edict of Muley Hamet king
+  of Fez and Emperour of Marocco, whose tenor is as followeth: To wit, that
+  no Englishmen should be molested or made slaues in any part of his
+  Dominions, obtained by the aforesaid M. Henry Roberts.
+
+In the name of the pitifull and the mercifull God, &c. The seruant of the
+supreme God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor aduanced by God, the
+Emperour of the Moores, the sonne of the Emperour of the Moores, the
+Iariffe, the Haçeny, whose honour God long increase and aduance his estate.
+This our princely commandement is deliuered into the hands of the English
+marchants, which remaine in the protection of our stately palaces: to the
+ende that all men which shall see this present writing, may vnderstand that
+our princely counsaile wil defend them by the fauor of God, from any thing
+that may impeach or hurt them in what sort soeuer they shalbe wronged: and
+that, which way soeuer they shall trauaile, no man shall take them captiues
+in these our kingdomes, ports, and places which belong vnto vs, which also
+may protect and defend them by our authoritie from any molestation
+whatsoeuer: and that no man shall hinder them by laying violent hand vpon
+them, and shall not giue occasion that they may be grieued in any sort by
+the fauour and assistance of God. And we charge and command our officers of
+our hauens and fortresses, and all such as beare any authority in these our
+dominions, and likewise all the common people, that in no wise they do
+molest them, in such sort that they be no way offended or wronged. And this
+our commandement shall remaine inuiolable, being registred in the middest
+of the moneth of Rabel in the yeere 996.
+
+The date of this letter agreeth with the 20. of March 1587. which I Abdel
+Rahman el Catan, interpretour for his Maiestie, haue translated and turned
+out of the Arabian into Spanish word for word as is conteined therein: and
+in witnesse thereof haue subscribed my name as aforesaid.
+
+Abdel Rahman el Catan.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+En nombre de Dios el piadoso piadador.
+
+Oracion de Dios sobre nuestro Sennor y Propheta Mahumet, y los allegados à
+el.
+
+[Sidenote: A letter of Mully Hamet to the Earle of Leicester.] El sieruo de
+Dios, y muy guerrero, y ensalsado por la graçia de Dios, Myra Momanyn, hijo
+de Myra Momanyn, nieto de Myra Momanyn, el Iarif, el Hazeny, que Dios
+sustenga sus reynos, y enhalse sus mandados, para el Sennor muy affamado y
+muy illustre, muy estimado, el Conde de Leycester, despues de dar las
+loores deuidas à Dios, y las oraçiones, y saludes deuidas à le propheta
+Mahumet. Seruirà esta por os hazer saber que llegò a qui à nuestra real
+Corte vuestra carta, y entendimos lo que en ella se contiene. Y vuestro
+Ambaxador, que aqui esti en nuestra corte me dio à entender la causa de la
+tardança de los rehenes hasta agora: el qual descuento reçebimos, y nos
+damos por satisfechos. Y quanta à lo que à nos escriueys por causa de Iuan
+Herman, y lo mesmo que nos ha dicho el Ambaxador sobre el, antes que
+llegâsse vuestra carta por la quexa del ambaxador, que se auia quexado del,
+ya auiamos mandado prender lo, y assi que da aora preso, y quedera, hasta
+que se le haga la iusticia que mas se le ha de hazer. Y con tanto nuestro
+Sennor os tenga en su guardia. Hecha en nuestra corte real en Marruecos,
+que Dios sostenga, et 28. dias del mes de Remodan anno 996.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+In the Name of the mercifull and pitifull God.
+
+The blessing of God light vpon our Lord and prophet Mahumet, and those that
+are obedient vnto him.
+
+The seruant of God both mightie in warre and mightily exalted by the grace
+of God Myra Momanyn, the son of Myra Momanyn, the Iarif, the Hazeni, whose
+kingdoms God maintaine and aduance his authoritie: Vnto the right famous,
+right noble, and right highly esteemed Erle of Leicester, after due praises
+giuen vnto God, and due blessings and salutations rendered vnto the prophet
+Mahumet. These are to giue you to vnderstand, that your letters arriued
+here in our royal Court, and we wel perceiue the contents thereof. And your
+Ambassador which remaineth here in our Court told me the cause of the
+slownesse of the gages or pledges vntil this time: which reckoning we
+accept of, and holde our selues as satisfied. And as touching the matter
+wherof you write vnto vs concerning Iohn Herman, and the selfe same
+complaint which your Ambassador hath made of him, before the comming of
+your letter, we had already commaunded him to be taken vpon the complaint
+which your Ambassadour had made of him, whereupon he still remaineth in
+hold, and shall so continue vntil further iustice be done vpon him
+according to his desert. And so our Lord keepe you in his safeguard.
+Written at our royall court in Marocco, which God maintaine, the 28. day of
+the moneth Remodan, Anno 996. [Marginal note: Which is with vs 1587.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Queenes Maiesties letters to the Emperour of Marocco.
+
+[Sidenote: The Queenes letters to the Emperour.] Muy alto, y muy poderoso
+Sennor,
+
+Auiendo entendido de parte de nuestro Agente la mucha aficion, y volontad,
+que nos teneys, y quanta honta, y fauor le hazeys por amor nuestro, para
+dar nos tanto mayor testimonio de vuestra amistad, hemos recebido de lo vno
+y de le otro muy grande contento, y satisfacion; y assy no podemos dexar de
+agradesceroslo, como mereceys. Vuestras cartas hemos tambien recibido, y
+con ellas holgadonos infinitamente, por venir de parte de vn Principe, à
+quien tenemos tanta obligacion. Nuestro Agente nos ha escripto sobre
+ciertas cosas, que desseays ser os embiadas de aqui: Y, aunque queriamos
+poder os en ello puntualmente conplazer, como pidiz, ha succedido, que las
+guerras, en que stamos al presente occupadas, no nos lo consienten del
+todo: Hemos però mandado que se os satisfaga en parte, y conforme à lo que
+por agora la necessitad nos permite, como mas particularmente os lo
+declararà nuestro Agente: esperando, que lo reciberreys en buena parte y
+conforme al animo, con que os lo concedemos. Y porque nos ha sido referido,
+que aueys prometido de proceder contra vn Iuan Herman vassallo nuestro, (el
+qual nos ha grauemente offendido) de la manera, que os lo demandaremos,
+auemos dado orden à nuestro dicho Agente de deziros mas parcularmente lo
+que desseamos ser hecho a cerca deste negocio, rogando os, que lo mandeys
+assi complir: y que seays seruido de fauorescer siempre al dicho Agente, y
+tener lo en buen credito, como hasta agora aueys hecho, sin permiter, que
+nadie os haga mudar de parecer a cerca de las calumnias, que le podran
+leuantar, ny dudar, que no complamos muy por entero todo, lo que de nuestra
+parte os prometiere. Nuestro Sennor guarde vostra muy alta y muy poderosa
+persona: Hecha en nuestra Corte Real de Grenewich a 20. de Iulio 1587.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right high and mightie Prince, Hauing vnderstood from our Agent the great
+affection and good wil which you beare vs, and how great honour and fauor
+you shew him for our sake, to the end to giue vs more ample testimonie of
+your friendship, we haue receiued very great contentment and satisfaction,
+as wel of the one as of the other: and withall we could not omit to
+magnifie you, according to your desert. We haue also receiued your letters,
+and do not a litle reioyce thereof, because they come from a prince vnto
+whom we are so much beholden. Or Agent hath written vnto vs concerning
+certaine things which you desire to bee sent vnto you from hence. And
+albeit we wish that we could particularly satisfie you, as you desire, yet
+it is fallen out, that the warres, wherein at this present we be busied wil
+not suffer vs fully to doe the same: neuerthelesse, wee haue commaunded to
+satisfie you in part, and according as the present necessitie doeth permit
+vs, as our Agent will declare vnto you more particularly, hoping you will
+receiue it in good part, and according to the good will wherewith wee
+graunt the same. [Sidenote: Iohn Herman an English rebel.] And because it
+hath bene signified vnto vs that you haue promised to proceed in iustice
+against one Iohn Herman our subiect, which hath grieuously offended vs, in
+such sort as wee haue sent word vnto you, wee haue giuen order to our said
+Agent, to informe you more particularly in that which we desire to be done
+in this busines, praying you also to command the same to be put in
+execution: and that it would please you alwayes to fauour our said Agent
+and to hold him in good credite, as you haue done hitherto, not suffering
+your selfe to be changed in your opinion, for all the false reports which
+they may raise against him, nor to doubt that wee will not accomplish at
+large all that he shall promise you on our behalfe. Our Lord keepe and
+preserue your right high and mightie person. Written in our royall Court at
+Greenwich the 20. of Iuly 1587.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A Patent granted to certaine Marchants of Exeter, and others of the West
+  parts, and of London, for a trade to the Riuer of Senega and Gambia in
+  Guinea, 1588.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. To our Treasurer and Admirral of England, our
+Treasurer and Barons of our Exchequer, and all and euery our Officers,
+ministers and subiects whatsoeuer, greeting. Whereas our welbeloued
+subiects William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicolas Spicer, and Iohn Doricot
+of our City of Exeter marchants, Iohn Yong of Coliton in our county of
+Deuon marchant, Richard Doderige of Barnstable in our saide County of Deuon
+Marchant, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicolas Turner of our Citie of London
+Marchants, haue bene perswaded and earnestly moued by certaine Portugals
+resident within our Dominions, to vndertake and set forward a voyage to
+certaine places on the coast of Guinea; Videlicit, from the Northermost
+part of the Riuer commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega, and
+from and within that Riuer all along that coast vnto the Southermost part
+of another Riuer commonly called by the name of Gambra, and within that
+Riuer: [Sidenote: A former voyage to Gambra.] which, as we are informed
+they haue already once performed accordingly: And for that we are credibly
+giuen to vnderstand that the further prosecuting of the same voyage, and
+the due and orderly establishing of an orderly trafique and trade of
+marchandize into those Countries, wil not only in time be very beneficial
+to these our Realmes and dominions, but also be a great succour and reliefe
+vnto the present distressed estate of those Portugals, who by our princely
+fauour liue and continue here vnder our protection: And considering that
+the aduenturing and enterprising of a newe trade cannot be a matter of
+small charge and hazard to the aduenturers in the beginning: we haue
+therefore thought it conuenient, that our said louing subiects William
+Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Young, Richard
+Doderige, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, for the better
+incouragement to proceede in their saide aduenture and trade in the said
+Countreis, shal haue the sole vse and exercise thereof for a certaine time.
+In consideration whereof, and for other waightie reasons and
+considerations, vs specially moouing, of our speciall grace, certaine
+knowledge and meere motion, we haue giuen and graunted, and by these
+presents for vs, our heires and successors doe giue and graunt vnto the
+said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn
+Young, Richard Doderide, Anthony Dassell and Nicholas Turner, and to euery
+of them, and to such other our Subiects as they or the most part of them
+shall thinke conuenient to receiue into their Company and society, to be
+the traders with them into the said Contreis, that they and euery of them
+by themselues or by their seruants or Factors and none others, shall and
+may for and during the full space and terme of tenne yeeres next ensuing
+the date of these presents, haue and enioy the free and whole trafique,
+trade and feat of marchandise, to and from the said Northermost part of the
+said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega: and from
+and within that riuer all along the coast of Guinea, vnto the Southermost
+part of the said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Gambra,
+and within that Riuer also. And that they the said William Brayley, Gilbert
+Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony
+Dassel and Nicholas Turner, and euery of them, by themselues or by their
+seruants or Factors, and such as they or the most part of them shall
+receiue into their Company and societie, to be traders with them into the
+sayd Countreis (as is aforesaid) and none others, shall and may, for, and
+during the said space and terme of 10. yeres, haue and enioy the sole and
+whole trafique or trade of marchandize into and from the said places afore
+limitted and described, for the buying and selling, bartering and changing
+of and with any goods, wares, and marchandizes whatsoeuer, to be vented had
+or found, at or within any the cities, townes, or places situated or being
+in the countries, partes and coastes of Guinea before limitted, any law,
+statute, or graunt, matter, custome or priuileges to the contrary in any
+wise notwithstanding. And for the better ordering, establishing, and
+gouerning of the said societie and Company in the said trade and trafique
+of marchandizes, and the quiet, orderly, and lawfull exercise of the same,
+We for vs, our heires, and successors, do by these presents giue and graunt
+full license and authority vnto the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith,
+Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthonie
+Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and to such others as they shall receiue into
+their saide societie and company to be traders into the said countreis, as
+is aforesaid, and to euery of them, that they or the most part of them
+shall and may at all conuenient times at their pleasures, assemble and
+meete together in any place or places conuenient, aswell within our citie
+of Exeter, as elsewhere within this our Realme of England, or other our
+dominions, during the said terme of ten yeere, to consult of, for, and
+concerning the saide trade and trafique of marchandize, and from time to
+time to make, ordaine, and stablish good, necessary, and reasonable orders,
+constitutions, and ordinances, for, and touching the same trade. And al
+such orders, constitutions, and ordinances so to be made, to put in vse and
+execute, and them, or any of them, to alter, change, and make voyd, and, if
+neede be, to make new, as at any time, during the said terme of ten yeeres,
+to them, or the most part of them then trading, as is aforesaide, shall be
+thought necessary and conuenient. Vnto all and euery which said orders,
+constitutions, and ordinances, they, and euery of them, and all other
+persons which shall hereafter be receiued into the saide societie and
+Company, shall submit themselues, and shall well and duely obserue,
+performe, and obey the same, so long as they shall stand in force, or else
+shall pay and incurre such forfeitures, paines, and penalties, for the
+breach thereof, and in such maner and forme, and to such vses and intents,
+as by the saide orders, constitutions, and ordinances shall be assessed,
+limitted and appointed. So alwayes, as the same orders, constitutions and
+ordinances be not repugnant or contrary to the lawes, statutes, and
+customes of this Realme of England, nor any penaltie to exceede the
+reasonable forme of other penalties, assessed by the Company of our
+Marchants, named Aduenturers. And to the intent that they onely, to whom
+the said power and libertie of trafique and trade of marchandize is
+graunted by these our letters patent aforesaid, and none others whatsoeuer,
+without their speciall consent and license before had, shall, during the
+said terme of ten yeeres, vse, or haue trade or trafique, with or for any
+maner of goods or marchandizes, to and from the saide coastes or parts of
+Guinea afore limited: Wee doe by these presents, by our royall and supreme
+authoritie, straightly charge and commaund, that no person or persons
+whatsoeuer, by themselues, or by their factors, or seruants, during the
+said terme of 10. yeres, shall in any wise trade or trafique, for or with
+any goods or marchandizes, to or from the said coasts and parts of Guinea
+afore limitted, other then the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith,
+Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony
+Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such as from time to time, they, or the
+most part of them, shall receiue into their societie and company, to be
+traders with them, as is aforesaid, as they tender our fauour, and will
+auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his or their
+bodies, at our will and pleasure, and to lose and forfeit the ship or
+shippes, and all the goods, wares, and marchandizes, wherewith they, or any
+of them, shal, during the said terme of 10. yeres, trade, or trafique to or
+from the said Countries, or any part thereof, according to the limitation
+aboue mentioned, contrary to our expresse prohibition and restraint, in
+that behalfe. And further, we do by these presents giue and graunt full
+power and authoritie to the said William Braily, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas
+Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and
+Nicholas Turner, and to such other persons, as they shal receiue into their
+society and company, to be traders with them, as is aforesaid, and the most
+part of them, for the time being: that they, and euery of them, by
+themselues, their factors, deputies, or assignes, shall and may, from time
+to time, during the said terme of 10. yeres, attach, arrest, take, and
+sease all, and all maner of ship, and ships, goods, wares, and marchandizes
+whatsoeuer, which shall be brought from, or caried to the said coasts and
+parts of Guinea afore limited, contrary to our will and pleasure, and the
+true meaning of the same, declared and expressed in these our letters
+patents. Of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer, the one third
+part shall be vnto vs, our heires, and successors, and another thirde part
+thereof we giue and graunt by these presents, for and towards the reliefe
+of the saide Portugals continuing here vnder our protection, as is
+aforesaid. And the other third part of al the same forfaitures, we do by
+these presents, of our certaine knowledge and meere motion, for vs, our
+heires and successors, giue and grant cleerely and wholy vnto the said
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, and such other
+persons, as they shall receiue into their societie, and company, as is
+aforesaid. And these our letters patents, or the inrolment or
+exemplification of the same, without any further or other warrant, shall
+from time to time, during the said tenne yeeres, be a sufficient warrant
+and authoritie to our Treasurer of England, for the time being, and to the
+barons of our Exchequer, and to all other our officers and ministers
+whatsoeuer, to whom it shall or may appertaine, to allow, deliuer, and pay
+one thirde part of all the said forfeitures, to the vse of the said
+Portugals, and one other thirde part of the same forfeitures, to the saide
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such other
+persons, as they shall receiue into their societie and Company, to be
+traders with them, as aforesaide, to their owne proper vse and behoofe:
+which said allowances and paiments thereof, our will and pleasure is, and
+we do straightly charge and commaund, to bee from time to time duely made
+and performed accordingly, without any delay or denial of any our officers
+aforesaid, or any other our officers or ministers whatsoeuer. And we do
+straightly charge and command, and by these presents probibite all and
+singular our customers, collectors, and farmers of our Customes and
+subsidies, and controllers of the same, of and within our ports of the
+citie of London, and the Citie of Exeter, and all other ports, creekes, and
+places, within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, and all other
+our officers and ministers whatsoeuer, which haue or shall haue any dealing
+or intermedling, touching our said Customes and subsidies, that they, ne
+any of them by themselues, their clearks, deputies, or substitutes, or any
+of them take or receiue, or in any wise cause or suffer to be taken or
+receiued for vs, or in our name, or to our vse, or for, or in the names or
+to the vses of our heires or successors, or any person, or persons, any
+summe or summes of money, or other things whatsoeuer, during the saide
+terme of ten yeeres, for, or in the name, lieu, or place of any Custome,
+subsidie, or other thing or duetie, to vs, our heires, or successors, due,
+or to be due, for the Customes or subsidies of any such goods, wares, or
+marchandizes, to be transported, caried, or brought to or from the
+priuileged places, before in these presents mentioned, or any of them: nor
+make, nor cause to be made any entry into, or of the bookes of subsidies or
+customes, nor make any agreement for the Customes or subsidies, of, or for
+any goods, wares or merchandizes, to bee sent to, or returned from any the
+priuleged places, before in these presents mentioned, sauing onely with,
+and in the name, and by the consent of the saide William Brayley, Gilbert
+Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Antonie
+Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, or of some of them, or of such as they or the
+most part of them shall receiue into their societie and Company, as
+aforesaid. Prouided alwaies, that if at any time hereafter, we our selves,
+by our writing signed with our proper hand, or any sixe or more of our
+priuie Counsell, for the time being, shall by our direction, and by writing
+signed and subscribed with their hands, signifie and notifie to the said
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, or to any of them,
+or to any other, whom they or the most part of them shal receiue into their
+Companie and society, as is aforesaid, or otherwise to our officers in our
+ports of Exeter, or Plimouth, by them to be notified to such as shall haue
+interest in this speciall priuilege, that our will and pleasure is, that
+the said trade and trafique shal cease, and be no longer continued into the
+saide coastes and partes of Guinea before limited: then immediatly from and
+after the ende of sixe moneths next insuing, after such signification and
+notification so to be giuen to any of the said Company and societie, as is
+aforesaid, or otherwise to our Officers in our ports of Exeter or Plimouth,
+by them to be notified to such as shall haue interest in this speciall
+priuilege, these our present letters Patents, and our graunt therein
+contained shall be vtterly voyde, and of none effect, ne validitie in the
+lawe, to all intents and purposes: any thing before mentioned to the
+contrary in any wise notwithstanding. Witnesse our selfe at Westminster,
+the thirde day of May, in the thirtieth yere of our Reign 1588.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voyage to Benin beyond the Countrey of Guinea, set foorth by Master Bird
+  and Master Newton Marchants of London, with a shippe called the Richard
+  of Arundell, and a Pinesse; Written by Iames Welsh, who was chiefe Master
+  of the said voyage, begunne in the yeere 1588.
+
+Vpon the twelft of October wee wayed our ankers at Ratcliffe and went to
+Blackwall. And the next day sayling from thence, by reason of contrary
+winde and weather, wee made it the 25. of October before wee were able to
+reach Plimouth, and there we stayed (to our great expense of victuals) for
+lacke of winde and weather vnto the 14. of December.
+
+On Saturday the said 14. of December we put from thence, and about midnight
+were thwart of the Lizart.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio del oro is in 22. degrees and 47. min.] Thursday the second
+of Ianuary wee had sight of the land neere Rio del oro, God be thanked, and
+there had 22. degrees of latitude, and 47. minutes.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo de las Barbas.] The thirde of Ianuary wee had sight of Cauo
+de las Barbas, and it bare Southeast fiue leagues off.
+
+[Sidenote: Crosiers.] The 4. we had sight of the Crosiers in the morning.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo Verde in 14. degr. 43. m.] Tuesday the 7. day we had sight
+of Cauo verde, and I find this place to be in latitude 14. degrees, and 43.
+minutes, being 4. leagues from the shoare.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo de Monte.] Friday the 17. Cauo de Monte bare off vs North
+Northeast, we sounded and had 50. fathom blacke oase, and at 2. of the
+clocke it bare North Northwest 8. leagues off. [Sidenote: Cauo Mensurado.]
+And Cauo Mensurado bare of vs East and by South, and wee went Northeast
+with the maine: here the current setteth to the East Southeast alongst the
+shoare, and at midnight wee sounded and had 26. fathome blacke oase.
+
+The 18. in the morning we were thwart of a land, much like Cauo verde, and
+it is as I iudge 9. leagues from Cauo Mensurado; it is a hill sadlebacked,
+and there are 4. or 5. one after another: and 7. leagues to the Southward
+of that, we saw a row of hils sadlebacked also, and from Cauo Mensurado are
+many mountaines.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Sestos. Cauo dos Baixos.] The 19. we were thwart Rio de
+Sestos, and the 20. Cauo dos Baixos was North and by West 4. leagues off
+the shoare, [Sidenote: Tabanoo.] and at afternoone there came a boate frome
+the shoare with 3. Negroes, from a place (as they say) called Tabanoo. And
+towards euening we were thwart of an Island, and a great many of small
+Islands or rockes to the Southward, and the currant came out of the
+Souther-boord: we sounded and had 35. fathomes.
+
+[Sidenote: A French ship at Ratire. Crua.] The 21. wee had a flat hill that
+bare North Northeast off vs, and wee were from the shoare 4. leagues, and
+at 2. a clocke in the afternoone we spake with a Frenchman riding neere a
+place called Ratire, and another place hard by called Crua. [Sidenote: A
+current to the Southeastward.] This Frenchman caried a letter from vs to M.
+Newton: wee layd it on hull while wee were writing of our letter; and the
+current set vs to the Southward a good pase alongst the shore South
+Southeast.
+
+The 25. we were in the bight of the Bay that is to the Westward of Capo de
+Tres puntas: the currant did set East Northeast.
+
+The 28. we lay sixe glasses a hull tarying for the pinesse.
+
+[Sidenote: Caou de tres puntas.] The last of Ianuary the middle part of
+Cape de tres puntas was thwart of vs three leagues at seuen of the clocke
+in the morning: and at eight the pinnesse came to an anker: and wee prooued
+that the current setteth to the Eastward: and at sixe at night the
+Vttermost lande bare East and by South 5. leagues, and we went Southwest,
+and Southwest and by South.
+
+Saturday the first of February 1588. we were thwart of a Round foreland,
+which I take to be the Eastermost part of Capo de tres puntas: and within
+the saide Round foreland was a great bay with an Island in the said bay.
+
+[Sidenote: The Castle of Mina.] The second of February wee were thwart of
+the Castle of Mina, and when the thirde glasse of our Looke-out was spent,
+we spied vnder our Larbord-quarter one of their Boates with certaine
+Negroes, and one Portugale in the Boate, wee haue had him to come aboord,
+but he would not. [Sidenote: Two white watch-houses.] And ouer the castle
+upon the hie rockes we did see as it might be two watch-houses, and they
+did shew very white: and we went eastnortheast.
+
+[Sidenote: Monte Redondo.] The 4 in the morning we were thwart a great high
+hill, and vp into the lande were more high ragged hilles, and those I
+reckoned to be but little short of Monte Redondo. Then I reckoned that we
+were 20 leagues Southeastward from the Mina, and at 11 of the clocke I
+sawe two hilles within the land, these hils I take to be 7 leagues from the
+first hils. And to sea-ward of these hilles is a bay, and at the east end
+of the bay another hill, and from the hils the landes lie verie low. We
+went Eastnortheast, and East and by North 22 leagues, and then East along
+the shore.
+
+[Sidenote: Villa longa.] The 6 we were short of Villa longa, and there we
+met with a Portugall Carauell.
+
+The 7 a faire temperate day, and all this day we road before Villa longa.
+
+The 8 at noone we set saile from Villa longa, and ten leagues from thence
+we ankered againe and stayed all that night in ten fadom water.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Lagos.] The ninth we set saile, and all alongst the shore
+were very thicke woodes, and in the afternoone we were thwart a riuer, and
+to the Eastward of the riuer a litle way off was a great high bush-tree as
+though it had no leaues, and at night we ankered with faire and temperate
+weather.
+
+The 10 we set sayle and went East, and East and by South 14 leagues along
+the shoare, which was so full of thicke woods, that in my iudgement a man
+should haue much to doe to passe through them, and towards night we ankered
+in 7 fadome with faire weather.
+
+[Sidenote: Very shallow water.] The 11 we sayled East and by South, and
+three leagues from the shore we had but 5 fadome water, and all the wood
+vpon the land was as euen as if it had beene cut with a paire of gardeners
+sheeres, and in running of two leagues we descerned a high tuft of trees
+vpon the brow of a land, which shewed like a Porpose head, and when wee
+came at it, it was but part of the lande, and a league further we saw a
+head-land very low and full of trees, and a great way from the land we had
+very shallow water, then we lay South into the sea, because of the sands
+for to get into the deepe water, and when we found it deepe, we ankered in
+fiue fadom thwart the riuer of Iaya, in the riuers mouth.
+
+The 12. in the morning we road still in the riuers mouth. This day we sent
+the pinnesse and the boat on land with the marchants, but they came not
+againe vntil the next morning. The shallowest part of this riuer is toward
+the West, where there is but 4 fadom and a halfe, and it is very broad.
+[Sidenote: Rio de Iaya.] The next morning came the boate aboord, and they
+also said it was Rio de Iaya. Here the currant setteth Westward, and the
+Eastermost land is higher then the Westermost Thursday the 13 we set saile,
+and lay South Southeast along the shore, where the trees are wonderfull
+euen, and the East shore is higher then the West shore, and when wee had
+sayled 18 leagues we had sight of a great riuer, then we ankered in three
+fadom and a halfe, and the currant went Westward. [Sidenote: Rio Benin.]
+This riuer is the riuer of Benin, and two leagues from the maine it is very
+shallowe.
+
+[Sidenote: A currant Westward.] The 15 we sent the boat and pinesse into
+the riuer with the marchants, and after that we set saile, because we road
+in shallow water, and went Southsoutheast, and the starboard tacke aboord
+vntill we came to fiue fadom water, where we road with the currant to the
+Westward: then came our boat out of the harbour and went aboord the
+pinnesse. The West part of the land was high browed much like the head of a
+Gurnard, and the Eastermost land was lower, and had on it three tufts of
+trees like stackes of wheate or corne, and the next day in the morning we
+sawe but two of those trees, by reason that we went more to the Eastward.
+And here we road still from the 14 of Februarie vntill the 14 of Aprill,
+with the winde at Southwest.
+
+The 16 of Februarie we rode still in fiue fadom, and the currant ranne
+still to the Westward, the winde at Southwest, and the boat and pinnesse
+came to vs againe out of the riuer, and told vs that there was but ten
+foote water vpon the barre. All that night was drowsie, and yet reasonable
+temperate.
+
+The 17 a close day, the winde at Southwest. Our marchants wayed their goods
+and put them aboord the pinnesse to goe into the riuer, and there came a
+great currant out of the riuer and set to the Westward.
+
+The 18 the marchants went with the boat and pinnesse into the riuer with
+their commodities. This day was close and drowsie, with thunder, raine, and
+lightning.
+
+The 24 a close morning and temperate, and in the afternoone the boat came
+to vs out of the riuer with our marchants.
+
+Twesday the 4 of March, a close soultry hot morning, the currant went to
+the Westward, and much troubled water came out of the riuer.
+
+[Sidenote: Sicknesse among our men.] The 16 our pinnesse came a boord and
+Anthonie Ingram in her, and she brought in her 94 bags of pepper, and 28
+Elephants teeth, and the Master of her and all his company were sicke. This
+was a temperate day and the winde at Southwest.
+
+The 17. 18. and 19 were faire temperate weather and the winde at Southwest.
+This day the pinnesse went into the riuer againe, and carried the Purser
+and the Surgion.
+
+The 25 of the said moneth 1589 we sent the boate into the riuer.
+
+[Sidenote: The death of the Captaine. Pepper and Elephants Teeth.] The 30
+our pinnesse came from Benin, and brought sorowfull newes, that Thomas
+Hemstead was dead and our Captaine also, and she brought with her 159
+Cerons or sackes of pepper and Elephants teeth.
+
+[Sidenote: A good note.] Note that in all the time of our abiding here, in
+the mouth of the riuer of Benin, and in all the coast hereabout it is faire
+temperate weather, when the winde is at Southwest. And when the winde is at
+Northeast and Northerly, then it raineth, with lightning and thunder, and
+is very intemperate weather.
+
+The 13 of Aprill 1589 we set saile homewards in the name of Iesus. In the
+morning we sayled with the winde at Southwest, and lay West and by North,
+but it prooued calme all that night, and the currant Southeast.
+
+The 14 the riuer of Benin was Northeast 7 leagues from the shore, and there
+was little winde and towards night calme.
+
+The l7 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and we had of latitude
+foure degrees and 20 minutes.
+
+The 25 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and here we had three
+degrees and 29 minuts of latitude.
+
+[Sidenote: A deceiptfll currant.] The 8 of May we had sight of the shore,
+which was part of Cauo de Monte, but we did not thinke we had beene so
+farre, but it came so to passe by reason of the currant. In this place M.
+Towrson was in like maner deceiued with the currant.
+
+The 9 we had sight of Cauo de monte.
+
+The 17 a darke drowsie day, this was the first night that I tooke the North
+starre.
+
+The 26 a temperate day with litle winde, and we were in 12 degrees and 13
+minutes of latitude.
+
+The 30 we met a great sea out of the Northwest.
+
+The 6 of Iune we found it as temperate as if we had beene in England, and
+yet we were within the height of the sunne, for it was declined 23 degrees,
+and 26 minuts to the Northward, and we had 15 degrees of latitude.
+
+The 8 faire and temperate as in England, here we met with a counter sea,
+out of the Southborde.
+
+The 15 a faire temperate day, the winde variable, here we had 18 degrees
+and fiftie nine minutes;
+
+[Sidenote: Rockweed or Saragasso all along the sea.] The 12 of Iuly in 30
+degrees of latitude we met with great store of rockweed, which did stick
+together like clusters of grapes, and this continued with vs vntill the 17
+of the said moneth, and then we saw no more, at which 17 day we were in two
+and thirtie degrees sixe and fortie minutes of latitude.
+
+The 25 at sixe of the clocke in the morning, we had sight of the Ile of
+Pike, it bare North and by East from vs, we being 15 leagues off.
+
+The 27 we spake with the poste of London and she told vs good newes of
+England.
+
+The nine and twentieth we had sight of the Island of Cueruo, and the 30 we
+saw the Island of Flores.
+
+The 27 of August in 41 degrees of latitude we saw 9 saile of Britons, and
+three of them followed vs vntill noone, and then gaue vs ouer.
+
+The 30 we had sight of Cape Finisterre.
+
+The eight of September at night wee put into Plimouth sound, and road in
+Causon Bay all night.
+
+The 9 we put into Catwater and there stayed vntill the 28 of September, by
+reason of want of men and sicknesse.
+
+The nine and twentieth we set sayle from Plimouth, and arriued at London
+the second of October 1589.
+
+The commodities that we caried in this voyage were cloth both linnen and
+woollen, yron worke of sundry sorts, Manillios or bracelets of copper,
+glasse beades, and corrall.
+
+The commodities that we brought home were pepper and Elephants teeth, oyle
+of palme, cloth made of Cotton wool very curiously wouen, and cloth made of
+the barke of palme trees. Their monie is pretie white shels, for golde and
+siluer we saw none. [Sidenote: Inamia, a kind of bread in Benin.] They haue
+also great store of cotton growing: their bread is a kind of roots, they
+call it Inamia, and when it is well sodden I would leaue our bread to eat
+of it, it is pleasant in eating, and light of digestion, the roote thereof
+is as bigge as a mans arme. Our men vpon fish-dayes had rather eate the
+rootes with oyle and vineger, then to eate good stockfish. [Sidenote: Wine
+of palm trees.] There are great store of palme trees, out of which they
+gather great store of wine, which wine is white and very pleasant, and we
+should buy two gallons of it for 20 shels. They haue good store of sope,
+and it smelleth like beaten violets. Also many pretie fine mats and baskets
+that they make, and spoones of Elephants teeth very curiously wrought with
+diuers proportions of foules and beasts made vpon them. There is vpon the
+coast wonderfull great lightning and thunder, in so much as I neuer hard
+the like in no Countrey, for it would make the decke or hatches tremble
+vnder our feete, and before we were well acquainted with it, we were
+fearefull, but God be thanked we had no harme. The people are very gentle
+and louing, and they goe naked both men and women vntill they be married,
+and then they goe couered from the middle downe to the knees. [Sidenote:
+Abundance of honey.] They would bring our men earthen pottes of the
+quantitie of two gallons, full of hony and hony combes for 100 shelles.
+They would also bring great store of Oranges and Plantans which is a fruit
+that groweth upon a tree, and is like vnto a Cucumber but very pleasant in
+eating. It hath pleased God of his mercefull goodnesse to give me the
+knowledge how to preserue fresh water with little cost, [Marginal note:
+This preseruatiue is wrought by casting into an hogshead of water an
+handful of bay-salt, as the author told me.] which did serve vs sixe
+moneths at the sea, and when we came into Plimmouth it was much wondered
+at, of the principal men of the towne, who said that there was not sweeter
+water in any spring in Plimmouth. Thus doth God prouide for his creatures,
+vnto whom be praise now and for euermore, Amen.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voiage set forth by M. Iohn Newton, and M. Iohn Bird marchants of
+  London to the kingdome and Citie of Benin in Africa, with a ship called
+  the Richard of Arundell, and a pinnesse, in the yere 1588. briefly set
+  downe in this letter following, written by the chiefe Factor in the
+  voyage to the foresaid Marchants at the time of the ships first arriual
+  at Plimouth.
+
+Worshipful Sirs, the discourse of our whole proceeding in this voyage wil
+aske more time and a person in better health then I am at this present, so
+that I trust you will pardon me, till my comming vp to you: in the meane
+time let this suffice. Whereas we departed in the moneth of December from
+the coast of England with your good ship the Richard of Arundell and the
+pinnesse, we held on our direct course towards our appointed port, and the
+14 day of Februarie following we arriued in the hauen of Benin, where we
+found not water enough to carry the ship ouer the barre, so that we left
+her without in the road, and with the pinnesse and ship boat, into which we
+had put the chiefest of our marchandise, [Sidenote: Goto in Benin.] we went
+vp the riuer to a place called Goto, where we arriued the 20 of February,
+the foresaid Goto being the neerest place that we could come to by water,
+to go for Benin. [Sidenote: The great citie of Benin.] From thence we
+presently sent Negroes to the king, to certifie him of our arriuall, and of
+the cause of our comming thither: who returned to vs againe the 22 day with
+a noble man in their company to bring vs vp to the Citie, and with 200
+Negroes to carrie our commodities: hereupon the 23 day we deliuered our
+marchandize to the Kings Factor, and the 25 day we came to the Citie of
+Benin, where we were well intertained: The sixe and twenty day we went to
+the Court to haue spoken with the king, which (by reason of a solemne feast
+then kept amongst them) we could not doe: but yet we spake with his
+Veadore, or chiefe man, that hath the dealing with the Christians: and we
+conferred with him concerning our trading, who answered vs, that we should
+have all thing to our desire, both in pepper and Elephants teeth.
+
+The first of March, we were admitted to the kings presence, and he made vs
+the like courteous answere for our traffike: the next day we went againe to
+the Court, where the foresaid Veadore shewed vs one basket of greene
+pepper, and another of dry in the stalkes: wee desired to haue it plucked
+from the stalks and made cleane, who answered, that it would aske time, but
+yet it should be done: and that against another yeere it should be in
+better readines, and the reason why we found it so vnprepared was, because
+in this kings time no Christians had euer resorted thither, to lade pepper.
+The next day there were sent vs 12 baskets, and so a litle euery day vntill
+the 9 of March at which time we had made vpon 64 serons of pepper, and 28
+Elephants teeth. In this time of our being at Benin (our natures at this
+first time not so well acquainted with that climate) we fell all of vs into
+the disease of the feuer, whereupon the Captaine sent me downe with those
+goods which we alreadie had receiued, to the rest of our men at Goto: where
+being arriued, I found all the men of our pinnesse sicke also, and by
+reason of their weaknes not able to conuey the pinnesse and goods downe to
+the place where our ship road: but by good hap within two houres after my
+comming to Goto, the boate came vp from the ship, to see how all things
+stood with vs, so that I put the goods into the boat, and went downe
+towards the ship: but by that time I was come aboord, many of our men died:
+namely, Master Benson, the Cooper, the Carpenter, and 3 or 4 more, and my
+selfe was also in such a weake state that I was not able to returne againe
+to Benin. Whereupon I sent vp Samuel Dunne, and the Chirurgian with him to
+our men, that were about to let them blood, if it were thought needfull:
+who at their comming to Benin, found the Captaine and your sonne William
+Bird dead, and Thomas Hempsteede very weake, who also died within two dayes
+after their comming thither. This sorrowfull accident caused them with such
+pepper and teeth, as they could then find, speedily to returne to the ship,
+as by the Cargason will appeare: at their comming away the Veadore tolde
+them, that if they could or would stay any longer time, he would vse all
+possible expedition to bring in more commodities: but the common sicknesse
+so increased and continued amongst vs all, that by the time our men which
+remained were come aboord, we had so many sicke and dead of our companie,
+that we looked all for the same happe, and so thought to loose both our
+ship, life, countrey and all. Very hardly and with much adoe could we get
+vp our ankers, but yet at last by the mercie of God hauing gotten them vp,
+but leauing our pinnesse behind vs, we got to sea, and set saile, which was
+vpon the 13 of Aprill. After which by little and little our men beganne to
+gather vp their crums and to recouer some better strength: and so sailing
+betwixt the Ilands of Cape Verde, and the maine we came to the Islands of
+the Azores vpon the 25 of Iuly, where our men beganne a fresh to grow ill,
+and divers died, among whom Samuel Dun was one, and as many as remained
+liuing were in a hard case: but in the midst of our distresse, it fell so
+well out, by Gods good prouidence, that we met with your ship the Barke
+Burre, on this side the North cape, which did not only keepe vs good
+companie, but also sent vs sixe fresh men aboord, without whose helpe, we
+should surely haue tasted of many inconueniences. But by this good meanes
+we are now at the last arriued in Plimouth, this 9 day of September: and
+for want of better health at this time, I referre the further knowledge of
+more particularities till my comming to London. Yours to commaund Antony
+Ingram.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Benin, set foorth by Master Iohn Newton, and Master
+  Iohn Bird Marchants of London in the yeere 1590 with a ship called the
+  Richard of Arundell of the burthen of one hundreth tunnes, and a small
+  pinnesse, in which voyage Master Iames Welsh was chiefe Maister.
+
+The third of September 1590 we set saile from Ratclife, and the 18 of the
+said moneth we came into Plimouth sound, and the two and twentieth we put
+to sea againe, and at midnight we were off the Lisart, and so passed on our
+voyage vntill the 14 of October, on which day we had sight of Forteuentura
+one of the Canarie Islands, which appeared very ragged as we sailed by it.
+
+The 16 of October, in the latitude of 24 degrees and nine minutes we met
+with a great hollow sea, the like whereof I neuer saw on this coast, and
+this day there came to the ships side a monstrous great fish (I thinke it
+was a Gobarto) which put vp his head to the steepe tubs where the cooke was
+in shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would haue caried away.
+
+The 21 in this latitude of 18 degrees we met with a countersea out of the
+North boord, and the last voyage in this very place we had the countersea
+out of the South, being very calme weather as now it is also.
+
+[Sidenote: A token of a Northerly winde.] The 24 we had sight of Cauo
+Verde, and the 25 we met with a great hollow sea out of the North, which is
+a common signe that the winde will be Northerly, and so it prooued.
+
+The 15 of Nouember we met with three currants out of the West and
+Northwest, one after another, with an houres time betweene each currant.
+This was in the latitude of 6 degrees and 42 minutes.
+
+[Sidenote: Great currants.] The 18 day we met with two other great currants
+out of the Southwest, and the 20 we saw another current out of the
+Northeast, and the 24 we had a great current out of the Southsouthwest, and
+at 6 of the clocke towards night we had 3 currents more.
+
+The 27 we thought that we had gone at the least 2 leagues and a halfe euery
+watch, and it fell out that we sailed but one league euery watch for the
+space of 24 houres, by meanes of a great billow and current that came still
+out of the South.
+
+The 5 of December in setting the watch we cast about and lay East
+Northeast, and Northeast, and here in 5 degrees and a halfe our pinnesse
+lost vs wilfully.
+
+The 7 at the going downe of the Sunne we saw a great blacke spot in the
+Sunne, and the 8. day both at rising and setting we saw the like, which
+spot to our seeming was about the bignesse of a shilling, being in 5
+degrees of latitude, and still there came a great billow of the
+southerboord.
+
+The 14 we sounded and had 15 fadom water and grosse red sand, and 2 leagues
+from the shore the currant set Southeast along the shore with a billow
+still out of the southerboord.
+
+[Sidenote: Two rocks.] The 15 we were thwart a rocke somewhat like the
+Mewstone in England, it was 2 leagues from vs, here we sounded and had 27
+fadom, but the rocke is not aboue a mile from the shore, and a mile farther
+we saw another rocke and betweene them both broken ground; here we sounded
+and had but 20 fadome and blacke sand, and we might see plaine that the
+rockes went not along the shore, but from the land to the seaward, and
+about 5 leagues to the Southwards we sawe a great bay, here we had 4
+degrees and 27 minuts.
+
+[Sidenote: A French ship of Hunfleur.] The 16 we met with a French ship of
+Hunfleur, who robbed our pinnesse, we sent a letter by him, and this night
+we saw another spot in the sunne at his going downe. And towards euening we
+were thwart of a riuer, and right ouer the riuer was a high tuft of trees.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo del las Palmas.] The 17 we ankered in the riuers mouth, and
+then we found the land to be Cauo de las Palmas, and betweene vs and the
+cape was a big ledge of rockes, one league and a halfe into the sea, and
+they bare to the West of the Cape, we saw also an Island off the point of
+the foreland, thus it waxed night that we could perceiue no more of the
+lande, but onely that it trended in like a bay, where there runneth a
+streame as if it were in the riuer of Thames, and this was the change day
+of the Moone.
+
+The 19 a faire temperate day, and the wind South, we went East, and the
+lande a sterne of vs West, and it shewed low by the water side like
+Islands, this was the East of Cauo de las Palmas, and it trended in with a
+great sound, and we went East all night, and in the morning wee were but 3
+or 4 leagues from the shore.
+
+The 20 we were thwart of a riuer railed Rio de los Barbos.
+
+The 21 we went along the shore East, and 3 or 4 leagues to the West of Cauo
+de tres puntas, I find the bay to be set deeper then it is by 4 leagues,
+and at 4 of the clocke the land begun to shewe high, and the first part of
+it full of Palme trees.
+
+The 24 still going by the shore, the land was very low and full of trees by
+the water side, and at 12 of the clocke we ankered thwart of the riuer
+called, Rio de Boilas. Here we sent our boate a shore with the marchants,
+but they durst not put into the riuer because of a great billow that
+continually brake at the entrance vpon the barre.
+
+The 28 we sailed alongst the shore, and ankered at night in seuen fadom
+because a great current would haue put vs backe, which came from the East
+Southeast from Papuas.
+
+[Sidenote: Arda.] The 29 at noone we were thwart of Arda, and there we
+tooke a Carauel but the men were fled on land, then we went aboord her, but
+she had nothing in her but only a litle oyle of Palme trees, and a few
+roots. The next morning, our Captaine and marchants went to meete
+Portugals, that came in a boate to speake with vs, where they communed
+about the buying of the Carauell of our men againe, and the Portugals
+promised that we should haue for the Carauell, certaine bullocks and
+Elephants teeth, and they gaue vs one tooth and one bullocke presently, and
+sayd they would bring vs the rest the next day.
+
+[Sidenote: Ianuarie.] The first of Ianuarie our Captaine went on land to
+speake with the Portugales, but when he saw they did dissemble, he came
+aboord againe, and presently we vnrigged the Carauell, and set her on fire
+before the towne. Then we set saile and went along the coast, where we saw
+a Date tree, the like whereof is not in all that coast vpon the water side,
+also we fell on ground a litle in one place: [Sidenote: Villa longa.] Thus
+we went to Villa longa, and there ankered.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Lagoa.] The third we were as far shot as Rio de Lagoa,
+where our marchants went a shore and vpon the barre they found 3 fadom
+flat, but they went not in because it was late. There is also to the
+Eastward of this riuer a Date tree higher than all the rest of the other
+trees thereabout. Thus we went along the coast, and euery night ankered,
+and al the shore as we went was full of trees and thicke woods.
+
+[Sidenote: The riuer Iaya.] The 6 day in the morning it was very foggy, so
+that we could not see the land, and at three of the clocke in the
+afternoone it cleared vp, and then we found our selues thwart of the riuer
+of Iaya, and when we found the shallow water, we bare into the sea South,
+as we did the voyage before, and came to an ancre in fiue fadom water.
+[Sidenote: The riuer Benin.] The next day we set saile againe, and towards
+noone we were thwart of the riuer of Benin in foure fadom water.
+
+The 10 day our Captaine went on land with the shallop at 2 a clocke in the
+afternoone. All this weeke it was very foggy euery day vntill ten a clocke,
+and all this time hitherto hath beene as temperate as our summer in
+England. This day we went into the road and ankered, and the west point of
+the road bare East northeast off vs, wee riding in foure fadome water.
+
+[Sidenote: Goto.] The 21 a faire temperate day, this day M. Hassald went to
+the towne of Goto, to heare newes of the Captaine.
+
+The 23 came the Carauell, and Samuell in her, and she brought 63 Elephants
+teeth, and three bullocks.
+
+The 28 a faire temperate day, and towards night there fell much raine,
+lightning, and thunder, this day our boate came aboord from Goto.
+
+The 24 of Februarie, we tooke in 298 Cerons or sackes of pepper, and 4
+Elephants teeth, and the winde was at Southeast. And the 26 we put the rest
+of our goods into the Carauell, and M. Hassald went with her to Goto.
+
+The 5 of March the Carauel came againe and brought 21 Cerons of pepper, and
+4 Elephants teeth.
+
+The 9 of Aprill our Carauell came aboord with water for our prouision for
+the sea, and this day also we lost our shallope.
+
+The 17 a drowsie rainie day, and in the afternoone we saw 3 great spoutes
+of raine, two on our larbord side, and one right with the ships head, but
+God be thanked, they came not at vs, and this day we tooke in the last of
+our water for the sea, and the 26 we victualed our Carauell to go with vs
+to the sea.
+
+The 27 we set saile to goe homewarde with the winde at Southwest, and at
+two a clocke in the afternoone, the riuer of Benin was Northeast 8 leagues
+from vs.
+
+The 3 of May we had such a terrible gust with raine, lightning and thunder,
+that it tore and split our fore saile, and also the Carauels foresayle and
+maine-sayle, with the wind at Southeast.
+
+The 12 a faire temperate day, much like our sommer mornings in England,
+being but one degree and a halfe from the line, but at midnight we had a
+cruell gust of raine; and the wind at northeast.
+
+The 24 we were South from Cauo de las Palmas 37 leagues.
+
+The first of Iuly we had sight of the Iland of Braua, and it bare East 7
+leagues off, and this Island is one of the Islands of Cauo Verde.
+
+The 13 of August we spake with the Queenes ships, the Lord Thomas Howard
+being Admirall, and sir Richard Greeneuill Viceadmirall. They kept vs in
+their company vntill the 15 day night, themselues lying a hull, in waight
+for purchase 30 leagues to the Southwest of the Island of Flores.
+
+[Sidenote: We departed in company of a prise.] The 15 we had leaue to
+depart with a fly-boat laden with sugar that came from Sant Thome, which
+was taken by the Queenes ships, whereof my Lord Admirall gaue me great
+charge, not to leaue her vntill she were harbored in England.
+
+The three and twentieth the Northeast part of the Island of Coruo bare of
+vs East and by South sixe leagues off.
+
+The 17 of September we met with a ship of Plimouth that came out of the
+West Indies, but she could tell vs no newes. The next day we had sight of
+another sayle, this day also one of our company named M. Wood died.
+
+The 23 we spake with the Dragon of my Lord of Cumberland, whereof Master
+Iuie was Maister.
+
+The second of October we met with a ship of New-castle which came from
+Newfoundland, and out of her we had 300 couple of Newland fish.
+
+The 6 we had sight of Sillie, and with raine and winde we were forced to
+put into S. Maries sound, where we staied all night, and 4 dayes after.
+
+The 11 we set saile againe, and comming out had three fadom vpon the barre
+at a high water, then we lay out Southeast, through Crow-sand, and shortly
+after we had sight of the lands end, and at ten of the clocke we were
+thwart of the Lysart.
+
+The 13 we were put into Dartmouth, and there we stayd vntill the 12 of
+December. From thence we put out with the winde at West, and the 18 of
+December, God be praised, we ankered at Limehouse in the Thames, where we
+discharged 589 sacks of Pepper, 150 Elephants teeth, and 32 barrels of oile
+of Palme trees.
+
+The commodities that we caried out this second voyage were Broad cloth,
+Kersies, Bayes, Linnen cloth, Yron vnwrought, Bracelets of Copper, Corall,
+Hawks belles, Horsetails, Hats, and such like.
+
+This voyage was more comfortable vnto vs then the first, because we had
+good store of fresh water, and that very sweet: for as yet we haue very
+good water in the shippe which we brought out of the riuer of Benin the
+first day of Aprill 1591. and it is at this day (being the 7 of Iune 1592.)
+to be seene aboord the ship as cleare and as sweet as any fountaine can
+yeeld.
+
+In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues within halfe a degree of the
+equinoctiall line, and there we found it more temperate than where we rode.
+[Marginal note: It is more temperate vnder the equinoctiall, then on the
+coast of Guinie and Benin.] And vnder the line we did kill great store of
+small Dolphines, and many other good fishes, and so did we all the way,
+which was a very great refreshing vnto vs, and the fish neuer forsooke vs
+vntil we were to the Northwards of the Ilands of Azores, and then we could
+see no more fish, but God be thanked wee met with good company of our
+countrey ships which were great comfort vnto vs, being fiue moneths before
+at Sea without any companie. By me Iames Welsh master of the Richard of
+Arundell, in both these voyages to the riuer of Benin.
+
+       *       *       *       *        *
+
+An Aduertisement sent to Philip the second king of Spaine from Angola by
+  one Baltazar Almeida de Sousa, touching the state of the forsayd
+  countrey, written the 21 of May. 1591.
+
+The 26 of Iuly I certified your maiestie by Iohn Frere de Bendanha your
+majesties pay-master and commissioner, with the gouernour Paulo Dias, which
+is lately deceased, of all things that happened the 28 of December in the
+yere last past 1590. Now I thought it conuenient to aduertise your maiestie
+what hath fallen out since that time, which is as foloweth. The gouernour
+Luis Serrano encamped himselfe eight leagues from Cabasa, where the Negro
+king dwelleth with 350 Portugal souldiers: and afterward being there
+encamped, it hapned that the King of Matamba sent a strong and mightie
+army, and in warlike maner, with strange inuentions for the sayd purpose.
+[Sidenote: 114 Portugals slaine in Angola.] So the king of Angola gaue this
+other king battell, and the gouernour sent 114 souldiers Portugals to helpe
+the said king of Angola: in which battell it was the will of God that our
+army was ouerthrown and all slaine, as well our Portugals as the Moores
+which tooke part with them. So with this ouerthrow it happened that this
+realme the second time hath rebelled against your maiestie. Herevpon the
+Governour assembling the rest of his Portugal souldiers, to the number of
+250 altogether, went to Amasanguano, which is now his place of abode.
+Moreouer, besides the manifold losses which haue befallen the Portugals in
+this realme, your maiestie hath sustained other great misfortunes in your
+lands and goods. And because I cannot personally come to certifie your
+maiestie thereof, I thought it good to write some part of the same whereby
+your maiestie may vnderstand the estate of this countrey. This realme for
+the most part thereof hath twise benne wonne, and twise lost for want of
+good gouernment For here haue bene many gouernours which haue pretended to
+do iustice, but haue pitifully neglected the same, and practised the cleane
+contrary.
+
+[Sidenote: The only way to reduce a rebellous kingdom vnto obedience.] And
+this I know to be most true. But the onely way to recouer this realme, and
+to augment your maiesties lands, goods and treasure, must be by sending
+some noble and mighty man to rule here, which must bring authoritie from
+your maiestie, and by taking streight order that euery captaine which doeth
+conquere here may bee rewarded according to his deserts. Likewise your
+maiestie must send hither 2000 good souldiers, with munition and sufficient
+store of prouision for them. And by this means your highnesse shall know
+what yeerely reuenue Angola will yeeld vnto your coffers, and what profit
+will grow thereof. Otherwise your maiestie shall reape but litle benefit
+here. If with my presence I may doe your maiestie any seruice in giuing
+information of the state of this realme, as one which haue had experience
+thereof, and haue seene the order of it, vpon the vnderstanding of your
+maiesties pleasure herein, I will do my best endeuour. [Sidenote: An vsuall
+trick of lewd gouernours.] And the cause whereof I haue not done this
+heretofore hath bene, by reason that the Gouernors of this realme would
+suffer none of the captaines which haue conquered this countrey to informe
+your maiestie of that which is needfull for your seruice, and the
+augmenting of this conquest. Our lord preserue your catholique person with
+increase of many kingdomes, and the augmentation of youre crowne. Written,
+in the conquest of the realme of Angola the 21 of May 1591. Your majesties
+most loiall subiect, Baltazar Almeida de Souza.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Confimatio treugarum inter Regem Angliæ Eduardum quartum, et Ioannem
+  secundum Regem Portugalliæ, datarum in oppido montis Maioris 8 Februarij,
+  et apud Westmonasterium 12 Septembris, 1482, anno regni 22 Regis Eduardi
+  quarti, lingua Lusitanica ex opere sequenti excerpta.
+
+Libro das obras de Garcia de Resende, que tracta da vida è feitos del Rey
+  dom Ioham secundo.
+
+Embaixada que el Ray mandou à el Rey d'Inglaterra, cap.33
+
+Eda qui de Monte Mor mandou el Rey por embaixadores à el rey dom Duarte de
+Inglaterra Ruy de Sousa pessoa principal è de muyto bon saber é credito, de
+que el Rey muyto confiaua, é ho doutor Ioam d'Eluas, é Fernam de Pina por
+secretario. E foram por mar muy honradamente com muy boa companhia: hos
+quaes foram en nome del Rey confirmar as ligas antiquas com Inglaterra, que
+polla condisan dellas ho nouo Rey de hum reyno é do outro era obrigado à
+mandar confirmar: é tambien pera mostrarem ho titolo que el rey tinha no
+senhorio de Guinee, pera que depois de visto el rey d'Inglaterra defendesse
+em todos seus reynos, que ninguen armasse nem podesse mandar à Guinee: é
+assi mandasse desfazer buna armada, que pera las faziam, per mandado do
+Duque de Medina Sidonia, hum Ioam Tintam é hum Guilherme Fabiam Ingreses.
+Com ha qual embaixada el rey d'Inglaterra mostrou receber grande
+contentamento, é foy delle com muyta honra recebida, é em tudo fez
+inteiramente ho que pellos embaixadores lhe foy requerido. De que elles
+trouxeran autenticas [Marginal note: These writings are in the tower.]
+escrituras das diligencias que con pubricos pregones fizeram: é assi as
+prouisones das aprauasones que eran necessarias: é com tudo muyto ben
+acabado, é ha vontade del rey se vieram.
+
+
+The Ambassage which king Iohn the second, king of Portugall, sent to Edward
+  the fourth king of England, which in part was to stay one Iohn Tintam,
+  and one William Fabian English men, from proceeding in a voyage which
+  they were preparing fot Guinea, 1481, taken out of the booke of the
+  workes of Garcias de Resende, which intreateth of the life and acts of
+  Don Iohn the second, king of Portugall. Chap. 33.
+
+And afterwards the king sent as Ambassadours from the towne of Monte maior
+to king Edward the fourth of England, Ruy de Sousa, a principall person,
+and a man of great wisedome and estimation, and in whom the king reposed
+great trust, with doctor Iohn d'Eluas, and Ferdinand de Pina, as
+secretarie. And they made their voyage by sea very honourably, being very
+well accompanied. [Sidenote: The first cause of this ambassage.] These men
+were sent on the behalfe of their king, to confirme the ancient leagues
+England, wherein it was conditioned that the new king of the one and of the
+other kingdome, should be bound to send to confirme the olde leagues.
+[Sidenote: The second cause.] And likewise they had order to shew and make
+him acquainted with the title which the king held in the segneury of
+Ginnee, to the intent that after the king of England had seene the same, he
+should giue charge thorow all his kingdomes, that no man should arme or set
+foorth ships to Ginnee: [Sidenote: The third cause.] and also to request
+him, that it would please him to giue commandement to dissolue a certaine
+fleet, which one Iohn Tintam and one William Fabian, English men, were
+making, by commandement of the duke of Medina Sidonia, to goe to the
+aforesayd parts of Ginnee. With which ambassage the king of England seemed
+to be very well pleased, and they were receiued of him with very great
+honour, and he condescended vnto all that the ambassadours required of him,
+at whose hands they receiued authenticall writings of the diligence which
+they had performed, with publication thereof by the heralds: and also
+prouisoes of those confirmations which were necessary. And hauing
+dispatched all things well, and with the kings good will, they returned
+home into their countrey.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A relation sent by Melchior Petoney to Nigil de Moura at Lisbon, from the
+  Iland and Castle of Arguin, standing a little to the southward of Cape
+  Blanco, in the Northerly latitude of 19 degrees, concerning the rich and
+  secret trade from the inland of Africa thither: Anno 1591.
+
+[Sidenote: Commodities fit for Arguin.] As concerning the trade to this
+Castle and Iland of Arguin, your worship is to vnderstand, that if it would
+please the kings maiesty to send hither two or three carauels once in a
+yeere with Flanders and Spanish commodities, as Bracelets of glasse,
+Kniues, Belles, Linnen-cloth, Looking-glasses, with other kindes of small
+wares, his hignesse might do great good here. For 50 leagues vp into the
+land the Moores haue many exceedingly rich golde mines; insomuch that they
+bring downe their golde to this Castle to traffique with vs: and for a
+small trifle they will give vs a great wedge of gold. And because here is
+no trade, the sayd Moores cary their golde to Fez being 250 leagues distant
+from hence, and there doe exchange the same for the forsayd kindes of
+commodities. By this meanes also his maiesty might stop that passage, and
+keepe the king of Fez from so huge a mass of golde. [Sidenote: Scarlet and
+fine Purple cloth greatly accepted.] Scarlet-clothes, and fine Purples are
+greatly accepted of in these parts. It is a most fertile country within the
+land, and yeeldeth great store of Wheat, flesh of all kindes, and abundance
+of fruits. [Sidenote: A good harbor before the Castle of Arguin.] Therefore
+if it were possible, you should do well to deale with his maiesty, either
+himselfe to send a couple of carauels, or to giue your worship leaue to
+traffique here: for here is a very good harbour where ships may ride at
+ancre hard by the Castle. The countrey where all the golde-mines are is
+called The kingdome of Darha. [Marginal note: Concerning this kingdome
+reade Leo Africanus a little after the beginning of his 6 booke.] In this
+kingdome are great store of cities and townes; and in euery city and towne
+a Captaine with certaine souldiers; which Captaines are lords and owners of
+the sayd townes. One city there is called Couton, another Xanigeton, as
+also the cities of Tubguer, Azegue, Amader, Quaherque, and the towne of
+Faroo. The which townes and cities are very great and fairely built, being
+inhabited by rich Moores, and abounding with all kinde of cattell, Barley
+and Dates. And here is such plenty of golde found vpon the sands by the
+riuers side, that the sayd Moores usually cary the same Northward to
+Marocco, and Southward to the city of Tombuto in the land of Negros, which
+city standeth about 300 leagues from the kingdome of Darha; and this
+kingdome is but 60 leagues from this Iland and Castle of Arguin. Wherefore
+I beseech your worship to put his maiesty in remembrance hereof; for the
+sayd cities and townes are but ten dayes iourney from hence. I heartily
+wish that his maiesty would send two or three marchants to see the state of
+the Countrey, who might trauell to the aforesayd cities, to understand of
+their rich trade. For any man may go safe and come safe from those places.
+And thus without troubling of your worship any further, I humbly take my
+leaue. From the Iland and Castle of Arguin the 20 of Ianuary 1591.
+
+Your worships seruant
+
+Melchior Petoney.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the riuers of Senega
+  and Gambra adioning vpon Guinea, 1591 with a discourse of the treasons of
+  certaine of Don Antonio his seruants and followers.
+
+By vertue of her Maiesties most gracious charter giuen in the yeere 1588,
+and in the thirtieth yeere of her Highnesse reigne, certaine English
+marchants are granted to trade, in and from the riuer of Senega to and in
+the riuer of Gambra, on the Westerne coast of Africa. The chiefest places
+of traffique on that coast betweene these riuers, are these:
+
+[Sidenote: The names of the chiefe places of traffike between Senega and
+Gambra.] 1 Senega riuer: The commodities be hides, gumme, elephants teeth,
+a few graines, ostrich feathers, amber-griece, and some golde.
+
+2 Beseguiache, a towne by Capo Verde * [sic--KTH] leagues from Senega
+riuer: The commodities be small hides, and a few teeth.
+
+3 Refisca Vieio, a towne 4 leagues from Beseguiache: The commodities be
+small hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+4 Palmerin, a towne 2 leagues from Refisca: The commodities be small hides,
+and a few elephants teeth now and then.
+
+5 Porto d'Ally, a towne 5 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be small
+hides, teeth, amber-griece, and a little golde: and many Portugals are
+there.
+
+6 Candimal, a towne halfe a league from Porto d'Ally: The commodities be
+small hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+7 Palmerin, a towne 3 leagues from Candimal: The commodities be small
+hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+8 Ioala, a towne 6 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be hides, waxe,
+elephants teeth, rice, and some golde: and many Spaniards and Portugals are
+there.
+
+9 Gambra riuer: The commodities are rice, waxe, hides, elephants teeth, and
+golde.
+
+The Frenchmen of Diepe and New-hauen haue traded thither aboue thirty
+yeres: and commonly with four or five ships a yere, whereof two small barks
+go into the riuer of Senega. The other were wont (vntill within these foure
+yeres, that our ships came thither) to ride with their ships in the road of
+Porto d'Ally and so sent their small shaloups of sixe or eight tunnes to
+some of these places on the Sea coast before repeated. Where in all places
+generally they were well beloued and as courteously entertained of the
+Negros, as if they had been naturally borne in the country. And very often
+the Negros come into France and returne againe, which is a further
+increasing of mutuall loue and amity. Since our comming to that coast the
+Frenchmen ride with their shippes at Refisca Vieio and suffered vs to ancre
+with our shippes at Porto d'Ally. The Frenchmen neuer vse to go into the
+riuer of Gambra: which is a riuer of secret trade and riches concealed by
+the Portugals. For long since one Frenchman entered the riuer with a small
+barke which was betrayed, surprised and taken by two gallies of the
+Portugals.
+
+In our second voyage and second yeere there were by vile treacherous meanes
+of the Portugals and the king of the Negros consent in Porto d'Ally and
+Ioala about forty Englishmen cruelly slaine and captiued, and most or all
+of their goods confiscated: whereof there returned onely two, which were
+marchants. And also by procurement of Pedro Gonsalues, one of Don Antonio
+the kings seruants, Thomas Dassel and others had bene betrayed, if it had
+not pleased Almighty God to reueale the same, whereby it was preuented.
+
+From the South side of Senega riuer on the Sea coast vnto about Palmerin is
+all one kingdome of Negros. The kings name is Melick Zamba, who dwelleth
+two dayes iourney within the land from Refisca.
+
+The 12 of Nouember 1591, I Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel factors in a
+ship called the Nightingale of London 125 tunnes, and a pinnesse called the
+Messenger of 40 tonnes arriued neere vnto Capo Verde at a little Iland
+called The Iland of liberty. At this Iland we set vp a small pinnesse, with
+which we cary our marchandise on land when wee traffique. And in the meane
+time Thomas Dassel went with the great pinnesse to traffike with Spaniards
+or Portugals in Porto d'Ally or Ioala. Ouer against the sayd Iland on the
+maine is an habitation of the Negros called Besegueache. The alcaide or
+gouernor thereof with a great traine came aboord in their canoas to receiue
+the kings dueties for ankerage and permitting the quiet setting vp of our
+pinnesse: who liked passing well that no Portugall came in the shippe,
+saying, we should be better thought of by the king and people, if we neuer
+did bring Portugall, but come of our selues as the Frenchmen euer did and
+doe. And to purchase the more loue, I Richard Rainolds gaue him and all his
+company courteous entertainment. Also vpon his intreaty, hauing sufficient
+pledge aboord, I and others went on land with him. At this instant there
+was great warre betweene this alcaide and another gouernor of the next
+prouince. Neuerthelesse vpon our arriuall truce was taken for a space; and
+I with our company conducted among both enemies to the gouernors house in
+Besegueache, and were gently and friendly feasted after their maner, and
+with some presents returned safe aboord againe. The next day the alcaide
+came aboord againe, to wil me to send some yron and other commodities in
+the boat to traffike with the Negros, and also requested me that I would go
+to Refisca with the ship; which I did. And one thing I noted, that a number
+of Negros attended the alcaides landing in warlike maner with bowes and
+poisoned arrowes, darts poisoned, and swords, (because that the enemies by
+reason of the truce taken were there also to view the ship) who for the
+most part approched to him kneeling downe and kissed the backe of his hand.
+
+The 17 of Nouember we weyed anker; and by reason no French ship was yet
+come, I went to the road of Refisca: where I sent for the alcaides
+interpreters, who came thither aboord, and receiued of me the kings duties
+for to haue free traffike with the Negros, with whom dayly I exchanged my
+yron and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth, finding the people
+very friendly and tractable. And the next day after our arriuall I went vp
+into the land about three miles to the towne of Refisca, where I was
+friendly vsed and well entertained of the alcaide, and especially of a
+yoong nobleman called Conde Amar Pattay, who presented me with an oxe for
+my company, goats and some yoong kids, assuring me that the king would be
+glad to heare of the arriuall of a Christians ship, whom they called
+Blancos, that is, white men: especially of an English ship. And so dayly
+the yong Conde came with a small company of horsemen to the sea side,
+feasting me very kindly and courteously. And the fift of December he with
+his traine came aboord to see the ship; which to them seemed woonderfull,
+as people that seldome had seene the like: who tolde me that his messenger
+from the king was returned; and the king reioyed much to heare that English
+men were come with a ship to trade in his ports; and being the first
+Englishman that euer came with a ship, I was the better welcome; promising
+that I or any Englishman hereafter should be wel intreated and find good
+dealing at their hands. And further the Conde on the kings behalfe and his
+owne, earnestly requested, that before my departure off the coast I would
+returne againe to his road to conferre with him for the better continuance
+and confirming of amity betweene them and Englishmen: which I agreed vnto.
+And so shewing him and his company the best friendship and courtesie I
+could, he went on shore, and should haue had the honor of our ordinance but
+that he desired the contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and
+noise of the gunnes, which they did greatly admire.
+
+The 13 of December at night we weighed anker, and arriued the 14 day at the
+road of Porto d'Ally, which is another kingdome: the king thereof is called
+Amar Meleck, and sonne to Meleck Zamba the other king, and dwelleth a dayes
+iourney and an halfe from Porto d'Ally. When we had ankered, the kings
+kinsmen being gouernors, with all the officers of that towne came aboord to
+receiue all duties for the ship and licence to traffike due to the king;
+who there generally seemed to be very glad that no Portugall was come in
+our ship out of England; saying it was the kings pleasure we should bring
+none hereafter; for that the king did esteeme them as people of no truth;
+and complained of one Francisco de Costa seruant to Don Antonio, how he had
+often and the last yere also abused and deluded their king Amar Meleck in
+promising to bring him certaine things out of England, which he neuer
+performed, and deemed that to be the cause of his staying behinde this
+voyage, and that neither Spaniard nor Portugall could abide vs, but
+reported very badly and gaue out hard speeches tending to the defamation
+and great dishonour of England: [Sidenote: The monstrous lies of a
+Portugall.] and also affirmed that at the arriuall of an English ship
+called The Command, of Richard Kelley of Dartmouth, one Pedro Gonsalues a
+Portugall that came in the sayd ship from Don Antonio reported vnto them,
+that we were fled out of England and come away vpon intent to rob and do
+great spoile vpon this coast to the Negros and Portugals, and that Thomas
+Dassel had murdered Francisco de Acosta since our comming from England, who
+was comming to their king in our ship with great presents from Don Antonio,
+and desired that at our arriuall stay might be made of our goods and our
+selues in secret maner; which they denied, not giuing credit to his report,
+hauing bene often abused by such friuolous and slanderous speeches by that
+nation; telling me their king was sory for the former murder and captiuity
+of our nation, and would neuer yeeld to the like, hauing the Portugals and
+Spaniards in generall hatred euer since, and conceiueth much better of our
+countrey, and vs, then these our enemies report of. [Sidenote: Port Dally
+the chief place of trade.] For which I yeelded them hearty thanks, assuring
+them they should finde great difference betweene the loyalty of the one and
+disloyalty of the other; and so payed their dueties: and for that it was
+the chiefe place of trade, I shewed them how I was resolued to goe to their
+king with certaine presents which we had brought out of England; which we
+determined for the more honor and credit of our countrey, and augmenting of
+their better affection toward vs.
+
+All this while Thomas Dassel was with our great pinnesse at the towne of
+Ioala, being in the kingdome of king Iocoel Lamiockeric, traffiking with
+the Spaniards and Portugals there. And the forenamed Pedro Gonsalues, which
+came out of England, was there also with other English marchants about the
+busines of Rich. Kelley; and as it should seeme, for that he could not
+obtaine his mischieuous pretended purpose against Thomas Dassel and others
+at the towne of Porto d'Ally, where I Richard Rainolds remained, he
+attempted with consent of other Portugals which were made priuy to his
+intent to betray the sayd Thomas Dassel at this towne, and had with bribes
+seduced the chiefe commanders and Negros to effect his wicked and most
+villanous practise: which as God would, was reuealed to the sayd Thomas
+Dassel by Rich. Cape an Englishman and seruant to the forenamed Rich.
+Kelley: to whom this sayd Pedro Gonsalues had disclosed his secret
+treachery, willing him with all expedition to stand vpon his guard. [The
+Cherubin of Lime at Ioala.] Whereupon Thomas Dassel went aboard a small
+English barke called The Cherubin of Lime, and there one Iohn Payua a
+Portugall and seruant of Don Antonio declared, that if he and one Garcia a
+Portugall of the sayd towne would haue consented with Pedro Gonsalues, the
+sayd Thomas Dassel had bene betrayed long before. And vpon this warning
+Thomas Dassel the next day hauing gotten three Portugals aboord, aduised
+for our better securities to send two on land, and detained one with him
+called Villa noua, telling them that if the next day by eight of the
+clocke, they would bring Pedro Gonsalues aboard to him, he would release
+the sayd Villa noua, which they did not. And Thomas Dassel hauing
+intelligence that certaine Negros and Portugals were ridden post ouerland
+to Porto d'Ally with intent to haue Richard Rainolds and his company stayd
+on land, being doubtfull what friendship soeuer the vnconstant Negros
+professed (by reason they be often wauering being ouercome with drinking
+wine) how they would deale, to preuent the dangerous wiles that might be
+effected in the road by Portugals, and for better strength, the 24 of
+December he came with his pinnesse and Portugall to ride in the road of
+Porto d'Ally, where our great shippe the Nightingall was: who was no sooner
+arriued but he had newes also from the shore from Iohn Baily Anthony
+Dassels seruant, who was there with our goods detained by the Portugals
+means, that aboue 20 Portugals and Spaniards were come from Ioala by land,
+and Pedro Gonsalues in their company, to take order for the releasing of
+Villa noua. So hauing had conference two or three dayes with the
+Commanders, the Negros, some Spaniards, and some Portugals, in the end by
+due examination of the matter the Negros seeing how vilely Pedro Gonsalues
+had delt, he being in their power, sayd he should suffer death or be
+tortured, for an example to others. But we in recompense of his cruelty
+pitied him and shewed mercy, desiring the Negros to intreat him well though
+vndeserued: and therevpon the Commanders brought him aboord the pinnesse to
+Thomas Dassel to do with him what he would: where at his comming from the
+shore, for lauish speeches which he used of Princes, he was well buffetted
+by a Spaniard, and might haue bene slaine, if for our sakes he had not bene
+rescued.
+
+[Sidenote: Note.] While I went on shore with Villa noua, the sayd Pedro
+Gonsalues confessed vnto Thomas Dassel that he did enquire of some Negros
+and Portugals if he might not stay him and his goods in the land, and that
+he did nothing but by commission from his king by his letters which he
+receiued from London in Dartmouth after we were departed from London, for
+that we presumed to come to Guinea to traffike without a seruant of his:
+and further, that he had power or procuration from Francisco de Costa the
+Portugall that stayed behinde in England to detaine the goods of Anthony
+Dassel in Guinea.
+
+By consent of M. Francis Tucker, Iohn Browbeare, and the rest of the
+factours of Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonsalues came, for
+auoiding further mischiefe that might be practised, we agreed that the sayd
+Pedro Gonsalues should stay aboord our shippe, and not goe any more on land
+vntill they departed. So the ninth of Ianuary he was deliuered aboord to
+goe for England in the same ship wherein he came: who was all the time of
+his abode in our shippe both courteously and friendly vsed at my hands,
+much against the mariners willes, who could not abide such a wicked
+creature and caitiue, that is nourished and relieued in our countrey, and
+yet by villanous meanes sought the destruction of vs all.
+
+The Spaniards and Portugals though they be dissemblers and not to be
+trusted, when they perceiued how king Amar Melicks Negros befriended and
+fauored vs, and that it would be preiudiciall to their trade for diuers
+respects, if we should any way be iniuried, renounced the sayd practises,
+detesting the author, and protested to defend vs in such cases with all
+faithfulnesse: desiring we would, as the king of Negros had commanded vs,
+neuer bring Portugal with vs more: vsing this phrase in disdaine of such as
+came out of England, let your Portugals be barres of yron: for in trueth in
+regard of the rich trade maintained by Frenchmen and by vs of late, they
+esteeme more of one barre of yron then of twenty Portugals which we should
+bring out of England: who at their comming thither very subtilly
+disaduantage vs, and doe great hurt to euery party.
+
+At the beginning of these broiles the king Amar Melick had sent his chiefe
+secretary and three horses for me Richard Rainolds: but I denied to goe by
+reason of the hurley burley, though I might haue had Negros of account for
+pledges aboord: yet we sent the presents vnto the king; who so soone as he
+vnderstood the cause why I came not to him, being sory and offended
+thereat, commanded presently by proclamation, that no iniury should be
+offered vs in his dominions by his owne people, or suffered to be done by
+Spaniards or Portugals. And if the Negros ioyning to his kingdome should
+confederate with the Spaniards and Portugals to molest or trouble vs; that
+his subiects the Negros should be ready to ayde, succor and defend vs. In
+which people appeared more confident loue and good will toward vs, then
+euer we shall finde either of Spaniards or Portugals, though we should
+relieue them of the greatest misery that can be imagined.
+
+In the riuer of Senega no Spaniard or Portugall vse to trade: and onely one
+Portugall called Ganigoga dwelleth farre within the riuer, who was maried
+to a kings daughter.
+
+[Sidenote: Note this trade.] In the townes of Porto d'Ally and Ioala, being
+townes of chiefest trade, and in the townes of Canton and Cassan in the
+riuer of Gambra are many Spaniards and Portugals resident by permission of
+the Negros; who haue rich trades there along the coast, especially to San
+Domingo and Rio grande, not far distant from Gambra riuer; whither they
+transport the yron which they buy of Frenchmen and vs, and exchange it for
+Negros; which be caried continually to the West Indies in such ships as
+came from Spaine. [Sidenote: A rich trade for golde in Rio grande.] Also by
+the gouernors order and Renters of Castel de Mina and other places, where
+golde is, vpon the coast of Guinea, they haue a place limited how farre
+they must go to trade within the riuer of Gambra; and further they may not
+go vpon paine of confiscation of their goods, and losse of life: for that
+the Renters themselues send at certaine times their owne barkes within the
+riuer to such places, where as they haue great store of golde. And in all
+these places hereabouts, where we vse to trade, they haue no Fort, Castle,
+or place of strength, but onely trading by the Negros safeconduct and
+permission. And the most part of the Spaniards and Portugals that be
+resident in these places be banished men or fugitiues, for committing most
+hainous crimes and incestuous acts, their life and conuersation being
+agreeable; and they are of the basest behauiour that we haue euer seene of
+these nations in any other countrey.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe relation concerning the estate of the cities and prouinces of
+  Tombuto and Gago written in Marocco the first of August 1594, and sent to
+  M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London.
+
+My hearty commendations premised: your letter of late I receiued, and found
+that you would haue me discouer vnto you the estate and quality of the
+countreyes of Tombuto and Gago. And that you may not thinke me to slumber
+in this action, wherein you would be truely and perfectly resolued, you
+shall vnderstand, that not ten dayes past here came a Cahaia of the
+Andoluzes home from Gago, and another principall Moore, whom the king sent
+thither at the first with Alcaide Hamode, and they brought with them thirty
+mules laden with gold. I saw the same come into the Alcasaua with mine owne
+eies: and these men themselues came not poore, but with such wealth, that
+they came away without the kings commandement; and for that cause the king
+will pay them no wages for the time they haue beene there. On the other
+side they dare not aske the king for any wages. And when Alcaide Hamode saw
+that the Cahaia of the Andoluzes would not stay in Gago with him, he
+thought good to send these thirty mules laden with golde by him, with
+letters of commendations, by which the king smelled their riches that they
+brought with them: and this was the cause of the kings displeasure towards
+them. So now there remaineth in Gago Alcaide Hamode, and Alcaide Iawdara,
+and Alcaide Bucthare. And here are in a readinesse to depart in the end of
+next September Alcaide Monsor, Ben Abdrahaman Allies, Monsor Rico with fiue
+thousand men, most of the fettilase, that is to say, of fier match, and
+muskets. [Sidenote: Commodities for Gago.] There is gone good store of reds
+and yellowes: and this yere here was want of the same commodity; but I
+trust the next yere wil be no want. But in fine the king doth prosper wel
+in those parts, and here are many pledges come hither, and namely three of
+the kings sonnes of Gago and the Iustice; I saw them come in with the
+treasure. Now when Alcaide Monsor commeth to Gago, the which will be in
+Ianuary next, then returneth hither Alcaide Hamode with all the treasure,
+and Alcaide Monsor is to keepe Gago vntill the king take further order. And
+thus much for Gago. Thus not hauing any other thing to write at this
+present, I commend you to the mercifull tuition of the almighty.
+
+From Marocco the first of August 1594.
+
+Your assured friend Laurence Madoc.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Another briefe relation concerning the late conquest and exceeding great
+  riches of the cities and prouinces Tombuth and Gogo, written from Morocco
+  the 30 August 1594, to M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London aforesayd.
+
+Louing friend M. Dassel, two of your letters I haue receiued, one by the
+shippe called The Amity, the other by the Concord: the chiefest matter
+therein was to be satisfied of the king of Morocco his proceedings in
+Guinea. Therefore these are to let you vnderstand that there went with
+Alcaide Hamode for those parts seuenteene hundred men: who passing ouer the
+sands, for want of water perished one third part of them: [Sidenote:
+Tombuto taken.] and at their comming to the city of Tombuto, the Negros
+made some resistence: but to small purpose, for that they had no defence
+but with their asagaies or iauelings poisoned. [Sidenote: Gago taken.] So
+they tooke it, and proceeded to the city of Gago, where the Negros were in
+numbers infinite, and meant to stand to the vttermost for their countrey:
+but the Moores slew them so fest, that they were fain to yeeld, and do pay
+tribute by the yere. The rent of Tombuto is 60 quintals of golde by the
+yeere: the goodnesse whereof you know. What rent Gago will yeeld, you shall
+know at the Spring, for then Alcaide Hamode commeth home. The rent of
+Tombuto is come by the cafelow or carouan, which is, as aboue mentioned, 60
+quintals. The report is, that Mahomed bringeth with him such an infinite
+treasure as I neuer heard of: it doth appeare that they haue more golde
+then any other parte of the world beside. The Alcaide winneth all the
+countrey where he goeth without fighting and is going downe towards the sea
+coast. The king of Marocco is like to be the greatest prince in the world
+for money, if he keepe this countrey. But I make account assoone as the
+king of Spaine hath quietnesse in Christendome, he wil thrust him out: for
+that the kings force is not great as yet; but he meaneth to be stronger.
+There is a campe ready to go now with a viceroy: the speech is with 3000
+men: but I thinke they will be hardly 2000; for by report, 3000 men are
+enough to conquer all the countrey: for they haue no defence of importance
+against an enemy. I thinke Hamode will be returned home in Ianuary or
+thereabout: for he stayeth but for the comming of the viceroy. Mulley
+Balasen the kings sonne of Marocco was slaine in Guinea by his own men, and
+they were presently killed, because they should tell no tales. And thus
+leauing to trouble you, I commit you to God, who prosper you in all your
+proceedings. From Marocco the first of August 1594.
+
+Yours to command for euer Laurence Madoc.
+
+Of these two rich cities and kingdomes of Tombuto and Gago Leo Africanus
+writeth at large in the beginning of his seuenth booke of the description
+of Africa, which worthy worke is to be annexed vnto the end of this second
+volume.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe extract of a patent granted to M. Thomas Gregory of Tanton, and
+  others, for traffique betweene the riuer of Nonnia and the riuers of
+  Madrabumba and Sierra Leona on the coast of Guinea, in the yeere 1592.
+
+In May the 34 yeere of our gracious soueraigne Queene Elizabeth, a patent
+of speciall licence was granted to Thomas Gregory of Tanton in the county
+of Somerset, and to Thomas Pope, and certaine other marchants to traffique
+into Guinea from the Northermost part of the riuer of Nonnia to the
+Southermost parts of the riuers of Madrabumba and Sierra Leona, and to
+other parts as well to the Southeast as to the Northwest, for a certaine
+number of leagues therein specified which amount to an hundred or
+thereabout. Which patent was granted for the terme of ten yeeres: as
+appeareth at large in the sayd patent recorded in the Rolles in her
+Majesties Chancery.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships laden with quicksiluer and the
+  Popes bulles, bound for the West Indies, by M. Thomas White in the Amity
+  of London, 1592.
+
+The 26 of Iuly 1592, in my returning out of Barbary in the ship called the
+Amity of London, being in the height of 36 degrees or thereabout, at foure
+of the clocke in the morning we had sight of two shippes, being distant
+from vs about three or foure leagues: by seuen of the clocke we fetched
+them vp, and were within gunshot: whose boldnesse, hauing the king of
+Spaines armes displayed, did make vs judge them rather ships of warre then
+laden with marchandise. And as it appeared by their owne speeches, they
+made full account to haue taken vs: it being a question among them, whether
+it were best to cary vs to S. Lucar, or to Lisbon. We waued ech other a
+maine. They hauing placed themselues in warlike order one a cables length
+before another, we began the fight. In the which we continued, so fast as
+we were able to charge and discharge, the space of fiue houres, being neuer
+a cables length distant either of vs from other. In which time we receiued
+diuers shot both in the hull of our ship, masts, and sailes, to the number
+of 32 great, besides 500 musket shot and harquebuzes a crocke at the least,
+which we tolde after the fight. And because we perceiued them to be stout,
+we thought good to boord the Biscaine, which was on head the other: where
+lying aboord about an houre, and plying our ordinance and small shot; in
+the end we stowed all his men. Now the other in the flieboat, thinking we
+had entred our men in their fellow, bare roome with vs, meaning to haue
+layed vs aboord, and so to haue intrapped vs betwixt them both: which we
+perceiuing, fitted our ordinance so for him, as we quitted our selues of
+him, and he boorded his fellow: by which meanes they both fell from vs.
+Then presently we kept our loofe, hoised our top-sailes, and weathered
+them, and came hard aboord the flieboat with our ordinance prepared, and
+gaue her our whole broad side, with the which we slew diuers of their men;
+so as we might see the blood run out at the scupper holes. After that we
+cast about, and new charged all our ordinance, and came vpon them againe,
+willing them to yeeld, or els we would sinke them: whereupon the one would
+haue yeelded, which was betweene winde and water; but the other called him
+traitor. Vnto whom we made answere, that if he would not yeeld presently
+also, we would sinke him first. [Sidenote: Marke this othe.] And thereupon
+he understanding our determination, presently put out a white flag, and
+yeelded, and yet refused to strike their own sailes, for that they were
+sworne neuer to strike to any Englishman. We then commanded their captaines
+and masters to come aboord vs; which they did. And after examination and
+stowing them, we sent certaine of our owne men aboord them, and strook
+their sailes, and manned their ships: finding in them both 126 persons
+liuing, and 8 dead, besides those which they themselues had cast ouerboord.
+So it pleased God to giue vs the victory being but 42 men and a boy,
+whereof 2 were killed and 3 wounded: for the which good successe we giue
+God the only praise. These two rich prizes laden with 1400 cheste of
+quicksiluer with the armes of Castile and Leon fastened vpon them, and with
+a great quantity of bulles or indulgences, and gilded Missals or Seruice
+books, with an hundred tonnes of excellent wines, we brought shortly after
+into the riuer of Thames vp to Blacke-wall.
+
+By the taking of this quicksiluer, about 1400 chests, the king of Spaine
+loseth for euery quintall of the same a quintall of siluer that should haue
+beene deliuered him by the masters of the mines there, which amounteth to
+600000 pounds.
+
+More by taking of his bulles, to wit, two millions and 72 thousand for
+liuing and dead persons for the prouinces of Noua Hispania, Iucatan,
+Guatimala, the Honduras, and the Phillippinas, taxed at two reals the
+piece. And more for eighteene thousand bulles taxed at foure reals,
+amounteth all to 107700 pounds. Summa totalis 707700 li.
+
+More there were taken ten fardels of gilt missals and breuiaries sent for
+the kings account.
+
+So the hindrance that the king receiueth by the losse of his bulles and
+quicksiluer amounteth as is abouesaid: besides the sacking of his wines,
+about 100 tunnes, whereby his fleet is disappointed of a great part of
+their prouision.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A true report of the honourable seruice at Sea perfourmed by Sir Iohn
+  Burrough Knight, Lieutenant generall of the fleet prepared by the honour.
+  Sir Walter Ralegh Knight, Lord warden of the Stanneries of Cornwall and
+  Deuon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara of Biscay, a ship of 600 tunnes
+  was taken, and the two East Indian caraks, the Santa Cruz and the Madre
+  de Dios were forced, the one burnt, and the other taken and brought into
+  Dartmouth the seuenth of September, 1592.
+
+Sir Walter Ralegh vpon commission receiued from her Maiesty for an
+expedition to be made to the West Indies, slacked not his vttermost
+diligence to make full prouision of all things necessary, as both in his
+choise of good ships, and sufficient men to performe the action euidently
+appeared. For his shippes which were in numbre 14 or 15, those two of her
+Maiesties, the Garland and the Foresight were the chiefest; the rest either
+his owne or his good friends or aduenturers of London. For the gentlemen
+his consorts and officers, to giue them their right, they were so well
+qualited in courage, experience, and discretion, as the greatest prince
+might repute himselfe happy to be serued with their like. The honor of
+Lieutenant generall was imposed vpon sir Iohn Burrough, a gentleman, for
+his manifold good and heroicall parts, thought euery way worthy of that
+commandement: with whom after sir W. R. returned was ioyned in commission
+sir Martin Frobisher, who for his speciall skill and knowledge in marine
+causes had formerly caried imploiments of like or greater place. The rest
+such as heretofore had giuen to the world sufficient proofe of their valour
+in diuers seruices of the like nature. With these ships thus manned sir
+Walter Ralegh departed towards the West countrey, there to store himselfe
+with such further necessaries as the state of his voyage did needfully
+require: where the Westerly windes blowing for a long time contrary to his
+course, bound and constrained him to keepe harborough so many weeks, that
+the fittest season for his purpose was gone, the mindes of his people much
+altered, his victuals consumed: and withall, her Maiesty vnderstanding how
+crosly all this sorted, began to call the proceeding of this preparation
+into question: insomuch that, whereas the sixt of May was first come before
+sir Walter could put to sea, the very next day sir Martin Frobisher in a
+pinnesse of my lord Admirals called The Disdaine, met him, and brought to
+him from her Maiesty letters of reuocation, with commandement to relinquish
+(for his owne part) the intended attempt, and to leaue the charge and
+conduct of all things in the hands of sir Iohn Burrough and sir Martin
+Frobisher, But sir Walter finding his honor so farre engaged in the
+vndertaking of this voyage, as without proceeding he saw no remedy either
+to salue his reputation, or to content those his friends which had put in
+aduentures of great summes with him; and making construction of the Queenes
+letters in such sort as if her commandement had bene propounded in
+indifferent termes, either to aduance forward or to retire, at his owne
+discretion; would in no case yeeld to leaue his fleet now vnder saile.
+Wherefore continuing his course into the sea, he met within a day or two,
+with certaine sailes lately come from Spaine: among which was a ship
+appertaining to Monsieur Gourdon gouernor of Caleis, and found aboord her
+one M. Neuel Dauies an Englishman, who hauing endured a long and miserable
+captiuity for the space of twelue yeeres, partly in the inquisition in
+Spaine, was now by good fortune escaped, and vpon returne to his countrey.
+This man, among other things, reported for certaine, that there was little
+hope of any good this yeere to be done in the West India; considering that
+the king of Spaine had sent expresse order to all the Ports both of the
+Ilands and of Terra firma, that no ship should stirre that yeere, nor any
+treasure be layed aboord for Spaine. But neither this vnpleasant relation
+nor ought els could stay his proceedings, vntill a tempest of strange and
+vncouth violence arising vpon Thursday the 11 of May, when he was athwart
+the Cape Finister, had so scattered the greater part of the fleet, and
+sunke his boats and pinnesses, that as the rest were driuen and seuered,
+some this way and some that, sir Walter himselfe being in the Garland of
+her Maiesty was in danger to be swallowed vp of the Sea. Whereupon sir W.
+Ralegh finding that the season of the yere was too farre gone to proceed
+with the enterprise which he had vpon Panama, hauing bene held on the
+English coast from February till May, and thereby spent three moneths
+victuals; and considering withall, that to lie vpon the Spanish coast or at
+the Ilands to attend the returne of the East or West Indian fleets was
+rather a worke of patience then ought els: he gaue directions to sir Iohn
+Burgh and sir M. Frobisher to diuide the fleet in two parts; sir M. with
+the Garland, cap. George Gifford, cap. Henry Thin, cap. Grenuile and others
+to lie off the South cape, thereby to amaze the Spanish fleet, and to holde
+them on their owne coast; while sir I. Burgh, capt. Robert Crosse, capt.
+Tomson, and others should attend at the Ilands for the caraks or any other
+Spanish ships comming from Mexico or other parts of the West Indies. Which
+direction tooke effect accordingly; for the king of Spaines Admirall
+receiuing intelligence that the English fleet was come on the coast,
+attended to defend the South parts of Spaine, and to keepe himselfe as nere
+sir Mart. Frobisher as he could, to impeach him in all things which he
+might vndertake; and thereby neglected the safeconduct of the caraks, with
+whom it fared as hereafter shall appeare. Before the fleet seuered
+themselues they mette with a great Biscain on the Spanish coast called
+Santa Clara a ship of 600 tunnes.
+
+The noise of the artillery on both sides being heard, immediatly they drew
+to their fleet; where after a reasonable hot fight, the ship was entred and
+mastered, which they found freighted with all sorts of small yron-worke, as
+horse shoes, nailes, plough-shares, yron barres, spikes, boults, locks,
+gimbols, and such like, valued by vs at 6000 or 7000 li. but woorth to them
+treble the value. This Biscain was sailing towards S. Lucar, there to take
+in some further prouision for the West India. This ship being first
+roomaged, and after sent for England, our fleet coasted along towards the
+Southcape of S. Vincent, and by the way about the Rocke neere Lisbon, sir
+Iohn Burrough in the Robucke spying a saile a farre off, gaue her present
+chase; which being a flieboat and of good saile, drew him farre Southwards
+before he could fetch her; but at last she came vnder his lee and strooke
+saile. The master of which flieboat comming aboord him, confessed that the
+king indeed had prepared a great fleet in S. Lucar and Cadiz, and (as the
+report in Spaine was currant) for the West Indies. But indeed the Spanish
+king had prouided this fleet vpon this counsell. He receiued intelligence,
+that sir Walter Ralegh was to put out strong for the West India: to impeach
+him, and to ranconter his force he appointed this fleet; although looking
+for the arriuall of his East Indian caraks, he first ordained those ships
+to waft them from the Açores. But perswading himselfe, that if the fleet of
+sir Walter Ralegh did go for the West India, then the Ilands should haue
+none to infest them but some small men of warre, which the caraks of
+themselues would be well able to match; his order was to Don Alonso de
+Baçan brother to the Marques of Santa Cruz, and Generall of his armada, to
+pursue sir Walters fleet, and to confront him, what course soeuer he held.
+[Sidenote: Sir Iohn Burrough in great danger of the Spanish fleet.] And
+that this was true, our men in short time by proofe vnderstood: for sir
+Iohn Burrough, not long after the taking of his last prize the flieboat, as
+he sailed backe againe towards the rest of his company, discouered the
+Spanish fleet to sea-ward of him: which hauing likewise espied him betwixt
+them and the shore, made full account to bring him safe into Spanish
+harbour; and therefore spred themselues in such sort before him, that
+indeed his danger was very great: for both the liberty of the sea was
+brought into a narrow straight, and the shore being enemy could giue him no
+comfort of reliefe: so that trusting to Gods helpe onely and his good
+saile, he thrust out from among them in spight of all their force, and to
+the notable illusion of all their cunning, which they shewed to the
+vttermost, in laying the way for his apprehension. [Sidenote: The Ile of S.
+Michael.] But now sir Iohn Burrough hauing happily escaped their clouches,
+finding the coast guarded by this fleet, and knowing it was but folly to
+expect a meeting there with sir Martin Frobisher (who vnderstanding of this
+armada aswell as himselfe, would be sure not to come that way) beganne to
+shape his course to the Açores according to sir W. Raleghs direction, and
+came in sight of S. Michael, running so neere by Villa Franca, that he
+might easily discerne the shippes lying there at anker. [Sidenote: Diuers
+small ships taken.] Diuers small carauels both here and betweene S. Georges
+and the Pike in his course towards Flores he intercepted; of which no great
+intelligence for his affaires could be vnderstood. [Sidenote: Santa Cruz a
+village in the Ile of Flores.] Arriuing before Flores vpon Thursday the 21
+of Iune, towards euening, accompanied onely with captaine Caufield and the
+Master of his shippe, the rest not being yet arriued, he made towards the
+shore with his boat, finding all the people of Santa Cruz, a village of
+that Iland, in armes, fearing their landing, and ready marshalled to defend
+their towne from spoile. Sir Iohn contrariwise made signes of amity vnto
+them by aduancing a white flagge, a common token of peace, which was
+answered againe of them with the like: whereupon ensued entercourses of
+good friendship; and pledges were taken on both sides, the captaine of the
+towne for them, and captaine Caufield for our: so that whatsoeuer our men
+wanted, which that place could supply either in fresh water, victuals, or
+the like, was very willingly granted by the inhabitants; and good leaue had
+they to refresh themselues on shore as much and as oft as they would
+without restraint. [Sidenote: Newes of the East Indian caraks.] At this
+Santa Cruz sir Iohn Burrough was informed, that indeed there was among them
+no expectation of any fleet to come from the west, but from the East, that
+no longer since then three dayes before his arriuall a carak was passed by
+for Lisbon, and that there were foure carafes more behinde, of one consort.
+Sir Iohn being very glad of this newes, stayed no longer on shore, but
+presently imbarqued himselfe, hauing onely in company a small barke of
+threescore tunnes belonging to one M. Hopkins of Bristoll. In the meane
+while that these things thus passed at Flores, part of the rest of the
+English fleet, which sir Iohn Burrough had left vpon the coast of Spaine,
+drew also towards the Açores: and whereas he quickly at sea had discouered
+one of the caraks, the same euening he might descry two or three of the
+Earle of Cumberlands ships (whereof one M. Norton was captaine) which
+hauing in like sort kenned the carak, pursued her by that course which they
+saw her to runne towards the Ilands. But on no side was there any way made
+by reason of a great calme which yeelded no breath to spread a saile.
+Insomuch that fitly to discouer her what she was, of what burthen, force,
+and countenance sir Iohn Burrough tooke his boat, and rowed the space of
+three miles, to make her exactly: and being returned, he consulted with the
+better sort of the company then present, vpon the boording her in the
+morning. [Sidenote: A carak called The Santa Cruz set on fire.] But a very
+mighty storme arising in the night, the extremity thereof forced them all
+to wey ankers, yet their care was such in wrestling with the weather not to
+lose the carak, that in the morning the tempest being qualified, and our
+men bearing againe with the shore, they might perceiue the carak very neere
+the land, and the Portugals confusedly carrying on shore such things as
+they could any maner of way conuey out of her; and seeing the haste our men
+made to come vpon them, forsook her; but first, that nothing might be left
+commodious to our men, set fire to that which they could not cary with
+them, intending by that meanes wholly to consume her; that neither glory of
+victory nor benefit of shippe might remaine to ours. And least the approch
+and industry of the English should bring meanes to extinguish the flame,
+thereby to preserue the residue of that which the fire had not destroyed;
+being foure hundred of them in number and well armed, they entrenched
+themselues on land so neere to the carak, that she being by their forces
+protected, and our men kept aloofe off, the fire might continue to the
+consumption of the whole. This being noted by sir Iohn Burrough he soone
+prouided a present remedy for this mischiefe. [Sidenote: An hundred of our
+men land.] For landing one hundred of his men, whereof many did swim and
+wade more then brest high to shore, and easily scattering those that
+presented themselues to guard the coast, he no sooner drew toward their new
+trenches, but they fled immediatly, leauing as much as the fire had spared
+to be the reward of our mens paines. Here was taken among others one
+Vincent Fonseca a Portugall, Purser of the carak, with two others, one an
+Almaine and the second a Low-dutchman, canoniers: who refusing to make any
+voluntary report of those things, which were demanded of them, had the
+torture threatened, the feare whereof at the last wrested from them this
+intelligence, that within fifteene dayes three other greater caraks then
+that lately fired would arriue at the same Iland: and that being fiue
+caraks in the fleet at their departure from Goa, to wit, the Buen Iesus
+admirall, the Madre de Dios, the S. Bernardo, the S. Christophoro, and the
+S. Cruz, (whose fortune you haue already heard) they had receiued speciall
+commandement from the king not to touch in any case at the Iland of S.
+Helena, where the Portugall caraks in their returne from the East India
+were alwayes till now woont to arriue to refresh themselues with water and
+victuals. And the kings reason was; because of the English men of warre,
+who (as he was informed) lay there in wait to intercept them. [Sidenote:
+Angola a new watering place for caraks.] If therefore their necessity of
+water should driue them to seeke supply any where, he appointed them Angola
+in the maine of Africa, with order there to stay onely the taking in of
+water to auoid the inconuenience of infections where unto that hot latitude
+is dangerously subiect. The last rendeuous for them all was the Iland of
+Flores, where the king assured them not to misse of his armada thither sent
+of purpose for their wafting to Lisbon. Vpon this information sir Iohn drew
+to counsel, meeting there Captaine Norton, captain Dountain, captain
+Abraham Cocke, captaines of three ships of the Earle of Cumberland, M.
+Tomson of Harwich cap. of the Dainty of sir Iohn Haukins, one of sir W.
+Raleghs fleet, and M. Christopher Newport cap. of the Golden dragon newly
+returned from the West India, and others. These being assembled, he
+communicated with them what he had vnderstood of the foresaid examinates,
+and what great presumptions of trueth their relation did cary: wishing that
+forasmuch as God and good fortune had brought them together in so good a
+season, they would shew the vttermost of their indeuors to bring these
+Easterlings vnder the lee of the English obedience. Hereupon a present
+accord on all sides followed not to part company or leaue of those seas
+till time should present cause to put their consultations in execution. The
+next day her Maiesties good ship the Foresight commanded by sir Rob. Crosse
+came in to the rest: and he likewise informed of the matter was soone
+drawen into this seruice. Thus sir Iohn with al these ships departing
+thence 6 or 7 leagues to the West of Flores, they spread themselues abroad
+from the North to the South, ech ship two leagues at the least distant from
+another. By which order of extension they were able to discouer the space
+of two whole degrees at sea. In this sort they lay from the 29 of Iune to
+the third of August, what time cap. Thomson in the Dainty had first sight
+of the huge carak called the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest receit,
+belonging to the crowne of Portugall. The Dainty being of excellent saile
+got the start of the rest of our fleet, and begun the conflict somewhat to
+her cost, with the slaughter and hurt of diuers of her men. Within a while
+after, sir Iohn Burrough in the Robucke of sir W. Raleghs, was at hand to
+second her, who saluted her with shot of great ordinance, and continued the
+fight within musket shot assisted by cap. Tomson and cap. Newport till sir
+R. Crosse viceadmirall of the fleet came vp being to leeward, at whose
+arriuall sir I. Burgh demanded of him what was best to be done, who
+answered, that if the carak were not boorded she would recouer the shore
+and fire herselfe as the other had done. Whereupon sir I. Burgh concluded
+to entangle her; and sir R. Crosse promised also to fasten himselfe to her
+together at the instant; which was performed: but after a while sir Iohn
+Burgh receiuing a shot with a canon perier vnder water and ready to sinke,
+desired sir R. C. to fall off, that he might also cleere himselfe, and saue
+his ship from sinking, which with difficulty he did: for both the Roebucke
+and the Foresight were so intangled, as with much adoe could they cleere
+themselues.
+
+[Sidenote: The Madre de Dios taken.] The same euening sir R. Crosse finding
+the carak then sure and drawing neere the Iland perswaded his company to
+boord her againe, or els there was no hope to recouer her: who after many
+excuses and feares, were by him incouraged, and so fell athwart her
+foreships all alone; and so hindered her sailing that the rest had time to
+come vp to his succour, and to recouer the carak yer she recouered the
+land: and so toward the euening after he had fought with her alone three
+houres single, my lord of Cumberlands two ships came vp, and with very
+little losse entred with sir R. Crosse, who had in that time broken their
+courages, and made the assault easie for the rest.
+
+The generall hauing disarmed the Portugals, and stowed them for better
+security on all sides, first had presented to his eyes the true proportion
+of the vast body of this carak, which did then and may still iustly prouoke
+the admiration of all men not formerly acquainted with such a sight. But
+albeit this first apparance of the hugenesse thereof yeelded sights enough
+to entertaine our mens eyes: yet the pitifull obiect of so many bodies
+slaine and dismembred could not but draw ech mans eye to see, and heart to
+lament, and hands to helpe those miserable people, whose limnes were so
+torne with the violence of shot, and paine made grieuous with the multitude
+of woundes. No man could almost steppe but vpon a dead carkase or a bloody
+floore, but specially about the helme, where very many of them fell
+suddenly from stirring to dying. For the greatnesse of the stirrage
+requiring the labour of twelue or fourteene men at once, and some of our
+shippes beating her in at the sterne with their ordinance often times with
+one shot slew foure or fiue labouring on either side of the helme; whose
+roomes being still furnished with fresh supplies, and our artillery still
+playing vpon them with continuall volleys, it could not be but that much
+bloud should be shed in that place. [Sidenote: Exceeding humanity shewed to
+the enemy.] Whereupon our Generall moued with singular commiseration of
+their misery, sent them his owne chyrurgions, denying them no possible
+helpe or reliefe that he or any of his company could affoord them. Among
+the rest of those, whose state this chance had made very deplorable, was
+Don Fernando de Mendoça Grand captaine and Commander of this Carake: who
+indeed was descended of the house of Mendoça in Spaine; but being married
+into Portugall, liued there as one of that nation; a gentleman well
+stricken in yeeres, well spoken, of comely personage, of good stature, but
+of hard fortune. In his seuerall seruices against the Moores he was twise
+taken prisoner, and both times ransomed by the king. In a former voyage of
+returne from the East India he was driuen vpon the Baxos or sands of Iuda
+nere the coast of Cephala, being then also captaine of a caracke which was
+there lost, and himselfe, though escaping the sea-danger, yet fell into the
+hands of infidels on land; who kept him vnder long and grieuous seruitude.
+Once more the king carying a louing respect to the man, and desirous to
+better his condition, was content to let him try his fortune in this
+Easterly nauigation, and committed vnto him the conduct of this caracke,
+wherein he went from Lisbon Generall of the whole fleet, and in that degree
+had returned, if the Vice-rey of Goa embarked for Portugall in the Bon
+Iesus had not, by reason of his late office, bene preferred. Sir Iohn
+intending not to adde too much affliction to the afflicted, moued with pity
+and compassion of humane misery, in the end resolued freely to dismisse
+this captaine and the most part of his followers, to their owne countrey,
+and for the same purpose bestowed them in certaine vessels furnished with
+all kindes of necessary prouision. This businesse thus dispatched, good
+leasure had he to take such view of the goods as conueniency might affoord.
+And hauing very prudently (to cut off the vnprofitable spoile and pillage
+whereunto he saw the minds of many inclined) seised vpon the whole to her
+Maiesties vse, after a short and slender romaging and searching of such
+things as first came to hand, he perceiued that the wealth would arise
+nothing disanswerable to expectation; but that the variety and grandure of
+all rich commodities would be more then sufficient to content both the
+aduenturers desire and the souldiers trauell. And here I cannot but enter
+into the consideration and acknowledgement of Gods great fauor towards our
+nation, who by putting this purchase into our hands hath manifestly
+discouered those secret trades and Indian riches, which hitherto lay
+strangely hidden, and cunningly concealed from vs; whereof there was among
+some few of vs some small and vnperfect glimse onely, which now is turned
+into the broad light of full and perfect knowledge. Whereby it should seeme
+that the will of God for our good is (if our weaknesse could apprehend it)
+to haue vs communicate with them in those East Indian treasures, and by the
+erection of a lawfull traffike to better our meanes to aduance true
+religion and his holy seruice. The caracke being in burden by the
+estimation of the wise and experienced no lesse then 1600 tunnes had full
+900 of those stowed with the grosse bulke of marchandise, the rest of the
+tunnage being allowed, partly to the ordinance which were 32 pieces of
+brasse of all sorts, partly to the passengers and the victuals, which could
+not be any small quantity, considering the number of the persons betwixt
+600 and 700, and the length of the nauigation. To giue you a taste (as it
+were) of the commodities, it shall suffice to deliuer you a generall
+particularity of them, according to the catalogue taken at Leadenhall the
+15 of September 1592. [Sidenote: A briefe catalogue of the sundry rich
+commodities of the Madre de Dios.] Where vpon good view it was found, that
+the principall wares after the iewels (which were no doubt of great value,
+though they neuer came to light) consisted of spices, drugges, silks,
+calicos, quilts, carpets and colours, &c. The spices were pepper, cloues,
+maces, nutmegs, cinamom, greene ginger: the drugs were beniamin,
+frankincense, galingale, mirabolans, aloes zocotrina, camphire: the silks,
+damasks, taffatas, sarcenets, altobassos, that is, counterfeit cloth of
+gold, vnwrought China silke, sleaued silke, white twisted silke, curled
+cypresse. The calicos were book-calicos, calico-launes, broad white
+calicos, fine starched calicos, course white calicos, browne broad calicos,
+browne course calicos. There were also canopies, and course diaper-towels,
+quilts of course sarcenet and of calico, carpets like those of Turky;
+whereunto are to be added the pearle, muske, ciuet, and amber-griece. The
+rest of the wares were many in number, but lesse in value; as elephants
+teeth, porcellan vessels of China, coco-nuts, hides, eben-wood as blacke as
+iet, bedsteads of the same, cloth of the rindes of trees very strange for
+the matter, and artificiall in workemanship. All which piles of commodities
+being by men of approued iudgement rated but in reasonable sort amounted to
+no lesse then 150000 li. sterling, which being diuided among the
+aduenturers (whereof her Maiesty was the chiefe) was sufficient to yeeld
+contentment to all parties. [Sidenote: The capacity and dimensions of the
+Madre de Dios.] The cargazon being taken out, and the goods fraighted in
+tenne of our ships sent for London, to the end that the bignesse, heigth,
+length, bredth, and other dimensions of so huge a vessell might by the
+exact rules of Geometricall obseruations be truly taken, both for present
+knowledge, and deriuation also of the same vnto posterity, one M. Robert
+Adams, a man in his faculty of excellent skill, omitted nothing in the
+description, which either his arte could demonstrate, or any mans iudgement
+thinke woorthy the memory. After an exquisite suruey of the whole frame he
+found the length from the beak-head to the sterne (whereupon was erected a
+lanterne) to containe 165 foote. The breadth in the second close decke
+whereof she had three, this being the place where there was most extension
+of bredth, was 46 feet and ten inches. She drew in water 31 foot at her
+departure from Cochin in India, but not aboue 26 at her arriual in
+Dartmouth, being lightened in her voyage by diuers meanes some 5 foote. She
+caried in height 7 seuerall stories, one maine Orlop, three close decks,
+one fore-castle, and a spar-decke of two floores a piece. The length of the
+keele was 100 foote, of the maine-mast 121 foot, and the circuite about at
+the partners 10 foote 7 inches, the maine-yard was 106 foote long. By which
+perfect commensuration of the parts appeareth the hugenesse of the whole,
+farre beyond the mould of the biggest shipping vsed among vs either for
+warre or receit.
+
+Don Alonso de Baçan hauing a great Fleet and suffering these two caraks,
+the Santa Cruz to be burnt, and the Madre de Dios to be taken, was
+disgraced by his prince for this negligence.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las Cinque
+  Llaguas, or, The fiue Wounds, by three tall Ships set foorth at the
+  charges of the right honorable the Erle of Cumberland and his friends:
+  Written by the discreet and valiant captaine M. Nicholas Downton.
+
+In the latter ende of the yeere 1593. the right honourable Erle of
+Cumberland, at his owne charges and his friends, prepared 3 ships, all at
+equall rate, and either of them had like quantitie of victuals, and like
+numbers of men, there being embarked in all 3 ships 420 men of al sorts.
+[Marginal note: Besides these three ships there was a pinnas called the
+Violet, or the Why not I.] The Roial Exchange went as Admirall, wherein M.
+George Caue was captaine. The May-flower Viceadmirall vnder the conduct of
+William Anthonie: and the Sampson, the charge whereof it pleased his honour
+to commit vnto me Nicholas Dounton. Our directions were sent vs to
+Plimmouth, and we were to open them at sea.
+
+The sixt of Aprill 1594 we set sayle in the sound of Plimmouth, directing
+our course toward the coast of Spaine.
+
+The 24 of the sayd moneth at the Admirals direction wee diuided our selues
+East and West from ech other, being then in the heigth of 43 degrees, with
+commaundement at night to come together againe.
+
+The 27 day in the morning we descried the May-flower and the litle Pinnasse
+with a Prise that they had taken, being of Viana in Portugall, and bound
+for Angola in Africa. This Barke was of 28 tunnes, hauing some 17 persons
+in the same. [Sidenote: Commodities fit for Angola.] There were in her some
+12 Buts of Galicia wine, whereof we tooke into euery shippe a like part,
+with some Ruske in chests and barrels, with 5 buts of blew course cloth,
+and certaine course linnen-cloth for Negros shirts, which goods were
+diuided among our fleet.
+
+The 4 of May we had sight of our Pinnasse, and the Admirals Shallop which
+had taken three Portugall Carauels, whereof they had sent two away and kept
+the third.
+
+The second of Iune we had sight of S. Michael. The third day in the morning
+we sent our small pinnasse, which was of some 24 tunnes, with the small
+Carauell which we had taken at the Burlings to range the road of all the
+Ilands, to see if they could get any thing in the same: appointing them to
+meet vs W. S. W. 12 leagues from Faiall. Their going from vs was to no
+purpose. They missed comming to vs when we appointed, as also we missed
+them, when we had great cause to haue vsed them.
+
+The 13 of Iune we met with a mightie Carack of the East. Indies, called Las
+cinque Llagas, or The fiue wounds. The May-flower was in fight with her
+before night. I, in the Sampson, fetched her vp in the euening, and as I
+commanded to giue her the broad side, as we terme it, while I stood very
+heedefully prying to discouer her strength: and where I might giue counsel
+to boord her in the night when the Admirall came vp to vs, and as I
+remember at the very first shot she discharged at vs, I was shot in a litle
+aboue the belly, whereby I was made vnseruiceable for a good while after,
+without touching any other for that night. Yet by meanes of an honest
+truehearted man which I had with me, one captaine Grant, nothing was
+neglected: vntill midnight when the Admirall came vp, the May-flower, and
+the Sampson neuer left by turnes to ply her with their great ordinance; but
+then captaine Caue wished vs to stay till morning, at what time each one of
+vs should giue her three bouts with our great ordinance, and so clap her
+aboord: but indeed it was long lingered in the morning vntil 10 of the
+clocke before wee attempted to boord her. The Admirall laid her a boord in
+the mid ship: the May-flower comming vp in the quarter, as it should seeme,
+to lie at the sterne of the Admirall on the larboord-side. The captaine of
+the sayd May-flower was slaine at the first comming vp: whereby the ship
+fell to the sterne of the out-licar of the Carack, which (being a piece of
+timber) so wounded her foresaile, that they sayd they could come no more to
+fight, I am sure they did not, but kept aloofe from vs. The Sampson went
+aboord on the bow, but hauing not rome enough, our quarter lay on the
+Exchanges bow, and our bowe on the Caracks bowe. The Exchange also at the
+first comming had her captaine M. Caue shot into both the legs, the one
+whereof he neuer recouered, so he for that present was not able to doe his
+office, and in his absence he had not any that would vndertake to lead out
+his company to enter vpon the enemie. My friend captaine Grant did lead my
+men on the Caracks side, which being not manfully backed by the Exchanges
+men, his forces being smal, made the enemie bolder than he would haue bene,
+whereby I had sixe men presently slaine and many more hurt, which made them
+that remained vnhurt to returne aboord, and would neuer more giue the
+assault. I say not but some of the Exchanges men did very well, and many
+more (no doubt) would haue done the like, if there had bene any principall
+man to haue put them forward, and to haue brought all the company to the
+fight, and not to haue run into corners themselues. But I must needs say,
+that their ship was as well prouided for defence, as any that I haue seene.
+And the Portugals peraduenture encouraged by our slacke working, plaied the
+men and had Barricados made, where they might stand without any danger of
+our shot. They plied vs also very much with fire, so that most of our men
+were burnt in some place or other: and while our men were putting out of
+the fire, they would euer be plying them with small shot or darts. This
+vnusuall casting of fire did much dismay many of our men and made them draw
+backe as they did. When we had not men to enter, we plied our great
+ordinance much at them as high vp as they might be mounted, for otherwise
+we did them little harme, and by shooting a piece out of our forecastle
+being close by her, we fired a mat on her beak head, which more and more
+kindled, and ran from thence to the mat on the bow-sprit, and from the mat
+vp to the wood of the bow-sprit, and thence to the top saile yard, which
+fire made the Portugals abaft in the ship to stagger, and to make shew of
+parle. But they that had the charge before encouraged them, making shew,
+that it might easily be put out, and that it was nothing. Whereupon againe
+they stood stifly to their defence. Anone the fire grew so strong, that I
+saw it beyond all helpe, although she had bene already yeelded to vs. Then
+we desired to be off from her, but had little hope to obtaine our desire;
+neuerthelesse we plied water very much to keep our ship well. Indeed I made
+little other reckoning for the ship, my selfe, and diuers hurt men, then to
+haue ended there with the Carak, but most of our people might haue saved
+themselues in boats. And when my care was most, by Gods prouidence onely,
+by the burning asunder of our spritsaile-yard with ropes and saile, and the
+ropes about the spritsaile-yarde of the Carack, whereby we were fast
+intangled, we fell apart, with burning of some of our sailes which we had
+then on boord. The Exchange also being farther from the fire, afterward was
+more easily cleared, and fell off from abaft And as soone as God had put vs
+out of danger, the fire got into the fore-castle, where, I think, was store
+of Beniamin, and such other like combustible matter, for it flamed and ran
+ouer all the Carack at an instant in a maner. The Portugals lept ouer-boord
+in great numbers. Then sent I captaine Grant with the boat, with leaue to
+vse his owne discretion in sauing of them. So he brought me aboord two
+gentlemen, the one an old man called Nuno Velio Pereira, which (as
+appeareth by the 4 chapter in the first booke of the woorthy history of
+Huighen de Linschoten) was gouernour of Moçambique and Cefala, in the yeere
+1582. and since that time had bene likewise a gouernour in a place of
+importance in the East Indies. And the shippe wherein he was comming home
+was cast away a little to the East of the Cape of Buona Speranza, and from
+thence be traueiled ouer-land to Moçambique, and came as a passenger in
+this Carack. The other was called Bras Carrero, and was captaine of a
+Carack which was cast away neere Moçambique, and came likewise in this ship
+for a passenger. Also three men of the inferior sort we saued in our boat,
+onely these two we clothed and brought into England. The rest which were
+taken vp by the other ship boats, we set all on shore in the Ile of Flores,
+except some two or three Negros, whereof one was borne in Moçambique, and
+another in the East Indies. This fight was open off the Sound between Faial
+and Pico 6 leagues to the Southward. The people which we saued told vs that
+the cause why they would not yeeld, was, because this Carack was for the
+king, and that she had all the goods belonging to the king in the countrey
+for that yeere in her, and that the captaine of her was in fauor with the
+king, and at his returne into the Indies should haue bene Viceroy there.
+And withall this ship was nothing at all pestered neither within boord nor
+without, and was more like a ship of warre then otherwise: moreouer she had
+the ordinance of a Carak that was cast away at Moçambique, and the company
+of her, together with the company of another Carack that was cast away a
+little to the Eastwards of the Cape of Buona Speranza. Yet through
+sicknesse which they caught at Angola, where they watered, they say, they
+had not now aboue 150 white men, but Negros a great many. They likewise
+affirmed that they had three noblemen and three ladies in her, but we found
+them to differ in most of their talke. All this day and all the night she
+burned, but the next morning her poulder which was lowest being 60 barrels
+blew her abroad, so that most of the ship did swim in parts aboue the
+water. Some of them say, that she was bigger then the Madre de Dios, and
+some, that she was lesse: but she was much vndermastered, and vndersailed,
+yet she went well for a ship that was so foule. The shot which wee made at
+her in great Ordinance before we layde her aboord might be at seuen bouts
+which we had, and sixe or 7 shot at a bout, one with another, some 49 shot:
+the time we lay aboord might be two houres. The shot which we discharged
+aboord the Carack might be some twentie Sacars. And thus much may suffice
+concerning our daungerous conflict with that vnfortunate Carack.
+
+The last of Iune after long traversing of the seas we had sight of another
+mightie Carack which diuerse of our company at the first tooke to be the
+great S. Philip the Admiral of Spaine, but the next day being the first of
+Iuly fetching her vp we perceiued her indeede to be a Carack, which after
+some few shot bestowed vpon her we summoned to yeeld; but they standing
+stoutly to their defence vtterly refused the same. Wherefore seeing no good
+could be done without boording her I consulted what course we should take
+in the boording. But by reason that wee which were the chiefe captaines
+were partly slaine and partly wounded in the former conflict, and because
+of the murmuring of some disordered and cowardly companions, our valiant
+and resolute determinations were crossed: and to conclude a long discourse
+in few words, the Carack escaped our hands. After this attending about
+Coruo and Flores for some West Indian purchase, and being disappointed of
+our expectation, and victuals growing short, we returned for England, where
+I arriued at Portesmouth the 28 of August.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The casting away of the Tobie neere Cape Espartel corruptly called Cape
+  Sprat, without the Straight of Gibraltar on the coast of Barbarie. 1593.
+
+The Tobie of London a ship of 250 tunnes manned with fiftie men, the owner
+whereof was the worshipful M. Richard Staper, being bound for Liuorno,
+Zante and Patras in Morea, being laden with marchandize to the value of 11
+or 12 thousand pounds sterling, set sayle from Black-wall the 16 day of
+August 1593, and we went thence to Portesmouth where we tooke in great
+quantine of wheate, and set sayle foorth of Stokes bay in the Isle of
+Wight, the 6. day of October, the winde being faire: and the 16 of the same
+moneth we were in the heigth of Cape S. Vincent, where on the next morning
+we descried a sayle which lay in try right a head off vs, to which we gaue
+chase with very much winde, the sayle being a Spaniard, which wee found in
+fine so good of sayle that we were faine to leaue her and giue her ouer.
+Two dayes after this we had sight of mount Chiego, which is the first
+high-land which we descrie on the Spanish coast at the entrance of the
+Straight of Gibraltar, where we had very foule weather and the winde scant
+two dayes together. Here we lay off to the sea. The Master, whose name was
+George Goodley, being a young man, and one which neuer tooke charge before
+for those parts, was very proud of that charge which he was litle able to
+discharge, neither would take any counsel of any of his company, but did as
+he thought best himselfe, and in the end of the two dayes of foule weather
+cast about, and the winde being faire, bare in with the straights mouth.
+The 19 day at night he thinking that he was farther off the land than he
+was, bare sayle all that night, and an houre and an halfe before day had
+ranne our shippe ypon the ground on the coast of Barbarie without the
+straight foure leagues to the South of Cape Espartel. Whereupon being all
+not a litle astonied, the Master said vnto vs, I pray you forgiue me; for
+this is my fault and no mans else. The company asked him whether they
+should cut off the main mast: no said the Master, we will hoyse out our
+boate. But one of our men comming speedily vp, said, Sirs, the ship is full
+of water, well sayd the Master, then cut the mayne-mast ouer boord: which
+thing we did with all speede. But the afterpart suddenly split a sunder in
+such sort that no man was able to stand vpon it, but all fled vpon the
+foremast vp into the shrouds thereof; and hung there for a time: but seeing
+nothing but present death approch (being so suddenly taken that we could
+not make a raft which we had determined) we committed our selues vnto the
+Lord and beganne with dolefull tune and heauy hearts to sing the 12 Psalme.
+Helpe Lord for good and godly men &c. Howbeit before we had finished foure
+verses the waues of the sea had stopped the breathes of most of our men.
+For the foremast with the weight of our men and the force of the sea fell
+downe into the water, and vpon the fall thereof there were 38 drowned, and
+onely 12 by Gods prouidence partly by swimming and other meanes of chests
+gote on shoare, which was about a quarter of a mile from the wracke of the
+ship. The master called George Goodley, and William Palmer his mate, both
+perished. M. Cæsar also being captaine and owner was likewise drowned: none
+of the officers were saued but the carpenter.
+
+We twelue which the Lord had deliuered from extreme danger of the Sea, at
+our comming ashore fell in a maner into as great distresse. At our first
+comming on shore we all fell downe on our knees, praying the Lord most
+humbly for his merciful goodnesse. Our prayers being done, we consulted
+together what course to take, seeing we were fallen into a desert place,
+and we traueled all that day vntill night, sometimes one way and sometimes
+another, and could finde no kinde of inhabitants; onely we saw where wilde
+beasts had bene, and places where there had bene houses, which after we
+perceiued to haue bene burnt by the Portugals. So at night falling into
+certaine groues of oliue trees, we climed vp and sate in them to auoid the
+danger of lions and other wilde beasts, whereof we saw many the next
+morning. The next day we trauelled vntill three of the clocke in the
+afternoone without any food but water and wilde date roots: then going ouer
+a mountaine, we had sight of Cape Espartel; whereby we knew somewhat better
+which way to trauell, and then we went forward vntill we came to an
+hedgerow made with great long canes; we spied and looked ouer it, and
+beheld a number of men aswell horsemen as footmen, to the number of some
+fiue thousand in skirmish together with small shot and other weapons. And
+after consultation what we were best to do, we concluded to yeeld our
+selues vnto them, being destitute of all meanes of resistance. So rising vp
+we marched toward them, who espying vs, foorthwith some hundred of them
+with their iauelings in their hands came running towards vs as though they
+would haue run vs thorow: howbeit they onely strooke vs flatling with their
+weapons, and said that we were Spaniards: and we tolde them that we were
+Englishmen: which they would not beleeue yet. By and by the conflict being
+ended, and night approching, the captaine of the Moores, a man of some 56
+yeres olde, came himselfe vnto vs, and by his interpreter which spake
+Italian, asked what we were and from whence we came. One Thomas Henmer of
+our company which could speake Italian, declared vnto him that we were
+marchants, and how by great misfortune our ship, marchandise, and the
+greatest part of our company were pitifully cast away vpon their coast. But
+he void of all humainity and all manhood, for all this, caused his men to
+strip vs out of our apparel euen to our shirts to see what money and iewels
+we had about vs: which when they had found to the value of some 200 pounds
+in golde and pearles they gaue vs some of our apparel againe, and bread and
+water onely to comfort vs. The next morning they carried vs downe to the
+shore where our shippe was cast away, which was some sixteene miles from
+that place. In which iourney they vsed vs like their slaues, making vs
+(being extreame weake,) to carry their stuffe, and offering to beat vs if
+we went not so fast as they. We asked them why they vsed vs so, and they
+replied, that we were their captiues: we said we were their friends, and
+that there was neuer Englishman captiue to the king of Marocco. So we came
+downe to the ship, and lay there with them seuen dayes, while they had
+gotten all the goods they could, and then they parted it amongst them.
+After the end of these seuen dayes the captaine appointed twenty of his men
+wel armed, to bring vs vp into the countrey: and the first night we came to
+the side of a riuer called Alarach, where we lay on the grasse all that
+night: so the next day we went ouer the riuer in a frigate of nine oares on
+a side, the riuer being in that place aboue a quarter of a mile broad: and
+that day we went to a towne of thirty houses, called Totteon: there we lay
+foure dayes hauing nothing to feed on but bread and water: and then we went
+to a towne called Cassuri, and there we were deliuered by those twenty
+souldiers vnto the Alcaide, which examined vs what we were: and we tolde
+him. He gaue vs a good answere, and sent vs to the Iewes house, where we
+lay seuen dayes. In the meane while that we lay here, there were brought
+thither twenty Spaniards and twenty Frenchmen, which Spaniards were taken
+in a conflict on land, but the Frenchmen were by foule weather cast on land
+within the Straights about Cape de Gate, and so made captiues. Thus at the
+seuen dayes end we twelue Englishmen, the twelue French, and the twenty
+Spaniards were all conducted toward Marocco with nine hundred souldiers
+horsemen and fotmen, and in two dayes iourney we came to the riuer of Fez,
+where we lodged all night, being prouided of tents. The next day we went to
+a towne called Salle, and lay without the towne in tents. From thence we
+trauelled almost an hundred miles without finding any towne, but euery
+night we came to fresh water, which was partly running water and sometime
+raine water. So we came at last within three miles of the city of Marocco,
+where we pitched our tents: and there we mette with a carrier which did
+trauel in the countrey for the English marchants: and by him we sent word
+vnto them of our estate; and they returned the next day vnto vs a Moore,
+which brought vs victuals, being at that instant very feeble and hungry:
+and withall sent vs a letter with pen, inke, and paper, willing vs to write
+vnto them what ship it was that was cast away, and how many and what men
+there were aliue. For said they we would knowe with speed, for to morow is
+the kings court: and therefore we would know, for that you should come into
+the citie like captiues. But for all that we were carried in as captiues
+and with ropes about our neckes as well English as the French and
+Spaniards. And so we were carried before the king: and when we came before
+him he did commit vs all to ward, where wee lay 15 dayes in close prison:
+and in the end we were cleared by the English Marchants to their great
+charges; for our deliuerance cost them 700 ounces, euery ounce in that
+country contayning two shillings. And when we came out of prison we went to
+the Alfandica, where we continued eight weekes with the English marchants.
+At the end of which time being well apparelled by the bountie of our
+marchants we were conueyed downe by the space of eight dayes iourney to S.
+Cruz, where the English ships road: where we tooke shipping about the 20 of
+March, two in the Anne Francis of London, and fiue more of vs fiue dayes
+after in the Expedition of London, and two more in a Flemish flie-boat, and
+one in the Mary Edward also of London, other two of our number died in the
+countrey of the bloodie-fluxe: the one at our first imprisonment at
+Marocco, whose name was George Hancock, and the other at S. Cruz, whose
+name was Robert Swancon, whose death was hastened by eating of rootes and
+other vnnatural things to slake their raging hunger in our trauaile, and by
+our hard and cold lodging in the open fields without tents. Thus of fiftie
+persons through the rashnesse of an vnskilfull Master ten onely suruiued of
+vs, and after a thousand miseries returned home poore, sicke, and feeble
+into our countrey.
+
+Richard Iohnson.
+William Williams Carpenter.
+Iohn Durham.
+Abraham Rouse.
+Iohn Matthewes.
+Thomas Henmore.
+Iohn Siluester.
+Thomas Whiting.
+William Church.
+Iohn Fox.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The letters of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie sent by one Laurence
+  Aldersey vnto the Emperour of Aethiopia, 1597.
+
+Inuictissimo potentissimoque Abassenorum regi, magnoque vtriusque Aethiopiæ
+imperatori &c.
+
+Elizabetha Dei gratia Angliæ, Franciæ, et Hiberniæ regina, fidei defensor
+&c. summo ac potentissimo Æthiopiæ imperatori salutem. Quod ab omnibus qui
+vbiuis terrarum ac gentium sunt regibus principibusque præstari par et
+æquum est, vt quanquàm maximo locorum interuallo dissiti, et moribus ac
+legibus discrepantes, communem tamen generis humani societatem tueri et
+conseruare, mutuáque vt occasio ferret, charitatis et beneuolentiæ officia
+velint exercere: in eo nos de vestra fide atque humanitate spem certissimam
+concipientes huic subito nostro Laurentio Alderseio in regnum vestrum
+proficiscenti, hasce literas nostras, quibus et nostra erga vos
+beneuolentia testata sit, et illum hinc profectum esse constet, potissimùm
+vobis indicandus dedimus. Qui cùm orbis terrarum perscrutandi
+cognoscendique studio permotus, multis antehàc regionibus peragratis, iam
+tandem in eas regiones, quæ vestræ ditionis sunt, longum, periculosumque
+iter instituat: cùm ipse existimauit, tum nos etiam sumus in eadem
+opinione, ad incolumitatem suam, atque etiam ad gratiam apud vos, plurimum
+illi prafuturum, si diplomate nostro munitus, beneuolenentiæ nostræ et
+profectionis hinc suæ testimonium ad vos deferret. Nam cum summus ille
+mundi conditor rectorque præpotens Deus, regibus principibusque qui suam
+vicem gerunt, orbem terrarum, suis cuique finibus pro rata portione
+designatis, regendum atque administrandum dederit; eoque munere ius quoddam
+inter eos fraternæ necessitudinis, æternumque foedus ab illis colendum
+sanxerit: non erit (vt arbitramur) ingratum vobis, cùm beneuolentiæ nostræ
+significationem, tàm immensa maris ac terrarum spatia transgressam, ab
+vltima Britannia ad vos in Aetheiopiam perferri intellexeritis. Nobisque
+rursùs erit incundum, cùm subditorum nostrorum prædicatione, ab ipsis Nili
+fontibus, et ab ijs regionibus quæ solis cursum definiunt, fama vestri
+nominis ad nos recurret. Erit igitur humanitatis vestræ huic subdito nostro
+eam largiri gratiam, vt in ditionem vestram sub præsidio ac tutela vestri
+nominis intrare, ibique saluus et incolumis manere possit: quod ipsum etiam
+ab aliis principibus, per quorum regiones illi transeundum erit magnoperè
+petimus, nobisque ipsis illud honoris causa tributum existimabimus: néque
+tamèn maiorem hac in re gratiam postulamus, quàm vicissim omnium principum
+subditis, omniumque gentium hominibus ad nos commeantibus liberrimè
+concedimus. Datum Londini quinto die Nouembris: anno regni nostri tricesimo
+nono: annoque Dom. 1597.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+To the most inuincible and puissant king of the Abassens, the mightie
+Emperour of Aethiopia the higher and the lower.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. To the most high and mightie Emperour of
+Aethiopia greeting. Whereas it is a matter requisite and well beseeming all
+kings and princes of what lands or nations soeuer, be they neuer so much
+disseuered in place or differing in customes and lawes, to maintaine and
+preserue the common societie of mankinde, and, as occassion shall be
+offered, to performe mutuall duties of charitie and beneuolence: we for
+that cause concerning most undoubted hope of your princely fidelity and
+courtesie, haue giuen vnto this our subiect Laurence Aldersey intending to
+trauell into your dominions, these our letters to be deliuered without
+faile vnto your Highnesse, to the end they may be a testimony of our good
+will towards you and of our saide subiect his departure from England. Who,
+after his trauels in many forren countreys, being as yet enflamed with a
+desire more throughly to surueigh and contemplate the world, and now at
+length to vndertake a long and daungerous iourney into your territories and
+regions: both the sayd Laurence thought, and our selues also deemed, that
+it would very much auaile him, as well for his owne safetie as for the
+attayning of your fauour, if, being protected with our broad seale, hee
+might transport vnto your Highnesse a testimony of our louing affection and
+of his departure from hence. For sithence almightie God the highest
+creatour and gouernour of the world hath allotted vnto kings and princes
+his vicegerents [sic--KTH] ouer the face of the whole earth, their designed
+portions and limits to be ruled and administred by them; and by this his
+gift hath established among them a certaine law of brotherly kindnesse, and
+an eternall league by them to be obserued: it will not (we hope) seeme
+vnpleasant vnto your highnesse, when you shall haue intelligence of our
+louing letters sent so huge a distance ouer sea and land, euen from the
+farthest realme of England vnto you in Aethiopia. On the other side our
+selues shall take great solace and delight, when as by the relation of our
+owne subiects, the renowme of your name shall be brought vnto vs from the
+fountains of Nilus, and from those regions which are situate vnder the
+Southerne Tropike. May it please you therefore of your princely clemencie
+to vouchsafe so much fauour on this our subiect, that he may, vnder the
+safeguard and protection of your name, enter into your highnesse dominions,
+and there remaine safe and free from danger. Which fauour and courtesie wee
+doe likewise most earnestly request at the hands of other princes, through
+whose Seigniories our said subject is to passe; and we shall esteeme it as
+done vnto our selfe and for our honours sake.
+
+Neither do we require any greater fauour in this behalfe, then we are vpon
+the like occasion most ready to graunt unto the subiects of all princes and
+the people of all Nations, trauelling into our dominions. Given at London
+the fift day of Nouember, in the thirtie and ninth yeere of our reigne: and
+in the yeare of our Lord 1597.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX
+
+THE OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE.
+
+[Footnote: The Editor takes this opportunity of making grateful
+acknowledgements to the Marquis of Stafford, for his permission to print
+this Tract from his curious Manuscript; and to the Reverend H. J. Todd, for
+furnishing him with the accurate transcript from which it is printed.]
+
+The first and greatest occasion let slip in our Voyage was, that we did not
+possess ourselues of the fleete that was bound for the Indies, the lading
+whereof would not onelie haue paid all charges of the iorneie, but haue
+enabled vs a great while to wage warre with Spaine, with the meanes of
+Spaine. To which I aunswere, that if either I had ben followed the first
+morning of our comminge before the harbor when I bare with it, or if we had
+entred the same Sundaie in the afternoone when we were vnder saile, and
+within cannon shot of the enemies fleete, or after the men of warre were
+taken and burnt, the nexte daie if anie shipping had gone vp as I vrged by
+mine owne speech sent by Sir Anthonie Ashlie, who being secretaire at wars
+was to record euerie mans seruice or omission; if anie of these had ben
+don, then I saie had that fleete ben easilie possessed. For the first
+morning they had neither their men aboard, as it was since confessed by our
+prisoners, nor were provided of any counsel what to doe. In the afternoone
+the same daie we had found the men of warre and the Marchaunts fleet
+altogether in one bodie, and engaged them both at once, so as at the same
+time we had defeated the one, we had possessed the other. And the next daie
+presentlie vpon the fight and victorie against the Kings shipps, we had
+found them all so amazed and confounded as they would haue thought of
+nothing but of sauing themselues, and we had taken the ships, the riches in
+them, and the fleet of gallies, without striking a blow; as both our
+prisoners and captaines out of the gallies haue assured vs. But the first
+morninge when I boare with the harbor, almost all the fleet came to an
+ancker by the point Saint Sebastian a league wide of me, and gaue the
+enemie leasure to send men and all necessaries aboard. When I was gon in, I
+could neither get my companion to waigh his anckor, nor most of those that
+were waied to goe in with me. And the next daie I had much a do to make our
+ships fight at all. And when God had giuen vs victorie, my perswasions nor
+protestations could make them that were sea-commaunders go or send vp to
+possess the fleet of the Indies, whiles we assailed the towne, so as the
+enemie had almost 48. howers to burne his owne shipps.
+
+The second imputation that maie be laid to vs, was, that we did abandon
+Cales, when we were possesst of it, whereas the holding of it would haue
+ben a naile not in the foote of this great monarch but in his side, and
+haue serued for a diversion of all the wars in these parts. To which I
+aunswere, that some of our sea-commaunders, and especiallie my colleague,
+did not onelie oppose themselues to that designe, (whose oppositions mine
+instructions made an absolute barre,) but when we came to see how the
+forces that should be left there might be victualed till succours came, the
+victualls were for the most part hidden and embeazled, and euery ship began
+at that instant to feare their wants, and to talke of goeing home; soe as I
+should neither haue had one ship to staie at Cales, nor victualls for the
+garrison for 2. moneths. And therefore I was forced to leaue Cales, and did
+not choose to abandon it.
+
+The third obiection we haue to aunswere is, whie we did not lie for the
+carricks and Indian ships, seing we were on the coast the verie time that
+is thought fittest for their intercepting and vsual of their retourne. In
+which I must first cite the testimonie of all our commanders by land and
+sea, that when we had in our retourne from Cales doubled the Cape St.
+Vincent comonlie called the South Cape, I vrged our going to th' Islands of
+Ozores, founding my selfe vpon these reasons: first, that it was more
+certaine to attend them at the land-fall where theie must needs touch, then
+to seeke them in the wide sea; and next, that the aduises sent out of
+Spaine and Portingall since our being of myght meete them at the Islands,
+and make them divert from coming thither. Besides, the Spaniards after
+theie saw vs engaged at Cales would neuer suspect or dreame of our goeing
+to the Islands. And when this counsell was reiected, and we come in the
+sight of Lisbon, I there againe pressed the lieing for them with a selected
+fleet, and offered vpon that condition to send home the land-forces, and
+all such ships as want of victualls, leaks sickness, or anie thing els had
+made vnfit to staie out at sea. But first the L. Admirall and Sr. Wa[l]ter
+Rawligh did directlie by attestation vnder their hands contradict the first
+proposition that I made, that some ships should attend that seruice. And
+when we came to the hypothesis, which were fitt and their captaines content
+to staie out in all the fleet, except the Low Countrie Squadron, there
+could be found but two, my L. Thom. Howard and my selfe; so as by the whole
+counsell at wars, it was resolued that as well my offer and opinion, as
+euerie mans els amongst vs, should be kept vnder his hand, for our
+particuler discharges, and I be barred of staieing, except my L. Admirall
+would assent to leaue some 8. or 10. of the Marchaunts ships besides 2. of
+the Queenes: which he refused to doe: and soe our dessigne brake of.
+
+The last omission maie seeme to be in this, that since all our seruice
+consisted in taking or distroyinge the Spanish shipping and sea prouisions,
+that we did not looke into all his chiefe ports, and do him in that kind as
+much hurt as we might haue done. To which I aunswere, that first my end in
+going to Cales was not onlie because it was a principall port and the
+likeliest to be held by vs, by cause of the seat and naturall strength of
+it; but also for that it was the farthest good porte south-ward; so as
+beginning with it we might, if some greater seruice did not diuert vs, goe
+to all the good ports betwixt that and the northmost ports of Biskaie:
+which was a better waie then to haue begonne or giuen the enemie an alarum
+in the middest of his Countrie, or the neerest ports to vs; for so our
+attempts would haue ben more difficile, and our retreats at last from those
+farthest ports less safe; considering the wants, infections, and other
+inconveniences that for the most parte doe accompanie the retraicts of our
+fleet and armies in long iourneies. But after we had ended at Cales, it was
+by all our seamen thought a capitall offence to name the goeing ouer the
+Barre at St. Lucars. Betwixt St Lucars and Lisbone there is no good porte.
+From Lisbone I was barred by name, if it had bene free for vs to haue gone.
+Yet our seamen are made of the same stuffe, Sr. Francis D: and his companie
+was, when theie lost the occasion of his taking Lisbone, for feare of
+passing by the castle of St. Iulian's. From Lisbone to the Groine there is
+no port to hold the Kings or anie other great shipping. To the Groin with
+cart-ropes I drew them: for both I vowed and protested against their
+refusall, and parted companie with them when they offered to hold another
+course. But when we came to the mouth of the harbor, and sent in some of
+our small vessells, we saw there was nothing there, nor yet at Furroll; for
+into that port also we made our discouveries to looke.
+
+After which discouverie we held our last counsell. And then I vrged our
+goeing to St. Audica, the passage St. Sebastian, and all other good ports
+all along the coast. But mine associat did altogether refuse to goe farther
+alonge the coaste, complaininge of wants, and obiecting our being embayed,
+and I know not what. In which opinion Sir Walter Rawlighe strengthened him;
+and theie were both desirous to take vpon them the honnor of breaking that
+dessigne. And of landing at the Groyne, or attempting the towne, theie
+would not heare by anie meanes. And presentlie euery man cried to set saile
+homewards. Since which time theie haue made such haste, as I, tarieing
+behind to bring along with me the St. Andrew taken at Cales and the flie
+boate that carries our artillarie haue lost them all, sauing Monsieur
+Oauerworme and his squadron, and some few small shipps.
+
+[These "Omissions" were not included in the early editions, but appeared in
+Woodfall's edition of 1812].
+
+
+
+
+INDICES.
+
+Where the same Document a given in Latin and English, the reference is
+to the English Version.
+
+N.B. The large print indicates that the _whole_ section refers to the
+subject mentioned.
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. VIII.
+
+ACHIM, (Sultan of Egypt).
+ACRE.
+AIGUES MORTES.
+AILWIN, founds Ramsey Abbey.
+ALBEMARLE (John, Earl of).
+ALCAYR. See _Cairo_.
+ALFRED, (King), sends Sighelmus to India.
+ALURED, (Bishop of Worcester). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+AMAZONS.
+AMBASSADORS SENT TO CONSTANTINOPLE BY EDWARD THE CONFESSOR.
+ARABIA.
+ARUNDEL (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE.
+ASSUR.
+ATHELARD. HIS TRAUAILES.
+
+BABYLON.
+BALDWIN (Archbishop of Canterbury), HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES.
+BALDWIN (of Bouillon).
+BALDWIN (King of Jerusalem), defeats Saracens.
+BALE, quoted,
+  --HIS LIFE OF MANDEVILLE.
+BANGOR COLLEGE, Pelagius its head.
+BASSET (William).
+BATH (Abbey of).
+BAUGIE (F. de).
+BEAUCHAMP, family.
+BEDA, quoted.
+BETHLEHEM.
+BOHUN (Henry), his death.
+BRENSE (Peter de).
+BRUNO, murdered by Sweyn.
+
+CÆLIUS (Mount).
+CÆSARIA.
+CAIRO.
+CANUTE.
+CAYPHAS (city).
+CELESTINE.
+CHANTENAY (P. de).
+CHAPMAN, quoted.
+CHESTER.
+CHESTER (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE.
+CHRONICON HIEROSOLYMITANUM, quoted.
+CLERMONT.
+CONRAD, Emperor of Germany.
+CONSTANTINOPLE.
+CROYLAND (Abbey).
+CRUSADE, preached by Urban.
+CURSON, (Robert). HIS TRAUAILES.
+CYPRUS.
+
+DAMIETTA, (Siege of).
+DES ROCHES, (Pierre). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+DEWIN, (P. de).
+DEWIN, (W. de).
+
+EARTH, its form.
+EDGAR (Prince). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+EDMUND (Prince).
+EDWARD (The Confessor). SENDS AMBASSADORS TO CONSTANTINOPLE.
+EDWARD I. HIS VOYAGE INTO ASIA.
+EGYPT.
+EPHESUS (Seven Sleepers of).
+
+FONTENELLE (Abbey).
+FORTIS (W.).
+FURNIVALL (Gerard).
+FURNIVALL (Thomas).
+FURNIVALL (William).
+
+GENNADIUS, quoted.
+GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted.
+GLOUCESTER Cathedral founded.
+GODERICUS; HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND.
+GODFREY (de Bouillon).
+GODWIN (Earl).
+GREEK ALPHABET.
+GUIMUNDE, Patriarch of Jerusalem.
+GUTUERE, HER VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+
+HADERWERCK (of Westphalia).
+HARDINE. HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND.
+HAROLD (King).
+HEBREW ALPHABET.
+HENRY II. ASSIGNS MONEY TO THE CRUSADES.
+HERMANNUS, companion of Robertus Kettenensis.
+HOLINSHED, quoted.
+HOLY LAND, _passim_.
+HONORIUS, quoted,
+  --pope.
+HOVEDEN (Roger), quoted.
+HUGH of Tabaria, Patriarch,
+  --Killed.
+HUNGARY.
+
+ICONIUM,
+  --Battle of.
+INGULPHUS'S Journey to Jerusalem,
+  --quoted,
+  --notice of.
+
+JAVA, Mandeville's account of.
+JERUSALEM. SWEYN'S JOURNEY to,
+  --ALURED'S JOURNEY,
+  --JOURNEY OF INGULPHUS,
+  --JOURNEY OF ROBERT CURTHOSE,
+  --VOYAGE OF GUTUERE,
+  --VOYAGE OF PRINCE EDGAR,
+  --VOYAGE OF JOHN LACY,
+  --W. MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE,
+  --VOYAGE OF PIERRE DES ROCHES,
+  --described by Mandeville.
+
+JOHN (King). HIS CONTRIBUTION TO THE HOLY LAND.
+JOPPA,
+  --VISITED BY A FLEET OF ENGLISH, DANES, ETC.
+JULIAN (the Apostate).
+
+LACY (John). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+LEDET (W.).
+LELAND, quoted.
+LIEGE.
+LOUIS (King of France).
+LUCY (Geoffrey de).
+LYNN.
+
+MAHOMET.
+MALLOW, (P. De).
+MANDEVILLE, (Sir J). HIS LIFE BY BALE,
+  --HIS EPITAPH,
+  --CONTENTS OF HIS BOOK,
+  --HIS VOYAGES IN LATIN BEGIN,
+  --IN ENGLISH,
+  --Prologue,
+  --From England to Constantinople,
+  --Of the cross and crown of Jesu Christ,
+  --Of the city of Constantinople and the faith of the Greeks,
+  --From Constantinople to Jerusalem,
+  --Of St John the Evangelist,
+  --Legend of the daughter of Hippocrates,
+  --Of the Soudans and the tower of Babiloyn,
+  --Of the desert between the church of St Catherine and Jerusalem,
+  --Of the dry tree,
+  --How roses came first in the world,
+  --Of the pilgrimages in Jerusalem and of the holy places thereabout,
+  --Of the temple of our Lord, Of the crueltie of King Heroud,
+  --Of Mount Syon,
+  --Of Probatica Piscina,
+  --Of Natatorium Siloe,
+  --Of the Dead Sea,
+  --Of Jordan,
+  --Of the Head of St. John the Baptist,
+  --Of the Samaritans,
+  --Of Galilee,
+  --Of Antichrist,
+  --Of Nazareth,
+  --Of the age of our Lady,
+  --Of the day of Doom,
+  --Of the Jacobites,
+  --Of the Surryenes,
+  --Of the Georgians,
+  --Of Damascus,
+  --Of three ways to Jerusalem,
+  --Of the Saracens,
+  --Of Mahomet,
+  --Of Albany and Lybia,
+  --Of the Wisshinges for Wacchinge of the Sperhauk,
+  --Of Noah,
+  --Of the land of Job,
+  --Of the Chaldeans,
+  --Of Amazons,
+  --Of the true diamond,
+  --Of Indian islands,
+  --Of idols,
+  --Of pepper,
+  --Of a marvellous well,
+  --Of St Thomas,
+  --Of the citie Of Calamye,
+  --Of the isle of Lamary,
+  --Of the form of the Earth,
+  --Of Java,
+  --Of Oracles,
+  --Some wonderful nations,
+  --Of the Great Khan of Cathay.
+MANDEVILLE, (William), Earl of Essex. HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+MANICHES, Emperor of Constantinople.
+MANUEL, Emperor of Constantinople. His LETTER TO HENRY II.
+MARASIA.
+MARSEILLES.
+MATTHEW OF WESTMINSTER, quoted.
+MAXIMUS, King of Britain.
+MONTFORT, (Simon de).
+
+NAZARETH,
+  --taken.
+NEVEL or NEVILLE (John).
+
+OCTOBONUS.
+OLYMPIC games.
+OLYMPUS.
+ORIEL COLLEGE,(_note_).
+OTHO (of Roges).
+
+PAMPELUNA, 30.
+PARIS (Matthew), quoted.
+PASHED, meaning of word.
+PELAGIAN HERESY, hatched.
+PELAGIUS, LIFE AND TRAUAILES OF.
+PESMES (Gerald).
+PETRUS DE RUPIBUS, _see Des Roches_.
+
+RAMA, Siege of.
+RAMSEY ABBEY,
+  --Its foundation.
+RICHARD, (Canonicus), HIS TRAUAILES.
+RICHARD, (Earl of Cornwall). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA.
+ROBERT, (Curthose); HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+ROBERT (son of Godwin), accompanies Prince Edgar to Jerusalem.
+ROBERTUS KETENENSIS. HIS TRAUAILES.
+
+ST. ALBANS.
+ST. AUMOND (A. de).
+SALISBURY (William Longespee, Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA,
+  --his death.
+SHERBORNE Abbey.
+SIGHELMUS (Bishop of Sherborne). A TESTIMONIE OF HIS
+  MISSION TO INDIA,
+  --A SECOND TESTIMONY.
+STANLAW Abbey, founded.
+SWANUS, HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+SYRIA.
+
+TABARIA (see TIBERIAS).
+TABOR (Mount).
+TEMPLARS (Knights).
+TIBERIAS.
+TILNEY, (Sir Frederick). A NOTE CONCERNING HIM.
+TILNEY, (Thomas).
+TRAPANI.
+TURNEHAM (R.), HIS TRAUAILL.
+TYRE.
+
+URBAN (Pope).
+
+VIRGIL (Polydore), quoted.
+VOISIE (J.).
+
+WAKE (Hugh).
+WALDEN'S epistle to Martin the fifth, quoted.
+WALTER (Hubert). HIS TRAUAILES.
+WHITEMAN, (Andrew). HIS TRAUAILES.
+WILLIAM OF MALMESBURY, quoted.
+WILLIAM OF NEWBURY, quoted.
+WILLIAM OF TYRE, quoted,
+  --HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES.
+WINCHESTER, (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE.
+WITRAZH, (Bernard).
+WOLSTAN, Abbot of Gloucester.
+
+
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+ADAM'S MOUNT.
+ALDERSEY, (Laurence). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+ALDRIDGE, (M.).
+ALEXANDRIA.
+ASCENSION, (Ship).
+ASSASSINS, (nation).
+AUGUSTA, (island).
+AZARON.
+
+BABEL, (Tower of).
+BABYLON,
+  --coins and measures.
+BARNACLES, growing on trees.
+BARNARD CASTLE.
+BARRETT (W). HIS ACCOUNT OF THE MONEY AND MEASURES
+  OF THE EAST.
+BARTON, (E.). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA.
+BASAN.
+BASSORA,
+  --coins and measures.
+BECK (Anthony). MADE PATRIARCH OF JERUSALEM.
+BETHLEHEM.
+BEZENEGAR.
+BIR.
+BODIN OR DADIN, (island).
+BOLINGBROKE, (Henry, Earl of). His quarrel with Thomas
+  Mowbray.
+BROADBANK, (W.).
+BUSHELL, (E.).
+
+CADIZ.
+CÆSAR, (F.), quoted.
+CAIDO.
+CAIRO.
+CAKAM.
+CALVARY.
+CAMBAIA.
+CAMBALETH.
+CAMPA.
+CANDIA.
+CARMEL. (mount).
+CASSAN or CASSIBIN.
+CASTLER, (N.).
+CATZA.
+CEPHALONIA, (island).
+CEUSKALA.
+CEYLON.
+CHALDEANS. Their manners.
+CHARGES FROM ALEPPO TO GOA.
+CHATAGAN.
+CHAUL.
+CHILENSO.
+CHIO.
+CICERO. His tomb.
+CLEMENT V., Pope.
+CLOVES.
+COCHIN
+  --Coins and measures.
+COINS
+  --ancient.
+COMUM.
+CORFU.
+CORNARI FAMILY.
+CREMATION of dead.
+CROCODILES
+CUSTOMS, (strange).
+CYPRUS
+  --ruins in.
+
+DAMAN.
+DIAMONDS.
+DIU.
+
+ELIZABETH (Queen), a present from the Sultan of Turkey's wife.
+ELTHAM.
+
+FAMAGUSTA.
+FEASTS of the Tartars.
+FILA CAVENNA (ship).
+FILLIE (D.).
+
+FISH, an abundance of
+  --Caught by birds.
+FOSTER (R.), appointed Consul in Syria
+  --Letter of directions to.
+FREDERICK (Cæsar), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST.
+FROISSART, quoted.
+FUCO.
+
+GANGES (river).
+GELBER, (A.), death of.
+GESTE.
+GINGER.
+GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted.
+GOA
+  --Besieged
+  --Coins and measures.
+GREECE (Patriarch of).
+GRIDA.
+
+HAKLUYT'S NOTE TO MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE.
+HAREBORNE, (W.).
+HENRY IV. HIS INTENDED VOYAGE TO THE HOLY LAND.
+HEWISH (R.).
+HICKOCKE (T.), HIS TRANSLATION OF FREDERICK'S VOYAGE.
+HOLLINSHED, quoted.
+HUNTINGTON (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+
+IANZU.
+IDOL (a strange).
+INDIA (Upper).
+INNS.
+
+JAVA.
+JENISE, (M.).
+JERUSALEM
+  --JOHN LOCKE'S VOYAGE
+  --L. Aldersey's voyage.
+JOPPA.
+
+KARAMORON river.
+KEELE (J.).
+
+LELAND, quoted.
+LEZINA (island).
+LINDSEY.
+LISSA (island).
+LOCKE, (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM
+  --Testimonial to him from the vicar of Mount Syon.
+
+MAHOMET, his dress.
+MALABAR.
+MALACCA
+  --Coins and measures.
+MALIAPOR.
+MANCY (province).
+MANDEVILLE, HIS VOYAGE CONTINUED
+  --Of the Tartars
+  --Of the Emperor of Persia
+  --Of various countries
+  --Of Prester John
+  --Of the Valley Perilous
+  --Some curious nations
+  --Of the Isle of
+  Bragman
+  --of King Alexander
+  --Of the name of Prester John
+  --Of Pissemyres
+  --Of the rivers of Paradise
+  --Of various islands
+  --Conclusion
+  --Hakluyt's note on Mandeville's voyage
+  --Passage of Pliny illustrating above.
+MANNA.
+MARTAVAN.
+MATAPAN (cape).
+MATTHEW GONSON (ship).
+MECCA, A DESCRIPTION OF THE PILGRIMAGE TO
+  --Described.
+MEDINA.
+MELEDA (island).
+MELISTORTE.
+MERCHANDISE, WHENCE VARIOUS KINDS ARE PROCURED.
+MONSOON.
+MOUMORAN (island).
+MURAD KHAN, Emperour of Turkey.
+
+NEGAPATAN.
+NESTORIANS.
+NORFOLK (Thomas Mowbray, duke of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+NUTMEGS.
+
+ODORICUS. HIS JOURNEY AMONG THE TARTARS.
+  --His journey from Pera to Thana
+  --To further India
+  --His return
+  --His death.
+OLD MAN of the Mountains
+  --His death.
+OPIUM.
+ORISA.
+ORMUS
+  --coins and measures.
+OSBORNE, (E.).
+
+PALM TREES.
+PEARL FISHERIES.
+PEGU.
+PELAGOSA (island).
+PELICANS.
+PEPPER, how grown.
+PERA.
+PIGMIES.
+PLINY, quoted.
+POLUMBRUM.
+
+QUINZAI.
+
+RAGUSA, tributary of Turkey.
+RAMUSIUS, quoted.
+RAYNOLDS (ship).
+ROSETTO.
+ROVIGNIO.
+RUBIES.
+RUBRICIS, (W de), quoted.
+
+SAILS made of reeds.
+ST. THOMAS
+  --His tomb.
+SALARIES OF OFFICERS OF GRAND SIGNOR'S COURT.
+SATAGAN.
+SIAM.
+SOBISSACLAO.
+STAPER, (R.).
+SULTANIA.
+SUMACOTO.
+SUMATRA.
+SYLAN (island). See _Ceylon_.
+
+TATHALAMASIN (island).
+TAURIS.
+THALAY, a river.
+THANA.
+THIBET.
+TORTOISES.
+TREBIZONDE.
+TREES, (curious).
+TRIPOLIS.
+TURKS, number of soldiers sent against Emperor.
+TYPHOON.
+
+VENICE.
+VIRGILE, (P.) quoted.
+
+WALSINGHAM (T.) quoted.
+WILKINSON (T.).
+WINCHESTER (Bishop of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+WRAG (Richard). HIS LETTER TO ROWLAND HEWISH.
+
+ZAITON.
+ZANTE.
+
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. X.
+
+ABILFADA ISMAEL, quoted.
+AGRA.
+ALDWORTH, (R).
+ALEPPO, ENTERED BY SOLIMAN,
+  --Mentioned.
+AMURATH I.
+AMURATH II.
+ANDERSON, (H.).
+ANSELL, (E.).
+ANTOGIL (Bay of).
+ARCULFUS.
+ARTILLERY, of Mahomet II.
+ASHLEY, (R.).
+ASPLEY, (W.), Bookseller.
+
+BABEL (Tower of).
+BABYLON.
+BAJAZET I.
+BALSARA.
+BALY (island).
+BANNING, (A.).
+BANNING, (P.).
+BANTAM
+  --described.
+BARNE, (George).
+BARNES, (P.).
+BARRETT, (W.).
+BATE, (R.).
+BEAUVAIS, (V. de).
+BELLAPORE.
+BELLERGAN.
+BIRRA.
+BISAPORE.
+BLUNT, (J.).
+BOND, (G.).
+BONDE, (M.).
+BORROUGH, (W.).
+BOSTOCK, (T.).
+BRAHMINS.
+BROOKE, (R.).
+BURSE.
+
+CAMBAIETTA.
+CAPE OF GOOD HOPE.
+CARPINI, (J. de P.).
+CAVIARE.
+CEYLON.
+CHAUL.
+CHINA (King of).
+CLARKE, (R.).
+CLAUDIAN, quoted.
+COMMENUS, family.
+COMORIN, (cape).
+CONSTANTINOPLE.
+CORDALL, (T.).
+COUCHE, (? Quichew).
+COWLTHIRST, (H.).
+COXE, (R.).
+CREMATION, of dead.
+CUSTOMS, (curious).
+
+DALKINS (T.).
+DANSEY (A.).
+DARSALL (R.).
+DIU.
+DOFFIE (C.).
+DORRINGTON (F.).
+DOWE (R.).
+DRAKE (Sir Francis).
+DUCANGE quoted.
+
+EBONY.
+ELDRED (John),
+  --HIS VOYAGE TO TRIPOLIS
+ELEPHANTS.
+ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTER TO ZELABDIN ECHEBAR
+  --TO THE KING OF CHINA
+  --HER SECOND CHARTER TO THE LEVANT COMPANY.
+EMANTUEL (ship).
+EUPHRATES (river).
+
+FAITH (C.).
+FARRINGTON (T.).
+FATEPOR.
+FELUGIA.
+FITCH (Ralph), mentioned
+  --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST
+  --Imprisoned.
+FLORIDA.
+FONES (A.).
+FONSECA (V.), Archbishop of Goa.
+
+GALVANO (A.), quoted.
+GANGES.
+GARROWAY (T.).
+GARROWAY (W.).
+GERMAIN (J.), biographical notice.
+GIBBON, quoted.
+GOA.
+GOLCONDA or GULCONDA.
+GRIMES (P.).
+GUILLAME (P.).
+
+HAKLUYT (R.)
+HAREBORNE (W.)
+HARTE (J.)
+HAWKINS (Sir John)
+HETTON
+HEWET (H.)
+HOLMEDEN (E.)
+HUIGHEN (J.)
+  --HIS ACCOUNT OF NEWBURY AND FITCH
+
+INDIES, A VOYAGE OF CERTAIN SHIPS OF HOLLAND
+
+JACKSON (A.)
+JANISSARIES
+JAPAN
+JAVA, currency of
+  --THE VOYAGE TO JAVA OF A DUTCH FLEET
+JEAN SANS PEUR
+JENKINSON (A.), HIS ACCOUNT OF SOLIMAN'S ENTRY INTO
+  ALEPPO
+  --HIS SAFE CONDUCT FROM SOLIMAN
+JERUSALEM, VOYAGE OF LA BROCQUIERE
+JOHN PALÆOLOGUS (Emperor)
+JONES (P.)
+
+LA BROCQUIERE, (B. de). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM
+  --Discours préliminaire
+  --Seconde partie
+  --Quitte la Bourgogne
+  --Arrive à Turin
+  --Bologne
+  --Florence
+  --Rome
+  --Venise
+  --Corfou
+  --Modon
+  --Jaffa
+  --Jerusalem
+  --Bethlehem
+  --Vallée d'Hebron
+  --Retourne à Gaza,
+  --Visite Nazareth
+  --Sur
+  --Bayreuth
+  --Damas
+  --Retourne à Nazareth
+  --Visite Balbec
+  --Antioch
+  --Adène
+  --Therse
+  --Larande
+  --Cohonge
+  --Burse
+  --Pera
+  --Constantinople
+  --Arrive à Andrianople
+  --Lessère
+  --Belgrade
+  --Son opinion des Turcs et de la manière de les attaquer
+  --Arrive à Pest
+  --rencontre Albert II, Duc d'Autriche
+  --Arrive à Vienne
+  --Constance
+  --Bâle
+  --Arrive à Dijon
+LAHORE
+LANGHENEZ (B.) his account of the Dutch voyage to India
+LAURENCE (S.)
+LAURENCE (P.)
+LEATE (N.)
+LEECH (W.). See _Leeds_
+LEEDS (W)
+LEGRAND D'AUSSY, his translation of La Brocquière
+LETHLANDE, (E.)
+LEVANT COMPANY, their second charter
+LINCHOTEN (J. Huighen van). See _Huighen_.
+
+MAHOMET
+MALACCA
+MANDEVILLE (Sir J.)
+MARRIAGES (strange)
+MARTAVAN
+MARTIN V. (Pope)
+MARTIN (R.)
+MARTIN (R. jun.)
+MASSAM (W.)
+MASULIPATAN
+MAURITIUS
+MAY (R.)
+MEXICO
+MIDDLETON (T.)
+MOGUL, (the great)
+MOLUCCAS
+MOSLEY, (N.)
+
+NEWBURY (John). HIS LETTER TO RICHARD HAKLUYT
+  --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --ANOTHER LETTER TO THE SAME
+  --A LETTER TO JOHN ELDRED AND WILLIAM SHALS
+  --A SECOND LETTER TO THE SAME
+  --A THIRD LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --His imprisonment
+NEWTON (J.)
+NORDEN (T.)
+
+OFFLEY (R.), 69.
+ORMUS
+OSBORNE, (Sir E.)
+  --First Governor of Levant Company
+
+PARVIS (H.)
+PATANAW or PATNA
+PEARDE (N.)
+PEGU
+PEPPER
+PERA
+PERU
+PHILLIP (W.) HIS TRANSLATION OF THE DUTCH VOYAGE TO INDIA
+PITCH issues from Earth
+POORE (Leonard)
+PORTER (E.)
+PORTER (G.)
+POWER (L.) See _Poore_.
+
+RATCLIFFE (A.)
+RAYNOLDS or REINOLDS (ship)
+RUBRUQUIS (W. de)
+RUTILIUS quoted
+
+SADLER (E.)
+SADLER (R.)
+ST. HELENA (island)
+ST. LAURENCE (island)
+SALTER (G.)
+SALTONSTALL (R.)
+SANDIE (R.)
+SCANDERBERG
+SCUDAMORE (Sir J.) Dedication to
+SERREPORE
+SERVIDORE
+SHALS (W.)
+SIAM
+SIGISMUND (Emperor)
+SIMONS (T.)
+SOFIA
+SOLIMAN. HIS ENTRY INTO ALEPPO
+  --HIS SAFE CONDUCT TO ANTHONY JENKINSON
+SOME (S.)
+SPENCER (J.)
+STAPER (J.)
+STAPER, (R.)
+STEVENS, (T.) Biographical notice
+STILE, (N.)
+STILE, (O.)
+STILICHO
+STORY, (J.)
+STROPENE, (M.)
+SUMATRA
+
+TARTARS
+TRIPOLIS (Syria)
+TYGER (ship)
+
+VIRGINIA
+
+WARNER (W.)
+WATTES (J.)
+WILKES, (W.)
+WOLFE (J.), Printer
+
+ZELABDIN ECHEBAR
+
+
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. XI.
+
+ADAMS (R.)
+AFRICA, DESCRIBED BY R. EDEN
+  --nations of
+ALDAIE (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE FIRST VOYAGE to MOROCCO
+ALDERSEY (L.) HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO EGYPT
+  --mentioned
+ALDRIDGE (W.)
+ALEXANDRIA
+ALGIERS
+AMITY, (ship)
+ANGOLA
+ASHBIE (F.)
+ASHLEY (R.)
+ASSAN AGA, A LETTER TO
+AUSTINE (P.)
+AZORES
+
+BAKER (R.)
+BARBARY, SECOND VOYAGE TO
+  --CHARTER TOR TRADE TO
+BARNE (Sir G.)
+BARTHOLOMEW (ship)
+BARTON (E.)
+BARTON (R.)
+BEARE (J.)
+BEAUFORT (John de)
+BENCE (E.)
+BENDS (W.). His account of the loss of the Edward Cotton
+BENIN, WELSH'S VOYAGE TO
+  --NEWTON AND BIRD'S VOYAGE TO
+  --THEIR SECOND VOYAGE
+BERRIN (J.)
+BIRD (J.) HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE
+BLANCO (cape)
+BLONKET (M.)
+BRISTOL
+BRITON (ship)
+BURGES (R.)
+BURROUGH (Sir J.) HIS SERVICES AT SEA
+BUTLER (Sir J.)
+BUTTOLFE (ship)
+
+CABOT (S.)
+CAIRO
+CALAIS VOYAGE, OMISSIONS OF
+CAMDEN
+CANARIES (islands)
+CANDIA
+CAPE OF GOOD HOPE
+CARNABY (R.)
+CARTER (W.)
+CARTHAGE
+CASTELIN (E.)
+CASTLE OF COMFORT (ship).
+CAVENDISH.
+CENTURION (ship).
+CEPHALONIA.
+CHALONER (Sir Th.), HIS VOYAGE TO ALGER.
+CHANCELLOR (R.).
+CHARLES V.
+CHEESMAN (W.).
+CHESTER (Sir W.).
+CHIAN.
+CHINA, ACCOUNT OF, FROM PORTUGUESE PRISONERS
+  --described.
+CHRISTOPHER (ship).
+COCKE (W).
+CORDALL (T.).
+COREA (cape).
+CORRIENTES (cape).
+COTTON (E.).
+COWEL (W.).
+CRAWFORD (R.).
+CREMATION.
+CRETTON (W.).
+CROMPTON (W.).
+CYPRUS.
+
+DALLIMORE (O.).
+DARTMOUTH.
+DASSEL (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+DAVIES (N.).
+DAVIS (M.).
+DAVISON (R.).
+DAWED, meaning of.
+DEIMOND (R.).
+DEWLY (W.).
+DICKENSON (M.).
+DIER (A.),
+  --hanged.
+DODDINGTON (J.).
+DOVER, 84.
+DOWNTON (N.), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SINKING OF LAS CINQUE LLAGAS.
+DRAGONS.
+DRAKE (Sir F.).
+
+EDEN (R.) HIS DESCRIPTION OF AFRICA.
+EDWARD IV.
+EDWARD BONAVENTURE (ship).
+EDWARD COTTON (ship).
+EGYPT.
+ELEPHANTS.
+ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTERS FOR THE RELEASE OF THE JESUS
+  --HER CHARTER FOR TRADE TO BARBARY
+  --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF MOROCCO
+  --HER PATENT TO EXETER MERCHANTS FOR A TRADE TO GUINEA
+  --HER PATENT TO T. GREGORY
+  --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF ÆTHIOPIA.
+ELIZABETH (ship).
+ELIZABETH STOKES (ship).
+ELVERS (A.).
+EPITAPH OF P. READ.
+ETHIOPIA, Emperor of.
+EVESHAM (J.), HIS VOYAGE INTO EGYPT.
+EXETER.
+
+FABIAN (W.).
+FALMOUTH.
+FENNER (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+FERRO, (island).
+FILLIE (D.).
+FORSTER (T.).
+FOSTER, (J.).
+FOX (J.), HIS ENTERPRISE IN DELIVERING 266 CHRISTIANS
+  --HIS CERTIFICATE FROM THE PRIOR OF GALIPOLI
+  --THE BISHOP OF ROME'S LETTERS IN HIS BEHALF
+  --THE KING OF SPAIN'S LETTERS IN HIS FAVOR.
+FRANKE (J.).
+FREIGIUS (J.T.), HIS ACCOUNT OF STUKELEY'S VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+FROBISHER (Sir M.).
+FROES (A.), Letter of.
+FROISSART, quoted.
+FUQUIEN.
+
+GAGO.
+GAINSH (R.).
+GALIPOLI (Candia).
+GARAMANTES have their women in common.
+GENOA, chronicles of, quoted.
+GEORGE (ship).
+GEORGE BONAVENTURE (ship).
+GERARD (Sir W.).
+GERBI (island).
+GIBBEN (R.).
+GIBRALTAR (straits of).
+GIFFORD (G.).
+GILMAN (J.).
+GOA.
+GOLDEN NOBLE, (ship).
+GOMERA (island).
+GONSON (B.).
+GRAND CANARY.
+GRAVESEND.
+GREEN DRAGON (ship).
+GREGORY (T.), HIS PATENT.
+GRENVILLE (Capt.).
+GRIFFITH (W.).
+GRIMES (Master).
+GROLOS (T.), Bishop of Astraphen.
+GROVE (Master).
+GUINEA.
+
+HAKLUYT (R.), HIS ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.
+HAMOR (W.).
+HARCOURT (Sir J.).
+HAREBORNE (W.),
+  --A LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLIS
+  --HIS LETTER TO HARVIE MILLERS
+  --A LETTER TO, FROM ALGIERS
+  --A LETTER TO MUSTAPHA
+  --A LETTER TO EDWARD BARTON
+  --Obtains a commandment from the Grand Signor
+  --A LETTER TO T. TYPTON
+  --A LETTER TO ASSAN AGA.
+HARISON (A.).
+HART (ship).
+HARWICH.
+HASLEWOOD (R.)
+HASLEWOOD (S.).
+HASSAN BASSA.
+HAWKINS (Sir J.).
+HAWKWOOD, HIS VICTORIES IN ITALY.
+HELLIER (A.).
+HENRY IV. HIS VOYAGE TO TUNIS.
+HENRY VIII.
+HERCULES (ship).
+HERMAN (J.).
+HEXASI.
+HICKMAN (A.).
+HIND (ship).
+HOGAN (E.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO.
+HOLINSHED, quoted.
+HOOPER (J.).
+HOWARD (Lord T.).
+HOWEL (H.).
+HUDDIE (W.).
+
+ISHAM (H.).
+
+JAMES (Leonard).
+JANISSARIES.
+JAPAN, PORTUGUESE ACCOUNT OF.
+JESUS (ship).
+JONES (P.).
+JOHN II. OF PORTUGAL,
+  --HIS EMBASSY TO EDWARD IV.
+JOHN BAPTIST (ship).
+JOHN EVANGELIST (ship).
+JUDDE (Sir A.).
+JUDITH (ship).
+
+KERRY (J.).
+KING (W.).
+KNEVET (Sir H.).
+KNOLLES (H.).
+
+LAMBERT (F.).
+LAMBERT (N.).
+LANCASTER (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.
+LANDMAN (D.).
+LAS BARBAS, (cape).
+LEICESTER (Earl of).
+LION (ship).
+LISNEY (T.).
+LISTER (C.).
+LOCK (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --ARTICLES DELIVERED TO.
+LOCK, (M.).
+LOCK (T.).
+LODGE (T.).
+LONG (N.).
+LUIZ (Don), HIS LETTER TO PINTEADO.
+
+MACAO.
+MADEIRA.
+MAFFEIUS (P.), quoted.
+MAKEWORTH (J.).
+MALACCA.
+MALTA.
+MALTA, Knights of.
+MAUNSELL (R.).
+MARCH (P.).
+MARCHANT ROYAL (ship).
+MARIA MARTIN (ship).
+MARTABAN.
+MARTIN (Alderman).
+MASSE (N.).
+MAYFLOWER (ship).
+MENSURADO (cape).
+MERLIN (ship).
+MILLERS (H.).
+MILO (island).
+MINION (ship).
+MOON (ship).
+MOONSHINE (ship).
+MOORE (R.).
+MOORE (W.).
+MORE (T.).
+MOROCCO, FIRST VOYAGE TO
+  --Mentioned.
+MORRIS (R.).
+MOURA (N. de).
+MULY HAMET, HIS LETTER TO THE EARL OF LEICESTER.
+MURAD KHAN, Sultan of Turkey,
+  --HIS LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLI FOR THE RESTITUTION OF THE JESUS.
+
+NAPER (G.).
+NELSON (J.).
+NEWHAVEN.
+NEWTON (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN,
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE.
+NICHOLAS (ship).
+NIGRITIS. _See Senegal_.
+NORWICH.
+
+ODORICUS, quoted.
+OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE.
+OSBORNE (Sir E.),
+  --HIS LETTER TO THE KING OF ALGIERS.
+
+PACHIN.
+PALMAS (cape).
+PALMER (R.).
+PALMER (W.).
+PALMES (island).
+PARKER, (H.).
+PATRAS.
+PEGU, described.
+PENELOPE (ship).
+PET (P.).
+PETER (ship).
+PETERSON (J.).
+PETONEY (M.), HIS ACCOUNT OF AFRICAN TRADE.
+PHILIP II., King of Spain.
+PINTEADO (A.),
+  --HIS DEATH
+  --HIS PATENT FROM THE KING OF PORTUGAL
+  --LETTER FROM DON LUIZ.
+PLYMOUTH.
+PORTO SANTO (island).
+PORTSMOUTH.
+PRESTER JOHN.
+PRIMROSE (ship).
+
+QUANCHAI.
+QUINTE (J.).
+QUINZI.
+
+RABNET (ship).
+RAGSTER (H.).
+RAINOLDS (R.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+RAINOLDS (W.).
+RALEIGH (Sir W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF BURROUGH'S VICTORIES AT SEA
+  --mentioned.
+RALPH (J.).
+RAWLINGS (R.).
+RAYMOND (G.).
+READ (P), HIS EPITAPH.
+RESENDE (Garcia de), quoted.
+RIBBE (R.).
+RICHARD II.
+RICKMAN (R.).
+RIO DEL ORO.
+RIO DULCE.
+RIO GRANDE.
+ROBERTS (H.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO.
+ROBINSON (M.).
+ROSE (ship).
+ROSSETTA.
+ROWLIE (F.).
+RUSSELL (Sir J.).
+RUTTER (W.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+RYE.
+
+ST. LUCAR or LUCAS.
+ST. SEBASTIAN (island).
+ST. THOME (island).
+ST. VINCENT (river).
+SALOMON (ship).
+SANDERS (Thomas), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE VOYAGE OF THE JESUS.
+SARAGASSO or SARGASSO (weed).
+SCIO (island).
+SELMAN (E.).
+SENEGAL (river).
+SEVILLE.
+SHINGLETON (T), HIS PASSPORT FROM THE KING OF ALGIERS.
+SIBBLE HERNINGHAM.
+SKEGS (R.).
+SMITH (H.).
+SMITH (J.).
+SMITH (N.).
+SONNINGS (W.).
+SOTHERICK (J.).
+SOUSA (B. A. de), HIS ADVERTISEMENT TO PHILIP II.
+SPARTEL (cape).
+SPORADES (island).
+STAFFORD (Marquis of).
+STAPER (N.).
+STEVENS (T.).
+STREET (W.).
+STUKELEY (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+SUMATRA.
+SWALLOW (ship).
+
+TAVISTOCK.
+TENERIFFE.
+THIN (H.).
+THOMAS (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SECOND VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+THOMAS (W.), quoted.
+THOMSON (T.).
+TIGER (ship).
+TINTAM (J.).
+TOBIE (ship), CAST AWAY.
+TODD (Rev. H. J.).
+TOMBUTO.
+TOWRSON (W.), HIS FIRST VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --HIS THIRD VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+TRACIE (J.).
+TRINITY (ship).
+TRIPOLIS.
+TUNIS.
+TYPTON (Master).
+
+UNDERWOOD (J.).
+UNICORN.
+UNICORN (ship).
+UNTICARO (P.).
+
+VERDE (cape).
+VERDE (islands).
+VIRGIL (P.), quoted.
+VOIS (T.).
+
+WELSH (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN
+  --SECOND VOYAGE.
+WHITE (M.).
+WHITE (W.).
+WHITE (T.), HIS CAPTURE OF TWO SPANISH SHIPS.
+WICKNEY (W.).
+WIGHT (isle of).
+WILKINS (W.).
+
+WILLES. HIS TRANSLATION OF THE PORTUGUESE ACCOUNTS OF CHINA
+  --OF JAPAN.
+WILLIAMS (T.).
+WILSON (H.).
+WINDHAM (T,),
+  --His death.
+WINTER (J.).
+WINTER (W.).
+WOODBRIDGE.
+WOODFALL, HIS EDITION OF HAKLUYT.
+WOODWARD (J.).
+WREN (W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF FENNER'S VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+WROTH (Sir T.).
+
+YORKE (Sir J.).
+YOUNG (J.).
+
+ZANTE.
+ZANZIBAR.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. VIII.
+
+I. The Life and trauailes of Pelagius borne in Wales.
+
+II. A Testimonie of the sending of Sighelmus, Bishop of Shirburne, by King
+  Alphred, vnto Saint Thomas of India in the yeare of our Lord 883,
+  recorded by William of Malmesburie.
+
+III. A Second testimonie of the foresaid Sighelmus, etc.
+
+IV. The trauailes of Andrew Whiteman, alias Leucander
+
+V. The Voyages of Swanus, the son of Earl Godwin, to Jerusalem, recorded by
+  William of Malmesburie.
+
+VI. A Voyage of three Ambassadours who in the time of Edward the Confessor,
+  were sent vnto Constantinople, and from thence to Ephesus, recorded by
+  William of Malmesburie.
+
+VII. The Voyage of Alured, bishop of Worcester, vnto Jerusalem. Recorded by
+  Roger Hoveden.
+
+VIII. The Voyage of Ingulphus, Abbat of Croyland, vnto Jerusalem, described
+  by the said Ingulphus.
+
+IX. Diuers of the hon. family of the Beauchamps, with Robert Curtoys sonne
+  of William the Conqueror, made a Voyage to Jerusalem, 1096. (From Hol.
+  pag. 22. vol. 2.)
+
+X. The Voyage of Gutuere toward Jerusalem, 1097.
+
+XI. The Voyage of Prince Edgar vnto Jerusalem, 1102. Recorded by William of
+  Malmesburie.
+
+XII. Mention made of one Godericus, etc.
+
+XIII. Mention made of one Hardine, etc.
+
+XIV. A fleete of Englishmen, Danes, etc. arriued at Joppa. written in the
+  Chronicles of Jerusalem.
+
+XV. The trauailes of one Athelard, recorded by Master Bale.
+
+XVI. The life and trauailes of one William of Tyre.
+
+XVII. The trauailes of Robertus Ketenensis.
+
+XVIII. A Voyage of certaine Englishmen vnder the conduct of Lewes King of
+  France vnto the Holy Land.
+
+XIX. The Voyage of John Lacy to Jerusalem.
+
+XX. The Voyage of William Mandeuile to Jerusalem.
+
+XXI. A great supply of money to the Holy Land by Henry II.
+
+XXII. A letter from Manuel the Emperour of Constantinople vnto Henrie the
+  second, King of England. Recorded by Roger Houeden.
+
+XXIII. The Life and Trauailes of Balwinus Deuonius, sometime Archbishop of
+  Canterbury.
+
+XXIV. An annotation concerning the said Baldwine, taken out of Giraldus
+  Cambrensis.
+
+XXV. A note touching Sir Frederike Tilney.
+
+XXVI. The trauailes of Richard Canonicus.
+
+XXVII. The large contribution to the succour of the Holy Land made by King
+  John of England. 1201.
+
+XXVIII. The trauailes of Hubert Walter, bishop of Salisburie.
+
+XXIX. The trauailes of Robert Curson.
+
+XXX. The voyage of Ranulph Earle of Chester and others to the Holy Land.
+  1218.
+
+XXXI. The voyage of Henry Bohun and Saer Quincy to the Holy Land.
+
+XXXII. The trauailes of Ranulph Glanuile, Earle of Chester.
+
+XXXIII. The voyage of Petrus de Rupibus, Bishop of Winchester, to
+  Jerusalem. 1231.
+
+XXXIV. The voyage of Richard Earle of Cornewall. into Syria.
+
+XXXV. The voyage of William Longespee into Asia. 1248.
+
+XXXVI. The voyage of Prince Edward into Asia. 1170.
+
+XXXVII. The Trauaile of Robert Turneham.
+
+XXXVIII. The Life of Sir John Mandeville, written by Master Bale.
+
+XXXIX. The Tomb and Epitaph of Sir John Mandeville from Ortelius.
+
+XL. Tabula Libri Joannis Mandevil.
+
+XLI. Liber Joannis Mandevil de Turcia, Armenia, Ægypto, Lybia, Syria,
+  Arabia, Persia, Chaldæa, Tartaria, India, et infinitis insulis
+  civitatibus et locis.
+
+  The English version begins.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. IX.
+
+I. Mandeville's voyage continued.
+
+II. Richardi Hakluyti brevis admonitio ad lectorem.
+
+III. Verba C. Plinii secundi.
+
+IV. Plinius de Scythis.
+
+V. Anthony Beck Bishop of Durisme made Patriarch of Hierusalem from Leland.
+
+VI. Itinerarium fratris Odorici.
+   _Sub-section_
+    1 His journey from Pera to Thana.
+    2 Of the maners of the Chaldæans and of India.
+    3 How pepper is had and where it groweth.
+    4 Of a strange idol &c.
+    5 Of certaine trees yielding meale, hony, and poyson.
+    6 Of the abundance of fishes, &c.
+    7 Of the island of Sylan and of the mountain where Adam mourned for
+      Abel.
+    8 Of Upper India, &c.
+    9 Of the city Fuco.
+   10 Of a monastery where many strange beastes doe live.
+   11 Of the city of Cambaleth.
+   12 Of the Glory of the great Can.
+   13 Of certain innes or hospitals, &c.
+   14 Of the four feasts which the Great Can solemnizeth.
+   15 Of divers provinces and cities.
+   16 Of a certaine rich man who is fed, &c. by fiftie virgins.
+   17 Of the death of Senex de Monte.
+   18 Of the honour and reverence done unto the great Can.
+   19 Of the death of Frier Odoricus.
+
+VII. The voyage of the Lord John of Holland, Earl of Huntington to
+  Jerusalem. 1394.
+
+VIII. The voyage of Thomas Mowbray, duke of Norfolk to Jerusalem. 1399.
+
+IX. The voyage of the Bishop of Winchester to Jerusalem. 1417.
+
+X. A preparation of a voyage of King Henry IV. to the Holy Land, &c.
+
+XI. The voyage of M. John Locke to Jerusalem.
+
+XII. The first voyage made by M. Laurence Aldersey to Jerusalem, &c. 1581.
+
+XIII. The passport made by the great master of Malta to the Englishmen in
+  the barque Reynolds, 1582.
+
+XIV. Commission given by M. William Harebourne, to Richard Foster, etc.
+
+XV. A letter of directions to Richard Foster.
+
+XVI. A commandement for Chio.
+
+XVII. A description of the yearly voyage unto Mecca.
+
+XVIII. The voyage of M. Cæsar Frederick into East India and beyond.
+
+XIX. The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, written by
+  W. Barret.
+
+XX. A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa.
+
+XXI. A declaration of the places from whence sundry goods come.
+
+XXII. The times or monsons wherein ships depart in the East Indies.
+
+XXIII. A briefe extract specifying the daily payments by the grand Signior
+  to the officers of his court.
+
+XXIV. The Turkes chiefe officers.
+
+XXV. The number of souldiers attending upon the Beglerbegs, &c.
+
+XXVI. The Turkes yeerely revenue.
+
+XXVII. Ambassadors allowances.
+
+XXVIII. Letter from Richard Wrag to Richard Hewish.
+
+XXIX. A description of a voyage to Constantinople and Lyria, by Master
+  Edward Barton, 1595.
+
+XXX. The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into
+  Hungary against the Christian Emperour, 1594.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. X.
+
+I. The manner of the entring of Soliman the great Turke into Aleppo, noted
+  by Anthony Jenkinson. 1553.
+
+II. A note of the presents that were given to the grand Signior.
+
+III. The safe conduct given by Soliman to Anthony Jenkinson.
+
+IV. Letters concerning the voyage of John Newbury and Ralph Fitch to the
+  East. 1583.
+  _Sub-section_
+    1 A letter from the Queen to Zelabdin Echebar
+    2 A letter from the Queen to the King of China
+    3 A letter of John Newbury to Richard Hakluyt
+    4 A letter from the said J. Newbury to Leonard Poore
+    5 Another letter from the same to the same
+    6 A letter from J. Newbury to John Eldred and William Shals
+    7 A second letter from the same to the same
+    8 A letter from the same to Leonard Poore
+    9 A letter from Ralph Fitch to Leonard Poore
+
+V. The voyage of Ralph Fitch to the East. 1583-91.
+
+VI. The report of John Huighen van Linchoten, concerning J. Newbury and R.
+  Fitch's imprisonment.
+
+VII. The voyage of John Eldred to Tripolis in Syria.
+
+VIII. The second letters patents graunted by the Queenes Maiestie to the
+  companie of the English marchants for the Levant. 1592.
+
+IX. Voyage d'Outremer et retour de Jérusalem en France par la voie de terre
+  par Bertrandon de La Brocquière remis en Français moderne par Le grand
+  d'Aussy.
+
+X. A voyage made by certaine ships of Holland into the East Indies. 1595-7.
+
+XI. A true report of the voyage to Java performed by a fleet from Holland.
+  1598.
+
+XII. A briefe description of a voiage before handled, in maner of a
+  iournall.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. XI.
+
+I. The voyage of Henry, Earl of Derby, afterwards Henry IV., to Tunis, from
+  P. Virgil.
+
+II. The same story from Froissart and Holinshead.
+
+III. The memorable victories of John Hawkwood, from Camden.
+
+IV. The Epitaph of Peter Read at Norwich.
+
+V. The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger.
+
+VI. The woorthy enterprise of John Foxe in delivering 266 Christians out of
+  captivity at Alexandria, 1577.
+
+VII. The copie of the certificate for John Fox.
+
+VIII. The Bishop of Rome, his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox.
+
+IX. The king of Spaine his letters for the placing of John Fox in the
+  office of gunner.
+
+X. The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbary in the Jesus, written by Thomas
+  Sanders. 1583.
+
+XI. The Queene's letters to the Turke for the restitution of the Jesus.
+
+XII. The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis commanding restitution of
+  the Jesus.
+
+XIII. A letter of Master William Hareborne for the release of the Jesus.
+
+XIV. The voyage of John Evesham into Egypt.
+
+XV. The second voyage of Laurence Aldersey to Alexandria and Cairo.
+
+XVI. A letter of the English Ambassador to M. Harvie Millers.
+
+XVII. A letter to W. Hareborne from Alger.
+
+XVIII. A letter of W. Hareborne to Mustapha.
+
+XIX. The passport granted to Thomas Shingleton by the king of Algier.
+
+XX. A letter of Sir Edward Osborne to the king of Alger.
+
+XXI. Notes concerning the trade of Alger.
+
+XXII. Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria.
+
+XXIII. A letter of the English Ambassador to Edward Barton.
+
+XXIV. A commaundement obtained of the Grand Signor by W. Hareborne.
+
+XXV. A letter of William Hareborne to T Typton.
+
+XXVI. Registrum valoris navium, &c. per trirenes Argerienses ereptorum.
+
+XXVII. A letter to Assan Aga.
+
+XXVIII. The originall of the first voyage for traffique into Marocco. 1551.
+
+XXIX. The second voyage to Barbary. 1552.
+
+XXX. A voyage into Guinea and Benin. 1553.
+
+XXXI. A briefe description of Afrike by Richard Eden.
+
+XXXII. Anthonie Pinteado, his letters patents from the king of Portugal.
+
+XXXIII. The letter of Don Lewis to Anthonie Pinteado.
+
+XXXIV. The second voyage to Guinea.
+
+XXXV. The first voyage made by William Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVI. The second voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVII. The third voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVIII. Certaine articles deliuered to Mr. John Lock.
+
+XXXIX. A letter of John Lock to the company of marchants adventurers for
+  Guinea.
+
+XL. The relation of William Rutter to Anthony Hickman touching a voyage to
+  Guinea. 1562.
+
+XLI. A meeting at Sir William Gerard's house. 1564.
+
+XLII. Relations extracted from Sir John Hawkin's voyage.
+
+XLIII. The voyage of George Fenner to Guinea written by Walter Wren.
+
+XLIV. The ambassage of Edmund Hogan to the Emperor of Morocco. 1577.
+
+XLV. The voyage of Thomas Stukeley into Barbary.
+
+XLVI. Certaine reports of the province of China learned from Portugalls
+  taken prisoners.
+
+XLVII. Of the island Japan and other isles, by R. Willes.
+
+XLVIII. An excellent treatise of the kingdom of China printed at Macao.
+  1590.
+
+XLIX. A letter by Thomas Stevens to his father.
+
+L. A briefe relation of the kingdom of Pegu.
+
+LI. A voyage to the East Indies by the Cape of Buona Speranza, written by R
+ Hakluyt.
+
+LII. Certaine remembrances of an intended iourney to Brassil. 1583.
+
+LIII. The letters patents granted by Her Majestie for a trade to Barbarie.
+  1583.
+
+LIV. The Ambassage of Henry Roberts to the Emperour of Marocco. 1585.
+
+LV. A letter from Muly Hamet to the Earl of Leicester.
+
+LVI. The Queenes letters to the Emperour of Marocco.
+
+LVII. A patent to certaine merchants of Exeter for a trade to the river of
+  Senega and Gambra in Guinea, 1588.
+
+LVIII. A voyage to Benin, 1588. Written by James Welsh.
+
+LIX. The voiage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1588.
+
+LX. The second voyage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1590.
+
+LXI. An advertisement sent to Philip II. king of Spaine from Angola by
+  Baltazar Almeida de Sousa. 1591.
+
+LXII: Confirmatio treugarum inter Eduardum quartum et Joannem secundum.
+  1482.
+
+LXIII. The ambassage which John II. king of Portugall, sent to Edward IV.
+
+LXIV. A relation sent by Melchior Peloney to Nigil de Moura. 1591.
+
+LXV. The Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to Guinea.
+
+LXVI. A briefe relation concerning the cities of Tombuto and Gago.
+
+LXVII. Another relation concerning the same.
+
+LXVIII. A briefe extract of a patent granted to Thomas Gregory, of Tanton.
+
+LXIX. The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships by Thomas White, 1592.
+
+LXX. A true report of the honourable service at sea perfourmed by Sir John
+  Burrough, prepared by Sir Walter Raleigh.
+
+LXXI. The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las
+  Cinque Llagas, by Nicholas Downton.
+
+LXXII. The casting away of the Tobie, 1593.
+
+LXXIII. The letters of the Queene sent by Laurence Aldersey to the Emperour
+  of Æthiopia, 1597
+
+LXXIV. The Omissions of Cales voyage.
+
+LXXV. Indices, viz.--
+       Vol. VIII.
+       Vol. IX.
+       Vol. X.
+       Vol. XI.
+
+LXXVI. Tables of Contents, viz:--
+       Vol. VIII.
+       Vol. IX.
+       Vol. X.
+       Vol. XI.
+
+
+END OF  VOL. XI
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES,
+TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 12693-8.txt or 12693-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/6/9/12693
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/12693-8.zip b/old/12693-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b9bb0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12693-8.zip
diff --git a/old/12693.txt b/old/12693.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b17449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12693.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16103 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Principal Navigations, Voyages,
+Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, Vol. 11, by Richard
+Hakluyt, Edited by Edmund Goldsmid
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries of
+The English Nation, Vol. 11
+
+Author: Richard Hakluyt
+
+Release Date: June 23, 2004  [eBook #12693]
+
+Language: English, Latin, Spanish, and Italian
+
+Character set encoding: US-ASCII
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS,
+VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Karl Hagen and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team from images generously made available by the Canadian
+Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+
+** Transcriber's Notes **
+
+The printed edition from which this e-text has been produced retains the
+spelling and abbreviations of Hakluyt's 16th-century original. In this
+version, the spelling has been retained, but the following manuscript
+abbreviations have been silently expanded:
+
+- vowels with macrons = vowel + 'n' or 'm'
+- q; = -que (in the Latin)
+- y'e = the; y't = that; w't = with
+
+This edition contains footnotes and two types of sidenotes. Most footnotes
+are added by the editor. They follow modern (19th-century) spelling
+conventions. Those that don't are Hakluyt's (and are not always
+systematically marked as such by the editor). The sidenotes are Hakluyt's
+own. Summarizing sidenotes are labelled [Sidenote: ] and placed before the
+sentence to which they apply. Sidenotes that are keyed with a symbol are
+labeled [Marginal note: ] and placed at the point of the symbol, except in
+poetry, where they are placed at a convenient point. Additional notes on
+corrections, etc. are signed 'KTH'
+
+** End Transcriber's Notes **
+
+
+
+
+
+THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES AND DISCOVERIES
+OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOLUME XI
+
+AFRICA
+
+Collected by
+
+RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER.
+
+AND
+
+Edited by
+
+EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoueries
+
+OF THE
+
+ENGLISH NATION IN AFRICA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Henrie Eatle of Derbie, after Duke of Hereford, and lastly
+  Henry the fourth King of England, to Tunis in Barbarie, with an army of
+  Englishmen mitten by Polidore Virgill. pag. 1389.
+
+Franci interim per inducias nacti ocium, ac simul Genuensium precibus
+defatigati, bellum in Afros, qui omnem oram insulasque Italiae latiocinijs
+infestas reddebant, suscipiunt. Richardus quoque rex Angliae rogatus
+auxilium, mittit Henricum comitem Derbiensem cum electa Anglicae pubis manu
+ad id bellum faciendum. Igitur Franci Anglique viribus et animis
+consociatis in Africam traijciunt, qui vbi littus attigere, eatenus a
+Barbaris descensione prohibiti sunt, quoad Anglorum sagittariorum virtute
+factum est, vt aditus pateret: in terram egressi recta Tunetam vrbem regiam
+petunt, ac obsident. Barbari timore affecti de pace ad eos legates mittunt,
+quam nostris dare placuit, vt soluta certa pecuniae summa ab omni deinceps
+Italiae, Galliaeque ora mamis abstinerent. Ita peractis rebus post paucos
+menses, quam eo itum erat, domum repediatum est.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+The French in the meane season hauing gotten some leasure by meanes of
+their truce, and being sollicited and vrged by the intreaties of the
+Genuois vndertooke to wage warre against the Moores, who robbed and spoyled
+all the coasts of Italy, and of the Ilandes adiacent. Likewise Richard the
+second, king of England, being sued vnto for ayde, sent Henry the Earle of
+Derbie with a choice armie of English souldiers vnto the same warfare.
+Wherefore the English and French, with forces and mindes vnited, sayled
+ouer into Africa, who when they approached vnto the shore were repelled by
+the Barbarians from landing, vntill such time as they had passage made them
+by the valour of the English archers. Thus hauing landed their forces, they
+foorthwith marched vnto the royall citie of Tunis, and besieged it. Whereat
+the Barbarians being dismayed, sent Ambassadours vnto our Christian
+Chieftaines to treat of peace, which our men graunted vnto them, vpon
+condition that they should pay a certaine summe of money, and that they
+should from thencefoorth abstaine from piracies vpon all the coasts of
+Italy and France. And so hauing dispatched their businesse, within a fewe
+moneths after their departure they returned home.
+
+
+This Historie is somewhat otherwise recorded by Froysard and Holenshed in
+  manner following, pag 473.
+
+In the thirteenth yeere of the reigne of King Richard the second, the
+Christians tooke in hand a iourney against the Saracens of Barbarie through
+sute of the Genouois, so that there went a great number of Lords, Knights,
+and Gentlemen of France and England, the Duke of Burbon being their
+Generall. Out of England there went Iohn de Beaufort bastarde sonne to the
+Duke of Lancaster (as Froysard hath noted) also Sir Iohn Russell, Sir Iohn
+Butler, Sir Iohn Harecourt and others. They set forwarde in the latter ende
+of the thirteenth yeere of the Kings reigne, and came to Genoa, where they
+remayned not verie long, but that the gallies and other vessels of the
+Genouois were ready to passe them ouer into Barbarie. And so about midsomer
+in the begining of the foureteenth yere of this kings reigne the whole army
+being embarked, sailed forth to the coast of Barbary, where neere to the
+city of Africa they landed: [Sidenote: The Chronicles of Genoa] at which
+instant the English archers (as the Chronicles of Genoa write) stood all
+the company in good stead with their long bowes, beating backe the enemies
+from the shore, which came downe to resist their landing. After they had
+got to land, they inuironed the city of Africa (called by the Moores
+Mahdia) with a strong siege: but at length, constrained with the
+intemperancy of the scalding ayre in that hot countrey, breeding in the
+army sundry diseases, they fell to a composition vpon certaine articles to
+be performed in the behalfe of the Saracens: and so 61 dayes after their
+arriuall there they tooke the seas againe, and returned home, as in the
+histories of France and Genoa is likewise expressed. Where, by Polidore
+Virgil it may seeme, that the lord Henry of Lancaster earle of Derbie
+should be generall of the English men, that (as before you heard) went into
+Barbary with the French men and Genouois.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The memorable victories in diuers parts of Italie of Iohn Hawkwood English
+  man in the reigne of Richard the second, briefly recorded by M. Camden.
+
+Ad alteram ripam fluuij Colne oppositus est Sibble Heningham, locus
+natalis, vt accepi, Ioannis Hawkwoodi (Itali Aucuthum corrupte vocant) quem
+illi tantopere ob virtutem militarem suspexerunt, vt Senatus Florentinus
+propter insignia merita equestri statua et tumuli honore in eximiae
+fortitudinis, fideique testimonium ornauit. Res eius gestas Itali pleno ore
+praedicant; Et Paulus Iouius in elogijs celebrat: sat mihi sit Iulij
+Feroldi tetrastichon adijcere.
+
+  Hawkoode Angloram decus, et decus addite genti
+     Italicae, Italico presidiumque solo,
+  Vt tumuli quondam Florentia, sic simulachri
+     Virtutem Ionius donat honore tuam.
+
+William Thomas in his Historie of the common wealthes of Italy, maketh
+honorable mention of him twise, to wit, in the commonwealth of Florentia
+and Ferrara.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Epitaph of the valiant Esquire M. Peter Read in the south Ile of Saint
+  Peters Church in the citie of Norwich, which was knighted by Charles the
+  fift at the winning of Tunis in the yeere of our Lord 1538.
+
+Here vnder lieth the corpes of Peter Reade Esquire, who hath worthily
+serued, not onely his Prince and Countrey, but also the Emperour Charles
+the fift, both at his conquest of Barbarie, and at his siege at Tunis, and
+also in other places. Who had giuen him by the sayd Emperour for his
+valiant deedes the order of Barbary. Who dyed the 29 day of December, in
+the yeere of our Lord God 1566.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger with Charles the fift 1541,
+  drawen out of his booke De Republica instauranda.
+
+Thomas Chalonerus patria Londinensis, studio Cantabrigensis, educatione
+aulicus, religione pius, vereque Christianus fuit. Itaque cum iuuenilem
+aetatem, mentemque suam humanioribus studijs roborasset, Domino Henrico
+Kneuetto a potentissimo rege Henrico eius nominis octauo ad Carolum quintum
+imperatorem transmisso legato, vna cum illo profectus est, tanquam
+familiaris amicus, vel eidem, a consilijs. Quo quidem tempore Carolo quinto
+nauali certamine a Genua et Corsica in Algyram in Africa contra Turcas
+classem soluente ac hostiliter proficiscente, ornatissimo illo Kneuetto
+legato regis, Thoma Chalonero, Henrico Knolleo, et Henrico Isamo,
+illustribus viris eundem in illa expeditione suapte sponte sequentibus,
+pariterque militantibus, mirifice vitam suam Chalonerus tutatus est. Nam
+triremi illa, in qua fuerat, vel scopulis allisa, vel grauissimis pro
+cellis conquassata, naufragus cum se diu natatu defendisset, deficientibus
+viribus, brachijs manibusque languidis ac quasi eneruatis, prehensa
+dentibus cum maxima difficultate rudenti, quae ex altera triremi iam
+propinqua tum fuerat eiecta, non sine dentium aliquorum iactura sese tandem
+recuperauit, ac domum integer relapsus est.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Thomas Chaloner was by birth a Londiner, by studie a Cantabrigian, by
+education a Courtier, by religion a deuout and true Christian. Therefore
+after he had confirmed his youth and minde in the studies of good learning,
+when Sir Henry Kneuet was sent ambassadour from the mighty Prince Henry the
+8. to the Emperour Charles the fift, he went with him as his familiar
+friend, or as one of his Councell. At which time the said Charles the 5.
+passing ouer from Genoa and Corsica to Alger in Africa in warlike sort,
+with a mighty army by sea, that honourable Kneuet the kings ambassadour,
+Thomas Chaloner, Henry Knolles, and Henry Isham, right worthy persons, of
+their owne accord accompanied him in that expedition, and serued him in
+that warre, wherin Thomas Chaloner escaped most wonderfully with his life.
+For the galley wherein he was, being either dashed against the rockes, or
+shaken with mighty stormes, and so cast away, after he had saued himselfe a
+long while by swimming, when his strength failed him, his armes and hands
+being faint and weary, with great difficulty laying hold with his teeth on
+a cable, which was cast out of the next gally, not without breaking and
+losse of certaine of his teeth, at length recouered himselfe, and returned
+home into his countrey in safety.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The woorthy enterprise of Iohn Foxe an Englishman in deliuering 266.
+Christians out of the captiuitie of the Turkes at Alexandria, the 3 of
+Ianuarie 1577.
+
+Among our Merchants here in England, it is a common voiage to traffike into
+Spaine: whereunto a ship, being called The three halfe Moones, manned with
+38. men, and well fensed with munitions, the better to encounter their
+enemies withall, and hauing wind and tide, set from Portsmouth, 1563. and
+bended her iourney toward Siuill a citie in Spaine, intending there to
+traffique with them. [Sidenote: Iohn Foxe taken 1563.] And felling neere
+the Streights, they perceiued themselues to be beset round with eight
+gallies of the Turkes, in such wise, that there was no way for them to flie
+or escape away, but that either they must yeeld or els be sunke. Which the
+owner perceiuing, manfully encouraged his company, exhorting them valiantly
+to shew their manhood, shewing them that God was their God, and not their
+enemies, requesting them also not to faint in seeing such a heape of their
+enemies ready to deuour them; putting them in mind also, that if it were
+Gods pleasure to giue them into their enemies hands, it was not they that
+ought to shew one displeasant looke or countenance there against; but to
+take it patiently, and not to prescribe a day and time for their
+deliuerance, as the citizens of Bethulia did, but to put themselues vnder
+his mercy. And againe, if it were his mind and good will to shew his mighty
+power by them, if their enemies were ten times so many, they were not able
+to stand in their hands; putting them likewise in mind of the old and
+ancient woorthinesse of their countreymen, who in the hardest extremities
+haue alwayes most preuailed and gone away conquerors, yea, and where it
+hath bene almost impossible. Such (quoth he) hath bene the valiantnesse of
+our countreymen, and such hath bene the mightie power of our God.
+
+With other like incouragements, exhorting them to behaue themselues
+manfully, they fell all on their knees making their prayers briefly vnto
+God: who being all risen vp againe perceiued their enemies by their signes
+and defiances bent to the spoyle, whose mercy was nothing els but crueltie,
+whereupon euery man tooke him to his weapon.
+
+Then stood vp one Groue the master, being a comely man, with his sword and
+target, holding them vp in defiance agaynst his enemies. So likewise stood
+vp the Owner, the Masters mate, Boateswaine, Purser, and euery man well
+appointed. Nowe likewise sounded vp the drums, trumpets and flutes, which
+would haue encouraged any man, had he neuer so litle heart or courage in
+him.
+
+Then taketh him to his charge Iohn Foxe the gunner in the disposing of his
+pieces in order to the best effect, and sending his bullets towards the
+Turkes, who likewise bestowed their pieces thrise as fast toward the
+Christians. But shortly they drew neere, so that the bowmen fel to their
+charge in sending forth their arrowes so thicke amongst the Gallies, and
+also in doubling their shot so sore vpon the gallies, that there was twise
+so many of the Turkes slaine, as the number of the Christians were in all.
+But the Turks discharged twise as fast against the Christians, and so long,
+that the ship was very sore stricken and bruised vnder water. Which the
+Turkes perceiuing, made the more haste to come aboord the Shippe: which ere
+they could doe, many a Turke bought it deerely with the losse of their
+liues. Yet was all in vaine, and boorded they were, where they found so
+hote a skirmish, that it had bene better they had not medled with the
+feast. For the Englishmen shewed themselues men in deed, in working
+manfully with their browne bils and halbardes: where the owner, master,
+boateswaine, and their company stoode to it so lustily, that the Turkes
+were halfe dismaied. [Sidenote: The valour and death of their Boatswaine.]
+But chiefly the boateswaine shewed himself valiant aboue the rest: for he
+fared amongst the Turkes like a wood Lion: for there was none of them that
+either could or durst stand in his face, till at the last there came a shot
+from the Turkes, which brake his whistle asunder, and smote him on the
+brest, so that he fell downe, bidding them farewell, and to be of good
+comfort, encouraging them likewise to winne praise by death, rather then to
+liue captiues in misery and shame. Which they hearing, in deed intended to
+haue done, as it appeared by their skirmish: but the prease and store of
+the Turkes was so great, that they were not able long to endure, but were
+so ouerpressed, that they could not wield their weapons: by reason whereof,
+they must needs be taken, which none of them intended to haue bene, but
+rather to haue died: except onely the masters mate, who shrunke from the
+skirmish, like a notable coward, esteeming neither the valure of his name,
+nor accounting of the present example of his fellowes, nor hauing respect
+to the miseries, whereunto he should be put. But in fine, so it was, that
+the Turks were victors, whereof they had no great cause to reioyce, or
+triumph. Then would it haue grieued any hard heart to see these Infidels so
+violently intreating the Christians, not hauing any respect of their
+manhood which they had tasted of, nor yet respecting their owne state, how
+they might haue met with such a bootie, as might haue giuen them the
+ouerthrow; but no remorse hereof, or any thing els doth bridle their fierce
+and tirannous dealing, but that the Christians must needs to the gallies,
+to serue in new offices: and they were no sooner in them, but their
+garments were pulled ouer their eares, and torne from their backes, and
+they set to the oares.
+
+I will make no mention of their miseries, being now vnder their enemies
+raging stripes. I thinke there is no man wil iudge their fare good, or
+their bodies vnloden of stripes, and not pestered with too much heate, and
+also with too much cold: but I will goe to my purpose, which is, to shew
+the ende of those, being in meere miserie, which continually doe call on
+God with a steadfast hope that he will deliuer them, and with a sure faith
+that he can doe it.
+
+Nigh to the citie of Alexandria, being a hauen towne, and vnder the
+dominion of the Turkes, there is a roade, being made very fensible with
+strong wals, whereinto the Turkes doe customably bring their gallies on
+shoare euery yeere, in the winter season, and there doe trimme them, and
+lay them vp against the spring time. In which road there is a prison,
+wherein the captiues and such prisoners as serue in the gallies, are put
+for all that time, vntill the seas be calme and passable for the gallies,
+euery prisoner being most grieuously laden with irons on their legges, to
+their great paine, and sore disabling of them to any labour taking.
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen carried prisoners vnto an Hauen nere Alexandria.]
+Into which prison were these Christians put, and fast warded all the Winter
+season. But ere it was long, the Master and the Owner, by meanes of
+friends, were redeemed: the rest abiding still by the miserie, while that
+they were all (through reason of their ill vsage and worse fare, miserably
+starued) sauing one Iohn Fox, who (as some men can abide harder and more
+miserie, then other some can, so can some likewise make more shift, and
+worke more deuises to helpe their state and liuing, then other some can
+doe) being somewhat skilfull in the craft of a Barbour, by reason thereof
+made great shift in helping his fare now and then with a good meale.
+Insomuch, til at the last, God sent him fauour in the sight of the keeper
+of the prison, so that he had leaue to goe in and out to the road, at his
+pleasure, paying a certaine stipend vnto the keeper, and wearing a locke
+about his leg: which libertie likewise, sixe more had vpon like sufferance:
+who by reason of their long imprisonment, not being feared or suspected to
+start aside, or that they would worke the Turkes any mischiefe, had
+libertie to go in and out at the sayd road, in such maner, as this Iohn Fox
+did, with irons on their legs, and to returne againe at night.
+
+In the yeere of our Lord 1577. in the Winter season, the gallies happily
+comming to their accustomed harborow, and being discharged of all their
+mastes, sailes, and other such furnitures, as vnto gallies doe appertaine,
+and all the Masters and mariners of them being then nested in their owne
+homes: there remained in the prison of the said road two hundred threescore
+and eight Christian prisoners, who had bene taken by the Turks force, and
+were of sixteen sundry nations. Among which there were three Englishmen,
+whereof one was named Iohn Foxe of Woodbridge in Suffolke, the other
+William Wickney of Portsmouth, in the Countie of Southampton, and the third
+Robert Moore of Harwich in the Countie of Essex. Which Iohn Fox hauing bene
+thirteene or fourteene yeres vnder their gentle entreatance, and being too
+too weary thereof, minding his escape, weighed with himselfe by what meanes
+it might be brought to passe: and continually pondering with himself
+thereof, tooke a good heart vnto him, in hope that God would not be alwayes
+scourging his children, and neuer ceassed to pray him to further his
+pretended enterprise, if that it should redound to his glory.
+
+Not farre from the road, and somewhat from thence, at one side of the
+Citie, there was a certaine victualling house, which one Peter Vnticaro had
+hired, paying also a certaine fee vnto the keeper of the road. This Peter
+Vnticaro was a Spaniard borne, and a Christian, and had bene prisoner about
+thirtie yeeres, and neuer practised any meanes to escape, but kept himselfe
+quiet without touch or suspect of any conspiracie: vntill that nowe this
+John Foxe vsing much thither, they brake one to another their mindes,
+concerning the restraint of their libertie and imprisonment. So that this
+Iohn Fox at length opening vnto this Vnticaro the deuise which he would
+faine put in practise, made priuie one more to this their intent. Which
+three debated of this matter at such times as they could compasse to meete
+together: insomuch, that at seuen weekes ende they had sufficiently
+concluded how the matter should be, if it pleased God to farther them
+thereto: who making fiue more priuie to this their deuise, whom they
+thought they might safely trust, determined in three nights after to
+accomplish their deliberate purpose. Whereupon the same Iohn Fox, and Peter
+Vnticaro, and the other sixe appointed to meete all together in the prison
+the next day, being the last day of December: where this Iohn Fox certified
+the rest of the prisoners, what their intent and deuise was, and how and
+when they minded to bring their purpose to passe: who thereunto perswaded
+them without much a doe to further their deuise. Which the same Iohn Fox
+seeing, deliuered vnto them a sort of files, which he had gathered together
+for this purpose, by the meanes of Peter Vnticaro, charging them that euery
+man should be readie discharged of his yrons by eight of the clocke on the
+the next day at night.
+
+[Sidenote: Januarie.] On the next day at night, this said Iohn Fox, and his
+sixe other companions, being all come to the house of Peter Vnticaro,
+passing the time away in mirth for feare of suspect, till the night came
+on, so that it was time for them to put in practise their deuise, sent
+Peter Vnticaro to the master of the roade, in the name of one of the
+Masters of the citie, with whom this keeper was acquainted, and at whose
+request he also would come at the first: who desired him to take the paines
+to meete him there, promising him, that he would bring him backe againe.
+The keeper agreed to goe with him, willing the warders not to barre the
+gate, saying, that he would not stay long, but would come againe with all
+speede.
+
+In the meane season, the other seuen had prouided them of such weapons, as
+they could get in that house: and Iohn Fox tooke him to an olde rustie
+sword blade, without either hilt or pomell, which he made to serue his
+turne, in bending the hand ende of the sword, in steed of a pomell, and the
+other had got such spits and glaiues as they found in the house.
+
+The keeper now being come vnto the house, and perceiuing no light, nor
+hearing any noyse, straight way suspected the matter: and returning
+backward, Iohn Fox standing behind the corner of the house, stepped foorth
+vnto him: who perceiuing it to be Iohn Fox, saide, O Fox, what haue I
+deserued of thee, that thou shouldest seeke my death? Thou villaine (quoth
+Fox) hast bene a bloodsucker of many a Christians blood, and now thou shalt
+know what thou hast deserued at my handes: wherewith he lift vp his bright
+shining sword of tenne yeeres rust, and stroke him so maine a blowe, as
+therewithall his head claue a sunder, so that he fell starke dead to the
+ground. Whereupon Peter Vnticaro went in, and certified the rest how the
+case stood with the keeper: who came presently foorth, and some with their
+spits ranne him through, and the other with their glaiues hewed him in
+sunder, cut off his head, and mangled him so, that no man should discerne
+what he was.
+
+Then marched they toward the roade, whereinto they entered softly, where
+were six warders, whom one of them asked, saying, who was there? quoth Fox
+and his company, all friendes. Which when they were all within, proued
+contrary: for, quoth Fox, my masters, here is not to euery man a man,
+wherefore looke you play your parts. Who so behaued themselues in deede,
+that they had dispatched these sixe quickly. Then Iohn Fox intending not to
+be barred of his enterprise, and minding to worke surely in that which he
+went about, barred the gate surely, and planted a Canon against it.
+
+Then entred they into the Gailers lodge, where they found the keyes of the
+fortresse and prison by his bed side, and there had they all better
+weapons. In this chamber was a chest, wherein was a rich treasure, and all
+in duckats, which this Peter Vnticaro, and two more, opening, staffed
+themselues so full as they could, betweene their shirts and their skinne:
+which Iohn Fox would not once touch, and sayde, that it was his and their
+libertie which he sought for, to the honour of his God, and not to make a
+marte of the wicked treasure of the Infidels. Yet did these words sinke
+nothing into their stomakes, they did it for a good intent: so did Saul
+saue the fattest Oxen, to offer vnto the Lord, and they to serue their owne
+turnes. But neither did Saul scape the wrath of God therefore, neither had
+these that thing which they desired so, and did thirst after. Such is Gods
+iustice. He that they put their trust in, to deliuer them from the
+tyrannous hands of their enemies, he (I say) could supply their want of
+necessaries.
+
+Nowe these eight being armed with such weapons as they thought well of,
+thinking themselues sufficient champions to encounter a stronger enemie,
+and coming vnto the prison, Fox opened the gates and doores thereof, and
+called forth all the prisoners, whom he set, some to ramming vp the gate,
+some to the dressing vp of a certaine gallie, which was the best in all the
+roade, and was called the captaine of Alexandria, whereinto some caried
+mastes, sailes, oares, and other such furniture as doth belong vnto a
+gallie.
+
+At the prison were certaine warders, whom Iohn Fox and his companie slewe:
+in the killing of whom, there were eight more of the Turkes, which
+perceiued them, and got them to the toppe of the prison: vnto whom Iohn
+Fox, and his company, were faine to come by ladders, where they found a hot
+skirmish. For some of them were there slaine, some wounded, and some but
+scarred, and not hurt. As Iohn Fox was thrise shot through his apparell,
+and not hurt. Peter Vnticaro, and the other two, that had armed them with
+the duckats, were slaine, as not able to weild themselues, being so
+pestered with the weight and vneasie carying of the wicked and prophane
+treasure: and also diuerse Christians were aswell hurt about that skirmish,
+as Turkes slaine.
+
+Amongst the Turkes was one thrust thorowe, who (let vs not say that it was
+ill fortune) fell off from the toppe of the prison wall, and made such a
+lowing, that the inhabitants thereabout (as here and there scattering
+stoode a house or two) came and dawed [Footnote: To awaken: here to bring
+back to his senses. I know of no other instance where it bears just this
+meaning. "The other side from whence the morning daws." (_Polyolbion
+X._)] him, so that they vnderstood the case, how that the prisoners were
+paying their ransomes: wherewith they raised both Alexandria which lay on
+the west side of the roade, and a Castle which was at the Cities end, next
+to the roade, and also an other Fortresse which lay on the Northside of the
+roade: so that nowe they had no way to escape, but one, which by mans
+reason (the two holdes lying so vpon the mouth of the roade) might seeme
+impossible to be a way for them. So was the red sea impossible for the
+Israelites to passe through, the hils and rockes lay so on the one side,
+and their enemies compassed on the other. So was it impossible, that the
+wals of Iericho should fall downe, being neither vndermined, nor yet rammed
+at with engines, nor yet any mans wisedome, pollicie, or helpe set or put
+thereunto. Such impossibilities can our God make possible. He that helde
+the Lyons iawes from renting Daniel asunder, yea, or yet from once touching
+him to his hurt: can not he hold the roring cannons of this hellish force?
+He that kept the fiers rage in the hot burning Ouen, from the three
+children, that praised his name, can not he keepe the fiers flaming blastes
+from among his elect?
+
+Now is the road fraught with lustie souldiers, laborers, and mariners, who
+are faine to stand to their tackling, in setting to euery man his hand,
+some to the carying in of victuals, some munitions, some oares, and some
+one thing, some another, but most are keeping their enemie from the wall of
+the road. But to be short, there was no time mispent, no man idle, nor any
+mans labour ill bestowed, or in vaine. So that in short time, this gally
+was ready trimmed vp. Whereinto euery man leaped in all haste, hoyssing vp
+the sayles lustily, yeelding themselues to his mercie and grace, in whose
+hands are both winde and weather.
+
+Now is this gally on flote, and out of the safetie of the roade: now haue
+the two Castles full power vpon the gally, now is there no remedy but to
+sinke: how can it be auoided? The canons let flie from both sides, and the
+gally is euen in the middest, and betweene them both. What man can deuise
+to saue it? there is no man, but would thinke it must needes be sunke.
+
+There was not one of them that feared the shotte, which went thundring
+round about their eares, nor yet were once scarred or touched, with fiue
+and forty shot, which came from the Castles. Here did God hold foorth his
+buckler, he shieldeth now this gally, and hath tried their faith to the
+vttermost. Now commeth his speciall helpe: yea, euen when man thinks them
+past all helpe then commeth he himselfe downe from heauen with his mightie
+power, then is his present remedie most readie prest. For they saile away,
+being not once touched with the glaunce of a shot, and are quickly out of
+the Turkish canons reach. Then might they see them comming downe by heapes
+to the water side, in companies like vnto swarmes of bees, making shew to
+come after them with gallies, in bustling themselues to dresse vp the
+gallies, which would be a swift peece of worke for them to doe, for that
+they had neither oares, mastes, sailes, gables, nor any thing else ready in
+any gally. But yet they are carrying them into them, some into one gally,
+and some into another, so that, being such a confusion amongst them,
+without any certaine guide, it were a thing impossible to ouertake them:
+beside that, there was no man that would take charge of a gally, the
+weather was so rough, and there was such an amasednes amongst them. And
+verely I thinke their God was amased thereat: it could not be but he must
+blush for shame, he can speake neuer a word for dulnes, much lease can he
+helpe them in such an extremitie. Well, howsoeuer it is, he is very much to
+blame, to suffer them to receiue such a gibe. But howsoeuer their God
+behaued himselfe, our God shewed himselfe a God indeede, and that he was
+the onely liuing God: for the seas were swift vnder his faithfull, which
+made the enemies agast to behold them, a skilfuller Pilot leades them, and
+their mariners bestirre them lustily: but the Turkes had neither mariners,
+Pilot, nor any skilfull Master, that was in a readinesse at this pinch.
+
+When the Christians were safe out of the enemies coast, Iohn Fox called to
+them all, willing them to be thankfull vnto almighty God for their
+deliuerie, and most humbly to fall downe vpon their knees, beseeching him
+to aide them vnto their friends land, and not to bring them into an other
+daunger, sith hee had most mightily deliuered them from so great a
+thraldome and bondage.
+
+Thus when euery man had made his petition, they fell straight way to their
+labour with the oares, in helping one another, when they were wearied, and
+with great labour striuing to come to some Christian land, as neere as they
+could gesse by the starres. But the windes were so diuers, one while
+driuing them this way, that they were now in a newe maze, thinking that God
+had forsaken them, and left them to a greater danger. And forasmuch as
+there were no victuals now left in the gally, it might haue beene a cause
+to them (if they had beene the Israelites) to haue murmured against their
+God: but they knew how that their God, who had deliuered them out of
+AEgypt, was such a louing and mercifull God, as that hee would not suffer
+them to be confounded, in whom he had wrought so great a wonder: but what
+calamitie soeuer they sustained, they knew it was but for their further
+triall, and also (in putting them in mind of their farther miserie) to
+cause them not to triumph and glory in themselues therefore. [Sidenote:
+Extremity of famine.] Hauing (I say) no victuals in the galley, it might
+seeme that one miserie continually fel vpon an others neck: but to be
+briefe, the famine grew to be so great, that in 28 dayes, wherein they
+were on the sea, there died eight persons, to the astonishment of all the
+rest.
+
+So it fell out, that vpon the 29 day, after they set from Alexandria, they
+fell on the Isle of Candie, and landed at Gallipoli, where they were made
+much of by the Abbot and Monks there, who caused them to stay there, while
+they were well refreshed and eased. [Sidenote: John Fox his sword kept as a
+monument in Gallipoli.] They kept there the sworde, wherewith Iohn Fox had
+killed the keeper, esteeming it as a most precious iewell, and hung it vp
+for a monument.
+
+When they thought good, hauing leaue to depart from thence, they sayled
+along the coast, till they arriued at Tarento, where they solde their
+gallie, and deuided it, euery man hauing a part thereof. The Turkes
+receiuing so shamefull a foile at their hand, pursued the Christians, and
+scoured the seas, where they could imagine that they had bent their course.
+And the Christians had departed from thence on the one day in the morning,
+and seuen gallies of the Turkes came thither that night, as it was
+certified by those who followed Fox, and his companie, fearing least they
+should haue bene met with. And then they came a foote to Naples, where they
+departed a sunder, euery man taking him to his next way home. From whence
+Iohn Fox tooke his iourney vnto Rome, where he was well entertayned of an
+Englishman, who presented his worthy deede vnto the Pope, who rewarded him
+liberally, and gaue him his letters vnto the king of Spaine, where he was
+very well entertained of him there, who for this his most worthy enterprise
+gaue him in fee twenty pence a day. From whence, being desirous to come
+into his owne countrie, he came thither at such time as he conueniently
+could, which was in the yeere of our Lorde God, 1579. Who being come into
+England, went vnto the Court, and shewed all his trauell vnto the Councell:
+who considering of the state of this man, in that hee had spent and lost a
+great part of his youth in thraldome and bondage, extended to him their
+liberalitie, to helpe to maintaine him now in age, to their right honour,
+and to the incouragement of all true hearted Christians.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The copie of the certificate for Iohn Fox, and his companie, made by the
+  Prior, and the brethren of Gallipoli, where they first landed.
+
+We the Prior, and Fathers of the Couent of the Amerciates, of the city of
+Gallipoli, of the order of Preachers doe testifie, that vpon the 29 of
+Ianuary last past, 1577, there came into the said citie a certaine gally
+from Alexandria, taken from the Turkes, with two hundreth fiftie and eight
+Christians, whereof was principal Master Iohn Fox, an Englishman, a gunner,
+and one of the chiefest that did accomplish that great worke, whereby so
+many Christians haue recouered their liberties. In token and remembrance
+whereof, vpon our earnest request to the same Iohn Fox, he hath left here
+an olde sworde, wherewith he slewe the keeper of the prison: which sword we
+doe as a monument and memoriall of so worthy a deede, hang vp in the chiefe
+place of our Couent house. And for because all things aforesaid, are such
+as we will testifie to be true, as they are orderly passed, and haue
+therefore good credite, that so much as is aboue expressed is true, and for
+the more faith thereof, we the Prior, and Fathers aforesaide, haue ratified
+and subscribed these presents. Geuen in Gallipoly, the third of Februarie
+1577.
+
+    I Frier Vincent Barba, Prior of the same place, confirme the premisses,
+      as they are aboue written.
+    I Frier Albert Damaro, of Gallipoly, Subprior, confirme as much.
+    I Frier Anthony Celleler of Gallipoly, confirme as aforesaid.
+    I Frier Bartlemew of Gallipoly, confirme as aboue said.
+    I Frier Francis of Gallipoly, confirme as much.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Bishop of Rome his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox.
+
+Be it knowen vnto all men, to whom this writing shall come, that the
+bringer hereof Iohn Fox Englishman, a Gunner, after he had serued captiue
+in the Turkes gallies, by the space of foureteene yeeres, at length,
+thorough God his helpe, taking good opportunitie, the third of Ianuarie
+last past, slew the keeper of the prison, (whom he first stroke on the
+face) together with four and twentie other Turkes, by the assistance of his
+fellow prisoners: and with 266. Christians (of whose libertie he was the
+author) launched from Alexandria, and from thence arriued first at
+Gallipoly in Candie, and afterwardes at Tarento in Apulia: the written
+testimony and credite of which things, as also of others, the same Iohn Fox
+hath in publike tables from Naples.
+
+Vpon Easter eue he came to Rome, and is now determined to take his iourney
+to the Spanish Court, hoping there to obtaine some reliefe toward his
+liuing: wherefore the poore distressed man humbly beseecheth, and we in his
+behalfe do in the bowels of Christ, desire you, that taking compassion of
+his former captiuitie, and present penurie, you doe not onely suffer him
+freely to passe throughout all your cities and townes, but also succour him
+with your charitable almes, the reward whereof you shall hereafter most
+assuredly receiue, which we hope you will afford to him, whom with tender
+affection of pitie wee commende vnto you. At Rome, the 20 of Aprill 1577.
+
+    Thomas Grolos Englishman Bishop of Astraphen.
+    Richard Silleum Prior Angliae.
+    Andreas Ludouicus Register to our Soueraigne Lord the Pope, which for
+      the greater credit of the premises, haue set my seale to these
+      presents. At Rome, the day and yeere aboue written.
+    Mauricius Clement the gouernour and keeper of the English Hospitall in
+      the citie.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The King of Spaine his letters to the Lieutenant, for the placing of Iohn
+  Fox in the office of a Gunner.
+
+To the illustrious Prince, Vespasian Gonsaga Colonna, our Lieutenant and
+Captaine Generall of our Realme of Valentia. Hauing consideration, that
+Iohn Fox Englishman hath serued vs, and was one of the most principall,
+which tooke away from the Turkes a certaine gallie, which they haue brought
+to Tarento, wherein were two hundred, fiftie, and eight Christian captiues:
+we licence him to practise, and giue him the office of a Gunner, and haue
+ordained, that he goe to our said Realme, there to serue in the said office
+in the Gallies, which by our commandement are lately made. And we doe
+commaund, that you cause to be payed to him eight ducats pay a moneth, for
+the time that he shall serue in the saide Gallies as a Gunner, or till we
+can otherwise prouide for him, the saide eight duckats monethly of the
+money which is already of our prouision, present and to come, and to haue
+regarde of those which come with him. From Escuriall the tenth of August,
+1577.
+
+  I the King,
+    Iuan del Gado.
+
+And vnder that a confirmation of the Councell.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbarie, in the yeere 1583. with a ship
+  called the Iesus, wherein the aduentures and distresses of some
+  Englishmen are truely reported, and other necessary circumstances
+  obserued. Written by Thomas Sanders.
+
+This voyage was set foorth by the right worshipfull sir Edward Osborne
+knight, chiefe merchant of all the Turkish company, and one master Richard
+Staper, the ship being of the burden of one hundred tunnes, called the
+Iesus, she was builded at Farmne a riuer by Portsmouth. The owners were
+master Thomas Thomson, Nicholas Carnaby, and Iohn Gilman. The master was
+one Aches Hellier of Black-wall, and his Mate was one Richard Morris of
+that place: their Pilot was one Anthonie Ierado a Frenchman, of the
+prouince of Marseils: the purser was one William Thomson our owners sonne:
+the merchants factors were Romane Sonnings a Frenchman, and Richard Skegs
+seruant vnto the said master Staper. The owners were bound vnto the
+marchants by charter partie therevpon, in one thousand markes, that the
+said ship by Gods permission should goe for Tripolis in Barbarie, that is
+to say, first from Portsmouth to Newhauen in Normandie, from thence to S.
+Lucar, otherwise called Saint Lucas, in Andeluzia, and from thence to
+Tripolie, which is in the East part of Africa, and so to returne vnto
+London. [Sidenote: Man doth purpose, and God doth dispose.] But here ought
+euery man to note and consider the workes of our God, that many times what
+man doth determine God doth disappoint. The said master hauing some
+occasion to goe to Farmne, tooke with him the Pilot and the Purser, and
+returning againe by meanes of a perrie of winde, the boat wherein they
+were, was drowned, with the said master, the purser, and all the company:
+onely the said Pilot by experience in swimming saued himselfe: these were
+the beginnings of our sorrowes. [Sidenote: A new master chosen.] After
+which the said masters mate would not proceed in that voiage, and the owner
+hearing of this misfortune, and the unwillingnesse of the masters mate, did
+send downe one Richard Deimond, and shipped him for master, who did chuse
+for his Mate one Andrew Dier, and so the said ship departed on her voiage
+accordingly: that is to say, about the 16. of October, in An. 1583. she
+made saile from Portsmouth, [Sidenote: The new master died.] and the 18 day
+then next following she arriued at Newhauen, where our saide last master
+Deimond by a surfeit died. The factors then appointed the said Andrew Dier,
+being then masters mate, to be their master for that voiage, who did chuse
+to be his Mates the two quarter masters of the same ship, to wit, Peter
+Austine, and Shillabey, and for Purser was shipped one Richard Burges.
+Afterward about the 8. day of Nouember we made saile forthward, and by
+force of weather we were driuen backe againe into Portesmouth, where we
+renued our victuals and other necessaries, and then the winde came faire.
+About the 29. day then next following we departed thence, and the first day
+of December by meanes of a contrarie winde, we were driuen to Plimmouth.
+The 18. day then next following, we made foorthward againe, and by force of
+weather we were driuen to Falmouth, where we remained vntill the first day
+of Ianuary: at which time the winde comming faire, we departed thence, and
+about the 20. day of the said moneth we arriued safely at S. Lucar.
+[Sidenote: The Iesus arriued in Tripolis.] And about the 9. day of March
+next following, we made saile from thence, and about the 18. day of the
+same moneth we came to Tripolis in Barbarie, where we were verie well
+intertained by the king of that countrey, and also of the commons. The
+commodities of that place are sweete oiles: the king there is a merchant,
+and the rather (willing to preferre himselfe before his commons) requested
+our said factors to traffique with him, and promised them that if they
+would take his oiles at his owne price, they should pay no maner of
+custome, and they tooke of him certaine tunnes of oile: and afterwarde
+perceiuing that they might haue farre better cheape notwithstanding the
+custome free, they desired the king to licence them to take the oiles at
+the pleasure of his commons, for that his price did exceede theirs:
+whereunto the king would not agree, but was rather contended to abate his
+price, insomuch that the factors bought all their oyles of the king custome
+free, and so laded the same aboord.
+
+[Sidenote: Another ship of Bristow came to Tripolis.] In the meane time
+there came to that place one Miles Dickenson in a ship of Bristow, who
+together with our said Factors tooke a house to themselues there. Our
+French Factor Romane Sonnings desired to buy a commodity in the market, and
+wanting money, desired the saide Miles Dickenson to lend him an hundred
+Chikinoes vntill he came to his lodging, which he did, and afterward the
+same Sonnings mette with Miles Dickenson in the streete, and deliuered him
+money bound vp in a napkin: saying, master Dickenson there is the money I
+borrowed of you, and so thanked him for the same: hee doubted nothing lesse
+then falshoode, which is seldome knowne among marchants, and specially
+being together in one house, and is the more detestable betweene
+Christians, they being in Turkie among the heathen. The said Dickenson did
+not tell the money presently, vntill he came to his lodging, and then
+finding nine Chikinoes lacking of his hundred, which was about three
+pounds, for that euery Chikino is woorth seuen shillings of English money,
+he came to the sayde Romane Sonnings and deliuered him his handkerchiefe,
+and asked him howe many Chikinoes hee had deliuered him! Sonnings answered,
+an hundred: Dickenson, said no: and so they protested and swore on both
+parts. But in the ende the said Romane Sonnings did sweare deepely with
+detestable othes and curses, and prayed God that he might shewe his workes
+on him, that other might take ensample thereby, and that he might be hanged
+like a dogge, and neuer come into England againe, if he did not deliuer
+vnto the sayde Dickenson an hundred Chikinoes. And here beholde a notable
+example of all blasphemers, curses and swearers, how God rewarded him
+accordingly: for many times it cometh to passe, that God sheweth his
+miracles vpon such monstrous blasphemers, to the ensample of others, as
+nowe hereafter you shall heare what befell to this Romane Sonnings.
+
+There was a man in the said towne a pledge, whose name was Patrone Norado,
+who the yere before had done this Sonnings some pleasure there. The
+foresaid Patrone Norado was indebted vnto a Turke of that towne in the
+summe of foure hundred and fiftie crownes, for certain goods sent by him
+into Christendome in a ship of his owne, and by his owne brother, and
+himselfe remained in Tripolis as pledge vntill his said brothers returne:
+and, as the report went there, after his brothers arriual into
+Christendome, he came among lewde companie, and lost his brothers said ship
+and goods at dice, and neuer returned vnto him againe.
+
+[Sidenote: A conspiracie practiced by the French Factor, to deceiue a
+Turkish marchant of 450 crowns.] The said Patrone Norado being voyde of all
+hope, and finding now opportunitie, consulted with the said Sonnings for to
+swimme a seaboorde the Islands, and the ship being then out of danger,
+should take him in (as after was confessed) and so to goe to Tolan in the
+prouince of Marseilis with this Patrone Norado, and there to take in his
+lading.
+
+The shippe being readie the first day of May, and hauing her sayles all
+aboorde, our sayde Factors did take their leaue of the king, who very
+courteously bidde them farwell, and when they came aboorde, they commanded
+the Master and the companie hastily to get out the ship: the Master
+answered that it was vnpossible, for that the winde was contrary and
+ouer-blowed. And he required vs vpon forfeiture of our bandes, that we
+should doe our endeuour to get her foorth. Then went wee to warpe out the
+shippe, and presently the king sent a boate aboord of vs, with three men in
+her, commaunding the saide Sonnings to come a shoare: at whose coming, the
+king demaunded of him custome for the oyles: Sonnings answered him that his
+highnesse had promised to deliuer them custome free. But notwithstanding
+the king weighed not his said promise, and as an infidell that hath not the
+feare of God before his eyes, nor regarde of his worde, albeit he was a
+king, hee caused the sayde Sonnings to pay the custome to the vttermost
+penie. And afterwarde willed him to make haste away, saying, that the
+Ianizaries would haue the oyle ashoare againe.
+
+These Ianizaries are souldiers there vnder the great Turke, and their power
+is aboue the Kings. And so the saide Factor departed from the king, and
+came to the waterside, and called for a boate to come aboorde, and he
+brought with him the foresaid Patrone Norado. [Sidenote: The beginning of
+their troubles, and occasion of all their miserie.] The companie
+inquisitiue to know what man that was, Sonnings answered, that he was his
+countrymen, a passenger: I pray God said the companie, that we come not
+into trouble by this man. Then said Sonnings angerly, what haue you to do
+with any matters of mine? if any thing chance otherwise then well, I must
+answer for all.
+
+Now the Turke vnto whom this Patrone Norado was indebted, missing him
+(supposed him to be aboorde of our shippe) presently went vnto the King,
+and tolde him that hee thought that his pledge Patrone Norado was aboord of
+the English ship, whereupon the King presently sent a boat aboord of vs,
+with three men in her commanding the said Sonnings to come a shoare, and
+not speaking any thing as touching the man, he saide that he would come
+presently in his owne boate, but as soone as they were gone, he willed vs
+to warp foorth the ship, and saide that he would see the knaues hanged
+before he would goe a shoare. And when the king sawe that he came not a
+shoare, but still continued warping away the shippe, he straight commaunded
+the gunner of the bulwarke next vnto vs, to shoote three shootes without
+ball. Then we came all to the said Sonnings, and asked of him what the
+matter was that we were shot at, he said that it was the Ianizaries who
+would haue the oyle a shoare againe, and willed vs to make haste away, and
+after that he had discharged three shots without ball, he commaunded all
+the gunners in the towne to doe their indeuour to sinke vs, but the Turkish
+gunners could not once strike vs, wherefore the king sent presently to the
+Banio: (this Banio is the prison whereas all the captiues lay at night) and
+promised if that there were any that could either sinke vs, or else cause
+vs to come in againe, he should haue a hundred crownes, and his libertie.
+With that came foorth a Spaniard called Sebastian, which had bene an olde
+seruitor in Flanders, and he said, that vpon the performance of that
+promise, hee would vndertake either to sinke vs, or to cause vs to come in
+againe, and therto he would gage his life, and at the first shotte he split
+our rudders head in pieces, and the second shotte he shotte vs vnder the
+water, and the third shotte he shotte vs through our foremast with a
+Coluering shot, and thus he hauing rent both our rudder and maste, and shot
+vs vnder water, we were inforced to goe in againe.
+
+This Sebastian for all his diligence herein, had neither his liberty, nor
+an hundred crownes, so promised by the said king, but after his seruice
+done was committed againe to prison, whereby may appeare the regard that
+the Turke or infidell hath of his worde, although he be able to performe
+it, yea more, though he be a king.
+
+Then, our merchants seeing no remedie, they together with fiue of our
+companie went a shoare, and then they ceased shooting: they shot vnto vs in
+the whole, nine and thirtie shootes, without the hurt of any man.
+
+And when our marchants came a shoare, the King commaunded presently that
+they with the rest of our companie that were with them, should be cheined
+foure and foure, to a hundred waight of yron, and when we came in with the
+ship, there came presently aboue an hundred Turks aboord of vs, and they
+searched vs, and stript our very clothes from our backes, and brake open
+our chests, and made a spoyle of all that we had: and the Christian
+caitifes likewise, that came a boord of vs made spoyle of our goods, and
+vsed vs as ill as the Turkes did. And our masters mate hauing a Geneua
+Bible in his hand, there came the kings chiefe gunner, and tooke it out
+from him, who shewed me of it, and I hauing the language, went presently to
+the kings treasurer, and tolde him of it, saying, that sith it was the will
+of God that we should fall into their handes, yet that they should grant us
+to vse our consciences to our owne discretion, as they suffered the
+Spaniards and other nations to vse theirs, and he graunted vs: then I told
+him that the maister gunner had taken away a Bible from one of our men: the
+Treasurer went presently and commaunded him to deliuer vp the Bible againe,
+which he did: and within a litle after he tooke it from the man againe, and
+I shewed the Treasurer of it, and presently he commaunded him to deliuer it
+againe: saying, thou villaine, wilt thou turne to Christianitie againe? for
+he was a Renegado, which is one that first was a Christian, and afterwards
+becommeth a Turke, and so he deliuered me the Bible the second time. And
+then I hauing it in my hand, the gunner came to me, and spake these wordes,
+saying, thou dogge, I wil haue the booke in despight of thee, and tooke it
+from me, saying: If thou tell the kings treasurer of it any more, by
+Mahomet I will be reuenged of thee. Notwithstanding I went the third time
+vnto the kings Treasurer, and tolde him of it, and he came with me, saying
+thus unto the gunner: by the head of the great Turke, if thou take it from
+him againe, thou shalt haue an hundred bastonadoes. And foorthwith he
+deliuered me the booke, saying, he had not the value of a pin of the spoyle
+of the ship, which was the better for him, as hereafter you shall heare:
+for there was none, neither Christian nor Turke that tooke the value of a
+peniworth of our goods from vs, but perished both bodie and goods within
+seuenteene moneths following, as hereafter shall plainely appeare.
+
+Then came the Guardian Basha, which is the keeper of the kings captiues, to
+fetch vs all a shoare, and then I remembring the miserable estate of poore
+distressed captiues, in the time of their bondage to those infidels, went
+to mine owne chest, and tooke out thereof a iarre of oyle, and filled a
+basket full of white Ruske to carie a shoare with me, but before I came to
+the Banio, the Turkish boyes had taken away almost all my bread, and the
+keeper saide, deliuer me the iarre of oyle, and when thou commest to the
+Banio thou shalt haue it againe, but I neuer had it of him any more.
+
+But when I came to the Banio, and sawe our Marchants and all the rest of
+our company in chaines, and we all ready to receiue the same reward, what
+heart in the world is there so hard, but would haue pitied our cause,
+hearing or seeing the lamentable greeting there was betwixt vs: all this
+happened the first of May 1584.
+
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen arraigned.] And the second day of the same
+moneth, the King with all his counsell sate in Judgment vpon vs. The first
+that were had forth to be arraigned, were the Factors, and the Masters, and
+the King asked them wherefore they came not a shoare when he sent for them.
+And Romaine Sonnings answered, that though he were king on shoare, and
+might commaunde there, so was hee as touching those that were vnder him:
+and therefore said, if any offence be, the fault is wholly in my selfe, and
+in no other. Then foorthwith the king gaue iudgement, that the saide
+Romaine Sonnings should be hanged ouer the Northeast bulwarke: from whence
+he conueyed the forenamed Patrone Norado, and then he called for our Master
+Andrew Dier, and vsed fewe wordes to him, and so condemned him to be hanged
+ouer the walles of the Westermost bulwarke.
+
+Then fell our other Factor (named Richard Skegs) vpon his knees before the
+king, and said, I beseech your highnesse either to pardon our Master, or
+else suffer me to die for him, for he is ignorant of this cause. And then
+the people of that countrey fauouring the said Richard Skegs besought the
+king to pardon them both. So then the king spake these wordes: Beholde for
+thy sake, I pardon the Master. Then presently the Turkes shouted, and
+cried, saying: Away with the Master from the presence of the king. And then
+he came into the Banio whereas we were, and tolde vs what had happened, and
+we all reioyced at the good hap of master Skegs, that hee was saued, and
+our Master for his sake.
+
+[Sidenote: Master Dier condemned to be hanged ouer a bulwarke.] But
+afterward our ioy was turned to double sorrow, for in the meane time the
+kings minde was altered: for that one of his counsell had aduised him, that
+vnlesse the Master died also, by the lawe they could not confiscate the
+ship nor goods, neither captive any of the men: whereupon the king sent for
+our Master againe, and gaue him another iudgement after his pardon for one
+cause, which was that hee should be hanged. Here all true Christians may
+see what trust a Christian man may put in an infidels promise, who being a
+King pardoned a man nowe, as you haue heard, and within an houre after
+hanged him for the same cause before a whole multitude: and also promised
+our Factors their oyles custome free, and at their going away made them pay
+the vttermost penie for the custome thereof.
+
+[Sidenote: A Frenshman turned Turke, in hope of his life, and afterwards
+was hanged.] And when that Romaine Sonnings saw no remedy but that he
+should die, he protested to turne Turke, hoping thereby to haue saued his
+life. Then said the Turke, if thou wilt turne Turke, speake the words that
+thereunto belong: and he did so. Then saide they vnto him, Now thou shalt
+die in the faithe of a Turke, and so hee did, as the Turkes reported that
+were at his execution. And the forenamed Patrone Norado, whereas before he
+had libertie and did nothing he then was condemned slaue perpetuall, except
+there were paiment made of the foresaid summe of money.
+
+Then the king condemned all vs, who were in number sixe and twentie, of the
+which, two were hanged (as you haue heard) and one died the first day wee
+came on shoare, by the visitation of Almightie God: and the other three and
+twentie he condemned slaues perpetually vnto the great Turke, and the ship
+and goods were confiscated to the vse of the great Turke: and then we all
+fell downe vpon our knees, giuing God thankes for this sorrowfull
+visitation, and giuing our selues wholy to the Almightie power of God, vnto
+whom all secrets are knowen, that he of his goodnesse would vouchsafe to
+looke vpon vs.
+
+Here may all true Christian hearts see the wonderfull workes of God shewed
+vpon such infidels, blasphemers, whoremasters, and renegate Christians, and
+so you shall reade in the ende of this booke, of the like vpon the
+vnfaithfull king and all his children, and of as many as tooke any portion
+of the said goods.
+
+[Sidenote: Euery fiue men allowed but two pence of bread a day.] But first
+to shewe our miserable bondage and slauerie, and vnto what small pittance
+and allowance wee were tied, for euery fiue men had allowance but fiue
+aspers of bread in a day, which is but two pence English: and our lodging
+was to lye on the bare boards, with a very simple cape to couer vs, wee
+were also forceably and most violently shauen, head and beard, and within
+three dayes after, I and six more of my fellowes, together with fourescore
+Italians and Spaniards were sent foorth in a Galeot to take a Greekish
+Carmosell, which came into Africa to steale Negroes, and went out of
+Tripolis vnto that place, which was two hundred and fourtie leagues thence,
+but wee were chained three and three to an oare, and wee rowed naked aboue
+the girdle, and the Boteswaine of the Galley walked abaft the maste, and
+his Mate afore the maste, and eche of them a bulls pissell dried in their
+handes, and when their diuelish choller rose, they would strike the
+Christians for no cause: and they allowed vs but halfe a pound of bread a
+man in a day without any other kinde of sustenance, water excepted. And
+when we came to the place whereas wee saw the Carmosell, we were not
+suffered to haue neither needle, bodkin, knife, or any other weapon about
+vs, nor at any other time in the night, vpon paine of one hundred
+bastonadoes: wee were then also cruelly manackled in such sort, that we
+could not put our handes the length of one foote asunder the one from the
+other, and euery night they searched our chaines three times, to see if
+they were fast riueted: Wee continued fight with the Carmosell three
+houres, and then wee tooke it, and lost but two of our men in that fight,
+but there were slaine of the Greekes fiue, and foureteene were cruelly
+hurt, and they that were sound, were presently made slaues and chained to
+the oares: and within fifteene dayes after we returned againe into
+Tripolis, and then wee were put to all maner of slauerie. [Sidenote: The
+Turkes builded a church.] I was put to hewe stones, and other to cary
+stones, and some to draw the Cart with earth, and some to make morter, and
+some to draw stones, (for at that time the Turkes builded a church:) And
+thus we were put to all kinde of slauerie that was to be done. And in the
+time of our being there, the Moores that are the husbandmen of the countrey
+rebelled against the king, because he would haue constrained them to pay
+greater tribute then heretofore they had done, so that the Souldiours of
+Tripolis marched foorth of the towne to haue ioyned battell against the
+Moores for their rebellion, and the King sent with them foure pieces of
+Ordinance, which were drawen by the captiues twenty miles into the Country
+after them, and at the sight thereof the Moores fled and then the Captaines
+returned backe againe. Then I and certaine Christians more were sent twelue
+miles into the countrey with a Cart to lode timber, and we returned againe
+the same day.
+
+[Sidenote: The Christians sent 3. times a weeke 30 miles to fetch wood.]
+Nowe the king had 18. captiues, which three times a weeke went to fetch
+wood thirtie miles from the towne: and on a time he appointed me for one of
+the 18. and wee departed at eight of the clocke in the night, and vpon the
+way as wee rode vpon the camels, I demaunded of one of our company, who did
+direct vs the way? he sayd, that there was a Moore in our company which was
+our guide: and I demavnded of them how Tripolis and the wood bare one of
+the other? and hee said, East Northeast and West Southwest. And at midnight
+or neere thereabouts, as I was riding vpon my camel, I fell asleepe, and
+the guide and all the rest rode away from me, not thinking but I had bene
+among them. When I awoke, and finding my selfe alone durst not call nor
+hallow for feare least the wilde Moores should heare me, because they holde
+this opinion, that in killing a Christian they do God good seruice: and
+musing with my selfe what were best for me to do, if I should goe foorth,
+and the wilde Moores should hap to meete with mee, they would kill mee: and
+on the other side, if I should returne backe to Tripolis without any wood
+or company, I should be most miserably vsed: therefore of two euils, rather
+I had to goe foorth to the loosing of my life, then to turne backe and
+trust to their mercie, fearing to bee vsed as before I had seene others:
+for vnderstanding by some of my company before, howe Tripolis and the saide
+wood did lie one off another, by the North starre I went forth at
+aduenture, and as God would haue it, I came right to the place where they
+were, euen about an houre before day: there altogether wee rested and gaue
+our camels prouender, and assoone as the day appeared, we rode all into the
+wood: and I seeing no wood there, but a sticke here and a sticke there,
+about the bignesse of a mans arme growing in the sand, it caused mee to
+maruile how so many camels should be loden in that place. The wood was
+Iuniper, we needed no axe nor edge toole to cut it, but pluckt it vp by
+strength of hands rootes and all, which a man might easily do, and so
+gathered it together, a little at one place and so at another, and laded
+our camels, and came home about seuen of the clocke that night following:
+because I fell lame, and my camel was tired, I left my wood in the way.
+
+[Sidenote: Eighteene captiues run away from Tripolis.] There was in
+Tripolis that time a Venetian, whose name was Benedetto Venetiano, and
+seuenteene captiues more of his company, which ranne away from Tripolis in
+a boate, and came in sight of an Island called Malta, which lieth fourtie
+leagues from Tripolis right North, and being within a mile of the shoare,
+and very faire weather, one of their company said, In dispetto de Dio
+adesso venio a pilliar terra, which is as much to say: In the despite of
+God I shall now fetch the shoare, [Sidenote: The iudgement of God vpon
+blasphemers.] and presently there arose a mighty storme, with thunder and
+raine and the wind at North, their boate being very small, so that they
+were inforced to beare vp roome, and to sheare right afore the winde ouer
+against the coast of Barbarie from whence they came, and rowing vp and
+downe the coast, their victuals being spent, the 21. day after their
+departure they were inforced through the want of food to come ashoare,
+thinking to haue stolne some sheepe: but the Moores of the country very
+craftily perceiuing their intent, gathered together a threescore horsemen,
+and hid themselues behinde a sandie hill, and when the Christians were come
+all a shoare, and past vp halfe a mile into the countrey, the Moores rode
+betwixt them and their boate, and some of them pursued the Christians, and
+so they were all taken and brought to Tripolis, from whence they had before
+escaped: and presently the king commaunded that the foresaide Benedetto
+with one more of his company should lose their eares, and the rest should
+be most cruelly beaten, which was presenly done. [Sidenote: The Greene
+Dragon.] This king had a sonne which was a ruler in an Island called Gerbi,
+whereunto arriued an English shippe called the Greene Dragon, of the which
+was Master one M. Blonket, who hauing a very vnhappy boy in that shippe,
+and vnderstanding that whosoeuer would turne Turke should be well
+enterteined of the kings sonne, this boy did runne a shoare, and
+voluntarily turned Turke. Shortly after the kings sonne came to Tripolis to
+visite his father, and seeing our company, hee greatly fancied Richard
+Burges our Purser, and Iames Smith: they were both yong men, therefore he
+was very desirous to haue them to turne Turkes, but they would not yeeld to
+his desire, saying: We are your fathers slaues, and as slaues wee will
+serue him. Then his father the king sent for them, and asked them if they
+would turne Turkes? And they saide: If it please your highnesse, Christians
+we were borne, and so we will remaine, beseeched the king that they might
+not bee inforced thereunto. [Sidenote: The Kings sonne had a captiue that
+was sonne to one of the Queenes Maiesties guard, that was forced to turne
+Turke.] The king had there before in his hosue a sonne of a yeoman of our
+Queenes guard, whom the kings sonne had inforced to turne Turke, his name
+was Iohn Nelson: him the king caused to be brought to these yong men, and
+thea said vnto them: Wil not you beare this your countreymen company, and
+be Turke as hee is? And they saide, that they would not yeeld thereunto
+during life. But it fell out, that within a moneth after, the kings sonne
+went home to Gerbi againe, being sixe score miles from Tripolis, and
+carried our two foresaid yong men with him, which were Richard Burges, and
+Iames Smith: and after their departure from vs, they sent vs a letter,
+signifying that there was no violence shewed vnto them as yet, but within
+three dayes after they were violently vsed, for that the kings sonne
+demaunded of them againe, if that they would turne Turke? Then answered
+Richard Burges, a Christian I am, and so I will remaine. Then the kings
+sonne very angerly said vnto him: By Mahomet thou shall presently be made
+Turke. Then called he for his men, and commaunded them to make him Turke,
+and they did so, and circumcised him, and would haue had him speake the
+wordes that thereunto belonged, but he answered them stoutly that he would
+not: and although they had put on him the habite of a Turke, yet sayd he, A
+Christian I was borne, and so I will remaine, though you force me to doe
+otherwise.
+
+And then he called for the other, and commaunded him to be made Turke
+perforce also: but he was very strong, for it was so much as eight of the
+kings sonnes men could doe to holde him, so in the ende they circumcised
+him, and made him Turke. Now to passe ouer a little, and so to shewe the
+maner of our deliuerance out of that miserable captiuitie.
+
+[Sidenote: The first motion for those Engmens deliuerie.] In May aforesaid,
+shortly after our apprehension, I wrote a letter into England vnto my
+father dwelling in Tauistoke in Deuonshire, signifying vnto him the whole
+estate of our calamities: and I wrote also to Constantinople, to the
+English Embassadour, both which letters were faithfully deliuered. But when
+my father had receiued my letter, and vnderstood the trueth of our mishap,
+and the occasion thereof, and what had happened to the offenders, he
+certified the right honourable the earle of Bedford thereof, who in short
+space acquainted her highnesse with the whole cause thereof, and her
+Maiestie like a most mercifull princesse tendering her Subiects, presently
+tooke order for our deliuerance. Whereupon the right worshipful sir Edward
+Osborne knight directed his letters with all speed to the English
+Embassadour in Constantinople, to procure our deliuery: and he obtained the
+great Turkes Commission, and sent it foorthwith to Tripolis, by one Master
+Edward Barton, together with a Iustice of the great Turkes, and one
+souldiour, and another Turke, and a Greeke which was his interpretour,
+which could speake besides Greeke, Turkish, Italian, Spanish and English.
+And when they came to Tripolis, they, were well interteined. And the first
+night they did lie in a Captaines house in the towne: all our company that
+were in Tripolis came that night for ioy to Master Barton and the other
+Commissioners to see them. Then master Barton said vnto vs, welcome my good
+countreymen, and louingly interteined vs, and at our departure from him, he
+gaue vs two shillings, and said, Serue God, for to morrow I hope you shall
+be as free as euer you were; We all gaue him thankes and so departed.
+
+The next day in the morning very early, the King hauing intelligence of
+their comming, sent word to the keeper, that none of the Englishmen
+(meaning our company) should goe to worke. Then he sent for Master Barton
+and the other Commissioners, and demaunded of the saide Master Barton his
+message: the Iustice answered, that the great Turke his Souereigne had sent
+them vnto him, signifying that he was informed that a certaine English
+shippe, called the Iesus, was by him the saide king confiscated, about
+twelue months since, and nowe my saide Souereigne hath here sent his
+especiall commission by vs vnto you, for the deliuerance of the saide
+shippe and goods, and also the free libertie and deliuerance of the
+Englishmen of the same shippe, whom you haue taken and kept in captiuitie.
+[Sidenote: The Englishmen released.] And further the same Iustice saide, I
+am authorized by my said soueraigne the great Turke to see it done: And
+therefore I commaund you by vertue of this commission, presently to make
+restitution of the premisses or the value thereof: and so did the Justices
+deliuer vnto the King the great Turkes commission to the effect aforesaide,
+which commission the king with all obedience receiued: and after the
+perusing of the same, he foorthwith commanded all the English captiues to
+be brought before him, and then willed the keeper to strike off all our
+yrons, which done, the king said, You Englishmen, for that you did offend
+the lawes of this place, by the same lawes therefore some of your company
+were condemned to die as you knowe, and you to bee perpetuall captiues
+during your liues: notwithstanding; seeing it hath pleased my soueraigne
+lord the great Turke to pardon your said offences, and to giue you your
+freedome and libertie, beholde, here I make deliuery of you to this English
+Gentleman: so hee deliuered vs all that were there, being thirteene in
+number, to Master Barton, who required also those two yong men which the
+Kings sonne had taken with him. Then the king answered that it was against
+their lawe to deliuer them, for that they were turned Turkes: and touching
+the ship and goods, the king said, that he had solde her, but would make
+restitution of the value, and as much of the goods as came vnto his hands,
+and so the king arose and went to dinner, and commaunded a Iew to goe with
+Master Barton and the other commissioners, to shew them their lodging,
+which was a house prouided and appointed them by the said king. And because
+I had the Italian and Spanish tongues, by which their most trafique in that
+countrey is, Master Barton made me his Cater to buy his victuals for him
+and his company, and deliuered me money needfull for the same. Thus were
+wee set at libertie the 28. day of April, 1585.
+
+[Sidenote: The plagues and punishments that happened to the King and his
+people.] Nowe to returne to the kings plagues and punishments, which
+Almighty God at his will and pleasure sendeth vpon men in the sight of the
+world, and likewise of the plagues that befell his children and others
+aforesaide. First when we were made bondmen, being the second day of May
+1584. the king had 300. captiues, and before the moneth was expired, there
+died of them of the plague 150. [Sidenote: The king lost 150. camels taken
+by the wilde Moores.] And whereas they were 26. men of our company, of whom
+two were hanged, and one died the same day that wee were made bondslaues:
+that present moneth there died nine more of our company of the plague, and
+other two were forced to turne Turkes as before is rehearsed: and on the
+fourth day of June next following the king lost 150 camels, which were
+taken from him by the wilde Moores: and on the 28. day of the saide moneth
+of Iune, one Geffrey Maltese, a renegado of Malta, ranne away to his
+countrey, and stole a Brigandine which the king had builded for to take the
+Christians withall, and carried with him twelue Christians more which were
+the kings captiues. Afterward about the tenth day of Iuly next following,
+the king road foorth vpon the greatest and fairest mare that might be
+seene, as white as any swanne: hee had not ridden fourtie paces from his
+house, but on a sudden the same mare fell downe vnder him starke dead, and
+I with sixe more were commaunded to burie her, skinne, shoes and all, which
+we did. And about three moneths after our deliuerie, Master Barton, with
+all his residue of his company departed from Tripoli to Zante, in a
+vessell, called a Settea, of one Marcus Segoorus, who dwelt in Zante, and
+after our arriuall at Zante we remained fifteene dayes there aboorde our
+vessell, before wee could haue Platego, (that is, leaue to come a shoare)
+because the plague was in that place, from whence wee came: and about three
+dayes after we came a shoare, thither came another Settea of Marseils bound
+for Constantinople. [Sidenote: Two Englishmen shipped to Constantinople
+with M. Barton.] Then did Master Barton, and his company, with two more of
+our company, shippe themselues as passengers in the same Settea, and went
+to Constantinople. But the other nine of vs, that remained in Zante, about
+three moneths after, shipt our selues in a ship of the said Marcus
+Segoorus, which came to Zante, and was bound for England. [The souldiers of
+Tripolis kil the king.] In which three moneths, the souldiers of Tripolie
+killed the said king. And then the kings sonne, according to the custome
+there, went to Constantinople, to surrender vp all his fathers treasure,
+goods, captiues, and concubines, vnto the great Turke, and tooke with him
+our saide Purser Richard Burges, and Iames Smith, and also the other two
+Englishmen, which he the said kings sonne had inforced to become Turkes, as
+is aforesayd. And they the said Englishmen finding now some opportunitie,
+concluded with the Christian captiues which were going with them vnto
+Constantinople, being in number about one hundred and fiftie, to kill the
+kings sonne, and all the Turkes which were aboorde of the Galley, and
+priuily the saide Englishmen conueyed vnto the saide Christian captiues,
+weapons for that purposes. And when they came into the maine Sea, towards
+Constantinople (vpon the faithfull promise of the sayde Christian captiues)
+these foure Englishmen lept suddenly into the Crossia, that is, in the
+middest of the Galley, where the canon lieth, and with their swordes
+drawne, did fight against all the foresaid Turkes, and for want of helpe of
+the saide Christian captiues, who falsly brake their promises, the said
+Master Blonkets boy was killed, and the sayde Iames Smith, and our Pursser
+Richard Surges, and the other Englishman, were taken and bound into
+chaines, to be hanged at their arriual in Constantinople: and as the Lordes
+will was, about two dayes after, passing through the gulfe of Venice, at an
+Island called Cephalonia, they met with two of the duke of Venice his
+Gallies, [Marginal Note: Two Gallies of Venice tooke the King of Tripolie
+his galley, and killed the kings sonne, and all the Turkes in it, and
+released all the Christians being in number 150.] which tooke that Galley,
+and killed the kings sonne, and his mother, and all the Turkes that were
+there, in number 150. and they saued the Christian captiues, and would haue
+killed the two Englishmen because they were circumcised, and become Turkes,
+had not the other Christian captiues excused them, saying, that they were
+inforced to be Turkes, by the kings sonne, and shewed the Venetians also,
+how they did enterprise at sea to fight against all the Turks, and that
+their two fellowes were slaine in that fight. Then the Venetians saued
+them, and they, with all the residue of the said captiues, had their
+libertie, which were in number 150. or thereabouts, and the said Gallie,
+and all the Turkes treasure was confiscated to the vse of the state of
+Venice. And from thence our two Englishmen traueiled homeward by land, and
+in this meane time we had one more of our company, which died in Zante, and
+afterward the other eight shipped themselues at Zante, in a shippe of the
+said Marcus Segorus, which was bound for England: and before we departed
+thence, there arriued the Assension, and the George Bonauenture of London
+in Cephalonia, in a harbour there, called Arrogostoria, whose Marchants
+agreed with the Marchants of our shippe, and so laded all the marchandise
+of our shippe into the said ships of London, who tooke vs eight in as
+passengers, and so we came home, and within two moneths after our arriuall
+at London, our said Purser Richard Surges, and his fellow came home also:
+for the which we are bound to praise Almightie God, during our liues, and
+as duetie bindeth vs, to pray for the preseruation of our most gracious
+Queene, for the great care her Maiestie had ouer vs, her poore Subjects, in
+seeking and procuring of our deliuerance aforesaide: and also for her
+honourable priuie Counsell, and I especiall for the prosperitie and good
+estate of the house of the late deceased, the right honourable the Earle of
+Bedford, whose honour I must confesse, most diligently at the suite of my
+father now departed, traueiled herein: for the which I rest continually
+bounden to him, whose soule I doubt not, but is already in the heauens in
+ioy, with the Almightie, vnto which place he vouchsafe to bring vs all,
+that for our sinnes suffered most vile and shameful death vpon the Crosse,
+there to liue perpetually world without ende, Amen.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Queenes letters to the Turke 1584. for the restitution of the shippe
+  called the Iesus, and the English captiues detained in Tripolie in
+  Barbarie, and for certaine other prisoners in Argier.
+
+ELIZABETHA, Dei ter maxhni et vnici coeli terraeque conditoris gratia,
+Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae Regina, fidei Christianae contra omnes
+omnium inter Christianos degentium, Christique nomen falso profitentium
+idololatrias, inuistissima et potentissima defensatrix: augustissimo,
+inuictissimoque principi, Zultan Murad Can, Musulmanici regni dominatori
+potentissimo, imperijque Orientis Monarchae, supra omnes soli et supremo
+salutem, et multos cum summa rerum optimarum affluentia foelices et
+fortunatos annos.
+
+Augustissime et potentissime Imperator, biennio iam peracto, ad Caesaream
+vestram Maiestatem scripsimus, vt dilectus noster famulus Guilielmus
+Harebornus, vir ornatissimus pro legato nostro Constantinopoli, alijsque
+Musulmanici imperij ditionibus, sublimi vestra authoritate reciperetur:
+simul etiam Angli subditi nostri commercium et mercaturam, in omnibus illis
+prouincijs exerceant, non minus libere quam Galli, Poloni, Veneti, Germani,
+caeterique vestri confoederati, qui varias Orientis partes peragrant,
+operam nauantes, vt mutuis commercijs coniungatur Oriens, cum Occidente.
+
+Quae priuilegia, cum nostris subditis Anglis inuictissima vestra Maiestas
+literis et diplomate suo liberalissime indulserit, facere non potuimus,
+quin quas maximas animus noster capere potest gratias, eo nomine ageremus:
+sperantes fore, vt haec instituta commerciorum ratio maximas vtilitates, et
+commoda vtrinque, tam in imperij vestri ditiones, quam regni nostri
+prouincias secum adferat.
+
+Id vt plane fiat, cum nuper subditi nostri nonnulli Tripoli in Barbaria et
+Argellae ab eius loci incolis voluntatem vestram forte nescientibus male
+habiti fuerint, et immaniter diuexati, Caesaream vestram Maiestatem
+beneuole rogamus, vt per Legatum nostrum eorum causam cognoscas, et
+postremo earum prouinciarum proregibus ac praefectis imperes, vt nostri
+libere in illis locis, sine vi aut iniuria deinceps versari, et negotia
+gerere possint.
+
+Et nos omni opera vicissim studebimus ea omnia praestare, quae Imperatoriae
+vestrae Maiestati vllo pacto grata fore intelligemus: quam Deus vnicus
+mundi conditor optimus maximus diutissime incolumem et florentem seruet.
+Datae in palatio nostro Londini, quinto die Mensis Septembris: anno IESV
+CHRISTI Seruatoris nostri, 1584. Regni vero nostri vicessimo sexto.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Elizabeth, by the grace of the most high God, and onely maker of heauen and
+earth, of England, France and Ireland Queene, and of the Christian faith,
+against all the Idolaters and false professors of the Name of CHRIST
+dwelling among the Christians, most inuincible and puissant defender: to
+the most valiant and invincible Prince, Zultan Murad Can, the most mightie
+ruler of the kingdome of Musulman, and of the East Empire the onely and
+highest Monarch aboue all, health and many happy and fortunate yeres, with
+great aboundance of the best things.
+
+Most noble and puissant Emperour, about two yeeres nowe passed, wee wrote
+vnto your Imperiall Maiestie, that our welbeloued seruant, William
+Hareborne, a man of great reputation and honour, might be receiued vnder
+your high authoritie, for our Ambassadour in Constantinople, and other
+places, vnder the obedience of your Empire of Musulman: And also that the
+Englishmen, being our Subiects, might exercise entercourse and marchandize
+in all those Prouinces, no lesse freely then the French, Polonians,
+Venetians, Germanes, and other your confederats, which traueile through
+diuers of the East parts: endeuouring that by mutuall trafique, the East
+may be ioyned and knit to the West.
+
+Which priuileges, when as your most puissant Maiestie, by your letters and
+vnder your dispensation most liberally and fauourably granted to our
+Subiects of England, wee could no lesse doe, but in that respect giue you
+as great thankes, as our heart could conceiue, trusting that it wil come to
+passe, that this order of trafique, so well ordeined, will bring with it
+selfe most great profits and commodities to both sides, as well to the
+parties subiect to your Empire, as to the Prouinces of our kingdome. Which
+thing that it may be done in plaine and effectuall maner, whereas some of
+our Subiects of late at Tripolis in Barbarie, and at Argier, were by the
+inhabitants of those places (being perhaps ignorant of your pleasure) euill
+intreated and grieuously vexed, wee doe friendly and louingly desire your
+Imperial Maiestie, that you will vnderstand their causes by our
+Ambassadour, and afterward giue commaundement to the Lieutenants and
+Presidents of those Prouinces, that our people may henceforth freely,
+without any violence, or iniurie, traueile, and do their businesse in those
+places.
+
+And we againe with all endeuour, shall studie to performe all those things,
+which we shall in any wise vnderstand to be acceptable to your Imperiall
+Maiestie, which God, the onely maker of the world, most best and most
+great, long keepe in health, and flourishing. Given in our pallaice at
+London, the fift day of the moneth of September, in the yeere of IESVS
+CHRIST our Saviour, 1534. And of our raigne, the 26.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis in Barbarie, commanding the
+  restitution of an English ship, called the Iesus, with the men, and
+  goods, sent from Constantinople, by Mahomet Beg, a Iustice of the Great
+  Turkes, and an English Gentleman, called Master Edward Barton. Anno 1584.
+
+Honourable, and worthy Bassa Romadan Beglerbeg, most wise and prudent Iudge
+of the West Tripolis, wee wish the ende of all thy enterprises happie, and
+prosperous. By these our highnesse letters, wee certifie thee, that the
+right honourable, William Hareborne, Ambassadour in our most famous Porch,
+for the most excellent Queenes Maiestie of England, in person, and by
+letters hath certified our highnesse, that a certaine shippe, with all her
+furniture, and artillerie, worth two thousand duckets, arriuing in the port
+of Tripolis, and discharged of her lading and marchandize, paide our
+custome according to order, and againe, the marchants laded their shippe
+with oyle, which by constraint they were inforced to buy of you and hauing
+answered in like maner the custome for the same, determined to depart: a
+Frenchman assistant to the Marchant, vnknowen to the Englishmen, caried
+away with him another Frenchman indebted to a certaine Moore in foure
+hundred duckets, and by force caused the Englishmen, and shippe to depart:
+who neither suspecting fraude, nor deceite, hoised sailes. In the meane
+time, this man, whose debter the Frenchman had stollen away, went to the
+Bassa with the supplication, by whose meanes, and force of the Castle, the
+Englishmen were constrained to returne into the port, where the Frenchman,
+author of the euill, with the Master of the ship an Englishman, innocent of
+the crime were hanged, and sixe and twentie Englishmen, cast into prison,
+of whom through famine, thirst, and stinke of the prison, eleuen died, and
+the rest like to die. Further, it was signified to our Maiestie also, that
+the marchandise and other goods, with the shippe, were worth 7600. duckets:
+which things if they be so, this is our commandemeht, which was granted and
+giuen by our Maiestie, that the English shippe, and all the marchandize,
+and whatsoeuer else taken away bee wholy restored, and that the Englishmen
+be let goe free, and suffered to returne into their countrey. Wherefore
+when this our commaundement shall come vnto thee, wee straightly commaund,
+that the foresaid businesse be diligently looked vnto, and discharged. And
+if it be so, that a Frenchman, and no Englishman hath done this craft, and
+wickednesse vnknowen to the Englishmen, and as authour of the wickednesse
+is punished, and that the Englishmen committed nothing against the peace
+and league, or their articles: also if they payd custome according to
+order, it is against law, custome of Countreys, and their priuilege, to
+hinder or hurt them. Neither is it meete, their shippe, marchandise, and
+all their goods taken, should be withholden. We will therefore, that the
+English shippe, marchandize, and all other their goods, without exception,
+be restored to the Englishmen: also that the men bee let goe free, and if
+they will, let none hinder them, to returne peaceably into their Countrey:
+do not commit, that they another time complaine of this matter, and how
+this businesse is dispatched, certifie vs at our most famous porche.
+
+Dated in the Citie of Constantinople, in the 992. yeere of Mahomet, and in
+the ende of the moneth of October; and in the yeere of IESVS 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of Master William Hareborne, the English Ambassadour, Ligier in
+  Constantinople, to the Bassa Romadan, the Beglerbeg of Tripolis in
+  Barbarie, for the restoring of an English shippe called the Iesus, with
+  the goods, and men, detained as slaues, Anno 1585.
+
+Molto magnifico Signor,
+
+Noi ha stato significato per diuerse lettere di quanto ha passato circa
+diuina naue nostra chiamata Iesus, sopra il quale in agiuto di Ricciardo
+Skegs, vno de gli nostri mercanti di essa gia morto, veniua vn certo
+Francese per sopra cargo, chiamato Romano Sonings, il quale per non esser
+ben portato secondo che doueua, volendo importer seco vn altro Francese
+debitore a certi vostri sensa pagarcene, per giusticia era appiccato col
+patron Inglese Andre Dier, che come simplice credendo al detto Francese,
+senza auedercene de la sua ria malitia non retornaua, quando da vostra
+magnifica Signoria gli era mandato. La morte del detto tristo Francese
+approuiamo como cosa benfatta. [Sidenote: Edoardo Barton et Mahumed Beg.]
+Ma al contrario, doue lei ha confiscato la detta naue e mercantia en essa,
+et fatto sciaui li marinari, como cosa molto contraria a li priuilegij dal
+Gran Signor quattro anni passati concessi, et da noi confirmati di parte de
+la Serenissima Magesta d'Ingilterra nostra patrona, e molto contraria a la
+liga del detto Gran Signor, il quale essendo dal sopra detto apieno
+informato, noi ha conceduto il suo regale mandamento di restitutione, la
+qual mandiamo a vostra magnifica Signoria col presente portator Edoardo
+Barton, nostro Secretario, et Mahumed Beg, droguemano di sua porta excelsa,
+con altre lettere del excellentissimo Vizir, et inuictissimo capitan di
+mar: chiedendo, tanto di parte del Gran Signor, quanto di sua Serenissima
+Magesta di V. S. M. che gli huomini, oglij, naue col fornimento, danare, et
+tutti altri beni qualconque, da lei et per vestro ordine da gli nostri
+tolti siano resi a questo mio Secretario liberamente senza empacho alcuno,
+como il Gran Signor da sua gratia noi ha conceduto, specialmente per esser
+detti oglij comprati per ordine di sua Serenissima Magesta, per prouisione
+della Corte sua. Il qual non facendo, protestiamo per questa nostra al
+incontra di esso tutti futuri danni che puono succedere per questa cagione,
+como authore di quelli, contrario a la Santa liga giurata de li duoi Rei,
+patroni nostri, como per li priuilegij, che lei mostrera il nostra, consta:
+per obseruatione de gli quali noi stiamo di fermo en questa excelsa Porta.
+Et cosi responderete nel alro mondo al solo Iddio, et qua al Gran Signor
+questo massimo peccato commesso da lei al incontra di tanti poueracchi, che
+per questa crudelta sono in parte morti, in parti retenuti da esso en duro
+cattiuerio. Al contrario, piacendo lei euitar questo incommodo et
+restarcene en gratia del Signor Iddio, et li nostri patroni,
+amicheuolmente, (como conuien a par vostro di mostrarsi prudente
+gouernatore, et fidel seruitor al patrono) ad impirete questa nostra
+guistissima domanda, per poter resultarui a grand honore et commodo per la
+tratta di marchantia, che faronno a laduenire li nostri in quella vostra
+prouincia. Li quali generalmente, tanto quelli, como tutti altri che nel
+mar riscontrarete, siano, secondo che manda il Grand Signor, de vostra
+Signoria magnifica amicheuolmente recolti et receunti: Et noi non
+mancharemo al debito di ottimo amico en qualconche occurenza vostra,
+piacendo lei amicitia nostra como desideramo. Il Signor Iddio lei conceda
+(adimpiendo questa nostra giusta rechiesta, per cauar noi di piu futura
+fatica in questo negocio, et lei di disgratia) ogni vera felicita, et
+supremo honore. Data in Palazzo nostro che fu da Rapamat appresso Pera di
+15. di Genero 1585.
+
+Il Ambassiatore de la Majesta Serenissima d'Ingilterra, amico de vostra
+Signoria magnifica, piacendo lei.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right honourable Lord, it hath bene signified vnto vs by diuers letters,
+what hath fallen out, concerning a certaine shippe of ours, called the
+Iesus, into which, fore the helpe of Richard Skegs, one of our Marchants in
+the same, nowe deceased, there was admitted a certaine Frenchman called
+Romaine Sonnings, which for his ill behauiour, according to his deserts,
+seeking to cary away with him another Frenchman, which was indebted to
+certaine of your people, without paying his creditours, was hanged by
+sentence of iustice, together with Andrew Dier, the master of the said
+ship, who simply and without fraude, giuing credite to the said Frenchman,
+without any knowledge of his euil fact, did not returne when hee was
+commaunded, by your honourable Lordship. The death of the said lewde
+Frenchman we approue as a thing well done, but contrarywise, whereas your
+Lordship hath confiscated the said ship with the goods therein, and hath
+made slaues of the Mariners, as a thing altogether contrary to the
+priuileges of the Grand Signior, granted foure yeeres since, and confirmed
+by vs on the behalfe of the most excellent the Queenes Maiestie of England
+our Mystresse, and altogether contrary to the league of the saide Grand
+Signior, who being fully informed of the aforesaid cause, hath granted vnto
+vs his royall commandement of restitution, which we send vnto your
+honourable Lordship, by the present bearer Edward Barton our Secretaire,
+and Mahomet Beg, one of the Iustices of his stately Court, with other
+letters of the most excellent Admirall, and most valiant Captaine of the
+Sea, requiring your honourable Lordship, as well on the behalfe of the
+Grand Signior, as of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie, my Mystresse,
+that the men, oyles, shippe, furniture, money, and all other goods
+whatsoeuer, by your Lordship, and your order taken from our men, be
+restored vnto this my Secretary freely, without delay, as the Grand Signior
+of his goodnesse hath graunted vnto vs, especially in regard that the same
+oyles were bought by the commaundement of our Queenes most excellent
+Maiestie, for the prouision of her Court. Which if you performe not, wee
+protest by these our leters against you, that you are the cause of all the
+inconueniences which may ensue vpon this occasion, as the authour thereof,
+contrary to the holy league sworne by both our Princes, as by the
+priuileges, which this our seruant will shewe you, may appeare. For the
+seeing of which league performed, wee remaine here as Ligier in this
+stately Court. And by this meanes you shall answere in another world vnto
+God alone, and in this world vnto the Grand Signior, for this hainous sinne
+committed by you against so many poore soules, which by this your cruelty
+are in part dead, and in part detained by you in most miserable captiuitie.
+Contrarywise, if it shall please you to auoyd this mischiefe, and to
+remaine in the fauour of Almighty God, and of our Princes, you shall
+friendly fulfill this our iust demaund (as it behooueth you to shew your
+selfe a prudent Gouernour, and faithfull seruant vnto your Lord) and the
+same may turne to your great honour, and profite, by the trade of
+marchandize, which our men in time to come, may vse in that gouernment of
+yours: which generally, as well those poore men, as all others, which you
+shall meete at the sea, ought to be according to the commandement of the
+Grand Signior, friendly entertained and receiued of your honourable
+Lordship, and we will not faile in the dueties of a speciall friend,
+whensoeuer you shall haue occasion to vse vs, as we desire. Almighty God
+grant vnto your Lordship (in the fulfilling of this our iust request,
+whereby wee may be deliuered from further trouble in this matter, and your
+selfe from further displeasure) all true felicitie, and increase of honour.
+
+Giuen in our Pallace from Rapamat in Pera, the 15 of Ianuarie 1585.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage passed by sea into Aegypt, by Iohn Euesham Gentleman. Anno 1586.
+
+The 5 of December 1586 we departed from Grauesend in the Tiger of London,
+wherein was Master vnder God for the voyage Robert Rickman, and the 21. day
+at night we came to the Isle of Wight: departing from thence in the morning
+following we had a faire winde, so that on the 27 day wee came in sight of
+the rocke of Lisbone, and so sayling along we came in sight of the South
+Cape, the 29 of the same, and on the morrowe with a Westerly winde we
+entered the straights: and the second of Ianuary being as high as Cape de
+Gate, we departed from our fleete towards Argier. And the 4 day we arriued
+at the port of Argier aforesaid, where we staied till the first of March.
+[Sidenote: Tunis.] At which time we set saile towardes a place called
+Tunis, to the Eastward of Argier 100 leagues, where we arriued the 8 of the
+same. This Tunis is a small citie vp 12 miles from the sea, and at the port
+or rode where shipping doe ride, is a castle or fort called Goletta,
+sometimes in the handes of the Christians, but now of the Turkes; at which
+place we remained till the third of Aprill: at which time wee set saile
+towardes Alexandria, and hauing sometime faire windes, sometime contrary,
+we passed on the 12 day betweene Sicilia and Malta (where neere adioyning
+hath beene the fort and holde of the knights of the Rhodes) and so the 19
+day we fell with the Isle of Candy, and from thence to Alexandria, where we
+arriued the 27 of April, and there continued till the 5 of October.
+
+[Sidenote: The description of Alexandria.] The said citie of Alexandria is
+an old thing decayed or ruinated, hauing bene a faire and great citie neere
+two miles in length, being all vauted vnderneath for prouision of fresh
+water, which water commeth thither but once euery yeere, out of one of the
+foure riuers of paradise (as it is termed) called Nilus, which in September
+floweth neere eighteene foote vpright higher then his accustomed manner,
+and so the banke being cut, as it were a sluce, about thirty miles from
+Alexandria, at a towne called Rossetto, it doth so come to the saide Citie,
+with such aboundance, that barkes of twelue tunne doe come vpon the said
+water, which water doth fill all the vaults, cesternes, and wels in the
+said Citie, with very good water, and doth so continue good, till the next
+yeere following: for they haue there very litle raine or none at all, yet
+have they exceeding great dewes. Also they haue very good corne, and very
+plentifull; all the Countrey is very hot, especially in the moneths of
+August, September, and October. Also within the saide Citie there is a
+pillar of Marble, called by the Turkes, King Pharaoes needle, and it is
+foure square, euery square is twelue foote, and it is in height 90 foote.
+Also there is without the wals of the said Citie, about twentie score
+paces, another marble pillar, being round, called Pompey his pillar: this
+pillar standeth vpon a great square stone, euery square is fifteene foote,
+and the same stone is fifteene foote high, and the compasse of the pillar
+is 37 foote, and the height of it is 101 feete, which is a wonder to thinke
+how euer it was possible to set the said pillar vpon the said square stone.
+The port of the said Citie is strongly fortified with two strong Castles,
+and one other Castle within the citie, being all very well planted with
+munition: [Sidenote: Cayro.] and there is to the Eastward of this Citie,
+about three dayes iourney the citie of Grand Cayro, otherwise called
+Memphis: it hath in it by report of the registers bookes which we did see,
+to the number of 2400 Churches, and is wonderfully populous, and is one
+dayes iourney about the wals, which was iourneyed by one of our Mariners
+for triall thereof. Also neere to the saide citie there is a place called
+the Pyramides, being as I may well terme it, one of the nine wonders of the
+world: that is, seuen seuerall places of flint and marble stone, foure
+square, the wals thereof are seuen yards thicke in those places that we did
+see: the squarenes is in length about twentie score euery square, being
+built as it were a pointed diamond, broad at the foote, and small or narrow
+at the toppe: the heigth of them, to our judgement, doth surmount twise the
+heighth of Paules steeple: within the said Pyramides, no man doth know what
+there is, for that they haue no entrance but in the one of them, there is a
+hole where the wall is broken, and so we went in there, hauing torch light
+with vs, for that it hath no light to it, and within the same, is as it
+were a great hall, in the which there is a costly tombe, which tombe they
+say, was made for kinq Pharao in his life time, but he was not buried
+there, being drowned in the red sea: also there are certaine vauts or
+dungeons, which goe downe verie deepe vnder those Pyramides with faire
+staires, but no man dare venter to goe downe into them, by reason that they
+can cary no light with them, for the dampe of the earth doth put out the
+light: the red sea is but three dayes iourney from this place, and
+Ierusalem about seuen dayes iourney from thence: but to returne to Cayro.
+There is a Castle wherein is the house that Pharaoes wiues were kept in,
+and in the Pallace or Court thereof stande 55 marble pillars, in such
+order, as our Exchange standeth in London: the said pillars are in beigth
+60 foote: and in compasse 14 foote: also in the said Citie is the castle
+were Joseph was in prison, where to this day they put in rich men, when the
+king would haue any summe of money of them: there are seuen gates to the
+sayd prison, and it goeth neere fiftie yardes downe right: also, the water
+that serueth this castle, commeth out of the foresaide riuer of Nilus, vpon
+a wall made with arches, fiue miles long, and it is twelue foote thicke.
+Also there are in old Cayro two Monasteries, the one called S. Georges, the
+other S. Maries: and in the Courts where the Churches be, was the house of
+king Pharao. In this Citie is great store of marchandize, especially
+pepper, and nutmegs, which come thither by land, out of the East India: and
+it is very plentifull of all maner of victuals, especially of bread,
+rootes, and hearbes: to the Eastwards of Cayro, there is a Well, fiue miles
+off called Matria, and as they say, when the Virgin Marie fled from
+Bethleem, and came into AEgypt, and being there, had neither water, nor any
+other thing to sustaine them, by the prouidence of God, an Angell came from
+heauen, and strake the ground with his wings, where presently issued out a
+fountaine of water: and the wall did open where the Israelites did hide
+themselues, which fountains or well is walled foure square till this day.
+[Sidenote: Carthage.] Also we were at an old Citie, all ruinated and
+destroyed, called in olde time, the great Citie of Carthage where Hannibal
+and Queene Dido dwelt: this Citie was but narrow, but was very long: for
+there was, and is yet to bee seene, one streete three mile long, to which
+Citie fresh water was brought vpon arches (as afore) aboue 25 miles, of
+which arches some are standing to this day. [Sidenote: Argier.] Also we
+were at diuers other places on the coast, as we came from Cayro, but of
+other antiquities we saw but few. The towne of Argier which was our first
+and last part, within the streights standeth vpon the side of an hill,
+close vpon the sea shore: it is very strong both by sea and land, and it is
+very well victualed with all manner of fruites bread and fish good store,
+and very cheape. It is inhabited with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes, and so are
+Alexandria and Cayro. In this towne are a great number of Christian
+captiues, whereof there are of Englishmen onely fifteene, from which port
+we set sayle towardes England, the seuenth of Ianuarie, Anno 1587, and the
+30 day of the sayd moneth, we arriued at Dartmouth on the coast of England.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage of M. Laurence Aldersey, to the Cities of Alexandria, and
+  Cayro in Aegypt. Anno 1586.
+
+I Embarked my selfe at Bristoll, in the Hercules, a good ship of London,
+and set saile the 21 day of Februarie, about ten of the clocke in the
+morning, hauing a merry winde: but the 23 day, there arose a very great
+storme, and in the mids of it we descried a small boate of the burden of
+ten tunnes, with foure men in her, in very great danger, who called a maine
+for our helpe. Whereupon our Master made towards them, and tooke them into
+our ship, and let the boate, which was laden with timber, and appertained
+to Chepstow, to runne a drift. The same night about midnight arose another
+great storme, but the winde was large with vs, vntill the 27 of the same
+moneth, which grew then somewhat contrary: yet notwithstanding we held on
+our course, and the tenth day of March, we described a saile about Cape
+Sprat, which is a little on this side the streight of Gibraltare, but we
+spake not with her. The next day we described twelue saile more, with whom
+we thought to haue spoken, to haue learned what they were, but they made
+very fast away, and we gaue them ouer.
+
+Thursday the 16 of March, we had sight of the streights, and of the coast
+of Barbary. The 18 day we passed them, and sailed towards Patras. Vpon the
+23 of March, we met with the Centurion of London which came from Genoa, by
+whom we sent letters to England, and the foure men also which we tooke in,
+vpon the coast of England, before-mentioned.
+
+The 29th of March we came to Goleta a small Iland, and had sight of two
+shippes, which we iudged to be of England.
+
+Tuesday the fourth of April, we were before Malta, and being there
+becalmed, our Maister caused the two ship boates to be had out, and they
+towed the ship, till we were out of sight of the Castle of Malta. The 9 day
+of April we came to Zante, and being before the towne, William Aldridge,
+seruant to Master Thomas Cordall of London, came aboord us, with whom our
+Master and twelue more of our company, thought to haue gone on shoare: but
+they could not be permitted: so we all came aboard againe, and went to
+Patras, where we arriued vpon good Friday, and lay there with good
+enterteinement at the English house, where was the Consull Master Grimes,
+Ralph Ashley, and Iohn Doddington, who very kindly went with vs, and shewed
+vs the pleasures of the towne.
+
+They brought vs to the house of the Cady, who was made then to vnderstand
+of the 20 Turks that wee had aboard, which were to goe to Constantinople,
+being redeemed out of captiuitie, by sir Francis Drake in the West Indies,
+and brought with him into England, and by order of the Queenes Maiestie
+sent now into their Countrey. Whereupon the Cady commanded them to be
+brought before him, that he might see them: and when, he had talked with
+them, and vnderstood howe strangely they were deliuered, he marueiled much,
+and admired the Queenes Maistie of England, who being but a woman, is
+notwithstanding of such power and renowne amongst all the princes of
+Christendome, with many other honourable wordes of commending her Maiestie.
+So he tooke the names of those 20 Turkes, and recorded them in their great
+bookes, to remaine in perpetuall memory. After this, our foresaid
+countreyman brought mee to the Chappel of S. Andrew where his tombe or
+sepulchre is, and the boord vpon which he was beheaded, which boord is now
+so rotten, that if any man offer to cut it, it falleth to powder, yet I
+brought some of it away with me.
+
+Vpon Tuesday in Easter weeke, wee set out towards Zante againe, and the 24.
+of April with much adoe, wee were all permitted to come on shoare, and I
+was caried to the English house in Zante, where I was very well
+entertained. The commodities of Zante are Currants and oyle: the situation
+of the Towne is vnder a very great hill, vpon which standeth a very strong
+Castle, which commaundeth the Towne. At Zante wee tooke in a Captaine and
+16. souldiers, with other passengers. Wee departed from Zante vpon Tuesday
+the 15. of April, and the next day we ankered at a small Iland, called
+Striualia, which is desolate of people, sauing a fewe religious men, who
+entertained vs well, without taking any money: but of courtesie we bestowed
+somewhat vpon them for their maintenance, and then they gaue vs a couple of
+leane sheepe, which we caried aboord. The last day of Aprill, wee arriued
+at Candie, at a Castle, called Sowday, where wee set the Captaine,
+Souldiers, and Mariners ashoare, which wee tooke in at Zante, with all
+their carriage.
+
+[Sidenote: The Islands of Milo, in olde time called Sporades.] The second
+day of May wee set saile againe, and the fourth day came to the Islands of
+Milo, where we ankered, and found the people there very courteous, and
+tooke in such necessaries as we wanted. The Islands are in my iudgement a
+hundred in number, and all within the compasse of a hundred miles.
+
+The 11. day, the Chaus, which is the greatest man there in authoritie, for
+certaine offences done in a little Chappell by the water side, which they
+saide one of our shippe had done, and imputed it to mee, because I was
+seene goe into it three dayes before, came to vs, and made much a doe, so
+that we were faine to come out of our shippe armed: but by three pieces of
+golde the brabling was ended, and we came to our shippe. This day wee also
+set saile, and the next day passed by the Castle of Serpeto, which is an
+old ruinated thing, and standeth vnder a hils side.
+
+The 13. day we passed by the Island of Paris, and the Island of the bankes
+of Helicon, and the Island called Ditter, where are many boares, and the
+women bee witches. The same day also wee passed by the Castle of Timo,
+standing vpon a very high mountaine, and neere vnto it is the Island of
+Diana.
+
+The 15. of May, wee came to Sio, where I stayed thirtie and three dayes. In
+it is a very proper Towne, after the building of that Countrey, and the
+people are civil: and while we were here there came in sixe Gallies, which
+had bene at Alexandria, and one of them which was the Admiral, had a Prince
+of the Moores prisoner, whom they tooke about Alexandria, and they meant to
+present him to the Turke. The towne standeth in a valley, and a long the
+water side pleasantly. There are about 26. winde-mils about it, and the
+commodities of it are cotton wooll, cotton yarne, mastike, and some other
+drugs.
+
+As we remained at Sio, there grew a great controuersie betweene the
+mariners of the Hercules, and the Greekes of the towne of Sio, about the
+bringing home of the Turkes, which the Greekes took in ill part, and the
+boyes cried out, Viue el Re Philippe: whereupon our men beate the boyes,
+and threwe stones, and so a broile beganne, and some of our men were hurt:
+but the Greekes were fetcht out of their houses, and manacled together with
+yrons, and threatned to the Gallies: about fortie of them were sent to the
+prison, and what became of them when we were gone, we know not, for we went
+thence within two dayes after, which was the 19. of Iune.
+
+The 20. day wee passed by the Island of Singonina, an Island risen by the
+casting of stones in that place: the substance of the ground there is
+brimstone, and burneth sometimes so much that it bloweth vp the rockes.
+
+The 24. of Iune wee came to Cyprus, and had sight in the way of the
+aforesaide sixe Gallies, that came from Alexandria, one whereof came vnto
+vs, and required a present for himselfe, and for two of the other Gallies,
+which we for quietnesse sake gaue them.
+
+The 27. of Iune, wee came to Tripolie, where I stayed till the fift of
+Iuly, and then tooke passage in a smal barke called a Caramusalin, which
+was a passage boat, and was bound for Bichieri, thirteene miles on this
+side Alexandria, which boate was fraighted with Turkes, Moores, and Iewes.
+
+The 20. day of Iuly, this barke which I passed in ranne vpon a rocke, and
+was in very great danger, so that we all began some to be ready to swimme,
+some to leape into the shippe boate, but it pleased God to set vs quickly
+off the rocke, and without much harme.
+
+[Sidenote: The English house in Alexandria.] The 28. of Iuly I came to
+Bichieri, where I was well entertained of a Iewe which was the Customer
+there, giuing me Muskadine, and drinking water himselfe: hauing broken my
+fast with him, he prouided mee a Camell for my carriage, and a Mule for mee
+to ride vpon, and a Moore to runne by me to the City of Alexandria, who had
+charge to see mee safe in the English house, whether I came, but found no
+Englishmen there: but then my guide brought me aboord a ship of Alderman
+Martins, called the Tyger of London, where I was well receiued of the
+Master of the said ship, whose name was Thomas Rickman, and of all the
+company.
+
+The said Master hauing made me good cheere, and made me also to drinke of
+the water of Nilus, hauing the keyes of the English house, went thither
+with me himselfe, and appointed mee a faire chamber, and left a man with me
+to prouide me all things that I needed, and euery day came himselfe to me,
+and caried me into the City, and shewed me the monuments thereof, which be
+these.
+
+[Sidenote: The monuments of Alexandria.] Hee brought mee first to Pompey
+his pillar, which is a mighty thing of gray marble, and all of one stone,
+in height by estimation about 52. yards, and the compasse about sixe
+fadome.
+
+The City hath three gates, one called the gate of Barbaria, the other of
+Merina, and the thirde of Rossetto.
+
+He brought me to a stone in the streete of the Citie, whereupon S. Marke
+was beheaded: to the place where S. Katerine died, hauing there hid
+herselfe, because she would not marry: also to the Bath of S. Katerine.
+
+I sawe there also Pharaos needle, which is a thing in height almost equall
+with Pompeys pillar, and is in compasse fiue fadome, and a halfe, and all
+of one stone.
+
+I was brought also to a most braue and daintie Bath, where we washed our
+selues: the Bath being of marble, and of very curious workemanship.
+
+The Citie standeth vpon great arches, or vawtes, like vnto Churches, with
+mightie pillars of marble, to holde vp the foundation: which arches are
+built to receiue the water of the riuer of Nilus, which is for the vse of
+the Citie. It hath three Castles, and an hundred Churches: but the part
+that is destroyed of it, is sixe time more then that part which standeth.
+
+The last day of Iuly, I departed from Alexandria towards Cayro in a passage
+boate, wherein first I went to Rossetto, standing by the riuer side, hauing
+13. or 14. great churches in it, their building there is of stone and
+bricke, but as for lodging, there is little, except we bring it with vs.
+
+From Rosetto wee passed along the riuer of Nilus, which is so famous in the
+world, twise as broad as the Thames at London: on both sides grow date
+trees in great abundance. The people be rude, insomuch that a man cannot
+traueile without a Ianizary to conduct him.
+
+[Sidenote: The Turkes Lent.] The time that I stayed in AEgypt, was the
+Turkes and Moores Lent, in all which time they burne lamps in their
+churches, as many as may hang in them: their Lent endureth 40. dayes, and
+they haue three Lents in the yere: during which time they neither eate nor
+drinke in the day time, but all the night they do nothing else.
+
+Betwixt Rossetto and Cayro there are along the water side three hundred
+cities and townes, and the length of the way is not aboue three hundred
+miles.
+
+To this famous Citie of Cayro I came the fift day of August, where I found
+M. William Alday, and William Caesar, who intertained me in very good sort.
+M. Caesar brought mee to see the Pyramides which are three in number, one
+whereof king Pharao made for his owne tombe, the tombe it selfe is almost
+in the top of it: the monuments bee high and in forme 4. square, and euery
+of the squares is as long as a man may shoote a rouing arrowe, and as high
+as a Church, I sawe also the ruines of the Citie of Memphis hard by those
+Pyramides.
+
+The house of Ioseph is yet standing in Cayro, which is a sumptuous thing,
+hauing a place to walke in of 56. mighty pillars, all gilt with gold, but I
+saw it not, being then lame.
+
+The 11. day of August the lande was cut at Cayro, to let in the water of
+the riuer of Nilus, which was done with great ioy and triumph.
+
+The 12. of August I set from Cayro towards Alexandria againe, and came
+thither the 14. of August The 26. day there was kept a great feast of the
+Turkes and Moores, which lasted two dayes, and for a day they neuer ceased
+shooting off of great Ordinance.
+
+[Sidenote: The English Consul at Argier.] From Alexandria I sailed to
+Argier, where I lay with M. Typton Consull of the English nation, who vsed
+me most kindly, and at his owne charge. Hee brought mee to the kings Court,
+and into the presence of the King, to see him, and the maners of the Court:
+the King doeth onely beare the name of a king, but the greatest gouernment
+is in the hands of the souldiers.
+
+The king of Potanca is prisoner in Argier, who comming to Constantinople,
+to acknowledge a duety to the great Turke, was betrayed by his owne nephew,
+who wrote to the Turke, that he went onely as a spy, by that meanes to get
+his kingdome. I heard at Argier of seuen Gallies that were at that time
+cast away at a towne called Formentera: three of them were of Argier, the
+other foure were the Christians.
+
+We found here 13. Englishmen, which were by force of weather put into the
+bay of Tunis, where they were very ill vsed by the Moores, who forced them
+to leaue their barke: whereupon they went to the Councell of Argier, to
+require a redresse and remedy for the iniurie. They were all belonging to
+the shippe called the Golden Noble of London, whereof Master Birde is
+owner. The Master was Stephen Haselwood, and the Captaine Edmond Bence.
+
+The thirde day of December, the pinnesse called the Mooneshine of London,
+came to Argier with a prize, which they tooke vpon the coast of Spaine,
+laden with sugar, hides, and ginger: the pinnesse also belonging to the
+Golden Noble: and at Argier they made sale both of shippe and goods, where
+wee left them at our comming away, which was the seuenth day of Ianuarie,
+and the first day of February, I landed at Dartmouth, and the seuenth day
+came to London, with humble thankes to Almightie God, for my safe arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the English Ambassadour to M. Haruie Millers, appointing him
+  Consull for the English nation in Alexandria, Cairo, and other places of
+  Egypt.
+
+Hauing to appoint our Consull in Cayro, Alexandria, Egypt, and other parts
+adiacent, for the safe protection of body and goods of her Maiesties
+subiects; being well perswaded of your sufficient abilitie; in her
+Maiesties name I doe elect and make choise of you, good friend Haruie
+Millers, to execute the same worshipfull office, as shall be required for
+her Maiesties better seruice, the commodity of her subiects, and my
+contentation: hauing and enioying for merit of your trauell in the premises
+the like remuneration incident to the rest of ours in such office in other
+parts of this Empire. Requiring you (all other affaires set aside) to
+repaire thither with expedition, and attend vpon this your charge, which
+the Almighty grant you well to accomplish. For the due execution whereof,
+wee heerewith send you the Grand Signiors Patent of priuilege with ours,
+and what els is needfull therefore, in so ample maner, as any other Consull
+whosoeuer doeth or may enioy the same. In ayd whereof, according to my
+bounden duety to her Maiesty our most gracious Mistresse, I will be ready
+alwayes to employ my selfe to the generall benefit of her Maiesties
+subiects, for your maintenance in all iust causes incident to the same. And
+thus eftsoones requiring and commanding you as aboue sayd, to performe my
+request, I bid you most heartily well to fare, and desire God to blesse
+you. From my mansion Rapamat night Pera this 25 of April 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter to the right honourable William Hareborne her Majesties
+  Ambassadour with the Grand Signior from Alger.
+
+Right honorable, we haue receiued your honors letters dated in
+Constantinople the 5. of Nouember, and accordingly deliuered that inclosed
+to the king of this place, requiring of him, according as you did command
+vs in her Maiesties name, that he would vouchsafe to giue order to all his
+Captaines and Raies that none of them should meddle with our English
+shippes comming or going to or from these parts, for that they haue order
+not to passe by the Christian coast, but vpon the coast of Barbary, and
+shewing him of the charter giuen by the Grand Signior, requiring him in
+like case that for the better fulfilling of the amity, friendship and holy
+league betweene the Grand Signior and her Maiesty, he would giue us fiue or
+six safe-conducts for our ships, that meeting with any of his gallies or
+galliots, they might not meddle with them neither shoot at them: who made
+me answere he would neither giue me any safe conduct nor commission to his
+men of war not to meddle with them, for that he trusted to take some of
+them this yere, and made good account thereof. In like maner I spake to the
+chiefe of the Ianisers and the Leuents, who made me answere, the best hope
+they had this yere was to take some of them, and although they haue the
+Grand Signiors commandement we care not therefore: for we will by policy,
+or one meanes or other prouoke them to shoot some ordinance, which if they
+do but one piece, the peace is broken, and they be good prizes. And some of
+them say further, we care not for his safe-conduct, for if they shew it vs,
+we will conuey it away, we are sure the dogs cannot be beleeued against vs.
+The premisses considered, your honour is with all speed to procure the
+Grand Signior his fauorable letters directed to Hazan, the Cady, Captaines,
+Ianisers, and Leuents, and another like to Romadan Bassa, king of Tripolis,
+commanding them in no maner whatsoeuer to deale with our English ships
+bound into those parts or returning thence with their commodities, although
+they should shoot one at another: for when our ships shall meet them, for
+that, as your honor is aduertised, the gallies of Carthagena, Florence,
+Sicilia and Malta haue made a league to take all our ships comming in or
+going out of the Grand Signiors dominions, therefore if they meet with any
+of these gallies of Alger or Tripolis, thinking they be of them, and not
+knowing them a far off, they may shoot at them, which if therefore they
+should make them prizes, were against Gods lawes, the Grand Signior his
+league, all reason and conscience, considering that all the world doth know
+that Marchants ships laden with marchandise do not seeke to fight with men
+of warre, but contrariwise to defend themselues from them, when they would
+do them harme. Wherefore if your honour do not get out two letters of the
+Grand Signior as aforesayd, and send them hither with all speed by some one
+of your gentlemen accompanied with a chaus of the Court, or some other of
+the Grand Signiors servants, it is impossible that our English ships can
+escape freely from these or the Christians: for either they must of force
+go on the Christian coast, and so fall into their hands, or els on this
+coast, and fall into the kings of this towne, or Tripolis, their hands
+which if they should, will neuer be recouered. And if your honor cannot
+obtaine this thing, I beseech your honour in the behalfe of all the English
+marchants (who sent me hither to follow such order as your honour should
+giue me) to certifie her Maiesty, to the end that they may be commanded to
+leaue off traffique, and not to lose their goods, and her poore subiects
+the Mariners. And thus humbly taking my leaue, I desist from troubling your
+honor. From Algier the tenth of February 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of M. Harborne to Mustapha, challenging him for his dishonest
+  dealing in translating of three of the Grand Signior his commandements.
+
+Domine Mustapha, nescimus quid sibi velit, cum nobis mandata ad finem
+vtilem concessa perperam reddas, quae male scripta, plus damni, quam
+vtilitatis adferant: quemadmodum constat ex tribus receptis mandatis, in
+quibus summum aut principale deest aut aufertur. In posterum noli ita
+nobiscum agere. Ita enim ludibrio erimus omnibus in nostrum et tuum
+dedecus. Cum nos multarum actionum spem Turcice scriptarum in tua prudentia
+reponimus, ita prouidere debes, vt non eueniant huiusmodi mala. Quocirca
+deinceps cum mandatum aut scriptum aliquod accipias, verbum ad verbum
+conuertatur in Latinum sermonem, ne damnum insequatur. Nosti multos habere
+nos inimicos conatibus nostris inuidentes, quorum malitiae vestrae est
+prudentiae aduersari. Hi nostri, Secretarius et minimus interpres ex nostra
+parte dicent in tribus illis receptis mandatis errata. Vt deinceps similes
+errores non eueniant precamur. Ista emendes, et caetera Serenissimae regiae
+Maiestatis negocia, vti decet vestrae conditionis hominem, melius cures.
+Nam vnicuique suo officio strenue est laborandum vt debito tramite omnia
+succedant: quod spero te facturum. Bene vale.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Pasport in Italian granted to Thomas Shingleton Englishman, by the king
+  of Algier. 1583.
+
+Noi Assan Basha Vicere et lochotenente e capitan della iurisditione de
+Algier doniamo e concediamo libero saluo condutto a Thomas Shingleton
+mercadante, che possi con suo vassello e marinare de che natione se siano,
+e mercadantia di qual si voglia natione, andare et venire, e negotiari, e
+contrattare liberamente in questa citta de Algier et altri locha de la
+nostra iurisditione cosi di ponente comi di Leuante: et cosi anchora
+commandiamo al capitan di maare di Algier et d'altri lochi de nostra
+iurisditione, Rais de Vasselli et Capitani de Leuante, et altri capitani di
+vasselli tanto grossi como picholi, si comnanda a qual si voglia, che
+truando il sopradetto Thomas Shingleton Inglese nelli mari di Genua,
+Francia Napoli, Calabria, e Sardigna con suo vassello e mercantia, et
+homini de che nationi si siano, non gli debba molestare, ne piggliare, ne
+toccare cosa de nessuna manero tanto di denare, como di qual si voglia
+altra robba, sotto la pena e disgratia di perdir la vita et la robba: Et
+per quanto hauete a caro la gratia del Gran Signor nostro patrone Soltan
+Murates Ottomano, lo lasciarete andare per suo camino senza dargli nessuno
+impedimento. Dato in Algieri in nostro regio Palazzo, sigillato del nostro
+reggio sigillo, e fermato della gran ferma, et scritto del nostro reggio
+Secretario, il di 23 de Ienaro, 1583.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+We Assan Bassha Viceroy and lieutenant, and captaine of the iurisdiction of
+Algier, giue and grant free safeconduct to Thomas Singleton marchant, that
+with his ship and mariners, of what nation soeuer they be, and with his
+marchandize of what countrey soeuer, he may go and come, and trade and
+traffique freely in this city of Algier, and other places of our
+iurisdiction, as well of the West as of the East. And in like sort we
+further command the captaine of the sea of Algier, and other places of our
+iurisdiction, the Reiz of vessels and captaines of the Leuant, and other
+captaines of vessels aswell great as small, whosoeuer they be, we do
+command them, that finding the forsayd Thomas Shingleton Englishman in the
+seas of Genua, France, Naples, Calabria, and Sardinia, with his ship and
+merchandize, and men of what nation soeuer they be, that they molest them
+not, neither take nor touch any kind of thing of theirs, neither money nor
+any other kind of goods, vnder paine and peril of loosing of their liues
+and goods: and as you make account of the fauour of the Grand Signor our
+lord Sultan Murates Hottoman, so see you let him passe on his way without
+any maner of impediment. Dated at Alger in our kingly palace, signed with
+our princely Signet, and sealed with our great seale, and writen by our
+Secretarie of estate, the 23. of Ianuarie, 1583.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter written in Spanish by Sir Edward Osborne, to the king of Alger,
+  the 20. of Iuly, 1584 in the behalfe of certeine English captiues there
+  detained.
+
+Muy alto y poderoso Rey,
+
+Sea seruida vostra alteza. Como la muy alta y potentissima magestad del
+Gran Sennor tiene hecho articulos de priuilegios con la Serenissima
+Magestad de nuestra Reyna d'Inglatierra, para los vassalos della poder
+libremente yr y boluer, y tratar por mar y tierra en los dominios de su
+potentissima Magestad, Como a la clara paresce por los dichos articulos, de
+che embiamos el tractado al Senor Iuan Tipton nuestro commissario, para le
+muestrar a vostra Alteza. Contra el tenor de los quales articulos por dos
+galeras de su ciudad de Alger ha sido hechado al fondo en la mar vn des
+nuestros nauios que venia de Patras, que es en la Morea, cargado de
+corintes y otras mercaderias, que alla se compraron, y las mas de la gente
+del la matados y ahogados en la mar, y el resto est an detenidos por
+esclauos: cosa muy contraria a los dichos articulas y priuilegios. Que es
+occasion, que por esto supplicamos a vostra Alteza muy humilmente, que,
+pues que la potentissimo magestad del grand Sennor es seruida nos
+fauorescer por los dichos articulos, tambien sea seruida vostra Alteza
+assistimos en ellos, otorgandonos por vostra autoridad su auida y fauor,
+segun que esperamos, para que puedan estar libres, y boluer para aca
+aquellos pobres hombres ansi hechos esclauos, como dicho es. Y ansi mismo,
+que mande vostra Alteza dar orden a los capitanes, maestres y gente de las
+galeras, que nos dexen de aqui adelante hazer nuestro trafico con seys naos
+cada anno para Turquia a los dominios del Gran Sennor a paz y a saluo, por
+no cotrariar a los dichos nuestros priuilegios, Lleuando cada vna de
+nuestras dichas naos pot se conoscer vn saluo condutto de su alta et
+potentissima magestad. Y con esta vostra tan senallada merced y fauor que
+en esso reciberemos, quedaremos nosotros con grandissima obligation a
+vostra Alteza de seruir la por ello, segun que el dicho Sennor Iuan Tipton,
+a quien nos reportamos de todo lo demas, mejor informira vostra Alteza:
+Cuya serenissima persona y estado supplicamos y pidimos a Dios omnipotente
+prosperu y accrescente con toda felicitad y honra. Del la ciuidad de
+Londres a los veynte dias de Iulio del mil y quinientos y ocbenta y quatro
+annos.
+
+Al seruitio de vuestra Alteza per y en hombre de todos los tratantes en
+Tutquia, lo el Mayor de Londres,
+
+Edward Osborne.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right high and mightie king,
+
+May it please your highnesse to vnderstand, that the most high and most
+mightie maiestie of the Grand Signor hath confirmed certaine articles of
+priuileges with the most excellent maiestie of our Queene of England, that
+her subjects may freely go and come, and traffique by sea and land in the
+dominions of his most mighty maiesty, as appeareth more at large by the
+said articles, whereof we haue sent the copy vnto M. Iohn Tipton our
+Commissarie to shew the same vnto your highnes. [Sidenote: An English ship
+sunke by two gallies of Alger.] Against the tenor of which articles, one of
+our ships which came from Patras which is in Morea, laden with corants and
+other merchandizes which were bought in those parts, was sunke by 2.
+gallies of your citie of Alger, and the greatest number of the men thereof
+were slain and drowned in the sea, the residue being detained as slaues: An
+acte very contrary to the meaning of the aforesaid articles and priuileges:
+which is the occasion that by these presents we beseech your highnesse very
+humbly that since it hath pleased the most mightie maiestie of the Grand
+Signor to fauour vs with the sayd priuileges, it would please your
+Highnesse in like maner to assist vs in the same, graunting vs by your
+authoritie, your ayde and fauour, according as our hope is that these poore
+men so detained in captiuitie, as is aforesaid, may be set at libertie, and
+returne into their countrey. And likewise that your highnesse would send to
+giue order to the captaines, masters and people of your gallies, that from
+hencefoorth they would suffer vs to vse our traffique with sixe ships
+yerely into Turkie vnto the dominions of the Grand Signor in peace and
+safetie, that they do not withstand those our said priuileges, euery one of
+our foresaid ships carying with them a passeport of his most high and most
+mightie maiestie to be knowen by. And for that your so singular fauour and
+curtesie which in so doing we shall receiue, we on our part with all
+bounden duetie vnto your highnesse, will seeke to honour you in that
+behalfe, according as the sayd Master Iohn Tipton (to whom wee referre our
+selues touching all other circumstances) shall more at large informe your
+highnesse, whose most excellent person and estate, we pray and beseech
+Almighty God to prosper and increase with all felicitie and honour. From
+the Citie of London, the 20. of Iuly, 1584.
+
+At the seruice of your highnesse, for and in the name of our whole company
+trading into Turkie, I Maior of London. Edward Osburne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes concerning the trade of Alger.
+
+The money that is coined in Alger is a piece of gold called Asiano, and
+Doublaes, and two Doublaes make an Asiano, but the Doubla is most vsed, for
+all things be sold by Doublaes, which Doubla is fiftie of their Aspers
+there.
+
+The Asper there is not so good by halfe and more, as that in
+Constantinople; for the Chekin of gold of the Turkes made at Constantinople
+is at Alger worth an 150 Aspers, and at Constantinople, it is but 66.
+Aspers.
+
+The pistolet and roials of plate are most currant there.
+
+The said pistolet goeth for 130. Aspers there: and the piece of 4 roials
+goeth for 40 Aspers, but oftentimes is sold for more, as men need them to
+carie vp into Turkie.
+
+Their Asianos and Doublaes are pieces of course gold, worth here but 40. s.
+the ounce, so the same is currant in no place of Turkie out of the kingdom
+of Alger, neither the Aspers, for that they be lesse then others be, for
+they coine them in Alger.
+
+The custome to the king is inward 10. per centum, to the Turke, to be paid
+of the commoditie it selfe, or as it shall be rated.
+
+There is another custome to the Ermine, of one and an halfe per centum,
+which is to the Iustice of the Christians: the goods for this custome are
+rated as they are for the kings custome.
+
+Hauing paid custome inwards, you pay none outwards for any commoditie that
+you doe lade, more then a reward to the gate keepers.
+
+The waight there is called a Cantare for fine wares, as mettals refined,
+and spices &c. which is here 120. li. subtil.
+
+Mettall not refined, as lead, iron, and such grosse wares, are sold by a
+great Cartare, which is halfe as big againe: so it is 180. li. subtil of
+ours here.
+
+The measure of corne is by a measure called a Curtia, which is about 4.
+bushels of our measure, and corne is plentiful there and good cheape,
+except when there hapneth a very dry yeere.
+
+The surest lodging for a Christian there is in a Iewes house: for if he
+haue any hurt, the Iew and his goods shall make it good, so the Iew taketh
+great care of the Christian and his goods that lieth in his house, for
+feare of punishment.
+
+An Englishman called Thomas Williams, which is M. Iohn Tiptons man, lieth
+about trade of merchandize in the streete called The Soca of the Iewes.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria.
+
+Alexandria in Egypt is a free port, and when a man commeth within the
+castles, presently the Ermyn sends aboord to haue one come and speake with
+him to know what goods are aboord: and then hee will set guards aboord the
+ship to see all the goods discharged. And then from the Ermin you goe to
+the Bye, [Marginal note: This is another officer.] onely for that he will
+inquire newes of you, and so from thence to the Consuls house where you
+lie. The Venetians haue a Consul themselues. But all other nations goe to
+the French nations Consul, who will giue you a chamber for your selues
+apart, if you will so haue it.
+
+The customs inward of all commodities are ten in the hundred, and the
+custome is paid in wares also that you buy: for the same wares in barter
+you pay also ten in the hundred, at the lading of the wares. [Marginal
+note: Other smal customs you pay besides, which may be at two in the
+hundred: and for Consulage you pay two in the hundred.] But if you sell for
+mony, you pay no more custome but the ten aforesaid, and one and a halfe in
+the hundred, which is for the custome of the goods you lade for the sayd
+mony, for more custome you pay not. But for all the money you bring thither
+you pay nothing for the custome of the same. And if you sell your wares for
+mony, and with the same money buy wares, you pay but two in the hundred for
+the custome thereof. And if you steale any custome, if it be taken, you pay
+double custome for that you steale.
+
+The weight of Alexandria is called Pois Forforeine, which is a kintal in
+that place, which maketh at Marseils 109. li. of Marseils waight, at 15
+ounces the pound, which is 103. li. of 16. ounces to the li. There is
+another waight called Pois Gerrin, which is 150. li. of Marseils waight, by
+which are sold all things to eate: but spice is sold by the former waight.
+
+From Alexandria to Cairo is three daies journey, but you must take a
+Ianissarie with you: and to go vp thither by water it is 8. dayes journey.
+Roials of Spaine are currant mony there, and are the best money you can
+cary. And 4. roials are worth 13. Medins, and 2. Medins, are 3. Aspers.
+Pistolets and crownes of France and Dollers will goe, but of all Roials are
+best.
+
+Rice is not permitted to goe out of the land, but is kept for a victuall.
+But with a present to the Bye and Ermine some may passe.
+
+All sortes of spices be garbled after the bargaine is made, and they be
+Moores which you deale withall, which be good people and not ill disposed.
+And after you be searched and haue leaue to passe, you must presently
+depart out of the port, and if you doe not, they will search you againe.
+And you must depart in the day, for in the night the castles will not
+suffer you to depart. The duetie to the Consul is 2 in the hundred, for his
+aide, and meate, and drinke and all. And the port of Alexandria is good
+when one is within it with good ankers and cables. Silver is better currant
+then gold in Alexandria, but both are good.
+
+Commonly the Carauans come thither in October from Mecca to Cairo, and from
+thence to Alexandria, where the merchants be that buy the spices, and
+therefore the spices are brought most to Alexandria, where each Christian
+nation remaineth at the Consuls houses. Yet oftentimes the Christians go vp
+to Cairo to buy drugs and other commodities there, as they see cause. And
+the commodities there vendible are all sorts of kersies, but the most part
+blewes, and of clothes all colours except mingled colours and blacks.
+Pepper is usually sold for 24. ducats the quintal, Ginger for 14. ducats.
+You most take canuas to make bags to put your commoditie in from
+Alexandria, for there is none. There is also fine flaxe, and good store of
+Buffe hides.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the English ambassador to M. Edward Barton.
+
+Master Barton I send you 3. commandements in Turkish, with a copy thereof
+in English, to the ende our ships might not come in danger of breach of
+league, if they should shoote at the gallies of those of Algier, Tunis, and
+Tripolis in the West: which after you haue shewed the Bassas, receiue
+againe into your hands, and see them registred, and then deliuer one of
+them to our friend M. Tipton, and the like you are to do with the priuilege
+which you cary with you, and see them iointly registered in the Cadies
+booke, deliuering the copy of the said priuilege sealed by the Cadi, also
+to the sayd our friend M. Tipton, taking a note of his hand for the receipt
+thereof, and for deliuerie at all times to vs or our assignes. And require
+them in her maiesties and the grand Signors name, that they will haue our
+ships passing too and fro vnder licence and safeconduct for recommended in
+friendly maner. Touching your proceedings in Tripolis with Romadan, as I
+haue not receiued any aduise thereof, since your departure, so must I leaue
+you to God and my former direction. The ship patronised of Hassan Rayes,
+which you wrote to be ours, prooued to be a Catalonian. As for ours, by
+report of that Hassan and other Iewes in his ship, it was affirmed to be
+sold to the Malteses, which with the rest you are to receiue there. And
+hauing ended these affaires and registred our priuilege, and these three
+commandements, in Tripolis, Tunis, and Alger, I pray you make speedy
+returne, and for that which may be recouered, make ouer the same either to
+Richard Rowed for Patrasso in Morea, or otherwise hither to Iohn Bate in
+the surest maner you may, if the registring of that your priuilege and
+these commandements will not suffer you in person to returne with the same.
+From my mansion Rapamat in Pera this 24. of Iune 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The commaundement obtained of the Grand Signior by her Maiesties ambassador
+  M. Wil. Hareborne, for the quiet passing of her subiects to and from his
+  dominions, sent in An. 1584 to the Viceroyes of Algier, Tunis, and
+  Tripolis in Barbary.
+
+To our Beglerbeg of Algier.
+
+We certifie thee by this our commandement, that the right honorable Will.
+Hareborne ambassador to the Queenes maiestie of England hath signified vnto
+vs, that the ships of that countrey in their comming and returning to and
+from our Empire, on the one part of the Seas haue the Spaniards,
+Florentines, Sicilians, and Malteses, on the other part our countreis
+committed to your charge: which abouesaid Christians will not quietly
+suffer their egresse and regresse, into, and out of our dominions, but doe
+take and make the men captiues, and forfeit the shippes and goods, as the
+last yeere the Maltese did one, which they tooke at Gerbi, and to that end
+do continually lie in wait for them to their destruction, whereupon they
+are constrained to stand to their defence at any such time as they might
+meet with them. Wherefore considering by this means they must stand vpon
+their guard, when they shall see any gallie afarre off, whereby if meeting
+with any of your gallies and not knowing them, in their defence they do
+shoot at them, and yet after when they doe certainly know them, do not
+shoote any more, but require to passe peaceably on their voiage, which you
+would deny, saying, the peace is broken because you haue shot at vs, and so
+make prize of them contrary to our priuileges, and against reason: for the
+preuenting of which inconuenience the said ambassadour hath required this
+our commaundement. We therefore command thee, that vpon sight hereof thou
+doe not permit any such matter in any sort whatsoeuer, but suffer the sayd
+Englishmen to passe in peace according to the tenour of our commandement
+giuen, without any disturbance or let by any meanes vpon the way, although
+that meeting with thy gallies, and not knowing them afarre off, they taking
+them for enemies should shoote at them, yet shall you not suffer them to
+hurt them therefore, but quietly to passe. Wherefore looke thou that they
+may haue right, according to our priuilege giuen them, and finding any that
+absenteth himself, and wil not obey this our commandement, presently
+certify vs to our porch, that we may giue order for his punishment, and
+with reverence giue faithfull credite to this our commandement, which
+hauing read, thou shalt againe returne it vnto them that present it. From
+our palace in Constantinople, the 1. of Iune 1584.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of the honorable M. Wil. Hareborne her maiesties ambass. with the
+  grand Signior to M. Tipton, appointing him Consul of the English in
+  Algier, Tunis, and Tripolis of Barbarie.
+
+Master Tipton, I haue receiued among others, yours of the 10. of Nouember
+1584. by Soliman Sorda, certifying the receipt of mine of the 24. of Iune
+1584. with the 3. commandements, which not being registred, let it now be
+done. Where you write the force of the priuilege to be broken by our ships
+in shooting, and therefore be lawfully taken, you are deceiued, for of
+those taken in then, hath the grand Signior now deliuered vs free, Wil.
+Moore, and Rob. Rawlings, and further promised the rest in like case,
+wheresoeuer they be, and that hereafter no violence shalbe shewed,
+considering ours be merchants ships which go peaceably in their voiage, and
+were ignorant of the orders of Algier, neither knew afar off, whether they
+were friends or the Christians gallies in league with vs, of whom they most
+doubted, who not suffring our ships to come into these parts, wil make
+prize of the goods and captiue the men, so as they are not to let them come
+nigh them: and since ours haue not done contrary to the articles of the
+same priuilege, wherein is no order for Algier prescribed vs, as both by
+the originall now sent vs, and also by the copy now sent you from London
+you may perceiue, they according to right are as abouesaid to be set free,
+and their goods restored, which if it be not there accomplished as the
+grand Signior hath now commanded, and most faithfully promised, neither yet
+in case of their denial, those offenders punished here, and our injuries
+redressed, we are to demand our Congie, and command our merchants her
+maiesties subiects, to end their traffike here, which in our countrey
+commodities is prooued and found by the great Signior to be so beneficial
+to his countries as we are assured so well thereof, as also for the honor
+which his ancestors neuer had of friendship with so mighty a prince as is
+her maiesty, he wil not but maintaine the faith promised her, and the
+intercourse in due force. And where you say that the grand Signor his
+letters, in the behalf of the French, were no more accepted there, then of
+a mean man, nor tooke no place, that is not material to vs, our letters are
+after another sort much more effectuall. For our case and theirs be found
+far different, in that they be not onely now out of fauour with him, but
+also the commodities which they bring hither, as sugar, paper, bracelets,
+ropes of bast, almonds, &c., all which may be here wel spared, and we
+contrarily so wel esteemed, as he neuer denied vs any thing since our
+comming demanded, which neither their ambassador, nor the Venetian could
+haue here, and therefore we rest perswaded, knowing the wisdom of the
+Beglebeg, who is aduised by his friends from hence, of this our credite
+with his master, he wil so respect his commandements, as to accomplish the
+tenor thereof according to our desire. And where you say that the Ianizers
+rule all there, I know right wel that if things be not done as the grand
+Signior commandeth, his lieutenant must answer it. And therefore I am fully
+perswaded if he doe what he may they dare not resist him, for if they
+should, those rebels should not be vnpunished of the grand Signior. And
+though they speake their pleasures among themselues there, yet they be not
+so brutish, but they wel consider that their master the grand Signior may
+not be gainsaid or mocked of any. For vpon his word dependeth the life or
+death euen of the chiefest, as I have seene since my comming hither. So
+whatsoever these Ianizaries say, they will be better aduised in their
+deedes then to withstand their Viceroy, if he himselfe wil vse his lawfull
+power, which if hee doe not, hee cannot purge himselfe here of their euill
+proceedings against the grand Signiors friends: for the feet may not rule
+the bodie, but contrarywise, the head, the feete, and all the rest of the
+members. And for that neither for feare, affection or otherwise you omit as
+a faithfull true subiect to her maiestie to do your dutie, I do by my
+warrant going herewith charge you, and in her maiesties name, to the
+vttermost to vse your good and faithfull endeuour, as becommeth a true
+subiect, and in all things that may concerne her maiesties good seuice,
+assisting the Chaus with the rest of our messengers in counsel, trauel, and
+what els shall be thought requisite for your good discharge of your duetie.
+And to the end you may boldly proceed herein as also for the good opinion
+sir Edward Osborne and the company haue of you, and I no lesse perswaded of
+youre wisedome, vpright dealing, and good experience in those parts, do
+send you herewith the grand Signiors and our patents for exercising the
+office of Consul there, in Tripolis and Tunis: by virtue of which
+authoritie you may without feare proceed as the office doeth chalenge in
+defence of our priuilege, to redresse all iniuries offred our nation. Which
+if you cannot get reformed there of the Beglerbies vpon your complaint, I
+thereof aduertised, shal doe it here, and to the vttermost maintaine you in
+al rightful causes whatsoeuer, doubt you not. And hereafter according to
+your aduise, I wil and doe giue our ships order not to fight with any
+gallies of Alger, but to hoise out their skiffe and go aboord to shew them
+their safeconduct, and to present the captain with a garment, and you there
+in such like case are to take order that they do not forceably take any
+thing from them. [Sidenote: The Inuentorie of our ships and goods sunke and
+taken by the gallies of Alger.] Nothing doubting but the Viceroy (whose
+friendship in her maiesties behalfe I desire) will not onely performe the
+same your iust request, and according to right, restore to libertie our men
+since the priuilege taken, but also cause those that tooke and sunke our
+ships to answere the value, which I haue set down truly, and rather with
+the least in the Inuentorie translated into Turkish, whereof the inclosed
+is the copy in English, which I send to the end you may be the better
+informed of my demand by this our Chaus Mahomet, with whom in all things
+you are to conferre of matters expedient, for the honor of her maiesties
+countrey, and the commoditie, and libertie of poore captiues, which if the
+Viceroy do wel consider, according to his wisdome, as the grand Signior
+doeth thereof, he shal wel perceiue it not onely a great honour to his
+master as aforesaid, to continue this amitie with her maiestie, but chiefly
+to the whole estate of his kingdom exceeding profitable, which by this
+means shall be abundantly serued with the chiefest commodities they want,
+with many other things of more importance to the grand Signior his
+contentation, not herein to be mentioned. For I know the Viceroies
+experienced wisdom can wel consider thereof, in such sort as he wil not
+deny to accomplish his masters commandement, and our earnest request in so
+small a matter as this we require, whereof I expect no refusall: for
+thereby he shall increase his honor with the grand Signior, be in credite
+with her maiestie, be void of trouble which hereafter by future suite
+against him may happen, and his gallies free of such doubtful issue as
+doeth chance, fighting with our ships. Which, as it is well knowen to all
+the world, haue so great hearts as neuer cowardly to yeeld to their
+enemies. And that therefore in that respect (after the prouerbe, like
+esteeme of their like) they are the more of such a valiant prince as is
+their Viceroy and his couragious souldiers to be in all friendship
+cherished and better esteemed. If the captaine Bassa had bene returned from
+Capha, I would in like maner haue procured his letters, which for that he
+is not, I doubt nothing but that the grand Signiors will suffise. Thus
+commending your selfe and these proceedings to the almighty his merciful
+direction, I bid you most heartily wel to fare. From my mansion Rapamat
+nigh Pera, this 30. of March, 1585.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Series vel registrum valoris nauium, bonorum, et hominum per triremes
+  Argerienses ereptorum, vna cum captiuorum hominum nominibus, Beglerbego
+  Argeriensi Hassano.
+
+1 Salomon de Plimmouth habuit 36. homines, onerata cum sale, onere
+trecentorum doliorum, valore Florenorum 5600.
+
+2 Elizabetha de Garnesey cum decem hominibus Anglis, reliquis Britonibus,
+valore Florenorum 2000.
+
+3 Maria Martin de London onere centum et triginta doliorum, rectore Thoma
+More cum triginta quinque hominibus, reuertens de Patrasso cum mandato
+Caesareo, valore Florenorum 1400.
+
+4 Elizabeth Stokes de London, rectore Dauid Fillie de London, Patrassum
+veniens cum mandato Caesareo: huius praecipuus valor erat in talleris
+numeratis, quos habuit Richardus Gibben, qui adduxit etiam Serenissimae
+Reginae: maiestatis literas Caesari et oratori. Valor reliquus in mercibus
+vna cum superiori in talleris, effecit Florenorum 21500.
+
+5 Nicolaus de London, rectore Thoma Forster, onerata cum vuis siccis,
+valore Florenorum 4800.
+
+
+In tempore Romadan Beglerbegi Argirae spoliatae et ereptae naues, merces,
+  et homines.
+
+1 Iudith de London, rectore Iacobo Beare, cum hominibus 24. valore
+Florenorum 3100.
+
+2 Iesus de London, rectore Andraea Dier, cum 21. hominibus. Valorem huius
+et 14. homines, reliquis mortuis, reddidit Romadan Bassa Tripolitanus
+Secretario legati, Edwardo Barten, valore Florenorum 9000.
+
+
+Nomina hominum mancipatorum et viuentium tunc temporis, quando Caesar
+  illustrissimus, et dominus Orator Chauseum Mahumetem miserunt Algiram.
+
+1 Ante foedus initum in naue Peter de Bristow. Iohn Winter, Robert Barton.
+
+2 In naue Swallow de London. Rich. Crawford, Anthony Eluers, Wil. Rainolds.
+
+Post foedus initum in naue Britona. Iames Yoong.
+
+1 In naue Rabnet de Hampton. Thomas Lisney.
+
+1 In naue Salomon. Iohn Tracie, Wil. Griffith, Wil. Cocke.
+
+1 In naue Elizabeth. Iohn Woodward, Giles Naper, Leonard Iames, Oliuer
+Dallimore, and Richard Maunsell.
+
+2 In naue Maria Martin. Thomas Moore, Wil. White, Wil. Palmer, Nich. Long,
+Peter March, Rich. Haslewood, Wil. Dewly, Wil. Cowel, Iohn Franke, Henry
+Parker, Iohn Cauendish, Moises Robinson, Iames Sotherich, Henry Howel,
+Nich. Smith, Henry Ragster, Rich. Dauison, Rich. Palmer.
+
+3 In naue Elizabeth Stokes. Dauid Fillie, Walter Street, Laurence Wilkins,
+Morgan Dauis, Iohn Quinte, Ambrose Harison, Iohn Peterson, Tristram Vois,
+Roger Ribbe.
+
+4 In naue Nicholas, Thomas Forster rector nauis et eius nautae.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+To Assan Aga, Eunuch and Treasurer to Hassan Bassa king of Alger, which
+  Assan Aga was the sonne of Fran. Rowlie of Bristow merchant, taken in the
+  Swalow.
+
+I receiued your letters of Will. Hamor gentleman my seruant very
+thankfully, aswel for the feruant faith that by his report I heare you haue
+in our lord Iesus Christ, by whose onely merits and bloodshedding, you
+together with vs and all other good Christians so truly beleeuing, shalbe
+saued, as also for your faithfull obedience like a true subiect to her
+Maiestie, naturally louing your countrey and countreymen, declared in your
+fauourable furtherance of the said Wil. Hamore, procuring their redemption.
+Of which your good and vertuous actions, as I reioice to vnderstand, so wil
+I impart the same to your singuler commendation, both to our mistresse her
+Maiestie, and her most honorable counsellors the nobilitie of England, to
+whom assure your selfe the report shalbe very welcome. And now this second
+time I am inforced by duetie to God and her maiesty, as also by the smal
+regard your master had of the Grand Signors former commandements, to
+complaine vnto him, though not so vehemently as I had occasion by his most
+vnworthy answer. But I hope, and the rather by your means, he will not
+contrary this second commandement, threatning him, not obseruing the same,
+losse of office and life. The due execution whereof by your vertuous and
+careful industry procured, wil manifest to all the world, especially to her
+maiesty, and me her ambassador, your true Christian mind and English heart,
+intentiuely bent to Gods honor, and the libertie of the poore men, for
+which I trust you be ordained another Ioseph, to folow his example in true
+pietie, in such sort that notwithstanding your body be subiect to Turkish
+thraldom, yet your vertuous mind free from those vices, next vnder God
+addict to the good seruice of your liege Lady and soueraigne princes, her
+most excellent maiesty, wil continually seeke by all good meanes to
+manifest the same in this and the like faithful seruice to your singuler
+commendation, wherby both my selfe and others in that place hauing found
+you in all good offices faithfully affectionated, may in like case performe
+the like towards you, when and where you may haue occasion to vse me: which
+as I for my part do assuredly promise, and wil no lesse faithfully
+performe: so accordingly I expect herein, and hereafter the like of you,
+whom most heartily saluted I commend to the diuine tuition and holy
+direction. From my house Rapamar, this 28. of June 1586.
+
+Your louing and good friend her Maiesties Ambassador with the Grand Signor,
+
+Wil. Hareborne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The originall of the first voyage for traffique into the kingdom of Marocco
+  in Barbarie, begun in the yeere 1551. with a tall ship called the Lion of
+  London, whereof went as captaine Master Thomas Windam, as appeareth by
+  this extract of a letter of Iames Aldaie, to the worshipfull master
+  Michael Locke, which Aldaie professeth himselfe to haue bene the first
+  inuentor of this trade.
+
+Worshipful Sir, hauing lately bene acquainted with your intent to prosecute
+the olde intermitted discouerie for Catai, if therein with my knowledge,
+trauell or industrie I may doe you seruice, I am readie to doe it and
+therein to aduenture my life to the vttermost point. Trueth it is, that I
+haue bene by some men (not my friends) euill spoken of at London, saying
+that although I be a man of knowledge in the Arte of Nauigation and
+Cosmographie, and that I haue bene the inuentor of some voyages that be now
+growen to great effect; yet say they maliciously and without iust cause,
+that I haue not bene willing at any season to proceed in those voyages that
+I haue taken in hand, taking example especially of two voyages. The one was
+when I was master in the great Barke Aucher of the Leuant, in which voyage
+I went not, but the causes they did not know of my let from the same, nor
+of the other. But first the very trueth is, that I was from the same voyage
+letted by the Princes letters, which my Master Sebastian Gabota had
+obtained for that purpose, to my great griefe. And as touching the second
+voyage which I inuented for the trade of Barbarie, the liuing God knoweth
+that I say most true, that when the great sweate was, (whereon the chiefe
+of those with whom I ioyned in that voyage died, that is to say, Sir Iohn
+Lutterell, Iohn Fletcher, Henry Ostrich and others) I my selfe was also
+taken with the same sweate in London, and after it, whether with euill diet
+in keeping, or how I know not, I was cast into such an extreame feuer, as I
+was neither able to ride nor goe: and the shippe being at Portesmouth,
+Thomas Windam had her away from thence, before I was able to stand vpon my
+legges, by whom I lost at that instant fourescore pound. Besides I was
+appointed by them that died (if they had liued) to haue had the whole
+gouernment both of shippe and goods, because I was to them the sole
+inuenter of that trade.
+
+In the first voyage to Barbary there were two Moores, being noblemen,
+whereof one was of the Kings blood, conuayed by the said Master Thomas
+Windham into their Countrey out of England,
+
+Yours humble at your commandement,
+
+Iames Alday.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Barbary in the yeere 1552. Set foorth by the right
+  worshipfull Sir Iohn Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir Thomas Wroth, Master
+  Frances Lambert, Master Cole and others; Written by the relation of
+  Master Iames Thomas then Page to Master Thomas Windham chiefe Captaine of
+  this voyage.
+
+The shippes that went on this voyage were three, whereof two were of the
+Riuer of Thames, That is to say, the Lyon of London, whereof Master Thomas
+Windham was Captaine and part owner, of about an hundred and fiftie tonnes:
+The other was the Buttolfe about fourescore tunnes, and a Portugall Carauel
+bought of certaine Portugals in Newport in Wales, and fraightened for this
+voyage, of summe sixtie tunnes. The number of men in the Fleete were an
+hundred and twentie. The Master of the Lyon was one Iohn Kerry of Mynhed in
+Somersetshire, his Mate was Dauid Landman. The chiefe Captaine of this
+small Fleete was Master Thomas Windham a Norffolke gentlemen borne, but
+dwelling at Marshfield-parke in Somerset shire. This Fleete departed out of
+King-rode neere Bristoll about the beginning of May 1552. being on a Munday
+in the morning: and the Munday fortnight next ensuing in the euening came
+to an ancker at their first port in the roade of Zafia, or Asafi on the
+coast of Barbarie, standing in 32. degrees of latitude, and there put on
+land part of our Marchandise to be conueied by land to the citie of
+Marocco: which being done, and hauing refreshed our selues with victuals
+and water, we went to the second port called Santa Cruz, where we
+discharged the rest of our goods, being good quantitie of linnen and
+woollen cloth, corall, amber, Iet, and diuers other things well accepted of
+the Moores. In which road we found a French ship, which not knowing whether
+it were warre or peace betweene England and France, drewe her selfe as
+neere vnder the towne wals as she could possible, crauing aide of the towne
+for her defence, if need were, which in deed seeing vs draw neere, shot at
+vs a piece from the wals, which came ouer the Lion our Admirall, between
+the maine mast and her foremast. [Sidenote: The English were at Santa Cruz
+the yere before being 1551.] Whereupon we comming to an anker, presently
+came a pinnes aboord vs to know what we were, who vnderstanding that we had
+bene there the yere before, and came with the good leaue of their king in
+marchant wise, were fully satisfied, and gaue vs good leaue to bring our
+goods peaceably on shore, where the Viceroy, whose name was Sibill Manache,
+within short time after came to visite vs, and vsed vs with all curtesie.
+But by diuers occasions we spent here very neere three moneths before we
+could get in our lading, which was Sugar, Dates, Almonds, and Malassos or
+sugar Syrrope. And for all our being here in the heate of the Sommer, yet
+none of our company perished by sicknesse. Our ships being laden, we drew
+into the Sea for a Westerne wind for England. But being at sea, a great
+leake fell vpon the Lion, so that we were driuen to Lancerota, and
+Forteuentura, where, betweene the two Ilands, we came to a road, whence wee
+put on land out of our sayd ship 70. chests of Sugar vpon Lancerota, with
+some dozen or sixteene of our company, where the inhabitants supposing we
+had made a wrongfull prize of our carauell, suddenly came with force vpon
+our people, among whom I my selfe was one, tooke vs prisoners, and spoiled
+the sugars: which thing being perceiued from our ships, they manned out
+three boates, thinking to rescue vs, and draue the Spaniards to flight,
+whereof they slew eighteene, and tooke their gouernour of the Iland
+prisoner, who was a very aged gentleman about 70 yeeres of age. But chasing
+the enemies so farre, for our recouerie, as pouder and arrowes wanted, the
+Spaniardes perceiuing this, returned, and in our mens retire they slew sixe
+of them. Then a Parle grew, in the which it was agreed, that we the
+prisoners should be by them restored, and they receiue their olde
+gouernour, giuing vs a testimonie vnder his and their hands, what damages
+wee had there receiued, the which damages were here restored, and made good
+by the king of Spaine his marchants vpon our returne into England. After
+wee had searched and mended our leake, being returned aboord, we came vnder
+saile, and as wee were going to the sea on the one side of the Iland, the
+Cacafuego and other ships of the king of Portugals Armada entered at the
+other, and came to anker in the road from whence we were but newly
+departed, and shot off their great ordinance in our hearing. And here by
+the way it is to bee vnderstood that the Portugals were much offended with
+this our new trade into Barbarie, and both in our voiage the yeere before,
+as also in this they gaue out in England by their marchants, that if they
+tooke vs in those partes, they would vse vs as their mortall enemies, with
+great threates and menaces. But by God and good prouidence wee escaped
+their hands. From this Iland shaping our coast for England, we were seuen
+or eight weekes before we could reach the coast of England. The first port
+wee entered into was the hauen of Plimmouth, from whence within short time
+wee came into the Thames, and landed our marchandise at London, about the
+ende of the moneth of October, 1552.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voiage made out of England vnto Guinea and Benin in Affrike, at the
+  charges of certaine marchants Aduenturers of the Citie of London, in the
+  yeere of our Lord 1553.
+
+I was desired by certaine of my friends to make some mention of this
+Voiage, that some memorie thereof might remaine to our posteritie, if
+either iniquitie of time consuming all things, or ignorance creeping in by
+barbarousness and contempt of knowledge should hereafter bury in obliuion
+so woorthie attempts, so much the greatlier to bee esteemed, as before
+neuer enterprised by Englishmen, or at the least so frequented, as at this
+present they are, and may bee, to the great commoditie of our marchants, if
+the same be not hindered by the ambition of such, as for the conquering of
+fortie or fiftie miles here and there, and erecting of certaine fortresses,
+thinke to be Lordes of half the world, enuying that other should enioy the
+commodities, which they themselues cannot wholly possesse. And although
+such as haue bene at charges in the discouering and conquering of such
+landes ought by good reason to haue certaine priuileges, preheminences, and
+tributes for the same, yet (to speake vnder correction) it may seeme
+somewhat rigorous, and agaynst good reason and conscience, or rather
+agaynst the charitie that ought to be among Christian men, that such as
+inuade the dominions of other should not permit other friendly to vse the
+trade of marchandise in places neerer, or seldome frequented of them,
+whereby their trade is not hindered in such places, where they themselues
+haue at their owne election appointed the Martes of their traffike. But
+forasmuch as at this present it is not my intent to accuse or defend,
+approoue or improoue, I will cease to speake any further hereof, and
+proceed to the description of the first voyage, as briefly and faithfully
+as I was aduertised of the same, by the information of such credible
+persons, as made diligent inquisition to know the trueth thereof, as much
+as shall be requisite, omitting to speake of many particular things, not
+greatly necessarie to be knowen: which neuerthelesse, with also the exact
+course of the navigation, shall be more fully declared in the second
+voiage. And if herein fauour or friendship shall perhaps cause some to
+thinke that some haue bene sharply touched, let them lay apart fauour and
+friendship, and giue place to trueth, that honest men may receiue prayse
+for well doing, and lewd persons reproch, as the iust stipend of their
+euill desertes, whereby other may be deterred to doe the like, and vertuous
+men encouraged to proceed in honest attempts.
+
+But that these voyages may be more plainly vnderstood of all men, I haue
+thought good for this purpose, before I intreat hereof, to make a briefe
+description of Africa, being that great part of the world, on whose West
+side beginneth the coast of Guinea at Cabo Verde, about twelue degrees in
+latitude, on this side the Equinoctiall line, and two degrees in longitude
+from the measuring line, so running from the North to the South, and by
+East in some places, within 5, 4, and 3 degrees and a halfe vnto the
+Equinoctiall, and so foorth in maner directly East and by North, for the
+space of 36 degrees or thereabout, in longitude from the West to the East,
+as shall more plainly appeare in the description of the second voyage.
+
+
+A briefe description of Afrike gathered by Richard Eden.
+
+In Africa the lesse are these kingdoms: the kingdom of Tunis and
+Constantina, which is at this day under Tunis, and also the region of
+Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of Afrike is very barren by reason of
+the great deserts, as the deserts of Numidia and Barca. The principall
+ports of the kingdome of Tunis are these: Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia,
+Bona, and Stora. The chiefe cities of Tunis are Constantina and Bona, with
+diuers other. Vnder this kingdom are many Ilands, as Zerbi, Lampadola,
+Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta, where at this present is the
+great master of the Rhodes. Vnder the South of this kingdom are the great
+deserts of Lybia. All the nations in this Africa the lesse are of the sect
+of Mahomet, and a rusticall people, liuing scattred in villages. The best
+of this part of Afrike is Barbaria lying on the coast of the sea
+Mediterraneum.
+
+Mauritania (now called Barbaria) is diuided into two parts, as Mauritania
+Tingitana, and Caesariensis. Mauritania Tingitania is now called the
+kingdom of Fes, and the kingdom of Marocco. The principall citie of Fes
+is called Fessa: and the chiefe citie of Marocco is named Marocco.
+
+Mauritania Caesariensis is at this day called the kingdom of Tremisen, with
+also the citie called Tremisen or Telensin. This region is full of deserts,
+and reacheth to the Sea Mediterraneum, to the citie of Oram, with the port
+of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fes reacheth vnto the Ocean Sea, from the
+West to the citie of Argilla: and the port of the sayd kingdom is called
+Sala.
+
+The kingdom of Marocco is also extended aboue the Ocean Sea, vnto the citie
+of Azamor and Azafi, which are vpon the Ocean Sea, toward the West of the
+sayd kingdom. Nere Mauritania Tingitana (that is to say, by the two
+kingdoms of Fes, and Marocco) are in the Sea, the Ilands of Canarie, called
+in old time, The fortunate Ilands. Toward the south of this region is the
+kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Ialofo, Gambra, and many other regions of
+the Blacke Moores, called Aethiopians or Negros all which are watered with
+the riuer Negro, called in old time Niger. In the sayd regions are no
+cities, but onely certaine lowe cottages made of boughes of trees,
+plastered with chalke, and couered with strawe. In these regions are also
+very great deserts.
+
+The kingdom of Marocco hath vnder it these seuen kingdoms: Hea, Sus,
+Guzula, the territorie of Marrocca, Duccala, Hazchora, and Tedle. The
+kingdom of Fes hath as many: as Fes, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errif, Garet,
+and Elcair. The kingdom of Tremisen hath these regions: Tremisen, Tenez,
+and Elgazair, all which are Machometists. But all the regions of Guinea are
+pure Gentiles, and idolatrous, without profession of any religion, or other
+knowledge of God, then by the law of nature.
+
+Africa the great is one of the three parts of the world, knowen in old
+time, and seuered from Asia, on the East by the riuer Nilus, on the West
+from Europe by the pillars of Hercules. The hither part is now called
+Barbarie, and the people Moores. The inner part is called Lybia and
+Aethiopia. Afrike the lesse is in this wise bounded: On the West it hath
+Numidia; On the East Cyrenaica: On the North, the sea called Mediterraneum.
+In this countrey was the noble city of Carthage.
+
+In the East side of Afrike beneath the red sea, dwelleth the great and
+mighty Emperour and Christian king Prester Iohn, well knowen to the
+Portugales in their voyages to Calicut. His dominions reach very farre on
+euery side: and hath vnder him many other Kings both christian and heathen
+that pay him tribute. This mightie prince is called Dauid the Emperour of
+Aethiopia. Some write that the king of Portugall sendeth him yeerely eight
+ships laden with marchandize. His kingdom confineth with the red Sea, and
+reacheth far into Afrike toward Aegypt and Barbarie. Southward it confineth
+with the Sea toward the Cape de Bona Speranza: and on the other side with
+the sea of sand, called Mare de Sabione, a very dangerous sea lying between
+the great citie of Alcair, or Cairo in Aegypt, and the country of
+Aethiopia: In the which way are many vnhabitable deserts, continuing for
+the space of fiue dayes iourney. And they affirme, that if the sayd
+Christian Emperour were not hindered by those deserts (in the which is
+great lacke of victuals, and especially of water) he would or now haue
+inuaded the kingdom of Egypt, and the citie of Alcair. The chiefe city of
+Ethiopia, where this great emperor is resident, is called Amacaiz, being a
+faire citie, whose inhabitants are of the colour of an Oliue. There are
+also many other cities, as the city of Saua vpon the riuer of Nilus, where
+the Emperour is accustomed to remaine in the Sommer season. There is
+likewise a great city named Barbaregaf, and Ascon, from whence it is said
+that the Queene of Saba came to Hierusalem to heare the wisedom of Salomon.
+This citie is but litle, yet very faire, and one of the chiefe cities in
+Ethiope. In this prouince are many exceeding high mountains, vpon the which
+is said to be the earthly paradise: and some say that there are the trees
+of the Sunne and Moone, whereof the antiquitie maketh mention: yet that
+none can passe thither by reason of great deserts of an hundred daies
+iourney. Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of Bona Speranza. And to
+haue said thus much of Afrike it may suffice.
+
+
+The first voiage to Guinea and Benin.
+
+In the yeere of our Lord 1553. the twelfth day of August, sailed from
+Portsmouth two goodly ships, the Primerose and the Lion, with a pinnas
+called the Moone, being all well furnished aswell with men of the lustiest
+sort, to the number of seuen score, as also with ordinance and victuals
+requisite to such a voiage: hauing also two captaines, the one a stranger
+called Anthonie Anes Pinteado, a Portugall, borne in a towne named The Port
+of Portugall, a wise, discreet, and sober man, who for his cunning in
+sailing, being as well an expert Pilot as a politike captaine, was sometime
+in great fauour with the king of Portugall, and to whom the coasts of
+Brasile and Guinea were committed to be kept from the Frenchmen, to whom he
+was a terrour on the Sea in those parts, and was furthermore a gentleman of
+the king his masters house. But as fortune in maner neuer fauoureth but
+flattereth, neuer promiseth but deceiueth, neuer raiseth but casteth downe
+againe: and as great wealth and fauour haue alwaies companions, emulation
+and enuie, he was after many aduersities and quarels made against him,
+inforced to come into England: where in this golden voyage he was euil
+matched with an vnequal companion, and vnlike match of most sundry
+qualities and conditions, with vertues few or none adorned. Thus departed
+these noble ships vnder saile on their voyage: But first captaine Windam
+putting forth of his ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head
+marchants, and shewing herein a muster of the tragicall partes hee had
+conceiued in his braine, and with such small beginnings nourished so
+monstrous a birth, that more happy, yea and blessed was that yong man being
+left behind, then if he had bene taken with them, as some do wish he had
+done the like by theirs. Thus sailed they on their voyage, vntill they came
+to the Iland of Madera, where they tooke in certaine wines for the store of
+their ships, and paid for them as they agreed of the price. At these Ilands
+they met with a great Galion of the king of Portugall, full of men and
+ordinance: yet such as could not haue preuailed if it had attempted to
+withstand or resist our ships, for the which cause it was set foorth, not
+onely to let and interrupt these our shippes of their purposed voiage, but
+al other that should attempt the like: yet chiefly to frustrate our voiage.
+For the king of Portugall was sinisterly informed, that our ships were
+armed to his castle of Mina in those parties, whereas nothing lesse was
+ment.
+
+After that our ships departed from the Iland of Madera forward on their
+voiage, began this worthy captaine Pinteados sorow, as a man tormented with
+the company of a terrible Hydra, who hitherto flattred with him, and made
+him a faire countenance and shew of loue. Then did he take vpon him to
+command all alone, setting nought both by captain Pinteado, and the rest of
+the marchants factors, sometimes with opprobrious words, and sometimes with
+threatnings most shamfully abusing them, taking from Pinteado the seruice
+of the boies and certain mariners that were assigned him by the order and
+direction of the worshipful merchants, and leauing him as a common mariner,
+which is the greatest despite and grief that can be to a Portugale or
+Spaniard, to be diminished of their honor, which they esteem aboue all
+riches. Thus sailing forward on their voiage, they came to the Ilands of
+Canarie, continuing their course from thence vntil they arriued at the
+Iland of S. Nicholas, where they victualled themselues with fresh meat, of
+the flesh of wild goats, whereof is great plenty in that Iland, and in
+maner of nothing els. From hence following on their course and tarying here
+and there at the desert Ilands in the way, because they would not come too
+timely to the countrey of Guinea for the heat, and tarying somewhat too
+long (for what can be well ministred in a common wealth, where inequalitie
+with tyrannie wil rule alone) they came at the length to the first land of
+the country of Guinea, where they fel with the great riuer of Sesto, where
+they might for their marchandizes haue laden their ships with the graines
+of that countrey, which is a very hote fruit, and much like vnto a fig as
+it groweth on the tree. For as the figs are full of small seeds, so is the
+said fruit full of graines, which are loose within the cod, hauing in the
+mids thereof a hole on euery side. This kind of spice is much vsed in cold
+countries, and may there be sold for great aduantage, for exchange of other
+wares. But our men, by the perswasion or rather inforcement of this
+tragicall captaine, not regarding and setting light by that commoditie, in
+comparison of the fine gold they thirsted, sailed an hundred leagues
+further, vntil they came to the golden land: where not attempting to come
+neere the castle pertaining to the king of Portugall, which was within the
+riuer of Mina, they made sale of their ware only on this side and beyond
+it, for the gold of that country, to the quantitie of an hundred and fiftie
+pounds weight, there being in case that they might haue dispatched all
+their ware for gold, if the vntame braine of Windam had, or could haue
+given eare to the counsell and experience of Pinteado. For when that Windam
+not satisfied with the gold which he had, and more might haue had if he had
+taried about the Mina, commanding the said Pinteado (for so he tooke vpon
+him) to lead the ships to Benin, being vnder the Equinoctial line, and an
+hundred and fifty leagues beyond the Mina, where he looked to haue their
+ships laden with pepper: and being counselled of the said Pinteado,
+considering the late time of the yeere, for that time to go no further, but
+to make sale of their wares such as they had for gold, wherby they might
+haue bene great gainers: Windam not assenting hereunto, fell into a sudden
+rage, reuiling the sayd Pinteado, calling him Iew, with other opprobrious
+words, saying, This whoreson Iew hath promised to bring vs to such places
+as are not, or as he cannot bring vs vnto: but if he do not, I will cut off
+his eares and naile them to the maste. Pinteado gaue the foresaid counsell
+to go no further for the safegard of the men and their liues, which they
+should put in danger if they came too late, for the Rossia which is their
+Winter, not for cold, but for smothering heate, with close and cloudie aire
+and storming weather, of such putrifying qualitie, that it rotted the
+coates of their backs: or els for comming to soone for the scorching heat
+of the sunne, which caused them to linger in the way. [Sidenote: The king
+of Benin his court.] But of force and not of will brought he the ships
+before the riuer of Benin, where riding at an Anker, they sent their pinnas
+vp into the riuer 50 or 60 leagues, from whence certaine of the marchants
+with captaine Pinteado, Francisco, a Portugale, Nicholas Lambert gentleman,
+and other marchants were conducted to the court where the king remained,
+ten leagues from the riuer side, whither when they came, they were brought
+with a great company to the presence of the king, who being a blacke Moore
+(although not so blacke as the rest) sate in a great huge hall, long and
+wide, the wals made of earth without windowes, the roofe of thin boords,
+open in sundry places, like vnto louers to let in the aire.
+
+And here to speake of the great reuerence they giue to their king, it is
+such, that if we would giue as much to our Sauior Christ, we should remooue
+from our heads many plagues which we daily deserue for our contempt and
+impietie.
+
+So it is therefore, that when his noble men are in his presence, they neuer
+looke him in the face, but sit cowring, as we vpon our knees, so they vpon
+their buttocks, with their elbowes vpon their knees, and their hands before
+their faces, not looking vp vntil the king command them. And when they are
+comming toward the king, as far as they do see him, they do shew such
+reuerence, sitting on the ground with their faces couered as before.
+Likewise when they depart from him, they turn not their backs toward him,
+but goe creeping backward with like reuerence.
+
+[Sidenote: The communication between the king of Benin and our men.] And
+now to speake somewhat of the communication that was between the king and
+our men, you shall first vnderstand that he himselfe could speake the
+Portugall tongue, which he had learned of a child. Therefore after he had
+commanded our men to stand vp, and demanded of them the cause of their
+comming into that countrey, they answered by Pinteado, that they were
+marchants trauelling into those parties for the commodities of his
+countrey, for exchange of wares which they had brought from their
+countries, being such as should be no lesse commodious for him and his
+people. The king then hauing of old lying in a certaine store house 30 or
+40 kintals of Pepper (euery kintall being an hundred weight) willed them to
+looke vpon the same, and againe to bring him a sight of such marchandizes
+as they had brought with them. [Sidenote: The kings gentlenes towards our
+men. ] And thereupon sent with the captaine and the marchants certaine of
+his men to conduct them to the waters side, with other to bring the ware
+from the pinnas to the court. Who when they were returned and the wares
+seen, the king grew to this ende with the merchants to prouide in 30 dayes
+the lading of al their ships with pepper. And in case their merchandizes
+would not extend to the value of so much pepper, he promised to credite
+them to their next returne, and thereupon sent the country round about to
+gather pepper, causing the same to be brought to the court: So that within
+the space of 30 dayes they had gathered fourescore tunne of pepper.
+
+In the meane season our men partly hauing no rule of themselues, but eating
+without measure of the fruits of the countrey, and drinking the wine of the
+Palme trees that droppeth in the night from the cut of the branches of the
+same, and in such extreme heate running continually into the water, and
+vsed before to such sudden and vehement alterations (then the which nothing
+is more dangerous) were thereby brought into swellings and agues: insomuch
+that the later time of the yeere comming on, caused them to die sometimes
+three and sometimes 4 or 5 in a day. Then Windam perceiuing the time of the
+30 daies to be expired, and his men dying so fast, sent to the court in
+post to Captaine Pinteado, and the rest to come away and to tary no longer.
+But Pinteado with the rest, wrote backe to him againe, certifying him of
+the great quantity of pepper they had alreadie gathered, and looked daily
+for much more: desiring him furthermore to remember the great praise and
+name they should win, if they came home prosperously, and what shame of the
+contrary. With which answere Windam not satisfied, and many of their men
+dying dayly, willed and commaunded them againe either to come away
+forthwith, or els threatened to leaue them behinde. When Pinteado heard
+this answere, thinking to perswade him with reason, hee tooke his way from
+the court toward the ships, being conducted thither with men by the kings
+commandement.
+
+[Sidenote: The Death of Windham.] In the meane season Windam all raging,
+brake vp Pinteados Cabin, brake open his chestes, spoiled such prouision of
+cold stilled waters and suckets as he had prouided for his health, and left
+him nothing, neither of his instruments to saile by, nor yet of his
+apparell: and in the meane time falling sicke, himselfe died also. Whose
+death Pinteado comming aboord, lamented as much as if he had bene the
+deerest friend he had in the world. [Sidenote: Pinteado euill vsed of the
+mariners.] But certaine of the mariners and other officers did spit in his
+face, some calling him Iewe, saying that he had brought them thither to
+kill them: and some drawing their swords at him, making a shew to slay him.
+Then he perceiuing that they would needs away, desired them to tarry that
+he might fetch the rest of the marchants that were left at the court, but
+they would not grant this request. Then desired he them to giue him the
+ship-boate, with as much of an old saile as might serue for the same,
+promising them therwith to bring Nicholas Lambert and the rest into
+England, but all was in vaine. [Sidenote: This Lambert was a Londiner
+borne, whose father had bin Lord Maior of London.] Then wrote he a letter
+to the court to the marchants, informing them of all the matter, and
+promising them if God would lend him life to returne with all haste to
+fetch them. And thus was Pinteado kept ashipboord against his will, thrust
+among the boyes of the ship, not vsed like a man, nor yet like an honest
+boy, but glad to find fauour at the cookes hand. Then departed they,
+leauing one of their ships behind them, which they sunke for lacke of men
+to cary her. [Sidenote: The death of Pinteado.] After this, within 6 or 7
+dayes sayling, dyed also Pinteado for uery pensiuenesse and thought that
+stroke him to the heart. A man worthy to serue any prince, and most vilely
+vsed. And of seuenscore men came home to Plimmouth scarcely forty, and of
+them many died. [Sidenote: Pinteado first perswaded our men to the voiage
+of Guinea.] And that no man should suspect these words which I haue saide
+in commendation of Pinteado, to be spoken vpon fauour otherwise then
+trueth, I haue thought good to adde hereunto the copie of the letters which
+the king of Portugall and the infant his brother wrote vnto him to
+reconcile him, at such time as vpon the king his masters displeasure (and
+not for any other crime or offence, as may appeare by the said letters) he
+was only for pouertie inforced to come into England, where he first
+perswaded our marchants to attempt the said voyages to Guinea. But as the
+king of Portugall too late repented him that he had so punished Pinteado,
+vpon malicious informations of such as enuied the mans good fortune: euen
+so may it hereby appeare that in some cases euen Lions themselues may
+either be hindered by the contempt, or aided by the helpe of the poore
+mise, according vnto the fable of Esope.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The copie of Anthonie Anes Pinteado his letters patents, whereby the king
+  of Portugall made him knight of his house, after all his troubles and
+  imprisonment, which, by wrong information made to the king, he had
+  susteined of long time, being at the last deliuered, his cause knowen and
+  manifested to the king by a gray Friar the kings Confessor.
+
+[Sidenote: Seven hundred reis are ten shillings. Alcayre is halfe a
+bushell.] I the king doe giue you to vnderstand lord Francis Desseaso, one
+of my counsell and ouerseer of my house, that in consideration of the good
+seruice which Anthony Anes Pinteado, the sonne of Iohn Anes, dwelling in
+the towne called the Port, hath done vnto me, my will and pleasure is, to
+make him knight of my house, allowing to him in Pension seuen hundred reis
+monethly, and euery day one alcayre of barly, as long as he keepeth a
+horse, and to be paid according to the ordinance of my house. Prouiding
+alwaies that he shall receiue but one marriage gift. And this also in such
+condition, that the time which is accepted in our ordinance, forbidding
+such men to marry for getting such children as might succeede them in this
+allowance, which is 6 yeres after the making of this patent, shalbe first
+expired before he do marry. I therfore command you to cause this to be
+entred in the booke called the Matricula of our houshold, vnder the title
+of knights. And when it is so entred, let the clarke of the Matricula, for
+the certeintie therof, write on the backside of this Aluala, or patent, the
+number of the leafe wherein this our grant is entred. Which done, let him
+returne this writing vnto the said Anthonie Anes Pinteado for his warrant.
+
+I Diego Henriques haue written this in Almarin the two and twentie day of
+September, in the yeere of our Lord 1551. And this beneuolence the king
+gaue vnto Anthonie Anes Pinteado, the fiue and twentie day of Iuly this
+present yeere.
+
+Rey.
+
+
+The Secretaries declaration written vnder the kings grant.
+
+Your Maiestie hath vouchsafed, in respect and consideration of the good
+seruice of Anthonie Anes Pinteado, dwelling in the port, and sonne of Iohn
+Anes, to make him knight of your house, with ordinarie allowance, of seuen
+hundred reis pension by the moneth, and one alcaire of barley by the day,
+as long as he keepeth a horse: and to be paide according to the ordinance
+of your house, with condition that hee shall haue but one marriage gift:
+and that not within the space of sixe yeres after the making of these
+letters Patents. The Secretaries note. Entred in the booke of the
+Matricula. Fol. 683.
+
+Francisco de Siquera.
+
+
+The copie of the letter of Don Lewes the infant, and brother to the king of
+  Portugall, sent into England to Anthonie Anes Pinteado.
+
+Anthony Anes Pinteado, I the infant brother to the king, haue me heartily
+commended vnto you. Peter Gonsalues is gone to seeke you, desiring to bring
+you home againe into your countrey. And for that purpose he hath with him a
+safe conduct for you, granted by the king, that therby you may freely and
+without all feare come home. And although the weather be foule and stormie,
+yet faile not to come: for in the time that his Maiestie hath giuen you,
+you may doe many things to your contentation and gratifying the king,
+whereof I would be right glad: and to bring the same to passe, I will do
+all that lieth in me for your profite. But forasmuch as Peter Gonsalues
+will make further declaration hereof vnto you, I say no more at this
+present. Written in Lisbone, the eight day of December. Anno 1552.
+
+The infant Don Lewes.
+
+
+All these foresaid writings I saw vnder seale, in the house of my friend
+Nicholas Liese, with whom Pinteado left them, at his vnfortunate departing
+to Guinea. But, notwithstanding all these friendly letters and faire
+promises, Pinteado durst not attempt to goe home, neither to keepe companie
+with the Portugals his countrey men, without the presence of other:
+forasmuch as he had secrete admonitions that they intended to slay him, if
+time and place might haue serued their wicked intent.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Guinea set out by Sir George Barne, Sir Iohn Yorke,
+  Thomas Lok, Anthonie Hickman and Edward Castelin, in the yere 1554. The
+  Captaine whereof was M. Iohn Lok.
+
+As in the first voiage I haue declared rather the order of the history,
+then the course of the nauigation, whereof at that time I could haue no
+perfect information: so in the description of this second voyage, my chiefe
+intent hath beene to shew the course of the same, according to the
+obseruation and ordinarie custome of the mariners, and as I receiued it at
+the handes of an expert Pilot, being one of the chiefe in this voyage, who
+also with his owne handes wrote a briefe declaration of the same, as he
+found and tried all things, not by coniecture, but by the art of sayling,
+and instruments perteining to the mariners facultie. Not therefore assuming
+to my selfe the commendations due vnto other, neither so bold as in any
+part to change or otherwise dispose the order of this voyage so well
+obserued by art and experience, I haue thought good to set forth the same,
+in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly vsed among them, and as I
+receiued it of the said Pilot, as I haue said. Take it therefore as
+followeth.
+
+[Sidenote: Robert Gainsh was master of the Iohn Euangelist.] In the yeere
+of our Lord 1554 the eleuenth day of October, we departed the riuer of
+Thames with three goodly ships, the one called the Trinitie, a ship of the
+burden of seuenscore tunne, the other called the Bartholomew, a ship of the
+burden of ninetie, the third was the Iohn Euangelist, a ship of seuen score
+tunne. With the sayd ships and two pinnesses (wherof the one was drowned on
+the coast of England) we went forward on our voyage, and stayed at Douer
+fourteene dayes. We staied also at Rie three or foure dayes. Moreouer last
+of all we touched at Dartmouth.
+
+The first day of Nouember at nine of the clocke at night, departing from
+the coast of England, we set off the Start, bearing Southwest all that
+night in the sea, and the next day all day, and the next night after,
+vntill the third day of the said moneth about noone, making our way good,
+did runne threescore leagues.
+
+The 17. day in the morning we had sight of the Ile of Madera, which doth
+rise to him that commeth in the Northnortheast part vpright land in the
+west part of it, and very high: and to the Southsoutheast a low long land,
+and a long point, with a saddle thorow the middest of it, standing in two
+and thirtie degrees: and in the West part, many springs of water running
+downe from the mountaine, and many white fieldes like vnto corne fields,
+and some white houses to the Southeast part of it: and the toppe of the
+mountaine sheweth very ragged, if you may see it, and in the Northeast part
+there is a bight or bay as though it were a harborow: Also in the said
+part, there is a rocke a little distance from the shoare, and ouer the sayd
+bight you shall see a great gappe in the mountaine.
+
+The 19 day at twelue of the clocke we had sight of the isle of Palmes and
+Teneriffa and the Canaries. The Ile of Palme riseth round, and lieth
+Southeast and Northwest, and the Northwest part is lowest. In the South is
+a round hill ouer the head land, and another round hill aboue that in the
+land. There are between the Southeast part of the Ile of Madera and the
+Northwest part of the Ile of Palme seuen and fifty leagues. This Isle of
+Palme lieth in eight and twenty degrees. And our course from Madera to the
+Ile of Palme was South and South and by West, so that we had sight of
+Teneriffa and of the Canaries. The Southeast part of the Ile of the Palme,
+and the Northnortheast of Teneriffa lie Southeast and Northwest, and
+betweene them are 20 leagues. Teneriffa and the great Canary called Gran
+Canaria, and the West part of Forteuentura stande in seuen and twenty
+degrees and a halfe. Gomera is a faire Island but very ragged, and lieth
+Westsouthwest off Teneriffa. And whosouer wil come betweene them two Ilands
+must come South and by East, and in the South part of Gomera is a towne and
+a good rode in the said part of the Iland: and it standeth in seuen and
+twentie degrees and three terces. Teneriffa is an high land, with a great
+high pike like a sugar loafe, and vpon the said pike is snow throughout all
+the whole yeere. And by reason of that pike it may be knowen aboue all
+other Ilands, and there we were becalmed the twentieth day of Nouember,
+from sixe of the clocke in the morning, vntill foure of the clocke at
+afternoone.
+
+The two and twentieth day of Nouember, vnder the Tropike of Cancer the
+Sunne goeth downe West and by South. Vpon the coast of Barbarie fiue and
+twentie leagues by North Cape blanke, at three leagues off the maine, there
+are fifteene fadomes and good shelly ground, and sande among and no
+streames, and two small Ilands standing in two and twentie degrees and a
+terce.
+
+From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is an hundred leagues, and our course was
+South and by East. The said Cape standeth in two and twentie and a halfe:
+and all that coast is flatte, sixteene or seuenteene fadome deepe. Seuen or
+eight leagues off from the riuer del Oro or Cape de las Barbas, there vse
+many Spaniardes and Portugals to trade for fishing, during the moneth of
+Nouember: and all that coast is very low lands. Also we went from Cape de
+las Barbas Southsouthwest, and Southwest and by South, till we brought our
+selues in twentie degrees and a halfe, reckoning our selues seuen leagues
+off: and there were the least sholes of Cape Blanke.
+
+Then we went South vntil we brought our selues in 13 degrees, reckoning our
+selues fiue and twentie leagues off. And in 15 degrees we did reare the
+Crossiers, and we might haue reared them sooner if we had looked for them.
+They are not right a crosse in the moneth of Nouember, by reason that the
+nights are short there. Neuertheless we had the sight of them the 29 day of
+the said moneth at night.
+
+The first of December, being in 13 degrees we set our course South and by
+East, vntill the fourth day of December at 12 of the clocke the same day.
+Then we were in nine degrees and a terce, rekoning our selues 30 leagues of
+the sholes of the riuer called Rio Grande, being Westsouthwest off them,
+the which sholes be 30 leagues long.
+
+The fourth of December we beganne to set our course Southeast, we being in
+sixe degrees and a halfe.
+
+The ninth day of December we set our course Eastsoutheast: the fourteenth
+day of the sayde moneth we set our course East, we being in fiue degrees
+and a halfe, reckoning our selues thirty and sixe leagues from the coast of
+Guinea.
+
+The nineteenth of the said moneth we set our course East and by North,
+reckoning our selues seuenteene leagues distant from Cape Mensurado, the
+said Cape being Eastnortheast of vs, and the riuer of Sesto being East.
+
+The one and twentieth day of the said moneth, we fell with Cape Mensurado
+to the Southeast, about two leagues off. This Cape may be easily knowen, by
+reason yet the rising of it is like a Porpose-head. Also toward the
+Southeast there are three trees, whereof the Eastermost tree is the
+highest, and the middlemost is like a hie stacke, and the Southermost like
+vnto a gibet: and vpon the maine are foure or fiue high hilles rising one
+after another like round hommocks or hillocks. And the Southeast of the
+three trees, brandiernwise: and all the coast along is white sand. The said
+Cape standeth within a litle in sixe degrees.
+
+The two and twentieth of December we came to the riuer of Sesto, and
+remained there vntill the nine and twentieth day of the said moneth. Here
+we thought it best to send before vs the pinnesse to the riuer Dulce,
+called Rio Dulce, that they might haue the beginning of the market before
+the comming of the Iohn Euangelist.
+
+At the riuer of Sesto we had a tunne of graines. This riuer standeth in
+sixe degrees, lacking a terce. From the riuer of Sesto to Rio Dulce are
+fiue and twentie leagues. Rio Dulce standeth in fiue degrees and a halfe.
+The river of Sesto is easie to be knowen, by reason there is a ledge of
+rockes on the Southeast part of the Rode. And at the entring into the hauen
+are fiue or sixe trees that beare no leaues. The is a good harborow, but
+very narow at the entrance into the riuer. There is also a rocke in the
+hauens mouth right as you enter. And all that coast betweene Cape de Monte,
+and cape de las Palmas, lieth Southeast and by East, Northwest and by West,
+being three leagues off the shore. And you shal haue in some places rocks
+two leagues off: and that, betweene the riuer of Sesto and cape de las
+Palmas.
+
+Betweene the riuer of Sesto and the riuer Dulce are fiue and twentie
+leagues: and the high land that is betweene them both, is called Cakeado,
+being eight leagues from the riuer of Sesto. And to the Southeastwarde of
+it is a place called Shawgro, and another called Shyawe or Shauo, where you
+may get fresh water. Off this Shyawe lieth a ledge of rockes: and to the
+Southeastwarde lieth a hedland called Croke. Betweene Cakeado and Croke are
+nine or ten leagues. To the Southeastward off, is a harborow called S.
+Vincent: Right ouer against S. Vincent is a rocke vnder the water two
+leagues and a halfe off the shore. To the Southeastward of that rocke you
+shal see an island about three or foure leagues off: this island is not
+past a league off the shore. To the Eastsoutheast of the island, is a rocke
+that lieth aboue the water, and by that rocke goeth in the riuer Dulce,
+which you shall know by the said riuer and rocke. The Northwest side of the
+hauen is flat sand, and the Southeast side thereof is like an Island, and a
+bare plot without any trees, and so is it not in any other place.
+
+In the Rode you shall ride in thirteene or foureteene fadomes, good oaze
+and sand, being the markes of the Rode to bring the Island and the
+Northeast land together, and here we ankered the last of December.
+
+The third day of Ianuarie, we came from the riuer Dulce.
+
+Note that Cape de las Palmas is a faire high land, but some low places
+thereof by the water side looke like red cliffes with white strakes like
+hie wayes, a cable length a piece, and this is the East part of the cape.
+This cape is the Southermost land in all the coast of Guinea, and standeth
+in foure degrees and a terce.
+
+The coast from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes, or de Tres Puntas, is
+faire and cleare without rocke or other danger.
+
+Twentie and fiue leagues from Cape de las Palmas, the land is higher then
+in any place, vntill we come to Cape Trepointes: And about ten leagues
+before you come to Cape Trepointes, the land riseth still higher and
+higher, vntill you come to Cape Trepointes. Also before you come to the
+said Cape, after other 5 leagues to the Northwest part of it, there is
+certaine broken ground, with two great rockes, and within them in the bight
+of a bay, is a castle called Arra, perteining to the king of Portugall. You
+shall know it by the said rockes that lie off it: for there is none such
+from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes. This coast lieth East and by
+North, West and by South. From Cape de las Palmas to the said castle is
+fourescore and fifteene leagues. And the coast lieth from the said castle
+to the Westermost point of Trepoyntes, Southeast and by South, Northwest
+and by North. Also the Westermost point of Trepoyntes is a low lande, lying
+halfe a mile out in the sea: and vpon the innermost necke, to the
+land-ward, is a tuft of trees, and there we arriued the eleuenth day of
+Ianuary.
+
+The 12 day of Ianuary we came to a towne called Samma or Samua, being 8
+leagues from Cape Trepointes toward Eastnortheast. Betweene Cape Trepointes
+and the towne of Samua is a great ledge of rockes a great way out in the
+sea. [Sidenote: The pledge was sir Iohn Yorke his Nephew.] We continued
+foure dayes at that Towne, and the Captaine thereof would needs haue a
+pledge a shore. But when they receiued the pledge, they kept him still, and
+would trafficke no more, but shot off their ordinance at vs. They haue two
+or three pieces of ordinance and no more.
+
+The sixteenth day of the said month we made reckoning to come to a place
+called Cape Corea, where captaine Don Iohn dwelleth, whose men entertained
+vs friendly. This Cape Corea is foure leagues Eastwarde of the castle of
+Mina, otherwise called La mina, or Castello de mina, where we arriued the
+18 day of the month. [Sidenote: The castle of Mina perteining to the king
+of Portugall.] Here we made sale of all our cloth, sauing two or three
+packes.
+
+The 26 day of the same moneth we weighed anker, and departed from thence to
+the Trinitie, which was seuen leagues Eastward of vs, where she solde her
+wares. Then they of the Trinitie willed vs to go Eastward of that eight or
+nine leagues, to sell part of their wares, in a place called Perecow, and
+another place named Perecow Grande, being the Eastermost place of both
+these, which you shal know by a great round hill neere vnto it, named Monte
+Rodondo, lying Westward from it, and by the water side are many high palme
+trees. From hence did we set forth homeward the thirteenth day of February,
+and plied vp alongst till we came within seuen or eight leagues to Cape
+Trepointes. About eight of the clocke the 15 day at afternoone, wee did
+cast about to seaward: and beware of the currants, for they will deceiue
+you sore. Whosoeuer shall come from the coast of Mina homeward, let him be
+sure to make his way good West, vntill he reckon himselfe as farre as Cape
+de las Palmas, where the currant setteth alwayes to the Eastward. And
+within twentie leagues Eastward of Cape de las Palmas is a riuer called De
+los Potos, where you may haue fresh water and balast enough, and plenty of
+iuory or Elephants teeth. This riuer standeth in foure degrees, and almost
+two terces. [Sidenote: Cabo de las Palmas.] And when you reckon your selfe
+as farre shot as Cape de las Palmas, being in a degree, or a degree and a
+halfe, you may go West, and West by North, vntill you come in three
+degrees: and then you may go Westnorthwest, and Northwest and by West,
+vntill you come in fiue degrees, and then Northwest. And in sixe degrees,
+we met Northerly windes, and great ruffling of tides. And as we could
+iudge, the currants went to the Northnorthwest. Furthermore betweene Cape
+de Monte, and Cape Verde, go great currants, which deceiue many men.
+
+The 22 day of Aprill, we were in 8 degrees and two terces: and so we ran to
+the Northwest, hauing the winde at Northeast and Eastnortheast, and
+sometimes at East, vntill we were at 18 degrees and a terce, which was on
+May day. And so from 18 and two terces, we had the winde at East and
+Eastnortheast, and sometimes at Eastsoutheast: and then we reckoned the
+Island of Cape verde Eastsoutheast of vs, we iudging our selues to be 48
+leagues off. And in 20 and 21 degrees, we had the winde more Easterly to
+the Southward then before. And so we ran to the Northwest and
+Northnorthwest, and sometimes North and by West and North, until we came
+into 31 degrees, where we reckoned our selues a hundred and fourescore
+leagues Southwest and by South of the Island de los Flores, and there wee
+met with the winde at Southsoutheast, and set our course Northeast.
+
+In 23 degrees we had the winde at the South and Southwest, and then we set
+our course Northnortheast, and so we ran to 40 degrees, and then we set our
+course Northeast, the winde being at the Southwest, and hauing the Ile de
+Flores East of us, and 17 leagues off.
+
+In the 41 degrees we met with the winde at Northeast, and so we ran
+Northwestward, then we met with the winde Westnorthwest, and at the West
+within 6 leagues, running toward the Northwest, and then we cast about, and
+lay Northeast, vntill we came in 42 degrees, where we set our course
+Eastnortheast, iudging the Ile of Coruo South and by West of vs, and sixe
+and thirty leagues distant from vs.
+
+A remembrance, that the 21st day of May we communed with Iohn Rafe, and he
+thought it best to goe Northeast, and iudged himselfe 25 leagues Eastward
+to the Isle de Flores, and in 39 degrees and a halfe.
+
+Note, that on the fourth day of September, vnder nine degrees, we lost the
+sight of the North starre.
+
+Note also, that in 45 degrees, the compasse is varied 8 degrees to the
+West.
+
+Item, in 40 degrees the compasse did varie 15 degrees in the whole.
+
+Item, in 30 degrees and a halfe, the compasse is varied 5 degrees to the
+West.
+
+Be it also in memory that two or three daies before we came to Cape de 3
+puntas, the pinnesse went alongst the shore, thinking to sell some of our
+wares, and so we came to anker three or foure leagues West and by South of
+the Cape de 3 puntas, where we left the Trinitie.
+
+Then our pinnesse came aboord with all our men, the pinnesse also tooke in
+more wares. They told me moreouer that they would goe to a place where the
+Primrose was, and had receiued much gold at the first voyage to these
+parties, and tolde me furthermore that it was a good place: but I fearing a
+brigantine that was then vpon the coast, did wey and follow them, and left
+the Trinitie about foure leagues off from vs, and there we rode against
+that towne foure dayes: so that Martine by his owne desire, and assent of
+some of the Commissioners that were in the pinnesse, went a shoare to the
+towne, and there Iohn Berin went to trafique from vs, being three miles off
+trafiquing at an other towne. The towne is called Samma or Samua, for Samma
+and Sammaterra, are the names of the two first townes, where we did
+trafique for gold, to the Northeast of Cape de 3 puntas.
+
+Hitherto continueth the course of the voyage, as it was described by the
+sayde Pilot. Nowe therefore I will speake somewhat of the countrey and
+people, and of such things as are brought from thence.
+
+They brought from thence at the last voyage foure hundred pound weight and
+odde of gold, of two and twentie carrats and one graine in finenesse: also
+sixe and thirtie buts of graines, and about two hundred and fiftie
+Elephants teeth of all quantities. Of these I saw and measured, some of
+nine spans in length, as they were crooked. Some of them were as bigge as a
+mans thigh aboue the knee, and weyed about fourescore and ten pound weight
+a peece. They say that some one hath bin seene of an hundred and fiue and
+twentie pound weight. Other there were which they call the teeth of calues,
+of one or two or three yeeres, whereof some were a foot and a halfe, some
+two foot, and some 3 or more, according to the age of the beast. These
+great teeth or tusks grow in the vpper iaw downeward, and not in the nether
+iaw vpward, wherein the Painters and Arras workers are deceiued. At this
+last voyage was brought from Guinea the head of an Elephant, of such huge
+bignesse, that onely the bones or cranew thereof, beside the nether iaw and
+great tusks, weighed about two hundred weight, and was as much as I could
+well lift from the ground: insomuch that considering also herewith the
+weight of two such great teeth, the nether iaw with the lesse teeth, the
+tongue, the great hanging eares, the bigge and long snout or troonke, with
+all the flesh, braines, and skinne, with all other parts belonging to the
+whole head, in my iudgement it could weigh litle lesse then fiue hundred
+weight. [Sidenote: Sir Andrew Iudde. The contemplation of Gods works.] This
+head diuers haue seene in the house of the worthy marchant sir Andrew
+Iudde, where also I saw it, and beheld it, not only with my bodily eyes,
+but much more with the eye of my mind and spirit, considering by the worke,
+the cunning and wisedome of the workemaister: without which consideration,
+the sight of such strange and wonderfull things may rather seeme
+curiosities, then profitable contemplations.
+
+[Sidenote: The decription and properties of the Elephant.] The Elephant
+(which some call an Oliphant) is the biggest of all foure footed beasts,
+his forelegs are longer then his hinder, he hath ancles in the lower part
+of his hinder legges, and fiue toes on his feete vndiuided, his snout or
+tronke is so long, and in such forme, that it is to him in the stead of a
+hand: for he neither eateth nor drinketh but by bringing his tronke to his
+mouth, therewith he helpeth vp his Master or keeper, therewith he
+ouerthroweth trees. Beside his two great tusks, he hath on euery side of
+his mouth foure teeth, wherewith he eateth and grindeth his meate: either
+of these teeth are almost a span in length, as they grow along in the iaw,
+and are about two inches in height, and almost as much in thicknesse. The
+tuskes of the male are greater then of the female: his tongue is very
+litle, and so farre in his mouth, that it cannot be seene: of all beastes
+they are most gentle and tractable, for by many sundry wayes they are
+taught, and doe vnderstand: insomuch that they learne to doe due honor to a
+king, and are quick sense and sharpenesse of wit. When the male hath once
+seasoned the female, he neuer after toucheth her. The male Elephant liueth
+two hundreth yeeres, or at the least one hundred and twentie: the female
+almost as long, but the floure of their age is but threescore yeres, as
+some write. They cannot suffer winter or cold: they loue riuers, and will
+often go into them vp to the snout, wherewith they blow and snuffe, and
+play in the water: but swimme they cannot, for the weight of their bodies.
+Plinie and Soline write, that they vse none adulterie. If they happen to
+meete with a man in wildernesse being out of the way, gently they wil go
+before him, and bring him into the plaine way. Ioyned in battel, they haue
+no small respect vnto them that be wounded: for they bring them that are
+hurt or weary into the middle of the army to be defended: they are made
+tame by drinking the iuise of barley. [Sidenote: Debate between the
+Elephant and the Dragon.] They haue continual warre against Dragons, which
+desire their blood, because it is very cold: and therefore the Dragon lying
+awaite as the Elephant passeth by, windeth his taile (being of exceeding
+length) about the hinder legs of the Elephant, and so staying him,
+thrusteth his head into his tronke and exhausteth his breath, or else
+biteth him in the eare, whereunto he cannot reach with his tronke, and when
+the Elephant waxeth faint, he falleth downe on the serpent, being now full
+of blood, and with the poise of his body breaketh him: so that his owne
+blood with the blood of the Elephant runneth out of him mingled together,
+which being colde, is congealed into that substance which the Apothecaries
+call Sanguis Draconis, (that is) Dragons blood, otherwise called
+Cinnabaris, although there be an other kinde of Cinnabaris, commonly called
+Cinoper or Vermilion, which the Painters vse in certaine colours.
+
+[Sidenote: Three kinds of Elephants.] They are also of three kinds, as of
+the Marshes, the plaines, and the mountaines, no lesse differing in
+conditions. Philostratus writeth, that as much as the Elephant of Libya in
+bignes passeth the horse of Nysea, so much doe the Elephants of India
+exceed them of Libya: for the Elephants of India, some haue bene seene of
+the height of nine cubits: the other do so greatly feare these, that they
+dare not abide the sight of them. Of the Indian Elephants onely the males
+haue tuskes, but of them of Ethiopia and Libya both kindes are tusked: they
+are of diuers heights, as of twelue, thirteene, and fourteene dodrants,
+euery dodrant being a measure of nine inches. Some write that an Elephant
+is bigger then three wilde Oxen or Buffes. They of India are black, or of
+the colour of a mouse, but they of Ethiope or Guinea are browne: the hide
+or skinne of them all is very hard, and without haire or bristles: their
+eares are two dodrants broad, and their eyes very litle. Our men saw one
+drinking at a riuer in Guinea, as they sailed into the land.
+
+Of other properties and conditions of the Elephant, as of their marueilous
+docilitie, of their fight and vse in the warres, of their generation and
+chastitie, when they were first seene in the Theatres and triumphes of the
+Romanes, how they are taken and tamed, and when they cast their tusks, with
+the vse of the same in medicine, who so desireth to know, let him reade
+Plinie, in the eight booke of his naturall history. He also writeth in his
+twelft booke, that in olde time they made many goodly workes of iuory or
+Elephants teeth: as tables, tressels, postes of houses, railes, lattesses
+for windowes, images of their gods, and diuers other things of iuory, both
+coloured, and vncoloured, and intermixt with sundry kindes of precious
+woods, as at this day are made certaine chaires, lutes, and virginals. They
+had such plenty thereof in olde time, that (as far as I remember) Iosephus
+writeth, that one of the gates of Hierusalem was called Porta Eburnea,
+(that is) the Iuory gate. The whitenesse thereof was so much esteemed, that
+it was thought to represent the natural fairenesse of mans skinne: insomuch
+that such as went about to set foorth (or rather corrupt) naturall beautie
+with colours and painting, were reproued by this prouerbe, Ebur atramento
+candefacere, that is, To make iuory white with inke. The Poets also
+describing the faire necks of beautifull virgins, call them Eburnea colla,
+that is, Iuory necks. And to haue said thus much of Elephants and Iuory, it
+may suffice.
+
+[Sidenote: The people of Africa.] Now therefore I will speake somewhat of
+the people and their maners, and maner of liuing, with an other briefe
+description of Africa also. It is to be vnderstood, that the people which
+now inhabite the regions of the coast of Guinea, and the midle parts of
+Africa, as Libya the inner, and Nubia, with diuers other great and large
+regions about the same, were in old time called AEthiopes and Nigritae,
+which we now call Moores, Moorens, or Negroes, a people of beastly liuing,
+without a God, lawe, religion, or common wealth, and so scorched and vexed
+with the heat of the sunne, that in many places they curse it when it
+riseth. Of the regions and people about the inner Libya (called Libya
+interior) Gemma Phrysius writeth thus.
+
+Libya interior is very large and desolate, in the which are many horrible
+wildernesses and mountaines, replenished with diuers kinds of wilde and
+monstrous beastes and serpents. First from Muritania or Barbary toward the
+South is Getulia, a rough and sauage region, whose inhabitants are wilde
+and wandering people. After these follow the people called Melanogetuli and
+Pharusij, which wander in the wildernesse, carrying with them great gourdes
+of water. [Sidenote: AEthiopes, Nigritae. The riuer Nigritis or Senega.]
+The Ethiopians called Nigritae occupy a great part of Africa, and are
+extended to the West Ocean. Southward also they reach to the riuer
+Nigritis, whose nature agreeth with the riuer of Nilus, forasmuch as it is
+increased and diminished at the same time, and bringeth forth the like
+beasts as the Crocodile. By reason whereof, I thinke this to be the same
+riuer which the Portugals called Senega: For this riuer is also of the same
+nature. It is furthermore marueilous and very strange that is said of this
+river: And this is, that on the one side thereof, the inhabitants are of
+high stature and black, and on the other side, of browne or tawne colour,
+and low stature, which thing also our men confirme to be true.
+
+[Sindenote: People of Libya.] There are also other people of Libya called
+Garamantes, whose women are common: for they contract no matrimonie;
+neither haue respect to chastitie. After these are the nations of the
+people called Pyrei, Sathiodaphnitae, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamatae,
+Dolopes, Aganginae, Leuci Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopei, Calcei Ethiopes, and
+Nubi. These haue the same situation in Ptolome that they now giue to the
+kingdome of Nubia. Here are certaine Christians vnder the dominion of the
+great Emperour of AEthiopia, called Prester Iohn. From these toward the
+West is a great nation of people called Aphricerones, whose region (as
+faire as may be gathered by coniecture) is the same that is now called
+Regnum Orguene, confining vpon the East parts of Guinea. From hence
+Westward, and somewhat toward the North, are the kingdoms of Gambra and
+Budomel, not farre from the riuer of Senega. And from hence toward the
+inland regions, and along by the sea coast, are the regions of Ginoia or
+Guinea, which we commonly call Ginnee. [Sidenote: The Portugals Nauigation
+to Brasile.] On the Westside of these regions toward the Ocean, is the
+cape or point called Cabo verde, or Caput viride, (that is) the greene
+cape, to the which the Portugals first direct their course when they saile
+to America, or the land of Brasile. Then departing from hence, they turne
+to the right hand toward the quarter of the winde called Garbino, which is
+betweene the West and the South. But to speake somewhat more of AEthiopia:
+although there are many nations of people so named, yet is AEthiopia
+chiefly diuided into two parts, whereof the one is called Aethiopia vnder
+Aegypt, a great and rich region. To this perteineth the Island Meroe,
+imbraced round about with the stremes of the riuer Nilus. In this Island
+women reigned in old time. Iosephus writeth, that it was sometime called
+Sabea: and that the Queene of Saba came from thence to Ierusalem, to heare
+the wisedom of Salomon. [Sidenote: Prester Iohn Emperour of Aethiopia.]
+From hence toward the East reigneth the said Christian Emperour Prester
+Iohn, whom some cal Papa Iohannes, and other say that he is called Pean
+Iuan (that is) great Iohn, whose Empire reacheth far beyond Nilus, and
+is extended to the coasts of the Red sea and Indian sea. The middle of the
+region is almost in 66. degrees of longitude, and 12. degrees of latitude.
+[Sidenote: People of the Eastside of Africa.] About this region inhabite
+the people called Clodi, Risophagi, Bobylonij, Axiuntae, Molili, and
+Molibae. After these is the region called Troglodytica, whose inhabitants
+dwel in caues and dennes: for these are their houses, and the flesh of
+serpents their meat, as writeth Plinie, and Diodorus Siculus. They haue no
+speach, but rather a grinning and chattering. There are also people
+without heads, called Blemines, hauing their eyes and mouth in their
+breast. Likewise Strucophagi, and naked Ganphasantes: Satyrs also, which
+haue nothing of men but onely shape. Moreouer Oripei, great hunters.
+Mennones also and the region of Smyrmophora, which bringeth foorth myrrhe.
+After these is the region of Azania, in the which many Elephants are found.
+A great part of the other regions of Africke that are beyond the
+Aequinoctiall line, are now ascribed to the kingdome of Melinde, whose
+inhabitants are accustomed to trafique with the nations of Arabia, and
+their king is ioyned in friendship with the king of Portugal, and payeth
+tribute to Prester Iohn.
+
+The other Ethiope, called AEthiopia interior (that is) the inner Ethiope,
+is not yet knowne for the greatnesse thereof, but onely by the sea
+coastes: yet is it described in this manner. First from the Aequinoctiall
+toward the South, is a great region of Aethiopians, which bringeth forth
+white Elephants, Tygers, and the beastes called Rhinocerotes. Also a
+region that bringeth foorth plenty of cynamome, lying betweene the
+branches of Nilus. Also the kingdome of Habech or Habasi, a region of
+Christian men, lying both on this side and beyond Nilus. Here are also the
+Aethiopians, called Ichthiopagi (that is) such as liue onely by fish, and
+were sometimes subdued by the warres of great Alexander. Furthermore the
+Aethiopians called Rhapsij, and Anthropophagi, that are accustomed to eat
+mans flesh, inhabite the regions neere vnto the mountains called Montes
+Lunae (that is) the mountaines of the Moone. Gazati is vnder the Tropike
+of Capricorne. After this followeth the front of Afrike, the Cape of Buena
+Speranza, or Caput Bonae Spei, that is, the Cape of good hope, by the
+which they passe that saile from Lisbon to Calicut. But by what names the
+Capes and gulfes are called, forasmuch as the same are in euery globe and
+card, it were here superfluous to rehearse them.
+
+Some write that Africa was so named by the Grecians, because it is without
+colde. For the Greeke letter Alpha or A signifies priuation, voyd, or
+without: and Phrice signifies colde. For in deed although in the stead of
+Winter they haue a cloudy and tempestuous season, yet is it not colde, but
+rather smothering hote, with hote showres of raine also, and somewhere such
+scorching windes, that what by one meanes and other, they seeme at certaine
+times to liue as it were in fornaces, and in maner already halfe way in
+Purgatorie or hell. Gemma Phrisius writeth, that in certaine parts of
+Africa, as in Atlas the greater, the aire in the night season is seene
+shining, with many strange fires and flames rising in maner as high as the
+Moone: and that in the element are sometime heard as it were the sound of
+pipes, trumpets and drummes: which noises may perhaps be caused by the
+vehement and sundry motions of such firie exhalations in the aire, as we
+see the like in many experiences wrought by fire, aire and winde.
+[Sidenote: The middle region of the aire is cold.] The hollowness also, and
+diuers reflexions and breaking of the cloudes may be great causes hereof,
+beside the vehement colde of the middle region of the aire, whereby the
+said fiery exhalations, ascending thither, are suddenly stricken backe with
+great force: for euen common and dayly experience teacheth vs, by the
+whissing of a burning torch, what noise fire maketh in the aire, and much
+more where it striueth when it is inclosed with aire, as appeareth in
+gunnes, and as the like is seene in onely aire inclosed, as in Organ pipes,
+and such other instruments that go by winde. [Sidenote: The strife of
+Elements. Winde.] For winde (as say the Philosophers) is none other then
+aire vehemently moued, as we see in a paire of bellowes, and such other.
+
+[Sidenote: The heate of the Moone.] Some of our men of good credite that
+were in this last voiage to Guinea, affirme earnestly that in the night
+season they felt a sensible heat to come from the beames of the moone.
+[Sidenote: The nature of the starres.] The which thing, although it be
+strange and insensible to vs that inhabite cold regions, yet doeth it stand
+with good reason that it may so be, forasmuch as the nature of starres and
+planets (as writeth Plinie) consisteth of fire, and conteineth in it a
+spirit of fire, which cannot be without heat.
+
+And, that the Moone giueth heate vpon the earth the Prophet Dauid seemeth
+to confirme in his 121. Psalme, where speaking of such men as are defended
+from euil by Gods protection, hee saith thus: Per diem Sol non exuret te,
+nec Luna per noctem. That is to say, In the day the Sunne shall not burne
+thee, nor the Moone by night.
+
+They say furthermore, that in certaine places of the sea they saw certaine
+streames of water, which they call spouts, falling out of the aire into the
+sea, and that some of these are as bigge as the great pillars of Churches:
+insomuch that sometimes they fall into shippes, and put them in great
+danger of drowning. Some faine that these should be the Cataracts of
+heauen, which were all opened at Noes floud. But I thinke them rather to be
+such fluxions and eruptions as Aristotle in his booke de Mundo saith, to
+chance in the sea. For speaking of such strange things as are seene often
+times in the sea, he writeth thus. Oftentimes also euen in the sea are
+seene euaporations of fire, and such eruptions and breaking foorth of
+springs, that the mouthes of riuers are opened. Whirlepooles, and fluxions
+are caused of such other vehement motions, not only in the middest of the
+sea, but also in creeks and streights. At certaine times also, a great
+quantity of water is suddenly lifted vp and carried about with the Moone,
+&c. By which wordes of Aristotle it doth appeare that such waters be lifted
+vp in one place at one time, and suddenly fall downe in an other place at
+another time. [Sidenote: A strange thing.] And hereunto perhaps perteineth
+it that Richard Chancellor told me that he heard Sebastian Cabot report,
+that (as farre as I remember) either about the coasts of Brasile or Rio de
+Plata, his shippe or pinnesse was suddenly lifted from the sea, and cast
+vpon land, I wot not howe farre. [Sidenote: The power of nature.] The which
+thing, and such other like wonderfull and strange workes of nature while I
+consider, and call to remembrance the narrownesse of mans vnderstanding and
+knowledge, in comparison of her mightie power, I can but cease to maruell
+and confesse with Plinie, that nothing is to her impossible, the least part
+of whose power is not yet knowen to men. Many things more our men saw and
+considered in this voyage, woorthy to be noted, whereof I haue thought good
+to put some in memory, that the reader may aswell take pleasure in the
+variety of things, as knowledge of the historie. Among other things,
+therefore touching the maners and nature of the people, this may seeme
+strange, that their princes and noble men vse to pounce and rase their
+skinnes with pretie knots in diuers formes, as it were branched damaske,
+thinking that to be a decent ornament. [Sidenote: Fine iewels. A bracelet.]
+And albeit they goe in maner all naked, yet are many of them, and
+especially their women, in maner laden with collars, bracelets, hoopes, and
+chaines, either of gold, copper, or iuory. I my selfe haue one of their
+brassets of Iuory, weighing two pound and sixe ounces of Troy weight, which
+make eight and thirtie ounces: this one of their women did weare vpon her
+arme. It is made of one whole piece of the biggest part of the tooth,
+turned and somewhat carued, with a hole in the midst, wherein they put
+their handes to wear it on their arme. Some haue on euery arme one, and as
+many on their legges, wherewith some of them are so galled, that although
+they are in maner made lame thereby, yet will they by no meanes leaue them
+off. Some weare also on their legges great shackles of bright copper, which
+they thinke to bee no lesse comely. They weare also collars, bracelets,
+garlands, and girdles, of certain blew stones like beads. Likewise some of
+their women weare on their bare armes certaine foresleeues made of the
+plates of beaten golde. On their fingers also they weare rings, made of
+golden wires, with a knot or wreath, like vnto that which children make in
+a ring of a rush. Among other things of golde that our men bought of them
+for exchange of their wares, were certaine dog-chaines and collers.
+
+They are very wary people in their bargaining, and will not lose one sparke
+of golde of any value. They vse weights and measures, and are very
+circumspect in occupying the same. They that shall haue to doe with them,
+must vse them gently: for they will not trafique or bring in any wares if
+they be euill vsed. At the first voyage that our men had into these
+parties, it so chanced, that at their departure from the first place where
+they did trafick, one of them either stole a muske Cat, or tooke her away
+by force, not mistrusting that that should haue hindered their bargaining
+in another place whither they intended to goe. But for all the haste they
+coulde make with full sailes, the fame of their misusage so preuented them,
+that the people of that place also, offended thereby, would bring in no
+wares: insomuch that they were inforced either to restore the Cat, or pay
+for her at their price before they could trafique there.
+
+Their houses are made of foure postes or trees, and couered with boughes.
+
+Their common feeding is of roots, and such fishes as they take, whereof
+they haue great plenty.
+
+There are also such flying fishes as are seene in the sea of the West
+Indies. Our men salted of their fishes, hoping to prouide store thereof:
+but they would take no salt, and must therefore be eaten forthwith as some
+say. Howbeit other affirme, that if they be salted immediately after they
+be taken, they wil last vncorrupted ten or twelue dayes. But this is more
+strange, that part of such flesh as they caried with them out of England,
+which putrified there, became sweete againe at their returne to the clime
+of temperate regions.
+
+They vse also a strange making of bread, in this maner. They grinde
+betweene two stones with their handes as much corne as they thinke may
+suffice their family, and when they haue thus brought it to floure, they
+put thereto a certaine quantitie of water, and make thereof very thinne
+dough, which they sticke vpon some post of their houses, where it is baked
+by the heate of the Sunne: so that when the master of the house or any of
+his family will eate thereof, they take it downe and eate it.
+
+They haue very faire wheate, the eare whereof is two handfuls in length,
+and as bigge as a great Bulrush, and almost foure inches about where it is
+biggest. The stemme or straw seemeth to be almost as bigge as the litle
+finger of a mans hand, or litle lesse. The graines of this wheate are as
+big as our peason, round also, and very white, and somewhat shining, like
+pearles that haue lost their colour. Almost all the substance of them
+turneth into floure, and maketh little bran or none. I told in one eare two
+hundred and threescore graines. The eare is inclosed in three blades longer
+than it selfe, and of two inches broad a piece. And by this fruitfulnes the
+Sunne seemeth partly to recompence such griefes and molestations as they
+otherwise receiue by the feruent heate thereof. It is doubtlesse a worthy
+contemplation to consider the contrary effects of the sunne: or rather the
+contrary passions of such things as receiue the influence of his beames,
+either to their hurt or benefit. Their drinke is either water, or the iuise
+that droppeth from the cut branches of the barren Date trees, called
+Palmitos. For either they hang great gourdes at the said branches euery
+euening, and let them so hang all night, or else they set them on the
+ground vnder the trees, that the droppes may fall therein. They say that
+this kinde of drinke is in taste much like vnto whey, but somewhat sweeter,
+and more pleasant. They cut the branches euery euening, because they are
+seared vp in the day by the heate of the Sunne. They haue also great beanes
+as bigge as chestnuts, and very hard, with a shell in the stead of a huske.
+
+Many things more might be saide of the maners of the people, and of the
+wonders and monstrous things that are engendered in Africke. But it shall
+suffice to haue saide this much of such things as our men partly sawe, and
+partly brought with them.
+
+And whereas before speaking of the fruit of graines, I described the same
+to haue holes by the side (as in deede it hath, as it is brought hither)
+yet was I afterward enfourmed, that those holes were made to put stringes
+or twigges through the fruite, thereby to hang them vp to dry at the Sunne.
+They grew not past a foote and a halfe, or two foote from the ground, and
+are as red as blood when they are gathered. The graines themselues are
+called of the Phisicions Grana Paradisi.
+
+[Sidenote: Shels that cleaue to ships.] At their comming home the keeles of
+their shippes were marueilously ouergrowne with certaine shelles of two
+inches length and more, as thicke as they could stand, and of such bignesse
+that a man might put his thumbe in the mouthes of them. They certainely
+affirme that in these there groweth a certaine slimie substance, which at
+the length slipping out of the shell and falling in the sea, becommeth
+those foules which we call Barnacles. The like shelles haue bene seene in
+ships returning from Iseland, but these shels were not past halfe an inch
+in length. Of the other that came from Guinea, I sawe the Primerose lying
+in the docke, and in maner couered with the said shels, which in my
+iudgement should greatly hinder her sayling. Their ships were also in many
+places eaten with the wormes called Bromas or Bissas, whereof mention is
+made in the Decades. These creepe betweene the plankes, which they eate
+through in many places.
+
+[Sidenote: A secret.] Among other things that chanced to them in this
+voyage, this is worthy to be noted, that whereas they sailed thither in
+seuen weekes, they could returne in no lesse space then twentie weekes. The
+cause whereof they say to be this: That about the coast of Cabo Verde the
+winde is euer at the East, by reason whereof they were enforced to saile
+farre out of their course into the maine Ocean, to finde the winde at the
+West to bring them home. [Sidenote: The death of our men.] There died of
+our men at this last voyage about twentie and four, whereof many died at
+their returne into the clime of the colde regions, as betweene the Islands
+of Azores and England. [Sidenote: Fiue blacke Moores brought into England.
+Colde may be better abiden then heate.] They brought with them certaine
+black slaues, whereof some were tall and strong men, and could wel agree
+with our meates and drinkes. The colde and moyst aire doth somewhat offend
+them. Yet doubtlesse men that are borne in hot Regions may better abide
+colde, then men that are borne in colde Regions may abide heate, forasmuch
+as vehement heate resolueth the radicall moysture of mens bodies, as colde
+constraineth and preserueth the same.
+
+This is also to be considered as a secret worke of nature, that throughout
+all Africke, vnder the AEquinoctial line, and neere about the same on both
+sides, the regions are extreeme hote, and the people very blacke. Whereas
+contrarily such regions of the West Indies as are vnder the same line are
+very temperate, and the people neither blacke, nor with curlde and short
+wooll on their heads, as they of Afrike haue, but of the colour of an
+Oliue, with long and blacke heare on their heads: the cause of which
+variety is declared in diuers places in the Decades.
+
+It is also worthy to be noted that some of them that were at this voyage
+told me: That is, that they ouertooke the course of the Sunne, so that they
+had it North from them at noone, the 14. day of March. And to haue said
+thus much of these voyages, it may suffice.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The first voyage made by Master William Towrson Marchant of London, to the
+  coast of Guinea, with two Ships, in the yeere 1555.
+
+Vpon Munday the thirtieth day of September wee departed from the Isle of
+Wight, out of the hauen of Neuport with two good shippes, the one called
+the Hart, the other the Hinde, both of London, and the Masters of them were
+Iohn Ralph, and William Carter, for a voyage to bee made vnto the Riuer de
+Sestos in Guinea, and to other hauens thereabout.
+
+It fell out by the varietie of windes, that it was the fourteenth day of
+October before wee coulde fetch Dartmouth: and being there arriued wee
+continued in that roade sixe dayes, and the 20. of October we warpt out of
+the hauen, and set saile, directing our course towards the Southwest, and
+the next morning we were runne by estimation thirty leagues.
+
+The first of Nouember we found our selues to be in 31. degrees of latitude
+by the reckoning of our Master. This day we ranne about 40. leagues also.
+
+The second day we ranne 36. leagues.
+
+The third day we had sight of Porto Santo, which is a small Island lying in
+the sea, about three leagues long, and a league and a halfe broad, and is
+possessed by Portugals. It riseth as we came from the Northnorthwest like
+two small hilles neere together. The East end of the same Island is a high
+land like a saddle with a valley, which makes it to beare that forme. The
+West ende of it is lower with certaine small round hillocks. This Island
+lieth in thirty and three degrees. The same day at 11. of the clocke we
+raysed the Isle of Madera, which lieth 12. leagues from Porto Santo,
+towards the Southwest: that Island is a faire Island and fruitfull, and is
+inhabited by Portugals, it riseth afarre off like a great whole land and
+high. By three of the clocke this day at after noone we were thwart of
+Porto Santo, and we set our course Southwest, to leaue the Isle of Madera
+to the Eastward, as we did Porto Santo. These two Islands were the first
+land that we saw since wee left the coast of England. About three of the
+clocke after midnight wee were thwart of Madera, within three leagues of
+the West ende of it, and by meanes of the high hilles there, we were
+becalmed: We suppose we ranne this day and night 30. leagues.
+
+The fourth day we lay becalmed vnder thejsle of Madera, vntill one of the
+clocke at afternoone, and then, the winde comming into the East, wee went
+our course, and ranne that day fifteene leagues.
+
+The 5. day we ranne 15. leagues more.
+
+The 6. day in the morning we raysed the Isle of Tenerif, otherwise called
+the Pike, because it is a very high Island, with a pike vpon the top like a
+loafe of suger. The same night we raised the Isle of Palma, which is a high
+land also, and to the Westward of the Isle of Tenerif.
+
+The 7. day we perceiued the Isle of Gomera, which is an Island standing
+betwixt Tenerif and Palma, about 12. leagues Eastward from Palma, and 8.
+leagues Westward from Tenerif: and for feare of being becalmed with the
+Isle of Tenerif, we left both it, and Gomera to the Eastward of vs, and
+went betwixt Palma and Gomera. We ranne this day and night 30. leagues.
+
+Note that these Islands be 60. leagues from Madera, and that there are 3
+Islands more to the Westward of Tenerif, named the Grand Canaria,
+Forte-ventura, and Lancerot, of which Island we came not in sight: they
+being inhabited by Spaniards.
+
+This day also we had sight of the Isle of Ferro, which is to the Southwards
+13. leagues from the other Islands, and is possessed by Spaniards. All this
+day and night by reason of the winde we could not double the point of the
+Isle of Ferro, except we would haue gone to the Westward of it, which had
+bene much out of our course: therefore we kept about, and ranne backe fiue
+houres Eastnortheast to the ende we might double it vpon the next boord,
+the winde continuing Southeast, which hath not bene often seene vpon that
+coast by any traueilers: for the winde continueth there for the most part
+Northeast, and East Northeast: so vpon the other boord by the next morning
+we were in a maner with the Island, and had roome ynough to double the
+same.
+
+The 8. day we kept our course as neere the winde as wee could, because that
+our due course to fetch the coast of Barbary was Southeast and by East, but
+by the scant winde we could not goe our due course, but went as neere it as
+we could, and ranne this day and night 25. leagues.
+
+The 9. day we ranne 30. leagues, the 10. 25. leagues, the 12. 24.
+
+The 12. day we saw a saile vnder our Lee, which was as we thought a
+fishermen, so that wee went roome to haue spoken with him, but within one
+houre there fell such a fogge, that wee could not see the shippe nor one of
+vs the other: we shot off diuers pieces to the Hinde, but she heard them
+not: at afternoone she shot off a piece which wee heard, and made her
+answere with another: and within one halfe houre after the fogge brake vp,
+and we were within 4. leagues of the shoare vpon the coast of Barbary, and
+wee sounded and had 14. fadom water. The Barke also came roome with vs and
+their ankered by reason of the contrary winde. When we fell with the land,
+we could not iudge iustly what part of the land it was, because the most
+part of that coast is lowe land, and no part to be iudged of it but the
+fore part of the shoare, which is white like chalke or sand, and very deepe
+vnto the hard shoare: there immediatly we began to fish, and found great
+store of a kinde of fish which the Portugals commonly fish for vpon that
+coast, which they cal Pergosses, the Frenchmen call them Saders, and our
+men salt-water breames. Before the clearing vp of the fogge, the shippe
+which we followed shaped such a course that we could see her no more, by
+reason of our shooting off to finde the Hinde againe. This part of the
+coast of Barbary, by our Pilots reckoning, is about 16. leagues to the
+Eastwards of the riuer del Oro.
+
+The 13. day in the afternoone wee spyed a saile comming towards vs, which
+wee iudged to be the saile that wee sawe the day before, and as soone as we
+spied him, wee caused the Hinde to way her ancre and to goe towardes him,
+and manned out our Skiffe in like case to lay him aboorde, or to discerne
+what hee was, and wee our selues within halfe an houre after wayed also:
+but after the saile had espied vs, hee kept about, and turned backe againe,
+and shortly after there fell such another fogge, that wee coulde not see
+him: which fogges continued all that night, so that wee were constrained to
+leaue the chase. This afternoone the winde came about, and wee went our
+course Southwest and by West, to goe cleare off the coast, wee ranne that
+night sixteene leagues.
+
+The foureteenth day in the morning was verie foggie: but about twelue a
+clocke wee espied a Caruell of 60. tunne which was fishing, and we sent our
+Skiffe to him with fiue men, and all without any weapon sauing their Oares.
+[Sidenote: A Caruell taken.] The Caruell for haste let slippe her ancre,
+and set saile; and they seeing that, fearing that they should not fetch
+her, would tarry for no weapons, and in the ende ouertooke the Caruel, and
+made her to strike saile, and brought her away, although they had
+foureteene or fifteene men aboord, and euery man his weapon, but they had
+not the hearts to resist our men. After they were come to vs, they let fall
+their ancre, for wee had cast ancre because the winde was not good: I
+caused then the Skiffe to come for mee, and I went aboorde of them to see
+that no harme should bee done to them, nor to take any thing but that which
+they might spare vs for our money. [Sidenote: Great store of fish vpon the
+coast of Barbary.] So wee tooke of them 3. Tapnets of figges, two small
+pots of oyle, two pipes of water, foure hogsheads of saltfish which they
+had taken vpon the coast, and certaine fresh fish which they did not
+esteeme, because there is such store vpon that coast, that in an houre and
+sometime lesse, a man may take as much fish as will serue twentie men a
+day. For these things, and for some wine which wee dranke aboord of them,
+and three or foure great Cannes which they sent aboord of our shippes, I
+payed them twentie and seuen Pistoles, which was twise as much as they
+willingly would haue taken: and so let them goe to their ancre and cable
+which they had let slippe, and got it againe by our helpe. After this wee
+set saile, but the winde caused vs to ancre againe about twelue leagues off
+the riuer del Oro, as the Portugals tolde vs. There were fiue Caruels more
+in this place, but when they sawe vs, they made all away for feare of vs.
+
+The 15. day we ridde still because of the winde.
+
+[Sidenote: The Tropike of Cancer in 23. and a halfe.] The 16. day we set
+saile and ranne our course 40. leagues. This day, by the reckoning of our
+Pilots, we were right vnder the Tropike of Cancer. The 17. we ranne 25.
+leagues within sight for the most part of the coast of Barbary.
+
+The 18. day wee ranne thirtie leagues, and at twelue of the clocke by the
+reckoning of our Pilots we were thwart of Cape Blanke.
+
+The 22. day our Pilots reckoned vs to be thwart Cape Verde.
+
+[Sidenote: The coast of Guinea.] The 12. day of December we had sight of
+land of Guinea, which as soone as we saw we halled into the land Northeast,
+and about 12. of the clocke at night we were neere the shoare within lesse
+then 2. leagues: and then we kept about and sounded, and found 18. fadom
+water. Afterwards we saw a light towards the shoare, which we thought to
+haue bene a ship, and thereby iudged it to be the riuer de Sestos, which
+light as soone as we espied, we came to an anker and armed our tops, and
+made all things ready to fight, because we doubted that it might be some
+Portugal or French man: this night we remained at an anker, but in the
+morning we saw no man, only we espied 4. rockes about 2. English miles from
+vs, one great rocke, and the 3. other smal ones, which when we sawe, we
+supposed that the light came from the shore, and so wayed, and set saile
+East Southeast along the shoare, because the Master did not well know the
+place, but thought that we were not so farre to the East as the riuer de
+Sestos.
+
+This land all along is a low land, and full of very high trees all along
+the shoare, so that it is not possible to know the place that a man doth
+fall withall, except it be by the latitude. In these 24. houres I thinke we
+ran 16. leagues, for all the night we had a great gale as we were vnder
+saile, and had withall store of thunder and lightnings.
+
+The 13. day for the most part we ran East Southeast all along the shoare,
+within two leagues alwayes of the same, and found the land all as at the
+first, ful of woods and great rocks hard aboord the shoare, and the billow
+beating so sore, that the seas brake vpon the shoare as white as snow, and
+the water mounted so high that a man might easily discerne it 4. leagues
+off, in such wise that no boate could land there. Thus we ran vntil 12. of
+the clocke, and then they tooke the Sunne and after iudged themselues to be
+24. leagues past the riuer de Sestos to the Eastwards, by reason whereof we
+halled into the shoare within two English miles, and there ancred and found
+fifteene fadom water, and all off from the shoare the sea so smooth, that
+we might wel haue rid by an Hawser. All that after-noone we trimmed our
+boate and made her a saile, to the ende that she might go along by the
+shoore to seeke some place to water in: for wee could not goe back againe
+to the riuer de Sestos, because the winde blowes alwayes contrary, and the
+Currant runneth alwayes to the Eastwards, which was also against vs.
+
+The 14. day we set saile and went back againe along the coast, and sent our
+boats hard aboord the shoare to seeke a watering place, which they found
+about 12. of the clock, and we being farre into the sea, met with diuers
+boats of the Countrey, small, long and narrow, and in euery boate one man
+and no more: we gaue them bread which they did eat, and were very glad of
+it. About 4. of the clocke our boats came to vs with fresh water: and this
+night we ankered against a Riuer.
+
+The 15. day we wayed and set saile to goe neere the shoare, and with our
+leade wee sounded all the way, and found sometimes rockes, and sometimes
+faire ground, and at the shallowest found 7. fadoms alwayes at the least.
+So in fine we found 7. fadom and a halfe within an English mile of the
+shoare, and there we ankered in a maner before the mouth of the Riuer, and
+then wee sent our boats into the Riuer for water, which went about a mile
+within the Riuer, where they had very good water. [Sidenote: Riuer S.
+Vincent.] This Riuer lieth by estimation 8. leagues beyond the Riuer de
+Sestos, and is called in the Carde Riuer S. Vincent, but it is so hard to
+finde, that a boat being within halfe a mile of it shall not be able to
+discerne that it is a Riuer: by reason that directly before the mouth of it
+there lyeth a ledge of rockes, which is much broader then the Riuer, so
+that a boate must runne in along the shoare a good way betwixt the rockes
+and the shoare before it come to the mouth of the Riuer, and being within
+it, it is a great Riuer and diuers other Riuers fall into it: The going
+into it is somewhat ill, because that at the entring the seas doe goe
+somewhat high, but being once within it, it is as calme as the Thames.
+
+[Sidenote: Cloth made of the barke of trees.] There are neere to the sea
+vpon this Riuer diuers inhabitants, which are mighty bigge men and go al
+naked except some thing before their priuie parts, which is like a clout
+about a quarter of a yard long made of the barke of trees, and yet it is
+like a cloth: for the barke is of that nature, that it will spin small
+after the maner of linnen. [Sidenote: The Negroes race their skinnes.] Some
+of them also weare the like vpon their heades being painted with diuers
+colours, but the most part of them go bare headed, and their heads are
+clipped and shorne of diuers sorts, and the most part of them haue their
+skin of their bodies raced with diuers workes, in maner of a leather
+Ierkin. The men and women goe so alike, that one cannot know a man from a
+woman but by their breastes, which in the most part be very foule and long,
+hanging downe like the vdder of a goate.
+
+The same morning we went into the Riuer with our Skiffe, and caried
+certaine basons, manels, &c. [Sidenote: Graines of Guinea.] And there we
+tooke that day one hogs-head and 100 li. waight of Graines, and two
+Elephants teeth at a reasonable good reckoning. We solde them both basons,
+and Manellios, and Margarits, but they desired most to haue basons: For the
+most part of our basons wee had by estimation about 30. li. for a piece,
+and for an Elephants tooth of 30. li. waight, we gaue them 6.
+
+The 16. day in the morning we went into the riuer with our Skiffe, and
+tooke some of euery sort of our marchandize with vs, and shewed it to the
+Negroes, but they esteemed it not, but made light of it, and also of the
+basons, Manellios and Margarits, which yesterday they did buy: howbeit for
+the basons they would haue giuen vs some graines, but to no purpose, so
+that this day wee tooke not by estimation aboue one hundreth pound waight
+of Graines, by meanes of their Captaine, who would suffer no man to sell
+any thing but through his hands, and at his price: he was so subtile, that
+for a bason hee would not giue 15. pound waight of Graines, and sometimes
+would offer vs smal dishfuls whereas before wee had baskets full, and when
+he saw that wee would not take them in contentment, the Captaine departed,
+and caused all the rest of the boates to depart, thinking belike that wee
+would haue followed them, and haue giuen them their owne askings.
+[Sidenote: The description of their townes and houses.] But after that we
+perceiued their fetch, wee wayed our Grapnel and went away, and then wee
+went on land into a small Towne to see the fashions of the Countrey, and
+there came a threescore of them about vs, and at the first they were afraid
+of vs, but in the end perceiuing that wee did no hurt, they would come to
+vs and take vs by the hand and be familiar with vs, and then we went into
+their Townes, which were like to twentie small houels, all couered ouer
+with great leaues and baggage, and all the sides open, and a scaffolde
+vnder the house about a yarde high, where they worke many pretie things of
+the barkes of trees, and there they lye also. In some of their houses they
+worke yron and make faire dartes, and diuers other things to worke their
+boates, and other things withall, and the women worke as well as the men.
+But when wee were there diuers of the women to shew vs pleasure danced and
+sung after their maner, full ill to our eares. Their song was thus:
+
+    Sakere, sakere, ho, ho. Sakere, sakore, ho, ho.
+
+And with these words they leape and dance, and clap their hands. Beastes we
+could see none that they had, but two goates, small dogges, and small
+hennes: other beastes we saw none. After that we had well marked all things
+we departed and went aboord our ships: which thing the Captaine of the
+other towne perceiuing, sent two of his seruants in a boat with a basket of
+Graines, and made vs signes that if when wee had slept wee would come
+againe into their riuer, wee should haue store of Graines, and so shewed vs
+his Graines and departed.
+
+The 17. day in the morning because we thought that the Negroes would haue
+done something because the Captaine sent for vs, I required the Master to
+goe on shoare, and sent the rest of our Marchants with him, and taried
+aboord my selfe by reason that the last day he esteemed our things so
+litle: so when the Master and the rest came into the riuer, the captaine
+with diuers others came to them, and brought Graines with them, and after
+that he saw that I was not there, he made signes to know where I was, and
+they made signes to him againe that I was in the ships: [Sidenote: Diago
+the name of a Captaine.] and then hee made signes to know who was Captaine
+by name of Diago, for so they call their Captaine, and they pointed to the
+master of the ship: then he began to shew his Graines, but he held them so
+vnreasonably, that there was no profit to be made of them: which things the
+Master perceiuing, and seeing that they had no store of Graines, came away,
+and tooke not aboue 50. pound waight of Graines. Then he went a shoare to
+the litle Towne where we were the day before, and one of them plucked a
+Gourd, wherewith the Negroes were offended, and came many of them to our
+men with their darts and great targets, and made signes to them to depart:
+which our men did, hauing but one bow and two or three swords, and went
+aboord the boate and came away from them: and assoone as they were come
+aboord we wayed and set saile, but the winde was off the Sea, so that we
+could not get out cleare of certaine rocks, and therefore we came to an
+ancre againe.
+
+[Sidenote: The latitude of S. Vincent riuer is 4. degrees and a halfe.]
+This riuer is called Riuer S. Vincent, standing in 4. degrees and a halfe,
+and ebbeth and floweth there every 12. houres, but not much water when it
+ebbeth the most: while wee were there, it ebbeth one fadome and a halfe
+water.
+
+[Sidenote: Leaues of exceeding length.] This countrey as farre as we could
+perceiue is altogether woody, and al strange trees, whereof wee knewe none,
+and they were of many sorts, with great leaues like great dockes, which bee
+higher then any man is able to reach the top of them.
+
+[Sidenote: Long pease stalkes.] There are certaine peason by the Sea side,
+which grow vpon great and very long stalkes, one of the stalkes I measured
+and found it 27. paces long, and they grow vpon the sand like to trees, and
+that so neere the Sea, that sometimes the Sea floweth into the woods as we
+might perceiue by the water markes.
+
+[Sidenote: Long womens breasts.] The trees and all things in this place
+grow continually greene. Diuers of the women haue such exceeding long
+breasts, that some of them wil lay the same vpon the ground and lie downe
+by them, but all the women haue not such breasts.
+
+At this place all the day the winde bloweth off the Sea, and all the night
+off the land, but wee found it to differ sometimes, which our Master
+marueiled at.
+
+This night at 9. of the clocke the winde came vp at the East, which
+ordinarily about that time was wont to come out of the North Northwest off
+the shoare: yet we wayed and halled off South with that winde all night
+into the Sea, but the next morning we halled in againe to the lande, and
+tooke in 6. Tunnes of water for our ship, and I thinke the Hinde tooke in
+as much.
+
+I could not perceiue that here was any gold, or any other good thing: for
+the people be so wilde and idle, that they giue themselues to seeke out
+nothing: if they would take paines they might gather great store of
+graines, but in this place I could not perceiue two Tunne.
+
+There are many foules in the Countrey, but the people will not take the
+paines to take them.
+
+I obsetued some of their words of speach, which I thought good here to set
+downe.
+
+  Bezow, bezow,                  Is their salutation.
+  Manegete afoye,                Graines ynough.
+  Crocow, afoye,                 Hennes ynough.
+  Zeramme, afoye,                Haue ynough.
+  Begge sacke                    Giue me a knife.
+  Begge come,                    Giue me bread
+  Borke,                         Holde your peace.
+  Coutrecke.                     Ye lye.
+  Veede,                         Put foorth, or emptie.
+  Brekeke,                       Rowe.
+  Diago,                         Their Captaine, and some
+                                   call him Dabo.
+
+These and other wordes they speake very thicke, and oftentimes recite one
+word three times together, and at the last time longer then at the two
+first.
+
+The 18. day towards night, as we were sailing along the coast, we met with
+certaine boats in the sea, and the men shewed vs that there was a riuer
+thwart of vs, where there were Graines to be sold, but we thought it not
+good to tary there, least the other ships should get before vs. This riuer
+hath lying before it three great rockes, and 5. small rocks, one great
+tree, and a little tree right by the riuer, which in height exceeded all
+the rest: we halled this night along the coast 16. leagues.
+
+The 19. day as we coasted the shoare, about twelue of the clocke there came
+out to vs 3. boates to tell vs that they had graines, and brought some with
+them for a shew, but we could not tary there. We proceeded along the coast,
+and ancred by the shore all the night, and ran this day 10. leagues.
+
+The 20. day the Hinde hauing ankered by vs amongst rockes, and foule
+gronnd, lost a small anker. At noone, as we passed along the coast, there
+came forth a Negro to vs, making signes, that if we would goe a shoare, wee
+should haue Graines, and where wee ankered at night, there came another to
+vs, and brought Graines, and shewed vs them, and made signes that wee
+should tary, and made a fire vpon the land in the night, meaning thereby to
+tell vs where we should land, and so they did in diuers other places vpon
+the coast, where they saw vs to anker. [Sidenote: The tides and nature of
+the shore.] In al the places where we haue ancred, since we came from our
+watring place, we haue found the tide alwayes running to the Westwards, and
+all along the coast many rockes hard aboord the shoare, and many of them a
+league off the shoare or more, we ran this day 12. leagues.
+
+The 21 day, although we ranne all day with a good gale of winde, yet the
+tides came so sore out of the coast, that we were not able to runne aboue
+sixe leagues: and this day there came some Negroes to vs, as there had done
+other times.
+
+The 22. wee ranne all day and night to double a point, called Das Palmas,
+and ranne sixteene leagues.
+
+The 23. day about 3. of the clocke we were thwart of the point, and before
+we came to the Westermost part of it, we saw a great ledge of rocks, which
+lie West from the Cape about 3. leagues and a league or more from the land.
+Shortly after we had sight of the Eastermost part of the Cape, which lieth
+4. leagues from the Westermost part, and vpon the very corner thereof lie
+two greene places, as it were closes, and to the Westwards of the Cape the
+land parted from the Cape, as it were a Bay, whereby it may well be knowen.
+Foure leagues more beyonde that there lieth a head-land in the sea, and
+about two leagues beyond the head-land there goeth in a great Bay, as it
+were a riuer, before which place we ankered all that night, which wee did,
+least in the night wee should ouerrunne a riuer where the last yeere they
+had all their Elephants teeth. [Sidenote: That was the yeere 1554.]
+
+This Cape Das palmas lieth vnder foure degrees and a halfe, and betwixt the
+said Cape, and the riuer de Sestos is the greatest store of Graines to be
+had, and being past the said Cape there is no great store else where.
+
+Where we ankered this night, we found that the tide, which before ran
+alwayes to the Westward, from this Cape runneth all to the Eastward: this
+day we ranne some 16. leagues.
+
+The 24. day running our course, about eight of the clock there came forth
+to vs certaine boats, which brought with them small egges, which were soft
+without shels, and they made vs signes, that there was within the land
+fresh water, and Goates: and the Master thinking that it was the riuer
+which we sought, cast ancker and sent the boate on shoare, with one that
+knew the riuer, and comming neere the shoare, hee perceiued that it was not
+the riuer, and so came backe againe, and went along the shoare, with their
+oares and saile, and wee weyed and ranne along the shoare also: and being
+thirteene leagues beyond the Cape, the Master perceiued a place which he
+iudged to be the riuer, when wee were in deede two miles shot past it: yet
+the boate came from the shoare, and they that were in her saide, that there
+was no riuer: notwithstanding wee came to an ancker, and the Master and I
+tooke fiue men with vs in the boat, and when hee came neere the shoare, hee
+perceiued that it was the same riuer which hee did seeke: so we rowed in,
+and found the entrance very ill, by reason that the sea goeth so high: and
+being entred, diuers boats came to vs, and shewed vs that they had
+Elephants teeth, and they brought vs one of about eight pound, and a little
+one of a pound, which we bought: then they brought certaine teeth to the
+riuer side, making signes, that if the next day we would come againe, they
+would sell vs them: so we gaue vnto two Captaines, to either of them a
+manillio, and so we departed, and came aboord, and sent out the other boate
+to another place, where certaine boats that came into the sea, made vs
+signes that there was fresh water: and being come thither, they found a
+towne, but no riuer, yet the people brought them fresh water, and shewed
+them an Elephants tooth, making signes that the next day they would sel
+them teeth, and so they came aboord.
+
+This riuer lieth by the Carde thirteene leagues from the Cape Das palmas,
+and there lieth to the Westwards of the same a rocke about a league in the
+sea, and the riuer it selfe hath a point of lande comming out into the Sea,
+whereupon grow fiue trees, which may well bee discerned two or three
+leagues off, comming from the Westward, but the riuer cannot bee perceiued
+vntill such time as a man be hard by it, and then a man may perceiue a
+litle Towne on ech side the riuer, and to ech Towne there belongeth a
+Captaine. The riuer is but small, but the water is good and fresh.
+
+Two miles beyond the riuer, where the other towne is, there lieth another
+point into the Sea, which is greene like a close, and not aboue sixe trees
+vpon it, which growe one of them from the other, whereby the coast may well
+be knowen: for along all the coast that we haue hitherto sailed by, I haue
+not seene so much bare land.
+
+In this place, and three or foure leagues to the Westward of it, al along
+the shoare, there grow many Palme trees, whereof they make their wine de
+Palma. These trees may easily be knowen almost two leagues off, for they be
+very high and white bodied, and streight, and be biggest in the midst: they
+haue no boughes, but onely a round bush in the top of them: and at the top
+of the same trees they boare a hoale, and there they hang a bottell, and
+the iuyce of the tree runneth out of the said hole into the bottle, and
+that is their wine.
+
+From the Cape das Palmas, to the Cape Tres puntas, there are 100. leagues:
+and to the port where we purpose to make sales of our cloth beyond the Cape
+Tres puntas, 40. leagues.
+
+Note, that betwixt the riuer De Sestos, and the Cape Das palmas, is the
+place where all the graines be gathered.
+
+The language of the people of this place, as far as I could perceiue,
+differeth not much from the language of those which dwel where we watred
+before: but the people of this place be more gentle in nature then the
+other, and goodlier men: their building and apparel is all one with the
+others.
+
+Their desire in this place was most of all to haue Manillios and
+Margarites: as for the rest of our things, they did litle esteeme them.
+
+[Sidenote: Their maner of swearing by the water of the Sea.] About nine of
+the clocke there came boates to vs foorth, from both of the places
+aforsaid, and brought with them certaine teeth, and after they had caused
+me to sweare by the water of the Sea that I would not hurt them, they came
+aboord our ship three or foure of them, and we gaue them to eate of all
+such things as we had, and they did eate and drinke of all things, as well
+as we our selues. Afterwards we bought all their teeth, which were in
+number 14. and of those 14. there were 10. small: afterwards they departed,
+making vs signes that the next day we should come to their Townes.
+
+[Sidenote: Two townes.] The 26. day because we would not trifle long at
+this place I required the Master to goe vnto one of the townes, and to take
+two of our marchants with him, and I my selfe went to the other, and tooke
+one with me, because these two townes stand three miles asunder. To these
+places we caried somewhat of euery kind of marchandize that we had: and hee
+had at the one Towne, nine teeth, which were but small, and at the other
+towne where I was, I had eleuen, which were also not bigge, and we left
+aboord with the Master certaine Manillios, wherewith he bought 12. teeth
+aboord the ship, in our absence: and hauing bought these of them, wee
+perceiued that they had no more teeth: so in that place where I was one
+brought to me a small goat, which I bought, and to the Master at the other
+place they brought fiue small hennes, which he bought also, and after that
+we saw there was nothing else to be had, we departed, and by one of the
+clocke we met aboord, and then wayed, and went East our course 18. leagues
+still within sight of land.
+
+The 28. the wind varied, and we ranne into the sea, and the winde comming
+againe off the sea, wee fell with the land againe, and the first of the
+land which we raised shewed as a great red cliffe round, but not very high,
+and to the Eastward of that another smaller red cliffe, and right aboue
+that into the land a round hammoke and greene, which we tooke to be trees.
+We ranne in these 24. houres, not aboue foure leagues.
+
+The 29. day comming neere to the shoare, we perceiued the red cliffe
+aforesaide to haue right vpon the top of it a great heape of trees, and all
+to the Westwards of it ful of red cliffes as farre as we could see, and all
+along the shoare, as well vpon the cliffes, as otherwise, full of wood:
+within a mile of the said great cliffe there is a riuer to the Eastwards,
+and no cliffes that we could see, except one small cliffe, which is hard by
+it. We ran this day and night 12. leagues.
+
+The windes that wee had in this place by the reports of the people and of
+those that haue bene there, haue not bene vsuall, but in the night, at
+North off the lande, and in the day South off the Sea, and most commonly
+Northwest, and Southwest.
+
+The 31. day we went our course by the shoare Northwards: this land is al
+along a low shoare, and full of wood, as all the coast is for the most
+part, and no rockes. This morning came out many boates which went a
+fishing, which bee greater boates then those which we sawe before, so that
+in some of them there sate 5. men, but the fashion of the boats is all one.
+In the afternoone about three of the clocke wee had sight of a Towne by the
+sea side, which our Pilots iudged to be 25. leagues to the Westwards of the
+Cape Tres puntas.
+
+The third of Ianuary in the morning we fell with the Cape Tres puntas, and
+in the night passed, as our Pilots saide, by one of the Portugals castles,
+which is 8. leagues to the Westwards of the Cape: vpon the first sight of
+the Cape wee discerned it a very high land, and all growen ouer with trees,
+and comming neere to it, we perceiued two head lands, as it were two Bayes
+betwixt them, which opened right to the Westward, and the vttermost of them
+is the Easterne Cape, there we perceiued the middle Cape, and the
+Eastermost Cape: the middle Cape standeth not aboue a league from the West
+Cape, although the Card sheweth them to be 3. leagues one from the other:
+and that middle Cape hath right before the point of it a small rocke so
+neere to it, that it cannot be discerned from the Cape, except a man be
+neere to the shoare, and upon the same Cape standeth a great heape of
+trees, and when a man is thwart the same Cape to the Eastward, there riseth
+hard by it a round greene hommoke, which commeth out of the maine.
+
+The thirde Cape is about a league beyond the middle Cape, and is a high
+land like to the other Capes, and betwixt the middle, and the thirde
+commeth out a little head or point of a land out of the maine, and diuers
+rocks hard aboord the shoare.
+
+Before we came to the Capes, being about 8. leagues off them, wee had the
+land Southeast, and by East, and being past the Capes, the land runneth in
+againe East Northeast.
+
+About two leagues beyond the farthest Cape there is a lowe glade about two
+miles long, and then the land riseth high againe, and diuers head lands
+rise one beyond another, and diuers rockes lie at the point of the first
+head-land. The middest of these Capes is the neerest to the Southwards, I
+meane, further into the sea than any of the other, so that being to the
+Eastward of it, it may be discerned farre off, and being so to the Eastward
+it riseth with two small rockes.
+
+This day we ankered for feare of ouershooting a towne called S. Iohns. Wee
+ran this day not aboue 8. leagues. In the afternoone this day there came a
+boate of the countrey from the shoare, with fiue men in her, and went along
+by vs, as we thought, to discerne our flagges, but they would not come
+neere vs, and when they had well looked vpon vs, they departed.
+
+The fourth day in the morning, sailing by the coast, we espied a ledge of
+rockes by the shoare, and to the Westwards of them two great grene hils
+ioyning together, so that betweene them it was hollow like a saddle: and
+within the said rockes the Master thought the aforenamed Towne had stoode,
+and therefore we manned our boates, and tooke with vs cloth, and other
+marchandize, and rowed ashoare, but going along by the coast, we sawe that
+there was no towne, therefore wee went aboord againe.
+
+From these two hils aforesaid, about two leagues to the Eastward, lie out
+into the Sea almost two miles a ledge of rockes, and beyond that a great
+Bay, which runneth into the North Northwestward, and the land in this place
+lieth North Northeast along the shoare: but the vttermost point of land in
+that place that we could see, lay Northeast, and by East from vs.
+
+After that we were with a small gale of winde runne past that vttermost
+head-land, we sawe a great red cliffe, which the Master againe iudged to be
+the towne of S. Iohns, and then wee tooke our boate with marchandize, and
+went thither, and when we came thither, we perceiued that there was a towne
+vpon the toppe of the hill, and so wee went toward it, and when we were
+hard by it, the people of the towne came together a great sort of them, and
+waued vs to come in, with a peece of cloth, and so we went into a very
+faire Bay, which lieth to the Eastward of the cliffe, whereupon the towne
+standeth, and being within the cliffe, wee let fall our grapnell, and after
+that we had taried there a good space, they sent a boate aboord of vs, to
+shewe vs that they had golde, and they shewed us a peece about halfe a
+crowne weight, and required to know our measure, and our weight, that they
+might shewe their Captaine thereof: and wee gaue them a measure of two
+elles, and a waight of two Angels to shew vnto him, which they tooke, and
+went on shoare, and shewed it vnto their Captaine, and then they brought vs
+a measure of two elles, one quarter and a halfe, and one Crusado-weight of
+gold, making vs signes that so much they would giue for the like measure,
+and lesse they would not haue. After this, we taried there about an houre,
+and when we sawe that they would doe no otherwise, and withall vnderstood,
+that all the best places were before vs, wee departed to our shippes and
+wayed, and ranne along the shoare, and went before with our boate, and
+hauing sailed about a league, we came to a point where there lay foorth a
+ledge of rockes, like to the others before spoken of, and being past that
+people, the Master spied a place which hee saide plainely was the towne of
+Don Iohn: and the night was come vpon vs, so that we could not well
+discerne it, but we ankered as neere vnto the place as we could.
+
+[Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn.] The fift day in the morning we perceiued
+it to be the same towne in deede, and we manned our boates and went
+thither, and because that the last yeere the Portugals at that place tooke
+away a man from them, and after shot at them with great bases, and did
+beate them from the place, we let fall our grapnel almost a base shot off
+the shoare, and there we lay about two houres, and no boats came to vs.
+Then certaine of our men with the Hindes boate went into the Bay which
+lieth to the Eastward of the towne, and within that Bay they found a goodly
+fresh riuer, and afterwards they came and waued to vs also to come in,
+because they perceiued the Negroes to come downe to that place, which we
+did: and immediately the Negroes came to vs, and made vs signes that they
+had golde, but none of them would come aboord our boates, neither could we
+perceiue any boates that they had to come withall, so that we iudged that
+the Portugals had spoiled their boates, because we saw halfe of their towne
+destroyed.
+
+Wee hauing stayed there a good space, and seeing that they would not come
+to vs, thrust our boates heads a shoare, being both well appointed, and
+then the Captaine of the Towne came downe being a graue man: and he came
+with his dart in his hand, and sixe tall men after him, euery one with his
+dart and his target, and their darts were all of yron, faire and sharpe,
+and there came another after them which caried the Captaines stoole: wee
+saluted him, and put off our caps, and bowed our selues, and hee like one
+that thought well of himselfe, did not mooue his cap, nor scant bowed his
+body, and sate him downe very solemnly, vpon his stoole: but all his men
+put off their caps to vs, and bowed downe themselues.
+
+He was clothed from the loines down with a cloth of that Countrey making,
+wrapped about him, and made fast about his loynes with a girdle, and his
+cap of a certaine cloth of the Countrey also, and bare legged, and bare
+footed, and all bare aboue the loynes, except his head.
+
+His seruants, some of them had cloth about their loines, and some nothing
+but a cloth betwixt their legges, and made fast before, and behinde to
+their girdles, and cappes of their owne making, some like a basket, and
+some like a great wide purse of beasts skinnes.
+
+[Sidenote: Their weapons.] All their cloth, cordes, girdles, fishing lines,
+and all such like things which they haue, they make of the bark of certaine
+trees, and thereof they can worke things very pretily, and yron worke they
+can make very fine, of all such things as they doe occupy, as darts,
+fishhookes, hooking yrons, yron heads, and great daggers, some of them as
+long as a woodknife, which be on both sides exceeding sharpe, and bended
+after the maner of Turkie blades, and the most part of them haue hanging at
+their left side one of those great daggers.
+
+Their targets bee made of such pils as their cloth is made of, and very
+closely wrought, and they bee in forme foure square, and very great, and
+somewhat longer then they bee broad, so that kneeling downe, they make
+their targets to couer their whole body. Their bowes be short, and of a
+pretie strength, as much as a man is able to draw with one of his fingers,
+and the string is of the barke of a tree, made flat, and about a quarter of
+an inch broad: as for their arrowes, I haue not as yet seene any of them,
+for they had wrapped them vp close, and because I was busie I could not
+stand about it, to haue them open them. Their golde also they worke very
+well.
+
+When the Captaine was set, I sent him two elles of cloth, and two basons,
+and gaue them vnto him, and hee sent againe for a waight of the same
+measure, and I sent him a weight of two Angels, which he would not take,
+nether would hee suffer the towne to buy any thing, but the basons of
+brasse: so that wee solde that day 74. basons vnto the men of the towne,
+for about half an Angel weight, one with another, and nine white basons,
+which we solde for a quarter of an Angell a peece, or thereabouts.
+
+We shewed them all our other things which we had, but they did not esteeme
+them.
+
+About two of the clocke, the Captaine who did depart in the morning from
+vs, came againe, and brought with him to present mee withall, a henne, and
+two great rootes, which I receiued, and after made me signes that the
+countrey would come to his towne that night, and bring great store of gold,
+which in deed about 4. of the clocke they did: for there came about 100.
+men vnder 3. Captaines, well appointed with their darts and bowes, and when
+they came to vs, euery man sticked downe his dart vpon the shoare, and the
+Captaines had stooles brought them, and they sate downe, and sent a young
+man aboord of vs, which brought a measure with him of an ell, and one
+fourth part, and one sixteenth part, and he would haue that foure times for
+a waight of one Angell and twelue graines: I offered him two elles, as I
+had done before for two Angels weight, which he esteemed nothing, but still
+stucke at his foure measures aforesaide: yet in the ende, when it grew very
+late, and I made him signes, that I would depart, he came to foure elles
+for the weight abouesaid, and otherwise he would not deale, and so we
+departed. This day we tooke for basons sixe ounces and a halfe and one
+eight part.
+
+The sixt day in the morning we manned our boates and the skiffe well, for
+feare of the Portugals which the last yeere had taken away a man from the
+other ships, and went on shoare, and landed, because they had no boates to
+come to vs, and so the young man which was with vs the night before was
+sent aboord, who seemed to haue dealt and bargained before with the
+Portugals for he could speake a litle Portuguise, and was perfect in
+weights and measures: at his comming be offered vs, as he had done before,
+one Angell, and twelue graines for four elles, and more he would not giue,
+and made signes, that if we would not take that, we should depart, which we
+did: but before we did indeede depart, I offered him of some rotten cloth
+three elles for his waight of an Angell and twelue graines, which he would
+not take, and then we departed making signes to him that we would go away,
+as indeede we would haue done, rather then haue giuen that measure,
+although the cloth was ill, seeing we were so neere to the places, which we
+iudged to be better for sale. Then we went aboord our ships which lay about
+a league off, and came backe againe to the shoare for sand and balaste: and
+then the Captaine perceiuing that the boats had brought no marchandize but
+came onely for water and sand, and seeing that we would depart, came vnto
+them, making signes againe to know whether would we not giue the foure
+elles, and they made signes againe, that we would giue them but three, and
+when they sawe that the boates were ready to depart, they came vnto them
+and gaue them the weight of our Angell and twelue graines, which we
+required before and made signes, that if we would come againe, they would
+take three elles. So when the boates came aboord, we layde wares in them
+both, and for the speedier dispatch I and Iohn Sauill went in one boat, and
+the Maister Iohn Makeworth, and Richard Curligin, in the other, and went on
+shoare, and that night I tooke for my part fiftie and two ounces, and in
+the other boate they tooke eight ounces and a quarter, all by one weight
+and measure, and so being very late, we departed and went aboord, and took
+in all this day three pound.
+
+The seuenth day we went a shoare againe, and that day I tooke in our boate
+three pound 19 ounces, so that we dispatched almost all the cloth that we
+caried with us before noone, and then many of the people were departed and
+those that remained had litle golde, yet they made vs signes to fetch them
+some latten basons which I would not because I purposed not to trifle out
+the time, but goe thence with speede to Don Iohns towne. But Iohn Sauill
+and Iohn Makeworth were desirous to goe againe: and I, loth to hinder them
+of any profite, consented, but went not my selfe: so they tooke eighteene
+ounces of gold and came away, seeing that the people at a certaine crie
+made, were departed.
+
+While they were at the shoare, there came a young fellow which could speake
+a little Portuguise, with three more with him, and to him I solde 39 basons
+and two small white sawcers, for three ounces, &c., which was the best
+reckoning that we did make of any basons: and in the forenoone when I was
+at the shoare, the Master solde fiue basons vnto the same fellow, for halfe
+an ounce of golde.
+
+[Sidenote: 60. Portugales in the castle of Mina.] This fellow, as farre as
+we could perceiue, had bene taken into the Castle by the Portugales, and
+was gotten away from them, for he tolde vs that the Portugales were bad
+men, and that they made them slaues if they could take them, and would put
+yrons vpon their legges, and besides he tolde vs, that as many Frenchmen or
+Englishmen, as they could take (for he could name these two very well) they
+would hang them: he tolde vs further, that there were 60 men in the castle,
+and that euery yeere there came thither two shippes, one great, and one
+small caruell, and further, that Don Iohn had warres with the Portugals,
+which gaue mee the better courage to goe to his towne, which lieth not
+foure leagues from the Castle, wherehence our men were beaten the last
+yeere.
+
+[Sidenote: The English in anno 1544 tooke away 5 Negroes.] This fellowe
+came aboord our shippe without much feare, and assoone as he came, he
+demaunded, why we had not brought againe their men, which the last yeere we
+tooke away, and could tell vs that there were fiue taken away by
+Englishmen: we made him answere, that they were in England well vsed, and
+were there kept till they could speake the language, and then they should
+be brought againe to be a helpe to Englishmen in this Countrey: and then he
+spake no more of that matter:
+
+Our boates being come aboord, we wayed and set saile and a litle after
+spied, a great fire vpon the shoare, and by the light of the fire we might
+discerne a white thing, which they tooke to be the Castle, and for feare of
+ouersbooting the towne of Don Iohn we there ankered two leagues off the
+shoare, for it is hard to fetch vp a towne here, if a ship ouershoot it.
+This day we tooke seuen pound, and fiue ounces of gold.
+
+This towne lieth in a great Bay, which is very deepe.
+
+The people in this place desired most to haue basons and cloth. They would
+buy some of them also many trifles, as kniues, horsetailes, hornes: and
+some of our men going a shoare, sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, &c.
+
+They shewed vs a certain course cloth, which I thinke to be made in France,
+for it was course wooll, and a small threed, and as thicke as wosted, and
+striped with stripes of greene, white, yellow &c. Diuers of the people did
+weare about their neckes great beades of glasse of diuerse colours. Here
+also I learned some of their language, [Marginal note: This language
+seemeth partly to be corrupt.] as followeth:
+
+     Mattea, mattea,     Is their salutation.
+     Dassee, dassee,     I thanke you.
+     Sheke,              Golde.
+     Cowrte,             Cut.
+     Cracca,             Kniues.
+     Bassina,            Basons.
+     Foco, foco,         Cloth.
+     Molta,              Much, or great store.
+
+[Sidenote: Sight of the casle of Mina.] The eight day in the morning we had
+sight of the Castle, but by reason of a miste that then fell we could not
+haue the perfect sight of it, till we were almost at the towne of Don Iohn,
+and then it cleared vp, and we saw it and a white house, as it were a
+Chappell, vpon the hill about it, and then we halled into the shoare,
+within two English miles of Don Iohns towne, and there ankered in seuen
+fadome water. Here, as in many other places before, we perceiued that the
+currant went with the winde.
+
+The land here is in some places low and in some high, and full of wood
+altogether.
+
+[Sidenote: Don Iohns towne described.] The towne of Don Iohn is but litle,
+of about twentie houses, and the most part of the towne is walled in with a
+wall of a mans height, made with reede or sedge, or some such thing. Here
+we staied two or three houres after we had ankered, to see if any man would
+come vnto vs: and seeing that none did come, we manned our boates and put
+in marchandize, and went and ankered with our boates neere to the shoare:
+then they sent out a man to vs who made vs signes that that was the towne
+of Don Iohn, and that he himselfe was in the Countrey, and would be at home
+at the going downe of the Sunne, and when he had done, he required a
+reward, as the most part of them will doe which come first aboord, and I
+gaue him one ell of cloth and he departed, and that night we heard no more
+of him.
+
+The ninth day in the morning we went againe with our boates to the shoare,
+and there came foorth a boate to vs, who made signes that Don Iohn was not
+come home, but would be at home this day: and to that place also came
+another boate from the other towne a mile from this, which is called Don
+Deuis, and brought with him gold to shew vs, making signes that we should
+come thither. I then left in this place Iohn Sauill, and Iohn Makeworth,
+and tooke the Hinde, and went to the other towne and there ankered, and
+tooke cloth and went to shore with the boate, and by and by the boates came
+to vs and brought a measure of foure yards long and a halfe, and shewed vs
+a weight of an angell and twelue graines, which they would giue for so
+much, and not otherwise: so I staied and made no bargaine. And all this day
+the barke lay at Don Iohns towne, and did nothing, hauing answere that he
+was not come home.
+
+The tenth day we went againe to the shoare, and there came out a boat with
+good store of gold, and hauing driuen the matter off a long time, and
+hauing brought the measure to a nayle lesse then three elles, and their
+weight to an angell and twentie graines, and could not bring them to more,
+I did conclude with them and solde, and within one quarter of an houre I
+tooke one pound and a quarter of an ounce of golde: and then they made me
+signes to tary, till they had parted their cloth vpon the shoare as their
+manner is, and they would come againe, and so they went away, and layde the
+cloth all abroad vpon the sande peece by peece, and by and by one came
+running downe from the towne to them, and spake vnto them, and foorthwith
+euery man made as much haste as he could away, and went into the woods to
+hide his golde and his cloth: we mistrusted some knauery, and being waued
+by them to come a shoare, yet we would not, but went aboorde the Hinde, and
+perceiued vpon the hill 30 men whom we iudged to be Portugals: and they
+went vp to the toppe of the hill and there mustered and shewed themselues,
+hauing a flagge with them. Then I being desirous to knowe what the Hart
+did, tooke the Hindes boate and went towards her, and when I came neere to
+them they shot off two pieces of ordinance which I marueiled at: I made as
+much haste as I could to her, and met her boate and skiffe comming from the
+shoare in all haste, and we met aboord together. [Sidenote: The Portugales
+of the castle of Mina inuaded our men.] They shewed me that they had beene
+a shoare all that day, and had giuen to the two sonnes of Don Iohn, to
+either of them three yardes and a halfe of doth, and three basons betwixt
+them, and had deliuered him 3 yards of cloth more and the weight of an
+angell and 12 graines, and being on land did tarie for his answere, and in
+the meane time the Portugals came running from the hill vpon them, whereof
+the Negroes a litle before had giuen them warning, and bad them to go away,
+but they perceiued it not. The sonne of Don Iohn conspired with the
+Portugales against them, so that they were almost vpon them, but yet they
+recouered their boate and set off from the shoare, and the Portugales shot
+their calieuers at them, but hurt no man, and then the shippe perceiuing
+it, shot off the two peeces aforesayde among them. Hereupon we layde bases
+in both the boates, and in the Skiffe and manned them well, and went a
+shoare againe, but because of the winde we could not land, but lay off in
+the sea about ten score and shot at them, but the hill succoured them, and
+they from the rockes and from the hilles shot at vs with their halfe
+hakes, and the Negroes more for feare then for loue stoode by them to helpe
+them, and when we saw that the Negroes were in such subiction vnto them
+that they durst not sell vs any thing for feare of them we went aboord, and
+that night the winde kept at the East, so that we could not with our ship
+fetch the Hinde, but I tooke the boate in the night and went aboord the
+barke to see what was there to be done, and in the morning we perceiued the
+towne to be in like case layde with Portugales, so we wayed and went along
+the coast. [Sidenote: The towne of Don Iohn de Viso.] This towne of Iohn de
+Viso standeth vpon an hill like the towne of Don Iohn, but it hath beene
+burned, so that there are not passing sixe houses in it: the most part of
+the golde that comes thither comes out of the countrey, and no doubt if the
+people durst for feare of the Portugals bring forth their gold, there would
+be had good store: but they dare not sell any thing, their subiection is so
+great to the Portugales. The 11 day running by the shoare we had sight of a
+litle towne foure leagues from the last towne that we came from, and about
+halfe a league from that, of another towne vpon a hill, and halfe a league
+from that also of another great towne vpon the shoare: whither we went to
+set what could there be done: if we could doe nothing, then to returne to
+the other towne, because we thought that the Portugales would leaue the
+towne vpon our departure. Along from the castle vnto this place are very
+high hilles which may be seene aboue all other hilles, but they are full of
+wood, and great red cliffes by the sea side. The boates of these places are
+somewhat large and bigge, for one of them will carie twelue men, but their
+forme is alike with the former boates of the coast. There are about these
+townes few riuers: their language differeth not from the language vsed at
+Don Iohns towne: but euery one can speake three or foure words of
+Portuguise, which they vsed altogether to vs.
+
+We sawe this night about 5 of the clocke 22 boates running along the shoare
+to the Westward, whereupon we suspected some knauery intended against vs.
+The 12 day therefore we set sayle and went further along the coast, and
+descried more townes wherein were greater houses then in the other townes,
+and the people came out of the townes to looke vpon vs, but we could see no
+boates. Two mile beyond the Eastermost towne are blacke rocks, which blacke
+rockes continue to the vttermost cape of the land, which is about a league
+off, and then the land runnes in Eastnortheast, and a sandy shoare againe:
+vpon these blacke rockes came downe certaine Negroes, which waued vs with a
+white flagge, but we perceiuing the principall place to be neere, would not
+stay, but bare still along the shoare: and as soone as we had opened the
+point of the land, we raysed another headland about a league off the point,
+which had a rocke lying off it into the sea, and that they thought to be
+the place which we sought. When we came thwart the place they knew it, and
+we put wares into our boate, and the ship being within halfe a mile of the
+place ankered in fiue fadome water and faire ground. We went on shoare with
+our boate, and ankered about ten of the clocke in the forenoone: we saw
+many boates lying vpon the shoare, and diuers came by vs, but none of them
+would come neere vs, being as we iudged afraid of vs: [Sidenote: Foure men
+taken away by the English.] because that foure men were taken perforce the
+last yeere from this place, so that no man came to vs, whereupon we went
+aboord againe, and thought here to haue made no saile: yet towardes night a
+great sort came downe to the water side, and waued vs on shoare with a
+white flagge, and afterwarde their Captaine came downe and many men with
+him, and sate him downe by the shoare vnder a tree: which when I perceiued,
+I tooke things with me to giue him: at last he sent a boat to call to vs,
+which would not come neere vs, but made vs signes to come againe the next
+day: but in fine, I got them to come aboord in offering them things to giue
+to their captaine, which were two elles of cloth, one latten bason, one
+white bason, a bottle, a great piece of beefe, and sixe bisket cakes, which
+they receiued making vs signes to come againe the next day, saying, that
+their Captain was Grand Capitane as appeared by those that attended vpon
+him with their darts and targets, and other weapons.
+
+This towne is very great and stands vpon a hill among trees, so that it
+cannot well be seene except a man be neere it: to the Eastward of it vpon
+the hill hard by the towne stand 2. high trees, which is a good marke to
+knowe the towne. And vnder the towne lieth another hill lower then it,
+whereupon the sea beates: and that end next the sea is all great blacke
+rockes, and beyonde the towne in a bay lieth another small towne.
+
+The 13 day in the morning we tooke our boate and went to shoare, and stayed
+till ten a clocke and no man came to vs: we went about therefore to returne
+aboord, and when the Negroes saw that, they came running downe with a
+flagge to waue vs againe, so we ankered againe, and then one shewed vs that
+the Captaine would come downe by and by: we sawe a saile in the meane time
+passe by vs but it was small, and we regarded it not. [Sidenote: The like
+they doe in the countrey of Prette Ianni.] Being on shore we made a tilt
+with our oares and sayle, and then there came a boate to vs with fiue men
+in her, who brought vs againe our bottle, and brought me a hen, making
+signes by the sunne, that within two houres the marchants of the countrey
+would come downe and buy all that we had: so I gaue them sixe Manillios to
+carry to their Captaine, and they made signes to haue a pledge of vs, and
+they would leaue vs another man: and we willing to do so, put one of our
+men in their boate, but they would not giue vs one of theirs, so we tooke
+our man againe, and there tarried for the marchants: and shortly after one
+came downe arrayed like their Captaine with a great traine after him, who
+saluted us friendly, and one of the chiefest of them went and sate downe
+vnder a tree, where the last yere the Captaine was wont to sit: and at last
+we perceiued a great many of them to stand at the ende of a hollow way, and
+behinde them the Portugales had planted a base, who suddenly shotte at vs
+but ouershot vs, and yet we were in a manner hard by them, and they shot at
+vs againe before we could ship our oares to get away but did no hurt. Then
+the Negroes came to the rocks hard by vs, and disharged calieuers at vs,
+and againe the Portugales shot off their base twise more, and then our ship
+shot at them, but the rockes and hilles defended them.
+
+[Sidenote: Master Robert Gainshes voyage to Guinea in anno 1554.] Then we
+went aboord to goe from this place, seeing the Negroes bent against vs,
+because that the last yeere M. Gainsh did take away the Captaines sonne and
+three others from this place with their golde, and all that they had about
+them: [Sidenote: The English were offered to build a towne in Guine.] which
+was the cause that they became friends with the Portugales, whom before
+they hated, as did appeare the last yeere by the courteous intertainement
+which the Trinitie had there, when the Captaine came aboord the shippe, and
+brought them to his towne, and offered them ground to build a Castle in,
+and there they had good sales.
+
+The 14 day we wayed and plyed backe againe to seeke the Hinde, which in the
+morning we met, and so we turned both back to the Eastwardes to see what we
+could doe at that place where the Trinitie did sell her eight frises the
+last yeere. The Hinde had taken eighteene ounces and a halfe more of golde
+of other Negroes, the day after that we left them. This day about one of
+the clocke we espied certaine boates vpon the sand and men by them and went
+to them with marchandizes, and tooke three ounces of gold for 18 fuffs of
+cloth, euery fuffe three yards and a halfe after one angell and 12 graines
+the fuffe, and then they made me signes that the next day I should haue
+golde enough: so the Master took the Hinde with Iohn Sauill and Iohn
+Makeworth, and went to seeke the place aforesaid, and I with Richard
+Pakeman remained in this place to see what we could do the next day: and
+when the Negroes perceiued our ship to go away, they feared that the other
+would follow, and so sent forth 2 boats to vs with 4 men in them, requiring
+vs to tary and to giue them one man for a pledge, and 2 of them should tary
+with vs for him, so Edward M. Morleis seruant seeing these men so earnest
+therein offered himselfe to be pledge, and we let him goe for two of them,
+one whereof had his waights and scales, and a chaine of golde aboute his
+necke, and another about his arme. They did eate of such things as we had
+and were well contented. In the night the Negroes kept a light vpon the
+shoare thwart of vs, and about one of the clocke we heard and saw the light
+of a base which shot off twise at the said light, and by and by discharged
+two calieuers, which in the end we perceiued to be the Portugals brigandine
+which followed vs from place to place, to giue warning to the people of the
+countrey, that they should not deale with vs.
+
+The 15 day in the morning the Captaine came downe with 100 men with him,
+and brought his wife, and many others brought their wiues also, because
+their towne was 8 miles vp in the countrey, and they determined to lie by
+the sea side till they had brought what they would. When he was come he
+sent our man aboord, and required to haue two men pledges, and he himselfe
+would come aboord, and I sent him two, of whom he tooke but one, and so
+came aboord vs, he and his wife with diuers of his friends, and brought me
+a goate and two great rootes, and I gaue him againe a latten bason, a white
+bason, 6 manillios, and a bottell of Malmesie, and to his wife a small
+casket. After this we began to make our measure and weight: and he had a
+weight of his owne which held one angell and 14 graines, and required a
+measure of 4 elles and a halfe. In fine we concluded the 8 part for one
+angell and 20 graines, and before we had done, they tooke mine owne weight
+and measure.
+
+The 16 day I tooke 8 li. 1 ounce of gold: and since the departure of the
+Hinde I heard not of her, but when our pledge went into the countrey the
+first night, he said he saw her cast anker aboue fiue leagues from this
+place. The 17 day I sold about 17 pieces of cloth, and tooke 4 li. 4 ounces
+and a halfe of gold. The 18 day the captaine desired to haue some of our
+wine, and offered halfe a ducket of gold for a bottell: but I gaue it him
+freely, and made him and his traine drinke besides. And this day also I
+tooke 5 li. 5 ounces of gold. The 19 day we sold about 18 clothes, and
+tooke 4 li. 4 ounces and one quarter of golde.
+
+The 20 day tooke 3 li. sixe ounces and a quarter of golde. The 21 we tooke
+8 li. 7. ounces and a quarter. The 22. 3. li. 8. ounces and a quarter. And
+this night about 4 of the clocke the Captaine who had layen all this while
+vpon the shoare, went away with all the rest of the people with him.
+
+The 23 day we were waued a shoare by other Negroes, and sold them cloth,
+caskets, kniues, and a dosen of bels, and tooke 1 li. 10 ounces of gold.
+The 24 likewise we sold bels, sheetes, and thimbles, and tooke two li. one
+ounce and a quarter of gold. The 25 day we sold 7 dosen of smal bels and
+other things, and then perceiuing their gold to be done, we wayed and set
+sayle and went to leeward to seeke the Hinde, and about 5 of the clocke at
+night we had sight of her, and bare with her, and understood that shee had
+made some sales. The 26 day wee receiued out of the Hinde 48 li. 3 ounces
+and one eight part of golde, which they had taken in the time that we were
+from them. And this day vpon the request of a Negro that came vnto vs from
+a captaine, we went to shoare with our marchandize, and tooke 7 li. and one
+ounce of gold. At this place they required no gages of vs, but at night
+they sent a man aboord vs, which lay with vs all night, because we might
+knowe that they would also come to vs the next day. The 27 day in both our
+shippes we tooke 8. li. one ounce, three quarters and halfe a quarter of
+golde. The 28 we made sales for the companie, and tooke one pound and half
+an ounce of gold. The 29 day in the morning we heard two calieuers shot off
+vpon the shore, which we iudged to be either by the Portugales or by the
+Negroes of the Portugales: we manned our boates and armed our selues and
+went to shoare, but coulde finde nothing: for they were gone. The 30 day we
+made more sales for the companie and for the Masters.
+
+The 31 we sent our boate to shoare to take in sand for balast, and there
+our men met the Negroes, with whom they had made sale the day before a
+fishing which did helpe them to fill sand, and hauing no gold, sold fish to
+our men for their handkerchiefs and nightkerchiefes.
+
+The 1 day of February we wayed and went to another place, and tooke 1 li.
+9. ounces 3 quarters of gold. The 2 day we made more sales: but hauing
+viewed our victuals we determined to tarie no long time vpon the coast,
+because the most part of our drinke was spent, and that which remained grew
+sowre. [Sidenote: They returne for England.] The 3 and 4 dayes we made some
+sales, though not great, and finding the wind this 4. day to come off the
+shoare, we set saile and ranne along the shoare to the Westwards: vpon this
+coast we found by experience that ordinarily about 2 of the clocke in the
+night the winde comes off the shoare at Northnortheast, and so continueth
+vntil eight of the clocke in the morning: and all the rest of the day and
+night it comes out of Southwest: and as for the tide or currant vpon this
+shoare, it goeth continually with the winde. The 5 day we continued sayling
+and thought to haue met with some English ships, but found none.
+
+The sixt day we went our course Southwest to fetch vnder the line, and
+ranne by estimation 24 leagues.
+
+The 13 day wee thought our selues by our reckoning to be cleare off the
+Cape das Palmas, and ranne 12 leagues.
+
+The 22 day we were thwart of the Cape de Monte, which is to the Westward of
+the Riuer de Sestos, about 30 leagues.
+
+The first day of March in a Ternado we lost the Hinde, whereupon we set vp
+a light and shot off a piece but could not heare of her, so that then we
+strooke our saile and taried for her, and in the morning had sight of her
+againe three leagues a sterne off vs.
+
+Vpon the 22 day we found our selues to be in the height of Cape Verde,
+which stands in 14 degrees and a halfe.
+
+From this day till the 29 day we continued our course, and then we found
+our selues to be in 22 degrees. This day one of our men called William
+King, who had bene long sicke, died in his sleepe, his apparel was
+distributed to those that lackt it, and his money was kept for his friends
+to be deliuered them at his comming home.
+
+The 30 day we found our selues to be vnder the Tropike.
+
+The 31 day we went our course, and made way 18 leagues.
+
+From the first day of Aprill to the 20 we went our course, and then found
+our selues to bee in the height of the Asores.
+
+The seuenth day of May we fell with the South part of Ireland, and going on
+shoare with our boate had fresh drinke, and two sheepe of the countrey
+people, which were wilde Kernes, and we gaue them golde for them, and
+bought further such other victuals as we had neede of, and thought would
+serue vs till we arriued in England.
+
+The 14. day with the afternoone tide we went into the Port of Bristoll
+called Hungrode, and there ankered in safetie and gaue thankes to God for
+our safe arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage made by Maister William Towrson to the coast of Guinea,
+  and the Castle of Mina, in the yeere 1556. with the Tiger of London, a
+  ship of 120 tunnes, the Hart of London of 60 tunnes, and a Pinnesse of
+  sixteene tunnes.
+
+The fourteenth day of September, the yeere abouesayd, we departed from
+Harwich, and directed our course for the Isle of Sillie, to meete there
+with the Hart and Pinnesse, which were rigged and victualed at Bristoll,
+but arriuing there the eight and twientieth day we found them not, and
+therefore after long lying at Hull to tarrie for them, but not espying
+them, we turned backe to Plimmouth the 12 day of October, and being there,
+the Hart and the Pinnesse came to vs, so that the 15 of Nouember we all
+departed together from Plimmouth at one of the clocke in the after noone,
+and the 28 day we had sight of the Isle of Porto Santo, and the next day in
+the morning of Madera.
+
+The third day of December we fell with the Ile of Palma, and the 9 we were
+thwart of Cape Blanke, and found there certaine Carauels fishing for
+Pargoes.
+
+The 19 we found our selues in the height of Sierra Leona, and all this day
+we ranne thwart of certaine Currants, which did set to the West
+Southwestward so fast as if it had bene the ouerfall of a sand, making a
+great noyse like vnto a streame or tide-gate when the water is shoale: and
+to prooue whither we could finde ground in this place, we sounded and had
+150 fadome, and no ground, and so departed.
+
+The 30 of December we fell with the coast of Guinea, and had first sight of
+it about 4 leagues off. The best marke that we could take of the place to
+knowe it was three hilles, which lay Northeast and by East from vs: betwixt
+the Northermost two hilles there are two high and great trees standing in
+sight as it were a sailes breadth one from another, and a litle more to the
+Northwestwards are certaine hommocks. Hauing sayled somewhat into the
+shoare wee tooke our selues to be shotte somewhat past the riuer de Sestos,
+so that we kept about to fetch it. And a litle after we had sight of three
+sayles of shippes and two pinnesses which were in the weather of vs, and
+hauing sight of them we made our selues readie to meete them, and halled
+off our ships to fetch the winde as neere as we could: and hauing sayled
+about an houre or two, they also went about, and went as we went to make
+themselues readie, and when we had them in chase, they went away from vs:
+but when they had made themselues readie, they kept about againe, and came
+with vs verie finely appointed with their streamers, and pendants and
+ensignes, and noyse of trumpets very brauely: so when we met, they had the
+weather of vs, and we being determined to fight, if they had bene
+Portugals, waued them to come vnder our Lee, which they denied stoutly:
+then we demaunded of them whence they were, and they sayd of France, we
+told them againe that we were of London in England. They asked of vs what
+Portugals wee had seene, we answered, none but Fishermen: then they told vs
+that there were certaine Portugall ships gone to the Mina to defend it, and
+that they met with another at the riuer de Sestos, which was a ship of two
+hundred which they had burned, and had saued none but the master and two or
+three Negroes, and certaine others which were sore burned which they left a
+shoare there. Then they desired to come aboord of vs with their boates to
+talke with vs, and wee gaue them leaue. Then the captaine of the Admirall
+and diuers others came aboord very friendly, desiring vs to keepe them
+company because of the Portugals, and to goe to the Mina with them: wee
+told them that we had not watered, and that we were but now fallen with the
+coast, and they shewed vs that we were fiftie leagues past the riuer de
+Sestos: notwithstanding there was water enough to be had, and they would
+helpe vs to water with their owne boates because they would haue our
+companie. And told vs further, that they had bene sixe weekes vpon the
+coast, and had gotten but three tunnes of graines amongst them all: and
+when wee had heard them, we made our reckoning that although the Mina were
+cleare, yet if they did goe before vs, they would marre our market; and if
+it were not cleare, then if the Portugals were there and did take them,
+they would vnderstand that we were behind, and so would waite for vs.
+[Sidenote: They admit certaine Frenchmen into their companie.] And further
+we made account that if we went with them we should doe as well as they, if
+the coast were cleare: if it were not cleare, then by them we were assured
+to be the stronger. Therefore hauing considered thus much of their gentle
+offers, we tolde them that the next day wee would conferre more largely of
+the matter. Whereupon they desired me to come the next day to dinner to
+them, and to bring the masters of our ships with me, and such merchants as
+I thought good, promising to giue vs water out of their owne ships if we
+would take it, or els to tarie with vs and helpe vs to water with their own
+boats and pinnasses.
+
+The 31 day in the morning the Admirall sent his boat aboord for me, and I
+tooke our masters and certaine of our marchants and went to him, who had
+prouided a notable banquet for vs, and intreated vs very friendly, desiring
+vs still to keepe his company, promising that what victuals were in his
+ships, or other things that might doe vs pleasure vntill the end, we should
+haue the one halfe of it, offering vs if we would to furle his Flags, and
+to bee at our commaundement in all things.
+
+In the ende we agreed to come to an anker, and to send our boat on shore
+with the Admirals boat, and one of his pinnasses, and an Almaine which they
+had brought out of France, to seeke water, as for our pinnasse she came to
+an anker to seaward of vs all, and would not come at vs. All this night the
+boats continued on shore.
+
+The first day of Ianuary our boats came to vs againe and had found no
+riuer. Whereupon we weighed and set saile, and ankred againe at another
+riuer.
+
+The 2 day we went into the riuer and bargained, and tooke 5 small Elephants
+teeth.
+
+The 3 day we tooke 5 more.
+
+[Sidenote: An assault vpon elephants.] The fourth day the French Admirall
+and wee tooke fifteene small teeth. This day wee tooke thirtie men with vs
+and went to seeke Elephants, our men being all well armed with
+harquebusses, pikes, long bowes, crossebowes, partizans, long swordes, and
+swordes and bucklers: wee found two Elephants which wee stroke diuers times
+with harquebusses and long bowes, but they went away from vs and hurt one
+of our men. The fift day we set saile and ranne along the coast.
+
+The 6 day we fell with the riuer de S. Andre, at which place the land is
+somewhat high to the Westward of the riuer, and a faire Baie also to the
+Westward of it: but to the Eastward of it it is lowe land.
+
+The 7 day we went into the Riuer and found no village, but certaine wild
+Negros not accustomed to trade. It is a very great riuer and 7 fadome water
+in some places at the entring. Here we filled water, and after set saile.
+
+The 8 day we sailed along the shore and came to the red cliffes, and went
+forward in sailing the 9 day also.
+
+The 10 day we came together to confer with captaine Blundel Admiral of the
+French ships, Ierom Baudet his vice admiral, and Iohn de Orleans master of
+a ship of 70 tunne, and with their marchants, and agreed that when God
+should send vs to any place where wee might make sale, that we should be of
+one accord and not one of vs hurt the market of the other, but certaine of
+our boates to make the price for all the rest, and then one boate to make
+sale for euery shippe. This night our boats going to the shore met with
+certaine Negros, who said that they had gold, and therefore we here cast
+anker.
+
+The 11 day all the day we tooke but one halfe angel weight of 4 graines,
+which we tooke by hand, for the people of this place had no weight: the
+Negros called this place Allow.
+
+The 12 day we ran along the coast and found but one towne, but no boates
+would come out to vs, and therefore we went our course.
+
+The 13 day I tooke my boat and went along the shore, and passed by diuers
+small townes, and was waued to come on shore at 3 places, but the sea went
+so high vpon the shore, that it was not possible for vs to land, neither
+could they come to vs if they had had boats, as I could see none but at one
+place, where there was one that would haue come vnto vs, but the Land-wash
+went so sore that it ouerthrew his boat, and one of the men was drowned,
+which the people lamented, and cried so sore, that we might easily heare
+them, and they got his body out of the sea, and caried it amongst them to
+their towne.
+
+[Sidenote: The castle of Mina.] The 14 day we came within Saker-shot of the
+castle, and straightway they set forth an Almade to descry vs, and when
+they perceiued that we were no Portugals, they ranne within the towne
+againe: for there is a great towne by the Castle which is called by the
+Negros Dondou. Without this there lie two great rockes like Ilands, and the
+castle standeth vpon a point which sheweth almost like an Iland. Before we
+came at this castle, we found the land for fiue or six leagues to be high
+land, and about seuen leagues before we came to the castle, lowe land,
+vntil we came at the castle, and then wee found the land high againe. This
+castle standeth about fiue leagues to the East of Cape de Tres puntas. Here
+I tooke the boate with our Negros and ranne alongst the shore till I came
+to the Cape and found two small townes, but no boates at them, neither any
+traffique to be had. At these places our Negros did vnderstand them well,
+and one of them went ashore at all the places and was well receiued of
+them. This night we ankred at the Cape de Tres puntas.
+
+The 15 day I tooke our boat and went along the shore, and about 3 leagues
+beyond the Eastermost part of the Cape we found a faire Bay where we ran
+in, and found a smal towne and certaine boates which belonged to the same
+towne, but the Negros in a long time would not come to vs, but at the last
+by the perswasion of our owne Negros, one boat came to vs, and with him we
+sent George our Negro a shore, and after he had talked with them, they came
+aboard our boates without feare, and I gaue to their captaine a bason, and
+two strings of Margarets, and they shewed vs about 5 duckats weight of
+gold, but they required so much for it that wee would not take it, because
+the Frenchman and we had agreed to make price of our goods all in one boat,
+and the price being made then euery man to sell in his owne boat, and no
+man to giue more then the price which should be set by vs al. This place is
+called Bulle, and here the Negros were very glad of our Negros, and shewed
+them all the friendship they could, when they had told them that they were
+the men that were taken away being now againe brought by vs.
+
+The Negros here shewed vs that a moneth since there were 3 ships that
+fought together, and the two shippes put the other to flight: and before
+that at the castle of Mina there were 4 ships of the Portugals which met
+with one Frenchman, which Frenchman caused them all to flee, which shippe
+we tooke to be the Roebarge: for the Frenchmen of our company iudged her to
+be thereabout that time with her pinnasse also. And further, that after her
+went a shippe of twelue score named the Shaudet all alone, and after her a
+ship of fourescore, and both for the Mina. And there were two others also
+which they left, one at Cape Verde called the Leuriere of Diepe, and
+another at the riuer De Sestos, besides these 3 which all this time be in
+our company, whose names be these:
+
+The Espoier of Hableneff which is the Admirall, whose captaine is Denis
+Blundell.
+
+The Leuriere of Roan Viceadmirall, whose master is Ierome Baudet.
+
+The other is of Hunfleur whose master is called Iohn de Orleans.
+
+The sixteenth day I went along the shore with two pinasses of the
+Frenchmen, and found a Baie and a fresh riuer, and after that went to a
+towne called Hanta, twelue leagues beyond the Cape. At this towne our
+Negros were well knowen, and the men of the towne wept for ioy when they
+saw them, and demanded of them where Anthonie and Binne had bene: and they
+told them that they had bene at London in England, and should bee brought
+home the next voyage. So after this, our Negros came aboord with other
+Negros which brought a weight with them, which was so small that wee could
+not giue them the halfe of that which they demaunded for it.
+
+The Negros here told vs that there were fiue Portugall shippes at the
+Castle, and one pinnasse, and that the Portugals did much harme to their
+Countrey, and that they liued in feare of them, and we told them againe,
+that we would defend them from the Portugals whereof they were very glad.
+
+The 17 day we went a shoare and the Frenchmen with vs, but did no great
+good, the Negros were so vnreasonable, we sold 80. Manellios for one ounce
+of gold.
+
+[Sidenote: The Negros brought home by our men.] Then wee departed and went
+to Shamma, and went into the riuer with fiue boates well appointed with men
+and ordinance, and with our noises of trumpets and drummes, for we thought
+here to haue found some Portugals but there were none: so wee sent our
+Negros on shoare, and after them went diuers of vs, and were very well
+receiued, and the people were very glad of our Negros, specially one of
+their brothers wiues, and one of their aunts, which receiued them with much
+ioy, and so did all the rest of the people, as if they had bene their
+naturall brethren: we comforted the captaine and told him that hee should
+not feare the Portugals, for wee would defend him from them: whereupon we
+caused our boats to shoote off their bases and harquebusses, and caused our
+men to come on shore with their long bowes, and they shot before the
+captaine, which he, with all the rest of the people, wondred much at,
+specially to see them shoot so farre as they did, and assaied to draw their
+bowes but could not. When it grew to be late, we departed to our ships, for
+we looked euery houre for the Portugals. And here the Negros shewed vs that
+there was an English ship at the Mina, which had brought one of the Negros
+againe, which Robert Gaynsh tooke away.
+
+The 18 day we went into the riuer with no lesse strength then before, and
+concluded with the Negros to giue them for euery Fuffe two yardes and three
+nailes of Cloth, and to take for it one angel-duckat: so that we tooke in
+all 70 Duckats, whereof the Frenchmen had fortie, and wee thirtie.
+
+The nineteenth day wee went a shore euery man for himselfe, and tooke a
+good quantitie of gold, and I for my part tooke foure pound and two ounces
+and a halfe of gold, and our Hartes boate tooke one and twentie ounces. At
+night the Negros shewed vs that the next day the Portugals would be with vs
+by land or by Sea: and when we were ready to depart, we heard diuers
+harquebusses shoote off in the woods by vs which wee knew to bee Portugals,
+which durst come no neerer to vs, but shot off in the woods to see if they
+could feare vs and so make vs to leaue our traffique.
+
+The 20 day we manned our fiue boats, and also a great boat of the
+Frenchmens with our men and the Admirals, 12 of them in their murrians and
+corsets, and the rest all well appoynted, with foure trumpets, a drumme and
+a Fife, and the boate all hanged with streamers of Silke and pendants very
+faire, and went into the riuer and traffiqued, our man of warre lying off
+and on in the riuer to waft vs, but we heard no more of the Portugals. This
+day the Negros told vs that there were certain ships come into Hanta, which
+towne is about two leagues to the Westward of this place.
+
+This 21 day we manned our boats againe and went to a place a league from
+this to the Westwards, and there found many Negros with another Captaine,
+and sold at the same rate that wee had done with the others.
+
+The 22 day we went ashore againe and traffiqued in like sort quietly, and I
+tooke 4 pound and six ounces of gold.
+
+The 23 day about night the Negros with their captaine came to vs and told
+vs that the king of Portugals ships were departed from the Castle, meaning
+the next day to plie to the windward to come to vs, giuing vs warning to
+take heed to our selues: we told them againe that wee were very glad of
+their comming, and would be ready at all times to meet them, and to assure
+them that wee were glad of it, wee sounded our trumpets, and shot off
+certaine bases whereof the Negros were very glad, and requested vs that if
+the Portugals sought to hinder our traffique, to shew them all the
+extremitie that we could, promising vs that if they came by land, they
+would aduertise vs thereof.
+
+The 24 we went a shore with our trumpets and drummes, and traffiqued, and I
+bade the captaine of the towne to dinner.
+
+[Sidenote: Fiue sailes of Portingals descried.] The 25 day we being a
+shore, our ships had descried fiue sailes of the king of Portugals, and our
+ships shot off ordinance to call vs away, and we threw euery man his caske
+ashore for water, and went to our ships, and by that time we had weighed
+and giuen order one to another what to do, it was night, so that that night
+nothing was done. We set saile and lay close all night to get the wind if
+we could: we were neere some of them, and one shot off a piece which wee
+iudged to be the Admirall of the Portugals, to cause the rest to come and
+speake with him: so all this night we made our selues ready for fight.
+
+The 26 we came in with the shore and had sight of the Portugals where they
+rid at anker, and we bare with them, and we gaue all our men white
+scarffes, to the ende that the Frenchmen might know one the other if we
+came to boording: but the night came vpon vs that we could not fetch them,
+but we ankered within demie-Culuering shot of them.
+
+[Sidenote: The fight with the Portugals.] The 27 day we weighed and so did
+the Portugals, and about eleuen of the clocke wee had the wind of them, and
+then we went roome with them, which when they pereeiued, they kept about to
+the shore againe, and wee after them, and when they were so neere the shore
+that they could not well runne any further on that boord, they kept about
+againe, and lay to the Seaward, and then we kept about with them, and were
+a head of them, and tooke in our topsailes and taried for them: and the
+first that came vp was a small barke which sailed so well that she cared
+not for any of vs, and caried good ordinance: and as soone as she came vp,
+she shot at vs, and ouershot vs, and then she shot at the Admirall of the
+Frenchmen, and shot him through in two or three places, and went forth a
+head of vs, because we were in our fighting sailes: then came vp another
+carauell vnder our Lee in like case which shot at vs and at the Frenchman,
+and hurt two of his men and shot him through the maine maste. And after
+them came vp the Admirall vnder our Lee also, but he was not able to doe vs
+so much harme as the small shippes, because he caried ordinance higher then
+they, neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, because our
+shippe was so weake in the side, that she laid all her ordinance in the
+Sea: [Sidenote: The French forsake our men.] wherefore we thought to lay
+the great ship aboord, and as soone as the French Admirall went roome with
+him, be fell a sterne and could not fetch him, and after he fell asterne of
+two carauels more and could fetch none of them, but fell to Leeward of them
+all: and when he was to Leeward, he kept about to the shoreward, and left
+vs, and then we put out our topsailes and gaue them chase, and both the
+other Frenchmen kept the wind, and would not come neere vs, and our owne
+ship was a sterne so that she could not come to vs: and after we had
+folowed them about two houres to the seaward, they kept about againe
+towards the shore, thinking to pay vs as they went along by, and to haue
+the wind of the French Admirall which before ran in towards the shore, and
+we kept about with them, and kept still the wind of them thinking that our
+Viceadmiral and the other would haue folowed vs as wee willed them to do:
+but after that the Portugall was past by them, and euery one had shot at vs
+and our Viceadmirall, both our Viceadmirall and the two Frenchmen, and our
+owne pinnasse left vs in the laps, and ran to seaward, and we ran still
+along, and kept the wind of them to succour the French Admirall, who was
+vnder all of their Lees, and when they met with him, euery one went roome
+with him, and gaue him the broad side, and after they cast about againe,
+and durst not boord him, because they sawe vs in the weather of them, or
+els without doubt they had taken or sunke them, for three of them which
+were the smallest went so fast that it was not possible for a ship to boord
+them, and caried such ordinance that if they had had the weather of vs,
+they would haue troubled 3 of the best ships that we had, and as for their
+Admirall and Viceadmirall they were both notablie appointed.
+
+When the Frenchman was cleare of them, hee laie as neere the winde as hee
+could, and wee followed them still towardes the shore, and there the
+Admirall ranne to Sea after the rest, and left vs all alone: and when the
+Portugals perceiued that we were alone, and gaue them chase, they kept
+about with vs and we with them, to keepe the wind of them, and we ranne
+still within base shot of them, but they shot not at vs, because we had the
+weather of them, and sawe that they could do vs no hurt: and thus we
+folowed one another vntil night, and in the night we lost them, but as for
+all the rest of our ships, they packed on all the sailes that they could
+and ranne to sea, and as they themselues confesse, they praied for vs, but
+as for helpe at their hands we could haue none.
+
+The 28 day we met with our Viceadmirall, our pinnasse, and two of the
+Frenchmen, and the third was fled which was a ship of fourscore tunne, and
+belonged to Roan: and when I had the sight of the rest of our ships, I
+tooke our skiffe and went to them to know why they lost vs in such a case,
+and Iohn Kire made me answere that his ship would neither reare nor steere,
+and as for the pinnasse, Iohn Dauis made me answere that she would doe
+nothing, and that he could cary her no further, for her rudder was broken,
+so that the Hart was glad to towe her. Then I went to the French Admirall,
+and found himselfe to be a man of good stomacke, but the one halfe of his
+men were sicke and dead: and then I talked with the smaller Frenchman, and
+hee made me answere that he could doe nothing, saying, that his ship would
+beare no saile, and had 16 of his men dead and sicke, so he made vs plaine
+answere that he was able to doe nothing. After this the Frenchman durst not
+anker for feare of the Portugales.
+
+The 29 day the master of the pinnasse came to vs and sayd that they were
+not able to keepe her any longer, and then wee viewed her and seeing there
+was no remedie, her rudder with all the iron worke being broken both aloft
+and belowe, wee agreed to breake her vp and to put the men into the Hart.
+So wee tooke out of her foure bases, one anker, and certaine fire wood, and
+set her on fire, and afterwards ran along the coast.
+
+The thirtie day we went in to the shore, and spake with certaine Negros,
+who told vs that some French shippes had bene there, but wee could not
+bargaine with them they were so vnreasonable.
+
+The 31 day I went to shore but did not traffike.
+
+The 1 day of Februarie we weighed, seeing we could not bring the Negros to
+any reason, and came to another place which standeth vpon an hill.
+
+The third day I went to a towne foure leagues from vs, and shot off two
+pieces, and the Captaine came to vs, and I sent Thomas Rippen a land who
+knew the Captaine, and assoone as he came on shore, the Captaine knew him
+and diuers of the Negros who then began to aske for mee, and hauing told
+the Captaine that I was in the boate, hee made no longer tarying but by and
+by caused two boates to be put to the Sea, and came to me himselfe, and
+when he sawe me, he cryed to me before hee came to the boat and seemed to
+be the gladdest man aliue, and so did all the companie that knew mee, and I
+gaue him a reward as the maner of the Countrey is, and caused the Frenchman
+to giue another, promising the next day to giue him wine: and that night
+because it was late, he would not talke of any price but left me a pledge,
+and tooke another of me and so departed.
+
+The 4 day going on shore, I found that the ships of France which had bin
+there, had done much hurt to our markets but yet I tooke fiue ounces and a
+halfe of gold.
+
+The fift day I tooke eight ounces and one eight part of gold: but I saw
+that the Negros perceiued the difference in Cloth betwixt ours and that
+which the Frenchmen had, which was better, and broader then ours: and then
+I told captaine Blundel that I would goe to the Leeward, because I
+perceiued that being there where his Cloth was sold, I should do no good,
+whereof hee was sorie.
+
+The 6 day there came an almade and Negros aboord me, requesting me to come
+to their towne for they had much gold and many marchants: and so I went and
+found their old Captaine gone, and another in his place: but this night wee
+did no good, because the marchants were not come downe: so he required a
+pledge which I let him haue, and tooke another of him.
+
+The 7 day George our Negro came to vs, who had followed vs at the least 30
+leagues in a small boat, and when he came, the Negros and we soone
+concluded of price. I tooke this day fiue pound and one ounce, and 3
+quarters of gold. This Negro we had left at Shamma at the time of the
+fight, who said that he saw the fight being on shore, and that when we were
+gone from the Portugals, the Portugals came into their riuer, and told them
+that the Englishmen had slaine two Portugals with a piece, which was in
+deed out of our ship, and they required harbour there, but the captaine of
+Shamma would not suffer them.
+
+The 8 day we tooke nineteene pound three ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 9 day we tooke two pound six ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 10 day three pound.
+
+[Sidenote: The Frenchmen bridled by the English.] The 11 day came to vs
+Ierome Bawdet the Viceadmiral of the Frenchmen and his pinnasse, and he
+shewed vs that where we left them there was no good to be done, and sayd he
+would goe to the Eastward, but we told him hee should not: and thereupon
+commaunded him to goe to his company which he was appointed to bee with,
+which hee refused to doe vntill wee had shot three or foure pieces at their
+pinnasse, and when the ship sawe that, she kept about, and ranne to
+Seaward, and durst come no neerer to vs, so the pinnasse went after her. We
+tooke this day one pound fiue ounces.
+
+The 12 day there came one of the Frenchmens pinnasses to vs laden with
+cloth, and would haue made sale, but I would not suffer him, and therefore
+tooke him and sent him aboord of our ship, and caused him to ride there all
+day. We tooke fiue pound six ounces and a halfe.
+
+The 14 day we tooke of some Negros 4 ounces of gold.
+
+The 16 we came to another towne.
+
+The 17 day I went a shore and vnderstood that 3 of the Portugall ships were
+at the Castle, and the other two at Shamma. The captaine of this towne was
+gone to the principall towne, to speake with their king, and would returne
+shortly as they told me, and so he did, and brought me a weight and
+measure, and I sent a man to see that principall towne, and their king. The
+Portugall ships rid so neere vs, that within 3 houres they might be with
+vs, yet were all contented to tary for sales.
+
+The 18 day certaine of the kings seruants came to vs, and we tooke one
+pound two ounces, and one eight part of gold.
+
+The 10 day we tooke fiue pound one ounce.
+
+The 20 day one pound and foure ounces.
+
+The 21 I tooke foure pound and one ounce, and the Negroes enquired for fine
+cloth, and I opened two pieces which were not fine enough, as they sayd,
+but seeing that we had no other, they bought of them. At night I prouided a
+gift, or present, and sent one marchant and a mariner with it to the king,
+to certifie him of our want of victuals, by reason whereof we could not
+stay long: for in deed we searched our ship, and the most part of our beere
+was leaked out of all our barrels.
+
+The 22 day we tooke three ounces and a halfe.
+
+[Sidenote: The offer of the king to the English to build a Fort.] The 23
+our men came from the king Abaan, and told vs, that he had receiued them
+very friendly, but he had litle gold, but promised, if we would tary, to
+send into all his countrey for gold for vs, and he willed our men at their
+comming home to speake to our king to send men and prouision into his
+countrey, to build a castle, and to bring Tailors with them, to make them
+apparell, and good wares, and they should be sure to sell them: but for
+that present the Frenchmen had filled them full of cloth.
+
+This towne standeth about foure leagues vp in the land, and is by the
+estimation of our men, as big in circuit as London, but the building is
+like to the rest of the countrey. They haue about this Towne great store of
+the wheate of the Countrey, and they iudge, that on one side of the towne
+there were one thousand rikes of Wheate, and another sorte of Corne which
+is called Mill, which is much vsed in Spaine.
+
+[Sidenote: A pretie deuise to descrie the enemie.] About this towne they
+keepe good watch euery night, and haue to warne the watchmen certaine
+cordes made fast ouer their wayes which lead into the town, and certaine
+bels vpon them, so that if any man touch the cordes, the bels ring, and
+then the watchmen runne foorth of their watch houses to see what they be:
+and if they be enemies, if they passe the cord, they haue prouision with
+certaine nets hanged ouer the wayes, where they must passe, to let fall
+vpon them, and so take them, and otherwise then by the wayes it is not
+possible to enter the towne, by reason of the thickets and bushes which are
+about the same, and the towne is also walled round about with long cords,
+and bound together with sedge and certaine barkes of tree.
+
+[Sidenote: The kings friendly entertainment of our men.] When our men came
+to the towne, it was about fiue of the clock in the morning, for there they
+trauell alwayes in the night by reason of the heate of the day: and about
+nine of the clocke, the king sent for them, for there may no man come to
+him before he be sent for, and then they would haue carried their present
+with them: but the Negros told them, that they must bee three times brought
+before him, before they might offer their gift: and when they came to him,
+he talked with them, and receiued them very friendly and kept them about
+half an hour, and then they departed, and after that sent for them againe
+three times, and last of all, they brought him their present, which he
+receiued thankfully, and then caused a pot of wine of Palme to be brought
+foorth, and made them drinke: and before they drinke, both here and in all
+the Countrey, they vse certaine ceremonies.
+
+[Sidenote: Their ceremonies in drinking.] First, they bring foorth their
+pot of drinke, and then they make a hole in the ground, and put some of the
+drinke into it, and they cast the earth vpon it, which they digged forth
+before, and then they set the pot vpon the same, then they take a little
+thing made of a goord, and with that they take out of the same drinke, and
+put it vpon the ground in three places, and in diuers places they haue
+certaine bunches of the pils of Palme trees set in the ground before them,
+and there they put in some drinke, doing great reuerence in all places to
+the same Palme trees.
+
+All these ceremonies first done, the king tooke a cup of gold, and they put
+him in wine, and hee dranke of it, and when he dranke, the people cried all
+with one voice, Abaan, Abaan, with certaine other words, like as they cry
+commonly in Flanders, vpon the Twelfe night, The kinning [sic--KTH] drinks:
+and when he had drunke, then they gaue drinke to euery one, and that done,
+the king licensed them to depart, and euery one that departeth from him
+boweth 3 times towards him, and waueth with both hands together, as they
+bow, and then do depart. The king hath commonly sitting by him 8 or 10
+ancient men with gray beards.
+
+This day we tooke one pound and 10 ounces of gold.
+
+The 24 day we tooke 3 pound and 7 ounces.
+
+The 25 we tooke 3 ounces and 3 quarters.
+
+The 26 day we tooke 2 pound and 10 ounces.
+
+The 27 two pound and fiue ounces.
+
+The 28 foure pound, and then seeing that there was no more gold to be had,
+we weighed and went foorth.
+
+The first day of March we came to a towne called Mowre, but we found no
+boats nor people there: but being ready to depart, there came two Almades
+to vs from another towne, of whom we tooke two ounces and a halfe of gold:
+and they tolde vs that the Negros that dwelled at Mowre were gone to dwell
+at Lagoua.
+
+The second day we came thwart of the castle, and about two leagues off, and
+there saw all the fiue Portugall ships at anker, and this day by night we
+fetched Shamma.
+
+[Sidenote: Ships of Portugall.] The third day we had sight of one tall
+ship, of about two hundred tunnes in the weather of vs, and within lesse
+then two leagues of our ships, and then we saw two more a sterne of her,
+the one a ship of fiue hundred or more, and the other a pinnesse: and these
+were a new fleet at that present arriued out of Portugall. Whereupon we
+wayed, and made shift to double out of the land, and then the winde comming
+to the South-southwest, the Hart going roome with them fell three leagues
+to the leewards of vs. These Portugals gaue vs the chase from nine of the
+clocke in the morning, till fiue at night, but did no good against vs. At
+last, we perceiuing the Admirall to be farre a sterne of his company,
+because his maine topmast was spent, determined to cast about againe with
+them, because we were sure to weather them, and the winde being as it was,
+it was our best course: but the Hart was so farre to the leeward, that we
+could not doe it, except we would lose her company, so that we tooke in
+some of our sailes, and went roome with him: which when he perceiued, he
+looffed to, and was able to lie as neere as he did before. At night, when
+we came to him, he would not speake to vs: then we asked of his company why
+he went so roome; and they made excuse that they were able to beare no
+saile by, for feare of bearing their foretopmast ouer boord: but this was a
+simple excuse.
+
+The fourth day, being put from our watring place we began to seethe our
+meat in salt water, and to rebate our allowance of drinke, to make it
+indure the longer: and so concluded to set our course thence, for our owne
+countrey.
+
+The 12 of March I found my selfe thwart of Cape das Palmas.
+
+The 16 day we fell with the land, which we iudged to be the Cape Mensurado,
+about which place is very much high land.
+
+The 18 day we lost sight of the Hart, and I thinke the willfull Master ran
+in with the shore of purpose to lose vs, being offended that I tolde him of
+his owne folly.
+
+[Sidenote: Two small Ilands by Sierra Leona. Note.] The 27 day we fell in
+sight of two small Islands, which lie by our reckoning sixe leagues off the
+headland of Sierra Leona: and before we came in sight of the same Ilands,
+we made our reckoning to be forty or thirty leagues at the least off them.
+Therefore all they that saile this way are to regard the currents which set
+Northnorthwest, or els they may be much deceiued.
+
+The 14 of April we met with two great ships of Portugall, which although
+they were in the weather of vs, yet came not roome with vs, whereby we
+iudged that they were bound for Calicut.
+
+The 18 day we were in the heigth of Cape verde.
+
+The 24 we were directly vnder the tropike of Cancer.
+
+The first day of May Henry Wilson our Steward died: and the next day died
+Iohn Vnderwood.
+
+[Sidenote: A French brauado.] The 23 we had sight of a shippe in the
+weather of vs, which was a Frenchman of 90 tunne, who came with vs as
+stoutly and as desperately as might be, and comming neere vs perceiued that
+we had bene vpon a long voyage, and iudging vs to be weake, as in deed we
+were, came neerer vs, and thought to haue layed vs aboord, and there stept
+vp some of his men in armour, and commanded vs to strike saile: whereupon
+we sent them some of our stuffe, crossebarres, and chaineshot, and arrowes,
+so thicke, that it made the vpper worke of their shippe flit about their
+eares, and then we spoiled him with all his men, and toare his shippe
+miserably with our great ordinance, and then he began to fall a sterne of
+vs, and to packe on his sailes, and get away: and we seeing that, gaue him
+foure or fiue good pieces more for his farewell; and thus we were rid of
+this French man, who did vs no harme at all. We had aboord vs a French man
+a Trumpeter, who being sicke, and lying in his bed, tooke his trumpet
+notwithstanding, and sounded till he could sound no more, and so died.
+
+The 28 we conferred together, and agreed to go into Seuerne, and so to
+Bristoll, but the same night we had sight of the Lizard, and by reason of
+the winde, we were not able to double the lands end to go into Seuerne, but
+were forced to beare in with the Lizard.
+
+The 29 day, about nine of the clocke in the morning, we arriued safely in
+Plimmouth, and praised God for our good arriuall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The third and last voyage of M. William Towrson to the coast of Guinie, and
+  the Castle de Mina, in the yeere 1577.
+
+The thirtieth day of Ianuary, the yeere abouesayd, we departed out of the
+sound of Plimmouth, with three ships, and a pinnesse, whereof the names are
+these:
+
+1 The Minion Admirall of the fleet.
+
+2 The Christopher Viceadmirall.
+
+3 The Tyger.
+
+4 A pinnesse called the Vnicorne: being all bound for the Canaries, and
+from thence, by the grace of God, to the coast of Guinie.
+
+The next day, being the last of this moneth, [Marginal note: It is to be
+vnderstood, that at this time there was warre betwixt England and France.]
+we met with two hulks of Dantzick, the one called the Rose, a ship of foure
+hundred tunnes, and the other called the Vnicorne, of an hundred and fifty
+tunnes, the Master of the Rose was called Nicholas Masse, and the Master of
+the Vnicorne Melchior White, both laden at Bourdeaux, and for the most part
+with wines. When we came to them, we caused them to hoise foorth their
+boats, and to come and speake with vs, and we examined euery one of them
+apart, what French mens goods they had in their shippes, and they said they
+had none: but by the contrarieties of their tales, and by the suspicion
+which we gathered of their false chartar-parties, we perceiued that they
+had French mens goods in them: we therefore caused one of them to fetch vp
+his bils of lading, and because he denied that he had any, we sent certaine
+with him, who caused him to goe to the place where he had hid them, and by
+the differences of his billes of lading, and his talke, we gathered, as
+before, that they had Frenchmens goods. Whereupon we examined them
+straightly, and first the Purser of the Vnicorne, which was the smaller
+shippe, confessed that they had two and thirty tunnes and a hogs-head of a
+French mans. Then we examined the Master in like case, and he acknowledged
+the same to be true. Then we examined also the Master of the great ship,
+and he confessed that he had an hundred and eight and twenty tunnes of the
+same French mans, and more they would not confesse, but sayd that all the
+rest was laden by Peter Lewgues of Hamburg, to be deliuered to one Henry
+Summer of Camphire, notwithstanding all their letters were directed to
+Hamburg, and written in Dutch without, and within in French.
+
+When they had confessed that they had thus much French mens goods within
+their shippes, we conferred together what was best to be done with them.
+William Cretton and Edward Selman were of the opinion, that it should be
+good either to carry them into Spaine, and there to make sale of the goods,
+or els into Ireland, or to returne backe againe into England with them, if
+the winde would permit it. But I, waying what charge we had of our Masters,
+first by mouth, and afterwards by writing, that for no such matter we
+should in any case prolong the time, for feare of losing the voyage, and
+considering that the time of the yeere was very farre spent, and the money
+that we should make of the wines not very much, in respect of the commodity
+which we hoped for by the voyage, perswaded them that to goe into Ireland,
+the winde being Easterly as it was, might be an occasion that we should be
+locked in there with that winde, and so lose our voyage: and to cary them
+into Spaine, seeing they sailed so ill, that hauing all their sailes
+abroad, we kept them company onely with our foresailes, and without any
+toppe sailes abroad, so that in euery two dayes sailing they would haue
+hindered vs more then one; and besides that (the winde being Easterly) we
+should not be able to seaze the coast with them: besides all this the losse
+of time when we came thither was to be considered, whereupon I thought it
+not good to carry them any further.
+
+And as for carying them into England, although the winde had bene good, as
+it was not, considering what charge we had of our Masters, to shift vs out
+of the way for feare of a stay by reason of the warres, I held it not in
+any wise conuenient.
+
+But notwithstanding all this, certeine of our company not being herewith
+satisfied went to our Master to know his opinion therein, who made them a
+plaine answere, that to cary them into any place, it was not the best way
+nor the profit of their Masters. And he tolde them further, that if the
+time were prolonged, one moneth longer before they passed the Cape, but a
+few men would go the voyage. [Sidenote: The French mens goods seazed in the
+time of the warre vpon the losse of Cales.] All these things considered, we
+all paused, and determined at the last, that euery man should take out of
+the hulks so much as he could well bestow for necessaries, and the next
+morning to conclude what should be further done with them. So we tooke out
+of them for vs foureteene tunnes and a halfe of wine, and one tunne we put
+into the pinnesse.
+
+More we tooke out one hogshead of Aquauitae.
+  Sixe cakes of rozzen.
+  A small halser for ties: and certeine chestnuts.
+
+The Christopher tooke out,
+  Ten tunnes of wine, and one hogshead.
+  A quantity of Aquauitae.
+  Shall-lines.
+  Chesnuts.
+  Sixe double bases with their chambers.
+
+And then men broke vp the hulks chests, and tooke out their compasses, and
+running glasses, the sounding leade and line, and candles: and cast some of
+their beefe ouer board, and spoiled them so much, that of very pity we gaue
+them a compasse, a running glasse, a leade and a line, certaine bread and
+candles, but what apparel of theirs we could finde in their ship, we gaue
+them againe, and some money also of that which William Crompton tooke for
+the ransome of a poore Frenchman, who being then Pilot downe the Riuer of
+Bordeux, they were not able to set him a shore againe, by reason of the
+foule weather.
+
+The Tyger also tooke out of the smaller hulke sixe or seuen tunnes of wine,
+one hogshead of Aquauitae, and certeine rozzen, and two bases he tooke out
+of the great hulke.
+
+The first day of February in the morning we all came together againe sauing
+W. Crompton who sent vs word mat he was contented to agree to that order
+which we should take.
+
+Now Edward Selman was of this opinion, that it was not best to let the
+ships depart, but put men into them to cary them into England, which thing
+neither we nor our Master would agree vnto, because we thought it not good
+to vnman our ships going outward, considering how dangerous the time was:
+so that in fine we agreed to let them depart, and giue them the rest of the
+wine which they had in their ships of the Frenchmens for the fraight of
+that which we had taken, and for their ordinance, rozzen, aquauitae,
+chesnuts, and other things which the company had taken from them. So we
+receiued a bill of their handes, that they confessed how much Frenchmens
+goods they had, and then we let them depart.
+
+The 10 day we reckoned our selues to be 25 leagues from the Grand Canarie,
+and this day about nine of the clocke our pinnesse brake her rudder, so
+that we were forced to towe her at the sterne of the Minion, which we were
+able to doe, and yet kept company with the rest of our ships. About eleuen
+of the clocke this day we had sight of the Grand Canarie.
+
+The 11 day when we came to the Iland we perceiued that it was the Ile of
+Tenerif, and then indeed wee had sight of the Grand Canarie, which lieth 12
+leagues to the Eastwards of Tenerif: and because the road of Tenerif is
+foule ground, and nothing was there to be gotten for the helping of our
+pinnesse, hauing the winde long, we agreed to go with the Grand Canarie.
+
+The 12 day we came into the roade of the towne of Canarie, which lieth one
+league from the same towne. And after we had shot off diuers pieces of
+ordinance to salute the towne and the castle, the gouernour and captiues of
+the Iland sent to vs which were the captaines of the ships, requiring vs to
+come a shoare.
+
+[Sidenote: Two English Marchants Legiers in the Grand Canary.] And when we
+came to them they receiued vs very friendly, offering vs their owne Iennets
+to ride to the towne, and what other friendship they could shew vs: and we
+went to the towne with two English Marchants which lay there, and remained
+in their house that day. The second day following we came aboord to deliuer
+our marchandise, and to get our pinnesse mended.
+
+The 14 day came into the road the Spanish fleet which was bound to the
+Emperours Indies, which were in number nineteene saile, whereof sixe were
+ships of foure hundred and fiue hundred a piece, the rest were of two
+hundred, an hundred and fifty, and of an hundred. When they were come to an
+ancre they saluted vs with ordinance, and so we did them in like case. And
+afterwards the Admirall (who was a knight) sent his pinnesse to desire me
+to come to him; and when I came to him he receiued me friendly, and was
+desirous to heare somewhat of the state of England and Flanders. And after
+he had me a banquet, I departed; and I being gone vnto the boat, hee caused
+one of his gentlemen to desire Francisco the Portugall, which was my
+interpreter, to require me to furle my flagge, declaring that hee was
+Generall of the Emperours fleet. Which thing (being come aboord) Francisco
+shewed me: and because I refused to furle it, and kept it foorth still,
+certaine of the souldiers in the ships shot diuers harquebush shot about
+the ship, and ouer the flagge: and at the same time there came certeine
+gentlemen aboord our ship to see her: to whom I sayd, that if they would
+not cause those their men to leaue shooting, I would shoot the best
+ordinance I had thorow their sides. And when they perceuied that I was
+offended, they departed, and caused their men of warre and souldiers to
+shoot no more, and afterwards they came to me againe, and tolde me that
+they punished their men. That done, I shewed them the ship, and made them
+such cheere as I could, which they receiued very thankfully: and the day
+following they sent for mee to dine with them, and sent me word that their
+General was very sory that any man should require me to furle my flagge,
+and that it was without his consent: and therefore he requested me not to
+thinke any vngentlenesse to be in him, promising that no man of his should
+misdemeane himselfe.
+
+The 17 day we set saile in the road of Grand Canarie, and proceeded on our
+voyage.
+
+The 20 in the morning we had sight of the coast of Barbarie, and running
+along the shore we had sight of Rio del Oro, which lieth almost vnder the
+tropike of Cancer.
+
+The 21 day we found our selues to be in 20 degrees and a halfe, which is
+the heigth of Cape Blank.
+
+The 25 we had sight of the land in the bay to the Northward of Cape Verde.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape verde. Foure Ilands.] The 26 I tooke Francisco and Francis
+Castelin with me, and went into the pinnesse, and so went to the Tyger
+which was neerer the shore then the other ships, and went aboord her, and
+with her and the other ships we ranne West and by South, and West
+southwest, vntill about foure of the clocke, at which time we were hard
+aboord the Cape, and then we ran in Southwest, and beyond the Cape about
+foure leagues we found a faire Iland, and besides that two or three Ilands,
+which were of very high rocks being full of diuers sorts of sea foule, and
+of pigeons, with other sorts of land-foules, and so many, that the whole
+Iland was couered with the dung thereof, and seemed so white as if the
+whole Iland had bene of chalke; and within those Ilands was a very faire
+bay, and hard aboord the rocks eighteene fadom water, and faire ground.
+[Sidenote: A great trade of the Frenchmen at Cape verde.] And when we
+perceiued the bay, and vnderstanding that the Frenchmen had a great trade
+there, which we were desirous to know, we came to an ancre with the Tyger.
+And after that the Minion and the Christopher ancred in like case: then we
+caused the pinnesse to runne beyond another Cape of land, to see if there
+were any place to trade in there.
+
+It being neere night I took our cocke and the Tygers skiffe, and went to
+the Iland, where we got certaine foules like vnto Gannards: and then I came
+aboord againe and tooke two of the Gannards which we had taken, and caried
+them to the captaine of the Christopher, and when I had talked with him I
+found him not willing to tary there, neither was I desirous to spend any
+long time there, but onely to attempt what was to be done. The Master of
+the Christopher told me he would not tary, being not bound for that place.
+
+[Sidenote: A faire Iland where the French trade.] The 27 the Captaine of
+the Tyger and Edward Selman came to me, and Iohn Makeworth from the
+Christopher, and then we agreed to take the pinnessse, and to come along
+the shore, because that where we rid no Negros came to vs, and the night
+before our pinnesse brought vs word that there was a very faire Iland. And
+when I came beyond the point I found it so, and withall a goodly bay, and
+we saw vpon the maine certaine Negros which waued vs on shore, and then we
+came to an ancre with the pinnesse, and went a shore with our cocke, and
+they shewed vs where their trade was, and that they had Elephants teeth,
+muske, and hides, and offered vs to fetch downe their Captaine, if we would
+send a man with them, and they would leaue a pledge for him: then we asked
+him when any ship had bene there; and some of them sayd not in eight
+moneths, others, in sixe moneths, and others in foure and that they were
+Frenchmen.
+
+Then we perceuing, the Christopher not willing to tary, departed from them,
+and set saile with the pinnesse and went aboord the Tyger.
+
+The 10 day of March we fell with the coast of Guinea, fiue leagues to the
+Eastward of Cape de Monte, beside a riuer called Rio das Palmas.
+
+The 11 we went to the shore, and found one man that could speake some
+Portuguise, who tolde vs that there were three French ships passed by; one
+of them two moneths past, and the other one moneth past. At this place I
+receiued nineteene Elephants teeth, and two ounces and halfe a quarter of
+golde.
+
+The 12 we set saile to go to the riuer de Sestos.
+
+The 13 at night we fell with the same riuer.
+
+The 14 day we sent in our boats to take water, and rommaged our shippes,
+and deliuered such wares to the Christopher and Tyger, as they had need of.
+
+The 15 we came together, and agreed to send the Tyger to another riuer to
+take in her water, and to see what she could do for graines.
+
+After that we tooke marchandise with vs, and went into the riuer, and there
+we found a Negro which was borne in Lisbone, left there by a ship of
+Portugal which was burned the last yere at this riuer in fighting with
+three Frenchmen: and he told vs further, that two moneths past there were
+three Frenchmen at this place; and sixe weeks past there were two French
+ships at the riuer: and fifteene dayes past there was one. All which ships
+were gone towards the Mina. This day we tooke but few graines.
+
+The 19 day considering that the Frenchman were gone before vs, and that by
+reason of the vnholesome aires of this place foureteene of our men in the
+Minion were fallen sicke, we determined to depart, and with all speed to go
+to the Mina.
+
+The 21. wee came to the riuer de Potos, where some of our boats went in for
+water, and I went in with our cocke, and tooke 12 small Elephants teeth.
+
+The 23. day, after we had taken as many teeth as we could get, about nine
+of the clocke we set saile to go towards the Mina.
+
+The 31 we came to Hanta, and made sale of certaine Manillios.
+
+[Sidenote: They descrie fiue saile of the Portugals.] The first Aprill we
+had sight of fiue saile of Portugals, wherevpon we set saile and went off
+to sea to get the winde of them, which wee should haue had if the winde had
+kept his ordinary course, which is all the day at the Southwest, and
+West-southwest: but this day with a flaw it kept all the day at the East,
+and East-southeast, so that the Portugals had the winde of vs, and came
+roome with the Tyger and vs untill night, and brought themselues all saue
+one, which sailed not so well as the rest, within shot of vs: then it fell
+calme, and the winde came vp to the Southwest, howbeit it was neere night,
+and the Christopher, by meanes of her boat, was about foure leagues to the
+leewards of vs. We tacked and ranne into the weather of the Admirall, and
+three more of his company, and when we were neere him we spake to him, but
+he would not answere. [Sidenote: The fight.] Then we cast about and lay in
+the weather of him; and casting about he shot at vs, and then wee shot at
+him, and shot him foure or fiue times thorow. They shot diuers times thorow
+our sailes, but hurt no man. The Tyger and the pinnesse, because it was
+night, kept out their sailes, and would not meddle with them. After we had
+thus fought together 2 houres or more, and would not lay him aboord because
+it was night, we left shooting one at the other, and kept still the weather
+of them. Then the Tyger and the pinnesse kept about and came to vs, and
+afterwards being neere the shore, we three kept about and lay to the sea,
+and shot off a piece to giue warning to the Christopher.
+
+This night about 12 of the clocke, being very litle winde, and the Master
+of the Tyger asleepe, by the ill worke of his men the ship fel aboord of
+vs, and with her sheare-hooks cut our maine-saile, and her boat being
+betwixt vs was broken and suncke, with certaine marchandise in her, and the
+ships wales were broken with her outleger: yet in the ende we cleared her
+without any more hurt, but she was in hazzard to be broken downe to the
+water.
+
+The second day we had sight of the Christopher, and were neere vnto her, so
+that I tooke our boat and went to her. And when I came thither, they shewed
+me, that after the Portugals had left vs, they went all roome with him, and
+about twelue a clocke at night met him, and shot at him, and hee at them,
+and they shot him thorow the sailes in diuers places, and did no other
+great hurt. And when we had vnderstood that they had bene with him as well
+as with vs, we agreed altogether to seeke them (if wee might finde them)
+and keepe a weather our places of traffique.
+
+The third day we ran all day to the Southwestwards to seeke the Portugals,
+but could haue no sight of them, and halled into the shore.
+
+The fourth day, when we had sight of land, we found that the current had
+set vs thirty leagues to the Eastwards of our reckoning, which we woondered
+at: for the first land we made was Lagua. Then I caused our boat to be
+manned, and the Christophers also, and went to the shore and tooke our
+Negro with vs. And on shore we learned that there were foure French ships
+vpon the coast: one at Perinnen, which is six leagues to the Westward of
+Laguoa: another at Weamba, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Laguoa; a third at Perecow, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Weamba: and the fourth at Egrand, which is foure leagues to the Eastward of
+Perecow.
+
+When we had intelligence of these newes we agreed to go to the Eastwards
+with the Frenchmen to put them from their traffique, and shot off two or
+three pieces in our boats to cause the ships to way: and hauing bene about
+one houre vnder saile, we had sight of one of the French men vnder saile,
+halling off from Weamba to whome we gaue chase, and agreed in the night for
+feare of ouershooting them, that the Minion should first come to ancre, and
+after that about three houres, the Tyger and the Christopher to beare along
+all night.
+
+The 5. day we found three of the French ships at ancre: one called La foye
+de Honfleur, a ship of 220 tunnes, another called the Ventereuse or small
+Roebarge of Honfleur, of 100 tunnes, both appertaining to Shawdet of
+Honfleur, the third was called the Mulet de Batuille a ship of 120 tunnes,
+and this ship belonged to certaine Marchants of Roan.
+
+[Sidenote: the English boord the Frenchmen.] When we came to them, we
+determined to lay the Admiral aboord, the Christopher the Viceadmirall, and
+the Tyger the smallest: but when we came nere them they wayed, and the
+Christopher being the headmost and the weathermost man, went roome with the
+Admirall: the Roebarge went so fast that wee could not fetch her. The first
+that we came to was the Mullet, and her wee layed aboord, and our men
+entred and tooke her, which ship was the richest except the Admirall: for
+the Admirall had taken about 80 pound of golde, and Roeberge had taken but
+22 pound: and all this we learned of the Frenchmen, who knew it very well:
+for they were all in consort together, and had bene vpon the coast of Mina
+two moneths and odde dayes: howbeit the Roebarge had bene there before them
+with another ship of Diepe, and a carauel, which had beaten all the coast,
+and were departed one moneth before our arriuing there, and they three had
+taken about 700 pound of golde.
+
+Assoone as we had layed the ship aboord, and left certaine men in her to
+keepe her, we set saile and gaue chase to the other two ships, and chased
+them all day and night, and the next day vntill three a clocke in the
+afternoone, but we could not fetch them: and therefore seeing that we
+brought our selues very farre to leeward of our place, we left the chase,
+and kept about againe to go with the shore.
+
+The 7 day I sent for the captaine, marchants and Masters of the other
+ships, and when they came we weighed the golde which we had from the
+Frenchmen, which weighed fifty pound and fiue ounces of golde: this done we
+agreed to put men out of euery ship into the prise to keepe her.
+
+The 12 day we came to the further place of the Mina called Egrand, and
+being come to an ancre, discharged all the marchants goods out of the
+prise, and would haue sold the ship with the victuals to the Frenchmen, but
+because she was leake they would not take her, but desired vs to saue their
+liues in taking them into our owne ships: then we agreed to take out the
+victuals and sinke the ship, and diuide the men among our ships.
+
+The 15 at night we made an end of discharging the prise, and diuided all
+the Frenchmen except foure which were sicke and not able to helpe
+themselues; which foure both the Christopher and the Tyger refused to take,
+leauing them in their ship alone in the night, so that about midnight I was
+forced to fetch them into our ship.
+
+The 15 of April, moouing our company for the voyage to Benin, the most part
+of them all refused it.
+
+The 16, seeing the vnwillingnesse of the company to goe thither, we
+determined to spend as much time vpon the coast as we could, to the end we
+might make our voyage, and agreed to leaue the Minion here at Egrand, the
+Tyger to go to Pericow which is foure leagues off, and the Christopher to
+goe to Weamba, which is ten leagues to the weatherward of this place: and
+if any of them both should haue sight of more sailes then they thought good
+to meddle withall to come roome with their fellowes; to wit, first the
+Christopher to come with the Tyger, and then both they to come with vs.
+
+We remained in this place called Egrand, vntill the last day of April, in
+which time many of our men fell sicke: and sixe of them died. And here we
+could haue no traffique with the Negros but three or foure dayes in the
+weeke, and all the rest of the weeke they would not come at vs.
+
+The 3 of May not hauing the pinnesse sent vs with cloth from the other
+ships, as they promised, we solde French cloth, and gaue but three yards
+thereof to euery fuffe.
+
+The 5 day the Negros departed, and told vs they would come to vs againe
+within foure dayes, which we determined there to tary, although we had
+diuers of our men sicke.
+
+The 8 day, all our cloth in the Minion being sold, I called the company
+together, to know whether they would tary the sale of the cloth taken in
+the prise at this place or no: they answered, that in respect of the death
+of some of their men, and the present sicknesse of twentie more, they would
+not tary, but repaire to the other ships, of whom they had heard nothing
+since the 27 of April: and yet they had our pinnesse with them, onely to
+cary newes from one to another.
+
+The 9 day we determined to depart hence to our fellowes, to see what they
+had done, and to attempt what was to be done at the towne of Don Iohn.
+
+The 10 day in the morning we sat saile to seeke the Christopher and the
+Tyger.
+
+The ll day the Captaine of the Christopher came to vs, and told vs that
+they could finde small doings at the places where they had bene.
+
+The 12 William Crompton and I in our small pinnesse went to the Tyger and
+the Christopher at Perenine.
+
+The 13 we sent away the Tyger to Egrand, because we found nothing to doe at
+Perenine, worth the tarying for.
+
+The 14 our great pinnesse came to vs, and presently we put cloth into her,
+and sent her backe to Weamba, where she had bene before, and had taken
+there ten pound of golde.
+
+The 15 the Minion came to vs, and the next day we went a shore with our
+boats, and tooke but one ounce of golde.
+
+The 19 day hauing set saile we came to an ancre before Mowre, and there we
+tarried two dayes, but tooke not an ounce of golde.
+
+The 21 we came to an ancre before Don Iohns towne.
+
+[Sidenote: the great towne of Don Iohn.] The 22 we manned our boats and
+went to shore, but the Negros would not come at vs; then the Captaine of
+the Christopher and I tooke a skiffe and eight men with vs, and went and
+talked with the Negros, and they sayd that they would send a man to the
+great towne, where Don Iohn himselfe lay, to aduertise him of our comming.
+
+The 23 we went ashore againe, and the Negros tolde vs that this day the
+marchants of Don Iohn would come downe: so we tarried there vntill night,
+and no man would come to vs: but diuers of the Negros made vs signes to
+depart.
+
+The 24 the Captaine of the Christopher tooke his boat and went to Mowre,
+and when he came thither, certaine Negros came to him to know the price of
+his wares, but in the end there came an Almade, which he iudged came from
+the castle, and caused all the Negros to depart from him: and when he saw
+they would come no more to him, he went ashore and tooke certaine men with
+him, and then the Negros cast stones at them, and would not suffer them to
+come vp to their towne. And when they saw that, they tooke certaine of the
+Almades, and put them to the sea, and afterwards departed. The same morning
+I went a shore at Don Iohns towne, and tooke a white flag with me, but none
+of the Negros could come to me, which caused vs to iudge that the Portugals
+were in the towne. After this, our boat came to vs well manned, and I sent
+one man vp to the towne with a white flag in his hand, but when he was come
+thither, all the Negros went away and would not speake with him. Then I
+sent one alone into the woods after them, but they in no case would come to
+vs. When we saw that, we tooke twelue goats and fourteene hennes, which we
+found in the towne, and went aboord without doing any farther hurt to the
+towne: and when I came aboord, I found our pinnesse come from Cormatin,
+which had taken there two pound and fiue ounces of golde. Then after much
+ado with the froward Mariners, we went thitherwards with our ship, and the
+Christopher went to Mowre.
+
+[Sidenote: A fight with the Negros.] The 25 day the Master of the
+Christopher sent his boat to the shore for balast, and the Negros would
+haue beaten the company from the shore, whereupon the company resisted
+them, and slew and hurt diuers of them, and hauing put them to flight,
+burned their towne, and brake all their boats.
+
+The 26 day our pinnesse came to vs from Cormatin, and had taken two pound
+and eleuen ounces of golde: and Iohn Shirife tolde vs that the Negros of
+that place were very desirous to haue a ship come back againe to their
+towne.
+
+The 27 we wayed and went to Cormatin.
+
+The 28 the Christopher came to vs from Mowre and traffiqued there two
+dayes.
+
+The second day of Iune the Tyger came to vs from Egrand, and the pinnesse
+from Weamba, and they two had taken about fifty pound of golde since they
+departed from vs.
+
+The 4 day we departed from Cormatin to plie vp to Shamma, being not able to
+tary any longer vpon the coast for lacke of victuals, and specially of
+drinke.
+
+The 7 day we had sight of fiue of the king of Portugals ships which came to
+an ancre besides the castle.
+
+The 8 day George and Binny came to vs, and brought with them two pound of
+golde.
+
+The 10 day in the morning I tooke our small pinnesse, and the Captaine of
+the Christopher with me, and manned her well, and went to the castle to
+view the Portugals ships, and there we found one ship of about 300 tunne,
+and foure carauels: when we had well viewed them, we returned backe againe
+to our ships which we found seuen leagues at sea.
+
+The 11 day in the morning we found our selues wel shot toward Shamma, and
+the Tyger with vs, but the Minion and the pinnesse had not wayed that
+night, so that we were out of sight of them: and hauing brought our selues
+in the weather of the Portugals ships, we came to an ancre to tary for the
+Minion, or els we might haue fetched Shamma. At night the Minion and the
+pinnesse came vp to vs, but could not fetch so farre to the weatherward as
+we, and therefore they ancred about a league a weather The castle, and we
+waied in the Christopher, and went roome with her.
+
+The 12 day the Tyger came roome with vs, and she and the Christopher
+finding themselues to stand in great need of victuals, would haue gone with
+the Portugals ships to haue fetched some of them forth: but our master and
+company would in no case consent to goe with them, for feare of hanging
+when we came home: and the other two ships being fully minded to haue gone,
+and fearing that their owne company would accuse them, durst not go to
+them.
+
+After this, by reason of the want of victuals in the pinnesse, which could
+receiue no victuals from the other shippes, but from vs onely, we tooke out
+all our men, and put twelue Frenchmen into her, and gaue them victuals to
+bring them to Shamma.
+
+The 19 day the Tyger and Minion arrived at Shamma, and the Christopher
+within two leagues off them, but could not fetch the winde by reason of the
+scantnesse of the winde, which hath bene so scant, that in fifteene dayes
+we haue plied to the windewards but twelue leagues, which before we did in
+one day and a night.
+
+The 20 day I tooke our pinnesse, and went to the towne of Shamma to speake
+with the captaine, and he tolde me that there was no golde there to be had,
+nor as much as a hen to be bought, and all by reason of the accord which he
+had made with the Portugals, and I seeing that departed peaceably from him.
+
+The 21 I put such things as we had into our small pinnesse, and tooke one
+marchant of our ship, and another of the Tyger, and sent her to Hanta, to
+attempt, if she could doe any thing there. That night they could doe
+nothing but were promised to haue golde the next day.
+
+The next day (which was the 22) being come, we sent our pinnesse to Hanta
+againe, but there neither the captaine nor the Negros durst traffike with
+vs, but intised vs from place to place, and all to no purpose.
+
+This day we put away our pinnesse, with fiue and twenty Frenchmen in her,
+and gaue them such victuals as we could spare, putting fifteene of them to
+the ransome of sixe crownes a man.
+
+The 23 of Iune our pinnesse came to vs from Hanta, and tolde vs that the
+Negros had dealt very ill with them, and would not traffike with them to
+any purpose.
+
+[Sidenote: Shamma burnt by the English.] The 24 we tooke our boat and
+pinnesse and manned them well, and went to the towne of Shamma, and because
+the Captaine thereof was become subiect to the Portugals we burned the
+towne, and our men seeking the spoile of such trifles as were there found a
+Portugals chest, wherein was some of his apparell, and his weights, and one
+letter sent to him from the castle, whereby we gathered that the Portugall
+had bene there of a long time.
+
+The 25 day, about three of the clocke at afternoone, we set saile, and put
+into the sea, for our returne to England.
+
+The last day of this moneth we fell with the shore againe, and made our
+reckoning to be eighteene leagues to the weatherward of the place where we
+set off. When we came to make the land, we found our selues to be eighteene
+leagues to the leeward of the place, where we set off, which came to passe,
+by reason of the extreme currant that runneth to the Eastward: when we
+perceiued our selues so abused, we agreed to cast about againe, and to lie
+as neere the winde as we could, to fetch the line.
+
+The seuenth of Iuly we had sight of the Ile of S. Thome, ana thought to
+haue sought the road to haue arriued there: but the next morning the wind
+came about, and we kept our course.
+
+The ninth, the winde varying, we kept about againe, and fell with the Iland
+of S. Thome, and seeking the road, were becalmed neere the Iland, and with
+the currant were put neere the shore, but could haue no ground to ancre: so
+that we were forced to hoise out our pinnesse, and the other ships their
+skiffs to towe from the Iland, which did litle good, but in the ende the
+winde put vs three leagues off the shore.
+
+The tenth day the Christopher and the Tyger cast about, whereby we iudged
+them to haue agreed together, to goe seeke some ships in the road, and to
+leaue vs: our men were not willing to goe after them, for feare of running
+in with the Iland againe, and of putting our selues into the same danger
+that we were in the night before: but we shot off a piece, and put out two
+lights, and they answered vs with lights againe: whereupon we kept our
+course, and thought that they had followed vs, but in the morning we could
+not see them, so that they left vs willingly, and we determined to follow
+them no more. But the eleuenth day we altered our opinion and course, and
+consented to cast about againe for the Iland, to seeke our ships; and about
+foure of the clocke in the afternoone we met with them.
+
+The 13 we fell againe with the Iland of S. Thome; and the same night we
+found our selues directly vnder the line.
+
+[Sidenote: The description of the Ile of S. Thome.] This Iland is a very
+high Iland, and being vpon the West side of it, you shall see a very high
+pike, which is very small, and streight, as it were the steeple of a
+church, which pike lieth directly vnder the line, and at the same South end
+of the Iland to the Westward thereof lieth a small Iland, about a mile from
+the great Iland.
+
+The third of August we departed from the Ile of S. Thome, and met the winde
+at the Southwest.
+
+The 12 day we were in the height of Cape Verde.
+
+The 22 day we fell with one of the Iles of Cape verde, called the Ile of
+Salt, and being informed by a Scotish man that we tooke among the Frenchmen
+vpon the coast, that there were fresh victuals to be had, we came to an
+ancre there.
+
+The 23 day in the morning we manned our skiffe, and went a shore, and found
+no houses, but we saw foure men, which kept themselues alwayes farre from
+vs, as for cattell we could finde none, but great store of goats, and they
+were so wilde, that we could not take aboue three or foure of them: but
+there we had good store of fish, and vpon a small Iland which lay by the
+same we had great store of sea-birds.
+
+At night the Christopher brake her cradle, and lost an ancre, so that she
+could tary no longer, so we all wayed, and set saile. Vpon the same Iland
+we left the Scotish man, which was the occasion of our going aland at that
+place, but how he was left we could not tell: but, as we iudged, the people
+of the Iland found him sleeping, and so caried him away; for at night I
+went my selfe to the Iland to seeke him, but could hear nothing of him.
+
+[Sidenote: The great inconuenience by late staying vpon the coast of
+Guinie.] The 24 day the Master of the Tyger came aboord vs, and tolde vs
+that his men were so weake, and the shippe so leake, that he was not able
+to keepe her aboue the water, and therefore requested vs to go backe againe
+to the Iland, that we might discharge her, and giue her vp: but we
+intreated him to take paine with her awhile, and we put a French Carpenter
+into her, to see if he could finde the leake. This day we tooke a view of
+all our men, both those that were hole, and the sicke also, and we found
+that in all the three ships, were not aboue thirty sound men.
+
+The 25 we had sight of the Ile of S. Nicholas, and the day following of the
+other Iles, S. Lucia, S. Vincent, and S. Anthony; which four Iles lie the
+one from the other Northwest, and by West, Souteast and by East.
+
+The 26 we came againe with the Iland of S. Anthony, and could not double
+the Cape. This day Philip Iones, the Master of the Christopher, came aboord
+vs, who had beene aboord the Tyger, and tolde vs that they were not able to
+keepe the Tyger, because she was leake, and the Master very weake, and sayd
+further, he had agreed with the Master and the company, that if the next
+day we could double the Iland, we should runne to the leeward of it, and
+there discharge her: but if we could not double it, then to put in betwixt
+the Iland of S. Vincent and S. Anthony, to see if we could discharge her.
+
+The third day of September I went aboord the Tyger, with the Master and
+Marchants with me, to view the shippe and men: and we found the shippe very
+leake, and onely six labouring men in her, whereof one was the Master
+gunner: so that we seeing that they were not able to keepe the ship, agreed
+to take in the men, and of the goods what we could saue, and then to put
+the ship away.
+
+The fift day we went to discharge the Tyger.
+
+The eight day, hauing taken out the artillery, goods, victuals, and gold of
+the Tyger, we gaue her vp 25 degrees by North the line.
+
+The 27 we had sight of two of the Iles of the Azores, S. Mary, and S.
+Michael.
+
+The fourth of October we found ourselues to be 41 degrees and a halfe from
+the line.
+
+The sixt day the Christopher came to vs, and willed vs to put with the
+Cape, for they also were so weake, that they were not able to keepe the
+sea, and we being weake also, agreed to go for Vigo, being a place which
+many English men frequent.
+
+The 10 day the Christopher went roome with the Cape, but we having a mery
+wind for England, and fearing the danger of the enemies, which ordinarily
+lie about the Cape: besides, not knowing the state of our countrey and
+Spaine, and although it were peace, yet there was little hope of friendship
+at their hands, considering the voyage that we had made, and we also being
+so weake, that by force and violence we could come by nothing, and doubting
+also that the king of Portugall knowing of our being there, might worke
+some way with the Counsell of Spaine to trouble vs: and further,
+considering that if we did put in with any harbor, we should not be able to
+come out againe, till we sent for more men into England, which would be a
+great charge, and losse of time, and meanes of many dangers. All these
+things pondred, we agreed to shoot off two pieces of ordinance, to warne
+the Christopher, and then we went our course for England: she hearing our
+pieces followed vs, and we carried a light for her, but the next day in the
+morning it was thicke, and we could not see her in the afternoone neither,
+so that we suspected that either she was gone with Spaine, or els that she
+should put foorth more sailes then we in the night, and was shot a head of
+vs, so that then we put forth our top-sailes, and went our course with
+England.
+
+At the time when the Christopher left vs, we were within 120 leagues of
+England, and 45 leagues Northwest and by West from Cape Finister: and at
+the same time in our ships we had not aboue sixe Mariners and sixe
+Marchants in health, which was but a weake company for such a ship to seeke
+a forren harbour.
+
+The 16 day about sixe of the clocke at night, we met with a great storme at
+the West-south-west, and West, and our men being weake, and not able to
+handle our sailes, we lost the same night our maine saile, foresaile, and
+spreetsaile, and were forced to lie a hulling, vntill the eighteenth day,
+and then we made ready an olde course of a foresaile, and put it to the
+yard, and therewith finding our selues far shot into the sleeue, we bare
+with our owne coast; but that foresaile continued not aboue two houres,
+before it was blowen from the yard with a freat, and then we were forced to
+lie a hull againe, vntil the nineteenth day of October in the morning, and
+then we put an olde bonnet to our foreyard, which, by the good blessing and
+prouidence of God, brought vs to the Ile of Wight, where we arriued the 20
+of October in the afternoone.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The commodities and wares that are most desired in Guinie, betwixt Sierra
+  Liona and the furthest place of the Mine.
+
+Manils of brasse, and some of loade.
+
+Basons of diuers sorts, but the most lattin.
+
+Pots of course tinne, of a quart and more.
+
+Some wedges of yron.
+
+Margarites, and certaine other sleight beads.
+
+Some blew Corall.
+
+Some horse tailes.
+
+Linnen cloth principally.
+
+Basons of Flanders.
+
+Some red cloth of low price, and some kersie.
+
+Kettles of Dutch-land with brasen handles.
+
+Some great brasse basons graued, such as in Flanders they set vpon their
+cupboords.
+
+Some great basons of pewter, and ewers grauen.
+
+Some lauers, such as be for water.
+
+Great kniues of a low price.
+
+Sleight Flanders-caskets.
+
+Chests of Roan of a lowe price, or any other chests.
+
+Great pinnes.
+
+Course French couerings.
+
+Packing sheets good store.
+
+Swords, daggers, frise mantels, and gownes, clokes, hats, red caps, Spanish
+blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of yron, sleight belles, gloues
+of a lowe price, leather bags, and what other trifles you will.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine Articles deliuered to M. Iohn Lok, by Sir William Gerard Knight,
+  M. William Winter, M. Beniamin Gonson, M. Anthony Hickman, and M. Edward
+  Castelin the 8 of September 1561, touching a voyage to Guinea.
+
+A remembrance for you M. Lok at your comming to the coast of Guinie.
+
+First, when God shal send you thither, to procure, as you passe alongst the
+coast, to understand what riuers, hauens, or harboroughs there be; and to
+make your selfe a plat thereof, setting those places which you shall thinke
+materiall in your sayd plat, with their true eleuations.
+
+Also you shall learne what commodities doe belong to the places where you
+shall touch, and what may be good for them.
+
+It is thought good, that hauing a fort vpon the coast of Mina in the king
+of Habaans country, [Marginal note: The English marchants intend to
+fortifie in Ghinea, in the king of Habaans country.] it would serve to
+great purpose: wherfore you are especially sent to consider where the fort
+might be best placed, and vpon what ground: wherein are to be noted these
+things following.
+
+1. That the ground so serue, that it ioyne to the sea on the one
+part, so as shippes and boats may come to lade and vnlade.
+
+2. What molde of earth the ground is of.
+
+3. What timber or wood may be had, and how it will be caried.
+
+4. What prouision of victuals may be had in the countrey: and what kinde of
+our victuals will best serve to continue.
+
+5. The place must be naturally strong, or such as may be made strong with a
+small charge, and afterwards kept with a few men.
+
+6. How water may be prouided, if there be none to be had in the ground
+where the fort shall stand, or neere to it.
+
+7. What helpe is to be had from the people of the country, either for the
+building of it, or for the defence thereof.
+
+To mooue the king of Haban a farre off, for the making of a fort, and to
+note how he will like it; but vse your communication so, that although
+there might fall out good cause for the doing of it, yet he do not
+vnderstand your meaning.
+
+Search the countrey so farre as you may, both alongst the coast, and into
+the land.
+
+To learne what became of the marchants that were left at Benin.
+
+The matters which shall be of importance to be noted we nothing doubt that
+you will omit, wherefore we referre the order of these affaires to your
+discretion.
+
+Also we pray you as occasion shall serue that you ayd and helpe our
+factours, both with your counsell and otherwise; and thus God send you
+safely to returne.
+
+William Gerrard, William Winter, Beniamin Gonson, Anthony Hickman, Edward
+Castelin.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A letter of M. Iohn Lok to the worshipfull company of Marchants aduenturers
+  for Guinie, written 1561, shewing reasons for his not proceeding in a
+  voyage then intended to the foresayd countrey.
+
+Worshipfull sirs; since the arriuall of M. Pet and Buttoll Monioy (as I
+vnderstand) for the voyage it is concluded that the Minion shall proceed on
+her voyage, if within 20 dayes she may be repaired of those hurts she hath
+receiued by the last storme: or in the moneth of Ianuary also, if the wind
+wil serue therfore. Wherefore for that your worships shall not be ignorant
+of my determined purpose in the same, with the reasons that haue perswaded
+me thereunto; I haue thought good to aduertise you thereof, trusting that
+your worships will weigh them, as I vprightly and plainly meane them. And
+not for any feare or discouragement that I haue of my selfe by the raging
+of the stormes of the sea, for that (I thanke the Lord) these haue not
+beene the first that I haue abiden, neither trust I they shalbe the last.
+First the state of the ship, in which, though I thinke not but M. Pet can
+do more for her strengthening than I can conceiue, yet for all that, it
+will neither mend her conditions, nor yet make her so stanch that any cabin
+in her shalbe stanch for men to lie drie in: the which sore, what a
+weakening it will be to the poore men after their labour, that they neither
+can haue a shift of apparell drie, nor yet a drie place to rest in, I
+referre to your discretion. For though that at Harwich she was both bound
+and caulked as much as might be, both within and without, yet for all that
+she left not, afore this flaw, in other weathers, being stressed, to open
+those seames, and become in the state she was before; I meane, in wetting
+her men: notwithstanding her new worke. And my iudgement, with that litle
+experience I haue had, leadeth me to thinke that the ship whose water works
+and footings be spent and rotten cannot be but leake for men. Next, the
+vnseasonable time of the yeere which is now present. And how onely by
+meanes of the vnseasonable times in the returne from the voyage home, many
+thereby haue decayed, to the great misery and calamity of the rest, and
+also to the great slander of the voyage, (which I much respect) the last
+and other voyage haue declared. And what it is to make the voyage in
+vnseasonable time, that hath the second voyage also declared. Wherefore
+weying and foreseeing this (as I may wel terme it) calamity and vneuitable
+danger of men, and that by men she must be brought home againe (except that
+God will shew an extraordinary miracle) I purpose not nor dare I venture
+with a safe conscience to tempt God herein. Againe, forsomuch as she is
+alone, and hath so little helpe of boat or pinnesse in her trade, and also
+for her watering, where a long time of force must be spent, my going, to
+the accomplishment of your expectations, will be to small effect for this
+time, because I shall want both vessell and men to accomplish it. And I
+would not gladly so spend my time and trauell, to my great charges and
+paine, and after, for not falling out accordingly, to lose both pot and
+water, as the prouerbe is. As for the Primrose, if she be there, her trade
+will be ended or euer we come there, so that she of force, by want of
+prouision, must returne: yea, though we should carry with vs a supply for
+her, yet is the meeting of her doubtfull, and though we met her, yet will
+the men not tarry, as no reason is they should: howbeit my opinion of her
+is that she is put into Ireland. The Flowerdeluce was in Milford. Thus for
+that your worships might vnderstand the whole cause why I doe not proceed,
+I haue troubled you at this time with this my long Letter. And, as God is
+my Iudge, not for feare of the Portugals, which there we shall meet (and
+yet alone without ayde) as here is a shippe which was in Lisbon, whose men
+say that there are in a readinesse (onely to meet vs) foure great ships, of
+the which one is accounted 700 tunnes, and other pinnesses: yet not for
+feare of them, nor raging of the seas (whose rage God is aboue to rule) but
+onely for the premisses: the sequell whereof must by reason turne to a
+great misery to the men; the which I for my part (though it might turne me
+to as much gaine as the whole commeth to) yet would I not be so tormented,
+as the sight thereof would be a corsiue to my heart, and the more, because
+foreseeing the same, I should be so leud, as yeelding, to haue runne into
+the danger thereof, and therefore I haue absolutely determined with my
+selfe not to goe this voyage. Howbeit if in a seasonable time of the yeere
+I had but one ship sufficient, though much lesse by the halfe, I would not
+refuse (as triall being made thereof should appeare) or if I had ability of
+my selfe to venture so much, it should well be seene. And this I speake to
+giue you to vnderstand that I refuse not this for feare: If you purpose to
+proceed heerein, send some one whom you please; to whom I will not onely
+deliuer the articles which I haue receiued, but also will giue some
+particular notes which I haue noted in the affaires which you haue
+committed vnto mee, with the best helpe and counsell I can. Thus the liuing
+God keepe your worships all. Bristoll this 11 of December 1561.
+
+Your worships to comand to his power.
+
+Iohn Lok.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The relation of one William Rutter to M. Anthony Hickman his master
+  touching a voyage set out to Guinea in the yeere 1562, by Sir William
+  Gerard, Sir William Chester, M. Thomas Lodge, the sayd Anthony Hickman,
+  and Edward Castelin, which voyage is also written in verse by Robert
+  Baker.
+
+Worshipfull sir, my duty remembered, this shalbe to declare vnto you the
+discourse of this our voyage, since our departure out of England from
+Dartmouth; at which time I gaue you to vnderstand of our departure, which
+was the 25 of February 1562. Then hauing a prosperous winde we departed
+from thence, and sailed on our voyage vntill we arriued at Cauo verde the
+20 of March, making no abode there, but sailed along the coast to our first
+appointed port Rio de Sestos, at which port we arriued the third of Aprill
+in the morning, hauing the sight of a Frenchman, who assoone as he
+perceiued vs, set saile and made to the sea: in the meane time we came to
+an anker in the rode: and after that he had espied our flag, perceiuing vs
+to be Englishman, he bare with the shore, and hailed our ships with his
+ordinance, at which time we the merchants of both the ships were in the
+riuer in traffike, and had vnderstanding of the Negroes that he had bene
+there three dayes before our comming: so we concluded together, that if he
+sent his pinnesse to traffike, we would not suffer him, vntill we had taken
+further order with their captaine and marchants. In the afternoone the
+pinnesse came into the riuer, whose men we willed to make no traffike
+vntill we had talked further with their captaine, whom we willed that night
+to come aboord our admirall: which was done. At which sayd time M. Burton
+and Iohn Munt went aboord the Minion where the Frenchmen were, and there
+concluded that they should tary by vs eight dayes, and suffer vs quietly to
+traffike, wherewith they were not well pleased. Wherevpon the next morning
+they departed from vs, sailing alongst the coast to the Eastward towards
+Potis, which he did to hinder our traffike that way: wherefore the
+marchants of the Minion and we concluded (forasmuch as at that present we
+vnderstood that were no sailes past alongst) that we should go before, to
+the end we might not be hindered of our traffike by the Frenchmen; which
+thing we did: and at our comming thither we found the Frenchmen in traffike
+to the West of Potis, by whom we passed, and arriued at Rio de Potis the 12
+of April, where we remained in traffike vntill the 15 of the sayd moneth,
+and then departed from thence along the coast toward Sant Andre, where we
+appointed by agreement to tary for the Minion; and the 17 at night we came
+to the riuer of S. Andre, in which very day the Minion came vnto vs,
+telling vs that they met at cauo das Palmas a great ship and a caruell of
+the king of Portugals bound to the Mina, who gaue chase vnto them, and shot
+freely at them, and the Minion in her defence returned her the like: but
+God be praised the Minion had no hurt for that time. In the end we
+concluded to hasten towards cauo de tres puntus to haue put them from the
+castle, if by any meanes wee might; and when wee were come to the Cape, we
+lay a hull one night and two dayes, and doubting they had bene past, the
+Minion went neere the shore, and sent her merchants to a place called Anta,
+where beforetime we had traffike, and the next morning very early being the
+21 of the sayd moneth, we againe had sight of the ship and the carauell a
+good way to sea-boord of vs. Then we presently set saile, and bare with the
+formost of them, hoping to haue got betweene the castle and them, but we
+came short of our purpose, which was no small griefe vnto vs all; and when
+they had gotten the castle to friend, they shot at vs freely, and we at
+them, and the castle at vs; but we profited litle. In the afternoone we set
+saile and came to the town of Don Iuan called Equi, where the 22 in the
+morning we went a shoare to traffike, but the Negros would not vntill they
+had newes from Don Luis, for at that time Don Iuan was dead, and the 23
+came Don Luis his sonne and Pacheco minding to traffike with vs, at which
+said day came two gallies rowing along the shoare from the castle, minding
+to keepe vs from our traffike. The 24 we set saile and chased the galies to
+the castle againe. The Negroes being glad of that required vs to goe to
+Mowre, which is some 3 leagues behind, and thither would they come for that
+they stood in feare of the Portugals, and there we remained for the
+marchants that came out of the countrey which were come with their gold,
+but Anthonio don Luis his sonne, and Pacheco were aboord the Minion. And
+the 25 in the morning came the two galies from the castle againe vnto vs,
+the weather being very calme, they shot at vs and hit vs 3 times, and
+shortly after the wind came from the shore, at which instant we descried
+the ship, and the carauell comming toward vs, then we weighed and set
+saile, and bare as neere vnto them as we could: but it was night or euer
+wee met with them, and the night being very darke we lost them. The next
+day plying to the shore, at night we agreed to go with Cormantin, but the
+next morning being the 28 we were but a litle distant from the great ship
+and the 2 galies, hauing no wind at all, and the carauell hard aboord the
+shore. Then being calme, came the 2 galies rowing to the sterne of the
+Minion, and fought with her the most part of the forenoone: [Sidenote: Much
+hurt done in the Minion with firing a barrel of gunpouder.] and in the
+fight a mischance hapned in the Minions steward-roome by means of a barrell
+of pouder that tooke fire, wherewith were hurt the master gunner, the
+steward, and most part of the gunners: which the galies perceiuing, began
+to be more fierce vpon them, and with one shot cut halfe her foremast in
+twaine, that without present remedie shee was not able to beare saile, and
+presently vpon this the great ship sent her boat to the galies, who
+suddenly departed from vs. And after their departure we went aboord the
+Minion to counsell what were best to be done, at which time they were sore
+discomfited. Whereupon we deuised what was best to be done: and because wee
+knew that the Negros neither would nor durst traffike so long as the galies
+were on the coast it was therefore agreed that we should prepare our selues
+to depart to Rio de Sestos, and so we departed that day. [Sidenote: They
+returne.] The 14 of May in the rooming we fell with the land, and when wee
+came to it, we doubted what place it was, and sent our boates on land to
+know the trueth, and we found it to be Rio de Barbos, which is to be
+Eastward of sant Andre, and there remained in getting of water until the
+21, where we lost the day before 5 of our men by meanes of overthrowing our
+black pinnasse. The 22 we departed from thence to Rio de Sesto, where we
+arriued the 2 of Iune, and the 4 wee departed from Rio de Sesto, and
+arriued (God bee thanked) the 6 of August within sight of the Stert in the
+West part of England, our men being very sicke and weake. We haue not at
+this present aboue 20 sound men that are able to labour, and we haue of our
+men 21 dead, and many more very sore hurt and sicke. Master Burton hath
+bene sicke this 6 weekes, and at this present (God strengthen him) is so
+weake that I feare he will hardly escape. Herein inclosed your worship
+shall receiue a briefe of all the goods sold by vs, and also what
+commodities we haue receiued for the same. Thus I leaue to trouble your
+worship, reseruing all things als to our generall meeting, and to the
+bringer hereof. From aboord the Primerose the 6 of August 1563.
+
+Your obedient seruant
+
+William Rutter.
+
+There are brought home this voiage An. 1363. Elephants teeth 166 weighing
+1758 pounds. Graines 22 buts full.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A meeting at Sir William Gerards house the 11 of Iuly 1564. for the setting
+  foorth of a voyage to Guinea, with the Minion of the Queens, the Iohn
+  Baptist of London, and the Merline of M. Gonson.
+
+At this meeting were these chiefe aduenturers, Sir William Gerrard, sir
+William Chester, sir Thomas Lodge, Anthonie Hickman, and Edward Castelin.
+Where it was agreed that Francis Ashbie should be sent to Deptford to M.
+Gonson for his letters to Peter Pet to goe about the rigging of the Minion
+vpon the Queenes maiesties charges, and so the said Francis to repaire with
+the same letters to Gillingham with money to supplie our charge there.
+
+Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith call vpon their
+partners to supply towards this new rigging and victualling, 29 li. 10s.
+6d. for euery 100. li. value.
+
+Also that euery one of the fiue partners shall foorthwith bring in 50 li.
+towards the furniture of the premisses.
+
+Likewise it is agreed that if M. Gonson giue his consent that the Merline
+shall be brought about from Bristoll to Hampton, that a letter be drawen
+whereunto his hand shall be, before order be giuen for the same.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The successe of this Voiage in part appeareth by certaine briefe relations
+  extracted out of the second voyage of Sir Iohn Hawkins to the West
+  Indies, made in the sayd yeere 1564, which I thought good to set downe
+  for want of further instructions, which hitherto I could not by any
+  meanes come by, albeit I haue vsed all possible indeuour for the
+  obtaining of the same: Take them therefore in the meane season as
+  foloweth.
+
+Master Iohn Hawkins, with the Iesus of Lubeck a ship of 700. tonnes, and
+the Salomon, a ship of 7 score, the Tiger a barke of 50, and the Swalow 30
+tonnes, being all well furnished with men to the number of one hundred
+threescore and ten, as also with ordinance and victuall requisite for such
+a voiage, departed out of Plimmouth the 18 day of October in the yeere of
+our Lord 1564. with a prosperous winde: at which departing, in cutting the
+foresaile, a marueilous misfortune happened to one of the officers in the
+ship, who by the pullie of the sheat was slaine out of hand, being a
+sorowfull beginning to them all. And after their setting out 10 leagues to
+the Sea, hee met the same day with the Minion a ship of the Queens
+Maiesties, whereof was captaine Dauid Carlet, and also her consort the Iohn
+Baptist of London being bound to Guinea likewise, who hailed one the other
+after the custome of the sea, with certaine pieces of ordinance for ioy of
+their meeting: which done, the Minion departed from him to seeke her other
+consort the Merline of London, which was a stone out of sight, leauing in
+M. Hawkins companie the Iohn Baptist her other consort.
+
+Thus sailing forwards on their way with a prosperous wind until the 21 of
+the same moneth, at that time a great storme arose, the wind being at
+Northeast about 9 of the clocke at night, and continued so 23 houres
+together, in which storme M. Hawkins lost the company of the Iohn Baptist
+aforesaid, and of his pinnasse called the Swallow, the other 3 ships being
+sore beaten with the storme. The 23 day the Swalow, to his no small
+reioicing, came to him againe in the night 10 leagues to the Northward of
+Cape Finister, hauing put roomer and not being able to double the Cape, in
+that there rose a contrary wind at Southwest. The 25 the wind continuing
+contrary, he put into a place in Galicia called Ferol, where he remained 5
+daies and appointed all the masters of his ships an order for the keeping
+of good company.
+
+[Sidenote: The firing and sinking of the Merline bound for Guinea.] The 26
+day the Minion came in also where he was, for the reioycing whereof he gaue
+them certaine pieces of ordinance after the curtesie of the Sea for their
+welcome, but the Minions men had no mirth because of their consort the
+Merline, whom at their departure from M. Hawkins vpon the coast of England,
+they went to seeke, and hauing met with her, kept company two dayes
+together, and at last by misfortune of fire (through the negligence of one
+of the gunners) the pouder in the gunners roome was set on fire, which with
+the first blast stroke out her poope, and therewithall lost 3 men, besides
+many sore burned (which escaped by the Brigandine being at her sterne) and
+immediatly to the great losse of the owners, and most horrible sight of the
+beholders, she sunke before their eies. The 30 day of the moneth M. Hawkins
+with his consorts and company of the Minion hauing now both the Brigandines
+at her sterne, weighed anker, and set saile on their voiage hauing a
+prosperous wind thereunto. The 4 of Nouember they had sight of the Iland of
+Madera, and the 6 day of Teneriffa, which they thought to haue bene the
+Canarie, in that they supposed themselues to haue bene to the Eastward of
+Teneriffa but were not: but the Minion beyng 3 or 4 leagues a head of vs
+kept on her course to Teneriffa, hauing better sight thereof then the other
+had, and by that means they parted company.
+
+The foresaid Sir Iohn Hawkins passing on his voiage by Cauo Verde and
+Sierra Leona, and afterward crossing ouer the maine Ocean comming to the
+towne of Burboroata vpon the coast of Terra firma in the West Indies, had
+further information of the euill successe of this Guinean voyage, as in the
+same hereafter is verbatim mentioned.
+
+The 29 of April, we being at anker without the road, a French ship called
+the green Dragon of Newhauen, whereof was captaine one Bon Temps came in,
+who saluted vs after the maner of the sea, with certaine pieces of
+ordinance, and we resaluted him with the like againe: with whom hauing
+communication, he declared that hee had bene at the Mina in Guinea, and was
+beaten off by the Portugals gallies, and enforced to come thither to make
+sale of such wares as he had: and further that the like was hapned vnto the
+Minion: also that captaine Dauid Carlet, and a marchant, with a dozen
+mariners were betraied by the Negros at their first arriuall thither,
+remaining prisoners with the Portugals, besides other misaduentures of the
+losse of their men hapned through the great lacke of fresh water, with
+great doubts of bringing home the ships: which was most sorrowfull for vs
+to vnderstand.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of M. George Fenner to Guinie, and the Islands of Cape Verde, in
+  the yeere of 1566. with three ships, to wit the Admirall called the
+  Castle of Comfort, the May Flower, and the George, and a pinnasse also:
+
+Written by Walter Wren.
+
+The 10 day of December, in the yeere abouesayd, we departed from Plimmouth,
+and the 12 day we were thwart of Vshant.
+
+The 15 day in the morning being Sunday, wee had sight of Cape Finister, and
+the same night we lost the company of our Admiral, wherefore we sayled
+along the coast of Portugall, hoping that our Admiral had bene before vs.
+
+The 18 day we met with a French ship of whom wee made inquirie for our
+Admirall, but he could not tell vs newes of him: so we followed our course
+to the Ilands of the Canaries.
+
+The 25 day in the morning we fell with a small Iland called Porto Santo,
+and within 3 houres wee had sight of another Iland called Madera which is 6
+leagues from Porto Santo.
+
+The said 25 day being the day of the Natiuitie, we hoised out our boat, and
+fet Master Edward Fenner captaine of the May Flower aboord vs, being in the
+George, with the master whose name was Robert Cortise and others of the
+sayd shippe, and feasted them with such cheere as God had sent vs.
+
+The 28 day we fel with an Iland called Tenerif, which is 27 leagues from
+the said Iland, and on the East side thereof we came to an anker in 40
+fadome water, within a base shot of the shore, in a little Baie wherein
+were 3 or 4 small houses: which Baie and houses were distant from a litle
+towne called Santa Cruz, a league or thereabout, and as we rode in the said
+Baie, we might see an Iland called The grand Canarie, which was 6 or 7
+leagues from vs.
+
+The 29 day the May Flower for that she could not fet into ye road where we
+were at an anker, by reason the wind was off the shore, and because she
+bare more roomer from the land then we did, in the morning came bearing in
+with the towne of Santa Cruz, thinking to come to an anker in the road
+against the towne, and before she came within the reach of any of their
+ordinance, they shot at her foure pieces which caused her to come roome
+with vs, and came at last to an anker by vs. And about one of the clocke in
+the afternoone, the forenamed captaine of the May Flower wrote a letter a
+shoare, directing it to the head officer of the towne of Santa Cruz, to the
+intent to vnderstand the pretense of the shooting off the said ordinance.
+
+The letter being written, Robert Courtise master of the May Flower, and
+Walter Wren were appointed to deliuer the same a land at 3 or 4 houses to
+bee conueid to the foresayd towne, and so went with six men in the boate,
+and rowed to the shore as neere as they might, for setting the boate on
+ground, for the sea went cruelly at the shore.
+
+The people stood in number 30 persons with such armour as they had: the
+foresayd Wren called to them in Spanish, declaring to them that they had a
+letter which they would very gladly haue conueid vnto the towne, shewing
+that they would traffique with them as marchants, desiring their helpe for
+the conuenience of the same letter. With that one of the Spaniards willed
+vs to come on land, and we should be welcome, but doubting the worst, the
+said Walter answered them that they would not come on land, vntill they had
+answere of their letter which they had brought.
+
+Whereupon one of the Spaniards vnraied himselfe, and lept into the water,
+and swam to the boat, whom we receiued. And he saluted vs, and demaunded
+what our request was: we made him answere, that by misfortune we lost the
+companie of our Admirall, and being bound to this Iland to traffique for
+wines and other things necessary for vs, do here mind to stay vntill he
+come.
+
+Concerning our letter he made vs answere, that he would with all diligence
+cary it, and deliuer it according to the direction, and so the said Walter
+knit the letter in a bladder, and deliuered it unto him, and also gaue him
+foure roials of Spanish money for his paines: and promising that we should
+haue answere of it, he tooke his leaue and swamme againe on shore, where
+the people stood ready to receiue him. And after that they had talked with
+him, and vnderstood our meaning, some of them threw vp their hats, and the
+other put them off holding them in their hands, and made vs very curteous
+signes, alwaies desiring that the boat would come a land, but we resaluting
+them rowed backe againe aboord.
+
+The 30 day the Gouernors brother of Santa Cruz came aboord the May Flower
+with sixe or seuen Spaniards with him, who concluded with the Captaine that
+we might come a shoare and traffique with them, but that day we did not,
+for we had sufficient pledge of theirs for our assurance. Our Captaine
+entertained them well, and at their departure gaue them foure pieces of
+ordinance for a farewell, and bestowed vpon them two cheeses with other
+things.
+
+The said Gouernors brother promised our Captaine that hee should haue
+sufficient pledges the morrow following, which was not done, whereupon wee
+grew suspicious, and went not that day a shore.
+
+The first day of Ianuary our captaine sent Nicholas Day and Iohn Sumpter a
+shore, who were very well entertained with as many of our company as went
+after them.
+
+In the said Iland is a maruellous high hill called the Pike, which is a far
+off more like a cloud in the aire, then any other thing: the hill is round
+and somewhat small at the top, it hath not bene knowen that euer any man
+could goe vp to the top thereof. And although it stand in 28 degrees which
+is as hote in January, as it is in England at Midsommer, yet is the top of
+the said hil Winter and Sommer seldome without snow.
+
+In this Iland about two leagues from the said Santa Cruz is a citie called
+Anagona.
+
+The third day wee departed about the Westerne point of the Iland, about 12
+or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz, into a Baie which is right agaynst the house
+of one Petro de Souses, in which Baie we came to an anker the 5 day, where
+we heard that our Admirall had bene there at an anker 7 dayes before vs,
+and was gone thence to an Iland called Gomera, whereupon we set saile
+presently to seeke him.
+
+The 6 day we came to an anker against the towne of Gomera, where we found
+our Admirall, which was very ioyfull of our comming, and we also of his
+sight.
+
+In the sayd road we found Edward Cooke, in a tall ship, and a shippe of the
+Coppersmiths of London, which the Portugals had trecherously surprised in
+the Baie of Santa Cruz, vpon the coast of Barbarie, which ship we left
+there all spoiled.
+
+Our General and merchants bought in the said towne for our provision, 14
+buts of wine, which cost 15 duckats a but, which were offred vs at Santa
+Cruz in Tenerif for 8, 9, and 10 duckats.
+
+The 9 day we departed from this road to another Baie, about 3 leagues off
+and there tooke in fresh water: and so the 10 day we set saile towards Cape
+Blanke, which is on the coast of Guinea.
+
+The 12 day we fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape Pargos, which is 35
+leagues from Cape Blanke. But hauing no knowledge of that coast, we went
+with Cape Blanke, and at the fall of the land we sounded and had 16 fadome
+water two leagues from the shore. The land is very lowe and white sand.
+[Sidenote: A good caueat.] Vpon the fall of the sayd coast beware how you
+borow in 12 or 10 fadome, for within 2 or 3 casts of the lead you may be on
+ground.
+
+The 17 day we set saile from Cape Blanke, directing our course South and by
+East and South among, and so fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape
+Verde, about 16 leagues, and about sixe leagues from the shore. The sayd
+land seemed vnto vs as if it had bene a great number of shippes vnder
+saile, being indeed nothing els but the land which was full of Hummoks,
+some high some lowe, with high trees on them. We bare with the said land
+till we were within 3 leagues of the shore, and then we sounded, and found
+28 fadome water, black oase. This day we saw much fish in sundry sculs
+swimming with their noses with the brim of the water.
+
+Passing along this coast we might see two small round hils, seeming to vs
+about a league one from the other, which is the Cape, and betweene them are
+great store of trees, and in all our dayes sailing we saw no land so high
+as the said two hils.
+
+The 19 day we came to an anker at the Cape, in a roade fast by the
+Westermost side of two hils in 10 fadome of water where you may ride in
+fiue or sixe fadome, for the ground is faire, and alwayes you shall haue
+the winde off the shore. And as soone as we were all at an anker our
+Generall came aboord vs, and with him the master of the Admirall, whose
+name was William Bats, and with them the captaine of the Viceadmirall,
+whose name was master Edward Fenner, and Robert Curtise the master, and
+dined aboord of vs being in the George, wherein was Captaine Iohn Heiwood,
+and Iohn Smith of Hampton master, and there we concluded to goe a land,
+which was halfe a mile from vs: [Sidenote: The foolish rashness of Wil.
+Bats perswading company to land unarmed.] and by the counsel of William
+Bats both Captaine and marchants and diuers of the companie went without
+armour: for he sayd, that although the people were blacke and naked, yet
+they were ciuill: so that hee would needs giue the venter without the
+consent of the rest to go without weapon. Thus they rowed to shore, where
+we being in the shippe might see a great companie of Negros naked, walking
+to and fro by the sea side where the landing place was, waiting for the
+comming of our men, who came too soone, and landed to their losse as it
+fell out afterwards.
+
+There went a shore the Admirals skiffe, and the May Flowers boate, and in
+them the number of 20 persons or thereabouts, as M. George Fenner the
+Generall, his brother M. Edward Fenner, Thomas Valentine, Iohn Worme and
+Francis Leigh marchants, Iohn Haward, William Bats, Nicholas Day, Iohn
+Thomson and others.
+
+At their comming to the shore there were 100 Negros or vpward, with their
+bowes and arrowes: our Captaines and merchants talked with them, and
+according to the vse of the country, the one demanded pledges of the other,
+and they were content to deliuer 3 of their Negros for 5 of our men. Our 5
+mens names were these, Iohn Haward, Wil. Bats, Nich. Day, Ioh. Tomson, and
+Iohn Curtise: these were deliuered them, and we receiued 3 Negros into our
+Admirals skiffe.
+
+Our men being a shore among the Negros, began to talke with them, declaring
+what ware and marchandize we had, as woollen cloth, linnen cloth, iron,
+cheese and other things. The Negros answered againe, they had ciuet, muske,
+gold and graines, which pleased our captaines and marchants very well. Then
+the Negros desired to haue a sight of some of our wares, to the which our
+marchants were content, and foorthwith sent aboord one of the boats for
+part of their marchandise, and in the meane time while the boate went to
+the ship, our fiue men were walking on the shore with the Negros, and our
+Generall and marchants staied in the other boat by the sea side, hauing the
+3 Negros with them.
+
+Our boate then came againe and brought iron and other marchandise, with
+bread, wine, and cheese which they gave vnto him. Then two of the Negros
+(which were the pledges) made themselues sicke, desiring to goe a shore,
+promising to send other two for them. Captaine Haiward perceiuing that our
+men had let the Negros come a shore, asked what they meant, and doubting
+the worst began to drawe toward the boate, and two or three of the Negros
+folowed him. And when hee came to the boate they began to stay him, and he
+made signes vnto them that hee would fetch them more drinke and bread:
+notwithstanding, when he was entering into the boate, one of them caught
+him by the breeches and would haue staied him, but hee sprang from him and
+leapt into the boate, and as soone as hee was in, one of the Negros a shore
+beganne to blow a pipe, and presently the other Negro that was in our boate
+sitting on the boates side, and master Wormes sword by him, suddenly drew
+the sword out of the scabberd, and cast himselfe into the Sea, and swamme a
+shore, and presently the Negros laied handes on our men that were on shore,
+and tooke three of them with great violence, and tore all their apparell
+from their backes and left them nothing to couer them, and many of them
+shot so thicke at our men in our boates, that they could scarse set hand to
+any Oare to rowe from the shore, yet (by the helpe of God) they got from
+them with their boates although many of them were hurt with their poysoned
+arrowes: and the poison is vncurable, if the arrow enter within the skin
+and drawe blood, and except the poison be presently suckt out, or the place
+where any man is hurt bee foorthwith cut away, he dieth within foure dayes,
+and within three houres after they bee hurt or pricked, wheresoeuer it be,
+although but at the litle toe, yet it striketh vp to the heart, and taketh
+away the stomacke, and causeth the partie marueilously to vomite, being
+able to brooke neither meat nor drinke.
+
+The Negros hauing vsed our men with such cruelty, whose names were Nicholas
+Day, William Bats, and Iohn Tomson, led them away to a towne which was
+within a mile of the water side, or thereabout.
+
+The 20 day we sent to land a boate or skiffe wherein were eight persons,
+and one of them was the foresayd Iohn Tomson and our interpreter which was
+a Frenchman, (for there was one of the Negros which spake good French:) and
+they caried with them two harquebusses, two targets and a mantell.
+
+The cause of sending them was to learne what ransome they demaunded for
+Bats and Day whom they detained. And when they came to the shore and told
+the Negros what they desired, they went and fetched them from among the
+trees, and brought them loose among fortie or fiftie of them. And being
+come within a stones cast of the sea side, William Bats brake from them,
+and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat, and he was not
+so soone in the water but hee fell downe, either breath or his foote
+failing him in the sand being soft: so that the Negros came and fell on him
+and tooke him and haled him, that we thought they had torne him in pieces:
+[Sidenote: The danger of poysoned arrowes.] for they tore againe all the
+apparell from his backe, so that some of them caried our men againe to the
+towne, and the rest shot at vs with their poisoned arrowes, and hurt one of
+our men called Androwes in the smal of the leg, who being come aboord, (for
+all that our Surgeons could do) we thought he would haue died.
+
+Our Generall (notwithstanding all this villanie) sent agayne to them, and
+offered them any thing that they desired for the raunsome of our men, but
+they would not deliuer them: giuing vs this answere: That there was in the
+foresayd roade, three weekes before we came, an English shippe which had
+taken three of their people, and vntill we did bring or send them againe,
+wee should not haue our men although wee would giue our three shippes with
+their furniture.
+
+The 21 day a French shippe of the burden of 80 tunnes (or thereabouts,)
+came to the place where we were, being bound to traffique at the Cape: we
+told them of the detaining of our two men by the Negros: and seeing that
+these Frenchmen were very well welcome to the Negros, we wished them to see
+whether they could procure them againe of the Negros, and bring them along
+with them, and our Generall promised the Frenchmen 100 li. to obtaine them.
+So wee committed the matter to the Frenchmen and departed.
+
+Of our men that were hurt by the Negros arrowes, foure died, and one to
+saue his life had his arme cut off. Androwes that was last of all hurt, lay
+lame not able to helpe himselfe: onely two recouered of their hurts. So we
+placed other men in the roomes of those that we lost, and set saile.
+
+The 26 day between Cape Verde and Bona vista we sawe many flying fishes of
+the bignesse of herrings, whereof two flew into our boat, which we towed at
+our sterne.
+
+The 28 day we fell with an Iland called Bona vista, which is from Cape
+Verde 86 leagues. The Northside of the sayde Iland is full of white sandie
+hils and dales, and somewhat high land.
+
+The sayd day wee came to an anker within the Westermost point, about a
+league within the point and found in our sounding faire sand in ten fadome
+water, but you may go neere till you be in fiue or six fadome, for the
+ground is faire.
+
+As soone as we were at an anker, our Generall sent his pinnasse a land, and
+found fiue or sixe small houses, but the people were fled into the
+mountains: and the next day he sent a shore againe, and met with two
+Portugals, who willingly went aboord with his men, and at their comming he
+welcommed them, although they were but poore and simple, and gaue each of
+them a paire of shoes, and so set them a shore againe.
+
+The 30 day we weighed and sailed into a Bay within a small Iland about a
+league from vs, and tooke plentie of diuers sortes of fishe. The foresayd
+Iland lieth in sixteene degrees. And if you meane to anker in the said Bay,
+you may borow in four or fiue fadome of the Southermost point of the sayd
+Iland, which you may see when you ride in the road. But beware of the
+middle of the Baie, for there lieth a ledge of rocks, which at lowe water
+breaketh, yet there is three fadome water ouer them.
+
+The last day of Ianuarie our Generall with certaine of his men went a shore
+in the Baie to the houses, where be found 12 Portugals. In all the Iland
+there were not aboue 30 persons, which were banished men for a time, some
+for more yeeres, some for lesse, and amongst them there was one simple man
+which was their captaine.
+
+They liue vpon goats flesh, cocks, hennes, and fresh water: other victuals
+they haue none, sauing fish, which they esteeme not, neither haue they any
+boats to take them.
+
+They reported that this Iland was giuen by the king of Portugall to one of
+his gentlemen, who hath let it foorth to rent for one hundreth duckats a
+yeere, which rent is reared onely in goates skinnes. For by their speaches
+there hath bene sent foorth of the sayd Iland into Portugall 40000 skins in
+one yeere.
+
+We were to these men marueilously welcome, and to their powers very wel
+entertained, and they gaue vs the flesh of as many hee-goates as wee would
+haue, and tooke much paines for vs in taking them, and bringing them from
+the mountains vpon their asses.
+
+They haue there great store of the oyle of Tortoises, which Tortoise is a
+fish which swimmeth in the Sea, with a shell on his backe as broad as a
+target. It raineth not in this Iland but in three moneths of the yeere,
+from the midst of Iuly to the midst of October, and it is here alwayes very
+hote. Kine haue bene brought hither, but by reason of the heate and drought
+they haue died.
+
+The 3 of February wee departed from this Iland, and the same day fell with
+another Iland called the Iland of Maiyo, which is 14 leagues from the other
+Iland: there is in the midst of the way between these two Ilands a danger
+which is alwayes to be seene.
+
+We ankred in the Northwest side of the sayd Ile in a faire Baie of eight
+fadomes water and faire sand, but here we staied not, but the fourth day
+weighed and sailed to another Iland called S. Iago, which lieth off the
+said Iland of Maiyo East and by South, and about fiue leagues one from the
+other. Being come within the Westermost point, we saw a faire road, and a
+small towne by the water side, and also a fort or platforme by it: there we
+purposed to come to anker, and our marchants to make some sale. But before
+we came within their shot, they let flie at vs two pieces, whereupon we
+went roomer and sailed along the shore two or three leagues from the road,
+where we found a small Baie and two or three small houses, where we came to
+an anker in 14 fadome faire ground.
+
+Within an houre after we had ankered we might see diuers horsemen and
+footmen on the land right against vs riding and running to and fro.
+
+The next day being the fift of Februarie, a great companie of their
+horsemen and footmen appeared on the shoare side, vnto whom our Generall
+sent to vnderstande whether they would quietly trafike with vs: And they
+sent him worde againe, desiring that they might speake with him, promising
+that if he came to trafike as a marchant he should be welcome, and also
+that he should haue any thing that he or the marchant would with reason
+demaund.
+
+When this answere was brought vnto our Generall he was very glad thereof
+and the whole companie, and presently (with as much speede as he could) he
+caused his boates to be made readie: but doubting the villanie of the
+Portugales, he armed his boates putting a double base in the head of his
+pinnesse, and two single bases in the head of the Skiffe, and so sent to
+the May-floure, and the George, and willed them in like sort to man their
+two boates.
+
+These boates being thus manned and well appointed, our Generall entered
+into his Skiffe, and with the rest rowed to the shoare where were
+threescore horsemen or more, and two hundreth footemen readie to receiue
+them. Our Generall marueiled that they came in so great a number and all
+armed, and therefore with a flagge of truce sent to them to knowe their
+pleasure: and they answered him with many faire promises and othes, that
+their pretence was all true, and that they meant like Gentlemen and
+Marchantes to trafike with him, declaring also that their Captaine was
+comming to speake with him, and therefore desired our Generall to come and
+speake with him himselfe.
+
+With this answere the boate returned, and then our Generall caused his
+pinnesse to rowe to them, and as he came neere the shoare they came in a
+great companie with much obeysance, opening their hands and armes abroade,
+bowing themselues with their bonnets off, with as much humble salutations
+outwardly as they might: earnestly desiring our Generall and Marchants to
+come on lande to them, wherevnto he would not agree without sufficient
+gages of Gentlemen and Marchants. At length they promised to sende two
+gages to our Generals contentment, promising fresh water, victuall, money,
+or Negroes for ware, if it were such as they liked: and therefore desired
+our Generall and Marchants to sende them a shoare in writing the quantitie
+of their wares, and the names of them: all which our Generall departed to
+performe, looking for their answere the morrowe following. And being gone a
+litle from the shoare, he caused his bases, curriers, and harquebusses to
+be shot off, and our ships in like case shot off fiue or sixe pieces of
+great ordinance, and so came aboord to prepare the note. The Portugales
+most of them departed, sauing those that were left to watch and to receiue
+the note, which about foure or five a clocke in the afternoone was sent,
+and it was receiued. [Sidenote: The treason of the Portugals in S. Iago to
+our men.] But all the purposes of the Portugal were villainously to betray
+vs, (as shal appeare hereafter) although we meant in truth and honestie,
+friendly to trafike with them.
+
+There was to the Westward of vs and about two leagues from vs, a towne
+behinde a point fast by the sea side, where they had certaine carauels, or
+shippes and also two Brigandines, whereof they (with all the speede that
+they might) made readie foure Carauels, and both the brigandines which were
+like two Gallies, and furnished them both with men and ordinance as much at
+they could carrie, and as soone as it was night, they came rowing and
+falling towardes vs: so that the land being high and the weather somewhat
+cloude or mystie, and they comming all the way close vnder the shoare we
+could not see them till they were right against one of our ships called the
+May-floure.
+
+By this time it was about one or two of the clocke in the morning, and the
+May-floure roade neerer them then the other two by a base shotte, so they
+made a sure account either to haue taken her or burnt her. In the meane
+time our men that had the watch (litle thinking of such villainous
+treacheries after so many faire wordes) were singing and playing one with
+the other and made such a noyse, that (being but a small gale of winde, and
+riding neere the lande) they might heare vs from the shoare: so that we
+supposed that they made account that we had espyed them, which indeede we
+had not, neither had any one piece of ordinance primed, or any other thing
+in a readinesse.
+
+They came so neere vs that they were within gunshot of vs, and then one of
+our men chanced to see a light, and then looking out spied the 4 ships, and
+suddenly cried out, Gallies, gallies, at which crie we were all amazed, and
+foorthwith they shot at vs all the great ordinance that they had, and their
+harquebusses, and curriers, and so lighted certaine tronkes or pieces of
+wilde fire, and all of them with one voice (as well they on the shoare as
+they in the shippes) gaue a great shoute, and so continued hallowing with
+great noyses, still approaching neerer and neerer vnto the May-floure. We
+(with all the speede that we might) made readie one piece of ordinance and
+shotte at them, which caused them somewhat to stay, so they charged their
+ordinance and shot at vs freshly againe, and while they shotte this second
+time at vs, we had made readie three pieces which we shot at them, but they
+approched still so neere, that at last we might haue shot a sheafe arrowe
+to them. Wherevpon we hauing a gale of winde off the shoare hoysed our
+foresayle, and cut our cable at the hawse, and went towarde our Admirall,
+and they continued following and shooting at vs, and sometime at our
+Admirall, but our Admirall shotte one such piece at them, that it made them
+to retire, and at length to worpe away like traiterous villaines, and
+although they thus suddenly shot all their shot at vs, yet they hurt
+neither man or boye of ours, but what we did to them we know not.
+
+But seeing the villanie of these men we thought it best to stay there no
+longer, but immediately set sayle towardes an Iland, called Fuego, 12
+leagues from the said Iland of S. Iago. At which Island of Fuego we came to
+an anker the 11 day of this moneth, against a white chappell in the West
+end of the sayd Iland, within half a league of a litle towne, and with in a
+league or thereabout of the vtternost point of the said Island.
+
+In this Island is a marueilous high hill which doth burne continually, and
+the inhabitants reported that about three yeeres past the whole Island was
+like to be burned with the abundance of fire that came out of it.
+
+About a league from the chappel to the Westward is a goodly spring of fresh
+water, where we had as much as we would. Wheate they haue none growing
+here, but a certaine seede that they call Mill, and certaine peason like
+Guinie peason, which Mill maketh good breade, but they haue here good store
+of rother beasts and goates. [Sidenote: Cotton in Fuego.] Their marchandize
+is cotton, which groweth there.
+
+The inhabitants are Portugals which haue commandement from the king to
+trafike neither with Englishmen nor Frenchmen for victuall or any other
+thing, except they be forced so to doe.
+
+There lieth off this Iland another called Ila Braua, which is not passing
+two leagues ouer, it hath good store of goates and many trees, but there
+are not passing three or foure persons dwelling in it.
+
+[Sidenote: They returne.] The 25 day of February we departed towardes the
+Islands at Azores: and on the 23 day March we had sight of one of them
+called Flores, and then wee might see another Island to the Northward of it
+called Cueruo, lying two leagues or thereabouts off the other.
+
+The 27 we came to an anker in Cueruo ouer against a village of about twelue
+simple houses; but in the night by a gale of winde, which caused vs to
+drawe our anker after vs we hoysed sayle and went to the aforesayd Island
+of Flores, where we sawe strange streames of water running downe from the
+high cliffes by reason of the great abundance of raine that had suddenly
+fallen.
+
+The 29 day we came againe to Cueruo and cast anker, but a storme arose and
+continued seuen or eight houres together, so that we let slip a cable and
+anker, and after the storme was alayed we came againe thinking to haue
+recouered the same, but the Portugals had either taken it, or spoiled it:
+the cable was new and neuer wet before, and both the cable and anker were
+better worth then 40 li. So that we accompt our selues much beholding to
+the honest Portugales.
+
+The 18 day of April we tooke in water at the Island of Flores, and hauing
+ankered our cable was fretted in sunder with a rocke and so burst, where
+wee lost that cable and anker also, and so departed to our coast.
+
+Then wee set sayle to an Islande named Faial, about the which lie three
+other Islands, the one catted Pico, the other Saint George, and the other
+Graciosa, which we had sight of on the eight and twentieth day.
+
+The 29 we came to an anker in the Southwest side of Faial in a faire bay,
+and 22 fadom water against a litle towne where we had both fresh water and
+fresh victuall. In this Iland by the report of the inhabitants, there
+groweth certaine greene woad, which by their speeches is faire better then
+the woad of S. Michael or of Tercera.
+
+The 8 day of May we came to Tercera where we met with a Portugall ship, and
+being destitute of a cable and anker, our Generall caused vs to keepe her
+companie, to see if she could conueniently spare vs any. The next morning
+we might see bearing with vs a great shippe and two Carauels, which we
+iudged to be of the king of Portugals Armada, and so they were, wherevpon
+we prepared our selues for our defence. [Sidenote: A Portugall Galiasse of
+400 tunnes.] The said ship was one of the kings Galliasses, about the
+burden of foure hundred tunnes, with about three hundred men in her, the
+shippe being well appointed with brasse pieces both great and small, and
+some of them so bigge that their shot was as great as a mans head, the
+other two Carauels were also very warlike and well appointed both with men
+and munition.
+
+[Sidenote: A fight betweene one English ship and 7 Portugals.] As soone as
+they were within shotte of vs, they waued vs amaine with their swords, we
+keeping our course, the greatest shippe shot at vs freely and the carauell
+also, and we prepared our selues, and made all things cleare for our
+safegard as neere as we could. Then the great shippe shot at vs all her
+broad side, and her foure greatest pieces that lay in her sterne, and
+therewith hurt some of our men, and we did the best we could with our shot
+to requite it. At last two other Carauels came off the shoare, and two
+other pinnesses full of men, and deliuered them aboord the great shippe,
+and so went backe againe with two men in a piece of them. The ship and the
+Carauell gave vs the first day three fights, and when the night was come
+they left off shooting, yet notwithstanding kept hard by vs all the night.
+In the meane time we had as much as wee could doe all the night to mende
+our ropes, and to strengthen our bulwarkes, putting our trust in God, and
+resoluing our selues rather to die in our defence then to bee taken by such
+wretches.
+
+The next day being the 10 of May in the morning, there were come to the
+aide the said Portugals foure great Armadas or Carauels more which made
+seuen, of which 4 three of them were at the least 100 tunnes a piece, the
+other not so bigge, but all well appointed and full of men. All these
+together came bearing with vs being in our Admirall, and one of the great
+Carauels came to lay vs aboorde (as we iudged) for they had prepared their
+false nettings, and all things for that purpose, so that the Gallias came
+vp in our larboord side, and the Carauell in our starboord side.
+
+Our Captaine and master perceiuing their pretence, caused our gunners to
+make all our ordinance readie with crossebarres, chaineshotte and
+haileshot: so the ship and Carauell came vp, and as soone as they were
+right in our sides, they shotte at vs as much ordinance as they could,
+thinking to haue layde vs presently aboord: whereupon we gaue them such a
+heate with both our sides, that they were both glad to fall asterne of vs,
+and so paused the space of two or three houres being a very small gale of
+winde.
+
+Then came vp the other fiue and shot all at vs, and so fell all asterne of
+vs, and then went to counsell together.
+
+Then our small barke named the George came to vs, and wee confered together
+a great space. And as the Portugall shippes and Carauels were comming to vs
+againe, our barke minding to fall asteme of vs and so to come vp againe,
+fell quickly vpon the lee, and by reason of the litle winde, it was so long
+before she could fill her sailes againe, that both the shippe and Carauels
+were came vp to vs, and she falling in among them made reasonable shift
+with them, but they got a head of her, so that she could not vs: then 5 of
+the Carauels followed her, but we saw she defended her selfe against them
+all.
+
+Then came the great shippe and the Carauell to vs, and fought with vs all
+that day with their ordinance.
+
+The May-floure our other consort being very good by the winde, tooke the
+benefite thereof and halde all that day close by the winde, but could not
+come neere vs. So when night againe was come, they gaue ouer their fight
+and followed vs all the night.
+
+In these many fights it could not otherwise be but needes some of our men
+must be slaine, (as they were indeede) and diuers hurt, and our tackle much
+spoyled: yet for all this we did our best indeuour to repaire all things,
+and to stand to it to the death with our assured trust in the mercie and
+helpe of God.
+
+This night the May-floure came vp to vs, and our Captaine tolde them his
+harmes and spoyles, and wished them if they could spare halfe a dosen fresh
+men to hoyse out their boate and sende them to him, but they could not
+spare any, and so bare away againe. Which when our enemies sawe in the next
+morning that we were one from another, they came vp to vs againe and gaue
+vs a great fight with much hallowing and hooping, making accompt either to
+boorde vs or els to sinke vs: but although our companie was but small, yet
+least they should see vs any whit dismayed, when they hallowed we hallowed
+also as fast as they, and waued to them to come and boorde vs if they
+durst, but that they would not, seeing vs still so couragious: [Sidenote:
+The 7 Portugals depart with shame from one English ship.] and hauing giuen
+vs that day foure fights, at night they forsooke vs with shame, as they
+came to vs at the first with pride.
+
+They had made in our ship some leakes with their shot which we againe
+stopped with al speed, and that being done, we tooke some rest after our
+long labour and trouble.
+
+The next day in the morning the May-floure came to vs, and brought vs sixe
+men in her boate which did vs much pleasure, and we sent to them some of
+our hurt men.
+
+Then we directed our course for our owne countrey, and by the second day of
+Iune we were neere to our owne coast and sounded being thwart the Lyzard.
+
+The third day we had sight of a shippe which was a Portugall, who bare with
+vs, and at his comming to vs (the weather being calme) our Captaine caused
+him to hoyse foorth his boate to come aboord to speake with him, and at
+their comming our Captaine and Marchants demanded of them what ware they
+had, and whether they were bound, and they made answere that their lading
+was sugar and cotton. Then our Captaine and Marchants shewed them fiue
+Negroes that we had, and asked them whither they would buy them, which they
+were very desirous to doe, and agreed to giue for them 40 chests of sugar,
+which chests were small hauiug not aboue 26 loaues in a piece: so they with
+their boate did fetch fiue of the chestes and deliuered them and went for
+more, and when they had laden their boate and were come againe, we might
+see bearing with vs a great ship and a small, which our Captaine supposed
+to be men of warre or Rouers, [Marginal Note: A Portugall ship
+(notwithstanding all their villanies) defended by our men from Rouers.] and
+then willed the Portugales to carie their sugar to their ship againe,
+purposing to make our selues readie for our defence. But the Portugales
+earnestly intreated our Captaine not so to forsake them, and promised him
+(if he would safegard them) to giue him aboue the bargain ten chests of
+sugar: whereupon our Captaine was content, and the Portugall not being good
+of sayle, we spared our topsayles for her; so at last the foresaid ship
+bare with vs, and (seeing that we did not feare them) gaue vs ouer. And the
+next morning came two others bearing with vs, and seeing vs not about to
+flie a iot from them forsooke vs also.
+
+The 5 day of Iune we had sight of the Stert, and about noone we were thwart
+of the bay of Lime, and so sounded and had 35 fadom water.
+
+The sixt day we came in at the Needles and so came to an anker vnder the
+Isle of Wight at a place called Meadhole, and from thence sayled to
+Southampton where we made an ende of this voyage.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Ambassage of M. Edmund Hogan, one of the sworne Esquires of her
+  Maiesties person, from her Highnesse to Mully Abdelmelech Emperour of
+  Marocco, and king of Fes and Sus: in the yeere 1577, written by himselfe.
+
+I Edmund Hogan being appointed Ambassadour from the Queenes Maiestie to the
+aboue named Emperour and King Mully Abdelmelech, departed with my company
+and seruants from London the two and twentie day of April 1577, being
+imbarked in the good ship called the Gallion of London, and arriued in
+Azafi a port of Barbarie the one and twentie day of May next following.
+Immediatly I sent Leonell Edgerton a shoare with my letters directed to
+Iohn Williams and Iohn Bampton, who dispatched a Trottero to Marocco to
+knowe the kings pleasure for my repaire to the Court, which letters came to
+their hands on the Thursday night.
+
+They with all speede gaue the king understanding of it, who being glad
+thereof speeded the next day certaine Captaines with souldiers and tents,
+with other prouision to Azafi, so that vpon Whitsunday at night the said
+Captaines with Iohn Bambton, Robert Washborne, and Robert Lion, and the
+kings officers came late to Azafi.
+
+In the meane time I remained a boord, and caused some of the goods to be
+discharged for lightning of the shippe, and I wrote in my letter that I
+would not lande, till I knewe the Kings pleasure.
+
+The 22 day being Saturday, the Make-speede arriued in the roade about two
+of the clocke in the afternoone.
+
+The 27 day, being Whitsunday, came aboord the Gallion Iohn Bampton, and
+others, giuing me to vnderstande how much the King reioyced of my safe
+arriuall, comming from the Queenes Maiestie, and how that for my safe
+conduct to the Court he had sent foure Captaines and an hundred souldiers
+well appointed, with a horse furnished which he vsed himselfe to ride on
+with all other furniture accordingly: they wished mee also to come on lande
+in the best order I could, as well for my selfe as my men, which I did,
+hauing to the number of tenne men, whereof three were trumpetters.
+
+The ships being foure appointed themselues in the best order they could for
+the best shew, and shot off all their ordinance to the value of twentie
+Markes in powder.
+
+At my comming a shoare, I found all the souldiers well appointed on
+horsebacke, the Captaines and the Gouernour of the towne standing as neere
+the water side as they could, with a Iennet of the kings, and receiued mee
+from the boate declaring how glad his maiestie was of my safe arriuall,
+comming from the Queenes Maiestie my Mistresse, and that hee had sent them
+to attend vpon me, it being his pleasure that I should tarie there on shore
+fiue or sixe dayes for my refreshing.
+
+So being mounted vpon the Iennet, they conducted mee through the Towne into
+a faire fielde vpon the Sea-side where was a tent prouided for mee, and all
+the ground spread with Turkie carpets, and the Castle discharged a peale of
+ordinance, and all things necessarie were brought into my tent, where I
+both tooke my table and lodging, and had other conuenient tents for my
+seruants.
+
+The souldiers enuironed the tents, and watched about vs day and night as
+long as I lay there, although I sought my speedier dispatch.
+
+On the Wednesday towards night, I tooke my horse and traueiled ten miles to
+the first place of water that we could finde, [Marginal Note: In Barbarie
+they haue no Innes but they lodge in open fieldes where they can find
+water.] and there pitched our tents till the next morning, and so traueiled
+till ten of the clocke, and then pitched our tents till foure, and so
+traueiled as long as day light would suffer about 26 miles that day.
+
+The next day being Friday I traueiled in like order but eight and twentie
+miles at the most, and by a Riuer being about sixe miles within sight of
+the Citie of Marocco we pitched our tents.
+
+[Sidenote: The singular humanitie of the king to our Ambassadour.]
+Immediatly after came all our English marchants, and the French on
+horsebacke to meete me, and before night there came an Alcayde from the
+king with fiftie men, and diuers mules laden with victuall and banket, for
+my supper, declaring vnto me how glad the king shewed himselfe to heare of
+the Queenes Maiestie, and that his pleasere was I should be receiued into
+his country as neuer any Christian the like: and desired to knowe what time
+the next day I would come into his citie, because he would that all the
+Christians as also his nobilitie should meete me, and willed Iohn Bampton
+to be with him early in the morning, which he did.
+
+About seuen of the clocke being accompanied with the French and English
+marchants, and a great number of souldiers, I passed towards the citie, and
+by that time I had traueiled 2 miles, there met me all the Christians of
+the Spaniards and Portugals to receiue me, which I knowe was more by the
+kings commandement then of any good wils of themselues: for some of them
+although they speake me faire hung downe their heads like dogs, and
+especially the Portugales, and I countenanced them accordingly. [Marginal
+Note: The Spaniards and Portugales were commanded by the king in paine of
+death, to meete the English Ambassadour.]
+
+So I passed on till I came within two English miles of the Citie, and then
+Iohn Bampton returned, shewing me that the king was so glad of my comming,
+that hee could not deuise to doe too much, to shewe the good will that hee
+did owe to the Queenes Maiestie, and her Realme.
+
+His counsellors met me without the gates, and at the entrie of the gates,
+his footmen and guard were placed on both sides of my horse, and so brought
+me to the kings palace.
+
+The king sate in his chaire with his Counsell about him, as well the Moores
+as the Elchies, and according to his order giuen vnto me before, I there
+declared my message in Spanish, and made deliuerie of the Queenes Maiesties
+letters, and all that I spake at that present in Spanish, hee caused one of
+his Elchies to declare the same to the Moores present, in the Larbe tongue.
+
+Which done, he answered me againe in Spanish, yeelding to the Queenes
+Maiestie great thankes, and offering himselfe and his countrey to bee at
+her Graces commaundement, and then commaunded certaine of his Counsellers
+to conduct mee to my lodging, not being farre from the Court.
+
+The house was faire after the fashion of that countrey, being daily well
+furnished with al kind of victuall at the kings charge.
+
+The same night he sent for mee to the Court, and I had conference with him
+about the space of two houres, where I throughly declared the charge
+committed vnto mee from her Maiestie, finding him conformable, willing to
+pleasure and not to vrge her Maiestie with any demaundes, more then
+conueniently shee might willingly consent vnto, hee knowing that out of his
+countrey the Realme of England might be better serued with lackes, then bee
+in comparison from vs.
+
+[Sidenote: The king of Spaine sought to disgrace the Queene and her
+Ambassadour.] Further he gaue me to vnderstand, that the king of Spaine had
+sent vnto him for a licence, that an Ambassadour of his might come into his
+countrey, and had made great meanes that if the Queenes maiesty of England
+sent any vnto him, that he would not giue him any credit or intertainment,
+albeit (said he) I know what the king of Spaine is, and what the Queene of
+England and her Realme is: for I neither like of him nor of his religion,
+being so gouerned by the Inquisition that he can doe nothing of himselfe.
+
+Therefore when he commeth vpon the licence which I haue granted, he shall
+well see how litle account I will make of him and Spaine, and how greatly
+will extoll you for the Queenes maiestie of England.
+
+He shall not come to my presence as you haue done, and shall dayly: for I
+minde to accept of you as my companion and one of my house, whereas he
+shall attend twentie dayes after he hath done his message.
+
+After the end of this speech I deliuered Sir Thomas Greshams letters, when
+as he tooke me by the hand, and led me downe a long court to a palace where
+there ranne a faire fountaine of water, and there sitting himselfe in a
+chaire, he commanded me to sit downe in another, and there called for such
+simple Musicians as he had.
+
+[Sidenote: The king of Barbarie sent into England for Musicians.] Then I
+presented him with a great base Lute, which he most thankfully accepted,
+and then he was desirous to heare of the Musicians, and I tolde him that
+there was great care had to prouide them, and that I did not doubt but vpon
+my returne they should come with the first ship. He is willing to giue them
+good intertainment with prouision of victuall, and to let them liue
+according to their law and conscience wherein he vrgeth none to the
+contrary.
+
+I finde him to be one that liueth greatly in the feare of God, being well
+exercised in the Scriptures, as well in the olde Testament as also in the
+New, and he beareth a greater affection to our Nation then to others
+because of our religion, which forbiddeth worship of Idols, and the Moores
+called him the Christian king.
+
+[Sidenote: A rich gift bestowed upon our Ambassadour.] The same night being
+the first of Iune, I continued with him till twelue of the clocke, and he
+seemed to haue so good liking of me, that he tooke from his girdle a short
+dagger being set with 200 stones, rubies and turkies, and did bestow it
+vpon me, and so I being conducted returned to my lodging for that time.
+
+The next day because he knew it to be Sunday and our Sabbath day he did let
+me rest. But on the Munday in the afternoone he sent for me, and I had
+conference with him againe, and musicke.
+
+Likewise on the Tuesday by three of the clocke he sent for me into his
+garden, finding him layd vpon a silke bed complayning of a sore leg: yet
+after long conference he walked into another Orchard, where as hauing a
+faire banketting-house and a great water, and a new gallie in it, he went
+aboord the gallie and tooke me with him, and passed the space of two or
+three houres, shewing the great experience he had in Gallies, wherein (as
+he said) he had excercised himselfe eighteene yeeres in his youth.
+
+After supper he shewed me his horses and other commodities that he had
+about his house, and since that night I haue not seene him, for that he
+hath kept in with his sore legge, but he hath sent to me daily.
+
+The 13 of Iune at sixe of the clocke at night I had againe audience of the
+king, and I continued with him till midnight, hauing debated as well for
+the Queenes commission as for the well dealing, with her marchants for
+their traffike here in these parts, saying, he would do much more for the
+Queenes maiesty and the Realme offering that all English ships with her
+subiects may with good securitie enter into his ports and dominions as well
+in trade of marchandise, as for victuall and water, as also in time of
+warre with any her enemies to bring in prises and to make sales, as
+occasion should serue, or else to depart againe with them at their
+pleasure.
+
+Likewise for all English ships that shall passe along his coast of
+Barbarie, and thorow the straites into the Leuant seas, that he would
+graunt safe conduct that the said ships and marchants with their goods
+might passe into the Leuant seas, and so to the Turks dominions, and the
+king of Argiers, as his owne, and that he would write to the Turke and to
+the king of Argier his letters for the well vsing of our ships and goods.
+
+Also that hereafter no Englishmen that by any meanes be taken captiues,
+shall be solde within any of his dominions: whereupon I declared that the
+Queenes maiesty accepting of these his offers was pleased to confirme the
+intercourse and trade of our marchants within this his countrey, as also to
+pleasure him with such commodities as he should haue need of, to furnish
+the necessities and wants of his countrey in trade of marchandise, so as he
+required nothing contrarie to her honour and law, and the breach of league
+with the Christian princes her neighbours. [Sidenote: A good prouiso.]
+
+The same night I presented the king with the case of combes, and desired
+his maiestie to haue special regard that the ships might be laden backe
+againe, for that I found litle store of saltpeter in readinesse in Iohn
+Bamptons hands. He answered me that I should haue all the assistance
+therein that he could, but that in Sus he thought to haue some store in his
+house there, as also that the Mountayners had made much in a readinesse: I
+requested that he would send downe, which he promised to doe.
+
+The eighteene day I was with him againe and so continued there till night,
+and he shewed me his house with pastime in ducking with water-Spaniels, and
+baiting buls with his English dogges.
+
+At this time I moued him againe for the sending downe to Sus, which he
+granted to doe, and the 24. day there departed Alcayde Mammie, with Lionell
+Edgerton, and Rowland Guy to Sus, and caried with them for our accompts and
+his company the kings letters to his brother Muly Hammet, and Alcayde
+Shauan, and the Viceroy.
+
+The 23. day the king sent me out of Marocco to his garden called
+Shersbonare, with his gard, and Alcayde Mamoute, and the 24. at night I
+came to the court to see a Morris dance, and a play of his Elchies. He
+promised me audience the next day being Tuesday, but he put it off till
+Thursday: and the Thursday at night I was sent for to the king after
+supper, and then he sent Alcayde Rodwan, and Alcayde Gowry to conferre with
+me, but after a little talke I desired to be brought to the King for my
+dispatch. And being brought to him, I preferred two bils of Iohn Bamptons
+which he had made for prouision of Salt-peter: also two bils for the quiet
+traffique of our English marchants, and bils for sugars to be made by the
+Iewes, as well for the debts past, as hereafter, and for good order in the
+Ingenios. Also I mooued him againe for the Salt-peter, and other
+dispatches, which he referred to be agreed vpon by the two Alcaydes. But
+the Friday being the 20. the Alcaydes could not intend it, and vpon
+Saturday Alcayde Rodwan fell sicke, so on Sunday we made meanes to the
+King, and that afternoone I was sent for to conferre vpon the bargaine with
+the Alcaydes and others, but did not agree.
+
+Vpon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the King for my dispatch, and the same
+afternoone I was called againe to the Court, and referred all things to the
+King, accepting his offer of Salt-peter.
+
+That night againe the King had me into his Gallie, and the Spaniels did
+hunt the ducke.
+
+The Thursday I was appointed to way the 300. kintals grosse of Salt-peter,
+and that afternoone the Tabybe came vnto mee to my lodging, shewing mee
+that the king was offended with Iohn Bampton for diuers causes.
+
+The Sunday night late being the 7. of Iuly, I got the King to forgiue all
+to Iohn Bampton, and the King promised me to speake againe with me vpon
+Munday.
+
+Vpon Tuesday I wrote to him againe for my dispatch, and then hee sent Fray
+Lewes to mee, and said that he had order to write.
+
+Vpon Wednesday I wrote againe, and he sent me word that vpon Thursday I
+should come and be dispatched, so that I should depart vpon Friday without
+faile, being the twelfth of Iuly.
+
+[Sidenote: The Emperor of Maroco his priuileges to the English.] So the
+Friday after according to the kings order and appointment I went to the
+court, and whereas motion and petition was made for the confirmation of the
+demaunds which I had preferred, they were all granted, and likewise the
+priuileges which were on the behalfe of our English marchants requested,
+were with great fauour and readinesse yeelded vnto. And whereas the Iews
+there resident were to our men in certaine round summes indebted, the
+Emperors pleasure and commandement was, that they should without further
+excuse or delay, pay and discharge the same. And thus at length I was
+dismissed with great honour and speciall countenance, such as hath not
+ordinarily bene shewed to other Ambassadors of the Christians.
+
+And touching the priuate affaires intreated vpon betwixt her Maiestie and
+the Emperour, I had letters from him to satisfie her highnesse therein. So
+to conclude, hauing receiued the like honourable conduct from his Court, as
+I had for my part at my first landing, I embarked my selfe with my foresaid
+company, and arriuing not long after in England, I repaired to her
+Maiesties court, and ended my Ambassage to her highnesse good liking, with
+relation of my seruice performed.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Thomas Stukeley, wrongfully called Marques of Ireland, into
+  Barbary 1578. Written by Iohannes Thomas Freigius in Historia de caede
+  Sebastiani Regis Lusitaniae.
+
+Venerant autem ad regem etiam sexcenti Itali, quos Papa subministrarat,
+Comiti Irlandiae: qui cum Vlissiponem tribus instructis nauibus appulisset
+Regi operam suam condixit, eumque in bellum sequi promisit. Cap. 7.
+
+Totum exercitum diuisit in quatuor acies quadratas: In dextro latere primum
+agmen erat Velitum et militum Tingitanorum, eosque ducebat Aluarus Peresius
+de Tauara: sinistram aciem seu mediam tenebant Germani et Ital, quibus
+imperabat Marchio Irlandiae, etc. Cap 11.
+
+Inter nobiles qui in hoc praelio ceciderunt, fuerunt, praeter regem
+Sebastianum, dux de Auero, Episcopi Conimbricensis et Portuensis,
+Commissarius generalis a Papa missus Marchio Irlandiae, Christophorus de
+Tauora, et plures alij. Cap. 13.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+There came also to Don Sebastian the King of Portugal 600. Italians, whom
+the Pope sent vnder the conduct of the Marques of Irland: [Marginal note:
+Thomas Stukeley was wrongfully indued with this title.] who being arriued
+at Lisbone with three tall ships, proffered his seruice to the king, and
+promised to attend vpon him in the warres, &c.
+
+He diuided the whole Armie into 4 squadrons: vpon the right wing stood the
+first squadron, consisting of men lightly armed or skirmishers and of the
+souldiers of Tangier, Generall of whom was Don Aluaro Perez de Tauara: the
+left or midle squadron consisted of Germanes and Italians, vnder the
+command of the Marques of Irland, &c. cap. 7.
+
+Of Noblemen were slaine in this battel (besides Don Sebastian the king) the
+duke de Auero, the two bishops of Coimbra and of Porto, the Marques of
+Irland sent by the Pope as his Commissary generall, Christopher de Tauara,
+and many others, cap. 13.
+
+It is further also to be remembred, that diuers other English gentlemen
+were in this battell, whereof the most part were slaine; and among others
+M. Christopher Lyster was taken captiue, and was there long detained in
+miserable seruitude. Which gentleman although at length he happily escaped
+the cruel hands of the Moores; yet returning home into England, and for his
+manifold good parts being in the yeere 1586. employed by the honourable the
+Earle of Cumberland, in a voyage intended by the Streights of Magellan for
+the South sea, as Viceadmirall, (wherein he shewed singular resolution and
+courage) and appointed afterward in diuers places of speciall command and
+credite, was last of all miserably drowned in a great and rich Spanish
+prize vpon the coast of Cornwall.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine reports of the prouince of China learned through the Portugals
+  there imprisoned, and chiefly by the relation of Galeotto Perera, a
+  gentleman of good credit, that lay prisoner in that Countrey many yeeres.
+  Done out of Italian into English by Richard Willes.
+
+This land of China is parted into 13. Shires, the which sometimes were ech
+one a kingdome by it selfe, but these many yeeres they haue bene all
+subiect vnto one King. Fuquien is made by the Portugals the first Shire,
+because there their troubles began, and they had occasion thereby to know
+the rest. In the shire be 8 cities, but one principally more famous then
+others called Fuquieo, the other seuen are reasonably great, the best
+knowen whereof vnto the Portugals is Cinceo, in respect of a certaine hauen
+ioyning thereunto, whither in time past they were wont for marchandise.
+
+Cantan is the second shire, not so great in quantitie, as well accompted
+of, both by the king thereof, and also by the Portugals, for that it lieth
+neerer vnto Malacca then any other part of China, and was first discried by
+the Portugals before any other shire in that prouince: this shire hath in
+it seuen Cities.
+
+Chequeam is the third shire, the chiefest Citie therein is Donchion,
+therein also standeth Liampo, with other 13. or 14. boroughes: countrey
+townes therein are too too many to be spoken of.
+
+The fourth shire is called Xutiamfu, the principall Citie thereof is great
+Pachin, where the King is alwayes resident. In it are fifteene other very
+great Cities: of other townes therein, and boroughes well walled and
+trenched about, I will say nothing.
+
+The fift shire hath name Chelim: the great Citie Nanquin chiefe of other
+fifteene cities was herein of ancient time the royall seat of the Chinish
+kings. From this shire, and from the aforesaid Chequeam forward bare rule
+the other kings, vntil the whole region became one kingdome.
+
+[Sidenote: Quianci, or, Quinzi.] The 6. shire beareth the name Quianci, as
+also the principal City thereof, wherein the fine clay to make vessels is
+wrought. The Portugals being ignorant of this Countrey, and finding great
+abundance of that fine clay to be solde at Liampo, and that very good
+cheape, thought at the first that it had bene made there, howbeit in fine
+they perceiued that the standing of Quinzi more neere vnto Liampo then to
+Cinceo or Cantan was the cause of so much fine clay at Liampo: within the
+compasse of Quinci shire be other 12. cities.
+
+The 7. shire is Quicin, the 8. Quansi, the 9. Confu, the 10. Vrnan, the 11.
+Sichiua. In the first hereof there be 16. Cities, in the next 15: how many
+Townes the other 3. haue, wee are ignorant as yet, as also of the proper
+names of the 12. and 13. shires, and the townes therein.
+
+This finally may be generally said hereof, that the greater shires in China
+prouince may bee compared with mightie kingdomes.
+
+In eche one of these shires bee set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, before
+whom are handled the matters of other Cities. There is also placed in ech
+one a Tutan, as you would say, a gouernour, and a Chian, that is a visiter,
+as it were: whose office is to goe in circuit, and to see iustice exactly
+done. By these meanes so vprightly things are ordered there, that it may be
+worthily accompted one of the best gouerned prouinces in all the world.
+
+The king maketh alwayes his abode in the great city Pachin, as much to say
+in our language, as by the name thereof I am aduertised, the towne of the
+kingdome. This kingdome is so large, that vnder fiue moneths you are not
+able to trauaile from the Townes by the Sea side to the Court, and backe
+againe, no not vnder three moneths in poste at your vrgent businesse. The
+post-horses in this Countrey are litle of body, but swift of foote. Many
+doe traueile the greater part of this iourney by water in certaine light
+barkes, for the multitude of Riuers commodious for passage from one Citie
+to another.
+
+The king, notwithstanding the hugenesse of his kingdome, hath such a care
+thereof, that euery Moone (for by the Moones they reckon their monethes)
+hee is aduertised fully of whatsoeuer thing happeneth therein, by these
+meanes following.
+
+The whole prouince being diuided into shires, and each shire hauing in it
+one chiefe and principall Citie, whereunto the matters of all the other
+Cities, Townes and boroughes, are brought, there are drawen in euery chiefe
+Citie aforesaid intelligences of such things as doe monethly fall out, and
+be sent in writing to the Court. If happely in one moneth euery Post be not
+able to goe so long a way, yet doeth there notwithstanding once euery
+moneth arriue one Poste out of the shire. Who so commeth before the new
+moone stayeth for the deliuery of his letters vntil the moone be changed.
+Then likewise are dispatched other Posts backe into all the 13. shires
+againe.
+
+Before that we doe come to Cinceo wee haue to passe through many places,
+and some of great importance. For this Countrey is so well inhabited neere
+the Sea side, that you cannot goe one mile but you shall see some Towne,
+borough or hostry, the which are so aboundantly prouided of all things,
+that in the Cities and townes they liue ciuily. Neuertheles such as dwel
+abrode are very poore, for the multitude of them euery where is so great,
+that out of a tree you shall see many times swarme a number of children,
+where a man would not haue thought to haue found any one at all.
+
+From these places in number infinite, you shall come vnto wo Cities very
+populous, and, being compared with Cinceo, not possibly to be discerned
+which is the greater of them. These Cities are as well walled as any Cities
+in all the world. As you come into either of them, there standeth so great
+and mighty a bridge, that the like thereof I haue neuer seene in Portugal
+nor else where. I heard one of my fellowes say, that hee tolde in one
+bridge 40. arches. The occasion wherefore these bridges are made so great
+is, for that the Countrey is toward the sea very plaine and low, and
+ouerflowed euer as the sea water encreaseth. The breadth of the bridges,
+although it bee well proportioned vnto the length thereof, yet are they
+equally built no higher in the middle then at either ende, in such wise
+that you may see directly from the one ende to the other: the sides are
+wonderfully well engraued after the maner of Rome-workes. But that we did
+most marueile at was therewithall the hugenesse of the stones, the like
+whereof, as we came into the Citie, we did see many set vp in places
+dis-habited by the way, to no small charges of theirs, howbeit to little
+purpose, whereas no body seeth them but such as doe come by. The arches are
+not made after our fashion, vauted with sundry stones set together: but
+paued, as it were, whole stones reaching from one piller to an other, in
+such wise that they lye both for the arches heads, and galantly serue also
+for the highway. I haue bene astonied to beholde the hugenesse of the
+aforesaid stones: some of them are xii. pases long and vpward, the least
+ii. good pases long, and an halfe.
+
+The wayes echwhere are galantly paued with fouresquare stone, except it be
+where for want of stone they vse to lay bricke: in this voyage wee
+trauailed ouer certaine hilles, where the wayes were pitched, and in many
+places no worse paued then in the plaine ground. This causes vs to thinke,
+that in all the world there bee no better workemen for buildings, then the
+inhabitants of China. The Countrey is so well inhabited, that no one foote
+of ground is left vntilled: small store of cattell haue we seene this day,
+we sawe onely certaine oxen wherewithall the countrey, men do plow their
+ground. One oxe draweth the plough alone not onely in this shire, but in
+other places also, wherein is greater store of cattell. These countreymen
+by arte do that in tillage, which we are constrained to doe by force. Here
+be solde the voydings of close stooles, although there wanteth not the dung
+of beastes: and the excrements of man are good marchandise throughout all
+China. The dungfermers seek in euery streete by exchange to buy this dirtie
+ware for herbs and wood. The custome is very good for keeping the Citie
+cleane. There is great aboundance of hennes, geese, duckes, swine, and
+goates, wethers haue they none: the hennes are solde by weight, and so are
+all other things. Two pound of hennes flesh, geese, or ducke, is worth two
+foi of their money, that is, d. ob. sterling. Swines flesh is sold at a
+penie the pound. Beefe beareth the same price, for the scarcitie thereof,
+howbeit Northward from Fuquieo and farther off from the seacoast, there is
+beefe more plentie and solde better cheape; We haue had in all the Cities
+we passed through, great abundance of all these victuals, beefe onely
+excepted. And if this Countrey were like vnto India, the inhabitants
+whereof eate neither henne, beefe, nor porke, but keepe that onely for the
+Portugals and Moores, they would be sold here for nothing. But it so
+falling out, that the Chineans are the greatest eaters in all the world,
+they do feed vpon all things, specially on porke, which, the fatter it is,
+is vnto them the lesse lothsome. The highest price of these things
+aforesaid I haue set downe, better cheap shal you sometimes buy them for
+the great plentie thereof in this countrey. Frogs are solde at the same
+price that is made of hennes, and are good meate amongst them, as also
+dogs, cats, rats, snakes, and all other vncleane meates.
+
+The Cities be very gallant, specially neere vnto the gates, the which are
+marueilously great, and couered with iron. The gate houses are built on
+high with towers, and the lower part thereof is made of bricke and stone,
+proportionally with the walls, from the walles vpward the building is of
+timber, and many stories in it one aboue the other. The strength of their
+townes is in the mightie walles and ditches, artillerie haue they none.
+
+The streetes in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the Cities we haue seene are
+very faire, so large and so straight, that it is wonderfull to behold.
+Their houses are built with timber, the foundations onely excepted, the
+which are layed with stone: in ech side of the streetes are pentises or
+continuall porches for the marchants to walke vnder: the breadth of the
+streets is neuertheless such, that in them 15. men may ride commodiously
+side by side. As they ride they must needs passe vnder many high arches of
+triumph that crosse ouer the streetes made of timber, and carued diuersly,
+couered with tiles of fine clay: vnder these arches the Mercers do vtter
+their smaller wares, and such as list to stand there are defended from
+raine and the heate of the Sunne. The greater gentlemen haue these arches
+at their doores: although some of them be not so mightily built as the
+rest.
+
+I shall haue occasion to speake of a certaine order of gentlemen that are
+called Louteas. I wil first therefore expound what this word signifieth.
+Loutea is as much to say in our language as Sir, and when any of them
+calleth his name, he answereth Sir: and as we do say, that the king hath
+made some gentlemen, so say they, that there is made a Loutea. And for that
+amongst them the degrees are diuers both in name and office, I will tell
+you onely of some principals, being not able to aduertise you of all.
+
+The maner how gentlemen are created Louteas, and do come to that honour and
+title, is by the giuing of a broad girdle, not like to the rest, and a cap,
+at the commaundement of the king. The name Loutea is more generall and
+common vnto mo, then the qualitie of honour thereby signified agreeth
+withall. Such Louteas as doe serue their prince in weightie matters for
+iustice, are created after trial made of their learning: but the other
+which serue in smaller affaires, as Captaines, constables, sergeants by
+land and sea, receiuers and such like, whereof there be in euery citie, as
+also in this, very many, are made for fauour: the chiefe Louteas are serued
+kneeling.
+
+The whole prouince of China is diuided, as I haue said, into 13. shires, in
+euery shire at the least is one gouernour called there Tutan, in some
+shires there be two.
+
+[Sidenote: Chian, or, Chaen.] Chiefe in office next vnto them be certaine
+other named Chians, that is, high Commissioners as you would say, visiters,
+with full authoritie in such wise, that they doe call vnto an accompt the
+Tutans themselues, but their authoritie lasteth not in any shire longer
+then one yere. Neuerthelesse in euery shire being at the least 7. cities,
+yea, in some of them 15. or 16. beside other boroughes and townes not well
+to be numbred, these visiters where they come are so honoured and feared,
+as though they were some great princes. At the yeres end, their circuit
+done, they come vnto that Citie which is chiefe of others in the shire, to
+do iustice there: finally busying themselues in the searching out of such
+as are to receiue the order of Louteas, whereof more shalbe said in another
+place.
+
+Ouer and beside these officers, in the chiefe Citie of ech one of these
+aforesaid 13. prouinces, is resident one Ponchiassi, Captaine thereof, and
+treasurer of all the kings reuenues. This Magistrate maketh his abode in
+one of the foure greatest houses that be in all these head Cities. And
+although the principall part of his function be to be Captaine, to be
+treasourer of the reuenues in that prouince, and to send these reuenues at
+appointed times to the Court: yet hath he notwithstanding by his office
+also to meddle with matters appertaining vnto iustice.
+
+[Sidenote: Anchiassi, or Hexasi.] In the second great house dwelleth an
+other Magistrate called Anchiassi, a great officer also, for he hath
+dealings in all matters of iustice. Who although he be somewhat inferior in
+dignitie vnto the Ponchiassi, yet for his great dealings and generall
+charge of iustice, whosoeuer seeth the affaires of the one house and the
+other might iudge this Anchiassi to be the greater.
+
+Tuzi, an other officer so called, lieth in the thirde house, a magistrate
+of importance, specially in things belonging vnto warfare, for thereof hath
+he charge.
+
+There is resident in the 4 house a fourth officer, bearing name Taissu. In
+this house is the principall prison of all the Citie. Ech one of these
+Magistrates aforesaide may both lay euill doers in prison, and deliuer them
+out againe, except the fact be heinous and of importance: in such a case
+they can do nothing, except they do meet al together. And if the deed
+deserueth death, all they together cannot determine thereof, without
+recourse made vnto the Chian wheresoeuer hee be, or to the Tutan; and eft
+soones it falleth put, that the case is referred vnto higher power. In all
+Cities, not onely chiefe in ech shire, but in the rest also, are meanes
+found to make Louteas. Many of them do study at the prince his charges,
+wherefore at the yeeres ende they resort vnto the head Cities, whither the
+Chians doe come, as it hath bene earst aside, as well to giue these
+degrees, as to sit in iudgement ouer the prisoners.
+
+The Chians go in circuit euery yeere, but such as are to be chosen to the
+greatest offices meete not but from three yeeres to three yeeres, and that
+in certaine large halles appointed for them to be examined in. Many things
+are asked them, whereunto if they doe answere accordingly, and be found
+sufficient to take their degree, the Chian by and by granteth it them: but
+the Cap and girdle, whereby they are knowen to be Louteas, they weare not
+before that they be confirmed by the king. Their examination done, and
+triall made of them, such as haue taken their degree wont to be giuen them
+with all ceremonies, vse to banquet and feast many dayes together (as the
+Chineans fashion is to ende all their pleasures with eating and drinking)
+and so remaine chosen to do the king seruice in matters of learning. The
+other examinates founde insufficient to proceed are sent backe to their
+studie againe. Whose ignorance is perceiued to come of negligence and
+default, such a one is whipped, and sometimes sent to prison, where lying
+that yere when this kinde of acte was, we found many thus punished, and
+demaunding the cause thereof, they saide it was for that they knew not how
+to answere vnto certaine things asked them. It is a world to see how these
+Louteas are serued and feared, in such wise, that in publike assemblies at
+one shrike they giue, all the seruitors belonging vnto iustice tremble
+thereat. At their being in these places, when they list to mooue, be it but
+euen to the gate, these seruitors doe take them vp, and carry them in
+seates of beaten gold. After this sort are they borne when they goe in the
+City, either for their owne businesse abroade, or to see ech other at home.
+For the dignitie they haue, and office they doe beare, they be all
+accompanied: the very meanest of them all that goeth in these seates is
+vshered by two men at the least, that cry vnto the people to giue place,
+howbeit they neede it not, for that reuerence the common people haue vnto
+them. They haue also in their company certaine Sergeants with their maces
+either siluered or altogether siluer, some two, some foure, other sixe,
+other eight, conueniently for ech one his degree. The more principal and
+chiefe Louteas haue going orderly before these Sergeants, many other with
+staues, and a great many catchpoules with rods of Indish canes dragged on
+the ground, so that the streets being paued, you may heare affarre off as
+well the noyse of the rods, as the voyce of the criers. These fellowes
+serue also to apprehend others, and the better to be knowen they weare
+liuery red girdles, and in their caps peacocks feathers. Behinde these
+Louteas come such as doe beare certaine tables hanged at staues endes,
+wherein is written in siluer letters, the name, degree, and office of that
+Loutea, whom they follow. In like maner they haue borne after them hattes
+agreeable vnto their titles: if the Loutea be meane, then hath he brought
+after him but one hat, and that may not be yealowe: but if he be of the
+better sort, then may he haue two, three, or foure: the principall and
+chiefe Louteas may haue all their hats yealow, the which among them is
+accompted great honour. The Loutea for warres, although he be but meane,
+may notwithstanding haue yealow hats. The Tutans and Chians, when they goe
+abroad, haue besides all this before them ledde three or foure horses with
+their guard in armour.
+
+Furthermore the Louteas, yea and all the people of China, are wont to eate
+their meate sitting on stooles at high tables as we doe, and that very
+cleanely, although they vse neither tableclothes nor napkins. Whatsoeuer is
+set downe vpon the boord is first carued before that it be brought in: they
+feede with two sticks, refraining from touching their meate with their
+hands, euen as we do with forkes: for the which respect they lesse do need
+any table clothes. Ne is the nation only ciuill at meate, but also in
+conuersation, and in courtesie they seeme to exceede all other. Likewise in
+their dealings after their maner they are so ready, that they farre passe
+all other Gentiles and Moores: the greater states are so vaine, that they
+line their clothes with the best silke that may be found. The Louteas are
+an idle generation, without all maner of exercises and pastimes, except it
+be eating and drinking. Sometimes they walke abroad in the fields to make
+the souldiers shoot at pricks with their bowes, but their eating passeth:
+they will stand eating euen when the other do draw to shoot. The pricke is
+a great blanket spread on certaine long poles, he that striketh it, hath of
+the best man there standing a piece of crimson Taffata, the which is knit
+about his head: in this sort the winners be honoured, and the Louteas with
+their bellies full returne home againe. The inhabitants of China be very
+great Idolaters, all generally doe worship the heauens: and, as wee are
+wont to say, God knoweth it: so say they at euery word, Tien Tautee, that
+is to say, The heauens doe know it. Some doe worship the Sonne, and some
+the Moone, as they thinke good, for none are bound more to one then to
+another. [Sidenote: After the Dutch fashion.] In their temples, the which
+they do call Meani, they haue a great altar in the same place as we haue,
+true it is that one may goe round about it There set they vp the image of a
+certaine Loutea of that countrey, whom they haue in great reuerence for
+certaine notable things he did. At the right hand standeth the diuel much
+more vgly painted then we doe vse to set him out, whereunto great homage is
+done by such as come into the temple to aske counsell, or to draw lottes:
+this opinion they haue of him, that he is malicious and able to do euil. If
+you aske them what they do thinke of the souls departed, they will answere
+that they be immortall, and that as soone as any one departeth out of this
+life, he becommeth a diuel if he haue liued well in this world, if
+otherwise, that the same diuel changeth him into a bufle, oxe, or dogge.
+[Marginal note: Pythagorean like.] Wherefore to this diuel they doe much
+honour, to him doe they sacrifice, praying him that he will make them like
+vnto himselfe, and not like other beastes. They haue moreouer another sort
+of temples, wherein both vpon the altars and also on the walls do stand
+many idols well proportioned, but bare headed; these beare name Omithofon,
+accompted of them spirits, but such as in heauen doe neither good nor
+euill, thought to be such men and women as haue chastly liued in this world
+in abstinence from fish and flesh, fed onely with rise and salates. Of that
+diuel they make some accompt: for these spirits they care litle or nothing
+at all. Againe they hold opinion that if a man do well in this life, the
+heauens will giue him many temporall blessings, but if he doe euil, then
+shall he haue infirmities, diseases, troubles, and penurie, and all this
+without any knowledge of God. Finally, this people knoweth no other thing
+then to liue and die, yet because they be reasonable creatures, all seemed
+good vnto them we speake in our language, though it were not very
+sufficient; our maner of praying especially pleased them, and truely they
+are well ynough disposed to receiue the knowledge of the trueth. Our Lord
+grant for his mercy all things so to be disposed, that it may sometime be
+brought to passe, that so great a nation as this is perish not for want of
+helpe.
+
+Our maner of praying so well liked them, that in prison importunately they
+besought vs to write for them somewhat as concerning heauen, the which we
+did to their contentation with such reasons as we knew, howbeit not very
+cunningly. As they do their idolatry they laugh at themselues. If at any
+time this countrey might be ioyned in league with the kingdome of
+Portugale, in such wise that free accesse were had to deale with the people
+there, they might all be soone conuerted. The greatest fault we doe finde
+in them is Sodomie, a vice very common in the meaner sort, and nothing
+strange among the best. This sinne were it left of them, in all other
+things so well disposed they be, that a good interpreter in a short space
+might do there great good: If, as I said, the countrey were ioyned in
+league with vs.
+
+Furthermore the Louteas, with all the people of China, are wont to
+solemnise the dayes of the new and full Moones in visiting one an other,
+and making great banquets: for to that end, as I earst said, do tend all
+their pastimes, and spending their dayes in pleasure. They are wont also to
+solemnise ech one his birth day, whereunto their kindred and friends do
+resort of custome with presents of iewels or money, receiuing againe for
+their reward good cheare. They keepe in like maner a generall feast with
+great banquets that day their king was borne. But their most principall and
+greatest feast of all, and best cheare, is the first day of new yeere,
+namely the first day of the new Moone of February, so that their first
+moneth is March, and they reckon the times accordingly, respect being had
+vnto the reigne of their princes: as when any deed is written, they date it
+thus, Made such a day of such a moone, and such a yeere of the reigne of
+such a king. And their ancient writings beare date of the yeeres of this or
+that king.
+
+Now will I speake of the maner which the Chineans doe obserue in doing of
+iustice, that it be knowen how farre these Gentiles do herein exceed many
+Christians, that be more bounden then they to deale iustly and in trueth.
+Because the Chinish king maketh his abode continually in the city of
+Pachin, his kingdome is so great, and the shires so many, as tofore it hath
+bene said: in it therefore the gouernours and rulers, much like vnto our
+Shireffs, be appointed so suddenly and speedily discharged againe, that
+they haue no time to grow naught. Furthermore to keepe the state in more
+securitie, the Louteas that gouerne one shire are chosen out of some other
+shire distant farre off, where they must leaue their wiues, children and
+goods, carying nothing with them but themselues. True it is, that at their
+comming thither they doe finde in a readinesse all things necessary, their
+house, furniture, seruants, and all other things in such perfection and
+plentie, that they want nothing. Thus the king is well serued without all
+feare of treason.
+
+In the principall Cities of the shires be foure chiefe Louteas, before whom
+are brought all matters of the inferiour Townes, throughout the whole
+Realme. Diuers other Louteas haue the managing of iustice, and receiuing of
+rents, bound to yeelde an accompt thereof vnto the greater officers. Other
+do see that there be no euil rule kept in the Citie: ech one as it behoueth
+him. [Sidenote: The Italians call it the strapado.] Generally all these doe
+imprison malefactors, cause them to be whipped and racked, hoysing them vp
+and downe by the armes with a cord, a thing very vsuall there, and
+accompted no shame. These Louteas do vse great diligence in the
+apprehending of theeues, so that it is a wonder to see a theefe escape away
+in any City, towne or village. Vpon the sea neere vnto the shoare many are
+taken, and looke euen as they are taken, so be they first whipped, and
+afterward layde in prison, where shortly after they all die for hunger and
+cold. At that time when we were in prison, there died of them aboue
+threescore and ten. If happely any one, hauing the meanes to get food, do
+escape, he is set with the condemned persons, and prouided for as they be
+by the King, in such wise as hereafter it shalbe said.
+
+Their whips be certaine pieces of canes, cleft in the middle, in such sort
+that they seeme rather plaine then sharpe. He that is to be whipped lieth
+groueling on the ground: vpon his thighes the hangman layeth on blowes
+mightily with these canes, that the standers by tremble at their crueltie.
+Ten stripes draw a great deale of blood, 20. or 30. spoile the flesh
+altogether, 50. or 60. will require long time to bee healed, and if they
+come to the number of one hundred, then are they incurable.
+
+The Louteas obserue moreouer this: when any man is brought before them to
+be examined, they aske him openly in the hearing of as many as be present,
+be the offence neuer so great. Thus did they also behaue themselues with
+vs: For this cause amongst them can here be no false witnesse, as daily
+amongst vs it falleth out. This good commeth thereof, that many being
+alwayes about the Iudge to heare the euidence, and beare witnesse, the
+processe cannot be falsified, as it happeneth sometimes with vs. The
+Moores, Gentiles, and Iewes haue all their sundry othes, the Moores do
+sweare by their Mossafos, the Brachmans by their Fili, the rest likewise by
+the things they do worship. The Chineans though they be wont to sweare by
+heauen, by the Moone, by the Sunne, and by all their Idoles, in iudgement
+neuertheless they sweare not at all. If for some offence an othe be vsed of
+any one, by and by with the least euidence he is tormented, so be the
+witnesses he bringeth, if they tell not the trueth, or do in any point
+disagree, except they be men of worship and credit, who are beleeued
+without any further matter: the rest are made to confesse the trueth by
+force of torments and whips. Besides this order obserued of them in
+examinations, they do feare so much their King, and he where he maketh his
+abode keepeth them so lowe, that they dare not once stirre. Againe, these
+Louteas as great as they be, notwithstanding the multitude of Notaries they
+haue, not trusting any others, do write all great processes and matters of
+importance themselues. Moreouer one vertue they haue worthy of great
+praise, and that is, being men so wel regarded and accompted as though they
+were princes, yet they be patient aboue measure in giuing audience. We
+poore strangers brought before them might say what we would, as all to be
+lyes and fallaces that they did write, ne did we stand before them with the
+usuall ceremonies of that Countrey, yet did they beare with vs so
+patiently, that they caused vs to wonder, knowing specially how litle any
+aduocate or Iudge is wont in our Countrey to beare with vs. For wheresoeuer
+in any Towne of Christendome should be accused vnknowen men as we were, I
+know not what end the very innocents cause would haue: but we in a heathen
+Countrey, hauing our great enemies two of the chiefest men in a whole
+Towne, wanting an interpreter, ignorant of that Countrey language, did in
+the end see our great aduersaries cast into prison for our sake, and
+depriued of their Offices and honour for not doing iustice, yea not to
+escape death: for, as the rumour goeth, they shalbe beheaded. Somewhat is
+now to be said of the lawes that I haue bene able to know in this Countrey,
+and first, no theft or murther is at any time pardoned: adulterers are put
+in prison, and the fact once prooued, are condemned to die, the womans
+husband must accuse them: this order is kept with men and women found in
+that fault, but theeues and murderers are imprisoned as I haue said, where
+they shortly die for hunger and cold. If any one happely escape by bribing
+the Gailer to giue him meate, his processe goeth further, and commeth to
+the Court where he is condemned to die. [Sidenote: A pillory boord.]
+Sentence being giuen, the prisoner is brought in publique with a terrible
+band of men that lay him in Irons hand and foot, with a boord at his necke
+one handfull broad, in length reaching downe to his knees, cleft in two
+parts, and with a hole one handfull downeward in the table fit for his
+necke, the which they inclose vp therein, nailing the boord fast together;
+one handfull of the boord standeth vp behinde in the necke: The sentence
+and cause wherefore the fellon was condemned to die, is written in that
+part of the table that standeth before.
+
+This ceremony ended, he is laid in a great prison in the company of some
+other condemned persons, the which are found by the king as long as they do
+liue. The bord aforesaid so made tormenteth the prisoners very much,
+keeping them both from rest, and eke letting them to eat commodiously,
+their hands being manacled in irons vnder that boord, so that in fine there
+is no remedy but death. In the chiefe Cities of euery shire, as we haue
+erst said, there be foure principall houses, in ech of them a prison: but
+in one of them, where the Taissu maketh his abode, there is a greater and a
+more principall prison then in any of the rest: and although in euery City
+there be many, neuerthelesse in three of them remaine onely such as be
+condemned to die. Their death is much prolonged, for that ordinarily there
+is no execution done but once a yeere, though many die for hunger and cold,
+as we haue seene in this prison. Execution is done in this maner. The
+Chian, to wit, the high Commissioner or Lord chiefe Iustice, at the yeres
+end goeth to the head City, where he heareth againe the causes of such as
+be condemned. Many times he deliuereth some of them, declaring that boord
+to haue bene wrongfully put about their necks: the visitation ended, he
+choseth out seuen or eight, not many more or lesse of the greatest
+malefactors, the which, to feare and keepe in awe the people, are brought
+into a great market place, where all the great Louteas meete together, and
+after many ceremonies and superstitions, as the vse of the Countrey is, are
+beheaded. This is done once a yeere: who so escapeth that day, may be sure
+that he shall not be put to death all that yeere following, and so
+remaineth at the kings charges in the greater prison. In that prison where
+we lay were alwayes one hundred and mo of these condemned persons, besides
+them that lay in other prisons.
+
+These prisons wherein the condemned caytifes do remaine are so strong, that
+it hath not bene heard, that any prisoner in all China hath escaped out of
+prison, for in deed it is a thing impossible. The prisons are thus builded.
+First all the place is mightily walled about, the walles be very strong and
+high, the gate of no lesse force: within it three other gates, before you
+come where the prisoners do lye, there many great lodgings are to be seene
+of the Louteas, Notaries, Parthions, that is, such as do there keepe watch
+and ward day and night, the court large and paued, on the one side whereof
+standeth a prison, with two mighty gates, wherein are kept such prisoners
+as haue committed enormious offences. This prison is so great, that in it
+are streets and Market places wherein all things necessary are sold. Yea
+some prisoners liue by that kind of trade, buying and selling, and letting
+out beds to hire: some are dayly sent to prison, some dayly deliuered,
+wherefore this place is neuer void of 7. or eight hundred men that go at
+libertie.
+
+Into one other prison of condemned persons shall you go at three yron
+gates, the court paued and vauted round about, and open aboue as it were a
+cloister. In this cloister be eight roomes with yron doores, and in ech of
+them a large gallerie, wherein euery night the prisoners do lie at length,
+their feet in the stocks, their bodies hampered in huge wooden grates that
+keep them from sitting, so that they lye as it were in a cage, sleepe if
+they can: in the morning they are losed againe, that they may go into the
+court. Notwithstanding the strength of this prison, it is kept with a
+garrison of men, part whereof watch within the house, part of them in the
+court, some keepe about the prison with lanterns and watch-bels answering
+one another fiue times euery night, and giuing warning so lowd, that the
+Loutea resting in a a chamber not neere thereunto, may heare them. In these
+prisons of condemned persons remaine some 15, other 20. yeres imprisoned,
+not executed, for the loue of their honorable friends that seeke to prolong
+their liues. Many of these prisoners be shoomakers, and haue from the king
+a certaine allowance of rise: some of them worke for the keeper, who
+suffreth them to go at libertie without fetters and boords, the better to
+worke. Howbeit when the Loutea called his checke roll, and with the keeper
+vieweth them, they all weare their liuerses, that is, boords at their
+necks, yronned hand and foot. When any of these prisoners dieth, he is to
+be seene of the Loutea and Notaries, brought out of a gate so narrow, that
+there can but one be drawen out there at once. The prisoners being brought
+forth, one of the aforesaid Parthions striketh him thrise on the head with
+an yron sledge, that done he is deliuered vnto his friends, if he haue any,
+otherwise the king hireth men to cary him to his buriall in the fields.
+
+Thus adulterers and theeues are vsed. Such as be imprisoned for debt once
+knowen, lie there vntill it be paied. [Sidenote: Of like the first lenders
+be the more wealthie.] The Taissu or Loutea calleth them many times before
+him by the vertue of his office, who vnderstanding the cause wherefore they
+do not pay their debts, appointeth them a certaine time to do it, within
+the compasse whereof if they discharge not their debts being debtors in
+deed, then they be whipped and condemned to perpetuall imprisonment: if the
+creditors be many, and one is to be paied before another, they do, contrary
+to our maner, pay him first of whom they last borrowed, and so ordinarily
+the rest, in such sort that the first lender be the last receiuer. The same
+order is kept in paying legacies: the last named receiueth his portion
+first. They accompt it nothing to shew fauour to such a one as can do the
+like againe: but to do good to them that haue litle or nothing, that is
+worth thanks, therefore pay they the last before the first, for that their
+intent seemeth rather to be vertuous then gainefull.
+
+When I said, that such as be committed to prison for theft and murther were
+iudged by the Court, I ment not them that were apprehended in the deed
+doing, for they need no triall, but are brought immediatly before the
+Tutan, who out of hand giueth sentence. Others not taken so openly, which
+do need trial, are the malefactors put to execution once a yere in the
+chiefe cities, to keepe in awe the people: or condemned, do remaine in
+prison, looking for their day. Theeues being taken are caried to prison
+from one place to another in a chest vpon mens shoulders, hired therefore
+by the king, the chest is 6. handfuls high, the prisoner sitteth therein
+vpon a bench, the couer of the chest is two boords, amid them both a
+pillery-like hole, for the prisoners necke, there sitteth he with his head
+without the chest, and the rest of his body within, not able to mooue or
+turne his head this way or that way, nor to plucke it in; the necessities
+of nature he voydeth at a hole in the bottome of a chest, the meate he
+eateth is put into his mouth by others. There abideth he day and night
+during his whole iourney: if happily his porters stumble, or the chest do
+iogge or be set down carelessly, it turneth to his great paines that
+sitteth therein, al such motions being vnto him hanging as it were. Thus
+were our companions carried from Cinceo, 7. dayes iourney, neuer taking any
+rest as afterward they told vs, and their greatest griefe was to stay by
+the way: as soone as they came, being taken out of the chests, they were
+not able to stand on their feet, and two of them died shortly after. When
+we lay in prison at Fuquieo, we came many times abroad, and were brought to
+the pallaces of noble men, to be seene of them and their wiues, for that
+they had neuer seene any Portugale before. Many things they asked vs of our
+Countrey, and our fashions, and did write euery thing, for they be curious
+in nouelties aboue measure. The gentlemen shew great curtesie vnto
+strangers, and so did we finde at their hands, and because that many times
+we were brought abroad into the City, somewhat wil I say of such things as
+I did see therein, being a gallant City, and chiefe in one of the 13.
+shires aforesaid. The City Fuquieo is very great, and mightily walled with
+square stone both within and without, and, as it may seeme by the breadth
+thereof, filled vp in the middle with earth, layd ouer with brick and
+couered with tyle, after the maner of porches or galleries, that one might
+dwel therein. The staires they vse are so easily made, that one may go them
+vp and downe a horse-backe, as eftsoones they do: the streets are paued, as
+already it hath bin said: there be a great number of Marchants, euery one
+hath written in a great table at his doore such things as he hath to sel.
+In like maner euery artisane painteth out his craft: the market places be
+large, great abundance of al things there be to be sold. The city standeth
+vpon water, many streames run through it, the banks pitched, and so broad
+that they serue for streets to the cities vse. Ouer the streams are sundry
+bridges both of timber and stone, which being made leuel with the streets,
+hinder not the passage of the barges too and fro, the chanels are so deepe.
+Where the streames come in and go out of the city, be certaine arches in
+the wal, there go in and out their Parai, that is a kind of barges they
+haue, and that in the day time only: at night these arches are closed vp
+with gates, so do they shut vp al the gates of the City. These streames and
+barges do ennoblish very much the City, and make it as it were to seeme
+another Venice. The buildings are euen, wel made, high, not lofted, except
+it be some wherein marchandize is laid. It is a world to see how great
+these cities are, and the cause is, for that the houses are built euen, as
+I haue said, and do take a great deale of roome. One thing we saw in this
+city that made vs al to wonder, and is worthy to be noted: namely, ouer a
+porch at the comming in to one of the aforesaid 4. houses, which the king
+hath in euery shire for his gouernors, as I haue erst said, standeth a
+tower built vpon 40. pillers, ech one whereof is but one stone, ech one 40.
+handfuls or spans long: in bredth or compasse 12, as many of vs did measure
+them. Besides this, their greatnesse is such in one piece, that it might
+seeme impossible to worke them: they be moreouer cornered, and in colour,
+length and breadth so like, that the one nothing differeth from the other.
+This thing made vs all to wonder very much.
+
+We are wont to cal this country China, and the people Chineans, but as long
+as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any time that name, I
+determined to learne how they were called: and asked sometimes by them
+thereof, for that they vnderstood vs not when we called them Chineans, I
+answered them, that al the inhabitants of India named them Chineans,
+wherefore I praied them that they would tel me, for what occasion they are
+so called, whether peraduenture any city of theirs bare that name. Hereunto
+they alwayes answered me, that they haue no such name, nor euer had. Then
+did I aske them what name the whole Country bareth, and what they would
+answere being asked of other nations what countrymen they were? It was told
+me that of ancient time in this country had bin many kings, and though
+presently it were al vnder one, ech kingdom neuertheles enioyed that name
+it first had, these kingdomes are the prouinces I spake of before.
+[Sidenote: Tamen the proper name of China.] In conclusion they said, that
+the whole country is called Tamen, and the inhabitants Tamegines, so that
+this name China or Chineans, is not heard of in that country. I thinke that
+the neernesse of another prouince thereabout called Cochinchina, and the
+inhabitants thereof Cochinesses, first discovered before China was, lying
+not far from Malacca, did giue occasion to ech of the nations, of that name
+Chineans, as also the whole country to be named China. But their proper
+name is that aforesaid.
+
+I haue heard moreover that in the City of Nanquim remaineth a table of
+gold, and in it written a kings name, as a memory of that residence the
+kings were wont to keepe there. This table standeth in a great pallace,
+couered alwayes, except it be on some of their festiuall dayes, at what
+time they are wont to let it be seene, couered neuertheless as it is, all
+the nobilitie of the City going of duetie to doe it euery day reuerence.
+The like is done in the head Cities of all the other shires in the pallaces
+of the Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesaid tables doe stand with the
+kings name written in them, although no reuerence be done thereunto but in
+solemn feastes.
+
+[Sidenote: Pochan, or Pachin.] I haue likewise vnderstood that the city
+Pachin, where the king maketh his abode, is so great, that to go from one
+side to the other, besides the Suburbs, the which are greater then the City
+it selfe, it requireth one whole day a horseback, going hackney pase. In
+the suburbs be many wealthy marchants of all sorts. They tolde me
+furthermore that it was moted about, and in the moates great store of fish,
+whereof the King maketh great gaines.
+
+[Sidenote: Their enemies.] It was also told me that the king of China had
+no kings to wage battel withall, besides the Tartars, with whom he had
+concluded a peace more then 80. yeres ago. Neuerthelesse their friendship
+was not so great, that the one nation might marry with the other.
+[Sidenote: Marriage of the kings children.] And demanding with whom they
+married, they said, that in olde time the Chinish kings when they would
+marry their daughters, accustomed to make a solemne feast, whereunto came
+all sorts of men. The daughter that was to be married, stood in a place
+where she might see them all, and looke whom she liked best, him did she
+chuse to husband, and if happely he were of a base condition, hee became by
+and by a gentleman: but this custome hath bene left long since. Now a dayes
+the king marrieth his daughters at his owne pleasure, with great men of the
+kingdome: the like order he obserueth in the marriage of his sonnes.
+
+They haue moreouer one thing very good, and that which made vs all to
+maruelle at them being Gentiles: namely, that there be hospitals in all
+their Cities, alwayes full of people, we neuer saw any poore body begge.
+[Marginal note: He speaketh not here of all China, but of the Cities, for
+in other places there be beggers, as you haue seene already, swarming out
+of trees.] We therefore asked the cause of this: answered it was, that in
+euery City there is a great circuit, wherein be many houses for poore
+people, for blinde, lame, old folke, not able to trauaile for age, nor
+hauing any other meanes to liue. These folke haue in the aforesaid houses
+euer plentie of rice during their liues, but nothing else. Such as be
+receiued into these houses, come in after this maner. When one is sicke,
+blinde or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassi, and prouing
+that to be true he writeth, he remaineth in the aforesaid great lodging as
+long as he liueth: besides this they keepe in these places swine and
+hennes, whereby the poore be relieued without going a begging.
+
+I said before that China was full of riuers, but now I minde to confirme
+the same anew: for the farther we went into the Countrey, the greater we
+found the riuers. Sometimes we were so farre off from the sea, that where
+we came no sea fish had bene seene, and salt was there very deare, of fresh
+water fish yet was there great abundance, and that fish very good: they
+keep it good after this maner. Where the riuers do meete, and so passe into
+the sea, there lieth great store of boats, specially where no salt-water
+commeth, and that in March and April. These boates are so many that it
+seemeth wonderfull, ne serue they for other then to take small fish. By the
+riuers sides they make leyres of fine and strong nettes, that lye three
+handfulls vnder water, and one aboue to keepe and nourish their fish in,
+vntill such time as other fishers do come with boates, bringing for that
+purpose certaine great chests lined with paper, able to holde water,
+wherein they cary their fish vp and downe the riuer, euery day renuing the
+chest with fresh water, and selling their fish in euery City, towne and
+village where they passe, vnto the people as they neede it: most of them
+haue net leyres to keepe fish in alwayes for their prouision. Where the
+greater boates cannot passe any further forward, they take lesser, and
+because the whole Countrey is very well watered, there is so great plenty
+of diuers sorts of fish, that it is wonderfull to see: assuredly we were
+amazed to behold the maner of their prouision. [Sidenote: Meanes to fat
+fish.] Their fish is chiefly nourished with the dung of Bufles and oxen,
+that greatly fatteth it. Although I said their fishing to be in March and
+April at what time we saw them do it, neuerthelesse they told vs that they
+fished at all times, for that vsually they do feed on fish, wherefore it
+behoueth them to make their prouision continually.
+
+When we had passed Fuquien, we went into Quicin shire, [Sidenote: He
+speaketh of Fuquien shire.] where the fine clay vessell is made, as I said
+before: and we came to a City, the one side whereof is built vpon the the
+foote of a hill, whereby passeth a riuer nauigable: there we tooke boat,
+and went by water toward the Sea: on ech side of the riuer we found many
+Cities, Townes and villages, wherein we saw great store of marchandize, but
+specially of fine clay: there did we land by the way to buy victuals and
+other necessaries. Going downe this riuer Southward, we were glad that wee
+drew neere vnto a warmer Countrey, from whence we had bene farre distant:
+this Countrey we passed through in eight dayes, for our iourney lay downe
+the streame. Before that I doe say any thing of that shire we came into, I
+will first speake of the great City of Quicin, wherein alwayes remaineth a
+Tutan, that is a gouernour, as you haue seene, though some Tutans do
+gouerne two or three shires.
+
+That Tutan that was condemned for our cause, of whom I spake before, was
+borne in this Countrey, but he gouerned Foquien shire: nothing it auailed
+him to be so great an officer. This Countrey is so great, that in many
+places where we went, there had bene as yet no talke of his death, although
+he were executed a Whole yere before. [Sidenote: Alias Cenchi.] At the
+Citie Quanchi whither we came, the riuer was so great it seemed a Sea,
+though it were so litle where we tooke water, that we needed small boats.
+One day about nine of the clocke, beginning to row neere the walls with the
+streame, we came at noone to a bridge made of many barges, ouerlinked al
+together with two mightie cheines. There stayed we vntill it was late, but
+we saw not one go either vp thereon or downe, except two Louteas that about
+the going downe of the Sunne, came and set them down there, the one on one
+side, the other on the other side. Then was the bridge opened in many
+places, and barges both great and small to the number of sixe hundred began
+to passe: those that went vp the streame at one place, such as came downe
+at an other. When all had thus shot the bridge, then was it shut vp againe.
+[Sidenote: The kings reuenues.] We heare say that euery day they take this
+order in all principall places of marchandize, for paying of the Custome
+vnto the king, specially for salt, whereof the greatest reuenues are made
+that the king hath in this Countrey. The passage of the bridge where it is
+opened, be so neere the shoare, that nothing can passe without touching the
+same. To stay the barges at their pleasure, that they goe no further
+forward, are vsed certaine iron instruments The bridge consisteth of 112.
+barges, there stayed we vntill the euening that they were opened,
+lothsomely oppressed by the multitude of people that came to see vs, so
+many in number, that we were enforced to go aside from the banke vntil such
+time as the bridge was opened: howbeit we were neuerthelesse thronged about
+with many boates full of people. And though in other Cities and places
+where we went, the people came so importunate vpon vs, that it was needfull
+to withdraw our selues: yet were we here much more molested for the number
+of people: and this bridge is the principall way out of the Citie vnto
+another place so wel inhabited, that were it walled about, it might be
+compared to the Citie. When we had shot the bridge, we kept along the Citie
+vntil it was night, and then met we with another riuer that ioyned with
+this, we rowed vp that by the walls vntill we came to another bridge
+gallantly made of barges, but lesser a great deale then that other bridge
+ouer the greater streame: here stayed we that night, and other two dayes
+with more quiet, being out of the preasse of the people. These riuers do
+meet without at one corner point of the City. In either of them were so
+many barges great and small, that we all thought them at the least to be
+aboue three thousand: the greater number thereof was in the lesser riuer,
+where we were. Amongst the rest here lay certaine greater vessels, called
+in their language Parai, that serue for the Tutan, when he taketh his
+voyage by other riuers that ioyne with this, towards Pachin, where the king
+maketh his abode. For, as many times I haue erst said, all this Countrey is
+full of riuers. Desirous to see those Parai we got into some of them, where
+we found some chambers set foorth with gilded beds very richly, other
+furnished with tables and seats, and all other things so neat and in
+perfection, that it was wonderfull.
+
+Quiacim shire, as farre as I can perceiue, lieth vpon the South. On that
+side we kept at our first entry thereinto, trauayling not farre from the
+high mountaines we saw there. Asking what people dwelleth beyond those
+monntaines, it was told me that they be theeues and men of a strange
+language. And because that vnto sundry places neere this riuer the
+mountaines doe approch, whence the people issuing downe do many times great
+harme, this order is taken at the entry into Quiacim shire. To guard this
+riuer whereon continually go to and fro Parai great and small fraught with
+salt, fish poudred with peper, and other necessaries for that countrey,
+they do lay in diuers places certaine Parai, and great barges armed, wherin
+watch and ward is kept day and night on both sides of the riuer, for the
+safety of the passage, and securitie of such Parai as do remaine there,
+though the trauailers neuer go but many in company. In euery rode there be
+at the least thirtie, in some two hundred men, as the passage requireth.
+This guard is kept vsually vntill you come to the City Onchio, where
+continually the Tutan of this shire, and eke of Cantan, maketh his abode.
+From that City vpward, where the riuer waxeth more narrow, and the passage
+more dangerous, there be alwayes armed one hundred and fiftie Parai, to
+accompany other vessels fraught with marchandize, and all this at the Kings
+charges. This seemed to me one of the strangest things I did see in this
+Countrey.
+
+When we lay at Fuquien, we did see certaine Moores, who knew so litle of
+their secte, that they could say nothing else but that Mahomet was a Moore,
+my father was a Moore, and I am a Moore, with some other wordes of their
+Alcoran, wherewithall, in abstinence from swines flesh, they liue vntill
+the diuel take them all. This when I saw, and being sure that in many
+Chinish Cities the reliques of Mahomet are kept, as soone as we came to the
+City where these fellowes be, I enfourmed my selfe of them, and learned the
+trueth.
+
+[Sidenote: Great ships comming from the North.] These Moores, as they tolde
+me, in times past came in great ships fraught with marchandise from Pachin
+ward, to a port granted vnto them by the king, as hee is wont to all them
+that traffique into this Countrey, where they being arriued at a litle
+Towne standing in the hauens mouth, in time conuerted vnto their sect the
+greatest Loutea there. When that Loutea with all his family was become
+Moorish, the rest began likewise to doe the same. In this part of China the
+people be at libertie, euery one to worship and folow what him liketh best.
+Wherefore no body tooke heede thereto, vntil such time as the Moores
+perceiuing that many followed them in superstition, and that the Loutea
+fauoured them, they began to forbid wholy the eating of swines flesh. But
+all these countreymen and women chosing rather to forsake father and
+mother, then to leaue off eating of porke, by no meanes would yeeld to that
+proclamation. For besides the great desire they all haue to eate that kinde
+of meate, many of them do liue thereby: and therefore the people complained
+vnto the Magistrates, accusing the Moores of a conspiracie pretended
+betwixt them and the Loutea against their king. In this countrey, as no
+suspition, no not one traiterous word is long borne withall, so was the
+king speedily aduertised thereof, who gaue commandement out of hand that
+the aforesaid Loutea should be put to death, and with him the Moores of
+most importance: the other to be layde first in prison, and afterward to be
+sent abroad into certaine Cities, where they remained perpetuall slaues
+vnto the king. To this City came by happe men and women threescore and
+odde, who at this day are brought to fiue men and foure women, for it is
+how twenty yeeres since this happened. [Sidenote: That is their temples.]
+Their offspring passeth the number of two hundreth, and they in this City,
+as the rest in other Cities whither they were sent, haue their Moscheas,
+whereunto they all resort euery Friday to keepe their holy day. But, as I
+thinke, that will no longer endure, then whiles they doe liue that came
+from thence, for their posteritie is so confused, that they haue nothing of
+a Moore in them but abstinence from swines flesh, and yet many of them doe
+eate thereof primly. [Sidenote: It should seeme by their voyage to be
+Cardandan in Ortelius.] They tell mee that their natiue Countrey hath name
+Camarian, a firme land wherein be many kings, and the Indish countrey well
+knowen vnto them. It may so be: for as soone as they did see our seruants
+(our seruants were Preuzaretes) they iudged them to be Indians: many of
+their wordes sounded vpon the Persian tongue, but none of vs coulde
+vnderstand them. I asked them whether they conuerted any of the Chinish
+nation vnto their secte: they answered mee, that with much a doe they
+conuerted the women with whom they doe marry, yeelding me no other cause
+thereof, but the difficultie they finde in them to be brought from eating
+swines flesh and drinking of wine. I am perswaded therefore, that if this
+Countrey were in league with vs, forbidding them neither of both, it would
+be an easie matter to draw them to our Religion, from their superstition,
+whereat they themselues do laugh when they do then idolatry.
+
+[Sidenote: A Northerne Sea.] I haue learned moreouer that the Sea, whereby
+these Moores that came to China were wont to trauaile, is a very great
+gulfe, that falleth into this Countrey out from Tartaria and Persia,
+leauing on the other side all the Countrey of China, and land of the
+Mogores, drawing alwayes toward the South: and of all likelyhood it is euen
+so, because that these Moores, the which we haue seene, be rather browne
+then white, whereby they shewe themselues to cone from some warmer Countrey
+then China is neere to Pachin, where the riuers are frosen in the Winter
+for colde, and many of them so vehemently that carts may passe ouer them.
+
+We did see in this Citie many Tartars, Mogores, Brames, and Laoynes, both
+men and women. The Tartars are men very white, good horsemen and archers,
+confining with China on that side where Pachin standeth, separated from
+thence by great mountaines that are bewixt these kingdomes. Ouer them be
+certaine wayes to passe, and for both sides, Castles continually kept with
+Souldiers: in time past the Tartars were wont alwayes to haue warres with
+the Chineans, but these fourescore yeeres past they were quiet, vntill the
+second yeere of our imprisonment. The Mogores be in like maner white, and
+heathen, we are aduertised that of one side they border vpon these Tartars,
+and confine with the Persian Tartars on the other side, whereof we sawe in
+them some tokens, as their maner of clothes, and that kinde of hat the
+Saracens doe weare. The Moores affirmed, that where the king lyeth, there
+be many Tartars and Mogores, that brought into China certaine blewes of
+great value: all we thought it to be Vanil of Cambaia wont to be sold at
+Ormus. So that this is the true situation of that Countrey, not in the
+North parts, as many times I haue heard say, confining with Germanie.
+
+As for the Brames we haue seene in this city Chenchi certaine men and
+women, amongst whom there was one that came not long since, hauing as yet
+her haire tied vp after the Pegues fashion: this woman, and other mo with
+whom a black Moore damsel in our company had conference, and did vnderstand
+them wel ynough, had dwelt in Pegu. This new come woman, imagining that we
+ment to make our abode in that citie, bid vs to be of good comfort, for
+that her countrey was not distant from thence aboue fiue dayes iourney, and
+that out of her countrey there lay a high way for vs home into our owne.
+Being asked the way, she answered that the first three daies the way lieth
+ouer certaine great mountaines and wildernesse, afterward people are met
+withall againe. [Sidenote: Southward from Chenchi to the sea.] Thence two
+dayes iourney more to the Brames countrey. Wherefore I doe conclude, that
+Chenchi is one of the confines of this kingdome, separated by certaine huge
+mountaines, as it hath bene alreadie said, that lie out towards the South.
+In the residue of these mountaines standeth the prouince of Sian, the
+Laoyns countrey, Camboia, Campaa, and Cochinchina.
+
+This citie chiefe of other sixteene is situated in a pleasant plaine
+abounding in all things necessarie, sea-fish onely excepted, for it
+standeth farre from the sea: of fresh fish so much store, that the market
+places are neuer emptie. The walles of this city are very strong and high:
+one day did I see the Louteas thereof go vpon the walles to take the view
+thereof, borne in their seates which I spake of before, accompanied with a
+troupe of horsemen that went two and two: It was tolde me they might haue
+gone three and three. We haue seene moreouer, that within this aforesayd
+Citie: the king hath moe then a thousande of his kinne lodged in great
+pallaces, in diuers partes of the Citie: their gates be redde, and the
+entrie into their houses, that they may be knowen, for that is the kings
+colour. These Gentlemen, according to their neerenesse in blood vnto the
+king, as soone as they be married receiue their place in honour: this place
+neither increaseth nor diminisheth in any respect as long as the king
+liueth, the king appointeth them their wiues and familie, allowing them by
+the moneth all things necessarie abundantly, as he doth to his gouernours
+of shires and Cities, howbeit, not one of these hath as long as he liueth
+any charge or gouernement at all. They giue themselues to eating and
+drinking, and be for the most part burly men of bodie, insomuch that
+espying any one of them whom we had not seene before, we might knowe him to
+be the King his cosin. They be neuerthelesse very pleasant, courteous, and
+faire conditioned: neither did we find, all the time wee were in that
+citie, so much honour and good intertainement any where as at their hands.
+They bid vs to their houses to eate and drinke, and when they found vs not,
+or we were not willing to go with them, they bid our seruants and slaues,
+causing them to sit downe with the first. Notwithstanding the good lodging
+these Gentlemen haue, so commodious that they want nothing, yet are they in
+this bondage, that during life they neuer goe abroad. The cause, as I did
+vnderstand, wherefore the king so vseth his cosins is, that none of them at
+any time may rebell against him: and thus he shutteth them vp in three or
+foure other cities. Most of them can play on the Lute, and to make that
+kinde of pastime peculiar vnto them onely, all other in the cities where
+they doe liue be forbidden that instrument, the Curtisans and blinde folke
+onely accepted, who be musicians and can play.
+
+This king furthermore, for the greater securitie of his Realme and the
+auoiding of tumults, letteth not one in all his countrey to be called Lord,
+except he be of his blood. Manie great estates and gouernours there be,
+that during their office are lodged Lord-like, and doe beare the port of
+mightie Princes: but they be so many times displaced and other placed a
+new, that they haue not the time to become corrupt. True it is that during
+their office they be well prouided for, as afterward also lodged at the
+kings charges, and in pension as long as they liue, payed them monethly in
+the cities where they dwell by certaine officers appointed for that
+purpose. The king then is a Lord onely, not one besides him as you haue
+seene, except it be such as be of his blood. A Nephew likewise of the king,
+the kings sisters sonne, lyeth continually within the walles of the citie
+in a strong pallace built Castlewise, euen as his other cousins do,
+remayning alwayes within doores, serued by Eunuches, neuer dealing with any
+matters. On their festiuall dayes, new moones, and full moones the
+magistrates make great bankets, and so do such as be of the king his blood.
+[Sidenote: Goa is a city of the Portugals in the East Indies.] The kings
+Nephew hath to name Vanfuli, his pallace is walled about, the wall is not
+high but fouresquare, and in circuit nothing inferiour to the wals of Goa,
+the outside is painted red, in euery square a gate, and ouer each gate a
+tower made of timber excellently well wrought: before the principall gate
+of the foure that openeth in to the high street no Loutea, be he neuer so
+great, may passe on horsebacke, or carried in his seat. Amidst this
+quadrangle standeth the pallace where that Nobleman lyeth, doubtlesse worth
+the sight, although we came not in to see it. By report the roofes of the
+towers and houses are glased greene, and the greater part of the quadrangle
+set with sauage trees, as Okes, Chesnuts, Cypresse, Pineapples, Cedars, and
+other such like that we do want, after the manner of a wood, wherein are
+kept Stags, Oxen, and other beasts, for that Lord his recreation neuer
+going abroad as I haue sayd. One preheminence this citie hath aboue the
+rest where we haue bene, and that of right, as we do thinke, that besides
+the multitude of market places wherein all things are to be sold through
+euery streete continually are cryed all things necessary, as flesh of all
+sortes, freshfish, hearbes, oyle, vineger, meale, rise: in summa, all
+things so plentifully, that many houses neede no servants, euery thing
+being brought to their doores. Most part of the marchants remaine in the
+suburbes, for that the cities are shut vp euery night, as I haue said. The
+marchants therefore, the better to attend their businesse, do chuse rather
+to make their abode without in the suburbes then within the citie. I haue
+seene in this riuer a pretie kinde of fishing, not to be omitted in my
+opinion, and therefore I will set it downe. [Marginal note: Odeicus writeth
+of the like.] The king hath in many riuers good store of barges full of
+sea-crowes that breede, are fedde and doe die therein, in certaine cages,
+allowed monethely a certaine prouision of rise. These barges the king
+bestoweth vpon his greatest magistrates, giuing to some two, to some three
+of them as be thinketh good, to fish therewithal after this manner. At the
+houre appointed to fish, all the barges are brought together in a circle,
+where the riuer is shalow, and the crowes tyed together vnder the wings are
+let leape downe into the water some vnder, some aboue, woorth the looking
+vpon: each one as he hath filled his bagge, goeth to his owne barge and
+emptieth it, which done, he returneth to fish againe. Thus hauing taken
+good store of fish, they set the crowes at libertie, and do suffer them to
+fish for their owne pleasure. There were in that city where I was, twentie
+barges at the least of these aforesayd crowes. I went almost euery day to
+see them, yet could I neuer be throughly satisfyed to see so strange a kind
+of fishing.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Of the Iland Iapan, and other litle Iles in the East Ocean.
+
+By R. Willes.
+
+The extreame part of the knowen world vnto vs is the noble Iland Giapan,
+written otherwise Iapon and Iapan. This Island standeth in the East Ocean,
+beyond all Asia, betwixt Cathayo and the West Indies sixe and thirtie
+degrees Northward from the Equinoctial line, in the same clime with the
+South part of Spain and Portugall, distant from thence by sea sixe thousand
+leagues: the trauile thither, both for ciuill discord, great pyracie, and
+often shipwracks is very dangerous. This countrey is hillie and pestered
+with snow, wherefore it is neither so warme as Portugall, nor yet so
+wealthy, as far as we can learne, wanting oyle, butter, cheese, milke,
+egges, sugar, honny, vinegar, saffron, cynamom and pepper. Barleybranne the
+Ilanders doe vse in stead of salt: medicinable things holsome for the bodie
+haue they none at all. Neuerthelesse in that Iland sundry fruites doe
+growe, not much vnlike the fruites of Spaine: and great store of Siluer
+mynes are therein to be seene. The people are tractable, ciuill, wittie,
+courteous, without deceit, in vertue and honest conuersation exceeding all
+other nations lately discouered, but so much standing vpon their
+reputation, that their chiefe Idole may be thought honour. The contempt
+thereof causeth among them much discord and debate, manslaughter and
+murther: euen for their reputation they doe honour their parents, keepe
+their promises, absteine from adulterie and robberies, punishing by death
+the least robbery done, holding for a principle, that whosoeuer stealeth a
+trifle, will, if he see occasion, steale a greater thing. It may be theft
+is so seuerely punished of them, for that the nation is oppressed with
+scarcitie of all things necessary, and so poore, that euen for miserie they
+strangle their owne children, preferring death before want. These fellowes
+doe neither eate nor kill any foule. They liue chiefely by fish, hearbes,
+and fruites, so healthfully, that they die very old. Of Rice and Wheat
+there is no great store. No man is ashamed there of his pouertie, neither
+be their gentlemen therefore lesse honoured of the meaner people, neither
+will the poorest gentleman there matche his childe with the baser sort for
+any gaine, so much they do make more account of gentry then of wealth. The
+greatest delight they haue is in armour, each boy at fourteene yeeres of
+ages, be he borne gentle or otherwise, hath his sword and dagger: very good
+archers they be, contemning all other nations in comparison of their
+manhood and prowesse, putting not vp one iniurie be it neuer so small in
+worde or deede, among themselues. They feede moderately, but they drinke
+largely. The vse of vines they knowe not, their drinke they make of Rice,
+vtterly they doe abhorre dice, an all games, accounting nothing more vile
+in a man, then to giue himselfe vnto those things that make vs greedy and
+desirous to get other mens goods. If at any time they do sweare, for that
+seldome they are wont to doe, they sweare by the Sunne: many of them are
+taught good letters, wherfore they may so much the sooner be brought vnto
+Christianitie. Each one is contented with one wife: they be all desirous to
+learne, and naturally inclined vnto honesty and courtesie: godly talke they
+listen vnto willingly, especially when they vnderstand it throughly. Their
+gouernment consisteth of 3 estates. The first place is due vnto the high
+Priest, by whose laws and decrees all publike and priuate matters
+appertayning to religion are decided. The sects of their clergie men, whom
+they doe call Bonzi, be of no estimation or authoritie except the high
+Priest by letters patent doe confirme the same: he confirmeth and alloweth
+of their Tundi, who be as it were Bishops, although in many places they are
+nominated by sundry Princes. These Tundi are greatly honoured of all sorts:
+they doe giue benefices vnto inferiour ministers, and do grant licences for
+many things as to eate flesh vpon those dayes they goe in pilgrimage to
+their Idoles with such like priuileges. Finally, this High Priest wont to
+be chosen in China for his wisedome and learning, made in Iapan for his
+gentry and birth, hath so large a Dominion and reuenues so great, that
+eftsones he beardeth the petie Kings and Princes there.
+
+Their second principal Magistrate, in their language Vo, is the chiefe
+Herehaught, made by succession and birth, honoured as a God. This gentleman
+neuer toucheth the ground with his foote without forfaiting of his office,
+he neuer goeth abroad out of his house, nor is at all times to be seene. At
+home he is either carried about in a litter, or els he goeth in wooden
+Choppines a foote high from the ground: commonly he sitteth in his chaire
+with a sword in one side, and a bow and arrows in the other, next his bodie
+he wearth blacke, his outward garments be red, all shadowed ouer with
+Cypresse, at his cappe hang certaine Lambeaux much like vnto a Bishop
+Miter, his forehead is painted white and red, he eateth his meat in earthen
+dishes. This Herehaught determineth in all Iapan the diuerse titles of
+honour, whereof in that Iland is great plentie, each one particularly
+knowen by his badge, commonly seene in sealing vp their letters, and dayly
+altered according to their degrees. About this Vo euery Noble man hath his
+Solicitor, for the nation is so desirous of praise and honour, that they
+striue among themselues who may bribe him best. By these meanes the
+Herehaught groweth so rich, that although hee haue neither land nor any
+reuenues otherwise, yet may he be accounted the wealthiest man in all
+Iapan. For three causes this great Magistrate may loose his office: first,
+if he touch the ground with his foote, as it hath beene alreadie said:
+next, if he kill any body: thirdly, if he be found an enemie vnto peace and
+quietnesse, howbeit neither of these aforesaid causes is sufficient to put
+him to death.
+
+Their third chiefe officer is a Iudge, his office is to take vp and to end
+matters in controuersie, to determine of warres and peace, that which he
+thinketh right, to punish rebels, wherein he may commaund the noble men to
+assist him vpon paine of forfeiting their goods: neuerthelesse at all times
+he is not obeyed, for that many matters are ended rather by might and
+armes, then determined by law. Other controuersies are decided either in
+the Temporall Court, as it seemeth good vnto the Princes, or in the
+Spirituall consistorie before the Tundi.
+
+Rebelles are executed in this manner, especially if they be noble men or
+officers. The king looke what day he giueth sentence against any one, the
+same day the partie, wheresoeuer he be, is aduertised thereof, and the day
+told him of his execution. The condemned person asketh of the messenger
+whether it may bee lawful for him to kill himselfe: the which thing when
+the king doeth graunt, the partie taking it for an honour, putteth on his
+best apparel and launcing his body a crosse from the breast downe all the
+belly, murthereth himselfe. This kind of death they take to be without
+infamie, neither doe their children for their fathers crime so punished,
+loose their goods. But if the king reserue them to be executed by the
+hangman, then flocketh he together his children, his seruants, and friends
+home to his house, to preserue his life by force. The king committeth the
+fetching of him out vnto his chiefe Iudge, who first setteth vpon him with
+bow and arrowes, and afterward with pikes and swords, vntill the rebell and
+family be slaine to their perpetuall ignominie and shame.
+
+The Indie-writers make mention of sundry great cities in this Iland, as
+Cangoxima a hauen towne in the South part thereof, and Meaco distant from
+thence three hundred leagues northward, the royall seat of the king and
+most wealthy of all other townes in that Iland. The people thereabout are
+very noble, and their language the best Iaponish. In Maco are sayd to be
+ninetie thousande houses inhabited and vpward, a famous Vniuersitie, and in
+it fiue principall Colleges, besides closes and cloysters of Bonzi,
+Leguixil, and Hamacata, that is, Priests, Monks and Nunnes. Other fiue
+notable Vniuersities there be in Iapan, namely, Coia, Negru, Homi, Frenoi,
+and Bandu. The first foure haue in them at the least three thousand and
+fiue hundred schollers: in the fift are many mo. For Bandu prouince is very
+great and possessed with sixe princes, fiue whereof are vassals vnto the
+sixt, yet he himselfe subiect vnto the Iaponish king, vsually called the
+great king of Meaco: lesser scholes there be many in diuers places of this
+Ilande. And thus much specially concerning this glorious Iland, among so
+many barbarous nations and rude regions, haue I gathered together in one
+summe, out of sundry letters written from thence into Europe, by no lesse
+faithfull reporters than famous trauellers. [Sidenote: Petrus Maffeius de
+rebus Iaponicis.] For confirmation wherof, as also for the knowledge of
+other things not conteyned in the premisses, the curious readers may peruse
+these 4 volumes of Indian matters written long ago in Italian, and of late
+compendiously made Latine, by Petrus Maffeius my old acquainted friend,
+entituling the same, De rubus Iaponicis. One whole letter out of the fift
+booke thereof, specially intreating of that countrey, I haue done into
+English word for word in such wise as followeth.
+
+
+Aloisius Froes to his companions in Iesus Christ that remaine in China and
+  India.
+
+The last yeere, deare brethren, I wrote vnto you from Firando, how Cosmus
+Turrianus had appointed me to trauile to Meaco to helpe Gaspar Vilela, for
+that there the haruest was great, the labourers few, and that I should haue
+for my companion in that iourney Aloisius Almeida. It seemeth now my part,
+hauing by the helpe of God ended so long a voiage, to signifie vnto you by
+letter such things specially as I might thinke you would most delight to
+know. And because at the beginning Almeida and I so parted the whole labour
+of writing letters betwixt vs, that he should speake of our voyage, and
+such things as happened therein, I should make relation of the Meachians
+estate, and write what I could well learne of the Iapans manners and
+conditions: setting aside all discourses of our voyage, that which standeth
+me vpon I will discharge in this Epistle, that you considering how
+artificially, how cunningly, vnder the pretext of religion, that craftie
+aduersary of mankind leadeth and draweth vnto perdition the Iapanish
+mindes, blinded with many superstitions and ceremonies, may the more pitie
+this Nation.
+
+The inhabiters of Iapan, as men that had neuer had greatly to doe with
+other Nations, in their Geography diuided the whole world into three parts,
+Iapan, Sian, and China. And albeit the Iapans receiued out of Sian and
+China their superstitions and ceremonies, yet doe they neuertheless
+contemne all other Nations in comparison of themselues, and standing in
+their owne conceite doe far preferre themselues before all other sorts of
+people in wisedome and policie.
+
+Touching the situation of the countrey and nature of the soyle, vnto the
+things eftsoones erst written, this one thing I will adde: in these Ilands,
+the sommer to be most hot, the winter extreme cold. In the kingdom of
+Canga, as we call it, falleth so much snow, that the houses being buried in
+it, the inhabitants keepe within doores certaine moneths of the yeere,
+hauing no way to come foorth except they break vp the tiles. Whirlewindes
+most vehement, earthquakes so common, that the Iapans dread such kind of
+feares litle or nothing at all. The countrey is ful of siluer mines
+otherwise barren, not so much by fault of nature, as through the
+slouthfulnesse of the inhabitants: howbeit Oxen they keepe and that for
+tillage sake onely. The ayre is holesome, the waters good, the people very
+faire and well bodied: bare headed commonly they goe, procuring baldnesse
+with sorrow and teares, eftsoones rooting vp with pinsars all the haire of
+their heads as it groweth, except it be a litle behind, the which they knot
+and keepe with all diligence. Euen from their childhood they weare daggers
+and swords, the which they vse to lay vnder their pillowes when they goe to
+bed: in shew courteous and affable, in deede haughtie and proud. They
+delight most in warlike affaires, and their greatest studie is armes. Mens
+apparel diuersely coloured is worne downe halfe the legges and to the
+elbowes: womens attire made handsomely like vnto a vaile, is somewhat
+longer: all manner of dicing and theft they do eschewe. The marchant
+although he be wealthy, is not accounted of. Gentlemen, be they neuer so
+poore, retaine their place: most precisely they stand vpon their honour and
+worthinesse, ceremoniously striuing among themselues in courtesies and
+faire speeches. Wherein if any one happily be lesse carefull than he should
+be, euen for a trifle many times he getteth euill will. Want though it
+trouble most of them, so much they doe detest, that poore men cruelly
+taking pittie of their infantes newly borne, especially girles, do many
+times with their owne feete strangle them. Noble men, and other likewise of
+meaner calling generally haue but one wife a peece, by whom although they
+haue issue, yet for a trifle they diuorse themselues from their wiues, and
+the wiues also sometimes from their husbands, to marry with others. After
+the second degree cousins may there lawfully marry. Adoption of other mens
+children is much vsed among them. In great townes most men and women can
+write and reade.
+
+This Nation feedeth sparingly, their vsuall meat is rice and salets, and
+neere the sea side fish. They feast one another many times, wherein they
+vse great diligence, especially in drinking one to another, insomuch that
+the better sort, least they might rudely commit some fault therein, does
+vse to reade certaine bookes written of duties and ceremonies apperteyning
+vnto banquets. To be delicate and fine, they put their meate into their
+mouthes with litle forkes, accounting it great rudenesse to touch it with
+their fingers: winter and sommer they drinke water as hot as they may
+possibly abide it. Their houses are in danger of fire, but finely made and
+cleane, layde all ouer with strawe-pallets, whereupon they doe both sit in
+stead of stooles, and lie in their clothes with billets under their heads.
+For feare of defiling these pallets, they goe either bare foote within
+doores, or weare strawe pantofles on their buskins when they come abroad,
+the which they lay aside at their returne home againe. Gentlemen for the
+most part do passe the night in banketting, musicke, and vaine discourses,
+they sleepe the day time. In Meaco and Sacaio there is good store of beds,
+but they be very litle, and may be compared vnto our pues.
+
+In bringing vp children they vse words only to rebuke them, admonishing as
+diligently and aduisedly boyes of sixe or seuen yeeres of age, as though
+they were olde men. They are giuen very much to intertaine strangers, of
+whom most curiously they loue to aske euen in trifles what forraine nations
+doe, and their fashions. Such arguments and reasons as be manifest, and are
+made plaine with examples, doe greatly persuade them. They detest all kinde
+of theft, whosoeuer is taken in that fault may be slaine freely of any
+bodie. No publike prisons, no common gayles, no ordinary Iusticers:
+priuately each householder hath the hearing of matters at home in his owne
+house, and the punishing of greater crimes that deserue death without
+delay. Thus vsually the people is kept in awe and feare.
+
+About foure hundred yeeres past (as in their olde recordes we finde) all
+Iapan was subiect vnto one Emperour whose royall seat was Meaco, in the
+Iaponish language called Cubucama. But the nobtlitie rebelling against him,
+by litle and litle haue taken away the greatest part of his dominion,
+howbeit his title continually remayneth, and the residue in some respect
+doe make great account of him still, acknowledging him for their superior.
+Thus the Empyre of Iapan, in times past but one alone, is now diuided into
+sixtie sixe kingdomes, the onely cause of ciuill warres continually in that
+Iland, to no small hinderance of the Gospell, whilest the kings that dwell
+neare together inuade one another, each one coueting to make his kingdome
+greater. Furthermore in the citie Meaco is the pallace of the high Priest,
+whom that nation honoureth as a God, he hath in his house 306 Idoles, one
+whereof by course is euery night set by his side for a watchman. He is
+thought of the common people so holy, that it may not be lawfull for him to
+goe vpon the earth: if happily he doe set one foote to the ground, he
+looseth his office. He is not serued very sumptuously, he is maintained by
+almes. The heads and beards of his ministers are shauen, they haue name
+Cangues, and their authoritie is great throughout all Iapan. The Cubucama
+vseth them for Embassadores to decide controuersies betwixt princes, and to
+end their warres, whereof they were wont to make very great game. It is now
+two yeres since or there about, that one of them came to Bungo, to intreate
+of peace betwixt the king thereof and the king of Amanguzzo. This Agent
+fauouring the king of Bungo his cause more then the other, brought to passe
+that the foresayd king of Bungo should keepe two kingdomes, the which he
+had taken in warres from the king of Amanguzzo. Wherefore he had for his
+reward of the king of Bungo aboue 30000 ducats. And thus farre hereof.
+
+I come now to other superstitions and ceremonies, that you may see, deare
+brethren, that which I said in the beginning, how subtilly the diuell hath
+deceiued the Iaponish nation, and how diligent and readie they be to obey
+and worship him. And first, al remembrance and knowledge not onely of
+Christ our Redeemer, but also of that one God the maker of all things is
+cleane extinguished and vtterly abolished out of the Iapans hearts.
+Moreouer their superstitious sects are many, whereas it is lawfull for each
+one to follow that which liketh him best: but the principall sects are two,
+namely the Amidans and Xacaians. Wherefore in this countrey shall you see
+many monasteries, not onely of Bonzii men, but also of Bonziae women
+diuersely attired, for some doe weare white vnder, and blacke vpper
+garments, other goe apparelled in ash colour, and their idole hath to name
+Denichi: from these the Amidanes differ very much. Againe the men Bonzii
+for the most part dwell in sumptuous houses, and haue great reuenues. These
+fellowes are chaste by commandement, marry they may not vpon paine of
+death. In the midst of their temple is erected an altar, whereon standeth a
+woodden Idole of Amida, naked from the girdle vpward, with holes in his
+eares after the manner of Italian gentlewomen, sitting on a wooden rose
+goodly to behold. They haue great libraries, and halles for them all to
+dine and sup together, and bels wherewith they are at certaine houres
+called to prayers. In the euening the Superintendent giueth each one a
+theame for meditation. After midnight before the altar in their Temple they
+do say Mattens at it were out of Xaca his last booke, one quier one verse,
+the other quier another. Early in the morning each one giueth himselfe to
+meditation one houre: they shaue their heads and beards. Their cloysters be
+very large, and within the precinct thereof, Chappels of the Fotoquiens,
+for by that name some of the Iapanish Saints are called: their holydaies
+yeerely be very many. Most of these Bonzii be gentlemen, for that the
+Iapanish nobility charged with many children, vse to make most of them
+Bonzii, not being able to leaue for each one a patrimony good enough. The
+Bonzii most coueteously bent, know all the wayes how to come by money. They
+sell vnto the people many scrolles of paper, by the helpe whereof the
+common people thinketh it selfe warranted from all power of the deuils.
+They borrow likewise money to be repayed with great vsury in an other
+worlde, giuing by obligation vnto the lender an assurance thereof, the
+which departing out of his life he may carry with him to hell.
+
+There is another great company of such as are called Inambuxu, with curled
+and staring haire. They make profession to finde out againe things either
+lost or stolen, after this sort. They set before them a child whom the
+deuill inuadeth, called vp thither by charmes: of that child then doe they
+aske that which they are desirous to know.
+
+These mens prayers both good and bad are thought greatly to preuaile,
+insomuch that both their blessings and their curses they sell vnto the
+people. The nouices of this order, before they be admitted, goe together
+two or three thousand in a company, vp a certaine high mountaine to doe
+pennance there, threescore dayes voluntarily punishing themselues. In this
+time the deuill sheweth himselfe vnto them in sundry shapes: and they like
+young graduats, admitted as it were fellowes into some certaine companie,
+are set foorth with white tassels hanging about their neckes, and blacke
+Bonnets that scarcely couer any more then the crawne of their heads. Thus
+attyred they range abroade in all Iapan, to set out themselues and their
+cunning to sale, each one beating his bason which he carieth alwayes about
+with him, to giue notice of their comming in al townes where they passe.
+
+There is also an other sort called Genguis, that make profession to shewe
+by soothsaying where stollen things are, and who were the theeues. These
+dwell in the toppe of an high mountaine, blacke in the face: for the
+continuall heate of the sunne, for the cold windes, and raines they doe
+continually endure. They marry but in their owne tribe and line: the report
+goeth that they be horned beasts. They climbe vp most high rockes and
+hilles, and go ouer very great riuers by the onely arte of the deuill, who
+to bring those wretches the more into errour, biddeth them to goe vp a
+certaine high mountaine, where they stande miserably gazing and earnestly
+looking for him as long as the deuill appointeth them. At the length at
+noonetide or in the euening commeth that deuill, whom they call Amida among
+them to shew himselfe vnto them: this shew breedeth in the braines and
+hearts of men such a kinde of superstition, that it can by no meanes be
+rooted out of them afterward.
+
+The deuill was wont also in another mountaine to shew himselfe vnto the
+Iapanish Nation. Who so was more desirous than other to go to heauen and to
+enioy Paradise, thither went he to see that sight, and hauing seene the
+deuill followed him (so by the deuill persuaded) into a denne vntil he came
+to a deepe pit. Into this pit the deuill was wont to leape and to take with
+him his worshipper whom he there murdred. This deceit was thus perceiued.
+An old man blinded with this superstition, was by his sonne diswaded from
+thence, but all in vaine. Wherefore his sonne followed him priuily into
+that denne with his bow and arrows, where the deuill gallantly appeared
+vnto him in the shape of a man. Whilest the old man falleth downe to
+worshippe the deuill, his sonne speedily shooting an arrow at the spirit so
+appearing, strooke a Foxe in stead of a man so suddenly was that shape
+altered. This olde manne his sonne tracking the Foxe so running away, came
+to that pit whereof I spake, and in the bottome thereof he found many bones
+of dead men, deceiued by the deuill after that sort in time past. Thus
+deliuered he his father from present death, and all other from so pestilent
+an opinion.
+
+There is furthermore a place bearing name Coia, very famous for the
+multitude of Abbyes which the Bonzii haue therein. The beginner and founder
+whereof is thought to be one Combendaxis a suttle craftie fellowe, that got
+the name of holinesse by cunning speech, although the lawes and ordinances
+he made were altogether deuillish: he is said to haue found out the
+Iapanish letters vsed at this day. In his latter yeeres this Sim suttle
+buried himselfe in a fouresquare graue, foure cubites deepe, seuerely
+forbidding it to be opened, for that then he died not, but rested his bodie
+wearied with continuall businesse, vntill many thousand thousands of yeeres
+were passed, after the which time a great learned man named Mirozu should
+come into Iapan, and then would he rise vp out of his graue againe. About
+his tombe many lampes are lighted, sent thither out of diuerse prouinces,
+for that the people are perswaded that whosoeuer is liberall and
+beneficiall towardes the beautifying of that monument shall not onely
+increase in wealth in this world, but in the life to come be safe through
+Combendaxis helpe. Such as giue themselues to worship him, liue in those
+Monasteries or Abbyes with shauen heads, as though they had forsaken all
+secular matters, whereas in deede they wallow in all sortes of wickednesse
+and lust. In these houses, the which are many (as I sayd) in number, doe
+remaine 6000 Bonzii, or thereabout besides the multitude of lay men, women
+be restrained from thence vpon paine of death. Another company of Bonzii
+dwelleth at Fatonochaiti. They teach a great multitude of children all
+tricks and sleights of guile and theft: whom they do find to be of great
+towardnes, those do they instruct in al the petigrues of princes, and
+fashions of the nobilitie, in chiualrie and eloquence, and so send them
+abroad into other prouinces, attired like yong princes, to this ende, that
+faining themselues to be nobly borne, they may with great summes of money
+borowed vnder the colour and pretence of nobilitie returne againe.
+Wherefore this place is so infamous in all Iapan, that if any scholer of
+that order be happily taken abroad, he incontinently dieth for it.
+Neuerthelesse these cousiners leaue not daily to vse their woonted
+wickednesse and knauerie.
+
+[Sidenote: A warrelike people 300 leagues to the North of Meaco.] North
+from Iapan, three hundred leagues out of Meaco, lieth a great countrey of
+sauage men clothed in beasts skinnes, rough bodied, with huge beards and
+monstrous muchaches, the which they hold vp with litle forkes as they
+drinke. These people are great drinkers of wine, fierce in warres, and much
+feared of the Iapans: being hurt in fight, they wash their wounds with salt
+water, other Surgerie haue they none. In their breasts they are sayd to
+cary looking glasses: their swordes they tie to their heads, in such wise,
+that the handle doe rest vpon their shoulders. Seruice and ceremonies haue
+they none at all, onely they are woont to worship heauen. To Aquita a great
+towne in that Iaponish kingdom, which we call Geuano, they much resort for
+marchandise, and the Aquitanes likewise doe trauell in to their countrey,
+howbeit not often, for that there many of them are slaine by the
+inhabiters.
+
+Much more concerning this matter I had to write: but to auoyd tediousnesse
+I will come to speake of the Iapans madnesse againe, who most desirous of
+vaine glory doe thinke then specially to get immortall fame, when they
+procure themselues to be most sumptuously and solemnly buried: their
+burials and obsequies in the citie Meaco are done after this maner.
+[Sidenote: The Iapanish funerals.] About one houre before the dead body be
+brought fourth, a great multitude of his friends apparelled in their best
+aray goe before vnto the fire, with them goe their kinswomen and such as
+bee of their acquaintance, clothed in white, (for that is the mourning
+colour there) with a changeable coloured vaile on their heads. Each woman
+hath with her also, according to her abilitie, all her familie trimmed vp
+in white mockado: the better sort and wealthier women goe in litters of
+Cedar artificially wrought and richly dressed. In the second place marcheth
+a great company of footemen sumptuously apparelled. Then afarre off commeth
+one of these Bonzii master of the ceremonies for that superstition, brauely
+clad in silkes and gold, in a large and high litter excellently well
+wrought, accompanied with 30 other Bonzii or thereabout, wearing hats,
+linnen albes, and fine blacke vpper garments. Then attired in ashe colour
+(for this colour also is mourning) with a long torch of Pineaple, he
+sheweth the dead body the way vnto the fire, lest it either stumble or
+ignorantly go out of the way. Well neere 200 Bonzii folow him singing the
+name of that deuill the which the partie deceassed chiefly did worship in
+his life time, and therewithall a very great bason is beaten euen to the
+place of fire instead of a bell. Then follow two great paper baskets hanged
+open at staues endes full of paper roses diuersly coloured, such as beare
+them doe march but slowly, shaking euer now and then their staues, that the
+aforesayd flowers may fall downe by litle and litle as it were drops of
+raine: and be whirled about with wind. This shower say they is an argument
+that the soule of the dead man is gone to paradise. After al this, eight
+beardles Bonzii orderly two and two drag after them on the ground long
+speares, the points backward, with flags of one cubite a piece, wherein the
+name also of that idole is written. Then there be caried 10 lanterns
+trimmed with the former inscription, ouercast with a fine vaile, and
+candles burning in them. [Sidenote: They burne their dead.] Besides this,
+two yoong men clothed in ashe colour beare pineaple torches, not lighted,
+of three foote length, the which torches serue to kindle the fire wherein
+the dead corpes is to bee burnt. In the same colour follow many other that
+weare on the crownes of their heads faire, litle, threesquare, blacke
+Lethren caps tied fast vnder their chinnes (for that is honorable amongst
+them) with papers on their heads, wherein the name of the deuill I spake
+of, is written. And to make it the more solemne, after commeth a man with a
+table one cubite long, one foot broad, couered with a very fine white
+vaile, in both sides whereof is written in golden letters the aforesayd
+name. At the length by foure men is brought fourth the corps sitting in a
+gorgeous litter clothed in white, hanging downe his head and holding his
+hands together like one that prayed: to the rest of his apparell may you
+adde an vpper gowne of paper, written full of that booke the which his God
+is sayd to haue made, when he liued in the world, by whose helpe and
+merites commonly they doe thinke to be saued. The dead man his children
+come next after him most gallantly set foorth, the yongest wherof carieth
+likewise a pineaple torch to kindle the fire. Last of all foloweth a great
+number of people in such caps as I erst spake of.
+
+When they are al come to the place appointed for the obsequie, al the
+Bonzii with the whole multitude for the space of one houre, beating pannes
+and basons with great clamours, call vpon the name of that deuill, the
+which being ended, the Obsequie is done in this maner. In the midst of a
+great quadrangle railed about, hanged with course linnen, and agreeably
+vnto the foure partes of the world made with foure gates to goe in and out
+at, is digged a hole: in the hole is laied good store of wood, whereon is
+raised gallantly a waued roofe; before that stand two tables furnished with
+diuers kindes of meates, especially drie Figs, Pomegranates and Tartes good
+store, but neither Fish nor Flesh: vpon one of them standeth also a chafer
+with coales, and in it sweete wood to make perfumes. When all this is
+readie, the corde wherewith the litter was caried, is throwen by a long
+rope into the fire: as many as are present striue to take the rope in their
+handes, vsing their aforesayd clamours, which done, they goe in procession
+as it were round about the quadrangle thrise. Then setting the litter on
+the wood built vp ready for the fire that Bonzius who then is master of the
+ceremonies, saieth a verse that no bodie there vnderstandeth, whirling
+thrise about ouer his head a torch lighted, to signifie thereby that the
+soule of the dead man had neither any beginning, ne shall haue at any time
+an ende, and throweth away the torch. Two of the dead man his children, or
+of his neere kinne, take it vp againe, and standing one at the East side of
+the litter, the other at the West, doe for honour and reuerence reach it to
+each other thrise ouer the dead corps, and so cast it into the pile of
+wood: by and by they throw in oyle, sweete wood, and other perfumes,
+accordingly as they haue plentie, and so with a great flame bring the corps
+to ashes: his children in the meane while putting sweete wood into the
+chafer at the table with odours, doe solemnly and religiously worship their
+father as a Saint: which being done, the Bonzii are paied each one in his
+degree. The master of the ceremonies hath for his pact fiue duckats,
+sometimes tenne, sometimes twentie, the rest haue tenne Iulies a piece, or
+els a certaine number of other presents called Caxae. The meate that was
+ordained, as soone as the dead corps friends and all the Bonzii are gone,
+is left for such as serued at the obsequie, for the poore and impotent
+lazars.
+
+The next day returne to the place of obsequie the dead man his children,
+his kindred and friends, who gathering vp his ashes, bones, and teeth, doe
+put them in a gilded pot, and so carie them home, to bee set vp in the same
+pot couered with cloth, in the middest of their houses. Many Bonzii returne
+likewise to these priuate funerals, and so do they againe the seuenth day:
+then cary they out the ashes to be buried in a place appointed, laying
+thereupon a fouresquare stone, wherein is written in great letters drawen
+all the length of the stone, the name of that deuil the which the dead man
+worshipped in his life time. Euery day afterward his children resort vnto
+the graue with roses and warme water that the dead corps thirst not. Nor
+the seuenth day onely, but the seuenth moneth and yeere, within their owne
+houses they renue this obsequie, to no small commodities and gaine of the
+Bonzii: great rich men doe spend in these their funerals 3000 duckats or
+thereabout, the meaner sort two or three hundred. Such as for pouertie be
+not able to go to that charges, are in the night time darke long without
+all pompe and ceremonies buried in a dunghill.
+
+They haue another kinde of buriall, especially neere the Sea side, for them
+that bee not yet dead. These fellowes are such, as hauing religiously with
+much deuotion worshipped Amida, now desirous to see him, doe slay
+themselues. And first they goe certaine dayes begging almes, the which they
+thrust into their sleeues, then preach they in publique a sermon vnto the
+people, declaring what they mind to doe, with the great good liking of all
+such as doe heare them: for euery body wondreth at such a kinde of
+holinesse. Then take they hookes to cut downe briars and thornes that might
+hinder them in their way to heauen, and so embarke themselues in a new
+vessell, tying great stones about their neckes, armes, loines, thighes, and
+feete: thus they launching out into the main Sea be either drowned there,
+their shippe bouged for that purpose, or els doe cast themselues ouer-boord
+headlong into the Sea. The emptie barke is out of hand set a fire for
+honours sake by their friends that folow them in another boat of their
+owne, thinking it blasphemie that any mortall creature should afterward
+once touch the barke that had bene so religiously halowed.
+
+Truly when we went to Meaco, eight dayes before we came to the Ile of Hiu
+at Fore towne, sixe men and two women so died. To all such as die so the
+people erecteth a Chappell, and to each of them a pillar and a pole made of
+Pineaple for a perpetuall monument, hanging vp many shreds of paper in
+stickes all the roofe ouer, with many verses set downe in the walles in
+commendation of that blessed company. Wherefore vnto this place both day
+and night many come very superstitiously in pilgrimage. It happened euen
+then as Aloisius Almeida and I went to christen a childe wee traueiled that
+way at what time foure or fiue olde women came foorth out of the aforesayd
+chappell with beades in their handes (for in this point also the deuill
+counterfeiteth Christianitie) who partly scorned at vs for follie, partly
+frowned and taunted at our small deuotion, for passing by that holy
+monument without any reuerence or worship done thereunto at all.
+
+It remaineth now we speake two or three wordes of those Sermons the Bonzii
+are woont to make, not so many as ours in number, but assuredly very well
+prouided for. The Pulpit is erected in a great temple with a silke Canopie
+ouer it, therein standeth a costly seate, before the seate a table with a
+bell and a booke. At the houre of Sermon each sect of the Iapans resorteth
+to their owne doctors in diuers Temples. Vp goeth the doctor into the
+Pulpit, and being set downe, after that hee hath lordlike looked him about,
+signifieth silence with his bell, and so readeth a fewe wordes of that
+booke we spake of, the which he expoundeth afterward, more at large. These
+preachers be for the most part eloquent, and apt to drawe with their speach
+the mindes of their hearers. Wherefore to this ende chieflie (such is their
+greedinesse) tendeth all their talke, that the people bee brought vnder the
+colour of godlinesse to enrich their monasteries, promising to each one so
+much the more happinesse in the life to come, how much the greater costes
+and charges they bee at in Church matters and obsequies: notwithstanding
+this multitude of superstitious Sects and companies, and the diuersities
+thereof amongst themselues: yet in this principally all their
+Superintendents doe trauell so to perswade their Nouices in their owne
+tales and lies, that they thinke nothing els trueth, nothing els sure to
+come by euerlasting saluation, nothing els woorth the hearing. Whereunto
+they adde other subtleties, as in going grauitie, in countenance, apparell,
+and in all outward shew, comelinesse. Whereby the Iapans mindes are so
+nousled in wicked opinions, and doe conceiue thereby such trust and hope of
+euerlasting saluation, that not onely at home, but also abroad in euery
+corner of the towne continually almost they run ouer their beades, humbly
+asking of Amida and Xaca, wealth, honour, good health, and euerlasting
+ioyes. Thus then, deare brethren, may you thinke how greatly they need the
+helpe of God, that either doe bring the Gospell into this countrey, or
+receiuing it brought vnto them, doe forsake idolatrie and ioine themselues
+with Christ, being assaulted by so many snares of the deuill, troubled with
+the daily dissuasions of their Bonzii, and finally, so iniuriously, so
+hardly, so sharpely vexed of their kinred and friends, that except the
+grace of God obtained by the sacrifices and prayers of the Catholique
+church doe helpe vs, it cannot be chosen but that the faith and constancie
+of many, if not of all, in these first beginnings of our churches, will
+greatly be put in ieopardie. So much the more it standeth you vpon that so
+earnestly long for the health of soules, to commend specially these
+Iapanish flocks vnto our Lord.
+
+We came to Sacaio the eight and twentie day of Ianuary: Aloisius Almeida
+first for businesse, but afterward let by sicknesse, staied there some
+while, but I parting the next day from thence came thirteene leagues off to
+Meaco the last of Ianuarie. Of my comming all the Christians tooke great
+comfort, but specially Gaspar Vilela who in 6 yeres had seen none of our
+companie at Meaco: his yeeres are not yet fortie, but his grey haires shew
+him to be seuentie, so vehemently is his litle body afflicted and worne
+with extreme cold. Hee speaketh Iapanish so skilfully after the phrase of
+Meaco (the which for the renowne of this people and royal seat of the king
+is best accounted of) that hee doeth both confesse and preach in that
+language. Certaine godly bookes also he hath done into that speach, not
+omitting to translate other as laisure suffreth him. To make an ende, our
+Lord for his goodnesse vouchsafe to preserue vs all continually, and to
+giue vs ayde both rightly to interprete his will, and well to doe the same.
+From Meaco the 19 of February 1565.
+
+Other such like matter is handled both in other his letters, and also in
+the Epistles written by his companions to be seene at large in the
+aforesaid volume. Amongst the rest this seemed in my iudgement one of the
+principall, and therefore the rather I tooke vpon me to doe it into
+English.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Of the Iles beyond Iapan in the way from China to the Moluccas.
+
+Amongst other Iles in the Asian sea betwixt Canton a Chinish hauen in
+Cathaio and the Moluccas, much spoken of in the Indian histories and
+painted out in Maps, Ainan and Santianum are very famous. Ainan standeth 19
+degrees on this side of the Equinoctiall line neere China, from whence the
+Chinish nation haue their prouision for shipping and other necessaries
+requisite for their Nauie. There staied Balthasar Gagus a great traueiler 5
+moneths, who describeth that place after this maner. [Sidenote: De reb.
+Iap. li. 4.] Ainan is a goodly countrey ful of Indian fruits and all kinds
+of victuals, besides great store of iewels and pearle, well inhabited, the
+townes built of stone, the people rude in conditions, apparelled in diuers
+coloured rugs, with two oxe hornes, as it were, made of fine cypres hanging
+downe about their eares, and a paire of sharpe cyzers at their foreheads.
+
+The cause wherefore they go in such attire I could not vnderstand, except
+it bee for that they do counterfeit the deuil in the forme of a brute
+beast, offring themselues vp to him.
+
+Santianum is an Ile neere vnto the hauen Cantan in the confines likewise of
+China, famous for the death of that worthy traueiler and godly professour
+and painfull doctor of the Indian nation in matters concerning religion,
+Francis Xauier, who after great labours, many iniuries, and calamities
+infinite suffred with much patience, singular ioy and gladnesse of mind,
+departed in a cabben made of bowes and rushes vpon a desert mountaine, no
+lesse voyd of all worldly commodities, then endued with all spirituall
+blessings, out of this life, the 2 day of December, the yeere of our Lord
+1552. after that many thousand of these Easterlings were brought by him to
+the knowledge of Christ. Of this holy man, his particular vertues, and
+specially trauell, and wonderfull works in that region, of other many litle
+Iles (yet not so litle, but they may right wel be written of at laisure)
+all the latter histories of the Indian regions are full.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+An excellent treatise of the kingdome of China, and of the estate and
+  gouernment thereof: Printed in Latine at Macao a citie of the Portugals
+  in China, An. Dom. 1590. and written Dialogue-wise. The speakers are
+  Linus, Leo, and Michael.
+
+LINUS.
+
+Concerning the kingdome of China (Michael) which is our next neighbour, we
+haue heard and daily do heare so many reports, that we are to request at
+your hands rather a true then a large discourse and narration thereof. And
+if there be ought in your knowledge besides that which by continual rumours
+is waxen stale among vs, we will right gladly giue diligent eare vnto it.
+
+MICHAEL. Because the report of this most famous kingdome is growen so
+common among vs, reducing diuers and manifold particulars into order, I
+will especially aime at the trueth of things receiued from the fathers of
+the societie, which euen now at this present are conuersant in China.
+[Sidenote: The situation and limites of China.] First of all therefore it
+is not vnknowen, that of all parts of the maine continent this kingdom of
+China is situate most Easterly: albeit certaine Ilands, as our natiue
+Iapon, and the Ile of Manilia stand more Easterly then China it selfe. As
+touching the limites and bounds of this kingdom, we may appoint the first
+towards the West to be a certaine Ile commonly called Hainan, which
+standeth in 19 degrees of Northerly latitude. For the continent next
+adioining vnto this Ile trendeth towardes the East, and that especially,
+where the promontorie of the citie called Nimpo or Liampo doeth extend it
+selfe. Howbeit, from that place declining Northward, it stretcheth foorth
+an huge length, insomuch that the farthest Chinian inhabitants that way doe
+behold the North pole eleuated, at least 50 degrees, and perhaps more also:
+whereupon a man may easilie coniecture (that I may speake like an
+Astronomer) how large the latitude of this kingdom is, when as it
+containeth about more then 540 leagues in direct extension towards the
+North. But as concerning the longitude which is accounted from East to
+West, it is not so exactly found out, that it may be distinguished into
+degrees. [Sidenote: Chinian Cosmographers.] Howbeit certaine it is, that
+according to the Map wherein the people of China describe the forme of
+their kingdom, the latitude thereof doeth not much exceed the longitude.
+This kingdom therefore is, without all peradventure, of all earthly
+kingdoms the most large and spacious: for albeit diuers other kings vnder
+their iurisdiction containing in dimensions more length and breadth then
+all China, do possesse very many kingdoms and far distant asunder: yet none
+of them all enioyeth any one kingdom so large and so ample, as the most
+puissant king of China doeth. [Sidenote: The rich reuenues of the king of
+China.] Now, if we shall make enquirie into his reuenues and tributes, true
+it is, that this king, of all others, is endued with the greatest and the
+richest, both in regard of the fertilitie and greatnes of his dominions,
+and also by reason of the seuere collection and exaction of his duties:
+yea, tributes are imposed vpon his subiects, not onely for lands, houses,
+and impost of marchandise, but also for euery person in each family. It is
+likewise to be understood, that almost no lord or potentate in China hath
+authoritie to leuie vnto himselfe any peculiar reuenues, or to collect any
+rents within the precincts of his seigniories, al such power belonging
+onely vnto the king: whereas in Europe the contrary is most commonly seen,
+as we haue before signified. In this most large kingdom are conteined 15
+prouinces, euery one of which were in it selfe sufficient to be made one
+great kingdom. Six of these prouinces do border vpon the sea, namely (that
+I may vse the names of the Chinians themselues) Coantum, Foquien, Chequiam,
+Nanquin, Xantum, Paquin: the other 9 be in-land prouinces, namely, Quiansi,
+Huquam, Honan, Xiensi, Xansi, Suchuon, Queicheu, Iunan, Coansi. [Sidenote:
+The seats roiall of the king of China.] Amongst all the foresayd prouinces,
+two are allotted for the kings court and seat roial, that is to say, Paquin
+for his court in the North, and Nanquin for his court in the South. For the
+kings of China were woont to be resident altogether at the South court: but
+afterward by reason of the manifold and cruell warres mooued by the
+Tartars, they were constrained to defixe their princely seate and
+habitation in that extreme prouince of the North. Whereupon it commeth to
+passe, that those Northren confines of the kingdom doe abound with many moe
+fortresses, marciall engines, and garrisons of souldiers. LEO. I haue
+heard, amongst those munitions, a certaine strange and admirable wall
+reported of, wherewith the people of China doe represse and driue backe the
+Tartars attempting to inuade their territories. MICHAEL. Certes that wall
+which you haue heard tell of is most woorthie of admiration; for it runneth
+alongst the borders of three Northerlie prouinces, Xiensi, Xansit and
+Paquin, and is sayd to contayne almost three hundred leagues in length, and
+in such sort to bee built, that it hindereth not the courses and streames
+of any riuers, their chanels being ouerthwarted and fortified with
+wonderfull bridges and other defences. Yet is it not vnlikely, that the
+sayd wall is built in such sort, that onely lowe and easie passages bee
+therewith stopped and enuironed; but the mountaines running betweene those
+lowe passages are, by their owne naturall strength, and inaccessible
+heigth, a sufficient fortification agaynst the enemie. LINUS. Tell vs
+(Michael) whether the kingdome of China be so frequented with inhabitants,
+as wee haue often bene informed, or no? MICHAEL. It is (Linus) in very deed
+a most populous kingdom, as I haue bene certified from the fathers of
+societie: who hauing seene sundry prouinces of Europe renoumed for the
+multitude of their inhabitants, doe notwithstanding greatly admire the
+infinite swarmes of people in China. Howbeit these multitudes are not
+pel-mel and confusiuely dispersed ouer the land, but most conueniently and
+orderly distributed in their townes and famous cities: of which assemblies
+there are diuers kindes among the Chinians. For they haue certaine
+principal cities called by the name of Fu: other inferior cities called
+Cheu: and of a third kind also named Hien, which be indeed walled townes,
+but are not priuileged with the dignities and prerogatiues of cities. To
+these may be added two other kindes of lesser townes, which are partly
+villages, and partly garrisons of souldiers. Of the first and principall
+kind is that most noble citie standing neere vnto the port of Macao, called
+by the Chinians Coanchefu, but by the Portugals commonly termed Cantam,
+which is rather the common name of the prouince, then a word of their
+proper imposition. Vnto the third kind appertaineth a towne, which is yet
+nigher vnto the port of Macao, called by the Portugals Ansam, but by the
+Chinians Hiansanhien. Al the foresayd prouinces therefore haue their
+greater cities named Fu, and their lesser cities called Cheu, vnto both of
+which the other townes may be added. Moreouer in euery prouince there is a
+certain principal city which is called the Metropolitane thereof, wherein
+the chief magistrates haue their place of residence, as the principal citie
+by me last mentioned, which is the head of the whole prouince called
+Coantum. The number of the greater cities throughout the whole kingdom is
+more then 150, and there is the same or rather a greater multitude of
+inferiour cities. Of walled townes, not endued with the priuileges of
+cities there are mo then 1120: the villages and garrisons can scarce be
+numbred: ouer and besides the which conuents it is incredible what a number
+of countrie fames or granges there be: for it is not easie to find any
+place desert or void of inhabitants in all that land. [Sidenote: The
+Chinian riuers greatly inhabited.] Now in the sea, in riuers, and in barks
+there are such abundance of people, and of whole families inhabiting, that
+euen the Europaeans themselues doe greatly wonder thereat: insomuch that
+some (albeit beyond measure) haue bene perswaded that there are as many
+people dwelling vpon the water as vpon the land. Neither were they induced
+so to thinke altogether without probabilitie: for whereas the kingdom of
+China is in all parts thereof interfused with commodious riuers, and in
+many places consisteth of waters, barges and boats being euery-where very
+common, it might easily bee supposed, that the number of watermen was equal
+vnto the land inhabitants. Howbeit, that is to be vnderstood by
+amplification, whereas the cities do swarme so ful with citizens and the
+countrie with peasants. [Sidenote: Holesome aire, plenty and peace in
+China.] LEO. The abundance of people which you tell vs of seemeth very
+strange: whereupon I coniecture the soile to be fertile, the aire to be
+holesome, and the whole kingdom to be at peace. MICHAEL. You haue (friend
+Leo) ful iudicially coniectured those three: for they do all so excel that
+which of the three in this kingdom be more excellent, it is not easie to
+discerne. And hence it is that this common opinion hath been rife among the
+Portugals, namely, that the kingdom of China was neuer visited with those
+three most heauy and sharpe scourges of mankind, warre, famine, and
+pestilence. But that opinion is more common then true: sithens there haue
+bene most terrible intestine and ciuile warres, as in many and most
+autenticall histories it is recorded: sithens also that some prouinces of
+the sayd kingdom, euen in these our dayes, haue bene afflicted with
+pestilence and contagious diseases, and with famine. [Sidenote: Chinian
+stories.] Howbeit, that the foresaid three benefits do mightily flourish
+and abound in China, it cannot be denied. For (that I may first speake of
+the salubritie of the aire) the fathers of the societie themselues are
+witnesses; that scarcely in any other realme there are so many found that
+liue vnto decrepite and extreme old age: so great a multitude is there of
+ancient and graue personages: neither doe they vse so many confections and
+medicines, nor so manifold and sundry wayes of curing diseases, as wee saw
+accustomed in Europe. For amongst them they haue no Phlebotomie or letting
+of blood: but all their cures, as ours also in Iapon, are atchieued by
+fasting, decoctions of herbes, and light or gentle potions. But in this
+behalfe let euery nation please themselues with their owne customes. Now,
+in fruitfulnes of soile this kingdom certes doth excel, far surpassing all
+other kingdoms of the East: yet it is nothing comparable vnto the plentie
+and abundance of Europe, as I haue declared at large in the former
+treatises. But the kingdom of China is, in this regard, so highly extolled,
+because there is not any region in the East partes that aboundeth so with
+marchandise, and from whence so much traffique is sent abroad. [Sidenote:
+The city of Coanchefu, _alias_ Cantam.] For whereas this kingdome is most
+large and full of nauigable riuers, so that commodities may easilie be
+conueyed out of one prouince into another: the Portugals doe find such
+abundance of wares within one and the same Citie, (which perhaps is the
+greatest Mart throughout the whole kingdome) that they are verily
+perswaded, that the same region, of all others, most aboundeth with
+marchandise: which notwithstanding is to be vnderstood of the Orientall
+regions: albeit there are some kindes of marchandise, wherewith the land of
+China is better stored then any other kingdom. [Sidenote: Great abundance
+of gold in China.] This region affordeth especially sundry kinds of
+mettals, of which the chiefe, both in excellencie and in abundance, is
+gold, whereof so many Pezoes are brought from China to India, and to our
+countrey of Iapon, that I heard say, that in one and the same ship, this
+present yeere, 2000 such pieces consisting of massie gold, as the Portugals
+commonly call golden loaues, were brought vnto vs for marchandise: and one
+of these loaues is worth almost 100 duckats. Hence it is that in the
+kingdom of China so many things are adorned with gold, as for example,
+beds, tables, pictures, images, litters wherein nice and daintie dames are
+caried vpon their seruants backes. Neither are these golden loaues onely
+bought by the Portugals, but also great plentie of gold-twine and leaues of
+gold: for the Chinians can very cunningly beate and extenuate gold into
+plates and leaues. [Sidenote: Great store of siluer.] There is also great
+store of siluer, whereof (that I may omit other arguments) it is no small
+demonstration, that euery yeere there are brought into the citie commonly
+called Cantam by the Portugal marchants to buie wares, at the least 400
+Sestertium thereof, and yet nothing in a maner is conueied out of the
+Chinian kingdom: because the people of China abounding with all
+necessaries, are not greatly inquisitiue or desirous of any marchandise
+from other kingdomes. I doe here omit the Siluer mines whereof there are
+great numbers in China, albeit there is much circumspection vsed in digging
+the siluer thereout: for the king standeth much in feare least it may bee
+an occasion to stirre vp the couetous and greedie humour of many. Nowe
+their siluer which they put to vses is for the most part passing fine, and
+purified from all drosse, and therefore in trying it they vse great
+diligence. What should I speake of their iron, copper, lead, tinne, and
+other mettals, and also of their quick-siluer. Of all which in the realme
+of China there is great abundance, and from thence they are transported
+into diuers countreys. Hereunto may bee added the wonderfull store of
+pearles, which, at the Ile of Hainan, are found in shell-fishes taken very
+cunningly by certaine Diuers, and doe much enlarge the kings reuenues.
+[Sidenote: Great store of silke in China.] But now let vs proceed vnto the
+Silke or Bombycine fleece, whereof there is great plentie in China: so that
+euen as the husbandmen labour in manuring the earth, and in sowing of Rice;
+so likewise the women doe employ a great part of their time in preseruing
+of silke-wormes, and in keeming and weauing of Silke. Hence it is that
+euery yeere the King and Queene with great solemnitie come foorth into a
+publique place, the one of them touching a plough, and the other a Mulberie
+tree, with the leaues whereof Silke-wormes are nourished: and both of them
+by this ceremonie encouraging both men and women vnto their vocation and
+labour: whereas otherwise, all the whole yeere throughout, no man besides
+the principall magistrates, may once attaine to the sight of the king.
+[Sidenote: Silke brought into Iapon.] Of this Silke or Bombycine fleece
+there is such abundance, that three shippes for the most part comming out
+of India to the port of Macao, and at the least one euery yeere comming
+vnto vs, are laden especially with this fraight, and it is vsed not onely
+in India, but caried euen vnto Portugal. Neither is the Fleece it selfe
+onely transported thence, but also diuers and sundry stuffes wouen thereof,
+for the Chinians do greatly excel in the Art of weauing, and do very much
+resemble our weauers of Europe. Moreouer the kingdom of China aboundeth
+with most costlie spices and odours, and especially with cynamom (albeit
+not comparable to the cynamom of Zeilan) with camphire also and muske,
+which is very principal and good. Muske deriueth his name from a beast of
+the same name (which beast resembleth a Beuer) from the parts whereof
+bruseda and putrified proceedeth a most delicate and fragrant smel which
+the Portugals highly esteem, commonly calling those parts of the foresaid
+beasts (because they are like vnto the gorges of foules) Papos, and conuey
+great plenty of them into India, and to vs of Iapon. [Sidenote: Cotton
+wooll, whereof Calicut-cloth is made.] But who would beleeue, that there
+were so much gossipine or cotton-wool in China; whereof such variety of
+clothes are made like vnto linnen; which we our selues do so often vse, and
+which also is conueied by sea into so many regions? Let vs now intreat of
+that earthen or pliable matter commonly called porcellan, which is pure
+white, and is to be esteemed the best stuffe of that kind in the whole
+world: whereof vessels of all kinds are very curiously framed. I say, it is
+the best earthen matter in all the world, for three qualities; namely, the
+cleannesse, the beauty, and the strength thereof. There is indeed other
+matter to be found more glorious, and more costly, but none so free from
+vncleannes, and so durable: this I adde, in regard of glasse, which indeed
+is immaculate and cleane, but may easily be broken in pieces. This matter
+is digged, not thorowout the whole region of China, but onely in one of the
+fifteene prouinces called Quiansi, wherein continually very many artificers
+are employed about the same matter: neither doe they only frame thereof
+smaller vessels, as dishes, platters, salt sellers, ewers, and such like,
+but also certaine huge tunnes, and vessels of great quantity, being very
+finely and cunningly wrought, which, by reason of the danger and difficulty
+of carriage, are not transported out of the realme, but are vsed onely
+within it, and especially in the kings court. The beauty of this matter is
+much augmented by variety of picture, which is layed in certaine colours
+vpon it, while it is yet new, golde also being added thereunto, which
+maketh the foresayd vessels to appeare most beautifull. It is wonderfull
+how highly the Portugals do esteeme thereof, seeing they do, with great
+difficulty transport the same, not onely to vs of Iapon and into India, but
+also into sundry prouinces of Europe. Vnto the marchandize aboue-mentioned
+may be added diuers and sundry plants, the rootes whereof be right holesome
+for mens bodies, and very medicinable, which are brought vnto our Iles of
+Iapon, and vnto many other Ilands, amongst the which that wood may be
+reckoned, which (by a synechdoche) is called The Wood of China, being of
+notable force to expell out of mens bodies those humours, which would breed
+contagious diseases. To these you may adde sugar-canes (for in the realme
+of China there is great store of excellent sugar) which is conueyed by the
+Portugals very plentifully, both into our countrey, and also into India. My
+speeches vttered immediatly before concerned marchandize onely, in regard
+whereof this kingdome is beneficiall not to itselfe alone, but most
+profitable to many other nations also. [Sidenote: China in a maner
+destitute of corne, wine, and oile.] As for those fruits which pertaine to
+yerely sustenance and common food, they can scarse be numbred: albeit, of
+those three commodities which they of Europe so greatly account of; namely
+of cornes, vines, and oliues the land of China is not very capable: for the
+Chinians know not so much as the name of an Oliue tree (out of the fruit
+whereof oile is expressed) neither yet the name of a vine. The prouince of
+Paquin is not altogether destitute of wine, but whether it be brought from
+other places, or there made, I am not able to say: although it aboundeth
+with many other, and those not vnpleasant liquors, which may serue in the
+stead of wine it selfe. Now, as touching corne, there is indeed wheat sowen
+in all the prouinces, howbeit rise is in farre more vse and request then
+it: and so in regard of these two commodities profitable for mans life;
+namely, wine and come; the kingdome of China and our countrey of Iapon may
+be compared together.
+
+LEO. You haue discoursed (Michael) of the fruitfulnesse of China, whereof I
+haue often heard, that it is no lesse pleasant than fruitful, and I haue
+bene especially induced so to thinke, at the sight of the Chinian maps.
+MICHAEL. The thing it selfe agrees right well with the picture: for they
+that haue seene the mediterran or inner parts of the kingdome of China, do
+report it to be a most amiable countrey, adorned with plenty of woods, with
+abundance of fruits and grasse, and with woonderfull variety of riuers,
+wherewith the Chinian kingdome is watered like a garden; diuers of which
+riuers doe naturally flowe, and others by arte and industry are defined
+into sundry places. But now I will intreat of the tranquility and peace of
+China, after I haue spoken a word or two concerning the maners of the
+inhabitants. [Sidenote: The disposition and maners of the Chinians.] This
+nation is indued with excellent wit and dexterity for the attaining of all
+artes, and being very constant in their owne customes, they lightly regard
+the customes or fashions of other people. They vse one and the same kinde
+of vesture, yet so, that there is some distinction betweene the apparell of
+the magistrate and of the common subiect. They all of them do weare long
+haire vpon their heads, and, after the maner of women, do curiously keame
+their dainty locks hanging downe to the ground, and, hauing twined and
+bound them vp, they couer them with calles, wearing sundry caps thereupon,
+according to their age and conditon. It seemeth that in olde time one
+language was common to all the prouinces: notwithstanding, by reason of
+variety of pronunciation, it is very much altered, and is diuided into
+sundry idiomes or proprieties of speech, according to the diuers prouinces:
+howbeit, among the magistrates, and in publike assemblies of iudgement,
+there is one and the very same kinde of language vsed thorowout the whole
+realme, from the which (as I haue sayd) the speech of ech prouince
+differeth not a little. [Sidenote: Their loyaltie vnto their superiours.]
+Moreouer this people is most loyall and obedient vnto the king and his
+magistrates, which is the principall cause of their tranquility and peace.
+For whereas the common sort doe apply themselues vnto the discretion and
+becke of inferiour magistrates, and the inferiour magistrates of the
+superiour, and the superiour magistrates of the king himselfe, framing and
+composing all their actions and affaires vnto that leuell: a world it is to
+see, in what equability and indifferency of iustice all of them do leade
+their liues, and how orderly the publike lawes are administred. Which thing
+notwithstanding shall be handled more at large, when we come to intreat of
+the gouernment. LINUS. Tell vs now (Michael) of the industry of that
+people, whereof we haue heard great reports. MICHAEL. Their industry is
+especially to be discerned in manuary artes and occupations, and therein
+the Chinians do surpasse most of these Easterly nations. For there are such
+a number of artificers ingeniously and cunningly framing sundry deuices out
+of golde, siluer, and other mettals, as likewise of stone, wood and other
+matters conuenient for mans vse, that the streets of cities being
+replenished with their shops and fine workemanship, are very woonderfull to
+beholde. Besides whom also there are very many Painters, vsing either the
+pensill or the needle (of which the last sort are called Embrotherers) and
+others also that curiously worke golde-twine vpon cloth either of linnen or
+of cotton: whose operations of all kinds are diligently conueyed by the
+Portugals into India. Their industry doth no lesse appeare in founding of
+gunnes and in making of gun-powder, whereof are made many rare and
+artificiall fire-works. To these may be added the arte of Printing, albeit
+their letters be in maner infinite and most difficult, the portraitures
+whereof they cut in wood or in brasse, and with maruellous facilitie they
+dayly publish huge multitudes of books. Vnto these mechanicall and
+illiberall crafts you may adde two more; that is to say, nauigation and
+discipline of warre; both of which haue bene in ancient times most
+diligently practised by the inhabitants of China: for (as we haue before
+signified in the third dialogue) the Chinians sailing euen as farre as
+India, subdued some part thereof vnto their owne dominion: howbeit
+afterward, least they should diminish the forces of their realme by
+dispersing them into many prouinces, altering their counsell, they
+determined to containe themselues within their owne limits: within which
+limits (as I haue sayd) there were in olde time vehement and cruell wares,
+both betweene the people of China themselues, and also against the
+Tartarian king, who inuaded their kingdome, and by himselue and his
+successours, for a long season, vsurped the gouernment thereof. Howbeit the
+kings of the Tartarian race being worne out, and their stocke and family
+being vtterly abolished, the Chinians began to lift vp their heads, and to
+aduance themselues, inioying for these 200 yeeres last past exceeding peace
+and tranquility, and at this day the posterity of the same king that
+expelled the Tartars, with great dignity weareth the crowne, and wieldeth
+the royall scepter. Albeit therefore the people of China (especially they
+that inhabit Southerly from the prouince of Paquin) are, for the most part,
+by reason of continuall ease and quiet, growen effeminate, and their
+courage is abated, notwithstanding they would prooue notable and braue
+souldiers, if they ioyned vse and exercise vnto their naturall fortitude.
+As a man may easily obserue in them, that maintaine continuall warres
+against the most barbarous and cruell Tartars. Howbeit in this kingdome of
+China there is so great regard of military discipline, that no city nor
+towne there is destitute of a garison, the captaines and gouernours keeping
+ech man his order; which all of them, in euery prouince, are subiect vnto
+the kings lieutenant generall for the warres, whom they call Chumpin, and
+yet he himselfe is subiect vnto the Tutan or viceroy. Let vs now come vnto
+that arte, which the Chinians do most of all professe, and which we may,
+not vnfitly, call literature or learning. For although it be commonly
+reported, that many liberall sciences, and especially naturall and morall
+phylosophy are studied in China, and that they haue Vniuersities there,
+wherein such ingenuous artes are deliuered and taught, yet, for the most
+part this opinion is to be esteemed more popular then true; but I will
+declare, vpon what occasion this conceit first grew. The people of China
+doe, aboue all things, professe the arte of literature; and learning it
+most diligently, they imploy themselues a long time and the better part of
+their age therein. For this cause, in all cities and townes, yea, and in
+pety villages also, there are certaine schole-masters hired for stipends to
+instruct children: and their literature being (as ours in Iapon is also) in
+maner infinite, their children are put to schole euen from their infancy
+and tender yeeres, from whence notwithstanding such are taken away, as are
+iudged to be vnfit for the same purpose, and are trained vp to marchandize
+or to manuary sciences: but the residue do so dedicate themselues to the
+study of learning, that (a strange thing it is to consider) being
+conuersant in the principall books, they will easily tel you, if they be
+asked the question, how many letters be conteined in euery page, and where
+ech letter is placed. Now, for the greater progresse and increase of
+learning, they (as the maner is in Europe) do appoint three degrees to the
+attaining of noble sciences; that is to say, the lowest, the middle degree,
+and the highest. Graduates of the first degree are called Siusai, of the
+second Quiugin, and of the third Chinzu. And in each city or walled towne
+there is a publique house called the Schoole, and vnto that all they doe
+resort from all priuate and pety-schooles that are minded to obtaine the
+first degree; where they do amplifie a sentence or theame propounded vnto
+them by some magistrate: and they, whose stile is more elegant and refined,
+are, in ech city, graced with the first degree. Of such as aspire vnto the
+second degree triall is made onely in the metropolitan or principall city
+of the prouince, whereunto, they of the first degree, euery third yere,
+haue recourse, and, in one publike house or place of assembly, doe, the
+second time, make an oration of another sentence obscurer then the former,
+and doe vndergo a more seuere examination. Now, there is commonly such an
+huge multitude of people, that this last yere, in the foresayd famous city
+of Cantam, by reason of the incredible assembly of persons flocking to that
+publike act or commencement, at the first entrance of the doores, there
+were many troden vnder foot, and quelled to death, as we haue bene most
+certainly informed. Moreouer they that sue for the highest degree are
+subiect vnto a most seuere and exact censure, whereby they are to be
+examined at the Kings Court onely, and that also euery third yere next
+ensuing the sayd yere wherein graduates of the second degree are elected in
+ech prouince, and, a certaine number being prescribed vnto euery particular
+prouince, they do ascend vnto that highest pitch of dignity, which is in so
+great regard with the king himselfe, that the three principall graduates
+do, for honours sake, drinke off a cup filled euen with the Kings owne
+hand, and are graced with other solemnities. [Marginal note: Note the
+extraordinary honor vouchsafed by the great King of China vpon his learned
+graduates.] Out of this order the chiefe magistrates are chosen: for after
+that they haue attained vnto this third degree, being a while trained vp in
+the lawes of the realme, and in the precepts of vrbanity, they are admitted
+vnto diuers function. Neither are we to thinke that the Chinians be
+altogether destitute of other artes. For, as touching morall philosophy,
+all those books are fraught with the precepts thereof, which, for their
+instructions sake, are alwayes conuersant in the hands of the foresayd
+students, wherein such graue and pithy sentences are set downe, that, in
+men void of the light of the Gospell, more can not be desired. [Sidenote:
+Naturall philosophy.] They haue books also that intreat of things and
+causes naturall, but herein it is to be supposed, that aswell their books
+as ours do abound with errors. There be other books among them, that
+discourse of herbs and medicines, and others of chiualry and martiall
+affaires. Neither can I here omit, that certaine men of China (albeit they
+be but few, and rare to be found) are excellent in the knowledge of
+astronomy, by which knowledge of theirs the dayes of the new moone incident
+to euery moneth are truly disposed and digested, and are committed to
+writing and published: besides, they doe most infallibly foretell the
+eclipses of the Sun and Moone: and whatsoeuer knowledge in this arte we of
+Iapon haue, it is deriued from them. LEO. We doe freely confesse that
+(Michael) sithens our books intreating of the same arte are a great part of
+them, written in the characters or letters of China. [Sidenote: The
+politike gouernment of China.] But now, instruct you vs as touching their
+maner of gouernment, wherein the Chinians are sayd greatly to excell.
+MICHAEL. That, that, in very deed, is their chiefe arte, and vnto that all
+their learning and exercise of letters is directed. Whereas therefore, in
+the kingdome of China, one onely king beares rule ouer so many prouinces,
+it is strange what a number of Magistrates are by him created to admister
+publique afiaires. For (to omit them which in ech Towne and City haue
+iurisdiction ouer the townesmen and citizens) there are three principall
+Magistrates in euery prouince. The first is he that hath to deale in cases
+criminall, and is called Ganchasu: the second is the Kings Fosterer, and is
+called Puchinsu: the third is the Lieutenant-generall for the warres,
+named, as we sayd before, Chumpin. These three therefore haue their place
+of residence in the chiefe City of the prouince: and the two former haue
+certaine associates of their owne order, but of inferiour authority,
+appointed in diuers Cities and Townes, vnto whom, according to the variety
+of causes, the Gouernours of Townes and the Maiors of Cities doe appeale.
+Howbeit the three forenamed Magistrates are in subjection vnto the Tutan,
+that is, the Vice-roy, ordained in ech prouince. And all these Magistrates
+beare office for the space of three yeeres together: yet so, that for the
+gouerning of ech province, not any of the same prouince, but strangers,
+that is, men of another prouince, are selected: whereof it commeth to
+passe, that the Iudges may giue sentence with a farre more entire and
+incorrupt minde, then if they were among their owne kinesfolke and allies.
+Ouer and besides all these, there is an annuall or yeerely Magistrate,
+which is called Chaien, whose duety it is to make inquisition of all
+crimes, and especially the crimes of Magistrates, and also to punish common
+offences: but concerning the faults of the great magistrates to admonish
+the king himselfe. Of this order, euery yere, are sent out of the Kings
+Court, for ech prouince, one; and going ouer all the Cities and Townes
+thereof, they do most diligently ransacke and serch out all crimes, and
+vpon them which are imprisoned they inflict due punishment, or, being found
+not guilty, they dismisse them vnpunished. Hence it is, that all
+Magistrates greatly fearing to be called in question by the Chaien are well
+kept within the limits of their callings. [Sidenote: Two Senates or
+Counsels continually holden in China.] Besides all these Magistrates there
+is at either Court, namely in the North, and in the South, a Senate or
+honourable assembly of graue counsellors, vnto the which, out of all
+prouinces, according to the neerenesse and distance of the place, affaires
+of greater weight and moment are referred, and by their authority diuers
+Magistrates are created: howbeit the managing and expedition of principall
+affaires is committed vnto the Senate of Paquin. Moreouer there are euery
+yeere certaine Magistrates appointed in ech prouince, to goe vnto the king;
+and euery third yeere all the Gouernours of Cities and of Townes do visit
+him at once, what time triall is made of them that aspire vnto the third
+degree: vpon which occasion there is at the same time an incredible number
+of people at the Kings Court. [Sidenote: The causes of peace in China.] By
+reason of this excellent order and harmony of Magistrates placed one vnder
+another, it can scarse be imagined, what sweete peace and tranquility
+flourisheth thorowout the whole realme, especially sithens, after speedy
+inquisition, persons that are guilty be put (as the maner is there) to the
+punishment of the bastinado: neither yet are suits or actions any long time
+delayed. [Sidenote: Learning the only step to honour in China.] Also it is
+not to be omitted, that for the obtaining of any dignity or magistracy, the
+way is open, without all respect of gentry or blood, vnto all men, if they
+be learned, and especially if they haue attained vnto the third and highest
+degree aforesaid. [The stately and formidable procession of the Chinian
+magistrates.] Neither can it be expressed how obedient and duetifull the
+common sort are vnto their Magistrates, and with what magnificence and
+pompe the sayd Magistrates come abroad: for the most part of them haue
+fiftie or threescore Sergeants attending vpon them, and going before them,
+two and two in a ranke: some of them carrying Halberds, Maces and
+Battle-axes: some trailing yron chaines vpon the ground: others holding
+great roddes or staues of a certaine kinde of reede, wherewith malefactours
+are punished, in their hands: and two there are that carry, inclosed in a
+case, the Kings seale peculiar for ech office: and many others also, that
+shew sundry spectacles vnto the people: whereunto may be added the horrible
+out-cries and showtes, which betweene whiles they vtter, to strike a
+terrour into the hearts of all men: and at length come the Magistrates
+themselues, being carried in a throne vpon the backs of foure men, sixe
+men, or eight men, according to the dignity of their office. [Sidenote: The
+houses of the Chinian magistrates.] Now, as concerning their houses, they
+are very large and stately, being built and furnished with all necessary
+stuffe, at the Kings owne cost, in the which, so long as their magistracy
+lasteth, they leade a braue and an honourable life. The sayd houses are
+without variety of stories one aboue another, which in the kingdome of
+China and in our Iles of Iapon also are not ordinarily vsed for habitation,
+but either to keepe watch and ward, or els for solace and recreations sake
+(for the which purposes, eight most lofty turrets of nine stories high are
+built) or els for the defence of Cities. Howbeit in other regardes these
+buildings doe shew foorth no small magnificence: for they haue their
+cisternes for the receit of raine-water, which are adorned with beautifull
+trees, set in order, round about them: and they haue also their places
+designed for the administration of iustice, and diuers other conuenient
+roomes to bestow their wiues and families in. Within the doores of the
+foresayd habitations a certain number of Sergeants and officers, hauing
+cabbins or little houses allotted them on both sides, doe alwayes giue
+their attendance; and so long as matters of iudgement are in deciding, they
+be alwayes ready at hand, that, at the direction of the Magistrates they
+may either beat malefactours, or by torments constraine them to tell the
+trueth. [Sidenote: The magistrates barges.] The sayd Magistrates also haue
+their peculiar barges wherein to take the water; being in breadth and
+length not much vnlike to galleys of Europe, but for swiftnesse and
+multitude of orres, farre inferiour vnto them. The rowers, sitting vpon
+galleries without the hatches or compasse of the barge, doe mooue it on
+forward with their oares: whereupon it commeth to passe, that the middle
+part of the barge affordeth sufficient roome for the Magistrates themselues
+to abide in, containing chambers therein almost as conuenient and handsome,
+as in any of their foresayd publique houses, together with butteries and
+kitchins, and such other places necessary for the prouision and stowage of
+victuals. LEO. All these things agree right well with the reports, which we
+haue heard of the stately and renowmed kingdome of China: I would now right
+gladly know somewhat concerning the order which is obserued in the
+obtaining of magistracies.
+
+MICHAEL. You haue enquired of a matter most woorthy to be knowen, which I
+had almost omitted to entreat of. [Sidenote: The maner of electing
+magistrates in China.] The Chinians therefore doe vse a kinde of gradation
+in aduancing men vnto sundry places of authority, which for the most part
+is performed by the Senatours of Paquin. For first they are made iudges of
+townes: then of Cities: afterward they are elected to be of that order,
+which decreeth punishments in cases criminall without further appeale, or
+of their order, that are the kings fosterers. [Sidenote: Degrees vnto
+honour.] And in both of these Orders, which are very honourable, there are
+many places and degrees, so that from the inferiour place they must ascend
+vnto the superiour, vntill they haue attained vnto the highest dignity of
+all: and immediatly after that they come to be Vice-royes, howbeit this
+gradation is not alwayes accomplished in one and the same prouince, but in
+changing their offices they change places and prouinces also. Moreouer,
+next after the office of Vice-roy they are capable to be chosen Senatours
+of Nanquin, and last of all to be elected into the Senate of Paquin. Now,
+there is such an order and methode obserued in the ascending vnto these
+dignities, that all men may easily coniecture, what office any one is to
+vndertake. [Sidenote: Riding post.] And there is so great diligence and
+celerity vsed for the substitution of one into the roome of another, that
+for the same purpose, messengers are dispatched by land, vpon swift
+post-horses, vnto diuers prouinces, almost twenty dayes iourney from the
+Kings Court. And, to be short, there is such district seuerity in degrading
+those that vniustly or negligently demeane themselues, from an honourable
+vnto an inferiour and base office, or altogether in depriuing them of the
+kings authority: that all Magistrates doe stand in feare of nothing in the
+world more then of that. [Sidenote: Martiall dignities.] The same order,
+almost, is obserued among the Captaines and Lieu-tenants generall for the
+warres: except onely in them, that their birth and offspring is respected:
+for many there be, who descending by parentage from such men as haue in
+times past atchieued braue exploits in warfare, so soone as they come to
+sufficient yeeres, are created Centurions, Colonels, and Gouernours, vntill
+at last they attaine to be Lieu-tenants generall and Protectours of some
+whole prouince; who notwithstanding (as I haue sayd) are in all things
+subiect vnto the Vice-roy. All the foresayd Magistrates both of warre and
+of peace haue a set number of attendants allotted vnto them, enioying a
+stipend, and carying certaine ensignes and peculiar badges of their office:
+and (besides the ordinary watch, which souldiers appointed for the same
+purpose doe in the night season, after the City gates be shut, keepe in
+their forts) wheresoeuer any Magistrate is, either at his house or in his
+barge, the sayd attendants striking vpon a cymball of brasse, at certaine
+appointed times, do keepe most circumspect and continuall watch and ward
+about his person. LINUS. You haue (Michael) sufficiently discoursed of the
+Magistrates: informe vs now of the king himselfe, whose name is so renowmed
+and spread abroad. [Sidenote: The king of China.] MICHAEL. Concerning this
+matter I will say so much onely as by certaine rumours hath come to my
+knowledge; for of matters appertaining vnto the kings Court we haue no
+eye-witnesses, sithens the fathers of the society haue not as yet proceeded
+vnto Paquin, who so soone as (by Gods assistance) they shall there be
+arriued, will by their letters more fully aduertise vs. [Sidenote:
+Van-Sui.] The king of China therefore is honoured with woonderfull
+reuerence and submission thorowout his whole realme; and whensoeuer any of
+his chiefe Magistrates speaketh vnto him, he calleth him VAN-SVI,
+signifying thereby that be wisheth tenne thousands of yeeres vnto him.
+[Sidenote: The succession of the crowne.] The succession of the kingdome
+dependeth vpon the bloud royall: for the eldest sonne borne of the kings
+first and lawfull wife obtaineth the kingdome after his fathers decease:
+neither doe they depriue themselues of the kingly authority in their life
+time (as the maner is in our Ilands of Iapon) but the custome of Europe is
+there obserued. [Sidenote: The kings yonger brethren.] Now, that the safety
+and life of the king may stand in more security, his yoonger brethren, and
+the rest borne of concubines are not permitted to liue in the kings Court:
+but places of habitation are by the king himselfe assigned vnto them in
+diuers prouinces farre distant asunder, where they dwell most commodiously,
+being comparable vnto kings for their buildings and revenues: howbeit they
+exercise no authority ouer the people, but all the gouernment of those
+cities wherein they dwell concerneth the Magistrates, who notwithstanding
+haue the sayde Princes in high regard and honour, and doe visit them twise
+in a moneth, and salute them kneeling vpon their knees, and bowing their
+faces downe to the earth: and yet they communicate nothing vnto them as
+touching the administration of the Common-wealth. These are they which may
+properly be called the Peeres or Princes of the Realme of China: for they
+deriue their houses and reuenues vnto their posterity, and so are these
+royall families continually preserued. But to returne vnto the king
+himselfe, hee is most chary in obseruing the Chinian lawes and customes,
+and diligently exerciseth himselfe in learning so much as concernes his
+estate, sheweth himselfe dayly vnto his chiefe Magistrates, and communeth
+of matters appertaining to the publique commodity of the Realme. [Sidenote:
+Twelue chariots.] His palace is of woonderfull largenesse and capacity, out
+of the which he very seldome takes his progresse; and whensoeuer he doeth
+so, there are twelue chariots brought foorth, all of them most like one to
+another both in workemanship and in value, that no man may discerne in
+which the king himselfe is placed. [Sidenote: The idolatrous religion of
+the king.] He followeth in religion especially the opinions of the
+Magistrates, attributing diuine power vnto heauen and earth as vnto the
+parents of all, and with great solemnity sacrificing vnto them. He hath
+diuers most sumptuous Temples dedicated vnto his ancestours, whereunto
+likewise he ascribeth diuine honour, and yet ceaseth hee not to fauour
+Priests of other sects, yea, hee erecteth Temples vnto their Patrons,
+endowing them with most rich reuenues; and so often as any vrgent necessity
+requireth, he enioynes continuall fastings and prayers vnto them: and after
+this sort he doeth in a maner patronize all the idolatrous sects of his
+Realme, and shewing himselfe ready to embrace any false religion
+whatsoeuer, be liueth in sundry and manifolde kindes of superstition.
+[Sidenote: The ciuill gouernment of China most agreeable to the instinct of
+nature.] Out of all the former particulars by me alledged, you may easily
+coniecture that the administration of kingdome of China doeth, for the most
+parts agree with the instinct of nature, authority being committed, not
+vnto rude and vnskilfull persons, but vnto such as haue beene conuersant in
+the vse and exercise of learning, yea, and in promoting learned men vnto
+magistracies, great consideration is had of their wisedom, justice, and of
+other virtues esteemed by the Chinian: wherefore the way being open for all
+men, without any respect of degree or parentage, to obtaine any of the
+foresayd dignities, it can not be but that this most mighty and famous
+kingdome must needes enioy exceeding peace and tranquility. LEO. I would
+nowe (Michael) right gladly vnderstand, what kinde of vrbanity or ciuill
+demeanour both the common people and the Magistrates doe vse one towardes
+another: for it is not likely that where such due administration of iustice
+is, common ciuility, which so well beseemeth all men, should be wanting.
+[Sidenote: The fiue vertues principally esteemed among the Chinians.]
+MICHAEL. You haue hit euen the very naile on the head: for among the fiue
+vertues, which the Chinians principally regard, vrbanity or courtesy is
+one, the rest are piety, a thankefull remembrance of benefites, true
+dealing in contracts or bargaines, and wisedome in atchieuing of matters:
+with the praises and commendations of which vertues the Chinian bookes are
+full fraught. [Sidenote: Vrbanity.] Now as touching their vrbanity, it is
+much vnlike vnto ours in Iapan, and vnto that of Europe: howbeit vnder two
+principall kindes the rule of their vrbanity or courtesie may be
+comprehended: whereof one is obserued betweene equals, and the other
+betweene superiours and inferiours. For when men of equall dignity meet
+together, they stand bending their backes, and bowing their heads downe to
+the ground, and this they doe either once or twice, or sometimes thrise.
+Now when the inferiour meets with his superiour, the sayd inferiour, for
+the most part kneeling lowly on his knees, enclineth his countenance downe
+to the earth. But how often and when this obeizance is to be performed it
+is woonderfull what a number of rules and prescriptions are set downe,
+which to recount would require a long time. [Sidenote: The Chinians great
+piety towards their parents.] Somewhat also I wil say as touching their
+piety, and especially of the piety which they vse towards their parents,
+which verily is so exceeding great, that for the space of three whole yeres
+together, the sonnes being cladde in mourning vestures doe bewaile the
+death of their parents, which duety is performed not onely by the common
+sort, but euen by all the Magistrates themselues, and that most curiously
+and diligently. And that all men may wholly giue their attendance vnto this
+businesse, it is prouided by a most inuiolable law among the Chinians, that
+Magistrates, vpon the death of their parents, must foorthwith renounce
+their authority, and three whole yeeres, for the performance of their
+fathers exequies, must betake themselues vnto a priuate kinde of liuing:
+which also is most duely put in practise by the Senatours of the Kings owne
+Councell. For albeit a man be right gracious in the eyes of his Prince,
+yea, and such an one, as vpon whom the administration of the Realme doeth
+principally depend; yet hauing heard of the death of his parents, that is,
+of his father or his mother, he hies himselfe immediately home to
+solemnise their funerals: insomuch that if the king would retaine him still
+in his office, he should be esteemed by the people, as a transgressour of
+the lawes and customes of China: which accident (as it is recorded) in
+ancient times fel out euen so. [Sisdenote: A memorable story.] For whenas a
+certain king most familiarly vsed a certaine Senatour of his about the
+managing and expedition of publike affaires, and vnderstanding well how
+necessary the helpe of his foresayd Senatour was, would gladly, after the
+death of his father, haue retained him still in his office: yet a certaine
+other man, being a welwiller vnto the Chinian lawes, could in no case abide
+it, but checking his Prince with sharpe rebukes, obiected the transgression
+of the law against him. The king waxing wroth menaced present death vnto
+the man; but when the party being no wit danted with the terrour of death,
+persisted still in his sayings, the king changing his determination
+dismissed the Senatour to mourne for his father, but as for his reprehender
+be aduanced him vnto an higher dignity. LINUS. I perceiue (Michael) that
+drawing to an end of these dialogues, and being weary of your long race,
+you begin to affect breuity: yet let it not seeme troublesome vnto you to
+speake somewhat of the religion of China, which onely thing seemes to be
+wanting in this present dialogue. [Sidenote: The religion of China.]
+MICHAEL. I confesse indeed that I endeuour to be briefe, not so much in
+regard of wearisomnesse, as for feare least I haue bene ouer tedious vnto
+you: howbeit I will not faile but accomplish that which I haue vndertaken,
+and (according to your request) adde somewhat more concerning religion.
+Whereas therefore the kingdome of China hath hitherto bene destitute of
+true religion, and now the first beginnings thereof are included in most
+narrow bounds, that nation being otherwise a people most ingenious, and of
+an extraordinory and high capacity, hath alwayes liued in great errours and
+ignorance of the trueth, being distracted into sundry opinions, and
+following manifolde sects. [Sidenote: Three principall sectes among the
+Chinians.] And among these sects there are three more famous then the rest:
+[Sidenote: Confucius authour of the first sect.] the first is of them that
+professe the doctrine of one Confucius a notable philosopher. This man (as
+it is reported in the history of his life) was one of most vpright and
+incorrupt maners, whereof he wrote sundry treatises very pithily and
+largely, which aboue all other books, are seriously read and perused by the
+Chinians. The same doctrine do all Magistrates embrace, and others also
+that giue their mindes to the study of letters, a great part whereof
+Confucius is sayd to haue inuented: and he is had in so great honour, that
+all his followers and clients, vpon the dayes of the new and full Moone,
+doe assemble themselues at the common Schoole, which I haue aboue
+mentioned, and before his image, which is worshipped with burning of
+incense and with tapers, they doe thrise bend their knees, and bow their
+heads downe to the ground; which not onely the common scholars, but the
+chiefe Magistrates do performe. [The summe of Confucius his doctrine.] The
+summe of the foresayd doctrine is, that men should follow the light of
+nature as their guide, and that they should diligently endeuour to attaine
+vnto the vertues by me before mentioned: and lastly, that they should
+employ their labour about the orderly gouernment of their families and of
+the Common-wealth. All these things are in very deed praise-worthy, if
+Confucius had made any mention of almighty God and of the life to come, and
+had not ascribed so much vnto the heauens, and vnto fatall necessity, nor
+yet had so curiously intreated of worshipping the images of their
+forefathers. In which regard he can very hardly or not at all be excused
+from the crime of idolatry: notwithstanding it is to be granted, that none
+other doctrine among the Chinians approacheth so neere vnto the trueth as
+this doeth. [Sidenote: Xequiam author of the second sect, whose followers
+are called Cen or Bonzi.] The second sect is of them which followethe the
+instructions of Xaquam, or as the Chinians call him Xequiam, whose
+opinions, because they are well knowen amongst vs, it were bootlesse for me
+to repeat; especially sithens, in the Catechisme composed by our grave
+visitour, they are notably refuted. This doctrine doe all they embrace,
+which are in China called Cen, but with vs at Iapon are named Bonzi.
+[Sidenote: Note.] For this I doe briefly and by the way giue you to
+vnderstand, that all words of the Chinians language are of one sillable
+onely, so that if there be any word that consisteth of more sillables then
+one, it consisteth also of more wordes then one. These sectaries called Cen
+doe shaue their beards and their heads, and doe for the most part, together
+with diuers of their associates, inhabit the Temples of Xaquam, or of
+others which in regard of the same profession haue in their Kalenders beene
+canonized for Saints, and doe rehearse certaine prayers after their maner,
+either vpon books or beads, vsing other ceremonies after the maner of our
+Bonzi. These men haue some inckling of the life to come, and of the
+rewardes of good men, and the punishments of the wicked: howbeit all their
+assertions are fraught with errours. [Sidenote: The third sect.] The third
+sect is of them which are called Tauzu: and those doe imitate a certaine
+other man, to be adored, as they thinke, for his holinesse. These also are
+Priests after their kinde, howbeit they let their haire grow, and doe in
+other obseruations differ from the former. Now, because the sect of
+Confucius is the most famous of all the three, and the two other sects
+called Cen and Tauzu are not much adicted vnto learning, their religion
+preuailing onely among the common sort, the Priests of both the sayd sects
+doe leade a most base and seruile life amongst the Chinians, insomuch that
+they kneele downe before the Magistrates, and are not permitted to sit
+beside them, sometimes, if the Magistrate please, are abased vnto the
+punishment of the bastonado: whereas in our Iles of Iapon it is farre
+otherwise, Priests, euen of false religion, being had in so great honour
+among vs. [Sidenote: The superstition of the Saracens.] LEO. I heard also
+(Michael) that the Saracens superstition takes place in China: now, whether
+it doth or no, you can resolue vs. MICHAEL. That forren superstition was
+brought into China what time the Tartars inuaded the kingdome, and vsurped
+the gouernment thereof. All the Saracens therefore in China are originally
+descended of the Tartars, who, because they were an infinite number, could
+not vtterly be expelled and rooted out of the kingdome, but remaining
+still there, haue propagated their posterity, though not their religion.
+These therefore are souldiers for the greater part of them, and sometimes
+doe obtaine martiall dignities: and except a few ceremonies of their
+superstition which is nowe become stale and almost worne out, they doe
+liue, altogether after the Chinians fashion, their predecessours being
+brought into the same kingdome about foure hundred yeeres agoe. [Sidenote:
+Christian religion planted in China.] LINUS. Now (Michael) let vs heare you
+say somewhat of the Christian religion, which as we hope hath set most
+happy footing in that kingdome. MICHAEL. I could say much concerning those
+most wished and acceptable beginnings were they not already published in
+Iapon by the letters of the fathers: howbeit I will make a briefe
+rehearsall of all things, that I may not seem altogether to haue abandoned
+this labour. You know that from the time wherein the fathers of the society
+arriued in our Ilands, to the end they might augment Christian religion,
+they were in like sort most carefull how they might insinuate themselues
+into the innermost parts of the kingdome of China. In the middst of this
+endeauour and trauell Francis Xauier, a most deuout man of the foresayd
+society, departed out of this present life at the Ile of Sancian (which
+some call Sangiam) leauing an example vnto the rest of his associates, how
+they should likewise doe their best to plant the religion of Christ in that
+nation. [Sidenote: An ancient custome worthy the obseruation.] This man was
+seconded by others, who vsed all meanes, and left no practise vnattempted,
+that they might bring these good beginnings vnto a prosperours issue:
+howbeit they were greatly hindered by reason of an ancient custome in
+China, in regard whereof they doe not without great difficulty and
+circumspection admit any strangers into their dominions, except those which
+hauing a long time executed the office of ambassadours doe ordinarily euery
+third yeere present themselues before the king: in the admission of whom
+likewise there is maruellous care vsed, that they may not easily espie and
+become acquainted with the affaires of the Realme. [Sidenote: The Chinians
+contemne other nations.] Hereunto may be added, that the Chinians are great
+contemners of other nations, and most constant obseruers of their owne
+lawes and customes: in all which respects it came to passe that there was
+wonderfull labour and diligence employed aboue thirty yeeres together,
+onely to get an entrance, vntill in the yeere one thousand fiue hundred
+fourescore and three, two fathers of the foresayd society, that had pretty
+skill in the letters and language of China, vtterly despairing of mans
+helpe, and depending vpon the prouidence of almighty God, obtained licence
+of the Tutan or Vice-roy to build them an house and a Church in the City of
+Xauquin, which by reason of the commodiousnesse thereof is the seat of the
+Viceroy himselue. This worke being begunne, the sayd fathers of the
+society, for the nouelty therof, were a few yeeres right well entreated by
+the Magistrates: inasmuch that two others out of India had free and easie
+accesse vnto them, one couple remaining still in their foresayd house at
+Xauquin, and the other two taking their iourney for the inner prouinces, to
+conuert more people vnto the faith: who notwithstanding afterward, other
+Magistrates not approouing of their attempts, were constrained to retire.
+Nowe all the time wherein the foresayd fathers abode at Xauquin (being more
+then fiue yeeres) certaine of the common people were restrained from false
+superstition to Christian religion, and seuenty persons were baptised. But
+the enemy of mankinde, who omitteth none opportunity for the hinderance of
+Christian religion, suggested into the mindes of the Chinians (being, as I
+sayd, of their owne nature, a people estranged from the traffique and
+acquaintance of other nations, and alwayes being too suspicious of
+strangers) that they should exhibit letters of supplication vnto the Caien
+and the Tutan their principall Magistrates, to haue the fathers expelled
+out of Xauquin: which Magistrates repairing vnto their foresayed house and
+Church entered consultation how they might bannish them out of the sayd
+City of Xauquin: in which thing verily they vsed great moderation, not any
+way offending or exasperating the mindes of the fathers, but onely
+signifying that they had regard vnto the estate of their Common-wealth. For
+the Tutan or Vice-roy calling the fathers vnto him, and (to let passe other
+accidents) vsing courteous and familiar conference with them, declared by
+many arguments, that their habitation in the City of Xauquin was not
+conuenient, especially sithens so many Magistrates resorted vnto that City,
+who would take great offence at the presence of strangers. For the which
+cause he perswaded them to accept some part of the money which they had
+bestowed in the building of their house, and so to returne either home into
+their own countrey, or vnto the port of Macao. Howbeit, such was the
+instant supplication of the fathers, and so woorthy of compassion, that the
+Tutan or Vice-roy, in the extreame and mediterrane borders of the prouince
+of Coantum, assigned vnto them a new habitation at the city called Xaucheo,
+commending them also to a certaine Magistrate, who was come from the same
+place to salute him. Thither therefore the sayd others, not without great
+sorrow and griefe of the Christians, hied themselues, and as we are
+informed by their last letters, they haue euen now layed the foundation of
+their first building, and haue also written that they are like to liue much
+more peaceably and conueniently for the propagating of Christian religion.
+These be the first beginnings of Christianity in China, where, euen as in
+other places of the Christian Common-wealth, the seed is to be sowen with
+great labour and teares, that acceptable fruits may be reaped with
+gladnesse. LEO. It is euen as you haue sayd (Michael) and nowe for this
+your pleasant and eloquent discourse we do acknowledge our selues much
+bounden vnto you.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A Letter written from Goa, the principall City of all the East Indies, by
+  one Thomas Steuens an English man, and sent to his father, M. Thomas
+  Steuens: Anno 1579.
+
+After most humble commendations: These shall be to crave your dayly
+blessing, with like commendations vnto my mother; and withall, to certifie
+you of my being: according to your will and my duety. I wrote vnto you
+taking my iourney from Italy to Portugall, which letters I thinke are come
+to your hands, so that presuming therupon, I thinke I haue the lesse need
+at this time to tell you the cause of my departing, which nevertheless in
+one word I may conclude, if I do but name obedience. I came to Lisbon
+toward the end of March, eight dayes before the departure of the shippes,
+so late that if they had not bene stayed about some weighty matters, they
+had bene long gone before our comming: insomuch that there were others
+ordained to goe in our places, that the kings prouision and ours also might
+not be in vaine. Neuerthelesse our sudden comming tooke place, and the
+fourth of Aprill fiue ships departed for Goa, wherein besides shipmen and
+souldiers, there were a great number of children which in the seas beare
+out better than men, and no maruell, when that many women also passe very
+well. The setting foorth from the port I need not to tell how solemne it is
+with trumpets, and shooting of ordinance, you may easily imagine it,
+considering that they go in the maner of warre. The tenth of the foresayd
+moneth we came to the sight of Porto Santo neere vnto Madera, where an
+English shippe set vpon ours (which was then also alone) with a few shots,
+which did no harme, but after that our ship had layed out her greatest
+ordinance, they straight departed as they came. The English shippe was very
+faire and great, which I was sorry to see so ill occupied, for she went
+rouing about, so that we saw her againe at the Canarian Iles, vnto the
+which we came the thirteenth of the sayd moneth, and good leisure we had to
+woonder at the high mountaine of the Iland Tenerif, for we wandred betweene
+that and great Canaria foure dayes by reason of contrary windes: and
+briefly, such euill weather we had vntill the foureteenth of May, that they
+despaired, to compasse the Cape of Good hope that yeere. Neuertheless,
+taking our voyage betweene Guinea and the Ilands of Capo Verde, without
+seeing of any land at all, we arriued at length vnto the coast of Guinie,
+which the Portugals so call, chiefly that part of the burning Zone, which
+is from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, in which parts they suffered
+so many inconueniences of heats, and lacke of windes, that they thinke
+themselues happy when they haue passed it: for sometimes the ship standeth
+there almost by the space of many dayes, sometimes she goeth, but in such
+order that it were almost as good to stand still. And the greatest part of
+this coast not cleare, but thicke and cloudy, full of thunder and
+lightening, and raine so vnholesome, that if the water stand a little
+while, all is full of wormes, and falling on the meat which is hanged vp,
+it maketh it straight full of wormes. Along all that coast we often times
+saw a thing swimming vpon the water like a cocks combe (which they call a
+ship of Guinea) but the colour much fairer; which combe standeth vpon a
+thing almost like the swimmer of a fish in colour and bignesse, and beareth
+vnderneath in the water, strings which saue it from turning ouer. This
+thing is so poisonous, that a man cannot touch it without great perill. In
+this coast, that is to say, from the sixt degree vnto the Equinoctiall, we
+spent no lesse than thirty dayes, partly with contrary windes, partly with
+calme. The thirtieth of May we passed the Equinoctiall with contentation,
+directing our course as well as we could to passe the promontory, but in
+all that gulfe, and in all the way beside, we found so often calmes, that
+the expertest mariner wondred at it. And in places where there are alwayes
+woont to be most horrible tempests, we found most quiet calmes which was
+very troublesome to those ships which be the greatest of all other, and
+cannot go without good windes. Insomuch, that when it is tempest almost
+intollerable for other ships, and maketh them maine all their sailes, these
+hoise vp, and saile excellent well, vnlesse the waters be too furious,
+which seldome happened in our nauigation. You shall vnderstand, that being
+passed the line, they cannot straightway go the next way to the promontory:
+but according to the winde, they draw always as neere South as they can to
+put themselues in the latitude of the point, which is 35 degrees and an
+halfe, and then they take their course towards the East, and so compass the
+point. But the winde serued vs so, that at 33 degrees we did direct our
+course toward the point or promontory of Good hope.
+
+You know that it is hard to saile from East to West, or contrary, because
+there is no fixed point in all the skie, whereby they may direct their
+course, wherefore I shall tell you what helps God prouided for these men.
+There is not a fowle that appereth, or signe in the aire, or in the sea,
+which they haue not written, which haue made the voyages heretofore.
+[Sidenote: The variation of the compasse.] Wherfore, partly by their owne
+experience, and pondering withall what space the ship was able to make with
+such a winde, and such direction, and partly by the experience of others,
+whose books and nauigations they haue, they gesse whereabouts they be,
+touching degrees of longitude, for of latitude they be alwayes sure: but
+the greatest and best industry of all is to marke the variation of the
+needle or compasse, which in the Meridian of the Iland of S. Michael, which
+is one of the Azores in the latitude of Lisbon, is iust North, and thence
+swarueth towards the East so much, that betwixt the Meridian aforesayd, and
+the point of Africa it carrieth three or foure quarters of 32. And againe
+in the point of Afrike, a little beyond the point that is called Cape das
+Agulias (in English the needles) it returneth againe vnto the North, and
+that place passed, it swarueth againe toward the West, as it did before
+proportionally. [Sidenote: Signes about the Cape of Bona Speransa.] As
+touching our first signes, the neerer we came to the people of Afrike, the
+more strange kindes of fowles appeared, insomuch that when we came within
+no lesse then thirty leagues (almost an hundred miles) and sixe hundred
+miles as we thought from any Iland, as good as three thousand fowles of
+sundry kindes followed our ship: some of them so great that their wings
+being opened from one point to the other, contained seuen spannes, as the
+Mariners sayd. A maruellous thing to see how God prouided, so that in so
+wide a sea these fowles are all fat, and nothing wanteth them. The
+Portugals haue named them all according to some propriety which they haue:
+some they call Rushtailes, because their tailes be not proportionable to
+their bodies, but long and small like a rush, some forked tailes because
+they be very broad and forked, some Veluet sleeues, because they haue wings
+of the colour of veluet, and bowe them as a man boweth his elbow. This bird
+is alwayes welcome, for he appeareth neerest the Cape. I should neuer make
+an end if I should tell all particulars: but it shall suffice briefly to
+touch a few, which yet shall be sufficient, if you marke them, to giue
+occasion to glorifie almighty God in his wonderfull works, and such variety
+in his creatures. [Sidenote: Fishes on sea coast of Africa.] And to speake
+somewhat of fishes in all places of calme, especially in the burning Zone,
+neere the line (for without we neuer saw any) there waited on our ship
+fishes as long as a man, which they call Tuberones, they come to eat such
+things as from the shippe fall into the sea, not refusing men themselues if
+they light vpon them. And if they finde any meat tied in the sea, they take
+it for theirs. These haue waiting on them six or seuen small fishes (which
+neuer depart) with gardes blew and greene round about their bodies, like
+comely seruing men: and they go two or three before him, and some on euery
+side. Moreouer, they haue other fishes which cleaue alwayes vnto their
+body, and seeme to take such superfluities as grow about them, and they are
+sayd to enter into their bodies also to purge them if they need. The
+Mariners in time past haue eaten of them, but since they haue seene them
+eate men their stomacks abhorre them. Neuerthelesse, they draw them vp with
+great hooks, and kill of them as many as they can, thinking that they haue
+made a great reuenge. There is another kind of fish as bigge almost as a
+herring, which hath wings and flieth, and they are together in great
+number. These haue two enemies, the one in the sea, the other in the aire.
+In the sea the fish which is called Albocore, as big as a Salmon, followeth
+them with great swiftnesse to take them. This poore fish not being able to
+swim fast, for he hath no finnes, but swimmeth with moouing of his taile,
+shutting his wings, lifteth himselue aboue the water, and flieth not very
+hie: the Albocore seeing that, although he haue no wings, yet he giueth a
+great leape out of the water, and sometimes catcheth him, or els he keepeth
+himselfe vnder the water going that way on as fast as he flieth. And when
+the fish being weary of the aire, or thinking himselue out of danger,
+returneth into the water, the Albocore meeteth with him: but sometimes his
+other enemy the sea-crow, catcheth him before he falleth. [Sidenote: Note.]
+With these and like sights, but alwayes making our supplications to God for
+good weather and saluation of the ship, we came at length vnto the point,
+so famous and feared of all men: but we found there no tempest, only great
+waues, where our Pilot was a little ouerseene: for whereas commonly al
+other neuer come within sight of land, but seeing signes ordinary, and
+finding bottome, go their way sure and safe, he thinking himselfe to haue
+wind at will, shot so nigh the land that the winde turning into the South,
+and the waues being exceeding great, rolled vs so neere the land, that the
+ship stood in lesse then 14 fadoms of water, no more then sixe miles from
+the Cape, which is called Das Agulias, and there we stood as vtterly cast
+away: for vnder vs were rocks of maine stone so sharpe, and cutting, that
+no ancre could hold the ship, the shore so euill, that nothing could take
+land, and the land itselfe so full of Tigers, and people that are sauage,
+and killers of all strangers, that we had no hope of life nor comfort, but
+onely in God and a good conscience. Notwithstanding, after we had lost
+ancres, hoising vp the sailes for to get the ship a coast in some safer
+place, or when it should please God, it pleased his mercy suddenly, where
+no man looked for helpe, to fill our sailes with wind from the land, and so
+we escaped, thanks be to God. And the day following, being in the place
+where they are alwayes wont to catch fish, we also fell a fishing, and so
+many they tooke, that they serued all the ship for that day, and part of
+the next. [Sidenote: Corall.] And one of them pulled vp a corall of great
+bignesse and price. For there they say (as we saw by experience) that the
+corals doe grow in the maner of stalks vpon the rocks in the bottome, and
+waxe hard and red. The day of perill was the nine and twentieth of Iuly.
+[Sidenote: Two wayes beyond the cape of Good hope.] And you shall
+vnderstand that, the Cape passed, there be two wayes to India: one within
+the Ile of S. Lawrence, which they take willingly, because they refresh
+themselues at Mosambique a fortnight or a moneth, not without great need,
+and thence in a moneth more land in Goa. The other is without the Ile of S.
+Lawrence, which they take when they set foorth so late, and come so late to
+the point, that they have no time to take the foresayd Mosambique, and then
+they goe heauily, because in this way they take no port. And by reason of
+the long nauigation, and want of food and water, they fall into sundry
+diseases, their gummes waxe great, and swell, and they are faine to cut
+them away, their legges swell and all the body becommeth sore, and so
+benummed, that they cannot stirre hand nor foot, and so they die for
+weaknesse, others fall into fluxes and agues, and die thereby. And this way
+it was our chance to make: yet though we had more then one hundred and
+fifty sicke, there died not past seuen and twentie; which losse they
+esteemed not much in respect of other times. Though some of ours were
+diseased in this sort, yet, thanks be to God, I had my health, contrary to
+the expectation of many: God send me my health so well in the land, if it
+may be to his honour and seruice. This way is full of priuy rocks and
+quicke-sands, so that sometimes we durst not saile by night, but by the
+prouidence of God we saw nothing, nor neuer found bottom vntill we came to
+the coast of India. When we had passed againe the line, and were come to
+the third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming on the water that
+were red as though they had bene sodden: but this was no signe of land.
+After about the eleuenth degree, the space of many days, more than ten
+thousand fishes by estimation followed round about our ship, whereof we
+caught so many, that for fifteene days we did eate nothing els, and they
+serued our turne very well: for at this time we had neither meate nor
+almost any thing els to eate, our nauigation growing so long that it drew
+neere to seuen moneths, where as commonly they goe it in fiue, I mean when
+they saile the inner way. [Sidenote: They commonly sail from Lisbon to Goa
+in 5 moneths.] But these fishes were not signe of land, but rather of deepe
+sea. At length we tooke a couple of Birds which were a kinde of Hawks,
+whereof they ioyed much, thinking that they had bene of India, but indeed
+they were of Arabia, as we found afterward. And we that thought we had bene
+neere India, were in the same latitude neere Zocotoro, an Ile in the mouth
+of the Red sea. [Sidenote: Running seas very dangerous.] But there God sent
+vs great winds from the Northeast or Northnortheast, wherevpon vnwillingly
+they bare vp towards the East, and thus we went tenne dayes without seeing
+signe of land, whereby they perceived their errour: for they had directed
+their course before always Northeast, coueting to multiply degrees of
+latitude, but partly the difference of the Needle, and most of all the
+running seas, which at that time ran Northwest, had drawen vs to this other
+danger, had not God sent vs this winde, which at length waxed larger, and
+restored vs to our right course. These running seas be so perillous that
+they deceiue the most part of the gouernours, and some be so little
+curious, contenting themselues with ordinary experience, that they care not
+to seeke out any meanes to know when they swarue, neither by the compasse,
+nor by any other triall. [Sidenote: Certaine signs of land.] The first
+signe of land were certaine fowles which they knew to be of India: the
+second, boughes of palmes and sedges: the third, snakes swimming on the
+water, and a substance which they call by the name of a coine of money, as
+broad and as round as a groat, wonderfully printed and stamped of nature,
+like vnto some coine. And these two last signes be so certaine, that the
+next day after, if the winde serve, they see lande, which we did to our
+great joy, when all our water (for you know they make no beere in those
+parts) and victuals began to faile vs. [Sidenote: They arriued at Goa the
+24 of October.] And to Goa we came the foure and twentieth day of October,
+there being receiued with passing great charity. The people be tawny, but
+not disfigured in their lips and noses, as the Moores and Cafres of
+Ethiopia. They that be not of reputation, or at least the most part, goe
+naked, sauing an apron of a span long, and as much in breadth before them,
+and a lace two fingers broad before them, girded about with a string and no
+more: and thus they thinke them as well as we with all our trimming. Of the
+fruits and trees that be here I cannot now speake, for I should make
+another letter as long as this. For hitherto I haue not seene a tree here
+whose like I haue seene in Europe, the vine excepted, which neuerthelesse
+here is to no purpose, so that all the wines are brought out of Portugall.
+The drinke of this countrey is good water, or wine of the Palme tree, or of
+a fruit called Cocos. And this shall suffice for this time. If God send me
+my health, I shall haue opportunity to write to you once againe. Now the
+length of my letter compelleth me to take my leaue, and thus I wish your
+most prosperous health. From Goa the tenth of Nouember, 1579.
+
+Your louing sonne Thomas
+
+Steuens.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe relation of the great magnificence and rich traffike of the
+  kingdome of Pegu beyond the East India, written by Frey Peter of Lisbon,
+  to his cousin Frey Diego of Lisbon, from Cochin.
+
+[Sidenote: The coast of India greatly troubled with Moores.] I receiued
+your letters in the harbour of Damaon by a carauell of aduise that came
+from Malacca, which brought shot, powder, and other prouision for the
+furnishing of foure gallies and a great Gallion, which are now in building,
+to keepe our coast for feare of great store of men of warre, being Moores,
+which trouble vs very sore. At that instant when I receiued your letters I
+was newly come from the kingdome of Pegu, where I had remained one yeere
+and an halfe, and from thence I departed to the city of Cochin in October
+1587. The newes which I can certifie you of concerning these countreys are:
+that this king of Pegu is the mightiest king of men, and the richest that
+is in these parts of the world: for he bringeth into the field at any time,
+when he hath warres with other princes, aboue a million of fightingmen:
+howbeit they be very leane and small people, and are brought vnto the field
+without good order. [Sidenote: Abundance of golde, siluer, pearles, and
+precious stones in Pegu.] He is lord of the Elephants, and of all the golde
+and siluer mines, and of all the pearles and precious stones: so that he
+hath the greatest store of treasure that euer was heard of in these parts.
+The countrey people call him the God of trueth and of iustice. I had great
+conference with this king, and with the head captaine of the Portugals,
+which is one of the countrey. They demanded of me many questions as
+touching the law and faith of Iesus Christ, and as touching the Ten
+Commandements. And the king gaue his consent that our Order should build a
+Church in his countrey, which was halfe builded; but our peruerse and
+malicious Portugals plucked it downe againe: [Sidenote: The great gaine of
+the Portugals in Pegu.] for whereas it is a countrey wherein our nation
+gaine very much by their commodities, they fearing that by the building of
+this Church there would be greater resort thither, and so their trade
+should be impaired if their great gaines should be knowen vnto others then
+those which found this countrey out first, therefore they were so vnwilling
+that the building of this church should goe forward. Our Portugals which
+are here in this realme are woorse people then the Gentiles. I preached
+diuers times among those heathen people; but being obstinate they say, that
+as their father beleeued so they will beleeue: for if their forefathers
+went to the diuell so they will. Whereupon I returned backe againe to our
+monastery to certifie our Father prouinciall of the estate of this new
+found countrey. It is the best and richest countrey in all this East India:
+and it is thought to be richer then China.
+
+[Sidenote: Pegu the best and richest countrey in all the East Indies.] I am
+afrayd that the warres which his Maiestie hath with England will be the
+vtter vndoing and spoile of Spaine: for these countreys likewise are almost
+spoiled with ciull warres, which the Moores haue against the Gentiles: for
+the kings here are vp in armes all the countrey ouer. Here is an Indian
+which is counted a prophet, which hath prophesied that there will a Dragon
+arise in a strange countrey, which will do great hurt to Spaine. How it
+will fall out onely God doth know. And thus I rest: from this monastery of
+Cochin the 28 of December, 1589. [Sidenote: A prophesie of an Indian
+against Spaine.]
+
+Your good cousin and assured friend
+
+frier Peter of Lisbon.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voyage with three tall ships, the Penelope Admirall, the Marchant royall
+  Viceadmirall, and the Edward Bonaduenture Rereadmirall, to the East
+  Indies, by the Cape of Buona Speransa, to Quitangone neere Mosambique, to
+  the Iles of Comoro and Zanzibar on the backeside of Africa, and beyond
+  Cape Comori in India, to the Iles of Nicubar and of Gomes Polo, within
+  two leagues of Sumatra, to the Ilands of Pulo Pinaom, and thence to the
+  maine land of Malacca, begunne by M. George Raymond, in the yeere 1591,
+  and performed by M. Iames Lancaster, and written from the mouth of Edmund
+  Barker of Ipswich, his lieutenant in the sayd voyage, by M. Richard
+  Hakluyt.
+
+Our fleet of the three tall ships abouenamed departed from Plimmouth the 10
+of April 1591, and arrived at the Canarie-ilands the 25 of the same, from
+whence we departed the 29 of April. The second of May we were in the height
+of Cape Blanco. The fift we passed the tropique of Cancer. The eight we
+were in the height of Cape Verde. All this time we went with a faire winde
+at Northeast, alwayes before the winde vntil the 13 of the same moneth,
+when we came within 8 degrees of the Equinoctiall line, where we met with a
+contrary winde. Here we lay off and on in the sea vntil the 6 of Iune, on
+which day we passed the sayd line. While we lay thus off and on, we tooke a
+Portugal Carauel laden by merchants of Lisbon for Brasile, in which Carauel
+we had some 60 tunnes of wine, 1200 iarres of oyle, about 100 iarres of
+oliues, certaine barrels of capers, three fats of peason, with diuers other
+necessaries fit for our voyage; which wine, oyle, oliues and capers were
+better to vs then gold. [Sidenote: Three occasions of sicknes neere the
+line.] We had two men died before wee passed the line, and diuers sicke,
+which took their sicknesse in those hote climates: for they be wonderfull
+vnwholesome from 8 degrees of Northerly latitude vnto the line, at that
+time of the yeere: for we had nothing but Ternados, with such thunder,
+lightning, and raine, that we could not keep our men drie 3 houres
+together, which was an occasion of the infection among them, and their
+eating of salt victuals, with lacke of clothes to shift them. After we
+passed the line, we had the wind still at Eastsoutheast, which carried vs
+along the coast of Brasil 100 leagues from the maine, til we came in 26
+degrees to the Southward of the line, where the wind came vp to the North,
+at which time we did account, that the Cape of Buona esperansa did beare
+off vs East and by South, betwixt 900 and 1000 leagues. Passing this gulfe
+from the coast of Brasil vnto the Cape we had the wind often variable as it
+is vpon our coast, but for the most part so, that we might lie our course.
+The 28 of Iuly we had sight of the foresayd Cape of Buona esperansa: vntill
+the 31 we lay off and on with the wind contrary to double the Cape, hoping
+to double it, and so to haue gone seuentie leagues further to a place
+called Agoada de S. Bras, before we would haue sought to haue put into any
+harbour. But our men being weake and sicke in all our shippes, we thought
+good to seeke some place to refresh them. With which consent we bare vp
+with the land to the Northward of the Cape, and going along the shoare, we
+espied a goodly Baie with an Iland lying to Seawards of it into which we
+did beare, and found it very commodious for our ships to ride in.
+[Sidenote: Agoada de Saldanha.] This Baie is called Agoada de Saldanha,
+lying 15 leagues Northward on the hither side of the Cape. The first of
+August being Sunday we came to an anker in the Baie, sending our men on
+land, and there came vnto them certaine blacke Saluages very brutish which
+would not stay, but retired from them. For the space of 15 or 20 dayes we
+could finde no reliefe but onely foules which wee killed with our pieces,
+which were cranes and geese: there was no fish but muskles and other
+shel-fish, which we gathered on the rockes. [Sidenote: Great store of
+Penguins and Seales.] After 15 or 20 dayes being here, our Admirall went
+with his pinnasse vnto the Iland which lieth off this Baie, where hee found
+great store of Penguines and Seales, whereof he brought good plenty with
+him. And twise after that we sent certain of our men, which at both times
+brought their bots lading vnto our ships. After we had bene here some time,
+we got here a Negro, whom we compelled to march into the countrey with vs,
+making signs to bring vs some cattel; but at this time we could come to the
+sight of none, so we let the Negro goe with some trifles. [Sidenote:
+Bullocks, oxen, and sheepe, dog-cheape.] Within 8 dayes after, he with 30
+or 40 other Negroes, bought vs downe some 40 bullocks and oxen, with as
+many sheepe: at which time we brought but few of them. But within 8 dayes
+after they came downe with as many more, and then we bought some 24 oxen
+with as many sheepe. We bought an oxe for two kniues, a stirke for a knife,
+and a sheepe for a knife, and some we bought for lesse value then a knife.
+The oxen be very large and well fleshed, but not fat. The sheepe are very
+big and very good meat, they haue no woll on their backs but haire, and
+haue great tailes like the sheepe in Syria. There be diuers sorts of wild
+beests, as the Antilope, (whereof M. Lancaster killed one of the bignes of
+a yong colt) the red and fallow Deere, with other great beasts vnknowen
+vnto vs. Here are also great store of ouer-growen monkies. As touching our
+proceeding vpon our voyage, it was thought good rather to proceed with two
+ships wel manned, then with three euill manned: for here wee had of sound
+and whole men but 198, of which there went in the Penelope with the Admiral
+101, and in the Edward with the worshipfull M. captaine Lancaster 97. We
+left behind 50 men with the Roiall marchant, whereof there were many
+pretily well recouered, of which ship was master and gouernour Abraham
+Kendal, which for many reasons we thought good to send home. The disease
+that hath consumed our men hath bene the skuruie. Our souldiers which haue
+not bene vsed to the Sea, haue best held out, but our mariners dropt away,
+which (in my iudgement) proceedeth of their euill diet at home.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape de Buona Speransa doubled. Cape dos Corrientes.] Sixe dayes
+after our sending backe for England of the Marchant Roiall from Agoada de
+Saldanha, our Admirall M. captaine Raimond in the Penelope, and M. Iames
+Lancaster in the Edward Bonaduenture, set forward to double the Cape of
+Buona esperansa, which they did very speedily. [Sidenote: Here they are
+seuered from the Penelope.] But being passed as far as Cape dos Corrientes
+the 14 of September we were encountred with a mighty storme and extreme
+gusts of wind, wherein we lost our Generals companie, and could neuer heare
+of him nor his ship any more, though we did our best endeuour to seeke him
+vp and downe a long while, and staied for him certaine dayes at the Iland
+of Comoro, where we appointed to stay one for another. [Sidenote: Foure men
+slaine with a clap of thunder.] Foure days after this uncomfortable
+seperation in the morning toward ten of the clocke we had a terrible clap
+of thunder, which slew foure of our men ovtright, the necks being wrung in
+sonder without speaking any word, and of 94 men there was not one
+vntouched, whereof some were striken blind, others were bruised in their
+legs and armes, and others in their brests, so that they voided blood two
+days after, others were drawen out at length as though they had been
+racked. But (God be thanked) they all recouered sauing onely the foure
+which were slain out right. Also with the same thunder our maine maste was
+torn very grieuously from the head to the decke, and some of the spikes
+that were ten inches into the timber, were melted with the extreme heate
+thereof. [Sidenote: The Shoulds of S. Laurence.] From thence we shaped our
+course to the Northeast, and not long after we fell vpon the Northwest end
+of the mighty Iland of S. Laurence: which one of our men espied by Gods
+good blessing late in the euening by Moone light, who seeing afarre off the
+breaking of the Sea, and calling to certaine of his fellowes, asked them
+what it was: which eft soones told him that it was the breaking of the Sea
+vpon the Shoulds. Whereupon in very good time we cast about to auoyd the
+danger which we were like to haue incurred. [Sidenote: Quitangone neere
+Mozambique.] Thus passing on forward, it was our lucke to ouer-shoote
+Mozambique, and to fall with a place called Quitangone two leagues to the
+Northward of it, and we tooke three or foure Barkes of Moores, which Barkes
+in their language they call Pangaias, laden with Millio, hennes and ducks,
+with one Portugall boy, going for the prouision of Mozambique. [Sidenote:
+The Ile of Comoro.] Within few dayes following we came to an Iland an
+hundred leagues to, the Northeast of Mozambique called Comoro, which we
+found exceedingly full of people, which are Moores of tawnie colour and
+good stature, but they be very trecherous and diligently to be taken heed
+of. Here wee desired to store our selues with water, whereof we stood in
+great need, and sent sixteene of our men well armed on in our boate: whom
+the people suffred quietly to land and water, and diuers of them with their
+king came aboord our ship in a gowne of crimosine Sattin pinked after the
+Moorish fashion downe to the knee, whom we entertained in the best maner,
+and had some conference with him of the state of the place and
+marchandises, vsing our Portugall boy which we had taken before for our
+interpreter, and in the end licensed the king and his company to depart,
+and sent our men againe for more water, who then also dispatched their
+businesse and returned quietly: the third time likewise we sent them for
+more, which also returned without any harme. [Sidenote: 32 of our men
+betraid at the Ile of Comoro.] And though we thought our selues furnished,
+yet our master William Mace of Radcliffe pretending that it might be long
+before we might finde any good watering place, would needes goe himselfe on
+shore with thirtie men, much against the will of our captaine, and hee and
+16 of his company, together with one boat which was all that we had, and 16
+others that were a washing ouer against our ship, were betrayed of the
+perfidious Moores, and in our sight for the most part slaine, we being not
+able for want of a boat to yeeld them any succour. [Sidenote: Zanzibar
+Iland.] From thence with heauie hearts we shaped our course for Zanzibar
+the 7 of Nouember, where shortly after we arriued and made vs a new boat of
+such boards as we had within boord, and rid in the road vntill the 15 of
+February, where, during our aboad, we sawe diuers Pangaias or boates, which
+are pinned with wooden pinnes, and sowed together with Palmito cordes, and
+calked with the husks of Cocos shels beaten, whereof they made Occam.
+[Sidenote: A Portugall Factorie in Zanzibar.] At length a Portugal Pangaia
+comming out of the harborow of Zanzibar, where they haue a small Factorie,
+sent a Canoa with a Moore which had bene christened, who brought vs a
+letter wherein they desired to know what wee were, and what we sought. We
+sent them word we were Englishmen come from Don Antonio vpon businesse to
+his friends in the Indies: with which answere they returned, and would not
+any more come at vs. Whereupon not long after wee manned out our boat and
+tooke a Pangaia of the Moores, which had a priest of theirs in it, which in
+their language they call a Sherife: whom we vsed very courteously: which
+the king tooke in very good part, hauing his priests in great estimation,
+and for his deliuerance furnished vs with two moneths victuals, during all
+which time we detained him with vs. These Moores informed vs of the false
+and spitefull dealing of the Portugals towards vs, [Marginal note: The
+treason of the Portugals towards the English.] which made them beleeue that
+we were cruell people and men-eaters, and willed them if they loued their
+safetie in no case to come neere vs. Which they did onely to cut us off
+from all knowledge of the state and traffique of the countrey. While we
+road from the end of Nouember vntil the middle of February in this
+harborough, which is sufficient for a ship of 500 tuns to ride in, we set
+vpon a Portugall Pangaia with our boat, but because it was very litle, and
+our men not able to stirre in it, we were not able to take the sayd Pangaia
+which was armed with 10 good shot like our long fouling pieces. [Sidenote:
+An excellent place for refreshing.] This place for the goodnesse of the
+harborough and watering, and plentifull refreshing with fish, whereof we
+tooke great store with our nets, and for sundry sorts of fruits of the
+countrey, as Cocos and others, which were brought vs by the Moores as also
+for oxen and hennes, is carefully to be sought for by such of our ships, as
+shall hereafter passe that way. [Sidenote: A gallie Frigate.] But our men
+had need to take good heed of the Portugals: for while we lay here the
+Portugall Admiral of the coast from Melinde to Mozambique, came to view and
+betray our boat if he could haue taken at any time aduantage, in a gallie
+Frigate of ten tunnes with 8 or 9 oares on a side. Of the strength of which
+Frigate and their trecherous meaning we were aduertised by an Arabian Moore
+which came from the king of Zanzibar diuers times vnto vs about the
+deliuerie of the priest aforesayd, and afterward by another which we caried
+thence along with vs: for whersoeuer we came, our care was to get into our
+hands some one or two of the countreys to learne the languages and states
+of those partes where we touched. [Sidenote: Another thunder-clap.]
+Moreouer, here againe we had another clap of thunder which did shake our
+foremast very much, which wee fisht and repaired with timber from the
+shore, whereof there is good store thereabout of a kind of tree some fortie
+foot high, which is a red and tough wood, and as I suppose, a kind of
+Cedar. [Sidenote: Heat in the head deadly. Letting of blood very
+necessary.] Here our Surgeon Arnold negligently catching a great heate in
+his head being on land with the master to seeke oxen, fell sicke and
+shortly died, which might haue bene cured by letting of blood before it had
+bin settled. Before our departure we had in this place some thousand weight
+of pitch, or rather a kind of gray and white gumme like vnto frankincense,
+as clammie as turpentine, which in melting groweth as blacke as pitch, and
+is very brittle of it selfe, but we mingled it with oile, whereof wee had
+300 iarres in the prize which we tooke to the Northward of the
+Equinoctiall, not farre from Guinie, bound for Brasil. Sixe days before wee
+departed hence, the Cape marchant of the Factorie wrote a letter vnto our
+capitaine in the way of friendship, as he pretended, requesting a iarre of
+wine and a iarre of oyle, and two or three pounds of gunpowder, which
+letter hee sent by a Negro his man, and Moore in a Canoa: we sent him his
+demaunds by the Moore, but tooke the Negro along with vs because we
+vnderstood he had bene in the East Indies and knew somewhat of the
+Countrey. [Sidenote: A Iunco laden with pepper and drugs.] By this Negro we
+were aduertised of a small Barke of some thirtie tunnes (which the Moores
+call a Iunco) which was come from Goa thither laden with Pepper for the
+Factorie and seruice of that kingdome. Thus hauing trimmed our shippe as we
+lay in this road, in the end we set forward for the coast of the East
+Indie, the 15 of February aforesayd, intending if we could to haue reached
+to Cape Comori, which is the headland or Promontorie of the maine of
+Malauar, and there to haue lien off and on for such ships as should haue
+passed from Zeilan, Sant Tome, Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, the Moluccos, the
+coast of China, and the Ile of Japan, which ships are of exceeding wealth
+and riches. [Sidenote: The currents set to the North-west.] But in our
+course we were very much deceiued by the currents that set into the gulfe
+of the Red sea along the coast of Melinde. [Sidenote: Zocotora.] And the
+windes shortening vpon vs to the Northeast and Easterly, kept vs that we
+could not get off, and so with the putting in of the currents from the
+Westward, set vs in further vnto the Northward within fourscore leagues of
+the Ile of Zocotora, farre from our determined course and expectation. But
+here we neuer wanted abundance of Dolphins, Bonitos, and flying fishes. Now
+while we found our selues thus farre to the Northward, and the time being
+so farre spent, we determined to goe for the Red sea, or for the Iland of
+Zocotora, both to refresh our selues, and also for some purchase. But while
+we were in this consultation, the winde very luckily came about to the
+Northwest and caried vs directly toward Cape Comori. [Sidenote: The Isles
+of Mamale.] Before we should haue doubled this Cape, we were determined to
+touch at the Ilands of Mamale, of which we had aduertisement, that one had
+victuals, standing in the Northerly latitude of twelue degrees. Howbeit it
+was not our good lucke to finde it, which fell out partly by the obstinacie
+of our master: for the day before we fell with part of the Ilands the wind
+came about to the Southwest, and then shifting our course we missed it. So
+the wind increasing Southerly, we feared we should not haue bene able to
+haue doubled the Cape, which would haue greatly hazarded our casting away
+vpon the coast of India, the Winter season and Westerne Monsons already
+being come in, which Monsons continue on that coast vntil August.
+[Sidenote: Cape Comori doubled 1592.] Neuertheless it pleased God to bring
+the wind more Westerly, and so in the moneth of May 1592, we happily
+doubled Cape Comori without sight of the coast of India. From hence thus
+hauing doubled this Cape, we directed our course for the Ilands of Nicubar,
+which lie North and South with the Westerne part of Sumatra, and in the
+latitude of 7 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall. From which Cape
+of Comori vnto the aforesayd Ilands we ranne in sixe days with a very large
+wind though the weather were foule with extreme raine and gustes of winde.
+These Ilands were missed through our masters default for want of due
+obseruation of the South starre. [Sidenote: The Iles of Gomes Polo.] And we
+fell to the Southward of them within the sight of the Ilands of Gomes Polo,
+[Sidenote: Sumatra.] which lie hard vpon the great Iland of Sumatra the
+first of Iune, and at the Northeast side of them we lay two or three dayes
+becalmed, hoping to haue had a Pilote from Sumatra, within two leagues
+whereof we lay off and on. [Sidenote: The Iles of Pulo Pinauo.] Now the
+Winter coming vpon vs with much contagious weather, we directed our course
+from hence with the Ilands of Pulo Pinaou, (where by the way it is to be
+noted that Pulo in the Malaian tongue signifieth an Iland) at which Ilands
+wee arriued about the beginning of Iune, where we came to an anker in a
+very good harborough betweene three Ilands: at which time our men were very
+sicke and many fallen. Here we determined to stay vntil the Winter were
+ouerpast. This place is in 6 degrees and a halfe to the Northward, and some
+fiue leagues from the maine betweene Malacca and Pegu. Here we continued
+vntil the end of August. Our refreshing in this place was very smal, onely
+of oysters growing on rocks, great wilks, and some few fish which we tooke
+with our hookes. Here we landed our sicke men on these vninhabited Ilands
+for their health, neuertheless 26 of them died in this place, whereof John
+Hall our master was one, and M. Rainold Golding another, a marchant of
+great honestie and much discretion. [Sidenote: Trees fit for mastes.] In
+these Ilands are abundance of trees of white wood, so right and tall, that
+a man may make mastes of them being an hundred foote long. The winter
+passed and hauing watered our ship and fitted her to goe to Sea, wee had
+left vs but 33 men and one boy, of which not past 22 were sound for labour
+and helpe, and of them not past a third part sailers: [Sidenote: Malacca.]
+thence we made saile to seeke some place of refreshing, and went ouer to
+the maine of Malacca. The next day we came to an anker in a Baie in six
+fadomes water some two leagues from the shore. Then master Iames Lancaster
+our captaine, and M. Edmund Barker his lieutenant, and other of the
+companie manning the boat, went on shoare to see what inhabitants might be
+found. And comming on land we found the tracking of some barefooted people
+which were departed thence not long before: for we sawe their fire still
+burning, but people we sawe none, nor any other living creature, saue a
+certaine kind of foule called oxe birds, which are a gray kind of
+Sea-foule, like a Snite in colour, but not in beake. Of these we killed
+some eight dozen with haile-shot being very tame, and spending the day in
+search, returned toward night aboord. The next day about two of the clocke
+in the afternoone we espied a Canoa which came neere vnto vs, but would not
+come aboord vs, hauing in it some sixteen naked Indians, with whom
+neuertheles going afterward on land, we had friendly conference and promise
+of victuals. [Sidenote: Three ships of Pegu laden with pepper.] The next
+day in the morning we espied three ships, being all of burthen 60 or 70
+tunnes, one of which wee made to strike with our very boate: and
+vnderstanding that they were of the towne of Martabam, [Sidenote:
+Martabam.] which is the chiefe hauen towne for the great citie of Pegu, and
+the goods belonging to certaine Portugal Iesuites and a Biscuit baker a
+Portugall we tooke that ship and did not force the other two, because they
+were laden for marchants of Pegu, but hauing this one at our command, we
+came together to an anker. The night folowing all the men except twelue,
+which we tooke into our ship, being most of them borne in Pegu, fled away
+in their boate, leauing their ship and goods with vs. [Sidenote: Pera.] The
+next day we weighed our anker and went to the Leeward of an Iland hard by,
+and tooke in her lading being pepper, which shee and the other two had
+laden at Pera, which is a place on the maine 30 leagues to the South.
+Besides the aforesaid three ships we tooke another ship of Pegu laden with
+pepper, and perceiuing her to bee laden with marchants goods of Pegu onely,
+wee dismissed her without touching any thing.
+
+[Sidenote: Pulo Sambilam.] Thus hauing staied here 10 daies and discharged
+her goods into the Edward, which was about the beginning of September, our
+sicke men being somewhat refreshed and lustie, with such reliefe as we had
+found in this ship, we weighed anker, determining to runne into the
+streights of Malacca to the Ilands called Pulo Sambilam, which are some
+fiue and fortie leagues Northward of the citie of Malacca, to which Ilands
+the Portugals must needs come from Goa or S. Thome, for the Malucos, China,
+and Iapan. And when wee were there arriued, we lay too and agayne for such
+shipping as should come that way. [Sidenote: A ship of Negapatan taken.]
+Thus hauing spent some fiue dayes, vpon a Sunday we espied a saile which
+was a Portugall ship that came from Negapatan a towne on the maine of India
+ouer-against the Northeast part of the Ile of Zeilan; and that night we
+tooke her being of 250 tunnes: she was laden with Rice for Malacca.
+Captaine Lancaster commanded their captaine and master aboord our shippe,
+and sent Edmund Barker his lieutenant and seuen more to keepe this prize,
+who being aboord the same, came to an anker in thirtie fadomes water: for
+in that chanell, three or foure leagues from the shore you shall finde good
+ankorage. [Sidenote: A ship of S. Thome.] Being thus at an anker and
+keeping out a light for the Edward, another Portugall ship of Sant Thome of
+foure hundred tunnes, came and ankered hard by vs. The Edward being put to
+Leeward for lacke of helpe of men to handle her sailes, was not able the
+next morning to fetch her vp, vntil we which were in the prize with our
+boate, went to helpe to man our shippe. Then comming aboord we went toward
+the shippe of Sant Thome, but our ship was so foule that shee escaped vs.
+After we had taken out of our Portugall prize what we thought good, we
+turned her and all her men away except a Pilot and foure Moores. [Sidenote:
+The galeon of Malacca of 700 taken.] We continued here vntill the sixt of
+October, at which time we met with the ship of the captaine of Malacca of
+seuen hundred tunnes which came from Goa: we shot at her many shot, and at
+last shooting her maine-yard through, she came to an anker and yeelded. We
+commaunded her Captaine, Master, Pilot, and Purser to come aboord vs. But
+the Captaine accompanied by one souldier onely came, and after certaine
+conference with him, he made excuse to fetch the Master, and Purser, which
+he sayd would not come vnless he went for them: but being gotten from vs in
+the edge of the euening, he with all the people which were to the number of
+about three hundred men, women and children gote a shore with two great
+boates and quite abandoned the ship. [Sidenote: Wares fit to carry into the
+East India.] At our comming aboord we found in her sixteene pieces of
+brasse, and three hundred but of Canarie wine, and Nipar wine, which is
+made of the palme trees, and raisin wine which is also very strong: as also
+all kinds of Haberdasher wares, as hats, red caps knit of Spanish wooll,
+worsted stockings knit, shooes, veluets, taffataes, chamlets, and silkes,
+abundance of suckets, rice, Venice glasses, certaine paper full of false
+and counterfeit stones which an Italian brought from Venice to deceiue the
+rude Indians withall, abundance of playing cardes, two or three packs of
+French paper. Whatsoeuer became of the treasure which vsually is brought in
+roials of plate in this gallion, we could not find it. After that the
+mariners had disordredly pilled this rich shippe, the Captaine because they
+would not follow his commandement to vnlade those excellent wines into the
+Edward, abandoned her and let her driue at Sea, taking out of her the
+choisest things that she had. [Sidenote: The kingdom of Iunsaloam.] And
+doubting the forces of Malaca, we departed thence to a Baie in the kingdom
+of Iunsalaom, which is betweene Malacca and Pegu eight degrees to the
+Northward, to seeke for pitch to trimme our ship. Here we sent our
+souldier, which the captaine of the aforesaid galion had left behind him
+with vs, because he had the Malaian language, to deale with the people for
+pitch, which hee did faithfully, and procured vs some two or three quintals
+with promise of more, and certaine of the people came vnto vs. [Sidenote:
+Amber-greese. The hornes of Abath.] We sent commodities to their king to
+barter for Amber-griese, and for the hornes of Abath, whereof the king
+onely hath the traffique in his hands. [Sidenote: The female Vnicorne.] Now
+this Abath is a beast which hath one horne onely in her forehead, and is
+thought to be the female Vnicorne, and is highly esteemed of all the Moores
+in those parts as a most soueraigne remedie against poyson. We had only two
+or three of these hornes which are of the colour of a browne gray, and some
+reasonable quantitie of Amber-griese. At last the king went about to betray
+our Portugall with our marchandise: but he to get aboord vs, told him that
+we had gilt armour, shirtes of maile and halberds, which things they
+greatly desire: for hope whereof he let him returne aboord, and so he
+escaped the danger. [Marginal note: Some small quantitie hereof may be
+caried to pleasure those kings.] Thus we left this coast and went backe
+againe in sight of Sumatra, and thence to the Ilands of Nicubar, where we
+arriued and found them inhabited with Moores, [Sidenote: They arriue at the
+Iles of Nicubar, which are inhabited by Moores.] and after wee came to an
+anker, the people daily came aboord vs in their Canoas, with hennes, Cocos,
+plantans, and other fruits: and within two dayes they brought vnto vs
+roials of plate, giuing vs them for Calicut cloth: which roials they nude
+by diuing for them in the Sea, which were lost not long before in two
+Portugall ships which were bound for China and were cast away there. They
+call in their language the Coco Calambe, the Plantane Pison, a Hen Iam, a
+Fish Iccan, a Hog Babee. From thence we returned the 21 of Nouember to goe
+for the Iland of Zeilan, and arriued there about the third of December
+1592, and ankered vpon the Southside in sixe fadomes water, where we lost
+our anker, the place being rockie and foule ground. Then we ranne along the
+Southwest part of the sayd Iland, to a place called Punta del Galle, where
+we ankered, determining there to haue remained vntill the comming of the
+Bengala Fleet of seuen or eight ships, and the Fleete of Pegu of two or
+three sailes, and the Portugall shippes of Tanaseri being a great Baie to
+the Southward of Martabam in the kingdome of Siam: which ships, by diuers
+intelligences which we had, were to come that way within foureteene daye to
+bring commodities to serue the Caraks, which commonly depart from Cochin
+for Portugall by the middest of Ianuarie. The commodities of the shippes
+which come from Bengala bee fine pauillions for beds, wrought quilts, fine
+Calicut cloth, Pintados and other fine workes, and Rice, and they make this
+voiage twise in the yeere. Those of Pegu bring the chiefest stones, as
+Rubies and Diamants, but their chiefe fraight is Rice and certaine cloth.
+Those of Tanaseri are chiefly freighted with Rice and Nipar wine, which is
+very strong, and in colour like vnto rocke water, somewhat whitish, and
+very hote in taste like vnto Aqua vitae. Being shot vp to the place
+aforesayd, called Punta del Galle, wee came to an anker in foule ground and
+lost the same, and lay all that night a drift, because we had nowe but two
+ankers left vs, which were vnstocked and in hold. Whereupon our men tooke
+occasion to come home, our Captaine at that time lying very sicke more like
+to die then to liue. In the morning wee set our foresaile determining to
+lie vp to the Northward and there to keepe our selues to and againe out of
+the current, which otherwise would haue set vs off to the Southward from
+all knowen land. Thus hauing set our foresayle, and in hand to set all our
+other sayles to accomplish our aforesayd determination, our men made
+answere that they would take their direct course for England and would stay
+there no longer. Nowe seeing that they could not bee perswaded by any
+meanes possible, the captaine was constrained to giue his consent to
+returne, leauing all hope of so great possibilities. Thus the eight of
+December 1592, wee set sayle for the Cape of Buona Speransa, passing by the
+Ilands of Maldiua, and leauing the mightie Iland of S. Laurence on the
+starreboord or Northward in the latitude of 26 degrees to the South. In our
+passage ouer from S. Laurence to the maine we had exceeding great store of
+Bonitos and Albocores, which are a greater kind of fish; of which our
+captain, being now recouered of his sicknesse, tooke with a hooke as many
+in two or three howers as would serue fortie persons a whole day. And this
+skole of fish continued with our ship for the space of fiue or sixe weekes,
+all which while we tooke to the quantitie aforesayd, which was no small
+refreshing to vs. In February 1593 we fell with the Eastermost land of
+Africa at a place called Baia de Agoa some 100 leagues to the Northeast of
+the Cape of Good Hope: and finding the winds contrary, we spent a moneth or
+fiue weekes before we could double the Cape. After wee had doubled it in
+March following wee directed our course for the Iland of Santa Helena, and
+arriued there the third day of Aprill, where we staied to our great comfort
+nineteene dayes: in which meane space some one man of vs tooke thirtie
+goodly Congers in one day, and other rockie fishe and some Bonitos. After
+our arriual at Santa Helena, I Edmund Barker went on shore with foure or
+fiue Peguins or men of Pegu which we had taken, and our Surgion, where in
+an house by the Chappell I found an Englishman one Iohn Segar of Burie in
+Suffock, [Marginal note: Iohn Segar an Englishman left 18 moneths alone in
+the Ile of santa Helena.] who was left there eighteene moneths before by
+Abraham Kendall, who put in there with the Roiall marchant and left him
+there to refresh him on the Iland, being otherwise like to haue perished on
+shipboord: and at our comming wee found him as fresh in colour and in as
+good plight of body to our seeming as might be, but crazed in minde and
+halfe out of his wits, as afterwards wee perceiued: for whether he was put
+in fright of vs, not knowing at first what we were, whether friends or
+foes, or of sudden ioy when he vnderstand we were his olde consorts and
+countreymen, hee became idle-headed, and for eight dayes space neither
+night nor day tooke any naturall rest, and so at length died for lacke of
+sleepe. [Marginal note: A miraculous effect of extreme feare or extreme
+ioy.] Here two of our men, whereof the one was diseased with the skuruie,
+and the other had bene nine moneths sicke of the fluxe, in short time while
+they were on the Iland, recouered their perfect health. We found in this
+place great store of very holesome and excellent good greene figs, orenges,
+and lemons very faire, abundance of goates and hogs, and great plentie of
+partriges, Guiniecocks, and other wilde foules. [Marginal note: The
+description of the commodities of the ile of santa Helena.] Our mariners
+somewhat discontented being now watered and hauing some prouision of fish,
+contrary to the will of the capitaine, would straight home. The capitaine
+because he was desirous to goe for Phernambuc in Brasil, granted their
+request. And about the 12 of Aprill 1593. we departed from S. Helena, and
+directed our course for the place aforesayd. The next day our capitaine
+calling vpon the sailers to finish a foresaile which they had in hand, some
+of them answered that vnlesse they might goe directly home, they would lay
+their hands to nothing; whereupon he was constrained to folow their humour.
+And from thence-foorth we directed our course for our countrey, which we
+kept vntill we came 8 degrees to the Northward of the Equinoctiall,
+betweene which 8 degrees and the line, we spent some sixe weekes, with many
+calme and contrary winds at North, and sometimes to the Eastward, and
+sometimes to the Westward: which losse of time and expense of our victuals,
+whereof we had very smal store, made vs doubt to keepe our course and some
+of our men growing into a mutinie threatned to breake vp other mens chests,
+to the ouerthrow of our victuals and all our selues, for euery man had his
+share of his victuals before in his owne custody, that they might be sure
+what to trust to, and husband it more thriftily. [Sidenote: The gulfe of
+Paria, or Bocca del Dragone passed.] Our captaine seeking to preuent this
+mischiefe, being aduertised by one of our companie which had bene at the
+Ile of Trinidada in M. Chidleis voyage, that there we should be sure to
+haue refreshing, hereupon directed his course to that Iland, and not
+knowing the currents, we were put past it in the night into the gulfe of
+Paria in the beginning of Iune, wherein we were 8 dayes, finding the
+current continually setting in, [Sidenote: A good note.] and oftentimes we
+were in 3 fadomes water, and could find no going out vntil the current had
+put vs ouer to the Westernside vnder the maine land, where we found no
+current at all, and more deep water; and so keeping by the shore, the wind
+off the shore euery night did helpe vs out to the Northward. [Sidenote: The
+Ile of Mona.] Being cleare, within foure or fiue days after we fell with
+the Ile of Mona where we ankered and rode some eighteene dayes. In which
+time the Indians of Mona gaue vs some refreshing. And in the meane space
+there arriued a French ship of Cane in which was capitaine one Monsieur de
+Barbaterre, of whom wee bought some two buts of wine and bread, and other
+victuals. Then wee watered and fitted our shippe, and stopped a great leake
+which broke on vs as we were beating out of the gulfe of Paria. And hauing
+thus made ready our ship to goe to Sea, we determined to goe directly for
+Newfound-land. But before we departed, there arose a storme the winde being
+Northerly, which put vs from an anker and forced vs the Southward of Santo
+Domingo. [Sidenote: The Ile of Sauona enuironed with flats.] This night we
+were in danger of shipwracke vpon an Iland called Sauona, which is
+enuironed with flats lying 4 or 5 miles off; yet it pleased God to cleare
+vs of them, [Sidenote: Cape de Tiberon.] and so we directed our course
+Westward along the Iland of Santo Domingo, and doubled Cape Tiberon, and
+passed through the old channell betweene S. Domingo and Cuba for the cape
+of Florida: And here we met againe with the French ship of Caen, whose
+Captaine could spare vs no more victuals, as he said, but only hides which
+he had taken by traffike vpon those Ilands, wherewith we were content and
+gaue him for them to his good satisfaction. After this, passing the Cape of
+Florida, and cleere of the channell of Bahama, we directed our course for
+the banke of Newfound-land. Thus running to the height of 36 degrees, and
+as farre to the East as the Ile of Bermuda the 17 of September finding the
+winds there very variable, contrarie to our expectation and all mens
+writings, we lay there a day or two the winde being northerly, and
+increasing continually more and more, it grewe to be a storme and a great
+frete of wind: which continued with vs some 24 houres, with such
+extremetie, as it caried not onely our sayles away being furled, but also
+made much water in our shipppe, so that wee had six foote water in hold,
+and hauing freed our ship thereof with baling, the winde shifted to the
+Northwest and became dullerd: but presently vpon it the extremetie of the
+storme was such that with the labouring of our ship we lost our foremaste,
+and our ship grewe as full of water as before. The storme once ceased, and
+the winde contrary to goe our course, we fell to consultation which might
+be our best way to saue our liues. Our victuals now being vtterly spent,
+and hauing eaten hides 6 or 7 daies, we thought it best to beare back
+againe for Dominica, and the Islands adioyning, knowing that there we might
+haue some reliefe, whereupon we turned backe for the said Islands. But
+before we could get thither the winde scanted vpon vs, which did greatly
+endanger vs for lacke of fresh water and victuals; so that we were
+constrained to beare vp to the Westward to certaine other Ilandes called
+the Neublas or cloudie Ilands, towards the Ile of S. Iuan de porto Rico,
+where at our arriuall we found land-crabs and fresh water, and tortoyses,
+which come most on lande about the full of the moone. Here hauing refreshed
+our selues some 17 or 18 dayes, and hauing gotten some small store of
+victuals into our ship, we resolued to returne againe for Mona: vpon which
+our determination fiue of our men left vs, remaining still on the Iles of
+Neublas for all perswasions that we could vse to the contrary, which
+afterward came home in an English shippe. From these Iles we departed and
+arriued at Mona about the twentieth of Nouember 1593, and there comming to
+an anker toward two or three of the clocke in the morning, the Captaine,
+and Edmund Barker his Lieutenant with some few others went on land to the
+houses of the olde Indian and his three sonnes, thinking to haue gotten
+some foode, our victuals being all spent, and we not able to proceede any
+further vntill we had obteyned some new supply. We spent two or three daies
+in seeking prouision to cary aboord to relieue the whole companie. And
+comming downe to go aboord, the winde then being northerly and the sea
+somewhat growne, they could not come on shore with the boate, which was a
+thing of small succour and not able to rowe in any rough sea, whereupon we
+stayed vntill the next morning, thinking to haue had lesse winde and safer
+passage. But in the night about twelue of the clocke our ship did driue
+away with fiue men and a boy onely in it, our carpenter secretly cut their
+owne cable, leauing nineteene of vs on land without boate or any thing, to
+our great discomfort. In the middest of these miseries reposing our trust
+in the goodnesse of God, which many times before had succoured vs in our
+greatest extremities, we contented our selues with our poore estate, and
+sought meanes to preserue our liues. And because one place was not able to
+sustaine vs, we tooke our leaues one of another, diuiding our selues into
+seuerall companies. The greatest reliefe that we sixe which were with the
+Captaine could finde for the space of nine and twentie dayes was the
+stalkes of purselaine boyled in water, and now and then a pompion, which we
+found in the garden of the olde Indian, who vpon this our second arriual
+with his three sonnes stole from vs, and kept himselfe continually aloft in
+the mountaines. After the ende of nine and twentie dayes we espied a French
+shippe, which afterwards we vnderstood to be of Diepe, called the Luisa,
+whose Captaine was one Monsieur Felix, vnto whom wee made a fire, at sight
+whereof he tooke in his topsayles, bare in with the land, and shewed vs his
+flagge, whereby we iudged him French: so comming along to the Westerne ende
+of the Island there he ankered, we making downe with all speede vnto him.
+At this time the Indian and his three sonnes came downe to our Captaine
+Master Iames Lancaster and went along with him to the shippe. This night he
+went aboord the French man who gaue him good entertainement, and the next
+day fetched eleuen more of vs aboord entreating vs all very courteously.
+This day came another French shippe of the same towne of Diepe which
+remayned there vntil night expecting our other seuen mens comming downe:
+who, albeit we caused certaine pieces of ordinance to be shot off to call
+them, yet came not downe. Whereupon we departed thence being deuided sixe
+into one ship, and sixe into another, and leauing this Iland departed for
+the Northside of Saint Domingo, where we remained vntill April following
+1594, and spent some two moneths in traffike with the inhabitants by
+permission for hides and other marchandises of the Countrey. In this meane
+while there came a shippe of New-hauen to the place where we were, whereby
+we had intelligence of our seuen men which wee left behinde vs at the Isle
+of Mona: which was, that two of them brake their neckes with ventring to
+take foules vpon the cliffes, other three were slaine by the Spaniards,
+which came from Saint Domingo, vpon knowledge giuen by our men which went
+away in the Edward, the other two this man of New-hauen had with him in his
+shippe, which escaped the Spaniards bloodie hands. From this place Captaine
+Lancaster and his Lieutenant Master Edmund Barker, shipped themselues in
+another shippe of Diepe, the Captaine whereof was one Iohn La Noe, which
+was readie first to come away, and leauing the rest of their companie in
+other ships, where they were well intreated, to come after him, on Sunday
+the seuenth of Aprill 1594 they set homewarde, and disbocking through the
+Caijcos from thence arriued safely in Diepe within two and fortie dayes
+after, on the 19 of May, where after two dayes we had stayed to refresh our
+selues, and giuen humble thankes vnto God, and vnto our friendly
+neighbours, we tooke passage for Rie and landed there on Friday the 24 of
+May 1594, hauing spent in this voyage three yeeres, sixe weekes and two
+dayes, which the Portugales performe in halfe the time, chiefely because
+wee lost our fit time and season to set foorth in the beginning of our
+voyage.
+
+We vnderstood in the East Indies by certaine Portugeles which we tooke,
+that they haue lately discouered the coast of China, to the latitude of
+nine and fiftie degrees, finding the sea still open to the Northward:
+giuing great hope of the Northeast or Northwest passage. Witnesse Master
+Iames Lancaster.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Certaine remembrances of an intended voyage to Brasill, and the Riuer of
+  Plate, by the Edward Cotton, a ship of 260 Tunnes of Master Edward Cotton
+  of Southampton, which perished through extreme negligence neare Rio
+  Grande in Guinie, the 17 of July 1583.
+
+Articles of Couenants agreed vpon betweene Edward Cotton Esquier, owner of
+the good ship called the Edward Cotton of Southampton, and of all the
+marchandizes in her laden, of the one part, and William Huddie gentleman,
+Captaine of the said ship, Iohn Hooper his Lieutenant, Iohn Foster Master,
+Hugh Smith Pilot for the whole voyage, and William Cheesman marchant, on
+the other part.
+
+1 To obserue and keepe the dayly order of Common prayer aboord the ships,
+and the companie to be called thereunto, at the least once in the day, to
+be pronounced openly.
+
+2 Item, that they be ready with the first faire winde, to set saile and
+sailes in the voyage, and not to put into any port or harbour, but being
+forcibly constrained by weather, or other apparent and vrgent cause.
+
+3 Item, that they take in, at or about the Isles of Cape Verde, to the
+quantitie of 25 or 30 tuns of salt, to be imployed among other the owners
+marchandize, at Santos, and S. Vincent, to his onely behoofe, and the rest
+of the salt, so much as shall be needed for victuall, and for sauing of the
+hides to be kept aboord, and the same salt to be prouided either at the
+fishermens hands neere the said Isles for trucke of commodities, or els to
+be taken in at the aforesayd Isles, at discretion of the aboue-named.
+
+4 Item, vpon the due performance of this voiage, the owner bindeth himselfe
+by this deede, to yeeld vnto any such of the companie, as shall refuse
+their shares before they depart from the coast of England, 20 markes a
+single share, for the dutie of the whole voiage, making not aboue 75.
+shares single in the whole.
+
+5 Item, the company according as they be appointed by the officers of the
+said ship aboue named, shall at all times be most ready to doe their
+painfull indeuor, not onely aboord, but in all labours at the land,
+according to the direction giuen by the aboue named officers, vpon paine of
+forfeiture of their shares and wages, the same to be diuided amongst the
+company.
+
+6 Item, that the shares be taken at their returne out of al the traine
+oile, and hides of the seales, and of all other commodities gotten by their
+handie labour, and of the salt that shall be vended and other commodities,
+at, or neere the coast of Brasil, to allow after 9 li. the tunne freight,
+whereof one third to goe to the company.
+
+7 Item, that if any man shall practise by any deuise or deuises whatsoeuer,
+to alter the voiage from the true purpose and intent of the owner, viz. to
+make their first port at Santos, and Saint Vincent, and there to revictuall
+and traffike, and from thence to the riuer of Plate to make their voyage by
+the traine, and hide of the seales, with such other commodities as are
+there to be had, according as the owner, with diuers that haue gouernment
+in the said ship, are bound to her highnesse by their deedes obligatorie in
+great summes, that all such practisers, vpon due proofe made, shall lose
+their whole intertainement due by shares or otherwise for this sayde voyage
+to be adiuged by the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, Pilot, and
+marchant, or three of them at least, whereof the Captaine to be one.
+
+8 Item, that the pinnesse be ready at al times to serue the marchants turne
+vpon his demand, to take in wares and commodities, and to cary and recary
+to and from the shore, when, and as oft as neede shall be, and to giue due
+attendance at the marchant and marchants direction during the whole voyage.
+
+9 Item, that no head or chiefe officer being set downe for such an officer
+vnder the hand of the owner, at the going to sea of the said shippe, shall
+or may be displaced from his said place or office, without great cause, and
+his misdemeanor to be adiudged by the Captaine, and his Lieutenant, the
+Master, the Pilot, and the marchant, or by the consent of three of them at
+least.
+
+10 Item, that vpon the returne of the shippe to the coast of England, the
+Maister and Pilot put not into any port or harbour, to the Westward of
+Southampton, but forced by weather, or such like vrgent cause.
+
+William Huddie.
+Iohn Hooper.
+Hugh Smith.
+John Foster.
+William Cheesman.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A direction as well for the Captaine, and other my friends of the shippe,
+  as especially for William Cheesman Marchant, for the voyage to the riuer
+  of Plate.
+
+[Sidenote: The Ile of S. Sebastian.] At your comming to the Isle of Saint
+Sebastian, vpon the coast of Brasill, you shall according to your
+discretions, make sale of such commodities, as you may thinke will be
+thereabout well vented, and likewise to buy commodities without making
+longer stay there then your victuals be prouiding, but rather to bespeake
+commodities against your returne from the riuer of Plate, especially of
+Amber, Sugar, Greene ginger, Cotton wooll, and some quantitie of the
+peppers of the countrey there. Also for Parats and Munkies, and the beast
+called Serrabosa. Also you shall barrell vp of the beefe called Petune, two
+or three barrels, and to lose no good opportunitie, to gather of the Indian
+figges, and the graines of them to preserue drie, in such quantitie as
+conueniently may be done: and touching the making of the traine, and
+preseruing of the hides, I leaue it wholly to the order and the discretion
+of the chiefe of the companie. Also that in any road where the ship shall
+ride vpon the coast of America, triall be made with the dragges, for the
+pearle Oisters, and the same being taken, to be opened and searched for
+pearle in the presence of the Captaine, his Lieutenant, the Master, the
+Pilot, and marchant, or three of them, whereof the Captaine or his
+Lieutenant to be one, and to remaine in the custodie of the Captaine and
+marchant, vnder two lockes, either of them to haue a key to his owne locke,
+and that a true inuentorie be deliuered also to the Master and Pilot of the
+said pearle or other iewels of price gotten in the said voiage, to the
+intent that no partie be defrauded of his due, and that no concealment be
+made of any such thing vpon forfeiture, the partie to lose his share and
+dutie for the voyage that shall so conceale and not reueale it vnto the
+officers aboue named. Also to doe your best indeuour to try for the best
+Ore of golde, siluer, or other rich mettals whatsoeuer. Forget not also to
+bring the kernels and seeds of strange plants with you, the Palmito with
+his fruit inclosed in him. Serue God, keepe good watch, and stand alwayes
+vpon your garde.
+
+Edward Cotton.
+
+
+These things being thus ordered, and the ship of the burden of 260 tunnes,
+with 83 men of all sortes furnished, and fully appointed for the voyage,
+began to set saile from Hurst Castle vpon Friday the 20 of May, Anno 1583,
+and the 17 day of Iuly ensuing fell with the coast of Guinie, to take in
+fresh water, where, through meere dissolute negligence, she perished vpon a
+sand, with the most part of the men in her, as appeareth by the confession
+of one that escaped, the substance and tenor whereof is this.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The confession of William Bends Masters Mate in the Edward Cotton, the 21
+  of October, Ann. 1584.
+
+He sayth, that the 17 day of Iuly, Anno 1583. hauing some lacke of fresh
+water, they put roome vpon the coast of Guinie, where they were set vpon a
+sand about 8 leagues from the shore, and this Examinate, with 29 more, got
+into the pinnesse, who arriued in an Island, being desolate of people, and
+fiue miles in compasse, where they rested 18 dayes through force of
+weather, hauing nought to eate but grasse. [Sidenote: Rio Grande.] The rest
+of the company the ship being splitted in two and in quarters, got them
+into one of the after quarters, and by the helpe of raftes came also a
+shore into another Island neere to Rio Grande, where they all died as he
+supposeth.
+
+The other 30 in the pinnesse, at the end of 18 dayes, departed that Island,
+and came to Saint Domingo, where comming on shore, they were taken of the
+Moores, and stripped naked. And they buried one Coxe [Marginal note: One
+Coxe an old English man buried aliue by the Moores of Rio Grande in
+Guinea.] an olde man aliue, notwithstanding his pitifull lamentation and
+skrikings: the rest hauing Rice and water allowed them, liued there a
+certaine time. This Examinate was at last sold to a Portugall, with whom he
+dwelt the space of a quarter of a yere, and in the end, a Portugall Carauel
+comming, thither, his master laded the same with Negroes, and he obtained
+leaue of his master to goe in the same Carauell, and by that meanes arriued
+at Lisbone, and from thence came into England the 17 of October, 1584,
+leauing behinde him of his companie aliue, Richard Hacker, Iohn Baker, Iohn
+Mathew, and a boy, with two others which were gone beyond Saint Domingo:
+all which, as he saith, were so sicke and diseased, that he iudged them to
+be long before this time dead.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Letters patents or priuiledges granted by her Maiestie to certaine
+  Noble men and Marchants of London, for a trade to Barbarie, in the yeere
+  1585.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France, and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. to the Treasurer & Barons of our Eschequer, and
+to al Maiors, shirifs, constables, customers, collectors of our customes
+and subsidies, controllers, searchers, and keepers of our hauens and
+creekes, ports and passages, within this our realme of England and the
+dominions of the same and to al our officers, ministers and subiects, and
+to all other whosoeuer to whom it shall or may appertaine, and to euery of
+them greeting. Whereas it is made euidently and apparently knowen vnto vs,
+that of late yeeres our right trustie and right welbeloued councellors,
+Ambrose Erle of Warwike, and Robert Erle of Leicester, and also our louing
+and naturall subiects, Thomas Starkie of our citie of London Alderman,
+Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes, Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur
+Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur
+Dawbeney, William Sherington, Thomas Bramlie, Anthony Garrard, Robert How,
+Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon
+Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henrie Farrington,
+Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton,
+Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert Washborne, Reinold Guy, Thomas
+Hitchcocke, George Lydiat, Iohn Cartwright, Henry Paiton, Iohn Boldroe,
+Robert Bowyer, Anthonie Dassell, Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas
+Dod, all of London, Marchants now trading into the Countrey of Barbary, in
+the parts of Africa, vnder the gouernement of Muly Hammet Sheriffe, Emperor
+of Morocco, and king of Fesse and Sus, haue sustained great and grieuous
+losses, and are like to sustaine greater if it should not be preuented: In
+tender consideration whereof, and for that diuers Marchandize of the same
+Countries are very necessary and conuenient for the vse and defence of this
+our Realme of England, and for diuers other causes vs specially mouing,
+minding the reliefe and benefit of our said subiects, and the quiet
+trafique and good gouernment to be had, and vsed among them in their said
+trade, of our speciall grace, certaine knowledge, and meere motion haue
+giuen and granted, and by those presents for vs, our heires and successors,
+doe giue and grant vnto the saide Earles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas
+Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, Arthur Atie gentleman, Alexander Auenon,
+Richard Staper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbenie, William Sherrington,
+Thomas Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward
+Holmden, Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile,
+Oliuer Stile, William Bond, Henry Farrington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter
+Williams, William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afild,
+Robert Washborne, Rainold Guie, Thomas Hitchcocke, George Lidiate, Iohn
+Cartwright, Henry Payton, Iohn Baldroe, Robert Bowyer, Anthony Dassell,
+Augustine Lane, Robert Lion, and Thomas Dod, that they and euery of them by
+themselues or by their factors or seruants, and none others, shall and may,
+for, and during the space of 12. yeeres, haue and enioy the whole freedome
+and libertie in the saide trafique or trade, vnto or from the said countrey
+of Barbary, or to or from any part thereof, for the buying and selling of
+all maner of wares and marchandizes whatsoeuer, that now or accustomably
+heretofore haue bene brought or transported, from, or to the said country
+of Barbary, or from or to any of the cities, townes, places, ports, roades,
+hauens, harbors, or creeks of the said country of Barbary, any law,
+statute, graunt, matter, customes or priuileges, to the contrary in any
+wise notwithstanding.
+
+And for the better establishing, ordering and gouerning of the said Erles
+of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, &c. abouesaid, their factors,
+seruants and assignes in the trade aforesaid, we for vs, our heires and
+successors, doe by these presents giue and graunt full licence to the saide
+Thomas Starke, Ierard Gore the elder, and the rest aforesaide, and euery of
+them from time to time, during the said terme of twelue yeeres, at their
+pleasures to assemble and meete together in any place or places conuenient
+within our citie of London, or elsewhere, to consult of, and for the said
+trade, and with the consent of the said Erie of Leicester, to make and
+establish good and necessary orders and ordinances for and touching the
+same, and al such orders and ordinances so made, to put in vse and execute,
+and them or any of them with the consent of the said Erle of Leicester, to
+alter, change and make voyde, and if need be, to make new, at any time
+during the saide terme, they or the most part of them then liuing and
+trading, shall finde conuenient.
+
+Prouided alwayes, that the ordinances or any of them bee not contrary or
+repugnant to the lawes, statutes or customes of this our Realme of England.
+And to the intent that they onely to whom the said libertie of trafique is
+graunted by these our Letters patents, and none other our Subiects
+whatsoeuer, without their special consent and licence before had, should
+during the said terme haue trade or trafique for any maner of Marchandizes,
+to, or from the said countrey of Barbary, or to, or from any Citie, town,
+place, port, harbor or creeke within the said countrey of Barbary, to, or
+out of our said Realmes and dominions, wee doe by these presents straightly
+charge, commaund, and prohibite all and euery our Subiects whatsoeuer,
+other then only the said Erles of Warwike and Leicester, Thomas Starkie,
+and the rest abouesaid, and euery of them by themselues, or by their
+Factors or seruants during the saide terme, to trade or trafique, for or
+with any marchandize, to, or from the saide Countrey of Barbary, or to, or
+from any the dominions of the same, as they tender our fauour, and will
+auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his and
+their bodies, at our will and pleasure, and of forfeiting all the
+marchandizes, or the full value thereof, wherewith they or any of them
+during the saide terme, shall trade or trafique to or from the said
+countrey of Barbary, or to, or from the dominions of the same, contrary to
+this our priuilege and prohibition, vnlesse it be by and with the expresse
+licence, consent, and agreement of the saide Erles of Warwike and
+Leicester, Thomas Starkie, Ierard Gore the elder, and all his sonnes,
+Thomas Gore the elder, Arthur Atie Gentleman, Alexander Auenon, Richard
+Straper, William Iennings, Arthur Dawbnie, William Sherington, Thomas
+Bramlie, Anthonie Gerrard, Robert Howe, Henry Colthirst, Edward Holmden,
+Iohn Swinnerton, Robert Walkaden, Simon Lawrence, Nicholas Stile, Oliuer
+Stile, William Bond, Henry Farington, Iohn Tedcastle, Walter Williams,
+William Brune, Iohn Suzan, Iohn Newton, Thomas Owen, Roger Afield, Robert
+Washborne, Rainold Guy, Thomas Hitchcock, George Lidiate, &c. or by, and
+and with the expresse licence and consent of the more part of them then
+liuning and trading, first had and obtained, so alwayes, that the sayd
+Earle of Leicester be one, if hee bee liuing.
+
+And we further for vs, our heires and successors of our speciall grace,
+meere motion and certaine knowledge, do graunt to the said Erles of Warwike
+and Leicester, Thomas Starkie, and the rest abouesaid, and to euery of
+them, that nothing shall be done, to be of force or validitie touching the
+said trade or trafique, or the exercise thereof, without or against the
+consent of the saide Erles, Thomas Starkie, (and the others before named)
+during the time of these our Letters patents for 12. yeeres as aforesaid.
+
+And for that the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them
+aforesaid should not be preuented or interrupted in this their said trade,
+we do by these presents for vs, our heires and successours, straightly
+prohibite and forbid all maner of person or persons, as well strangers of
+what nation or countrey soeuer, as our owne Subiects, other then onely the
+said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. and euery of them as aforesaid, that they
+nor any of them from hencefoorth during the said terme of 12. yeeres, do or
+shall bring, or cause to be brought into this our Realme of England, or to
+any the dominions thereof, any maner of marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, or
+being made within the said Countrey of Barbary, or within any the dominions
+thereof, vnlesse it be by and with the license of the more part of them
+then liuing, first had and obtained, so alwayes that the sayd Erle of
+Leicester (if hee be liuing) be one, vnder the paine that euery one that
+shall offend or doe against this our present prohibition here last aboue
+mentioned in these presents, shall forfeite and lose all and singular the
+said marchandizes to be landed in any our realmes and dominions, contrary
+to the tenor and true meaning of this our prohibition in that behalfe
+prouided: the one moitie of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer
+mentioned or specified in these our present Letters patents, shalbe to vs,
+our heires and successors: And the other moity of al and euery the said
+forfaitures, we doe by these presents of our certaine knowledge and meere
+motion clearely and wholy for vs, our heires and successors giue and graunt
+vnto the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. And these our Letters patents,
+vpon the onely sight thereof, without any further warrant, shal bee
+sufficient authoritie to our Treasurer of England for the time being, to
+our Barons of the Exchequer, and to all other our officers that shall haue
+to deale in this behalfe, to make full allowance vnto the said Erles,
+Thomas Starkie, &c. their deputies or assignes of the one moitie of all and
+singular the goods, marchandizes and things whatsoever mentioned in these
+our present Letters patents, to be forfaited at any time or times during
+the said terme of twelue yeres: which said allowance we doe straightly
+charge and commaund from time to time to be made to the sayd Erles, Thomas
+Starkie, &c. and to euery of them accordingly, without any maner of delay
+or deniall or any of our officers whatsoever, as they tender our fauour and
+the furtherance of our good pleasure. And wee doe straightly charge and
+commaund, and by these presents prohibite all and singular Customers and
+Collectors of our customes and subsidies, and comptrollers, of the same, of
+and within our Citie and port of London, and all other portes, creekes, and
+places within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, that they ne
+any of them take or perceiue, or cause, or suffer to be taken, receiued, or
+perceiued for vs and in our name, or to our vse, or to the vses of our
+heires or successors of any person or persons, any sum or summes of money,
+or other things whatsoeuer during the said terme of 12. yeeres, for, and in
+the name and liew or place of any custome, subsidy and other thing or
+duties to vs, our heires or successors due or to be due for the customes
+and subsidies of any marchandizes whatsoeuer growing, being made or comming
+out of the said countrey of Barbary, or out of the dominions thereof, nor
+make, cause, nor suffer to be made any entrie into our or their books of
+customs and subsidies, nor make any agreement for the subsidies and
+customs, of, and for any the said marchants, sauing onely with, and in the
+name of the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or the most part of them, as
+they and euery of them will answers at their vttermost perils to the
+contrary. And for the better and more sure obseruation of this our graunt,
+wee will, and grant for vs, our heires and successors by these presents,
+that the Treasurer and barons of our Exchequer for the time being, by force
+of this our graunt or enrolment thereof in the said court at al and euery
+time and times during the said terme of 12 yeeres, at and vpon request made
+vnto them by the said Erles, Thomas Starkie, &c. or by the atturneis,
+factors, deputies or assignes of them, or the most part of them then liuing
+and trading, shall and may make and direct vnder the seale of the said
+Exchequer, one or more sufficient writ or writs, close or patents, vnto
+euery or any of our said customers, collectors or controllers of our heires
+and successors in all and euery, or to any port or ports, creeke, hauens,
+or other places within this our realme of England, as the Erles, Thomas
+Starkie, &c. or any the atturneis, factors, deputies or assignes of them or
+the most part of them then liuing and trading, shall at any time require,
+commaunding and straightly charging them and euery of them, that they nor
+any of them at any time or times during the said term of 12. yeeres, make
+any entrie of any wares or marchandizes whatsoeuer, growing, being made or
+comming out or from the said countrey of Barbary, or the dominions thereof,
+nor receiue or take any custome, subsidie or other entrie, or make any
+agreement for the same, other then with or in the name of the said Erles,
+Thomas Starkie, &c, the factor or factors, deputies or assignes of them or
+the most part of them then liuing and trading, according to this our
+graunt, and the true meaning thereof, and according to our saide will and
+pleasure before in these presents declared. In witnesse whereof we haue
+caused these our Letters to be made patents. Witnesse our selfe at
+Westminster the 5. day of Iuly in the 27. yeere of our reigne.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Ambassage of Master Henry Roberts, one of the sworne Esquires of her
+  Maiesties person, from her highnesse to Mully Hamet Emperour of Morocco
+  and the King of Fesse and Sus, in the yeere 1585: who remained there as
+  Liger for the space of 3. yeeres. Written briefly by himselfe.
+
+Vpon an incorporation granted to the Company of Barbary Marchants resident
+in London, I Henry Roberts one of her Maiesties sworne Esquires of her
+person, was appointed her highnesse messenger, and Agent vnto the aforesaid
+Mully Hamet Emperor of Marocco, king of Fesse, and Sus. And after I had
+receiued my Commission, instructions, and her Maiesties letters, I departed
+from London the 14. of August in the yeere 1585. in a tall ship called the
+Ascension, in the company of the Minion and Hopewell, and we all arriued in
+safetie at Azafi a port of Barbary, the 14. of September next following.
+The Alcaide of the towne (being the kings officer there, and as it were
+Maior of the place) recalled mee with all humanitie and honour, according
+to the custome of the Countrey, lodging me in the chiefest house of the
+towne, from whence I dispatched a messenger (which in their language they
+call a Trottero) to aduertise the Emperour of my arriuall: who immediately
+gaue order, and sent certaine souldiers for my guard and conduct, and
+horses for my selfe, and mules for mine owne and my companies carriages.
+Thus being accompanied with M. Richard Euans, Edward Salcot, and other
+English Marchants resident there in the Countrey, with my traine of Moores
+and carriages, I came at length to the riuer of Tensist, which is within
+foure miles of Marocco: and there by the water side I pitched my tents
+vnder the Oliue trees: where I met with all the English Marchants by
+themselues, and the French and Flemish, and diuers other Christians, which
+attended my comming. And after we had dined, and spent out the heat of the
+day, about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we all set forward toward
+the Citie of Marocco, where we arriued the said day, being the 14. of
+September, and I was lodged by the Emperours appointment in a faire house
+in the Iudaria or Iurie, which is the place where the Iewes haue their
+abode, and is the fairest place, and quietest lodging in all the Citie.
+
+After I had reposed my selfe 3 dayes, I had accesse to the kings presence,
+delinered my message and her Maiesties letters, and was receiued with all
+humanitie, and had fauourable audience from time to time for three yeeres:
+during which space I abode there in his Court, as her Maiesties Agent and
+Ligier: and whensoeuer I had occasion of businesse, I was admitted either
+to his Maiestie himselfe, or to his vice Roy, whose name was Alcayde Breme
+Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the chiefest about his
+Maiestie. The particulers of my seruice, for diuers good and reasonable
+causes, I forbeare here to put downe in writing.
+
+After leaue obtained, and an honourable reward bestowed by the Emperour
+vpon me, I departed from his Court at Marocco the 18. of August 1588.
+toward a garden of his, which is called Shersbonare, where he promised mee
+I should stay but one day for his letters: howbeit, vpon some occasion I
+was stayed vntil the 14. of September at the kings charges, with 40. or 50.
+shot attending vpon me for my guard and safetie.
+
+From thence at length I was conducted with all things necessary to the port
+of Santa Cruz, being sixe dayes iourney from Marocco, and the place where
+our shippes do commonly take in their lading, where I arriued the 21. of
+the same moneth. In this port I stayed 43. dayes, and at length the second
+of Nouember I embarqued my selfe, and one Marshok Reiz a Captaine and a
+Gentleman, which the Emperour sent with mee vpon an Ambassage to her
+Maiestie: and after much torment and foule weather at Sea, yet New-yeres
+day I came on land at S. Iues in Cornwall, from whence passing by land both
+together vp towards London, we were met without the Citie with the chiefest
+marchants of the Barbary Company, well mounted all on horsebacke, to the
+number of 40. or 50. horse, and so the Ambassadour and myselfe being both
+in Coche, entred the citie by torchlight, on Sunday at night the 12. of
+Ianuary 1589.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Este es vn traslado bien y fielmente sacado da vna carta real del Rey Muley
+  Hamet de Fes y Emperador de Marruecos, cuyo tenor es este, que Segue.
+
+Con el nombre de Dios piadoso y misericordioso, &c. El sieruo de Dios
+soberano, el conquistador per su causa, el successor ensalcado por Dios,
+Emperador de los Moros, hijo del Emperador de los Moros, Iariffe, Haceni,
+el que perpetue su honora, y ensalce su estado. Se pone este nuestro real
+mandado en manos de los criados de neustras altas puertas los mercadores
+Yngleses; para que por el sepan todos los que la presente vieren, come
+nuestro alto Conseio les anpara con el fauor de Dios de todo aquello, que
+les enpeciere y dannare en qualquiera manera, que fueren offendidos, y en
+qualquiera viaie, que fueren, ninguno les captinara en estos nuestros
+reynos, y puertos, y lugares, que a nos pertenescen: y que les cubre el
+anporo de nuestro podor de qualquiera fatiga; y ningun los impida commano
+de enemistad, ni se dara causa, de que se agrauien en qualquiera manera con
+el fauor de Dios y de sua comparo. Y mandamos a los Alcaydes de los
+nuestros puertos y fortalezas, y a los que en estos nuestros reynos tienen
+cargo, y a toda la gente commun, que no les alleguen en ninguna manera, con
+orden, de que sean offendidos en ninguna manera; y esto sera
+necessariamente: Que es escrita en los medios dias de Rabel, segundo anno
+de nueue cientos, y nouenta y seys.
+
+Concorda el dia d'esta cara con veynte dias de Marco del anno de mil y
+quiniento y ochenta y siete, lo qual yo Abdel Rahman el Catan, interprete
+per su Magestad saque, y Romance de verbo ad verbum, como en el se
+contiene, y en Fee dello firmo de my nombre, fecho vt supra.
+
+Abdel Rahman el Catan.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+This is a copy well and truely translated of an edict of Muley Hamet king
+  of Fez and Emperour of Marocco, whose tenor is as followeth: To wit, that
+  no Englishmen should be molested or made slaues in any part of his
+  Dominions, obtained by the aforesaid M. Henry Roberts.
+
+In the name of the pitifull and the mercifull God, &c. The seruant of the
+supreme God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor aduanced by God, the
+Emperour of the Moores, the sonne of the Emperour of the Moores, the
+Iariffe, the Haceny, whose honour God long increase and aduance his estate.
+This our princely commandement is deliuered into the hands of the English
+marchants, which remaine in the protection of our stately palaces: to the
+ende that all men which shall see this present writing, may vnderstand that
+our princely counsaile wil defend them by the fauor of God, from any thing
+that may impeach or hurt them in what sort soeuer they shalbe wronged: and
+that, which way soeuer they shall trauaile, no man shall take them captiues
+in these our kingdomes, ports, and places which belong vnto vs, which also
+may protect and defend them by our authoritie from any molestation
+whatsoeuer: and that no man shall hinder them by laying violent hand vpon
+them, and shall not giue occasion that they may be grieued in any sort by
+the fauour and assistance of God. And we charge and command our officers of
+our hauens and fortresses, and all such as beare any authority in these our
+dominions, and likewise all the common people, that in no wise they do
+molest them, in such sort that they be no way offended or wronged. And this
+our commandement shall remaine inuiolable, being registred in the middest
+of the moneth of Rabel in the yeere 996.
+
+The date of this letter agreeth with the 20. of March 1587. which I Abdel
+Rahman el Catan, interpretour for his Maiestie, haue translated and turned
+out of the Arabian into Spanish word for word as is conteined therein: and
+in witnesse thereof haue subscribed my name as aforesaid.
+
+Abdel Rahman el Catan.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+En nombre de Dios el piadoso piadador.
+
+Oracion de Dios sobre nuestro Sennor y Propheta Mahumet, y los allegados a
+el.
+
+[Sidenote: A letter of Mully Hamet to the Earle of Leicester.] El sieruo de
+Dios, y muy guerrero, y ensalsado por la gracia de Dios, Myra Momanyn, hijo
+de Myra Momanyn, nieto de Myra Momanyn, el Iarif, el Hazeny, que Dios
+sustenga sus reynos, y enhalse sus mandados, para el Sennor muy affamado y
+muy illustre, muy estimado, el Conde de Leycester, despues de dar las
+loores deuidas a Dios, y las oraciones, y saludes deuidas a le propheta
+Mahumet. Seruira esta por os hazer saber que llego a qui a nuestra real
+Corte vuestra carta, y entendimos lo que en ella se contiene. Y vuestro
+Ambaxador, que aqui esti en nuestra corte me dio a entender la causa de la
+tardanca de los rehenes hasta agora: el qual descuento recebimos, y nos
+damos por satisfechos. Y quanta a lo que a nos escriueys por causa de Iuan
+Herman, y lo mesmo que nos ha dicho el Ambaxador sobre el, antes que
+llegasse vuestra carta por la quexa del ambaxador, que se auia quexado del,
+ya auiamos mandado prender lo, y assi que da aora preso, y quedera, hasta
+que se le haga la iusticia que mas se le ha de hazer. Y con tanto nuestro
+Sennor os tenga en su guardia. Hecha en nuestra corte real en Marruecos,
+que Dios sostenga, et 28. dias del mes de Remodan anno 996.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+In the Name of the mercifull and pitifull God.
+
+The blessing of God light vpon our Lord and prophet Mahumet, and those that
+are obedient vnto him.
+
+The seruant of God both mightie in warre and mightily exalted by the grace
+of God Myra Momanyn, the son of Myra Momanyn, the Iarif, the Hazeni, whose
+kingdoms God maintaine and aduance his authoritie: Vnto the right famous,
+right noble, and right highly esteemed Erle of Leicester, after due praises
+giuen vnto God, and due blessings and salutations rendered vnto the prophet
+Mahumet. These are to giue you to vnderstand, that your letters arriued
+here in our royal Court, and we wel perceiue the contents thereof. And your
+Ambassador which remaineth here in our Court told me the cause of the
+slownesse of the gages or pledges vntil this time: which reckoning we
+accept of, and holde our selues as satisfied. And as touching the matter
+wherof you write vnto vs concerning Iohn Herman, and the selfe same
+complaint which your Ambassador hath made of him, before the comming of
+your letter, we had already commaunded him to be taken vpon the complaint
+which your Ambassadour had made of him, whereupon he still remaineth in
+hold, and shall so continue vntil further iustice be done vpon him
+according to his desert. And so our Lord keepe you in his safeguard.
+Written at our royall court in Marocco, which God maintaine, the 28. day of
+the moneth Remodan, Anno 996. [Marginal note: Which is with vs 1587.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Queenes Maiesties letters to the Emperour of Marocco.
+
+[Sidenote: The Queenes letters to the Emperour.] Muy alto, y muy poderoso
+Sennor,
+
+Auiendo entendido de parte de nuestro Agente la mucha aficion, y volontad,
+que nos teneys, y quanta honta, y fauor le hazeys por amor nuestro, para
+dar nos tanto mayor testimonio de vuestra amistad, hemos recebido de lo vno
+y de le otro muy grande contento, y satisfacion; y assy no podemos dexar de
+agradesceroslo, como mereceys. Vuestras cartas hemos tambien recibido, y
+con ellas holgadonos infinitamente, por venir de parte de vn Principe, a
+quien tenemos tanta obligacion. Nuestro Agente nos ha escripto sobre
+ciertas cosas, que desseays ser os embiadas de aqui: Y, aunque queriamos
+poder os en ello puntualmente conplazer, como pidiz, ha succedido, que las
+guerras, en que stamos al presente occupadas, no nos lo consienten del
+todo: Hemos pero mandado que se os satisfaga en parte, y conforme a lo que
+por agora la necessitad nos permite, como mas particularmente os lo
+declarara nuestro Agente: esperando, que lo reciberreys en buena parte y
+conforme al animo, con que os lo concedemos. Y porque nos ha sido referido,
+que aueys prometido de proceder contra vn Iuan Herman vassallo nuestro, (el
+qual nos ha grauemente offendido) de la manera, que os lo demandaremos,
+auemos dado orden a nuestro dicho Agente de deziros mas parcularmente lo
+que desseamos ser hecho a cerca deste negocio, rogando os, que lo mandeys
+assi complir: y que seays seruido de fauorescer siempre al dicho Agente, y
+tener lo en buen credito, como hasta agora aueys hecho, sin permiter, que
+nadie os haga mudar de parecer a cerca de las calumnias, que le podran
+leuantar, ny dudar, que no complamos muy por entero todo, lo que de nuestra
+parte os prometiere. Nuestro Sennor guarde vostra muy alta y muy poderosa
+persona: Hecha en nuestra Corte Real de Grenewich a 20. de Iulio 1587.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+Right high and mightie Prince, Hauing vnderstood from our Agent the great
+affection and good wil which you beare vs, and how great honour and fauor
+you shew him for our sake, to the end to giue vs more ample testimonie of
+your friendship, we haue receiued very great contentment and satisfaction,
+as wel of the one as of the other: and withall we could not omit to
+magnifie you, according to your desert. We haue also receiued your letters,
+and do not a litle reioyce thereof, because they come from a prince vnto
+whom we are so much beholden. Or Agent hath written vnto vs concerning
+certaine things which you desire to bee sent vnto you from hence. And
+albeit we wish that we could particularly satisfie you, as you desire, yet
+it is fallen out, that the warres, wherein at this present we be busied wil
+not suffer vs fully to doe the same: neuerthelesse, wee haue commaunded to
+satisfie you in part, and according as the present necessitie doeth permit
+vs, as our Agent will declare vnto you more particularly, hoping you will
+receiue it in good part, and according to the good will wherewith wee
+graunt the same. [Sidenote: Iohn Herman an English rebel.] And because it
+hath bene signified vnto vs that you haue promised to proceed in iustice
+against one Iohn Herman our subiect, which hath grieuously offended vs, in
+such sort as wee haue sent word vnto you, wee haue giuen order to our said
+Agent, to informe you more particularly in that which we desire to be done
+in this busines, praying you also to command the same to be put in
+execution: and that it would please you alwayes to fauour our said Agent
+and to hold him in good credite, as you haue done hitherto, not suffering
+your selfe to be changed in your opinion, for all the false reports which
+they may raise against him, nor to doubt that wee will not accomplish at
+large all that he shall promise you on our behalfe. Our Lord keepe and
+preserue your right high and mightie person. Written in our royall Court at
+Greenwich the 20. of Iuly 1587.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A Patent granted to certaine Marchants of Exeter, and others of the West
+  parts, and of London, for a trade to the Riuer of Senega and Gambia in
+  Guinea, 1588.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. To our Treasurer and Admirral of England, our
+Treasurer and Barons of our Exchequer, and all and euery our Officers,
+ministers and subiects whatsoeuer, greeting. Whereas our welbeloued
+subiects William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicolas Spicer, and Iohn Doricot
+of our City of Exeter marchants, Iohn Yong of Coliton in our county of
+Deuon marchant, Richard Doderige of Barnstable in our saide County of Deuon
+Marchant, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicolas Turner of our Citie of London
+Marchants, haue bene perswaded and earnestly moued by certaine Portugals
+resident within our Dominions, to vndertake and set forward a voyage to
+certaine places on the coast of Guinea; Videlicit, from the Northermost
+part of the Riuer commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega, and
+from and within that Riuer all along that coast vnto the Southermost part
+of another Riuer commonly called by the name of Gambra, and within that
+Riuer: [Sidenote: A former voyage to Gambra.] which, as we are informed
+they haue already once performed accordingly: And for that we are credibly
+giuen to vnderstand that the further prosecuting of the same voyage, and
+the due and orderly establishing of an orderly trafique and trade of
+marchandize into those Countries, wil not only in time be very beneficial
+to these our Realmes and dominions, but also be a great succour and reliefe
+vnto the present distressed estate of those Portugals, who by our princely
+fauour liue and continue here vnder our protection: And considering that
+the aduenturing and enterprising of a newe trade cannot be a matter of
+small charge and hazard to the aduenturers in the beginning: we haue
+therefore thought it conuenient, that our said louing subiects William
+Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Young, Richard
+Doderige, Anthonie Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, for the better
+incouragement to proceede in their saide aduenture and trade in the said
+Countreis, shal haue the sole vse and exercise thereof for a certaine time.
+In consideration whereof, and for other waightie reasons and
+considerations, vs specially moouing, of our speciall grace, certaine
+knowledge and meere motion, we haue giuen and graunted, and by these
+presents for vs, our heires and successors doe giue and graunt vnto the
+said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn
+Young, Richard Doderide, Anthony Dassell and Nicholas Turner, and to euery
+of them, and to such other our Subiects as they or the most part of them
+shall thinke conuenient to receiue into their Company and society, to be
+the traders with them into the said Contreis, that they and euery of them
+by themselues or by their seruants or Factors and none others, shall and
+may for and during the full space and terme of tenne yeeres next ensuing
+the date of these presents, haue and enioy the free and whole trafique,
+trade and feat of marchandise, to and from the said Northermost part of the
+said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Senega: and from
+and within that riuer all along the coast of Guinea, vnto the Southermost
+part of the said Riuer, commonly called by the name of the Riuer of Gambra,
+and within that Riuer also. And that they the said William Brayley, Gilbert
+Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony
+Dassel and Nicholas Turner, and euery of them, by themselues or by their
+seruants or Factors, and such as they or the most part of them shall
+receiue into their Company and societie, to be traders with them into the
+sayd Countreis (as is aforesaid) and none others, shall and may, for, and
+during the said space and terme of 10. yeres, haue and enioy the sole and
+whole trafique or trade of marchandize into and from the said places afore
+limitted and described, for the buying and selling, bartering and changing
+of and with any goods, wares, and marchandizes whatsoeuer, to be vented had
+or found, at or within any the cities, townes, or places situated or being
+in the countries, partes and coastes of Guinea before limitted, any law,
+statute, or graunt, matter, custome or priuileges to the contrary in any
+wise notwithstanding. And for the better ordering, establishing, and
+gouerning of the said societie and Company in the said trade and trafique
+of marchandizes, and the quiet, orderly, and lawfull exercise of the same,
+We for vs, our heires, and successors, do by these presents giue and graunt
+full license and authority vnto the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith,
+Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthonie
+Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and to such others as they shall receiue into
+their saide societie and company to be traders into the said countreis, as
+is aforesaid, and to euery of them, that they or the most part of them
+shall and may at all conuenient times at their pleasures, assemble and
+meete together in any place or places conuenient, aswell within our citie
+of Exeter, as elsewhere within this our Realme of England, or other our
+dominions, during the said terme of ten yeere, to consult of, for, and
+concerning the saide trade and trafique of marchandize, and from time to
+time to make, ordaine, and stablish good, necessary, and reasonable orders,
+constitutions, and ordinances, for, and touching the same trade. And al
+such orders, constitutions, and ordinances so to be made, to put in vse and
+execute, and them, or any of them, to alter, change, and make voyd, and, if
+neede be, to make new, as at any time, during the said terme of ten yeeres,
+to them, or the most part of them then trading, as is aforesaide, shall be
+thought necessary and conuenient. Vnto all and euery which said orders,
+constitutions, and ordinances, they, and euery of them, and all other
+persons which shall hereafter be receiued into the saide societie and
+Company, shall submit themselues, and shall well and duely obserue,
+performe, and obey the same, so long as they shall stand in force, or else
+shall pay and incurre such forfeitures, paines, and penalties, for the
+breach thereof, and in such maner and forme, and to such vses and intents,
+as by the saide orders, constitutions, and ordinances shall be assessed,
+limitted and appointed. So alwayes, as the same orders, constitutions and
+ordinances be not repugnant or contrary to the lawes, statutes, and
+customes of this Realme of England, nor any penaltie to exceede the
+reasonable forme of other penalties, assessed by the Company of our
+Marchants, named Aduenturers. And to the intent that they onely, to whom
+the said power and libertie of trafique and trade of marchandize is
+graunted by these our letters patent aforesaid, and none others whatsoeuer,
+without their speciall consent and license before had, shall, during the
+said terme of ten yeeres, vse, or haue trade or trafique, with or for any
+maner of goods or marchandizes, to and from the saide coastes or parts of
+Guinea afore limited: Wee doe by these presents, by our royall and supreme
+authoritie, straightly charge and commaund, that no person or persons
+whatsoeuer, by themselues, or by their factors, or seruants, during the
+said terme of 10. yeres, shall in any wise trade or trafique, for or with
+any goods or marchandizes, to or from the said coasts and parts of Guinea
+afore limitted, other then the said William Brayley, Gilbert Smith,
+Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony
+Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such as from time to time, they, or the
+most part of them, shall receiue into their societie and company, to be
+traders with them, as is aforesaid, as they tender our fauour, and will
+auoyde our high displeasure, and vpon paine of imprisonment of his or their
+bodies, at our will and pleasure, and to lose and forfeit the ship or
+shippes, and all the goods, wares, and marchandizes, wherewith they, or any
+of them, shal, during the said terme of 10. yeres, trade, or trafique to or
+from the said Countries, or any part thereof, according to the limitation
+aboue mentioned, contrary to our expresse prohibition and restraint, in
+that behalfe. And further, we do by these presents giue and graunt full
+power and authoritie to the said William Braily, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas
+Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and
+Nicholas Turner, and to such other persons, as they shal receiue into their
+society and company, to be traders with them, as is aforesaid, and the most
+part of them, for the time being: that they, and euery of them, by
+themselues, their factors, deputies, or assignes, shall and may, from time
+to time, during the said terme of 10. yeres, attach, arrest, take, and
+sease all, and all maner of ship, and ships, goods, wares, and marchandizes
+whatsoeuer, which shall be brought from, or caried to the said coasts and
+parts of Guinea afore limited, contrary to our will and pleasure, and the
+true meaning of the same, declared and expressed in these our letters
+patents. Of all and euery which said forfaitures whatsoeuer, the one third
+part shall be vnto vs, our heires, and successors, and another thirde part
+thereof we giue and graunt by these presents, for and towards the reliefe
+of the saide Portugals continuing here vnder our protection, as is
+aforesaid. And the other third part of al the same forfaitures, we do by
+these presents, of our certaine knowledge and meere motion, for vs, our
+heires and successors, giue and grant cleerely and wholy vnto the said
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, and such other
+persons, as they shall receiue into their societie, and company, as is
+aforesaid. And these our letters patents, or the inrolment or
+exemplification of the same, without any further or other warrant, shall
+from time to time, during the said tenne yeeres, be a sufficient warrant
+and authoritie to our Treasurer of England, for the time being, and to the
+barons of our Exchequer, and to all other our officers and ministers
+whatsoeuer, to whom it shall or may appertaine, to allow, deliuer, and pay
+one thirde part of all the said forfeitures, to the vse of the said
+Portugals, and one other thirde part of the same forfeitures, to the saide
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, and such other
+persons, as they shall receiue into their societie and Company, to be
+traders with them, as aforesaide, to their owne proper vse and behoofe:
+which said allowances and paiments thereof, our will and pleasure is, and
+we do straightly charge and commaund, to bee from time to time duely made
+and performed accordingly, without any delay or denial of any our officers
+aforesaid, or any other our officers or ministers whatsoeuer. And we do
+straightly charge and command, and by these presents probibite all and
+singular our customers, collectors, and farmers of our Customes and
+subsidies, and controllers of the same, of and within our ports of the
+citie of London, and the Citie of Exeter, and all other ports, creekes, and
+places, within this our Realme of England, and euery of them, and all other
+our officers and ministers whatsoeuer, which haue or shall haue any dealing
+or intermedling, touching our said Customes and subsidies, that they, ne
+any of them by themselues, their clearks, deputies, or substitutes, or any
+of them take or receiue, or in any wise cause or suffer to be taken or
+receiued for vs, or in our name, or to our vse, or for, or in the names or
+to the vses of our heires or successors, or any person, or persons, any
+summe or summes of money, or other things whatsoeuer, during the saide
+terme of ten yeeres, for, or in the name, lieu, or place of any Custome,
+subsidie, or other thing or duetie, to vs, our heires, or successors, due,
+or to be due, for the Customes or subsidies of any such goods, wares, or
+marchandizes, to be transported, caried, or brought to or from the
+priuileged places, before in these presents mentioned, or any of them: nor
+make, nor cause to be made any entry into, or of the bookes of subsidies or
+customes, nor make any agreement for the Customes or subsidies, of, or for
+any goods, wares or merchandizes, to bee sent to, or returned from any the
+priuleged places, before in these presents mentioned, sauing onely with,
+and in the name, and by the consent of the saide William Brayley, Gilbert
+Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong, Richard Doderige, Antonie
+Dassel, and Nicholas Turner, or of some of them, or of such as they or the
+most part of them shall receiue into their societie and Company, as
+aforesaid. Prouided alwaies, that if at any time hereafter, we our selves,
+by our writing signed with our proper hand, or any sixe or more of our
+priuie Counsell, for the time being, shall by our direction, and by writing
+signed and subscribed with their hands, signifie and notifie to the said
+William Brayley, Gilbert Smith, Nicholas Spicer, Iohn Doricot, Iohn Yong,
+Richard Doderige, Anthony Dassell, and Nicholas Turner, or to any of them,
+or to any other, whom they or the most part of them shal receiue into their
+Companie and society, as is aforesaid, or otherwise to our officers in our
+ports of Exeter, or Plimouth, by them to be notified to such as shall haue
+interest in this speciall priuilege, that our will and pleasure is, that
+the said trade and trafique shal cease, and be no longer continued into the
+saide coastes and partes of Guinea before limited: then immediatly from and
+after the ende of sixe moneths next insuing, after such signification and
+notification so to be giuen to any of the said Company and societie, as is
+aforesaid, or otherwise to our Officers in our ports of Exeter or Plimouth,
+by them to be notified to such as shall haue interest in this speciall
+priuilege, these our present letters Patents, and our graunt therein
+contained shall be vtterly voyde, and of none effect, ne validitie in the
+lawe, to all intents and purposes: any thing before mentioned to the
+contrary in any wise notwithstanding. Witnesse our selfe at Westminster,
+the thirde day of May, in the thirtieth yere of our Reign 1588.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A voyage to Benin beyond the Countrey of Guinea, set foorth by Master Bird
+  and Master Newton Marchants of London, with a shippe called the Richard
+  of Arundell, and a Pinesse; Written by Iames Welsh, who was chiefe Master
+  of the said voyage, begunne in the yeere 1588.
+
+Vpon the twelft of October wee wayed our ankers at Ratcliffe and went to
+Blackwall. And the next day sayling from thence, by reason of contrary
+winde and weather, wee made it the 25. of October before wee were able to
+reach Plimouth, and there we stayed (to our great expense of victuals) for
+lacke of winde and weather vnto the 14. of December.
+
+On Saturday the said 14. of December we put from thence, and about midnight
+were thwart of the Lizart.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio del oro is in 22. degrees and 47. min.] Thursday the second
+of Ianuary wee had sight of the land neere Rio del oro, God be thanked, and
+there had 22. degrees of latitude, and 47. minutes.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo de las Barbas.] The thirde of Ianuary wee had sight of Cauo
+de las Barbas, and it bare Southeast fiue leagues off.
+
+[Sidenote: Crosiers.] The 4. we had sight of the Crosiers in the morning.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo Verde in 14. degr. 43. m.] Tuesday the 7. day we had sight
+of Cauo verde, and I find this place to be in latitude 14. degrees, and 43.
+minutes, being 4. leagues from the shoare.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo de Monte.] Friday the 17. Cauo de Monte bare off vs North
+Northeast, we sounded and had 50. fathom blacke oase, and at 2. of the
+clocke it bare North Northwest 8. leagues off. [Sidenote: Cauo Mensurado.]
+And Cauo Mensurado bare of vs East and by South, and wee went Northeast
+with the maine: here the current setteth to the East Southeast alongst the
+shoare, and at midnight wee sounded and had 26. fathome blacke oase.
+
+The 18. in the morning we were thwart of a land, much like Cauo verde, and
+it is as I iudge 9. leagues from Cauo Mensurado; it is a hill sadlebacked,
+and there are 4. or 5. one after another: and 7. leagues to the Southward
+of that, we saw a row of hils sadlebacked also, and from Cauo Mensurado are
+many mountaines.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Sestos. Cauo dos Baixos.] The 19. we were thwart Rio de
+Sestos, and the 20. Cauo dos Baixos was North and by West 4. leagues off
+the shoare, [Sidenote: Tabanoo.] and at afternoone there came a boate frome
+the shoare with 3. Negroes, from a place (as they say) called Tabanoo. And
+towards euening we were thwart of an Island, and a great many of small
+Islands or rockes to the Southward, and the currant came out of the
+Souther-boord: we sounded and had 35. fathomes.
+
+[Sidenote: A French ship at Ratire. Crua.] The 21. wee had a flat hill that
+bare North Northeast off vs, and wee were from the shoare 4. leagues, and
+at 2. a clocke in the afternoone we spake with a Frenchman riding neere a
+place called Ratire, and another place hard by called Crua. [Sidenote: A
+current to the Southeastward.] This Frenchman caried a letter from vs to M.
+Newton: wee layd it on hull while wee were writing of our letter; and the
+current set vs to the Southward a good pase alongst the shore South
+Southeast.
+
+The 25. we were in the bight of the Bay that is to the Westward of Capo de
+Tres puntas: the currant did set East Northeast.
+
+The 28. we lay sixe glasses a hull tarying for the pinesse.
+
+[Sidenote: Caou de tres puntas.] The last of Ianuary the middle part of
+Cape de tres puntas was thwart of vs three leagues at seuen of the clocke
+in the morning: and at eight the pinnesse came to an anker: and wee prooued
+that the current setteth to the Eastward: and at sixe at night the
+Vttermost lande bare East and by South 5. leagues, and we went Southwest,
+and Southwest and by South.
+
+Saturday the first of February 1588. we were thwart of a Round foreland,
+which I take to be the Eastermost part of Capo de tres puntas: and within
+the saide Round foreland was a great bay with an Island in the said bay.
+
+[Sidenote: The Castle of Mina.] The second of February wee were thwart of
+the Castle of Mina, and when the thirde glasse of our Looke-out was spent,
+we spied vnder our Larbord-quarter one of their Boates with certaine
+Negroes, and one Portugale in the Boate, wee haue had him to come aboord,
+but he would not. [Sidenote: Two white watch-houses.] And ouer the castle
+upon the hie rockes we did see as it might be two watch-houses, and they
+did shew very white: and we went eastnortheast.
+
+[Sidenote: Monte Redondo.] The 4 in the morning we were thwart a great high
+hill, and vp into the lande were more high ragged hilles, and those I
+reckoned to be but little short of Monte Redondo. Then I reckoned that we
+were 20 leagues Southeastward from the Mina, and at 11 of the clocke I
+sawe two hilles within the land, these hils I take to be 7 leagues from the
+first hils. And to sea-ward of these hilles is a bay, and at the east end
+of the bay another hill, and from the hils the landes lie verie low. We
+went Eastnortheast, and East and by North 22 leagues, and then East along
+the shore.
+
+[Sidenote: Villa longa.] The 6 we were short of Villa longa, and there we
+met with a Portugall Carauell.
+
+The 7 a faire temperate day, and all this day we road before Villa longa.
+
+The 8 at noone we set saile from Villa longa, and ten leagues from thence
+we ankered againe and stayed all that night in ten fadom water.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Lagos.] The ninth we set saile, and all alongst the shore
+were very thicke woodes, and in the afternoone we were thwart a riuer, and
+to the Eastward of the riuer a litle way off was a great high bush-tree as
+though it had no leaues, and at night we ankered with faire and temperate
+weather.
+
+The 10 we set sayle and went East, and East and by South 14 leagues along
+the shoare, which was so full of thicke woods, that in my iudgement a man
+should haue much to doe to passe through them, and towards night we ankered
+in 7 fadome with faire weather.
+
+[Sidenote: Very shallow water.] The 11 we sayled East and by South, and
+three leagues from the shore we had but 5 fadome water, and all the wood
+vpon the land was as euen as if it had beene cut with a paire of gardeners
+sheeres, and in running of two leagues we descerned a high tuft of trees
+vpon the brow of a land, which shewed like a Porpose head, and when wee
+came at it, it was but part of the lande, and a league further we saw a
+head-land very low and full of trees, and a great way from the land we had
+very shallow water, then we lay South into the sea, because of the sands
+for to get into the deepe water, and when we found it deepe, we ankered in
+fiue fadom thwart the riuer of Iaya, in the riuers mouth.
+
+The 12. in the morning we road still in the riuers mouth. This day we sent
+the pinnesse and the boat on land with the marchants, but they came not
+againe vntil the next morning. The shallowest part of this riuer is toward
+the West, where there is but 4 fadom and a halfe, and it is very broad.
+[Sidenote: Rio de Iaya.] The next morning came the boate aboord, and they
+also said it was Rio de Iaya. Here the currant setteth Westward, and the
+Eastermost land is higher then the Westermost Thursday the 13 we set saile,
+and lay South Southeast along the shore, where the trees are wonderfull
+euen, and the East shore is higher then the West shore, and when wee had
+sayled 18 leagues we had sight of a great riuer, then we ankered in three
+fadom and a halfe, and the currant went Westward. [Sidenote: Rio Benin.]
+This riuer is the riuer of Benin, and two leagues from the maine it is very
+shallowe.
+
+[Sidenote: A currant Westward.] The 15 we sent the boat and pinesse into
+the riuer with the marchants, and after that we set saile, because we road
+in shallow water, and went Southsoutheast, and the starboard tacke aboord
+vntill we came to fiue fadom water, where we road with the currant to the
+Westward: then came our boat out of the harbour and went aboord the
+pinnesse. The West part of the land was high browed much like the head of a
+Gurnard, and the Eastermost land was lower, and had on it three tufts of
+trees like stackes of wheate or corne, and the next day in the morning we
+sawe but two of those trees, by reason that we went more to the Eastward.
+And here we road still from the 14 of Februarie vntill the 14 of Aprill,
+with the winde at Southwest.
+
+The 16 of Februarie we rode still in fiue fadom, and the currant ranne
+still to the Westward, the winde at Southwest, and the boat and pinnesse
+came to vs againe out of the riuer, and told vs that there was but ten
+foote water vpon the barre. All that night was drowsie, and yet reasonable
+temperate.
+
+The 17 a close day, the winde at Southwest. Our marchants wayed their goods
+and put them aboord the pinnesse to goe into the riuer, and there came a
+great currant out of the riuer and set to the Westward.
+
+The 18 the marchants went with the boat and pinnesse into the riuer with
+their commodities. This day was close and drowsie, with thunder, raine, and
+lightning.
+
+The 24 a close morning and temperate, and in the afternoone the boat came
+to vs out of the riuer with our marchants.
+
+Twesday the 4 of March, a close soultry hot morning, the currant went to
+the Westward, and much troubled water came out of the riuer.
+
+[Sidenote: Sicknesse among our men.] The 16 our pinnesse came a boord and
+Anthonie Ingram in her, and she brought in her 94 bags of pepper, and 28
+Elephants teeth, and the Master of her and all his company were sicke. This
+was a temperate day and the winde at Southwest.
+
+The 17. 18. and 19 were faire temperate weather and the winde at Southwest.
+This day the pinnesse went into the riuer againe, and carried the Purser
+and the Surgion.
+
+The 25 of the said moneth 1589 we sent the boate into the riuer.
+
+[Sidenote: The death of the Captaine. Pepper and Elephants Teeth.] The 30
+our pinnesse came from Benin, and brought sorowfull newes, that Thomas
+Hemstead was dead and our Captaine also, and she brought with her 159
+Cerons or sackes of pepper and Elephants teeth.
+
+[Sidenote: A good note.] Note that in all the time of our abiding here, in
+the mouth of the riuer of Benin, and in all the coast hereabout it is faire
+temperate weather, when the winde is at Southwest. And when the winde is at
+Northeast and Northerly, then it raineth, with lightning and thunder, and
+is very intemperate weather.
+
+The 13 of Aprill 1589 we set saile homewards in the name of Iesus. In the
+morning we sayled with the winde at Southwest, and lay West and by North,
+but it prooued calme all that night, and the currant Southeast.
+
+The 14 the riuer of Benin was Northeast 7 leagues from the shore, and there
+was little winde and towards night calme.
+
+The l7 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and we had of latitude
+foure degrees and 20 minutes.
+
+The 25 a faire temperate day the winde variable, and here we had three
+degrees and 29 minuts of latitude.
+
+[Sidenote: A deceiptfll currant.] The 8 of May we had sight of the shore,
+which was part of Cauo de Monte, but we did not thinke we had beene so
+farre, but it came so to passe by reason of the currant. In this place M.
+Towrson was in like maner deceiued with the currant.
+
+The 9 we had sight of Cauo de monte.
+
+The 17 a darke drowsie day, this was the first night that I tooke the North
+starre.
+
+The 26 a temperate day with litle winde, and we were in 12 degrees and 13
+minutes of latitude.
+
+The 30 we met a great sea out of the Northwest.
+
+The 6 of Iune we found it as temperate as if we had beene in England, and
+yet we were within the height of the sunne, for it was declined 23 degrees,
+and 26 minuts to the Northward, and we had 15 degrees of latitude.
+
+The 8 faire and temperate as in England, here we met with a counter sea,
+out of the Southborde.
+
+The 15 a faire temperate day, the winde variable, here we had 18 degrees
+and fiftie nine minutes;
+
+[Sidenote: Rockweed or Saragasso all along the sea.] The 12 of Iuly in 30
+degrees of latitude we met with great store of rockweed, which did stick
+together like clusters of grapes, and this continued with vs vntill the 17
+of the said moneth, and then we saw no more, at which 17 day we were in two
+and thirtie degrees sixe and fortie minutes of latitude.
+
+The 25 at sixe of the clocke in the morning, we had sight of the Ile of
+Pike, it bare North and by East from vs, we being 15 leagues off.
+
+The 27 we spake with the poste of London and she told vs good newes of
+England.
+
+The nine and twentieth we had sight of the Island of Cueruo, and the 30 we
+saw the Island of Flores.
+
+The 27 of August in 41 degrees of latitude we saw 9 saile of Britons, and
+three of them followed vs vntill noone, and then gaue vs ouer.
+
+The 30 we had sight of Cape Finisterre.
+
+The eight of September at night wee put into Plimouth sound, and road in
+Causon Bay all night.
+
+The 9 we put into Catwater and there stayed vntill the 28 of September, by
+reason of want of men and sicknesse.
+
+The nine and twentieth we set sayle from Plimouth, and arriued at London
+the second of October 1589.
+
+The commodities that we caried in this voyage were cloth both linnen and
+woollen, yron worke of sundry sorts, Manillios or bracelets of copper,
+glasse beades, and corrall.
+
+The commodities that we brought home were pepper and Elephants teeth, oyle
+of palme, cloth made of Cotton wool very curiously wouen, and cloth made of
+the barke of palme trees. Their monie is pretie white shels, for golde and
+siluer we saw none. [Sidenote: Inamia, a kind of bread in Benin.] They haue
+also great store of cotton growing: their bread is a kind of roots, they
+call it Inamia, and when it is well sodden I would leaue our bread to eat
+of it, it is pleasant in eating, and light of digestion, the roote thereof
+is as bigge as a mans arme. Our men vpon fish-dayes had rather eate the
+rootes with oyle and vineger, then to eate good stockfish. [Sidenote: Wine
+of palm trees.] There are great store of palme trees, out of which they
+gather great store of wine, which wine is white and very pleasant, and we
+should buy two gallons of it for 20 shels. They haue good store of sope,
+and it smelleth like beaten violets. Also many pretie fine mats and baskets
+that they make, and spoones of Elephants teeth very curiously wrought with
+diuers proportions of foules and beasts made vpon them. There is vpon the
+coast wonderfull great lightning and thunder, in so much as I neuer hard
+the like in no Countrey, for it would make the decke or hatches tremble
+vnder our feete, and before we were well acquainted with it, we were
+fearefull, but God be thanked we had no harme. The people are very gentle
+and louing, and they goe naked both men and women vntill they be married,
+and then they goe couered from the middle downe to the knees. [Sidenote:
+Abundance of honey.] They would bring our men earthen pottes of the
+quantitie of two gallons, full of hony and hony combes for 100 shelles.
+They would also bring great store of Oranges and Plantans which is a fruit
+that groweth upon a tree, and is like vnto a Cucumber but very pleasant in
+eating. It hath pleased God of his mercefull goodnesse to give me the
+knowledge how to preserue fresh water with little cost, [Marginal note:
+This preseruatiue is wrought by casting into an hogshead of water an
+handful of bay-salt, as the author told me.] which did serve vs sixe
+moneths at the sea, and when we came into Plimmouth it was much wondered
+at, of the principal men of the towne, who said that there was not sweeter
+water in any spring in Plimmouth. Thus doth God prouide for his creatures,
+vnto whom be praise now and for euermore, Amen.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voiage set forth by M. Iohn Newton, and M. Iohn Bird marchants of
+  London to the kingdome and Citie of Benin in Africa, with a ship called
+  the Richard of Arundell, and a pinnesse, in the yere 1588. briefly set
+  downe in this letter following, written by the chiefe Factor in the
+  voyage to the foresaid Marchants at the time of the ships first arriual
+  at Plimouth.
+
+Worshipful Sirs, the discourse of our whole proceeding in this voyage wil
+aske more time and a person in better health then I am at this present, so
+that I trust you will pardon me, till my comming vp to you: in the meane
+time let this suffice. Whereas we departed in the moneth of December from
+the coast of England with your good ship the Richard of Arundell and the
+pinnesse, we held on our direct course towards our appointed port, and the
+14 day of Februarie following we arriued in the hauen of Benin, where we
+found not water enough to carry the ship ouer the barre, so that we left
+her without in the road, and with the pinnesse and ship boat, into which we
+had put the chiefest of our marchandise, [Sidenote: Goto in Benin.] we went
+vp the riuer to a place called Goto, where we arriued the 20 of February,
+the foresaid Goto being the neerest place that we could come to by water,
+to go for Benin. [Sidenote: The great citie of Benin.] From thence we
+presently sent Negroes to the king, to certifie him of our arriuall, and of
+the cause of our comming thither: who returned to vs againe the 22 day with
+a noble man in their company to bring vs vp to the Citie, and with 200
+Negroes to carrie our commodities: hereupon the 23 day we deliuered our
+marchandize to the Kings Factor, and the 25 day we came to the Citie of
+Benin, where we were well intertained: The sixe and twenty day we went to
+the Court to haue spoken with the king, which (by reason of a solemne feast
+then kept amongst them) we could not doe: but yet we spake with his
+Veadore, or chiefe man, that hath the dealing with the Christians: and we
+conferred with him concerning our trading, who answered vs, that we should
+have all thing to our desire, both in pepper and Elephants teeth.
+
+The first of March, we were admitted to the kings presence, and he made vs
+the like courteous answere for our traffike: the next day we went againe to
+the Court, where the foresaid Veadore shewed vs one basket of greene
+pepper, and another of dry in the stalkes: wee desired to haue it plucked
+from the stalks and made cleane, who answered, that it would aske time, but
+yet it should be done: and that against another yeere it should be in
+better readines, and the reason why we found it so vnprepared was, because
+in this kings time no Christians had euer resorted thither, to lade pepper.
+The next day there were sent vs 12 baskets, and so a litle euery day vntill
+the 9 of March at which time we had made vpon 64 serons of pepper, and 28
+Elephants teeth. In this time of our being at Benin (our natures at this
+first time not so well acquainted with that climate) we fell all of vs into
+the disease of the feuer, whereupon the Captaine sent me downe with those
+goods which we alreadie had receiued, to the rest of our men at Goto: where
+being arriued, I found all the men of our pinnesse sicke also, and by
+reason of their weaknes not able to conuey the pinnesse and goods downe to
+the place where our ship road: but by good hap within two houres after my
+comming to Goto, the boate came vp from the ship, to see how all things
+stood with vs, so that I put the goods into the boat, and went downe
+towards the ship: but by that time I was come aboord, many of our men died:
+namely, Master Benson, the Cooper, the Carpenter, and 3 or 4 more, and my
+selfe was also in such a weake state that I was not able to returne againe
+to Benin. Whereupon I sent vp Samuel Dunne, and the Chirurgian with him to
+our men, that were about to let them blood, if it were thought needfull:
+who at their comming to Benin, found the Captaine and your sonne William
+Bird dead, and Thomas Hempsteede very weake, who also died within two dayes
+after their comming thither. This sorrowfull accident caused them with such
+pepper and teeth, as they could then find, speedily to returne to the ship,
+as by the Cargason will appeare: at their comming away the Veadore tolde
+them, that if they could or would stay any longer time, he would vse all
+possible expedition to bring in more commodities: but the common sicknesse
+so increased and continued amongst vs all, that by the time our men which
+remained were come aboord, we had so many sicke and dead of our companie,
+that we looked all for the same happe, and so thought to loose both our
+ship, life, countrey and all. Very hardly and with much adoe could we get
+vp our ankers, but yet at last by the mercie of God hauing gotten them vp,
+but leauing our pinnesse behind vs, we got to sea, and set saile, which was
+vpon the 13 of Aprill. After which by little and little our men beganne to
+gather vp their crums and to recouer some better strength: and so sailing
+betwixt the Ilands of Cape Verde, and the maine we came to the Islands of
+the Azores vpon the 25 of Iuly, where our men beganne a fresh to grow ill,
+and divers died, among whom Samuel Dun was one, and as many as remained
+liuing were in a hard case: but in the midst of our distresse, it fell so
+well out, by Gods good prouidence, that we met with your ship the Barke
+Burre, on this side the North cape, which did not only keepe vs good
+companie, but also sent vs sixe fresh men aboord, without whose helpe, we
+should surely haue tasted of many inconueniences. But by this good meanes
+we are now at the last arriued in Plimouth, this 9 day of September: and
+for want of better health at this time, I referre the further knowledge of
+more particularities till my comming to London. Yours to commaund Antony
+Ingram.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The second voyage to Benin, set foorth by Master Iohn Newton, and Master
+  Iohn Bird Marchants of London in the yeere 1590 with a ship called the
+  Richard of Arundell of the burthen of one hundreth tunnes, and a small
+  pinnesse, in which voyage Master Iames Welsh was chiefe Maister.
+
+The third of September 1590 we set saile from Ratclife, and the 18 of the
+said moneth we came into Plimouth sound, and the two and twentieth we put
+to sea againe, and at midnight we were off the Lisart, and so passed on our
+voyage vntill the 14 of October, on which day we had sight of Forteuentura
+one of the Canarie Islands, which appeared very ragged as we sailed by it.
+
+The 16 of October, in the latitude of 24 degrees and nine minutes we met
+with a great hollow sea, the like whereof I neuer saw on this coast, and
+this day there came to the ships side a monstrous great fish (I thinke it
+was a Gobarto) which put vp his head to the steepe tubs where the cooke was
+in shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would haue caried away.
+
+The 21 in this latitude of 18 degrees we met with a countersea out of the
+North boord, and the last voyage in this very place we had the countersea
+out of the South, being very calme weather as now it is also.
+
+[Sidenote: A token of a Northerly winde.] The 24 we had sight of Cauo
+Verde, and the 25 we met with a great hollow sea out of the North, which is
+a common signe that the winde will be Northerly, and so it prooued.
+
+The 15 of Nouember we met with three currants out of the West and
+Northwest, one after another, with an houres time betweene each currant.
+This was in the latitude of 6 degrees and 42 minutes.
+
+[Sidenote: Great currants.] The 18 day we met with two other great currants
+out of the Southwest, and the 20 we saw another current out of the
+Northeast, and the 24 we had a great current out of the Southsouthwest, and
+at 6 of the clocke towards night we had 3 currents more.
+
+The 27 we thought that we had gone at the least 2 leagues and a halfe euery
+watch, and it fell out that we sailed but one league euery watch for the
+space of 24 houres, by meanes of a great billow and current that came still
+out of the South.
+
+The 5 of December in setting the watch we cast about and lay East
+Northeast, and Northeast, and here in 5 degrees and a halfe our pinnesse
+lost vs wilfully.
+
+The 7 at the going downe of the Sunne we saw a great blacke spot in the
+Sunne, and the 8. day both at rising and setting we saw the like, which
+spot to our seeming was about the bignesse of a shilling, being in 5
+degrees of latitude, and still there came a great billow of the
+southerboord.
+
+The 14 we sounded and had 15 fadom water and grosse red sand, and 2 leagues
+from the shore the currant set Southeast along the shore with a billow
+still out of the southerboord.
+
+[Sidenote: Two rocks.] The 15 we were thwart a rocke somewhat like the
+Mewstone in England, it was 2 leagues from vs, here we sounded and had 27
+fadom, but the rocke is not aboue a mile from the shore, and a mile farther
+we saw another rocke and betweene them both broken ground; here we sounded
+and had but 20 fadome and blacke sand, and we might see plaine that the
+rockes went not along the shore, but from the land to the seaward, and
+about 5 leagues to the Southwards we sawe a great bay, here we had 4
+degrees and 27 minuts.
+
+[Sidenote: A French ship of Hunfleur.] The 16 we met with a French ship of
+Hunfleur, who robbed our pinnesse, we sent a letter by him, and this night
+we saw another spot in the sunne at his going downe. And towards euening we
+were thwart of a riuer, and right ouer the riuer was a high tuft of trees.
+
+[Sidenote: Cauo del las Palmas.] The 17 we ankered in the riuers mouth, and
+then we found the land to be Cauo de las Palmas, and betweene vs and the
+cape was a big ledge of rockes, one league and a halfe into the sea, and
+they bare to the West of the Cape, we saw also an Island off the point of
+the foreland, thus it waxed night that we could perceiue no more of the
+lande, but onely that it trended in like a bay, where there runneth a
+streame as if it were in the riuer of Thames, and this was the change day
+of the Moone.
+
+The 19 a faire temperate day, and the wind South, we went East, and the
+lande a sterne of vs West, and it shewed low by the water side like
+Islands, this was the East of Cauo de las Palmas, and it trended in with a
+great sound, and we went East all night, and in the morning wee were but 3
+or 4 leagues from the shore.
+
+The 20 we were thwart of a riuer railed Rio de los Barbos.
+
+The 21 we went along the shore East, and 3 or 4 leagues to the West of Cauo
+de tres puntas, I find the bay to be set deeper then it is by 4 leagues,
+and at 4 of the clocke the land begun to shewe high, and the first part of
+it full of Palme trees.
+
+The 24 still going by the shore, the land was very low and full of trees by
+the water side, and at 12 of the clocke we ankered thwart of the riuer
+called, Rio de Boilas. Here we sent our boate a shore with the marchants,
+but they durst not put into the riuer because of a great billow that
+continually brake at the entrance vpon the barre.
+
+The 28 we sailed alongst the shore, and ankered at night in seuen fadom
+because a great current would haue put vs backe, which came from the East
+Southeast from Papuas.
+
+[Sidenote: Arda.] The 29 at noone we were thwart of Arda, and there we
+tooke a Carauel but the men were fled on land, then we went aboord her, but
+she had nothing in her but only a litle oyle of Palme trees, and a few
+roots. The next morning, our Captaine and marchants went to meete
+Portugals, that came in a boate to speake with vs, where they communed
+about the buying of the Carauell of our men againe, and the Portugals
+promised that we should haue for the Carauell, certaine bullocks and
+Elephants teeth, and they gaue vs one tooth and one bullocke presently, and
+sayd they would bring vs the rest the next day.
+
+[Sidenote: Ianuarie.] The first of Ianuarie our Captaine went on land to
+speake with the Portugales, but when he saw they did dissemble, he came
+aboord againe, and presently we vnrigged the Carauell, and set her on fire
+before the towne. Then we set saile and went along the coast, where we saw
+a Date tree, the like whereof is not in all that coast vpon the water side,
+also we fell on ground a litle in one place: [Sidenote: Villa longa.] Thus
+we went to Villa longa, and there ankered.
+
+[Sidenote: Rio de Lagoa.] The third we were as far shot as Rio de Lagoa,
+where our marchants went a shore and vpon the barre they found 3 fadom
+flat, but they went not in because it was late. There is also to the
+Eastward of this riuer a Date tree higher than all the rest of the other
+trees thereabout. Thus we went along the coast, and euery night ankered,
+and al the shore as we went was full of trees and thicke woods.
+
+[Sidenote: The riuer Iaya.] The 6 day in the morning it was very foggy, so
+that we could not see the land, and at three of the clocke in the
+afternoone it cleared vp, and then we found our selues thwart of the riuer
+of Iaya, and when we found the shallow water, we bare into the sea South,
+as we did the voyage before, and came to an ancre in fiue fadom water.
+[Sidenote: The riuer Benin.] The next day we set saile againe, and towards
+noone we were thwart of the riuer of Benin in foure fadom water.
+
+The 10 day our Captaine went on land with the shallop at 2 a clocke in the
+afternoone. All this weeke it was very foggy euery day vntill ten a clocke,
+and all this time hitherto hath beene as temperate as our summer in
+England. This day we went into the road and ankered, and the west point of
+the road bare East northeast off vs, wee riding in foure fadome water.
+
+[Sidenote: Goto.] The 21 a faire temperate day, this day M. Hassald went to
+the towne of Goto, to heare newes of the Captaine.
+
+The 23 came the Carauell, and Samuell in her, and she brought 63 Elephants
+teeth, and three bullocks.
+
+The 28 a faire temperate day, and towards night there fell much raine,
+lightning, and thunder, this day our boate came aboord from Goto.
+
+The 24 of Februarie, we tooke in 298 Cerons or sackes of pepper, and 4
+Elephants teeth, and the winde was at Southeast. And the 26 we put the rest
+of our goods into the Carauell, and M. Hassald went with her to Goto.
+
+The 5 of March the Carauel came againe and brought 21 Cerons of pepper, and
+4 Elephants teeth.
+
+The 9 of Aprill our Carauell came aboord with water for our prouision for
+the sea, and this day also we lost our shallope.
+
+The 17 a drowsie rainie day, and in the afternoone we saw 3 great spoutes
+of raine, two on our larbord side, and one right with the ships head, but
+God be thanked, they came not at vs, and this day we tooke in the last of
+our water for the sea, and the 26 we victualed our Carauell to go with vs
+to the sea.
+
+The 27 we set saile to goe homewarde with the winde at Southwest, and at
+two a clocke in the afternoone, the riuer of Benin was Northeast 8 leagues
+from vs.
+
+The 3 of May we had such a terrible gust with raine, lightning and thunder,
+that it tore and split our fore saile, and also the Carauels foresayle and
+maine-sayle, with the wind at Southeast.
+
+The 12 a faire temperate day, much like our sommer mornings in England,
+being but one degree and a halfe from the line, but at midnight we had a
+cruell gust of raine; and the wind at northeast.
+
+The 24 we were South from Cauo de las Palmas 37 leagues.
+
+The first of Iuly we had sight of the Iland of Braua, and it bare East 7
+leagues off, and this Island is one of the Islands of Cauo Verde.
+
+The 13 of August we spake with the Queenes ships, the Lord Thomas Howard
+being Admirall, and sir Richard Greeneuill Viceadmirall. They kept vs in
+their company vntill the 15 day night, themselues lying a hull, in waight
+for purchase 30 leagues to the Southwest of the Island of Flores.
+
+[Sidenote: We departed in company of a prise.] The 15 we had leaue to
+depart with a fly-boat laden with sugar that came from Sant Thome, which
+was taken by the Queenes ships, whereof my Lord Admirall gaue me great
+charge, not to leaue her vntill she were harbored in England.
+
+The three and twentieth the Northeast part of the Island of Coruo bare of
+vs East and by South sixe leagues off.
+
+The 17 of September we met with a ship of Plimouth that came out of the
+West Indies, but she could tell vs no newes. The next day we had sight of
+another sayle, this day also one of our company named M. Wood died.
+
+The 23 we spake with the Dragon of my Lord of Cumberland, whereof Master
+Iuie was Maister.
+
+The second of October we met with a ship of New-castle which came from
+Newfoundland, and out of her we had 300 couple of Newland fish.
+
+The 6 we had sight of Sillie, and with raine and winde we were forced to
+put into S. Maries sound, where we staied all night, and 4 dayes after.
+
+The 11 we set saile againe, and comming out had three fadom vpon the barre
+at a high water, then we lay out Southeast, through Crow-sand, and shortly
+after we had sight of the lands end, and at ten of the clocke we were
+thwart of the Lysart.
+
+The 13 we were put into Dartmouth, and there we stayd vntill the 12 of
+December. From thence we put out with the winde at West, and the 18 of
+December, God be praised, we ankered at Limehouse in the Thames, where we
+discharged 589 sacks of Pepper, 150 Elephants teeth, and 32 barrels of oile
+of Palme trees.
+
+The commodities that we caried out this second voyage were Broad cloth,
+Kersies, Bayes, Linnen cloth, Yron vnwrought, Bracelets of Copper, Corall,
+Hawks belles, Horsetails, Hats, and such like.
+
+This voyage was more comfortable vnto vs then the first, because we had
+good store of fresh water, and that very sweet: for as yet we haue very
+good water in the shippe which we brought out of the riuer of Benin the
+first day of Aprill 1591. and it is at this day (being the 7 of Iune 1592.)
+to be seene aboord the ship as cleare and as sweet as any fountaine can
+yeeld.
+
+In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues within halfe a degree of the
+equinoctiall line, and there we found it more temperate than where we rode.
+[Marginal note: It is more temperate vnder the equinoctiall, then on the
+coast of Guinie and Benin.] And vnder the line we did kill great store of
+small Dolphines, and many other good fishes, and so did we all the way,
+which was a very great refreshing vnto vs, and the fish neuer forsooke vs
+vntil we were to the Northwards of the Ilands of Azores, and then we could
+see no more fish, but God be thanked wee met with good company of our
+countrey ships which were great comfort vnto vs, being fiue moneths before
+at Sea without any companie. By me Iames Welsh master of the Richard of
+Arundell, in both these voyages to the riuer of Benin.
+
+       *       *       *       *        *
+
+An Aduertisement sent to Philip the second king of Spaine from Angola by
+  one Baltazar Almeida de Sousa, touching the state of the forsayd
+  countrey, written the 21 of May. 1591.
+
+The 26 of Iuly I certified your maiestie by Iohn Frere de Bendanha your
+majesties pay-master and commissioner, with the gouernour Paulo Dias, which
+is lately deceased, of all things that happened the 28 of December in the
+yere last past 1590. Now I thought it conuenient to aduertise your maiestie
+what hath fallen out since that time, which is as foloweth. The gouernour
+Luis Serrano encamped himselfe eight leagues from Cabasa, where the Negro
+king dwelleth with 350 Portugal souldiers: and afterward being there
+encamped, it hapned that the King of Matamba sent a strong and mightie
+army, and in warlike maner, with strange inuentions for the sayd purpose.
+[Sidenote: 114 Portugals slaine in Angola.] So the king of Angola gaue this
+other king battell, and the gouernour sent 114 souldiers Portugals to helpe
+the said king of Angola: in which battell it was the will of God that our
+army was ouerthrown and all slaine, as well our Portugals as the Moores
+which tooke part with them. So with this ouerthrow it happened that this
+realme the second time hath rebelled against your maiestie. Herevpon the
+Governour assembling the rest of his Portugal souldiers, to the number of
+250 altogether, went to Amasanguano, which is now his place of abode.
+Moreouer, besides the manifold losses which haue befallen the Portugals in
+this realme, your maiestie hath sustained other great misfortunes in your
+lands and goods. And because I cannot personally come to certifie your
+maiestie thereof, I thought it good to write some part of the same whereby
+your maiestie may vnderstand the estate of this countrey. This realme for
+the most part thereof hath twise benne wonne, and twise lost for want of
+good gouernment For here haue bene many gouernours which haue pretended to
+do iustice, but haue pitifully neglected the same, and practised the cleane
+contrary.
+
+[Sidenote: The only way to reduce a rebellous kingdom vnto obedience.] And
+this I know to be most true. But the onely way to recouer this realme, and
+to augment your maiesties lands, goods and treasure, must be by sending
+some noble and mighty man to rule here, which must bring authoritie from
+your maiestie, and by taking streight order that euery captaine which doeth
+conquere here may bee rewarded according to his deserts. Likewise your
+maiestie must send hither 2000 good souldiers, with munition and sufficient
+store of prouision for them. And by this means your highnesse shall know
+what yeerely reuenue Angola will yeeld vnto your coffers, and what profit
+will grow thereof. Otherwise your maiestie shall reape but litle benefit
+here. If with my presence I may doe your maiestie any seruice in giuing
+information of the state of this realme, as one which haue had experience
+thereof, and haue seene the order of it, vpon the vnderstanding of your
+maiesties pleasure herein, I will do my best endeuour. [Sidenote: An vsuall
+trick of lewd gouernours.] And the cause whereof I haue not done this
+heretofore hath bene, by reason that the Gouernors of this realme would
+suffer none of the captaines which haue conquered this countrey to informe
+your maiestie of that which is needfull for your seruice, and the
+augmenting of this conquest. Our lord preserue your catholique person with
+increase of many kingdomes, and the augmentation of youre crowne. Written,
+in the conquest of the realme of Angola the 21 of May 1591. Your majesties
+most loiall subiect, Baltazar Almeida de Souza.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Confimatio treugarum inter Regem Angliae Eduardum quartum, et Ioannem
+  secundum Regem Portugalliae, datarum in oppido montis Maioris 8
+  Februarij, et apud Westmonasterium 12 Septembris, 1482, anno regni 22
+  Regis Eduardi quarti, lingua Lusitanica ex opere sequenti excerpta.
+
+Libro das obras de Garcia de Resende, que tracta da vida e feitos del Rey
+  dom Ioham secundo.
+
+Embaixada que el Ray mandou a el Rey d'Inglaterra, cap.33
+
+Eda qui de Monte Mor mandou el Rey por embaixadores a el rey dom Duarte de
+Inglaterra Ruy de Sousa pessoa principal e de muyto bon saber e credito, de
+que el Rey muyto confiaua, e ho doutor Ioam d'Eluas, e Fernam de Pina por
+secretario. E foram por mar muy honradamente com muy boa companhia: hos
+quaes foram en nome del Rey confirmar as ligas antiquas com Inglaterra, que
+polla condisan dellas ho nouo Rey de hum reyno e do outro era obrigado a
+mandar confirmar: e tambien pera mostrarem ho titolo que el rey tinha no
+senhorio de Guinee, pera que depois de visto el rey d'Inglaterra defendesse
+em todos seus reynos, que ninguen armasse nem podesse mandar a Guinee: e
+assi mandasse desfazer buna armada, que pera las faziam, per mandado do
+Duque de Medina Sidonia, hum Ioam Tintam e hum Guilherme Fabiam Ingreses.
+Com ha qual embaixada el rey d'Inglaterra mostrou receber grande
+contentamento, e foy delle com muyta honra recebida, e em tudo fez
+inteiramente ho que pellos embaixadores lhe foy requerido. De que elles
+trouxeran autenticas [Marginal note: These writings are in the tower.]
+escrituras das diligencias que con pubricos pregones fizeram: e assi as
+prouisones das aprauasones que eran necessarias: e com tudo muyto ben
+acabado, e ha vontade del rey se vieram.
+
+
+The Ambassage which king Iohn the second, king of Portugall, sent to Edward
+  the fourth king of England, which in part was to stay one Iohn Tintam,
+  and one William Fabian English men, from proceeding in a voyage which
+  they were preparing fot Guinea, 1481, taken out of the booke of the
+  workes of Garcias de Resende, which intreateth of the life and acts of
+  Don Iohn the second, king of Portugall. Chap. 33.
+
+And afterwards the king sent as Ambassadours from the towne of Monte maior
+to king Edward the fourth of England, Ruy de Sousa, a principall person,
+and a man of great wisedome and estimation, and in whom the king reposed
+great trust, with doctor Iohn d'Eluas, and Ferdinand de Pina, as
+secretarie. And they made their voyage by sea very honourably, being very
+well accompanied. [Sidenote: The first cause of this ambassage.] These men
+were sent on the behalfe of their king, to confirme the ancient leagues
+England, wherein it was conditioned that the new king of the one and of the
+other kingdome, should be bound to send to confirme the olde leagues.
+[Sidenote: The second cause.] And likewise they had order to shew and make
+him acquainted with the title which the king held in the segneury of
+Ginnee, to the intent that after the king of England had seene the same, he
+should giue charge thorow all his kingdomes, that no man should arme or set
+foorth ships to Ginnee: [Sidenote: The third cause.] and also to request
+him, that it would please him to giue commandement to dissolue a certaine
+fleet, which one Iohn Tintam and one William Fabian, English men, were
+making, by commandement of the duke of Medina Sidonia, to goe to the
+aforesayd parts of Ginnee. With which ambassage the king of England seemed
+to be very well pleased, and they were receiued of him with very great
+honour, and he condescended vnto all that the ambassadours required of him,
+at whose hands they receiued authenticall writings of the diligence which
+they had performed, with publication thereof by the heralds: and also
+prouisoes of those confirmations which were necessary. And hauing
+dispatched all things well, and with the kings good will, they returned
+home into their countrey.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A relation sent by Melchior Petoney to Nigil de Moura at Lisbon, from the
+  Iland and Castle of Arguin, standing a little to the southward of Cape
+  Blanco, in the Northerly latitude of 19 degrees, concerning the rich and
+  secret trade from the inland of Africa thither: Anno 1591.
+
+[Sidenote: Commodities fit for Arguin.] As concerning the trade to this
+Castle and Iland of Arguin, your worship is to vnderstand, that if it would
+please the kings maiesty to send hither two or three carauels once in a
+yeere with Flanders and Spanish commodities, as Bracelets of glasse,
+Kniues, Belles, Linnen-cloth, Looking-glasses, with other kindes of small
+wares, his hignesse might do great good here. For 50 leagues vp into the
+land the Moores haue many exceedingly rich golde mines; insomuch that they
+bring downe their golde to this Castle to traffique with vs: and for a
+small trifle they will give vs a great wedge of gold. And because here is
+no trade, the sayd Moores cary their golde to Fez being 250 leagues distant
+from hence, and there doe exchange the same for the forsayd kindes of
+commodities. By this meanes also his maiesty might stop that passage, and
+keepe the king of Fez from so huge a mass of golde. [Sidenote: Scarlet and
+fine Purple cloth greatly accepted.] Scarlet-clothes, and fine Purples are
+greatly accepted of in these parts. It is a most fertile country within the
+land, and yeeldeth great store of Wheat, flesh of all kindes, and abundance
+of fruits. [Sidenote: A good harbor before the Castle of Arguin.] Therefore
+if it were possible, you should do well to deale with his maiesty, either
+himselfe to send a couple of carauels, or to giue your worship leaue to
+traffique here: for here is a very good harbour where ships may ride at
+ancre hard by the Castle. The countrey where all the golde-mines are is
+called The kingdome of Darha. [Marginal note: Concerning this kingdome
+reade Leo Africanus a little after the beginning of his 6 booke.] In this
+kingdome are great store of cities and townes; and in euery city and towne
+a Captaine with certaine souldiers; which Captaines are lords and owners of
+the sayd townes. One city there is called Couton, another Xanigeton, as
+also the cities of Tubguer, Azegue, Amader, Quaherque, and the towne of
+Faroo. The which townes and cities are very great and fairely built, being
+inhabited by rich Moores, and abounding with all kinde of cattell, Barley
+and Dates. And here is such plenty of golde found vpon the sands by the
+riuers side, that the sayd Moores usually cary the same Northward to
+Marocco, and Southward to the city of Tombuto in the land of Negros, which
+city standeth about 300 leagues from the kingdome of Darha; and this
+kingdome is but 60 leagues from this Iland and Castle of Arguin. Wherefore
+I beseech your worship to put his maiesty in remembrance hereof; for the
+sayd cities and townes are but ten dayes iourney from hence. I heartily
+wish that his maiesty would send two or three marchants to see the state of
+the Countrey, who might trauell to the aforesayd cities, to understand of
+their rich trade. For any man may go safe and come safe from those places.
+And thus without troubling of your worship any further, I humbly take my
+leaue. From the Iland and Castle of Arguin the 20 of Ianuary 1591.
+
+Your worships seruant
+
+Melchior Petoney.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the riuers of Senega
+  and Gambra adioning vpon Guinea, 1591 with a discourse of the treasons of
+  certaine of Don Antonio his seruants and followers.
+
+By vertue of her Maiesties most gracious charter giuen in the yeere 1588,
+and in the thirtieth yeere of her Highnesse reigne, certaine English
+marchants are granted to trade, in and from the riuer of Senega to and in
+the riuer of Gambra, on the Westerne coast of Africa. The chiefest places
+of traffique on that coast betweene these riuers, are these:
+
+[Sidenote: The names of the chiefe places of traffike between Senega and
+Gambra.] 1 Senega riuer: The commodities be hides, gumme, elephants teeth,
+a few graines, ostrich feathers, amber-griece, and some golde.
+
+2 Beseguiache, a towne by Capo Verde * [sic--KTH] leagues from Senega
+riuer: The commodities be small hides, and a few teeth.
+
+3 Refisca Vieio, a towne 4 leagues from Beseguiache: The commodities be
+small hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+4 Palmerin, a towne 2 leagues from Refisca: The commodities be small hides,
+and a few elephants teeth now and then.
+
+5 Porto d'Ally, a towne 5 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be small
+hides, teeth, amber-griece, and a little golde: and many Portugals are
+there.
+
+6 Candimal, a towne halfe a league from Porto d'Ally: The commodities be
+small hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+7 Palmerin, a towne 3 leagues from Candimal: The commodities be small
+hides, and a few teeth now and then.
+
+8 Ioala, a towne 6 leagues from Palmerin: The commodities be hides, waxe,
+elephants teeth, rice, and some golde: and many Spaniards and Portugals are
+there.
+
+9 Gambra riuer: The commodities are rice, waxe, hides, elephants teeth, and
+golde.
+
+The Frenchmen of Diepe and New-hauen haue traded thither aboue thirty
+yeres: and commonly with four or five ships a yere, whereof two small barks
+go into the riuer of Senega. The other were wont (vntill within these foure
+yeres, that our ships came thither) to ride with their ships in the road of
+Porto d'Ally and so sent their small shaloups of sixe or eight tunnes to
+some of these places on the Sea coast before repeated. Where in all places
+generally they were well beloued and as courteously entertained of the
+Negros, as if they had been naturally borne in the country. And very often
+the Negros come into France and returne againe, which is a further
+increasing of mutuall loue and amity. Since our comming to that coast the
+Frenchmen ride with their shippes at Refisca Vieio and suffered vs to ancre
+with our shippes at Porto d'Ally. The Frenchmen neuer vse to go into the
+riuer of Gambra: which is a riuer of secret trade and riches concealed by
+the Portugals. For long since one Frenchman entered the riuer with a small
+barke which was betrayed, surprised and taken by two gallies of the
+Portugals.
+
+In our second voyage and second yeere there were by vile treacherous meanes
+of the Portugals and the king of the Negros consent in Porto d'Ally and
+Ioala about forty Englishmen cruelly slaine and captiued, and most or all
+of their goods confiscated: whereof there returned onely two, which were
+marchants. And also by procurement of Pedro Gonsalues, one of Don Antonio
+the kings seruants, Thomas Dassel and others had bene betrayed, if it had
+not pleased Almighty God to reueale the same, whereby it was preuented.
+
+From the South side of Senega riuer on the Sea coast vnto about Palmerin is
+all one kingdome of Negros. The kings name is Melick Zamba, who dwelleth
+two dayes iourney within the land from Refisca.
+
+The 12 of Nouember 1591, I Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel factors in a
+ship called the Nightingale of London 125 tunnes, and a pinnesse called the
+Messenger of 40 tonnes arriued neere vnto Capo Verde at a little Iland
+called The Iland of liberty. At this Iland we set vp a small pinnesse, with
+which we cary our marchandise on land when wee traffique. And in the meane
+time Thomas Dassel went with the great pinnesse to traffike with Spaniards
+or Portugals in Porto d'Ally or Ioala. Ouer against the sayd Iland on the
+maine is an habitation of the Negros called Besegueache. The alcaide or
+gouernor thereof with a great traine came aboord in their canoas to receiue
+the kings dueties for ankerage and permitting the quiet setting vp of our
+pinnesse: who liked passing well that no Portugall came in the shippe,
+saying, we should be better thought of by the king and people, if we neuer
+did bring Portugall, but come of our selues as the Frenchmen euer did and
+doe. And to purchase the more loue, I Richard Rainolds gaue him and all his
+company courteous entertainment. Also vpon his intreaty, hauing sufficient
+pledge aboord, I and others went on land with him. At this instant there
+was great warre betweene this alcaide and another gouernor of the next
+prouince. Neuerthelesse vpon our arriuall truce was taken for a space; and
+I with our company conducted among both enemies to the gouernors house in
+Besegueache, and were gently and friendly feasted after their maner, and
+with some presents returned safe aboord againe. The next day the alcaide
+came aboord againe, to wil me to send some yron and other commodities in
+the boat to traffike with the Negros, and also requested me that I would go
+to Refisca with the ship; which I did. And one thing I noted, that a number
+of Negros attended the alcaides landing in warlike maner with bowes and
+poisoned arrowes, darts poisoned, and swords, (because that the enemies by
+reason of the truce taken were there also to view the ship) who for the
+most part approched to him kneeling downe and kissed the backe of his hand.
+
+The 17 of Nouember we weyed anker; and by reason no French ship was yet
+come, I went to the road of Refisca: where I sent for the alcaides
+interpreters, who came thither aboord, and receiued of me the kings duties
+for to haue free traffike with the Negros, with whom dayly I exchanged my
+yron and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth, finding the people
+very friendly and tractable. And the next day after our arriuall I went vp
+into the land about three miles to the towne of Refisca, where I was
+friendly vsed and well entertained of the alcaide, and especially of a
+yoong nobleman called Conde Amar Pattay, who presented me with an oxe for
+my company, goats and some yoong kids, assuring me that the king would be
+glad to heare of the arriuall of a Christians ship, whom they called
+Blancos, that is, white men: especially of an English ship. And so dayly
+the yong Conde came with a small company of horsemen to the sea side,
+feasting me very kindly and courteously. And the fift of December he with
+his traine came aboord to see the ship; which to them seemed woonderfull,
+as people that seldome had seene the like: who tolde me that his messenger
+from the king was returned; and the king reioyed much to heare that English
+men were come with a ship to trade in his ports; and being the first
+Englishman that euer came with a ship, I was the better welcome; promising
+that I or any Englishman hereafter should be wel intreated and find good
+dealing at their hands. And further the Conde on the kings behalfe and his
+owne, earnestly requested, that before my departure off the coast I would
+returne againe to his road to conferre with him for the better continuance
+and confirming of amity betweene them and Englishmen: which I agreed vnto.
+And so shewing him and his company the best friendship and courtesie I
+could, he went on shore, and should haue had the honor of our ordinance but
+that he desired the contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and
+noise of the gunnes, which they did greatly admire.
+
+The 13 of December at night we weighed anker, and arriued the 14 day at the
+road of Porto d'Ally, which is another kingdome: the king thereof is called
+Amar Meleck, and sonne to Meleck Zamba the other king, and dwelleth a dayes
+iourney and an halfe from Porto d'Ally. When we had ankered, the kings
+kinsmen being gouernors, with all the officers of that towne came aboord to
+receiue all duties for the ship and licence to traffike due to the king;
+who there generally seemed to be very glad that no Portugall was come in
+our ship out of England; saying it was the kings pleasure we should bring
+none hereafter; for that the king did esteeme them as people of no truth;
+and complained of one Francisco de Costa seruant to Don Antonio, how he had
+often and the last yere also abused and deluded their king Amar Meleck in
+promising to bring him certaine things out of England, which he neuer
+performed, and deemed that to be the cause of his staying behinde this
+voyage, and that neither Spaniard nor Portugall could abide vs, but
+reported very badly and gaue out hard speeches tending to the defamation
+and great dishonour of England: [Sidenote: The monstrous lies of a
+Portugall.] and also affirmed that at the arriuall of an English ship
+called The Command, of Richard Kelley of Dartmouth, one Pedro Gonsalues a
+Portugall that came in the sayd ship from Don Antonio reported vnto them,
+that we were fled out of England and come away vpon intent to rob and do
+great spoile vpon this coast to the Negros and Portugals, and that Thomas
+Dassel had murdered Francisco de Acosta since our comming from England, who
+was comming to their king in our ship with great presents from Don Antonio,
+and desired that at our arriuall stay might be made of our goods and our
+selues in secret maner; which they denied, not giuing credit to his report,
+hauing bene often abused by such friuolous and slanderous speeches by that
+nation; telling me their king was sory for the former murder and captiuity
+of our nation, and would neuer yeeld to the like, hauing the Portugals and
+Spaniards in generall hatred euer since, and conceiueth much better of our
+countrey, and vs, then these our enemies report of. [Sidenote: Port Dally
+the chief place of trade.] For which I yeelded them hearty thanks, assuring
+them they should finde great difference betweene the loyalty of the one and
+disloyalty of the other; and so payed their dueties: and for that it was
+the chiefe place of trade, I shewed them how I was resolued to goe to their
+king with certaine presents which we had brought out of England; which we
+determined for the more honor and credit of our countrey, and augmenting of
+their better affection toward vs.
+
+All this while Thomas Dassel was with our great pinnesse at the towne of
+Ioala, being in the kingdome of king Iocoel Lamiockeric, traffiking with
+the Spaniards and Portugals there. And the forenamed Pedro Gonsalues, which
+came out of England, was there also with other English marchants about the
+busines of Rich. Kelley; and as it should seeme, for that he could not
+obtaine his mischieuous pretended purpose against Thomas Dassel and others
+at the towne of Porto d'Ally, where I Richard Rainolds remained, he
+attempted with consent of other Portugals which were made priuy to his
+intent to betray the sayd Thomas Dassel at this towne, and had with bribes
+seduced the chiefe commanders and Negros to effect his wicked and most
+villanous practise: which as God would, was reuealed to the sayd Thomas
+Dassel by Rich. Cape an Englishman and seruant to the forenamed Rich.
+Kelley: to whom this sayd Pedro Gonsalues had disclosed his secret
+treachery, willing him with all expedition to stand vpon his guard. [The
+Cherubin of Lime at Ioala.] Whereupon Thomas Dassel went aboard a small
+English barke called The Cherubin of Lime, and there one Iohn Payua a
+Portugall and seruant of Don Antonio declared, that if he and one Garcia a
+Portugall of the sayd towne would haue consented with Pedro Gonsalues, the
+sayd Thomas Dassel had bene betrayed long before. And vpon this warning
+Thomas Dassel the next day hauing gotten three Portugals aboord, aduised
+for our better securities to send two on land, and detained one with him
+called Villa noua, telling them that if the next day by eight of the
+clocke, they would bring Pedro Gonsalues aboard to him, he would release
+the sayd Villa noua, which they did not. And Thomas Dassel hauing
+intelligence that certaine Negros and Portugals were ridden post ouerland
+to Porto d'Ally with intent to haue Richard Rainolds and his company stayd
+on land, being doubtfull what friendship soeuer the vnconstant Negros
+professed (by reason they be often wauering being ouercome with drinking
+wine) how they would deale, to preuent the dangerous wiles that might be
+effected in the road by Portugals, and for better strength, the 24 of
+December he came with his pinnesse and Portugall to ride in the road of
+Porto d'Ally, where our great shippe the Nightingall was: who was no sooner
+arriued but he had newes also from the shore from Iohn Baily Anthony
+Dassels seruant, who was there with our goods detained by the Portugals
+means, that aboue 20 Portugals and Spaniards were come from Ioala by land,
+and Pedro Gonsalues in their company, to take order for the releasing of
+Villa noua. So hauing had conference two or three dayes with the
+Commanders, the Negros, some Spaniards, and some Portugals, in the end by
+due examination of the matter the Negros seeing how vilely Pedro Gonsalues
+had delt, he being in their power, sayd he should suffer death or be
+tortured, for an example to others. But we in recompense of his cruelty
+pitied him and shewed mercy, desiring the Negros to intreat him well though
+vndeserued: and therevpon the Commanders brought him aboord the pinnesse to
+Thomas Dassel to do with him what he would: where at his comming from the
+shore, for lauish speeches which he used of Princes, he was well buffetted
+by a Spaniard, and might haue bene slaine, if for our sakes he had not bene
+rescued.
+
+[Sidenote: Note.] While I went on shore with Villa noua, the sayd Pedro
+Gonsalues confessed vnto Thomas Dassel that he did enquire of some Negros
+and Portugals if he might not stay him and his goods in the land, and that
+he did nothing but by commission from his king by his letters which he
+receiued from London in Dartmouth after we were departed from London, for
+that we presumed to come to Guinea to traffike without a seruant of his:
+and further, that he had power or procuration from Francisco de Costa the
+Portugall that stayed behinde in England to detaine the goods of Anthony
+Dassel in Guinea.
+
+By consent of M. Francis Tucker, Iohn Browbeare, and the rest of the
+factours of Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonsalues came, for
+auoiding further mischiefe that might be practised, we agreed that the sayd
+Pedro Gonsalues should stay aboord our shippe, and not goe any more on land
+vntill they departed. So the ninth of Ianuary he was deliuered aboord to
+goe for England in the same ship wherein he came: who was all the time of
+his abode in our shippe both courteously and friendly vsed at my hands,
+much against the mariners willes, who could not abide such a wicked
+creature and caitiue, that is nourished and relieued in our countrey, and
+yet by villanous meanes sought the destruction of vs all.
+
+The Spaniards and Portugals though they be dissemblers and not to be
+trusted, when they perceiued how king Amar Melicks Negros befriended and
+fauored vs, and that it would be preiudiciall to their trade for diuers
+respects, if we should any way be iniuried, renounced the sayd practises,
+detesting the author, and protested to defend vs in such cases with all
+faithfulnesse: desiring we would, as the king of Negros had commanded vs,
+neuer bring Portugal with vs more: vsing this phrase in disdaine of such as
+came out of England, let your Portugals be barres of yron: for in trueth in
+regard of the rich trade maintained by Frenchmen and by vs of late, they
+esteeme more of one barre of yron then of twenty Portugals which we should
+bring out of England: who at their comming thither very subtilly
+disaduantage vs, and doe great hurt to euery party.
+
+At the beginning of these broiles the king Amar Melick had sent his chiefe
+secretary and three horses for me Richard Rainolds: but I denied to goe by
+reason of the hurley burley, though I might haue had Negros of account for
+pledges aboord: yet we sent the presents vnto the king; who so soone as he
+vnderstood the cause why I came not to him, being sory and offended
+thereat, commanded presently by proclamation, that no iniury should be
+offered vs in his dominions by his owne people, or suffered to be done by
+Spaniards or Portugals. And if the Negros ioyning to his kingdome should
+confederate with the Spaniards and Portugals to molest or trouble vs; that
+his subiects the Negros should be ready to ayde, succor and defend vs. In
+which people appeared more confident loue and good will toward vs, then
+euer we shall finde either of Spaniards or Portugals, though we should
+relieue them of the greatest misery that can be imagined.
+
+In the riuer of Senega no Spaniard or Portugall vse to trade: and onely one
+Portugall called Ganigoga dwelleth farre within the riuer, who was maried
+to a kings daughter.
+
+[Sidenote: Note this trade.] In the townes of Porto d'Ally and Ioala, being
+townes of chiefest trade, and in the townes of Canton and Cassan in the
+riuer of Gambra are many Spaniards and Portugals resident by permission of
+the Negros; who haue rich trades there along the coast, especially to San
+Domingo and Rio grande, not far distant from Gambra riuer; whither they
+transport the yron which they buy of Frenchmen and vs, and exchange it for
+Negros; which be caried continually to the West Indies in such ships as
+came from Spaine. [Sidenote: A rich trade for golde in Rio grande.] Also by
+the gouernors order and Renters of Castel de Mina and other places, where
+golde is, vpon the coast of Guinea, they haue a place limited how farre
+they must go to trade within the riuer of Gambra; and further they may not
+go vpon paine of confiscation of their goods, and losse of life: for that
+the Renters themselues send at certaine times their owne barkes within the
+riuer to such places, where as they haue great store of golde. And in all
+these places hereabouts, where we vse to trade, they haue no Fort, Castle,
+or place of strength, but onely trading by the Negros safeconduct and
+permission. And the most part of the Spaniards and Portugals that be
+resident in these places be banished men or fugitiues, for committing most
+hainous crimes and incestuous acts, their life and conuersation being
+agreeable; and they are of the basest behauiour that we haue euer seene of
+these nations in any other countrey.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe relation concerning the estate of the cities and prouinces of
+  Tombuto and Gago written in Marocco the first of August 1594, and sent to
+  M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London.
+
+My hearty commendations premised: your letter of late I receiued, and found
+that you would haue me discouer vnto you the estate and quality of the
+countreyes of Tombuto and Gago. And that you may not thinke me to slumber
+in this action, wherein you would be truely and perfectly resolued, you
+shall vnderstand, that not ten dayes past here came a Cahaia of the
+Andoluzes home from Gago, and another principall Moore, whom the king sent
+thither at the first with Alcaide Hamode, and they brought with them thirty
+mules laden with gold. I saw the same come into the Alcasaua with mine owne
+eies: and these men themselues came not poore, but with such wealth, that
+they came away without the kings commandement; and for that cause the king
+will pay them no wages for the time they haue beene there. On the other
+side they dare not aske the king for any wages. And when Alcaide Hamode saw
+that the Cahaia of the Andoluzes would not stay in Gago with him, he
+thought good to send these thirty mules laden with golde by him, with
+letters of commendations, by which the king smelled their riches that they
+brought with them: and this was the cause of the kings displeasure towards
+them. So now there remaineth in Gago Alcaide Hamode, and Alcaide Iawdara,
+and Alcaide Bucthare. And here are in a readinesse to depart in the end of
+next September Alcaide Monsor, Ben Abdrahaman Allies, Monsor Rico with fiue
+thousand men, most of the fettilase, that is to say, of fier match, and
+muskets. [Sidenote: Commodities for Gago.] There is gone good store of reds
+and yellowes: and this yere here was want of the same commodity; but I
+trust the next yere wil be no want. But in fine the king doth prosper wel
+in those parts, and here are many pledges come hither, and namely three of
+the kings sonnes of Gago and the Iustice; I saw them come in with the
+treasure. Now when Alcaide Monsor commeth to Gago, the which will be in
+Ianuary next, then returneth hither Alcaide Hamode with all the treasure,
+and Alcaide Monsor is to keepe Gago vntill the king take further order. And
+thus much for Gago. Thus not hauing any other thing to write at this
+present, I commend you to the mercifull tuition of the almighty.
+
+From Marocco the first of August 1594.
+
+Your assured friend Laurence Madoc.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Another briefe relation concerning the late conquest and exceeding great
+  riches of the cities and prouinces Tombuth and Gogo, written from Morocco
+  the 30 August 1594, to M. Anthony Dassel marchant of London aforesayd.
+
+Louing friend M. Dassel, two of your letters I haue receiued, one by the
+shippe called The Amity, the other by the Concord: the chiefest matter
+therein was to be satisfied of the king of Morocco his proceedings in
+Guinea. Therefore these are to let you vnderstand that there went with
+Alcaide Hamode for those parts seuenteene hundred men: who passing ouer the
+sands, for want of water perished one third part of them: [Sidenote:
+Tombuto taken.] and at their comming to the city of Tombuto, the Negros
+made some resistence: but to small purpose, for that they had no defence
+but with their asagaies or iauelings poisoned. [Sidenote: Gago taken.] So
+they tooke it, and proceeded to the city of Gago, where the Negros were in
+numbers infinite, and meant to stand to the vttermost for their countrey:
+but the Moores slew them so fest, that they were fain to yeeld, and do pay
+tribute by the yere. The rent of Tombuto is 60 quintals of golde by the
+yeere: the goodnesse whereof you know. What rent Gago will yeeld, you shall
+know at the Spring, for then Alcaide Hamode commeth home. The rent of
+Tombuto is come by the cafelow or carouan, which is, as aboue mentioned, 60
+quintals. The report is, that Mahomed bringeth with him such an infinite
+treasure as I neuer heard of: it doth appeare that they haue more golde
+then any other parte of the world beside. The Alcaide winneth all the
+countrey where he goeth without fighting and is going downe towards the sea
+coast. The king of Marocco is like to be the greatest prince in the world
+for money, if he keepe this countrey. But I make account assoone as the
+king of Spaine hath quietnesse in Christendome, he wil thrust him out: for
+that the kings force is not great as yet; but he meaneth to be stronger.
+There is a campe ready to go now with a viceroy: the speech is with 3000
+men: but I thinke they will be hardly 2000; for by report, 3000 men are
+enough to conquer all the countrey: for they haue no defence of importance
+against an enemy. I thinke Hamode will be returned home in Ianuary or
+thereabout: for he stayeth but for the comming of the viceroy. Mulley
+Balasen the kings sonne of Marocco was slaine in Guinea by his own men, and
+they were presently killed, because they should tell no tales. And thus
+leauing to trouble you, I commit you to God, who prosper you in all your
+proceedings. From Marocco the first of August 1594.
+
+Yours to command for euer Laurence Madoc.
+
+Of these two rich cities and kingdomes of Tombuto and Gago Leo Africanus
+writeth at large in the beginning of his seuenth booke of the description
+of Africa, which worthy worke is to be annexed vnto the end of this second
+volume.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe extract of a patent granted to M. Thomas Gregory of Tanton, and
+  others, for traffique betweene the riuer of Nonnia and the riuers of
+  Madrabumba and Sierra Leona on the coast of Guinea, in the yeere 1592.
+
+In May the 34 yeere of our gracious soueraigne Queene Elizabeth, a patent
+of speciall licence was granted to Thomas Gregory of Tanton in the county
+of Somerset, and to Thomas Pope, and certaine other marchants to traffique
+into Guinea from the Northermost part of the riuer of Nonnia to the
+Southermost parts of the riuers of Madrabumba and Sierra Leona, and to
+other parts as well to the Southeast as to the Northwest, for a certaine
+number of leagues therein specified which amount to an hundred or
+thereabout. Which patent was granted for the terme of ten yeeres: as
+appeareth at large in the sayd patent recorded in the Rolles in her
+Majesties Chancery.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships laden with quicksiluer and the
+  Popes bulles, bound for the West Indies, by M. Thomas White in the Amity
+  of London, 1592.
+
+The 26 of Iuly 1592, in my returning out of Barbary in the ship called the
+Amity of London, being in the height of 36 degrees or thereabout, at foure
+of the clocke in the morning we had sight of two shippes, being distant
+from vs about three or foure leagues: by seuen of the clocke we fetched
+them vp, and were within gunshot: whose boldnesse, hauing the king of
+Spaines armes displayed, did make vs judge them rather ships of warre then
+laden with marchandise. And as it appeared by their owne speeches, they
+made full account to haue taken vs: it being a question among them, whether
+it were best to cary vs to S. Lucar, or to Lisbon. We waued ech other a
+maine. They hauing placed themselues in warlike order one a cables length
+before another, we began the fight. In the which we continued, so fast as
+we were able to charge and discharge, the space of fiue houres, being neuer
+a cables length distant either of vs from other. In which time we receiued
+diuers shot both in the hull of our ship, masts, and sailes, to the number
+of 32 great, besides 500 musket shot and harquebuzes a crocke at the least,
+which we tolde after the fight. And because we perceiued them to be stout,
+we thought good to boord the Biscaine, which was on head the other: where
+lying aboord about an houre, and plying our ordinance and small shot; in
+the end we stowed all his men. Now the other in the flieboat, thinking we
+had entred our men in their fellow, bare roome with vs, meaning to haue
+layed vs aboord, and so to haue intrapped vs betwixt them both: which we
+perceiuing, fitted our ordinance so for him, as we quitted our selues of
+him, and he boorded his fellow: by which meanes they both fell from vs.
+Then presently we kept our loofe, hoised our top-sailes, and weathered
+them, and came hard aboord the flieboat with our ordinance prepared, and
+gaue her our whole broad side, with the which we slew diuers of their men;
+so as we might see the blood run out at the scupper holes. After that we
+cast about, and new charged all our ordinance, and came vpon them againe,
+willing them to yeeld, or els we would sinke them: whereupon the one would
+haue yeelded, which was betweene winde and water; but the other called him
+traitor. Vnto whom we made answere, that if he would not yeeld presently
+also, we would sinke him first. [Sidenote: Marke this othe.] And thereupon
+he understanding our determination, presently put out a white flag, and
+yeelded, and yet refused to strike their own sailes, for that they were
+sworne neuer to strike to any Englishman. We then commanded their captaines
+and masters to come aboord vs; which they did. And after examination and
+stowing them, we sent certaine of our owne men aboord them, and strook
+their sailes, and manned their ships: finding in them both 126 persons
+liuing, and 8 dead, besides those which they themselues had cast ouerboord.
+So it pleased God to giue vs the victory being but 42 men and a boy,
+whereof 2 were killed and 3 wounded: for the which good successe we giue
+God the only praise. These two rich prizes laden with 1400 cheste of
+quicksiluer with the armes of Castile and Leon fastened vpon them, and with
+a great quantity of bulles or indulgences, and gilded Missals or Seruice
+books, with an hundred tonnes of excellent wines, we brought shortly after
+into the riuer of Thames vp to Blacke-wall.
+
+By the taking of this quicksiluer, about 1400 chests, the king of Spaine
+loseth for euery quintall of the same a quintall of siluer that should haue
+beene deliuered him by the masters of the mines there, which amounteth to
+600000 pounds.
+
+More by taking of his bulles, to wit, two millions and 72 thousand for
+liuing and dead persons for the prouinces of Noua Hispania, Iucatan,
+Guatimala, the Honduras, and the Phillippinas, taxed at two reals the
+piece. And more for eighteene thousand bulles taxed at foure reals,
+amounteth all to 107700 pounds. Summa totalis 707700 li.
+
+More there were taken ten fardels of gilt missals and breuiaries sent for
+the kings account.
+
+So the hindrance that the king receiueth by the losse of his bulles and
+quicksiluer amounteth as is abouesaid: besides the sacking of his wines,
+about 100 tunnes, whereby his fleet is disappointed of a great part of
+their prouision.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A true report of the honourable seruice at Sea perfourmed by Sir Iohn
+  Burrough Knight, Lieutenant generall of the fleet prepared by the honour.
+  Sir Walter Ralegh Knight, Lord warden of the Stanneries of Cornwall and
+  Deuon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara of Biscay, a ship of 600 tunnes
+  was taken, and the two East Indian caraks, the Santa Cruz and the Madre
+  de Dios were forced, the one burnt, and the other taken and brought into
+  Dartmouth the seuenth of September, 1592.
+
+Sir Walter Ralegh vpon commission receiued from her Maiesty for an
+expedition to be made to the West Indies, slacked not his vttermost
+diligence to make full prouision of all things necessary, as both in his
+choise of good ships, and sufficient men to performe the action euidently
+appeared. For his shippes which were in numbre 14 or 15, those two of her
+Maiesties, the Garland and the Foresight were the chiefest; the rest either
+his owne or his good friends or aduenturers of London. For the gentlemen
+his consorts and officers, to giue them their right, they were so well
+qualited in courage, experience, and discretion, as the greatest prince
+might repute himselfe happy to be serued with their like. The honor of
+Lieutenant generall was imposed vpon sir Iohn Burrough, a gentleman, for
+his manifold good and heroicall parts, thought euery way worthy of that
+commandement: with whom after sir W. R. returned was ioyned in commission
+sir Martin Frobisher, who for his speciall skill and knowledge in marine
+causes had formerly caried imploiments of like or greater place. The rest
+such as heretofore had giuen to the world sufficient proofe of their valour
+in diuers seruices of the like nature. With these ships thus manned sir
+Walter Ralegh departed towards the West countrey, there to store himselfe
+with such further necessaries as the state of his voyage did needfully
+require: where the Westerly windes blowing for a long time contrary to his
+course, bound and constrained him to keepe harborough so many weeks, that
+the fittest season for his purpose was gone, the mindes of his people much
+altered, his victuals consumed: and withall, her Maiesty vnderstanding how
+crosly all this sorted, began to call the proceeding of this preparation
+into question: insomuch that, whereas the sixt of May was first come before
+sir Walter could put to sea, the very next day sir Martin Frobisher in a
+pinnesse of my lord Admirals called The Disdaine, met him, and brought to
+him from her Maiesty letters of reuocation, with commandement to relinquish
+(for his owne part) the intended attempt, and to leaue the charge and
+conduct of all things in the hands of sir Iohn Burrough and sir Martin
+Frobisher, But sir Walter finding his honor so farre engaged in the
+vndertaking of this voyage, as without proceeding he saw no remedy either
+to salue his reputation, or to content those his friends which had put in
+aduentures of great summes with him; and making construction of the Queenes
+letters in such sort as if her commandement had bene propounded in
+indifferent termes, either to aduance forward or to retire, at his owne
+discretion; would in no case yeeld to leaue his fleet now vnder saile.
+Wherefore continuing his course into the sea, he met within a day or two,
+with certaine sailes lately come from Spaine: among which was a ship
+appertaining to Monsieur Gourdon gouernor of Caleis, and found aboord her
+one M. Neuel Dauies an Englishman, who hauing endured a long and miserable
+captiuity for the space of twelue yeeres, partly in the inquisition in
+Spaine, was now by good fortune escaped, and vpon returne to his countrey.
+This man, among other things, reported for certaine, that there was little
+hope of any good this yeere to be done in the West India; considering that
+the king of Spaine had sent expresse order to all the Ports both of the
+Ilands and of Terra firma, that no ship should stirre that yeere, nor any
+treasure be layed aboord for Spaine. But neither this vnpleasant relation
+nor ought els could stay his proceedings, vntill a tempest of strange and
+vncouth violence arising vpon Thursday the 11 of May, when he was athwart
+the Cape Finister, had so scattered the greater part of the fleet, and
+sunke his boats and pinnesses, that as the rest were driuen and seuered,
+some this way and some that, sir Walter himselfe being in the Garland of
+her Maiesty was in danger to be swallowed vp of the Sea. Whereupon sir W.
+Ralegh finding that the season of the yere was too farre gone to proceed
+with the enterprise which he had vpon Panama, hauing bene held on the
+English coast from February till May, and thereby spent three moneths
+victuals; and considering withall, that to lie vpon the Spanish coast or at
+the Ilands to attend the returne of the East or West Indian fleets was
+rather a worke of patience then ought els: he gaue directions to sir Iohn
+Burgh and sir M. Frobisher to diuide the fleet in two parts; sir M. with
+the Garland, cap. George Gifford, cap. Henry Thin, cap. Grenuile and others
+to lie off the South cape, thereby to amaze the Spanish fleet, and to holde
+them on their owne coast; while sir I. Burgh, capt. Robert Crosse, capt.
+Tomson, and others should attend at the Ilands for the caraks or any other
+Spanish ships comming from Mexico or other parts of the West Indies. Which
+direction tooke effect accordingly; for the king of Spaines Admirall
+receiuing intelligence that the English fleet was come on the coast,
+attended to defend the South parts of Spaine, and to keepe himselfe as nere
+sir Mart. Frobisher as he could, to impeach him in all things which he
+might vndertake; and thereby neglected the safeconduct of the caraks, with
+whom it fared as hereafter shall appeare. Before the fleet seuered
+themselues they mette with a great Biscain on the Spanish coast called
+Santa Clara a ship of 600 tunnes.
+
+The noise of the artillery on both sides being heard, immediatly they drew
+to their fleet; where after a reasonable hot fight, the ship was entred and
+mastered, which they found freighted with all sorts of small yron-worke, as
+horse shoes, nailes, plough-shares, yron barres, spikes, boults, locks,
+gimbols, and such like, valued by vs at 6000 or 7000 li. but woorth to them
+treble the value. This Biscain was sailing towards S. Lucar, there to take
+in some further prouision for the West India. This ship being first
+roomaged, and after sent for England, our fleet coasted along towards the
+Southcape of S. Vincent, and by the way about the Rocke neere Lisbon, sir
+Iohn Burrough in the Robucke spying a saile a farre off, gaue her present
+chase; which being a flieboat and of good saile, drew him farre Southwards
+before he could fetch her; but at last she came vnder his lee and strooke
+saile. The master of which flieboat comming aboord him, confessed that the
+king indeed had prepared a great fleet in S. Lucar and Cadiz, and (as the
+report in Spaine was currant) for the West Indies. But indeed the Spanish
+king had prouided this fleet vpon this counsell. He receiued intelligence,
+that sir Walter Ralegh was to put out strong for the West India: to impeach
+him, and to ranconter his force he appointed this fleet; although looking
+for the arriuall of his East Indian caraks, he first ordained those ships
+to waft them from the Acores. But perswading himselfe, that if the fleet of
+sir Walter Ralegh did go for the West India, then the Ilands should haue
+none to infest them but some small men of warre, which the caraks of
+themselues would be well able to match; his order was to Don Alonso de
+Bacan brother to the Marques of Santa Cruz, and Generall of his armada, to
+pursue sir Walters fleet, and to confront him, what course soeuer he held.
+[Sidenote: Sir Iohn Burrough in great danger of the Spanish fleet.] And
+that this was true, our men in short time by proofe vnderstood: for sir
+Iohn Burrough, not long after the taking of his last prize the flieboat, as
+he sailed backe againe towards the rest of his company, discouered the
+Spanish fleet to sea-ward of him: which hauing likewise espied him betwixt
+them and the shore, made full account to bring him safe into Spanish
+harbour; and therefore spred themselues in such sort before him, that
+indeed his danger was very great: for both the liberty of the sea was
+brought into a narrow straight, and the shore being enemy could giue him no
+comfort of reliefe: so that trusting to Gods helpe onely and his good
+saile, he thrust out from among them in spight of all their force, and to
+the notable illusion of all their cunning, which they shewed to the
+vttermost, in laying the way for his apprehension. [Sidenote: The Ile of S.
+Michael.] But now sir Iohn Burrough hauing happily escaped their clouches,
+finding the coast guarded by this fleet, and knowing it was but folly to
+expect a meeting there with sir Martin Frobisher (who vnderstanding of this
+armada aswell as himselfe, would be sure not to come that way) beganne to
+shape his course to the Acores according to sir W. Raleghs direction, and
+came in sight of S. Michael, running so neere by Villa Franca, that he
+might easily discerne the shippes lying there at anker. [Sidenote: Diuers
+small ships taken.] Diuers small carauels both here and betweene S. Georges
+and the Pike in his course towards Flores he intercepted; of which no great
+intelligence for his affaires could be vnderstood. [Sidenote: Santa Cruz a
+village in the Ile of Flores.] Arriuing before Flores vpon Thursday the 21
+of Iune, towards euening, accompanied onely with captaine Caufield and the
+Master of his shippe, the rest not being yet arriued, he made towards the
+shore with his boat, finding all the people of Santa Cruz, a village of
+that Iland, in armes, fearing their landing, and ready marshalled to defend
+their towne from spoile. Sir Iohn contrariwise made signes of amity vnto
+them by aduancing a white flagge, a common token of peace, which was
+answered againe of them with the like: whereupon ensued entercourses of
+good friendship; and pledges were taken on both sides, the captaine of the
+towne for them, and captaine Caufield for our: so that whatsoeuer our men
+wanted, which that place could supply either in fresh water, victuals, or
+the like, was very willingly granted by the inhabitants; and good leaue had
+they to refresh themselues on shore as much and as oft as they would
+without restraint. [Sidenote: Newes of the East Indian caraks.] At this
+Santa Cruz sir Iohn Burrough was informed, that indeed there was among them
+no expectation of any fleet to come from the west, but from the East, that
+no longer since then three dayes before his arriuall a carak was passed by
+for Lisbon, and that there were foure carafes more behinde, of one consort.
+Sir Iohn being very glad of this newes, stayed no longer on shore, but
+presently imbarqued himselfe, hauing onely in company a small barke of
+threescore tunnes belonging to one M. Hopkins of Bristoll. In the meane
+while that these things thus passed at Flores, part of the rest of the
+English fleet, which sir Iohn Burrough had left vpon the coast of Spaine,
+drew also towards the Acores: and whereas he quickly at sea had discouered
+one of the caraks, the same euening he might descry two or three of the
+Earle of Cumberlands ships (whereof one M. Norton was captaine) which
+hauing in like sort kenned the carak, pursued her by that course which they
+saw her to runne towards the Ilands. But on no side was there any way made
+by reason of a great calme which yeelded no breath to spread a saile.
+Insomuch that fitly to discouer her what she was, of what burthen, force,
+and countenance sir Iohn Burrough tooke his boat, and rowed the space of
+three miles, to make her exactly: and being returned, he consulted with the
+better sort of the company then present, vpon the boording her in the
+morning. [Sidenote: A carak called The Santa Cruz set on fire.] But a very
+mighty storme arising in the night, the extremity thereof forced them all
+to wey ankers, yet their care was such in wrestling with the weather not to
+lose the carak, that in the morning the tempest being qualified, and our
+men bearing againe with the shore, they might perceiue the carak very neere
+the land, and the Portugals confusedly carrying on shore such things as
+they could any maner of way conuey out of her; and seeing the haste our men
+made to come vpon them, forsook her; but first, that nothing might be left
+commodious to our men, set fire to that which they could not cary with
+them, intending by that meanes wholly to consume her; that neither glory of
+victory nor benefit of shippe might remaine to ours. And least the approch
+and industry of the English should bring meanes to extinguish the flame,
+thereby to preserue the residue of that which the fire had not destroyed;
+being foure hundred of them in number and well armed, they entrenched
+themselues on land so neere to the carak, that she being by their forces
+protected, and our men kept aloofe off, the fire might continue to the
+consumption of the whole. This being noted by sir Iohn Burrough he soone
+prouided a present remedy for this mischiefe. [Sidenote: An hundred of our
+men land.] For landing one hundred of his men, whereof many did swim and
+wade more then brest high to shore, and easily scattering those that
+presented themselues to guard the coast, he no sooner drew toward their new
+trenches, but they fled immediatly, leauing as much as the fire had spared
+to be the reward of our mens paines. Here was taken among others one
+Vincent Fonseca a Portugall, Purser of the carak, with two others, one an
+Almaine and the second a Low-dutchman, canoniers: who refusing to make any
+voluntary report of those things, which were demanded of them, had the
+torture threatened, the feare whereof at the last wrested from them this
+intelligence, that within fifteene dayes three other greater caraks then
+that lately fired would arriue at the same Iland: and that being fiue
+caraks in the fleet at their departure from Goa, to wit, the Buen Iesus
+admirall, the Madre de Dios, the S. Bernardo, the S. Christophoro, and the
+S. Cruz, (whose fortune you haue already heard) they had receiued speciall
+commandement from the king not to touch in any case at the Iland of S.
+Helena, where the Portugall caraks in their returne from the East India
+were alwayes till now woont to arriue to refresh themselues with water and
+victuals. And the kings reason was; because of the English men of warre,
+who (as he was informed) lay there in wait to intercept them. [Sidenote:
+Angola a new watering place for caraks.] If therefore their necessity of
+water should driue them to seeke supply any where, he appointed them Angola
+in the maine of Africa, with order there to stay onely the taking in of
+water to auoid the inconuenience of infections where unto that hot latitude
+is dangerously subiect. The last rendeuous for them all was the Iland of
+Flores, where the king assured them not to misse of his armada thither sent
+of purpose for their wafting to Lisbon. Vpon this information sir Iohn drew
+to counsel, meeting there Captaine Norton, captain Dountain, captain
+Abraham Cocke, captaines of three ships of the Earle of Cumberland, M.
+Tomson of Harwich cap. of the Dainty of sir Iohn Haukins, one of sir W.
+Raleghs fleet, and M. Christopher Newport cap. of the Golden dragon newly
+returned from the West India, and others. These being assembled, he
+communicated with them what he had vnderstood of the foresaid examinates,
+and what great presumptions of trueth their relation did cary: wishing that
+forasmuch as God and good fortune had brought them together in so good a
+season, they would shew the vttermost of their indeuors to bring these
+Easterlings vnder the lee of the English obedience. Hereupon a present
+accord on all sides followed not to part company or leaue of those seas
+till time should present cause to put their consultations in execution. The
+next day her Maiesties good ship the Foresight commanded by sir Rob. Crosse
+came in to the rest: and he likewise informed of the matter was soone
+drawen into this seruice. Thus sir Iohn with al these ships departing
+thence 6 or 7 leagues to the West of Flores, they spread themselues abroad
+from the North to the South, ech ship two leagues at the least distant from
+another. By which order of extension they were able to discouer the space
+of two whole degrees at sea. In this sort they lay from the 29 of Iune to
+the third of August, what time cap. Thomson in the Dainty had first sight
+of the huge carak called the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest receit,
+belonging to the crowne of Portugall. The Dainty being of excellent saile
+got the start of the rest of our fleet, and begun the conflict somewhat to
+her cost, with the slaughter and hurt of diuers of her men. Within a while
+after, sir Iohn Burrough in the Robucke of sir W. Raleghs, was at hand to
+second her, who saluted her with shot of great ordinance, and continued the
+fight within musket shot assisted by cap. Tomson and cap. Newport till sir
+R. Crosse viceadmirall of the fleet came vp being to leeward, at whose
+arriuall sir I. Burgh demanded of him what was best to be done, who
+answered, that if the carak were not boorded she would recouer the shore
+and fire herselfe as the other had done. Whereupon sir I. Burgh concluded
+to entangle her; and sir R. Crosse promised also to fasten himselfe to her
+together at the instant; which was performed: but after a while sir Iohn
+Burgh receiuing a shot with a canon perier vnder water and ready to sinke,
+desired sir R. C. to fall off, that he might also cleere himselfe, and saue
+his ship from sinking, which with difficulty he did: for both the Roebucke
+and the Foresight were so intangled, as with much adoe could they cleere
+themselues.
+
+[Sidenote: The Madre de Dios taken.] The same euening sir R. Crosse finding
+the carak then sure and drawing neere the Iland perswaded his company to
+boord her againe, or els there was no hope to recouer her: who after many
+excuses and feares, were by him incouraged, and so fell athwart her
+foreships all alone; and so hindered her sailing that the rest had time to
+come vp to his succour, and to recouer the carak yer she recouered the
+land: and so toward the euening after he had fought with her alone three
+houres single, my lord of Cumberlands two ships came vp, and with very
+little losse entred with sir R. Crosse, who had in that time broken their
+courages, and made the assault easie for the rest.
+
+The generall hauing disarmed the Portugals, and stowed them for better
+security on all sides, first had presented to his eyes the true proportion
+of the vast body of this carak, which did then and may still iustly prouoke
+the admiration of all men not formerly acquainted with such a sight. But
+albeit this first apparance of the hugenesse thereof yeelded sights enough
+to entertaine our mens eyes: yet the pitifull obiect of so many bodies
+slaine and dismembred could not but draw ech mans eye to see, and heart to
+lament, and hands to helpe those miserable people, whose limnes were so
+torne with the violence of shot, and paine made grieuous with the multitude
+of woundes. No man could almost steppe but vpon a dead carkase or a bloody
+floore, but specially about the helme, where very many of them fell
+suddenly from stirring to dying. For the greatnesse of the stirrage
+requiring the labour of twelue or fourteene men at once, and some of our
+shippes beating her in at the sterne with their ordinance often times with
+one shot slew foure or fiue labouring on either side of the helme; whose
+roomes being still furnished with fresh supplies, and our artillery still
+playing vpon them with continuall volleys, it could not be but that much
+bloud should be shed in that place. [Sidenote: Exceeding humanity shewed to
+the enemy.] Whereupon our Generall moued with singular commiseration of
+their misery, sent them his owne chyrurgions, denying them no possible
+helpe or reliefe that he or any of his company could affoord them. Among
+the rest of those, whose state this chance had made very deplorable, was
+Don Fernando de Mendoca Grand captaine and Commander of this Carake: who
+indeed was descended of the house of Mendoca in Spaine; but being married
+into Portugall, liued there as one of that nation; a gentleman well
+stricken in yeeres, well spoken, of comely personage, of good stature, but
+of hard fortune. In his seuerall seruices against the Moores he was twise
+taken prisoner, and both times ransomed by the king. In a former voyage of
+returne from the East India he was driuen vpon the Baxos or sands of Iuda
+nere the coast of Cephala, being then also captaine of a caracke which was
+there lost, and himselfe, though escaping the sea-danger, yet fell into the
+hands of infidels on land; who kept him vnder long and grieuous seruitude.
+Once more the king carying a louing respect to the man, and desirous to
+better his condition, was content to let him try his fortune in this
+Easterly nauigation, and committed vnto him the conduct of this caracke,
+wherein he went from Lisbon Generall of the whole fleet, and in that degree
+had returned, if the Vice-rey of Goa embarked for Portugall in the Bon
+Iesus had not, by reason of his late office, bene preferred. Sir Iohn
+intending not to adde too much affliction to the afflicted, moued with pity
+and compassion of humane misery, in the end resolued freely to dismisse
+this captaine and the most part of his followers, to their owne countrey,
+and for the same purpose bestowed them in certaine vessels furnished with
+all kindes of necessary prouision. This businesse thus dispatched, good
+leasure had he to take such view of the goods as conueniency might affoord.
+And hauing very prudently (to cut off the vnprofitable spoile and pillage
+whereunto he saw the minds of many inclined) seised vpon the whole to her
+Maiesties vse, after a short and slender romaging and searching of such
+things as first came to hand, he perceiued that the wealth would arise
+nothing disanswerable to expectation; but that the variety and grandure of
+all rich commodities would be more then sufficient to content both the
+aduenturers desire and the souldiers trauell. And here I cannot but enter
+into the consideration and acknowledgement of Gods great fauor towards our
+nation, who by putting this purchase into our hands hath manifestly
+discouered those secret trades and Indian riches, which hitherto lay
+strangely hidden, and cunningly concealed from vs; whereof there was among
+some few of vs some small and vnperfect glimse onely, which now is turned
+into the broad light of full and perfect knowledge. Whereby it should seeme
+that the will of God for our good is (if our weaknesse could apprehend it)
+to haue vs communicate with them in those East Indian treasures, and by the
+erection of a lawfull traffike to better our meanes to aduance true
+religion and his holy seruice. The caracke being in burden by the
+estimation of the wise and experienced no lesse then 1600 tunnes had full
+900 of those stowed with the grosse bulke of marchandise, the rest of the
+tunnage being allowed, partly to the ordinance which were 32 pieces of
+brasse of all sorts, partly to the passengers and the victuals, which could
+not be any small quantity, considering the number of the persons betwixt
+600 and 700, and the length of the nauigation. To giue you a taste (as it
+were) of the commodities, it shall suffice to deliuer you a generall
+particularity of them, according to the catalogue taken at Leadenhall the
+15 of September 1592. [Sidenote: A briefe catalogue of the sundry rich
+commodities of the Madre de Dios.] Where vpon good view it was found, that
+the principall wares after the iewels (which were no doubt of great value,
+though they neuer came to light) consisted of spices, drugges, silks,
+calicos, quilts, carpets and colours, &c. The spices were pepper, cloues,
+maces, nutmegs, cinamom, greene ginger: the drugs were beniamin,
+frankincense, galingale, mirabolans, aloes zocotrina, camphire: the silks,
+damasks, taffatas, sarcenets, altobassos, that is, counterfeit cloth of
+gold, vnwrought China silke, sleaued silke, white twisted silke, curled
+cypresse. The calicos were book-calicos, calico-launes, broad white
+calicos, fine starched calicos, course white calicos, browne broad calicos,
+browne course calicos. There were also canopies, and course diaper-towels,
+quilts of course sarcenet and of calico, carpets like those of Turky;
+whereunto are to be added the pearle, muske, ciuet, and amber-griece. The
+rest of the wares were many in number, but lesse in value; as elephants
+teeth, porcellan vessels of China, coco-nuts, hides, eben-wood as blacke as
+iet, bedsteads of the same, cloth of the rindes of trees very strange for
+the matter, and artificiall in workemanship. All which piles of commodities
+being by men of approued iudgement rated but in reasonable sort amounted to
+no lesse then 150000 li. sterling, which being diuided among the
+aduenturers (whereof her Maiesty was the chiefe) was sufficient to yeeld
+contentment to all parties. [Sidenote: The capacity and dimensions of the
+Madre de Dios.] The cargazon being taken out, and the goods fraighted in
+tenne of our ships sent for London, to the end that the bignesse, heigth,
+length, bredth, and other dimensions of so huge a vessell might by the
+exact rules of Geometricall obseruations be truly taken, both for present
+knowledge, and deriuation also of the same vnto posterity, one M. Robert
+Adams, a man in his faculty of excellent skill, omitted nothing in the
+description, which either his arte could demonstrate, or any mans iudgement
+thinke woorthy the memory. After an exquisite suruey of the whole frame he
+found the length from the beak-head to the sterne (whereupon was erected a
+lanterne) to containe 165 foote. The breadth in the second close decke
+whereof she had three, this being the place where there was most extension
+of bredth, was 46 feet and ten inches. She drew in water 31 foot at her
+departure from Cochin in India, but not aboue 26 at her arriual in
+Dartmouth, being lightened in her voyage by diuers meanes some 5 foote. She
+caried in height 7 seuerall stories, one maine Orlop, three close decks,
+one fore-castle, and a spar-decke of two floores a piece. The length of the
+keele was 100 foote, of the maine-mast 121 foot, and the circuite about at
+the partners 10 foote 7 inches, the maine-yard was 106 foote long. By which
+perfect commensuration of the parts appeareth the hugenesse of the whole,
+farre beyond the mould of the biggest shipping vsed among vs either for
+warre or receit.
+
+Don Alonso de Bacan hauing a great Fleet and suffering these two caraks,
+the Santa Cruz to be burnt, and the Madre de Dios to be taken, was
+disgraced by his prince for this negligence.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las Cinque
+  Llaguas, or, The fiue Wounds, by three tall Ships set foorth at the
+  charges of the right honorable the Erle of Cumberland and his friends:
+  Written by the discreet and valiant captaine M. Nicholas Downton.
+
+In the latter ende of the yeere 1593. the right honourable Erle of
+Cumberland, at his owne charges and his friends, prepared 3 ships, all at
+equall rate, and either of them had like quantitie of victuals, and like
+numbers of men, there being embarked in all 3 ships 420 men of al sorts.
+[Marginal note: Besides these three ships there was a pinnas called the
+Violet, or the Why not I.] The Roial Exchange went as Admirall, wherein M.
+George Caue was captaine. The May-flower Viceadmirall vnder the conduct of
+William Anthonie: and the Sampson, the charge whereof it pleased his honour
+to commit vnto me Nicholas Dounton. Our directions were sent vs to
+Plimmouth, and we were to open them at sea.
+
+The sixt of Aprill 1594 we set sayle in the sound of Plimmouth, directing
+our course toward the coast of Spaine.
+
+The 24 of the sayd moneth at the Admirals direction wee diuided our selues
+East and West from ech other, being then in the heigth of 43 degrees, with
+commaundement at night to come together againe.
+
+The 27 day in the morning we descried the May-flower and the litle Pinnasse
+with a Prise that they had taken, being of Viana in Portugall, and bound
+for Angola in Africa. This Barke was of 28 tunnes, hauing some 17 persons
+in the same. [Sidenote: Commodities fit for Angola.] There were in her some
+12 Buts of Galicia wine, whereof we tooke into euery shippe a like part,
+with some Ruske in chests and barrels, with 5 buts of blew course cloth,
+and certaine course linnen-cloth for Negros shirts, which goods were
+diuided among our fleet.
+
+The 4 of May we had sight of our Pinnasse, and the Admirals Shallop which
+had taken three Portugall Carauels, whereof they had sent two away and kept
+the third.
+
+The second of Iune we had sight of S. Michael. The third day in the morning
+we sent our small pinnasse, which was of some 24 tunnes, with the small
+Carauell which we had taken at the Burlings to range the road of all the
+Ilands, to see if they could get any thing in the same: appointing them to
+meet vs W. S. W. 12 leagues from Faiall. Their going from vs was to no
+purpose. They missed comming to vs when we appointed, as also we missed
+them, when we had great cause to haue vsed them.
+
+The 13 of Iune we met with a mightie Carack of the East. Indies, called Las
+cinque Llagas, or The fiue wounds. The May-flower was in fight with her
+before night. I, in the Sampson, fetched her vp in the euening, and as I
+commanded to giue her the broad side, as we terme it, while I stood very
+heedefully prying to discouer her strength: and where I might giue counsel
+to boord her in the night when the Admirall came vp to vs, and as I
+remember at the very first shot she discharged at vs, I was shot in a litle
+aboue the belly, whereby I was made vnseruiceable for a good while after,
+without touching any other for that night. Yet by meanes of an honest
+truehearted man which I had with me, one captaine Grant, nothing was
+neglected: vntill midnight when the Admirall came vp, the May-flower, and
+the Sampson neuer left by turnes to ply her with their great ordinance; but
+then captaine Caue wished vs to stay till morning, at what time each one of
+vs should giue her three bouts with our great ordinance, and so clap her
+aboord: but indeed it was long lingered in the morning vntil 10 of the
+clocke before wee attempted to boord her. The Admirall laid her a boord in
+the mid ship: the May-flower comming vp in the quarter, as it should seeme,
+to lie at the sterne of the Admirall on the larboord-side. The captaine of
+the sayd May-flower was slaine at the first comming vp: whereby the ship
+fell to the sterne of the out-licar of the Carack, which (being a piece of
+timber) so wounded her foresaile, that they sayd they could come no more to
+fight, I am sure they did not, but kept aloofe from vs. The Sampson went
+aboord on the bow, but hauing not rome enough, our quarter lay on the
+Exchanges bow, and our bowe on the Caracks bowe. The Exchange also at the
+first comming had her captaine M. Caue shot into both the legs, the one
+whereof he neuer recouered, so he for that present was not able to doe his
+office, and in his absence he had not any that would vndertake to lead out
+his company to enter vpon the enemie. My friend captaine Grant did lead my
+men on the Caracks side, which being not manfully backed by the Exchanges
+men, his forces being smal, made the enemie bolder than he would haue bene,
+whereby I had sixe men presently slaine and many more hurt, which made them
+that remained vnhurt to returne aboord, and would neuer more giue the
+assault. I say not but some of the Exchanges men did very well, and many
+more (no doubt) would haue done the like, if there had bene any principall
+man to haue put them forward, and to haue brought all the company to the
+fight, and not to haue run into corners themselues. But I must needs say,
+that their ship was as well prouided for defence, as any that I haue seene.
+And the Portugals peraduenture encouraged by our slacke working, plaied the
+men and had Barricados made, where they might stand without any danger of
+our shot. They plied vs also very much with fire, so that most of our men
+were burnt in some place or other: and while our men were putting out of
+the fire, they would euer be plying them with small shot or darts. This
+vnusuall casting of fire did much dismay many of our men and made them draw
+backe as they did. When we had not men to enter, we plied our great
+ordinance much at them as high vp as they might be mounted, for otherwise
+we did them little harme, and by shooting a piece out of our forecastle
+being close by her, we fired a mat on her beak head, which more and more
+kindled, and ran from thence to the mat on the bow-sprit, and from the mat
+vp to the wood of the bow-sprit, and thence to the top saile yard, which
+fire made the Portugals abaft in the ship to stagger, and to make shew of
+parle. But they that had the charge before encouraged them, making shew,
+that it might easily be put out, and that it was nothing. Whereupon againe
+they stood stifly to their defence. Anone the fire grew so strong, that I
+saw it beyond all helpe, although she had bene already yeelded to vs. Then
+we desired to be off from her, but had little hope to obtaine our desire;
+neuerthelesse we plied water very much to keep our ship well. Indeed I made
+little other reckoning for the ship, my selfe, and diuers hurt men, then to
+haue ended there with the Carak, but most of our people might haue saved
+themselues in boats. And when my care was most, by Gods prouidence onely,
+by the burning asunder of our spritsaile-yard with ropes and saile, and the
+ropes about the spritsaile-yarde of the Carack, whereby we were fast
+intangled, we fell apart, with burning of some of our sailes which we had
+then on boord. The Exchange also being farther from the fire, afterward was
+more easily cleared, and fell off from abaft And as soone as God had put vs
+out of danger, the fire got into the fore-castle, where, I think, was store
+of Beniamin, and such other like combustible matter, for it flamed and ran
+ouer all the Carack at an instant in a maner. The Portugals lept ouer-boord
+in great numbers. Then sent I captaine Grant with the boat, with leaue to
+vse his owne discretion in sauing of them. So he brought me aboord two
+gentlemen, the one an old man called Nuno Velio Pereira, which (as
+appeareth by the 4 chapter in the first booke of the woorthy history of
+Huighen de Linschoten) was gouernour of Mocambique and Cefala, in the yeere
+1582. and since that time had bene likewise a gouernour in a place of
+importance in the East Indies. And the shippe wherein he was comming home
+was cast away a little to the East of the Cape of Buona Speranza, and from
+thence be traueiled ouer-land to Mocambique, and came as a passenger in
+this Carack. The other was called Bras Carrero, and was captaine of a
+Carack which was cast away neere Mocambique, and came likewise in this ship
+for a passenger. Also three men of the inferior sort we saued in our boat,
+onely these two we clothed and brought into England. The rest which were
+taken vp by the other ship boats, we set all on shore in the Ile of Flores,
+except some two or three Negros, whereof one was borne in Mocambique, and
+another in the East Indies. This fight was open off the Sound between Faial
+and Pico 6 leagues to the Southward. The people which we saued told vs that
+the cause why they would not yeeld, was, because this Carack was for the
+king, and that she had all the goods belonging to the king in the countrey
+for that yeere in her, and that the captaine of her was in fauor with the
+king, and at his returne into the Indies should haue bene Viceroy there.
+And withall this ship was nothing at all pestered neither within boord nor
+without, and was more like a ship of warre then otherwise: moreouer she had
+the ordinance of a Carak that was cast away at Mocambique, and the company
+of her, together with the company of another Carack that was cast away a
+little to the Eastwards of the Cape of Buona Speranza. Yet through
+sicknesse which they caught at Angola, where they watered, they say, they
+had not now aboue 150 white men, but Negros a great many. They likewise
+affirmed that they had three noblemen and three ladies in her, but we found
+them to differ in most of their talke. All this day and all the night she
+burned, but the next morning her poulder which was lowest being 60 barrels
+blew her abroad, so that most of the ship did swim in parts aboue the
+water. Some of them say, that she was bigger then the Madre de Dios, and
+some, that she was lesse: but she was much vndermastered, and vndersailed,
+yet she went well for a ship that was so foule. The shot which wee made at
+her in great Ordinance before we layde her aboord might be at seuen bouts
+which we had, and sixe or 7 shot at a bout, one with another, some 49 shot:
+the time we lay aboord might be two houres. The shot which we discharged
+aboord the Carack might be some twentie Sacars. And thus much may suffice
+concerning our daungerous conflict with that vnfortunate Carack.
+
+The last of Iune after long traversing of the seas we had sight of another
+mightie Carack which diuerse of our company at the first tooke to be the
+great S. Philip the Admiral of Spaine, but the next day being the first of
+Iuly fetching her vp we perceiued her indeede to be a Carack, which after
+some few shot bestowed vpon her we summoned to yeeld; but they standing
+stoutly to their defence vtterly refused the same. Wherefore seeing no good
+could be done without boording her I consulted what course we should take
+in the boording. But by reason that wee which were the chiefe captaines
+were partly slaine and partly wounded in the former conflict, and because
+of the murmuring of some disordered and cowardly companions, our valiant
+and resolute determinations were crossed: and to conclude a long discourse
+in few words, the Carack escaped our hands. After this attending about
+Coruo and Flores for some West Indian purchase, and being disappointed of
+our expectation, and victuals growing short, we returned for England, where
+I arriued at Portesmouth the 28 of August.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The casting away of the Tobie neere Cape Espartel corruptly called Cape
+  Sprat, without the Straight of Gibraltar on the coast of Barbarie. 1593.
+
+The Tobie of London a ship of 250 tunnes manned with fiftie men, the owner
+whereof was the worshipful M. Richard Staper, being bound for Liuorno,
+Zante and Patras in Morea, being laden with marchandize to the value of 11
+or 12 thousand pounds sterling, set sayle from Black-wall the 16 day of
+August 1593, and we went thence to Portesmouth where we tooke in great
+quantine of wheate, and set sayle foorth of Stokes bay in the Isle of
+Wight, the 6. day of October, the winde being faire: and the 16 of the same
+moneth we were in the heigth of Cape S. Vincent, where on the next morning
+we descried a sayle which lay in try right a head off vs, to which we gaue
+chase with very much winde, the sayle being a Spaniard, which wee found in
+fine so good of sayle that we were faine to leaue her and giue her ouer.
+Two dayes after this we had sight of mount Chiego, which is the first
+high-land which we descrie on the Spanish coast at the entrance of the
+Straight of Gibraltar, where we had very foule weather and the winde scant
+two dayes together. Here we lay off to the sea. The Master, whose name was
+George Goodley, being a young man, and one which neuer tooke charge before
+for those parts, was very proud of that charge which he was litle able to
+discharge, neither would take any counsel of any of his company, but did as
+he thought best himselfe, and in the end of the two dayes of foule weather
+cast about, and the winde being faire, bare in with the straights mouth.
+The 19 day at night he thinking that he was farther off the land than he
+was, bare sayle all that night, and an houre and an halfe before day had
+ranne our shippe ypon the ground on the coast of Barbarie without the
+straight foure leagues to the South of Cape Espartel. Whereupon being all
+not a litle astonied, the Master said vnto vs, I pray you forgiue me; for
+this is my fault and no mans else. The company asked him whether they
+should cut off the main mast: no said the Master, we will hoyse out our
+boate. But one of our men comming speedily vp, said, Sirs, the ship is full
+of water, well sayd the Master, then cut the mayne-mast ouer boord: which
+thing we did with all speede. But the afterpart suddenly split a sunder in
+such sort that no man was able to stand vpon it, but all fled vpon the
+foremast vp into the shrouds thereof; and hung there for a time: but seeing
+nothing but present death approch (being so suddenly taken that we could
+not make a raft which we had determined) we committed our selues vnto the
+Lord and beganne with dolefull tune and heauy hearts to sing the 12 Psalme.
+Helpe Lord for good and godly men &c. Howbeit before we had finished foure
+verses the waues of the sea had stopped the breathes of most of our men.
+For the foremast with the weight of our men and the force of the sea fell
+downe into the water, and vpon the fall thereof there were 38 drowned, and
+onely 12 by Gods prouidence partly by swimming and other meanes of chests
+gote on shoare, which was about a quarter of a mile from the wracke of the
+ship. The master called George Goodley, and William Palmer his mate, both
+perished. M. Caesar also being captaine and owner was likewise drowned:
+none of the officers were saued but the carpenter.
+
+We twelue which the Lord had deliuered from extreme danger of the Sea, at
+our comming ashore fell in a maner into as great distresse. At our first
+comming on shore we all fell downe on our knees, praying the Lord most
+humbly for his merciful goodnesse. Our prayers being done, we consulted
+together what course to take, seeing we were fallen into a desert place,
+and we traueled all that day vntill night, sometimes one way and sometimes
+another, and could finde no kinde of inhabitants; onely we saw where wilde
+beasts had bene, and places where there had bene houses, which after we
+perceiued to haue bene burnt by the Portugals. So at night falling into
+certaine groues of oliue trees, we climed vp and sate in them to auoid the
+danger of lions and other wilde beasts, whereof we saw many the next
+morning. The next day we trauelled vntill three of the clocke in the
+afternoone without any food but water and wilde date roots: then going ouer
+a mountaine, we had sight of Cape Espartel; whereby we knew somewhat better
+which way to trauell, and then we went forward vntill we came to an
+hedgerow made with great long canes; we spied and looked ouer it, and
+beheld a number of men aswell horsemen as footmen, to the number of some
+fiue thousand in skirmish together with small shot and other weapons. And
+after consultation what we were best to do, we concluded to yeeld our
+selues vnto them, being destitute of all meanes of resistance. So rising vp
+we marched toward them, who espying vs, foorthwith some hundred of them
+with their iauelings in their hands came running towards vs as though they
+would haue run vs thorow: howbeit they onely strooke vs flatling with their
+weapons, and said that we were Spaniards: and we tolde them that we were
+Englishmen: which they would not beleeue yet. By and by the conflict being
+ended, and night approching, the captaine of the Moores, a man of some 56
+yeres olde, came himselfe vnto vs, and by his interpreter which spake
+Italian, asked what we were and from whence we came. One Thomas Henmer of
+our company which could speake Italian, declared vnto him that we were
+marchants, and how by great misfortune our ship, marchandise, and the
+greatest part of our company were pitifully cast away vpon their coast. But
+he void of all humainity and all manhood, for all this, caused his men to
+strip vs out of our apparel euen to our shirts to see what money and iewels
+we had about vs: which when they had found to the value of some 200 pounds
+in golde and pearles they gaue vs some of our apparel againe, and bread and
+water onely to comfort vs. The next morning they carried vs downe to the
+shore where our shippe was cast away, which was some sixteene miles from
+that place. In which iourney they vsed vs like their slaues, making vs
+(being extreame weake,) to carry their stuffe, and offering to beat vs if
+we went not so fast as they. We asked them why they vsed vs so, and they
+replied, that we were their captiues: we said we were their friends, and
+that there was neuer Englishman captiue to the king of Marocco. So we came
+downe to the ship, and lay there with them seuen dayes, while they had
+gotten all the goods they could, and then they parted it amongst them.
+After the end of these seuen dayes the captaine appointed twenty of his men
+wel armed, to bring vs vp into the countrey: and the first night we came to
+the side of a riuer called Alarach, where we lay on the grasse all that
+night: so the next day we went ouer the riuer in a frigate of nine oares on
+a side, the riuer being in that place aboue a quarter of a mile broad: and
+that day we went to a towne of thirty houses, called Totteon: there we lay
+foure dayes hauing nothing to feed on but bread and water: and then we went
+to a towne called Cassuri, and there we were deliuered by those twenty
+souldiers vnto the Alcaide, which examined vs what we were: and we tolde
+him. He gaue vs a good answere, and sent vs to the Iewes house, where we
+lay seuen dayes. In the meane while that we lay here, there were brought
+thither twenty Spaniards and twenty Frenchmen, which Spaniards were taken
+in a conflict on land, but the Frenchmen were by foule weather cast on land
+within the Straights about Cape de Gate, and so made captiues. Thus at the
+seuen dayes end we twelue Englishmen, the twelue French, and the twenty
+Spaniards were all conducted toward Marocco with nine hundred souldiers
+horsemen and fotmen, and in two dayes iourney we came to the riuer of Fez,
+where we lodged all night, being prouided of tents. The next day we went to
+a towne called Salle, and lay without the towne in tents. From thence we
+trauelled almost an hundred miles without finding any towne, but euery
+night we came to fresh water, which was partly running water and sometime
+raine water. So we came at last within three miles of the city of Marocco,
+where we pitched our tents: and there we mette with a carrier which did
+trauel in the countrey for the English marchants: and by him we sent word
+vnto them of our estate; and they returned the next day vnto vs a Moore,
+which brought vs victuals, being at that instant very feeble and hungry:
+and withall sent vs a letter with pen, inke, and paper, willing vs to write
+vnto them what ship it was that was cast away, and how many and what men
+there were aliue. For said they we would knowe with speed, for to morow is
+the kings court: and therefore we would know, for that you should come into
+the citie like captiues. But for all that we were carried in as captiues
+and with ropes about our neckes as well English as the French and
+Spaniards. And so we were carried before the king: and when we came before
+him he did commit vs all to ward, where wee lay 15 dayes in close prison:
+and in the end we were cleared by the English Marchants to their great
+charges; for our deliuerance cost them 700 ounces, euery ounce in that
+country contayning two shillings. And when we came out of prison we went to
+the Alfandica, where we continued eight weekes with the English marchants.
+At the end of which time being well apparelled by the bountie of our
+marchants we were conueyed downe by the space of eight dayes iourney to S.
+Cruz, where the English ships road: where we tooke shipping about the 20 of
+March, two in the Anne Francis of London, and fiue more of vs fiue dayes
+after in the Expedition of London, and two more in a Flemish flie-boat, and
+one in the Mary Edward also of London, other two of our number died in the
+countrey of the bloodie-fluxe: the one at our first imprisonment at
+Marocco, whose name was George Hancock, and the other at S. Cruz, whose
+name was Robert Swancon, whose death was hastened by eating of rootes and
+other vnnatural things to slake their raging hunger in our trauaile, and by
+our hard and cold lodging in the open fields without tents. Thus of fiftie
+persons through the rashnesse of an vnskilfull Master ten onely suruiued of
+vs, and after a thousand miseries returned home poore, sicke, and feeble
+into our countrey.
+
+Richard Iohnson.
+William Williams Carpenter.
+Iohn Durham.
+Abraham Rouse.
+Iohn Matthewes.
+Thomas Henmore.
+Iohn Siluester.
+Thomas Whiting.
+William Church.
+Iohn Fox.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The letters of the Queenes most excellent Maiestie sent by one Laurence
+  Aldersey vnto the Emperour of Aethiopia, 1597.
+
+Inuictissimo potentissimoque Abassenorum regi, magnoque vtriusque
+Aethiopiae imperatori &c.
+
+Elizabetha Dei gratia Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae regina, fidei
+defensor &c. summo ac potentissimo AEthiopiae imperatori salutem. Quod ab
+omnibus qui vbiuis terrarum ac gentium sunt regibus principibusque
+praestari par et aequum est, vt quanquam maximo locorum interuallo
+dissiti, et moribus ac legibus discrepantes, communem tamen generis humani
+societatem tueri et conseruare, mutuaque vt occasio ferret, charitatis et
+beneuolentiae officia velint exercere: in eo nos de vestra fide atque
+humanitate spem certissimam concipientes huic subito nostro Laurentio
+Alderseio in regnum vestrum proficiscenti, hasce literas nostras, quibus
+et nostra erga vos beneuolentia testata sit, et illum hinc profectum esse
+constet, potissimum vobis indicandus dedimus. Qui cum orbis terrarum
+perscrutandi cognoscendique studio permotus, multis antehac regionibus
+peragratis, iam tandem in eas regiones, quae vestrae ditionis sunt,
+longum, periculosumque iter instituat: cum ipse existimauit, tum nos etiam
+sumus in eadem opinione, ad incolumitatem suam, atque etiam ad gratiam
+apud vos, plurimum illi prafuturum, si diplomate nostro munitus,
+beneuolenentiae nostrae et profectionis hinc suae testimonium ad vos
+deferret. Nam cum summus ille mundi conditor rectorque praepotens Deus,
+regibus principibusque qui suam vicem gerunt, orbem terrarum, suis cuique
+finibus pro rata portione designatis, regendum atque administrandum
+dederit; eoque munere ius quoddam inter eos fraternae necessitudinis,
+aeternumque foedus ab illis colendum sanxerit: non erit (vt arbitramur)
+ingratum vobis, cum beneuolentiae nostrae significationem, tam immensa
+maris ac terrarum spatia transgressam, ab vltima Britannia ad vos in
+Aetheiopiam perferri intellexeritis. Nobisque rursus erit incundum, cum
+subditorum nostrorum praedicatione, ab ipsis Nili fontibus, et ab ijs
+regionibus quae solis cursum definiunt, fama vestri nominis ad nos
+recurret. Erit igitur humanitatis vestrae huic subdito nostro eam largiri
+gratiam, vt in ditionem vestram sub praesidio ac tutela vestri nominis
+intrare, ibique saluus et incolumis manere possit: quod ipsum etiam
+ab aliis principibus, per quorum regiones illi transeundum erit magnopere
+petimus, nobisque ipsis illud honoris causa tributum existimabimus: neque
+tamen maiorem hac in re gratiam postulamus, quam vicissim omnium principum
+subditis, omniumque gentium hominibus ad nos commeantibus liberrime
+concedimus. Datum Londini quinto die Nouembris: anno regni nostri
+tricesimo nono: annoque Dom. 1597.
+
+
+The same in English.
+
+To the most inuincible and puissant king of the Abassens, the mightie
+Emperour of Aethiopia the higher and the lower.
+
+Elizabeth by the grace of God Queene of England, France and Ireland,
+defender of the faith, &c. To the most high and mightie Emperour of
+Aethiopia greeting. Whereas it is a matter requisite and well beseeming all
+kings and princes of what lands or nations soeuer, be they neuer so much
+disseuered in place or differing in customes and lawes, to maintaine and
+preserue the common societie of mankinde, and, as occassion shall be
+offered, to performe mutuall duties of charitie and beneuolence: we for
+that cause concerning most undoubted hope of your princely fidelity and
+courtesie, haue giuen vnto this our subiect Laurence Aldersey intending to
+trauell into your dominions, these our letters to be deliuered without
+faile vnto your Highnesse, to the end they may be a testimony of our good
+will towards you and of our saide subiect his departure from England. Who,
+after his trauels in many forren countreys, being as yet enflamed with a
+desire more throughly to surueigh and contemplate the world, and now at
+length to vndertake a long and daungerous iourney into your territories and
+regions: both the sayd Laurence thought, and our selues also deemed, that
+it would very much auaile him, as well for his owne safetie as for the
+attayning of your fauour, if, being protected with our broad seale, hee
+might transport vnto your Highnesse a testimony of our louing affection and
+of his departure from hence. For sithence almightie God the highest
+creatour and gouernour of the world hath allotted vnto kings and princes
+his vicegerents [sic--KTH] ouer the face of the whole earth, their designed
+portions and limits to be ruled and administred by them; and by this his
+gift hath established among them a certaine law of brotherly kindnesse, and
+an eternall league by them to be obserued: it will not (we hope) seeme
+vnpleasant vnto your highnesse, when you shall haue intelligence of our
+louing letters sent so huge a distance ouer sea and land, euen from the
+farthest realme of England vnto you in Aethiopia. On the other side our
+selues shall take great solace and delight, when as by the relation of our
+owne subiects, the renowme of your name shall be brought vnto vs from the
+fountains of Nilus, and from those regions which are situate vnder the
+Southerne Tropike. May it please you therefore of your princely clemencie
+to vouchsafe so much fauour on this our subiect, that he may, vnder the
+safeguard and protection of your name, enter into your highnesse dominions,
+and there remaine safe and free from danger. Which fauour and courtesie wee
+doe likewise most earnestly request at the hands of other princes, through
+whose Seigniories our said subject is to passe; and we shall esteeme it as
+done vnto our selfe and for our honours sake.
+
+Neither do we require any greater fauour in this behalfe, then we are vpon
+the like occasion most ready to graunt unto the subiects of all princes and
+the people of all Nations, trauelling into our dominions. Given at London
+the fift day of Nouember, in the thirtie and ninth yeere of our reigne: and
+in the yeare of our Lord 1597.
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX
+
+THE OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE.
+
+[Footnote: The Editor takes this opportunity of making grateful
+acknowledgements to the Marquis of Stafford, for his permission to print
+this Tract from his curious Manuscript; and to the Reverend H. J. Todd, for
+furnishing him with the accurate transcript from which it is printed.]
+
+The first and greatest occasion let slip in our Voyage was, that we did not
+possess ourselues of the fleete that was bound for the Indies, the lading
+whereof would not onelie haue paid all charges of the iorneie, but haue
+enabled vs a great while to wage warre with Spaine, with the meanes of
+Spaine. To which I aunswere, that if either I had ben followed the first
+morning of our comminge before the harbor when I bare with it, or if we had
+entred the same Sundaie in the afternoone when we were vnder saile, and
+within cannon shot of the enemies fleete, or after the men of warre were
+taken and burnt, the nexte daie if anie shipping had gone vp as I vrged by
+mine owne speech sent by Sir Anthonie Ashlie, who being secretaire at wars
+was to record euerie mans seruice or omission; if anie of these had ben
+don, then I saie had that fleete ben easilie possessed. For the first
+morning they had neither their men aboard, as it was since confessed by our
+prisoners, nor were provided of any counsel what to doe. In the afternoone
+the same daie we had found the men of warre and the Marchaunts fleet
+altogether in one bodie, and engaged them both at once, so as at the same
+time we had defeated the one, we had possessed the other. And the next daie
+presentlie vpon the fight and victorie against the Kings shipps, we had
+found them all so amazed and confounded as they would haue thought of
+nothing but of sauing themselues, and we had taken the ships, the riches in
+them, and the fleet of gallies, without striking a blow; as both our
+prisoners and captaines out of the gallies haue assured vs. But the first
+morninge when I boare with the harbor, almost all the fleet came to an
+ancker by the point Saint Sebastian a league wide of me, and gaue the
+enemie leasure to send men and all necessaries aboard. When I was gon in, I
+could neither get my companion to waigh his anckor, nor most of those that
+were waied to goe in with me. And the next daie I had much a do to make our
+ships fight at all. And when God had giuen vs victorie, my perswasions nor
+protestations could make them that were sea-commaunders go or send vp to
+possess the fleet of the Indies, whiles we assailed the towne, so as the
+enemie had almost 48. howers to burne his owne shipps.
+
+The second imputation that maie be laid to vs, was, that we did abandon
+Cales, when we were possesst of it, whereas the holding of it would haue
+ben a naile not in the foote of this great monarch but in his side, and
+haue serued for a diversion of all the wars in these parts. To which I
+aunswere, that some of our sea-commaunders, and especiallie my colleague,
+did not onelie oppose themselues to that designe, (whose oppositions mine
+instructions made an absolute barre,) but when we came to see how the
+forces that should be left there might be victualed till succours came, the
+victualls were for the most part hidden and embeazled, and euery ship began
+at that instant to feare their wants, and to talke of goeing home; soe as I
+should neither haue had one ship to staie at Cales, nor victualls for the
+garrison for 2. moneths. And therefore I was forced to leaue Cales, and did
+not choose to abandon it.
+
+The third obiection we haue to aunswere is, whie we did not lie for the
+carricks and Indian ships, seing we were on the coast the verie time that
+is thought fittest for their intercepting and vsual of their retourne. In
+which I must first cite the testimonie of all our commanders by land and
+sea, that when we had in our retourne from Cales doubled the Cape St.
+Vincent comonlie called the South Cape, I vrged our going to th' Islands of
+Ozores, founding my selfe vpon these reasons: first, that it was more
+certaine to attend them at the land-fall where theie must needs touch, then
+to seeke them in the wide sea; and next, that the aduises sent out of
+Spaine and Portingall since our being of myght meete them at the Islands,
+and make them divert from coming thither. Besides, the Spaniards after
+theie saw vs engaged at Cales would neuer suspect or dreame of our goeing
+to the Islands. And when this counsell was reiected, and we come in the
+sight of Lisbon, I there againe pressed the lieing for them with a selected
+fleet, and offered vpon that condition to send home the land-forces, and
+all such ships as want of victualls, leaks sickness, or anie thing els had
+made vnfit to staie out at sea. But first the L. Admirall and Sr. Wa[l]ter
+Rawligh did directlie by attestation vnder their hands contradict the first
+proposition that I made, that some ships should attend that seruice. And
+when we came to the hypothesis, which were fitt and their captaines content
+to staie out in all the fleet, except the Low Countrie Squadron, there
+could be found but two, my L. Thom. Howard and my selfe; so as by the whole
+counsell at wars, it was resolued that as well my offer and opinion, as
+euerie mans els amongst vs, should be kept vnder his hand, for our
+particuler discharges, and I be barred of staieing, except my L. Admirall
+would assent to leaue some 8. or 10. of the Marchaunts ships besides 2. of
+the Queenes: which he refused to doe: and soe our dessigne brake of.
+
+The last omission maie seeme to be in this, that since all our seruice
+consisted in taking or distroyinge the Spanish shipping and sea prouisions,
+that we did not looke into all his chiefe ports, and do him in that kind as
+much hurt as we might haue done. To which I aunswere, that first my end in
+going to Cales was not onlie because it was a principall port and the
+likeliest to be held by vs, by cause of the seat and naturall strength of
+it; but also for that it was the farthest good porte south-ward; so as
+beginning with it we might, if some greater seruice did not diuert vs, goe
+to all the good ports betwixt that and the northmost ports of Biskaie:
+which was a better waie then to haue begonne or giuen the enemie an alarum
+in the middest of his Countrie, or the neerest ports to vs; for so our
+attempts would haue ben more difficile, and our retreats at last from those
+farthest ports less safe; considering the wants, infections, and other
+inconveniences that for the most parte doe accompanie the retraicts of our
+fleet and armies in long iourneies. But after we had ended at Cales, it was
+by all our seamen thought a capitall offence to name the goeing ouer the
+Barre at St. Lucars. Betwixt St Lucars and Lisbone there is no good porte.
+From Lisbone I was barred by name, if it had bene free for vs to haue gone.
+Yet our seamen are made of the same stuffe, Sr. Francis D: and his companie
+was, when theie lost the occasion of his taking Lisbone, for feare of
+passing by the castle of St. Iulian's. From Lisbone to the Groine there is
+no port to hold the Kings or anie other great shipping. To the Groin with
+cart-ropes I drew them: for both I vowed and protested against their
+refusall, and parted companie with them when they offered to hold another
+course. But when we came to the mouth of the harbor, and sent in some of
+our small vessells, we saw there was nothing there, nor yet at Furroll; for
+into that port also we made our discouveries to looke.
+
+After which discouverie we held our last counsell. And then I vrged our
+goeing to St. Audica, the passage St. Sebastian, and all other good ports
+all along the coast. But mine associat did altogether refuse to goe farther
+alonge the coaste, complaininge of wants, and obiecting our being embayed,
+and I know not what. In which opinion Sir Walter Rawlighe strengthened him;
+and theie were both desirous to take vpon them the honnor of breaking that
+dessigne. And of landing at the Groyne, or attempting the towne, theie
+would not heare by anie meanes. And presentlie euery man cried to set saile
+homewards. Since which time theie haue made such haste, as I, tarieing
+behind to bring along with me the St. Andrew taken at Cales and the flie
+boate that carries our artillarie haue lost them all, sauing Monsieur
+Oauerworme and his squadron, and some few small shipps.
+
+[These "Omissions" were not included in the early editions, but appeared in
+Woodfall's edition of 1812].
+
+
+
+
+INDICES.
+
+Where the same Document a given in Latin and English, the reference is
+to the English Version.
+
+N.B. The large print indicates that the _whole_ section refers to the
+subject mentioned.
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. VIII.
+
+ACHIM, (Sultan of Egypt).
+ACRE.
+AIGUES MORTES.
+AILWIN, founds Ramsey Abbey.
+ALBEMARLE (John, Earl of).
+ALCAYR. See _Cairo_.
+ALFRED, (King), sends Sighelmus to India.
+ALURED, (Bishop of Worcester). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+AMAZONS.
+AMBASSADORS SENT TO CONSTANTINOPLE BY EDWARD THE CONFESSOR.
+ARABIA.
+ARUNDEL (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE.
+ASSUR.
+ATHELARD. HIS TRAUAILES.
+
+BABYLON.
+BALDWIN (Archbishop of Canterbury), HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES.
+BALDWIN (of Bouillon).
+BALDWIN (King of Jerusalem), defeats Saracens.
+BALE, quoted,
+  --HIS LIFE OF MANDEVILLE.
+BANGOR COLLEGE, Pelagius its head.
+BASSET (William).
+BATH (Abbey of).
+BAUGIE (F. de).
+BEAUCHAMP, family.
+BEDA, quoted.
+BETHLEHEM.
+BOHUN (Henry), his death.
+BRENSE (Peter de).
+BRUNO, murdered by Sweyn.
+
+CAELIUS (Mount).
+CAESARIA.
+CAIRO.
+CANUTE.
+CAYPHAS (city).
+CELESTINE.
+CHANTENAY (P. de).
+CHAPMAN, quoted.
+CHESTER.
+CHESTER (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE.
+CHRONICON HIEROSOLYMITANUM, quoted.
+CLERMONT.
+CONRAD, Emperor of Germany.
+CONSTANTINOPLE.
+CROYLAND (Abbey).
+CRUSADE, preached by Urban.
+CURSON, (Robert). HIS TRAUAILES.
+CYPRUS.
+
+DAMIETTA, (Siege of).
+DES ROCHES, (Pierre). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+DEWIN, (P. de).
+DEWIN, (W. de).
+
+EARTH, its form.
+EDGAR (Prince). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+EDMUND (Prince).
+EDWARD (The Confessor). SENDS AMBASSADORS TO CONSTANTINOPLE.
+EDWARD I. HIS VOYAGE INTO ASIA.
+EGYPT.
+EPHESUS (Seven Sleepers of).
+
+FONTENELLE (Abbey).
+FORTIS (W.).
+FURNIVALL (Gerard).
+FURNIVALL (Thomas).
+FURNIVALL (William).
+
+GENNADIUS, quoted.
+GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted.
+GLOUCESTER Cathedral founded.
+GODERICUS; HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND.
+GODFREY (de Bouillon).
+GODWIN (Earl).
+GREEK ALPHABET.
+GUIMUNDE, Patriarch of Jerusalem.
+GUTUERE, HER VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+
+HADERWERCK (of Westphalia).
+HARDINE. HIS ADVENTURES IN HOLY LAND.
+HAROLD (King).
+HEBREW ALPHABET.
+HENRY II. ASSIGNS MONEY TO THE CRUSADES.
+HERMANNUS, companion of Robertus Kettenensis.
+HOLINSHED, quoted.
+HOLY LAND, _passim_.
+HONORIUS, quoted,
+  --pope.
+HOVEDEN (Roger), quoted.
+HUGH of Tabaria, Patriarch,
+  --Killed.
+HUNGARY.
+
+ICONIUM,
+  --Battle of.
+INGULPHUS'S Journey to Jerusalem,
+  --quoted,
+  --notice of.
+
+JAVA, Mandeville's account of.
+JERUSALEM. SWEYN'S JOURNEY to,
+  --ALURED'S JOURNEY,
+  --JOURNEY OF INGULPHUS,
+  --JOURNEY OF ROBERT CURTHOSE,
+  --VOYAGE OF GUTUERE,
+  --VOYAGE OF PRINCE EDGAR,
+  --VOYAGE OF JOHN LACY,
+  --W. MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE,
+  --VOYAGE OF PIERRE DES ROCHES,
+  --described by Mandeville.
+
+JOHN (King). HIS CONTRIBUTION TO THE HOLY LAND.
+JOPPA,
+  --VISITED BY A FLEET OF ENGLISH, DANES, ETC.
+JULIAN (the Apostate).
+
+LACY (John). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+LEDET (W.).
+LELAND, quoted.
+LIEGE.
+LOUIS (King of France).
+LUCY (Geoffrey de).
+LYNN.
+
+MAHOMET.
+MALLOW, (P. De).
+MANDEVILLE, (Sir J). HIS LIFE BY BALE,
+  --HIS EPITAPH,
+  --CONTENTS OF HIS BOOK,
+  --HIS VOYAGES IN LATIN BEGIN,
+  --IN ENGLISH,
+  --Prologue,
+  --From England to Constantinople,
+  --Of the cross and crown of Jesu Christ,
+  --Of the city of Constantinople and the faith of the Greeks,
+  --From Constantinople to Jerusalem,
+  --Of St John the Evangelist,
+  --Legend of the daughter of Hippocrates,
+  --Of the Soudans and the tower of Babiloyn,
+  --Of the desert between the church of St Catherine and Jerusalem,
+  --Of the dry tree,
+  --How roses came first in the world,
+  --Of the pilgrimages in Jerusalem and of the holy places thereabout,
+  --Of the temple of our Lord, Of the crueltie of King Heroud,
+  --Of Mount Syon,
+  --Of Probatica Piscina,
+  --Of Natatorium Siloe,
+  --Of the Dead Sea,
+  --Of Jordan,
+  --Of the Head of St. John the Baptist,
+  --Of the Samaritans,
+  --Of Galilee,
+  --Of Antichrist,
+  --Of Nazareth,
+  --Of the age of our Lady,
+  --Of the day of Doom,
+  --Of the Jacobites,
+  --Of the Surryenes,
+  --Of the Georgians,
+  --Of Damascus,
+  --Of three ways to Jerusalem,
+  --Of the Saracens,
+  --Of Mahomet,
+  --Of Albany and Lybia,
+  --Of the Wisshinges for Wacchinge of the Sperhauk,
+  --Of Noah,
+  --Of the land of Job,
+  --Of the Chaldeans,
+  --Of Amazons,
+  --Of the true diamond,
+  --Of Indian islands,
+  --Of idols,
+  --Of pepper,
+  --Of a marvellous well,
+  --Of St Thomas,
+  --Of the citie Of Calamye,
+  --Of the isle of Lamary,
+  --Of the form of the Earth,
+  --Of Java,
+  --Of Oracles,
+  --Some wonderful nations,
+  --Of the Great Khan of Cathay.
+MANDEVILLE, (William), Earl of Essex. HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+MANICHES, Emperor of Constantinople.
+MANUEL, Emperor of Constantinople. His LETTER TO HENRY II.
+MARASIA.
+MARSEILLES.
+MATTHEW OF WESTMINSTER, quoted.
+MAXIMUS, King of Britain.
+MONTFORT, (Simon de).
+
+NAZARETH,
+  --taken.
+NEVEL or NEVILLE (John).
+
+OCTOBONUS.
+OLYMPIC games.
+OLYMPUS.
+ORIEL COLLEGE,(_note_).
+OTHO (of Roges).
+
+PAMPELUNA, 30.
+PARIS (Matthew), quoted.
+PASHED, meaning of word.
+PELAGIAN HERESY, hatched.
+PELAGIUS, LIFE AND TRAUAILES OF.
+PESMES (Gerald).
+PETRUS DE RUPIBUS, _see Des Roches_.
+
+RAMA, Siege of.
+RAMSEY ABBEY,
+  --Its foundation.
+RICHARD, (Canonicus), HIS TRAUAILES.
+RICHARD, (Earl of Cornwall). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA.
+ROBERT, (Curthose); HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+ROBERT (son of Godwin), accompanies Prince Edgar to Jerusalem.
+ROBERTUS KETENENSIS. HIS TRAUAILES.
+
+ST. ALBANS.
+ST. AUMOND (A. de).
+SALISBURY (William Longespee, Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA,
+  --his death.
+SHERBORNE Abbey.
+SIGHELMUS (Bishop of Sherborne). A TESTIMONIE OF HIS
+  MISSION TO INDIA,
+  --A SECOND TESTIMONY.
+STANLAW Abbey, founded.
+SWANUS, HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+SYRIA.
+
+TABARIA (see TIBERIAS).
+TABOR (Mount).
+TEMPLARS (Knights).
+TIBERIAS.
+TILNEY, (Sir Frederick). A NOTE CONCERNING HIM.
+TILNEY, (Thomas).
+TRAPANI.
+TURNEHAM (R.), HIS TRAUAILL.
+TYRE.
+
+URBAN (Pope).
+
+VIRGIL (Polydore), quoted.
+VOISIE (J.).
+
+WAKE (Hugh).
+WALDEN'S epistle to Martin the fifth, quoted.
+WALTER (Hubert). HIS TRAUAILES.
+WHITEMAN, (Andrew). HIS TRAUAILES.
+WILLIAM OF MALMESBURY, quoted.
+WILLIAM OF NEWBURY, quoted.
+WILLIAM OF TYRE, quoted,
+  --HIS LIFE AND TRAUAILES.
+WINCHESTER, (Earl of). HIS VOYAGE.
+WITRAZH, (Bernard).
+WOLSTAN, Abbot of Gloucester.
+
+
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+ADAM'S MOUNT.
+ALDERSEY, (Laurence). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+ALDRIDGE, (M.).
+ALEXANDRIA.
+ASCENSION, (Ship).
+ASSASSINS, (nation).
+AUGUSTA, (island).
+AZARON.
+
+BABEL, (Tower of).
+BABYLON,
+  --coins and measures.
+BARNACLES, growing on trees.
+BARNARD CASTLE.
+BARRETT (W). HIS ACCOUNT OF THE MONEY AND MEASURES
+  OF THE EAST.
+BARTON, (E.). HIS VOYAGE TO SYRIA.
+BASAN.
+BASSORA,
+  --coins and measures.
+BECK (Anthony). MADE PATRIARCH OF JERUSALEM.
+BETHLEHEM.
+BEZENEGAR.
+BIR.
+BODIN OR DADIN, (island).
+BOLINGBROKE, (Henry, Earl of). His quarrel with Thomas
+  Mowbray.
+BROADBANK, (W.).
+BUSHELL, (E.).
+
+CADIZ.
+CAESAR, (F.), quoted.
+CAIDO.
+CAIRO.
+CAKAM.
+CALVARY.
+CAMBAIA.
+CAMBALETH.
+CAMPA.
+CANDIA.
+CARMEL. (mount).
+CASSAN or CASSIBIN.
+CASTLER, (N.).
+CATZA.
+CEPHALONIA, (island).
+CEUSKALA.
+CEYLON.
+CHALDEANS. Their manners.
+CHARGES FROM ALEPPO TO GOA.
+CHATAGAN.
+CHAUL.
+CHILENSO.
+CHIO.
+CICERO. His tomb.
+CLEMENT V., Pope.
+CLOVES.
+COCHIN
+  --Coins and measures.
+COINS
+  --ancient.
+COMUM.
+CORFU.
+CORNARI FAMILY.
+CREMATION of dead.
+CROCODILES
+CUSTOMS, (strange).
+CYPRUS
+  --ruins in.
+
+DAMAN.
+DIAMONDS.
+DIU.
+
+ELIZABETH (Queen), a present from the Sultan of Turkey's wife.
+ELTHAM.
+
+FAMAGUSTA.
+FEASTS of the Tartars.
+FILA CAVENNA (ship).
+FILLIE (D.).
+
+FISH, an abundance of
+  --Caught by birds.
+FOSTER (R.), appointed Consul in Syria
+  --Letter of directions to.
+FREDERICK (Caesar), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST.
+FROISSART, quoted.
+FUCO.
+
+GANGES (river).
+GELBER, (A.), death of.
+GESTE.
+GINGER.
+GIRALDUS CAMBRENSIS, quoted.
+GOA
+  --Besieged
+  --Coins and measures.
+GREECE (Patriarch of).
+GRIDA.
+
+HAKLUYT'S NOTE TO MANDEVILLE'S VOYAGE.
+HAREBORNE, (W.).
+HENRY IV. HIS INTENDED VOYAGE TO THE HOLY LAND.
+HEWISH (R.).
+HICKOCKE (T.), HIS TRANSLATION OF FREDERICK'S VOYAGE.
+HOLLINSHED, quoted.
+HUNTINGTON (Earl of), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+
+IANZU.
+IDOL (a strange).
+INDIA (Upper).
+INNS.
+
+JAVA.
+JENISE, (M.).
+JERUSALEM
+  --JOHN LOCKE'S VOYAGE
+  --L. Aldersey's voyage.
+JOPPA.
+
+KARAMORON river.
+KEELE (J.).
+
+LELAND, quoted.
+LEZINA (island).
+LINDSEY.
+LISSA (island).
+LOCKE, (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM
+  --Testimonial to him from the vicar of Mount Syon.
+
+MAHOMET, his dress.
+MALABAR.
+MALACCA
+  --Coins and measures.
+MALIAPOR.
+MANCY (province).
+MANDEVILLE, HIS VOYAGE CONTINUED
+  --Of the Tartars
+  --Of the Emperor of Persia
+  --Of various countries
+  --Of Prester John
+  --Of the Valley Perilous
+  --Some curious nations
+  --Of the Isle of
+  Bragman
+  --of King Alexander
+  --Of the name of Prester John
+  --Of Pissemyres
+  --Of the rivers of Paradise
+  --Of various islands
+  --Conclusion
+  --Hakluyt's note on Mandeville's voyage
+  --Passage of Pliny illustrating above.
+MANNA.
+MARTAVAN.
+MATAPAN (cape).
+MATTHEW GONSON (ship).
+MECCA, A DESCRIPTION OF THE PILGRIMAGE TO
+  --Described.
+MEDINA.
+MELEDA (island).
+MELISTORTE.
+MERCHANDISE, WHENCE VARIOUS KINDS ARE PROCURED.
+MONSOON.
+MOUMORAN (island).
+MURAD KHAN, Emperour of Turkey.
+
+NEGAPATAN.
+NESTORIANS.
+NORFOLK (Thomas Mowbray, duke of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+NUTMEGS.
+
+ODORICUS. HIS JOURNEY AMONG THE TARTARS.
+  --His journey from Pera to Thana
+  --To further India
+  --His return
+  --His death.
+OLD MAN of the Mountains
+  --His death.
+OPIUM.
+ORISA.
+ORMUS
+  --coins and measures.
+OSBORNE, (E.).
+
+PALM TREES.
+PEARL FISHERIES.
+PEGU.
+PELAGOSA (island).
+PELICANS.
+PEPPER, how grown.
+PERA.
+PIGMIES.
+PLINY, quoted.
+POLUMBRUM.
+
+QUINZAI.
+
+RAGUSA, tributary of Turkey.
+RAMUSIUS, quoted.
+RAYNOLDS (ship).
+ROSETTO.
+ROVIGNIO.
+RUBIES.
+RUBRICIS, (W de), quoted.
+
+SAILS made of reeds.
+ST. THOMAS
+  --His tomb.
+SALARIES OF OFFICERS OF GRAND SIGNOR'S COURT.
+SATAGAN.
+SIAM.
+SOBISSACLAO.
+STAPER, (R.).
+SULTANIA.
+SUMACOTO.
+SUMATRA.
+SYLAN (island). See _Ceylon_.
+
+TATHALAMASIN (island).
+TAURIS.
+THALAY, a river.
+THANA.
+THIBET.
+TORTOISES.
+TREBIZONDE.
+TREES, (curious).
+TRIPOLIS.
+TURKS, number of soldiers sent against Emperor.
+TYPHOON.
+
+VENICE.
+VIRGILE, (P.) quoted.
+
+WALSINGHAM (T.) quoted.
+WILKINSON (T.).
+WINCHESTER (Bishop of). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM.
+WRAG (Richard). HIS LETTER TO ROWLAND HEWISH.
+
+ZAITON.
+ZANTE.
+
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. X.
+
+ABILFADA ISMAEL, quoted.
+AGRA.
+ALDWORTH, (R).
+ALEPPO, ENTERED BY SOLIMAN,
+  --Mentioned.
+AMURATH I.
+AMURATH II.
+ANDERSON, (H.).
+ANSELL, (E.).
+ANTOGIL (Bay of).
+ARCULFUS.
+ARTILLERY, of Mahomet II.
+ASHLEY, (R.).
+ASPLEY, (W.), Bookseller.
+
+BABEL (Tower of).
+BABYLON.
+BAJAZET I.
+BALSARA.
+BALY (island).
+BANNING, (A.).
+BANNING, (P.).
+BANTAM
+  --described.
+BARNE, (George).
+BARNES, (P.).
+BARRETT, (W.).
+BATE, (R.).
+BEAUVAIS, (V. de).
+BELLAPORE.
+BELLERGAN.
+BIRRA.
+BISAPORE.
+BLUNT, (J.).
+BOND, (G.).
+BONDE, (M.).
+BORROUGH, (W.).
+BOSTOCK, (T.).
+BRAHMINS.
+BROOKE, (R.).
+BURSE.
+
+CAMBAIETTA.
+CAPE OF GOOD HOPE.
+CARPINI, (J. de P.).
+CAVIARE.
+CEYLON.
+CHAUL.
+CHINA (King of).
+CLARKE, (R.).
+CLAUDIAN, quoted.
+COMMENUS, family.
+COMORIN, (cape).
+CONSTANTINOPLE.
+CORDALL, (T.).
+COUCHE, (? Quichew).
+COWLTHIRST, (H.).
+COXE, (R.).
+CREMATION, of dead.
+CUSTOMS, (curious).
+
+DALKINS (T.).
+DANSEY (A.).
+DARSALL (R.).
+DIU.
+DOFFIE (C.).
+DORRINGTON (F.).
+DOWE (R.).
+DRAKE (Sir Francis).
+DUCANGE quoted.
+
+EBONY.
+ELDRED (John),
+  --HIS VOYAGE TO TRIPOLIS
+ELEPHANTS.
+ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTER TO ZELABDIN ECHEBAR
+  --TO THE KING OF CHINA
+  --HER SECOND CHARTER TO THE LEVANT COMPANY.
+EMANTUEL (ship).
+EUPHRATES (river).
+
+FAITH (C.).
+FARRINGTON (T.).
+FATEPOR.
+FELUGIA.
+FITCH (Ralph), mentioned
+  --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST
+  --Imprisoned.
+FLORIDA.
+FONES (A.).
+FONSECA (V.), Archbishop of Goa.
+
+GALVANO (A.), quoted.
+GANGES.
+GARROWAY (T.).
+GARROWAY (W.).
+GERMAIN (J.), biographical notice.
+GIBBON, quoted.
+GOA.
+GOLCONDA or GULCONDA.
+GRIMES (P.).
+GUILLAME (P.).
+
+HAKLUYT (R.)
+HAREBORNE (W.)
+HARTE (J.)
+HAWKINS (Sir John)
+HETTON
+HEWET (H.)
+HOLMEDEN (E.)
+HUIGHEN (J.)
+  --HIS ACCOUNT OF NEWBURY AND FITCH
+
+INDIES, A VOYAGE OF CERTAIN SHIPS OF HOLLAND
+
+JACKSON (A.)
+JANISSARIES
+JAPAN
+JAVA, currency of
+  --THE VOYAGE TO JAVA OF A DUTCH FLEET
+JEAN SANS PEUR
+JENKINSON (A.), HIS ACCOUNT OF SOLIMAN'S ENTRY INTO
+  ALEPPO
+  --HIS SAFE CONDUCT FROM SOLIMAN
+JERUSALEM, VOYAGE OF LA BROCQUIERE
+JOHN PALAEOLOGUS (Emperor)
+JONES (P.)
+
+LA BROCQUIERE, (B. de). HIS VOYAGE TO JERUSALEM
+  --Discours preliminaire
+  --Seconde partie
+  --Quitte la Bourgogne
+  --Arrive a Turin
+  --Bologne
+  --Florence
+  --Rome
+  --Venise
+  --Corfou
+  --Modon
+  --Jaffa
+  --Jerusalem
+  --Bethlehem
+  --Vallee d'Hebron
+  --Retourne a Gaza,
+  --Visite Nazareth
+  --Sur
+  --Bayreuth
+  --Damas
+  --Retourne a Nazareth
+  --Visite Balbec
+  --Antioch
+  --Adene
+  --Therse
+  --Larande
+  --Cohonge
+  --Burse
+  --Pera
+  --Constantinople
+  --Arrive a Andrianople
+  --Lessere
+  --Belgrade
+  --Son opinion des Turcs et de la maniere de les attaquer
+  --Arrive a Pest
+  --rencontre Albert II, Duc d'Autriche
+  --Arrive a Vienne
+  --Constance
+  --Bale
+  --Arrive a Dijon
+LAHORE
+LANGHENEZ (B.) his account of the Dutch voyage to India
+LAURENCE (S.)
+LAURENCE (P.)
+LEATE (N.)
+LEECH (W.). See _Leeds_
+LEEDS (W)
+LEGRAND D'AUSSY, his translation of La Brocquiere
+LETHLANDE, (E.)
+LEVANT COMPANY, their second charter
+LINCHOTEN (J. Huighen van). See _Huighen_.
+
+MAHOMET
+MALACCA
+MANDEVILLE (Sir J.)
+MARRIAGES (strange)
+MARTAVAN
+MARTIN V. (Pope)
+MARTIN (R.)
+MARTIN (R. jun.)
+MASSAM (W.)
+MASULIPATAN
+MAURITIUS
+MAY (R.)
+MEXICO
+MIDDLETON (T.)
+MOGUL, (the great)
+MOLUCCAS
+MOSLEY, (N.)
+
+NEWBURY (John). HIS LETTER TO RICHARD HAKLUYT
+  --A LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --ANOTHER LETTER TO THE SAME
+  --A LETTER TO JOHN ELDRED AND WILLIAM SHALS
+  --A SECOND LETTER TO THE SAME
+  --A THIRD LETTER TO LEONARD POORE
+  --His imprisonment
+NEWTON (J.)
+NORDEN (T.)
+
+OFFLEY (R.), 69.
+ORMUS
+OSBORNE, (Sir E.)
+  --First Governor of Levant Company
+
+PARVIS (H.)
+PATANAW or PATNA
+PEARDE (N.)
+PEGU
+PEPPER
+PERA
+PERU
+PHILLIP (W.) HIS TRANSLATION OF THE DUTCH VOYAGE TO INDIA
+PITCH issues from Earth
+POORE (Leonard)
+PORTER (E.)
+PORTER (G.)
+POWER (L.) See _Poore_.
+
+RATCLIFFE (A.)
+RAYNOLDS or REINOLDS (ship)
+RUBRUQUIS (W. de)
+RUTILIUS quoted
+
+SADLER (E.)
+SADLER (R.)
+ST. HELENA (island)
+ST. LAURENCE (island)
+SALTER (G.)
+SALTONSTALL (R.)
+SANDIE (R.)
+SCANDERBERG
+SCUDAMORE (Sir J.) Dedication to
+SERREPORE
+SERVIDORE
+SHALS (W.)
+SIAM
+SIGISMUND (Emperor)
+SIMONS (T.)
+SOFIA
+SOLIMAN. HIS ENTRY INTO ALEPPO
+  --HIS SAFE CONDUCT TO ANTHONY JENKINSON
+SOME (S.)
+SPENCER (J.)
+STAPER (J.)
+STAPER, (R.)
+STEVENS, (T.) Biographical notice
+STILE, (N.)
+STILE, (O.)
+STILICHO
+STORY, (J.)
+STROPENE, (M.)
+SUMATRA
+
+TARTARS
+TRIPOLIS (Syria)
+TYGER (ship)
+
+VIRGINIA
+
+WARNER (W.)
+WATTES (J.)
+WILKES, (W.)
+WOLFE (J.), Printer
+
+ZELABDIN ECHEBAR
+
+
+
+
+INDEX TO VOL. XI.
+
+ADAMS (R.)
+AFRICA, DESCRIBED BY R. EDEN
+  --nations of
+ALDAIE (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE FIRST VOYAGE to MOROCCO
+ALDERSEY (L.) HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO EGYPT
+  --mentioned
+ALDRIDGE (W.)
+ALEXANDRIA
+ALGIERS
+AMITY, (ship)
+ANGOLA
+ASHBIE (F.)
+ASHLEY (R.)
+ASSAN AGA, A LETTER TO
+AUSTINE (P.)
+AZORES
+
+BAKER (R.)
+BARBARY, SECOND VOYAGE TO
+  --CHARTER TOR TRADE TO
+BARNE (Sir G.)
+BARTHOLOMEW (ship)
+BARTON (E.)
+BARTON (R.)
+BEARE (J.)
+BEAUFORT (John de)
+BENCE (E.)
+BENDS (W.). His account of the loss of the Edward Cotton
+BENIN, WELSH'S VOYAGE TO
+  --NEWTON AND BIRD'S VOYAGE TO
+  --THEIR SECOND VOYAGE
+BERRIN (J.)
+BIRD (J.) HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE
+BLANCO (cape)
+BLONKET (M.)
+BRISTOL
+BRITON (ship)
+BURGES (R.)
+BURROUGH (Sir J.) HIS SERVICES AT SEA
+BUTLER (Sir J.)
+BUTTOLFE (ship)
+
+CABOT (S.)
+CAIRO
+CALAIS VOYAGE, OMISSIONS OF
+CAMDEN
+CANARIES (islands)
+CANDIA
+CAPE OF GOOD HOPE
+CARNABY (R.)
+CARTER (W.)
+CARTHAGE
+CASTELIN (E.)
+CASTLE OF COMFORT (ship).
+CAVENDISH.
+CENTURION (ship).
+CEPHALONIA.
+CHALONER (Sir Th.), HIS VOYAGE TO ALGER.
+CHANCELLOR (R.).
+CHARLES V.
+CHEESMAN (W.).
+CHESTER (Sir W.).
+CHIAN.
+CHINA, ACCOUNT OF, FROM PORTUGUESE PRISONERS
+  --described.
+CHRISTOPHER (ship).
+COCKE (W).
+CORDALL (T.).
+COREA (cape).
+CORRIENTES (cape).
+COTTON (E.).
+COWEL (W.).
+CRAWFORD (R.).
+CREMATION.
+CRETTON (W.).
+CROMPTON (W.).
+CYPRUS.
+
+DALLIMORE (O.).
+DARTMOUTH.
+DASSEL (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+DAVIES (N.).
+DAVIS (M.).
+DAVISON (R.).
+DAWED, meaning of.
+DEIMOND (R.).
+DEWLY (W.).
+DICKENSON (M.).
+DIER (A.),
+  --hanged.
+DODDINGTON (J.).
+DOVER, 84.
+DOWNTON (N.), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SINKING OF LAS CINQUE LLAGAS.
+DRAGONS.
+DRAKE (Sir F.).
+
+EDEN (R.) HIS DESCRIPTION OF AFRICA.
+EDWARD IV.
+EDWARD BONAVENTURE (ship).
+EDWARD COTTON (ship).
+EGYPT.
+ELEPHANTS.
+ELIZABETH (Queen), HER LETTERS FOR THE RELEASE OF THE JESUS
+  --HER CHARTER FOR TRADE TO BARBARY
+  --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF MOROCCO
+  --HER PATENT TO EXETER MERCHANTS FOR A TRADE TO GUINEA
+  --HER PATENT TO T. GREGORY
+  --HER LETTER TO THE EMPEROR OF AETHIOPIA.
+ELIZABETH (ship).
+ELIZABETH STOKES (ship).
+ELVERS (A.).
+EPITAPH OF P. READ.
+ETHIOPIA, Emperor of.
+EVESHAM (J.), HIS VOYAGE INTO EGYPT.
+EXETER.
+
+FABIAN (W.).
+FALMOUTH.
+FENNER (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+FERRO, (island).
+FILLIE (D.).
+FORSTER (T.).
+FOSTER, (J.).
+FOX (J.), HIS ENTERPRISE IN DELIVERING 266 CHRISTIANS
+  --HIS CERTIFICATE FROM THE PRIOR OF GALIPOLI
+  --THE BISHOP OF ROME'S LETTERS IN HIS BEHALF
+  --THE KING OF SPAIN'S LETTERS IN HIS FAVOR.
+FRANKE (J.).
+FREIGIUS (J.T.), HIS ACCOUNT OF STUKELEY'S VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+FROBISHER (Sir M.).
+FROES (A.), Letter of.
+FROISSART, quoted.
+FUQUIEN.
+
+GAGO.
+GAINSH (R.).
+GALIPOLI (Candia).
+GARAMANTES have their women in common.
+GENOA, chronicles of, quoted.
+GEORGE (ship).
+GEORGE BONAVENTURE (ship).
+GERARD (Sir W.).
+GERBI (island).
+GIBBEN (R.).
+GIBRALTAR (straits of).
+GIFFORD (G.).
+GILMAN (J.).
+GOA.
+GOLDEN NOBLE, (ship).
+GOMERA (island).
+GONSON (B.).
+GRAND CANARY.
+GRAVESEND.
+GREEN DRAGON (ship).
+GREGORY (T.), HIS PATENT.
+GRENVILLE (Capt.).
+GRIFFITH (W.).
+GRIMES (Master).
+GROLOS (T.), Bishop of Astraphen.
+GROVE (Master).
+GUINEA.
+
+HAKLUYT (R.), HIS ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.
+HAMOR (W.).
+HARCOURT (Sir J.).
+HAREBORNE (W.),
+  --A LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLIS
+  --HIS LETTER TO HARVIE MILLERS
+  --A LETTER TO, FROM ALGIERS
+  --A LETTER TO MUSTAPHA
+  --A LETTER TO EDWARD BARTON
+  --Obtains a commandment from the Grand Signor
+  --A LETTER TO T. TYPTON
+  --A LETTER TO ASSAN AGA.
+HARISON (A.).
+HART (ship).
+HARWICH.
+HASLEWOOD (R.)
+HASLEWOOD (S.).
+HASSAN BASSA.
+HAWKINS (Sir J.).
+HAWKWOOD, HIS VICTORIES IN ITALY.
+HELLIER (A.).
+HENRY IV. HIS VOYAGE TO TUNIS.
+HENRY VIII.
+HERCULES (ship).
+HERMAN (J.).
+HEXASI.
+HICKMAN (A.).
+HIND (ship).
+HOGAN (E.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO.
+HOLINSHED, quoted.
+HOOPER (J.).
+HOWARD (Lord T.).
+HOWEL (H.).
+HUDDIE (W.).
+
+ISHAM (H.).
+
+JAMES (Leonard).
+JANISSARIES.
+JAPAN, PORTUGUESE ACCOUNT OF.
+JESUS (ship).
+JONES (P.).
+JOHN II. OF PORTUGAL,
+  --HIS EMBASSY TO EDWARD IV.
+JOHN BAPTIST (ship).
+JOHN EVANGELIST (ship).
+JUDDE (Sir A.).
+JUDITH (ship).
+
+KERRY (J.).
+KING (W.).
+KNEVET (Sir H.).
+KNOLLES (H.).
+
+LAMBERT (F.).
+LAMBERT (N.).
+LANCASTER (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO THE EAST INDIES.
+LANDMAN (D.).
+LAS BARBAS, (cape).
+LEICESTER (Earl of).
+LION (ship).
+LISNEY (T.).
+LISTER (C.).
+LOCK (G.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --ARTICLES DELIVERED TO.
+LOCK, (M.).
+LOCK (T.).
+LODGE (T.).
+LONG (N.).
+LUIZ (Don), HIS LETTER TO PINTEADO.
+
+MACAO.
+MADEIRA.
+MAFFEIUS (P.), quoted.
+MAKEWORTH (J.).
+MALACCA.
+MALTA.
+MALTA, Knights of.
+MAUNSELL (R.).
+MARCH (P.).
+MARCHANT ROYAL (ship).
+MARIA MARTIN (ship).
+MARTABAN.
+MARTIN (Alderman).
+MASSE (N.).
+MAYFLOWER (ship).
+MENSURADO (cape).
+MERLIN (ship).
+MILLERS (H.).
+MILO (island).
+MINION (ship).
+MOON (ship).
+MOONSHINE (ship).
+MOORE (R.).
+MOORE (W.).
+MORE (T.).
+MOROCCO, FIRST VOYAGE TO
+  --Mentioned.
+MORRIS (R.).
+MOURA (N. de).
+MULY HAMET, HIS LETTER TO THE EARL OF LEICESTER.
+MURAD KHAN, Sultan of Turkey,
+  --HIS LETTER TO THE SULTAN OF TRIPOLI FOR THE RESTITUTION OF THE JESUS.
+
+NAPER (G.).
+NELSON (J.).
+NEWHAVEN.
+NEWTON (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN,
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE.
+NICHOLAS (ship).
+NIGRITIS. _See Senegal_.
+NORWICH.
+
+ODORICUS, quoted.
+OMISSIONS OF CALES VOYAGE.
+OSBORNE (Sir E.),
+  --HIS LETTER TO THE KING OF ALGIERS.
+
+PACHIN.
+PALMAS (cape).
+PALMER (R.).
+PALMER (W.).
+PALMES (island).
+PARKER, (H.).
+PATRAS.
+PEGU, described.
+PENELOPE (ship).
+PET (P.).
+PETER (ship).
+PETERSON (J.).
+PETONEY (M.), HIS ACCOUNT OF AFRICAN TRADE.
+PHILIP II., King of Spain.
+PINTEADO (A.),
+  --HIS DEATH
+  --HIS PATENT FROM THE KING OF PORTUGAL
+  --LETTER FROM DON LUIZ.
+PLYMOUTH.
+PORTO SANTO (island).
+PORTSMOUTH.
+PRESTER JOHN.
+PRIMROSE (ship).
+
+QUANCHAI.
+QUINTE (J.).
+QUINZI.
+
+RABNET (ship).
+RAGSTER (H.).
+RAINOLDS (R.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+RAINOLDS (W.).
+RALEIGH (Sir W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF BURROUGH'S VICTORIES AT SEA
+  --mentioned.
+RALPH (J.).
+RAWLINGS (R.).
+RAYMOND (G.).
+READ (P), HIS EPITAPH.
+RESENDE (Garcia de), quoted.
+RIBBE (R.).
+RICHARD II.
+RICKMAN (R.).
+RIO DEL ORO.
+RIO DULCE.
+RIO GRANDE.
+ROBERTS (H.), HIS EMBASSY TO MOROCCO.
+ROBINSON (M.).
+ROSE (ship).
+ROSSETTA.
+ROWLIE (F.).
+RUSSELL (Sir J.).
+RUTTER (W.), HIS VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+RYE.
+
+ST. LUCAR or LUCAS.
+ST. SEBASTIAN (island).
+ST. THOME (island).
+ST. VINCENT (river).
+SALOMON (ship).
+SANDERS (Thomas), HIS ACCOUNT OF THE VOYAGE OF THE JESUS.
+SARAGASSO or SARGASSO (weed).
+SCIO (island).
+SELMAN (E.).
+SENEGAL (river).
+SEVILLE.
+SHINGLETON (T), HIS PASSPORT FROM THE KING OF ALGIERS.
+SIBBLE HERNINGHAM.
+SKEGS (R.).
+SMITH (H.).
+SMITH (J.).
+SMITH (N.).
+SONNINGS (W.).
+SOTHERICK (J.).
+SOUSA (B. A. de), HIS ADVERTISEMENT TO PHILIP II.
+SPARTEL (cape).
+SPORADES (island).
+STAFFORD (Marquis of).
+STAPER (N.).
+STEVENS (T.).
+STREET (W.).
+STUKELEY (T.), HIS VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+SUMATRA.
+SWALLOW (ship).
+
+TAVISTOCK.
+TENERIFFE.
+THIN (H.).
+THOMAS (J.) HIS ACCOUNT OF THE SECOND VOYAGE TO BARBARY.
+THOMAS (W.), quoted.
+THOMSON (T.).
+TIGER (ship).
+TINTAM (J.).
+TOBIE (ship), CAST AWAY.
+TODD (Rev. H. J.).
+TOMBUTO.
+TOWRSON (W.), HIS FIRST VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --HIS SECOND VOYAGE TO GUINEA
+  --HIS THIRD VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+TRACIE (J.).
+TRINITY (ship).
+TRIPOLIS.
+TUNIS.
+TYPTON (Master).
+
+UNDERWOOD (J.).
+UNICORN.
+UNICORN (ship).
+UNTICARO (P.).
+
+VERDE (cape).
+VERDE (islands).
+VIRGIL (P.), quoted.
+VOIS (T.).
+
+WELSH (J.), HIS VOYAGE TO BENIN
+  --SECOND VOYAGE.
+WHITE (M.).
+WHITE (W.).
+WHITE (T.), HIS CAPTURE OF TWO SPANISH SHIPS.
+WICKNEY (W.).
+WIGHT (isle of).
+WILKINS (W.).
+
+WILLES. HIS TRANSLATION OF THE PORTUGUESE ACCOUNTS OF CHINA
+  --OF JAPAN.
+WILLIAMS (T.).
+WILSON (H.).
+WINDHAM (T,),
+  --His death.
+WINTER (J.).
+WINTER (W.).
+WOODBRIDGE.
+WOODFALL, HIS EDITION OF HAKLUYT.
+WOODWARD (J.).
+WREN (W.), HIS ACCOUNT OF FENNER'S VOYAGE TO GUINEA.
+WROTH (Sir T.).
+
+YORKE (Sir J.).
+YOUNG (J.).
+
+ZANTE.
+ZANZIBAR.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. VIII.
+
+I. The Life and trauailes of Pelagius borne in Wales.
+
+II. A Testimonie of the sending of Sighelmus, Bishop of Shirburne, by King
+  Alphred, vnto Saint Thomas of India in the yeare of our Lord 883,
+  recorded by William of Malmesburie.
+
+III. A Second testimonie of the foresaid Sighelmus, etc.
+
+IV. The trauailes of Andrew Whiteman, alias Leucander
+
+V. The Voyages of Swanus, the son of Earl Godwin, to Jerusalem, recorded by
+  William of Malmesburie.
+
+VI. A Voyage of three Ambassadours who in the time of Edward the Confessor,
+  were sent vnto Constantinople, and from thence to Ephesus, recorded by
+  William of Malmesburie.
+
+VII. The Voyage of Alured, bishop of Worcester, vnto Jerusalem. Recorded by
+  Roger Hoveden.
+
+VIII. The Voyage of Ingulphus, Abbat of Croyland, vnto Jerusalem, described
+  by the said Ingulphus.
+
+IX. Diuers of the hon. family of the Beauchamps, with Robert Curtoys sonne
+  of William the Conqueror, made a Voyage to Jerusalem, 1096. (From Hol.
+  pag. 22. vol. 2.)
+
+X. The Voyage of Gutuere toward Jerusalem, 1097.
+
+XI. The Voyage of Prince Edgar vnto Jerusalem, 1102. Recorded by William of
+  Malmesburie.
+
+XII. Mention made of one Godericus, etc.
+
+XIII. Mention made of one Hardine, etc.
+
+XIV. A fleete of Englishmen, Danes, etc. arriued at Joppa. written in the
+  Chronicles of Jerusalem.
+
+XV. The trauailes of one Athelard, recorded by Master Bale.
+
+XVI. The life and trauailes of one William of Tyre.
+
+XVII. The trauailes of Robertus Ketenensis.
+
+XVIII. A Voyage of certaine Englishmen vnder the conduct of Lewes King of
+  France vnto the Holy Land.
+
+XIX. The Voyage of John Lacy to Jerusalem.
+
+XX. The Voyage of William Mandeuile to Jerusalem.
+
+XXI. A great supply of money to the Holy Land by Henry II.
+
+XXII. A letter from Manuel the Emperour of Constantinople vnto Henrie the
+  second, King of England. Recorded by Roger Houeden.
+
+XXIII. The Life and Trauailes of Balwinus Deuonius, sometime Archbishop of
+  Canterbury.
+
+XXIV. An annotation concerning the said Baldwine, taken out of Giraldus
+  Cambrensis.
+
+XXV. A note touching Sir Frederike Tilney.
+
+XXVI. The trauailes of Richard Canonicus.
+
+XXVII. The large contribution to the succour of the Holy Land made by King
+  John of England. 1201.
+
+XXVIII. The trauailes of Hubert Walter, bishop of Salisburie.
+
+XXIX. The trauailes of Robert Curson.
+
+XXX. The voyage of Ranulph Earle of Chester and others to the Holy Land.
+  1218.
+
+XXXI. The voyage of Henry Bohun and Saer Quincy to the Holy Land.
+
+XXXII. The trauailes of Ranulph Glanuile, Earle of Chester.
+
+XXXIII. The voyage of Petrus de Rupibus, Bishop of Winchester, to
+  Jerusalem. 1231.
+
+XXXIV. The voyage of Richard Earle of Cornewall. into Syria.
+
+XXXV. The voyage of William Longespee into Asia. 1248.
+
+XXXVI. The voyage of Prince Edward into Asia. 1170.
+
+XXXVII. The Trauaile of Robert Turneham.
+
+XXXVIII. The Life of Sir John Mandeville, written by Master Bale.
+
+XXXIX. The Tomb and Epitaph of Sir John Mandeville from Ortelius.
+
+XL. Tabula Libri Joannis Mandevil.
+
+XLI. Liber Joannis Mandevil de Turcia, Armenia, AEgypto, Lybia, Syria,
+  Arabia, Persia, Chaldaea, Tartaria, India, et infinitis insulis
+  civitatibus et locis.
+
+  The English version begins.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. IX.
+
+I. Mandeville's voyage continued.
+
+II. Richardi Hakluyti brevis admonitio ad lectorem.
+
+III. Verba C. Plinii secundi.
+
+IV. Plinius de Scythis.
+
+V. Anthony Beck Bishop of Durisme made Patriarch of Hierusalem from Leland.
+
+VI. Itinerarium fratris Odorici.
+   _Sub-section_
+    1 His journey from Pera to Thana.
+    2 Of the maners of the Chaldaeans and of India.
+    3 How pepper is had and where it groweth.
+    4 Of a strange idol &c.
+    5 Of certaine trees yielding meale, hony, and poyson.
+    6 Of the abundance of fishes, &c.
+    7 Of the island of Sylan and of the mountain where Adam mourned for
+      Abel.
+    8 Of Upper India, &c.
+    9 Of the city Fuco.
+   10 Of a monastery where many strange beastes doe live.
+   11 Of the city of Cambaleth.
+   12 Of the Glory of the great Can.
+   13 Of certain innes or hospitals, &c.
+   14 Of the four feasts which the Great Can solemnizeth.
+   15 Of divers provinces and cities.
+   16 Of a certaine rich man who is fed, &c. by fiftie virgins.
+   17 Of the death of Senex de Monte.
+   18 Of the honour and reverence done unto the great Can.
+   19 Of the death of Frier Odoricus.
+
+VII. The voyage of the Lord John of Holland, Earl of Huntington to
+  Jerusalem. 1394.
+
+VIII. The voyage of Thomas Mowbray, duke of Norfolk to Jerusalem. 1399.
+
+IX. The voyage of the Bishop of Winchester to Jerusalem. 1417.
+
+X. A preparation of a voyage of King Henry IV. to the Holy Land, &c.
+
+XI. The voyage of M. John Locke to Jerusalem.
+
+XII. The first voyage made by M. Laurence Aldersey to Jerusalem, &c. 1581.
+
+XIII. The passport made by the great master of Malta to the Englishmen in
+  the barque Reynolds, 1582.
+
+XIV. Commission given by M. William Harebourne, to Richard Foster, etc.
+
+XV. A letter of directions to Richard Foster.
+
+XVI. A commandement for Chio.
+
+XVII. A description of the yearly voyage unto Mecca.
+
+XVIII. The voyage of M. Caesar Frederick into East India and beyond.
+
+XIX. The money and measures of Babylon, Balsara, and the Indies, written by
+  W. Barret.
+
+XX. A note of charges from Aleppo to Goa.
+
+XXI. A declaration of the places from whence sundry goods come.
+
+XXII. The times or monsons wherein ships depart in the East Indies.
+
+XXIII. A briefe extract specifying the daily payments by the grand Signior
+  to the officers of his court.
+
+XXIV. The Turkes chiefe officers.
+
+XXV. The number of souldiers attending upon the Beglerbegs, &c.
+
+XXVI. The Turkes yeerely revenue.
+
+XXVII. Ambassadors allowances.
+
+XXVIII. Letter from Richard Wrag to Richard Hewish.
+
+XXIX. A description of a voyage to Constantinople and Lyria, by Master
+  Edward Barton, 1595.
+
+XXX. The number of Turkish souldiours which were appointed to goe into
+  Hungary against the Christian Emperour, 1594.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. X.
+
+I. The manner of the entring of Soliman the great Turke into Aleppo, noted
+  by Anthony Jenkinson. 1553.
+
+II. A note of the presents that were given to the grand Signior.
+
+III. The safe conduct given by Soliman to Anthony Jenkinson.
+
+IV. Letters concerning the voyage of John Newbury and Ralph Fitch to the
+  East. 1583.
+  _Sub-section_
+    1 A letter from the Queen to Zelabdin Echebar
+    2 A letter from the Queen to the King of China
+    3 A letter of John Newbury to Richard Hakluyt
+    4 A letter from the said J. Newbury to Leonard Poore
+    5 Another letter from the same to the same
+    6 A letter from J. Newbury to John Eldred and William Shals
+    7 A second letter from the same to the same
+    8 A letter from the same to Leonard Poore
+    9 A letter from Ralph Fitch to Leonard Poore
+
+V. The voyage of Ralph Fitch to the East. 1583-91.
+
+VI. The report of John Huighen van Linchoten, concerning J. Newbury and R.
+  Fitch's imprisonment.
+
+VII. The voyage of John Eldred to Tripolis in Syria.
+
+VIII. The second letters patents graunted by the Queenes Maiestie to the
+  companie of the English marchants for the Levant. 1592.
+
+IX. Voyage d'Outremer et retour de Jerusalem en France par la voie de terre
+  par Bertrandon de La Brocquiere remis en Francais moderne par Le grand
+  d'Aussy.
+
+X. A voyage made by certaine ships of Holland into the East Indies. 1595-7.
+
+XI. A true report of the voyage to Java performed by a fleet from Holland.
+  1598.
+
+XII. A briefe description of a voiage before handled, in maner of a
+  iournall.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS TO VOL. XI.
+
+I. The voyage of Henry, Earl of Derby, afterwards Henry IV., to Tunis, from
+  P. Virgil.
+
+II. The same story from Froissart and Holinshead.
+
+III. The memorable victories of John Hawkwood, from Camden.
+
+IV. The Epitaph of Peter Read at Norwich.
+
+V. The voyage of Sir Thomas Chaloner to Alger.
+
+VI. The woorthy enterprise of John Foxe in delivering 266 Christians out of
+  captivity at Alexandria, 1577.
+
+VII. The copie of the certificate for John Fox.
+
+VIII. The Bishop of Rome, his letters in the behalfe of Iohn Fox.
+
+IX. The king of Spaine his letters for the placing of John Fox in the
+  office of gunner.
+
+X. The voyage made to Tripolis in Barbary in the Jesus, written by Thomas
+  Sanders. 1583.
+
+XI. The Queene's letters to the Turke for the restitution of the Jesus.
+
+XII. The Turkes letter to the King of Tripolis commanding restitution of
+  the Jesus.
+
+XIII. A letter of Master William Hareborne for the release of the Jesus.
+
+XIV. The voyage of John Evesham into Egypt.
+
+XV. The second voyage of Laurence Aldersey to Alexandria and Cairo.
+
+XVI. A letter of the English Ambassador to M. Harvie Millers.
+
+XVII. A letter to W. Hareborne from Alger.
+
+XVIII. A letter of W. Hareborne to Mustapha.
+
+XIX. The passport granted to Thomas Shingleton by the king of Algier.
+
+XX. A letter of Sir Edward Osborne to the king of Alger.
+
+XXI. Notes concerning the trade of Alger.
+
+XXII. Notes concerning the trade in Alexandria.
+
+XXIII. A letter of the English Ambassador to Edward Barton.
+
+XXIV. A commaundement obtained of the Grand Signor by W. Hareborne.
+
+XXV. A letter of William Hareborne to T Typton.
+
+XXVI. Registrum valoris navium, &c. per trirenes Argerienses ereptorum.
+
+XXVII. A letter to Assan Aga.
+
+XXVIII. The originall of the first voyage for traffique into Marocco. 1551.
+
+XXIX. The second voyage to Barbary. 1552.
+
+XXX. A voyage into Guinea and Benin. 1553.
+
+XXXI. A briefe description of Afrike by Richard Eden.
+
+XXXII. Anthonie Pinteado, his letters patents from the king of Portugal.
+
+XXXIII. The letter of Don Lewis to Anthonie Pinteado.
+
+XXXIV. The second voyage to Guinea.
+
+XXXV. The first voyage made by William Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVI. The second voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVII. The third voyage of W. Towrson to Guinea.
+
+XXXVIII. Certaine articles deliuered to Mr. John Lock.
+
+XXXIX. A letter of John Lock to the company of marchants adventurers for
+  Guinea.
+
+XL. The relation of William Rutter to Anthony Hickman touching a voyage to
+  Guinea. 1562.
+
+XLI. A meeting at Sir William Gerard's house. 1564.
+
+XLII. Relations extracted from Sir John Hawkin's voyage.
+
+XLIII. The voyage of George Fenner to Guinea written by Walter Wren.
+
+XLIV. The ambassage of Edmund Hogan to the Emperor of Morocco. 1577.
+
+XLV. The voyage of Thomas Stukeley into Barbary.
+
+XLVI. Certaine reports of the province of China learned from Portugalls
+  taken prisoners.
+
+XLVII. Of the island Japan and other isles, by R. Willes.
+
+XLVIII. An excellent treatise of the kingdom of China printed at Macao.
+  1590.
+
+XLIX. A letter by Thomas Stevens to his father.
+
+L. A briefe relation of the kingdom of Pegu.
+
+LI. A voyage to the East Indies by the Cape of Buona Speranza, written by R
+ Hakluyt.
+
+LII. Certaine remembrances of an intended iourney to Brassil. 1583.
+
+LIII. The letters patents granted by Her Majestie for a trade to Barbarie.
+  1583.
+
+LIV. The Ambassage of Henry Roberts to the Emperour of Marocco. 1585.
+
+LV. A letter from Muly Hamet to the Earl of Leicester.
+
+LVI. The Queenes letters to the Emperour of Marocco.
+
+LVII. A patent to certaine merchants of Exeter for a trade to the river of
+  Senega and Gambra in Guinea, 1588.
+
+LVIII. A voyage to Benin, 1588. Written by James Welsh.
+
+LIX. The voiage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1588.
+
+LX. The second voyage of John Newton and John Bird to Benin. 1590.
+
+LXI. An advertisement sent to Philip II. king of Spaine from Angola by
+  Baltazar Almeida de Sousa. 1591.
+
+LXII: Confirmatio treugarum inter Eduardum quartum et Joannem secundum.
+  1482.
+
+LXIII. The ambassage which John II. king of Portugall, sent to Edward IV.
+
+LXIV. A relation sent by Melchior Peloney to Nigil de Moura. 1591.
+
+LXV. The Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to Guinea.
+
+LXVI. A briefe relation concerning the cities of Tombuto and Gago.
+
+LXVII. Another relation concerning the same.
+
+LXVIII. A briefe extract of a patent granted to Thomas Gregory, of Tanton.
+
+LXIX. The maner of the taking of two Spanish ships by Thomas White, 1592.
+
+LXX. A true report of the honourable service at sea perfourmed by Sir John
+  Burrough, prepared by Sir Walter Raleigh.
+
+LXXI. The firing and sinking of the stout and warrelike Carack called Las
+  Cinque Llagas, by Nicholas Downton.
+
+LXXII. The casting away of the Tobie, 1593.
+
+LXXIII. The letters of the Queene sent by Laurence Aldersey to the Emperour
+  of AEthiopia, 1597
+
+LXXIV. The Omissions of Cales voyage.
+
+LXXV. Indices, viz.--
+       Vol. VIII.
+       Vol. IX.
+       Vol. X.
+       Vol. XI.
+
+LXXVI. Tables of Contents, viz:--
+       Vol. VIII.
+       Vol. IX.
+       Vol. X.
+       Vol. XI.
+
+
+END OF  VOL. XI
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES,
+TRAFFIQUES, AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION, VOL. 11***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 12693.txt or 12693.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/6/9/12693
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/12693.zip b/old/12693.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab80c24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/12693.zip